AI Tipiṭaka Translations

Hide English Translation

. Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa.

. Homage to the Blessed One, the Arahant, the Perfectly Enlightened One.

Aṅguttaranikāye

Aṅguttara Nikāya

Dukanipāta-aṭṭhakathā

Commentary to the Dukanipāta

1. Paṭhamapaṇṇāsakaṃ

1. The First Book

1. Kammakāraṇavaggo

1. Kammakāraṇa Chapter

1. Vajjasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Commentary on the Vajja Sutta

1.Dukanipātassa paṭhamevajjānīti dosā aparādhā.Diṭṭhadhammikanti diṭṭheva dhamme imasmiṃyeva attabhāve uppannaphalaṃ.Samparāyikanti samparāye anāgate attabhāve uppannaphalaṃ.Āgucārinti pāpakāriṃ aparādhakārakaṃ.Rājāno gahetvā vividhā kammakāraṇā kārenteti coraṃ gahetvā vividhā kammakāraṇā rājapurisā karonti, rājāno pana tā kārenti nāma. Taṃ coraṃ evaṃ kammakāraṇā kāriyamānaṃ esa passati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘passati coraṃ āgucāriṃ rājāno gahetvā vividhā kammakāraṇā kārente’’ti.Addhadaṇḍakehīti muggarehi, pahārasādhanatthaṃ vā catuhatthadaṇḍaṃ dvedhā chetvā gahitadaṇḍakehi.Bilaṅgathālikanti kañjiyaukkhalikakammakāraṇaṃ. Taṃ karontā sīsakaṭāhaṃ uppāṭetvā tattaṃ ayoguḷaṃ saṇḍāsena gahetvā tattha pakkhipanti, tena matthaluṅgaṃ pakkuthitvā uttarati.Saṅkhamuṇḍikanti saṅkhamuṇḍakammakāraṇaṃ. Taṃ karontā uttaroṭṭhaubhatokaṇṇacūḷikagalavāṭakaparicchedena cammaṃ chinditvā sabbakese ekato gaṇṭhiṃ katvā daṇḍakena veṭhetvā uppāṭenti, saha kesehi cammaṃ uṭṭhahati. Tato sīsakaṭāhaṃ thūlasakkharāhi ghaṃsitvā dhovantā saṅkhavaṇṇaṃ karonti.Rāhumukhanti rāhumukhakammakāraṇaṃ. Taṃ karontā saṅkunā mukhaṃ vivaritvā antomukhe dīpaṃ jālenti, kaṇṇacūḷikāhi vā paṭṭhāya mukhaṃ nikhādanena khananti, lohitaṃ paggharitvā mukhaṃ pūreti.

1. In the first sutta of the Dukanipāta, vajjāni means faults or offenses. Diṭṭhadhammika means having a result that arises in this very life, in this present existence. Samparāyika means having a result that arises in the future existence, in the afterlife. Āgucāri means one who commits evil deeds, one who commits offenses. Rājāno gahetvā vividhā kammakāraṇā kārente means royal officials, having seized a thief, inflict various tortures; but it is said that the kings order those to be done. That thief, while being subjected to such tortures, is seen by this person. Therefore, it is said, "He sees a thief, an evildoer, being seized by the kings and subjected to various tortures." Addhadaṇḍakehī means with mallets; or, having split a four- cubit staff in two for the purpose of striking, with the staves taken up. Bilaṅgathālika means the torture of the gruel cauldron. While inflicting that torture, they crack open the skull, take a hot iron ball with tongs, and drop it inside, so that the brain boils and rises up. Saṅkhamuṇḍika means the torture of the conch-shell skull. While inflicting that torture, they cut the skin around the upper lip, both ear lobes, and the throat, and having tied all the hair together, they wrap it around a stick and pull it out, so the skin comes off with the hair. Then, scrubbing the skull with coarse gravel and washing it, they make it the color of a conch shell. Rāhumukha means the torture of the Rāhu's mouth. While inflicting that torture, they force the mouth open with skewers and light a lamp inside the mouth, or they dig into the mouth starting from the earlobes, so that blood flows and fills the mouth.

Jotimālikanti sakalasarīraṃ telapilotikāya veṭhetvā ālimpenti.Hatthapajjotikanti hatthe telapilotikāya veṭhetvā dīpaṃ viya pajjālenti.Erakavattikanti erakavattakammakāraṇaṃ. Taṃ karontā heṭṭhāgīvato paṭṭhāya cammavaṭṭe kantitvā gopphake ṭhapenti, atha naṃ yottehi bandhitvā kaḍḍhanti. So attano cammavaṭṭe akkamitvā akkamitvā patati.Cīrakavāsikanti cīrakavāsikakammakāraṇaṃ. Taṃ karontā tatheva cammavaṭṭe kantitvā kaṭiyaṃ ṭhapenti, kaṭito paṭṭhāya kantitvā gopphakesu ṭhapenti, uparimehi heṭṭhimasarīraṃ cīrakanivāsananivatthaṃ viya hoti.Eṇeyyakanti eṇeyyakakammakāraṇaṃ. Taṃ karontā ubhosu kapparesu ca ubhosu jāṇukesu ca ayavalayāni datvā ayasūlāni koṭṭenti. So catūhi ayasūlehi bhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhahati. Atha naṃ parivāretvā aggiṃ karonti. ‘‘Eṇeyyako jotipariggaho yathā’’ti āgataṭṭhānepi idameva vuttaṃ. Taṃ kālena kālaṃ sūlāni apanetvā catūhi aṭṭhikoṭīhiyeva ṭhapenti. Evarūpā kammakāraṇā nāma natthi.

Jotimālika means they wrap the entire body in oil-soaked cloths and set it alight. Hatthapajjotika means they wrap the hands in oil-soaked cloths and ignite them like lamps. Erakavattika means the erakavattika torture. While inflicting that torture, they cut a circle of skin starting from below the neck and place it at the ankles, then they tie him with ropes and pull him. He falls, stepping on his own circle of skin. Cīrakavāsika means the cīrakavāsika torture. While inflicting that torture, they similarly cut a circle of skin and place it at the waist, then they cut from the waist down and place it at the ankles, so that the lower body appears to be clothed in a bark garment. Eṇeyyaka means the eṇeyyaka torture. While inflicting that torture, they insert iron rings into both armpits and both knees and hammer in iron stakes. He is fixed to the ground with four iron stakes. Then they surround him and light a fire. Even in the passage that begins "Just as the eṇeyyaka is surrounded by flames," the same thing is said. From time to time, they remove the stakes and keep him standing on the four bony points alone. There is no torture like that.

Baḷisamaṃsikanti ubhatomukhehi baḷisehi paharitvā cammamaṃsanhārūni uppāṭenti.Kahāpaṇikanti sakalasarīraṃ tiṇhāhi vāsīhi koṭito paṭṭhāya kahāpaṇamattaṃ, kahāpaṇamattaṃ pātentā koṭṭenti.Khārāpatacchikanti sarīraṃ tattha tattha āvudhehi paharitvā kocchehi khāraṃ ghaṃsanti, cammamaṃsanhārūni paggharitvā aṭṭhikasaṅkhalikāva tiṭṭhati.Palighaparivattikanti ekena passena nipajjāpetvā kaṇṇacchiddena ayasūlaṃ koṭṭetvā pathaviyā ekābaddhaṃ karonti. Atha naṃ pāde gahetvā āviñchanti.Palālapīṭhakanti cheko kāraṇiko chavicammaṃ acchinditvā nisadapotehi aṭṭhīni bhinditvā kesesu gahetvā ukkhipati, maṃsarāsiyeva hoti. Atha naṃ keseheva pariyonandhitvā gaṇhanti, palālavaṭṭiṃ viya katvā puna veṭhenti.Sunakhehipīti katipayāni divasāni āhāraṃ adatvā chātakasunakhehi khādāpenti. Te muhuttena aṭṭhikasaṅkhalikameva karonti.Sūle uttāsenteti sūle āropente.

Baḷisamaṃsika means having struck with double-ended fishhooks, they tear off skin, flesh, sinews, and bones. Kahāpaṇika means they chop the entire body with sharp axes, starting from the ankles, in pieces the size of a kahāpaṇa. Khārāpatacchika means having struck the body here and there with weapons, they rub it with lye using coarse cloths, so that skin, flesh, sinews, and bones flow away, and only a skeleton remains. Palighaparivattika means having laid him down on one side, they hammer an iron stake through the ear hole and fix it to the ground. Then, grabbing his feet, they drag him around. Palālapīṭhaka means a clever executioner cuts the skin and flesh, smashes the bones with a hammer, and lifts him up by the hair, so that he is just a pile of flesh. Then, wrapping him up with the hair, they gather him up, making him like a straw doll and then wrapping him again. Sunakhehipī means having not given food for several days, they have him eaten by hungry dogs. In a moment, they reduce him to just a skeleton. Sūle uttāsente means they impale him on a stake.

Na paresaṃ pābhataṃ vilumpanto caratīti paresaṃ santakaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ parammukhaṃ ābhataṃ antamaso antaravīthiyaṃ patitaṃ sahassabhaṇḍikampi disvā ‘‘iminā jīvissāmī’’ti vilumpanto na vicarati, ko iminā atthoti piṭṭhipādena vā pavaṭṭetvā gacchati.

Na paresaṃ pābhataṃ vilumpanto caratīti he does not go about plundering another's possessions, even a thousand pieces of goods presented to others, seeing it turned away, even fallen in the street, thinking, "I will live off this," but instead kicks it aside with his foot, thinking, "What use is this to me?"

Pāpakoti lāmako.Dukkhoti aniṭṭho.Kiñca tanti kiṃ nāma taṃ kāraṇaṃ bhaveyya.Yāhanti yena ahaṃ.Kāyaduccaritanti pāṇātipātādi tividhaṃ akusalaṃ kāyakammaṃ.Kāyasucaritanti tassa paṭipakkhabhūtaṃ tividhaṃ kusalakammaṃ.Vacīduccaritanti musāvādādi catubbidhaṃ akusalaṃ vacīkammaṃ.Vacīsucaritanti tassa paṭipakkhabhūtaṃ catubbidhaṃ kusalakammaṃ.Manoduccaritanti abhijjhādi tividhaṃ akusalakammaṃ.Manosucaritanti tassa paṭipakkhabhūtaṃ tividhaṃ kusalakammaṃ.Suddhaṃ attānaṃ pariharatīti ettha duvidhā suddhi – pariyāyato ca nippariyāyato ca. Saraṇagamanena hi pariyāyena suddhaṃ attānaṃ pariharati nāma. Tathā pañcahi sīlehi, dasahi sīlehi – catupārisuddhisīlena, paṭhamajjhānena…pe… nevasaññānāsaññāyatanena, sotāpattimaggena, sotāpattiphalena…pe… arahattamaggena pariyāyena suddhaṃ attānaṃ pariharati nāma. Arahattaphale patiṭṭhito pana khīṇāsavo chinnamūlake pañcakkhandhe nhāpentopi khādāpentopi bhuñjāpentopi nisīdāpentopi nipajjāpentopi nippariyāyeneva suddhaṃ nimmalaṃ attānaṃ pariharati paṭijaggatīti veditabbo.

Pāpako means base. Dukkho means undesirable. Kiñca ta means what could that reason be? Yāha means that by which I. Kāyaduccarita means the three kinds of unwholesome bodily actions, such as killing living beings. Kāyasucarita means the three kinds of wholesome bodily actions that are the opposite of that. Vacīduccarita means the four kinds of unwholesome verbal actions, such as false speech. Vacīsucarita means the four kinds of wholesome verbal actions that are the opposite of that. Manoduccarita means the three kinds of unwholesome mental actions, such as covetousness. Manosucarita means the three kinds of wholesome mental actions that are the opposite of that. Suddhaṃ attānaṃ pariharatīti here, purity is of two kinds—conventional and ultimate. By taking refuge, one conventionally maintains oneself in purity. Likewise, by the five precepts, the ten precepts, the fourfold purity of morality, the first jhāna…pe…the realm of neither perception nor non-perception, the stream-entry path, the stream-entry fruition…pe…the arahantship path, one conventionally maintains oneself in purity. However, the one who is established in arahantship fruition, the arahant whose taints are destroyed, even while bathing, feeding, eating, sitting, or lying down amidst the five aggregates whose root is cut off, maintains and protects himself in ultimate purity and impeccability, this should be understood.

Tasmāti yasmā imāni dve vajjāneva, no na vajjāni, tasmā.Vajjabhīrunoti vajjabhīrukā.Vajjabhayadassāvinoti vajjāni bhayato dassanasīlā.Etaṃ pāṭikaṅkhanti etaṃ icchitabbaṃ, etaṃ avassaṃbhāvīti attho.Yanti nipātamattaṃ, kāraṇavacanaṃ vā yena kāraṇena parimuccissati sabbavajjehi. Kena pana kāraṇena parimuccissatīti? Catutthamaggena ceva catutthaphalena ca. Maggena hi parimuccati nāma, phalaṃ patto parimutto nāma hotīti. Kiṃ pana khīṇāsavassa akusalaṃ na vipaccatīti? Vipaccati, taṃ pana khīṇāsavabhāvato pubbe kataṃ. Tañca kho imasmiṃyeva attabhāve, samparāye panassa kammaphalaṃ nāma natthīti. Paṭhamaṃ.

Tasmāti because these two are faults, not non-faults, therefore. Vajjabhīrunoti one who is afraid of faults. Vajjabhayadassāvinoti one who is in the habit of seeing faults as a source of fear. Etaṃ pāṭikaṅkhanti this should be desired; this is sure to happen, is the meaning. Yanti is merely a particle, or a word indicating cause—by which cause will he be freed from all faults? By what cause, then, will he be freed? By the fourth path and the fourth fruition. For one is freed by the path, and one who has attained the fruition is said to be freed. But does unwholesome kamma not ripen for the arahant? It does ripen, but that was done before the state of arahantship. And that is only in this very existence; for him, there is no result of kamma in the afterlife. The first.

2. Padhānasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Commentary on the Padhāna Sutta

2.Dutiyepadhānānīti vīriyāni. Vīriyañhi padahitabbato padhānabhāvakaraṇato vā padhānanti vuccati.Durabhisambhavānīti dussahāni duppūriyāni, dukkarānīti attho.Agāraṃ ajjhāvasatanti agāre vasantānaṃ.Cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānapaccayabhesajjaparikkhārānuppadānatthaṃ padhānanti etesaṃ cīvarādīnaṃ catunnaṃ paccayānaṃ anuppadānatthāya padhānaṃ nāma durabhisambhavanti dasseti. Caturatanikampi hi pilotikaṃ, pasatataṇḍulamattaṃ vā bhattaṃ, caturatanikaṃ vā paṇṇasālaṃ, telasappinavanītādīsu vā appamattakampi bhesajjaṃ paresaṃ dethāti vattumpi nīharitvā dātumpi dukkaraṃ ubhatobyūḷhasaṅgāmappavesanasadisaṃ. Tenāha bhagavā –

2. In the second sutta, padhānānīti means efforts. For effort is called padhāna because it should be strived for or because it is the cause of making effort. Durabhisambhavānīti means difficult to accomplish, difficult to fulfill, difficult to do. Agāraṃ ajjhāvasatanti for those living in a household. Cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānapaccayabhesajjaparikkhārānuppadānatthaṃ padhānanti here it shows that effort for the non-provision of these four requisites, namely robes, etc., is difficult to accomplish. For even giving to others a rag worth four rattis, or a handful of rice, or a hut worth four rattis, or even a small amount of medicine among ghee, butter, and oil, is difficult, like entering a fierce battle on both sides. Therefore, the Blessed One said:

‘‘Dānañca yuddhañca samānamāhu,

‘‘Giving and battle, they say, are the same,
Even a few overcome many;
If one gives even a little with faith,
By that, he is happy hereafter.’’ (jā. 1.8.72; saṃ. ni. 1.33);

Agārasmā anagāriyaṃ pabbajitānanti gehato nikkhamitvā agārassa gharāvāsassa hitāvahehi kasigorakkhādīhi virahitaṃ anagāriyaṃ pabbajjaṃ upagatānaṃ.Sabbūpadhipaṭinissaggatthāya padhānanti sabbesaṃ khandhūpadhikilesūpadhiabhisaṅkhārūpadhisaṅkhātānaṃ upadhīnaṃ paṭinissaggasaṅkhātassa nibbānassa atthāya vipassanāya ceva maggena ca sahajātavīriyaṃ.Tasmāti yasmā imāni dve padhānāni durabhisambhavāni, tasmā. Dutiyaṃ.

Agārasmā anagāriyaṃ pabbajitānanti for those who have gone forth from home into homelessness, devoid of household affairs such as farming and cattle-raising. Sabbūpadhipaṭinissaggatthāya padhānanti effort along with the insight and the path, for the sake of nibbāna, which is the relinquishment of all upadhis, namely the aggregates, the upadhi of defilements, the upadhi of volitional formations. Tasmāti because these two kinds of effort are difficult to accomplish, therefore. The second.

3. Tapanīyasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Commentary on the Tapanīya Sutta

3.Tatiyetapanīyāti idha ceva samparāye ca tapantīti tapanīyā.Tappatīti cittasantāpena tappati anusocati kāyaduccaritaṃ katvā nandayakkho viya nandamāṇavo viya nandagoghātako viya devadatto viya dvebhātikā viya ca. Te kira gāvaṃ vadhitvā maṃsaṃ dve koṭṭhāse akaṃsu. Tato kaniṭṭho jeṭṭhakaṃ āha – ‘‘mayhaṃ dārakā bahū, imāni me antāni dehī’’ti. Atha naṃ so ‘‘sabbaṃ maṃsaṃ dvedhā vibhattaṃ, puna kiṃ maggasī’’ti paharitvā jīvitakkhayaṃ pāpesi. Nivattitvā ca naṃ olokento mataṃ disvā ‘‘bhāriyaṃ me kammaṃ kata’’nti cittaṃ uppādesi. Athassa balavasoko uppajji. So ṭhitaṭṭhānepi nisinnaṭṭhānepi tadeva kammaṃ āvajjeti, cittassādaṃ na labhati. Asitapītakhāyitasāyitampissa sarīre ojaṃ na pharati, aṭṭhicammamattameva ahosi. Atha naṃ eko thero disvā – ‘‘upāsaka, tvaṃ pahūtaannapāno, aṭṭhicammamattameva te avasiṭṭhaṃ, atthi nu kho te kiñci tapanīyakamma’’nti? So ‘‘āma, bhante’’ti sabbaṃ ārocesi. Atha naṃ thero ‘‘bhāriyaṃ te upāsaka kammaṃ kataṃ, anaparādhaṭṭhāne aparaddha’’nti āha. So teneva kammena kālaṃ katvā niraye nibbatto. Vacīduccaritena suppabuddhasakkakokālikaciñcamāṇavikādayo viya tappati. Sesamettha catutthe ca uttānatthameva. Tatiyaṃ.

3. In the third sutta, tapanīyāti means burning, because they burn both in this life and in the afterlife. Tappatīti is tormented with mental anguish; he grieves, having done evil bodily conduct, like Nanda the Yaksha, Nandamāṇava, Nandagoghātaka, Devadatta, and the Two Brothers. It seems that they slaughtered a cow and divided the meat into two portions. Then the younger brother said to the elder brother, "I have many children; give me these entrails." Then he struck him, saying, "All the meat has been divided in two; why are you asking again?" and brought about his death. Turning back and seeing him dead, he generated the thought, "I have done a terrible deed." Then strong sorrow arose in him. Whether standing or sitting, he reflects on that same action, and he does not find pleasure in his mind. Even what he eats, drinks, chews, and tastes does not give nourishment to his body; he became skin and bones. Then a certain elder saw him and said, "Layman, you have plenty of food and drink, but only skin and bones remain for you. Is there some tormenting deed?" He said, "Yes, venerable sir," and told everything. Then the elder said to him, "You have done a terrible deed, layman; you have wronged one who was innocent." Having died from that same kamma, he was reborn in hell. He is tormented by evil verbal conduct, like Suppabuddha Sakka, Kokālika, and Ciñcamāṇavikā. The rest here and in the fourth sutta is easy to understand. The third.

5. Upaññātasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Commentary on the Upaññāta Sutta

5.Pañcamedvinnāhanti dvinnaṃ ahaṃ.Upaññāsinti upagantvā guṇaṃ aññāsiṃ, jāniṃ paṭivijjhinti attho. Idāni te dhamme dassentoyā ca asantuṭṭhitātiādimāha. Imañhi dhammadvayaṃ nissāya satthā sabbaññutaṃ patto, tasmā tassānubhāvaṃ dassento evamāha. Tatthaasantuṭṭhitā kusalesu dhammesūti iminā imaṃ dīpeti – ‘‘ahaṃ jhānamattakena vā obhāsanimittamattakena vā asantuṭṭho hutvā arahattamaggameva uppādesiṃ. Yāva so na uppajji, na tāvāhaṃ santuṭṭho ahosiṃ. Padhānasmiṃ ca anukkaṇṭhito hutvā anosakkanāya ṭhatvāyeva padhānakiriyaṃ akāsi’’nti imamatthaṃ dassentoyā ca appaṭivānitātiādimāha. Tatthaappaṭivānitāti appaṭikkamanā anosakkanā.Appaṭivānī sudāhaṃ,bhikkhave, padahāmīti etthasudanti nipātamattaṃ. Ahaṃ, bhikkhave, anosakkanāyaṃ ṭhito bodhisattakāle sabbaññutaṃ patthento padhānamakāsinti ayamettha attho.

5. In the fifth sutta, dvinnāhanti means I of two. Upaññāsinti means having approached, I knew the quality, I penetrated the knowledge, is the meaning. Now, showing those qualities, he said yā ca asantuṭṭhitāti, etc. For relying on these two qualities, the Teacher attained omniscience; therefore, showing the power of that, he said thus. There, asantuṭṭhitā kusalesu dhammesūti with this, he shows this: "I, being dissatisfied with just a bit of jhāna or just a bit of the light-nimitta, developed the arahantship path itself. Until that arose, I was not satisfied. And being unremitting in effort, I stood without stopping and performed the act of striving," showing this meaning, he said yā ca appaṭivānitāti, etc. There, appaṭivānitāti means without turning back, without stopping. Appaṭivānī sudāhaṃ, bhikkhave, padahāmīti there, sudanti is merely a particle. I, bhikkhus, standing without turning back, desiring omniscience in the bodhisatta state, made effort, this is the meaning here.

kāmaṃ taco cātiādimāha. Tatthapattabbanti iminā pattabbaṃ guṇajātaṃ dasseti.Purisathāmenātiādinā purisassa ñāṇathāmo ñāṇavīriyaṃ ñāṇaparakkamo ca kathito.Saṇṭhānanti ṭhapanā appavattanā osakkanā, paṭippassaddhīti attho. Ettāvatā tena caturaṅgasamannāgataṃ vīriyādhiṭṭhānaṃ nāma kathitaṃ. Ettha hi kāmaṃ taco cāti ekaṃ aṅgaṃ, nhāru cāti ekaṃ, aṭṭhi cāti ekaṃ, maṃsalohitanti ekaṃ, imāni cattāri aṅgāni.Purisathāmenātiādīni adhimattavīriyādhivacanāni. Iti purimehi catūhi aṅgehi samannāgatena hutvā evaṃ adhiṭṭhitaṃ vīriyaṃ caturaṅgasamannāgataṃ vīriyādhiṭṭhānaṃ nāmāti veditabbaṃ. Ettāvatā tena bodhipallaṅke attano āgamanīyapaṭipadā kathitā.

kāmaṃ taco cāti, etc., he said. There, with pattabbanti, he shows the kind of quality to be attained. With Purisathāmenāti, etc., the power of knowledge, the energy of knowledge, and the exertion of knowledge of a person are spoken of. Saṇṭhānanti means establishing, not turning back, stopping, abandoning, is the meaning. To this extent, the determination of effort endowed with four factors has been spoken of by him. Here, kāmaṃ taco cāti is one factor, nhāru cāti is one, aṭṭhi cāti is one, maṃsalohitanti is one; these are the four factors. Purisathāmenāti, etc., are terms for excessive effort. Thus, it should be understood that effort thus determined, endowed with the preceding four factors, is called the determination of effort endowed with four factors. To this extent, the practice suitable for his coming to the Bodhi-platform has been spoken of by him.

tassa mayhaṃ, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tatthaappamādādhigatāti satiavippavāsasaṅkhātena appamādena adhigatā, na suttappamattena laddhā.Sambodhīti catumaggañāṇañceva sabbaññutaññāṇañca. Na hi sakkā etaṃ suttappamattena adhigantunti. Tenāha – ‘‘appamādādhigatā sambodhī’’ti.Anuttaro yogakkhemoti na kevalaṃ bodhiyeva, arahattaphalanibbānasaṅkhāto anuttaro yogakkhemopi appamādādhigatova.

tassa mayhaṃ, bhikkhaveti, etc., he said. There, appamādādhigatāti means attained by diligence, which is characterized by the non-wandering of mindfulness, not attained by negligent heedlessness. Sambodhīti means both the knowledge of the four paths and the knowledge of omniscience. For it is not possible to attain this by negligent heedlessness. Therefore, he said, "Enlightenment is attained by diligence." Anuttaro yogakkhemoti not only enlightenment, but also the unsurpassed security from bondage, namely arahantship fruition and nibbāna, is attained by diligence.

tumhe cepi bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tatthayassatthāyāti yassa atthāya, yaṃ upasampajja viharitukāmā hutvāti attho.Tadanuttaranti taṃ anuttaraṃ.Brahmacariyapariyosānanti maggabrahmacariyassa pariyosānabhūtaṃ ariyaphalaṃ.Abhiññā sacchikatvāti abhiññāya uttamapaññāya paccakkhaṃ katvā.Upasampajja viharissathāti paṭilabhitvā pāpuṇitvā viharissatha.Tasmāti yasmā appaṭivānapadhānaṃ nāmetaṃ bahūpakāraṃ uttamatthasādhakaṃ, tasmā. Pañcamaṃ.

Tumhe cepi bhikkhave etc., was said beginning here. Therein, yassatthāyā means for which purpose, meaning desiring to live having attained what.Tadanuttaranti, that unsurpassed.Brahmacariyapariyosānanti, the noble fruition that is the culmination of the path of Brahmacariya.Abhiññā sacchikatvā means having directly experienced with higher wisdom.Upasampajja viharissathā means you will live having attained and reached. Tasmā because this name of unretreating effort is very helpful and achieves the highest goal. Fifth.

6. Saṃyojanasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Saṃyojanasutta Description

6.Chaṭṭhesaṃyojaniyesu dhammesūti dasannaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ paccayabhūtesu tebhūmakadhammesu.Assādānupassitāti assādato passitā passanabhāvoti attho.Nibbidānupassitāti nibbidāvasena ukkaṇṭhanavasena passanabhāvo.Jātiyāti khandhanibbattito.Jarāyāti khandhaparipākato.Maraṇenāti khandhabhedato.Sokehīti antonijjhāyanalakkhaṇehi sokehi.Paridevehīti tannissitalālappitalakkhaṇehi paridevehi.Dukkhehīti kāyapaṭipīḷanadukkhehi.Domanassehīti manovighātadomanassehi.Upāyāsehīti adhimattāyāsalakkhaṇaupāyāsehi.Dukkhasmāti sakalavaṭṭadukkhato.Pajahatīti maggena pajahati.Pahāyāti ettha pana phalakkhaṇo kathito. Imasmiṃ sutte vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ kathitaṃ. Chaṭṭhaṃ.

6. In the sixth, saṃyojaniyesu dhammesū means in the phenomena pertaining to the ten fetters, in the three planes of existence.Assādānupassitā means seeing from the aspect of enjoyment, the state of seeing.Nibbidānupassitā means the state of seeing in the manner of disenchantment, in the manner of disgust.Jātiyā means from the arising of the aggregates.Jarāyā means from the maturing of the aggregates.Maraṇenā means from the dissolution of the aggregates.Sokehī means with sorrows having the characteristic of internal brooding.Paridevehī means with lamentations having the characteristic of uttering and wailing related to that.Dukkhehī means with pains that oppress the body.Domanassehī means with mental distress that agitates the mind.Upāyāsehī means with despairs having the characteristic of excessive distress.Dukkhasmā means from all the suffering of the round of existence.Pajahatī means abandons by the path.Pahāyā here, however, the characteristic of fruition is spoken. In this sutta, the round of existence and escape from it are spoken of. Sixth.

7. Kaṇhasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Kaṇhasutta Description

7.Sattamekaṇhāti na kāḷavaṇṇatāya kaṇhā, kaṇhatāya pana upanentīti nipphattikāḷatāya kaṇhā. Sarasenāpi vā sabbākusaladhammā kaṇhā eva. Na hi tesaṃ uppattiyā cittaṃ pabhassaraṃ hoti.Ahirikanti ahirikabhāvo.Anottappanti anottāpibhāvo. Sattamaṃ.

7. In the seventh, kaṇhā is not black because of its black color, but it is black because it leads to blackness, by the blackness of its accomplishment. Alternatively, all unwholesome Dhammas are black. For the mind is not luminous by their arising. Ahirika means shamelessness. Anottappa means lack of moral dread. Seventh.

8. Sukkasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Sukkasutta Description

8.Aṭṭhamesukkāti na vaṇṇasukkatāya sukkā, sukkatāya pana upanentīti nipphattisukkatāya sukkā. Sarasenāpi vā sabbakusaladhammā sukkā eva. Tesaṃ hi uppattiyā cittaṃ pabhassaraṃ hoti.Hirī ca ottappañcāti ettha pāpato jigucchanalakkhaṇā hirī, bhāyanalakkhaṇaṃ ottappaṃ. Yaṃ panettha vitthārato vattabbaṃ siyā, taṃ visuddhimagge vuttameva. Aṭṭhamaṃ.

8. In the eighth, sukkā is not white because of its white color, but it is white because it leads to whiteness, by the whiteness of its accomplishment. Alternatively, all wholesome Dhammas are indeed white. For the mind is luminous by their arising. Hirī ca ottappañcā here, hirī has the characteristic of loathing evil, ottappaṃ has the characteristic of being afraid. Whatever should be said here in detail, that is already said in the Visuddhimagga. Eighth.

9. Cariyasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Cariyasutta Description

9.Navamelokaṃ pālentīti lokaṃ sandhārenti ṭhapenti rakkhanti.Nayidha paññāyetha mātāti imasmiṃ loke janikā mātā ‘‘ayaṃ me mātā’’ti garucittīkāravasena na paññāyetha. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo.Sambhedanti saṅkaraṃ mariyādabhedaṃ vā.Yathā ajeḷakātiādīsu ete hi sattā ‘‘ayaṃ me mātā’’ti vā ‘‘mātucchā’’ti vā garucittīkāravasena na jānanti. Yaṃ vatthuṃ nissāya uppannā, tattheva vippaṭipajjanti. Tasmā upamaṃ āharanto ‘‘yathā ajeḷakā’’tiādimāha. Navamaṃ.

9. In the ninth, lokaṃ pālentī means they maintain, establish, and protect the world. Nayidha paññāyetha mātā in this world, the mother who gave birth, would not be recognized with a sense of importance as "this is my mother". This same method applies to the remaining phrases as well. Sambheda means mixture or breach of boundaries. Yathā ajeḷakā etc., these beings do not know with a sense of importance as "this is my mother" or "maternal aunt." They are antagonistic in the very place from which they arose. Therefore, bringing an analogy, he said, "Just as goats," etc. Ninth.

10. Vassūpanāyikasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Vassūpanāyikasutta Description

10.Dasamaṃ aṭṭhuppattiyaṃ vuttaṃ. Kataraaṭṭhuppattiyaṃ? Manussānaṃ ujjhāyane. Bhagavatā hi paṭhamabodhiyaṃ vīsati vassāni vassūpanāyikā appaññattā ahosi. Bhikkhū anibaddhavāsā vassepi utuvassepi yathāsukhaṃ vicariṃsu. Te disvā manussā ‘‘kathañhi nāma samaṇā sakyaputtiyā hemantampi gimhampi vassampi cārikaṃ carissanti haritāni tiṇāni sammaddantā ekindriyaṃ jīvaṃ viheṭhentā bahū khuddake pāṇe saṅghātaṃ āpādentā. Ime hi nāma aññatitthiyā durakkhātadhammā vassāvāsaṃ allīyissanti saṃkasāyissanti, ime nāma sakuṇā rukkhaggesu kulāvakāni katvā vassāvāsaṃ allīyissanti saṃkasāyissantī’’tiādīni vatvā ujjhāyiṃsu. Tamatthaṃ bhikkhū bhagavato ārocesuṃ. Bhagavā taṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā imaṃ suttaṃ desento paṭhamaṃ tāva ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, vassaṃ upagantu’’nti (mahāva. 184) ettakamevāha. Atha bhikkhūnaṃ ‘‘kadā nu kho vassaṃ upagantabba’’nti uppannaṃ vitakkaṃ sutvā ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, vassāne vassaṃ upagantu’’nti āha. Atha kho bhikkhūnaṃ etadahosi – ‘‘kati nu kho vassūpanāyikā’’ti. Bhagavato etamatthaṃ ārocesuṃ. Taṃ sutvā sakalampi idaṃ suttaṃ desentodvemā, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tatthavassūpanāyikāti vassūpagamanāni.Purimikāti aparajjugatāya āsāḷhiyā upagantabbā purimakattikapuṇṇamipariyosānā paṭhamā temāsī.Pacchimikāti māsagatāya āsāḷhiyā upagantabbā pacchimakattikapariyosānā pacchimā temāsīti. Dasamaṃ.

10. The tenth was spoken in the incident of the cause. In which incident of the cause? In the criticism of humans. For in the first enlightenment of the Blessed One, the rains-residence was not established for twenty years. Monks wandered at will, dwelling wherever they pleased, even in the rainy season, even in the unseasonal rains. Seeing them, people criticized, saying, "How indeed can these renunciates, followers of the Sakyan, wander on pilgrimage in the cold season, in the hot season, and in the rainy season, crushing green grasses, harming life with one sense faculty, bringing many small beings to destruction? These other sectarians, whose doctrine is poorly proclaimed, will cling to the rains-residence and be confined. These birds will make nests in the treetops and cling to the rains-residence and be confined," and so on. Monks reported that matter to the Blessed One. The Blessed One, making that the incident of the cause, while teaching this sutta, first said only this much: "I allow, O monks, entering the rains." (mahāva. 184) Then, having heard the thought that arose in the monks, "When should the rains be entered?", he said, "I allow, O monks, entering the rains in the rains season." Then this occurred to the monks: "How many rains-residences are there?" They reported this matter to the Blessed One. Having heard that, while teaching this entire sutta, he said, dvemā, bhikkhave etc. Therein, vassūpanāyikā means entering the rains.Purimikā means the first three months, which should be entered on the approaching Āṣā̄ḷhī full-moon day and ends on the first Kattika full-moon day.Pacchimikā means the last three months, which should be entered on the month-late Āṣā̄ḷhī and ends on the last Kattika. Tenth.

2. Adhikaraṇavaggavaṇṇanā

2. Adhikaraṇavagga Description

11.Dutiyassa paṭhamebalānīti kenaṭṭhena balāni. Akampiyaṭṭhena balāni nāma, tathā durabhibhavanaṭṭhena anajjhomaddanaṭṭhena ca.Paṭisaṅkhānabalanti paccavekkhaṇabalaṃ.Bhāvanābalanti brūhanabalaṃ vaḍḍhanabalaṃ.Suddhaṃ attānanti idaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.Tatrāti tesu dvīsu balesu.Yamidanti yaṃ idaṃ.Sekhānametaṃ balanti sattannaṃ sekhānaṃ ñāṇabalametaṃ.Sekhañhi so, bhikkhave, balaṃ āgammāti sattannaṃ sekhānaṃ ñāṇabalaṃ ārabbha sandhāya paṭicca.Pajahatīti maggena pajahati.Pahāyāti iminā pana phalaṃ kathitaṃ.Yaṃ pāpanti yaṃ pāpakaṃ lāmakaṃ. Yasmā panetāni dvepi vaḍḍhetvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti, tasmā ettha etadaggaṃ nāgatanti veditabbaṃ.

11. In the first of the second, balānī by what meaning are they strengths? They are called strengths because of the meaning of being unshakeable, and likewise because of the meaning of being insurmountable and the meaning of being uncrushable. Paṭisaṅkhānabala means the strength of reflection. Bhāvanābala means the strength of development and growth.Suddhaṃ attāna this should be understood in the same way as said below.Tatrā among those two strengths.Yamida this which.Sekhānametaṃ bala this strength of knowledge belongs to the seven trainees.Sekhañhi so, bhikkhave, balaṃ āgammā having come to, referring to, relying on the strength of knowledge of the seven trainees.Pajahatī abandons by the path.Pahāyā by this, however, fruition is spoken.Yaṃ pāpa whatever is evil and base. Since, however, one attains arahantship by developing both of these, therefore it should be understood that the foremost is included here.

12.Dutiyesatisambojjhaṅgaṃ bhāvetītiādīsu ayaṃ heṭṭhā anāgatānaṃ padānaṃ vasena atthavaṇṇanā –vivekanissitanti vivekaṃ nissitaṃ.Vivekoti vivittatā. Svāyaṃ tadaṅgaviveko vikkhambhana-samuccheda-paṭippassaddhi-nissaraṇavivekoti pañcavidho. Tasmiṃ pañcavidhe viveke. Vivekanissitanti tadaṅgavivekanissitaṃ, samucchedavivekanissitaṃ, nissaraṇavivekanissitañca satisambojjhaṅgaṃ bhāvetīti ayamattho veditabbo. Tathā hi satisambojjhaṅgabhāvanānuyutto yogī vipassanākkhaṇe kiccato tadaṅgavivekanissitaṃ, ajjhāsayato nissaraṇavivekanissitaṃ, maggakāle pana kiccato samucchedavivekanissitaṃ, ārammaṇato nissaraṇavivekanissitaṃ satisambojjhaṅgaṃ bhāveti. Pañcavidhavivekanissitampīti eke. Te hi na kevalaṃ balavavipassanāmaggaphalakkhaṇesuyeva bojjhaṅge uddharanti, vipassanāpādakakasiṇajjhānaānāpānāsubhabrahmavihārajjhānesupi uddharanti, na ca paṭisiddhā aṭṭhakathācariyehi. Tasmā tesaṃ matena etesaṃ jhānānaṃ pavattikkhaṇe kiccato eva vikkhambhanavivekanissitaṃ. Yathā ca ‘‘vipassanākkhaṇe ajjhāsayato nissaraṇavivekanissita’’nti vuttaṃ, evaṃ ‘‘paṭippassaddhivivekanissitampi bhāvetī’’ti vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Esa nayovirāganissitantiādīsu. Vivekatthā eva hi virāgādayo.

12. In the second, in satisambojjhaṅgaṃ bhāvetī etc., this is the meaning description based on the words not included below— vivekanissita means relying on seclusion. Viveko means separateness. This is fivefold: tadaṅgaviveko, vikkhambhana-samuccheda-paṭippassaddhi-nissaraṇaviveko. In that fivefold seclusion. Vivekanissita means he develops mindfulness as a factor of enlightenment that relies on temporary seclusion, that relies on exhaustive seclusion, and that relies on escape seclusion. Thus, it should be understood that the yogi, engaged in the development of mindfulness as a factor of enlightenment, develops mindfulness as a factor of enlightenment that relies on temporary seclusion according to its function at the moment of insight, that relies on escape seclusion according to his intention, and that relies on exhaustive seclusion according to its function at the time of the path, and that relies on escape seclusion according to its object. Some say it also relies on fivefold seclusion. For they bring up the enlightenment factors not only in strong moments of insight and path and fruition, but also in the kasina jhanas that are the basis of insight, in breathing meditation, foulness meditation, and brahma-vihāra jhanas, and they are not prohibited by the commentaries. Therefore, according to their view, at the moment of the arising of these jhanas, it relies on suppression seclusion by its function. And just as it was said, "at the moment of insight, it relies on escape seclusion according to his intention," so it is fitting to say, "he also develops relying on tranquility seclusion." This same method applies in virāganissita etc. For detachment etc. are indeed the meanings of seclusion.

vossaggoduvidho pariccāgavossaggo ca pakkhandanavossaggo cāti. Tatthapariccāgavossaggoti vipassanākkhaṇe ca tadaṅgavasena, maggakkhaṇe ca samucchedavasena kilesappahānaṃ.Pakkhandanavossaggoti vipassanākkhaṇe tanninnabhāvena, maggakkhaṇe pana ārammaṇakaraṇena nibbānapakkhandanaṃ. Tadubhayampi imasmiṃ lokiyalokuttaramissake atthavaṇṇanānaye vaṭṭati. Tathā hi ayaṃ satisambojjhaṅgo yathāvuttena pakārena kilese pariccajati, nibbānañca pakkhandati.Vossaggapariṇāminti iminā pana sakalena vacanena vossaggatthaṃ pariṇamantaṃ pariṇatañca, paripaccantaṃ paripakkañcāti idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti. Ayañhi bojjhaṅgabhāvanānuyutto bhikkhu yathā satisambojjhaṅgo kilesapariccāgavossaggatthaṃ nibbānapakkhandanavossaggatthañca paripaccati, yathā ca paripakko hoti, tathā naṃ bhāvetīti. Esa nayo sesabojjhaṅgesu.

vossaggo is twofold: relinquishment-vossaggo and plunging-vossaggo. Therein, pariccāgavossaggo is the abandoning of defilements temporarily at the moment of insight and exhaustively at the moment of the path. Pakkhandanavossaggo is the plunging into nibbāna by inclining towards it at the moment of insight, and by making it the object at the moment of the path. Both of those are fitting in this method of meaning description that mixes mundane and supramundane. Thus, this mindfulness as a factor of enlightenment relinquishes defilements and plunges into nibbāna in the manner said. Vossaggapariṇāmi by this entire statement, what transforms and has transformed into the meaning of relinquishment, and what ripens and has ripened, this is said. For how the bhikkhu engaged in developing the enlightenment factors ripens mindfulness as a factor of enlightenment for the sake of the relinquishment of defilements and for the sake of plunging into nibbāna, and how it is ripened, thus he develops it. This same method applies to the remaining enlightenment factors.

viveko,sabbesaṃ virāgabhāvatovirāgo,nirodhabhāvatonirodhoti vuttaṃ. Maggo eva ca vossaggapariṇāmī, tasmā satisambojjhaṅgaṃ bhāveti vivekaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavattiyā vivekanissitaṃ, tathāvirāganissitaṃ nirodhanissitaṃ. Tañca kho ariyamaggakkhaṇuppattiyā kilesānaṃ samucchedato pariccāgabhāvena ca nibbānapakkhandanabhāvena ca pariṇataṃ paripakkanti ayameva attho daṭṭhabbo. Esa nayo sesabojjhaṅgesu. Iti ime satta bojjhaṅgā lokiyalokuttaramissakā kathitā. Imesupi dvīsu balesu etadaggabhāvo vuttanayeneva veditabbo.

viveko, because of the detachment of all, virāgo, because of the cessation, nirodho is said. The path itself is transformation into relinquishment, therefore, he develops mindfulness as a factor of enlightenment, relying on seclusion because of its occurrence making seclusion the object, likewise virāganissitaṃ nirodhanissitaṃ. And that, however, at the moment of the arising of the noble path, transformed and ripened by the exhaustive abandonment of defilements and by the plunging into nibbāna, this meaning should be seen. This same method applies to the remaining enlightenment factors. Thus, these seven enlightenment factors are spoken of mixed with mundane and supramundane. In these two strengths as well, the state of being the foremost should be understood in the manner said.

13.Tatiyevivicceva kāmehītiādīnaṃ catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ pāḷiattho ca bhāvanānayo ca sabbo sabbākārena visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.69-70) vitthāritoyeva. Imāni pana cattāri jhānāni eko bhikkhu cittekaggatthāya bhāveti, eko vipassanāpādakatthāya, eko abhiññāpādakatthāya, eko nirodhapādakatthāya, eko bhavavisesatthāya. Idha pana tānipi vipassanāpādakāni adhippetāni. Ayaṃ hi bhikkhu imāni jhānāni samāpajjitvā samāpattito vuṭṭhāya saṅkhāre sammasitvā hetupaccayapariggahaṃ katvā sappaccayaṃ nāmarūpañca vavatthapetvā indriyabalabojjhaṅgāni samodhānetvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti. Evametāni jhānāni lokiyalokuttaramissakāneva kathitāni. Imasmimpi baladvaye etadaggabhāvo vuttanayeneva veditabbo.

13. In the third, the meaning of the Pali and the method of development of the four jhānas beginning with vivicceva kāmehī are all extensively explained in the Visuddhimagga (visuddhi. 1.69-70). However, one bhikkhu develops these four jhānas for the sake of one-pointedness of mind, one for the sake of being the basis for insight, one for the sake of being the basis for higher knowledge, one for the sake of being the basis for cessation, and one for the sake of a special state of existence. Here, however, those that are the basis for insight are intended. For this bhikkhu, having attained these jhānas, having arisen from the attainment, having discerned formations, having made the examination of causes and conditions, having determined name-and-form along with its conditions, having combined the faculties, strengths, and enlightenment factors, attains arahantship. Thus, these jhānas are spoken of mixed with mundane and supramundane. In this pair of strengths as well, the state of being the foremost should be understood in the manner said.

14.Catutthesaṃkhittena ca vitthārena cāti saṃkhittadhammadesanā vitthāradhammadesanā cāti dveyeva dhammadesanāti dasseti. Tattha mātikaṃ uddisitvā kathitā desanā saṃkhittadesanā nāma. Tameva mātikaṃ vitthārato vibhajitvā kathitā vitthāradesanā nāma. Mātikaṃ vā ṭhapetvāpi aṭṭhapetvāpi vitthārato vibhajitvā kathitā vitthāradesanā nāma. Tāsu saṃkhittadesanā nāma mahāpaññassa puggalassa vasena kathitā, vitthāradesanā nāma mandapaññassa. Mahāpaññassa hi vitthāradesanā atipapañco viya hoti. Mandapaññassa saṅkhepadesanā sasakassa uppatanaṃ viya hoti, neva antaṃ na koṭiṃ pāpuṇituṃ sakkoti. Saṅkhepadesanā ca ugghaṭitaññussa vasena kathitā, vitthāradesanā itaresaṃ tiṇṇaṃ vasena. Sakalampi hi tepiṭakaṃ saṅkhepadesanā vitthāradesanāti ettheva saṅkhaṃ gacchati.

14. In the fourth, saṃkhittena ca vitthārena cā showing that there are only two kinds of Dhamma teaching: concise Dhamma teaching and extensive Dhamma teaching. Therein, the teaching spoken after reciting the mātika is called concise teaching. The extensive teaching is that same mātika divided and spoken of extensively. Or, even setting aside or not setting aside the mātika, the teaching divided and spoken of extensively is called extensive teaching. Among those, the concise teaching is spoken in terms of a person of great wisdom, the extensive teaching is for a person of dull wisdom. For extensive teaching is like excessive elaboration for a person of great wisdom. Concise teaching is like a rabbit's jump for a person of dull wisdom; he is not able to reach the beginning or the end. Concise teaching is spoken in terms of one who understands quickly, extensive teaching is in terms of the remaining three. For the entire Tipitaka goes to inclusion in concise teaching and extensive teaching here.

15.Pañcameyasmiṃ, bhikkhave, adhikaraṇeti vivādādhikaraṇaṃ, anuvādādhikaraṇaṃ, āpattādhikaraṇaṃ, kiccādhikaraṇanti imesaṃ catunnaṃ adhikaraṇānaṃ yasmiṃ adhikaraṇe.Āpanno ca bhikkhūti āpattiṃ āpanno bhikkhu ca.Tasmetanti tasmiṃ etaṃ.Dīghattāyāti dīghaṃ addhānaṃ tiṭṭhanatthāya.Kharattāyāti dāsa-koṇḍa-caṇḍāla-venāti evaṃ kharavācāpavattanatthāya.Vāḷattāyāti pāṇi leḍḍudaṇḍādīhi paharaṇavasena kakkhaḷabhāvatthāya.Bhikkhū ca na phāsuṃ viharissantīti aññamaññaṃ vivādāpanne bhikkhusaṅghe yepi uddesaṃ vā paripucchaṃ vā gahetukāmā padhānaṃ vā anuyuñjitukāmā, te phāsuṃ na viharissanti. Bhikkhusaṅghasmiṃ hi uposathapavāraṇāya ṭhitāya uddesādīhi atthikā uddesādīni gahetuṃ na sakkonti, vipassakānaṃ cittuppādo na ekaggo hoti, tato visesaṃ nibbattetuṃ na sakkonti. Evaṃ bhikkhū ca na phāsuṃ viharissanti.Na dīghattāyātiādīsu vuttapaṭipakkhanayena attho veditabbo.

15. In the fifth, yasmiṃ, bhikkhave, adhikaraṇe in which case of these four cases: dispute case, accusation case, offense case, duty case. Āpanno ca bhikkhū and the monk who has committed an offense. Tasmeta in that matter. Dīghattāyā for standing for a long time.Kharattāyā for uttering harsh speech such as slave, outcast, candala, or vile one.Vāḷattāyā for harshness in the manner of striking with hand, clod, or stick etc.Bhikkhū ca na phāsuṃ viharissantī and monks will not live comfortably in a community of monks embroiled in disputes, those who desire to take up reciting or questioning, or who desire to engage in striving, will not live comfortably. For in a community of monks standing for the uposatha or pavāraṇā, those who are interested in reciting etc. are not able to take up reciting etc., the mind-moment of the meditators is not one-pointed, therefore they are not able to produce distinction. Thus, monks will not live comfortably. In na dīghattāyā etc., the meaning should be understood by way of the opposite of what was said.

Idhāti imasmiṃ sāsane.Iti paṭisañcikkhatīti evaṃ paccavekkhati.Akusalaṃ āpannoti ettha akusalanti āpatti adhippetā, āpattiṃ āpannoti attho.Kañcideva desanti na sabbameva āpattiṃ, āpattiyā pana kañcideva desaṃ aññataraṃ āpattinti attho.Kāyenāti karajakāyena.Anattamanoti atuṭṭhacitto.Anattamanavācanti atuṭṭhavācaṃ.Mamevāti maṃyeva.Tatthāti tasmiṃ adhikaraṇe.Accayo accagamāti aparādho atikkamitvā madditvā gato, ahamevettha aparādhiko.Suṅkadāyakaṃva bhaṇḍasminti yathā suṅkaṭṭhānaṃ pariharitvā nīte bhaṇḍasmiṃ suṅkadāyakaṃ aparādho abhibhavati, so ca tattha aparādhiko hoti, na rājāno na rājapurisāti attho.

Idhā in this Dispensation. Iti paṭisañcikkhatī thus, he reflects. Akusalaṃ āpanno here, akusalaṃ means offense is intended, meaning having committed an offense. Kañcideva desa not the entire offense, but rather some part of the offense, one or another offense is meant. Kāyenā by the reed body. Anattamano displeased in mind. Anattamanavāca displeased speech. Mamevā only me. Tatthā in that case. Accayo accagamā the transgression has gone beyond and crushed, I myself am the offender here. Suṅkadāyakaṃva bhaṇḍasmi just as in goods carried avoiding the customs place, the offender is overcome by the transgression, and he is the offender there, not the kings nor the king's men is the meaning.

Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yo hi raññā ṭhapitaṃ suṅkaṭṭhānaṃ pariharitvā bhaṇḍaṃ harati, taṃ saha bhaṇḍasakaṭena ānetvā rañño dassenti. Tattha neva suṅkaṭṭhānassa doso atthi, na rañño na rājapurisānaṃ, pariharitvā gatasseva pana doso, evamevaṃ yaṃ so bhikkhu āpattiṃ āpanno, tattha neva āpattiyā doso, na codakassa. Tīhi pana kāraṇehi tasseva bhikkhuno doso. Tassa hi āpattiṃ āpannabhāvenapi doso, codake anattamanatāyapi doso, anattamanassa sato paresaṃ ārocanenapi doso. Codakassa pana yaṃ so taṃ āpattiṃ āpajjantaṃ addasa, tattha doso natthi. Anattamanatāya codanāya pana doso. Tampi amanasikaritvā ayaṃ bhikkhu attanova dosaṃ paccavekkhanto ‘‘iti mameva tattha accayo accagamā suṅkadāyakaṃva bhaṇḍasmi’’nti evaṃ paṭisañcikkhatīti attho. Dutiyavāre codakassa anattamanatā ca anattamanatāya coditabhāvo cāti dve dosā, tesaṃ vasena ‘‘accayo accagamā’’ti ettha yojanā kātabbā. Sesamettha uttānamevāti.

The meaning here is: if someone evades the customs post established by the king and takes goods, they are brought, along with the cart of goods, to the king. There is no fault in the customs post, nor in the king or royal officials, but only in the one who evaded it. Similarly, whatever offense that bhikkhu committed, there is no fault in the offense itself, nor in the accuser. However, the bhikkhu is at fault for three reasons: he is at fault for committing the offense, he is at fault for being displeased with the accuser, and he is at fault for announcing it to others while displeased. However, there is no fault in the accuser for seeing him commit the offense, but there is fault in the accusation due to displeasure. But without considering even that, this bhikkhu, reflecting on his own fault, should reflect thus: "Indeed, I myself committed an offense there, like a tax-dodger with goods." This is the meaning. In the second instance, there are two faults in the accuser: displeasure and being accused due to displeasure; the phrase "committed an offense" should be applied in relation to these. The rest here is self-explanatory.

16.Chaṭṭheaññataroti eko apākaṭanāmo brāhmaṇo.Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamītiyenāti bhummatthe karaṇavacanaṃ. Tasmā yattha bhagavā, tattha upasaṅkamīti evamettha attho veditabbo. Yena vā kāraṇena bhagavā devamanussehi upasaṅkamitabbo, tena kāraṇena upasaṅkamīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Kena ca kāraṇena bhagavā upasaṅkamitabbo? Nānappakāraguṇavisesādhigamādhippāyena, sāduphalūpabhogādhippāyena dijagaṇehi niccaphalitamahārukkho viya.Upasaṅkamīti gatoti vuttaṃ hoti.Upasaṅkamitvāti upasaṅkamanapariyosānadīpanaṃ. Atha vā evaṃ gato tato āsannataraṃ ṭhānaṃ bhagavato samīpasaṅkhātaṃ gantvātipi vuttaṃ hoti.

16. In the sixth, aññataro means a certain brahmin whose name was not well-known. Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamī means yena is a karana-vacana (instrumental case) in the sense of bhumma (abundance). Therefore, the meaning here should be understood as "he approached where the Blessed One was." Or, the meaning here should be seen as "for whatever reason the Blessed One should be approached by gods and humans, for that reason he approached." And for what reason should the Blessed One be approached? With the intention of attaining various special qualities, like a large, fruit-bearing tree constantly visited by flocks of birds for the sake of enjoying its delicious fruits. Upasaṅkamī means he went. Upasaṅkamitvā indicates the conclusion of approaching. Or, having gone thus, it also means he went to a place nearer to the Blessed One, which is considered proximity.

Bhagavatā saddhiṃ sammodīti yathā ca khamanīyādīni pucchanto bhagavā tena, evaṃ sopi bhagavatā saddhiṃ samappavattamodo ahosi, sītodakaṃ viya uṇhodakena sammoditaṃ ekībhāvaṃ agamāsi. Yāya ca ‘‘kacci, bho gotama, khamanīyaṃ, kacci yāpanīyaṃ, kacci bhoto gotamassa ca sāvakānañca appābādhaṃ appātaṅkaṃ lahuṭṭhānaṃ balaṃ phāsuvihāro’’tiādikāya kathāya sammodi, taṃ pītipāmojjasaṅkhātassa sammodassa jananato sammodituṃ yuttabhāvato casammodanīyaṃ,atthabyañjanamadhuratāya sucirampi kālaṃ sāretuṃ nirantaraṃ pavattetuṃ araharūpato saritabbabhāvato casāraṇīyaṃ. Suyyamānasukhato vā sammodanīyaṃ, anussariyamānasukhato sāraṇīyaṃ, tathā byañjanaparisuddhatāya sammodanīyaṃ, atthaparisuddhatāya sāraṇīyanti evaṃ anekehi pariyāyehi sammodanīyaṃ sāraṇīyaṃ kathaṃ vītisāretvā pariyosāpetvā niṭṭhapetvā yenatthena āgato, taṃ pucchitukāmo ekamantaṃ nisīdi.

Bhagavatā saddhiṃ sammodī means just as the Blessed One and he exchanged courteous greetings, such as asking about well-being, so too he had an exchange of pleasantries with the Blessed One, like cold water mixed with hot water becoming one. And the talk with which he exchanged greetings, such as "I hope, venerable Gotama, you are well, I hope you are able to maintain yourself, I hope venerable Gotama and your disciples are free from illness, free from disease, of light constitution, strong, and living in comfort," is called sammodanīyaṃ because it generates delight and joy, and because it is fitting to exchange greetings; and it is called sāraṇīyaṃ because it is worthy of being remembered due to the sweetness of its meaning and expression, and because it is perpetually worthy of being recalled for a long time. Or, sammodanīyaṃ because it is pleasant to hear, sāraṇīyaṃ because it is pleasant to remember; similarly, sammodanīyaṃ because of the purity of its expression, sāraṇīyaṃ because of the purity of its meaning. Thus, having brought to an end and concluded the talk that was to be exchanged and remembered in many ways, he sat down to one side, wishing to ask about the purpose for which he had come.

Ekamantanti bhāvanapuṃsakaniddeso ‘‘visamaṃ candimasūriyā parivattantī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 4.70) viya. Tasmā yathā nisinno ekamantaṃ nisinno hoti, tathā nisīdīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Bhummatthe vā etaṃ upayogavacanaṃ.Nisīdīti upāvisi. Paṇḍitā hi purisā garuṭṭhānīyaṃ upasaṅkamitvā āsanakusalatāya ekamantaṃ nisīdanti. Ayañca nesaṃ aññataro, tasmā ekamantaṃ nisīdi.

Ekamantaṃ is a neuter noun, like in "visamaṃ candimasūriyā parivattantī" (a. ni. 4.70). Therefore, the meaning here should be understood as "just as one sits having sat down to one side, so he sat down." Or, this is an instrumental case in the sense of bhumma (abundance). Nisīdī means he sat down. For wise people, having approached someone worthy of respect, sit down to one side out of skill in seating arrangements. And this was one of theirs, therefore he sat down to one side.

Kathaṃ nisinno pana ekamantaṃ nisinno hotīti? Cha nisajjadose vajjetvā. Seyyathidaṃ – atidūraṃ, accāsannaṃ, uparivātaṃ, unnatappadesaṃ, atisammukhaṃ atipacchāti. Atidūre nisinno hi sace kathetukāmo hoti, uccāsaddena kathetabbaṃ hoti. Accāsanne nisinno saṅghaṭṭanaṃ karoti. Uparivāte nisinno sarīragandhena bādhati. Unnatappadese nisinno agāravaṃ pakāseti. Atisammukhā nisinno sace daṭṭhukāmo hoti, cakkhunā cakkhuṃ āhacca daṭṭhabbaṃ hoti. Atipacchā nisinno sace daṭṭhukāmo hoti, gīvaṃ pasāretvā daṭṭhabbaṃ hoti. Tasmā ayampi ete cha nisajjadose vajjetvā nisīdi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘ekamantaṃ nisīdī’’ti.

But how does one sit having sat down to one side? By avoiding six faults in sitting. Namely: too far, too close, upwind, on an elevated place, too directly in front, and too far behind. For someone sitting too far away, if they want to speak, they have to speak loudly. Someone sitting too close causes crowding. Someone sitting upwind causes discomfort with body odor. Someone sitting on an elevated place shows disrespect. Someone sitting too directly in front, if they want to look, has to look by making eye contact. Someone sitting too far behind, if they want to look, has to stretch their neck to look. Therefore, he too sat down avoiding these six faults in sitting. Therefore it was said, "ekamantaṃ nisīdī".

Etadavocāti duvidhā hi pucchā – agārikapucchā, anagārikapucchā ca. Tattha ‘‘kiṃ, bhante, kusalaṃ, kiṃ akusala’’nti (ma. ni. 3.296) iminā nayena agārikapucchā āgatā. ‘‘Ime nu kho, bhante, pañcupādānakkhandhā’’ti (ma. ni. 3.86) iminā nayena anagārikapucchā. Ayaṃ pana attano anurūpaṃ agārikapucchaṃ pucchanto etaṃ ‘‘ko nu kho, bho gotama, hetu ko paccayo’’tiādivacanaṃ avoca. Tatthahetu paccayoti ubhayampetaṃ kāraṇavevacanameva.Adhammacariyāvisamacariyāhetūti adhammacariyāsaṅkhātāya visamacariyāya hetu, taṃkāraṇā tappaccayāti attho. Tatrāyaṃ padattho – adhammassa cariyā adhammacariyā, adhammakāraṇanti attho. Visamaṃ cariyā, visamassa vā kammassa cariyāti visamacariyā. Adhammacariyā ca sā visamacariyā cāti adhammacariyāvisamacariyā. Etenupāyena sukkapakkhepi attho veditabbo. Atthato panettha adhammacariyāvisamacariyā nāma dasa akusalakammapathā, dhammacariyāsamacariyā nāma dasa kusalakammapathāti veditabbā.

Etadavocā means there are two kinds of questions: questions for householders and questions for renunciants. There, questions for householders come in this manner: "What, venerable sir, is skillful? What is unskillful?" (ma. ni. 3.296). Questions for renunciants come in this manner: "Are these, venerable sir, the five aggregates subject to clinging?" (ma. ni. 3.86). But this one, asking a question appropriate to himself as a householder, said this statement, beginning with "ko nu kho, bho gotama, hetu ko paccayo". There, hetu paccayo both mean the same thing: cause. Adhammacariyāvisamacariyāhetū means the cause, the reason, the condition for misconduct, which is called adhammacariyā. Here is the meaning of the words: adhammassa cariyā adhammacariyā, meaning the cause of unrighteousness. Visamaṃ cariyā, or visamassa vā kammassa cariyāti visamacariyā, means unbalanced conduct or conduct of unbalanced karma. Adhammacariyā ca sā visamacariyā cāti adhammacariyāvisamacariyā means unrighteous conduct and unbalanced conduct. The meaning should be understood in the same way for the white side as well. In essence here, adhammacariyāvisamacariyā means the ten unskillful courses of action, and dhammacariyāsamacariyā means the ten skillful courses of action, which should be understood.

Abhikkantaṃ, bho gotamāti ettha ayaṃ abhikkantasaddo khayasundarābhirūpaabbhanumodanesu dissati. ‘‘Abhikkantā, bhante, ratti, nikkhanto paṭhamo yāmo, ciranisinno bhikkhusaṅgho’’tiādīsu (udā. 45; cūḷava. 383; a. ni. 8.20) hi khaye dissati. ‘‘Ayaṃ imesaṃ catunnaṃ puggalānaṃ abhikkantataro ca paṇītataro cā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 4.100) sundare.

Abhikkantaṃ, bho gotamā here, the word abhikkanta is seen in the senses of destruction, beautiful, excellent, and approval. In "Abhikkantā, bhante, ratti, nikkhanto paṭhamo yāmo, ciranisinno bhikkhusaṅgho" (udā. 45; cūḷava. 383; a. ni. 8.20) and so on, it is seen in the sense of destruction. In "Ayaṃ imesaṃ catunnaṃ puggalānaṃ abhikkantataro ca paṇītataro cā" (a. ni. 4.100) and so on, it is seen in the sense of beautiful.

‘‘Ko me vandati pādāni, iddhiyā yasasā jalaṃ;

"Who bows at my feet, blazing with power and glory;
Illuminating all directions with excellent appearance?"

Ādīsu (vi. va. 857) abhirūpe. ‘‘Abhikkantaṃ, bhante’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.250; pārā. 15) abbhanumodane. Idhāpi abbhanumodaneyeva. Yasmā ca abbhanumodane, tasmā sādhu sādhu, bho gotamāti vuttaṃ hotīti veditabbaṃ.

And so on (vi. va. 857), it is seen in the sense of excellent. In "Abhikkantaṃ, bhante" (dī. ni. 1.250; pārā. 15) and so on, it is seen in the sense of approval. Here too, it is in the sense of approval. And because it is in the sense of approval, it should be understood as "sādhu sādhu, bho gotamā" (good, good, venerable Gotama).

‘‘Bhaye kodhe pasaṃsāyaṃ, turite kotūhalacchare;

"In fear, anger, praise, haste, curiosity, desire;
In laughter, sorrow, joy, the wise one repeats."

abhikkantanti abhikkantaṃ atiiṭṭhaṃ atimanāpaṃ, atisundaranti vuttaṃ hoti.

abhikkantaṃ means abhikkantaṃ, exceedingly desirable, exceedingly pleasing, exceedingly beautiful.

Tattha ekena abhikkantasaddena desanaṃ thometi, ekena attano pasādaṃ. Ayañhettha adhippāyo – abhikkantaṃ, bho gotama, yadidaṃ bhoto gotamassa dhammadesanā, abhikkantaṃ yadidaṃ bhoto gotamassa dhammadesanaṃ āgamma mama pasādoti. Bhagavatoyeva vā vacanaṃ dve dve atthe sandhāya thometi – bhoto gotamassa vacanaṃ abhikkantaṃ dosanāsanato, abhikkantaṃ guṇādhigamanato, tathā saddhājananato, paññājananato, sātthato, sabyañjanato, uttānapadato, gambhīratthato, kaṇṇasukhato, hadayaṅgamato, anattukkaṃsanato, aparavambhanato, karuṇāsītalato, paññāvadātato, āpātharamaṇīyato, vimaddakkhamato, suyyamānasukhato, vīmaṃsiyamānahitatoti evamādīhi yojetabbaṃ.

There, with one abhikkanta sound, he praises the teaching, and with the other, his own faith. Here is the idea: "Abhikkantaṃ, bho gotama, yadidaṃ bhoto gotamassa dhammadesanā, abhikkantaṃ yadidaṃ bhoto gotamassa dhammadesanaṃ āgamma mama pasādoti" (Excellent, venerable Gotama, this teaching of venerable Gotama; excellent, this faith of mine that has come about through the teaching of venerable Gotama). Or, the Blessed One's own words are praised with two meanings: "Bhoto gotamassa vacanaṃ abhikkantaṃ dosanāsanato, abhikkantaṃ guṇādhigamanato" (The words of venerable Gotama are excellent in destroying faults, excellent in attaining qualities), and similarly, in generating faith, in generating wisdom, in being meaningful, in being well-expressed, in being easily understood, in being profound in meaning, in being pleasing to the ear, in being heart-touching, in not praising oneself, in not disparaging others, in being compassionate and cool, in being clear in wisdom, in being pleasing to the eye, in being capable of being analyzed, in being pleasant to hear, in being beneficial to contemplate. In this way, it should be connected.

nikkujjitanti adhomukhaṭhapitaṃ, heṭṭhāmukhajātaṃ vā.Ukkujjeyyāti uparimukhaṃ kareyya.Paṭicchannanti tiṇapaṇṇādichāditaṃ.Vivareyyāti ugghāṭeyya.Mūḷhassāti disāmūḷhassa.Maggaṃ ācikkheyyāti hatthe gahetvā ‘‘esa maggo’’ti vadeyya.Andhakāreti kāḷapakkhacātuddasīaḍḍharattaghanavanasaṇḍameghapaṭalehi caturaṅge tame. Ayaṃ tāva anuttānapadattho.

Nikkujjitaṃ means placed face down, or born with the face downward. Ukkujjeyya means would turn it face up. Paṭicchannaṃ means covered with grass, leaves, and so on. Vivareyya means would uncover. Mūḷhassa means to one lost in direction. Maggaṃ ācikkheyya means would take them by the hand and say, "This is the path." Andhakāre means fourfold darkness consisting of the dark fortnight, the fourteenth night, midnight, dense forest groves, and clouds. This, for the moment, is the literal meaning.

Ayaṃ pana adhippāyayojanā – yathā koci nikkujjitaṃ ukkujjeyya, evaṃ saddhammavimukhaṃ asaddhamme patitaṃ maṃ asaddhammā vuṭṭhāpentena, yathā paṭicchannaṃ vivareyya, evaṃ kassapassa bhagavato sāsanantaradhānato pabhuti micchādiṭṭhigahanapaṭicchannaṃ sāsanaṃ vivarantena, yathā mūḷhassa maggaṃ ācikkheyya, evaṃ kummaggamicchāmaggappaṭipannassa me saggamokkhamaggaṃ āvikarontena, yathā andhakāre telapajjotaṃ dhāreyya, evaṃ mohandhakāre nimuggassa me buddhādiratanarūpāni apassato tappaṭicchādakamohandhakāraviddhaṃsakadesanāpajjotadhāraṇena mayhaṃ bhotā gotamena etehi pariyāyehi pakāsitattā anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsitoti.

But here is the application of the implied meaning: "Just as someone would turn upright what is overturned, so too you lift me up from unrighteousness, having turned away from the good Dhamma and fallen into unrighteousness; just as someone would uncover what is covered, so too you uncover the teaching, covered by the thicket of wrong views since the disappearance of the dispensation of the Blessed Kassapa; just as someone would show the path to one who is lost, so too you reveal to me, who have taken the wrong path and the false path, the path to heaven and liberation; just as someone would hold up an oil lamp in the darkness, so too, because you have illuminated me, who was immersed in the darkness of delusion and unable to see the forms of the Buddha and other jewels, by holding up the lamp of teaching that dispels the darkness of delusion that conceals them, in these ways, the Dhamma has been revealed in many ways by venerable Gotama."

esāhantiādimāha. Tatthaesāhanti eso ahaṃ.Bhavantaṃ gotamaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmīti bhavaṃ me gotamo saraṇaṃ parāyaṇaṃ aghassa tātā hitassa ca vidhātāti iminā adhippāyena bhavantaṃ gotamaṃ gacchāmi bhajāmi sevāmi payirupāsāmi, evaṃ vā jānāmi bujjhāmīti. Yesañhi dhātūnaṃ gati attho, buddhipi tesaṃ attho. Tasmā gacchāmīti imassa jānāmi bujjhāmīti ayamattho vutto.Dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañcāti ettha pana adhigatamagge sacchikatanirodhe yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjamāne ca catūsu apāyesu apatamāne dhāretītidhammo. So atthato ariyamaggo ceva nibbānañca. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘yāvatā, bhikkhave, dhammā saṅkhatā, ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo tesaṃ aggamakkhāyatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.34) vitthāro. Na kevalañca ariyamaggo ceva nibbānañca, apica kho ariyaphalehi saddhiṃ pariyattidhammopi. Vuttañhetaṃ chattamāṇavakavimāne –

He said, beginning with esāhaṃ. There, esāhaṃ means this I. Bhavantaṃ gotamaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmī means "I go to venerable Gotama, resort to him, rely on him, he is my refuge and ultimate support, the protector from harm and the provider of benefit," with this intention, "I go to venerable Gotama, I resort to him, I serve him, I attend upon him, and thus I know and understand." For of those verbal roots that have the meaning of going, understanding is also their meaning. Therefore, this meaning of "gacchāmi" is said to be "I know and understand." Dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañcā: Here, dhammo sustains one who has attained the path, realized cessation, and is practicing according to the teaching, and who does not fall into the four woeful states. So, in meaning, it is the Noble Eightfold Path and Nibbana. And it was said, "Yāvatā, bhikkhave, dhammā saṅkhatā, ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo tesaṃ aggamakkhāyatī" (a. ni. 4.34), and so on. And not only the Noble Eightfold Path and Nibbana, but also the Teaching in its textual form, along with the Noble Fruits. And it was said in the Chattamāṇavakavimāna—

‘‘Rāgavirāgamanejamasokaṃ, dhammamasaṅkhatamappaṭikūlaṃ;

"Rāgavirāgamanejamasokaṃ, dhammamasaṅkhatamappaṭikūlaṃ;
Madhuramimaṃ paguṇaṃ suvibhattaṃ, dhammamimaṃ saraṇatthamupehī" (vi. va. 887);

rāgavirogoti maggo kathito.Anojamasokanti phalaṃ.Dhammamasaṅkhatanti nibbānaṃ.Appaṭikūlaṃ madhuramimaṃpaguṇaṃ suvibhattanti piṭakattayena vibhattā sabbadhammakkhandhāti. Diṭṭhisīlasaṅghātena saṃhatotisaṅgho. So atthato aṭṭhaariyapuggalasamūho. Vuttañhetaṃ tasmiyeva vimāne –

rāgavirogo is said to be the Path. Anojamasokaṃ is the Fruit. Dhammamasaṅkhataṃ is Nibbana. Appaṭikūlaṃ madhuramimaṃ paguṇaṃ suvibhattaṃ means all the aggregates of the Dhamma divided into the three baskets (Tipitaka). Saṅgho means a group united by vision and virtue. So, in meaning, it is the community of the eight Noble Individuals. And it was said in that same Vimanavatthu—

‘‘Yattha ca dinnamahapphalamāhu, catūsu sucīsu purisayugesu;

"Yattha ca dinnamahapphalamāhu, catūsu sucīsu purisayugesu;
Aṭṭha ca puggaladhammadasā te, saṅghamimaṃ saraṇatthamupehī" (vi. va. 888);

bhikkhusaṅgho. Ettāvatā brāhmaṇo tīṇi saraṇagamanāni paṭivedesi.

bhikkhusaṅgho. With this much, the brahmin declared the three refuges.

Idāni tesu saraṇagamanesu kosallatthaṃ saraṇaṃ, saraṇagamanaṃ, yo ca saraṇaṃ gacchati, saraṇagamanappabhedo, saraṇagamanaphalaṃ, saṃkileso, bhedoti ayaṃ vidhi veditabbo.

Now, for skillfulness in those refuges, this method should be understood: the refuge, the act of going for refuge, and the one who goes for refuge, the kinds of going for refuge, the fruit of going for refuge, defilement, and distinction.

saraṇaṃ,saraṇagatānaṃ teneva saraṇagamanena bhayaṃ santāsaṃ dukkhaṃ duggatiparikilesaṃ hanati vināsetīti attho, ratanattayassevetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Atha vā hite pavattanena ahitā ca nivattanena sattānaṃ bhayaṃ hiṃsatīti buddho, bhavakantārā uttāraṇena lokassa assāsadānena ca dhammo, appakānampi kārānaṃ vipulaphalapaṭilābhakaraṇena saṅgho. Tasmā imināpi pariyāyena ratanattayaṃ saraṇaṃ. Tappasādataggarutāhi vihatakileso tapparāyaṇatākārappavatto cittuppādo saraṇagamanaṃ. Taṃsamaṅgīsatto saraṇaṃ gacchati, vuttappakārena cittuppādena ‘‘etāni me tīṇi ratanāni saraṇaṃ, etāni parāyaṇa’’nti evaṃ upetīti attho. Evaṃ tāvasaraṇaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ yo ca saraṇaṃ gacchatiidaṃ tayaṃ veditabbaṃ.

Saraṇaṃ means, by that very act of going for refuge, it destroys and eliminates fear, terror, suffering, woeful destinations, and defilements for those who have gone for refuge; this is a designation for the Triple Gem itself. Or, the Buddha harms the fear of beings by causing them to engage in benefit and by preventing them from engaging in harm, the Dhamma by leading them across the wilderness of existence and by giving them assurance to the world, the Sangha by causing the attainment of great fruit from even small deeds. Therefore, in this way too, the Triple Gem is a refuge. The mental state that arises, having dispelled defilements through respect and reverence for it, and inclining towards reliance on it, is the act of going for refuge. One endowed with that seeks refuge, meaning they approach, resort to, serve, and attend upon with a mental state of the kind described: "These three gems are my refuge, these are my ultimate support." Thus, firstly, saraṇaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ yo ca saraṇaṃ gacchati, this triad should be understood.

Saraṇagamanappabhede pana duvidhaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ lokuttaraṃ lokiyañcāti. Tattha lokuttaraṃ diṭṭhasaccānaṃ maggakkhaṇe saraṇagamanupakkilesasamucchedena ārammaṇato nibbānārammaṇaṃ hutvā kiccato sakalepi ratanattaye ijjhati. Lokiyaṃ puthujjanānaṃ saraṇagamanupakkilesavikkhambhanena ārammaṇato buddhādiguṇārammaṇaṃ hutvā ijjhati. Taṃ atthato buddhādīsu vatthūsu saddhāpaṭilābho, saddhāmūlikā ca sammādiṭṭhi dasasu puññakiriyāvatthūsu diṭṭhijukammanti vuccati.

In the kinds of going for refuge, there are two kinds of going for refuge: supramundane and mundane. There, supramundane going for refuge, at the moment of the path for those who have seen the truths, with the eradication of the defilements associated with going for refuge, has Nibbana as its object, and fulfills all the Gems in its function. Mundane going for refuge, for ordinary people, with the suppression of the defilements associated with going for refuge, has the qualities of the Buddha and so on as its object, and fulfills its function. In essence, it is the attainment of faith in the Buddha and so on, and right view rooted in faith, which is called correctness of view in the ten bases for meritorious action.

attasanniyyātanaṃnāma ‘‘ajja ādiṃ katvā ahaṃ attānaṃ buddhassa niyyātemi, dhammassa, saṅghassā’’ti evaṃ buddhādīnaṃ attapariccajanaṃ.Tapparāyaṇatānāma ‘‘ajja ādiṃ katvā ahaṃ buddhaparāyaṇo, dhammaparāyaṇo, saṅghaparāyaṇo iti maṃ dhārethā’’ti evaṃ tapparāyaṇabhāvo.Sissabhāvūpagamanaṃnāma ‘‘ajja ādiṃ katvā ahaṃ buddhassa antevāsiko, dhammassa, saṅghassa iti maṃ dhārethā’’ti evaṃ sissabhāvūpagamo.Paṇipātonāma ‘‘ajja ādiṃ katvā ahaṃ abhivādana-paccuṭṭhāna-añjalikamma-sāmīcikammaṃ buddhādīnaṃyeva tiṇṇaṃ vatthūnaṃ karomi iti maṃ dhārethā’’ti evaṃ buddhādīsu paramanipaccakāro. Imesañhi catunnampi ākārānaṃ aññatarampi karontena gahitaṃyeva hoti saraṇagamanaṃ.

Attasanniyyātanaṃ means "Beginning from today, I dedicate myself to the Buddha, to the Dhamma, to the Sangha," thus, the surrendering of oneself to the Buddha and others. Tapparāyaṇatā means "Beginning from today, may you regard me as one who is devoted to the Buddha, devoted to the Dhamma, devoted to the Sangha," thus, the state of being devoted to them. Sissabhāvūpagamanaṃ means "Beginning from today, may you regard me as a disciple of the Buddha, of the Dhamma, of the Sangha," thus, the approach of becoming a disciple. Paṇipāto means "Beginning from today, may you regard me as one who performs acts of reverence, rising up in respect, showing reverence with joined palms, and proper service, only to these three objects: the Buddha and others," thus, the utmost respect towards the Buddha and others. Indeed, by performing any one of these four acts, the going for refuge is already undertaken.

Apica ‘‘bhagavato attānaṃ pariccajāmi, dhammassa, saṅghassa attānaṃ pariccajāmi, jīvitaṃ pariccajāmi, pariccattoyeva me attā, pariccattaṃyeva me jīvitaṃ, jīvitapariyantikaṃ buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmi, buddho me saraṇaṃ leṇaṃ tāṇa’’nti evampi attasanniyyātanaṃ veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Satthārañca vatāhaṃ passeyyaṃ, bhagavantameva passeyyaṃ, sugatañca vatāhaṃ passeyyaṃ, bhagavantameva passeyyaṃ, sammāsambuddhañca vatāhaṃ passeyyaṃ, bhagavantameva passeyya’’nti (saṃ. ni. 2.154) evampi mahākassapassa saraṇagamane viya sissabhāvūpagamanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.

Furthermore, "I relinquish myself to the Blessed One; I relinquish myself to the Dhamma; I relinquish myself to the Sangha; I relinquish my life; indeed, my self is relinquished; indeed, my life is relinquished; until the end of my life, I go to the Buddha for refuge; the Buddha is my refuge, shelter, and protection," thus, the attasanniyyātanaṃ should be understood. Similar to Mahākassapa's going for refuge, "Oh, that I might see the Teacher; that I might see the Blessed One; that I might see the Well-gone One; that I might see the Blessed One; that I might see the Perfectly Enlightened One; that I might see the Blessed One" (saṃ. ni. 2.154), the sissabhāvūpagamanaṃ should be seen.

‘‘So ahaṃ vicarissāmi, gāmā gāmaṃ purā puraṃ;

"I shall wander, from village to village, from city to city; paying homage to the Fully Enlightened One, and to the Dhamma, so well-taught." (su. ni. 194; saṃ. ni. 1.246);

Evampi āḷavakādīnaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ viya tapparāyaṇatā veditabbā. ‘‘Atha kho brahmāyu brāhmaṇo uṭṭhāyāsanā ekaṃsaṃ uttarāsaṅgaṃ karitvā bhagavato pādesu sirasā nipatitvā bhagavato pādāni mukhena ca paricumbati, pāṇīhi ca parisambāhati, nāmañca sāveti – ‘brahmāyu ahaṃ, bho gotama, brāhmaṇo; brahmāyu ahaṃ, bho gotama, brāhmaṇo’’’ti (ma. ni. 2.394) evampi paṇipāto veditabbo.

Thus, similar to Āḷavaka and others' going for refuge, the tapparāyaṇatā should be understood. "Then Brahmāyu the Brahmin, rising from his seat, arranging his upper robe over one shoulder, prostrated himself with his head at the Blessed One's feet, and kissed the Blessed One's feet, and massaged them with his hands, and announced his name: 'I am Brahmāyu, venerable Gotama, a Brahmin; I am Brahmāyu, venerable Gotama, a Brahmin'" (ma. ni. 2.394), thus, the paṇipāto should be understood.

So panesa ñātibhayācariyadakkhiṇeyyavasena catubbidho hoti. Tattha dakkhiṇeyyapaṇipātena saraṇagamanaṃ hoti, na itarehi. Seṭṭhavaseneva hi saraṇaṃ gaṇhāti, seṭṭhavasena ca bhijjati. Tasmā yo sākiyo vā koliyo vā ‘‘buddho amhākaṃ ñātako’’ti vandati, aggahitameva hoti saraṇaṃ. Yo vā ‘‘samaṇo gotamo rājapūjito mahānubhāvo avandiyamāno anatthampi kareyyā’’ti bhayena vandati, aggahitameva hoti saraṇaṃ. Yo vā bodhisattakāle bhagavato santike kiñci uggahitaṃ saramāno buddhakāle vā –

Now, this (paṇipāto) is fourfold, based on kinship, fear, teacher, and merit-worthiness. Among these, going for refuge occurs with the merit-worthiness paṇipāto, not with the others. Indeed, one takes refuge based on superiority, and it is broken based on superiority. Therefore, if a Sakyan or a Koliyan venerates, saying "The Buddha is our relative," the refuge is not taken. Or if one venerates out of fear, saying "The ascetic Gotama, being honored by the king, is powerful; if not venerated, he might cause harm," the refuge is not taken. Or if, remembering something learned in the presence of the Blessed One in the time of the Bodhisatta, or in the Buddha-period:

‘‘Ekena bhoge bhuñjeyya, dvīhi kammaṃ payojaye;

"With one part one should enjoy one's wealth, with two parts one should apply oneself to work, and the fourth one should save for times of distress." (dī. ni. 3.265) –

Evarūpaṃ anusāsaniṃ uggahetvā ‘‘ācariyo me’’ti vandati, aggahitameva hoti saraṇaṃ. Yo pana ‘‘ayaṃ loke aggadakkhiṇeyyo’’ti vandati, teneva gahitaṃ hoti saraṇaṃ.

Having learned such an instruction, if one venerates, saying "He is my teacher," the refuge is not taken. But if one venerates, saying "This one is the foremost object of merit in the world," by that very act, the refuge is taken.

saraṇagamanappabhedoveditabbo.

saraṇagamanappabhedo should be understood.

Ettha ca lokuttarassa saraṇagamanassa cattāri sāmaññaphalāni vipākaphalaṃ, sabbadukkhakkhayo ānisaṃsaphalaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ –

Herein, for supramundane going for refuge, the four fruits of Stream-entry are the resultant fruit, and the destruction of all suffering is the benefit fruit. This was said:

‘‘Yo ca buddhañca dhammañca, saṅghañca saraṇaṃ gato;

"He who has gone for refuge to the Buddha, the Dhamma, and the Sangha, sees with right wisdom the four Noble Truths; (dha. pa. 190);

‘‘Dukkhaṃ dukkhasamuppādaṃ, dukkhassa ca atikkamaṃ;

"Suffering, the arising of suffering, and the transcending of suffering; and the Noble Eightfold Path, leading to the stilling of suffering. (dha. pa. 191);

‘‘Etaṃ kho saraṇaṃ khemaṃ, etaṃ saraṇamuttamaṃ;

"This indeed is refuge secure, this is refuge supreme; by going to this refuge, one is released from all suffering." (dha. pa. 192);

Apica niccato anupagamanādivasenapetassa ānisaṃsaphalaṃ veditabbaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ –

Moreover, the benefit fruit of one who has departed should be understood as in terms of not adhering to permanence and so on. This was said:

‘‘Aṭṭhānametaṃ, bhikkhave, anavakāso, yaṃ diṭṭhisampanno puggalo kañci saṅkhāraṃ niccato upagaccheyya, sukhato upagaccheyya, kañci dhammaṃ attato upagaccheyya, mātaraṃ jīvitā voropeyya, pitaraṃ, arahantaṃ jīvitā voropeyya, paduṭṭhacitto tathāgatassa lohitaṃ uppādeyya, saṅghaṃ bhindeyya, aññaṃ satthāraṃ uddiseyya, netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.128-130; a. ni. 1.272-277).

"This is impossible, monks, it cannot happen that a person endowed with (right) view would adhere to any conditioned thing as permanent, would adhere to (anything as) happiness, would adhere to any phenomenon as self, would deprive his mother of life, would deprive his father (or) an arahant of life, would with malicious intent draw blood from a Tathāgata, would cause a schism in the Sangha, would appoint another teacher, such a thing is not possible." (ma. ni. 3.128-130; a. ni. 1.272-277).

Lokiyassa pana saraṇagamanassa bhavasampadāpi bhogasampadāpi phalameva. Vuttañhetaṃ –

But for mundane going for refuge, prosperity of existence and prosperity of wealth are the fruits. This was said:

‘‘Ye keci buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gatāse,

"Whatever beings have gone to the Buddha for refuge, they will not go to a realm of misery; having abandoned the human body, they will fill the hosts of the devas." (saṃ. ni. 1.37);

Aparampi vuttaṃ –

And it was also said:

‘‘Atha kho sakko devānamindo asītiyā devatāsahassehi saddhiṃ yenāyasmā mahāmoggallāno tenupasaṅkami…pe… ekamantaṃ ṭhitaṃ kho sakkaṃ devānamindaṃ āyasmā mahāmoggallāno etadavoca – ‘sādhu kho, devānaminda, buddhasaraṇagamanaṃ hoti. Buddhasaraṇagamanahetu kho devānaminda evamidhekacce sattā kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā sugatiṃ saggaṃ lokaṃ upapajjanti. Te aññe deve dasahi ṭhānehi adhigaṇhanti dibbena āyunā dibbena vaṇṇena sukhena yasena ādhipateyyena dibbehi rūpehi saddehi gandhehi rasehi phoṭṭhabbehī’’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.341).

"Then Sakka, the deva-lord, together with eighty thousand devas, approached the venerable Mahāmoggallāna…pe… The venerable Mahāmoggallāna said this to Sakka, the deva-lord, who was standing to one side: 'Good indeed, deva-lord, is going for refuge to the Buddha. Because of going for refuge to the Buddha, deva-lord, some beings here, on the dissolution of the body, after death, are reborn in a happy destination, in the heavenly world. They surpass the other devas in ten respects: with divine lifespan, divine beauty, happiness, fame, sovereignty, divine forms, sounds, odors, tastes, and tactile objects'" (saṃ. ni. 4.341).

saraṇagamanaphalaṃveditabbaṃ.

saraṇagamanaphalaṃ should be understood.

saṃkilesocabhedoca veditabbo.

The saṃkileso (defilement) and bhedo (breakage) should be understood.

Upāsakaṃmaṃ bhavaṃ gotamo dhāretūti maṃ bhavaṃ gotamo ‘‘upāsako aya’’nti evaṃ dhāretu, jānātūti attho. Upāsakavidhikosallatthaṃ panettha ko upāsako, kasmā upāsakoti vuccati, kimassa sīlaṃ, ko ājīvo, kā vipatti, kā sampattīti idaṃ pakiṇṇakaṃ veditabbaṃ.

Upāsakaṃ maṃ bhavaṃ gotamo dhāretū means "May venerable Gotama regard me," that is, "May venerable Gotama know me as 'This one is an upāsaka.'" Herein, for the sake of skill in the procedure for an upāsaka, this miscellaneous matter should be understood: who is an upāsaka, why is he called an upāsaka, what is his morality, what is his livelihood, what is his failure, what is his success?

ko upāsakoti yo koci saraṇagato gahaṭṭho. Vuttañhetaṃ –

ko upāsakoti: Whoever is a householder who has gone for refuge. This was said:

‘‘Yato kho, mahānāma, upāsako buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gato hoti, dhammaṃ saraṇaṃ gato, saṅghaṃ saraṇaṃ gato hoti. Ettāvatā kho, mahānāma, upāsako hotī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1033).

"When, Mahānāma, an upāsaka has gone to the Buddha for refuge, has gone to the Dhamma for refuge, has gone to the Sangha for refuge, to this extent, Mahānāma, is one an upāsaka." (saṃ. ni. 5.1033).

Kasmāupāsakoti. Ratanattayassa upāsanato. So hi buddhaṃ upāsatīti upāsako. Dhammaṃ, saṅghaṃ upāsatīti upāsakoti.

Kasmā upāsakoti: Because of attending upon the Triple Gem. For he attends upon the Buddha, therefore he is an upāsaka. He attends upon the Dhamma, the Sangha, therefore he is an upāsaka.

Kimassa sīlanti. Pañca veramaṇiyo. Yathāha –

Kimassa sīlanti: The five abstinences. As he said:

‘‘Yato kho, mahānāma, upāsako pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti, adinnādānā, kāmesumicchācārā, musāvādā, surāmerayamajjappamādaṭṭhānā paṭivirato hoti. Ettāvatā kho, mahānāma, upāsako sīlavā hotī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1033).

"When, Mahānāma, an upāsaka abstains from taking life, abstains from taking what is not given, abstains from misconduct in sexual pleasures, abstains from false speech, abstains from liquor, wine, and intoxicants, which are the basis for negligence, to this extent, Mahānāma, is one virtuous." (saṃ. ni. 5.1033).

Ko ājīvoti. Pañca micchāvaṇijjā pahāya dhammena samena jīvikakappanaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ –

Ko ājīvoti: Abandoning the five wrong livelihoods and devising a livelihood righteously and fairly. This was said:

‘‘Pañcimā, bhikkhave, vaṇijjā upāsakena akaraṇīyā. Katamā pañca. Satthavaṇijjā, sattavaṇijjā, maṃsavaṇijjā, majjavaṇijjā, visavaṇijjā. Imā kho, bhikkhave, pañca vaṇijjā upāsakena akaraṇīyā’’ti (a. ni. 5.177).

"These five trades, monks, should not be engaged in by an upāsaka. Which five? Trade in weapons, trade in beings, trade in meat, trade in intoxicants, trade in poison. These five trades, monks, should not be engaged in by an upāsaka." (a. ni. 5.177).

Kā vipattīti. Yā tasseva sīlassa ca ājīvassa ca vipatti, ayamassa vipatti. Apica yāya esa caṇḍālo ceva hoti malañca patikuṭṭho ca, sāpi tassa vipattīti veditabbā. Te ca atthato assaddhiyādayo pañca dhammā honti. Yathāha –

Kā vipattīti: That which is the failure of that very morality and livelihood, this is his failure. Moreover, that by which one is a despised outcast, a stain, and a rejected one, that too should be understood as his failure. And those, in terms of meaning, are the five qualities beginning with faithlessness. As he said:

‘‘Pañcahi, bhikkhave, dhammehi samannāgato upāsako upāsakacaṇḍālo ca hoti upāsakamalañca upāsakapatikuṭṭho ca. Katamehi pañcahi? Assaddho hoti, dussīlo hoti, kotūhalamaṅgaliko hoti, maṅgalaṃ pacceti no kammaṃ, ito ca bahiddhā dakkhiṇeyyaṃ pariyesati, tattha ca pubbakāraṃ karotī’’ti (a. ni. 5.175).

"Endowed with five qualities, monks, an upāsaka is a despised outcast among upāsakas, a stain among upāsakas, a rejected one among upāsakas. Which five? He is faithless, he is immoral, he is one who delights in superstitious rituals, he trusts in rituals, not in kamma, and he seeks worthy recipients of offerings outside (the Sangha) and makes prior gifts to them." (a. ni. 5.175).

Kā sampattīti. Yā cassa sīlasampadā ca ājīvasampadā ca, sā sampatti. Ye cassa ratanabhāvādikarā saddhādayo pañca dhammā. Yathāha –

Kā sampattīti: That which is his accomplishment of morality and accomplishment of livelihood, that is success. And those five qualities, beginning with faith, which make one like a jewel and so on. As he said:

‘‘Pañcahi, bhikkhave, dhammehi samannāgato upāsako upāsakaratanañca hoti upāsakapadumañca upāsakapuṇḍarīkañca. Katamehi pañcahi? Saddho hoti, sīlavā hoti, na kotūhalamaṅgaliko hoti, kammaṃ pacceti no maṅgalaṃ, na ito bahiddhā dakkhiṇeyyaṃ gavesati, idha ca pubbakāraṃ karotī’’ti (a. ni. 5.175).

"Endowed with five qualities, monks, an upāsaka is a jewel among upāsakas, a lotus among upāsakas, a white lotus among upāsakas. Which five? He is faithful, he is virtuous, he is not one who delights in superstitious rituals, he trusts in kamma, not in rituals, and he does not seek worthy recipients of offerings outside (the Sangha), and he makes prior gifts here." (a. ni. 5.175).

Ajjataggeti ettha ayaṃaggasaddo ādikoṭikoṭṭhāsaseṭṭhesu dissati. ‘‘Ajjatagge samma, dovārika, āvarāmi dvāraṃ nigaṇṭhānaṃ nigaṇṭhīna’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.70) hi ādimhi dissati. ‘‘Teneva aṅgulaggena taṃ aṅgulaggaṃ parāmaseyya (kathā. 441). Ucchaggaṃ veḷagga’’ntiādīsu koṭiyaṃ. ‘‘Ambilaggaṃ vā madhuraggaṃ vā tittakaggaṃ vā (saṃ. ni. 5.374), anujānāmi, bhikkhave, vihāraggena vā pariveṇaggena vā bhājetu’’ntiādīsu (cūḷava. 318) koṭṭhāse. ‘‘Yāvatā, bhikkhave, sattā apadā vā…pe… tathāgato tesaṃ aggamakkhāyatī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 4.34) seṭṭhe. Idha panāyaṃ ādimhi daṭṭhabbo. Tasmā ajjataggeti ajjataṃ ādiṃ katvāti evamettha attho veditabbo.Ajjatanti ajjabhāvaṃ. Ajjadaggeti vā pāṭho, dakāro padasandhikaro, ajja aggaṃ katvāti attho.

Ajjataggeti: Here, this word agga is seen in the senses of beginning, end, portion, and best. For in "Beginning from today, good sir doorkeeper, I am closing the door to the Niganthas and Niganthis," and so on (ma. ni. 2.70), it is seen in the sense of beginning. In "With that very finger-joint, one should touch that finger-joint (kathā. 441). The tip of the sugarcane, the tip of the bamboo," and so on, in the sense of end. In "Sour tip, or sweet tip, or bitter tip (saṃ. ni. 5.374), I allow, monks, to divide by the edge of the monastery or the edge of the enclosure," and so on (cūḷava. 318), in the sense of portion. In "To whatever extent, monks, there are beings without feet…pe… the Tathāgata is declared to be the foremost among them" (a. ni. 4.34), in the sense of best. Here, however, it should be seen in the sense of beginning. Therefore, "ajjatagge" means "having made today the beginning," thus, the meaning should be understood here. Ajjatanti: the state of today. Or there is the reading "ajjadagge," the "da" being a euphonic consonant, meaning "today having made the beginning."

Pāṇupetanti pāṇehi upetaṃ, yāva me jīvitaṃ pavattati, tāva upetaṃ, anaññasatthukaṃ tīhi saraṇagamanehi saraṇaṃ gataṃ upāsakaṃ kappiyakārakaṃ maṃ bhavaṃ gotamo dhāretu jānātu. Ahañhi sacepi me tikhiṇena asinā sīsaṃ chindeyya, neva buddhaṃ ‘‘na buddho’’ti vā dhammaṃ ‘‘na dhammo’’ti vā saṅghaṃ ‘‘na saṅgho’’ti vā vadeyyanti evaṃ attasanniyyātanena saraṇaṃ gantvā catūhi ca paccayehi pavāretvā uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṃ abhivādetvā tikkhattuṃ padakkhiṇaṃ katvā pakkāmīti.

Pāṇupetanti: endowed with life, endowed as long as my life lasts, not having another teacher, gone for refuge with the three refuges, may venerable Gotama regard me, the upāsaka, the one who does what is allowable. For even if someone were to cut off my head with a sharp sword, I would never say that the Buddha is "not the Buddha," or the Dhamma is "not the Dhamma," or the Sangha is "not the Sangha," thus, having gone for refuge with self-surrender, and having invited (him) with the four requisites, and rising from his seat, and having paid homage to the Blessed One, and having circumambulated three times, he departed.

17.Sattamejāṇussoṇīti jāṇussoṇiṭhānantaraṃ kira nāmekaṃ ṭhānantaraṃ, taṃ yena kulena laddhaṃ, taṃ jāṇussoṇikulanti vuccati. Ayaṃ tasmiṃ kule jātattā rañño santike ca laddhajāṇussoṇisakkārattā jāṇussoṇīti vuccati.Tenupasaṅkamīti ‘‘samaṇo kira gotamo paṇḍito byatto bahussuto’’ti sutvā ‘‘sace so liṅgavibhattikārakādibhedaṃ jānissati, amhehi ñātameva jānissati, aññātaṃ kiṃ jānissati. Ñātameva kathessati, aññātaṃ kiṃ kathessatī’’ti cintetvā mānaddhajaṃ paggayha siṅgaṃ ukkhipitvā mahāparivārehi parivuto yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami.Katattā ca, brāhmaṇa, akatattā cāti satthā tassa vacanaṃ sutvā ‘‘ayaṃ brāhmaṇo idha āgacchanto na jānitukāmo atthagavesī hutvā āgato, mānaṃ pana paggayha siṅgaṃ ukkhipitvā āgato. Kiṃ nu khvassa yathā pañhassa atthaṃ jānāti, evaṃ kathite vaḍḍhi bhavissati, udāhu yathā na jānātī’’ti cintetvā ‘‘yathā na jānāti, evaṃ kathite vaḍḍhi bhavissatī’’ti ñatvā ‘‘katattā ca, brāhmaṇa, akatattā cā’’ti āha.

17. In the seventh (sutta), jāṇussoṇīti: it seems that jāṇussoṇī is the name of a certain position. The family that obtained that position is called the Jāṇussoṇī family. Because he was born in that family and because he had received the Jāṇussoṇī honor from the king, he is called Jāṇussoṇī. Tenupasaṅkamīti: Having heard that "The ascetic Gotama is wise, clever, and very learned," thinking, "If he knows the distinctions of genders, cases, agents, etc., he will only know what we already know; what unknown thing will he know? He will only speak of what is known; what unknown thing will he speak of?" and raising the banner of conceit, lifting up his horn, surrounded by a large retinue, he approached the Blessed One. Katattā ca, brāhmaṇa, akatattā cā: Hearing his statement, the Teacher, thinking, "This Brahmin, coming here, has come not wanting to know, as one seeking meaning, but has come raising the banner of conceit, lifting up his horn. Will there be growth for him if something is spoken in accordance with how he knows the meaning of the question, or will it be in accordance with how he does not know?" knowing that "There will be growth if something is spoken in accordance with how he does not know," he said, "From doing, Brahmin, and from not doing."

ko nu kho, bho gotamāti imaṃ dutiyapañhaṃ ārabhi.

ko nu kho, bho gotamāti: He began this second question.

na kho ahantiādimāha. Athassa nihatamānataṃ ñatvā satthā upari desanaṃ vaḍḍhentotena hi, brāhmaṇātiādimāha. Tatthatena hīti kāraṇaniddeso. Yasmā saṃkhittena bhāsitassa atthaṃ ajānanto vitthāradesanaṃ yācasi, tasmāti attho. Sesamettha uttānatthamevāti.

na kho ahantiādimāha: Then, knowing his subdued conceit, the Teacher, increasing the teaching further, said, tena hi, brāhmaṇātiādimāha. Therein, tena hīti: is an indication of the reason. Because you, not knowing the meaning of what was spoken concisely, ask for a detailed explanation, therefore (I will explain), is the meaning. The rest here is easily understood.

18.Aṭṭhameāyasmāti piyavacanametaṃ.Ānandoti tassa therassa nāmaṃ.Ekaṃsenāti ekantena.Anuviccāti anupavisitvā.Viññūti paṇḍitā.Garahantīti nindanti, avaṇṇaṃ bhāsanti. Sesamettha navame ca sabbaṃ uttānatthameva.

18.In the eighth (sutta), āyasmāti: This is a term of endearment. Ānandoti: (Ānanda) is the name of that Elder. Ekaṃsenā: resolutely. Anuviccā: having entered. Viññū: wise ones. Garahantī: criticize, speak disparagingly. The rest here, and all in the ninth (sutta), is easily understood.

20.Dasamedunnikkhittañca padabyañjananti uppaṭipāṭiyā gahitapāḷipadameva hi atthassa byañjanattā byañjananti vuccati. Ubhayametaṃ pāḷiyāva nāmaṃ.Attho ca dunnītoti parivattetvā uppaṭipāṭiyā gahitā aṭṭhakathā.Dunnikkhittassa, bhikkhave, padabyañjanassa atthopi dunnayo hotīti parivattetvā uppaṭipāṭiyā gahitāya pāḷiyā aṭṭhakathā nāma dunnayā dunnīhārā dukkathā nāma hoti. Ekādasame vuttapaṭipakkhanayena attho veditabboti.

20. In the tenth, "dunnikkhittañca padabyañjana": the very Pali words grasped in an inverted order are called byañjana, because they are expressive of the meaning. Both of these are names for the Pali itself. "Attho ca dunnīto": the commentary that is taken by inverting and reversing the order. "Dunnikkhittassa, bhikkhave, padabyañjanassa atthopi dunnayo hotī": the commentary on the Pali that is taken by inverting and reversing the order is difficult to understand, difficult to infer, and is poorly spoken. In the eleventh, the meaning should be understood in the manner opposite to what has been stated.

3. Bālavaggavaṇṇanā

3. Commentary on the Chapter of Fools

22.Tatiyassa paṭhameaccayaṃ accayato na passatīti ‘‘aparajjhitvā aparaddhaṃ mayā’’ti attano aparādhaṃ na passati, aparaddhaṃ mayāti vatvā daṇḍakammaṃ āharitvā na khamāpetīti attho.Accayaṃ desentassāti evaṃ vatvā daṇḍakammaṃ āharitvā khamāpentassa.Yathādhammaṃ nappaṭiggaṇhātīti ‘‘puna evaṃ na karissāmi, khamatha me’’ti vuccamāno accayaṃ imaṃ yathādhammaṃ yathāsabhāvaṃ na paṭiggaṇhāti. ‘‘Ito paṭṭhāya puna evarūpaṃ mā akāsi, khamāmi tuyha’’nti na vadati. Sukkapakkho vuttapaṭipakkhanayeneva veditabbo.

22. In the first of the third, "accayaṃ accayato na passatī": he does not see his own offense as an offense, thinking, "I have not transgressed," and having brought about a penalty, does not ask forgiveness. "Accayaṃ desentassā": one who, having said thus, brings about a penalty and asks for forgiveness. "Yathādhammaṃ nappaṭiggaṇhātī": being told, "I will not do so again, forgive me," he does not accept this offense in accordance with the Dhamma, in accordance with its nature. He does not say, "From now on, do not do such a thing again, I forgive you." The bright side should be understood in the manner opposite to what has been stated.

23.Dutiyeabbhācikkhantīti abhibhavitvā ācikkhanti, abhūtena vadanti.Dosantaroti antare patitadoso. Evarūpo hi ‘‘natthi samaṇassa gotamassa uttarimanussadhammo’’tiādīni vadanto sunakkhatto viya tathāgataṃ abbhācikkhati.Saddhovā duggahitenāti yo hi ñāṇavirahitāya saddhāya atisaddho hoti muddhappasanno, sopi ‘‘buddho nāma sabbalokuttaro, sabbe tassa kesādayo bāttiṃsa koṭṭhāsā lokuttarāyevā’’tiādinā nayena duggahitaṃ gaṇhitvā tathāgataṃ abbhācikkhati. Tatiyaṃ uttānatthamevāti.

23. In the second, "abbhācikkhantī": they speak by overpowering, they speak untruthfully. "Dosantaro": one whose fault falls in between. For one of this kind, while saying things like, "The Samaṇa Gotama does not have any superior human qualities," defames the Tathāgata, like Sunakkhatta. "Saddho vā duggahitenā": for one who is overly credulous with faith devoid of wisdom, one who is foolishly devoted, also defames the Tathāgata by grasping poorly in ways such as, "The Buddha is supramundane in every way; all thirty-two parts, beginning with his hair, are supramundane." The third is simply of obvious meaning.

25.Catuttheneyyatthaṃ suttantanti yassa attho netabbo, taṃ netabbatthaṃ suttantaṃ.Nītattho suttantoti dīpetīti kathitattho ayaṃ suttantoti vadati. Tattha ‘‘ekapuggalo, bhikkhave, dveme, bhikkhave, puggalā, tayome, bhikkhave, puggalā, cattārome, bhikkhave, puggalā’’ti evarūpo suttanto neyyattho nāma. Ettha hi kiñcāpi sammāsambuddhena ‘‘ekapuggalo, bhikkhave’’tiādi vuttaṃ, paramatthato pana puggalo nāma natthīti evamassa attho netabbova hoti. Ayaṃ pana attano bālatāya nītattho ayaṃ suttantoti dīpeti. Paramatthato hi puggale asati na tathāgato ‘‘ekapuggalo, bhikkhave’’tiādīni vadeyya. Yasmā pana tena vuttaṃ, tasmā paramatthato atthi puggaloti gaṇhanto taṃ neyyatthaṃ suttantaṃ nītattho suttantoti dīpeti.Nītatthanti aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattāti evaṃ kathitatthaṃ. Ettha hi aniccameva dukkhameva anattāyevāti attho. Ayaṃ pana attano bālatāya ‘‘neyyattho ayaṃ suttanto, atthamassa āharissāmī’’ti ‘‘niccaṃ nāma atthi, sukhaṃ nāma atthi, attā nāma atthī’’ti gaṇhanto nītatthaṃ suttantaṃ neyyattho suttantoti dīpeti nāma. Pañcamaṃ uttānatthamevāti.

25. In the fourth, "neyyatthaṃ suttanta": that suttanta whose meaning is to be inferred, that is, of inferable meaning. "Nītattho suttantoti dīpetī": he declares this suttanta to be of explicit meaning. Here, suttantas of the form, "There is one person, monks; there are two persons, monks; there are three persons, monks; there are four persons, monks," are called of inferable meaning. For even though the Fully Enlightened Buddha said, "There is one person, monks," in ultimate reality there is no such thing as a person; thus its meaning must be inferred. But this person, due to his own foolishness, declares this suttanta to be of explicit meaning. For in ultimate reality, since there is no person, the Tathāgata would not say things like, "There is one person, monks." But because it was said by him, this person, thinking that in ultimate reality there is a person, declares that suttanta of inferable meaning to be of explicit meaning. "Nītattha": of explicit meaning, such as, "impermanent, suffering, not-self." Here, the meaning is just impermanent, just suffering, just not-self. But this person, due to his own foolishness, thinking, "This suttanta is of inferable meaning, I will bring out its meaning," and grasping "there is permanence, there is happiness, there is self," declares that suttanta of explicit meaning to be of inferable meaning. The fifth is simply of obvious meaning.

27.Chaṭṭhepaṭicchannakammantassāti pāpakammassa. Pāpaṃ hi paṭicchādetvā karonti. No cepi paṭicchādetvā karonti, pāpakammaṃ paṭicchannamevāti vuccati.Nirayoti sahokāsakā khandhā. Tiracchānayoniyaṃ khandhāva labbhanti. Sattamaṭṭhamāni uttānatthāneva.

27. In the sixth, "paṭicchannakammantassā": of one whose actions are concealed, that is, of evil actions. For evil is done by concealing it. But even if they do not do it by concealing it, an evil action is said to be concealed. "Nirayo": hell; the aggregates together with space. In the animal realm, only aggregates are obtained. The seventh and eighth are of obvious meaning.

30.Navamepaṭiggāhāti paṭiggāhakā, dussīlaṃ puggalaṃ dve ṭhānāni paṭiggaṇhantīti attho.

30. In the ninth, "paṭiggāhā": receivers; they receive an immoral person in two ways.

31.Dasameatthavaseti kāraṇāni.Araññavanapatthānīti araññāni ca vanapatthāni ca. Tattha kiñcāpi abhidhamme nippariyāyena ‘‘nikkhamitvā bahi indakhīlā, sabbametaṃ arañña’’nti (vibha. 529) vuttaṃ, tathāpi yaṃ taṃ ‘‘pañcadhanusatikaṃ pacchima’’nti (pārā. 654) āraññakaṅganipphādakaṃ senāsanaṃ vuttaṃ, tadeva adhippetanti veditabbaṃ.Vanapatthanti gāmantaṃ atikkamitvā manussānaṃ anupacāraṭṭhānaṃ, yattha na kasīyati na vapīyati.Pantānīti pariyantāni atidūrāni,diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāranti lokiyalokuttaraṃ phāsuvihāraṃ.Pacchimañca janataṃ anukampamānoti pacchime mama sāvake anukampanto.

31. In the tenth, "atthavase": reasons. "Araññavanapatthānī": forests and woodland thickets. Although in the Abhidhamma it is said definitively, "having gone out beyond the city gate, all this is forest" (vibha. 529), it should be understood that the lodging that brings about the practice of the forest dweller is just that which is said to be "five-hundred bow lengths to the west" (pārā. 654). "Vanapattha": a woodland thicket; a place beyond the edge of the village, a place where people do not frequent, where there is no plowing or sowing. "Pantānī": remote places, very distant. "Diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāra": a pleasant dwelling in this very life, mundane and supramundane. "Pacchimañca janataṃ anukampamāno": and being compassionate to the later generation of my disciples.

32.Ekādasamevijjābhāgiyāti vijjākoṭṭhāsikā.Samathoti cittekaggatā.Vipassanāti saṅkhārapariggāhakañāṇaṃ.Kamatthamanubhotīti katamaṃ atthaṃ ārādheti sampādeti paripūreti.Cittaṃ bhāvīyatīti maggacittaṃ bhāvīyati brūhīyati vaḍḍhīyati.Yo rāgo, so pahīyatīti yo rajjanakavasena rāgo, so pahīyati. Rāgo hi maggacittassa paccanīko, maggacittaṃ rāgassa ca. Rāgakkhaṇe maggacittaṃ natthi, maggacittakkhaṇe rāgo natthi. Yadā pana rāgo uppajjati, tadā maggacittassa uppattiṃ nivāreti, padaṃ pacchindati. Yadā pana maggacittaṃ uppajjati, tadā rāgaṃ samūlakaṃ ubbaṭṭetvā samugghātentameva uppajjati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘rāgo pahīyatī’’ti.

32. In the eleventh, "vijjābhāgiyā": belonging to the sphere of knowledge. "Samatho": concentration of mind. "Vipassanā": the knowledge that discerns formations. "Kamatthamanubhotī": which meaning does he cultivate, accomplish, fulfill? "Cittaṃ bhāvīyatī": the path-consciousness is developed, increased, grown. "Yo rāgo, so pahīyatī": whatever rāga is there in the sense of attachment, that is abandoned. For rāga is an enemy of the path-consciousness, and the path-consciousness is an enemy of rāga. At the moment of rāga, there is no path-consciousness; at the moment of path-consciousness, there is no rāga. But when rāga arises, then it prevents the arising of the path-consciousness, it cuts off its opportunity. But when the path-consciousness arises, then it arises only by uprooting and eradicating rāga completely. Therefore it was said, "Rāga is abandoned."

Vipassanā, bhikkhave, bhāvitāti vipassanāñāṇaṃ brūhitaṃ vaḍḍhitaṃ.Paññā bhāvīyatīti maggapaññā bhāvīyati brūhīyati vaḍḍhīyati.Yā avijjā, sā pahīyatīti aṭṭhasu ṭhānesu vaṭṭamūlikā mahāavijjā pahīyati. Avijjā hi maggapaññāya paccanīkā, maggapaññā avijjāya. Avijjākkhaṇe maggapaññā natthi, maggapaññākkhaṇe avijjā natthi. Yadā pana avijjā uppajjati, tadā maggapaññāya uppattiṃ nivāreti, padaṃ pacchindati. Yadā maggapaññā uppajjati, tadā avijjaṃ samūlikaṃ ubbaṭṭetvā samugghātayamānāva uppajjati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘avijjā pahīyatī’’ti. Iti maggacittaṃ maggapaññāti dvepi sahajātadhammāva kathitā.

"Vipassanā, bhikkhave, bhāvitā": insight-knowledge is developed, increased, grown. "Paññā bhāvīyatī": path-wisdom is developed, increased, grown. "Yā avijjā, sā pahīyatī": whatever great avijjā, the root of the round of rebirths, is in the eight instances, that is abandoned. For avijjā is an enemy of path-wisdom, and path-wisdom is an enemy of avijjā. At the moment of avijjā, there is no path-wisdom; at the moment of path-wisdom, there is no avijjā. But when avijjā arises, then it prevents the arising of path-wisdom, it cuts off its opportunity. But when path-wisdom arises, then it arises only by uprooting and utterly destroying avijjā. Therefore it was said, "Avijjā is abandoned." Thus, both path-consciousness and path-wisdom, co-nascent phenomena, have been spoken of.

Rāgupakkiliṭṭhaṃ vā, bhikkhave, cittaṃ na vimuccatīti rāgena upakkiliṭṭhattā maggacittaṃ na vimuccatīti dasseti.Avijjupakkiliṭṭhā vā paññā na bhāvīyatīti avijjāya upakkiliṭṭhattā maggapaññā na bhāvīyatīti dasseti.Iti kho, bhikkhaveti evaṃ kho, bhikkhave.Rāgavirāgā cetovimuttīti rāgassa khayavirāgena cetovimutti nāma hoti. Phalasamādhissetaṃ nāmaṃ.Avijjāvirāgā paññāvimuttīti avijjāya khayavirāgena paññāvimutti nāma hoti. Imasmiṃ sutte nānākkhaṇikā samādhivipassanā kathitāti.

"Rāgupakkiliṭṭhaṃ vā, bhikkhave, cittaṃ na vimuccatī": monks, consciousness contaminated by rāga is not liberated, this he shows. "Avijjupakkiliṭṭhā vā paññā na bhāvīyatī": wisdom contaminated by avijjā is not developed, this he shows. "Iti kho, bhikkhave": thus indeed, monks. "Rāgavirāgā cetovimuttī": liberation of mind occurs through the fading away and cessation of rāga. This is a name for the fruit-attainment samādhi. "Avijjāvirāgā paññāvimuttī": liberation of wisdom occurs through the fading away and cessation of avijjā. In this sutta, samādhi and vipassanā occurring at different moments have been spoken of.

4. Samacittavaggavaṇṇanā

4. Commentary on the Chapter on Even-Mindedness

33.Catutthassa paṭhameasappurisabhūmīti asappurisānaṃ patiṭṭhānaṭṭhānaṃ.Sappurisabhūmiyampi eseva nayo.Akataññūti kataṃ na jānāti.Akatavedīti kataṃ pākaṭaṃ katvā na jānāti.Upaññātanti vaṇṇitaṃ thomitaṃ pasatthaṃ.Yadidanti yā ayaṃ.Akataññutā akataveditāti parena katassa upakārassa ajānanañceva pākaṭaṃ katvā ajānanañca.Kevalāti sakalā. Sukkapakkhepi vuttanayeneva attho veditabbo.

33. In the first of the fourth, "asappurisabhūmī": the standing place of unrighteous people. The same method applies to "sappurisabhūmiya" as well. "Akataññū": he does not know what has been done. "Akatavedī": having made it known, he does not know what has been done. "Upaññāta": praised, extolled, commended. "Yadida": that is. "Akataññutā akataveditā": not knowing the benefit done by another, and not knowing it even after it has been made known. "Kevalā": entire. In the bright side too, the meaning should be understood in the same way as stated.

34.Dutiyemātu ca pitu cāti janakamātu ca janakapitu ca.Ekena, bhikkhave, aṃsena mātaraṃ parihareyyāti ekasmiṃ aṃsakūṭe ṭhapetvā mātaraṃ paṭijaggeyya.Ekena aṃsena pitaraṃ parihareyyāti ekasmiṃ aṃsakūṭe ṭhapetvā pitaraṃ paṭijaggeyya.Vassasatāyuko vassasatajīvīti vassasatāyukakāle jāto sakalaṃ vassasataṃ jīvanto. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – sace putto nāma ‘‘mātāpitūnaṃ paṭikarissāmī’’ti uṭṭhāya samuṭṭhāya dakkhiṇe aṃsakūṭe mātaraṃ, vāme pitaraṃ ṭhapetvā vassasatāyuko sakalampi vassasataṃ jīvamāno parihareyya.So ca nesaṃ ucchādanaparimaddananhāpanasambāhanenāti so ca putto nesaṃ mātāpitūnaṃ aṃsakūṭesu ṭhitānaṃyeva duggandhapaṭivinodanatthaṃ sugandhakaraṇena ucchādanena, parissamavinodanatthaṃ hatthaparimaddanena, sītuṇhakāle ca uṇhodakasītodakanhāpanena, hatthapādādīnaṃ ākaḍḍhanaparikaḍḍhanasaṅkhātena sambāhanena upaṭṭhānaṃ kareyya.Te ca tatthevāti te ca mātāpitaro tattheva tassa aṃsakūṭesu nisinnāva muttakarīsaṃ cajeyyuṃ.Natveva,bhikkhaveti, bhikkhave, evampi natveva mātāpitūnaṃ kataṃ vā hoti paṭikataṃ vā.

34. In the second, "mātu ca pitu cā": of the mother who bore him, and of the father who bore him. "Ekena, bhikkhave, aṃsena mātaraṃ parihareyyā": placing his mother on one shoulder, he would care for her. "Ekena aṃsena pitaraṃ parihareyyā": placing his father on one shoulder, he would care for him. "Vassasatāyuko vassasatajīvī": born at a time of a hundred-year lifespan, living a full hundred years. This is what is said: if a son, thinking, "I will repay my mother and father," were to rise up and place his mother on his right shoulder and his father on his left shoulder, and, being of a hundred-year lifespan, were to care for them while living a full hundred years. "So ca nesaṃ ucchādanaparimaddananhāpanasambāhanenā": and that son would attend to those mothers and fathers of his, who are staying on his shoulders, by applying fragrant powder to remove their bad odor, by massaging with his hands to alleviate their weariness, by bathing them with hot or cold water according to whether it is a hot or cold season, and by massaging them with pulling and kneading of their hands, feet, and so on. "Te ca tatthevā": and those mothers and fathers would excrete urine and feces right there, while sitting on his shoulders. "Natveva, bhikkhave": monks, even so, it would not be done or repaid to the mothers and fathers.

Issarādhipacce rajjeti cakkavattirajjaṃ sandhāyevamāha.Āpādakāti vaḍḍhakā anupālakā. Puttā hi mātāpitūhi vaḍḍhitā ceva anupālitā ca.Posakāti hatthapāde vaḍḍhetvā hadayalohitaṃ pāyetvā posakā. Puttā hi mātāpitūhi puṭṭhā bhatā annapānādīhi paṭijaggitā.Imassa lokassa dassetāroti sace hi mātāpitaro jātadivaseyeva puttaṃ pāde gahetvā araññe vā nadiyaṃ vā papāte vā khipeyyuṃ, imasmiṃ loke iṭṭhāniṭṭhārammaṇaṃ na passeyya. Evaṃ akatvā āpāditattā positattā esa imasmiṃ loke iṭṭhāniṭṭhārammaṇaṃ mātāpitaro nissāya passatīti tyāssa imassa lokassa dassetāro nāma honti.Samādapetīti gaṇhāpeti. Imasmiṃ sutte saddhāsīlacāgapaññā lokiyalokuttaramissakā kathitā. Dhammasenāpatisāriputtattherasadisova bhikkhu tesu patiṭṭhāpeti nāmāti veditabbo.

"Issarādhipacce rajje": he speaks thus in reference to the universal monarch's reign. "Āpādakā": developers, maintainers. For children are developed and maintained by their mothers and fathers. "Posakā": nurturers, by developing their hands and feet and nourishing them with heart's blood. For children are nourished by their mothers and fathers, sustained and attended to with food, drink, and so on. "Imassa lokassa dassetāro": if the mothers and fathers were to take the child by the feet on the day of its birth and throw it into a forest or a river or a precipice, it would not see desirable or undesirable objects in this world. Not doing so, because they developed it and nurtured it, this one sees desirable and undesirable objects in this world relying on the mothers and fathers; thus they are called the "showers of this world." "Samādapetī": he induces, persuades. In this sutta, faith, moral conduct, generosity, and wisdom, mixed mundane and supramundane, have been spoken of. It should be understood that a bhikkhu like the Venerable Sāriputta, the General of the Dhamma, establishes them in those qualities.

35.Tatiyetenupasaṅkamīti so hi brāhmaṇo ‘‘samaṇo kira gotamo kathitaṃ vissajjeti, pucchāyassa virajjhanaṃ nāma natthi. Ahamassa virajjhanapañhaṃ abhisaṅkharissāmī’’ti paṇītabhojanaṃ bhuñjitvā gabbhadvāraṃ pidahitvā nisinno cintetuṃ ārabhi. Athassa etadahosi – ‘‘imasmiṃ ṭhāne uccāsaddamahāsaddo vattati, cittaṃ na ekaggaṃ hoti, bhūmigharaṃ kāressāmī’’ti bhūmigharaṃ kāretvā tattha pavisitvā – ‘‘evaṃ puṭṭho evaṃ kathessati, evaṃ puṭṭho evaṃ kathessatī’’ti ekaṃ gaṇhitvā ekaṃ vissajjento sakaladivasaṃ kiñci passituṃ nāsakkhi. Tassa imināva nīhārena cattāro māsā vītivattā. So catunnaṃ māsānaṃ accayena ubhatokoṭikaṃ pañhaṃ nāma addasa. Evaṃ kirassa ahosi – ‘‘ahaṃ samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ upasaṅkamitvā ‘kiṃvādī bhava’nti pucchissāmi. Sace ‘kiriyavādimhī’ti vakkhati, ‘sabbākusalānaṃ nāma tumhe kiriyaṃ vadethā’ti naṃ niggaṇhissāmi. Sace ‘akiriyavādimhī’ti vakkhati, ‘kusaladhammānaṃ nāma tumhe akiriyaṃ vadethā’ti naṃ niggaṇhissāmi. Idañhi ubhatokoṭikaṃ pañhaṃ puṭṭho neva uggilituṃ sakkhissati na niggilituṃ. Evaṃ mama jayo bhavissati, samaṇassa gotamassa parājayo’’ti uṭṭhāya apphoṭetvā bhūmigharā nikkhamma ‘‘evarūpaṃ pañhaṃ pucchantena na ekakena gantuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti nagare ghosanaṃ kāretvā sakalanāgarehi parivuto yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami.Kiṃvādīti kiṃladdhiko.Kimakkhāyīti kiṃ nāma sāvakānaṃ paṭipadaṃ akkhāyīti pucchi. Athassa bhagavā catūhi māsehi pañhaṃ abhisaṅkharitvā ‘‘diṭṭho me samaṇassa gotamassa parājayapañho’’ti mānaṃ paggayha āgatabhāvaṃ ñatvā ekapadeneva taṃ pañhaṃ bhindantokiriyavādī cāhaṃ, brāhmaṇātiādimāha. Atha brāhmaṇo attano mānaṃ apanetvā bhagavantaṃ āyācantoyathākathaṃ panātiādimāha. Sesamettha uttānatthamevāti.

35. In the third, "tenupasaṅkamī": that brahmin, thinking, "It is said that the Samaṇa Gotama evades what is said, there is no discomfiture for him in questioning. I will devise a discomfiting question for him," having eaten choice food, closed the door of his room, and began to think. Then this occurred to him: "In this place there is a loud noise, the mind is not concentrated; I will have an earthen house built." Having had an earthen house built, having entered there, and rejecting one thing and affirming another, thinking, "When asked thus, he will speak thus; when asked thus, he will speak thus," he was unable to see anything for the entire day. In this way, four months passed for him. At the end of four months, he saw a question with two horns. This is what occurred to him: "I will approach the Samaṇa Gotama and ask, 'What doctrine do you profess?' If he says, 'I am a proponent of action,' I will refute him, saying, 'Do you profess action for all unwholesome things?' If he says, 'I am a proponent of non-action,' I will refute him, saying, 'Do you profess non-action for wholesome things?' Being asked this question with two horns, he will neither be able to swallow it nor spit it out. Thus my victory will occur, and the Samaṇa Gotama's defeat." Having risen up, clapped his hands, and exited the earthen house, he made an announcement in the city, thinking, "One should not go alone when asking such a question," and surrounded by all the townspeople, he approached the Blessed One. "Kiṃvādī": professing what? "Kimakkhāyī": what conduct do you proclaim to your disciples? the brahmin asked. Then the Blessed One, knowing that he had come with pride, having devised a question for four months, thinking, "I have seen the Samaṇa Gotama's question of defeat," breaking that question with a single phrase, said, "kiriyavādī cāhaṃ, brāhmaṇā". Then the brahmin, having removed his pride, requesting the Blessed One, said, "yathākathaṃ panā". The remainder here is simply of obvious meaning.

36.Catutthedakkhiṇeyyāti dakkhiṇā vuccati dānaṃ, tassa paṭiggahaṇayuttā kati puggalāti pucchati.Sekhoti iminā satta sekkhe dasseti. Ettha ca sīlavantaputhujjanopi sotāpanneneva saṅgahito.Āhuneyyā yajamānānaṃ hontīti dānaṃ dadantānaṃ āhunassa arahā dānapaṭiggāhakā nāma hontīti attho.Khettanti vatthu patiṭṭhā, puññassa viruhanaṭṭhānanti attho.

36. In the fourth, "dakkhiṇeyyā": dakkhiṇā means a gift; he asks how many people are worthy of receiving it. "Sekho": with this he shows the seven trainees. And here, a virtuous worldling is included in the stream-enterer. "Āhuneyyā yajamānānaṃ hontī": they are indeed worthy of offerings, worthy of receiving gifts for those who are giving gifts, this is the meaning. "Khetta": a field, a foundation, a place for the growth of merit, this is the meaning.

37.Pañcamepubbārāmeti sāvatthito puratthimadisābhāge ārāme.Migāramātupāsādeti visākhāya upāsikāya pāsāde. Sā hi migāraseṭṭhinā mātuṭṭhāne ṭhapitattāpi, sabbajeṭṭhakassa puttassa ayyakaseṭṭhinova samānanāmakattāpi migāramātāti vuccati. Tāya kārito sahassagabbho pāsādo migāramātupāsādo nāma. Thero tasmiṃ viharati.Tatra kho āyasmā sāriputtoti tasmiṃ pāsāde viharanto dhammasenāpatisāriputtatthero.

37. In the fifth, "pubbārāme": in the monastery in the eastern direction from Sāvatthi. "Migāramātupāsāde": in the mansion of Visākhā the laywoman. She is called Migāramātā because she was established in the place of a mother by the merchant Migāra, and also because she had the same name as the chief merchant, the father of her eldest son, Ayyaka. The mansion of a thousand chambers built by her is called Migāramātupāsāda. The Elder was dwelling in that. "Tatra kho āyasmā sāriputto": there indeed, the Venerable Sāriputta, the General of the Dhamma, was dwelling in that mansion.

Bhikkhū āmantesīti kasmiṃ kāle āmantesi? Kānici hi suttāni purebhatte bhāsitāni atthi, kānici pacchābhatte, kānici purimayāme, kānici majjhimayāme, kānici pacchimayāme. Idaṃ pana samacittapaṭipadāsuttaṃ pacchābhatte bhāsitaṃ. Tasmā sāyanhasamaye āmantesi.

Bhikkhū āmantesīti: When did he address the bhikkhus? Some suttas were spoken in the forenoon, some in the afternoon, some in the first watch of the night, some in the middle watch, and some in the last watch. However, this Samacittapaṭipadā Sutta was spoken in the afternoon. Therefore, he addressed them in the evening.

Na kevalaṃ cetaṃ thereneva bhāsitaṃ, tathāgatenāpi bhāsitaṃ. Kattha nisīditvāti? Visākhāya ratanapāsāde nisīditvā. Tathāgato hi paṭhamabodhiyaṃ vīsati vassāni anibaddhavāso hutvā yattha yattha phāsukaṃ hoti, tattha tattheva gantvā vasi. Paṭhamaṃ antovassañhi isipatane dhammacakkaṃ pavattetvā aṭṭhārasa mahābrahmakoṭiyo amatapānaṃ pāyetvā bārāṇasiṃ upanissāya isipatane vasi. Dutiyaṃ antovassaṃ rājagahaṃ upanissāya veḷuvane, tatiyacatutthānipi tattheva, pañcamaṃ antovassaṃ vesāliṃ upanissāya mahāvane kūṭāgārasālāyaṃ, chaṭṭhaṃ antovassaṃ makulapabbate, sattamaṃ tāvatiṃsabhavane, aṭṭhamaṃ bhagge susumāragiraṃ nissāya bhesakaḷāvane, navamaṃ kosambiyaṃ, dasamaṃ pālileyyake vanasaṇḍe, ekādasamaṃ nālāyaṃ brāhmaṇagāme, dvādasamaṃ verañjāyaṃ, terasamaṃ cāliyapabbate, cuddasamaṃ jetavane, pañcadasamaṃ kapilavatthusmiṃ, soḷasamaṃ āḷavakaṃ dametvā caturāsītipāṇasahassāni amatapānaṃ pāyetvā āḷaviyaṃ, sattarasamaṃ rājagaheyeva, aṭṭhārasamaṃ cāliyapabbateyeva, tathā ekūnavīsatimaṃ, vīsatimaṃ pana antovassaṃ rājagahaṃyeva upanissāya vasi. Evaṃ vīsati vassāni anibaddhavāso hutvā yattha yattha phāsukaṃ hoti, tattha tattheva vasi.

This was not only spoken by the Elder, but also by the Tathāgata. Where did he sit? He sat in Visākhā's Ratanapāsāda (Jewel Palace). After attaining Enlightenment, the Tathāgata spent twenty years without a fixed abode, residing wherever it was convenient. In the first rainy season, after setting the Dhamma-cakka (Wheel of Dhamma) in motion at Isipatana and giving the drink of immortality to eighteen crore (ten million) Mahā Brahmas, he resided at Isipatana, depending on Bārāṇasī. In the second rainy season, he resided at Veḷuvana (Bamboo Grove), depending on Rājagaha; also in the third and fourth. In the fifth rainy season, he resided at Mahāvana in Vesālī, in the Kūṭāgārasālā (Gabled Pavilion); in the sixth rainy season at Makulapabbata (Makula Mountain); in the seventh in Tāvatiṃsa heaven; in the eighth at Bhesakaḷāvana in Bhagga, depending on Susumāragira; in the ninth in Kosambī; in the tenth in the vanasaṇḍa (grove) of Pālileyyaka; in the eleventh in the brāhmaṇa village of Nāḷā; in the twelfth in Verañjā; in the thirteenth on Cāliyapabbata (Cāliya Mountain); in the fourteenth in Jetavana; in the fifteenth in Kapilavatthu; in the sixteenth, after taming Āḷavaka and giving the drink of immortality to eighty-four thousand beings, in Āḷavī; in the seventeenth in Rājagaha itself; in the eighteenth on Cāliyapabbata; likewise in the nineteenth, and in the twentieth rainy season, he resided depending on Rājagaha. Thus, for twenty years he lived without a fixed abode, residing wherever it was convenient.

Tato paṭṭhāya pana dve senāsanāni dhuvaparibhogāni akāsi. Katarāni dve? Jetavanañca pubbārāmañca. Kasmā? Dvinnaṃ kulānaṃ guṇamahantatāya. Anāthapiṇḍikassa hi visākhāya ca guṇaṃ sandhāya guṇaṃ paṭicca satthā tāni senāsanāni dhuvaparibhogena paribhuñji. Utuvassaṃ cārikaṃ caritvāpi hi antovasse dvīsuyeva senāsanesu vasati. Evaṃ vasanto pana jetavane rattiṃ vasitvā punadivase bhikkhusaṅghaparivuto dakkhiṇadvārena sāvatthiṃ piṇḍāya pavisitvā pācīnadvārena nikkhamitvā pubbārāme divāvihāraṃ karoti. Pubbārāme rattiṃ vasitvā punadivase pācīnadvārena sāvatthiṃ piṇḍāya pavisitvā dakkhiṇadvārena nikkhamitvā jetavane divāvihāraṃ karoti. Tasmiṃ pana divase sammāsambuddho jetavaneyeva vasi. Yattha katthaci vasantassa cassa pañcavidhakiccaṃ avijahitameva hoti. Taṃ heṭṭhā vitthāritameva. Tesu kiccesu pacchimayāmakiccakāle bhagavā lokaṃ olokento sāvatthivāsīnañca samantā ca sāvatthiyā gāvutaaḍḍhayojanayojanaparame ṭhāne aparimāṇānaṃ sattānaṃ abhisamayabhāvaṃ addasa.

From then on, he made two residences places of constant use: Jetavana and Pubbārāma. Why? Because of the greatness of the qualities of two families. Considering and regarding the virtues of Anāthapiṇḍika and Visākhā, the Teacher used those residences for constant dwelling. Even after wandering on tour during the seasons, he would reside in only those two residences during the rainy season. While dwelling thus, after spending the night in Jetavana, on the following day, surrounded by the Sangha of bhikkhus, he would enter Sāvatthī through the southern gate for alms, then exit through the eastern gate and spend the day at Pubbārāma. After spending the night in Pubbārāma, on the following day, he would enter Sāvatthī through the eastern gate for alms, then exit through the southern gate and spend the day at Jetavana. On that particular day, the Sammāsambuddha stayed at Jetavana itself. Wherever he stayed, his fivefold duties were never neglected. That has already been extensively explained below. Among those duties, during the last watch of the night, as the Blessed One surveyed the world, he saw the potential for attainment of countless beings in Sāvatthī and in the area surrounding Sāvatthī within a distance of one and a half or two yojanas.

Tato ‘‘kasmiṃ nu kho kāle abhisamayo bhavissatī’’ti olokento ‘‘sāyanhasamaye’’ti disvā ‘‘mayi nu kho kathente abhisamayo bhavissati, sāvake kathente bhavissatī’’ti ‘‘sāriputtatthere kathente bhavissatī’’ti addasa. Tato ‘‘kattha nisīditvā kathente bhavissatī’’ti olokento ‘‘visākhāya ratanapāsāde nisīditvā’’ti disvā ‘‘buddhānaṃ nāma tayo sāvakasannipātā honti, aggasāvakānaṃ eko. Tesu ajja dhammasenāpatisāriputtattherassa sāvakasannipāto bhavissatī’’ti addasa. Disvā pātova sarīrapaṭijagganaṃ katvā nivatthanivāsano sugatacīvaraṃ pārupitvā selamayapattaṃ ādāya bhikkhusaṅghaparivuto dakkhiṇadvārena nagaraṃ pavisitvā piṇḍāya caranto bhikkhusaṅghassa sulabhapiṇḍapātaṃ katvā vātappahatā viya nāvā paṭinivattitvā dakkhiṇadvārena nikkhamitvā bahidvāre aṭṭhāsi. Tato asīti mahāsāvakā bhikkhuniparisā upāsakaparisā upāsikāparisāti catasso parisā satthāraṃ parivārayiṃsu.

Then, considering "At what time will the attainment occur?", seeing that it would be in the evening, he considered "Will the attainment occur while I am speaking, or while a disciple is speaking?", he saw that it would occur while Sāriputta Thera was speaking. Then, considering "Where will they be sitting when speaking?", seeing that it would be in Visākhā's Ratanapāsāda, he realized, "For Buddhas, there are three assemblies of disciples, and for chief disciples, there is one. Today, there will be an assembly of disciples for the Dhammasenāpati (General of the Dhamma) Sāriputta Thera." Having seen this, in the morning, after attending to his bodily needs, putting on his lower robe and draping his Sugata cloak, taking his bowl made of stone, surrounded by the Sangha of bhikkhus, he entered the city through the southern gate, and after providing easily obtainable alms to the Sangha of bhikkhus, like a ship driven back by the wind, he returned and stood outside the southern gate. Then the four assemblies – eighty great disciples, the bhikkhunī assembly, the upāsaka (male lay follower) assembly, and the upāsikā (female lay follower) assembly – surrounded the Teacher.

Satthā sāriputtattheraṃ āmantesi – ‘‘sāriputta, tayā pubbārāmaṃ gantuṃ vaṭṭati, tava ca parisaṃ gahetvā gacchāhī’’ti. ‘‘Sādhu, bhante’’ti thero attano parivārehi pañcahi bhikkhusatehi parivuto pubbārāmaṃ agamāsi. Eteneva niyāmena asīti mahāsāvake pubbārāmameva pesetvā sayaṃ ekena ānandatthereneva saddhiṃ jetavanaṃ agamāsi. Ānandattheropi vihāre satthu vattaṃ katvā vanditvā ‘‘pubbārāmaṃ gacchāmi, bhante’’ti āha. Evaṃ karohi ānandāti. Satthāraṃ vanditvā tattheva agamāsi. Satthā ekakova jetavane ohīno.

The Teacher addressed Sāriputta Thera: "Sāriputta, it is fitting for you to go to Pubbārāma, and go taking your retinue with you." "Sādhu, Bhante (Venerable Sir)," the Thera, surrounded by his retinue of five hundred bhikkhus, went to Pubbārāma. In the same manner, after sending the eighty great disciples to Pubbārāma, he himself went to Jetavana with only Ānanda Thera. Ānanda Thera too, after performing his duties to the Teacher in the monastery, and paying homage, said, "I am going to Pubbārāma, Bhante." "Do so, Ānanda." After paying homage to the Teacher, he went there. The Teacher remained alone in Jetavana.

Taṃ divasañhi catasso parisā therasseva dhammakathaṃ sotukāmā ahesuṃ. Kosalamahārājāpi balakāyena parivuto pubbārāmameva gato. Tathā pañcasataupāsakaparivāro anāthapiṇḍiko. Visākhā pana mahāupāsikā dvīhi jaṅghasahassehi parivuto agamāsi. Sattapaṇṇāsāya kulasatasahassānaṃ vasanaṭṭhāne sāvatthinagare gehapālakadārake ṭhapetvā sesajano gandhacuṇṇamālādīni gahetvā pubbārāmameva agamāsi. Catūsu dvāragāmesu gāvutaaḍḍhayojanayojanaparamaṭṭhāne sabbeyeva manussā gandhacuṇṇamālādihatthā pubbārāmameva agamaṃsu. Sakalavihāro missakapupphehi abhikiṇṇo viya ahosi.

On that day, the four assemblies desired to hear the Dhamma talk from the Thera himself. King Kosala also went to Pubbārāma, surrounded by his army. Likewise, Anāthapiṇḍika, with a retinue of five hundred upāsakas. Visākhā the great upāsikā, went surrounded by two thousand female attendants. In the city of Sāvatthī, the dwelling place of seven hundred and fifty million families, after stationing gatekeepers, children, and servants at home, the remaining people, taking perfumes, powders, garlands, and the like, went to Pubbārāma. In the four gate-villages, within a distance of one and a half or two yojanas, all the people, with perfumes, powders, garlands, and the like in their hands, went to Pubbārāma. The entire monastery seemed to be strewn with mixed flowers.

Dhammasenāpatisāriputtattheropi kho vihāraṃ gantvā vihārapariveṇe aṅgaṇaṭṭhāne aṭṭhāsi. Bhikkhū therassa āsanaṃ paññāpayiṃsu. Thero tattha nisīditvā upaṭṭhākattherena vatte kate bhikkhusaṅghassa ovādaṃ katvā gandhakuṭiṃ pavisitvā samāpattiṃ appetvā nisīdi. So paricchinnakālavasena samāpattito vuṭṭhāya aciravatiṃ gantvā rajojallaṃ pavāhetvā paṭippassaddhadaratho otiṇṇatittheneva uttaritvā nivatthanivāsano saṅghāṭiṃ pārupitvā aṭṭhāsi. Bhikkhusaṅghopi sammukhasammukhaṭṭhānena otaritvā sarīre rajojallaṃ pavāhetvā paccuttaritvā theraṃ parivārayiṃsu. Antovihārepi therassa dhammāsanaṃ paññāpayiṃsu. Catassopi parisā attano attano okāsaṃ ñatvā maggaṃ ṭhapetvā nisīdiṃsu. Sāriputtattheropi pañcabhikkhusataparivāro dhammasabhaṃ āgantvā sīhamatthakappatiṭṭhite samussitasetacchatte ratanapallaṅke cittabījaniṃ gahetvā puratthābhimukho nisīdi. Nisīditvā parisaṃ oloketvā – ‘‘mahatī vatāyaṃ parisā, imissā na appamattikā parittakadhammadesanā anucchavikā, kataradhammadesanā nu kho anucchavikā bhavissatī’’ti tīṇi piṭakāni āvajjamāno imaṃ saṃyojanapariyāya dhammadesanaṃ addasa.

The Dhammasenāpati Sāriputta Thera also, after going to the monastery, stood in the courtyard of the monastery. The bhikkhus prepared a seat for the Thera. The Thera, after sitting there and having the duties performed by the attendant Thera, giving advice to the Sangha of bhikkhus, entered the Gandhakuti (Fragrant Chamber), attained samāpatti (absorption), and sat down. He, after arising from samāpatti according to the allotted time, went to the Aciravatī River, washed off the dust and dirt, and having emerged like one refreshed and bathed at a landing place, putting on his lower robe and draping his Sangha robe, stood there. The Sangha of bhikkhus also, descending face to face, washed the dust and dirt from their bodies, re-emerged, and surrounded the Thera. Inside the monastery too, they prepared a Dhamma seat for the Thera. The four assemblies, knowing their respective places, sat down, leaving a path. Sāriputta Thera also, with a retinue of five hundred bhikkhus, came to the Dhamma assembly hall, and sat down facing east on a jeweled couch with a raised white parasol, resting on a lion-shaped support, taking a painted fan. Having sat down, surveying the assembly, he thought, "This assembly is indeed large; a small, limited Dhamma talk is not suitable for it. Which Dhamma talk will be suitable?" Considering the three piṭakas (baskets), he saw this Saṃyojanapariyāya Dhamma talk.

āvuso, bhikkhaveti. Āvusoti hi avatvā, bhikkhaveti vacanaṃ buddhālāpo nāma hoti, ayaṃ panāyasmā ‘‘dasabalena samānaṃ ālapanaṃ na karissāmī’’ti satthu gāravavasena sāvakālāpaṃ karonto, ‘‘āvuso bhikkhave’’ti āha.Etadavocāti etaṃ ‘‘ajjhattasaṃyojanañca, āvuso, puggalaṃ desessāmi bahiddhāsaṃyojanañcā’’ti dhammadesanāpadaṃ avoca.

āvuso, bhikkhave: For without saying "āvuso (friends)," the word "bhikkhave (bhikkhus)" would be a Buddha's address. But this venerable one, thinking "I will not make an address equal to that of the Ten-Powered One," out of respect for the Teacher, making a disciple's address, said, "āvuso bhikkhave." Etadavocā: He spoke this phrase of Dhamma teaching, "I will teach, friends, a person with internal Saṃyojana and external Saṃyojana."

Tasmiṃ pana ratanapāsāde adhivattho eko sotāpanno devaputto atthi, so buddhehi vā sāvakehi vā desanāya āraddhamattāyayeva jānāti – ‘‘ayaṃ desanā uttānikā bhavissati, ayaṃ gambhīrā. Ayaṃ jhānanissitā bhavissati, ayaṃ vipassanānissitā. Ayaṃ magganissitā ayaṃ phalanissitā, ayaṃ nibbānanissitā’’ti. So tasmimpi divase therena desanāya āraddhamattāya evaṃ aññāsi – ‘‘yena nīhārena mayhaṃ ayyena dhammasenāpatinā sāriputtattherena desanā āraddhā, ayaṃ desanā vipassanāgāḷhā bhavissati, chahi mukhehi vipassanaṃ kathessati. Desanāpariyosāne koṭisatasahassadevatā arahattaṃ pāpuṇissanti, sotāpannādīnaṃ pana devamanussānaṃ paricchedo na bhavissati. Desanāya anucchavikaṃ katvā mayhaṃ ayyassa sādhukāraṃ dassāmī’’ti devānubhāvena mahantaṃ saddaṃ katvā – ‘‘sādhu sādhu ayyā’’ti āha.

In that Ratanapāsāda, there was a Sotāpanna (stream-enterer) devaputta (divine being) residing, who knew as soon as a teaching was begun by the Buddhas or their disciples, "This teaching will be simple, this will be profound. This will be based on jhāna (absorption), this will be based on vipassanā (insight). This will be based on the path, this will be based on the fruit, this will be based on Nibbāna." He, on that day as soon as the Thera began the teaching, knew thus: "With the method by which my lord, the Dhammasenāpati Sāriputta Thera, has begun the teaching, this teaching will be deeply rooted in vipassanā; he will speak of vipassanā in six ways. At the end of the teaching, a hundred crore devatās (deities) will attain arahatship; however, there will be no limit to the devas and humans who attain Sotāpanna and the like. After making the teaching suitable, I will give a Sādhukāra (expression of approval) to my lord," and by the power of the devas, making a great sound, he said, "Sādhu, Sādhu, Lords."

Devarājena sādhukāre dinne parivārakapāsādasahasse adhivatthā devatā sabbāva sādhukāraṃ adaṃsu. Tāsaṃ sādhukārasaddena sabbā pubbārāme vasanadevatā, tāsaṃ saddena gāvutamatte devatā, tato aḍḍhayojane yojaneti etenupāyena ekacakkavāḷe, dvīsu cakkavāḷesu, tīsu cakkavāḷesūti dasasahassacakkavāḷesu devatā sādhukāramadaṃsu. Tāsaṃ sādhukārasaddena pathaviṭṭhakanāgā ca ākāsaṭṭhakadevatā ca. Tato abbhavalāhakā, uṇhavalāhakā, sītavalāhakā, vassavalāhakā, cātumahārājikā cattāro mahārājāno, tāvatiṃsā devatā, sakko devarājā, yāmā devatā, suyāmo devarājā, tusitā devatā, santusito devarājā, nimmānaratī devatā, sunimmito devarājā, vasavattī devatā, vasavattī devarājā, brahmapārisajjā, brahmapurohitā, mahābrahmāno, parittābhā, appamāṇābhā, ābhassarā, parittasubhā, appamāṇasubhā, subhakiṇhā, vehapphalā, avihā, atappā, sudassā, sudassī, akaniṭṭhā devatāti asaññe ca arūpāvacarasatte ca ṭhapetvā sotāyatanapavattiṭṭhāne sabbā devatā sādhukāramadaṃsu.

When the Devarāja (divine king) gave the Sādhukāra, all the devatās residing in a thousand surrounding palaces gave the Sādhukāra. By the sound of their Sādhukāra, all the devatās residing in Pubbārāma, and by their sound, the devatās within a gāvuta (distance), then half a yojana, a yojana – in this way, in one cakkavāḷa (world-system), in two cakkavāḷas, in three cakkavāḷas – in ten thousand cakkavāḷas, the devatās gave the Sādhukāra. By the sound of their Sādhukāra, the Nāgas (serpent beings) dwelling on the earth and the devatās dwelling in the sky, then the cloud-carriers, the hot cloud-carriers, the cold cloud-carriers, the rain cloud-carriers, the four great kings of the Cātumahārājika heaven, the devatās of Tāvatiṃsa heaven, Sakka the Devarāja, the devatās of Yāma heaven, Suyāma the Devarāja, the devatās of Tusita heaven, Santusita the Devarāja, the devatās of Nimmānaratī heaven, Sunimmita the Devarāja, the devatās of Vasavattī heaven, Vasavattī the Devarāja, the Brahmapārisajjā, the Brahmapurohitā, the Mahābrahmāno, the Parittābhā, the Appamāṇābhā, the Ābhassarā, the Parittasubhā, the Appamāṇasubhā, the Subhakiṇhā, the Vehapphalā, the Avihā, the Atappā, the Sudassā, the Sudassī, the Akaniṭṭhā devatās – excluding the Asañña and the arūpāvacara beings, all the devatās in the place where the stream of hearing operates gave the Sādhukāra.

Tato khīṇāsavamahābrahmāno – ‘‘mahā vatāyaṃ sādhukārasaddo, pathavitalato paṭṭhāya yāva akaniṭṭhalokaṃ āgato, kimatthaṃ nu kho eso’’ti āvajjento ‘‘dhammasenāpatisāriputtatthero pubbārāme visākhāya ratanapāsāde nisīditvā saṃyojanapariyāyadhammadesanamārabhi, amhehipi tattha kāyasakkhīhi bhavituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti cintetvā tattha agamaṃsu. Pubbārāmo devatāhi paripuṇṇo, samantā pubbārāmassa gāvutaṃ aḍḍhayojanaṃ, yojananti sakalacakkavāḷaṃ heṭṭhā pathavitalena tiriyaṃ cakkavāḷapariyantena paricchinnaṃ dasahi cakkavāḷasahassehi sannipatitāhi devatāhi nirantaramahosi, āragganitudanamatte ṭhāne uparimakoṭiyā saṭṭhi devatā sukhumattabhāve māpetvā aṭṭhaṃsu.

Then the Khīṇāsava (one with taints destroyed) Mahābrahmās, considering "This Sādhukāra sound is indeed great, it has come from the surface of the earth up to the Akaniṭṭha world, what is it for?", realized, "The Dhammasenāpati Sāriputta Thera, sitting in Visākhā's Ratanapāsāda in Pubbārāma, has begun the Saṃyojanapariyāya Dhamma teaching; it is fitting for us to be bodily witnesses there," and thinking thus, they went there. Pubbārāma was filled with devatās; a gāvuta, half a yojana, a yojana around Pubbārāma – the entire cakkavāḷa, bounded below by the surface of the earth and horizontally by the edge of the cakkavāḷa, was uninterruptedly crowded with devatās assembled from ten thousand cakkavāḷas; in a place only the size of the tip of a needle, sixty devatās stood on the upper edge, having created subtle forms.

Athāyasmā sāriputto ‘‘mahantaṃ vatidaṃ halāhalaṃ, kiṃ nu kho eta’’nti āvajjento dasasahassacakkavāḷe ṭhitānaṃ devatānaṃ ekacakkavāḷe sannipatitabhāvaṃ addasa. Atha yasmā buddhānaṃ adhiṭṭhānakiccaṃ natthi, parisaparimāṇeneva passanti ceva saddañca sāventi. Sāvakānaṃ pana adhiṭṭhānaṃ vaṭṭati. Tasmā thero samāpattiṃ samāpajjitvā samāpattito vuṭṭhāya mahaggatacittena adhiṭṭhāsi – ‘‘cakkavāḷapariyantā parisā sabbāpi maṃ passatu, dhammañca me desentassa saddaṃ suṇātū’’ti. Adhiṭṭhitakālato paṭṭhāya dakkhiṇajāṇupasse ca cakkavāḷamukhavaṭṭiyañca nisīditvā ‘‘dhammasenāpatisāriputtatthero nāma kīdiso dīgho rasso sāmo odāto’’ti vattabbakāraṇaṃ nāhosi, sabbesampi sabbadisāsu nisinnānaṃ abhimukheyeva paññāyittha, nabhamajjhe ṭhitacando viya ahosi. Dhammaṃ desentassāpissa dakkhiṇajāṇupasse ca cakkavāḷamukhavaṭṭiyañca nisinnā sabbe ekakaṃseneva saddaṃ suṇiṃsu.

Then Āyasmā (Venerable) Sāriputta, considering "This commotion is indeed great, what is it?", saw the devatās from ten thousand cakkavāḷas assembled in one cakkavāḷa. Now, for Buddhas, there is no need for an act of determination; they see and hear the sound simply by the measure of the assembly. But for disciples, an act of determination is necessary. Therefore, the Thera, after attaining samāpatti, arising from samāpatti, with a great expansive mind, made a determination: "May this entire assembly up to the edge of the cakkavāḷa see me, and hear the sound of me teaching the Dhamma." From the time of the determination, those sitting near his right knee and on the edge of the cakkavāḷa, there was no reason to say "What is Dhammasenāpati Sāriputta Thera like, is he tall, short, dark, or fair?"; he appeared facing everyone sitting in all directions, like the moon in the middle of the sky. And all those sitting near his right knee and on the edge of the cakkavāḷa heard the sound of him teaching the Dhamma as if it were in one conch shell.

ajjhattasaṃyojanañca, āvusoti imaṃ dhammadesanaṃ ārabhi. Tatthaajjhattanti kāmabhavo.Bahiddhāti rūpārūpabhavo. Kiñcāpi hi sattā kāmabhave appaṃ kālaṃ vasanti kappassa catutthameva koṭṭhāsaṃ, itaresu tīsu koṭṭhāsesu kāmabhavo suñño hoti tuccho, rūpabhave bahuṃ kālaṃ vasanti, tathāpi tesaṃ yasmā kāmabhave cutipaṭisandhiyo bahukā honti, appakā rūpārūpabhavesu. Yattha ca cutipaṭisandhiyo bahukā, tattha ālayopi patthanāpi abhilāsopi bahu hoti. Yattha appā, tattha appo. Tasmā kāmabhavo ajjhattaṃ nāma jātaṃ, rūpārūpabhavā bahiddhā nāma. Iti ajjhattasaṅkhāte kāmabhave chandarāgoajjhattasaṃyojanaṃnāma, bahiddhāsaṅkhātesu rūpārūpabhavesu chandarāgobahiddhāsaṃyojanaṃnāma. Orambhāgiyāni vā pañca saṃyojanāni ajjhattasaṃyojanaṃ nāma, uddhambhāgiyāni pañca bahiddhāsaṃyojanaṃ nāma. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – oraṃ vuccati kāmadhātu, tattha upapattinipphādanato taṃ oraṃ bhajantīti orambhāgiyāni. Uddhaṃ vuccati rūpārūpadhātu, tattha upapattinipphādanato taṃ uddhaṃ bhajantīti uddhambhāgiyāni.

ajjhattasaṃyojanañca, āvuso: He began this Dhamma teaching. Therein, ajjhattaṃ means the Kāma-bhava (sensual existence). Bahiddhā means the Rūpa- and Arūpa-bhava (form and formless existences). Although beings live in the Kāma-bhava for only a short time, only a fourth part of a kappa (aeon), while the Kāma-bhava is empty and void in the other three parts, they live in the Rūpa-bhava for a long time, nevertheless, because their dying and rebirth are frequent in the Kāma-bhava, and infrequent in the Rūpa- and Arūpa-bhava. And where dying and rebirth are frequent, there desire, longing, and craving are also great. Where they are infrequent, there they are infrequent. Therefore, the Kāma-bhava is known as ajjhattaṃ, the Rūpa- and Arūpa-bhava are known as bahiddhā. Thus, in the Kāma-bhava, which is designated as ajjhattaṃ, desire and lust are called ajjhattasaṃyojanaṃ, and in the Rūpa- and Arūpa-bhava, which are designated as bahiddhā, desire and lust are called bahiddhāsaṃyojanaṃ. Or, the five orambhāgiya saṃyojanas (lower fetters) are called ajjhattasaṃyojanaṃ, and the five uddhambhāgiya saṃyojanas (higher fetters) are called bahiddhāsaṃyojanaṃ. Here, this is the meaning of the words: oraṃ means the Kāma-dhātu (sensual realm); because they produce rebirth there, those who cling to that oraṃ are called orambhāgiyāni. Uddhaṃ means the Rūpa- and Arūpa-dhātu (form and formless realms); because they produce rebirth there, those who cling to that uddhaṃ are called uddhambhāgiyāni.

ajjhattasaṃyojano,bahiddhāsaṃyojanena saṃyutto puggalobahiddhāsaṃyojano. Ubhayampi cetaṃ na lokiyassa vaṭṭanissitamahājanassa nāmaṃ. Yesaṃ pana bhavo dvedhā paricchinno, tesaṃ sotāpannasakadāgāmianāgāmīnaṃ ariyasāvakānaṃ etaṃ nāmaṃ. Yathā hi mahāaraññe khadiravanasālavanādīni thambho tulāsaṅghāṭoti nāmaṃ na labhanti, khadiravanaṃ sālavananti nāmameva labhanti. Yadā pana tato rukkhā tiṇhāya kuṭhāriyā chinditvā thambhādisaṇṭhānena tacchitā honti, tadā thambho tulāsaṅghāṭoti nāmaṃ labhanti. Evamevaṃ aparicchinnabhavo bahalakileso puthujjano etaṃ nāmaṃ na labhati, bhavaṃ paricchinditvā kilese tanuke katvā ṭhitā sotāpannādayova labhanti.

Ajjhattasaṃyojano: a person bound by internal bonds. Bahiddhāsaṃyojano: a person bound by external bonds. Both of these are names for noble disciples, such as stream-enterers, once-returners, and non-returners, whose existence (bhava) is clearly defined in two ways, not for ordinary people caught in the cycle of existence. Just as in a large forest, woods of khadira, sāla, etc., do not get the name of 'pillar, beam, or rafter,' but only the name of 'khadira wood' or 'sāla wood,' but when trees from there are cut with a sharp axe and fashioned into the shape of pillars, etc., then they get the name of 'pillar, beam, or rafter,' so too, an ordinary person whose existence is undefined and whose defilements are thick does not get this name, but only stream-enterers, etc., who have defined existence and thinned down the defilements, get it.

vacchakasālopamaṃveditabbaṃ. Vacchakasālaṃ hi katvā anto khāṇuke koṭṭetvā vacchake yottehi bandhitvā tesu upanibandhanti, yottesu appahontesu kaṇṇesupi gahetvā tattha vacchake pavesenti, antosālāya okāse appahonte bahi khāṇuke koṭṭetvāpi evameva karonti. Tattha koci antobaddho vacchako bahinipanno hoti, koci bahibaddho antonipanno, koci antobaddho antova nipanno, koci bahibaddho bahiyeva nipanno. Koci antopi abaddhova carati, bahipi abaddhova. Tattha antobaddhassa bahinipannassa bandhanaṃ dīghaṃ hoti. So hi uṇhādipīḷito nikkhamitvā bahi vacchakānaṃ abbhantare nipajjati. Bahibaddhe antonipannepi eseva nayo. Yo pana antobaddho antonipanno, tassa bandhanaṃ rassaṃ hoti. Bahibaddhe bahinipannepi eseva nayo. Ubhopi hi te divasampi khāṇukaṃ anuparigantvā tattheva sayanti. Yo pana anto abaddho tattheva vacchakānaṃ antare vicarati. Ayaṃ sīlavā vacchako kaṇṇe gahetvā vacchakānaṃ antare vissaṭṭho divasampi aññattha agantvā tattheva carati. Bahi abaddhe tattheva vicarantepi eseva nayo.

Vacchakasālopamaṃ veditabbo: It should be understood as similar to a calf pen (vacchakasāla). Having made a calf pen, they drive posts into the ground inside, bind the pen with ropes, and tie the calves to them. If the ropes are not enough, they also take the calves by the ears and put them in the pen. When there is not enough space inside the pen, they also drive posts outside and do the same. There, some calves, though tied inside, lie down outside; some, though tied outside, lie down inside; some, though tied inside, lie down inside; some, though tied outside, lie down outside; some wander inside without being tied at all, and some wander outside without being tied. Among them, the tether of the calf tied inside but lying outside is long. Afflicted by heat, etc., it goes out and lies down among the other calves outside. The same method applies to the calf tied outside but lying inside. But the tether of the calf tied inside and lying inside is short. The same method applies to the calf tied outside and lying outside. Both of them, having roamed around the post all day, lie down right there. But the one untied inside wanders within the pen. This well-behaved calf, released by the ears within the pen, wanders there all day without going elsewhere. The same method applies to the one untied outside, even when wandering there.

Tattha vacchakasālā viya tayo bhavā veditabbā. Vacchakasālāyaṃ khāṇukā viya avijjākhāṇuko. Vacchakabandhanayottaṃ viya dasa saṃyojanāni. Vacchakā viya tīsu bhavesu nibbattasattā. Antobaddho bahisayitavacchako viya rūpārūpabhavesu sotāpannasakadāgāmino. Te hi kiñcāpi tattheva vasanti, saṃyojanaṃ pana tesaṃ kāmāvacarūpanibaddhameva. Kenaṭṭhena? Appahīnaṭṭhena. Rūpārūpabhavesu puthujjanopi eteheva saṅgahito. Sopi hi kiñcāpi tattha vasati, saṃyojanaṃ panassa kāmāvacarūpanibaddhameva. Bahibaddho antosayitavacchako viya kāmāvacare anāgāmī. So hi kiñcāpi kāmāvacare vasati, saṃyojanaṃ panassa rūpārūpabhavūpanibaddhameva. Antobaddho antonipanno viya kāmāvacare sotāpannasakadāgāmino. Te hi sayampi kāmāvacare vasanti, saṃyojanampi tesaṃ kāmāvacarūpanibaddhameva. Bahibaddho bahinipanno viya rūpārūpabhavesu anāgāmī. So hi sayampi tattha vasati, saṃyojanampissa rūpārūpabhavūpanibaddhameva. Antoabaddho antovicaraṇavacchako viya kāmāvacare khīṇāsavo. Bahiabaddho bahivicaraṇavacchako viya rūpārūpabhave khīṇāsavo. Saṃyojanesu pana sakkāyadiṭṭhi vicikicchā sīlabbataparāmāsoti imāni tīṇi gacchantaṃ nivārenti, gataṃ paṭiānenti. Kāmacchando byāpādoti imāni pana dve saṃyojanāni samāpattiyā vā avikkhambhetvā maggena vā asamucchinditvā rūpārūpabhave nibbattituṃ na sakkoti.

There, the three existences (bhava) should be understood as like the calf pen. The post in the calf pen is like the post of ignorance (avijjākhāṇuko). The rope for tying the calves is like the ten fetters (saṃyojanāni). The calves are like beings reborn in the three existences. Like a calf tied inside but lying outside are stream-enterers and once-returners in the realms of form and formlessness. Although they live there, their fetters are only attached to the realm of sense-desire. In what sense? In the sense of not having abandoned them. Even ordinary people in the realms of form and formlessness are included by these. Although they live there, their fetters are only attached to the realm of sense-desire. Like a calf tied outside but lying inside is a non-returner in the realm of sense-desire. Although he lives in the realm of sense-desire, his fetters are attached only to the realms of form and formlessness. Like a calf tied inside and lying inside are stream-enterers and once-returners in the realm of sense-desire. They themselves live in the realm of sense-desire, and their fetters are attached only to the realm of sense-desire. Like a calf tied outside and lying outside is a non-returner in the realms of form and formlessness. He himself lives there, and his fetters are attached only to the realms of form and formlessness. Like a calf untied inside and wandering inside is an arahant in the realm of sense-desire. Like a calf untied outside and wandering outside is an arahant in the realms of form and formlessness. Among the fetters, these three—self-illusion (sakkāyadiṭṭhi), doubt (vicikicchā), and attachment to rites and rituals (sīlabbataparāmāsa)—prevent one from going and turn one back. But these two fetters—sensual desire (kāmacchando) and ill-will (byāpādo)—cannot lead to rebirth in the realms of form and formlessness without being suppressed by attainment (samāpatti) or cut off by the path (magga).

Katamo cāvusoti idaṃ thero yathā nāma puriso dve ratanapeḷā passe ṭhapetvā sampattaparisāya dve hatthe pūretvā sattavidhaṃ ratanaṃ bhājetvā dadeyya, evaṃ paṭhamaṃ ratanapeḷaṃ datvā dutiyampi tatheva dadeyya. Evamevaṃ ‘‘ajjhattasaṃyojanañca, āvuso, puggalaṃ desessāmi bahiddhāsaṃyojanañcā’’ti imāni dve padāni mātikāvasena ṭhapetvā idāni aṭṭhavidhāya parisāya bhājetvā dassetuṃ vitthārakathaṃ ārabhi.

Katamo cāvuso: The Elder, as if a man, keeping two jewel boxes by his side, would fill both hands and distribute the seven kinds of jewels to the assembled crowd, in the same way, having first placed one jewel box and then given the second in the same way, having established these two terms "I will teach, friend, a person with internal bonds and with external bonds" in the manner of a matrix, now began to expand the teaching in order to distribute and show it to the eight kinds of assemblies.

idhāti imasmiṃ sāsane.Sīlavāhotīti catupārisuddhisīlehi sīlasampanno hoti. Iti thero ettāvatā ca kira catupārisuddhisīlaṃ uddisitvā ‘‘pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvuto’’ti iminā tattha jeṭṭhakasīlaṃ vitthāretvā dassesīti dīpavihāravāsī summatthero āha. Antevāsiko panassa tipiṭakacūḷanāgatthero āha – ‘‘ubhayatthāpi pātimokkhasaṃvarova vutto. Pātimokkhasaṃvaroyeva hi sīlaṃ, itarāni pana tīṇi sīlanti vuttaṭṭhānaṃ nāma atthī’’ti ananujānanto uttari āha – indriyasaṃvaro nāma chadvārarakkhāmattakameva, ājīvapārisuddhi dhammena samena paccayuppattimattakaṃ, paccayasannissitaṃ paṭiladdhapaccaye ‘‘idamattha’’nti paccavekkhitvā paribhuñjanamattakaṃ, nippariyāyena pana pātimokkhasaṃvarova sīlaṃ. Yassa so bhinno, ayaṃ chinnasīso viya puriso hatthapāde sesāni rakkhissatīti na vattabbo. Yassa pana so arogo, ayaṃ acchinnasīso viya puriso jīvitaṃ sesāni puna pākatikāni katvā rakkhituṃ sakkoti. Tasmā sīlavāti iminā pātimokkhasaṃvaraṃ uddisitvā taṃ vitthārento ‘‘pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvuto’’tiādimāhāti.

Idhā: In this Dispensation. Sīlavā hotī: He is accomplished in virtue (sīla), with the fourfold purity of virtue. It seems that up to this point, the Elder, having mentioned the fourfold purity of virtue, expanded and showed the foremost virtue there with this, "restrained by the restraint of the Pātimokkha," said the Elder Summa, a resident of Dīpavihāra. But his pupil, the Elder Tipiṭaka Cūḷanāga, said, "The restraint of the Pātimokkha is mentioned in both places. For the restraint of the Pātimokkha is virtue, but there is no place where the other three are called virtue," not agreeing, he said further: "Restraint of the senses (indriyasaṃvaro) is merely guarding the six doors; purity of livelihood (ājīvapārisuddhi) is merely obtaining requisites in accordance with the Dhamma fairly; dependence on requisites (paccayasannissita) is merely reflecting after receiving requisites, 'for this purpose,' and using them; without circumlocution, the restraint of the Pātimokkha is virtue. He whose Pātimokkha is broken should not be told that he is like a man with a severed head, who will protect his hands, feet, and the rest. But he whose Pātimokkha is healthy is like a man with an unsevered head, who can restore his life and the rest to their natural state and protect them. Therefore, having mentioned the Pātimokkha with 'virtuous,' expanding it, he said, 'restrained by the restraint of the Pātimokkha,' etc."

pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvutoti pātimokkhasaṃvarena samannāgato.Ācāragocarasampannoti ācārena ca gocarena ca sampanno.Aṇumattesūti appamattakesu.Vajjesūti akusaladhammesu.Bhayadassāvīti bhayadassī.Samādāyāti sammā ādiyitvā.Sikkhati sikkhāpadesūti taṃ taṃ sikkhāpadaṃ samādiyitvā sikkhati. Apicasamādāya sikkhati sikkhāpadesūti yaṃkiñci sikkhāpadesu sikkhākoṭṭhāsesu sikkhitabbaṃ kāyikaṃ vā vācasikaṃ vā, taṃ sabbaṃ sammā ādāya sikkhati. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthārato pana sabbānetāni pātimokkhasaṃvarādīni padāni visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.14 ādayo) vuttāni, catupārisuddhisīlañca sabbākārena vibhajitvā dassitaṃ.Aññataraṃ devanikāyanti chasu kāmāvacaradevaghaṭāsu aññataraṃ devaghaṭaṃ.Āgāmī hotīti heṭṭhā āgāmī hoti.Āgantā itthattanti itthattaṃ mānusakapañcakkhandhabhāvameva āgantā hoti. Tatrūpapattiko vā uparūpapattiko vā na hoti, puna heṭṭhāgāmīyeva hotīti dasseti. Iminā aṅgena sukkhavipassakassa dhātukammaṭṭhānikabhikkhuno heṭṭhimaṃ maggadvayañceva phaladvayañca kathitaṃ.

Pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvuto: Endowed with the restraint of the Pātimokkha. Ācāragocarasampanno: Endowed with conduct (ācāra) and resort (gocara). Aṇumattesu: In trifling. Vajjesu: In unskillful things. Bhayadassāvī: Seeing danger. Samādāya: Properly undertaking. Sikkhati sikkhāpadesū: Having undertaken that particular training rule, he trains. Moreover, samādāya sikkhati sikkhāpadesū: Whatever is to be trained in the training rules, in the categories of training, whether bodily or verbal, all that, having properly undertaken, he trains. This is the summary here, but in detail, all these terms, beginning with the restraint of the Pātimokkha, are mentioned in the Visuddhimagga (Visuddhi. 1.14 ff.), and the fourfold purity of virtue is shown divided in every way. Aññataraṃ devanikāyaṃ: To one of the deva groups in the six realms of sense-desire. Āgāmī hotī: He is one who returns below. Āgantā itthattaṃ: He is one who comes to this state, to the five-aggregate existence of human beings. He is not one who is reborn there or reborn above, but he is indeed one who returns below, he shows. With this factor, the two lower paths and the two fruits of a dry-insight meditator (sukkhavipassaka) and a monk who takes the elements as his meditation subject (dhātukammaṭṭhānikabhikkhu) are spoken of.

Aññataraṃ santaṃ cetovimuttinti aṭṭhasu samāpattīsu aññataraṃ catutthajjhānasamāpattiṃ. Sā hi paccanīkakilesānaṃ santattā santā, teheva ca kilesehi cetaso vimuttattā cetovimuttīti vuccati.Aññataraṃ devanikāyanti pañcasu suddhāvāsadevanikāyesu aññataraṃ.Anāgantā itthattanti puna imaṃ pañcakkhandhabhāvaṃ anāgantā, heṭṭhūpapattiko na hoti, uparūpapattiko vā hoti tattheva vā parinibbāyīti dasseti. Iminā aṅgena samādhikammikassa bhikkhuno tayo maggā tīṇi ca phalāni kathitāni.

Aññataraṃ santaṃ cetovimuttiṃ: One of the eight attainments, the fourth jhāna attainment. For it is called peaceful (santā) because it calms the opposing defilements, and because of the mind's liberation from those same defilements, it is called liberation of mind (cetovimutti). Aññataraṃ devanikāyaṃ: One of the five Pure Abodes (suddhāvāsadevanikāyesu). Anāgantā itthattaṃ: He is one who does not come again to this five-aggregate existence; he is not one who is reborn below, but he is one who is reborn above, or he is one who is extinguished there, he shows. With this factor, the three paths and three fruits of a monk who is skilled in samādhi are spoken of.

Kāmānaṃyeva nibbidāyāti duvidhānampi kāmānaṃ nibbindanatthāya ukkaṇṭhanatthāya.Virāgāyāti virajjanatthāya.Nirodhāyāti appavattikaraṇatthāya.Paṭipanno hotīti paṭipattiṃ paṭipanno hoti. Ettāvatā sotāpannassa ca sakadāgāmino ca pañcakāmaguṇikarāgakkhayatthāya anāgāmimaggavipassanā kathitā hoti.Bhavānaṃyevāti tiṇṇaṃ bhavānaṃ. Iminā anāgāmino bhavarāgakkhayatthāya arahattamaggavipassanā kathitā hoti.Taṇhākkhayāya paṭipanno hotīti imināpi sotāpannasakadāgāmīnaṃyeva pañcakāmaguṇikataṇhākkhayakaraṇatthaṃ anāgāmimaggavipassanā kathitā.So lobhakkhayāyāti imināpi anāgāmino bhavalobhakkhayatthāya arahattamaggavipassanāva kathitā.Aññataraṃ devanikāyanti suddhāvāsesveva aññataraṃ devanikāyaṃ.Anāgantā itthattanti imaṃ khandhapañcakabhāvaṃ anāgantā, heṭṭhūpapattiko na hoti, uparūpapattiko vā hoti, tattheva vā parinibbāyati.

Kāmānaṃyeva nibbidāya: For the sake of aversion to both kinds of sense-desire, for the sake of revulsion. Virāgāyā: For the sake of detachment. Nirodhāyā: For the sake of non-recurrence. Paṭipanno hotī: He undertakes a course of practice. Up to this point, the path of non-returning (anāgāmi)-insight (vipassanā) has been taught for the sake of destroying sensual desire associated with the five sense objects for the stream-enterer and the once-returner. Bhavānaṃyeva: Of the three existences. With this, the path of arahantship-insight has been taught for the sake of destroying the desire for existence of the non-returner. Taṇhākkhayāya paṭipanno hotī: With this too, the path of non-returning-insight has been taught for the stream-enterer and the once-returner, for the sake of destroying sensual craving associated with the five sense objects. So lobhakkhayāyā: With this too, the path of arahantship-insight has been taught for the non-returner, for the sake of destroying the craving for existence. Aññataraṃ devanikāyaṃ: To one of the Pure Abodes. Anāgantā itthattaṃ: He is one who does not come to this five-aggregate existence; he is not one who is reborn below, but he is one who is reborn above, or he is one who is extinguished there.

Iti paṭhamena aṅgena sukkhavipassakassa dhātukammaṭṭhānikabhikkhuno heṭṭhimāni dve maggaphalāni kathitāni, dutiyena samādhikammikassa tīṇi maggaphalāni, ‘‘so kāmāna’’nti iminā sotāpannasakadāgāmīnaṃ pañcakāmaguṇikarāgakkhayāya upari anāgāmimaggavipassanā, ‘‘so bhavānaṃyevā’’ti iminā anāgāmissa upari arahattamaggavipassanā, ‘‘so taṇhākkhayāyā’’ti iminā sotāpannasakadāgāmīnaṃ pañcakāmaguṇikataṇhākkhayāya upari anāgāmimaggavipassanā, ‘‘so lobhakkhayāyā’’ti iminā anāgāmino bhavalobhakkhayāya upari arahattamaggavipassanā kathitāti evaṃ chahi mukhehi vipassanaṃ kathetvā desanaṃ yathānusandhiṃ pāpesi. Desanāpariyosāne koṭisatasahassadevatā arahattaṃ pāpuṇiṃsu, sotāpannādīnaṃ paricchedova nāhosi. Yathā ca imasmiṃ samāgame, evaṃ mahāsamayasutte maṅgalasutte ca cūḷarāhulovādasutte ca koṭisatasahassadevatā arahattaṃ pāpuṇiṃsu, sotāpannādīnaṃ devamanussānaṃ paricchedo nāhosi.

Thus, with the first factor, the two lower paths and fruits of a dry-insight meditator who takes the elements as his meditation subject are spoken of; with the second, the three paths and fruits of one skilled in samādhi; with "so kāmānaṃ," the non-returning path-insight above for the stream-enterer and once-returner for the sake of destroying sensual desire associated with the five sense objects; with "so bhavānaṃyeva," the path of arahantship-insight above for the non-returner; with "so taṇhākkhayāyā," the non-returning path-insight above for the stream-enterer and once-returner for the sake of destroying sensual craving associated with the five sense objects; with "so lobhakkhayāyā," the path of arahantship-insight above for the non-returner for the sake of destroying the craving for existence. Thus, having taught insight through six approaches, he brought the discourse to its natural conclusion. At the end of the discourse, a hundred thousand devas attained arahantship; there was no counting the stream-enterers, etc. Just as in this assembly, so too in the Mahāsamayasutta, the Maṅgalasutta, and the Cūḷarāhulovādasutta, a hundred thousand devas attained arahantship; there was no counting the devas and humans who were stream-enterers, etc.

Samacittā devatāti cittassa sukhumabhāvasamatāya samacittā. Sabbāpi hi tā attano attabhāve sukhume cittasarikkhake katvā māpesuṃ. Tena samacittā nāma jātā. Aparenapi kāraṇena samacittā – ‘‘therena samāpatti tāva kathitā, samāpattithāmo pana na kathito. Mayaṃ dasabalaṃ pakkositvā samāpattiyā thāmaṃ kathāpessāmā’’ti sabbāpi ekacittā ahesuntipi samacittā. Aparampi kāraṇaṃ – ‘‘therena ekena pariyāyena samāpattipi samāpattithāmopi kathito, ko nu kho imaṃ samāgamaṃ sampatto, ko na sampatto’’ti olokayamānā tathāgatassa asampattabhāvaṃ disvā ‘‘mayaṃ tathāgataṃ pakkositvā parisaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ karissāmā’’ti sabbāpi ekacittā ahesuntipi samacittā. Aparampi kāraṇaṃ – anāgate kocideva bhikkhu vā bhikkhunī vā devo vā manusso vā ‘‘ayaṃ desanā sāvakabhāsitā’’ti agāravaṃ kareyya, sammāsambuddhaṃ pakkositvā imaṃ desanaṃ sabbaññubhāsitaṃ karissāma. Evaṃ anāgate garubhāvanīyā bhavissatīti sabbāva ekacittā ahesuntipi samacittā. Aparampi kāraṇaṃ – sabbāpi hi tā ekasamāpattilābhiniyo vā ahesuṃ ekārammaṇalābhiniyo vāti evampi samacittā.

Samacittā devatā: Devas of unified mind, due to the uniformity of the subtle nature of the mind. All of them, having made their own existences subtle and mind-like, manifested them. Therefore, they became known as "of unified mind." For another reason too, they were of unified mind: "The Elder has spoken of attainment, but he has not spoken of the power of attainment. We will summon the Ten-Powered One and have him speak of the power of attainment," all were of one mind, therefore they were of unified mind. For another reason too: "The Elder has spoken of both attainment and the power of attainment in one way; who has arrived at this assembly, who has not arrived?" Looking around and seeing that the Tathāgata had not arrived, "We will summon the Tathāgata and make the assembly complete," all were of one mind, therefore they were of unified mind. For another reason too: In the future, some monk or nun, deva or human, might disrespectfully think, "This discourse was spoken by a disciple"; we will summon the All-Knowing One and make this discourse spoken by the All-Knowing One. Thus, it will be worthy of reverence in the future, all were of one mind, therefore they were of unified mind. For another reason too: All of them were either attainers of the same attainment or attainers of the same object, thus they were of unified mind.

Haṭṭhāti tuṭṭhapahaṭṭhā āmoditā pamoditā.Sādhūti āyācanatthe nipāto.Anukampaṃ upādāyāti na therassa anukampaṃ kāruññaṃ anuddayaṃ paṭicca, na ca imasmiṃ ṭhāne therassa anukampitabbakiccaṃ atthi. Yasmiṃ hi divase thero sūkarakhataleṇadvāre bhāgineyyassa dīghanakhaparibbājakassa vedanākammaṭṭhāne (ma. ni. 2.206) kathiyamāne tālavaṇṭaṃ gahetvā satthāraṃ bījamāno ṭhito parassa vaḍḍhitabhojanaṃ bhuñjitvā khudaṃ vinodento viya parassa sajjitapasādhanaṃ sīse paṭimuñcanto viya ca sāvakapāramiñāṇassa nippadesato matthakaṃ patto, tasmiṃyeva divase bhagavatā anukampito nāma. Avasesānaṃ pana taṃ ṭhānaṃ sampattānaṃ devamanussānaṃ anukampaṃ upādāya gacchatu bhagavāti bhagavantaṃ yāciṃsu.

Haṭṭhā: Delighted, elated, rejoicing, gladdened. Sādhu: An expletive in the sense of request. Anukampaṃ upādāya: Not having regard for the Elder's compassion, kindness, or sympathy, nor is there any need for the Elder to be pitied in this place. For on the day when the Elder, standing at the doorway of Sūkarakhataleṇa, fanning the Teacher with a palm leaf while the meditation subject of feeling (vedanākammaṭṭhāna) was being spoken of to his nephew, the wandering ascetic Dīghanakha (ma. ni. 2.206), was like one enjoying food grown by another to dispel hunger, or like one placing on his head adornments prepared by another, on that very day, the Bhagavat pitied him. But having regard for the compassion of the devas and humans who had arrived at the remaining place, they requested the Bhagavat, "May the Bhagavat go."

Balavā purisoti dubbalo hi khippaṃ samiñjanapasāraṇaṃ kātuṃ na sakkoti, balavāva sakkoti. Tenetaṃ vuttaṃ.Sammukhe pāturahosīti sammukhaṭṭhāne puratoyeva pākaṭo ahosi.Bhagavā etadavocāti etaṃ ‘‘idha sāriputtā’’tiādinā nayena attano āgamanakāraṇaṃ avoca. Evaṃ kirassa ahosi – ‘‘sace koci bālo akataññū bhikkhu vā bhikkhunī vā upāsako vā upāsikā vā evaṃ cinteyya – ‘sāriputtatthero mahantaṃ parisaṃ alattha, sammāsambuddho ettakaṃ adhivāsetuṃ asakkonto usūyāya parisaṃ uṭṭhāpetuṃ āgato’ti. So imaṃ mayi manopadosaṃ katvā apāye nibbatteyyā’’ti. Athattano āgamanakāraṇaṃ kathento etaṃ ‘‘idha sāriputtā’’tiādivacanaṃ avoca.

Balavā puriso: A weak man cannot quickly contract and extend his arm, only a strong man can. Therefore this was said. Sammukhe pāturahosī: He appeared in the place directly in front. Bhagavā etadavocā: The Bhagavat spoke this, "Here, Sāriputta," etc., explaining the reason for his arrival. It occurred to him thus: "If some foolish, ungrateful monk or nun, layman or laywoman, should think thus: 'Sāriputta has obtained a large assembly; unable to endure so much, the Sammāsambuddha has come out of jealousy to break up the assembly,' having conceived this ill-will towards me, they would be reborn in a state of woe." Therefore, in explaining the reason for his arrival, he spoke these words, "Here, Sāriputta," etc.

tā kho pana, sāriputta, devatā dasapi hutvātiādimāha. Tattha yasavasena vā atthaṃ āharituṃ vaṭṭati samāpattivasena vā. Yasavasena tāva mahesakkhā devatā dasa dasa ekaṭṭhāne aṭṭhaṃsu, tāhi appesakkhatarā vīsati vīsati ekaṭṭhāne aṭṭhaṃsu, tāhi appesakkhatarā…pe… saṭṭhi saṭṭhi ekaṭṭhāne aṭṭhaṃsu. Samāpattivasena pana yāhi paṇītā samāpatti bhāvitā, tā saṭṭhi saṭṭhi ekaṭṭhāne aṭṭhaṃsu. Yāhi tato hīnatarā, tā paññāsa paññāsa…pe… yāhi tato hīnatarā samāpatti bhāvitā…pe… tā dasa dasa ekaṭṭhāne aṭṭhaṃsu. Yāhi vā hīnā bhāvitā, tā dasa dasa ekaṭṭhāne aṭṭhaṃsu. Yāhi tato paṇītatarā bhāvitā, tā vīsati vīsati. Yāhi tato paṇītatarā…pe… tā saṭṭhi saṭṭhi ekaṭṭhāne aṭṭhaṃsu.

tā kho pana, sāriputta, devatā dasapi hutvātiādimāha. Here, it is suitable to bring the meaning in terms of fame or in terms of attainment. In terms of fame, powerful deities stood ten by ten in one place; those less powerful stood twenty by twenty in one place; those less powerful…pe… stood sixty by sixty in one place. But in terms of attainment, those by whom refined attainment was cultivated, they stood sixty by sixty in one place. Those by whom less inferior attainments were cultivated, they stood fifty by fifty…pe… those by whom still less inferior attainment was cultivated…pe… they stood ten by ten in one place. Or those by whom inferior attainment was cultivated, they stood ten by ten in one place. Those by whom more refined attainment was cultivated, they stood twenty by twenty. Those by whom more refined…pe… they stood sixty by sixty in one place.

Āraggakoṭinitudanamatteti āraggakoṭiyā patanamatte okāse.Naca aññamaññaṃ byābādhentīti evaṃ sambādhe ṭhāne tiṭṭhantiyopi aññamaññaṃ na byābādhenti na ghaṭṭenti, asampīḷā asambādhāva ahesuṃ. ‘‘Tava hattho maṃ bādhati, tava pādo maṃ bādhati, tvaṃ maṃ maddantī ṭhitā’’ti vattabbakāraṇaṃ nāhosi.Tattha nūnāti tasmiṃ bhave nūna.Tathācittaṃ bhāvitanti tenākārena cittaṃ bhāvitaṃ.Yena tā devatāti yena tathābhāvitena cittena tā devatā dasapi hutvā…pe… tiṭṭhanti, na ca aññamaññaṃ byābādhentīti.Idheva khoti sāsane vā manussaloke vā bhummaṃ, imasmiṃyeva sāsane imasmiṃyeva manussaloketi attho. Tāsañhi devatānaṃ imasmiṃyeva manussaloke imasmiṃyeva ca sāsane taṃ cittaṃ bhāvitaṃ, yena tā sante rūpabhave nibbattā, tato ca pana āgantvā evaṃ sukhume attabhāve māpetvā ṭhitā. Tattha kiñcāpi kassapadasabalassa sāsane tīṇi maggaphalāni nibbattetvā brahmaloke nibbattadevatāpi atthi, sabbabuddhānaṃ pana ekāva anusāsanī ekaṃ sāsananti katvā ‘‘idheva kho, sāriputtā’’ti aññabuddhānaṃ sāsanampi imameva sāsanaṃ karonto āha. Ettāvatā tathāgatena samāpattiyā thāmo kathito.

Āraggakoṭinitudanamatteti, in the space of the mere falling of the tip of a goad.Na ca aññamaññaṃ byābādhentīti, even standing in such a crowded place, they did not bother each other, did not jostle, they were without pressure, without crowding. There was no cause to say, "Your hand bothers me, your foot bothers me, you are standing pressing me."Tattha nūnāti, surely in that existence.Tathācittaṃ bhāvitanti, the mind was cultivated in that manner.Yena tā devatāti, by which thus cultivated mind, those deities, even being ten…pe… stand, and they do not bother one another.Idheva khoti, either in the Dispensation or in the human world—indeed, in this Dispensation, indeed, in this human world is the meaning. For that mind was cultivated by those deities in this human world and in this Dispensation, by which they were reborn in a peaceful realm of form, and then, having come from there, they stood creating such a subtle existence. Here, although there are deities reborn in the Brahma world after producing three paths and fruits in the Dispensation of Kassapa Dasabala, having made the instruction one and the Dispensation one for all Buddhas, he said, "Indeed here, Sāriputta," making even the Dispensation of other Buddhas this very Dispensation. Thus far, the power of attainment has been spoken by the Tathāgata.

tasmātiha, sāriputtāti āha. Tatthatasmāti yasmā tā devatā idheva santaṃ samāpattiṃ nibbattetvā sante bhave nibbattā, tasmā.Santindriyāti pañcannaṃ indriyānaṃ santatāya nibbutatāya paṇītatāya santindriyā.Santamānasāti mānasassa santatāya nibbutatāya paṇītatāya santamānasā.Santaṃyeva upahāraṃ upaharissāmāti kāyacittūpahāraṃ santaṃ nibbutaṃ paṇītaṃyeva upaharissāma.Sabrahmacārīsūti samānaṃ ekuddesatādiṃ brahmaṃ carantesu sahadhammikesu.Evañhi vo, sāriputta, sikkhitabbanti iminā ettakena vārena bhagavā desanaṃ sabbaññubhāsitaṃ akāsi.Anassunti naṭṭhā vinaṭṭhā.Ye imaṃ dhammapariyāyaṃ nāssosunti ye attano pāpikaṃ tucchaṃ niratthakaṃ diṭṭhiṃ nissāya imaṃ evarūpaṃ dhammadesanaṃ sotuṃ na labhiṃsūti yathānusandhinā desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesi.

tasmātiha, sāriputtāti āha. Here, tasmāti, because those deities, having produced peaceful attainment here, were reborn in a peaceful existence, therefore.Santindriyāti, with the faculties calmed, pacified, refined, with calmed faculties.Santamānasāti, with the mind calmed, pacified, refined, with calmed mind.Santaṃyeva upahāraṃ upaharissāmāti, we will offer a peaceful, pacified, refined offering of body and mind.Sabrahmacārīsūti, among those who live the brahma-life, the holy life, sharing the same teaching, etc.Evañhi vo, sāriputta, sikkhitabbanti, in this way, with this much discourse, the Blessed One made an all-knowing utterance.Anassunti, lost, destroyed.Ye imaṃ dhammapariyāyaṃ nāssosunti, those who, relying on their own evil, empty, meaningless view, did not get to hear this kind of Dhamma teaching, thus he concluded the teaching according to the connection.

38.Chaṭṭhevaraṇāyaṃ viharatīti varaṇā nāma ekaṃ nagaraṃ, taṃ upanissāya viharati.Kāmarāgābhinivesavinibandhapaligedhapariyuṭṭhānajjhosānahetūti kāmarāgābhinivesahetu, kāmarāgavinibandhahetu, kāmarāgapaligedhahetu, kāmarāgapariyuṭṭhānahetu, kāmarāgaajjhosānahetūti attho. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yvāyaṃ pañca kāmaguṇe nissāya uppajjati kāmarāgo, tassābhinivesādihetu. Kāmarāgena abhiniviṭṭhattā vinibaddhattā tasmiṃyeva ca kāmarāge mahāpaṅke viya paligedhattā anupaviṭṭhattā teneva ca kāmarāgena pariyuṭṭhitattā gahitattā kāmarāgeneva ca ajjhositattā gilitvā pariniṭṭhapetvā gahitattāti.Diṭṭhirāgādipadesupi eseva nayo.Diṭṭhirāgoti panettha dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhiyo nissāya uppajjanakarāgo veditabbo.Puratthimesu janapadesūti therassa vasanaṭṭhānato sāvatthijanapado puratthimadisābhāge hoti, thero ca nisīdantopi tatomukhova nisinno, tasmā evamāha.Udānaṃ udānesīti udāhāraṃ udāhari. Yathā hi yaṃ telaṃ mānaṃ gahetuṃ na sakkoti, vissanditvā gacchati, taṃ avasesakoti vuccati. Yañca jalaṃ taḷākaṃ gahetuṃ na sakkoti, ajjhottharitvā gacchati, taṃ oghoti vuccati, evamevaṃ yaṃ pītivacanaṃ hadayaṃ gahetuṃ na sakkoti, adhikaṃ hutvā anto asaṇṭhahitvā bahi nikkhamati, taṃ udānanti vuccati, evarūpaṃ pītimayavacanaṃ nicchāresīti attho.

38.In the sixth [sutta], varaṇāyaṃ viharatīti, Varaṇā is the name of a city; he dwelt depending on that. Kāmarāgābhinivesavinibandhapaligedhapariyuṭṭhānajjhosānahetūti, because of attachment to sensual passion, because of the bond of sensual passion, because of the entangling of sensual passion, because of the enveloping of sensual passion, because of the adhering to sensual passion is the meaning. This is said: that sensual passion which arises relying on the five strands of sensual pleasure—because of the cause of its attachment, etc. Because of being attached to sensual passion, because of being bound, and because of being entangled in that very sensual passion like in a great mud, because of being immersed, and because of being enveloped by that very sensual passion, because of being seized, and because of being adhered to by sensual passion itself, because of being swallowed, having completely finished and seized.Diṭṭhirāgādi- in the cases of diṭṭhirāga, etc., this same method [should be understood].Diṭṭhirāgoti, here, lust that arises relying on the sixty-two views should be understood.Puratthimesu janapadesūti, from the residence of the Elder, the Sāvatthi region is in the eastern direction; and the Elder, even while sitting, was sitting facing that direction, therefore he said this.Udānaṃ udānesīti, he uttered an exclamation. Just as oil which cannot be contained to measure, flows out and goes, that is called avasesako; and just as water which cannot be contained by a pond, overflows and goes, that is called a flood. Just so, a word of joy which the heart cannot contain, having become excessive, without settling inside, comes out, that is called an udāna. He uttered a word filled with such joy is the meaning.

39.Sattamegundāvaneti evaṃ nāmake vane.Upasaṅkamīti ‘‘mahākaccānatthero kira nāma attano pitumattampi ayyakamattampi disvā neva abhivādeti na paccuṭṭheti na āsanena nimantetī’’ti sutvā ‘‘na sakkā ettakena niṭṭhaṃ gantuṃ, upasaṅkamitvā naṃ pariggaṇhissāmī’’ti bhuttapātarāso yenāyasmā mahākaccāno tenupasaṅkami.Jiṇṇeti jarājiṇṇe.Vuddheti vayovuddhe.Mahallaketi jātimahallake.Addhagateti dīghakāladdhānaṃ atikkante.Vayoanuppatteti pacchimavayaṃ anuppatte.Tayidaṃ, bho kaccāna, tathevāti, bho kaccāna, yaṃ taṃ amhehi kevalaṃ sutameva, taṃ iminā diṭṭhena sameti. Tasmā taṃ tatheva, na aññathā.Na hi bhavaṃ kaccāno brāhmaṇeti idaṃ attānaṃ sandhāya vadati. Ayaṃ kirassa adhippāyo – amhe evaṃ mahallake disvā bhoto kaccānassa abhivādanamattampi paccuṭṭhānamattampi āsanena nimantanamattampi natthīti.Na sampannamevāti na yuttameva na anucchavikameva.

39.In the seventh [sutta], gundāvaneti, in a forest with such a name.Upasaṅkamīti, having heard that "it is said that the Elder Mahākaccāna does not even greet, nor rise up for, nor invite with a seat even his paternal grandmother or maternal grandmother," [thinking] "it is not possible to come to a conclusion with just this, I will approach and investigate him," after the morning meal, he approached the Venerable Mahākaccāna.Jiṇṇeti, aged by old age.Vuddheti, aged by years.Mahallaketi, aged by birth.Addhagateti, having passed a long time.Vayoanuppatteti, having reached the final age.Tayidaṃ, bho kaccāna, tathevāti, venerable Kaccāna, that which we [heard] only as a rumor, agrees with what is seen. Therefore, that is so, not otherwise.Na hi bhavaṃ kaccāno brāhmaṇeti, this he speaks referring to himself. This is his intention: having seen us so old, there is not even greeting, nor rising up, nor inviting with a seat from venerable Kaccāna.Na sampannamevāti, it is not proper, not fitting.

atthi brāhmaṇātiādimāha. Tatthajānatāti sabbaṃ neyyaṃ jānantena.Passatāti tadeva hatthe ṭhapitaṃ āmalakaṃ viya passantena.Vuddhabhūmīti yena kāraṇena vuddho nāma hoti, taṃ kāraṇaṃ.Daharabhūmīti yena kāraṇena daharo nāma hoti, taṃ kāraṇaṃ.Āsītikoti asītivassavayo.Nāvutikoti navutivassavayo.Kāme paribhuñjatīti vatthukāme kilesakāmeti duvidhepi kāme kamanavasena paribhuñjati.Kāmamajjhāvasatīti duvidhepi kāme ghare gharassāmiko viya vasati adhivasati.Kāmapariyesanāya ussukoti duvidhānampi kāmānaṃ pariyesanatthaṃ ussukkamāpanno.Bālo na therotveva saṅkhyaṃ gacchatīti so na thero bālo mandotveva gaṇanaṃ gacchati. Vuttaṃ hetaṃ –

atthi brāhmaṇātiādimāha. Here, jānatāti, by one who knows all that should be known.Passatāti, by one who sees that very thing as an āmalaka fruit placed in the hand.Vuddhabhūmīti, the reason by which one is called old.Daharabhūmīti, the reason by which one is called young.Āsītikoti, age of eighty years.Nāvutikoti, age of ninety years.Kāme paribhuñjatīti, he enjoys both kinds of sensual pleasures, object of desire and defilement of desire, according to his desire.Kāmamajjhāvasatīti, he lives, dwells in both kinds of sensual pleasures like a householder in a house.Kāmapariyesanāya ussukoti, intent on the search for both kinds of sensual pleasures.Bālo na therotveva saṅkhyaṃ gacchatīti, he, not an elder, goes to the count as a fool, an idiot. For it was said:

‘‘Na tena thero so hoti, yenassa palitaṃ siro;

"He is not an elder just because his head is gray;
He is ripe in age, called 'old-in-vain.'" (Dhp. 260);

Daharoti taruṇo.Yuvāti yobbanena samannāgato.Susukāḷakesoti suṭṭhu kāḷakeso.Bhadrena yobbanena samannāgatoti yena yobbanena samannāgato yuvā, taṃ yobbanaṃ bhadraṃ laddhakanti dasseti.Paṭhamena vayasāti paṭhamavayo nāma tettiṃsa vassāni, tena samannāgatoti attho.Paṇḍito therotveva saṅkhyaṃ gacchatīti so evarūpo puggalo paṇḍitoti ca theroti ca gaṇanaṃ gacchati. Vuttampi cetaṃ –

Daharoti, young.Yuvāti, endowed with youth.Susukāḷakesoti, with very black hair.Bhadrena yobbanena samannāgatoti, he shows that the youth with which a young man is endowed, that youth is auspicious, attained.Paṭhamena vayasāti, the first age is thirty-three years; endowed with that is the meaning.Paṇḍito therotveva saṅkhyaṃ gacchatīti, such a person goes to the count as wise and as an elder. And it was said:

‘‘Yamhi saccañca dhammo ca, ahiṃsā saṃyamo damo;

"He in whom there is truth, Dhamma, non-harming, restraint, and self-control;
He, rid of impurities, is wise, is called an elder." (Dhp. 261);

40.Aṭṭhamecorā balavanto hontīti pakkhasampannā, parivārasampannā, dhanasampannā, nivāsaṭṭhānasampannā, vāhanasampannā ca honti.Rājāno tasmiṃ samaye dubbalā hontīti tasmiṃ samaye rājāno tāsaṃ sampattīnaṃ abhāvena dubbalā honti.Atiyātunti bahiddhā janapadacārikaṃ caritvā icchiticchitakkhaṇe antonagaraṃ pavisituṃ.Niyyātunti ‘‘corā janapadaṃ vilumpanti maddanti, te nisedhessāmā’’ti paṭhamayāme vā majjhimayāme vā pacchimayāme vā nikkhamituṃ phāsukaṃ na hoti. Tato uṭṭhāya corā manusse pothetvā acchinditvā gacchanti.Paccantime vā janapade anusaññātunti gāmaṃ vāsakaraṇatthāya setuṃ attharaṇatthāya pokkharaṇiṃ khaṇāpanatthāya sālādīnaṃ karaṇatthāya paccantime janapade anusaññātumpi na sukhaṃ hoti.Brāhmaṇagahapatikānanti antonagaravāsīnaṃ brāhmaṇagahapatikānaṃ.Bāhirāni vā kammantānīti bahigāme ārāme khettakammantāni.Pāpabhikkhū balavanto hontīti pakkhuttarā yasuttarā puññavanto bahukehi upaṭṭhākehi ca upaṭṭhākīhi ca samannāgatā rājarājamahāmattasannissitā.Pesalā bhikkhū tasmiṃ samaye dubbalā hontīti tasmiṃ samaye piyasīlā bhikkhū tāsaṃ sampattīnaṃ abhāvena dubbalā honti.Tuṇhībhūtā tuṇhībhūtāva saṅghamajjhe saṅkasāyantīti nissaddā hutvā saṅghamajjhe nisinnā kiñci ekavacanampi mukhaṃ ukkhipitvā kathetuṃ asakkontā pajjhāyantā viya nisīdanti.Tayidanti tadetaṃ kāraṇaṃ. Sukkapakkho vuttavipallāsena veditabbo.

40.In the eighth [sutta], corā balavanto hontīti, they are endowed with faction, endowed with retinue, endowed with wealth, endowed with dwelling places, and endowed with vehicles.Rājāno tasmiṃ samaye dubbalā hontīti, at that time the kings are weak due to the absence of those endowments.Atiyātunti, having wandered outside for the sake of touring the countryside, to enter the inner city at any desired moment.Niyyātunti, it is not easy to go out in the first watch, or the middle watch, or the last watch, thinking "thieves plunder and oppress the countryside; we will stop them." Thenceforth, thieves strike and rob people and go away.Paccantime vā janapade anusaññātunti, it is not pleasant to instruct in the border regions for the purpose of making a village habitable, spreading a bridge, digging a pond, building halls, etc.Brāhmaṇagahapatikānanti, of the brahmin householders living in the inner city.Bāhirāni vā kammantānīti, outside the village in gardens and fields.Pāpabhikkhū balavanto hontīti, evil monks are powerful, supported by factions, supported by fame, meritorious, endowed with many supporters, both male and female, and relying on kings and great ministers.Pesalā bhikkhū tasmiṃ samaye dubbalā hontīti, at that time, amiable monks are weak due to the absence of those endowments.Tuṇhībhūtā tuṇhībhūtāva saṅghamajjhe saṅkasāyantīti, being silent, having sat silently in the midst of the Saṅgha, unable to lift their faces and speak even a single word, they sit as if meditating.Tayidanti, that is the reason. The bright side should be understood by reversal of what was said.

41.Navamemicchāpaṭipattādhikaraṇahetūti micchāpaṭipattiyā kāraṇahetu paṭipajjanahetūti attho.Ñāyaṃ dhammaṃ kusalanti sahavipassanakaṃ maggaṃ. Evarūpo hi sahavipassanakaṃ maggaṃ ārādhetuṃ sampādetuṃ pūretuṃ na sakkoti. Sukkapakkho vuttavipallāsena veditabbo. Imasmiṃ sutte saha vipassanāya maggo kathito.

41.In the ninth [sutta], micchāpaṭipattādhikaraṇahetūti, because of the cause, the reason for wrong practice, because of practicing is the meaning.Ñāyaṃ dhammaṃ kusalanti, the path together with insight. For such a one is not able to develop, accomplish, fulfill the path together with insight. The bright side should be understood by reversal of what was said. In this sutta, the path together with insight is spoken.

42.Dasameduggahitehīti uppaṭipāṭiyā gahitehi.Byañjanappatirūpakehīti byañjanaso patirūpakehi akkharacitratāya laddhakehi.Atthañca dhammañca paṭibāhantīti suggahitasuttantānaṃ atthañca pāḷiñca paṭibāhanti, attano duggahitasuttantānaṃyeva atthañca pāḷiñca uttaritaraṃ katvā dassenti. Sukkapakkho vuttavipallāsena veditabbo. Imasmiṃ sutte sāsanassa vuddhi ca parihāni ca kathitāti.

42.In the tenth [sutta], duggahitehīti, by those grasped incorrectly.Byañjanappatirūpakehīti, by those which are similar only in expression, obtained through artistry of letters.Atthañca dhammañca paṭibāhantīti, they reject the meaning and the text of well-grasped suttas, they show the meaning and the text of their own incorrectly grasped suttas as superior. The bright side should be understood by reversal of what was said. In this sutta, the growth and decline of the Dispensation is spoken of.

5. Parisavaggavaṇṇanā

5. Parisavaggavaṇṇanā

43.Pañcamassa paṭhameuttānāti pākaṭā appaṭicchannā.Gambhīrāti guḷhā paṭicchannā.Uddhatāti uddhaccena samannāgatā.Unnaḷāti uggatanaḷā, uṭṭhitatucchamānāti vuttaṃ hoti.Capalāti pattacīvaramaṇḍanādinā cāpallena yuttā.Mukharāti mukhakharā kharavacanā.Vikiṇṇavācāti asaṃyatavacanā divasampi niratthakavacanapalāpino.Muṭṭhassatīti vissaṭṭhasatino.Asampajānāti nippaññā.Asamāhitāti cittekaggatāmattassāpi alābhino.Pākatindriyāti pakatiyā ṭhitehi vivaṭehi arakkhitehi indriyehi samannāgatā. Sukkapakkho vuttavipallāsena veditabbo.

43.In the first [sutta] of the fifth [vagga], uttānāti, manifest, unconcealed.Gambhīrāti, profound, concealed.Uddhatāti, endowed with arrogance.Unnaḷāti, with raised naḷā reeds, it is said: with raised empty pride.Capalāti, endowed with fickleness by decorating robes etc.Mukharāti, harsh-mouthed, harsh-speaking.Vikiṇṇavācāti, with unrestrained speech, chattering aimlessly even during the day.Muṭṭhassatīti, with mindfulness forgotten.Asampajānāti, without wisdom.Asamāhitāti, without even the attainment of one-pointedness of mind.Pākatindriyāti, endowed with faculties standing in their natural state, open, unguarded. The bright side should be understood by reversal of what was said.

44.Dutiyebhaṇḍanajātāti bhaṇḍanaṃ vuccati kalahassa pubbabhāgo, taṃ tesaṃ jātanti bhaṇḍanajātā. Tathā ‘‘mayaṃ tumhe daṇḍāpessāma bandhāpessāmā’’tiādivacanappavattiyā sañjātakalahā. Ayaṃ tāva gihīsu nayo. Pabbajitā pana āpattivītikkamavācaṃ vadantākalahajātānāma.Vivādāpannāti viruddhavādaṃ āpannā.Mukhasattīhi vitudantāti guṇānaṃ chindanaṭṭhena dubbhāsitā vācā mukhasattiyoti vuccanti, tāhi vitudantā vijjhantā.Samaggāti ekakammaṃ ekuddeso samasikkhatāti etesaṃ karaṇena samaggatāya sahitā.Piyacakkhūhīti mettācakkhūhi.

44.In the second [sutta], bhaṇḍanajātāti, bhaṇḍana means the preliminary stage of quarrel, that is born of them is bhaṇḍanajātā. Likewise, those in whom a quarrel has arisen by uttering words such as, "we will fine you, we will bind you." This, for now, is the method among laypeople. But renunciates speaking words of transgression of offenses are called kalahajātā.Vivādāpannāti, involved in contradictory arguments.Mukhasattīhi vitudantāti, words badly spoken which cut off qualities are called mouth-weapons; piercing with those, stabbing.Samaggāti, united by the making of one action, one recitation, equal training; united in concord.Piyacakkhūhīti, with eyes of loving-kindness.

45.Tatiyeaggavatīti uttamapuggalavatī, aggāya vā uttamāya paṭipattiyā samannāgatā. Tato viparītāanaggavatī. Bāhulikāti cīvarādibāhullāya paṭipannā. Sāsanaṃ sithilaṃ gaṇhantītisāthalikā. Okkamane pubbaṅgamāti ettha okkamanaṃ vuccati avagamanaṭṭhena pañca nīvaraṇāni, tena pañcanīvaraṇapūraṇe pubbaṅgamāti vuttaṃ hoti.Paviveketi upadhiviveke nibbāne.Nikkhittadhurāti tividhepi viveke oropitadhurā.Na vīriyaṃ ārabhantīti duvidhampi vīriyaṃ na karonti.Appattassa pattiyāti pubbe appattassa jhānavipassanāmaggaphalavisesassa pattiatthāya. Itaraṃ padadvayaṃ tasseva vevacanaṃ.Pacchimā janatāti saddhivihārikaantevāsikajano.Diṭṭhānugatiṃ āpajjatīti ācariyupajjhāyehi kataṃ anukaronto diṭṭhassa tesaṃ ācārassa anugatiṃ āpajjati nāma. Sesaṃ vuttapaṭipakkhanayena veditabbaṃ.

45.In the third [sutta], aggavatīti, possessing excellent persons, endowed with excellent or supreme practice. The opposite of that is anaggavatī. Bāhulikāti, committed to abundance of robes etc. Thinking the Dispensation is lax is sāthalikā. Okkamane pubbaṅgamāti, here, okkamana means the five hindrances in the sense of descending into them; being foremost in the fulfilling of the five hindrances is said.Paviveketi, in detachment from the basis of clinging, in Nibbāna.Nikkhittadhurāti, having laid down the burden in all three kinds of detachment.Na vīriyaṃ ārabhantīti, they do not make both kinds of effort.Appattassa pattiyāti, for the sake of the attainment of a special quality of jhāna, insight, path, and fruit which was previously unattained. The other pair of words are synonyms of that.Pacchimā janatāti, the community of junior co-residents and apprentices.Diṭṭhānugatiṃ āpajjatīti, imitating what was done by teachers and preceptors, one undergoes conformity to their view, to their conduct. The rest should be understood in the manner opposite to what was said.

46.Catuttheariyāti ariyasāvakaparisā.Anariyāti puthujjanaparisā.‘‘Idaṃ dukkha’’nti yathābhūtaṃ nappajānantīti ṭhapetvā taṇhaṃ tebhūmakā pañcakkhandhā dukkhasaccaṃ nāma, ettakameva dukkhaṃ, ito uddhaṃ dukkhaṃ natthīti yathāsabhāvato nappajānanti. Esa nayo sabbattha. Sesapadesu pana tassa dukkhassa samuṭṭhāpikā purimataṇhāsamudayonāma, tassāyeva taṇhāya, dvinnampi vā tesaṃ saccānaṃ accantakkhayo asamuppattidukkhanirodhonāma, aṭṭhaṅgiko ariyamaggodukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadānāmāti evaṃ imasmiṃ sutte catūhi saccehi cattāro maggā ca cattāri ca phalāni kathitāni.

47.Pañcameparisākasaṭoti kasaṭaparisā kacavaraparisā palāpaparisāti attho.Parisāmaṇḍoti pasannaparisā sāraparisāti attho.Chandāgatiṃ gacchantīti chandena agatiṃ gacchanti, akattabbaṃ karontīti attho. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Imāni pana cattāri agatigamanāni bhaṇḍabhājanīye ca vinicchayaṭṭhāne ca labbhanti. Tattha bhaṇḍabhājanīye tāva attano bhārabhūtānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ amanāpe bhaṇḍake patte taṃ parivattetvā manāpaṃ dentochandāgatiṃ gacchatināma. Attano pana abhārabhūtānaṃ manāpe bhaṇḍake patte taṃ parivattetvā amanāpaṃ dentodosāgatiṃ gacchatināma. Bhaṇḍakabhājanīyavatthuñca ṭhitikañca ajānantomohāgatiṃgacchatināma. Mukharānaṃ vā rājādinissitānaṃ vā ‘‘ime me amanāpe bhaṇḍake dinne anatthampi kareyyu’’nti bhayena parivattetvā manāpaṃ dentobhayāgatiṃ gacchatināma. Yo pana evaṃ na gacchati, sabbesaṃ tulābhūto pamāṇabhūto majjhatto hutvā yaṃ yassa pāpuṇāti, taññeva tassa deti, ayaṃ catubbidhampi agatigamanaṃ na gacchati nāma. Vinicchayaṭṭhāne pana attano bhārabhūtassa garukāpattiṃ lahukāpattīti katvā kathentochandāgatiṃ gacchatināma. Itarassa lahukāpattiṃ garukāpattīti katvā kathentodosāgatiṃ gacchatināma. Āpattivuṭṭhānaṃ pana samuccayakkhandhakañca ajānantomohāgatiṃ gacchatināma. Mukharassa vā rājapūjitassa vā ‘‘ayaṃ me garukaṃ katvā āpattiṃ kathentassa anatthampi kareyyā’’ti garukameva lahukāti katvā kathentobhayāgatiṃ gacchatināma. Yo pana sabbesaṃ yathābhūtameva katheti, ayaṃ catubbidhampi agatigamanaṃ na gacchati nāma.

48.Chaṭṭheokkācitavinītāti dubbinītā.No paṭipucchāvinītāti na pucchitvā vinītā.Gambhīrāti pāḷivasena gambhīrā sallasuttasadisā.Gambhīratthāti atthavasena gambhīrā mahāvedallasuttasadisā.Lokuttarāti lokuttaraatthadīpakā.Suññatāpaṭisaṃyuttāti sattasuññaṃ dhammamattameva pakāsakā asaṅkhatasaṃyuttasadisā.Na aññā cittaṃ upaṭṭhapentīti vijānanatthāya cittaṃ na upaṭṭhapenti, niddāyanti vā aññavihitā vā honti.Uggahetabbaṃ pariyāpuṇitabbanti uggahetabbe ca pariyāpuṇitabbe ca.Kavitāti kavīhi katā. Itaraṃ tasseva vevacanaṃ.Cittakkharāti vicitraakkharā. Itaraṃ tasseva vevacanaṃ.Bāhirakāti sāsanato bahibhūtā.Sāvakabhāsitāti tesaṃ tesaṃ sāvakehi bhāsitā.Sussūsantīti akkharacittatāya ceva sarasampattiyā ca attamanā hutvā suṇanti.Na ceva aññamaññaṃ paṭipucchantīti aññamaññaṃ atthaṃ vā anusandhiṃ vā pubbāparaṃ vā na pucchanti.Na ca paṭivicarantīti pucchanatthāya cārikaṃ na vicaranti.Idaṃ kathanti idaṃ byañjanaṃ kathaṃ ropetabbaṃ kinti ropetabbaṃ?Imassa ko atthoti imassa bhāsitassa ko attho, kā anusandhi, kiṃ pubbāparaṃ?Avivaṭanti paṭicchannaṃ.Na vivarantīti na ugghāṭenti.Anuttānīkatanti apākaṭaṃ kataṃ.Na uttāniṃ karontīti pākaṭaṃ na karonti.Kaṅkhāṭhāniyesūti kaṅkhāya kāraṇabhūtesu. Sukkapakkho vuttavipallāsena veditabbo.

49.Sattameāmisagarūti catupaccayagarukā lokuttaradhammaṃ lāmakato gahetvā ṭhitaparisā.Saddhammagarūti nava lokuttaradhamme garuke katvā cattāro paccaye lāmakato gahetvā ṭhitaparisā.Ubhatobhāgavimuttoti dvīhi bhāgehi vimutto.Paññāvimuttoti paññāya vimutto sukkhavipassakakhīṇāsavo.Kāyasakkhīti kāyena jhānaphassaṃ phusitvā pacchā nirodhaṃ nibbānaṃ sacchikatvā ṭhito.Diṭṭhippattoti diṭṭhantaṃ patto. Ime dvepi chasu ṭhānesu labbhanti.Saddhāvimuttoti saddahanto vimutto. Ayampi chasu ṭhānesu labbhati. Dhammaṃ anussaratītidhammānusārī. Saddhaṃ anussaratītisaddhānusārī. Ime dvepi paṭhamamaggasamaṅgino.Kalyāṇadhammoti sundaradhammo.Dussīlo pāpadhammoti nissīlo lāmakadhammo. Imaṃ kasmā gaṇhanti? Sabbesu hi ekasadisesu jātesu sīlavantesu balavagāravaṃ na hoti, ekaccesu pana dussīlesu sati sīlavantānaṃ upari balavagāravaṃ hotīti maññantā gaṇhanti.Te tena lābhaṃ labhantīti te bhikkhū ekaccānaṃ vaṇṇaṃ ekaccānaṃ avaṇṇaṃ kathetvā cattāro paccaye labhanti.Gathitāti taṇhāya ganthitā.Mucchitāti taṇhāvaseneva mucchitā.Ajjhopannāti ajjhosāya gilitvā pariniṭṭhapetvā ṭhitā.Anādīnavadassāvinoti apaccavekkhitaparibhoge ādīnavaṃ apassantā.Anissaraṇapaññāti catūsu paccayesu chandarāgaapakaḍḍhanāya nissaraṇapaññāya virahitā idamatthaṃ etanti ajānantā.Paribhuñjantīti sacchandarāgā hutvā paribhuñjanti.

ubhatobhāgavimuttotiādīsu ayaṃ sattannampi ariyapuggalānaṃ saṅkhepapakāsanā – eko bhikkhu paññādhurena abhiniviṭṭho aṭṭha samāpattiyo nibbattetvā sotāpattimaggaṃ pāpuṇāti. So tasmiṃ khaṇe dhammānusārī nāma hoti, sotāpattiphalādīsu chasu ṭhānesu kāyasakkhi nāma, arahattaphalakkhaṇe ubhatobhāgavimutto nāma. Samāpattīhi vikkhambhanavimuttiyā maggena samucchedavimuttiyāti dvikkhattuṃ vā dvīhi vā bhāgehi vimuttoti attho. Aparo paññādhurena abhiniviṭṭho samāpattiyo nibbattetuṃ asakkonto sukkhavipassakova hutvā sotāpattimaggaṃ pāpuṇāti. So tasmiṃ khaṇe dhammānusārī nāma hoti, sotāpattiphalādīsu chasu ṭhānesu diṭṭhippatto nāma, arahattaphalakkhaṇe paññāvimutto nāma. Aparo saddhādhurena abhiniviṭṭho aṭṭha samāpattiyo nibbattetvā sotāpattimaggaṃ pāpuṇāti. So tasmiṃ khaṇe saddhānusārī nāma hoti, sotāpattiphalādīsu chasu ṭhānesu kāyasakkhi nāma, arahattaphalakkhaṇe ubhatobhāgavimutto nāma. Aparo saddhādhurena abhiniviṭṭho samāpattiyo nibbattetuṃ asakkonto sukkhavipassakova hutvā sotāpattimaggaṃ pāpuṇāti. So tasmiṃ khaṇe saddhānusārī nāma hoti, sotāpattiphalādīsu chasu ṭhānesu saddhāvimutto nāma, arahattaphalakkhaṇe paññāvimutto nāma.

50.Aṭṭhamevisamāti sapakkhalanaṭṭhena visamā.Samāti nipakkhalanaṭṭhena samā.Adhammakammānīti uddhammāni kammāni.Avinayakammānīti ubbinayāni kammāni.

51.Navameadhammikāti niddhammā.Dhammikāti dhammayuttā.

52.Dasameadhikaraṇanti vivādādhikaraṇādicatubbidhaṃ adhikaraṇaṃ.Ādiyantīti gaṇhanti.Saññāpentīti jānāpenti.Na ca saññattiṃ upagacchantīti saññāpanatthaṃ na sannipatanti.Na ca nijjhāpentīti na pekkhāpenti.Na ca nijjhattiṃ upagacchantīti aññamaññaṃ nijjhāpanatthāya na sannipatanti.Asaññattibalāti asaññattiyeva balaṃ etesanti asaññattibalā.Appaṭinissaggamantinoti yesaṃ hi evaṃ hoti – ‘‘sace amhehi gahitaṃ adhikaraṇaṃ dhammikaṃ bhavissati, gaṇhissāma. Sace adhammikaṃ, vissajjessāmā’’ti, te paṭinissaggamantino nāma honti. Ime pana na tathā mantentīti appaṭinissaggamantino.Thāmasā parāmāsā abhinivissāti diṭṭhithāmena ca diṭṭhiparāmāsena ca abhinivisitvā.Idameva saccanti idaṃ amhākaṃ vacanameva saccaṃ.Moghamaññanti avasesānaṃ vacanaṃ moghaṃ tucchaṃ. Sukkapakkho uttānatthoyevāti.

2. Dutiyapaṇṇāsakaṃ

(6) 1. Puggalavaggavaṇṇanā

53.Dutiyapaṇṇāsakassa paṭhame cakkavattinā saddhiṃ gahitattā ‘‘lokānukampāyā’’ti na vuttaṃ. Ettha ca cakkavattino uppattiyā dve sampattiyo labhanti, buddhānaṃ uppattiyā tissopi.

54.Dutiyeacchariyamanussāti āciṇṇamanussā abbhutamanussā.

55.Tatiyebahuno janassa anutappā hotīti mahājanassa anutāpakārī hoti. Tattha cakkavattino kālakiriyā ekacakkavāḷe devamanussānaṃ anutāpaṃ karoti, tathāgatassa kālakiriyā dasasu cakkavāḷasahassesu.

56.Catutthethūpārahāti thūpassa yuttā anucchavikā. Cakkavattino hi cetiyaṃ paṭijaggitvā dve sampattiyo labhanti, buddhānaṃ cetiyaṃ paṭijaggitvā tissopi.

57.Pañcamebuddhāti attano ānubhāvena cattāri saccāni buddhā.

58.Chaṭṭhephalantiyāti saddaṃ karontiyā.Na santasantīti na bhāyanti. Tattha khīṇāsavo attano sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā pahīnattā na bhāyati, hatthājānīyo sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā balavattāti. Sattamaṭṭhamesupi eseva nayo.

61.Navamekiṃpurisāti kinnarā.Mānusiṃ vācaṃ na bhāsantīti manussakathaṃ na kathenti. Dhammāsokassa kira ekaṃ kinnaraṃ ānetvā dassesuṃ. So ‘‘kathāpetha na’’nti āha. Kinnaro kathetuṃ na icchati. Eko puriso ‘‘ahametaṃ kathāpessāmī’’ti heṭṭhāpāsādaṃ otāretvā dve khāṇuke koṭṭetvā ukkhaliṃ āropesi. Sā ubhatopassehi patati. Taṃ disvā kinnaro ‘‘kiṃ aññaṃ ekaṃ khāṇukaṃ koṭṭetuṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti ettakameva āha. Puna aparabhāge dve kinnare ānetvā dassesuṃ. Rājā ‘‘kathāpetha ne’’ti āha. Te kathetuṃ na icchiṃsu. Eko puriso ‘‘ahamete kathāpessāmī’’ti te gahetvā antarāpaṇaṃ agamāsi. Tattheko ambapakkañca macche ca addasa, eko kabiṭṭhaphalañca ambilikāphalañca. Tattha purimo ‘‘mahāvisaṃ manussā khādanti, kathaṃ te kilāsino na hontī’’ti āha. Itaro ‘‘kathaṃ ime etaṃ nissāya kuṭṭhino na hontī’’ti āha. Evaṃ mānusiṃ vācaṃ kathetuṃ sakkontāpi dve atthe sampassamānā na kathentīti.

62.Dasameappaṭivānoti anukaṇṭhito apaccosakkito.

63.Ekādasameasantasannivāsanti asappurisānaṃ sannivāsaṃ.Na vadeyyāti ovādena vā anusāsaniyā vā na vadeyya, mā vadatūti attho.Therampāhaṃ na vadeyyanti ahampi theraṃ bhikkhuṃ ovādānusāsanivasena na vadeyyaṃ.Ahitānukampīti ahitaṃ icchamāno.No hitānukampīti hitaṃ anicchamāno.Noti naṃ vadeyyanti ‘‘ahaṃ tava vacanaṃ na karissa’’nti naṃ vadeyyaṃ.Viheṭheyyanti vacanassa akaraṇena viheṭheyyaṃ.Passampissanappaṭikareyyanti passantopi jānantopi ahaṃ tassa vacanaṃ na kareyyaṃ. Iminā upāyena sabbattha attho veditabbo. Sukkapakkhe panasādhūti naṃ vadeyyanti ‘‘sādhu bhaddakaṃ sukathitaṃ tayā’’ti tassa kathaṃ abhinandanto naṃ vadeyyanti attho.

64.Dvādasameubhato vacīsaṃsāroti dvīsupi pakkhesu aññamaññaṃ akkosanapaccakkosanavasena saṃsaramānā vācā vacīsaṃsāro.Diṭṭhipaḷāsoti diṭṭhiṃ nissāya uppajjanako yugaggāhalakkhaṇo paḷāso diṭṭhipaḷāso nāma.Cetaso āghātoti kopo. So hi cittaṃ āghātento uppajjati.Appaccayoti atuṭṭhākāro, domanassanti attho.Anabhiraddhīti kopoyeva. So hi anabhirādhanavasena anabhiraddhīti vuccati.Ajjhattaṃ avūpasantaṃ hotīti sabbampetaṃ niyakajjhattasaṅkhāte attano citte ca saddhivihārikaantevāsikasaṅkhātāya attano parisāya ca avūpasantaṃ hoti.Tasmetanti tasmiṃ etaṃ. Sesaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbanti.

(7) 2. Sukhavaggavaṇṇanā

65.Dutiyassa paṭhamegihisukhanti gihīnaṃ sabbakāmanipphattimūlakaṃ sukhaṃ.Pabbajitasukhanti pabbajitānaṃ pabbajjāmūlakaṃ sukhaṃ.

65.In the first of the second, gihisukha means the happiness of laypeople, rooted in the fulfillment of all desires. Pabbajitasukha means the happiness of renunciants, rooted in their renunciation.

66.Dutiyekāmasukhanti kāme ārabbha uppajjanakasukhaṃ.Nekkhammasukhanti nekkhammaṃ vuccati pabbajjā, taṃ ārabbha uppajjanakasukhaṃ.

66.In the second, kāmasukha means the happiness that arises in dependence on sense pleasures. Nekkhammasukha means nekkhamma, which is called renunciation, the happiness that arises in dependence on that.

67.Tatiyeupadhisukhanti tebhūmakasukhaṃ.Nirupadhisukhanti lokuttarasukhaṃ.

67.In the third, upadhisukha means the happiness of the three realms. Nirupadhisukha means supramundane happiness.

68.Catutthesāsavasukhanti āsavānaṃ paccayabhūtaṃ vaṭṭasukhaṃ.Anāsavasukhanti tesaṃ apaccayabhūtaṃ vivaṭṭasukhaṃ.

68.In the fourth, sāsavasukha means the happiness of the round of rebirths, which is the condition for the āsavas. Anāsavasukha means the happiness of liberation, which is not a condition for them.

69.Pañcamesāmisanti saṃkilesaṃ vaṭṭagāmisukhaṃ.Nirāmisanti nikkilesaṃ vivaṭṭagāmisukhaṃ.

69.In the fifth, sāmisa means the happiness that leads to defilement and the round of rebirths. Nirāmisa means the happiness that leads to the undefiled state and liberation.

70.Chaṭṭheariyasukhanti aputhujjanasukhaṃ.Anariyasukhanti puthujjanasukhaṃ.

70.In the sixth, ariyasukha means the happiness of those who are not ordinary people (puthujjana). Anariyasukha means the happiness of ordinary people (puthujjana).

71.Sattamekāyikanti kāyaviññāṇasahajātaṃ.Cetasikanti manodvārikasukhaṃ. Taṃ lokiyalokuttaramissakaṃ kathitaṃ.

71.In the seventh, kāyika means that which is co-arisen with body-consciousness. Cetasika means happiness through the mind-door. This is said to be a mixture of mundane and supramundane.

72.Aṭṭhamesappītikanti paṭhamadutiyajjhānasukhaṃ.Nippītikanti tatiyacatutthajjhānasukhaṃ. Tattha lokiyasappītikato lokiyanippītikaṃ, lokuttarasappītikato ca lokuttaranippītikaṃ agganti evaṃ bhummantaraṃ abhinditvā aggabhāvo veditabbo.

72.In the eighth, sappītika means the happiness of the first and second jhāna. Nippītika means the happiness of the third and fourth jhāna. Here, the superiority of mundane nippītika over mundane sappītika, and of supramundane nippītika over supramundane sappītika, should be understood as excellence without transgressing the levels.

73.Navamesātasukhanti tīsu jhānesu sukhaṃ.Upekkhāsukhanti catutthajjhānasukhaṃ.

73.In the ninth, sātasukha means the happiness in the three jhānas. Upekkhāsukha means the happiness of the fourth jhāna.

74.Dasamesamādhisukhanti appanaṃ vā upacāraṃ vā pattasukhaṃ.Asamādhisukhanti tadubhayaṃ appattasukhaṃ.

74.In the tenth, samādhisukha means the happiness attained by reaching appanā or upacāra samādhi. Asamādhisukha means the happiness of not attaining either of these.

75.Ekādasamesappītikārammaṇanti sappītikaṃ jhānadvayaṃ paccavekkhantassa uppannasukhaṃ.Nippītikārammaṇepi eseva nayo. Dvādasamepi imināva upāyena attho veditabbo.

75.In the eleventh, sappītikārammaṇa means the happiness that arises when reviewing the two jhānas with pīti. Nippītikārammaṇe also, the same method applies. In the twelfth too, the meaning should be understood in this way.

77.Terasamerūpārammaṇanti rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānārammaṇaṃ, yaṃkiñci rūpaṃ ārabbha uppajjanakaṃ vā.Arūpārammaṇanti arūpāvacarajjhānārammaṇaṃ, yaṃkiñci arūpaṃ ārabbha uppajjanakaṃ vāti.

77.In the thirteenth, rūpārammaṇa means the object of the fourth rūpāvacara jhāna, or whatever rūpa that gives rise to it. Arūpārammaṇa means the object of the arūpāvacara jhāna, or whatever arūpa that gives rise to it.

(8) 3. Sanimittavaggavaṇṇanā

(8) 3. Sanimittavaggavaṇṇanā

78-79.Tatiyassa paṭhamesanimittāti sakāraṇā. Dutiyādīsupi eseva nayo. Nidānaṃ hetu saṅkhāro paccayo rūpanti sabbānipi hi etāni kāraṇavevacanāneva.

78-79.In the first of the third, sanimittā means with a cause. The same method applies in the second and subsequent ones. Nidāna, hetu, saṅkhāra, paccaya, and rūpa, all these are indeed synonyms for cause.

84.Sattamesavedanāti paccayabhūtāya sampayuttavedanāya satiyeva uppajjanti, nāsatīti attho. Aṭṭhamanavamesupi eseva nayo.

84.In the seventh, savedanā means they arise only when there is feeling (vedanā) associated as a condition, not when there is none. The same method applies in the eighth and ninth.

87.Dasamesaṅkhatārammaṇāti paccayanibbattaṃ saṅkhatadhammaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvāva uppajjanti.No asaṅkhatārammaṇāti asaṅkhataṃ pana nibbānaṃ ārabbha na uppajjanti.Na hontīti maggakkhaṇe na honti nāma, phale patte nāhesunti. Evametesu dasasupi ṭhānesu yāva arahattā desanā desitāti.

87.In the tenth, saṅkhatārammaṇā means they arise only having made a conditioned (saṅkhata) phenomenon produced by conditions as their object. No asaṅkhatārammaṇā means they do not arise having unconditioned Nibbāna as their object. Na hontī means they are not present at the moment of the path (magga), meaning they are not when the fruit (phala) is attained. Thus, the teaching has been taught in these ten instances up to arahantship.

(9) 4. Dhammavaggavaṇṇanā

(9) 4. Dhammavaggavaṇṇanā

88.Catutthassa paṭhamecetovimuttīti phalasamādhi.Paññāvimuttīti phalapaññā.

88.In the first of the fourth, cetovimuttī means the phalasamādhi. Paññāvimuttī means the phalapaññā.

89.Dutiyepaggāhoti vīriyaṃ.Avikkhepoti cittekaggatā.

89.In the second, paggāho means effort (vīriya). Avikkhepo means one-pointedness of mind (cittekaggatā).

90.Tatiyenāmanti cattāro arūpakkhandhā.Rūpanti rūpakkhandho. Iti imasmiṃ sutte dhammakoṭṭhāsaparicchedañāṇaṃ nāma kathitaṃ.

90.In the third, nāma means the four immaterial aggregates. Rūpa means the material aggregate. Thus, in this sutta, what is called the knowledge of distinguishing sections of Dhamma has been spoken of.

91.Catutthevijjāti phalañāṇaṃ.Vimuttīti taṃsampayuttā sesadhammā.

91.In the fourth, vijjā means the knowledge of the fruit (phalañāṇa). Vimuttī means the remaining dhammas associated with it.

92.Pañcamebhavadiṭṭhīti sassatadiṭṭhi.Vibhavadiṭṭhīti ucchedadiṭṭhi. Chaṭṭhasattamāni uttānatthāneva.

92.In the fifth, bhavadiṭṭhī means the belief in eternalism (sassatadiṭṭhi). Vibhavadiṭṭhī means the belief in annihilationism (ucchedadiṭṭhi). The sixth and seventh are easy to understand.

95.Aṭṭhamedovacassatāti dubbacabhāvo.Pāpamittatāti pāpamittasevanabhāvo. Navamaṃ vuttavipariyāyena veditabbaṃ.

95.In the eighth, dovacassatā means being difficult to admonish (dubbacabhāvo). Pāpamittatā means associating with bad friends (pāpamittasevanabhāvo). The ninth should be understood in the opposite way to what has been said.

97.Dasamedhātukusalatāti aṭṭhārasa dhātuyo dhātūti jānanaṃ.Manasikārakusalatāti tāsaṃyeva dhātūnaṃ aniccādivasena lakkhaṇattayaṃ āropetvā jānanaṃ.

97.In the tenth, dhātukusalatā means knowing the eighteen elements (dhātu) as elements. Manasikārakusalatā means knowing those same elements by applying the three characteristics of impermanence, etc., to them.

98.Ekādasameāpattikusalatāti pañcannañca sattannañca āpattikkhandhānaṃ jānanaṃ.Āpattivuṭṭhānakusalatāti desanāya vā kammavācāya vā āpattīhi vuṭṭhānajānananti.

98.In the eleventh, āpattikusalatā means knowing the five or seven groups of offenses (āpattikkhandha). Āpattivuṭṭhānakusalatā means knowing how to emerge from offenses through confession or a formal act (kammavācā).

(10) 5. Bālavaggavaṇṇanā

(10) 5. Bālavaggavaṇṇanā

99.Pañcamassa paṭhameanāgataṃ bhāraṃ vahatīti ‘‘sammajjanī padīpo ca, udakaṃ āsanena ca, chandapārisuddhiutukkhānaṃ, bhikkhugaṇanā ca ovādo, pātimokkhaṃ therabhāroti vuccatī’’ti imaṃ dasavidhaṃ therabhāraṃ navako hutvā therena anajjhiṭṭho karonto anāgataṃ bhāraṃ vahati nāma.Āgataṃ bhāraṃ na vahatīti thero samāno tameva dasavidhaṃ bhāraṃ attanā vā akaronto paraṃ vā asamādapento āgataṃ bhāraṃ na vahati nāma. Dutiyasuttepi imināva nayena attho veditabbo.

99.In the first of the fifth, anāgataṃ bhāraṃ vahatī means a newly ordained monk, without being instructed by a senior monk, undertakes the ten duties of a senior monk, namely, “sweeping, providing light, water, and a seat, maintaining pure intention, disposal of excrement, counting the monks, giving advice, and reciting the Pātimokkha; these are called the duties of a senior monk,” he is said to be carrying a future burden. Āgataṃ bhāraṃ na vahatī means a senior monk who, being a senior, does not do those same ten duties himself or does not encourage others to do them, is said not to be carrying a present burden. The meaning in the second sutta should be understood in the same way.

101.Tatiyeakappiye kappiyasaññīti akappiye sīhamaṃsādimhi ‘‘kappiyaṃ ida’’nti evaṃsaññī.Kappiye akappiyasaññīti kumbhīlamaṃsabiḷāramaṃsādimhi kappiye ‘‘akappiyaṃ ida’’nti evaṃsaññī. Catutthaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.

101.In the third, akappiye kappiyasaññī means perceiving what is impermissible, such as lion’s meat, as “this is permissible.” Kappiye akappiyasaññī means perceiving what is permissible, such as the meat of a crocodile or cat, as “this is impermissible.” The fourth should be understood in the same way as stated above.

103.Pañcameanāpattiyā āpattisaññīti āpucchitvā bhaṇḍakaṃ dhovantassa, pattaṃ pacantassa, kese chindantassa, gāmaṃ pavisantassātiādīsu anāpatti, tattha ‘‘āpatti aya’’nti evaṃsaññī.Āpattiyā anāpattisaññīti tesaññeva vatthūnaṃ anāpucchākaraṇe āpatti, tattha ‘‘anāpattī’’ti evaṃsaññī. Chaṭṭhepi vuttanayeneva attho veditabbo. Sattamādīni uttānatthāneva.

103.In the fifth, anāpattiyā āpattisaññī means when there is no offense, such as when washing a bowl after asking permission, dyeing a robe, cutting hair, or entering a village, he perceives "this is an offense." Āpattiyā anāpattisaññī means when doing those same things without asking permission there is an offense, but he perceives "there is no offense." The meaning in the sixth should also be understood in the same way. The seventh and subsequent ones are easy to understand.

109.Ekādasameāsavāti kilesā.Na kukkuccāyitabbanti saṅghabhogassa apaṭṭhapanaṃ avicāraṇaṃ na kukkuccāyitabbaṃ nāma, taṃ kukkuccāyati.Kukkuccāyitabbanti tasseva paṭṭhapanaṃ vicāraṇaṃ, taṃ na kukkuccāyati. Dvādasamādīni heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva veditabbānīti.

109.In the eleventh, āsavā means defilements (kilesā). Na kukkuccāyitabbanti means not establishing or considering the Sangha’s property should not be a cause for remorse, but he makes it a cause for remorse. Kukkuccāyitabbanti means establishing or considering it should be a cause, but he does not make it a cause for remorse. The twelfth and subsequent ones should be understood in the same way as stated below.

3. Tatiyapaṇṇāsakaṃ

3. Tatiyapaṇṇāsakaṃ

(11) 1. Āsāduppajahavaggavaṇṇanā

(11) 1. Āsāduppajahavaggavaṇṇanā

119.Tatiyassa paṇṇāsakassa paṭhameāsāti taṇhā.Duppajahāti duccajā dunnīharā. Lābhāsāya duppajahabhāvena sattā dasapi vassāni vīsatipi saṭṭhipi vassāni ‘‘ajja labhissāma, sve labhissāmā’’ti rājānaṃ upaṭṭhahanti, kasikammādīni karonti, ubhatobyūḷhaṃ saṅgāmaṃ pakkhandanti, ajapathasaṅkupathādayo paṭipajjanti, nāvāya mahāsamuddaṃ pavisanti. Jīvitāsāya duppajahattā sampatte maraṇakālepi vassasatajīviṃ attānaṃ maññanti. So kammakammanimittādīni passantopi ‘‘dānaṃ dehi pūjaṃ, karohī’’ti anukampakehi vuccamāno ‘‘nāhaṃ marissāmi, jīvissāmi’’cceva āsāya kassaci vacanaṃ na gaṇhāti.

119.In the first of the third paṇṇāsaka, āsā means craving (taṇhā). Duppajahā means difficult to abandon, difficult to get rid of. Because of craving for gain, beings attend upon kings for ten, twenty, or sixty years thinking, "Today we will gain, tomorrow we will gain," they do agriculture and other work, they rush into fierce battles, they undertake difficult paths and dangerous routes, and they enter the great ocean by ship. Because of the craving to live, even when death has arrived, they think of themselves as living for a hundred years. Even seeing omens, karma, and signs, when told by compassionate people, "Give alms, make offerings," out of craving he does not heed anyone’s words, thinking, “I will not die, I will live.”

120.Dutiyepubbakārīti paṭhamaṃ upakārassa kārako.Kataññūkatavedīti tena kataṃ ñatvā pacchā kārako. Tesu pubbakārī ‘‘iṇaṃ demī’’ti saññaṃ karoti, pacchā kārako ‘‘iṇaṃ jīrāpemī’’ti saññaṃ karoti.

120.In the second, pubbakārī means one who does a service first. Kataññūkatavedī means knowing the service done by him, he does it later. Among these, the one who does it first makes the intention, “I will give a debt,” and the one who does it later makes the intention, “I will repay a debt.”

121.Tatiyetitto ca tappetā cāti paccekabuddho ca tathāgatasāvako ca khīṇāsavo titto nāma, tathāgato arahaṃ sammāsambuddho titto ca tappetā ca.

121.In the third, titto ca tappetā cā means a Paccekabuddha and a disciple of the Tathāgata, a khīṇāsava, is called titto, but the Tathāgata, an Arahant, a Sammāsambuddha, is titto ca tappetā ca.

122.Catuttheduttappayāti dāyakena duttappayā tappetuṃ na sukarā.Nikkhipatīti nidahati na paribhuñjati.Vissajjetīti paresaṃ deti.

122.In the fourth, duttappayā means difficult for a donor to please. Nikkhipatī means he stores it away and does not use it. Vissajjetī means he gives it to others.

123.Pañcamena vissajjetīti sabbaṃyeva paresaṃ na deti, attano pana yāpanamattaṃ gahetvā avasesaṃ deti.

123.In the fifth, na vissajjetī means he does not give everything to others, but taking only what is sufficient for his own sustenance, he gives the remainder.

124.Chaṭṭhesubhanimittanti iṭṭhārammaṇaṃ.

124.In the sixth, subhanimitta means a pleasing object.

125.Sattamepaṭighanimittanti aniṭṭhanimittaṃ.

125.In the seventh, paṭighanimitta means an unpleasing object.

126.Aṭṭhameparato ca ghosoti parassa santikā assaddhammasavanaṃ.

126.In the eighth, parato ca ghoso means hearing the teaching of the untrue Dhamma from another.

127.Navameparato ca ghosoti parassa santikā saddhammasavanaṃ. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.

127.In the ninth, parato ca ghoso means hearing the teaching of the true Dhamma from another. The rest is easy to understand everywhere.

(12) 2. Āyācanavaggavaṇṇanā

(12) 2. Āyācanavaggavaṇṇanā

131.Dutiyassa paṭhameevaṃ sammā āyācamāno āyāceyyāti saddho bhikkhu uṭṭhahitvā ‘‘yādiso sāriputtatthero paññāya, ahampi tādiso homi. Yādiso mahāmoggallānatthero iddhiyā, ahampi tādiso homī’’ti evaṃ āyācanto pihento patthento yaṃ atthi, tasseva patthitattā sammā pattheyya nāma. Ito uttari patthento micchā pattheyya. Evarūpā hi patthanā yaṃ natthi, tassa patthitattā micchāpatthanā nāma hoti. Kiṃ kāraṇā?Esā, bhikkhave, tulā etaṃ pamāṇanti yathā hi suvaṇṇaṃ vā hiraññaṃ vā tulentassa tulā icchitabbā, dhaññaṃ minantassa mānanti tulane tulā, minane ca mānaṃ pamāṇaṃ hoti, evameva mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ esā tulā etaṃ pamāṇaṃ yadidaṃ sāriputtamoggallānā. Te gahetvā ‘‘ahampi ñāṇena vā iddhiyā vā etampamāṇo homī’’ti attānaṃ tuletuṃ vā pamāṇetuṃ vā sakkā, na ito aññathā.

131.In the first of the second, evaṃ sammā āyācamāno āyāceyyā means a faithful bhikkhu, having risen, should rightly aspire, desiring and longing, "Just as Sāriputta Thera was in wisdom, may I also be like that. Just as Mahāmoggallāna Thera was in psychic power, may I also be like that," since he aspires for what is possible. Aspiring for more than this, he would be wrongly aspiring. For such an aspiration is a wrong aspiration, since he aspires for what is not possible. Why? Esā, bhikkhave, tulā etaṃ pamāṇanti Just as a balance is needed for weighing gold or silver, and a measure for measuring grain, so this, namely Sāriputta and Moggallāna, is the balance and measure for my bhikkhu disciples. Taking them, it is possible to weigh or measure oneself, thinking, "May I also be of this measure in knowledge or psychic power," but not otherwise.

132.Dutiyādīsupi eseva nayo. Idaṃ panettha visesamattaṃ –khemā ca bhikkhunī uppalavaṇṇā cāti etāsu hi khemā paññāya aggā, uppalavaṇṇā iddhiyā. Tasmā ‘‘paññāya vā iddhiyā vā etādisī homī’’ti sammā āyācamānā āyāceyya. Tathā citto gahapati paññāya aggo, hatthako rājakumāro mahiddhikatāya. Tasmā ‘‘paññāya vā iddhiyā vā ediso homī’’ti sammā āyācamāno āyāceyya. Khujjuttarāpi mahāpaññatāya aggā, nandamātā mahiddhikatāya. Tasmā ‘‘paññāya vā iddhiyā vā etādisī homī’’ti sammā āyācamānā āyāceyya.

132.The same method applies in the second and subsequent ones. However, there is only this difference here: khemā ca bhikkhunī uppalavaṇṇā cāti For among these, Khemā was foremost in wisdom, and Uppalavaṇṇā in psychic power. Therefore, one should rightly aspire, desiring, "May I be like this in wisdom or psychic power." Similarly, Citta the householder was foremost in wisdom, and Hatthaka, the prince, in great psychic power. Therefore, one should rightly aspire, desiring, "May I be like this in wisdom or psychic power." Khujjuttarā was also foremost in great wisdom, and Nandamātā in great psychic power. Therefore, one should rightly aspire, desiring, "May I be like this in wisdom or psychic power."

135.Pañcamekhatanti guṇānaṃ khatattā khataṃ.Upahatanti guṇānaṃ upahatattā upahataṃ, chinnaguṇaṃ naṭṭhaguṇanti attho.Attānaṃ pariharatīti nigguṇaṃ attānaṃ jaggati gopāyati.Sāvajjoti sadoso.Sānuvajjoti saupavādo.Pasavatīti paṭilabhati.Ananuviccāti ajānitvā avinicchinitvā.Apariyogāhetvāti ananupavisitvā.Avaṇṇārahassāti avaṇṇayuttassa micchāpaṭipannassa titthiyassa vā titthiyasāvakassa vā.Vaṇṇaṃ bhāsatīti ‘‘suppaṭipanno esa sammāpaṭipanno’’ti guṇaṃ katheti.Vaṇṇārahassāti buddhādīsu aññatarassa sammāpaṭipannassa.Avaṇṇaṃ bhāsatīti ‘‘duppaṭipanno esa micchāpaṭipanno’’ti aguṇaṃ katheti.Avaṇṇārahassa avaṇṇaṃ bhāsatīti idhekacco puggalo duppaṭipannānaṃ micchāpaṭipannānaṃ titthiyānaṃ titthiyasāvakānaṃ ‘‘itipi duppaṭipannā itipi micchāpaṭipannā’’ti avaṇṇaṃ bhāsati.Vaṇṇārahassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsatīti suppaṭipannānaṃ sammāpaṭipannānaṃ buddhānaṃ buddhasāvakānaṃ ‘‘itipi suppaṭipannā itipi sammāpaṭipannā’’ti vaṇṇaṃ bhāsati.

135.In the fifth, khata means ruined, because of the ruin of virtues. Upahata means injured, because of the injury to virtues; meaning one whose virtues are destroyed or lost. Attānaṃ pariharatī means he cherishes and protects a worthless self. Sāvajjo means with fault. Sānuvajjo means subject to blame. Pasavatī means he obtains. Ananuviccā means without knowing, without deciding. Apariyogāhetvā means without investigating. Avaṇṇārahassāti means of a sectarian or a disciple of a sectarian who is worthy of dispraise and wrongly practicing. Vaṇṇaṃ bhāsatī means he speaks of the virtues, saying, "This one is practicing well, practicing correctly." Vaṇṇārahassāti means of one who is rightly practicing, such as a Buddha, etc. Avaṇṇaṃ bhāsatī means he speaks of the faults, saying, "This one is practicing badly, practicing wrongly." Avaṇṇārahassa avaṇṇaṃ bhāsatī means here someone speaks dispraise of those sectarians or disciples of sectarians who are wrongly practicing, saying, "In this way, they are wrongly practicing." Vaṇṇārahassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsatī means he speaks praise of the Buddhas or disciples of Buddhas who are rightly practicing, saying, "In this way, they are rightly practicing."

136.Chaṭṭheappasādanīye ṭhāneti appasādakāraṇe.Pasādaṃupadaṃsetīti duppaṭipadāya micchāpaṭipadāya ‘‘ayaṃ suppaṭipadā sammāpaṭipadā’’ti pasādaṃ janeti.Pasādanīye ṭhāne appasādanti suppaṭipadāya sammāpaṭipadāya ‘‘ayaṃ duppaṭipadā micchāpaṭipadā’’ti appasādaṃ janetīti. Sesamettha uttānameva.

136.In the sixth, appasādanīye ṭhāne means in a situation that does not cause faith. Pasādaṃ upadaṃsetī means he produces faith in wrong practice, saying, "This is right practice." Pasādanīye ṭhāne appasādanti means he produces a lack of faith in right practice, saying, "This is wrong practice." The rest here is easy to understand.

137.Sattame dvīsūti dvīsu okāsesu dvīsu kāraṇesu.Micchāpaṭipajjamānoti micchāpaṭipattiṃ paṭipajjamāno.Mātari ca pitari cāti mittavindako viya mātari, ajātasattu viya pitari. Sukkapakkho vuttanayeneva veditabbo.

137.Sattame dvīsūti in two opportunities, in two reasons. Micchāpaṭipajjamānoti means practicing wrongly. Mātari ca pitari cāti means towards his mother like Mittavindaka, and towards his father like Ajātasattu. The bright side should be understood in the same way as stated above.

138.Aṭṭhametathāgate ca tathāgatasāvake cāti devadatto viya tathāgate, kokāliko viya ca tathāgatasāvake. Sukkapakkhe ānandatthero viya tathāgate, nandagopālakaseṭṭhiputto viya ca tathāgatasāvake.

138.In the eighth, tathāgate ca tathāgatasāvake cāti means towards the Tathāgata like Devadatta, and towards a disciple of the Tathāgata like Kokālika. On the bright side, like Ānanda Thera towards the Tathāgata, and like Nanda the cowherd's son towards a disciple of the Tathāgata.

139.Navamesacittavodānanti sakacittassa vodānaṃ, aṭṭhannaṃ samāpattīnaṃ etaṃ nāmaṃ.Na ca kiñci loke upādiyatīti loke ca rūpādīsu dhammesu kiñci ekaṃ dhammampi na gaṇhāti na parāmasati. Evamettha anupādānaṃ nāma dutiyo dhammo hoti. Dasamekādasamāni uttānatthānevāti.

139.In the ninth, sacittavodāna means the purification (vodāna) of one's own mind (sakacitta); this is a name for the eight attainments (samāpatti). Na ca kiñci loke upādiyatīti means one does not grasp or cling to even a single dhamma among the rūpa and other dhammas in the world. Thus, non-grasping (anupādāna) is the second dhamma here. The tenth and eleventh are straightforward in meaning.

(13) 3. Dānavaggavaṇṇanā

(13) 3. Dānavaggavaṇṇanā (Explanation of the Chapter on Giving)

142.Tatiyassa paṭhamedānānīti diyyanakavasena dānāni, deyyadhammassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Savatthukā vā cetanā dānaṃ, sampattipariccāgassetaṃ nāmaṃ.Āmisadānanti cattāro paccayā diyyanakavasena āmisadānaṃ nāma.Dhammadānanti idhekacco amatapattipaṭipadaṃ kathetvā deti, idaṃ dhammadānaṃ nāma.

142.In the first of the third, dānāni means givings (dāna) in the sense of the act of giving; this is a name for the things to be given (deyyadhamma). Or, the intention accompanied by material (savatthukā) is giving; this is a name for the relinquishment of possessions (sampattipariccāga). Āmisadāna means the giving of material things (āmisa) in the sense of the act of giving; the four requisites are called āmisadāna. Dhammadāna means here someone teaches and gives the path to the attainment of the Deathless; this is called dhammadāna.

143.Dutiye cattāro paccayā yajanakavasenayāgonāmadhammopiyajanakavasena yāgoti veditabbo.

143.In the second, the four requisites are called yāga in the sense of offering (yajana); dhamma should also be understood as yāga in the sense of offering.

144.Tatiye āmisassa cajanaṃāmisacāgo,dhammassa cajanaṃdhammacāgo. Catutthe upasaggamattaṃ viseso.

144.In the third, the relinquishing of material things is āmisacāgo, the relinquishing of dhamma is dhammacāgo. In the fourth, only the prefix is different.

146.Pañcame catunnaṃ paccayānaṃ bhuñjanaṃāmisabhogo,dhammassa bhuñjanaṃdhammabhogo. Chaṭṭhe upasaggamattaṃ viseso.

146.In the fifth, the enjoying of the four requisites is āmisabhogo, the enjoying of dhamma is dhammabhogo. In the sixth, only the prefix is different.

148.Sattame catunnaṃ paccayānaṃ saṃvibhajanaṃāmisasaṃvibhāgo,dhammassa saṃvibhajanaṃdhammasaṃvibhāgo.

148.In the seventh, the sharing of the four requisites is āmisasaṃvibhāgo, the sharing of dhamma is dhammasaṃvibhāgo.

149.Aṭṭhame catūhi paccayehi saṅgahoāmisasaṅgaho,dhammena saṅgahodhammasaṅgaho.

149.In the eighth, the gathering together with the four requisites is āmisasaṅgaho, the gathering together with dhamma is dhammasaṅgaho.

150.Navame catūhi paccayehi anuggaṇhanaṃāmisānuggaho,dhammena anuggaṇhanaṃdhammānuggaho.

150.In the ninth, the assisting with the four requisites is āmisānuggaho, the assisting with dhamma is dhammānuggaho.

151.Dasame catūhi paccayehi anukampanaṃāmisānukampā,dhammena anukampanaṃdhammānukampāti.

151.In the tenth, the showing of compassion with the four requisites is āmisānukampā, the showing of compassion with dhamma is dhammānukampā.

(14) 4. Santhāravaggavaṇṇanā

(14) 4. Santhāravaggavaṇṇanā (Explanation of the Chapter on Sharing)

152.Catutthassa paṭhame catūhi paccayehi attano ca parassa ca antarapaṭicchādanavasena santharaṇaṃāmisasanthāro,dhammena santharaṇaṃdhammasanthāro. Dutiye upasaggamattaṃ viseso.

152.In the first of the fourth, the sharing with the four requisites by way of covering oneself and others is āmisasanthāro, the sharing with dhamma is dhammasanthāro. In the second, only the prefix is different.

154.Tatiye vuttappakārassa āmisassa esanāāmisesanā,dhammassa esanādhammesanā. Catutthe upasaggamattameva viseso.

154.In the third, the seeking of material things (āmisa) as described above is āmisesanā, the seeking of dhamma is dhammesanā. In the fourth, only the prefix is different.

156.Pañcame matthakappattā āmisapariyesanāāmisapariyeṭṭhi,matthakappattāva dhammapariyesanādhammapariyeṭṭhīti vuttā.

156.In the fifth, the thorough search for material things is āmisapariyeṭṭhi, the thorough search for dhamma is called dhammapariyeṭṭhī.

157.Chaṭṭhe āmisena pūjanaṃāmisapūjā,dhammena pūjanaṃdhammapūjā.

157.In the sixth, the honoring with material things is āmisapūjā, the honoring with dhamma is dhammapūjā.

158.Sattameātitheyyānīti āgantukadānāni. Atitheyyānītipi pāṭho.

158.In the seventh, ātitheyyānī means gifts for guests. "Atitheyyānī" is also a reading.

159.Aṭṭhame āmisaṃ ijjhanakasamijjhanakavasenaāmisiddhi,dhammopi ijjhanakasamijjhanakavasenadhammiddhi.

159.In the eighth, success regarding material things (āmisa) by way of immediate and gradual attainment is āmisiddhi, likewise, success regarding dhamma is dhammiddhi.

160.Navame āmisena vaḍḍhanaṃāmisavuddhi,dhammena vaḍḍhanaṃdhammavuddhi.

160.In the ninth, growth (vaḍḍhanaṃ) through material things is āmisavuddhi, growth through dhamma is dhammavuddhi.

161.Dasame ratikaraṇaṭṭhena āmisaṃāmisaratanaṃ,dhammodhammaratanaṃ.

161.In the tenth, material things (āmisa) in the sense of causing delight is āmisaratanaṃ, dhamma is dhammaratanaṃ.

162.Ekādasame āmisassa cinanaṃ vaḍḍhanaṃāmisasannicayo,dhammassa cinanaṃ vaḍḍhanaṃdhammasannicayo.

162.In the eleventh, the accumulation and increase of material things is āmisasannicayo, the accumulation and increase of dhamma is dhammasannicayo.

163.Dvādasame āmisassa vipulabhāvoāmisavepullaṃ,dhammassa vipulabhāvodhammavepullanti.

163.In the twelfth, the abundance of material things is āmisavepullaṃ, the abundance of dhamma is dhammavepullaṃ.

(15) 5. Samāpattivaggavaṇṇanā

(15) 5. Samāpattivaggavaṇṇanā (Explanation of the Chapter on Attainments)

164.Pañcamassa paṭhamesamāpattikusalatāti āhārasappāyaṃ utusappāyaṃ pariggaṇhitvā samāpattisamāpajjane chekatā.Samāpattivuṭṭhānakusalatāti yathāparicchedena gate kāle viyatto hutvā uṭṭhahanto vuṭṭhānakusalo nāma hoti, evaṃ kusalatā.

164.In the first of the fifth, samāpattikusalatā means skillfulness in entering into the attainments (samāpatti), having ascertained suitable food and a suitable climate. Samāpattivuṭṭhānakusalatā means skillfulness in emerging; one who emerges clearly, knowing the time for emerging, is called skilled in emerging; thus, this is skillfulness.

165.Dutiyeajjavanti ujubhāvo.Maddavanti mudubhāvo.

165.In the second, ajjava means uprightness, maddava means gentleness.

166.Tatiyekhantīti adhivāsanakhanti.Soraccanti susīlyabhāvena suratabhāvo.

166.In the third, khantī means forbearance (adhivāsanakhanti), soracca means amiability (suratabhāva) through good conduct (susīlyabhāva).

167.Catutthesākhalyanti saṇhavācāvasena sammodamānabhāvo.Paṭisanthāroti āmisena vā dhammena vā paṭisantharaṇaṃ.

167.In the fourth, sākhalya means sociability (sammodamānabhāvo) through gentle speech, paṭisanthāro means sharing (paṭisantharaṇaṃ) with material things or with dhamma.

168.Pañcameavihiṃsāti karuṇāpubbabhāgo.Soceyyanti sīlavasena sucibhāvo. Chaṭṭhasattamāni uttānatthāneva.

168.In the fifth, avihiṃsā means having compassion as its preliminary part, soceyya means purity (sucibhāvo) in terms of virtue. The sixth and seventh are straightforward in meaning.

171.Aṭṭhamepaṭisaṅkhānabalanti paccavekkhaṇabalaṃ.

171.In the eighth, paṭisaṅkhānabala means the power of reflection (paccavekkhaṇabalaṃ).

172.Navame muṭṭhassacce akampanena satiyevasatibalaṃ. Uddhacce akampanena samādhiyevasamādhibalaṃ.

172.In the ninth, satibalaṃ means mindfulness (sati) itself, unwavering in the face of forgetfulness (muṭṭhassacce); samādhibalaṃ means concentration (samādhi) itself, unwavering in the face of distraction (uddhacce).

173.Dasamesamathoti cittekaggatā.Vipassanāti saṅkhārapariggāhakaññāṇaṃ.

173.In the tenth, samatho means one-pointedness of mind (cittekaggatā), vipassanā means the knowledge that discerns conditioned phenomena (saṅkhārapariggāhakaññāṇaṃ).

174.Ekādasamesīlavipattīti dussīlyaṃ.Diṭṭhivipattīti micchādiṭṭhi.

174.In the eleventh, sīlavipattī means immorality (dussīlya), diṭṭhivipattī means wrong view (micchādiṭṭhi).

175.Dvādasamesīlasampadāti paripuṇṇasīlatā.Diṭṭhisampadāti sammādiṭṭhikabhāvo. Tena kammassakatasammādiṭṭhi, jhānasammādiṭṭhi, vipassanāsammādiṭṭhi, maggasammādiṭṭhi, phalasammādiṭṭhīti sabbāpi pañcavidhā sammādiṭṭhi saṅgahitā hoti.

175.In the twelfth, sīlasampadā means perfection of virtue (paripuṇṇasīlatā), diṭṭhisampadā means possessing right view (sammādiṭṭhikabhāvo). Therefore, kamma-ownership right view (kammassakatasammādiṭṭhi), jhāna right view, vipassanā right view, path right view, and fruition right view are all included, as the fivefold right view.

176.Terasamesīlavisuddhīti visuddhisampāpakaṃ sīlaṃ.Diṭṭhivisuddhīti visuddhisampāpikā catumaggasammādiṭṭhi, pañcavidhāpi vā sammādiṭṭhi.

176.In the thirteenth, sīlavisuddhī means virtue that leads to purification (visuddhisampāpakaṃ sīlaṃ), diṭṭhivisuddhī means the fourfold path right view that leads to purification (visuddhisampāpikā catumaggasammādiṭṭhi), or even the fivefold right view.

177.Cuddasamediṭṭhivisuddhīti visuddhisampāpikā sammādiṭṭhiyeva.Yathādiṭṭhissa ca padhānanti heṭṭhimamaggasampayuttaṃ vīriyaṃ. Tañhi tassā diṭṭhiyā anurūpattā ‘‘yathādiṭṭhissa ca padhāna’’nti vuttaṃ.

177.In the fourteenth, diṭṭhivisuddhī means right view itself that leads to purification (visuddhisampāpikā sammādiṭṭhiyeva), yathādiṭṭhissa ca padhāna means the effort associated with the lower path, for it is said "yathādiṭṭhissa ca padhāna" because it is in accordance with that view.

178.Pannarasameasantuṭṭhitā ca kusalesu dhammesūti aññatra arahattamaggā kusalesu dhammesu asantuṭṭhibhāvo.

178.In the fifteenth, asantuṭṭhitā ca kusalesu dhammesū means the state of being unsatisfied with skillful qualities (kusalesu dhammesu), other than the path of Arahatship.

179.Soḷasamemuṭṭhassaccanti muṭṭhassatibhāvo.Asampajaññanti aññāṇabhāvo.

179.In the sixteenth, muṭṭhassacca means forgetfulness, asampajañña means lack of knowledge.

180.Sattarasame apilāpanalakkhaṇāsati. Sammā pajānanalakkhaṇaṃsampajaññanti.

180.In the seventeenth, sati has the characteristic of non-confusion, sampajañña has the characteristic of right understanding.

1. Kodhapeyyālaṃ

1. Kodhapeyyālaṃ (Repetition on Anger)

181.Ito paresu kujjhanalakkhaṇokodho. Upanandhanalakkhaṇoupanāho. Sukatakaraṇamakkhanalakkhaṇomakkho. Yugaggāhalakkhaṇopalāso. Usūyanalakkhaṇāissā. Pañcamaccherabhāvomacchariyaṃ. Taṃ sabbampi maccharāyanalakkhaṇaṃ. Katapaṭicchādanalakkhaṇāmāyā. Kerāṭikalakkhaṇaṃsāṭheyyaṃ. Alajjanākāroahirikaṃ. Upavādato abhāyanākāroanottappaṃ. Akkodhādayo tesaṃ paṭipakkhavasena veditabbā.

181.In the following, kodho is anger, characterized by irritation, upanāho is resentment, characterized by binding, makkho is denigration, characterized by concealing one's good deeds, palāso is insolence, characterized by contention, issā is envy, characterized by displeasure, macchariyaṃ is avarice, the fifth type of avarice, all of which is characterized by miserliness, māyā is deceit, characterized by concealing one's faults, sāṭheyyaṃ is craftiness, characterized by trickery, ahirikaṃ is shamelessness, characterized by lack of embarrassment, anottappaṃ is recklessness, characterized by lack of dread of blame. Akkodhā and the others should be understood as the opposites of these.

185.Sekkhassa bhikkhunoti sattavidhassāpi sekkhassa upariupariguṇehi parihānāya saṃvattanti, puthujjanassa pana paṭhamataraṃyeva parihānāya saṃvattantīti veditabbā.Aparihānāyāti upariupariguṇehi aparihānatthāya.

185.Sekkhassa bhikkhunoti means these qualities lead to decline from the superior qualities of even the seven kinds of trainees (sekha), but for an ordinary person (puthujjana), they lead to decline even sooner. Aparihānāyāti means for non-decline from superior qualities.

187.Yathābhataṃ nikkhittoti yathā ānetvā nikkhitto, evaṃ niraye patiṭṭhito vāti veditabbo.

187.Yathābhataṃ nikkhittoti should be understood as being established in hell, just as he was brought and thrown down.

190.Ekaccoti yassete kodhādayo atthi, so ekacco nāma.

190.Ekaccoti means one who has these anger and so on is called "ekacco".

2. Akusalapeyyālaṃ

2. Akusalapeyyālaṃ (Repetition on the Unwholesome)

191-200.Sāvajjāti sadosā.Anavajjāti niddosā.Dukkhudrayāti dukkhavaḍḍhikā.Sukhudriyāti sukhavaḍḍhikā.Sabyābajjhāti sadukkhā.Abyābajjhāti niddukkhā. Ettāvatā vaṭṭavivaṭṭameva kathitaṃ.

191-200.Sāvajjāti means with fault (sadosā), anavajjāti means without fault (niddosā), dukkhudrayāti means increasing suffering (dukkhavaḍḍhikā), sukhudriyāti means increasing happiness (sukhavaḍḍhikā), sabyābajjhāti means with suffering (sadukkhā), abyābajjhāti means without suffering (niddukkhā). So far, only the cycle of existence and its cessation have been discussed.

3. Vinayapeyyālaṃ

3. Vinayapeyyālaṃ (Repetition on the Vinaya)

201.Dveme,bhikkhave, atthavase paṭiccāti, bhikkhave, dve atthe nissāya dve kāraṇāni sandhāya.Sikkhāpadaṃ paññattanti sikkhākoṭṭhāso ṭhapito.Saṅghasuṭṭhutāyāti saṅghassa suṭṭhubhāvāya, ‘‘suṭṭhu, bhante’’ti vatvā sampaṭicchanatthāyāti attho.Saṅghaphāsutāyāti saṅghassa phāsuvihāratthāya.Dummaṅkūnanti dussīlānaṃ.Pesalānanti pīyasīlānaṃ.Diṭṭhadhammikānaṃ āsavānanti diṭṭhadhamme imasmiṃyeva attabhāve vītikkamapaccayā paṭiladdhabbānaṃ vadhabandhanādidukkhadhammasaṅkhātānaṃ āsavānaṃ.Saṃvarāyāti pidahanatthāya.Samparāyikānanti tathārūpānaṃyeva apāyadukkhasaṅkhātānaṃ samparāye uppajjanakaāsavānaṃ.Paṭighātāyāti paṭisedhanatthāya.Verānanti akusalaverānampi puggalaverānampi.Vajjānanti dosānaṃ. Te eva vā dukkhadhammā vajjanīyattā idha vajjāti adhippetā.Bhayānanti cittutrāsabhayānampi bhayahetūnaṃ tesaṃyeva dukkhadhammānampi.Akusalānanti akkhamaṭṭhena akusalasaṅkhātānaṃ dukkhadhammānaṃ.Gihīnaṃ anukampāyāti gihīsu ujjhāyantesu paññattasikkhāpadaṃ gihīnaṃ anukampāya paññattaṃ nāma.Pāpicchānaṃ pakkhupacchedāyāti pāpicchā pakkhaṃ nissāya saṅghaṃ bhindeyyunti tesaṃ pakkhupacchedanatthāya.Appasannānaṃ pasādāyāti pubbe appasannānampi paṇḍitamanussānaṃ sikkhāpadapaññattisampadaṃ disvā pasāduppattiatthāya.Pasannānaṃ bhiyyobhāvāyāti pasannānaṃ uparūparipasādabhāvāya.Saddhammaṭṭhitiyāti saddhammassa ciraṭṭhitatthaṃ.Vinayānuggahāyāti pañcavidhassāpi vinayassa anuggaṇhanatthāya.

201.Dveme, bhikkhave, atthavase paṭiccāti, O monks, relying on two purposes, with reference to two reasons. Sikkhāpadaṃ paññattanti means a rule of training (sikkhākoṭṭhāso) is established. Saṅghasuṭṭhutāyāti means for the well-being of the Sangha; the meaning is for the purpose of receiving it, saying "It is well, venerable sir." Saṅghaphāsutāyāti means for the comfortable dwelling of the Sangha. Dummaṅkūnanti means of the immoral. Pesalānanti means of those with pleasing virtue. Diṭṭhadhammikānaṃ āsavānanti means of the āsavas consisting of painful conditions such as execution, imprisonment, etc., which are to be obtained in this very life (diṭṭhadhamme), in this very existence (attabhāve), due to transgression (vītikkamapaccayā). Saṃvarāyāti means for restraint (pidahanatthāya). Samparāyikānanti means of the āsavas that cause the arising in the next world (samparāye), consisting of suffering in the lower realms. Paṭighātāyāti means for warding off (paṭisedhanatthāya). Verānanti means both unwholesome enmities (akusalaverānaṃ) and personal enmities (puggalaverānaṃ). Vajjānanti means of faults (dosānaṃ). Or, those very painful conditions are here intended as faults (vajja) because they are to be avoided (vajjanīyattā). Bhayānanti means of fears, both fears of mental agitation (cittutrāsabhayānaṃ) and the causes of fear, those very painful conditions. Akusalānanti means of painful conditions called unwholesome (akusalasaṅkhātānaṃ) in the sense of being incapable (akkhamaṭṭhena). Gihīnaṃ anukampāyāti means the rule of training established while the laypeople were complaining is established out of compassion for the laypeople. Pāpicchānaṃ pakkhupacchedāyāti means for the purpose of cutting off the support of those with evil desires (pāpicchā), lest they should cause a schism in the Sangha relying on their faction (pakkhaṃ nissāya). Appasannānaṃ pasādāyāti means for the arising of confidence in those learned people (paṇḍitamanussānaṃ) who were previously without confidence, upon seeing the excellence of the establishment of the rule of training. Pasannānaṃ bhiyyobhāvāyāti means for the further increase of confidence in those who are already confident. Saddhammaṭṭhitiyāti means for the long standing of the Good Dhamma. Vinayānuggahāyāti means for the support of the five kinds of Vinaya.

202-230.Pātimokkhaṃ paññattanti bhikkhupātimokkhaṃ bhikkhunipātimokkhanti duvidhaṃ pātimokkhaṃ paññattaṃ.Pātimokkhuddesotibhikkhūnaṃ pañca, bhikkhunīnaṃ cattāroti nava pātimokkhuddesā paññattā. Pātimokkhaṭṭhapananti uposathaṭṭhapanaṃ.Pavāraṇā paññattāti cātuddasikā pannarasikāti dve pavāraṇā paññattā.Pavāraṇaṭṭhapanaṃ paññattanti sāpattikassa bhikkhuno pavāraṇā uttiyā vattamānāya pavāraṇaṭṭhapanaṃ paññattaṃ. Tajjanīyakammādīsu bhikkhū vācāsattīhi vitudantānaṃ paṇḍukalohitakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃtajjanīyakammaṃ(cūḷava. 1 ādayo) paññattaṃ. Bālassa abyattassa seyyasakassa bhikkhunoniyassakammaṃpaññattaṃ. Kuladūsake assajipunabbasuke bhikkhū ārabbhapabbājanīyakammaṃ(cūḷava. 21 ādayo) paññattaṃ. Gihīnaṃ akkosakassa sudhammattherassapaṭisāraṇīyakammaṃ(cūḷava. 33 ādayo) paññattaṃ. Āpattiyā adassanādīsuukkhepanīyakammaṃpaññattaṃ. Garukāpattiṃ āpannassa paṭicchannāya āpattiyāparivāsadānaṃpaññattaṃ. Parivāse antarāpattiṃ āpannassamūlāya paṭikassanaṃpaññattaṃ. Paṭicchannāyapi appaṭicchannāyapi āpattiyāmānattadānaṃpaññattaṃ. Ciṇṇamānattassaabbhānaṃpaññattaṃ. Sammā vattantassaosāraṇīyaṃpaññattaṃ. Asammāvattanādīsunissāraṇīyaṃpaññattaṃ.

202-230.Pātimokkhaṃ paññattanti means the Pātimokkha for monks and the Pātimokkha for nuns, these two Pātimokkhas are established. Pātimokkhuddesoti means nine recitations of the Pātimokkha are established: five for monks and four for nuns. Pātimokkhaṭṭhapananti means the establishment of the Uposatha. Pavāraṇā paññattāti means two Pavāraṇās are established: the fourteenth and the fifteenth. Pavāraṇaṭṭhapanaṃ paññattanti means the establishment of Pavāraṇā is established when the Pavāraṇā of a monk who has committed an offense is postponed while the Utti is ongoing. Tajjanīyakammaṃ(cūḷava. 1 ādayo) is prescribed for monks who are like Pandukalohitaka trees, who harass other monks with verbal attacks. Niyassakammaṃ is prescribed for a foolish, incompetent, and dependent monk. Pabbājanīyakammaṃ(cūḷava. 21 ādayo) is prescribed with reference to monks who corrupt families, who are rogues and repeat offenders. Paṭisāraṇīyakammaṃ(cūḷava. 33 ādayo) is prescribed for Sudhammatthera, who curses laypeople. Ukkhepanīyakammaṃ is prescribed for not seeing an offense, and so on. Parivāsadānaṃ is prescribed for one who has committed a grave offense and has concealed it. Mūlāya paṭikassanaṃ is prescribed for one who has committed another offense while in parivāsa. Mānattadānaṃ is prescribed for an offense whether concealed or unconcealed. Abbhānaṃ is prescribed for one who has completed mānatta. Osāraṇīyaṃ is prescribed for one who behaves properly. Nissāraṇīyaṃ is prescribed for behaving improperly, and so on.

upasampadāpaññattā. Ñattikammaṃ nava ṭhānāni gacchatīti evaṃ navaṭṭhānikaṃñattikammaṃpaññattaṃ. Ñattidutiyakammaṃ satta ṭhānāni gacchatīti evaṃ sattaṭṭhānikamevañattidutiyakammaṃpaññattaṃ. Ñatticatutthakammaṃ satta ṭhānāni gacchatīti evaṃ sattaṭṭhānikamevañatticatutthakammaṃpaññattaṃ. Paṭhamapārājikādīnaṃ paṭhamapaññattiapaññatte paññattaṃ. Tesaṃyeva anupaññattipaññatte anupaññattaṃ. Dhammasammukhatā vinayasammukhatā saṅghasammukhatā puggalasammukhatāti imassa catubbidhassa sammukhībhāvassa vasenasammukhāvinayopaññatto. Sativepullappattassa khīṇāsavassa acodanatthāyasativinayopaññatto. Ummattakassa bhikkhunoamūḷhavinayopaññatto. Appaṭiññāya cuditakassa āpattiyā ataraṇatthaṃpaṭiññātakaraṇaṃpaññattaṃ. Bahutarānaṃ dhammavādīnaṃ laddhiṃ gahetvā adhikaraṇavūpasamanatthaṃ.Yebhuyyasikāpaññattā. Pāpussannassa puggalassa niggaṇhanatthaṃtassapāpiyasikāpaññattā. Bhaṇḍanādivasena bahuṃ assāmaṇakaṃ katvā āpattiṃ āpannānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ṭhapetvā thullavajjaṃ ṭhapetvā gihipaṭisaṃyuttañca avasesāpattīnaṃ vūpasamanatthāyatiṇavatthārakopaññatto.

upasampadā is prescribed. Ñattikammaṃ is prescribed, as the motion procedure (ñattikammaṃ) is successful in nine instances. Ñattidutiyakammaṃ is prescribed, as the motion-and-one-resolution procedure (ñattidutiyakammaṃ) is successful in seven instances. Ñatticatutthakammaṃ is prescribed, as the motion-and-four-resolutions procedure (ñatticatutthakammaṃ) is successful in seven instances. Apaññatte paññattaṃ means the initial prescription of the first Pārājika and so on. Paññatte anupaññattaṃ means the subsequent prescription of those very same. Sammukhāvinayo is prescribed based on this fourfold presence: presence of the Dhamma, presence of the Vinaya, presence of the Sangha, presence of the individual. Sativinayo is prescribed for a Khīṇāsava who has attained abundance of mindfulness, so that there is no need for accusation. Amūḷhavinayo is prescribed for a deranged monk. Paṭiññātakaraṇaṃ is prescribed for one accused of an offense who does not confess, so that he may be acquitted. Yebhuyyasikā is prescribed for settling a legal question by taking the view of the majority of Dhamma-speakers. Tassapāpiyasikā is prescribed for the suppression of a depraved individual. Tiṇavatthārako is prescribed for the absolution of offenses of monks who have caused much disagreement and misconduct, having set aside a Thullavajja and what is connected to laypeople, for the settling of the remaining offenses.

4. Rāgapeyyālaṃ

4. Rāgapeyyālaṃ (Repetition on Lust)

231.Rāgassa,bhikkhave, abhiññāyāti pañcakāmaguṇikarāgassa abhijānanatthaṃ paccakkhakaraṇatthaṃ.Pariññāyāti parijānanatthaṃ.Parikkhayāyāti parikkhayagamanatthaṃ.Pahānāyāti pajahanatthaṃ.Khayāya vayāyāti khayavayagamanatthaṃ.Virāgāyāti virajjanatthaṃ.Nirodhāyāti nirujjhanatthaṃ.Cāgāyāti cajanatthaṃ.Paṭinissaggāyāti paṭinissajjanatthaṃ.

231.Rāgassa, bhikkhave, abhiññāyāti: "For the full understanding of lust," meaning for fully knowing the lust which is the five cords of sensual pleasure, for making it evident. Pariññāyāti: For the complete understanding. Parikkhayāyāti: For going to the destruction. Pahānāyāti: For abandoning. Khayāya vayāyāti: For going to the destruction and dissolution. Virāgāyāti: For dispassion. Nirodhāyāti: For ceasing. Cāgāyāti: For relinquishing. Paṭinissaggāyāti: For surrendering.

232-246.Thambhassāti kodhamānavasena thaddhabhāvassa.Sārabbhassāti kāraṇuttariyalakkhaṇassa sārabbhassa.Mānassāti navavidhamānassa.Atimānassāti atikkamitvā maññanamānassa.Madassāti majjanākāramadassa.Pamādassāti sativippavāsassa, pañcasu kāmaguṇesu cittavossaggassa. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.

232-246.Thambhassāti: Of rigidity due to anger and conceit. Sārabbhassāti: Of sārabbha characterized by being superior without reason. Mānassāti: Of the nine kinds of conceit. Atimānassāti: Of conceit that consists of thinking oneself superior. Madassāti: Of intoxication in the manner of being drunk. Pamādassāti: Of the loss of mindfulness, the abandonment of the mind in the five cords of sensual pleasure. The rest is straightforward in meaning everywhere.

Manorathapūraṇiyā aṅguttaranikāya-aṭṭhakathāya

Manorathapūraṇī, the Aṅguttaranikāya Commentary

. Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa.

. Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa.

Aṅguttaranikāye

In the Aṅguttaranikāya

Tikanipāta-aṭṭhakathā

Tikanipāta Commentary

1. Paṭhamapaṇṇāsakaṃ

1. First Fifty

1. Bālavaggo

1. Bāla Chapter

1. Bhayasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Bhaya Sutta Commentary

1.Tikanipātassa paṭhamebhayānītiādīsubhayanti cittutrāso.Upaddavoti anekaggatākāro.Upasaggoti upasaṭṭhākāro tattha tattha lagganākāro.

1.In the first sutta of the Tikanipāta, in bhayānītiādi, bhayaṃ means agitation of mind. Upaddavoti: The characteristic of being in disarray. Upasaggoti: The characteristic of adhering, the characteristic of clinging here and there.

cittutrāsonāma. ‘‘Yathā no te corā kupitā anatthampi āvaheyyu’’nti hatthasāraṃ gahetvā dvipadacatuppadehi saddhiṃ araññaṃ pavisitvā tattha tattha bhūmiyaṃ nipajjanti ḍaṃsamakasādīhi khajjamānā, gumbantarāni pavisantā khāṇukaṇṭake maddanti. Tesaṃ evaṃ vicarantānaṃ vikkhittabhāvoanekaggatākāronāma. Tato coresu yathāvutte divase anāgacchantesu ‘‘tucchakasāsanaṃ bhavissati, gāmaṃ pavisissāmā’’ti saparikkhārā gāmaṃ pavisanti. Atha tesaṃ paviṭṭhabhāvaṃ ñatvā gāmaṃ parivāretvā dvāre aggiṃ datvā manusse ghātetvā corā sabbaṃ vibhavaṃ vilumpitvā gacchanti. Tesu ghātitāvasesā aggiṃ nibbāpetvā koṭṭhakacchāyābhitticchāyādīsu tattha tattha laggitvā nisīdanti naṭṭhaṃ anusocamānā. Ayaṃupasaṭṭhākāro lagganākāronāma.

cittutrāsonāma: Means agitation of mind. "Just as these thieves, being angry, might bring us harm," taking their hand-implements, entering the forest together with bipeds and quadrupeds, lying down here and there on the ground, being bitten by gadflies and mosquitoes, entering thickets, trampling on stumps and thorns. The scattered state of those wandering in this way is called anekaggatākāro. Then, when the thieves do not come on the day mentioned, thinking, "The teaching of the empty ones will be; we shall enter the village," they enter the village with their belongings. Then, having learned of their entry, surrounding the village, setting fire to the gate, killing the people, the thieves plunder all the wealth and depart. Those remaining after the killing, extinguishing the fire, sit clinging here and there in the shade of walls and the shade of eaves, lamenting what is lost. This is called upasaṭṭhākāro lagganākāro, the characteristic of adhering, the characteristic of clinging.

Naḷāgārāti naḷehi channapaṭicchannaagārā. Sesasambhārā panettha rukkhamayā honti.Tiṇāgārepi eseva nayo.Kūṭāgārānīti kūṭasaṅgahitāni agārāni.Ullittāvalittānīti anto ca bahi ca littāni.Nivātānīti nivāritavātappavesāni.Phusitaggaḷānīti chekehi vaḍḍhakīhi katattā piṭṭhasaṅghāṭamhi suṭṭhu phusitakavāṭāni.Pihitavātapānānīti yuttavātapānāni. Iminā padadvayena kavāṭavātapānānaṃ niccapihitataṃ akathetvā sampattiyeva kathitā. Icchiticchitakkhaṇe pana tāni pidhīyanti ca vivarīyanti ca.

Naḷāgārāti: Houses covered and roofed with reeds. The remaining materials here are made of wood. The same method applies to tiṇāgāre. Kūṭāgārānīti: Houses constructed with gables. Ullittāvalittānīti: Plastered inside and out. Nivātānīti: Where the entry of wind is prevented. Phusitaggaḷānīti: Because they are made by clever carpenters, the bolts are well-fitted in the frame of the door. Pihitavātapānānīti: Fitted with windows. With these two words, the constant closing of doors and windows is not stated, but only the availability. However, they are closed and opened at will, at the desired moment.

Bālato uppajjantīti bālameva nissāya uppajjanti. Bālo hi apaṇḍitapuriso rajjaṃ vā oparajjaṃ vā aññaṃ vā pana mahantaṃ ṭhānaṃ patthento katipaye attanā sadise vidhavaputte mahādhutte gahetvā ‘‘etha ahaṃ tumhe issare karissāmī’’ti pabbatagahanādīni nissāya antamante gāme paharanto dāmarikabhāvaṃ jānāpetvā anupubbena nigamepi janapadepi paharati. Manussā gehāni chaḍḍetvā khemaṭṭhānaṃ patthayamānā pakkamanti. Te nissāya vasantā bhikkhūpi bhikkhuniyopi attano attano vasanaṭṭhānāni pahāya pakkamanti. Gatagataṭṭhāne bhikkhāpi senāsanampi dullabhaṃ hoti. Evaṃ catunnampi parisānaṃ bhayaṃ āgatameva hoti. Pabbajjitesupi dve bālā bhikkhū aññamaññaṃ vivādaṃ paṭṭhapetvā codanaṃ ārabhanti. Iti kosambivāsikānaṃ viya mahākalaho uppajjati. Catunnaṃ parisānaṃ bhayaṃ āgatameva hotīti evaṃ yāni kānici bhayāni uppajjanti, sabbāni tāni bālato uppajjantīti yathānusandhinā desanaṃ niṭṭhapesi.

Bālato uppajjantīti: They arise dependent on a fool. For a fool, an unwise person, desiring a kingdom or a sub-kingdom or any other great position, taking a few dissolute sons like himself, saying, "Come, I will make you lords," relying on mountain thickets and the like, striking villages at the border, making known his state of brigandage, gradually strikes even towns and districts. People, abandoning their homes, seeking a safe place, depart. Monks and nuns dwelling dependent on them also abandon their dwellings and depart. In the place where they have gone, alms and lodging become scarce. Thus, fear has indeed come to all four assemblies. Among those gone forth as well, two foolish monks, starting a quarrel with each other, begin accusation. Thus, a great conflict arises like that of the Kosambians. Fear has indeed come to the four assemblies. Thus, whatever fears arise, all of them arise from a fool. He concluded the teaching in accordance with the connection.

2. Lakkhaṇasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Lakkhaṇa Sutta Commentary

2.Dutiye kāyadvārādipavattaṃ kammaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ sañjānanakāraṇaṃ assātikammalakkhaṇo. Apadānasobhanī paññāti yā paññā nāma apadānena sobhati, bālā ca paṇḍitā ca attano attano cariteneva pākaṭā hontīti attho. Bālena hi gatamaggo rukkhagacchagāmanigamādīni jhāpetvā gacchantassa indaggino gatamaggo viya hoti, jhāmaṭṭhānamattameva aṅgāramasichārikāsamākulaṃ paññāyati. Paṇḍitena gatamaggo kusobbhādayo pūretvā vividhasassasampadaṃ āvahamānena catudīpikameghena gatamaggo viya hoti. Yathā tena gatamagge udakapūrāni ceva vividhasassaphalāphalāni ca tāni tāni ṭhānāni paññāyanti, evaṃ paṇḍitena gatamagge sampattiyova paññāyanti no vipattiyoti. Sesamettha uttānatthameva.

2.In the second, kamma that originates from the door of the body, etc., is a characteristic, a cause of recognition, therefore, kammalakkhaṇo: He whose characteristic is kamma. Apadānasobhanī paññāti: The wisdom that is beautiful by means of accomplishment; for fools and wise men become manifest by their own conduct. For the path traveled by a fool is like the path traveled by a forest fire, scorching villages and towns, leaving only a scorched place, appearing as a heap of ashes and charcoal. The path traveled by a wise man is like the path traveled by a cloud of the four continents, filling up grass and bringing about a variety of crops. Just as in the path traveled by that, reservoirs of water and various crops and fruits appear in those places, so in the path traveled by a wise man, only success appears, not failure. The rest here is straightforward in meaning.

3. Cintīsuttavaṇṇanā
3. Cintī Sutta Commentary

3.Tatiyebālalakkhaṇānīti ‘‘bālo aya’’nti etehi lakkhīyati ñāyatīti bālalakkhaṇāni. Tānevassa sañjānanakāraṇānītibālanimittāni. Bālāpadānānīti bālassa apadānāni.Duccintitacintīti cintayanto abhijjhābyāpādamicchādassanavasena duccintitameva cinteti.Dubbhāsitabhāsīti bhāsamānopi musāvādādibhedaṃ dubbhāsitameva bhāsati.Dukkaṭakammakārīti karontopi pāṇātipātādivasena dukkaṭakammameva karoti.Paṇḍitalakkhaṇānītiādi vuttānusāreneva veditabbaṃ.Sucintitacintītiādīni cettha manosucaritādīnaṃ vasena yojetabbāni.

3.In the third, bālalakkhaṇānīti: These are the characteristics by which a fool is marked and known, therefore, they are the characteristics of a fool. These themselves are the causes of his recognition, therefore, bālanimittāni. Bālāpadānānīti: The accomplishments of a fool. Duccintitacintīti: Thinking, he thinks only badly in terms of covetousness, ill will, and wrong view. Dubbhāsitabhāsīti: Speaking, he speaks only what is badly spoken, such as false speech and the like. Dukkaṭakammakārīti: Doing, he does only bad kamma in terms of killing living beings and the like. Paṇḍitalakkhaṇānītiādi: Should be understood in accordance with what was said. Sucintitacintītiādīni: Here, these should be connected in terms of good conduct of mind and the like.

4. Accayasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Accaya Sutta Commentary

4.Catuttheaccayaṃ accayato na passatīti attano aparādhaṃ aparādhato na passati.Accayato disvā yathādhammaṃ nappaṭikarotīti ‘‘aparaddhaṃ mayā’’ti ñatvāpi yo dhammo, taṃ na karoti, daṇḍakammaṃ āharitvā accayaṃ na deseti nakkhamāpeti.Accayaṃ desentassa yathādhammaṃ nappaṭiggaṇhātīti parassa ‘‘viraddhaṃ mayā’’ti ñatvā daṇḍakammaṃ āharitvā khamāpentassa nakkhamati. Sukkapakkho vuttapaṭipakkhato veditabbo.

4.In the fourth, accayaṃ accayato na passatīti: He does not see his own offense as an offense. Accayato disvā yathādhammaṃ nappaṭikarotīti: Even having known "I have offended," he does not do that which is the Dhamma; he does not bring forward a penalty, does not declare the offense, does not ask for forgiveness. Accayaṃ desentassa yathādhammaṃ nappaṭiggaṇhātīti: He does not forgive another who, having known "I have transgressed," brings forward a penalty and asks for forgiveness. The bright side should be understood as the opposite of what has been said.

5. Ayonisosuttavaṇṇanā
5. Ayoniso Sutta Commentary

5.Pañcameayoniso pañhaṃ kattā hotīti ‘‘kati nu kho, udāyi, anussatiṭṭhānānī’’ti vutte ‘‘pubbenivāso anussatiṭṭhānaṃ bhavissatī’’ti cintetvā lāḷudāyitthero viya anupāyacintāya apañhameva pañhanti kattā hoti.Ayoniso pañhaṃ vissajjetā hotīti evaṃ cintitaṃ pana pañhaṃ vissajjentopi ‘‘idha, bhante, bhikkhu anekavihitaṃ pubbenivāsaṃ anussarati. Seyyathidaṃ, ekampi jāti’’ntiādinā nayena soyeva thero viya ayoniso vissajjetā hoti, apañhameva pañhanti katheti.Parimaṇḍalehi padabyañjanehīti ettha padameva atthassa byañjanato padabyañjanaṃ. Taṃ akkharapāripūriṃ katvā dasavidhaṃ byañjanabuddhiṃ aparihāpetvā vuttaṃ parimaṇḍalaṃ nāma hoti, evarūpehi padabyañjanehīti attho.Siliṭṭhehīti padasiliṭṭhatāya siliṭṭhehi.Upagatehīti atthañca kāraṇañca upagatehi.Nābbhanumoditāti evaṃ yoniso sabbaṃ kāraṇasampannaṃ katvāpi vissajjitaṃ parassa pañhaṃ nābhinumodati nābhinandati sāriputtattherassa pañhaṃ lāḷudāyitthero viya. Yathāha –

5.In the fifth, ayoniso pañhaṃ kattā hotīti: When it is said, "How many, Udayi, are the bases of mindfulness?", thinking "Past lives will be a base of mindfulness," like Lāḷudāyi Thera, he asks a question that is not a question, by means of unwise thought. Ayoniso pañhaṃ vissajjetā hotīti: But answering a question thought about in this way, he answers unwisely, saying what is not a question as a question, like that same Thera, "Here, venerable sir, a bhikkhu remembers many kinds of past lives, such as one birth," etc. Parimaṇḍalehi padabyañjanehīti: Here, the word itself is a designation of the meaning, therefore, padabyañjanaṃ. Making that a complete set of letters, without neglecting the ten kinds of intelligence of expression, what is said is called perfect; the meaning is, with words and expressions of such a kind. Siliṭṭhehīti: With expressions that are connected by the connection of words. Upagatehīti: Approached by meaning and reason. Nābbhanumoditāti: Even having made everything well-reasoned in this way and answered, he does not approve or rejoice in another's question, like Lāḷudāyi Thera did not approve of Sāriputta Thera's question. As he said:

‘‘Aṭṭhānaṃ kho etaṃ, āvuso sāriputta, anavakāso, yaṃ so atikkammeva kabaḷīkārāhārabhakkhānaṃ devānaṃ sahabyataṃ aññataraṃ manomayaṃ kāyaṃ upapanno saññāvedayitanirodhaṃ samāpajjeyyāpi vuṭṭhaheyyāpi, natthetaṃ ṭhāna’’nti (a. ni. 5.166).

"This is impossible, friend Sāriputta, there is no opportunity for one who has gone beyond the sphere of devas who live on morsel food to attain to or emerge from the cessation of perception and feeling; this is not possible" (a. ni. 5.166).

Yoniso pañhaṃ kattātiādīsu ānandatthero viya yonisova pañhaṃ cintetvā yoniso vissajjitā hoti. Thero hi ‘‘kati nu kho, ānanda, anussatiṭṭhānānī’’ti pucchito ‘‘ayaṃ pañho bhavissatī’’ti yoniso cintetvā yoniso vissajjento āha – ‘‘idha, bhante, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi…pe… catutthajjhānaṃ upasampajja viharati. Idaṃ, bhante, anussatiṭṭhānaṃ evaṃbhāvitaṃ evaṃbahulīkataṃ diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārāya saṃvattatī’’ti.Abbhanumoditā hotīti tathāgato viya yoniso abbhanumoditā hoti. Tathāgato hi ānandattherena pañhe vissajjite ‘‘sādhu sādhu, ānanda, tena hi tvaṃ, ānanda, imampi chaṭṭhaṃ anussatiṭṭhānaṃ dhārehi. Idhānanda, bhikkhu satova abhikkamati satova paṭikkamatī’’tiādimāha. Chaṭṭhādīni uttānatthāneva.

Yoniso pañhaṃ kattātiādīsu: Like Ānanda Thera, having wisely thought out the question, he answers wisely. For when the Thera was asked, "How many, Ānanda, are the bases of mindfulness?", having wisely thought, "This will be the question," answering wisely, he said, "Here, venerable sir, a bhikkhu, quite secluded from sense pleasures… attains and abides in the fourth jhāna. This, venerable sir, is a base of mindfulness, thus developed, thus cultivated, conduces to pleasant abiding in this very life." Abbhanumoditā hotīti: Like the Tathāgata, he wisely approves. For when the Tathāgata had answered Ānanda Thera's question, he said, "Good, good, Ānanda. Therefore, Ānanda, you should remember this sixth base of mindfulness as well. Here, Ānanda, a bhikkhu, mindful, goes forward; mindful, he turns back," etc. The sixth and the others are straightforward in meaning.

9. Khatasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Khata Sutta Commentary

9.Navame sukkapakkho pubbabhāge dasahipi kusalakammapathehi paricchinno, upari yāva arahattamaggā labbhati.Bahuñca puññaṃ pasavatīti ettha lokiyalokuttaramissakapuññaṃ kathitaṃ.

9.In the ninth, the bright side is delimited in the former part by the ten paths of skillful action, and above that, it can be attained up to the path of arahantship. Bahuñca puññaṃ pasavatīti: Here, meritorious action mixed with the mundane and supramundane is spoken of.

10. Malasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Mala Sutta Commentary

10.Dasame dussīlabhāvo dussīlyaṃ, dussīlyameva malaṃdussīlyamalaṃ. Kenaṭṭhena malanti? Anudahanaṭṭhena duggandhaṭṭhena kiliṭṭhakaraṇaṭṭhena ca. Tañhi nirayādīsu apāyesu anudahatīti anudahanaṭṭhenapi malaṃ. Tena samannāgato puggalo mātāpitūnampi santike bhikkhusaṅghassāpi antare bodhicetiyaṭṭhānesupi jigucchanīyo hoti, sabbadisāsu cassa ‘‘evarūpaṃ kira tena pāpakammaṃ kata’’nti avaṇṇagandho vāyatīti duggandhaṭṭhenapi malaṃ. Tena ca samannāgato puggalo gatagataṭṭhāne upatāpañceva labhati, kāyakammādīni cassa asucīni honti apabhassarānīti kiliṭṭhakaraṇaṭṭhenapi malaṃ. Apica taṃ devamanussasampattiyo ceva nibbānasampattiñca milāpetīti milāpanaṭṭhenapi malanti veditabbaṃ. Issāmalamaccheramalesupi eseva nayo.

10.In the tenth, being of bad moral conduct is dussīlyaṃ; bad moral conduct itself is a stain, dussīlyamalaṃ. In what sense is it a stain? In the sense of burning, in the sense of being foul-smelling, and in the sense of making impure. For it burns in the apāyas, such as hell, therefore, it is a stain in the sense of burning. A person endowed with that is loathsome even in the presence of his parents, even in the midst of the Sangha of monks, even in places of Bodhi-shrines; and in all directions, the foul smell of his ill-repute wafts, "Such and such a bad deed has been done by him," therefore, it is a stain in the sense of being foul-smelling. And a person endowed with that obtains only torment wherever he goes, and his bodily actions and the like are impure and inglorious, therefore, it is a stain in the sense of making impure. Moreover, it withers both the attainment of devas and humans and the attainment of Nibbāna, therefore, it should be understood as a stain in the sense of withering. The same method applies to the stain of envy and the stain of stinginess.

2. Rathakāravaggo

2. Rathakāra Chapter

1. Ñātasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Ñāta Sutta Commentary

11.Dutiyassa paṭhameñātoti paññāto pākaṭo.Ananulomiketi sāsanassa na anulometīti ananulomikaṃ, tasmiṃ ananulomike.Kāyakammeti pāṇātipātādimhi kāyaduccarite. Oḷārikaṃ vā etaṃ, na evarūpe samādapetuṃ sakkoti. Disā namassituṃ vaṭṭati, bhūtabaliṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti evarūpe samādapeti gaṇhāpeti.Vacīkammepi musāvādādīni oḷārikāni, attano santakaṃ parassa adātukāmena ‘‘natthī’’ti ayaṃ vañcanamusāvādo nāma vattuṃ vaṭṭatīti evarūpe samādapeti.Manokammepi abhijjhādayo oḷārikā, kammaṭṭhānaṃ visaṃvādetvā kathento pana ananulomikesu dhammesu samādapeti nāma dakkhiṇavihāravāsitthero viya. Taṃ kira theraṃ eko upaṭṭhāko amaccaputto upasaṅkamitvā ‘‘mettāyantena paṭhamaṃ kīdise puggale mettāyitabba’’nti pucchi. Thero sabhāgavisabhāgaṃ anācikkhitvā ‘‘piyapuggale’’ti āha. Tassa ca bhariyā piyā hoti manāpā, so taṃ ārabbha mettāyanto ummādaṃ pāpuṇi. Kathaṃ panesa bahujanaahitāya paṭipanno hotīti? Evarūpassa hi saddhivihārikādayo ceva upaṭṭhākādayo ca tesaṃ ārakkhadevatā ādiṃ katvā tāsaṃ tāsaṃ mittabhūtā yāva brahmalokā sesadevatā ca ‘‘ayaṃ bhikkhu na ajānitvā karissatī’’ti tena katameva karonti, evamesa bahujanaahitāya paṭipanno hoti.

11.In the first of the second, ñātoti: Known, manifest. Ananulomiketi: It does not conform to the Teaching, therefore, ananulomikaṃ; in that which does not conform. Kāyakammeti: In bodily misconduct such as killing living beings and the like. Or this is gross, he is not able to train in such a thing. It is proper to salute the directions, it is proper to make offerings to the spirits, in such a thing he trains, he causes to take up. Vacīkammepi: The gross things are false speech and the like; it is proper to speak this deceitful false speech, saying "there is not" when one does not want to give one's own property to another, in such a thing he trains. Manokammepi: The gross things are covetousness and the like; but when he speaks, contradicting the meditation subject, he trains in things that do not conform, like the Thera dwelling in the Southern Monastery. It seems that a certain attendant, the son of a courtier, approached that Thera and asked, "How should one radiate metta toward what kind of person first?" The Thera, without explaining similar and dissimilar, said, "Toward a dear person." And his wife was dear and pleasing, so radiating metta toward her, he reached madness. How does he act for the welfare of many people? For the pupils and attendants of such a one, including their guardian deities, and all the remaining deities who are friends to them up to the Brahma realm, thinking, "This monk will not do it without knowing," do just what he has done. Thus, he acts for the welfare of many people.

kāyakammavacīkammāniveditabbāni. Kammaṭṭhānaṃ pana avisaṃvādetvā kathento anulomikesu dhammesu samādapeti nāma koḷitavihāravāsī catunikāyikatissatthero viya. Tassa kira jeṭṭhabhātā nandābhayatthero nāma potaliyavihāre vasanto ekasmiṃ roge samuṭṭhite kaniṭṭhaṃ pakkosāpetvā āha – ‘‘āvuso, mayhaṃ sallahukaṃ katvā ekaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ kathehī’’ti. Kiṃ, bhante, aññena kammaṭṭhānena, kabaḷīkārāhāraṃ pariggaṇhituṃ vaṭṭatīti? Kimatthiko esa, āvusoti? Bhante, kabaḷīkārāhāro upādārūpaṃ, ekasmiñca upādārūpe diṭṭhe tevīsati upādārūpāni pākaṭāni hontīti. So ‘‘vaṭṭissati, āvuso, ettaka’’nti taṃ uyyojetvā kabaḷīkārāhāraṃ pariggaṇhitvā upādārūpaṃ sallakkhetvā vivaṭṭetvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇi. Atha naṃ theraṃ bahivihārā anikkhantameva pakkositvā, ‘‘āvuso, mahāavassayosi mayhaṃ jāto’’ti kaniṭṭhattherassa attanā paṭiladdhaguṇaṃ ārocesi.Bahujanahitāyāti etassapi hi saddhivihārikādayo ‘‘ayaṃ na ajānitvā karissatī’’ti tena katameva karontīti bahujanahitāya paṭipanno nāma hotīti.

kāyakammavacīkammāni should be explained. But when explaining the meditation subject without misrepresenting it, he establishes (others) in the conducive qualities, like Tissathera of Catunikkāya, a resident of Koḷita Monastery. It seems his elder brother, named Nandābhaya Thera, residing in Potaliya Monastery, having fallen ill, summoned his younger brother and said, "Friend, please give me a simple meditation subject." (The younger brother asked:) "Venerable sir, what is the need for another meditation subject? Is it suitable to contemplate on morsel food?" "What is the purpose of that, friend?" "Venerable sir, morsel food is derivative matter (upādārūpa), and when one derivative matter is seen, twenty-three derivative matters become apparent." He, saying, "It will be suitable, friend, this much is enough," sent him away, and contemplating on morsel food, discerning derivative matter, developing insight, he attained Arahatship. Then the Thera, before even leaving the monastery, summoned him and declared to his younger brother the qualities he had attained through him, "Friend, you have become a great refuge for me." Bahujanahitāyā means that even his fellow monks and novices, thinking, "He will not do this without knowing," do what he has done, thus he is said to be practicing for the welfare of many.

2. Sāraṇīyasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Sāraṇīyasutta Commentary

12.Dutiyekhattiyassāti jātiyā khattiyassa.Muddhāvasittassāti rājābhisekena muddhani abhisittassa.Sāraṇīyāni bhavantīti saritabbāni asammussanīyāni honti.Jātoti nibbatto.Yāvajīvaṃ sāraṇīyanti daharakāle jānitumpi na sakkā, aparabhāge pana mātāpituādīhi ñātakehi vā dāsādīhi vā ‘‘tvaṃ asukajanapade asukanagare asukadivase asukanakkhatte jāto’’ti ācikkhite sutvā tato paṭṭhāya yāvajīvaṃ sarati na sammussati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘yāvajīvaṃ sāraṇīyaṃ hotī’’ti.

12. In the second (sutta), khattiyassā means a Khattiya by birth. Muddhāvasittassā means one who has been consecrated by having (water) poured on the head in a royal ceremony. Sāraṇīyāni bhavantī means they are to be remembered, not forgotten. Jāto means born. Yāvajīvaṃ sāraṇīya means it is not possible to know during childhood, but later, when relatives like parents or servants say, "You were born in such and such country, in such and such city, on such and such day, under such and such constellation," having heard this, from then on, he remembers it for life and does not forget it. Therefore, it is said, "Yāvajīvaṃ sāraṇīyaṃ hotī."

Idaṃ,bhikkhave, dutiyanti abhisekaṭṭhānaṃ nāma rañño balavatuṭṭhikaraṃ hoti, tenassa taṃ yāvajīvaṃ sāraṇīyaṃ. Saṅgāmavijayaṭṭhānepi eseva nayo. Ettha panasaṅgāmanti yuddhaṃ.Abhivijinitvāti jinitvā sattumaddanaṃ katvā.Tameva saṅgāmasīsanti tameva saṅgāmaṭṭhānaṃ.Ajjhāvasatīti abhibhavitvā āvasati.

Idaṃ,bhikkhave, dutiyanti means the place of consecration is something that greatly increases the king's strength and satisfaction; therefore, it is memorable to him for life. The same method applies to the place of victory in battle. Here, saṅgāma means battle. Abhivijinitvā means having conquered, having destroyed the enemy. Tameva saṅgāmasīsanti means that very battlefield. Ajjhāvasatīti means having overcome, he dwells.

evameva kho, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tatthaanagāriyaṃ pabbajito hotīti ettha catupārisuddhisīlampi pabbajjānissitamevāti veditabbaṃ.Sāraṇīyaṃ hotīti ‘‘ahaṃ asukaraṭṭhe asukajanapade asukavihāre asukamāḷake asukadivāṭṭhāne asukacaṅkame asukarukkhamūle pabbajito’’ti evaṃ yāvajīvaṃ saritabbameva hoti na sammussitabbaṃ.

evameva kho, bhikkhaveti etc. was said. Here, anagāriyaṃ pabbajito hotīti, it should be understood that the fourfold purification of virtue (catupārisuddhisīla) also depends on renunciation. Sāraṇīyaṃ hotīti means "I went forth in such and such a country, in such and such a district, in such and such a monastery, in such and such a courtyard, in such and such a daytime dwelling, in such and such a promenade, at the foot of such and such a tree," thus it should be remembered for life and not forgotten.

Idaṃdukkhanti ettakaṃ dukkhaṃ, na ito uddhaṃ dukkhaṃ atthi.Ayaṃ dukkhasamudayoti ettako dukkhasamudayo, na ito uddhaṃ dukkhasamudayo atthīti. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo. Evamettha catūhi saccehi sotāpattimaggo kathito. Kasiṇaparikammavipassanāñāṇāni pana maggasannissitāneva honti.Sāraṇīyaṃhotīti ‘‘ahaṃ asukaraṭṭhe…pe… asukarukkhamūle sotāpanno jāto’’ti yāvajīvaṃ sāraṇīyaṃ hoti asammussanīyaṃ.

Idaṃdukkhanti means this much is suffering; there is no suffering beyond this. Ayaṃ dukkhasamudayoti means this much is the origin of suffering; there is no origin of suffering beyond this. The same method applies to the remaining two terms. Thus, here, the path of stream-entry (sotāpattimagga) is described with the four Noble Truths. However, the preparatory concentration (parikamma) for the kasina and the insight knowledges (vipassanāñāṇāni) definitely depend on the path. Sāraṇīyaṃhotīti means "I became a stream-enterer at such and such a country...pe...at the foot of such and such a tree," thus it is to be remembered for life and not to be forgotten.

Āsavānaṃ khayāti āsavānaṃ khayena.Cetovimuttinti phalasamādhiṃ.Paññāvimuttinti phalapaññaṃ.Sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvāti attanāva abhivisiṭṭhāya paññāya paccakkhaṃ katvā.Upasampajja viharatīti paṭilabhitvā viharati.Sāraṇīyanti ‘‘mayā asukaraṭṭhe…pe… asukarukkhamūle arahattaṃ patta’’nti attano arahattapattiṭṭhānaṃ nāma yāvajīvaṃ sāraṇīyaṃ hoti asammussanīyanti yathānusandhināva desanaṃ niṭṭhapesi.

Āsavānaṃ khayāti means through the destruction of the āsavas. Cetovimuttinti means the fruition attainment (phalasamādhi). Paññāvimuttinti means the fruition wisdom (phalapañña). Sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvāti means having directly realized through one's own superior wisdom. Upasampajja viharatīti means having attained, he dwells. Sāraṇīyanti means "I attained Arahatship in such and such a country...pe...at the foot of such and such a tree," thus one's own place of attaining Arahatship is to be remembered for life and not to be forgotten; thus, he concluded the discourse according to the connection.

3. Āsaṃsasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Āsaṃsasutta Commentary

13.Tatiyesantoti atthi upalabbhanti.Saṃvijjamānāti tasseva vevacanaṃ.Lokasminti sattaloke.Nirāsoti anāso apatthano.Āsaṃsoti āsaṃsamāno patthayamāno.Vigatāsoti apagatāso.Caṇḍālakuleti caṇḍālānaṃ kule.Venakuleti vilīvakārakule.Nesādakuleti migaluddakānaṃ kule.Rathakārakuleti cammakārakule.Pukkusakuleti pupphacchaḍḍakakule.

13. In the third (sutta), santoti means existent, found. Saṃvijjamānāti is a synonym for that. Lokasminti means in the world of beings. Nirāsoti means without hope, without desire. Āsaṃsoti means hoping, desiring. Vigatāsoti means with hope gone. Caṇḍālakuleti means in the family of outcastes. Venakuleti means in the family of basket weavers. Nesādakuleti means in the family of hunters. Rathakārakuleti means in the family of leather workers. Pukkusakuleti means in the family of sweepers.

daliddetiādimāha. Tatthadaliddeti dāliddiyena samannāgate.Appannapānabhojaneti parittakaannapānabhojane.Kasiravuttiketi dukkhajīvike, yattha vāyāmena payogena jīvitavuttiṃ sādhenti, tathārūpeti attho.Yattha kasirena ghāsacchādo labbhatīti yasmiṃ kule dukkhena yāgubhattaghāso ca kopīnamattaṃ acchādanañca labbhati.

daliddeti etc. was said. Here, daliddeti means endowed with poverty. Appannapānabhojaneti means with meager food and drink. Kasiravuttiketi means living with difficulty, where they sustain their livelihood through effort and exertion; that is the meaning. Yattha kasirena ghāsacchādo labbhatīti means in which family food and a covering just sufficient to cover the shame is obtained with difficulty.

so ca hoti dubbaṇṇotiādimāha. Tatthadubbaṇṇoti paṃsupisācako viya jhāmakhāṇuvaṇṇo.Duddasikoti vijātamātuyāpi amanāpadassano.Okoṭimakoti lakuṇḍako.Kāṇoti ekakkhikāṇo vā ubhayakkhikāṇo vā.Kuṇīti ekahatthakuṇī vā ubhayahatthakuṇī vā.Khañjoti ekapādakhañjo vā ubhayapādakhañjo vā.Pakkhahatoti hatapakkho pīṭhasappī.Padīpeyyassāti vaṭṭitelakapallakādino padīpaupakaraṇassa.Tassa na evaṃ hotīti. Kasmā na hoti? Nīcakule jātattā.

so ca hoti dubbaṇṇoti etc. was said. Here, dubbaṇṇoti means having a complexion like that of a dust demon, the color of a burnt stump. Duddasikoti means unpleasant to look at even to his own mother who knows him. Okoṭimakoti means hunchbacked. Kāṇoti means blind in one eye or blind in both eyes. Kuṇīti means crippled in one hand or crippled in both hands. Khañjoti means lame in one foot or lame in both feet. Pakkhahatoti means paralyzed, like a lame turtle. Padīpeyyassāti means of the lamp equipment, such as a wick, oil, a small dish, etc. Tassa na evaṃ hotīti. Why does this not occur? Because he is born in a low family.

Jeṭṭhoti aññasmiṃ jeṭṭhe sati kaniṭṭho āsaṃ na karoti, tasmā jeṭṭhoti āha.Ābhisekoti jeṭṭhopi na abhisekāraho āsaṃ na karoti, tasmā ābhisekoti āha.Anabhisittoti abhisekārahopi kāṇakuṇiādidosarahito sakiṃ abhisitto puna abhiseke āsaṃ na karoti, tasmā anabhisittoti āha.Acalappattoti jeṭṭhopi ābhiseko anabhisitto mando uttānaseyyako, sopi abhiseke āsaṃ na karoti. Soḷasavassuddesiko pana paññāyamānamassubhedo acalappatto nāma hoti, mahantampi rajjaṃ vicāretuṃ samattho, tasmā ‘‘acalappatto’’ti āha.Tassa evaṃ hotīti kasmā hoti? Mahājātitāya.

Jeṭṭhoti means when there is an elder brother, the younger brother does not have hope; therefore, it is said "Jeṭṭho." Ābhisekoti means even if the elder brother is not worthy of consecration, he does not have hope; therefore, it is said "Ābhiseko." Anabhisittoti means even if he is worthy of consecration, free from defects such as being blind or crippled, one who has been consecrated once does not hope for another consecration; therefore, it is said "anabhisitto." Acalappattoti means even if the elder brother has been consecrated, is unconsecrated, foolish, lying on his back, he also does not hope for consecration. But one who is about sixteen years old, with the first signs of a beard appearing, is called "acalappatto," capable of managing even a large kingdom; therefore, it is said "acalappatto." Tassa evaṃ hotīti. Why does this occur? Because of his high birth.

Dussīloti nissīlo.Pāpadhammoti lāmakadhammo.Asucīti asucīhi kāyakammādīhi samannāgato.Saṅkassarasamācāroti saṅkāhi saritabbasamācāro, kiñcideva asāruppaṃ disvā ‘‘idaṃ iminā kataṃ bhavissatī’’ti evaṃ paresaṃ āsaṅkanīyasamācāro, attanāyeva vā saṅkāhi saritabbasamācāro, sāsaṅkasamācāroti attho. Tassa hi divāṭṭhānādīsu sannipatitvā kiñcideva mantayante bhikkhū disvā ‘‘ime ekato hutvā mantenti, kacci nu kho mayā katakammaṃ jānitvā mantentī’’ti evaṃ sāsaṅkasamācāro hoti.Paṭicchannakammantoti paṭicchādetabbayuttakena pāpakammena samannāgato.Assamaṇo samaṇapaṭiññoti assamaṇo hutvāva samaṇapatirūpakatāya ‘‘samaṇo aha’’nti evaṃ paṭiñño.Abrahmacārī brahmacāripaṭiññoti aññe brahmacārino sunivatthe supārute sumbhakapattadhare gāmanigamarājadhānīsu piṇḍāya caritvā jīvikaṃ kappente disvā sayampi tādisena ākārena tathā paṭipajjanato ‘‘ahaṃ brahmacārī’’ti paṭiññaṃ dento viya hoti. ‘‘Ahaṃ bhikkhū’’ti vatvā uposathaggādīni pavisanto pana brahmacāripaṭiñño hotiyeva, tathā saṅghikaṃ lābhaṃ gaṇhanto.Antopūtīti pūtinā kammena anto anupaviṭṭho.Avassutoti rāgādīhi tinto.Kasambujātoti sañjātarāgādikacavaro.Tassa na evaṃ hotīti. Kasmā na hoti? Lokuttaradhammaupanissayassa natthitāya.Tassaevaṃ hotīti. Kasmā hoti? Mahāsīlasmiṃ paripūrakāritāya.

Dussīloti means without virtue. Pāpadhammoti means of base qualities. Asucīti means endowed with impure bodily actions, etc. Saṅkassarasamācāroti means with conduct that is to be remembered with suspicion; having seen some impropriety, (people think) "This will have been done by him," thus he has conduct that causes others to suspect him, or he himself has conduct that is to be remembered with suspicion, meaning he has suspicious conduct. For example, having seen monks gathering and conferring in the daytime dwelling, etc., he thinks, "These ones have gathered together and are conferring; perhaps they are conferring having learned about an action done by me," thus he has suspicious conduct. Paṭicchannakammantoti means endowed with evil actions that are fit to be concealed. Assamaṇo samaṇapaṭiññoti means being not a Samaṇa, but pretending to be a Samaṇa, thus he claims "I am a Samaṇa." Abrahmacārī brahmacāripaṭiññoti means, seeing other brahmacārīs well-dressed, well-robed, carrying alms bowls, wandering for alms in villages, towns, and royal cities and maintaining their livelihood, he himself, acting in the same manner, seems to be making the claim "I am a brahmacārī." But one who enters the uposatha hall etc. saying "I am a bhikkhu" is definitely making the claim of being a brahmacārī, and likewise, one who receives monastic gain. Antopūtīti means inwardly rotten, entered within by rotten deeds. Avassutoti means soaked with lust etc. Kasambujātoti means born of a heap of lust etc. Tassa na evaṃ hotīti. Why does this not occur? Because the supporting condition for supramundane qualities does not exist. Tassaevaṃ hotīti. Why does this occur? Because he is a fulfiller of great virtue.

4. Cakkavattisuttavaṇṇanā
4. Cakkavattisutta Commentary

14.Catutthe catūhi saṅgahavatthūhi janaṃ rañjetītirājā. Cakkaṃ vattetīticakkavattī. Vattitaṃ vā anena cakkanti cakkavattī. Dhammo assa atthītidhammiko. Dhammeneva dasavidhena cakkavattivattena rājā jātotidhammarājā. Sopi na arājakanti sopi aññaṃ nissayarājānaṃ alabhitvā cakkaṃ nāma vattetuṃ na sakkotīti attho. Iti satthā desanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā yathānusandhiṃ apāpetvāva tuṇhī ahosi. Kasmā? Anusandhikusalā uṭṭhahitvā anusandhiṃ pucchissanti, bahū hi imasmiṃ ṭhāne tathārūpā bhikkhū, athāhaṃ tehi puṭṭho desanaṃ vaḍḍhessāmīti. Atheko anusandhikusalo bhikkhu bhagavantaṃ pucchantoko pana, bhantetiādimāha. Bhagavāpissa byākarontodhammo bhikkhūtiādimāha.

14. In the fourth (sutta), one who delights the people with the four bases of sympathy (saṅgahavatthūni) is a rājā (king). One who turns the wheel is a cakkavattī (wheel-turning monarch). Or the wheel is turned by him, therefore he is a Cakkavattī. He has Dhamma, therefore he is dhammiko (righteous). Because he has become a king through the ten-fold wheel-turning practice of Dhamma, he is a dhammarājā (righteous king). Sopi na arājakanti means even he cannot turn the wheel without finding another dependent king. Thus, the Teacher, having begun the discourse, fell silent without completing the connection. Why? Thinking, "Those skilled in connecting will rise and ask about the connection; for there are many such monks in this place, then, when asked by them, I will expand the discourse." Then one monk skilled in connecting, asking the Blessed One, said, ko pana, bhanteti etc. The Blessed One, explaining to him, said, dhammo bhikkhūti etc.

dhammoti dasakusalakammapathadhammo.Dhammanti tameva vuttappakāraṃ dhammaṃ.Nissāyāti tadadhiṭṭhānena cetasā tameva nissayaṃ katvā.Dhammaṃ sakkarontoti yathā kato so dhammo suṭṭhu kato hoti, evametaṃ karonto.Dhammaṃ garuṃ karontoti tasmiṃ gāravuppattiyā taṃ garukaronto.Dhammaṃ apacāyamānoti tasseva dhammassa añjalikaraṇādīhi nīcavuttitaṃ karonto.Dhammaddhajo dhammaketūti taṃ dhammaṃ dhajamiva purakkhatvā ketumiva ukkhipitvā pavattiyā dhammaddhajo dhammaketu ca hutvāti attho.Dhammādhipateyyoti dhammādhipatibhūtāgatabhāvena dhammavaseneva ca sabbakiriyānaṃ karaṇena dhammādhipateyyo hutvā.Dhammikaṃ rakkhāvaraṇaguttiṃ saṃvidahatīti dhammo assā atthīti dhammikā, rakkhā ca āvaraṇañca gutti ca rakkhāvaraṇagutti. Tattha ‘‘paraṃ rakkhanto attānaṃ rakkhatī’’ti vacanato khantiādayorakkhā. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘kathañca, bhikkhave, paraṃ rakkhanto attānaṃ rakkhati. Khantiyā avihiṃsāya mettacittatāya anuddayāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.385). Nivāsanapārupanagehādīniāvaraṇaṃ. Corādiupaddavanivāraṇatthaṃ gopāyanāgutti. Taṃ sabbampi suṭṭhu vidahati pavatteti ṭhapetīti attho.

dhammoti means the ten wholesome courses of action (dasakusalakammapatha). Dhammanti means that very Dhamma, as described above. Nissāyāti means with a mind based on that, having made just that the basis. Dhammaṃ sakkarontoti means doing this, so that Dhamma that was done becomes well done. Dhammaṃ garuṃ karontoti means respecting that, giving weight to it. Dhammaṃ apacāyamānoti means showing humility to that very Dhamma with acts of reverence, etc. Dhammaddhajo dhammaketūti means having that Dhamma as a banner, as a flag, and upholding it by practice, thus he is a banner of Dhamma and a flag of Dhamma. Dhammādhipateyyoti means being a lord of Dhamma due to having Dhamma as the lord in past and future lives and doing all actions only under the power of Dhamma, thus he is lord of Dhamma. Dhammikaṃ rakkhāvaraṇaguttiṃ saṃvidahatīti means one who has Dhamma possesses (dhammikā) protection, defense, and guard, which are protection, defense, and guard. Therein, rakkhā (protection) is, according to the saying, "Protecting others, he protects himself," patience, etc. It was said: "And how, monks, does one protecting others protect oneself? By patience, by non-violence, by a mind of loving-kindness, by compassion" (SN 5.385). Dwellings, robes, houses, etc. are āvaraṇaṃ (defense). Guarding for the purpose of preventing disturbances from thieves, etc. is gutti (guard). He well arranges, establishes, and maintains all of that; that is the meaning.

antojanasmintiādimāha. Tatrāyaṃ saṅkhepattho – antojanasaṅkhātaṃ puttadāraṃ sīlasaṃvare patiṭṭhāpento vatthagandhamālādīni cassa dadamāno sabbopaddave cassa nivārayamāno dhammikaṃ rakkhāvaraṇaguttiṃ saṃvidahati nāma. Khattiyādīsupi eseva nayo. Ayaṃ pana viseso – abhisittakhattiyā bhadraassājānīyādiratanasampadānenapi upagaṇhitabbā, anuyantā khattiyā tesaṃ anurūpayānavāhanasampadānenapi paritosetabbā, balakāyo kālaṃ anatikkametvā bhattavetanasampadānenapi anuggahetabbo, brāhmaṇā annapānavatthādinā deyyadhammena, gahapatikā bhattabījanaṅgalabalibaddādisampadānena, tathā nigamavāsinonegamājanapadavāsino cajānapadā. Samitapāpabāhitapāpā panasamaṇabrāhmaṇāsamaṇaparikkhārasampadānena sakkātabbā, migapakkhino abhayadānena samassāsetabbā.

antojanasminti etc. was said. Here, this is the summarized meaning: establishing the internal people, namely, sons and wives, in the restraint of virtue, giving them clothes, perfume, garlands, etc., and preventing all disturbances for them, he is said to be arranging righteous protection, defense, and guard. The same method applies to the Khattiyas, etc. But this is the distinction: anointed Khattiyas are to be supported with gifts of excellent horses, thoroughbreds, and other treasures; following Khattiyas are to be pleased with gifts of vehicles and conveyances suitable to them; the army is to be favored with timely gifts of food and wages; Brahmins with gifts of food, drink, clothing, and other allowable items; householders with gifts of food, seeds, plows, oxen, etc.; and likewise, town dwellers (negamā) and country dwellers (jānapadā). But the Samanas and Brahmins who have eliminated evil and turned away from evil (samaṇabrāhmaṇā) are to be honored with gifts of requisites for ascetics, and birds and animals are to be reassured with the gift of safety.

Dhammeneva cakkaṃ vattetīti dasakusalakammapathadhammeneva cakkaṃ pavatteti.Taṃ hoti cakkaṃ appaṭivattiyanti taṃ tena evaṃ pavattitaṃ āṇācakkaṃ appaṭivattiyaṃ hoti.Kenacimanussabhūtenāti devatā nāma attanā icchiticchitameva karonti, tasmā tā aggaṇhitvā ‘‘manussabhūtenā’’ti vuttaṃ.Paccatthikenāti paṭiatthikena, paṭisattunāti attho.Dhammikoti cakkavattī dasakusalakammapathavasena dhammiko, tathāgato pana navalokuttaradhammavasena.Dhammarājāti navahi lokuttaradhammehi mahājanaṃ rañjetīti dhammarājā.Dhammaṃyevāti navalokuttaradhammameva nissāya tameva sakkaronto taṃ garukaronto taṃ apacāyamāno. Sovassa dhammo abbhuggataṭṭhena dhajotidhammaddhajo. Sovassa ketūtidhammaketu. Tameva adhipatiṃ jeṭṭhakaṃ katvā viharatītidhammādhipateyyo. Dhammikaṃ rakkhāvaraṇaguttinti lokiyalokuttaradhammadāyikarakkhañca āvaraṇañca guttiñca.Saṃvidahatīti ṭhapeti paññapeti.Evarūpanti tividhaṃ kāyaduccaritaṃ na sevitabbaṃ, sucaritaṃ sevitabbanti evaṃ sabbattha attho veditabbo.Saṃvidahitvāti ṭhapetvā kathetvā.Dhammeneva anuttaraṃ dhammacakkaṃ pavattetīti navalokuttaradhammeneva asadisaṃ dhammacakkaṃ pavatteti.Taṃ hoti cakkaṃ appaṭivattiyanti taṃ evaṃ pavattitaṃ dhammacakkaṃ etesu samaṇādīsu ekenapi paṭivattetuṃ paṭibāhituṃ na sakkā. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.

Dhammeneva cakkaṃ vattetīti means he turns the wheel with just the ten wholesome courses of action. Taṃ hoti cakkaṃ appaṭivattiyanti means that wheel of authority turned by him in this way is irreversible. Kenacimanussabhūtenāti means deities do whatever they wish, therefore, not including them, it is said, "by a human being." Paccatthikenāti means by an adversary, by an enemy. Dhammikoti means the wheel-turning monarch (cakkavattī) is righteous by way of the ten wholesome courses of action, but the Tathāgata (is righteous) by way of the nine supramundane qualities. Dhammarājāti means he delights the great multitude with the nine supramundane qualities, therefore he is a righteous king (dhammarājā). Dhammaṃyevāti means relying on just the nine supramundane qualities, honoring just that, respecting that, being humble to that. His Dhamma is a banner in the sense of being raised up, therefore he is dhammaddhajo (banner of Dhamma). His is a flag, therefore he is dhammaketu (flag of Dhamma). He dwells having made just that his lord, his chief, therefore he is dhammādhipateyyo (lord of Dhamma). Dhammikaṃ rakkhāvaraṇaguttinti means both mundane and supramundane Dhamma-giving protection (rakkha), defense (āvaraṇa), and guard (gutti). Saṃvidahatīti means he establishes, ordains. Evarūpanti means one should understand the meaning everywhere to be that such kinds of three unwholesome bodily actions should not be practiced, and wholesome actions should be practiced. Saṃvidahitvāti means having established, having spoken. Dhammeneva anuttaraṃ dhammacakkaṃ pavattetīti means he turns the unsurpassed wheel of Dhamma with just the nine supramundane qualities. Taṃ hoti cakkaṃ appaṭivattiyanti means that wheel of Dhamma turned in this way cannot be turned back or opposed by even one of these ascetics, etc. The rest is obvious everywhere.

5. Sacetanasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Sacetanasutta Commentary

15.Pañcameisipataneti buddhapaccekabuddhasaṅkhātānaṃ isīnaṃ dhammacakkappavattanatthāya ceva uposathakaraṇatthāya ca āgantvā patane, sannipātaṭṭhāneti attho. Padanetipi pāṭho, ayameva attho.Migadāyeti migānaṃ abhayatthāya dinne.Chahi māsehi chārattūnehīti so kira raññā āṇattadivaseyeva sabbūpakaraṇāni sajjetvā antevāsikehi saddhiṃ araññaṃ pavisitvā gāmadvāragāmamajjhadevakulasusānādīsu ṭhitarukkhe ceva jhāmapatitasukkharukkhe ca vivajjetvā sampannapadese ṭhite sabbadosavivajjite nābhiaranemīnaṃ anurūpe rukkhe gahetvā taṃ cakkaṃ akāsi. Tassa rukkhe vicinitvā gaṇhantassa ceva karontassa ca ettako kālo vītivatto. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘chahi māsehi chārattūnehī’’ti.Nānākaraṇanti nānattaṃ.Nesanti na esaṃ.Atthesanti atthi esaṃ.Abhisaṅkhārassa gatīti payogassa gamanaṃ.Ciṅgulāyitvāti paribbhamitvā.Akkhāhataṃ maññeti akkhe pavesetvā ṭhapitamiva.

15. Isipatana in the fifth [sutta] means a place of arrival and gathering for the isīs, namely Buddhas and Paccekabuddhas, for the purpose of setting the Wheel of Dhamma in motion and for holding Uposatha ceremonies. Padana is also a reading, with the same meaning. Migadāya means given for the safety of deer. Chahi māsehi chārattūnehi means that the artisan, having prepared all the equipment as soon as the king ordered, entered the forest with his apprentices and, avoiding trees standing in village gates, village centers, shrines, cemeteries, etc., as well as scorched or dead trees, took a tree suitable for the nave and spokes, located in a flawless area. So much time passed for him in searching for and taking the tree, and in making the wheel. Therefore, it was said, "in six months and six nights." Nānākaraṇa means difference. Nesa means not those. Atthesa means there are those. Abhisaṅkhārassa gatī means the course of effort. Ciṅgulāyitvā means having roamed around. Akkhāhataṃ maññe means as if it were placed and fixed in an axle.

Sadosāti sagaṇḍā uṇṇatoṇataṭṭhānayuttā.Sakasāvāti pūtisārena ceva pheggunā ca yuttā.Kāyavaṅkātiādīni kāyaduccaritādīnaṃ nāmāni.Evaṃ papatitāti evaṃ guṇapatanena patitā.Evaṃ patiṭṭhitāti evaṃ guṇehi patiṭṭhitā. Tattha lokiyamahājanā papatitā nāma, sotāpannādayo patiṭṭhitā nāma. Tesupi purimā tayo kilesānaṃ samudācārakkhaṇe papatitā nāma, khīṇāsavā pana ekanteneva patiṭṭhitā nāma.Tasmāti yasmā appahīnakāyavaṅkādayo papatanti, pahīnakāyavaṅkādayo patiṭṭhahanti, tasmā. Kāyavaṅkādīnaṃ pana evaṃ pahānaṃ veditabbaṃ – pāṇātipāto adinnādānaṃ micchācāro musāvādo pisuṇāvācā micchādiṭṭhīti ime tāva cha sotāpattimaggena pahīyanti, pharusāvācā byāpādoti dve anāgāmimaggena, abhijjhā samphappalāpoti dve arahattamaggenāti.

Sadosā means with knots, having uneven and elevated spots. Sakasāvā means endowed with rotten sap and pith. Kāyavaṅkā, etc., are names for bodily misconduct, etc. Evaṃ papatitā means fallen due to such qualities. Evaṃ patiṭṭhitā means established by such qualities. Among them, ordinary people are called fallen, while Stream-enterers, etc., are called established. Even among these, the first three are called fallen at the moment of the arising of defilements, while the perfected ones (khīṇāsavā) are called permanently established. Tasmā means because those who have not abandoned bodily crookedness, etc., fall, and those who have abandoned bodily crookedness, etc., are established, therefore. The abandonment of bodily crookedness, etc., should be understood thus: killing, stealing, sexual misconduct, lying, divisive speech, and wrong view—these six are abandoned by the Path of Stream-entry; harsh speech and ill-will—these two by the Path of Non-returning; covetousness and frivolous talk—these two by the Path of Arahantship.

6. Apaṇṇakasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Commentary on the Apaṇṇaka Sutta

16.Chaṭṭheapaṇṇakapaṭipadanti aviraddhapaṭipadaṃ ekaṃsapaṭipadaṃ niyyānikapaṭipadaṃ kāraṇapaṭipadaṃ sārapaṭipadaṃ maṇḍapaṭipadaṃ apaccanīkapaṭipadaṃ anulomapaṭipadaṃ dhammānudhammapaṭipadaṃ paṭipanno hoti, na takkaggāhena vā nayaggāhena vā. Evaṃ gahetvā paṭipanno hi bhikkhu vā bhikkhunī vā upāsako vā upāsikā vā manussadevanibbānasampattīhi hāyati parihāyati, apaṇṇakapaṭipadaṃ paṭipanno pana tāhi sampattīhi na parihāyati. Atīte kantāraddhānamaggaṃ paṭipannesu dvīsu satthavāhesu yakkhassa vacanaṃ gahetvā bālasatthavāho saddhiṃ satthena anayabyasanaṃ patto, yakkhassa vacanaṃ aggahetvā ‘‘udakadiṭṭhaṭṭhāne udakaṃ chaḍḍessāmā’’ti satthake saññāpetvā maggaṃ paṭipanno paṇḍitasatthavāho viya. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ –

16. In the sixth [sutta], apaṇṇakapaṭipada means practicing a non-erroneous practice, a one-sided practice, a practice that leads out, a causal practice, a substantial practice, an excellent practice, an unopposed practice, a conforming practice, a practice according to the Dhamma, not by grasping at logic or by grasping at methods. For a bhikkhu, bhikkhunī, upāsaka, or upāsikā who practices thus declines and falls away from the attainments of human, divine, and Nibbānic bliss; but one who practices the apaṇṇakapaṭipada does not fall away from those attainments. In the past, among two caravan leaders traveling a difficult desert road, the foolish caravan leader, taking the word of a yakkha, met with disaster along with the caravan, like the wise caravan leader who, not taking the word of a yakkha, instructed the caravan, "We will discard water at a place where water is seen," and traveled the road. Regarding this, it was said:

‘‘Apaṇṇakaṃ ṭhānameke, dutiyaṃ āhu takkikā;

"Some say the apaṇṇaka is one thing,
Logicians say it is another;
The wise one, knowing this,
Should take what is apaṇṇaka." (Jā. 1.1.1);

Yoni cassa āraddhā hotīti etthayonīti khandhakoṭṭhāsassapi kāraṇassapi passāvamaggassapi nāmaṃ. ‘‘Catasso kho imā, sāriputta, yoniyo’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.152) hi khandhakoṭṭhāso yoni nāma. ‘‘Yoni hesā bhūmija phalassa adhigamāyā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.226) kāraṇaṃ. ‘‘Na cāhaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ brūmi, yonijaṃ mattisambhava’’nti (ma. ni. 2.457; dha. pa. 396) ca ‘‘tamenaṃ kammajavātā nivattitvā uddhaṃpādaṃ adhosiraṃ samparivattetvā mātu yonimukhe sampaṭipādentī’’ti ca ādīsu passāvamaggo. Idha pana kāraṇaṃ adhippetaṃ.Āraddhāti paggahitā paripuṇṇā.

Yoni cassa āraddhā hotīti, here, yoni is a name for the aggregate-section, the cause, and the urinary tract. For in passages such as "These are the four yonis, Sāriputta" (M.N. 1.152), yoni means the aggregate-section. In passages such as "This is the yoni for the attainment of a ground-born fruit" (M.N. 3.226), it means the cause. And in passages such as "I do not call a brahmin one born of a womb (yonijaṃ), born of a mother" (M.N. 2.457; Dh.P. 396) and "Then the winds born of kamma, turning him upside down, head down and feet up, deposit him at the opening of the mother's womb (yonimukhe)," it means the urinary tract. Here, however, the cause is intended. Āraddhā means initiated, complete.

Āsavānaṃ khayāyāti ettha āsavantītiāsavā,cakkhutopi…pe… manatopi sandanti pavattantīti vuttaṃ hoti. Dhammato yāva gotrabhu, okāsato yāva bhavaggā savantīti vāāsavā,ete dhamme etañca okāsaṃ antokaritvā pavattantīti attho. Antokaraṇattho hi ayaṃ ākāro. Cirapārivāsiyaṭṭhena madirādayo āsavā, āsavā viyātipiāsavā. Lokasmimpi hi cirapārivāsikā madirādayo āsavāti vuccanti, yadi ca cirapārivāsiyaṭṭhena āsavā, eteyeva bhavitumarahanti. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘purimā, bhikkhave, koṭi na paññāyati avijjāya, ito pubbe avijjā nāhosī’’tiādi (a. ni. 10.61). Āyataṃ vā saṃsāradukkhaṃ savanti pasavantītipiāsavā. Purimāni cettha nibbacanāni yattha kilesā āsavāti āgacchanti, tattha yujjanti, pacchimaṃ kammepi. Na kevalañca kammakilesāyeva āsavā, apica kho nānappakārā upaddavāpi. Suttesu hi ‘‘nāhaṃ, cunda, diṭṭhadhammikānaṃyeva āsavānaṃ saṃvarāya dhammaṃ desemī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.182) ettha vivādamūlabhūtā kilesā āsavāti āgatā.

Āsavānaṃ khayāyati, here, āsavā means "they flow out," i.e., they flow and proceed from the eye...pe... and from the mind. Or, āsavā means "they flow from the Dhamma as far as the gotrabhu, and from the space as far as the peak of existence," meaning they flow encompassing this Dhamma and this space. For this figure [ākāro] is in the sense of encompassing. Āsavā are like intoxicants due to their long association, and also āsavā because they overflow. In the world, too, long-associated intoxicants are called āsavā, and they alone ought to be. For it was said, "The earliest beginning of ignorance is not evident, bhikkhus, before this there was no ignorance" (A.N. 10.61). Or, āsavā means "they flow forth, cause to exude, prolonged suffering of saṃsāra." The former explanations here apply where defilements come as āsavā, and the latter applies to kamma as well. Not only are kamma and defilements āsavā, but also various kinds of troubles. For in the suttas, "I do not teach the Dhamma, Cunda, only for the restraint of āsavā in this present life" (D.N. 3.182), here defilements that are the root of disputes are mentioned as āsavā.

‘‘Yena devūpapatyassa, gandhabbo vā vihaṅgamo;

"By which he might go to a divine state,
A gandhabba or a bird,
By which he might go to a yakkha state,
Or be reborn among humans;
Those āsavā of mine are destroyed,
Overthrown, made without residue." (A.N. 4.36) –

Ettha tebhūmakaṃ ca kammaṃ avasesā ca akusalā dhammā. ‘‘Diṭṭhadhammikānaṃ āsavānaṃ saṃvarāya samparāyikānaṃ āsavānaṃ paṭighātāyā’’ti (pārā. 39; a. ni. 2.202-230) ettha parūpavādavippaṭisāravadhabandhādayo ceva apāyadukkhabhūtā ca nānappakārā upaddavā.

Here, kamma of the three planes and the remaining unwholesome states are meant. "For the restraint of āsavā in this present life, for the warding off of āsavā in the life to come" (Pārā. 39; A.N. 2.202-230), here various kinds of troubles, such as reproaches, remorse, beatings, bonds, and sufferings of the lower realms, are meant.

Te panete āsavā yattha yathā āgatā, tattha tathā veditabbā. Ete hi vinaye tāva ‘‘diṭṭhadhammikānaṃ āsavānaṃ saṃvarāya, samparāyikānaṃ āsavānaṃ paṭighātāyā’’ti (pārā. 39; a. ni. 2.202-230) dvedhā āgatā. Saḷāyatane ‘‘tayo me, āvuso, āsavā kāmāsavo bhavāsavo avijjāsavo’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.321) tidhā āgatā. Aññesu ca suttantesu (cūḷani. jatukaṇṇimāṇavapucchāniddeso 69; paṭi. ma. 1.107) abhidhamme (dha. sa. 1102-1106; vibha. 937) ca teyeva diṭṭhāsavena saha catudhā āgatā. Nibbedhikapariyāyena ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, āsavā nirayagāminiyā, atthi āsavā tiracchānayonigāminiyā, atthi āsavā pettivisayagāminiyā, atthi āsavā manussalokagāminiyā, atthi āsavā devalokagāminiyā’’ti (a. ni. 6.63) pañcadhā āgatā. Kammameva cettha āsavāti vuttaṃ. Chakkanipāte ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, āsavā saṃvarāpahātabbā’’tiādinā (a. ni. 6.58) nayena chadhā āgatā. Sabbāsavapariyāye (ma. ni. 1.14 ādayo) teyeva dassanena pahātabbehi saddhiṃ sattadhā āgatā. Idha pana abhidhammanayena cattāro āsavā adhippetāti veditabbā.

These āsavā, however, should be understood according to where they appear. For in the Vinaya, they appear in two ways: "for the restraint of āsavā in this present life, for the warding off of āsavā in the life to come" (Pārā. 39; A.N. 2.202-230). In the Saḷāyatana, they appear in three ways: "These are the three āsavā, friend: the āsava of sense-pleasures, the āsava of becoming, and the āsava of ignorance" (Saṃ.N. 4.321). In other suttas (Cūḷani. Jatukaṇṇimāṇavapucchāniddeso 69; Paṭi.Ma. 1.107) and in the Abhidhamma (Dh.Sa. 1102-1106; Vibha. 937), they appear in four ways with the āsava of views. By way of the nibbedhikapariyāya, "There are āsavā, bhikkhus, that lead to hell; there are āsavā that lead to the animal realm; there are āsavā that lead to the realm of ghosts; there are āsavā that lead to the human world; there are āsavā that lead to the world of devas" (A.N. 6.63), they appear in five ways. Here, kamma itself is said to be āsavā. In the Chakkanipāta, they appear in six ways with the method beginning "There are āsavā to be abandoned by restraint" (A.N. 6.58). In the Sabbāsavapariyāya (M.N. 1.14 ff), they appear in seven ways with those to be abandoned by seeing. Here, however, it should be understood that the four āsavā are intended according to the Abhidhamma method.

Khayāyāti ettha pana āsavānaṃ sarasabhedopi khīṇākāropi maggaphalanibbānānipi ‘‘āsavakkhayo’’ti vuccati. ‘‘Yo āsavānaṃ khayo vayo bhedo paribhedo aniccatā antaradhāna’’nti ettha hi āsavānaṃ sarasabhedo ‘‘āsavakkhayo’’ti vutto. ‘‘Jānato ahaṃ, bhikkhave, passato āsavānaṃ khayaṃ vadāmī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.15; saṃ. ni. 2.23; itivu. 102) ettha āsavappahānaṃ āsavānaṃ accantakkhayo asamuppādo khīṇākāro natthibhāvo ‘‘āsavakkhayo’’ti vutto.

Khayāyati, here, the destruction of the flavor of the āsavā, the state of being destroyed, and the Paths, Fruits, and Nibbāna are called "destruction of the āsavā." For here, "Whatever is the destruction, decay, breaking, disintegration, impermanence, disappearance of the āsavā," is said to be "destruction of the āsavā." "Knowing, bhikkhus, I declare the destruction of the āsavā for one who sees" (M.N. 1.15; Saṃ.N. 2.23; Itivu. 102), here the abandonment of the āsavā, the complete destruction of the āsavā, their non-arising, the state of being destroyed, the state of non-existence, are said to be "destruction of the āsavā."

‘‘Sekhassa sikkhamānassa, ujumaggānusārino;

"For one who is a learner, training,
Following the straight path;
Knowledge comes first in destruction,
Then immediately, understanding." (Itivu. 62) –

Ettha maggo ‘‘āsavakkhayo’’ti vutto. ‘‘Āsavānaṃ khayā samaṇo hotī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.438) ettha phalaṃ.

Here, the Path is said to be "destruction of the āsavā." "By the destruction of the āsavā, one is a recluse" (M.N. 1.438), here, the Fruit is meant.

‘‘Paravajjānupassissa, niccaṃ ujjhānasaññino;

"For one who watches for the faults of others,
Who is always critical;
The āsavā increase for that one,
He is far from the destruction of the āsavā." (Dh.P. 253) –

Ettha nibbānaṃ. Imasmiṃ pana sutte phalaṃ sandhāya ‘‘āsavānaṃ khayāyā’’ti āha, arahattaphalatthāyāti attho.

Here, Nibbāna is meant. In this sutta, however, he said "for the destruction of the āsavā," intending the Fruit, meaning for the sake of the Fruit of Arahantship.

Indriyesu guttadvāroti manacchaṭṭhesu indriyesu pihitadvāro.Bhojane mattaññūti bhojanasmiṃ pamāṇaññū, paṭiggahaṇaparibhogapaccavekkhaṇamattaṃ jānāti pajānātīti attho.Jāgariyaṃanuyuttoti rattindivaṃ cha koṭṭhāse katvā pañcasu koṭṭhāsesu jāgaraṇabhāvaṃ anuyutto, jāgaraṇeyeva yuttappayuttoti attho.

Indriyesu guttadvāro means one with guarded doors in the six senses including the mind. Bhojane mattaññū means knowing moderation in food, he knows and understands the measure in acceptance, consumption, and reflection. Jāgariyaṃ anuyutto means dividing the day and night into six parts, he is devoted to wakefulness in five parts, meaning he is constantly engaged in wakefulness.

kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhūtiādimāha. Tatthacakkhunā rūpaṃ disvātiādīnaṃ attho visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.15) vitthārito, tathāpaṭisaṅkhā yoniso āhāraṃ āhāreti neva davāyātiādīnaṃ (visuddhi. 1.18).Āvaraṇīyehi dhammehīti pañcahi nīvaraṇehi dhammehi. Nīvaraṇāni hi cittaṃ āvaritvā tiṭṭhanti, tasmā āvaraṇīyā dhammāti vuccanti.Sīhaseyyaṃ kappetīti sīho viya seyyaṃ kappeti.Pāde pādaṃ accādhāyāti vāmapādaṃ dakkhiṇapāde atiādhāya. Samaṃ ṭhapite hi pāde jāṇukena jāṇukaṃ gopphakena ca gopphakaṃ ghaṭīyati, tato vedanā uṭṭhahanti. Tasmā tassa dosassa parivajjanatthaṃ thokaṃ atikkamitvā esa pādaṃ ṭhapeti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘pāde pādaṃ accādhāyā’’ti.

kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhū etc., he said. There, the meaning of cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā etc., is extensively explained in the Visuddhimagga (Visuddhi. 1.15), as well as that of paṭisaṅkhā yoniso āhāraṃ āhāreti neva davāyā etc. (Visuddhi. 1.18). Āvaraṇīyehi dhammehī means with the five hindrances. For the hindrances stand obstructing the mind, therefore they are called obstructive states. Sīhaseyyaṃ kappetī means he arranges his lying down like a lion. Pāde pādaṃ accādhāyā means placing the left foot over the right foot. For if the feet are placed evenly, knee touches knee and ankle touches ankle, and then pain arises. Therefore, to avoid that fault, he places that foot slightly overlapping. Therefore it was said, "placing the left foot over the right foot."

Satosampajānoti satiyā ceva sampajaññena ca samannāgato. Kathaṃ panesa niddāyanto sato sampajāno nāma hotīti? Purimappavattivasena. Ayaṃ hi caṅkame caṅkamanto niddāya okkamanabhāvaṃ ñatvā pavattamānaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ ṭhapetvā mañce vā phalake vā nipanno niddaṃ upagantvā puna pabujjhamāno kammaṭṭhānaṃ ṭhitaṭṭhāne gaṇhantoyeva pabujjhati. Tasmā niddāyantopi sato sampajāno nāma hoti. Ayaṃ tāva mūlakammaṭṭhāne nayova. Pariggahakammaṭṭhānavasenāpi panesa sato sampajāno nāma hoti. Kathaṃ? Ayaṃ hi caṅkamanto niddāya okkamanabhāvaṃ ñatvā pāsāṇaphalake vā mañce vā dakkhiṇena passena nipajjitvā paccavekkhati – ‘‘acetano kāyo acetane mañce patiṭṭhito, acetano mañco acetanāya pathaviyā, acetanā pathavī acetane udake, acetanaṃ udakaṃ acetane vāte, acetano vāto acetane ākāse patiṭṭhito. Tattha ākāsampi ‘ahaṃ vātaṃ ukkhipitvā ṭhita’nti na jānāti, vātopi ‘ahaṃ ākāse patiṭṭhito’ti na jānāti. Tathā vāto na jānāti. ‘Ahaṃ udakaṃ ukkhipitvā ṭhito’ti…pe… mañco na jānāti, ‘ahaṃ kāyaṃ ukkhipitvā ṭhito’ti, kāyo na jānāti ‘ahaṃ mañce patiṭṭhito’ti. Na hi tesaṃ aññamaññaṃ ābhogo vā samannāhāro vā manasikāro vā cetanā vā patthanā vā atthī’’ti. Tassa evaṃ paccavekkhato taṃ paccavekkhaṇacittaṃ bhavaṅge otarati. Evaṃ niddāyantopi sato sampajāno nāma hotīti.

Sato sampajāno means endowed with mindfulness and clear comprehension. How then is he called mindful and clearly comprehending while sleeping? By virtue of his previous practice. For he, while walking on the walkway, knowing the tendency to fall asleep, having set aside the meditation subject that was proceeding, lies down on a bed or plank, goes to sleep, and upon awakening, awakens taking up the meditation subject at the very place where it stopped. Therefore, even while sleeping, he is called mindful and clearly comprehending. This, indeed, is the method in the basic meditation. However, he is also called mindful and clearly comprehending in terms of the support meditation. How? He, while walking on the walkway, knowing the tendency to fall asleep, lies down on his right side on a stone slab or bed and reflects, "An inanimate body is resting on an inanimate bed, an inanimate bed is resting on inanimate earth, inanimate earth is resting on inanimate water, inanimate water is resting on inanimate air, inanimate air is resting on inanimate space. There, even space does not know, 'I am standing having supported air,' nor does air know, 'I am resting on space.' Similarly, air does not know, 'I am standing having supported water'...pe... the bed does not know, 'I am standing having supported the body,' nor does the body know, 'I am resting on the bed.' For there is no influence, interaction, attention, volition, or desire among them." While he is reflecting thus, that reflecting mind subsides into bhavaṅga. Thus, even while sleeping, he is called mindful and clearly comprehending.

Uṭṭhānasaññaṃ manasikaritvāti ‘‘ettakaṃ ṭhānaṃ gate cande vā tārakāya vā uṭṭhahissāmī’’ti uṭṭhānakālaparicchedikaṃ saññaṃ manasikaritvā, citte ṭhapetvāti attho. Evaṃ karitvā sayito hi yathāparicchinneyeva kāle uṭṭhahati.

Uṭṭhānasaññaṃ manasikaritvā means having paid attention to the thought of rising, "I will rise when the moon or a star has reached such and such a position," having fixed in mind the sign that determines the time of rising. For having done thus, he rises at exactly the appointed time.

7. Attabyābādhasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Commentary on the Attabyābādha Sutta

17.Sattameattabyābādhāyāti attadukkhāya.Parabyābādhāyāti paradukkhāya.Kāyasucaritantiādīni pubbabhāge dasakusalakammapathavasena āgatāni, upari pana yāva arahattā avāritāneva.

17. In the seventh [sutta], attabyābādhāya means for self-affliction. Parabyābādhāya means for the affliction of others. Kāyasucarita etc., came in the preliminary part in terms of the ten wholesome courses of action, but above that, they are unobstructed even up to Arahantship.

8. Devalokasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Commentary on the Devaloka Sutta

18.Aṭṭhameaṭṭīyeyyāthāti aṭṭā pīḷitā bhaveyyātha.Harāyeyyāthāti lajjeyyātha.Jiguccheyyāthāti gūthe viya tasmiṃ vacane sañjātajigucchā bhaveyyātha.Iti kirāti etthaitīti padasandhibyañjanasiliṭṭhatā,kirāti anussavatthe nipāto. Dibbena kira āyunā aṭṭīyathāti evamassa sambandho veditabbo.Pageva kho panāti paṭhamataraṃyeva.

18. In the eighth [sutta], aṭṭīyeyyātha means you would be distressed. Harāyeyyātha means you would be ashamed. Jiguccheyyātha means you would feel disgust towards that speech, like towards filth. Iti kirā means, here, itī is a term that connects the words, kirā is a particle in the sense of hearsay. "You would be distressed by the divine lifespan," thus the connection should be understood. Pageva kho panā means even earlier.

9. Paṭhamapāpaṇikasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Commentary on the Paṭhamapāpaṇika Sutta

19.Navamepāpaṇikoti āpaṇiko, āpaṇaṃ ugghāṭetvā bhaṇḍavikkāyakassa vāṇijassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.Abhabboti abhājanabhūto.Nasakkaccaṃ kammantaṃ adhiṭṭhātīti yathā adhiṭṭhitaṃ suadhiṭṭhitaṃ hoti, evaṃ sayaṃ attapaccakkhaṃ karonto nādhiṭṭhāti. Tattha paccūsakāle padasaddena uṭṭhāya dīpaṃ jāletvā bhaṇḍaṃ pasāretvā anisīdanto pubbaṇhasamayaṃ na sakkaccaṃ kammantaṃ adhiṭṭhāti nāma. Ayaṃ hi yaṃ corā rattiṃ bhaṇḍaṃ haritvā ‘‘idaṃ amhākaṃ hatthato vissajjessāmā’’ti āpaṇaṃ gantvā appena agghena denti, yampi bahuverino manussā rattiṃ nagare vasitvā pātova āpaṇaṃ gantvā bhaṇḍaṃ gaṇhanti, yaṃ vā pana janapadaṃ gantukāmā manussā pātova āpaṇaṃ gantvā bhaṇḍaṃ kiṇanti, tappaccayassa lābhassa assāmiko hoti.

19. In the ninth, pāpaṇiko means a shopkeeper, a term for a merchant who opens a shop and sells goods. Abhabbo means incapable, not a vessel. Na sakkaccaṃ kammantaṃ adhiṭṭhātī means he does not undertake the task attentively, making it well-established as intended, personally verifying it himself. Here, in the early morning, rising with the sound of footsteps, lighting a lamp, spreading out the goods, and not sitting down, he does not attentively undertake the task. This is because he is not the owner of the profit that comes when thieves, after stealing goods at night, go to the shop and offer them at a low price, saying, "We will sell these from our hands," or when people with much enmity, having lived in the city at night, go to the shop early in the morning and buy goods, or when people wanting to go to the countryside buy goods early in the morning.

majjhanhikasamayaṃ na sakkaccaṃ kammantaṃ adhiṭṭhātināma. So hi yaṃ corā pātova vissajjetuṃ na sampāpuṇiṃsu, divākāle pana paresaṃ asañcārakkhaṇe āpaṇaṃ gantvā appagghena denti, yañca bhojanavelāya puññavanto issarā ‘‘āpaṇato idañcidañca laddhuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti pahiṇitvā āharāpenti, tappaccayassa lābhassa assāmiko hoti.

Majjhanhikasamayaṃ na sakkaccaṃ kammantaṃ adhiṭṭhāti means he does not attentively undertake the task at midday. This is because he is not the owner of the profit that comes when thieves, unable to sell the goods early in the morning, go to the shop during the day, when others are not watching, and offer them at a low price, or when virtuous wealthy people send messengers during mealtime, saying, "It is fitting to obtain this and that from the shop," and have them brought.

sāyanhasamayaṃ na sakkaccaṃ kammantaṃ adhiṭṭhātināma. So hi yaṃ corā pātopi divāpi vissajjetuṃ na sampāpuṇiṃsu, sāyaṃ pana āpaṇaṃ gantvā appagghena denti, tappaccayassa lābhassa assāmiko hoti.

Sāyanhasamayaṃ na sakkaccaṃ kammantaṃ adhiṭṭhāti means he does not attentively undertake the task in the evening. This is because he is not the owner of the profit that comes when thieves, unable to sell the goods either early in the morning or during the day, go to the shop in the evening and offer them at a low price.

Na sakkaccaṃ samādhinimittaṃ adhiṭṭhātīti sakkaccakiriyāya samādhiṃ na samāpajjati. Ettha ca pātova cetiyaṅgaṇabodhiyaṅgaṇesu vattaṃ katvā senāsanaṃ pavisitvā yāva bhikkhācāravelā, tāva samāpattiṃ appetvā anisīdantopubbaṇhasamayaṃ na sakkaccaṃ samādhinimittaṃ adhiṭṭhātināma. Pacchābhattaṃ pana piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto rattiṭṭhānadivāṭṭhānaṃ pavisitvā yāva sāyanhasamayā samāpattiṃ appetvā anisīdantomajjhanhikasamayaṃ na sakkaccaṃ samādhinimittaṃ adhiṭṭhātināma. Sāyaṃ pana cetiyaṃ vanditvā therūpaṭṭhānaṃ katvā senāsanaṃ pavisitvā paṭhamayāmaṃ samāpattiṃ samāpajjitvā anisīdantosāyanhasamayaṃ na sakkaccaṃ samādhinimittaṃ adhiṭṭhātināma. Sukkapakkho vuttapaṭipakkhanayeneva veditabbo. Apicettha ‘‘samāpattiṃ appetvā’’ti vuttaṭṭhāne samāpattiyā asati vipassanāpi vaṭṭati, samādhinimittanti ca samādhiārammaṇampi vaṭṭatiyeva. Vuttampi cetaṃ – ‘‘samādhipi samādhinimittaṃ, samādhārammaṇampi samādhinimitta’’nti.

Na sakkaccaṃ samādhinimittaṃ adhiṭṭhātī means he does not attain concentration through attentive action. Here, after performing duties at the cetiya courtyard and Bodhi courtyard early in the morning, entering the lodging, and not applying his mind to attainment until the time for alms round, he pubbaṇhasamayaṃ na sakkaccaṃ samādhinimittaṃ adhiṭṭhāti means he does not attentively apply his mind to the cause of concentration in the forenoon. Again, after returning from the alms round after the meal, entering his daytime or nighttime dwelling, and not applying his mind to attainment until the evening, he majjhanhikasamayaṃ na sakkaccaṃ samādhinimittaṃ adhiṭṭhāti means he does not attentively apply his mind to the cause of concentration at midday. Again, after venerating the cetiya in the evening, attending to the elders, entering his lodging, and not attaining to concentration during the first watch of the night, he sāyanhasamayaṃ na sakkaccaṃ samādhinimittaṃ adhiṭṭhāti means he does not attentively apply his mind to the cause of concentration in the evening. The bright fortnight should be understood in the same way, with the opposite method. Moreover, here, in the place where "samāpattiṃ appetvā" (without applying his mind to attainment) is said, if there is no attainment, insight (vipassanā) is also appropriate, and samādhinimitta also means the object of concentration (samādhiārammaṇa). For it has been said, "Concentration is both the cause of concentration and the object of concentration."

10. Dutiyapāpaṇikasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Commentary on the Second Pāpaṇika Sutta

20.Dasamecakkhumāti paññācakkhunā cakkhumā hoti.Vidhuroti visiṭṭhadhuro uttamadhuro ñāṇasampayuttena vīriyena samannāgato.Nissayasampannoti avassayasampanno patiṭṭhānasampanno.Paṇiyanti vikkāyikabhaṇḍaṃ.Ettakaṃ mūlaṃ bhavissati ettako udayoti tasmiṃ ‘‘evaṃ kītaṃ evaṃ vikkāyamāna’’nti vuttapaṇiye yena kayena taṃ kītaṃ, taṃ kayasaṅkhātaṃ mūlaṃ ettakaṃ bhavissati. Yo ca tasmiṃ vikkayamāne vikkayo, tasmiṃ vikkaye ettako udayo bhavissati, ettikā vaḍḍhīti attho.

20. In the tenth, cakkhumā means having sight, having the eye of wisdom. Vidhuro means having a distinct burden, an excellent burden, endowed with energy connected with knowledge. Nissayasampanno means endowed with support, endowed with a foundation. Paṇiyaṃ means goods for sale. Ettakaṃ mūlaṃ bhavissati ettako udayo means, in that merchandise said to be "thus bought, thus being sold," the price at which it was bought, that price called the cost, will be so much. And in that being sold, the sale, in that sale there will be so much profit, so much increase.

Kusalo hoti paṇiyaṃ ketuñca vikketuñcāti sulabhaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā kiṇanto dullabhaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā vikkiṇanto ca ettha kusalo nāma hoti, dasaguṇampi vīsatiguṇampi lābhaṃ labhati.

Kusalo hoti paṇiyaṃ ketuñca vikketuñcā means he is skilled at buying by going to a place where it is easily available and selling by going to a place where it is difficult to obtain; he obtains a profit of ten or twenty times the cost.

Aḍḍhāti issarā bahunā nikkhittadhanena samannāgatā.Mahaddhanāti vaḷañjanakavasena mahaddhanā.Mahābhogāti upabhogaparibhogabhaṇḍena mahābhogā.Paṭibaloti kāyabalena ceva ñāṇabalena ca samannāgatattā samattho.Amhākañca kālena kālaṃ anuppadātunti amhākañca gahitadhanamūlikaṃ vaḍḍhiṃ kālena kālaṃ anuppadātuṃ.Nipatantīti nimantenti. Nipātentītipi pāṭho, ayameva attho.

Aḍḍhā means wealthy, endowed with much deposited wealth. Mahaddhanā means having great wealth in terms of resources. Mahābhogā means having great possessions in terms of goods for consumption and use. Paṭibalo means capable, being endowed with both physical strength and the strength of knowledge. Amhākañca kālena kālaṃ anuppadātu means to give us the increase on the principal of the money taken from us from time to time. Nipatantī means they invite. Nipātentītipi pāṭho, ayameva attho.

Kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ upasampadāyāti kusaladhammānaṃ sampādanatthāya paṭilābhatthāya.Thāmavāti ñāṇathāmena samannāgato.Daḷhaparakkamoti thirena ñāṇaparakkamena samannāgato.Anikkhittadhuroti ‘‘aggamaggaṃ apāpuṇitvā imaṃ vīriyadhuraṃ na ṭhapessāmī’’ti evaṃ aṭṭhapitadhuro.

Kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ upasampadāyā means for the attainment, for the acquisition, of skillful qualities. Thāmavā means endowed with the strength of knowledge. Daḷhaparakkamo means endowed with firm energy of knowledge. Anikkhittadhuro means one who has not laid down the burden, thinking, "Without attaining the highest path, I will not put down this burden of effort."

Bahussutāti ekanikāyādivasena bahu buddhavacanaṃ sutaṃ etesanti bahussutā.Āgatāgamāti eko nikāyo eko āgamo nāma, dve nikāyā dve āgamā nāma, pañca nikāyā pañca āgamā nāma, etesu āgamesu yesaṃ ekopi āgamo āgato paguṇo pavattito, te āgatāgamā nāma.Dhammadharāti suttantapiṭakadharā.Vinayadharāti vinayapiṭakadharā.Mātikādharāti dvemātikādharā.Paripucchatīti atthānatthaṃ kāraṇākāraṇaṃ pucchati.Paripañhatīti ‘‘imaṃ nāma pucchissāmī’’ti aññāti tuleti pariggaṇhāti. Sesamettha uttānatthameva.

Bahussutā means those who have heard much of the Buddha's teaching, according to one Nikāya, etc. Āgatāgamā means, one Nikāya is called one Āgama, two Nikāyas are called two Āgamas, five Nikāyas are called five Āgamas; among these Āgamas, those who have mastered, learned, and propagated even one Āgama are called āgatāgamā. Dhammadharā means those who uphold the Suttanta Piṭaka. Vinayadharā means those who uphold the Vinaya Piṭaka. Mātikādharā means those who uphold the two Mātikās. Paripucchatī means he asks about what is beneficial and not beneficial, what is a cause and not a cause. Paripañhatī means he considers and determines in advance, thinking, "I will ask about this." The rest here is clear in meaning.

Imasmiṃ pana sutte paṭhamaṃ paññā āgatā, pacchā vīriyañca kalyāṇamittasevanā ca. Tattha paṭhamaṃ arahattaṃ patvā pacchā vīriyaṃ katvā kalyāṇamittā sevitabbāti na evaṃ attho daṭṭhabbo, desanāya nāma heṭṭhimena vā paricchedo hoti uparimena vā dvīhipi vā koṭīhi. Idha pana uparimena paricchedo veditabbo. Tasmā kathentena paṭhamaṃ kalyāṇamittaupanissayaṃ dassetvā majjhe vīriyaṃ dassetvā pacchā arahattaṃ kathetabbanti.

However, in this sutta, wisdom (paññā) comes first, and then effort (vīriya) and association with good friends (kalyāṇamitta). One should not understand the meaning to be that one attains arahantship first and then exerts effort and associates with good friends. The discourse is limited by either the lower or the upper, or by both ends. Here, the limitation should be understood by the upper end. Therefore, when speaking, one should first show the support of good friends, then show effort in the middle, and finally speak of arahantship.

3. Puggalavaggo

3. Puggalavagga

1. Samiddhasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Samiddha Sutta Commentary

21.Tatiyassa paṭhame jhānaphassaṃ paṭhamaṃ phusati, pacchā nirodhaṃ nibbānaṃ sacchikarotītikāyasakkhi. Diṭṭhantaṃ pattotidiṭṭhippatto. Saddahanto vimuttotisaddhāvimutto. Khamatīti ruccati.Abhikkantataroti atisundarataro.Paṇītataroti atipaṇītataro.Saddhindriyaṃ adhimattaṃ hotīti samiddhattherassa kira arahattamaggakkhaṇe saddhindriyaṃ dhuraṃ ahosi, sesāni cattāri sahajātindriyāni tasseva parivārāni ahesuṃ. Iti thero attanā paṭividdhamaggaṃ kathento evamāha. Mahākoṭṭhikattherassa pana arahattamaggakkhaṇe samādhindriyaṃ dhuraṃ ahosi, sesāni cattāri indriyāni tasseva parivārāni ahesuṃ. Tasmā sopi samādhindriyaṃ adhimattanti kathento attanā paṭividdhamaggameva kathesi. Sāriputtattherassa pana arahattamaggakkhaṇe paññindriyaṃ dhuraṃ ahosi. Sesāni cattāri indriyāni tasseva parivārāni ahesuṃ. Tasmā sopi paññindriyaṃ adhimattanti kathento attanā paṭividdhamaggameva kathesi.

21. In the first, kāyasakkhi means one who first experiences the feeling of jhāna and then realizes cessation, Nibbāna. Diṭṭhippatto means one who has attained right view. Saddhāvimutto means one freed by faith. Khamatī means it pleases. Abhikkantataro means exceedingly beautiful. Paṇītataro means exceedingly refined. Saddhindriyaṃ adhimattaṃ hotī means, it is said that for the Venerable Samiddha, at the moment of the path to arahantship, the faculty of faith was predominant, and the remaining four co-arisen faculties were its retinue. Thus, the Elder, speaking of the path he had realized, said this. But for the Venerable Mahākoṭṭhita, at the moment of the path to arahantship, the faculty of concentration was predominant, and the remaining four faculties were its retinue. Therefore, he, too, speaking of the predominance of the faculty of concentration, spoke of the path he had realized. But for the Venerable Sāriputta, at the moment of the path to arahantship, the faculty of wisdom was predominant, and the remaining four faculties were its retinue. Therefore, he, too, speaking of the predominance of the faculty of wisdom, spoke of the path he had realized.

Nakhvetthāti na kho ettha.Ekaṃsena byākātunti ekantena byākarituṃ.Arahattāya paṭipannoti arahattamaggasamaṅgiṃ dasseti. Evametasmiṃ sutte tīhipi therehi attanā paṭividdhamaggova kathito, sammāsambuddho pana bhummantareneva kathesi.

Na khvetthā means not here. Ekaṃsena byākātu means to explain definitively. Arahattāya paṭipanno indicates one who has entered upon the path to arahantship. Thus, in this sutta, the path realized by each of the three elders was spoken of, but the Sammāsambuddha spoke only by way of suggestion.

2. Gilānasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Gilāna Sutta Commentary

22.Dutiyesappāyānīti hitāni vuddhikarāni.Patirūpanti anucchavikaṃ.Neva vuṭṭhāti tamhā ābādhāti iminā atekicchena vātāpamārādinā rogena samannāgato niṭṭhāpattagilāno kathito.Vuṭṭhāti tamhā ābādhāti iminā khipitakakacchutiṇapupphakajarādibhedo appamattaābādho kathito.Labhanto sappāyāni bhojanāni no alabhantoti iminā pana yesaṃ paṭijagganena phāsukaṃ hoti, sabbepi te ābādhā kathitā. Ettha capatirūpo upaṭṭhākonāma gilānupaṭṭhākaaṅgehi samannāgato paṇḍito dakkho analaso veditabbo.Gilānupaṭṭhāko anuññātoti bhikkhusaṅghena dātabboti anuññāto. Tasmiñhi gilāne attano dhammatāya yāpetuṃ asakkonte bhikkhusaṅghena tassa bhikkhuno eko bhikkhu ca sāmaṇero ca ‘‘imaṃ paṭijaggathā’’ti apaloketvā dātabbā. Yāva pana te taṃ paṭijagganti, tāva gilānassa ca tesañca dvinnaṃ yenattho, sabbaṃ bhikkhusaṅghasseva bhāro.

22. In the second, sappāyānī means beneficial, promoting growth. Patirūpaṃ means suitable, appropriate. Neva vuṭṭhāti tamhā ābādhā means here, one who is afflicted with an incurable disease like epilepsy, etc., is said to be a patient nearing death (niṭṭhāpattagilāno). Vuṭṭhāti tamhā ābādhā means here, one afflicted with a slight illness, such as a cold, cough, fever, old age, etc., is spoken of. Labhanto sappāyāni bhojanāni no alabhanto means here, all those illnesses for which ease is obtained by tending to them are spoken of. And here, patirūpo upaṭṭhāko means a suitable attendant, to be understood as a wise, skilled, and tireless person endowed with the qualities of a sick-nurse. Gilānupaṭṭhāko anuññāto means an attendant who is permitted, to be given by the Saṅgha of monks. For when a sick person is unable to maintain himself according to his own nature, the Saṅgha of monks should appoint one bhikkhu and one sāmaṇera to that bhikkhu, after seeking approval, saying, "Tend to this one." As long as they tend to him, whatever is needed by the sick person and the two attendants, all that is the responsibility of the Saṅgha of monks.

Aññepi gilānā upaṭṭhātabbāti itarepi dve gilānā upaṭṭhāpetabbā. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Yopi hi niṭṭhapattagilāno, so anupaṭṭhiyamāno ‘‘sace maṃ paṭijaggeyyuṃ, phāsukaṃ me bhaveyya. Na kho pana maṃ paṭijaggantī’’ti manopadosaṃ katvā apāye nibbatteyya. Paṭijaggiyamānassa panassa evaṃ hoti ‘‘bhikkhusaṅghena yaṃ kātabbaṃ, taṃ kataṃ. Mayhaṃ pana kammavipāko īdiso’’ti. So bhikkhusaṅghe mettaṃ paccupaṭṭhāpetvā sagge nibbattissati. Yo pana appamattakena byādhinā samannāgato labhantopi alabhantopi vuṭṭhātiyeva, tassa vināpi bhesajjena vūpasamanabyādhi bhesajje kate khippataraṃ vūpasammati. So tato buddhavacanaṃ vā uggaṇhituṃ sakkhissati, samaṇadhammaṃ vā kātuṃ sakkhissati. Iminā kāraṇena ‘‘aññepi gilānā upaṭṭhātabbā’’ti vuttaṃ.

Aññepi gilānā upaṭṭhātabbā means other two sick persons should also be attended to. Why? Because even the sick person who is nearing death, if not attended to, might create mental corruption thinking, "If they would attend to me, it would be easeful for me, but they are not tending to me," and be reborn in a lower realm. But for one being attended to, it occurs to him, "What should be done by the Saṅgha of monks has been done. But my result of karma is such." Having established loving-kindness in the Saṅgha of monks, he will be reborn in heaven. But one who, afflicted with a slight illness, recovers whether he obtains or does not obtain suitable things, his illness subsides even without medicine, or subsides more quickly if medicine is taken. He will then be able to learn the Buddha's teaching, or be able to practice the ascetic life. For this reason, it is said, "Other sick persons should also be attended to."

Neva okkamatīti neva pavisati.Niyāmaṃ kusalesu dhammesu sammattanti kusalesu dhammesu magganiyāmasaṅkhātaṃ sammattaṃ. Iminā padaparamo puggalo kathito. Dutiyavārena ugghaṭitaññū gahito sāsane nālakattherasadiso buddhantare ekavāraṃ paccekabuddhānaṃ santike ovādaṃ labhitvā paṭividdhapaccekabodhiñāṇo ca. Tatiyavārena vipañcitaññū puggalo kathito, neyyo pana tannissitova hoti.

Neva okkamatī means he never enters. Niyāmaṃ kusalesu dhammesu sammatta means fixedness, establishment, in wholesome qualities, regarding the fixed course of the path. By this, the person who is "only a word" (padaparamo) is described. In the second turn, the one who understands when the meaning is explained (ugghaṭitaññū) is taken, like the Elder Nālakata, who, in another Buddha's era, having received advice once from the Paccekabuddhas, realized the knowledge of a Paccekabuddha. In the third turn, the one who understands when the meaning is elaborated (vipañcitaññū) is described, and the one who needs guidance (neyyo) is dependent on that.

Dhammadesanā anuññātāti māsassa aṭṭha vāre dhammakathā anuññātā.Aññesampi dhammo desetabboti itaresampi dhammo kathetabbo. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Padaparamassa hi imasmiṃ attabhāve dhammaṃ paṭivijjhituṃ asakkontassāpi anāgate paccayo bhavissati. Yo pana tathāgatassa rūpadassanaṃ labhantopi alabhantopi dhammavinayañca savanāya labhantopi alabhantopi dhammaṃ abhisameti, so alabhanto tāva abhisameti. Labhanto pana khippameva abhisamessatīti iminā kāraṇena tesaṃ dhammo desetabbo. Tatiyassa pana punappunaṃ desetabbova.

Dhammadesanā anuññātā means the teaching of the Dhamma is permitted eight times a month. Aññesampi dhammo desetabbo means the Dhamma should be taught to others as well. Why? Because even if the person who is "only a word" (padaparamo) is unable to penetrate the Dhamma in this lifetime, it will be a condition for the future. But the one who attains the Dhamma, whether he obtains or does not obtain the sight of the Tathāgata, and whether he obtains or does not obtain the hearing of the Dhamma and the Discipline, he attains it even without obtaining them. But if he obtains them, he will attain it very quickly; for this reason, the Dhamma should be taught to them. For the third one, it should be taught again and again.

3. Saṅkhārasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Saṅkhāra Sutta Commentary

23.Tatiyesabyābajjhanti sadukkhaṃ.Kāyasaṅkhāranti kāyadvāre cetanārāsiṃ.Abhisaṅkharotīti āyūhati rāsiṃ karoti piṇḍaṃ karoti.Vacīmanodvāresupi eseva nayo.Sabyābajjhaṃ lokanti sadukkhaṃ lokaṃ.Sabyābajjhā phassā phusantīti sadukkhā vipākaphassā phusanti.Sabyābajjhaṃvedanaṃ vediyatīti sadukkhaṃ vipākavedanaṃ vediyati, sābādhaṃ nirassādanti attho.Seyyathāpi sattā nerayikāti yathā niraye nibbattasattā ekantadukkhaṃ vedanaṃ vediyanti, evaṃ vediyatīti attho. Kiṃ pana tattha upekkhāvedanā natthīti? Atthi, dukkhavedanāya pana balavabhāvena sā abbohārikaṭṭhāne ṭhitā. Iti nirayova nirayassa upamaṃ katvā āhaṭo. Tatra paṭibhāgaupamā nāma kira esā.

23. In the third, sabyābajjhaṃ means with suffering. Kāyasaṅkhāraṃ means a mass of volition in the door of the body. Abhisaṅkharotī means he accumulates, makes a mass, makes a lump. The same method applies vacīmanodvāresu (in the doors of speech and mind) too. Sabyābajjhaṃ lokaṃ means a world with suffering. Sabyābajjhā phassā phusantī means painful results of contact touch. Sabyābajjhaṃ vedanaṃ vediyatī means he experiences painful result of feeling, it is troublesome, without enjoyment. Seyyathāpi sattā nerayikā means just as beings born in hell experience only painful feeling, so he experiences. But is there no neutral feeling there? There is, but due to the strength of the painful feeling, it remains in a non-functional state. Thus, hell itself is brought as a simile for hell. It seems that this is called a simile of resemblance there.

Seyyathāpi devā subhakiṇhāti idhāpi devalokova devalokassa upamaṃ katvā āhaṭo. Yasmā pana heṭṭhimesu brahmalokesu sappītikajjhānavipāko vattati, subhakiṇhesu nippītiko ekantasukhova, tasmā te aggahetvā subhakiṇhāva kathitā. Iti ayampi tatra paṭibhāgaupamā nāmāti veditabbā.

Seyyathāpi devā subhakiṇhā here too, the deva-world itself is brought as a simile for the deva-world. But because in the lower Brahma-worlds there exists the result of jhāna with joy, and in the Subhakiṇha-worlds there is only happiness without joy, therefore, without taking those, only the Subhakiṇha are mentioned. Thus, this too should be understood as a simile of resemblance there.

Vokiṇṇasukhadukkhanti vomissakasukhadukkhaṃ.Seyyathāpi manussāti manussānaṃ hi kālena sukhaṃ hoti, kālena dukkhaṃ.Ekacce ca devāti kāmāvacaradevā. Tesampi kālena sukhaṃ hoti, kālena dukkhaṃ. Tesaṃ hi hīnatarānaṃ mahesakkhatarā devatā disvā āsanā vuṭṭhātabbaṃ hoti, maggā ukkamitabbaṃ, pārutavatthaṃ apanetabbaṃ, añjalikammaṃ kātabbanti taṃ sabbampi dukkhaṃ nāma hoti.Ekacce ca vinipātikāti vemānikapetā. Te hi kālena sampattiṃ anubhavanti kālena kammanti vokiṇṇasukhadukkhāva honti. Iti imasmiṃ sutte tīṇi sucaritāni lokiyalokuttaramissakāni kathitānīti veditabbāni.

Vokiṇṇasukhadukkhaṃ means mixed happiness and suffering. Seyyathāpi manussā means for humans, there is happiness at times, and suffering at times. Ekacce ca devā means the devas of the sensuous sphere. For them too, there is happiness at times, and suffering at times. For when devas of lesser power see more powerful deities, they have to get up from their seats, move out of the way, remove their outer garment, and perform the añjali gesture; all that is called suffering. Ekacce ca vinipātikā means the vemānika-petas. For they experience prosperity at times and karma at times, and thus they have mixed happiness and suffering. Thus, in this sutta, three good conducts, mixed with mundane and supramundane, are said to be understood.

4. Bahukārasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Bahukāra Sutta Commentary

24.Catutthetayome, bhikkhave, puggalāti tayo ācariyapuggalā.Puggalassabahukārāti antevāsikapuggalassa bahūpakārā.Buddhanti sabbaññubuddhaṃ.Saraṇaṃ gato hotīti avassayaṃ gato hoti.Dhammanti satantikaṃ navalokuttaradhammaṃ.Saṅghanti aṭṭhaariyapuggalasamūhaṃ. Idañca pana saraṇagamanaṃ aggahitasaraṇapubbassa akatābhinivesassa vasena vuttaṃ. Iti imasmiṃ sutte saraṇadāyako sotāpattimaggasampāpako arahattamaggasampāpakoti tayo ācariyā bahukārāti āgatā, pabbajjādāyako buddhavacanadāyako kammavācācariyo sakadāgāmimaggasampāpako anāgāmimaggasampāpakoti ime ācariyā na āgatā, kiṃ ete na bahukārāti? No, na bahukārā. Ayaṃ pana desanā duvidhena paricchinnā. Tasmā sabbepete bahukārā. Tesu saraṇagamanasmiṃyeva akatābhiniveso vaṭṭati, catupārisuddhisīlakasiṇaparikammavipassanāñāṇāni pana paṭhamamaggasannissitāni honti, upari dve maggā ca phalāni ca arahattamaggasannissitānīti veditabbāni.

24. In the fourth, "These three, bhikkhus, are individuals" means three teacher individuals. "Are of great assistance to the individual" means are of great assistance to the pupil individual. "Buddha" means the all-knowing Buddha. "Has gone for refuge" means has gone for reliance. "Dhamma" means the flawless, nine supramundane Dhammas. "Saṅgha" means the group of eight noble individuals. This going for refuge, however, is stated in terms of one who has not previously taken refuge and has not made a firm commitment. Thus, in this sutta, the three teachers who lead to the attainment of the Stream-entry path and the Arahatship path are mentioned as being of great assistance. The teachers who give the going forth, give the Buddha's word, the kammavācā teacher, who lead to the attainment of the Once-returning path and the Non-returning path, these teachers are not mentioned. Are these not of great assistance? No, they are not of great assistance. But this teaching is defined in two ways. Therefore, all these are of great assistance. Among them, non-commitment is suitable only in going for refuge, but the fourfold purity of sīla, kasiṇa-preparatory work, and insight knowledges are based on the first path, and the two higher paths and the fruits are to be understood as based on the Arahatship path.

Iminā puggalenāti iminā antevāsikapuggalena.Na suppatikāraṃ vadāmīti patikāraṃ kātuṃ na sukaranti vadāmi. Abhivādanādīsu anekasatavāraṃ anekasahassavārampi hi pañcapatiṭṭhitena nipatitvā vandanto āsanā vuṭṭhāya paccuggacchanto diṭṭhadiṭṭhakkhaṇe añjaliṃ paggaṇhanto anucchavikaṃ sāmīcikammaṃ karonto divase divase cīvarasataṃ cīvarasahassaṃ piṇḍapātasataṃ piṇḍapātasahassaṃ dadamāno cakkavāḷapariyantena sabbaratanamayaṃ āvāsaṃ karonto sappinavanītādinānappakāraṃ bhesajjaṃ anuppadajjamāno neva sakkoti ācariyena katassa patikāraṃ nāma kātunti evamattho veditabbo.

"By this individual" means by this pupil individual. "I do not say it is easy to repay" means I say it is not easy to make repayment. For even bowing with the fivefold prostration hundreds or thousands of times in acts of reverence, rising from the seat to greet him, raising the hands in añjali at every opportunity, performing appropriate respectful actions, giving hundreds of robes, thousands of robes, hundreds of alms-food portions, thousands of alms-food portions, constructing a dwelling made entirely of jewels extending to the edge of the cakkavāḷa, constantly providing various kinds of medicine such as ghee and butter, one is not able to repay the teacher for what he has done, this is the meaning to be understood.

5. Vajirūpamasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Vajirūpama Sutta Commentary

25.Pañcamearukūpamacittoti purāṇavaṇasadisacitto.Vijjūpamacittoti ittarakālobhāsanena vijjusadisacitto.Vajirūpamacittoti kilesānaṃ mūlaghātakaraṇasamatthatāya vajirena sadisacitto.Abhisajjatīti laggati.Kuppatīti kopavasena kuppati.Byāpajjatīti pakatibhāvaṃ pajahati, pūtiko hoti.Patitthīyatīti thinabhāvaṃ thaddhabhāvaṃ āpajjati.Kopanti dubbalakodhaṃ.Dosanti dussanavasena tato balavataraṃ.Appaccayanti atuṭṭhākāraṃ domanassaṃ.Duṭṭhārukoti purāṇavaṇo.Kaṭṭhenāti daṇḍakakoṭiyā.Kaṭhalenāti kapālena.Āsavaṃ detīti aparāparaṃ savati. Purāṇavaṇo hi attano dhammatāyeva pubbaṃ lohitaṃ yūsanti imāni tīṇi savati, ghaṭṭito pana tāni adhikataraṃ savati.

25. In the fifth, "Mind like a festering sore" means a mind like an old wound. "Mind like a flash of lightning" means a mind like lightning, due to its brief illumination. "Mind like a diamond" means a mind like a diamond, due to its ability to destroy the roots of the kilesas. "Becomes attached" means clings. "Becomes angry" means becomes agitated due to anger. "Becomes malicious" means abandons its natural state, becomes foul. "Becomes rigid" means attains a state of rigidity and stubbornness. "Anger" means weak anger. "Aversion" means stronger than that, in the sense of hating. "Displeasure" means a state of dissatisfaction, dejection. "Festering sore" means an old wound. "With a stick" means with the tip of a stick. "With a potsherd" means with a piece of broken pottery. "Lets flow" means flows continuously. For an old wound, by its very nature, first lets flow blood, serum, and pus; but when scraped, it lets them flow even more.

Evamevakhoti ettha idaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ – duṭṭhāruko viya hi kodhanapuggalo, tassa attano dhammatāya savanaṃ viya kodhanassapi attano dhammatāya uddhumātassa viya caṇḍikatassa caraṇaṃ, kaṭṭhena vā kaṭhalāya vā ghaṭṭanaṃ viya appamattaṃ vacanaṃ, bhiyyosomattāya savanaṃ viya ‘‘mādisaṃ nāma esa evaṃ vadatī’’ti bhiyyosomattāya uddhumāyanabhāvo daṭṭhabbo.

"Just so, indeed" here is the connection of the simile: a person full of anger is like a festering sore; the way it flows by its very nature is like the angry person acting in an agitated and fierce manner by his very nature; a slight word is like scraping with a stick or potsherd; the greatly increased flow is to be seen as the greatly increased agitated state, thinking, "He dares to say such a thing to me!"

Rattandhakāratimisāyanti rattiṃ cakkhuviññāṇuppattinivāraṇena andhabhāvakaraṇe bahalatame.Vijjantarikāyāti vijjuppattikkhaṇe. Idhāpi idaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ – cakkhumā puriso viya hi yogāvacaro daṭṭhabbo, andhakāraṃ viya sotāpattimaggavajjhā kilesā, vijjusañcaraṇaṃ viya sotāpattimaggañāṇassa uppattikālo, vijjantarikāya cakkhumato purisassa samantā rūpadassanaṃ viya sotāpattimaggakkhaṇe nibbānadassanaṃ, puna andhakārāvattharaṇaṃ viya sakadāgāmimaggavajjhā kilesā, puna vijjusañcaraṇaṃ viya sakadāgāmimaggañāṇassa uppādo, vijjantarikāya cakkhumato purisassa samantā rūpadassanaṃ viya sakadāgāmimaggakkhaṇe nibbānadassanaṃ, puna andhakārāvattharaṇaṃ viya anāgāmimaggavajjhā kilesā, puna vijjusañcaraṇaṃ viya anāgāmimaggañāṇassa uppādo, vijjantarikāya cakkhumato purisassa samantā rūpadassanaṃ viya anāgāmimaggakkhaṇe nibbānadassanaṃ veditabbaṃ.

"In utter darkness of night" means in the densest darkness, preventing the arising of eye-consciousness at night. "In a flash of lightning" means at the moment of lightning's arising. Here too, is the connection of the simile: the yogi should be seen as like the man with sight; the darkness as the kilesas subject to the Stream-entry path; the flash of lightning as the time of arising of the Stream-entry path knowledge; seeing forms all around by the man with sight in a flash of lightning as seeing Nibbāna at the moment of the Stream-entry path; again, the covering of darkness as the kilesas subject to the Once-returning path; again, the flash of lightning as the arising of the Once-returning path knowledge; seeing forms all around by the man with sight in a flash of lightning as seeing Nibbāna at the moment of the Once-returning path; again, the covering of darkness as the kilesas subject to the Non-returning path; again, the flash of lightning as the arising of the Non-returning path knowledge; seeing forms all around by the man with sight in a flash of lightning is to be understood as seeing Nibbāna at the moment of the Non-returning path.

Vajirūpamacittatāyapiidaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ – vajiraṃ viya hi arahattamaggañāṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, maṇigaṇṭhipāsāṇagaṇṭhi viya arahattamaggavajjhā kilesā, vajirassa maṇigaṇṭhimpi vā pāsāṇagaṇṭhimpi vā vinivijjhitvā agamanabhāvassa natthitā viya arahattamaggañāṇena acchejjānaṃ kilesānaṃ natthibhāvo, vajirena nibbiddhavedhassa puna apatipūraṇaṃ viya arahattamaggena chinnānaṃ kilesānaṃ puna anuppādo daṭṭhabboti.

"In having a diamond-like mind" here too, is the connection of the simile: Arahatship path knowledge should be seen as like a diamond; the knot of jewels or the knot of stones as the kilesas subject to the Arahatship path; the impossibility of the diamond not piercing through a knot of jewels or a knot of stones is like the non-existence of kilesas that cannot be cut off by Arahatship path knowledge; the diamond-pierced hole not being filled up again is to be seen as the kilesas cut off by the Arahatship path not arising again.

6. Sevitabbasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Sevitabba Sutta Commentary

26.Chaṭṭhesevitabboti upasaṅkamitabbo.Bhajitabboti allīyitabbo.Payirupāsitabboti santike nisīdanavasena punappunaṃ upāsitabbo.Sakkatvā garuṃ katvāti sakkārañceva garukārañca katvā.Hīno hoti sīlenātiādīsu upādāyupādāya hīnatā veditabbā. Tattha yo hi pañca sīlāni rakkhati, so dasa sīlāni rakkhantena na sevitabbo. Yo dasa sīlāni rakkhati, so catupārisuddhisīlaṃ rakkhantena na sevitabbo.Aññatra anuddayā aññatra anukampāti ṭhapetvā anuddayañca anukampañca. Attano atthāyeva hi evarūpo puggalo na sevitabbo, anuddayānukampāvasena pana taṃ upasaṅkamituṃ vaṭṭati.

26. In the sixth, "Should be associated with" means should be approached. "Should be cultivated" means should be adhered to. "Should be attended upon" means should be repeatedly attended upon by sitting nearby. "Respecting and honoring" means having made respect and reverence. In "Is inferior in sīla" etc., inferiority is to be understood by taking up each quality. Here, one who keeps the five sīlas should not be associated with one who keeps the ten sīlas. One who keeps the ten sīlas should not be associated with one who keeps the fourfold purity of sīla. "Except out of compassion, except out of sympathy" means setting aside compassion and sympathy. For such a person should not be associated with for one's own benefit, but it is fitting to approach him out of compassion and sympathy.

Sīlasāmaññagatānaṃ satanti sīlena samānabhāvaṃ gatānaṃ santānaṃ.Sīlakathāca no bhavissatīti evaṃ samānasīlānaṃ amhākaṃ sīlameva ārabbha kathā bhavissati.Sā ca no pavattinī bhavissatīti sā ca amhākaṃ kathā divasampi kathentānaṃ pavattissati na paṭihaññissati.Sā ca no phāsu bhavissatīti sā ca divasampi pavattamānā sīlakathā amhākaṃ phāsuvihāro sukhavihāro bhavissati.Samādhipaññākathāsupi eseva nayo.

"Of those gone to similarity in sīla" means of those beings gone to equality by sīla. "There will be talk about sīla" means for us who are equal in sīla, there will be talk based on sīla itself. "And it will be continuous for us" means that talk of ours, even if we speak for a day, will continue and will not be interrupted. "And it will be comfortable for us" means that talk about sīla, even if it continues for a day, will be comfortable dwelling and happy dwelling for us. The same method applies to talk about samādhi and paññā.

Sīlakkhandhanti sīlarāsiṃ.Tattha tattha paññāya anuggahessāmīti ettha sīlassa asappāye anupakāradhamme vajjetvā sappāye upakāradhamme sevanto tasmiṃ tasmiṃ ṭhāne sīlakkhandhaṃ paññāya anuggaṇhāti nāma.Samādhipaññākkhandhesupi eseva nayo.Nihīyatīti attano hīnataraṃ puggalaṃ sevanto khāraparissāvane āsittaudakaṃ viya satataṃ samitaṃ hāyati parihāyati.Tulyasevīti attanā samānasevī.Seṭṭhamupanamanti seṭṭhaṃ puggalaṃ oṇamanto.Udeti khippanti khippameva vaḍḍhati.Tasmā attano uttariṃ bhajethāti yasmā seṭṭhaṃ puggalaṃ upanamanto udeti khippaṃ, tasmā attano uttaritaraṃ visiṭṭhataraṃ bhajetha.

"Aggregate of sīla" means the mass of sīla. "There, in that place, I will support it with paññā" here, avoiding what is unsuitable and unhelpful for sīla, and cultivating what is suitable and helpful, one supports the aggregate of sīla with paññā in that place. The same method applies to the aggregates of samādhi and paññā. "Declines" means continually and constantly diminishes and deteriorates, like water poured into a filter of alkali, when associating with a person inferior to oneself. "Associating with an equal" means associating with one equal to oneself. "Approaches a superior" means inclining towards a superior person. "Quickly increases" means quickly grows. "Therefore, one should cultivate someone superior to oneself" means since one increases quickly when approaching a superior person, therefore, one should cultivate one more excellent and distinguished than oneself.

7. Jigucchitabbasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Jigucchitabba Sutta Commentary

27.Sattamejigucchitabboti gūthaṃ viya jigucchitabbo.Atha kho nanti atha kho assa.Kittisaddoti kathāsaddo.Evameva khoti ettha gūthakūpo viya dussīlyaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Gūthakūpe patitvā ṭhito dhammaniahi viya dussīlapuggalo. Gūthakūpato uddhariyamānena tena ahinā purisassa sarīraṃ āruḷhenāpi adaṭṭhabhāvo viya dussīlaṃ sevamānassāpi tassa kiriyāya akaraṇabhāvo. Sarīraṃ gūthena makkhetvā ahinā gatakālo viya dussīlaṃ sevamānassa pāpakittisaddaabbhuggamanakālo veditabbo.

27. In the seventh, "Should be detested" means should be detested like excrement. "But then not" means but then not for him. "Sound of his fame" means the sound of his talk. "Just so, indeed" here, bad sīla should be seen as like a cesspool. A person of bad sīla is like a snake fallen into a cesspool and remaining there. Just as even if that snake, being lifted out of the cesspool, crawls on a man's body, it does not bite him, so too, even when associating with a person of bad sīla, there is no doing of that action by him. The time when the snake has gone after smearing the body with excrement is to be understood as the time when the bad sound of fame arises for one associating with bad sīla.

Tindukālātanti tindukarukkhaalātaṃ.Bhiyyosomattāya cicciṭāyatīti taṃ hi jhāyamānaṃ pakatiyāpi papaṭikāyo muñcantaṃ cicciṭāti ‘‘ciṭiciṭā’’ti saddaṃ karoti, ghaṭṭitaṃ pana adhimattaṃ karotīti attho.Evameva khoti evamevaṃ kodhano attano dhammatāyapi uddhato caṇḍikato hutvā carati, appamattakaṃ pana vacanaṃ sutakāle ‘‘mādisaṃ nāma evaṃ vadati evaṃ vadatī’’ti atirekataraṃ uddhato caṇḍikato hutvā carati.Gūthakūpoti gūthapuṇṇakūpo, gūtharāsiyeva vā. Opammasaṃsandanaṃ panettha purimanayeneva veditabbaṃ.Tasmā evarūpo puggalo ajjhupekkhitabbo na sevitabboti yasmā kodhano atiseviyamāno atiupasaṅkamiyamānopi kujjhatiyeva, ‘‘kiṃ iminā’’ti paṭikkamantepi kujjhatiyeva. Tasmā palālaggi viya ajjhupekkhitabbo na sevitabbo na bhajitabbo. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Yo hi palālaggiṃ atiupasaṅkamitvā tappati, tassa sarīraṃ jhāyati. Yo atipaṭikkamitvā tappati, tassa sītaṃ na vūpasammati. Anupasaṅkamitvā apaṭikkamitvā pana majjhattabhāvena tappantassa sītaṃ vūpasammati, tasmā palālaggi viya kodhano puggalo majjhattabhāvena ajjhupekkhitabbo, na sevitabbo na bhajitabbo na payirupāsitabbo.

"Tinduka ember" means an ember from a tinduka tree. "Crackles even more" means that, while burning, it naturally makes a crackling sound, releasing its bark, but when stirred, it makes the sound even more, this is the meaning. "Just so, indeed" just so, an angry person naturally acts in an agitated and fierce manner, but upon hearing even a slight word, he acts in an extremely agitated and fierce manner, thinking, "He dares to say such a thing to me!" "Cesspool" means a pool filled with excrement, or simply a heap of excrement. The connection of the simile here should be understood in the same way as before. "Therefore, such a person should be ignored, not associated with" means since an angry person gets angry even when over-served and over-approached, and gets angry even when turned away, saying, "What is the use of him?" Therefore, he should be ignored like a straw fire, not associated with, not cultivated. What is said? For one who warms himself by approaching a straw fire too closely, his body burns. For one who warms himself by turning away too far, the cold does not subside. But for one who warms himself by neither approaching nor turning away, but in a middling way, the cold subsides. Therefore, an angry person should be ignored in a middling way, like a straw fire, not associated with, not cultivated, not attended upon.

Kalyāṇamittoti sucimitto.Kalyāṇasahāyoti sucisahāyo. Sahāyā nāma sahagāmino saddhiṃcarā.Kalyāṇasampavaṅkoti kalyāṇesu sucipuggalesu sampavaṅko, tanninnatappoṇatappabbhāramānasoti attho.

"Good friend" means a true friend. "Good companion" means a true companion. Companions are those who go together, who travel together. "Good associate" means associate with the good, with true persons, meaning one whose mind is inclined, disposed, and tending towards them.

8. Gūthabhāṇīsuttavaṇṇanā
8. Gūthabhāṇī Sutta Commentary

28.Aṭṭhamegūthabhāṇīti yo gūthaṃ viya duggandhakathaṃ katheti.Pupphabhāṇīti yo pupphāni viya sugandhakathaṃ katheti.Madhubhāṇīti yo madhu viya madhurakathaṃ katheti.Sabhaggatoti sabhāya ṭhito.Parisaggatoti gāmaparisāya ṭhito.Ñātimajjhagatoti ñātīnaṃ majjhe ṭhito.Pūgamajjhagatoti seṇīnaṃ majjhe ṭhito.Rājakulamajjhagatoti rājakulassa majjhe mahāvinicchaye ṭhito.Abhinītoti pucchanatthāyānīto.Sakkhipuṭṭhoti sakkhiṃ katvā pucchito.Ehambho purisāti ālapanametaṃ.Attahetu vā parahetu vāti attano vā parassa vā hatthapādādihetu vā dhanahetu vā.Āmisakiñcikkhahetu vāti etthaāmisanti lañjo adhippeto.Kiñcikkhanti yaṃ vā taṃ vā appamattakaṃ antamaso tittiriyavaṭṭakasappipiṇḍanavanītapiṇḍādimattakassa lañjassa hetūti attho.Sampajānamusā bhāsitā hotīti jānantoyeva musāvādaṃ kattā hoti.

28. In the eighth, "Speaks excrement" means one who speaks words that are foul-smelling like excrement. "Speaks flowers" means one who speaks words that are fragrant like flowers. "Speaks honey" means one who speaks words that are sweet like honey. "Gone to an assembly" means standing in an assembly. "Gone to a gathering" means standing in a village gathering. "Gone to the midst of relatives" means standing in the midst of relatives. "Gone to the midst of a guild" means standing in the midst of guilds. "Gone to the midst of the royal family" means standing in the midst of the royal family in a great judgment. "Brought forth" means brought for questioning. "Asked as a witness" means asked after being made a witness. "Come here, good sirs" this is an address. "For his own sake or for the sake of another" means for his own sake or for the sake of another, for the sake of hands, feet, etc., or for the sake of wealth. "Or for the sake of some trifling gain" here, "gain" means bribery. "Trifling" means for the sake of some small amount, even as little as a patty of quail or sparrow ghee or a lump of butter, this is the meaning. "Is speaking a deliberate lie" means knowingly commits false speech.

Nelāti elaṃ vuccati doso, nāssa elanti nelā, niddosāti attho. ‘‘Nelaṅgo setapacchādo’’ti (udā. 65) ettha vuttasīlaṃ viya.Kaṇṇasukhāti byañjanamadhuratāya kaṇṇānaṃ sukhā, sūcivijjhanaṃ viya kaṇṇasūlaṃ na janeti. Atthamadhuratāya sakalasarīre kopaṃ ajanetvā pemaṃ janetītipemanīyā. Hadayaṃ gacchati appaṭihaññamānā sukhena cittaṃ pavisatītihadayaṅgamā. Guṇaparipuṇṇatāya pure bhavātiporī. Pure saṃvaḍḍhanārī viya sukumārātipi porī. Purassa esātipi porī. Purassa esāti nagaravāsīnaṃ kathāti attho. Nagaravāsino hi yuttakathā honti, pitimattaṃ pitāti, mātimattaṃ mātāti, bhātimattaṃ bhātāti vadanti. Evarūpī kathā bahuno janassa kantā hotītibahujanakantā. Kantabhāveneva bahuno janassa manāpā cittavuddhikarātibahujanamanāpā.

"Nelā" means ela is said to be a fault, one without fault is nelā, meaning faultless. Like the sīla stated in "Nelaṅgo setapacchādo" (udā. 65). "Pleasing to the ear" means pleasing to the ears due to the sweetness of the expression, it does not produce ear-ache like a needle prick. "Endearing" because it generates affection in the entire body due to the sweetness of the meaning, without generating anger. "Heart-gladdening" it enters the heart easily, penetrating the mind pleasantly without obstruction. "Civilized" because it is perfect in qualities. It is also civilized because it is very refined, like a woman raised in the city. It is also civilized because it belongs to the city. It is also civilized because it is the speech of city dwellers, meaning city dwellers are truthful in their speech; they say father only to one who is truly their father, mother only to one who is truly their mother, brother only to one who is truly their brother. Such speech is liked by many people, so it is "liked by many people". Just by being liked, it is "delightful to many people", increasing their mental well-being.

9. Andhasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Andha Sutta Commentary

29.Navamecakkhu na hotīti paññācakkhu na hoti.Phātiṃ kareyyāti phītaṃ vaḍḍhitaṃ kareyya.Sāvajjānavajjeti sadosaniddose.Hīnappaṇīteti adhamuttame.Kaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāgeti kaṇhasukkāyeva aññamaññaṃ paṭibāhanato paṭipakkhavasena sappaṭibhāgāti vuccanti. Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepo – kusale dhamme ‘‘kusalā dhammā’’ti jāneyya, akusale dhamme ‘‘akusalā dhammā’’ti jāneyya. Sāvajjādīsupi eseva nayo. Kaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāgesu pana kaṇhadhamme ‘‘sukkasappaṭibhāgā’’ti jāneyya, sukkadhamme ‘‘kaṇhasappaṭibhāgā’’ti yena paññācakkhunā jāneyya, tathārūpampissa cakkhu na hotīti. Iminā nayena sesavāresupi attho veditabbo.

29. In the ninth, "Has no eye" means has no eye of paññā. "Would make flourish" means would make prosperous and grow. "Faulty and faultless" means with and without faults. "Inferior and superior" means low and excellent. "Dark and bright counterparts" means dark and bright are called counterparts because they mutually repel each other, being opposed. Here is a summary of it: he should know skillful dhammas as "skillful dhammas," and he should know unskillful dhammas as "unskillful dhammas." The same method applies to faulty etc. But in dark and bright counterparts, he should know dark dhammas as "bright counterparts," and he should know bright dhammas as "dark counterparts," by whatever eye of paññā he would know, he does not have such an eye. In this way, the meaning should be understood in the remaining instances as well.

Na ceva bhogā tathārūpāti tathājātikā bhogāpissa na honti.Na ca puññāni kubbatīti puññāni ca na karoti. Ettāvatā bhoguppādanacakkhuno ca puññakaraṇacakkhuno ca abhāvo vutto.Ubhayattha kaliggāhoti idhaloke ca paraloke cāti ubhayasmimpi aparaddhaggāho, parājayaggāho hotīti attho. Atha vāubhayattha kaliggāhoti ubhayesampi diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikānaṃ atthānaṃ kaliggāho, parājayaggāhoti attho.Dhammādhammenāti dasakusalakammapathadhammenapi dasaakusalakammapathaadhammenapi.Saṭhoti kerāṭiko.Bhogāni pariyesatīti bhoge gavesati.Theyyenakūṭakammena, musāvādena cūbhayanti theyyādīsu ubhayena pariyesatīti attho. Kathaṃ? Theyyena kūṭakammena ca pariyesati, theyyena musāvādena ca pariyesati, kūṭakammena musāvādena ca pariyesati.Saṅghātunti saṅgharituṃ.Dhammaladdhehīti dasakusalakammapathadhammaṃ akopetvā laddhehi.Uṭṭhānādhigatanti vīriyena adhigataṃ.Abyagghamānasoti nibbicikicchacitto.Bhaddakaṃ ṭhānanti seṭṭhaṃ devaṭṭhānaṃ.Na socatīti yasmiṃ ṭhāne antosokena na socati.

Na ceva bhogā tathārūpāti even such riches do not exist for him. Na ca puññāni kubbatīti and he does not perform meritorious deeds. Thus, it is said that there is an absence of the eye for generating wealth and the eye for performing meritorious deeds. Ubhayattha kaliggāhoti in this world and the next, in both, there is a seizing of faults, a seizing of defeat, this is the meaning. Or rather, ubhayattha kaliggāhoti a seizing of faults, a seizing of defeat in both kinds of goals, those pertaining to the visible and future lives. Dhammādhammenāti through the Dhamma of the ten wholesome courses of action and through the Adhamma of the ten unwholesome courses of action. Saṭhoti deceitful. Bhogāni pariyesatīti he seeks wealth. Theyyenakūṭakammena, musāvādena cūbhayanti he seeks by both theft and false dealing, or falsehood. How? He seeks by theft and false dealing, he seeks by theft and falsehood, he seeks by false dealing and falsehood. Saṅghātunti to gather. Dhammaladdhehīti by acquisitions gained without violating the Dhamma of the ten wholesome courses of action. Uṭṭhānādhigatanti acquired through effort. Abyagghamānasoti with unwavering mind. Bhaddakaṃ ṭhānanti an excellent, divine state. Na socatīti in which place he does not grieve with inner sorrow.

10. Avakujjasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Avakujjasuttavaṇṇanā

30.Dasameavakujjapaññoti adhomukhapañño.Ucchaṅgapaññoti ucchaṅgasadisapañño.Puthupaññoti vitthārikapañño.Ādikalyāṇantiādīsuādīti pubbapaṭṭhapanā.Majjhanti kathāvemajjhaṃ.Pariyosānanti sanniṭṭhānaṃ. Itissa te dhammaṃ kathentā pubbapaṭṭhapanepi kalyāṇaṃ bhaddakaṃ anavajjameva katvā kathenti, vemajjhepi pariyosānepi. Ettha ca atthi desanāya ādimajjhapariyosānāni, atthi sāsanassa. Tattha desanāya tāva catuppadikagāthāya paṭhamapadaṃ ādi, dve padāni majjhaṃ, avasānapadaṃ pariyosānaṃ. Ekānusandhikassa suttassa nidānaṃ ādi, anusandhi majjhaṃ, idamavocāti appanā pariyosānaṃ. Anekānusandhikassa paṭhamo anusandhi ādi, tato paraṃ eko vā aneke vā majjhaṃ, pacchimo pariyosānaṃ. Ayaṃ tāva desanāya nayo. Sāsanassa pana sīlaṃ ādi, samādhi majjhaṃ, vipassanā pariyosānaṃ. Samādhi vā ādi, vipassanā majjhaṃ, maggo pariyosānaṃ. Vipassanā vā ādi, maggo majjhaṃ, phalaṃ pariyosānaṃ. Maggo vā ādi, phalaṃ majjhaṃ, nibbānaṃ pariyosānaṃ. Dve dve vā kayiramāne sīlasamādhayo ādi, vipassanāmaggā majjhaṃ, phalanibbānāni pariyosānaṃ.

30.In the tenth, avakujjapaññoti one whose wisdom is face-downward. Ucchaṅgapaññoti one whose wisdom is like a lap. Puthupaññoti one whose wisdom is extensive. Ādikalyāṇanti in the beginnings, ādīti the initial setting forth. Majjhanti the middle of the discourse. Pariyosānanti the conclusion. Thus, while they are speaking the Dhamma, they speak having made the initial setting forth good, auspicious, and blameless, and also in the middle and at the conclusion. And here, there are beginnings, middles, and conclusions to the teaching, and there are beginnings, middles, and conclusions to the Dispensation (sāsana). There, for the teaching, the first line of a four-line verse is the beginning, the two lines are the middle, and the final line is the conclusion. For a Sutta with one connection, the introduction is the beginning, the connection is the middle, and "idamavoca" (thus he spoke) is the application, the conclusion. For one with many connections, the first connection is the beginning, thereafter one or many are the middle, and the last is the conclusion. This is the method for the teaching. But for the Dispensation, morality (sīla) is the beginning, concentration (samādhi) is the middle, and insight (vipassanā) is the conclusion. Or concentration is the beginning, insight is the middle, and the path (magga) is the conclusion. Or insight is the beginning, the path is the middle, and the fruit (phala) is the conclusion. Or the path is the beginning, the fruit is the middle, and Nibbāna is the conclusion. Or, when doing two at a time, morality and concentration are the beginning, insight and the paths are the middle, and the fruits and Nibbāna are the conclusion.

Sātthanti sātthakaṃ katvā desenti.Sabyañjananti akkharapāripūriṃ katvā desenti.Kevalaparipuṇṇanti sakalaparipuṇṇaṃ anūnaṃ katvā desenti.Parisuddhanti parisuddhaṃ nijjaṭaṃ niggaṇṭhiṃ katvā desenti.Brahmacariyaṃ pakāsentīti evaṃ desentā ca seṭṭhacariyabhūtaṃ sikkhattayasaṅgahitaṃ ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ pakāsenti.Neva ādiṃ manasi karotīti neva pubbapaṭṭhapanaṃ manasi karoti.

Sātthanti they teach having made it meaningful. Sabyañjananti they teach having made the letters complete. Kevalaparipuṇṇanti they teach having made it entirely complete, without deficiency. Parisuddhanti they teach having made it pure, without complications, without knots. Brahmacariyaṃ pakāsentīti and teaching thus, they reveal the Noble Eightfold Path, which is the supreme conduct, included within the three trainings (sikkhā). Neva ādiṃ manasi karotīti he does not attend to the initial setting forth.

Kumbhoti ghaṭo.Nikujjoti adhomukho ṭhapito.Evameva khoti ettha kumbho nikujjo viya avakujjapañño puggalo daṭṭhabbo, udakāsiñcanakālo viya dhammadesanāya laddhakālo, udakassa vivaṭṭanakālo viya tasmiṃ āsane nisinnassa uggahetuṃ asamatthakālo, udakassa asaṇṭhānakālo viya vuṭṭhahitvā asallakkhaṇakālo veditabbo.

Kumbhoti a pot. Nikujjoti placed face down. Evameva khoti here, the person with face-downward wisdom should be seen as like a pot placed face down, the time of pouring water is like the time for receiving a teaching of the Dhamma, the time for opening the water is like the time when one sitting in that seat is unable to grasp it, and the time of the water not staying is to be understood as like the time of standing up and not reflecting.

Ākiṇṇānīti pakkhittāni.Satisammosāya pakireyyāti muṭṭhassatitāya vikireyya.Evameva khoti ettha ucchaṅgo viya ucchaṅgapañño puggalo daṭṭhabbo, nānākhajjakāni viya nānappakāraṃ buddhavacanaṃ, ucchaṅge nānākhajjakāni khādantassa nisinnakālo viya tasmiṃ āsane nisinnassa uggaṇhanakālo, vuṭṭhahantassa satisammosā pakiraṇakālo viya tasmā āsanā vuṭṭhāya gacchantassa asallakkhaṇakālo veditabbo.

Ākiṇṇānīti scattered. Satisammosāya pakireyyāti he would scatter through confused mindfulness. Evameva khoti here, the person with lap-like wisdom should be seen as like a lap, the various snacks are like the Buddha's word of various kinds, the time of sitting eating the various snacks in the lap is like the time when one sitting in that seat is grasping it, and the time of scattering with confused mindfulness when standing up is to be understood as like the time of not reflecting when standing up from that seat and leaving.

Ukkujjoti uparimukho ṭhapito.Saṇṭhātīti patiṭṭhahati.Evameva khoti ettha uparimukho ṭhapito kumbho viya puthupañño puggalo daṭṭhabbo, udakassa āsittakālo viya desanāya laddhakālo, udakassa saṇṭhānakālo viya tattha nisinnassa uggaṇhanakālo, no vivaṭṭanakālo viya vuṭṭhāya gacchantassa sallakkhaṇakālo veditabbo.

Ukkujjoti placed face up. Saṇṭhātīti stands firm. Evameva khoti here, the person with extensive wisdom should be seen as like a pot placed face up, the time of pouring water is like the time for receiving a teaching, the time of the water standing firm is like the time when one sitting there is grasping it, and the time of not opening is to be understood as like the time of reflecting when standing up and leaving.

Dummedhoti nippañño.Avicakkhaṇoti saṃvidahanapaññāya rahito.Gantāti gamanasīlo.Seyyo etena vuccatīti etasmā puggalā uttaritaroti vuccati.Dhammānudhammappaṭipannoti navalokuttaradhammassa anudhammaṃ saha sīlena pubbabhāgapaṭipadaṃ paṭipanno.Dukkhassāti vaṭṭadukkhassa.Antakaro siyāti koṭikaro paricchedakaro parivaṭumakaro bhaveyyāti.

Dummedhoti lacking wisdom. Avicakkhaṇoti devoid of discerning wisdom. Gantāti one who is given to going. Seyyo etena vuccatīti he is said to be superior to this person. Dhammānudhammappaṭipannoti one who has practiced the Dhamma in accordance with the Dhamma, the preliminary practice together with morality, in accordance with the nine supramundane Dhammas. Dukkhassāti of the suffering of the round. Antakaro siyāti he would be one who makes an end, a limit, a boundary.

4. Devadūtavaggo

4. Devadūtavaggo

1. Sabrahmakasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Sabrahmakasuttavaṇṇanā

31.Catutthassa paṭhameajjhāgāreti sake ghare.Pūjitā hontīti yaṃ ghare atthi, tena paṭijaggitā gopitā honti. Iti mātāpitupūjakāni kulāni mātāpitūhi sabrahmakānīti pakāsetvā idāni nesaṃ sapubbācariyakādibhāvaṃ pakāsentosapubbācariyakānītiādimāha. Tatthabrahmātiādīni tesaṃ brahmādibhāvasādhanatthaṃ vuttāni.Bahukārāti puttānaṃ bahūpakārā.Āpādakāti jīvitassa āpādakā. Puttakānaṃ hi mātāpitūhi jīvitaṃ āpāditaṃ pālitaṃ ghaṭitaṃ anuppabandhena pavattitaṃ.Posakāti hatthapāde vaḍḍhetvā hadayalohitaṃ pāyetvā posetāro.Imassa lokassa dassetāroti puttānaṃ hi imasmiṃ loke iṭṭhāniṭṭhārammaṇassa dassanaṃ nāma mātāpitaro nissāya jātanti imassa lokassa dassetāro nāma.

31.In the first of the fourth, ajjhāgāreti in their own home. Pūjitā hontīti they are honored and protected with whatever is in the home. Thus, having shown that families that honor their mother and father are associated with Brahmā by their mothers and fathers, now revealing their status as associated with the first teachers etc., he said sapubbācariyakānīti etc. There, brahmāti etc. are stated for the purpose of establishing their status as Brahmā etc. Bahukārāti greatly helpful to their children. Āpādakāti bringing about life. For life is brought about, maintained, arranged, and continuously sustained by mothers and fathers for their children. Posakāti those who nourish by developing their hands and feet and feeding them heart’s blood. Imassa lokassa dassetāroti for mothers and fathers, on whom the birth of their children depends, are the revealers of desirable and undesirable sense objects in this world.

Brahmāti mātāpitaroti seṭṭhādhivacanaṃ. Yathā brahmuno catasso bhāvanā avijahitā honti mettā karuṇā muditā upekkhāti, evameva mātāpitūnaṃ puttakesu catasso bhāvanā avijahitā honti. Tā tasmiṃ tasmiṃ kāle veditabbā – kucchigatasmiṃ hi dārake ‘‘kadā nu kho puttakaṃ arogaṃ paripuṇṇaṅgapaccaṅgaṃ passissāmā’’ti mātāpitūnaṃ mettacittaṃ uppajjati. Yadā panesa mando uttānaseyyako ūkāhi vā maṅkulādīhi pāṇakehi daṭṭho dukkhaseyyāya vā pana pīḷito parodati viravati, tadāssa saddaṃ sutvā mātāpitūnaṃ kāruññaṃ uppajjati, ādhāvitvā vidhāvitvā kīḷanakāle pana lobhanīyavayasmiṃ vā ṭhitakāle dārakaṃ oloketvā mātāpitūnaṃ cittaṃ sappimaṇḍe pakkhittasatavihatakappāsapicupaṭalaṃ viya mudukaṃ hoti āmoditaṃ pamoditaṃ, tadā tesaṃ muditā labbhati. Yadā panesa putto dārābharaṇaṃ paccupaṭṭhāpetvā pāṭiyekkaṃ agāraṃ ajjhāvasati, tadā mātāpitūnaṃ ‘‘sakkoti dāni no puttako attano dhammatāya yāpetu’’nti majjhattabhāvo uppajjati, tasmiṃ kāle upekkhā labbhatīti iminā kāraṇena ‘‘brahmāti mātāpitaro’’ti vuttaṃ.

Brahmāti mātāpitaroti it is a term of excellence. Just as the four sublime states (brahmavihārā) are inseparable from Brahmā, namely, loving-kindness (mettā), compassion (karuṇā), altruistic joy (muditā), and equanimity (upekkhā), even so, these four sublime states are inseparable from mothers and fathers towards their children. They should be understood at that time, at that time: for when the child is in the womb, a mind of loving-kindness arises in mothers and fathers: “When indeed will we see our child healthy, with perfect limbs and organs?” But when he is weak, lying on his back, bitten by lice or insects etc., or afflicted or tormented by a painful sleep, he cries out and wails, then having heard his sound, compassion arises in the mothers and fathers; but when he is running about and playing or standing at a lovely age, having gazed upon the child, the mind of the mothers and fathers is soft like a piece of cotton wool dipped in ghee-cream, gladdened and delighted, then their altruistic joy is obtained. But when this son, having set up his wife and ornaments, dwells in a separate house, then a state of equanimity arises in the mothers and fathers, “Now our son is able to maintain himself according to his own nature,” at that time equanimity is obtained, thus it is said, “Brahmā are mothers and fathers,” for this reason.

Pubbācariyātivuccareti mātāpitaro hi jātakālato paṭṭhāya ‘‘evaṃ nisīda, evaṃ tiṭṭha, evaṃ gaccha, evaṃ saya, evaṃ khāda, evaṃ bhuñja, ayaṃ te, tātāti vattabbo, ayaṃ bhātikāti, ayaṃ bhaginīti, idaṃ nāma kātuṃ vaṭṭati, idaṃ na vaṭṭati, asukaṃ nāma upasaṅkamituṃ vaṭṭati, asukaṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti gāhāpenti sikkhāpenti. Athāparabhāge aññe ācariyā hatthisippaassasipparathasippadhanusippatharusippamuddāgaṇanādīni sikkhāpenti. Añño saraṇāni deti, añño sīlesu patiṭṭhāpeti, añño pabbājeti, añño buddhavacanaṃ uggaṇhāpeti, añño upasampādeti, añño sotāpattimaggādīni pāpeti. Iti sabbepi te pacchācariyā nāma honti, mātāpitaro pana sabbapaṭhamā, tenāha – ‘‘pubbācariyāti vuccare’’ti. Tatthavuccareti vuccanti kathiyanti.Āhuneyyā ca puttānanti puttānaṃ āhutaṃ pāhutaṃ abhisaṅkhataṃ annapānādiṃ arahanti, anucchavikā taṃ paṭiggahetuṃ. Tasmā ‘‘āhuneyyā ca puttāna’’nti vuttaṃ.Pajāya anukampakāti paresaṃ pāṇe acchinditvāpi attano pajaṃ paṭijagganti gopāyanti. Tasmā ‘‘pajāya anukampakā’’ti vuttaṃ.

Pubbācariyātivuccareti for from the time of birth, mothers and fathers teach them, “Sit like this, stand like this, go like this, lie down like this, eat like this, partake like this, this is what should be said to your father, this to your brother, this to your sister, this is what is fitting to do, this is not fitting, it is fitting to approach such-and-such a person, it is not fitting to approach such-and-such,”. Then in the later part, other teachers teach the crafts of elephants, horses, chariots, bows, swords, accounting using seals etc. Another gives the refuges, another establishes in the moralities (sīla), another ordains, another teaches the word of the Buddha, another grants higher ordination, another causes to attain the path of stream-entry etc. Thus, all those are known as later teachers, but mothers and fathers are the very first, therefore he said, “pubbācariyāti vuccare”. There, vuccareti they are called, they are spoken of. Āhuneyyā ca puttānanti and they deserve the offerings, gifts, prepared food and drink of their children, it is fitting to receive that. Therefore it is said, “āhuneyyā ca puttāna”. Pajāya anukampakāti even without harming the lives of others, they protect and guard their own offspring. Therefore it is said, “pajāya anukampakā”.

Namasseyyāti namo kareyya.Sakkareyyāti sakkārena paṭimāneyya. Idāni taṃ sakkāraṃ dassento ‘‘annenā’’tiādimāha. Tatthaannenāti yāgubhattakhādanīyena.Pānenāti aṭṭhavidhapānena.Vatthenāti nivāsanapārupanakena vatthena.Sayanenāti mañcapīṭhānuppadānena.Ucchādanenāti duggandhaṃ paṭivinodetvā sugandhakaraṇucchādanena.Nhāpanenāti sīte uṇhodakena, uṇhe sītodakena gattāni parisiñcitvā nhāpanena.Pādānaṃ dhovanenāti uṇhodakasītodakehi pādadhovanena ceva telamakkhanena ca.Peccāti paralokaṃ gantvā.Sagge pamodatīti idha tāva mātāpitūsu pāricariyaṃ disvā pāricariyakāraṇā taṃ paṇḍitamanussā idheva pasaṃsanti, paralokaṃ pana gantvā sagge ṭhito so mātāpituupaṭṭhāko dibbasampattīhi āmodati pamodatīti.

Namasseyyāti one should pay homage. Sakkareyyāti one should treat with respect. Now, showing that respect, he said, beginning with “annenā”. There, annenāti with rice gruel, rice, and things to eat. Pānenāti with the eight kinds of drink. Vatthenāti with robes for wearing and covering. Sayanenāti with the giving of beds and seats. Ucchādanenāti with perfuming unguents that dispel bad smells and make them fragrant. Nhāpanenāti with bathing, sprinkling their bodies with warm water when it is cold, and with cold water when it is hot. Pādānaṃ dhovanenāti with the washing of feet with warm or cold water, and with oiling. Peccāti having gone to the next world. Sagge pamodatīti having seen service to his parents here, those wise people praise him here itself on account of that service, but having gone to the next world, standing in heaven, that one who served his parents rejoices and delights in divine riches.

2. Ānandasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Ānandasuttavaṇṇanā

32.Dutiyetathārūpoti tathājātiko.Samādhipaṭilābhoti cittekaggatālābho.Imasmiṃ ca saviññāṇaketi ettha attano ca parassa cāti ubhayesampi kāyo saviññāṇakaṭṭhena ekato katvā imasminti vutto.Ahaṅkāramamaṅkāramānānusayāti ahaṅkāradiṭṭhi ca mamaṅkārataṇhā ca mānānusayo cāti attano ca parassa ca kilesā.Nāssūti na bhaveyyuṃ.Bahiddhā ca sabbanimittesūti rūpanimittaṃ, saddanimittaṃ, gandhanimittaṃ, rasanimittaṃ, phoṭṭhabbanimittaṃ, sassatādinimittaṃ, puggalanimittaṃ dhammanimittanti evarūpesu ca bahiddhā sabbanimittesu.Cetovimuttiṃ paññāvimuttinti phalasamādhiñceva phalañāṇañca.Siyāti bhaveyya.

32.In the second, tathārūpoti of such a kind. Samādhipaṭilābhoti the attainment of one-pointedness of mind. Imasmiṃ ca saviññāṇaketi here, having put together the body with consciousness of both himself and others, it is said, "in this". Ahaṅkāramamaṅkāramānānusayāti ego-making view, mine-making craving, and the underlying tendency to conceit, the defilements of both himself and others. Nāssūti should not be. Bahiddhā ca sabbanimittesūti and in all external signs such as signs of form, signs of sound, signs of smell, signs of taste, signs of tactile objects, signs of permanence etc., signs of persons, and signs of things. Cetovimuttiṃ paññāvimuttinti the fruition-attainment and fruition-knowledge. Siyāti may there be.

Idhānanda, bhikkhunoti, ānanda, imasmiṃ sāsane bhikkhuno.Etaṃ santaṃ etaṃ paṇītanti nibbānaṃ dassento āha. Nibbānaṃ hi kilesānaṃ santatāya santaṃ nāma, nibbānaṃ santanti samāpattiṃ appetvāva divasampi nisinnassa cittuppādo santanteva pavattatītipi santaṃ.Paṇītanti samāpattiṃ appetvā nisinnassāpi cittuppādo paṇītanteva pavattatīti nibbānaṃ paṇītaṃ nāma.Sabbasaṅkhārasamathotiādīnipi tasseva vevacanāni. ‘‘Sabbasaṅkhārasamatho’’ti samāpattiṃ appetvā nisinnassa hi divasabhāgampi cittuppādo sabbasaṅkhārasamathoteva pavattati…pe… tathā tīsu bhavesu vānasaṅkhātāya taṇhāya abhāvena nibbānanti laddhanāme tasmiṃ samāpattiṃ appetvā nisinnassa cittuppādo nibbānaṃ nibbānanteva pavattatīti sabbasaṅkhārasamathotiādīni nāmāni labhati. Imasmiṃ pana aṭṭhavidhe ābhogasamannāhāre imasmiṃ ṭhāne ekopi labbhati, dvepi sabbepi labbhanteva.

Idhānanda, bhikkhunoti, Ānanda, in this Dispensation, for a bhikkhu. Etaṃ santaṃ etaṃ paṇītanti showing Nibbāna, he said. For Nibbāna is peaceful because of the stilling of defilements, Nibbāna is peace, even when one sits for a day without applying the attainment, the thought-moment flows peacefully, and it is also peace. Paṇītanti even when one sits without applying the attainment, the thought-moment flows excellently, therefore Nibbāna is called excellent. Sabbasaṅkhārasamathoti etc. are also synonyms for that. "Sabbasaṅkhārasamatho" (the stilling of all formations), for even when one sits for a day without applying the attainment, the thought-moment flows only as the stilling of all formations…pe… likewise, because of the absence of craving, named vāna in the three planes of existence, Nibbāna is the name received, and even when one sits in that attainment without applying it, the thought-moment flows as Nibbāna, therefore it obtains names such as the stilling of all formations etc. But in this eightfold focusing, in this place even one is obtained, two are obtained, and all are always obtained.

Saṅkhāyāti ñāṇena jānitvā.Paroparānīti parāni ca oparāni ca. Paraattabhāvasakaattabhāvāni hi parāni ca oparāni cāti vuttaṃ hoti.Yassāti yassa arahato.Iñjitanti rāgiñjitaṃ dosamohamānadiṭṭhikilesaduccaritiñjitanti imāni satta iñjitāni calitāni phanditāni.Natthi kuhiñcīti katthaci ekārammaṇepi natthi.Santoti paccanīkakilesānaṃ santatāya santo.Vidhūmoti kāyaduccaritādidhūmavirahito.Anīghoti rāgādiīghavirahito.Nirāsoti nittaṇho.Atārīti tiṇṇo uttiṇṇo samatikkanto.Soti so arahaṃ khīṇāsavo.Jātijaranti ettha jātijarāgahaṇeneva byādhimaraṇampi gahitamevāti veditabbaṃ. Iti suttantepi gāthāyapi arahattaphalasamāpattiyeva kathitāti.

Saṅkhāyāti having known by knowledge. Paroparānīti further and beyond. For future and past lives are said to be further and beyond. Yassāti of which, of which arahant. Iñjitanti agitation of lust, agitation of hate and delusion, conceit, views, defilements, and bad conduct, these seven agitations, movements, tremblings. Natthi kuhiñcīti nowhere, not even in a single object. Santoti peaceful because of the stilling of opposing defilements. Vidhūmoti devoid of the smoke of bodily misconduct etc. Anīghoti devoid of the pain of lust etc. Nirāsoti without craving. Atārīti has crossed over, transcended, overcome. Soti that, that arahant, one with destroyed taints (khīṇāsava). Jātijaranti here it should be understood that by the mentioning of birth and old age, sickness and death are also included. Thus, in both the Suttanta and the verse, only the fruition-attainment of arahantship is spoken of.

3. Sāriputtasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Sāriputtasuttavaṇṇanā

33.Tatiyesaṃkhittenāti mātikāṭhapanena.Vitthārenāti ṭhapitamātikāvibhajanena.Saṃkhittavitthārenāti kāle saṃkhittena kāle vitthārena.Aññātāro ca dullabhāti paṭivijjhanakapuggalā pana dullabhā. Idaṃ bhagavā ‘‘sāriputtattherassa ñāṇaṃ ghaṭṭemī’’ti adhippāyena kathesi. Taṃ sutvā thero kiñcāpi ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, ājānissāmī’’ti na vadati, adhippāyena pana ‘‘vissatthā tumhe, bhante, desetha, ahaṃ tumhehi desitaṃ dhammaṃ nayasatena nayasahassena paṭivijjhissāmi, mamesa bhāro hotū’’ti satthāraṃ desanāya ussāhentoetassa bhagavā kālotiādimāha.

33. Saṃkhittenāti in the brief method, meaning by establishing the matrix (mātikā). Vitthārenāti in the detailed method, meaning by dividing the established matrix. Saṃkhittavitthārenāti sometimes briefly, sometimes in detail. Aññātāro ca dullabhāti but individuals who penetrate (the meaning) are rare. The Blessed One spoke this intending to "test the wisdom of Sāriputta Thera." Having heard that, although the Elder did not say, "Venerable Sir, I will understand," but with the intention of encouraging the Teacher in the teaching, saying, "You can trust me, Venerable Sir, teach. I will penetrate the Dhamma taught by you in hundreds and thousands of ways; let this be my burden," he said, starting with etassa bhagavā kāloti.

tasmātihāti desanaṃ ārabhi. Tatthaimasmiñca saviññāṇaketiādi vuttanayameva.Acchecchitaṇhanti maggañāṇasatthena taṇhaṃ chindi.Vivattayi saṃyojananti dasavidhampi saṃyojanaṃ samūlakaṃ ubbattetvā chaḍḍesi.Sammā mānābhisamayā antamakāsi dukkhassāti sammā upāyena sammā paṭipattiyā navavidhassa mānassa pahānābhisamayena vaṭṭadukkhassa antamakāsi.Idañca pana metaṃ, sāriputta, sandhāya bhāsitanti, sāriputta, mayā pārāyane udayapañhe idaṃ phalasamāpattimeva sandhāya etaṃ bhāsitaṃ.

tasmātihāti he began the discourse. There, imasmiñca saviññāṇaketi etc. is as stated before. Acchecchi taṇhanti he cut off craving with the sword of the path-knowledge. Vivattayi saṃyojananti having uprooted and discarded even the ten kinds of fetters. Sammā mānābhisamayā antamakāsi dukkhassāti by the correct means, by the correct practice, by the penetration of the abandonment of the nine kinds of conceit, he made an end to the suffering of the round (of rebirths). Idañca pana metaṃ, sāriputta, sandhāya bhāsitanti, Sāriputta, this was spoken by me in the Udaya question of the Pārāyana, referring specifically to the attainment of fruition (phalasamāpatti).

pahānaṃ kāmasaññānantiādi āraddhaṃ. Udayapañhe ca etaṃ padaṃ ‘‘pahānaṃ kāmacchandāna’’nti (su. ni. 1112; cūḷani. udayamāṇavapucchāniddeso 75) āgataṃ, idha pana aṅguttarabhāṇakehi ‘‘kāmasaññāna’’nti āropitaṃ. Tattha byañjanameva nānaṃ, attho pana ekoyeva.Kāmasaññānanti kāme ārabbha uppannasaññānaṃ, aṭṭhahi vā lobhasahagatacittehi sahajātasaññānaṃ.Domanassāna cūbhayanti etāsañca kāmasaññānaṃ cetasikadomanassānañcāti ubhinnampi pahānaṃ paṭippassaddhipahānasaṅkhātaṃ arahattaphalaṃ aññāvimokkhaṃ pabrūmīti attho. Niddese pana ‘‘kāmacchandassa ca domanassassa ca ubhinnaṃ pahānaṃ vūpasamaṃ paṭinissaggaṃ paṭippassaddhiṃ amataṃ nibbāna’’nti (cūḷani. udayamāṇavapucchāniddeso 75) vuttaṃ, taṃ atthuddhāravasena vuttaṃ. Pahānanti hi khīṇākārasaṅkhāto vūpasamopi vuccati, kilese paṭinissajjanto maggopi, kilesapaṭippassaddhisaṅkhātaṃ phalampi, yaṃ āgamma kilesā pahīyanti, taṃ amataṃ nibbānampi. Tasmā tattha tāni padāni āgatāni. ‘‘Aññāvimokkhaṃ pabrūmī’’ti vacanato pana arahattaphalameva adhippetaṃ.Thinassaca panūdanantipi thinassa ca panūdanante uppannattā arahattaphalameva adhippetaṃ.Kukkuccānaṃ nivāraṇanti kukkuccanivāraṇassa maggassa anantaraṃ uppannattā phalameva adhippetaṃ.

pahānaṃ kāmasaññānantiādi (the passage) beginning with "abandoning perceptions of sensual pleasure". In the Udaya question, this term appears as "pahānaṃ kāmacchandāna" (Sn. 1112; Cūḷani. Udayamāṇavapucchāniddeso 75), but here it has been inserted as "kāmasaññāna" by the Aṅguttara reciters. There, only the wording is different, but the meaning is the same. Kāmasaññānanti perceptions arising in relation to sensual pleasures, or the perceptions that are co-arisen with the eight types of consciousness accompanied by greed. Domanassāna cūbhayanti the abandonment of both these perceptions of sensual pleasure and mental displeasure, meaning the fruit of Arahatship, known as abandonment by tranquility, is what we call liberation through wisdom (aññāvimokkha). In the Niddesa, however, it is said, "the abandoning, the subsiding, the relinquishing, the stilling, the deathlessness, the nibbāna of both sensual desire and displeasure" (Cūḷani. Udayamāṇavapucchāniddeso 75), which is stated in terms of extracting the meaning. For abandonment (pahāna) is also called subsiding (vūpasama), characterized by the absence of defilements; the path that relinquishes defilements; the fruit that is the stilling of defilements; and the deathless, nibbāna, upon which defilements are abandoned. Therefore, those terms appear there. But from the statement "we declare liberation through wisdom (aññāvimokkha)," the fruit of Arahatship is what is intended. Thinassa ca panūdanantipi even the removal of sloth (thina), since it arises, the fruit of Arahatship is what is intended. Kukkuccānaṃ nivāraṇanti since the path of warding off remorse arises immediately after, the fruit is what is intended.

Upekkhāsatisaṃsuddhanti catutthajjhānike phale uppannāya upekkhāya ca satiyā ca saṃsuddhaṃ.Dhammatakkapurejavanti dhammatakko vuccati sammāsaṅkappo, so ādito hoti, purato hoti, pubbaṅgamo hoti aññāvimokkhassāti dhammatakkapurejavo. Taṃ dhammatakkapurejavaṃ.Aññāvimokkhanti aññindriyapariyosāne uppannaṃ vimokkhaṃ, aññāya vā vimokkhaṃ aññāvimokkhaṃ, paññāvimuttanti attho.Avijjāya pabhedananti avijjāya pabhedanante uppannattā, avijjāya pabhedanasaṅkhātaṃ vā nibbānaṃ ārabbha uppannattā evaṃladdhanāmaṃ arahattaphalameva. Iti sabbehipi imehi pahānantiādīhi padehi arahattaphalameva pakāsitanti veditabbaṃ.

Upekkhāsatisaṃsuddhanti purified by equanimity (upekkhā) and mindfulness (sati) arisen in the fourth jhāna fruit. Dhammatakkapurejavanti dhammatakko means right thought (sammāsaṅkappo), that which is at the beginning, is in front, is the forerunner of liberation through wisdom, therefore dhammatakkapurejava. That which is dhammatakkapurejava. Aññāvimokkhanti the liberation arising at the end of the faculty of wisdom, or liberation through wisdom, aññāvimokkha, meaning liberated by wisdom (paññāvimutta). Avijjāya pabhedananti since it arises at the breaking of ignorance, or since it arises in relation to nibbāna, which is the breaking of ignorance, the fruit of Arahatship is thus named. Thus, it should be understood that with all these terms beginning with abandonment (pahāna) etc., only the fruit of Arahatship is expressed.

4. Nidānasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Nidānasuttavaṇṇanā

34.Catutthenidānānīti kāraṇāni.Kammānanti vaṭṭagāmikammānaṃ.Lobho nidānaṃ kammānaṃ samudayāyāti lubbhanapalubbhanasabhāvo lobho vaṭṭagāmikammānaṃ samudayāya piṇḍakaraṇatthāya nidānaṃ kāraṇaṃ paccayoti attho.Dosoti dussanapadussanasabhāvo doso.Mohoti muyhanapamuyhanasabhāvo moho.

34.In the fourth (sutta), nidānānīti causes. Kammānanti of the actions that lead to the cycle (of rebirths). Lobho nidānaṃ kammānaṃ samudayāyāti greed, having the nature of clinging and sticking, is the cause, the reason, the condition for the arising, the accumulation, of actions leading to the cycle (of rebirths). Dosoti hatred, having the nature of being angry and enraged. Mohoti delusion, having the nature of being confused and bewildered.

Lobhapakatanti lobhena pakataṃ, lobhābhibhūtena luddhena hutvā katakammanti attho. Lobhato jātantilobhajaṃ. Lobho nidānamassātilobhanidānaṃ. Lobho samudayo assātilobhasamudayaṃ. Samudayoti paccayo, lobhapaccayanti attho.Yatthassa attabhāvo nibbattatīti yasmiṃ ṭhāne assa lobhajakammavato puggalassa attabhāvo nibbattati, khandhā pātubhavanti.Tattha taṃ kammaṃ vipaccatīti tesu khandhesu taṃ kammaṃ vipaccati.Diṭṭhe vā dhammetiādi yasmā taṃ kammaṃ diṭṭhadhammavedanīyaṃ vā hoti upapajjavedanīyaṃ vā aparapariyāyavedanīyaṃ vā, tasmā taṃ pabhedaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Sesadvayepi eseva nayo.

Lobhapakatanti done by greed, meaning actions done by one overcome and possessed by greed. Born of greed is lobhajaṃ. Greed is the cause of it is lobhanidānaṃ. Greed is the origin of it is lobhasamudayaṃ. Samudaya means condition, meaning conditioned by greed. Yatthassa attabhāvo nibbattatīti in whatever place the existence of the individual with greed-born actions arises, where the aggregates manifest. Tattha taṃ kammaṃ vipaccatīti in those aggregates that action ripens. Diṭṭhe vā dhammetiādi since that action is either immediately effective, or subsequently effective, or indefinitely effective, therefore it is said to show that distinction. The same method applies to the remaining two.

Akhaṇḍānīti abhinnāni.Apūtīnīti pūtibhāvena abījattaṃ appattāni.Avātātapahatānīti na vātena na ca ātapena hatāni.Sārādānīti gahitasārāni sāravantāni na nissārāni.Sukhasayitānīti sannicayabhāvena sukhaṃ sayitāni.Sukhetteti maṇḍakhette.Suparikammakatāya bhūmiyāti naṅgalakasanena ceva aṭṭhadantakena ca suṭṭhu parikammakatāya khettabhūmiyā.Nikkhittānīti ṭhapitāni ropitāni.Anuppaveccheyyāti anuppaveseyya.Vuddhintiādīsu uddhaggamanenavuddhiṃ,heṭṭhā mūlappatiṭṭhānenavirūḷhiṃ,samantā vitthārikabhāvenavepullaṃ.

Akhaṇḍānīti unbroken. Apūtīnīti not having reached the state of seedlessness due to putrefaction. Avātātapahatānīti not struck by wind or heat. Sārādānīti having taken the essence, having essence, not without essence. Sukhasayitānīti lying comfortably in a state of accumulation. Sukhetteti in a field fit for cultivation. Suparikammakatāya bhūmiyāti on a field that has been well prepared by plowing with a plow and an harrow. Nikkhittānīti placed, planted. Anuppaveccheyyāti would cause to enter. Among vuddhintiādīsu, by going upwards, vuddhiṃ, by establishing the root downwards, virūḷhiṃ, by spreading all around, vepullaṃ.

diṭṭhe vā dhammetiādi vuttaṃ, tattha asammohatthaṃ imasmiṃ ṭhāne kammavibhatti nāma kathetabbā. Suttantikapariyāyena hi ekādasa kammāni vibhattāni. Seyyathidaṃ – diṭṭhadhammavedanīyaṃ upapajjavedanīyaṃ aparapariyāyavedanīyaṃ, yaggarukaṃ yabbahulaṃ yadāsannaṃ kaṭattā vā pana kammaṃ, janakaṃ upatthambhakaṃ upapīḷakaṃ upaghātakanti. Tattha ekajavanavīthiyaṃ sattasu cittesu kusalā vā akusalā vā paṭhamajavanacetanādiṭṭhadhammavedanīyakammaṃnāma. Taṃ imasmiṃyeva attabhāve vipākaṃ deti kākavaḷiyapuṇṇaseṭṭhīnaṃ viya kusalaṃ, nandayakkhanandamāṇavakanandagoghātakakokāliyasuppabuddhadevadattaciñcamāṇavikānaṃ viya ca akusalaṃ. Tathā asakkontaṃ pana ahosikammaṃ nāma hoti, avipākaṃ sampajjati. Taṃ migaluddakopamāya sādhetabbaṃ. Yathā hi migaluddakena migaṃ disvā dhanuṃ ākaḍḍhitvā khitto saro sace na virajjhati, taṃ migaṃ tattheva pāteti, atha naṃ migaluddako niccammaṃ katvā khaṇḍākhaṇḍikaṃ chetvā maṃsaṃ ādāya puttadāraṃ tosento gacchati. Sace pana virajjhati, migo palāyitvā puna taṃ disaṃ na oloketi. Evaṃ sampadamidaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sarassa avirajjhitvā migavijjhanaṃ viya hi diṭṭhadhammavedanīyassa kammassa vipākavārapaṭilābho, avijjhanaṃ viya avipākabhāvāya sampajjananti.

diṭṭhe vā dhammetiādi has been said, there the classification of karma should be explained in this place for the sake of non-confusion. For according to the Suttanta method, eleven types of karma are distinguished. Namely: immediately effective (diṭṭhadhammavedanīya), subsequently effective (upapajjavedanīya), indefinitely effective (aparapariyāyavedanīya), weighty (yaggaruka), habitual (yabbahula), proximate (yadāsanna), or karma done because it had to be done (kaṭattā vā pana kammaṃ), generative (janaka), supportive (upatthambhaka), obstructive (upapīḷaka), and destructive (upaghātaka). Among these, in a single moment of javana-citta (impulsion), the first javana-cetanā (volition), whether skillful or unskillful, is called diṭṭhadhammavedanīyakammaṃ. That gives its result in this very existence, like the skill of Kākavaḷiyapuṇṇaseṭṭhī, and the unskill of Nandayakkha, Nandamāṇavaka, Nandagoghātaka, Kokālika, Suppabuddha, Devadatta, and Ciñcamāṇavikā. But that which is unable to do so becomes defunct karma (ahosikamma), it becomes without result. That should be illustrated by the simile of the hunter. Just as when a hunter sees a deer and shoots an arrow after drawing his bow, if the arrow does not fail, it fells the deer right there, then the hunter skins it, cuts it into pieces, takes the meat, and goes away pleasing his children and wife. But if it fails, the deer runs away and does not look in that direction again. This situation should be seen in the same way. For the success of the immediately effective karma in striking the deer with the unfailing arrow is like the obtaining of the opportunity for fruition, and the failure to strike is like becoming without result.

upapajjavedanīyakammaṃnāma. Taṃ anantare attabhāve vipākaṃ deti. Taṃ panetaṃ kusalapakkhe aṭṭhasamāpattivasena, akusalapakkhe pañcānantariyakammavasena veditabbaṃ. Tattha aṭṭhasamāpattilābhī ekāya samāpattiyā brahmaloke nibbattati. Pañcannampi ānantariyānaṃ kattā ekena kammena niraye nibbattati, sesasamāpattiyo ca kammāni ca ahosikammabhāvaṃyeva āpajjanti, avipākāni honti. Ayampi attho purimaupamāyayeva dīpetabbo.

upapajjavedanīyakammaṃnāma. That gives its result in the immediately following existence. This should be understood as eight attainments (samāpatti) on the skillful side, and the five heinous crimes (ānantariyakamma) on the unskillful side. Among these, one who attains the eight attainments is reborn in the Brahma world by one attainment. The perpetrator of even one of the five heinous crimes is reborn in hell by one action, and the remaining attainments and actions become defunct actions (ahosikamma), they become without result. This meaning should also be explained by the same simile as before.

aparapariyāyavedanīyakammaṃnāma. Taṃ anāgate yadā okāsaṃ labhati, tadā vipākaṃ deti. Sati saṃsārappavattiyā ahosikammaṃ nāma na hoti. Taṃ sabbaṃ sunakhaluddakena dīpetabbaṃ. Yathā hi sunakhaluddakena migaṃ disvā sunakho vissajjito migaṃ anubandhitvā yasmiṃ ṭhāne pāpuṇāti, tasmiṃ yeva ḍaṃsati; evamevaṃ idaṃ kammaṃ yasmiṃ ṭhāne okāsaṃ labhati, tasmiṃyeva vipākaṃ deti, tena mutto satto nāma natthi.

aparapariyāyavedanīyakammaṃnāma. That gives its result in the future, whenever it gets an opportunity. As long as the cycle of rebirths continues, there is no defunct karma. That should all be illustrated by the story of Sunakhaluddaka. Just as when Sunakhaluddaka sees a deer and releases his dog, the dog chases after the deer and bites it in the place where it catches up; in the same way, this action gives its result in the place where it gets an opportunity, so there is no being who is freed from it.

yaggarukaṃnāma. Tadetaṃ kusalapakkhe mahaggatakammaṃ, akusalapakkhe pañcānantariyakammaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tasmiṃ sati sesāni kusalāni vā akusalāni vā vipaccituṃ na sakkonti, tadeva duvidhampi paṭisandhiṃ deti. Yathā hi sāsapappamāṇāpi sakkharā vā ayaguḷikā vā udakarahade pakkhittā udakapiṭṭhe uplavituṃ na sakkoti, heṭṭhāva pavisati; evameva kusalepi akusalepi yaṃ garukaṃ, tadeva gaṇhitvā gacchati.

yaggarukaṃnāma. That should be understood as great karma on the skillful side, and the five heinous crimes on the unskillful side. When that is present, the remaining skillful or unskillful actions are unable to ripen; that very one gives rebirth in both ways. Just as even a mustard seed or an iron ball thrown into a lake of water cannot float on the surface of the water, but sinks to the bottom; in the same way, whether it is skillful or unskillful, that which is weighty takes hold and goes.

yabbahulaṃnāma. Taṃ dīgharattaṃ laddhāsevanavasena veditabbaṃ. Yaṃ vā balavakusalakammesu somanassakaraṃ, akusalakammesu santāpakaraṃ, etaṃ yabbahulaṃ nāma. Tadetaṃ yathā nāma dvīsu mallesu yuddhabhūmiṃ otiṇṇesu yo balavā, so itaraṃ pātetvā gacchati; evameva itaraṃ dubbalakammaṃ avattharitvā yaṃ āsevanavasena vā bahulaṃ, āsannavasena vā balavaṃ, taṃ vipākaṃ deti,duṭṭhagāmaṇiabhayaraññokammaṃ viya.

yabbahulaṃnāma. That should be understood as having been cultivated for a long time. Or that which causes joy among strong skillful actions, and that which causes torment among unskillful actions, that is called habitual (yabbahula). Just as when two wrestlers enter the arena, the one who is stronger throws the other down and goes; in the same way, having undermined the other weaker action, that which is habitual or strong due to proximity gives its result, like the karma of King Duṭṭhagāmaṇi Abhaya.

So kira cūḷaṅgaṇiyayuddhe parājito vaḷavaṃ āruyha palāyi. Tassa cūḷupaṭṭhāko tissāmacco nāma ekakova pacchato ahosi. So ekaṃ aṭaviṃ pavisitvā nisinno jighacchāya bādhayamānāya – ‘‘bhātika tissa, ativiya no jighacchā bādhati, kiṃ karissāmā’’ti āha. Atthi, deva, mayā sāṭakantare ṭhapetvā ekaṃ suvaṇṇasarakabhattaṃ ābhatanti. Tena hi āharāti. So nīharitvā rañño purato ṭhapesi. Rājā disvā, ‘‘tāta, cattāro koṭṭhāse karohī’’ti āha. Mayaṃ tayo janā, kasmā devo cattāro koṭṭhāse kārayatīti? Bhātika tissa, yato paṭṭhāya ahaṃ attānaṃ sarāmi, na me ayyānaṃ adatvā āhāro paribhuttapubbo atthi, svāhaṃ ajjapi adatvā na paribhuñjissāmīti. So cattāro koṭṭhāse akāsi. Rājā ‘‘kālaṃ ghosehī’’ti āha. Chaḍḍitāraññe kuto, ayye, labhissāma devāti. ‘‘Nāyaṃ tava bhāro. Sace mama saddhā atthi, ayye, labhissāma, vissattho kālaṃ ghosehī’’ti āha. So ‘‘kālo, bhante, kālo, bhante’’ti tikkhattuṃ ghosesi.

It is said that he, defeated in the Cūḷaṅgaṇiya battle, fled on horseback. His attendant named Tissāmacca was the only one behind him. He entered a forest and sat down, tormented by hunger, and said, "Brother Tissa, we are very much tormented by hunger, what shall we do?" He said, "O King, I have brought a golden rice bowl hidden in my robe." "Then bring it," he said. He took it out and placed it in front of the king. The king saw it and said, "Friend, make four portions." "We are three people, why does Your Majesty make four portions?" "Brother Tissa, since I remember myself, I have never partaken of food without giving to my ancestors, so I will not partake of it today without giving," he said. He made four portions. The king said, "Announce the time." "Where shall we find a time announcer in this deserted forest, Your Majesty?" "That is not your burden. If I have faith, Your Majesty, we shall find one, confidently announce the time," he said. He announced three times, "It is time, Venerable Sir, it is time, Venerable Sir."

Athassa bodhimātumahātissatthero taṃ saddaṃ dibbāya sotadhātuyā sutvā ‘katthāyaṃ saddo’ti taṃ āvajjento ‘‘ajja duṭṭhagāmaṇiabhayamahārājā yuddhaparājito aṭaviṃ pavisitvā nisinno ekaṃ sarakabhattaṃ cattāro koṭṭhāse kāretvā ‘ekakova na paribhuñjissāmī’ti kālaṃ ghosāpesī’’ti ñatvā ‘‘ajja mayā rañño saṅgahaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti manogatiyā āgantvā rañño purato aṭṭhāsi. Rājā disvā pasannacitto ‘‘passa, bhātika, tissā’’ti vatvā theraṃ vanditvā ‘‘pattaṃ, bhante, dethā’’ti āha. Thero pattaṃ nīhari. Rājā attano koṭṭhāsena saddhiṃ therassa koṭṭhāsaṃ patte pakkhipitvā, ‘‘bhante, āhāraparissayo nāma mā kadāci hotū’’ti vanditvā aṭṭhāsi. Tissāmaccopi ‘‘mama ayyaputte passante bhuñjituṃ na sakkhissāmī’’ti attano koṭṭhāsaṃ therasseva patte ākiri. Vaḷavāpi cintesi – ‘‘mayhampi koṭṭhāsaṃ therasseva dātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti. Rājā vaḷavaṃ oloketvā ‘‘ayampi attano koṭṭhāsaṃ therasseva patte pakkhipanaṃ paccāsīsatī’’ti ñatvā tampi tattheva pakkhipitvā theraṃ vanditvā uyyojesi. Thero taṃ bhattaṃ ādāya gantvā ādito paṭṭhāya bhikkhusaṅghassa ālopasaṅkhepena adāsi.

Then Mahātissa Thera of Bodhimāla, having heard that sound with his divine ear element, considering, "Where is this sound?" knowing that "Today, King Duṭṭhagāmaṇi Abhaya, defeated in battle, having entered a forest, is sitting and has had a rice bowl made into four portions, and is having the time announced, saying, 'I will not partake of it alone without giving to others,'" thinking, "Today I must do a favor for the king," he came by mental power and stood in front of the king. The king, seeing him, with a delighted mind said, "Look, brother Tissa," and after bowing to the Thera, said, "Give me the bowl, Venerable Sir." The Thera took out his bowl. The king, putting his own portion together with the Thera's portion into the bowl, stood bowing and said, "May there never be a lack of offerings of food, Venerable Sir." Tissāmacca also, thinking, "I will not be able to eat while seeing my lord," poured his own portion into the Thera's bowl. The mare also thought, "I should give my portion to the Thera." The king, looking at the mare, knowing that "She is also expecting to put her portion into the Thera's bowl," putting that too there, bowed to the Thera and sent him away. The Thera, taking that food, went and gave it to the Saṅgha of monks from the beginning in the form of morsels.

Rājāpi cintesi – ‘‘ativiyamhā jighacchitā, sādhu vatassa sace atirekabhattasitthāni pahiṇeyyā’’ti. Thero rañño cittaṃ ñatvā atirekabhattaṃ etesaṃ yāpanamattaṃ katvā pattaṃ ākāse khipi, patto āgantvā rañño hatthe patiṭṭhāsi. Bhattaṃ tiṇṇampi janānaṃ yāvadatthaṃ ahosi. Atha rājā pattaṃ dhovitvā ‘‘tucchapattaṃ na pesissāmī’’ti uttarisāṭakaṃ mocetvā udakaṃ puñchitvā sāṭakaṃ patte ṭhapetvā ‘‘patto gantvā mama ayyassa hatthe patiṭṭhātū’’ti ākāse khipi. Patto gantvā therassa hatthe patiṭṭhāsi.

The king also thought, "We are very hungry, it would be good if he would send back the leftover rice gruel." The Thera, knowing the king's mind, having made the leftover food just enough to sustain them, threw the bowl into the sky, the bowl came and rested in the king's hand. The food was sufficient for all three people. Then the king, having washed the bowl, thinking, "I will not send an empty bowl," having removed his upper robe, dried the water, placed the robe in the bowl, threw it into the sky, saying, "May the bowl go and rest in the hands of my lord." The bowl went and rested in the Thera's hand.

Aparabhāge rañño tathāgatassa sarīradhātūnaṃ aṭṭhamabhāgaṃ patiṭṭhāpetvā vīsaratanasatikaṃ mahācetiyaṃ kārentassa apariniṭṭhiteyeva cetiye kālakiriyāsamayo anuppatto. Athassa mahācetiyassa dakkhiṇapasse nipannassa pañcanikāyavasena bhikkhusaṅghe sajjhāyaṃ karonte chahi devalokehi cha rathā āgantvā purato ākāse aṭṭhaṃsu. Rājā ‘‘puññapotthakaṃ āharathā’’ti ādito paṭṭhāya puññapotthakaṃ vācāpesi. Atha naṃ kiñci kammaṃ na paritosesi. So ‘‘parato vācethā’’ti āha. Potthakavācako ‘‘cūḷaṅgaṇiyayuddhe parājitena te deva aṭaviṃ pavisitvā nisinnena ekaṃ sarakabhattaṃ cattāro koṭṭhāse kāretvā bodhimātumahātissattherassa bhikkhā dinnā’’ti āha. Rājā ‘‘ṭhapehī’’ti vatvā bhikkhusaṅghaṃ pucchi, ‘‘bhante, kataro devaloko ramaṇīyo’’ti? Sabbabodhisattānaṃ vasanaṭṭhānaṃ tusitabhavanaṃ mahārājāti. Rājā kālaṃ katvā tusitabhavanato āgataratheva patiṭṭhāya tusitabhavanaṃ agamāsi. Idaṃ balavakammassa vipākadāne vatthu.

Later, while the king was having the great Cetiya built, investing a hundred thousand vīsaratanas, after enshrining one-eighth of the Tathāgata's bodily relics, the time of his death arrived while the Cetiya was still unfinished. As he lay on the southern side of the great Cetiya, the Saṅgha of bhikkhus, divided into five nikāyas, was reciting. Six chariots from six devalokas came and stood in the sky before him. The king said, "Bring the book of merit," and from the beginning, he had the book of merit recited. But nothing pleased him. So he said, "Recite further." The reciter of the book said, "In the Cūḷaṅgaṇiya battle, defeated, you, O deva, entered the forest and, sitting there, had a sarakabhatta meal divided into four portions and given as alms to Bodhimātumahātissa Thera." The king said, "Stop," and asked the Saṅgha of bhikkhus, "Bhante, which devaloka is delightful?" "Tusita-bhavana, O great king, is the dwelling place of all Bodhisattas." The king, having died, went to Tusita-bhavana, establishing himself in the very chariot that had come from there. This is a story illustrating the giving of results by a strong kamma.

yadāsannaṃnāma. Tadetaṃ yathā nāma gogaṇaparipuṇṇassa vajassa dvāre vivaṭe parabhāge dammagavabalavagavesu santesupi yo vajadvārassa āsanno hoti antamaso dubbalajaraggavopi, so eva paṭhamataraṃ nikkhamati, evameva aññesu kusalākusalesu santesupi maraṇakālassa āsannattā vipākaṃ deti.

Yadāsanna by name. Just as, when the gate of a cattle pen filled with cattle is opened, even if there are docile cows, strong cows, and bullocks, the one nearest to the gate, even if a weak and old cow, is the first to exit; so too, even if other wholesome and unwholesome deeds exist, the one nearest to the moment of death gives its result.

Tatrimāni vatthūni – madhuaṅgaṇagāme kira eko damiḷadovāriko pātova baḷisaṃ ādāya gantvā macche vadhitvā tayo koṭṭhāse katvā ekena taṇḍulaṃ gaṇhāti, ekena dadhiṃ, ekaṃ pacati. Iminā nīhārena paññāsa vassāni pāṇātipātakammaṃ katvā aparabhāge mahallako anuṭṭhānaseyyaṃ upagacchati. Tasmiṃ khaṇe girivihāravāsī cūḷapiṇḍapātikatissatthero ‘‘mā ayaṃ satto mayi passante nassatū’’ti gantvā tassa gehadvāre aṭṭhāsi. Athassa bhariyā, ‘‘sāmi, thero āgato’’ti ārocesi. Ahaṃ paññāsa vassāni therassa santikaṃ na gatapubbo, katarena me guṇena thero āgamissati, gacchāti naṃ vadathāti. Sā ‘‘aticchatha, bhante’’ti āha. Thero ‘‘upāsakassa kā sarīrappavattī’’ti pucchi. Dubbalo, bhanteti. Thero gharaṃ pavisitvā satiṃ uppādetvā ‘‘sīlaṃ gaṇhissasī’’ti āha. Āma, bhante, dethāti. Thero tīṇi saraṇāni datvā pañca sīlāni dātuṃ ārabhi. Tassa pañca sīlānīti vacanakāleyeva jivhā papati. Thero ‘‘vaṭṭissati ettaka’’nti nikkhamitvā gato. Sopi kālaṃ katvā cātumahārājikabhavane nibbatti. Nibbattakkhaṇeyeva ca ‘‘kiṃ nu kho kammaṃ katvā mayā idaṃ laddha’’nti āvajjento theraṃ nissāya laddhabhāvaṃ ñatvā devalokato āgantvā theraṃ vanditvā ekamantaṃ aṭṭhāsi. ‘‘Ko eso’’ti ca vutte ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, damiḷadovāriko’’ti āha. Kuhiṃ nibbattosīti? Cātumahārājikesu, bhante, sace me ayyo pañca sīlāni adassa, upari devaloke nibbatto assaṃ. Ahaṃ kiṃ karissāmi, tvaṃ gaṇhituṃ nāsakkhi, puttakāti. So theraṃ vanditvā devalokameva gato. Idaṃ tāva kusalakamme vatthu.

Here are some instances: It is said that in Madhuaṅgaṇa village, a Tamil gatekeeper would go out early in the morning with a fishing rod, kill fish, divide them into three portions, taking rice with one, curds with another, and cooking the third. Having engaged in the act of killing living beings in this manner for fifty years, in his later years, he became old and confined to his bed. At that moment, Cūḷapiṇḍapātikatissa Thera, residing in Girivihāra, thinking, "Lest this being perish while I am watching," went and stood at the door of his house. Then his wife announced to him, "Sāmi, the Thera has come." "I have never gone to the presence of the Thera for fifty years; by what virtue would the Thera come? Tell him to go away," he said. She said, "Please wait, Bhante." The Thera asked, "What is the condition of the upāsaka’s body?" "Weak, Bhante." The Thera, entering the house, aroused mindfulness and said, "Will you take the sīla?" "Yes, Bhante, give them," he said. The Thera, having given the three saraṇas, began to give the five sīlas. At the very moment of saying "pañca sīlāni," his tongue fell off. The Thera, thinking, "This much will suffice," departed and went away. He too, having died, was reborn in the Cātumahārājika-bhavana. And immediately upon being reborn, reflecting, "By doing what kamma have I obtained this?" and knowing that it was obtained through the Thera, he came from the devaloka, paid homage to the Thera, and stood to one side. When asked, "Who is this?" he said, "Bhante, I am the Tamil gatekeeper." "Where were you reborn?" "In the Cātumahārājikas, Bhante; if my lord had given me the five sīlas, I would have been reborn in an upper devaloka. What can I do? You were not able to take them, my son." He, having paid homage to the Thera, went to the devaloka itself. This, then, is an instance regarding wholesome kamma.

Antaragaṅgāya pana mahāvācakālaupāsako nāma ahosi. So tiṃsa vassāni sotāpattimaggatthāya dvattiṃsākāraṃ sajjhāyitvā ‘‘ahaṃ evaṃ dvattiṃsākāraṃ sajjhāyanto obhāsamattampi nibbattetuṃ nāsakkhiṃ, buddhasāsanaṃ aniyyānikaṃ bhavissatī’’ti diṭṭhivipallāsaṃ patvā kālakiriyaṃ katvā mahāgaṅgāya navausabhiko susumārapeto hutvā nibbatti. Ekaṃ samayaṃ kacchakatitthena saṭṭhi pāsāṇatthambhasakaṭāni agamaṃsu. So sabbepi te goṇe ca pāsāṇe ca khādi. Idaṃ akusalakamme vatthu.

In Antaragaṅgā, there was a great reciter, an upāsaka named Lau. For thirty years, having recited the thirty-two parts of the body for the sake of sotāpattimagga, thinking, "Even while reciting the thirty-two parts in this way, I have not been able to produce even a mere light; the Buddha's teaching will be fruitless," he fell into a perverted view. Having died, he was reborn as a new usabha-sized susumāra in the Mahāgaṅgā. On one occasion, sixty carts of stone pillars came to Kacchakatittha. He devoured all those oxen and stones. This is an instance regarding unwholesome kamma.

kaṭattā vā pana kammaṃnāma. Taṃ yathā nāma ummattakena khittadaṇḍaṃ yattha vā tattha vā gacchati, evameva tesaṃ abhāve yattha katthaci vipākaṃ deti.

Katattā vā pana kammaṃ by name. Just as a stick thrown by a madman goes anywhere, so too, in the absence of those, it gives its result anywhere.

Janakaṃnāma ekaṃ paṭisandhiṃ janetvā pavattiṃ na janeti, pavatte aññaṃ kammaṃ vipākaṃ nibbatteti. Yathā hi mātā janetiyeva, dhātiyeva pana jaggati; evamevaṃ mātā viya paṭisandhinibbattakaṃ janakakammaṃ, dhāti viya pavatte sampattakammaṃ.Upatthambhakaṃnāma kusalepi labbhati akusalepi. Ekacco hi kusalaṃ katvā sugatibhave nibbattati. So tattha ṭhito punappunaṃ kusalaṃ katvā taṃ kammaṃ upatthambhetvā anekāni vassasatasahassāni sugatibhavasmiṃyeva vicarati. Ekacco akusalaṃ katvā duggatibhave nibbattati. So tattha ṭhito punappunaṃ akusalaṃ katvā taṃ kammaṃ upatthambhetvā bahūni vassasatasahassāni duggatibhavasmiṃyeva vicarati.

Janaka by name, generates only one rebirth and does not generate the course of life; in the course of life, another kamma produces its result. Just as a mother only gives birth, but a nurse rears; in the same way, the janakakamma, like a mother, produces rebirth, and the sampattakamma, like a nurse, supports the course of life. Upatthambhaka by name, is found in both wholesome and unwholesome deeds. For one, having done a wholesome deed, is reborn in a fortunate existence. Remaining there, he repeatedly does wholesome deeds, and supporting that kamma, he wanders in the fortunate existence for many hundreds of thousands of years. One, having done an unwholesome deed, is reborn in an unfortunate existence. Remaining there, he repeatedly does unwholesome deeds, and supporting that kamma, he wanders in the unfortunate existence for many hundreds of thousands of years.

janakaṃnāma kusalampi hoti akusalampi. Taṃ paṭisandhiyampi pavattepi rūpārūpavipākakkhandhe janeti.Upatthambhakaṃpana vipākaṃ janetuṃ na sakkoti, aññena kammena dinnāya paṭisandhiyā janite vipāke uppajjanakasukhadukkhaṃ upatthambheti, addhānaṃ pavatteti.Upapīḷakaṃnāma aññena kammena dinnāya paṭisandhiyā janite vipāke uppajjanakasukhadukkhaṃ pīḷeti bādheti, addhānaṃ pavattituṃ na deti. Tatrāyaṃ nayo – kusalakamme vipaccamāne akusalakammaṃ upapīḷakaṃ hutvā tassa vipaccituṃ na deti. Akusalakamme vipaccamāne kusalakammaṃ upapīḷakaṃ hutvā tassa vipaccituṃ na deti. Yathā vaḍḍhamānakaṃ rukkhaṃ vā gacchaṃ vā lataṃ vā kocideva daṇḍena vā satthena vā bhindeyya vā chindeyya vā, atha so rukkho vā gaccho vā latā vā vaḍḍhituṃ na sakkuṇeyya; evamevaṃ kusalaṃ vipaccamānaṃ akusalena upapīḷitaṃ, akusalaṃ vā pana vipaccamānaṃ kusalena upapīḷitaṃ vipaccituṃ na sakkoti. Tattha sunakkhattassa akusalakammaṃ kusalaṃ upapīḷesi, coraghātakassa kusalakammaṃ akusalaṃ upapīḷesi.

Janaka by name, is both wholesome and unwholesome. It generates aggregates of form and formless results in both rebirth and the course of life. Upatthambhaka, however, is not able to generate a result; it supports the arising happiness and suffering in the result generated by the rebirth given by another kamma, and extends the duration of the course of life. Upapīḷaka by name, afflicts and torments the arising happiness and suffering in the result generated by the rebirth given by another kamma, and does not allow the duration of the course of life to proceed. Herein is the method: when a wholesome kamma is ripening, an unwholesome kamma, becoming upapīḷaka, does not allow it to ripen. When an unwholesome kamma is ripening, a wholesome kamma, becoming upapīḷaka, does not allow it to ripen. Just as if someone were to break or cut down a growing tree, bush, or creeper with a stick or weapon, that tree, bush, or creeper would not be able to grow; in the same way, a wholesome deed, while ripening, is afflicted by an unwholesome deed, or an unwholesome deed, while ripening, is afflicted by a wholesome deed, and is not able to ripen. In that case, Sunakkhatta's unwholesome kamma afflicted the wholesome, and the executioner's wholesome kamma afflicted the unwholesome.

Rājagahe kira vātakāḷako paññāsa vassāni coraghātakammaṃ akāsi. Atha naṃ rañño ārocesuṃ – ‘‘deva, vātakāḷako mahallako core ghātetuṃ na sakkotī’’ti. ‘‘Apanetha naṃ tasmā ṭhānantarāti. Amaccā naṃ apanetvā aññaṃ tasmiṃ ṭhāne ṭhapayiṃsu. Vātakāḷakopi yāva taṃ kammaṃ akāsi, tāva ahatavatthāni vā acchādituṃ surabhipupphāni vā piḷandhituṃ pāyāsaṃ vā bhuñjituṃ ucchādananhāpanaṃ vā paccanubhotuṃ nālattha. So ‘‘dīgharattaṃ me kiliṭṭhavesena carita’’nti ‘‘pāyāsaṃ me pacāhī’’ti bhariyaṃ āṇāpetvā nhānīyasambhārāni gāhāpetvā nhānatitthaṃ gantvā sīsaṃ nhatvā ahatavatthāni acchādetvā gandhe vilimpitvā pupphāni piḷandhitvā gharaṃ āgacchanto sāriputtattheraṃ disvā ‘‘saṃkiliṭṭhakammato camhi apagato, ayyo ca me diṭṭho’’ti tuṭṭhamānaso theraṃ gharaṃ netvā navasappisakkaracuṇṇābhisaṅkhatena pāyāsena parivisi. Thero tassa anumodanamakāsi. So anumodanaṃ sutvā anulomikakhantiṃ paṭilabhitvā theraṃ anugantvā nivattamāno antarāmagge taruṇavacchāya gāviyā madditvā jīvitakkhayaṃ pāpito gantvā tāvatiṃsabhavane nibbatti. Bhikkhū tathāgataṃ pucchiṃsu – ‘‘bhante, coraghātako ajjeva kiliṭṭhakammato apanīto, ajjeva kālaṅkato, kahaṃ nu kho nibbatto’’ti? Tāvatiṃsabhavane, bhikkhaveti. Bhante, coraghātako dīgharattaṃ purise ghātesi, tumhe ca evaṃ vadetha, natthi nu kho pāpakammassa phalanti. Mā, bhikkhave, evaṃ avacuttha, balavakalyāṇamittūpanissayaṃ labhitvā dhammasenāpatissa piṇḍapātaṃ datvā anumodanaṃ sutvā anulomikakhantiṃ paṭilabhitvā so tattha nibbattoti.

It is said that in Rājagaha, Vātakāḷaka worked as an executioner for fifty years. Then they reported to the king, "Deva, Vātakāḷaka is old and unable to execute the thieves." "Remove him from that position," the ministers removed him and appointed another in that place. As long as Vātakāḷaka performed that work, he was not able to wear new clothes, adorn himself with fragrant flowers, eat pāyāsa, or enjoy rubbing with ucchādana and bathing. Thinking, "I have lived for a long time in soiled garments," he ordered his wife, "Cook pāyāsa for me," and taking bathing materials, he went to the bathing place, washed his head, put on new clothes, anointed himself with perfumes, adorned himself with flowers, and coming home, seeing Sāriputta Thera, thinking, "I have turned away from soiled work, and my lord has been seen," with a joyful mind, he led the Thera to his house and served him with pāyāsa mixed with fresh ghee, sugar, and flour. The Thera gave his blessing. Hearing the blessing, he obtained anulomikakhanti and, following the Thera, on his return, was crushed by a young cow in the middle of the road, reached the end of his life, and was reborn in Tāvatiṃsa-bhavana. The bhikkhus asked the Tathāgata, "Bhante, the executioner was just removed from soiled work today, and died today; where was he reborn?" "In Tāvatiṃsa-bhavana, bhikkhus." "Bhante, the executioner killed men for a long time, and you say thus; is there no fruit of evil kamma?" "Do not say thus, bhikkhus; having obtained the strong support of a good friend, having given alms to the dhammasenāpati, having heard the blessing, having obtained anulomikakhanti, he was reborn there."

‘‘Subhāsitaṃ suṇitvāna, nāgariyo coraghātako;

"Having heard good speech, the townsman, the executioner,
Having obtained anulomakhanti, rejoices, gone to the tidiva."

Upaghātakaṃpana sayaṃ kusalampi akusalampi samānaṃ aññaṃ dubbalakammaṃ ghātetvā tassa vipākaṃ paṭibāhitvā attano vipākassa okāsaṃ karoti. Evaṃ pana kammena kate okāse taṃ vipākaṃ uppannaṃ nāma vuccati. Upacchedakantipi etasseva nāmaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ nayo – kusalakammassa vipaccanakāle ekaṃ akusalakammaṃ uṭṭhāya taṃ kammaṃ chinditvā pāteti. Akusalakammassapi vipaccanakāle ekaṃ kusalakammaṃ uṭṭhāya taṃ kammaṃ chinditvā pāteti. Idaṃ upacchedakaṃ nāma. Tattha ajātasattuno kammaṃ kusalacchedakaṃ ahosi, aṅgulimālattherassa akusalacchedakanti. Evaṃ suttantikapariyāyena ekādasa kammāni vibhattāni.

Upaghātaka, however, whether it is wholesome or unwholesome itself, destroys another weaker kamma, repelling its result, and makes an opportunity for its own result. When that result arises in the opportunity made by the kamma in this way, it is called arisen. Upacchedaka is also a name for this. Herein is the method: at the time of the ripening of a wholesome kamma, an unwholesome kamma arises, cutting off and casting down that kamma. At the time of the ripening of an unwholesome kamma, a wholesome kamma arises, cutting off and casting down that kamma. This is called upacchedaka. Therein, Ajātasattu's kamma was a cutter-off of wholesome, and Aṅgulimāla Thera's was a cutter-off of unwholesome. Thus, according to the suttantika method, eleven kammas are distinguished.

Abhidhammapariyāyena pana soḷasa kammāni vibhattāni, seyyathidaṃ – ‘‘atthekaccāni pāpakāni kammasamādānāni gatisampattipaṭibāḷhāni na vipaccanti, atthekaccāni pāpakāni kammasamādānāni upadhisampattipaṭibāḷhāni na vipaccanti, atthekaccāni pāpakāni kammasamādānāni kālasampattipaṭibāḷhāni na vipaccanti, atthekaccāni pāpakāni kammasamādānāni payogasampattipaṭibāḷhāni na vipaccanti. Atthekaccāni pāpakāni kammasamādānāni gativipattiṃ āgamma vipaccanti, upadhivipattiṃ, kālavipattiṃ, payogavipattiṃ āgamma vipaccanti. Atthekaccāni kalyāṇāni kammasamādānāni gativipattipaṭibāḷhāni na vipaccanti, upadhivipatti, kālavipatti, payogavipattipaṭibāḷhāni na vipaccanti. Atthekaccāni kalyāṇāni kammasamādānāni gatisampattiṃ āgamma vipaccanti, upadhisampattiṃ, kālasampattiṃ, payogasampattiṃ āgamma vipaccantī’’ti (vibha. 810).

According to the Abhidhamma method, however, sixteen kammas are distinguished, namely: "There are certain evil courses of action that, being obstructed by attainment of favorable rebirth, do not ripen; there are certain evil courses of action that, being obstructed by attainment of favorable existence, do not ripen; there are certain evil courses of action that, being obstructed by attainment of favorable time, do not ripen; there are certain evil courses of action that, being obstructed by attainment of favorable effort, do not ripen. There are certain evil courses of action that, coming upon unfavorable rebirth, ripen; coming upon unfavorable existence, unfavorable time, unfavorable effort, they ripen. There are certain wholesome courses of action that, being obstructed by unfavorable rebirth, do not ripen; unfavorable existence, unfavorable time, unfavorable effort, they do not ripen. There are certain wholesome courses of action that, coming upon favorable rebirth, ripen; favorable existence, favorable time, favorable effort, they ripen" (vibha. 810).

pāpakānīti lāmakāni.Kammasamādānānīti kammaggahaṇāni. Gahitasamādinnānaṃ kammānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ.Gatisampattipaṭibāḷhāni na vipaccantītiādīsu aniṭṭhārammaṇānubhavanārahe kamme vijjamāneyeva sugatibhave nibbattassa taṃ kammaṃgatisampattipaṭibāḷhaṃ na vipaccatināma. Gatisampattiyā patibāhitaṃ hutvā na vipaccatīti attho. Yo pana pāpakammena dāsiyā vā kammakāriyā vā kucchiyaṃ nibbattitvā upadhisampanno hoti, attabhāvasamiddhiyaṃ tiṭṭhati. Athassa sāmikā tassa rūpasampattiṃ disvā ‘‘nāyaṃ kiliṭṭhakammassānucchaviko’’ti cittaṃ uppādetvā attano jātaputtaṃ viya bhaṇḍāgārikādiṭṭhānesu ṭhapetvā sampattiṃ yojetvā pariharanti. Evarūpassa kammaṃupadhisampattipaṭibāḷhaṃ na vipaccatināma. Yo pana paṭhamakappikakālasadise sulabhasampannarasabhojane subhikkhakāle nibbattati, tassa vijjamānampi pāpakammaṃkālasampattipaṭibāḷhaṃ na vipaccatināma. Yo pana sammāpayogaṃ nissāya jīvati, upasaṅkamitabbayuttakāle upasaṅkamati, paṭikkamitabbayuttakāle paṭikkamati, palāyitabbayuttakāle palāyati. Lañjadānayuttakāle lañjaṃ deti, corikayuttakāle corikaṃ karoti, evarūpassa pāpakammaṃpayogasampattipaṭibāḷhaṃ na vipaccatināma.

Pāpakāni means base. Kammasamādānāni means undertakings of kamma. This is a designation for kammas that have been undertaken and initiated. Among gatisampattipaṭibāḷhāni na vipaccanti, when there is kamma that is not worthy of experiencing an undesirable object, and one is reborn in a fortunate existence, that kamma is called gatisampattipaṭibāḷhaṃ na vipaccati. The meaning is that it does not ripen, being obstructed by attainment of favorable rebirth. However, one who is born in the womb of a slave woman or worker woman by evil kamma is endowed with favorable existence and stands in the prosperity of the individual existence. Then the owners, seeing his beauty, thinking, "This is not appropriate for base work," generate a thought and maintain him with prosperity, placing him in positions such as treasurer, like their own born son. The kamma of such a one is called upadhisampattipaṭibāḷhaṃ na vipaccati. However, one who is born in a time of good fortune, like the first age, in a time of abundant and complete delicious food, and of good harvest, even the existing evil kamma of that one is called kālasampattipaṭibāḷhaṃ na vipaccati. However, one who lives relying on right effort, approaches at the appropriate time for approaching, retreats at the appropriate time for retreating, flees at the appropriate time for fleeing. At the appropriate time for giving a bribe, he gives a bribe; at the appropriate time for stealing, he steals; the evil kamma of such a one is called payogasampattipaṭibāḷhaṃ na vipaccati.

gativipattiṃ āgamma vipaccatināma. Yo pana dāsiyā vā kammakāriyā vā kucchismiṃ nibbatto dubbaṇṇo hoti dussaṇṭhāno, ‘‘yakkho nu kho manusso nu kho’’ti vimatiṃ uppādeti. So sace puriso hoti, atha naṃ ‘‘nāyaṃ aññassa kammassa anucchaviko’’ti hatthiṃ vā rakkhāpenti assaṃ vā goṇe vā, tiṇakaṭṭhādīni vā āharāpenti, kheḷasarakaṃ vā gaṇhāpenti. Sace itthī hoti, atha naṃ hatthiassādīnaṃ bhattamāsādīni vā pacāpenti, kacavaraṃ vā chaḍḍāpenti, aññaṃ vā pana jigucchanīyakammaṃ kārenti. Evarūpassa pāpakammaṃupadhivipattiṃ āgamma vipaccatināma. Yo pana dubbhikkhakāle vā parihīnasampattikāle vā antarakappe vā nibbattati, tassa pāpakammaṃkālavipattiṃ āgamma vipaccatināma. Yo pana payogaṃ sampādetuṃ na jānāti, upasaṅkamitabbayuttakāle upasaṅkamituṃ na jānāti…pe… corikayuttakāle corikaṃ kātuṃ na jānāti, tassa pāpakammaṃpayogavipattiṃ āgamma vipaccatināma.

Gativipattiṃ āgamma vipaccati however, when one is born in the womb of a slave woman or worker woman and is ugly and deformed, he gives rise to doubt, "Is he a yakkha or a human?" If he is a male, then thinking, "This is not appropriate for another's work," they have him guard elephants or horses or cattle, or have him bring grass and wood, or have him carry saliva. If she is a female, then they have her cook food for elephants and horses, or have her throw away rubbish, or have her do other despicable work. The evil kamma of such a one is called upadhivipattiṃ āgamma vipaccati. However, one who is born in a time of famine or a time of declining prosperity or in an intermediate age, the evil kamma of that one is called kālavipattiṃ āgamma vipaccati. However, one who does not know how to accomplish effort, does not know how to approach at the appropriate time for approaching...pe...does not know how to steal at the appropriate time for stealing, the evil kamma of that one is called payogavipattiṃ āgamma vipaccati.

gativipattipaṭibāḷhaṃ na vipaccatināma. Yo pana puññānubhāvena rājarājamahāmattādīnaṃ gehe nibbattitvā kāṇo vā hoti kuṇī vā khañjo vā pakkhahato vā, tassa oparajjasenāpatibhaṇḍāgārikaṭṭhānādīni na anucchavikānīti na denti. Iccassa taṃ puññaṃupadhivipattipaṭibāḷhaṃ na vipaccatināma. Yo pana dubbhikkhakāle vā parihīnasampattikāle vā antarakappe vā manussesu nibbattati, tassa taṃ kalyāṇakammaṃkālavipattipaṭibāḷhaṃ na vipaccatināma. Yo heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva payogaṃ sampādetuṃ na jānāti, tassa kalyāṇakammaṃpayogavipattipaṭibāḷhaṃ na vipaccatināma.

It is called gativipattipaṭibāḷhaṃ na vipaccati. But if, due to the power of merit, one is born in the home of a king, a great minister, or the like, and is blind, hunchbacked, lame, or paralyzed, they do not give him positions such as sub-king, general, treasurer, or judge, considering them unsuitable. This merit of his is called upadhivipattipaṭibāḷhaṃ na vipaccati. If one is born among humans during a famine, a time of declining prosperity, or an antarakappa, that meritorious deed of his is called kālavipattipaṭibāḷhaṃ na vipaccati. If one does not know how to properly apply effort in the manner described above, that meritorious deed of his is called payogavipattipaṭibāḷhaṃ na vipaccati.

gatisampattiṃ āgamma vipaccatināma. Rājarājamahāmattādīnaṃ kule nibbattitvā upadhisampattiṃ pattassa attabhāvasamiddhiyaṃ ṭhitassa devanagare samussitaratanatoraṇasadisaṃ attabhāvaṃ disvā ‘‘imassa oparajjasenāpatibhaṇḍāgārikaṭṭhānādīni anucchavikānī’’ti daharasseva sato tāni ṭhānantarāni denti, evarūpassa kalyāṇakammaṃupadhisampattiṃ āgamma vipaccatināma. Yo paṭhamakappikesu vā sulabhannapānakāle vā nibbattati, tassa kalyāṇakammaṃkālasampattiṃ āgamma vipaccatināma. Yo vuttanayeneva payogaṃ sampādetuṃ jānāti, tassa kammaṃpayogasampattiṃ āgamma vipaccatināma. Evaṃ abhidhammapariyāyena soḷasa kammāni vibhattāni.

It is called gatisampattiṃ āgamma vipaccati. Being born in the family of kings, great ministers, and the like, having attained the fortune of a good body (upadhisampatti), standing in the perfection of one's existence, seeing an existence like a jeweled archway raised in the city of the gods, thinking, "These positions such as sub-king, general, treasurer, and judge are suitable for him," they give those positions to him while he is still young. The meritorious deed of such a person is called upadhisampattiṃ āgamma vipaccati. If one is born in the earliest kappas or during a time when food and drink are easily obtained, that meritorious deed of his is called kālasampattiṃ āgamma vipaccati. If one knows how to properly apply effort in the manner described above, that kamma is called payogasampattiṃ āgamma vipaccati. Thus, sixteen kammas have been distinguished according to the Abhidhamma method.

Aparānipi paṭisambhidāmaggapariyāyena dvādasa kammāni vibhattāni. Seyyathidaṃ – ‘‘ahosi kammaṃ ahosi kammavipāko, ahosi kammaṃ nāhosi kammavipāko, ahosi kammaṃ atthi kammavipāko, ahosi kammaṃ natthi kammavipāko, ahosi kammaṃ bhavissati kammavipāko, ahosi kammaṃ na bhavissati kammavipāko, atthi kammaṃ atthi kammavipāko, atthi kammaṃ natthi kammavipāko, atthi kammaṃ bhavissati kammavipāko, atthi kammaṃ na bhavissati kammavipāko, bhavissati kammaṃ bhavissati kammavipāko, bhavissati kammaṃ na bhavissati kammavipāko’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.234).

Furthermore, twelve kammas have been distinguished according to the Paṭisambhidāmagga method, as follows: "There was a kamma, there was a result of kamma; there was a kamma, there was no result of kamma; there was a kamma, there is a result of kamma; there was a kamma, there is no result of kamma; there was a kamma, there will be a result of kamma; there was a kamma, there will be no result of kamma; there is a kamma, there is a result of kamma; there is a kamma, there is no result of kamma; there is a kamma, there will be a result of kamma; there is a kamma, there will be no result of kamma; there will be a kamma, there will be a result of kamma; there will be a kamma, there will be no result of kamma" (paṭi. ma. 1.234).

ahosi kammaṃ ahosi kammavipākoti vuttaṃ. Yaṃ pana vipākavāraṃ na labhi, paṭisandhijanakaṃ paṭisandhiṃ rūpajanakaṃ vā rūpaṃ janetuṃ nāsakkhi, taṃahosi kammaṃ nāhosi kammavipākoti vuttaṃ. Yaṃ pana atīte āyūhitaṃ etarahi laddhavipākavāraṃ paṭisandhijanakaṃ paṭisandhiṃ janetvā rūpajanakaṃ rūpaṃ janetvā ṭhitaṃ, taṃahosi kammaṃ atthi kammavipākoti vuttaṃ. Yaṃ aladdhavipākavāraṃ paṭisandhijanakaṃ vā paṭisandhiṃ rūpajanakaṃ vā rūpaṃ janetuṃ nāsakkhi, taṃahosi kammaṃ natthi kammavipākoti vuttaṃ. Yaṃ pana atīte āyūhitaṃ anāgate vipākavāraṃ labhissati, paṭisandhijanakaṃ paṭisandhiṃ rūpajanakaṃ rūpaṃ janetuṃ sakkhissati, taṃahosi kammaṃ bhavissati kammavipākoti vuttaṃ. Yaṃ anāgate vipākavāraṃ na labhissati, paṭisandhijanakaṃ paṭisandhiṃ rūpajanakaṃ vā rūpaṃ janetuṃ na sakkhissati, taṃahosi kammaṃ na bhavissati kammavipākoti vuttaṃ.

ahosi kammaṃ ahosi kammavipāko has been said. But that which did not obtain the opportunity for fruition, being unable to generate rebirth or form, that is, to generate rebirth productive kamma or form productive kamma, is called ahosi kammaṃ nāhosi kammavipāko. But that which was accumulated in the past, now having obtained the opportunity for fruition, having generated rebirth, generating rebirth productive kamma, having generated form, generating form productive kamma, and remains, is called ahosi kammaṃ atthi kammavipāko. But that which did not obtain the opportunity for fruition, being unable to generate rebirth or form, that is, rebirth productive kamma or form productive kamma, is called ahosi kammaṃ natthi kammavipāko. But that which was accumulated in the past and will obtain the opportunity for fruition in the future, being able to generate rebirth, generating rebirth productive kamma, and to generate form, generating form productive kamma, is called ahosi kammaṃ bhavissati kammavipāko. But that which will not obtain the opportunity for fruition in the future, being unable to generate rebirth or form, that is, rebirth productive kamma or form productive kamma, is called ahosi kammaṃ na bhavissati kammavipāko.

atthi kammaṃ atthi kammavipākoti vuttaṃ. Yaṃ pana etarahi vipākavāraṃ na labhati, taṃatthi kammaṃ natthi kammavipākoti vuttaṃ. Yaṃ pana etarahi āyūhitaṃ anāgate vipākavāraṃ labhissati, paṭisandhijanakaṃ paṭisandhiṃ rūpajanakaṃ rūpaṃ janetuṃ sakkhissati, taṃatthi kammaṃ bhavissati kammavipākoti vuttaṃ. Yaṃ pana vipākavāraṃ na labhissati, paṭisandhijanakaṃ paṭisandhiṃ rūpajanakaṃ vā rūpaṃ janetuṃ sakkhissati, taṃatthi kammaṃ na bhavissati kammavipākoti vuttaṃ.

atthi kammaṃ atthi kammavipāko has been said. But that which does not obtain the opportunity for fruition at present is called atthi kammaṃ natthi kammavipāko. But that which is accumulated at present and will obtain the opportunity for fruition in the future, being able to generate rebirth, generating rebirth productive kamma, and to generate form, generating form productive kamma, is called atthi kammaṃ bhavissati kammavipāko. But that which will not obtain the opportunity for fruition, being able to generate rebirth or form, that is, rebirth productive kamma or form productive kamma, is called atthi kammaṃ na bhavissati kammavipāko.

bhavissati kammaṃ bhavissati kammavipākoti vuttaṃ. Yaṃ pana vipākavāraṃ na labhissati, paṭisandhijanakaṃ paṭisandhiṃ rūpajanakaṃ vā rūpaṃ janetuṃ na sakkhissati, taṃbhavissati kammaṃ na bhavissati kammavipākoti vuttaṃ. Evaṃ paṭisambhidāmaggapariyāyena dvādasa kammāni vibhattāni.

bhavissati kammaṃ bhavissati kammavipāko has been said. But that which will not obtain the opportunity for fruition, being unable to generate rebirth or form, that is, rebirth productive kamma or form productive kamma, is called bhavissati kammaṃ na bhavissati kammavipāko. Thus, twelve kammas have been distinguished according to the Paṭisambhidāmagga method.

Iti imāni ceva dvādasa abhidhammapariyāyena vibhattāni ca soḷasa kammāni attano ṭhānā osakkitvā suttantikapariyāyena vuttāni ekādasa kammāniyeva bhavanti. Tānipi tato osakkitvā tīṇiyeva kammāni honti diṭṭhadhammavedanīyaṃ, upapajjavedanīyaṃ, aparapariyāyavedanīyanti. Tesaṃ saṅkamanaṃ natthi, yathāṭhāneyeva tiṭṭhanti. Yadi hi diṭṭhadhammavedanīyaṃ kammaṃ upapajjavedanīyaṃ vā aparapariyāyavedanīyaṃ vā bhaveyya, ‘‘diṭṭhe vā dhamme’’ti satthā na vadeyya. Sacepi upapajjavedanīyaṃ diṭṭhadhammavedanīyaṃ vā aparapariyāyavedanīyaṃ vā bhaveyya, ‘‘upapajja vā’’ti satthā na vadeyya. Athāpi aparapariyāyavedanīyaṃ diṭṭhadhammavedanīyaṃ vā upapajjavedanīyaṃ vā bhaveyya, ‘‘apare vā pariyāye’’ti satthā na vadeyya.

Thus, these twelve kammas and the sixteen kammas distinguished according to the Abhidhamma method, withdrawing from their positions, become the eleven kammas stated according to the Suttanta method. Those, too, withdrawing from that, become only three kammas: diṭṭhadhammavedanīya, upapajjavedanīya, and aparapariyāyavedanīya. There is no transference among them; they remain in their respective places. For if diṭṭhadhammavedanīya kamma were to become upapajjavedanīya or aparapariyāyavedanīya, the Teacher would not say "in this very life." If upapajjavedanīya were to become diṭṭhadhammavedanīya or aparapariyāyavedanīya, the Teacher would not say "in the next existence." Likewise, if aparapariyāyavedanīya were to become diṭṭhadhammavedanīya or upapajjavedanīya, the Teacher would not say "in some subsequent existence."

lobhe vigateti lobhe apagate niruddhe.Tālavatthukatanti tālavatthu viya kataṃ, matthakacchinnatālo viya puna aviruḷhisabhāvaṃ katanti attho.Anabhāvaṃ katanti anuabhāvaṃ kataṃ, yathā puna nuppajjati, evaṃ katanti attho.Evassūti evaṃ bhaveyyuṃ.Evameva khoti ettha bījāni viya kusalākusalaṃ kammaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, tāni agginā ḍahanapuriso viya yogāvacaro, aggi viya maggañāṇaṃ, aggiṃ datvā bījānaṃ ḍahanakālo viya maggañāṇena kilesānaṃ daḍḍhakālo, masikatakālo viya pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ chinnamūlake katvā ṭhapitakālo, mahāvāte opunitvā nadiyā vā pavāhetvā appavattikatakālo viya upādinnakasantānassa nirodhena chinnamūlakānaṃ pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ appaṭisandhikabhāvena nirujjhitvā puna bhavasmiṃ paṭisandhiṃ aggahitakālo veditabbo.

lobhe vigate means when greed is gone, ceased. Tālavatthukataṃ means made like a palm stump, made to be of a nature that does not grow again like a palm tree with its head cut off. Anabhāvaṃ kataṃ means made without becoming, made in such a way that it does not arise again. Evassū means may it be so. Evameva kho: here, wholesome and unwholesome kamma should be seen as like seeds, the yogāvacara as like a man burning them with fire, maggañāṇa as like the fire, the time of burning the seeds with fire as like the time of burning the defilements with the path knowledge (maggañāṇa), the time of making ashes as like the time of cutting off the root of the five aggregates and placing them, the time of blowing away with a great wind and flowing them away in a river as like the time of the appropriated continuum ceasing, with the five aggregates having their roots cut off ceasing without rebirth, and not grasping rebirth in future existence, should be understood.

Mohajañcāpaviddasūti mohajañcāpi aviddasu. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yaṃ so avidū andhabālo lobhajañca dosajañca mohajañcāti kammaṃ karoti, evaṃ karontena yaṃ tena pakataṃ kammaṃ appaṃ vā yadi vā bahuṃ.Idheva taṃ vedaniyanti taṃ kammaṃ tena bālena idha sake attabhāveyeva vedanīyaṃ, tasseva taṃ attabhāve vipaccatīti attho.Vatthuṃ aññaṃ na vijjatīti tassa kammassa vipaccanatthāya aññaṃ vatthu natthi. Na hi aññena kataṃ kammaṃ aññassa attabhāve vipaccati.Tasmā lobhañca dosañca, mohajañcāpi viddasūti tasmā yo vidū medhāvī paṇḍito taṃ lobhajādibhedaṃ kammaṃ na karoti, sovijjaṃ uppādayaṃ bhikkhu, sabbā duggatiyo jahe,arahattamaggavijjaṃ uppādetvā taṃ vā pana vijjaṃ uppādento sabbā duggatiyo jahati. Desanāsīsamevetaṃ, sugatiyopi pana so khīṇāsavo jahatiyeva. Yampi cetaṃ ‘‘tasmā lobhañca dosañcā’’ti vuttaṃ, etthāpi lobhadosasīsena lobhajañca dosajañca kammameva niddiṭṭhanti veditabbaṃ. Evaṃ suttantesupi gāthāyapi vaṭṭavivaṭṭameva kathitanti.

Mohajañcāpaviddasū means even those born of delusion, not knowing. This is what is said: that which that ignorant, blind fool does, kamma born of greed, born of hatred, and born of delusion, whatever kamma he does, be it little or much. Idheva taṃ vedaniyaṃ: that kamma is to be experienced by that fool right here in his own existence; it ripens in that very existence of his, is the meaning. Vatthuṃ aññaṃ na vijjati: there is no other basis for the ripening of that kamma. Indeed, kamma done by one does not ripen in the existence of another. Tasmā lobhañca dosañca, mohajañcāpi viddasū: therefore, that wise, intelligent, learned person does not do that kamma of greed, etc. He, vijjaṃ uppādayaṃ bhikkhu, sabbā duggatiyo jahe, generating knowledge, the bhikkhu abandons all bad destinations, generating the knowledge of the path to arahantship or, indeed, generating that knowledge, he abandons all bad destinations. This is the conclusion of the discourse; however, that khīṇāsava abandons even good destinations. And also, that which was said, "Therefore, greed and hatred," here too it should be understood that only kamma born of greed and kamma born of hatred, with greed and hatred as the head, is indicated. Thus, in the Suttantas as well, only the round and the reverse have been spoken of.

5. Hatthakasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Hatthakasutta Commentary

35.Pañcameāḷaviyanti āḷaviraṭṭhe.Gomaggeti gunnaṃ gamanamagge.Paṇṇasanthareti sayaṃ patitapaṇṇasanthare.Athāti evaṃ gunnaṃ gamanamaggaṃ ujuṃ mahāpathaṃ nissāya siṃsapāvane sayaṃ patitapaṇṇāni saṅkaḍḍhitvā katasanthare sugatamahācīvaraṃ pattharitvā pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā nisinne tathāgate.Hatthako āḷavakoti hatthato hatthaṃ gatattā evaṃladdhanāmo āḷavako rājaputto.Etadavocāti etaṃ ‘‘kacci, bhante, bhagavā’’tiādivacanaṃ avoca. Kasmā pana sammāsambuddho taṃ ṭhānaṃ gantvā nisinno, kasmā rājakumāro tattha gatoti? Sammāsambuddho tāva aṭṭhuppattikāya dhammadesanāya samuṭṭhānaṃ disvā tattha nisinno, rājakumāropi pātova uṭṭhāya pañcahi upāsakasatehi parivuto buddhupaṭṭhānaṃ gacchanto mahāmaggā okkamma gopathaṃ gahetvā ‘‘buddhānaṃ pūjanatthāya missakamālaṃ ocinissāmī’’ti gacchanto satthāraṃ disvā upasaṅkamitvā vanditvā ekamantaṃ nisīdi, evaṃ so tattha gatoti.Sukhamasayitthāti sukhaṃ sayittha.

35. In the fifth, āḷaviyaṃ means in the Āḷavi country. Gomagge means on the path of the cattle's going. Paṇṇasanthare means on a bed of leaves fallen by themselves. Athāti thus, relying on the straight highway, the path of the cattle's going, having spread out the Sugata's great robe on a bed made by gathering the leaves fallen by themselves in the siṃsapā grove, sat the Tathagata sitting with legs crossed. Hatthako āḷavako means Hatthaka the Āḷavaka, the prince, thus named because he was received from hand to hand. Etadavocā means he said this statement beginning with "Kacci, bhante, Bhagavā." But why did the Perfectly Enlightened One go and sit in that place, and why did the prince go there? The Perfectly Enlightened One, seeing the cause for the arising of a Dhamma talk for the sake of the eight kinds of beings, sat there, and the prince, too, having risen early in the morning, surrounded by five hundred lay followers, going to attend upon the Buddha, turning off the highway and taking the cattle path, thinking, "I will gather mixed flowers for the purpose of honoring the Buddhas," saw the Teacher, approached, paid homage, and sat down to one side; thus he went there. Sukhamasayitthā means he slept comfortably.

Antaraṭṭhakoti māghaphagguṇānaṃ antare aṭṭhadivasaparimāṇo kālo. Māghassa hi avasāne cattāro divasā, phagguṇassa ādimhi cattāroti ayaṃ ‘‘antaraṭṭhako’’ti vuccati.Himapātasamayoti himassa patanasamayo.Kharāti pharusā kakkhaḷā vā.Gokaṇṭakahatāti navavuṭṭhe deve gāvīnaṃ akkantakkantaṭṭhāne khurantarehi kaddamo uggantvā tiṭṭhati, so vātātapena sukkho kakacadantasadiso hoti dukkhasamphasso. Taṃ sandhāyāha – ‘‘gokaṇṭakahatā bhūmī’’ti. Gunnaṃ khurantarehi chinnātipi attho.Verambho vāto vāyatīti catūhi disāhi vāyanto vāto vāyati. Ekāya disāya vā dvīhi vā disāhi tīhi vā disāhi vāyanto vāto verambhoti na vuccati.

Antaraṭṭhako means the time measuring eight days in the interval between Māgha and Phagguna. For at the end of Māgha there are four days, and at the beginning of Phagguna there are four; this is called "antaraṭṭhako." Himapātasamayo means the time of the falling of snow. Kharā means rough or hard. Gokaṇṭakahatā means when new rain has fallen, mud sprouts up and remains in the places where the cows have stepped, between their hooves; dried by the wind and sun, it becomes like a saw blade, painful to the touch. Referring to that, he said, "gokaṇṭakahatā bhūmī." It also means cut by the hooves of the cattle. Verambho vāto vāyatī means the wind blows blowing from the four directions. A wind blowing from one direction, two directions, or three directions is not called verambha.

Tena hi rājakumārāti idaṃ satthā ‘‘ayaṃ rājakumāro lokasmiṃ neva sukhavāsino, na dukkhavāsino jānāti, jānāpessāmi na’’nti upari desanaṃ vaḍḍhento āha. Tatthayathā te khameyyāti yathā tuyhaṃ rucceyya.Idhassāti imasmiṃ loke assa.Gonakatthatoti caturaṅgulādhikalomena kāḷakojavena atthato.Paṭikatthatoti uṇṇāmayena setattharaṇena atthato.Paṭalikatthatoti ghanapupphena uṇṇāmayaattharaṇena atthato.Kadalimigapavarapaccattharaṇoti kadalimigacammamayena uttamapaccattharaṇena atthato. Taṃ kira paccattharaṇaṃ setavatthassa upari kadalimigacammaṃ attharitvā sibbitvā karonti.Sauttaracchadoti saha uttaracchadena, upari baddhena rattavitānena saddhinti attho.Ubhatolohitakūpadhānoti sīsūpadhānañca pādūpadhānañcāti pallaṅkassa ubhato ṭhapitalohitakūpadhāno.Pajāpatiyoti bhariyāyo.Manāpenapaccupaṭṭhitā assūti manāpena upaṭṭhānavidhānena paccupaṭṭhitā bhaveyyuṃ.

Tena hi rājakumārāti this the Teacher said, increasing the discourse further, thinking, "This prince knows neither those who live happily in the world nor those who live unhappily; I will make him know." There, yathā te khameyyā means as it pleases you. Idhassā means in this world. Gonakatthato means covered with a black wool blanket with wool exceeding four fingerbreadths. Paṭikatthato means covered with a white woolen spread. Paṭalikatthato means covered with a thick woolen spread with flowers. Kadalimigapavarapaccattharaṇo means covered with an excellent covering made of kadali deer hide. It is said that that covering is made by spreading kadali deer hide over a white cloth and sewing it. Sauttaracchado means together with an upper covering, together with a red canopy fastened above, is the meaning. Ubhatolohitakūpadhāno means a bed with red pillows placed on both sides, one for the head and one for the feet. Pajāpatiyo means wives. Manāpena paccupaṭṭhitā assū means may they attend with pleasant service.

Kāyikāti pañcadvārakāyaṃ khobhayamānā.Cetasikāti manodvāraṃ khobhayamānā.So rāgo tathāgatassa pahīnoti tathārūpo rāgo tathāgatassa pahīnoti attho. Yo pana tassa rāgo, na so tathāgatassa pahīno nāma.Dosamohesupi eseva nayo.

Kāyikā means agitating the five-door body. Cetasikā means agitating the mind-door. So rāgo tathāgatassa pahīno means such a passion is abandoned by the Tathagata, is the meaning. But that passion of his is not abandoned by the Tathagata. The same method applies to dosamohosu.

Brāhmaṇoti bāhitapāpo khīṇāsavabrāhmaṇo.Parinibbutoti kilesaparinibbānena parinibbuto.Na limpati kāmesūti vatthukāmesu ca kilesakāmesu ca taṇhādiṭṭhilepehi na limpati.Sītibhūtoti abbhantare tāpanakilesānaṃ abhāvena sītibhūto.Nirūpadhīti kilesūpadhīnaṃ abhāvena nirūpadhi.Sabbā āsattiyo chetvāti āsattiyo vuccanti taṇhāyo, tā sabbāpi rūpādīsu ārammaṇesu āsattavisattā āsattiyo chinditvā.Vineyya hadaye daranti hadayanissitaṃ darathaṃ vinayitvā vūpasametvā.Santiṃ pappuyya cetasoti cittassa kilesanibbānaṃ pāpuṇitvā. Karaṇavacanaṃ vā etaṃ ‘‘sabbacetaso samannāharitvā’’tiādīsu viya, cetasā nibbānaṃ pāpuṇitvāti attho.

Brāhmaṇo means the brāhmaṇa who has cast off evil, the khīṇāsava. Parinibbuto means fully extinguished by the extinction of defilements. Na limpati kāmesū means he does not cling to sense pleasures or defilement pleasures with the stain of craving and wrong view. Sītibhūto means having become cooled due to the absence of defilements that heat within. Nirūpadhī means without attachment due to the absence of defilement attachments. Sabbā āsattiyo chetvā means āsattis are called cravings, having cut off all those āsattis clinging and sticking to objects such as forms. Vineyya hadaye daraṃ means having removed and calmed the anguish that depends on the heart. Santiṃ pappuyya cetaso means having attained the extinction of defilements of the mind. Or this is an instrumental expression, like in "sabbacetaso samannāharitvā," meaning having attained extinction with the mind.

6. Devadūtasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Devadūtasutta Commentary

36.Chaṭṭhedevadūtānīti devadūtā. Ayaṃ panettha vacanattho – devoti maccu, tassa dūtātidevadūtā. Jiṇṇabyādhimatā hi saṃvegajananaṭṭhena ‘‘idāni te maccusamīpaṃ gantabba’’nti codenti viya, tasmā devadūtāti vuccanti. Devā viya dūtātipidevadūtā. Yathā hi alaṅkatapaṭiyattāya devatāya ākāse ṭhatvā ‘‘tvaṃ asukadivase marissasī’’ti vutte tassā vacanaṃ saddhātabbaṃ hoti; evamevaṃ jiṇṇabyādhimatāpi dissamānā ‘‘tvampi evaṃdhammo’’ti codenti viya, tesañca taṃ vacanaṃ anaññathābhāvitāya devatāya byākaraṇasadisameva hotīti devā viya dūtāti devadūtā. Visuddhidevānaṃ dūtātipidevadūtā. Sabbabodhisattā hi jiṇṇabyādhimatapabbajite disvāva saṃvegaṃ āpajjitvā nikkhamma pabbajiṃsu. Evaṃ visuddhidevānaṃ dūtātipi devadūtā. Idha pana liṅgavipallāsena ‘‘devadūtānī’’ti vuttaṃ.

36. In the sixth, devadūtānī means messengers of the gods. Here, this is the meaning of the expression: deva means death, its messengers are devadūtā. For the aged, the sick, and the dead, by way of generating a sense of urgency, seem to urge, "Now you must go near death"; therefore, they are called messengers of the gods. Or, those who are messengers like gods are also devadūtā. Just as when a deity standing in the sky, adorned and ornamented, says, "You will die on such and such a day," that word of hers is to be believed; in the same way, the aged, the sick, and the dead, being visible, seem to urge, "You too are subject to this"; and that word of theirs, because of the inevitability, is just like a declaration by a deity; therefore, those who are messengers like gods are called messengers of the gods. Or, the messengers of the pure gods are also devadūtā. Indeed, all Bodhisattas, having seen the aged, the sick, the dead, and the renunciant, having felt a sense of urgency, went forth and renounced. Thus, the messengers of the pure gods are also messengers of the gods. Here, however, due to the change of gender, it is said "devadūtānī."

Kāyenaduccaritantiādi kasmā āraddhaṃ? Devadūtānuyuñjanaṭṭhānupakkamakammadassanatthaṃ. Iminā hi kammena ayaṃ satto niraye nibbattati, atha naṃ tattha yamo rājā devadūte samanuyuñjati. Tatthakāyena duccaritaṃ caratīti kāyadvārena tividhaṃ duccaritaṃ carati.Vācāyāti vacīdvārena catubbidhaṃ duccaritaṃ carati.Manasāti manodvārena tividhaṃ duccaritaṃ carati.

Kāyena duccaritaṃ etc., why was it begun? To show the non-circumvention of the place of questioning by the divine messengers, and the result of actions. For by this action, a being is reborn in hell, and there the King Yama questions him with the divine messengers. There, kāyena duccaritaṃ carati means he performs threefold misconduct through the body-door. Vācāya means he performs fourfold misconduct through the speech-door. Manasā means he performs threefold misconduct through the mind-door.

Tamenaṃ, bhikkhave, nirayapālāti ettha ekacce therā ‘‘nirayapālā nāma natthi, yantarūpaṃ viya kammameva kāraṇaṃ kāretī’’ti vadanti. Taṃ ‘‘atthi niraye nirayapālāti, āmantā. Atthi ca kāraṇikā’’tiādinā nayena abhidhamme (kathā. 866) paṭisedhitameva. Yathā hi manussaloke kammakāraṇakārakā atthi, evameva niraye nirayapālā atthīti.Yamassaraññoti yamarājā nāma vemānikapetarājā. Ekasmiṃ kāle dibbavimāne dibbakapparukkhadibbauyyānadibbanāṭakādisabbasampattiṃ anubhavati, ekasmiṃ kāle kammavipākaṃ, dhammiko rājā, na cesa ekova hoti, catūsu pana dvāresu cattāro janā honti.Amatteyyoti mātu hito matteyyo, mātari sammā paṭipannoti attho. Na matteyyoti amatteyyo, mātari micchā paṭipannoti attho. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo.Abrahmaññoti ettha ca khīṇāsavā brāhmaṇā nāma, tesu micchā paṭipanno abrahmañño nāma.

Tamenaṃ, bhikkhave, nirayapālā—here, some elders say, "There are no 'hell-wardens'; it is just the action itself that causes things to happen, like a machine." But that is refuted in the Abhidhamma (Kathā. 866) in the manner beginning, "Are there hell-wardens in hell? Yes. And there are agents." Just as in the human world there are those who do and cause actions, so too in hell there are hell-wardens. Yamassa rañño—Yamarājā is a king of the petas in a celestial mansion. At one time, he experiences all kinds of prosperity in a divine mansion with divine wish-fulfilling trees, divine gardens, divine dancers, etc.; at another time, he experiences the result of his actions. He is a righteous king, and he is not alone; rather, there are four people at each of the four gates. AmatteyyoMatteyya means having affection for one's mother, behaving properly towards one's mother. Amatteyyo means not having affection, behaving improperly towards one's mother. The same method applies in the remaining terms. Abrahmañño—here, brāhmaṇā means arahants; abrahmañño means behaving improperly towards them.

Samanuyuñjatīti anuyogavattaṃ āropento pucchati, laddhiṃ patiṭṭhāpento panasamanuggāhatināma, kāraṇaṃ pucchantosamanubhāsatināma.Nāddasanti attano santike pahitassa kassaci devadūtassa abhāvaṃ sandhāya evaṃ vadati.

Samanuyuñjatīti means he questions, imposing the duty of questioning; but establishing a doctrine is called samanuggāhati, and asking for a reason is called samanubhāsati. Nāddasanti means he speaks thus, referring to the absence of any divine messenger sent to his presence.

ambhotiādimāha. Tatthajiṇṇanti jarājiṇṇaṃ.Gopānasivaṅkanti gopānasī viya vaṅkaṃ.Bhogganti bhaggaṃ. Imināpissa vaṅkabhāvameva dīpeti.Daṇḍaparāyaṇanti daṇḍapaṭisaraṇaṃ daṇḍadutiyaṃ.Pavedhamānanti kampamānaṃ.Āturanti jarāturaṃ.Khaṇḍadantanti jarānubhāvena khaṇḍitadantaṃ.Palitakesanti paṇḍarakesaṃ.Vilūnanti luñcitvā gahitakesaṃ viya khallāṭaṃ.Khalitasiranti mahākhallāṭasīsaṃ.Valitanti sañjātavaliṃ.Tilakāhatagattanti setatilakakāḷatilakehi vikiṇṇasarīraṃ.Jarādhammoti jarāsabhāvo, aparimutto jarāya, jarā nāma mayhaṃ abbhantareyeva pavattatīti. Paratobyādhidhammo maraṇadhammoti padadvayepi eseva nayo.

ambho etc., he said. There, jiṇṇaṃ means aged with old age. Gopānasivaṅkaṃ means crooked like the rung of a ladder. Bhoggaṃ means broken. By this, he indicates its crookedness. Daṇḍaparāyaṇaṃ means having a staff as a support, a staff as a second. Pavedhamānaṃ means trembling. Āturaṃ means afflicted with old age. Khaṇḍadantaṃ means having broken teeth due to the power of old age. Palitakesaṃ means having white hair. Vilūnaṃ means bald, as if the hair had been plucked out. Khalitasiraṃ means having a greatly bald head. Valitaṃ means having wrinkles. Tilakāhatagattaṃ means having a body scattered with white and black marks like sesame seeds. Jarādhammo means having the nature of aging, not freed from aging, aging occurs within me. The same method applies to the two terms byādhidhammo maraṇadhammo further on.

Paṭhamaṃ devadūtaṃ samanuyuñjitvāti ettha jarājiṇṇasatto atthato evaṃ vadati nāma – ‘‘passatha, bho, ahampi tumhe viya taruṇo ahosiṃ ūrubalī bāhubalī javasampanno, tassa me tā balajavasampattiyo antarahitā, vijjamānāpi me hatthapādā hatthapādakiccaṃ na karonti, jarāyamhi aparimuttatāya ediso jāto. Na kho panāhameva, tumhepi jarāya aparimuttāva. Yatheva hi mayhaṃ, evaṃ tumhākampi jarā āgamissati. Iti tassā pure āgamanāva kalyāṇaṃ karothā’’ti. Tenevesa devadūto nāma jāto.Ābādhikanti bādhikaṃ.Dukkhitanti dukkhappattaṃ.Bāḷhagilānanti adhimattagilānaṃ.

Paṭhamaṃ devadūtaṃ samanuyuñjitvā—here, the being aged with old age speaks thus in meaning: "Look, sirs, I too was once young like you, with strong thighs, strong arms, and full of speed; those strengths and speeds of mine have disappeared. Although my hands and feet exist, they do not perform the functions of hands and feet; being not freed from old age, I have become like this. It is not just I alone; you too are not freed from old age. Just as it is for me, so too will old age come for you. Thus, before it arrives, do what is skillful." Therefore, he is called a divine messenger. Ābādhikaṃ means afflicted. Dukkhitaṃ means having attained suffering. Bāḷhagilānaṃ means excessively ill.

Dutiyaṃ devadūtanti etthapi gilānasatto atthato evaṃ vadati nāma – ‘‘passatha, bho, ahampi tumhe viya nirogo ahosiṃ, somhi etarahi byādhinā abhihato, sake muttakarīse palipanno, uṭṭhātumpi na sakkomi. Vijjamānāpi me hatthapādā hatthapādakiccaṃ na karonti, byādhitomhi aparimuttatāya ediso jāto. Na kho panāhameva, tumhepi byādhito aparimuttāva. Yatheva hi mayhaṃ, evaṃ tumhākampi byādhi āgamissati. Iti tassa pure āgamanāva kalyāṇaṃ karothā’’ti. Tenevesa devadūto nāma jāto.

Dutiyaṃ devadūtaṃ—here too, the sick being speaks thus in meaning: "Look, sirs, I too was once healthy like you; now I am struck down by illness, lying smeared in my own urine and feces; I am not even able to get up. Although my hands and feet exist, they do not perform the functions of hands and feet; being not freed from illness, I have become like this. It is not just I alone; you too are not freed from illness. Just as it is for me, so too will illness come for you. Thus, before it arrives, do what is skillful." Therefore, he is called a divine messenger.

Ekāhamatantiādīsu ekāhaṃ matassa assāti ekāhamato, taṃ ekāhamataṃ. Parato padadvayepi eseva nayo. Bhastā viya vāyunā uddhaṃ jīvitapariyādānā yathākkamaṃ samuggatena sūnabhāvena uddhumātattāuddhumātakaṃ. Vinīlo vuccati viparibhinnavaṇṇo, vinīlova vinīlako, taṃvinīlakaṃ. Paṭikūlattā vā kucchitaṃ vinīlanti vinīlakaṃ.Vipubbakanti vissandamānapubbakaṃ, paribhinnaṭṭhāne hi paggharitena pubbena palimakkhitanti attho.

In ekāhamata etc., ekāhaṃ matassa assā ti ekāhamato, that is, ekāhamataṃ. The same method applies to the two terms further on. Uddhumātakaṃ means swollen up, due to the emptiness that has successively arisen from the cessation of life, like a bellows inflated by the wind. Vinīlo means having changed color, just vinīlo, that is, vinīlakaṃ. Or, because of its repulsiveness, kucchitaṃ vinīlaṃ, that is, vinīlakaṃ. Vipubbakaṃ means oozing pus, smeared with the pus that has flowed out from the broken places.

Tatiyaṃdevadūtanti ettha matakasatto atthato evaṃ vadati nāma – ‘‘passatha, bho, maṃ āmakasusāne chaḍḍitaṃ uddhumātakādibhāvappattaṃ, maraṇatomhi aparimuttatāya ediso jāto. Na kho panāhameva, tumhepi maraṇato aparimuttā. Yatheva hi mayhaṃ, evaṃ tumhākampi maraṇaṃ āgamissati. Iti tassa pure āgamanāva kalyāṇaṃ karothā’’ti. Tenevassa devadūto nāma jāto.

Tatiyaṃ devadūtaṃ—here, the dead being speaks thus in meaning: "Look, sirs, at me, thrown in the charnel ground, having attained the state of being swollen up, etc.; being not freed from death, I have become like this. It is not just I alone; you too are not freed from death. Just as it is for me, so too will death come for you. Thus, before it arrives, do what is skillful." Therefore, he is called a divine messenger.

Imaṃ pana devadūtānuyogaṃ ko labhati, ko na labhati? Yena tāva bahuṃ pāpaṃ kataṃ, so gantvā niraye nibbattatiyeva. Yena pana parittaṃ pāpaṃ kataṃ, so labhati. Yathā hi sabhaṇḍaṃ coraṃ gahetvā kattabbameva karonti na vinicchinanti. Anuvijjitvā gahitaṃ pana vinicchayaṭṭhānaṃ nayanti, so vinicchayaṃ labhati. Evaṃsampadametaṃ. Parittapāpakammā hi attano dhammatāyapi saranti, sārīyamānāpi saranti.

Now, who obtains this questioning by the divine messengers, and who does not? He who has done much evil goes and is reborn in hell. But he who has done little evil obtains it. Just as they do what must be done to a thief caught with goods; they do not investigate. But having investigated, they take him to the place of judgment; he obtains judgment. This is similar. Those with little evil action remember by their own nature; being reminded, they remember.

dīghajayantadamiḷonāma attano dhammatāya sari. So kira damiḷo sumanagirimahāvihāre ākāsacetiyaṃ rattapaṭena pūjesi, atha niraye ussadasāmante nibbatto aggijālasaddaṃ sutvāva attanā pūjitapaṭaṃ anussari, so gantvā sagge nibbatto. Aparopi puttassa daharabhikkhuno khalisāṭakaṃ dento pādamūle ṭhapesi, maraṇakālamhi paṭapaṭāti sadde nimittaṃ gaṇhi, sopi ussadasāmante nibbatto jālasaddena taṃ sāṭakaṃ anussaritvā sagge nibbatto. Evaṃ tāva attano dhammatāya kusalaṃ kammaṃ saritvā sagge nibbattatīti.

Dīghajayantadamiḷo by name, remembered by his own nature. It is said that this Tamilian decorated the sky-cetiya at the Sumanagiri Mahāvihāra with a red cloth; then, reborn in the vicinity of hell, having heard the sound of the fire flames, he recalled the cloth he had offered, and he went and was reborn in heaven. Another, giving a worn-out cloth to his young bhikkhu son, placed it at his feet; at the time of death, he took the sound paṭa paṭa as a sign, and he too, reborn in the vicinity of hell, having remembered that cloth with the sound of flames, was reborn in heaven. Thus, by remembering a skillful action by their own nature, they are reborn in heaven.

Attano dhammatāya asarante pana tayo devadūte pucchati. Tattha koci paṭhamena devadūtena sarati, koci dutiyatatiyehi, koci tīhipi nassarati. Taṃ yamo rājā disvā sayaṃ sāreti. Eko kira amacco sumanapupphakumbhena mahācetiyaṃ pūjetvā yamassa pattiṃ adāsi, taṃ akusalakammena niraye nibbattaṃ yamassa santikaṃ nayiṃsu. Tasmiṃ tīhipi devadūtehi kusalaṃ asarante yamo sayaṃ olokento disvā – ‘‘nanu tvaṃ mahācetiyaṃ sumanapupphakumbhena pūjetvā mayhaṃ pattiṃ adāsī’’ti sāresi, so tasmiṃ kāle saritvā devalokaṃ gato. Yamo pana sayaṃ oloketvāpi apassanto – ‘‘mahādukkhaṃ nāma anubhavissati ayaṃ satto’’ti tuṇhī ahosi.

But those who do not remember by their own nature are questioned by the three divine messengers. There, some remember by the first divine messenger, some by the second and third, some do not remember even by the three. King Yama, seeing that, reminds them himself. It is said that a certain minister, having honored the Great Cetiya with a bouquet of jasmine flowers, shared the merit with Yama; having been reborn in hell due to an unskillful action, they took him to Yama's presence. As he did not remember the skillful action even with the three divine messengers, Yama himself, looking around, reminded him: "Did you not honor the Great Cetiya with a bouquet of jasmine flowers and share the merit with me?" At that time, remembering, he went to the world of the devas. But Yama, even looking around himself and not seeing, was silent, thinking, "This being will experience great suffering."

Tattaṃ ayokhilanti tigāvutaṃ attabhāvaṃ sampajjalitāya lohapathaviyā uttānakaṃ nipajjāpetvā dakkhiṇahatthe tālappamāṇaṃ ayasūlaṃ pavesenti, tathā vāmahatthādīsu. Yathā ca taṃ uttānakaṃ nipajjāpetvā, evaṃ urenapi vāmapassenapi dakkhiṇapassenapi nipajjāpetvā te taṃ kammakāraṇaṃ karontiyeva.Saṃvesetvāti jalitāya lohapathaviyā tigāvutaṃ attabhāvaṃ nipajjāpetvā.Kuṭhārīhīti mahatīhi gehassa ekapakkhacchadanamattāhi kuṭhārīhi tacchanti, lohitaṃ nadī hutvā sandati, lohapathavito jālā uṭṭhahitvā tacchitaṭṭhānaṃ gaṇhāti, mahādukkhaṃ uppajjati. Tacchantā pana suttāhataṃ karitvā dāruṃ viya aṭṭhaṃsampi chaḷaṃsampi karonti.Vāsīhīti mahāsuppappamāṇāhi vāsīhi.Rathe yojetvāti saddhiṃ yugayottapakkharathacakkakubbarapājanehi sabbato pajjalite rathe yojetvā.Mahantanti mahākūṭāgārappamāṇaṃ.Āropentīti sampajjalitehi ayamuggarehi pothentā āropenti.Sakimpi uddhanti supakkuthitāya ukkhaliyā pakkhittataṇḍulā viya uddhamadhotiriyañca gacchati.Mahānirayeti avīcimahānirayamhi.

Tattaṃ ayokhilaṃ—having laid him face up on a three-gāvuta body upon a blazing iron ground, they drive an iron stake the size of a palm tree into his right hand, and likewise into his left hand, etc. And as they lay him face up, so too they lay him on his chest, on his left side, and on his right side, and they perform that action-causing. Saṃvesetvā—having laid down a three-gāvuta body on a blazing iron ground. Kuṭhārīhī—they plane with large axes the size of one side of a house's roof covering; blood flows like a river, flames rise up from the iron ground and seize the planed place, great suffering arises. While planing, they make eight or six sections, like wood that has been marked with string. Vāsīhī—with hatchets the size of large winnowing baskets. Rathe yojetvā—having harnessed him to a chariot blazing on all sides, complete with yoke, straps, axles, chariot wheels, and goad. Mahantaṃ—a great one, the size of a large peaked house. Āropentī—striking with blazing iron hammers, they force him to climb up. Sakimpi uddhaṃ—like rice grains thrown into a well-cooked pot, it goes upwards, downwards, and sideways. Mahāniraye—in the Avīci Great Hell.

Bhāgasomitoti bhāge ṭhapetvā vibhatto.Pariyantoti parikkhitto.Ayasāti upari ayapaṭṭena chādito.Samantā yojanasataṃ, pharitvā tiṭṭhatīti evaṃ pharitvā tiṭṭhati, yathā taṃ samantā yojanasate ṭhatvā olokentassa akkhīni yamakagoḷakā viya nikkhamanti.

Bhāgaso mito—placed in sections, divided. Pariyanto—enclosed. Ayasā—covered with an iron plate on top. Samantā yojanasataṃ, pharitvā tiṭṭhatī—it stands pervading in such a way that for one standing and looking around a hundred yojanas, his eyes pop out like myrobalan fruits.

Hīnakāyūpagāti hīnaṃ kāyaṃ upagatā hutvā.Upādāneti taṇhādiṭṭhiggahaṇe.Jātimaraṇasambhaveti jātiyā ca maraṇassa ca kāraṇabhūte.Anupādāti catūhi upādānehi anupādiyitvā.Jātimaraṇasaṅkhayeti jātimaraṇasaṅkhayasaṅkhāte nibbāne vimuccanti.Diṭṭhadhammābhinibbutāti diṭṭhadhamme imasmiṃyeva attabhāve sabbakilesanibbānena nibbutā.Sabbadukkhaṃ upaccagunti sakalavaṭṭadukkhaṃ atikkantā.

Hīnakāyūpagā—having gone to a base body. Upādāne—in grasping, that is, craving and wrong view. Jātimaraṇasambhave—in the cause of birth and death. Anupādā—not grasping with the four graspings. Jātimaraṇasaṅkhaye—they are freed in Nibbāna, which is reckoned as the cessation of birth and death. Diṭṭhadhammābhinibbutā—cooled in this very life with the extinction of all defilements. Sabbadukkhaṃ upaccaguṃ—they have transcended all the suffering of the round.

7. Catumahārājasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Commentary on the Catumahārāja Sutta

37.Sattameamaccā pārisajjāti paricārikadevatā.Imaṃ lokaṃ anuvicarantīti aṭṭhamīdivase kira sakko devarājā cattāro mahārājāno āṇāpeti – ‘‘tātā, ajja aṭṭhamīdivase manussalokaṃ anuvicaritvā puññāni karontānaṃ nāmagottaṃ uggaṇhitvā āgacchathā’’ti. Te gantvā attano paricārake pesenti – ‘‘gacchatha, tātā, manussalokaṃ vicaritvā puññakārakānaṃ nāmagottāni suvaṇṇapaṭṭe likhitvā ānethā’’ti. Te tathā karonti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘imaṃ lokaṃ anuvicarantī’’ti.Kaccibahūtiādi tesaṃ upaparikkhākāradassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Evaṃ upaparikkhantā hi te anuvicaranti. Tatthauposathaṃ upavasantīti māsassa aṭṭhavāre uposathaṅgāni adhiṭṭhahanti.Paṭijāgarontīti paṭijāgarauposathakammaṃ nāma karonti. Taṃ karontā ekasmiṃ addhamāse catunnaṃ uposathadivasānaṃ paccuggamanānuggamanavasena karonti. Pañcamīuposathaṃ paccuggacchantā catutthiyaṃ uposathikā honti, anugacchantā chaṭṭhiyaṃ. Aṭṭhamīuposathaṃ paccuggacchantā sattamiyaṃ, anugacchantā navamiyaṃ. Cātuddasiṃ paccuggacchantā terasiyaṃ, pannarasīuposathaṃ anugacchantā pāṭipade uposathikā honti.Puññāni karontīti saraṇagamananiccasīlapupphapūjādhammassavanapadīpasahassaāropanavihārakaraṇādīni nānappakārāni puññāni karonti. Te evaṃ anuvicaritvā puññakammakārakānaṃ nāmagottāni sovaṇṇamaye paṭṭe likhitvā āharitvā catunnaṃ mahārājānaṃ denti.Puttā imaṃ lokaṃ anuvicarantīti catūhi mahārājehi purimanayeneva pahitattā anuvicaranti.Tadahūti taṃdivasaṃ.Uposatheti uposathadivase.

37. In the seventh, amaccā pārisajjā means attendant deities. Imaṃ lokaṃ anuvicarantī—it is said that on the eighth day, Sakka, the king of the devas, orders the four Great Kings: "Fathers, today, on the eighth day, wander through the human world and, having learned the names and clans of those doing merit, come back." They go and send their attendants: "Go, sirs, wander through the human world and bring back the names and clans of those doing merit, written on a gold plate." They do so. Therefore, it was said, "imaṃ lokaṃ anuvicarantī." Kacci bahū etc., was said to show the manner of their investigation. For they wander investigating in this way. There, uposathaṃ upavasantī means they undertake the Uposatha vows eight times a month. Paṭijāgarontī means they perform the paṭijāgara-uposatha practice. Doing so, they perform it in one half-month by way of approaching and following the four Uposatha days. Approaching the fifth Uposatha, they observe Uposatha on the fourth day; following it, on the sixth. Approaching the eighth Uposatha, on the seventh; following it, on the ninth. Approaching the fourteenth, on the thirteenth; following the fifteenth Uposatha, they observe Uposatha on the first day of the lunar month. Puññāni karontī means they perform various kinds of merit, such as going for refuge, undertaking the precepts, offering flowers, listening to the Dhamma, lighting thousands of lamps, making monasteries, etc. Having thus wandered about, they write the names and clans of those doing meritorious actions on a golden plate and give it to the four Great Kings. Puttā imaṃ lokaṃ anuvicarantī—because they were sent by the four Great Kings in the same manner as before, they wander about. Tadahū—that day. Uposathe—on the Uposatha day.

Sace, bhikkhave, appakā hontīti catunnaṃ mahārājānaṃ amaccā pārisajjā tā tā gāmanigamarājadhāniyo upasaṅkamanti, tato taṃ upanissāya adhivatthā devatā ‘‘mahārājānaṃ amaccā āgatā’’ti paṇṇākāraṃ gahetvā tesaṃ santikaṃ gacchanti. Te paṇṇākāraṃ gahetvā ‘‘kacci nu kho mārisā bahū manussā matteyyā’’ti vuttanayena manussānaṃ puññapaṭipattiṃ pucchitvā ‘‘āma, mārisa, imasmiṃ gāme asuko ca asuko ca puññāni karontī’’ti vutte tesaṃ nāmagottaṃ likhitvā aññattha gacchanti. Atha cātuddasiyaṃ catunnaṃ mahārājānaṃ puttāpi tameva suvaṇṇapaṭṭaṃ gahetvā teneva nayena anuvicarantā nāmagottāni likhanti. Tadahuposathe pannarase cattāropi mahārājāno teneva nayena tasmiṃyeva suvaṇṇapaṭṭe nāmagottāni likhanti. Te suvaṇṇapaṭṭaparimāṇeneva – ‘‘imasmiṃ kāle manussā appakā, imasmiṃ kāle bahukā’’ti jānanti. Taṃ sandhāya ‘‘sace, bhikkhave, appakā honti manussā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.Devānaṃ tāvatiṃsānanti paṭhamaṃ abhinibbatte tettiṃsa devaputte upādāya evaṃladdhanāmānaṃ. Tesaṃ pana uppattikathā dīghanikāye sakkapañhasuttavaṇṇanāya vitthāritā.Tenāti tena ārocanena, tena vā puññakārakānaṃ appakabhāvena.Dibbā vata, bho, kāyā parihāyissantīti navanavānaṃ devaputtānaṃ apātubhāvena devakāyā parihāyissanti, ramaṇīyaṃ dasayojanasahassaṃ devanagaraṃ suññaṃ bhavissati.Paripūrissanti asurakāyāti cattāro apāyā paripūrissanti. Iminā ‘‘mayaṃ paripuṇṇe devanagare devasaṅghamajjhe nakkhattaṃ kīḷituṃ na labhissāmā’’ti anattamanā honti. Sukkapakkhepi imināva upāyena attho veditabbo.

Sace, bhikkhave, appakā hontī—the ministers and attendants of the four Great Kings approach those villages, towns, and capital cities; then the deities dwelling in dependence on that, taking offerings, go to their presence, thinking, "The ministers of the Great Kings have arrived." Taking the offerings, they ask about the meritorious conduct of humans in the manner stated, "kacci nu kho mārisā bahū manussā matteyyā," and when it is said, "Yes, sir, so-and-so in this village are doing meritorious deeds," they write down their names and clans and go elsewhere. Then, on the fourteenth day, the sons of the four Great Kings, taking that same golden plate, wandering about in that same manner, write down the names and clans. On that Uposatha day, the fifteenth, the four Great Kings also write down the names and clans on that same golden plate in that same manner. By the amount of the golden plate, they know, "At this time humans are few; at this time they are many." Referring to that, it was said, "sace, bhikkhave, appakā honti manussā" etc. Devānaṃ tāvatiṃsānaṃ—beginning with the thirty-three deva sons who were first reborn, they obtained this name. But their story of origin is related in detail in the commentary on the Sakkapañha Sutta in the Dīgha Nikāya. Tenā—by that announcement, or by the fewness of those doing merit. Dibbā vata, bho, kāyā parihāyissantī—by the non-appearance of new deva sons, the deva bodies will decline, the beautiful deva city of ten thousand yojanas will become empty. Paripūrissanti asurakāyā—the four woeful destinations will be filled. By this, they become unhappy, thinking, "We will not be able to play at the festival in the middle of the assembly of devas in a full deva city." The meaning should be understood in the same way in the bright fortnight.

Bhūtapubbaṃ, bhikkhave, sakko devānamindoti attano sakkadevarājakālaṃ sandhāya katheti. Ekassa vā sakkassa ajjhāsayaṃ gahetvā kathetīti vuttaṃ.Anunayamānoti anubodhayamāno.Tāyaṃ velāyanti tasmiṃ kāle.

Bhūtapubbaṃ, bhikkhave, sakko devānamindo means, "Once, monks, Sakka, the lord of gods," referring to the time when he was Sakka, the king of gods. It is said that it is spoken having taken the inclination of one Sakka. Anunayamāno means explaining or making understand. Tāyaṃ velāya means at that time.

Pāṭihāriyapakkhañcāti ettha pāṭihāriyapakkho nāma antovasse temāsaṃ nibaddhuposatho, taṃ asakkontassa dvinnaṃ pavāraṇānaṃ antare ekamāsaṃ nibaddhuposatho, tampi asakkontassa paṭhamapavāraṇato paṭṭhāya eko addhamāso pāṭihāriyapakkhoyeva nāma.Aṭṭhaṅgasusamāgatanti aṭṭhahi guṇaṅgehi samannāgataṃ.Yopissamādiso naroti yopi satto mādiso bhaveyya. Sakkopi kira vuttappakārassa uposathakammassa guṇaṃ jānitvā dve devalokasampattiyo pahāya māsassa aṭṭha vāre uposathaṃ upavasati. Tasmā evamāha. Aparo nayo –yopissa mādiso naroti yopi satto mādiso assa, mayā pattaṃ sampattiṃ pāpuṇituṃ iccheyyāti attho. Sakkā hi evarūpena uposathakammena sakkasampattiṃ pāpuṇitunti ayamettha adhippāyo.

Pāṭihāriyapakkhañcā here means pāṭihāriyapakkha is the unbroken observance of the uposatha for three months during the rainy season (vassa). For one unable to do that, it is the unbroken observance of the uposatha for one month between two pavāraṇā ceremonies. If unable to do even that, then from the first pavāraṇā, a half-month is indeed called pāṭihāriyapakkha. Aṭṭhaṅgasusamāgata means endowed with eight qualities or factors. Yopissamādiso naro means whatever being might be like me. It is said that Sakka, knowing the merit of the aforementioned uposatha practice, gives up two heavenly realms and observes the uposatha eight times a month. Therefore, he says this. Another interpretation: yopissa mādiso naro means whatever being might be like me, meaning, might wish to attain the attainment I have reached. For it is possible to attain Sakka's attainment through such an uposatha practice; this is the meaning here.

Vusitavāti vutthavāso.Katakaraṇīyoti catūhi maggehi kattabbakiccaṃ katvā ṭhito.Ohitabhāroti khandhabhārakilesabhāraabhisaṅkhārabhāre otāretvā ṭhito.Anuppattasadatthoti sadattho vuccati arahattaṃ, taṃ anuppatto.Parikkhīṇabhavasaṃyojanoti yena saṃyojanena baddho bhavesu ākaḍḍhīyati, tassa khīṇattā parikkhīṇabhavasaṃyojano.Sammadaññā vimuttoti hetunā nayena kāraṇena jānitvā vimutto.Kallaṃ vacanāyāti yuttaṃ vattuṃ.

Vusitavā means having lived the (holy) life. Katakaraṇīyo means having done what was to be done through the four paths. Ohitabhāro means having put down the burdens of the aggregates, the burden of defilements, and the burden of volitional activities. Anuppattasadattho means sadattho refers to arahatship, which he has attained. Parikkhīṇabhavasaṃyojano means because the fetter by which one is bound and drawn into existences is destroyed, he is one whose fetters of existence are destroyed. Sammadaññā vimutto means liberated through knowing rightly, by reason, by cause. Kallaṃ vacanāyā means fitting to say.

Yopissa mādiso naroti yopi mādiso khīṇāsavo assa, sopi evarūpaṃ uposathaṃ upavaseyyāti uposathakammassa guṇaṃ jānanto evaṃ vadeyya. Aparo nayoyopissa mādiso naroti yopi satto mādiso assa, mayā pattaṃ sampattiṃ pāpuṇituṃ iccheyyāti attho. Sakkā hi evarūpena uposathakammena khīṇāsavasampattiṃ pāpuṇitunti ayamettha adhippāyo. Aṭṭhamaṃ uttānatthameva.

Yopissa mādiso naro means whatever khīṇāsava (one with taints destroyed) might be like me, he too would observe such an uposatha, thus speaking knowing the merit of the uposatha practice. Another interpretation: yopissa mādiso naro means whatever being might be like me, meaning, might wish to attain the attainment I have reached. For it is possible to attain the attainment of a khīṇāsava through such an uposatha practice; this is the meaning here. The eighth is straightforward in meaning.

9. Sukhumālasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Sukhumālasutta Commentary

39.Navamesukhumāloti niddukkho.Paramasukhumāloti paramaniddukkho.Accantasukhumāloti satataniddukkho. Imaṃ bhagavā kapilapure nibbattakālato paṭṭhāya niddukkhabhāvaṃ gahetvā āha, cariyakāle pana tena anubhūtadukkhassa anto natthīti.Ekatthāti ekissā pokkharaṇiyā.Uppalaṃ vappatīti uppalaṃ ropeti. Sā nīluppalavanasañchannā hoti.Padumanti paṇḍarapadumaṃ.Puṇḍarīkanti rattapadumaṃ. Evaṃ itarāpi dve padumapuṇḍarīkavanehi sañchannā honti. Bodhisattassa kira sattaṭṭhavassikakāle rājā amacce pucchi – ‘‘taruṇadārakā katarakīḷikaṃ piyāyantī’’ti? Udakakīḷikaṃ devāti. Tato rājā kuddālakammakārake sannipātetvā pokkharaṇiṭṭhānāni gaṇhāpesi. Atha sakko devarājā āvajjento taṃ pavattiṃ ñatvā – ‘‘na yutto mahāsattassa mānusakaparibhogo, dibbaparibhogo yutto’’ti vissakammaṃ āmantetvā – ‘‘gaccha, tāta, mahāsattassa kīḷābhūmiyaṃ pokkharaṇiyo māpehī’’ti āha. Kīdisā hontu, devāti? Apagatakalalakaddamā hontu vippakiṇṇamaṇimuttapavāḷikā sattaratanamayapākāraparikkhittā pavāḷamayauṇhīsehi maṇimayasopānabāhukehi suvaṇṇarajatamaṇimayaphalakehi sopānehi samannāgatā. Suvaṇṇarajatamaṇipavāḷamayā cettha nāvā hontu, suvaṇṇanāvāya rajatapallaṅko hotu, rajatanāvāya suvaṇṇapallaṅko, maṇināvāya pavāḷapallaṅko, pavāḷanāvāya maṇipallaṅko, suvaṇṇarajatamaṇipavāḷamayāva udakasecananāḷikā hontu, pañcavaṇṇehi ca padumehi sañchannā hontūti. ‘‘Sādhu, devā’’ti vissakammadevaputto sakkassa paṭissutvā rattibhāge otaritvā rañño gāhāpitapokkharaṇiṭṭhānesuyeva teneva niyāmena pokkharaṇiyo māpesi.

39.In the ninth, sukhumālo means without suffering. Paramasukhumālo means extremely without suffering. Accantasukhumālo means constantly without suffering. The Blessed One spoke this having taken into account the state of being without suffering from the time of his birth in Kapilavatthu, but there was no end to the suffering he experienced during the period of (practicing the) conduct (cariya). Ekatthā means in one pond. Uppalaṃ vappatī means plants blue lotuses (uppala). That (pond) is covered with a grove of blue lotuses. Paduma means white lotus. Puṇḍarīka means red lotus. Thus, the other two (ponds) are also covered with groves of lotuses and red lotuses. It is said that when the Bodhisatta was seven or eight years old, the king asked the ministers, "What kind of games do young children enjoy?" They enjoy water games, Your Majesty. Then the king gathered the well-diggers and had them mark out the sites for the ponds. Then Sakka, the lord of gods, reflecting, realized this event and said, "Human enjoyment is not fitting for the Great Being; divine enjoyment is fitting." He summoned Vissakamma and said, "Go, my dear, and build ponds in the Great Being's playground." "What kind should they be, Your Majesty?" "They should be free from mud and mire, scattered with various jewels, pearls, and corals, surrounded by walls made of the seven precious materials, and endowed with steps made of coral balustrades, with landings made of gold, silver, and jewels. Let there be boats here made of gold, silver, jewels, and coral; let there be a silver couch in the golden boat, a golden couch in the silver boat, a coral couch in the jeweled boat, and a jeweled couch in the coral boat; let there be water sprinklers made of gold, silver, jewels, and coral, and let them be covered with lotuses of five colors." "Very well, Your Majesty," Vissakamma, the son of the gods, promised Sakka, and descending at night, he built the ponds in the sites marked out by the king, in the same manner.

Nanu cetā apagatakalalakaddamā, kathamettha padumāni pupphiṃsūti? So kira tāsu pokkharaṇīsu tattha tattha suvaṇṇarajatamaṇipavāḷamayā khuddakanāvāyo māpetvā ‘‘etā kalalakaddamapūritā ca hontu, pañcavaṇṇāni cettha padumāni pupphantū’’ti adhiṭṭhāsi. Evaṃ pañcavaṇṇāni padumāni pupphiṃsu, reṇuvaṭṭiyo uggantvā udakapiṭṭhaṃ ajjhottharitvā vicaranti. Pañcavidhā bhamaragaṇā upakūjantā vicaranti. Evaṃ tā māpetvā vissakammo devapurameva gato. Tato vibhātāya rattiyā mahājano disvā ‘‘mahāpurissassa māpitā bhavissantī’’ti gantvā rañño ārocesi. Rājā mahājanaparivāro gantvā pokkharaṇiyo disvā ‘‘mama puttassa puññiddhiyā devatāhi māpitā bhavissantī’’ti attamano ahosi. Tato paṭṭhāya mahāpuriso udakakīḷikaṃ agamāsi.

Now, if these (ponds) were free from mud and mire, how did the lotuses bloom there? It is said that he made small boats of gold, silver, jewels, and coral in those ponds in various places, and he resolved, "Let these be filled with mud and mire, and let lotuses of five colors bloom here." Thus, lotuses of five colors bloomed, and pollen circles arose, spreading over the surface of the water and moving about. Groups of five kinds of bees moved about, buzzing. Having made them in this way, Vissakamma went back to the city of the gods. Then, at dawn, the great crowd, seeing (this), went and informed the king, "They must have been made for the Great Being." The king, surrounded by the great crowd, went and saw the ponds and was delighted, thinking, "They must have been made by deities due to the merit of my son." From then on, the Great Being went to the water games.

Yāvadeva mamatthāyāti etthayāvadevāti payojanāvadhiniyāmavacanaṃ, yāva mameva atthāya, natthettha aññaṃ kāraṇanti attho.Na kho panassāhanti na kho panassa ahaṃ.Akāsikaṃ candananti asaṇhaṃ candanaṃ.Kāsikaṃ, bhikkhave, su me taṃ veṭhananti, bhikkhave, veṭhanampi me kāsikaṃ hoti. Ettha hisuiti catanti ca nipātamattaṃ,meti sāmivacanaṃ. Veṭhanampi me saṇhameva hotīti dasseti.Kāsikā kañcukāti pārupanakañcukopi saṇhakañcukova.Setacchattaṃ dhārīyatīti mānusakasetacchattampi dibbasetacchattampi uparidhāritameva hoti.Mā naṃ phusi sītaṃ vāti mā etaṃ bodhisattaṃ sītaṃ vā uṇhādīsu vā aññataraṃ phusatūti attho.

Yāvadeva mamatthāyā in this, yāvadevā is a word that defines the limit of purpose, meaning, "only for my sake; there is no other reason here." Na kho panassāha means not indeed for him. Akāsikaṃ candana means coarse sandalwood. Kāsikaṃ, bhikkhave, su me taṃ veṭhana means, monks, even my turban is from Kāsī. Here, su and ta are mere particles, and me is a word of possession. It shows that even my turban is fine. Kāsikā kañcukā means even the jacket to wear is a fine jacket. Setacchattaṃ dhārīyatī means both the human white parasol and the divine white parasol are held over (him). Mā naṃ phusi sītaṃ vā means may neither cold nor any other of heat etc. touch this Bodhisatta.

Tayopāsādā ahesunti bodhisatte kira soḷasavassuddesike jāte suddhodanamahārājā ‘‘puttassa vasanakapāsāde kāressāmī’’ti vaḍḍhakino sannipātāpetvā bhaddakena nakkhattamuhuttena navabhūmikataparikammaṃ kāretvā tayo pāsāde kārāpesi. Te sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.Hemantikotiādīsu yattha sukhaṃ hemante vasituṃ, ayaṃ hemantiko. Itaresupi eseva nayo. Ayaṃ panettha vacanattho – hemante vāso hemantaṃ, hemantaṃ arahatīti hemantiko. Itaresupi eseva nayo.

Tayopāsādā ahesu it is said that when the Bodhisatta was sixteen years old, King Suddhodana, thinking, "I will have mansions built for my son to live in," gathered the carpenters and, at an auspicious and fortunate moment, had three mansions built with nine levels of work. This was said in reference to them. Among Hemantiko etc., hemantiko is where it is comfortable to live in winter. The same method applies to the others. This is the meaning of the words here: hemantaṃ is living in winter, hemantaṃ arahati iti hemantiko, (one who) is worthy of winter. The same method applies to the others.

hemantikopāsādo navabhūmako ahosi, bhūmiyo panassa uṇhautuggāhāpanatthāya nīcā ahesuṃ. Tattha dvāravātapānāni suphusitakavāṭāni ahesuṃ nibbivarāni. Cittakammampi karontā tattha tattha pajjalite aggikkhandheyeva akaṃsu. Bhūmattharaṇaṃ panettha kambalamayaṃ, tathā sāṇivitānanivāsanapārupanaveṭhanāni. Vātapānāni uṇhaggāhāpanatthaṃ divā vivaṭāni rattiṃ pihitāni honti.

The hemantiko mansion had nine levels, but its floors were low to let in the warmth. There, the doors and windows had tightly fitted shutters and were without gaps. Even when doing the paintings, they depicted blazing firebrands in various places. The floor covering there was made of wool, as were the canopies, undergarments, cloaks, and turbans. The windows were kept open during the day to let in warmth and closed at night.

Gimhikopana pañcabhūmako ahosi. Sītautuggāhāpanatthaṃ panettha bhūmiyo uccā asambādhā ahesuṃ. Dvāravātapānāni nātiphusitāni savivarāni sajālāni ahesuṃ. Cittakamme uppalāni padumāni puṇḍarīkāniyeva akaṃsu. Bhūmattharaṇaṃ panettha dukūlamayaṃ, tathā sāṇivitānanivāsanapārupanaveṭhanāni. Vātapānasamīpesu cettha nava cāṭiyo ṭhapetvā udakassa pūretvā nīluppalādīhi sañchādenti. Tesu tesu padesesu udakayantāni karonti, yehi deve vassante viya udakadhārā nikkhamanti. Antopāsāde tattha tattha kalalapūrā doṇiyo ṭhapetvā pañcavaṇṇāni padumāni ropayiṃsu. Pāsādamatthake sukkhamahiṃsacammaṃ bandhitvā yantaṃ parivattetvā yāva chadanapiṭṭhiyā pāsāṇe āropetvā tasmiṃ vissajjenti. Tesaṃ camme pavaṭṭantānaṃ saddo meghagajjitaṃ viya hoti. Dvāravātapānāni panettha divā pihitāni honti rattiṃ vivaṭāni.

The gimhiko, however, had five levels. Its floors were high and spacious to let in the coolness. The doors and windows were not too tightly fitted, had gaps and latticework. In the paintings, they depicted only lotuses, white lotuses, and red lotuses. The floor covering there was made of linen, as were the canopies, undergarments, cloaks, and turbans. Near the windows, they placed nine jars, filled them with water, and covered them with blue lotuses and other flowers. In those places, they installed water sprinklers, from which streams of water flowed as if the gods were raining. Inside the mansion, they placed troughs filled with mud in various places and planted lotuses of five colors. On top of the mansion, they tied dry animal hides and turned a mechanism, lifting stones up to the roof and releasing them there. The sound of those hides falling was like the roaring of thunder. Here, the doors and windows were closed during the day and opened at night.

Vassikosattabhūmako ahosi. Bhūmiyo panettha dvinnampi utūnaṃ gāhāpanatthāya nātiuccā nātinīcā akaṃsu. Ekaccāni dvāravātapānāni suphusitāni, ekaccāni savivarāni. Tattha cittakammampi kesuci ṭhānesu pajjalitaaggikkhandhavasena, kesuci jātassaravasena kataṃ. Bhūmattharaṇādīni panettha kambaladukūlavasena ubhayamissakāni. Ekacce dvāravātapānā rattiṃ vivaṭā divā pihitā, ekacce divā vivaṭā rattiṃ pihitā. Tayopi pāsādā ubbedhena samappamāṇā. Bhūmikāsu pana nānattaṃ ahosi.

The vassiko had seven levels. Its floors were neither too high nor too low to let in both kinds of weather. Some of the doors and windows were tightly fitted, and some had gaps. There, the paintings were done in some places with blazing firebrands and in some places with the essence of birth stories. The floor coverings and other items here were mixed with both wool and linen. Some doors and windows were open at night and closed during the day, and some were open during the day and closed at night. All three mansions were of equal height, but there was variety in the levels.

Evaṃ niṭṭhitesu pāsādesu rājā cintesi – ‘‘putto me vayappatto, chattamassa ussāpetvā rajjasiriṃ passissāmī’’ti. So sākiyānaṃ paṇṇāni pahiṇi – ‘‘putto me vayappatto, rajje naṃ patiṭṭhāpessāmi, sabbe attano attano gehesu vayappattā, dārikā imaṃ gehaṃ pesentū’’ti. Te sāsanaṃ sutvā – ‘‘kumāro kevalaṃ dassanakkhamo rūpasampanno, na kiñci sippaṃ jānāti, dārabharaṇaṃ kātuṃ na sakkhissati, na mayaṃ dhītaro dassāmā’’ti āhaṃsu. Rājā taṃ pavattiṃ sutvā puttassa santikaṃ gantvā ārocesi. Bodhisatto ‘‘kiṃ sippaṃ dassetuṃ vaṭṭati, tātā’’ti āha. Sahassathāmadhanuṃ āropetuṃ vaṭṭati, tātāti. Tena hi āharāpethāti. Rājā āharāpetvā adāsi. Dhanuṃ purisasahassaṃ āropeti, purisasahassaṃ oropeti. Mahāpuriso dhanuṃ āharāpetvā pallaṅke nisinnova jiyaṃ pādaṅguṭṭhake veṭhetvā kaḍḍhanto pādaṅguṭṭhakeneva dhanuṃ āropetvā vāmena hatthena daṇḍe gahetvā dakkhiṇena hatthena kaḍḍhitvā jiyaṃ pothesi. Sakalanagaraṃ uppatanākārappattaṃ ahosi. ‘‘Kiṃ saddo eso’’ti ca vutte ‘‘devo gajjatī’’ti āhaṃsu. Athaññe ‘‘tumhe na jānātha, na devo gajjati, aṅgīrasassa kumārassa sahassathāmadhanuṃ āropetvā jiyaṃ pothentassa jiyappahārasaddo eso’’ti āhaṃsu. Sākiyā tāvatakeneva āraddhacittā ahesuṃ.

When the mansions were completed in this way, the king thought, "My son has come of age; I will raise the parasol for him and see the royal glory." He sent letters to the Sakyans, saying, "My son has come of age; I will establish him in the kingdom. Let all those with daughters of marriageable age in their homes send them to this house." Hearing the message, they said, "The prince is only capable of being seen, endowed with beauty, but he knows no craft; he will not be able to support a wife; we will not give (him) our daughters." Hearing that news, the king went to his son and told him. The Bodhisatta said, "What craft is it proper to show, father?" "It is proper to draw a thousand-strength bow, my dear." "Then have one brought here." The king had one brought and gave it to him. A thousand men can draw the bow, and a thousand men can lower it. The Great Being had the bow brought and, sitting on the couch, wrapped the string around his big toes and, pulling (the bow) with his big toes, and holding the stave with his left hand, drew (the string) with his right hand and twanged the string. The entire city reached a state of being about to fly up. When asked, "What is that sound?" they said, "The god is thundering." Then others said, "You do not know; the god is not thundering; that is the sound of the bowstring striking when the prince Aṅgīrasa draws the thousand-strength bow." The Sakyans were immediately filled with eagerness.

Mahāpuriso ‘‘aññaṃ kiṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti āha. Aṭṭhaṅgulamattabahalaṃ ayopaṭṭaṃ kaṇḍena vinivijjhituṃ vaṭṭatīti. Taṃ vinivijjhitvā ‘‘aññaṃ kiṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti āha. Caturaṅgulabahalaṃ asanaphalakaṃ vinivijjhituṃ vaṭṭatīti. Taṃ vinivijjhitvā ‘‘aññaṃ kiṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti āha. Vidatthibahalaṃ udumbaraphalakaṃ vinivijjhituṃ vaṭṭatīti. Taṃ vinivijjhitvā ‘‘aññaṃ kiṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti. Yante baddhaṃ phalakasataṃ vinivijjhituṃ vaṭṭatīti. Taṃ vinivijjhitvā ‘‘aññaṃ kiṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti āha. Saṭṭhipaṭalaṃ sukkhamahiṃsacammaṃ vinivijjhituṃ vaṭṭatīti. Tampi vinivijjhitvā ‘‘aññaṃ kiṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti āha. Tato vālikasakaṭādīni ācikkhiṃsu. Mahāsatto vālikasakaṭampi palālasakaṭampi vinivijjhitvā udake ekusabhappamāṇaṃ kaṇḍaṃ pesesi, thale aṭṭhausabhappamāṇaṃ. Atha naṃ ‘‘idāni vātiṅgaṇasaññāya vālaṃ vijjhituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti āhaṃsu. Tena hi bandhāpethāti. Saddantare bajjhatu, tātāti. Purato gacchantu, gāvutantare bandhantūti. Purato gacchantu, addhayojane bandhantūti. Purato gacchantu yojane bandhantūti. Bandhāpetha, tātāti yojanamatthake vātiṅgaṇasaññāya vālaṃ bandhāpetvā rattandhakāre meghapaṭalacchannāsu disāsu kaṇḍaṃ khipi, taṃ gantvā yojanamatthake vālaṃ phāletvā pathaviṃ pāvisi. Na kevalañca ettakameva, taṃ divasaṃ pana mahāsatto loke vattamānasippaṃ sabbameva sandassesi. Sakyarājāno attano attano dhītaro alaṅkaritvā pesayiṃsu, cattālīsasahassanāṭakitthiyo ahesuṃ. Mahāpuriso tīsu pāsādesu devo maññe paricārento mahāsampattiṃ anubhavati.

The Great Being said, "What else is it proper to do?" "It is proper to pierce through an iron plate eight finger-widths thick with an arrow." Having pierced through that, he said, "What else is it proper to do?" "It is proper to pierce through an asana plank four finger-widths thick." Having pierced through that, he said, "What else is it proper to do?" "It is proper to pierce through a udumbara plank a span thick." Having pierced through that, he said, "What else is it proper to do?" "It is proper to pierce through a hundred planks tied to a frame." Having pierced through that, he said, "What else is it proper to do?" "It is proper to pierce through sixty layers of dried animal hide." Having pierced through that too, he said, "What else is it proper to do?" Then they indicated carts of sand and so on. The Great Being pierced through even a cart of sand and a cart of straw, and he sent an arrow one usabha in the water, and eight usabhas on land. Then they said to him, "Now it is proper to pierce a hair with the thought of a vātiṅgaṇa sprout." "Then have it tied." "Let it be tied at the end of a sound." "Let them go forward and tie it at the distance of a gāvuta." "Let them go forward and tie it at half a yojana." "Let them go forward and tie it at a yojana." "Tie it, my dears." Having had the hair tied at the distance of a yojana with the thought of a vātiṅgaṇa sprout, in the darkness of the night, in the directions covered by clouds, he shot an arrow. It went and split the hair at the distance of a yojana and entered the earth. And not only that much, but on that day the Great Being showed all the crafts existing in the world. The Sakyan kings adorned and sent their daughters; there were forty thousand actresses. The Great Being, being served in the three mansions as if by gods, enjoys great wealth.

Nippurisehīti purisavirahitehi. Na kevalaṃ cettha tūriyāneva nippurisāni, sabbaṭṭhānānipi nippurisāneva. Dovārikāpi itthiyova, nhāpanādiparikammakarāpi itthiyova. Rājā kira ‘‘tathārūpaṃ issariyasukhasampattiṃ anubhavamānassa purisaṃ disvā parisaṅkā uppajjati, sā me puttassa mā ahosī’’ti sabbakiccesu itthiyova ṭhapesi.Paricārayamānoti modamāno.Na heṭṭhāpāsādaṃ orohāmīti pāsādato heṭṭhā na otarāmi. Iti maṃ cattāro māse añño sikhābaddho puriso nāma passituṃ nālattha.Yathāti yena niyāmena.Dāsakammakaraporisassāti dāsānañceva devasikabhattavetanābhatānaṃ kammakarānañca nissāya jīvamānapurisānañca.Kaṇājakanti sakuṇḍakabhattaṃ.Bilaṅgadutiyanti kañjikadutiyaṃ.

Nippurisehīti: without men. Here, not only the musical instruments are without men, but all places are also without men. Even the doorkeepers are women, and the attendants for bathing and other services are also women. It is said that the king, thinking, "While I am enjoying such prosperity of sovereignty, the sight of a man gives rise to doubt; may that not happen to my son," appointed only women in all matters. Paricārayamāno: enjoying. Na heṭṭhāpāsādaṃ orohāmī: I do not descend from the palace. Thus, for four months, no other man with a topknot was able to see me. Yathā: in which manner. Dāsakammakaraporisassā: of men living on the support of slaves, servants with daily food and wages, and laborers. Kaṇājaka: rice gruel in a pot. Bilaṅgadutiya: with sour gruel as the second item.

Evarūpāya iddhiyāti evaṃjātikāya puññiddhiyā samannāgatassa.Evarūpena ca sukhumālenāti evaṃjātikena ca niddukkhabhāvena. Sokhumālenātipi pāṭho. Evaṃ tathāgato ettakena ṭhānena attano sirisampattiṃ kathesi. Kathento ca na uppilāvitabhāvatthaṃ kathesi, ‘‘evarūpāyapi pana sampattiyā ṭhito pamādaṃ akatvā appamattova ahosi’’nti appamādalakkhaṇasseva dīpanatthaṃ kathesi. Tenevaassutavā kho puthujjanotiādimāha. Tatthaparanti parapuggalaṃ.Jiṇṇanti jarājiṇṇaṃ.Aṭṭīyatīti aṭṭo pīḷito hoti.Harāyatīti hiriṃ karoti lajjati.Jigucchatīti asuciṃ viya disvā jigucchaṃ uppādeti.Attānaṃyeva atisitvāti jarādhammampi samānaṃ attānaṃ atikkamitvā aṭṭīyati harāyatīti attho.Jarādhammoti jarāsabhāvo.Jaraṃ anatītoti jaraṃ anatikkanto, anto jarāya vattāmi.Iti paṭisañcikkhatoti evaṃ paccavekkhantassa.Yobbanamadoti yobbanaṃ nissāya uppajjanako mānamado.Sabbasopahīyīti sabbākārena pahīno. Maggena pahīnasadiso katvā dassito. Na panesa maggena pahīno, paṭisaṅkhānena pahīnova kathitoti veditabbo. Bodhisattassa hi devatā jarāpattaṃ dassesuṃ. Tato paṭṭhāya yāva arahattā antarā mahāsattassa yobbanamado nāma na uppajjati. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo. Ettha panaārogyamadoti ahaṃ nirogoti ārogyaṃ nissāya uppajjanako mānamado.Jīvitamadoti ahaṃ ciraṃ jīvīti taṃ nissāya uppajjanako mānamado.Sikkhaṃ paccakkhāyāti sikkhaṃ paṭikkhipitvā.Hīnāyāvattatīti hīnāya lāmakāya gihibhāvāya āvattati.

Evarūpāya iddhiyā: endowed with such meritorious power. Evarūpena ca sukhumālenā: and with such freedom from suffering. "Sokhumālenā" is also a reading. Thus, the Tathāgata related his own glorious fortune in this much detail. And in relating it, he did not relate it for the sake of boasting, but for the purpose of illuminating the characteristic of diligence, saying, "Even while abiding in such prosperity, he remained diligent, not heedless." Therefore, he said, assutavā kho puthujjano (the uninstructed worldling), etc. There, para: another person. Jiṇṇa: aged with old age. Aṭṭīyatī: is afflicted, oppressed. Harāyatī: feels shame, is ashamed. Jigucchatī: seeing it as impure, produces disgust. Attānaṃyeva atisitvā: surpassing himself, even though subject to aging, he is afflicted and feels ashamed, is the meaning. Jarādhammo: the nature of aging. Jaraṃ anatīto: not having transcended aging, I am subject to aging. Iti paṭisañcikkhato: to one who reflects thus. Yobbanamado: the intoxication of pride that arises dependent on youth. Sabbaso pahīyī: is entirely abandoned. It is shown as if abandoned by the path. But it should be understood that it is not abandoned by the path, but is said to be abandoned by reflection. For the deities showed the Bodhisatta someone afflicted with old age. From then until arahantship, intoxication with youth does not arise in the Great Being. The same method applies to the other two terms as well. Here, ārogyamado: the intoxication of pride that arises dependent on health, thinking, "I am healthy." Jīvitamado: the intoxication of pride that arises dependent on life, thinking, "I will live long." Sikkhaṃ paccakkhāyā: having rejected the training. Hīnāyāvattatī: returns to the inferior, base state of a householder.

Yathādhammāti byādhiādīhi yathāsabhāvā.Tathāsantāti yathā santā eva aviparītabyādhiādisabhāvāva hutvāti attho.Jigucchantīti parapuggalaṃ jigucchanti.Mama evaṃ vihārinoti mayhaṃ evaṃ jigucchāvihārena viharantassa evaṃ jigucchanaṃ nappatirūpaṃ bhaveyya nānucchavikaṃ.Sohaṃ evaṃ viharantoti so ahaṃ evaṃ paraṃ jigucchamāno viharanto, evaṃ vā iminā paṭisaṅkhānavihārena viharanto.Ñatvā dhammaṃ nirūpadhinti sabbūpadhivirahitaṃ nibbānadhammaṃ ñatvā.Sabbe made abhibhosmīti sabbe tayopi made abhibhaviṃ samatikkamiṃ.Nekkhamme daṭṭhu khematanti nibbāne khemabhāvaṃ disvā. Nekkhammaṃ daṭṭhu khematotipi pāṭho, nibbānaṃ khemato disvāti attho.Tassame ahu ussāhoti tassa mayhaṃ taṃ nekkhammasaṅkhātaṃ nibbānaṃ abhipassantassa ussāho ahu, vāyāmo ahosīti attho.Nāhaṃbhabbo etarahi, kāmāni paṭisevitunti ahaṃ dāni duvidhepi kāme paṭisevituṃ abhabbo.Anivatti bhavissāmīti pabbajjato ca sabbaññutaññāṇato ca na nivattissāmi, anivattako bhavissāmi.Brahmacariyaparāyaṇoti maggabrahmacariyaparāyaṇo jātosmīti attho. Iti imāhi gāthāhi mahābodhipallaṅke attano āgamanīyavīriyaṃ kathesi.

Yathādhammā: according to their nature, by diseases, etc. Tathāsantā: being just as they are, being in the very nature of unimpaired diseases, etc., is the meaning. Jigucchantī: they feel disgust for another person. Mama evaṃ vihārino: for me, living with such a state of disgust, such disgust would not be fitting, would not be suitable. Sohaṃ evaṃ viharanto: so I, living thus, feeling disgust for others, or living with this state of reflection. Ñatvā dhammaṃ nirūpadhi: having known the Dhamma, Nibbāna, which is devoid of all conditions. Sabbe made abhibhosmī: I overcame, transcended, all three intoxications of pride. Nekkhamme daṭṭhu khemata: having seen security in renunciation, in Nibbāna. "Nekkhammaṃ daṭṭhu khemato" is also a reading, meaning having seen Nibbāna as secure. Tassa me ahu ussāho: for me, seeing that Nibbāna described as renunciation, effort arose, exertion arose, is the meaning. Nāhaṃ bhabbo etarahi, kāmāni paṭisevitu: I am now incapable of indulging in either kind of sensual pleasures. Anivatti bhavissāmī: I will not turn back from renunciation and from the knowledge of omniscience, I will be one who does not turn back. Brahmacariyaparāyaṇo: I have become devoted to the Noble life, the path, is the meaning. Thus, in these verses, he related his own irresistible vigor at the Great Bodhi Tree.

10. Ādhipateyyasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Ādhipateyyasuttavaṇṇanā

40.Dasameādhipateyyānīti jeṭṭhakakāraṇato nibbattāni.Attādhipateyyantiādīsu attānaṃ jeṭṭhakaṃ katvā nibbattitaṃ guṇajātaṃattādhipateyyaṃ. Lokaṃ jeṭṭhakaṃ katvā nibbattitaṃlokādhipateyyaṃ. Navavidhaṃ lokuttaradhammaṃ jeṭṭhakaṃ katvā nibbattitaṃdhammādhipateyyaṃ. Na iti bhavābhavahetūti iti bhavo, iti bhavoti evaṃ āyatiṃ, na tassa tassa sampattibhavassa hetu.Otiṇṇoti anupaviṭṭho. Yassa hi jāti antopaviṭṭhā, so jātiyā otiṇṇo nāma.Jarādīsupi eseva nayo.Kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassāti sakalassa vaṭṭadukkharāsissa.Antakiriyāpaññāyethāti antakaraṇaṃ paricchedaparivaṭumakaraṇaṃ paññāyeyya.Ohāyāti pahāya.Pāpiṭṭhatareti lāmakatare.Āraddhanti paggahitaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ, āraddhattāvaasallīnaṃ. Upaṭṭhitāti catusatipaṭṭhānavasena upaṭṭhitā. Upaṭṭhitattāvaasammuṭṭhā. Passaddho kāyoti nāmakāyo ca karajakāyo ca passaddho vūpasantadaratho. Passaddhattāvaasāraddho. Samāhitaṃ cittanti ārammaṇe cittaṃ sammā āhitaṃ suṭṭhu ṭhapitaṃ. Sammā āhitattāvaekaggaṃ. Adhipatiṃ karitvāti jeṭṭhakaṃ katvā.Suddhaṃattānaṃ pariharatīti suddhaṃ nimmalaṃ katvā attānaṃ pariharati paṭijaggati, gopāyatīti attho. Ayañca yāva arahattamaggā pariyāyena suddhamattānaṃ pariharati nāma, phalappattova pana nippariyāyena suddhamattānaṃ pariharati.

40. In the tenth, ādhipateyyānī: produced from the cause of being chief. Among attādhipateyyaṃ, etc., the collection of virtues produced by making oneself chief is attādhipateyyaṃ (supremacy of self). That produced by making the world chief is lokādhipateyyaṃ (supremacy of the world). That produced by making the nine kinds of supramundane Dhamma chief is dhammādhipateyyaṃ (supremacy of the Dhamma). Na iti bhavābhavahetū: thus, "it will be," thus, "it will be," is not a cause for future attainment of existence. Otiṇṇo: entered. For one whose birth has entered within, he is called one who has entered into birth. The same method applies to jarā (old age), etc. Kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassā: to the entire mass of round of suffering. Antakiriyā paññāyethā: the making of an end, the making of a boundary, the making of a limit might be discerned. Ohāyā: having abandoned. Pāpiṭṭhatare: more base. Āraddhaṃ: undertaken, complete; because it is undertaken, it is asallīnaṃ (unrelaxed). Upaṭṭhitā: present, established in terms of the four foundations of mindfulness. Because it is present, it is asammuṭṭhā (unconfused). Passaddho kāyo: the mind-body and the physical body are calmed, the anxiety is stilled. Because it is calmed, it is asāraddho (unagitated). Samāhitaṃ cittaṃ: the mind is well-placed, well-established on the object. Because it is well-placed, it is ekaggaṃ (one-pointed). Adhipatiṃ karitvā: having made chief. Suddhaṃ attānaṃ pariharatī: having made pure, immaculate, he maintains himself, cherishes himself, protects himself, is the meaning. And this one maintains himself purely by way of the path up to arahantship, but only upon attaining the fruit does he maintain himself purely without any alternative.

Svākkhātotiādīni visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.147) vitthāritāni.Jānaṃ passaṃ viharantīti taṃ dhammaṃ jānantā passantā viharanti.Imāni kho, bhikkhave, tīṇi ādhipateyyānīti ettāvatā tīṇi ādhipateyyāni lokiyalokuttaramissakāni kathitāni.

Svākkhāto, etc., are explained in detail in the Visuddhimagga (Visuddhi. 1.147). Jānaṃ passaṃ viharantī: knowing and seeing that Dhamma, they live. Imāni kho, bhikkhave, tīṇi ādhipateyyānī: thus, these three supremacies, mixed mundane and supramundane, have been spoken of.

Pakubbatoti karontassa.Attā te purisa jānāti, saccaṃ vā yadi vā musāti yaṃ tvaṃ karosi, taṃ yadi vā yathāsabhāvaṃ yadi vā no yathāsabhāvanti tava attāva jānāti. Iminā ca kāraṇena veditabbaṃ ‘‘pāpakammaṃ karontassa loke paṭicchannaṭṭhānaṃ nāma natthī’’ti.Kalyāṇanti sundaraṃ.Atimaññasīti atikkamitvā maññasi.Attānaṃ parigūhasīti yathā me attāpi na jānāti, evaṃ naṃ parigūhāmīti vāyamasi.Attādhipateyyakoti attajeṭṭhako.Lokādhipoti lokajeṭṭhako.Nipakoti paññavā.Jhāyīti jhāyanto.Dhammādhipoti dhammajeṭṭhako.Saccaparakkamoti thiraparakkamo bhūtaparakkamo.Pasayha māranti māraṃ pasahitvā.Abhibhuyya antakanti idaṃ tasseva vevacanaṃ.Yo ca phusī jātikkhayaṃ padhānavāti yo jhāyī padhānavā māraṃ abhibhavitvā jātikkhayaṃ arahattaṃ phusi.Sotādisoti so tathāvidho tathāsaṇṭhito.Lokavidūti tayo loke vidite pākaṭe katvā ṭhito.Sumedhoti supañño.Sabbesu dhammesu atammayo munīti sabbe tebhūmakadhamme taṇhāsaṅkhātāya tammayatāya abhāvena atammayo khīṇāsavamuni kadāci katthaci na hīyati na parihīyatīti vuttaṃ hotīti.

Pakubbato: while doing. Attā te purisa jānāti, saccaṃ vā yadi vā musā: whatever you do, whether it is according to its nature or not according to its nature, your own self knows. And by this reason, it should be understood that "for one who commits an evil deed, there is no place hidden in the world." Kalyāṇaṃ: beautiful. Atimaññasī: you think too highly. Attānaṃ parigūhasī: you try to conceal it, thinking, "May even my own self not know." Attādhipateyyako: one who makes self chief. Lokādhipo: one who makes the world chief. Nipako: wise. Jhāyī: one who meditates. Dhammādhipo: one who makes the Dhamma chief. Saccaparakkamo: one of steadfast effort, one of truthful effort. Pasayha māraṃ: having overcome Māra. Abhibhuyya antakaṃ: this is a synonym for that same. Yo ca phusī jātikkhayaṃ padhānavā: and that meditating one, of effort, having overcome Māra, touched the destruction of birth, arahantship. So tādiso: he is of such a kind, of such a state. Lokavidū: having made the three worlds known, manifest, he stands. Sumedho: of good wisdom. Sabbesu dhammesu atammayo munī: because of the absence of that "being made of that" consisting of craving in all the three-planed Dhammas, the arahant-sage, free from taints, is never, nowhere, diminished or declined, is what is said.

5. Cūḷavaggo

5. Cūḷavaggo

1. Sammukhībhāvasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Sammukhībhāvasuttavaṇṇanā

41.Pañcamassa paṭhamesammukhībhāvāti sammukhībhāvena, vijjamānatāyāti attho.Pasavatīti paṭilabhati.Saddhāya sammukhībhāvāti yadi hi saddhā na bhaveyya, deyyadhammo na bhaveyya, dakkhiṇeyyasaṅkhātā paṭiggāhakapuggalā na bhaveyyuṃ, kathaṃ puññakammaṃ kareyya. Tesaṃ pana sammukhībhāvena sakkā kātunti tasmā ‘‘saddhāya sammukhībhāvā’’tiādimāha. Ettha ca dve dhammā sulabhā deyyadhammā ceva dakkhiṇeyyā ca, saddhā pana dullabhā. Puthujjanassa hi saddhā athāvarā padavārena nānā hoti, teneva mahāmoggallānasadisopi aggasāvako pāṭibhogo bhavituṃ asakkonto āha – ‘‘dvinnaṃ kho te ahaṃ, āvuso, dhammānaṃ pāṭibhogo bhogānañca jīvitassa ca, saddhāya pana tvaṃyeva pāṭibhogo’’ti (udā. 18).

41. In the first of the fifth, sammukhībhāvā: by being present, by being available, is the meaning. Pasavatī: obtains. Saddhāya sammukhībhāvā: for if there were no faith, there would be no gift-worthy thing, there would be no individuals worthy of offerings constituting the Sangha, how could one perform a meritorious act? But because it is possible to do it through their being present, therefore he said, "saddhāya sammukhībhāvā," etc. And here, two things are easily available: gift-worthy things and those worthy of offerings, but faith is difficult to obtain. For the faith of an ordinary person varies in many ways due to the path of wrong views, therefore even the chief disciple like Mahāmoggallāna, being unable to become a guarantor, said, "I am a guarantor for you, friend, in two things: for possessions and for life; but for faith, you yourself are the guarantor" (Udā. 18).

2. Tiṭhānasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Tiṭhānasuttavaṇṇanā

42.Dutiyevigatamalamaccherenāti vigatamacchariyamalena.Muttacāgoti vissaṭṭhacāgo.Payatapāṇīti dhotahattho. Assaddho hi satakkhattuṃ hatthe dhovitvāpi malinahatthova hoti, saddho pana dānābhiratattā malinahatthopi dhotahatthova.Vossaggaratoti vossaggasaṅkhāte dāne rato.Yācayogoti yācituṃ yutto, yācakehi vā yogo assātipi yācayogo.Dānasaṃvibhāgaratoti dānaṃ dadanto saṃvibhāgañca karonto dānasaṃvibhāgarato nāma hoti.

42. In the second, vigatamalamaccherenā: with stinginess, the stain, removed. Muttacāgo: unconstrained generosity. Payatapāṇī: with washed hands. For a faithless person, even having washed his hands a hundred times, is still one with dirty hands; but a faithful person, being delighting in giving, even with dirty hands, is still one with washed hands. Vossaggarato: delighting in generosity, described as relinquishment. Yācayogo: fit to be begged from, or he has association with beggars, thus he is "yācayogo." Dānasaṃvibhāgarato: giving gifts and sharing, he is called delighting in giving and sharing.

Dassanakāmo sīlavatanti dasapi yojanāni vīsampi tiṃsampi yojanasatampi gantvā sīlasampanne daṭṭhukāmo hotipāṭaliputtakabrāhmaṇoviyasaddhātissamahārājāviya ca. Pāṭaliputtassa kira nagaradvāre sālāya nisinnā dve brāhmaṇā kāḷavallimaṇḍapavāsimahānāgattherassa guṇakathaṃ sutvā ‘‘amhehi taṃ bhikkhuṃ daṭṭhuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti dvepi janā nikkhamiṃsu. Eko antarāmagge kālamakāsi. Eko samuddatīraṃ patvā nāvāya mahātitthapaṭṭane oruyha anurādhapuraṃ āgantvā ‘‘kāḷavallimaṇḍapo kuhi’’nti pucchi. Rohaṇajanapadeti. So anupubbena therassa vasanaṭṭhānaṃ patvā cūḷanagaragāme dhuraghare nivāsaṃ gahetvā therassa āhāraṃ sampādetvā pātova vuṭṭhāya therassa vasanaṭṭhānaṃ pucchitvā gantvā janapariyante ṭhito theraṃ dūratova āgacchantaṃ disvā sakiṃ tattheva ṭhito vanditvā puna upasaṅkamitvā gopphakesu daḷhaṃ gahetvā vandanto ‘‘uccā, bhante, tumhe’’ti āha. Thero ca nātiucco nātirasso pamāṇayuttova, tena naṃ puna āha – ‘‘nātiuccā tumhe, tumhākaṃ pana guṇā mecakavaṇṇassa samuddassa matthakena gantvā sakalajambudīpatalaṃ ajjhottharitvā gatā, ahampi pāṭaliputtanagaradvāre nisinno tumhākaṃ guṇakathaṃ assosi’’nti. So therassa bhikkhāhāraṃ datvā attano ticīvaraṃ paṭiyādetvā therassa santike pabbajitvā tassovāde patiṭṭhāya katipāheneva arahattaṃ pāpuṇi.

Dassanakāmo sīlavata: he wants to see one accomplished in virtue, even going ten yojanas, twenty, thirty, or a hundred yojanas, like the Pāṭaliputtaka brahmin and like King Saddhātissa. It is said that two brahmins sitting in a hall at the city gate of Pāṭaliputta, hearing the account of the virtues of the Elder Mahānāga, who resided in the Kāḷavallimaṇḍapa, both came out thinking, "We should see that bhikkhu." One died on the way. The other, reaching the seashore, disembarked at Mahātitthapaṭṭana by boat, came to Anurādhapura, and asked, "Where is Kāḷavallimaṇḍapa?" (They said,) "In the Rohaṇa district." Gradually, he reached the elder's dwelling place, took up residence in the Dhuraghara in Cūḷanagaragāma, prepared food for the elder, and rising early in the morning, asked for the elder's dwelling place, went there, and standing at the edge of the district, saw the elder coming from afar, first worshiped him standing right there, then approaching again, grasped his ankles firmly and worshiped him, saying, "You are tall, venerable sir." The elder was neither too tall nor too short, but of proper measure, so he said to him again, "You are not too tall, but your virtues have gone over the top of the dark-colored ocean, covered the entire surface of Jambudīpa, and I heard the account of your virtues sitting at the city gate of Pāṭaliputta." He gave the elder his alms-food, prepared his own three robes, went forth in the presence of the elder, and establishing himself in his instruction, attained arahantship within a few days.

Saddhātissamahārājāpi, ‘‘bhante, mayhaṃ vanditabbayuttakaṃ ekaṃ ayyaṃ ācikkhathā’’ti pucchi. Bhikkhū ‘‘maṅgalavāsī kuṭṭatissatthero’’ti āhaṃsu. Rājā mahāparivārena pañcayojanamaggaṃ agamāsi. Thero ‘‘kiṃ saddo eso, āvuso’’ti bhikkhusaṅghaṃ pucchi. ‘‘Rājā, bhante, tumhākaṃ dassanatthāya āgato’’ti. Thero cintesi – ‘‘kiṃ mayhaṃ mahallakakāle rājagehe kamma’’nti divāṭṭhāne mañce nipajjitvā bhūmiyaṃ lekhaṃ likhanto acchi. Rājā ‘‘kahaṃ thero’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘divāṭṭhāne’’ti sutvā tattha gacchanto theraṃ bhūmiyaṃ lekhaṃ likhantaṃ disvā ‘‘khīṇāsavassa nāma hatthakukkuccaṃ natthi, nāyaṃ khīṇāsavo’’ti avanditvāva nivatti. Bhikkhusaṅgho theraṃ āha – ‘‘bhante, evaṃvidhassa saddhassa pasannassa rañño kasmā vippaṭisāraṃ karitthā’’ti. ‘‘Āvuso, rañño pasādarakkhanaṃ na tumhākaṃ bhāro, mahallakattherassa bhāro’’ti vatvā aparabhāge anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbāyanto bhikkhusaṅghaṃ āha – ‘‘mayhaṃ kūṭāgāramhi aññampi pallaṅkaṃ attharathā’’ti. Tasmiṃ atthate thero – ‘‘idaṃ kūṭāgāraṃ antare appatiṭṭhahitvā raññā diṭṭhakāleyeva bhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhātū’’ti adhiṭṭhahitvā parinibbāyi. Kūṭāgāraṃ pañcayojanamaggaṃ ākāsena agamāsi. Pañcayojanamagge dhajaṃ dhāretuṃ samatthā rukkhā dhajapaggahitāva ahesuṃ. Gacchāpi gumbāpi sabbe kūṭāgārābhimukhā hutvā aṭṭhaṃsu.

King Saddhātissa also asked, "Venerable sir, tell me of a worthy elder for me to worship." The bhikkhus said, "The Elder Kuṭṭatissa, who resides in Maṅgalavāsa." The king went a distance of five yojanas with a large retinue. The elder asked the bhikkhu-sangha, "What is that noise, friends?" "The king has come, venerable sir, for the sake of seeing you." The elder thought, "What business do I have with the royal household in my old age?" and lying down on a couch in the day quarters, he was drawing lines on the ground. The king, asking, "Where is the elder?" and hearing, "In the day quarters," went there, saw the elder drawing lines on the ground, and thinking, "There is no hand-worry for one who is free from taints; he is not one who is free from taints," he turned back without worshiping. The bhikkhu-sangha said to the elder, "Venerable sir, why did you cause displeasure to such a faithful and devoted king?" "Friends, protecting the king's devotion is not your burden, it is the burden of an elder in old age," he said, and while passing away in the element of Nibbāna without remainder in the latter part of the day, he said to the bhikkhu-sangha, "Spread another couch in my peaked chamber." When it was spread, the elder, "May this peaked chamber, without settling in the middle, settle on the ground at the very moment it is seen by the king," having determined thus, passed away. The peaked chamber went through the sky for a distance of five yojanas. Trees capable of holding a flag at a distance of five yojanas were like those holding up flags. Even bushes and shrubs all stood facing the peaked chamber.

Raññopi paṇṇaṃ pahiṇiṃsu ‘‘thero parinibbuto, kūṭāgāraṃ ākāsena āgacchatī’’ti. Rājā na saddahi. Kūṭāgāraṃ ākāsena gantvā thūpārāmaṃ padakkhiṇaṃ katvā silācetiyaṭṭhānaṃ agamāsi. Cetiyaṃ saha vatthunā uppatitvā kūṭāgāramatthake aṭṭhāsi, sādhukārasahassāni pavattiṃsu. Tasmiṃ khaṇe mahābyagghatthero nāma lohapāsāde sattamakūṭāgāre nisinno bhikkhūnaṃ vinayakammaṃ karonto taṃ saddaṃ sutvā ‘‘kiṃ saddo eso’’ti paṭipucchi. Bhante, maṅgalavāsī kuṭṭatissatthero parinibbuto, kūṭāgāraṃ pañcayojanamaggaṃ ākāsena āgataṃ, tattha so sādhukārasaddoti. Āvuso, puññavante nissāya sakkāraṃ labhissāmāti antevāsike khamāpetvā ākāseneva āgantvā taṃ kūṭāgāraṃ pavisitvā dutiyamañce nisīditvā anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbāyi. Rājā gandhapupphacuṇṇāni ādāya gantvā ākāse ṭhitaṃ kūṭāgāraṃ disvā kūṭāgāraṃ pūjesi. Tasmiṃ khaṇe kūṭāgāraṃ otaritvā pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhitaṃ. Rājā mahāsakkārena sarīrakiccaṃ kāretvā dhātuyo gahetvā cetiyaṃ akāsi. Evarūpā sīlavantānaṃ dassanakāmā nāma honti.

The king also sent a message saying, "The elder has passed away, and his pavilion is coming through the air." The king did not believe it. The pavilion went through the air, circumambulated Thūpārāma, and went to the place of the Silācetiya. The Cetiya, along with its pedestal, rose up and stood on the top of the pavilion, and thousands of shouts of approval arose. At that moment, the elder named Mahābyaggha, while seated in the seventh pavilion of the Lohapāsāda, was conducting Vinaya proceedings for the monks. Hearing that sound, he asked, "What is that sound?" "Venerable sir, Elder Kuṭṭatissa, a resident of Maṅgalavāsa, has passed away, and his pavilion has come five yojanas through the air; that is the sound of approval there." "Friends, relying on a virtuous one, we shall receive honor." After seeking forgiveness from his pupils, he came through the air, entered that pavilion, sat on the second platform, and passed away into the Nibbāna element without remainder. The king, taking perfumes and powders, went and, seeing the pavilion standing in the sky, honored the pavilion. At that moment, the pavilion descended and stood on the ground. The king, with great honor, had the obsequies performed and, taking the relics, built a Cetiya. Such are the devotees who desire to see the virtuous.

Saddhammaṃ sotumicchatīti tathāgatappaveditaṃ saddhammaṃ sotukāmo hotipiṇḍapātikattherādayoviya. Gaṅgāvanavāliaṅgaṇamhi kira tiṃsa bhikkhū vassaṃ upagatā anvaddhamāsaṃ uposathadivase catupaccayasantosabhāvanārāmamahāariyavaṃsañca (a. ni. 4.28) kathenti. Eko piṇḍapātikatthero pacchābhāgena āgantvā paṭicchannaṭṭhāne nisīdi. Atha naṃ eko gonaso jaṅghapiṇḍimaṃsaṃ saṇḍāsena gaṇhanto viya ḍaṃsi. Thero olokento gonasaṃ disvā ‘‘ajja dhammassavanantarāyaṃ na karissāmī’’ti gonasaṃ gahetvā thavikāya pakkhipitvā thavikāmukhaṃ bandhitvā avidūre ṭhāne ṭhapetvā dhammaṃ suṇantova nisīdi. Aruṇuggamanañca visaṃ vikkhambhetvā therassa tiṇṇaṃ phalānaṃ pāpuṇanañca visassa daṭṭhaṭṭhāneneva otaritvā pathavipavisanañca dhammakathikattherassa dhammakathāniṭṭhāpanañca ekakkhaṇeyeva ahosi. Tato thero āha – ‘‘āvuso eko me coro gahito’’ti thavikaṃ muñcitvā gonasaṃ vissajjesi. Bhikkhū disvā ‘‘kāya velāya daṭṭhattha, bhante’’ti pucchiṃsu. Hiyyo sāyanhasamaye, āvusoti. Kasmā, bhante, evaṃ bhāriyaṃ kammaṃ karitthāti. Āvuso, sacāhaṃ dīghajātikena daṭṭhoti vadeyyaṃ, nayimaṃ ettakaṃ ānisaṃsaṃ labheyyanti. Idaṃ tāva piṇḍapātikattherassa vatthu.

Saddhammaṃ sotumicchatīti, he desires to hear the Saddhamma proclaimed by the Tathāgata, like Piṇḍapātikatherādayo. It is said that in the Vaṅgaṇa grove by the river Gaṅgā, thirty monks had entered the rainy season retreat and were reciting the Catupaccayasantoṣabhāvanārāmamahāariyavaṃsa (a. ni. 4.28) on the Uposatha day every fortnight. A Piṇḍapātika elder came late and sat in a hidden place. Then a viper bit his calf muscle as if grasping it with tongs. The elder, looking and seeing the viper, thought, "Today, I will not cause an interruption to the hearing of the Dhamma." He caught the viper, put it in his bag, tied the mouth of the bag, placed it not far away, and sat listening to the Dhamma. At the moment of sunrise, the venom was neutralized, the elder attained the three fruits, the venom flowed down from the place where it bit and entered the earth, and the Dhamma-speaker elder completed his Dhamma talk—all in one moment. Then the elder said, "Friends, I have caught a thief." He released the bag and let the viper go. The monks, seeing it, asked, "At what time did it bite you, venerable sir?" "Yesterday evening, friends." "Why, venerable sir, did you do such a difficult thing?" "Friends, if I had said that I was bitten by a long-lived creature, I would not have obtained such great benefit." This, for now, is the story of the Piṇḍapātika elder.

Dīghavāpiyampi ‘‘mahājātakabhāṇakatthero gāthāsahassaṃ mahāvessantaraṃ kathessatī’’ti tissamahāgāme tissamahāvihāravāsī eko daharo sutvā tato nikkhamitvā ekāheneva navayojanamaggaṃ āgato. Tasmiṃyeva khaṇe thero dhammakathaṃ ārabhi. Daharo dūramaggāgamanena sañjātakāyadarathattā paṭṭhānagāthāya saddhiṃ avasānagāthaṃyeva vavatthapesi. Tato therassa ‘‘idamavocā’’ti vatvā uṭṭhāya gamanakāle ‘‘mayhaṃ āgamanakammaṃ moghaṃ jāta’’nti rodamāno aṭṭhāsi. Eko manusso taṃ kathaṃ sutvā gantvā therassa ārocesi, ‘‘bhante, ‘tumhākaṃ dhammakathaṃ sossāmī’ti eko daharabhikkhu tissamahāvihārā āgato, so ‘kāyadarathabhāvena me āgamanaṃ moghaṃ jāta’nti rodamāno ṭhito’’ti. Gacchatha saññāpetha naṃ ‘‘puna sve kathessāmā’’ti. So punadivase therassa dhammakathaṃ sutvā sotāpattiphalaṃ pāpuṇi.

Also in Dīghavāpi, a young man residing in Tissa Mahāvihāra in Tissa Mahāgāma, having heard that "The great reciter of the Mahā-Jātaka, the elder, will recite the Mahāvessantara of a thousand verses," left there and came a distance of nine yojanas in one day. At that very moment, the elder began the Dhamma talk. The young man, due to the weariness of body caused by traveling a long distance, only understood the concluding verse along with the initial verse. Then, after the elder said, "Idamavocā" ("Thus I spoke"), he got up to leave, standing and weeping, "My coming has been in vain." A man, having heard that story, went and reported to the elder, "Venerable sir, a young monk has come from Tissa Mahāvihāra thinking, 'I will listen to your Dhamma talk,' and he is standing and weeping, 'My coming has been in vain due to bodily weariness.'" "Go, summon him, saying, 'We will speak again tomorrow.'" The next day, having listened to the elder's Dhamma talk, he attained the fruit of Stream-entry (Sotāpatti).

ullakolikaṇṇivāsikāekā itthī puttakaṃ pāyamānā ‘‘dīghabhāṇakamahāabhayatthero nāma ariyavaṃsapaṭipadaṃ kathetī’’ti sutvā pañcayojanamaggaṃ gantvā divākathikattherassa nisinnakāleyeva vihāraṃ pavisitvā bhūmiyaṃ puttaṃ nipajjāpetvā divākathikattherassa ṭhitakāva dhammaṃ assosi. Sarabhāṇake there uṭṭhite dīghabhāṇakamahāabhayatthero catupaccayasantosabhāvanārāmamahāariyavaṃsaṃ ārabhi. Sā ṭhitakāva paggaṇhāti. Thero tayo eva paccaye kathetvā uṭṭhānākāraṃ akāsi. Sā upāsikā āha – ‘‘ayyo, ‘ariyavaṃsaṃ kathessāmī’ti siniddhabhojanaṃ bhuñjitvā madhurapānakaṃ pivitvā yaṭṭhimadhukatelādīhi bhesajjaṃ katvā kathetuṃ yuttaṭṭhāneyeva uṭṭhahatī’’ti. Thero ‘‘sādhu, bhaginī’’ti vatvā upari bhāvanārāmaṃ paṭṭhapesi. Aruṇuggamanañca therassa ‘‘idamavocā’’ti vacanañca upāsikāya sotāpattiphaluppatti ca ekakkhaṇeyeva ahosi.

Ullakolikaṇṇivāsikā, a woman dwelling in Ullakolaṇṇi, while nursing her child, having heard that "The great reciter of the Dīgha-Bhāṇaka, the elder Mahā-Abhaya, is speaking on the Ariyavaṃsa practice," went a distance of five yojanas and, just as the elder Divākathika was seated, entered the monastery, laid the child on the ground, and, standing, listened to the Dhamma of the elder Divākathika. When the elder Sarabhāṇaka had risen, the elder Mahā-Abhaya, the reciter of the Dīgha-Bhāṇaka, began the Catupaccayasantoṣabhāvanārāmamahāariyavaṃsa. She grasped it while standing. The elder spoke only three conditions and made a gesture to rise. That female devotee said, "Venerable sir, having eaten rich food, having drunk sweet drinks, and having taken medicine with licorice and oil, you rise at the very place suitable for speaking the Ariyavaṃsa?" The elder, saying "Good, sister," began the Bhāvanārāma on top of it. The sunrise, the elder's saying "Idamavocā," and the arising of the female devotee's fruit of Stream-entry all happened in one moment.

kaḷamparavāsikāitthī aṅkena puttaṃ ādāya ‘‘dhammaṃ sossāmī’’ti cittalapabbataṃ gantvā ekaṃ rukkhaṃ nissāya dārakaṃ nipajjāpetvā sayaṃ ṭhitakāva dhammaṃ suṇāti. Rattibhāgasamanantare eko dīghajātiko tassā passantiyāyeva samīpe nipannadārakaṃ catūhi dāṭhāhi ḍaṃsitvā agamāsi. Sā cintesi – ‘‘sacāhaṃ ‘putto me sappena daṭṭho’ti vakkhāmi, dhammassa antarāyo bhavissati. Anekakkhattuṃ kho pana me ayaṃ saṃsāravaṭṭe vaṭṭantiyā putto ahosi, dhammameva carissāmī’’ti tiyāmarattiṃ ṭhitakāva dhammaṃ paggaṇhitvā sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhāya aruṇe uggate saccakiriyāya puttassa visaṃ nimmathetvā puttaṃ gahetvā gatā. Evarūpā puggalā dhammaṃ sotukāmā nāma honti.

Kaḷamparavāsikā, a woman dwelling in Kaḷampara, taking her son on her hip, went to Cittalapabbata thinking, "I will listen to the Dhamma," and, leaning against a tree, laid the child down and herself, standing, listened to the Dhamma. In the latter part of the night, a long-lived creature bit the child lying near her with its four fangs, right before her eyes, and went away. She thought, "If I say, 'My son has been bitten by a snake,' there will be an interruption to the Dhamma. Many times, while wandering in this round of rebirths, he has been my son; I will practice the Dhamma." Standing throughout the three watches of the night, she grasped the Dhamma, and, established in the fruit of Stream-entry, at sunrise, by an act of truth, neutralized the poison in her son, took her son, and went away. Such persons are those who desire to hear the Dhamma.

3. Atthavasasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Atthavasasuttavaṇṇanā

43.Tatiyetayo, bhikkhave, atthavase sampassamānenāti tayo atthe tīṇi kāraṇāni passantena.Alamevāti yuttameva.Yo dhammaṃ desetīti yo puggalo catusaccadhammaṃ pakāseti.Atthappaṭisaṃvedīti aṭṭhakathaṃ ñāṇena paṭisaṃvedī.Dhammappaṭisaṃvedīti pāḷidhammaṃ paṭisaṃvedī.

43. In the third, tayo, bhikkhave, atthavase sampassamānenā, by seeing three purposes, three reasons. Alamevā, it is indeed fitting. Yo dhammaṃ desetī, the person who reveals the Four Noble Truths. Atthappaṭisaṃvedī, one who understands the commentary with knowledge. Dhammappaṭisaṃvedī, one who understands the Pāḷi Dhamma.

4. Kathāpavattisuttavaṇṇanā
4. Kathāpavattisuttavaṇṇanā

44.Catuttheṭhānehīti kāraṇehi.Pavattinīti appaṭihatā niyyānikā.

44. In the fourth, ṭhānehī, by reasons. Pavattinī, unimpeded, leading out.

5. Paṇḍitasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Paṇḍitasuttavaṇṇanā

45.Pañcamepaṇḍitapaññattānīti paṇḍitehi paññattāni kathitāni pasatthāni.Sappurisapaññattānīti sappurisehi mahāpurisehi paññattāni kathitāni pasatthāni.Ahiṃsāti karuṇā ceva karuṇāpubbabhāgo ca.Saṃyamoti sīlasaṃyamo.Damoti indriyasaṃvaro, uposathavasena vā attadamanaṃ, puṇṇovāde (ma. ni. 3.395 ādayo; saṃ. ni. 4.88 ādayo) damoti vuttā khantipi āḷavake (saṃ. ni. 1.246; su. ni. 183 ādayo) vuttā paññāpi imasmiṃ sutte vaṭṭatiyeva.Mātāpitu upaṭṭhānanti mātāpitūnaṃ rakkhanaṃ gopanaṃ paṭijagganaṃ.Santānanti aññattha buddhapaccekabuddhaariyasāvakā santo nāma, idha pana mātāpituupaṭṭhākā adhippetā. Tasmā uttamaṭṭhena santānaṃ, seṭṭhacariyaṭṭhenabrahmacārīnaṃ. Idaṃ mātāpituupaṭṭhānaṃ sabbhi upaññātanti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.Sataṃ etāni ṭhānānīti santānaṃ uttamapurisānaṃ etāni ṭhānāni kāraṇāni.Ariyo dassanasampannoti idha imesaṃyeva tiṇṇaṃ ṭhānānaṃ kāraṇena ariyo ceva dassanasampanno ca veditabbo, na buddhādayo na sotāpannā. Atha vāsataṃ etāni ṭhānānīti mātupaṭṭhānaṃ pitupaṭṭhānanti etāni ṭhānāni santānaṃ uttamapurisānaṃ kāraṇānīti evaṃ mātāpituupaṭṭhākavasena imissā gāthāya attho veditabbo. Mātāpituupaṭṭhākoyeva hi idha ‘‘ariyo dassanasampanno’’ti vutto.Sa lokaṃ bhajate sivanti so khemaṃ devalokaṃ gacchatīti.

45. In the fifth, paṇḍitapaññattānī, proclaimed, spoken, praised by the wise. Sappurisapaññattānī, proclaimed, spoken, praised by the good, the great. Ahiṃsā, compassion and the preliminary part of compassion. Saṃyamo, restraint of morality (sīla). Damo, sense restraint, or self-taming by way of the Uposatha, and in the Puṇṇovāda (ma. ni. 3.395 ff; saṃ. ni. 4.88 ff) "damo" is said, and also in Āḷavaka (saṃ. ni. 1.246; su. ni. 183 ff) patience (khanti) is said, and in this sutta, wisdom (paññā) also applies. Mātāpitu upaṭṭhānaṃ, protecting, guarding, attending to mother and father. Santānaṃ, elsewhere the Buddhas, Paccekabuddhas, and noble disciples are called "santo," but here it refers to those who attend to mother and father. Therefore, "santānaṃ" in the highest sense, and brahmacārīnaṃ in the sense of the best conduct. Here, the meaning should be understood as "This attending to mother and father is praised by the good." Sataṃ etāni ṭhānānī, these places, reasons, are for the excellent persons who are "santānaṃ." Ariyo dassanasampanno, here, through the reason of these three places, he should be understood as both noble and endowed with vision, not the Buddhas, etc., not the Stream-enterers. Or, sataṃ etāni ṭhānānī, these places, such as attending to mother and attending to father, are reasons for the excellent persons who are "santānaṃ." Thus, the meaning of this verse should be understood in terms of attending to mother and father. For here, only the one who attends to mother and father is called "ariyo dassanasampanno." Sa lokaṃ bhajate sivaṃ, he goes to the blissful world of gods.

6. Sīlavantasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Sīlavantasuttavaṇṇanā

46.Chaṭṭhetīhi ṭhānehīti tīhi kāraṇehi.Kāyenātiādīsu bhikkhū āgacchante disvā paccuggamanaṃ karontā gacchante anugacchantā āsanasālāya sammajjanaupalepanādīni karontā āsanāni paññāpentā pānīyaṃ paccupaṭṭhāpentā kāyena puññaṃ pasavanti nāma. Bhikkhusaṅghaṃ piṇḍāya carantaṃ disvā ‘‘yāguṃ detha, bhattaṃ detha, sappinavanītādīni detha, gandhapupphādīhi pūjetha, uposathaṃ upavasatha, dhammaṃ suṇātha, cetiyaṃ vandathā’’tiādīni vadantā vācāya puññaṃ pasavanti nāma. Bhikkhū piṇḍāya carante disvā ‘‘labhantū’’ti cintentā manasā puññaṃ pasavanti nāma.Pasavantīti paṭilabhanti. Puññaṃ panettha lokiyalokuttaramissakaṃ kathitaṃ.

46. In the sixth, tīhi ṭhānehī, by three reasons. In kāyenātiādīsu, seeing the monks coming, doing the welcoming, following those going, doing the sweeping and plastering etc. of the assembly hall, arranging the seats, providing drinking water, they generate merit by body. Seeing the Saṅgha of monks going for alms, saying, "Give rice-gruel, give food, give ghee, butter etc., honor with perfumes and flowers, observe the Uposatha, listen to the Dhamma, venerate the Cetiya," they generate merit by speech. Seeing the monks going for alms, thinking, "May they receive," they generate merit by mind. Pasavantī, they obtain. Here, the merit is spoken of as mixed with worldly and supramundane.

7. Saṅkhatalakkhaṇasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Saṅkhatalakkhaṇasuttavaṇṇanā

47.Sattamesaṅkhatassāti paccayehi samāgantvā katassa.Saṅkhatalakkhaṇānīti saṅkhataṃ etanti sañjānanakāraṇāni nimittāni.Uppādoti jāti.Vayoti bhedo.Ṭhitassa aññathattaṃnāma jarā. Tatthasaṅkhatanti tebhūmakā dhammā. Maggaphalāni pana asammasanūpagattā idha na kathīyanti. Uppādādayosaṅkhatalakkhaṇānāma. Tesu uppādakkhaṇe uppādo, ṭhānakkhaṇe jarā, bhedakkhaṇe vayo. Lakkhaṇaṃ na saṅkhataṃ, saṅkhataṃ na lakkhaṇaṃ, lakkhaṇena pana saṅkhataṃ paricchinnaṃ. Yathā hatthiassagomahiṃsādīnaṃ sattisūlādīni sañjānanalakkhaṇāni na hatthiādayo, napi hatthiādayo lakkhaṇāneva, lakkhaṇehi pana te ‘‘asukassa hatthī, asukassa asso, asukahatthī, asukaasso’’ti vā paññāyanti, evaṃsampadamidaṃ veditabbaṃ.

47. In the seventh, saṅkhatassā, of the conditioned, made by the coming together of conditions. Saṅkhatalakkhaṇānī, the signs, the indicators for knowing "this is conditioned." Uppādo, arising, birth. Vayo, dissolution, decay. Ṭhitassa aññathattaṃ, change of what is standing, is aging. There, saṅkhataṃ means the three-plane (tebhūmaka) phenomena. But the paths and fruits are not mentioned here, as they are beyond the scope of conceptual proliferation (asammasanūpaga). Arising etc. are called saṅkhatalakkhaṇā. Among them, arising at the moment of arising, aging at the moment of standing, decay at the moment of dissolution. The characteristic is not the conditioned, the conditioned is not the characteristic, but the conditioned is distinguished by the characteristic. Just as the identifying characteristics of elephants, horses, buffaloes, etc., such as goads and spears, are not the elephants etc., nor are the elephants etc. the characteristics themselves, but by the characteristics, they are known as "so-and-so's elephant, so-and-so's horse," so this should be understood accordingly.

8. Asaṅkhatalakkhaṇasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Asaṅkhatalakkhaṇasuttavaṇṇanā

48.Aṭṭhameasaṅkhatassāti paccayehi samāgantvā akatassa.Asaṅkhatalakkhaṇānīti asaṅkhataṃ etanti sañjānanakāraṇāni nimittāni.Na uppādo paññāyatītiādīhi uppādajarābhaṅgānaṃ abhāvo vutto. Uppādādīnañhi abhāvena asaṅkhatanti paññāyati.

48. In the eighth, asaṅkhatassā, of the unconditioned, not made by the coming together of conditions. Asaṅkhatalakkhaṇānī, the signs, the indicators for knowing "this is unconditioned." By na uppādo paññāyatītiādīhi, the absence of arising, aging, and dissolution is stated. For it is known as unconditioned by the absence of arising etc.

9. Pabbatarājasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Pabbatarājasuttavaṇṇanā

49.Navamemahāsālāti mahārukkhā.Kulapatinti kulajeṭṭhakaṃ.Seloti silāmayo.Araññasminti agāmakaṭṭhāne.Brahmāti mahanto.Vaneti aṭaviyaṃ.Vanappatīti vanajeṭṭhakā.Idha dhammaṃ caritvāna, maggaṃ sugatigāminanti sugatigāmikamaggasaṅkhātaṃ dhammaṃ caritvā.

49. In the ninth, mahāsālā, large trees. Kulapatiṃ, the elder of the family. Selo, made of stone. Araññasmiṃ, in a place without villages. Brahmā, great. Vane, in the forest. Vanappatī, the elders of the forest. Idha dhammaṃ caritvāna, maggaṃ sugatigāminaṃ, having practiced the Dhamma that is the path leading to a good destination.

10. Ātappakaraṇīyasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Ātappakaraṇīyasuttavaṇṇanā

50.Dasameātappaṃ karaṇīyanti vīriyaṃ kātuṃ yuttaṃ.Anuppādāyāti anuppādatthāya, anuppādaṃ sādhessāmīti iminā kāraṇena kattabbanti attho. Paratopi eseva nayo.Sārīrikānanti sarīrasambhavānaṃ.Dukkhānanti dukkhamānaṃ.Tibbānanti bahalānaṃ, tāpanavasena vā tibbānaṃ.Kharānanti pharusānaṃ.Kaṭukānanti tikhiṇānaṃ.Asātānanti amadhurānaṃ.Amanāpānanti manaṃ vaḍḍhetuṃ asamatthānaṃ.Pāṇaharānanti jīvitaharānaṃ.Adhivāsanāyāti adhivāsanatthāya sahanatthāya khamanatthāya.

50. In the tenth, ātappaṃ karaṇīyaṃ, it is fitting to make effort. Anuppādāyā, for the sake of non-arising, with the reason "I will achieve non-arising," is the meaning. The same method applies further on. Sārīrikānaṃ, born of the body. Dukkhānaṃ, of pains. Tibbānaṃ, intense, or intense in the sense of burning. Kharānaṃ, rough. Kaṭukānaṃ, sharp. Asātānaṃ, unpleasant. Amanāpānaṃ, incapable of increasing the mind. Pāṇaharānaṃ, life-destroying. Adhivāsanāyā, for the sake of enduring, for the sake of tolerating, for the sake of forgiving.

yato kho, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tatthayatoti yadā.Ātāpīti vīriyavā.Nipakoti sappañño.Satoti satiyā samannāgato.Dukkhassa antakiriyāyāti vaṭṭadukkhassa paricchedaparivaṭumakiriyāya. Ime ca pana ātāpādayo tayopi lokiyalokuttaramissakā kathitā.

yato kho, bhikkhavetiādi is said. There, yato, when. Ātāpī, energetic. Nipako, wise. Sato, endowed with mindfulness. Dukkhassa antakiriyāyā, for the cessation and complete ending of the round of suffering. But these three, energy etc., are spoken of as mixed with worldly and supramundane.

11. Mahācorasuttavaṇṇanā
11. Mahācorasuttavaṇṇanā

51.Ekādasamemahācoroti mahanto balavacoro.Sandhinti gharasandhiṃ.Nillopanti mahāvilopaṃ.Ekāgārikanti ekameva gehaṃ parivāretvā vilumpanaṃ.Paripanthepi tiṭṭhatīti panthadūhanakammaṃ karoti.Nadīvidugganti nadīnaṃ duggamaṭṭhānaṃ antaradīpakaṃ, yattha sakkā hoti dvīhipi tīhipi jaṅghasahassehi saddhiṃ nilīyituṃ.Pabbatavisamanti pabbatānaṃ visamaṭṭhānaṃ pabbatantaraṃ, yattha sakkā hoti sattahi vā aṭṭhahi vā jaṅghasahassehi saddhiṃ nilīyituṃ.Tiṇagahananti tiṇena vaḍḍhitvā sañchannaṃ dvattiyojanaṭṭhānaṃ.Rodhanti ghanaṃ aññamaññaṃ saṃsaṭṭhasākhaṃ ekābaddhaṃ mahāvanasaṇḍaṃ.Pariyodhāya atthaṃ bhaṇissantīti pariyodahitvā taṃ taṃ kāraṇaṃ pakkhipitvā atthaṃ kathayissanti.Tyāssāti te assa.Pariyodhāya atthaṃ bhaṇantīti kismiñci kiñci vattuṃ āraddheyeva ‘‘mā evaṃ avacuttha, mayaṃ etaṃ kulaparamparāya jānāma, na esa evarūpaṃ karissatī’’ti taṃ taṃ kāraṇaṃ pakkhipitvā mahantampi dosaṃ harantā atthaṃ bhaṇanti. Atha vāpariyodhāyāti paṭicchādetvātipi attho. Te hi tassapi dosaṃ paṭicchādetvā atthaṃ bhaṇanti.Khataṃ upahatanti guṇakhananena khataṃ, guṇupaghātena upahataṃ.Visamena kāyakammenāti sampakkhalanaṭṭhena visamena kāyadvārikakammena. Vacīmanokammesupi eseva nayo.Antaggāhikāyāti dasavatthukāya antaṃ gahetvā ṭhitadiṭṭhiyā. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.

51. In the eleventh, mahācoro means a great and powerful thief. Sandhi means house-breaking. Nillopa means great plunder. Ekāgārika means plundering by surrounding a single house. Paripanthepi tiṭṭhatī means he commits highway robbery. Nadīvidugga means a difficult place in a river, an island in the middle of a river, where it is possible to hide with two or three thousand soldiers. Pabbatavisama means a difficult place in the mountains, a mountain pass, where it is possible to hide with seven or eight thousand soldiers. Tiṇagahana means a place covered with grass, two or three yojanas in extent. Rodha means a dense thicket, with branches intertwined and connected, a large mass of forest. Pariyodhāya atthaṃ bhaṇissantī means having considered and introduced various reasons, they will speak the meaning. Tyāssā means those horses. Pariyodhāya atthaṃ bhaṇantī means just as someone has started to say something, they introduce various reasons, saying, "Do not say so, we know this through family tradition, he will not do such a thing," and they speak the meaning, removing even a great fault. Or, pariyodhāya also means concealing. For they conceal even his fault and speak the meaning. Khataṃ upahata means damaged by digging into virtues, harmed by undermining virtues. Visamena kāyakammenā means with uneven bodily action in the sense of slipping and sliding. The same method applies to verbal and mental actions. Antaggāhikāyā means with a view that has grasped and held onto the extreme of the ten bases. The rest is all of obvious meaning everywhere.

2. Dutiyapaṇṇāsakaṃ

2. The Second Paṇṇāsaka

(6) 1. Brāhmaṇavaggo

(6) 1. Brāhmaṇa Vagga

1. Paṭhamadvebrāhmaṇasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Commentary on the First Dvebrāhmaṇa Sutta

52.Brāhmaṇavaggassa paṭhamejiṇṇāti jarājiṇṇā.Vuddhāti vayovuddhā.Mahallakāti jātimahallakā.Addhagatāti tayo addhe atikkantā.Vayoanuppattāti tatiyaṃ vayaṃ anuppattā.Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṃsūti puttadāre attano vacanaṃ akaronte disvā ‘‘samaṇassa gotamassa santikaṃ gantvā niyyānikamaggaṃ gavesissāmā’’ti cintetvā upasaṅkamiṃsu.Mayamassu, bho gotama, brāhmaṇāti; bho gotama, mayaṃ brāhmaṇā na khattiyā nāmaccā na gahapatikāti brāhmaṇabhāvaṃ jānāpetvājiṇṇātiādimāhaṃsu.Akatabhīruttāṇāti akatabhayaparittāṇā. Avassayabhūtaṃ patiṭṭhākammaṃ amhehi na katanti dassenti.Tagghāti ekaṃsatthe nipāto, sampaṭicchanatthe vā. Ekantena tumhe evarūpā, ahampi kho etaṃ sampaṭicchāmīti ca dasseti.Upanīyatīti upasaṃharīyati. Ayaṃ hi jātiyā jaraṃ upanīyati, jarāya byādhiṃ, byādhinā maraṇaṃ, maraṇena puna jātiṃ. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘upanīyatī’’ti.

52. In the first of the Brāhmaṇa Vagga, jiṇṇā means old with age. Vuddhā means advanced in years. Mahallakā means old by birth. Addhagatā means having gone through three periods. Vayoanuppattā means having reached the third period of life. Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṃsū means seeing that their sons and wives do not heed their words, they approached thinking, "We will go to the presence of the ascetic Gotama and seek the path to liberation." Mayamassu, bho gotama, brāhmaṇā means, "Venerable Gotama, we are brahmins, not Khattiyas, Nāmaccas, or householders," making known their brahmin status, they said jiṇṇā and so on. Akatabhīruttāṇā means not having done a protection against fear. They show that we have not done the act of refuge which is inevitably needed. Tagghā is a particle indicating certainty, or in the sense of acceptance. It shows both that you are certainly like this, and I indeed accept this. Upanīyatī means it is being brought near. For by birth, old age is brought near, by old age, disease, by disease, death, and by death, again birth. Therefore it is said, "upanīyatī."

yodha kāyena saṃyamotiādimāha. Tatthakāyena saṃyamoti kāyadvārena saṃvaro. Sesesupi eseva nayo.Taṃ tassa petassāti taṃ puññaṃ tassa paralokaṃ gatassa tāyanaṭṭhenatāṇaṃ,nilīyanaṭṭhenaleṇaṃ,patiṭṭhānaṭṭhenadīpo,avassayanaṭṭhenasaraṇaṃ,uttamagativasenaparāyaṇañcahotīti dasseti. Gāthā uttānatthāyeva. Evaṃ te brāhmaṇā tathāgatena pañcasu sīlesu samādapitā yāvajīvaṃ pañca sīlāni rakkhitvā sagge nibbattiṃsu.

He said, beginning with yodha kāyena saṃyamo. There, kāyena saṃyamo means restraint through the door of the body. The same method applies to the rest. Taṃ tassa petassā means that merit, in the sense of being a refuge for the departed, is a tāṇaṃ (protection), in the sense of being a shelter, a leṇaṃ (refuge), in the sense of being a foundation, a dīpo (island), in the sense of being inevitable, a saraṇaṃ (shelter), and in the sense of being the ultimate destination, a parāyaṇañca (final support). The verses are of obvious meaning. Thus, those brahmins, having been established in the five precepts by the Tathāgata, having kept the five precepts for as long as they lived, were reborn in heaven.

2. Dutiyadvebrāhmaṇasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Commentary on the Second Dvebrāhmaṇa Sutta

53.Dutiyebhājananti yaṃkiñci bhaṇḍakaṃ. Sesaṃ paṭhame vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.

53. In the second, bhājana means any kind of container. The rest should be understood in the same way as said in the first.

3. Aññatarabrāhmaṇasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Commentary on the Aññatara Brāhmaṇa Sutta

54.Tatiyesammodanīyanti sammodajananiṃ.Sāraṇīyanti saritabbayuttakaṃ.Vītisāretvāti pariyosāpetvā.Kittāvatāti kittakena.Sandiṭṭhiko dhammo hotīti sāmaṃ passitabbo hoti.Akālikoti na kālantare phaladāyako.Ehipassikoti ‘‘ehi passā’’ti evaṃ dassetuṃ sakkāti āgamanīyapaṭipadaṃ pucchati.Opaneyyikoti attano cittaṃ upanetabbo.Paccattaṃ veditabboti sāmaṃyeva jānitabbo.Viññūhīti paṇḍitehi.Pariyādinnacittoti ādinnagahitaparāmaṭṭhacitto hutvā.Cetetīti cinteti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Imasmiṃ pana sutte brāhmaṇena lokuttaramaggo pucchito, satthārāpi soyeva kathito. So hi sāmaṃ passitabbattā sandiṭṭhiko nāmāti.

54. In the third, sammodanīya means causing joy. Sāraṇīya means worthy of being remembered. Vītisāretvā means having finished. Kittāvatā means by how much. Sandiṭṭhiko dhammo hotī means the Dhamma is directly visible. Akāliko means not giving results in another time. Ehipassiko means asking about the practice that is "come and see," in that it can be shown. Opaneyyiko means to be brought into one's own mind. Paccattaṃ veditabbo means to be known by oneself. Viññūhī means by the wise. Pariyādinnacitto means having a mind taken over, seized, and obsessed. Cetetī means thinks. The rest here is obvious. In this sutta, the brahmin asked about the supramundane path, and the Teacher also spoke of the same. For that is called directly visible because it is to be seen by oneself.

4. Paribbājakasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Commentary on the Paribbājaka Sutta

55.Catutthebrāhmaṇaparibbājakoti brāhmaṇajātiko paribbājako, na khattiyādijātiko.Attatthampīti diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaṃ lokiyalokuttaramissakaṃ attano atthaṃ.

55. In the fourth, brāhmaṇaparibbājako means a wandering ascetic of brahmin birth, not of Khattiya birth, etc. Attatthampī means one's own benefit, mixed with the visible and future lives, mundane and supramundane.

5. Nibbutasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Commentary on the Nibbuta Sutta

56.Pañcameakālikanti na kālantare pattabbaṃ.Opaneyyikanti paṭipattiyā upagantabbaṃ.

56. In the fifth, akālika means not to be attained in another time. Opaneyyika means to be approached by practice.

6. Palokasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Commentary on the Paloka Sutta

57.Chaṭṭheācariyapācariyānanti ācariyānañceva ācariyācariyānañca.Avīci maññe phuṭo ahosīti yathā avīci mahānirayo nirantaraphuṭo nerayikasattehi paripuṇṇo, manussehi evaṃ paripuṇṇo hoti.Kukkuṭasaṃpātikāti ekagāmassa chadanapiṭṭhito uppatitvā itaragāmassa chadanapiṭṭhe patanasaṅkhāto kukkuṭasaṃpāto etāsu atthīti kukkuṭasaṃpātikā. Kukkuṭasaṃpādikātipi pāṭho, gāmantarato gāmantaraṃ kukkuṭānaṃ padasā gamanasaṅkhāto kukkuṭasaṃpādo etāsu atthīti attho. Ubhayampetaṃ ghananivāsataṃyeva dīpeti.Adhammarāgarattāti rāgo nāma ekanteneva adhammo, attano parikkhāresu pana uppajjamāno na adhammarāgoti adhippeto, paraparikkhāresu uppajjamānova adhammarāgoti.Visamalobhābhibhūtāti lobhassa samakālo nāma natthi, ekantaṃ visamova esa. Attanā pariggahitavatthumhi pana uppajjamāno samalobho nāma, parapariggahitavatthumhi uppajjamānova visamoti adhippeto.Micchādhammaparetāti avatthupaṭisevanasaṅkhātena micchādhammena samannāgatā.Devo na sammā dhāraṃ anuppavecchatīti vassitabbayutte kāle vassaṃ na vassati.Dubbhikkhanti dullabhabhikkhaṃ.Dussassanti vividhasassānaṃ asampajjanena dussassaṃ.Setaṭṭhikanti sasse sampajjamāne pāṇakā patanti, tehi daṭṭhattā nikkhantanikkhantāni sālisīsāni setavaṇṇāni honti nissārāni. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘setaṭṭhika’’nti.Salākāvuttanti vapitaṃ vapitaṃ sassaṃ salākāmattameva sampajjati, phalaṃ na detīti attho.Yakkhāti yakkhādhipatino.Vāḷe amanusse ossajjantīti caṇḍayakkhe manussapathe vissajjenti, te laddhokāsā mahājanaṃ jīvitakkhayaṃ pāpenti.

57. In the sixth, ācariyapācariyāna means both of teachers and of teachers' teachers. Avīci maññe phuṭo ahosī means just as the Avīci great hell is constantly filled and packed with hell beings, so it is filled and packed with humans. Kukkuṭasaṃpātikā means the chicken flight, which is defined as flying from the roof of one village and landing on the roof of another village, exists in these. Kukkuṭasaṃpādikātipi is also a reading, meaning the chicken passage, defined as chickens going on foot from one village to another, exists in these. Both of these indicate dense habitation. Adhammarāgarattā means passion is entirely unrighteous, but when it arises in one's own possessions, it is not intended as unrighteous passion; only when it arises in the possessions of others is it unrighteous passion. Visamalobhābhibhūtā means there is no equal time for greed, it is entirely unequal. However, when it arises in something possessed by oneself, it is called equal greed, only when it arises in something possessed by another is it intended as unequal. Micchādhammaparetā means endowed with the wrong conduct, defined as attending to unworthy things. Devo na sammā dhāraṃ anuppavecchatī means the deva does not send rain at the right time for raining. Dubbhikkha means scarcity of alms. Dussassa means poor crops due to the non-production of various crops. Setaṭṭhika means when crops are produced, creatures fall upon them, and because they are bitten by them, the heads of rice that come out are white and without essence. Referring to that, it is said "setaṭṭhika". Salākāvutta means the crops that are sown are only as much as a lottery ticket, they do not give fruit, is the meaning. Yakkhā means the overlords of the yakkhas. Vāḷe amanusse ossajjantī means they release fierce non-humans into the path of humans, and having obtained an opportunity, they cause great people to lose their lives.

7. Vacchagottasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Commentary on the Vacchagotta Sutta

58.Sattamemahapphalanti mahāvipākaṃ.Dhammassa cānudhammaṃ byākarontīti etthadhammonāma kathitakathā,anudhammonāma kathitassa paṭikathanaṃ.Sahadhammikoti sakāraṇo sahetuko.Vādānupātoti vādassa anupāto, anupatanaṃ pavattīti attho.Gārayhaṃṭhānanti garahitabbayuttaṃ kāraṇaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – bhotā gotamena vuttā sakāraṇā vādappavatti kiñcipi gārayhaṃ kāraṇaṃ na āgacchatīti. Atha vā tehi parehi vuttā sakāraṇā vādappavatti kiñci gārayhaṃ kāraṇaṃ na āgacchatīti pucchati.

58. In the seventh, mahapphala means of great result. Dhammassa cānudhammaṃ byākarontī; here, dhammo means a spoken word, anudhammo means speaking in response to what has been spoken. Sahadhammiko means with reason, with cause. Vādānupāto means the consequence of speech, the occurrence of following after speech, is the meaning. Gārayhaṃṭhāna means a cause worthy of censure. This is what is said - "The consequence of speech spoken with cause by the venerable Gotama, does no cause worthy of censure come about?" Or he asks, "Does any cause worthy of censure come about from the consequence of speech spoken with cause by others?"

Antarāyakarohotīti antarāyaṃ vināsaṃ kicchalābhakaṃ vilomakaṃ karoti.Pāripanthikoti panthadūhanacoro.Khato ca hotīti guṇakhananena khato hoti.Upahatoti guṇupaghāteneva upahato.

Antarāyakarohotī means he makes an obstruction, a ruin, a difficult gain, an adversary. Pāripanthiko means a highway robber. Khato ca hotī means he is damaged by digging into virtues. Upahato means he is harmed by undermining virtues.

Candanikāyāti asucikalalakūpe.Oligalleti niddhamanakalale.So cāti so sīlavāti vuttakhīṇāsavo.Sīlakkhandhenāti sīlarāsinā. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Ettha ca vimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ vuccati paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ, taṃ asekkhassa pavattattā asekkhanti vuttaṃ. Itarāni sikkhāpariyosānappattatāya sayampi asekkhāneva. Tāni ca pana lokuttarāni, paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ lokiyaṃ.

Candanikāyā means in a pit of impure filth. Oligalle means in draining scum. So cā means that virtuous one, the aforesaid khīṇāsava. Sīlakkhandhenā means with the mass of virtue. The same method applies to the remaining terms. Here, the knowledge and vision of liberation is called reviewing knowledge, and because it occurs to one beyond training, it is said to be beyond training. The others are themselves beyond training because they have reached the end of training. But those are supramundane, reviewing knowledge is mundane.

Rohiṇīsūti rattavaṇṇāsu.Sarūpāsūti attano vacchakehi samānarūpāsu.Pārevatāsūti kapotavaṇṇāsu.Dantoti nibbisevano.Puṅgavoti usabho.Dhorayhoti dhuravāho.Kalyāṇajavanikkamoti kalyāṇena ujunā javena gantā.Nāssa vaṇṇaṃ parikkhareti assa goṇassa sarīravaṇṇaṃ na upaparikkhanti, dhuravahanakammameva pana upaparikkhanti.Yasmiṃ kasmiñci jātiyeti yattha katthaci kulajāte.Yāsu kāsuci etāsūti etāsu khattiyādippabhedāsu yāsu kāsuci jātīsu.

Rohiṇīsū means reddish in color. Sarūpāsū means similar in appearance to their own calves. Pārevatāsū means dove-colored. Danto means not disobedient. Puṅgavo means an ox. Dhorayho means a bearer of the yoke. Kalyāṇajavanikkamo means going with good, straight speed. Nāssa vaṇṇaṃ parikkhare means they do not examine the color of the body of the horse or bull, but only examine the work of carrying the yoke. Yasmiṃ kasmiñci jātiye means in whatever family lineage. Yāsu kāsuci etāsū means in whichever of these castes, such as Khattiya and so on.

Brahmacariyassa kevalīti brahmacariyassa kevalena samannāgato, paripuṇṇabhāvena yuttoti attho. Khīṇāsavo hi sakalabrahmacārī nāma hoti. Tenetaṃ vuttaṃ.Pannabhāroti oropitabhāro, khandhabhāraṃ kilesabhāraṃ kāmaguṇabhārañca oropetvā ṭhitoti attho.Katakiccoti catūhi maggehi kiccaṃ katvā ṭhito.Pāragū sabbadhammānanti sabbadhammā vuccanti pañcakkhandhā dvādasāyatanāni aṭṭhārasa dhātuyo, tesaṃ sabbadhammānaṃ abhiññāpāraṃ, pariññāpāraṃ, pahānapāraṃ, bhāvanāpāraṃ, sacchikiriyāpāraṃ, samāpattipārañcāti chabbidhaṃ pāraṃ gatattā pāragū.Anupādāyāti aggahetvā.Nibbutoti kilesasantāparahito.Virajeti rāgadosamoharajarahite.

Brahmacariyassa kevalī means endowed with the entirety of the holy life, united with the state of completeness, is the meaning. For a khīṇāsava is called entirely a follower of the holy life. Therefore, this was said. Pannabhāro means having laid down the burden, standing having laid down the burden of the aggregates, the burden of defilements, and the burden of sensual pleasures, is the meaning. Katakicco means standing having done the task with the four paths. Pāragū sabbadhammāna means all dhammas are said to be the five aggregates, the twelve sense bases, and the eighteen elements, having gone to the further shore of knowledge, the further shore of full understanding, the further shore of abandoning, the further shore of development, the further shore of realization, and the further shore of attainment of all those dhammas, therefore, pāragū. Anupādāyā means without grasping. Nibbuto means free from the torment of defilements. Viraje means free from passion, hatred, delusion, and old age.

Avijānantāti khettaṃ ajānantā.Dummedhāti nippaññā.Assutāvinoti khettavinicchayasavanena rahitā.Bahiddhāti imamhā sāsanā bahiddhā.Na hi sante upāsareti buddhapaccekabuddhakhīṇāsave uttamapurise na upasaṅkamanti.Dhīrasammateti paṇḍitehi sammate sambhāvite.Mūlajātā patiṭṭhitāti iminā sotāpannassa saddhaṃ dasseti.Kule vā idha jāyareti idha vā manussaloke khattiyabrāhmaṇavessakule jāyanti. Ayameva hi tividhā kulasampatti nāma.Anupubbena nibbānaṃ, adhigacchantīti sīlasamādhipaññāti ime guṇe pūretvā anukkamena nibbānaṃ adhigacchantīti.

Avijānantā means not knowing the field. Dummedhā means without wisdom. Assutāvino means lacking the hearing that distinguishes the field. Bahiddhā means outside this dispensation. Na hi sante upāsare means they do not approach the Buddhas, Paccekabuddhas, khīṇāsavas, and supreme persons. Dhīrasammate means approved and respected by the wise. Mūlajātā patiṭṭhitā means by this he shows the faith of the sotāpanna. Kule vā idha jāyare means here in the human world they are born in a Khattiya, Brahmin, or Vessa family. For this is called the threefold family wealth. Anupubbena nibbānaṃ, adhigacchantī means having fulfilled these qualities, virtue, concentration, and wisdom, they gradually attain Nibbāna.

8. Tikaṇṇasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Commentary on the Tikaṇṇa Sutta

59.Aṭṭhametikaṇṇoti tassa nāmaṃ.Upasaṅkamīti ‘‘samaṇo kira gotamo paṇḍito, gacchissāmi tassa santika’’nti cintetvā bhuttapātarāso mahājanaparivuto upasaṅkami.Bhagavato sammukhāti dasabalassa purato nisīditvā.Vaṇṇaṃ bhāsatīti kasmā bhāsati? So kira ito pubbe tathāgatassa santikaṃ agatapubbo. Athassa etadahosi – ‘‘buddhā nāma durāsadā, mayi paṭhamataraṃ akathente katheyya vā na vā. Sace na kathessati, atha maṃ samāgamaṭṭhāne kathentaṃ evaṃ vakkhanti ‘tvaṃ idha kasmā kathesi, yena te samaṇassa gotamassa santikaṃ gantvā vacanamattampi na laddha’nti. Tasmā ‘evaṃ me ayaṃ garahā muccissatī’’’ti maññamāno bhāsati. Kiñcāpi brāhmaṇānaṃ vaṇṇaṃ bhāsati, tathāgatassa pana ñāṇaṃ ghaṭṭessāmīti adhippāyeneva bhāsati.Evampi tevijjā brāhmaṇāti tevijjakabrāhmaṇā evaṃpaṇḍitā evaṃdhīrā evaṃbyattā evaṃbahussutā evaṃvādino, evaṃsammatāti attho.Itipīti iminā tesaṃ paṇḍitādiākāraparicchedaṃ dasseti. Ettakena kāraṇena paṇḍitā…pe… ettakena kāraṇena sammatāti ayañhi ettha attho.

59. In the eighth, tikaṇṇo is his name. Upasaṅkamī means thinking, "The ascetic Gotama is said to be wise, I will go to his presence," he approached, surrounded by a great crowd, having eaten his morning meal. Bhagavato sammukhā means having sat down in front of the one with ten powers. Vaṇṇaṃ bhāsatī means why does he speak praise? It is said that he had never before gone to the presence of the Tathāgata. Then this occurred to him - "The Buddhas are difficult to approach, if I do not speak first, he may or may not speak. If he does not speak, then when I am speaking in the assembly, they will say to me, 'Why did you speak here, when you could not even get a word from the ascetic Gotama?' Therefore, thinking 'I will be freed from this censure in this way,' he speaks. Although he speaks praise of the Brahmins, he speaks with the intention of challenging the knowledge of the Tathāgata. Evampi tevijjā brāhmaṇā means the three-Veda Brahmins are thus wise, thus intelligent, thus learned, thus well-versed in the Vedas, thus eloquent, thus esteemed, is the meaning. Itipī with this he shows the limitation of their qualities such as wise, etc. They are wise for this much reason...pe...they are esteemed for this much reason, for this is the meaning here.

Yathā kathaṃ pana brāhmaṇāti etthayathāti kāraṇavacanaṃ,kathaṃ panāti pucchāvacanaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – kathaṃ pana, brāhmaṇa, brāhmaṇā tevijjaṃ paññāpenti. Yathā evaṃ sakkā hoti jānituṃ, taṃ kāraṇaṃ vadehīti. Taṃ sutvā brāhmaṇo ‘‘jānanaṭṭhāneyeva maṃ sammāsambuddho pucchi, no ajānanaṭṭhāne’’ti attamano hutvāidha, bho gotamātiādimāha. Tatthaubhatoti dvīhipi pakkhehi.Mātito ca pitito cāti yassa mātā brāhmaṇī, mātu mātā brāhmaṇī, tassāpi mātā brāhmaṇī. Pitā brāhmaṇo, pitu pitā brāhmaṇo, tassāpi pitā brāhmaṇo, so ubhato sujāto mātito ca pitito ca.Saṃsuddhagahaṇikoti yassa saṃsuddhā mātu gahaṇī, kucchīti attho. ‘‘Samavepākiniyā gahaṇiyā’’ti pana ettha kammajatejodhātu gahaṇīti vuccati.

Yathā kathaṃ pana brāhmaṇāti: Here, yathā means a reason, and kathaṃ pana means a question. This means: "But how, brahmin, do brahmins describe the knowledge of the three Vedas? Please tell me the reason why it is possible to know in this way." Having heard that, the brahmin, pleased, thinking, "The Sammāsambuddha is asking me about what can be known, not about what cannot be known," said, "idha, bho gotamā," and so on. There, ubhato means from both sides.Mātito ca pitito cāti means one whose mother is a brahmin, whose mother's mother is a brahmin, and whose mother's mother's mother is also a brahmin; whose father is a brahmin, whose father's father is a brahmin, and whose father's father's father is also a brahmin; such a one is well-born from both sides, from mother and father.Saṃsuddhagahaṇikoti means one whose mother's lineage, whose womb, is pure. "Samavepākiniyā gahaṇiyā" means here that the element of heat born of kamma is called gahaṇī (womb).

Yāva sattamā pitāmahayugāti ettha pitu pitā pitāmaho, pitāmahassa yugaṃ pitāmahayugaṃ.Yuganti āyuppamāṇaṃ vuccati. Abhilāpamattameva cetaṃ, atthato pana pitāmahoyeva pitāmahayugaṃ. Tato uddhaṃ sabbepi pubbapurisā pitāmahaggahaṇeneva gahitā. Evaṃ yāva sattamo puriso, tāva saṃsuddhagahaṇiko, atha vā akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādenāti dasseti.Akkhittoti ‘‘apanetha etaṃ, kiṃ iminā’’ti evaṃ akkhitto anavakkhitto.Anupakkuṭṭhoti na upakkuṭṭho, na akkosaṃ vā nindaṃ vā pattapubbo. Kena kāraṇenāti?Jātivādena. ‘‘Itipi hīnajātiko eso’’ti evarūpena vacanenāti attho.

Yāva sattamā pitāmahayugāti: Here, pitu pitā (father's father) is pitāmaha (grandfather), and pitāmahassa yugaṃ (the age of the grandfather) is pitāmahayugaṃ. Yuganti means the measure of life. However, this is just a term of speech; in reality, it is the grandfather himself who is the pitāmahayugaṃ. Beyond that, all ancestors are included in the term 'grandfather'. Thus, it shows that up to the seventh generation, one is of pure lineage, or unreviled and unrebuked by caste.Akkhittoti means "Remove this one, what is the use of him?" Thus, akkhitto means unreviled, unrejected.Anupakkuṭṭhoti means not rebuked, never having received abuse or scorn. For what reason?Jātivādena, meaning by a statement such as, "This one is of low caste."

Ajjhāyakoti idaṃ ‘‘na dānime jhāyanti, na dānime jhāyantīti kho, vāseṭṭha, ajjhāyakā ajjhāyakāteva tatiyaṃ akkharaṃ upanibbatta’’nti (dī. ni. 3.132) evaṃ paṭhamakappikakāle jhānavirahitānaṃ brāhmaṇānaṃ garahavacanaṃ uppannaṃ. Idāni pana taṃ ajjhāyatīti ajjhāyako, mante parivattetīti iminā atthena pasaṃsāvacanaṃ katvā voharanti. Mante dhāretītimantadharo.

Ajjhāyakoti: This, "Now they do not meditate, now they do not meditate; thus, Vāseṭṭha, the term 'ajjhāyaka' has arisen, the third syllable," (dī. ni. 3.132) thus, in the early aeon, a term of reproach arose for brahmins who lacked jhāna. But now, ajjhāyako means one who recites, and they use it as a term of praise, meaning one who repeats mantras. Mantadharo means one who holds mantras.

Tiṇṇaṃ vedānanti irubbedayajubbedasāmabbedānaṃ. Oṭṭhapahatakaraṇavasena pāraṃ gatotipāragū. Saha nighaṇḍunā ca keṭubhena casanighaṇḍukeṭubhānaṃ. Nighaṇḍūti nāmanighaṇḍurukkhādīnaṃ vevacanapakāsakasatthaṃ.Keṭubhanti kiriyākappavikappo kavīnaṃ upakārāya satthaṃ. Saha akkharappabhedenasākkharappabhedānaṃ. Akkharappabhedoti sikkhā ca nirutti ca.Itihāsapañcamānanti āthabbaṇavedaṃ catutthaṃ katvā itiha āsa, itiha āsāti īdisavacanapaṭisaṃyutto purāṇakathāsaṅkhāto khattavijjāsaṅkhāto vā itihāso pañcamo etesanti itihāsapañcamā. Tesaṃ itihāsapañcamānaṃ vedānaṃ.

Tiṇṇaṃ vedānanti means the Rigveda, Yajurveda, and Samaveda. Pāragū means one who has gone to the other shore by means of oral recitation.Sanighaṇḍukeṭubhānaṃ: with the Nighaṇḍu and Keṭubha. Nighaṇḍūti is a text that explains synonyms of names, trees, etc.Keṭubhanti is a text on the variations of actions, for the benefit of poets. Sākkharappabhedānaṃ means with the distinctions of letters. Akkharappabhedoti means phonology (sikkhā) and etymology (nirutti).Itihāsapañcamānanti: Having made the Atharvaveda the fourth, and itiha āsa (thus it was), itiha āsāti is connected to such a statement; Itihāsa is a collection of ancient stories, also known as khattavijjā (knowledge of the warrior class), and the fifth of these is itihāsapañcamā. Of those Vedas with Itihāsa as the fifth.

padako veyyākaraṇo. Lokāyataṃvuccati vitaṇḍavādasatthaṃ.Mahāpurisalakkhaṇanti mahāpurisānaṃ buddhādīnaṃ lakkhaṇadīpakaṃ dvādasasahassaganthapamāṇaṃ satthaṃ, yattha soḷasasahassagāthāpadaparimāṇā buddhamantā nāma ahesuṃ, yesaṃ vasena ‘‘iminā lakkhaṇena samannāgatā buddhā nāma honti, iminā paccekabuddhā, dve aggasāvakā, asīti mahāsāvakā, buddhamātā, buddhapitā, aggupaṭṭhākā, aggupaṭṭhāyikā, rājā cakkavattī’’ti ayaṃ viseso ñāyati.Anavayoti imesu lokāyatamahāpurisalakkhaṇesu anūno paripūrakārī, avayo na hotīti vuttaṃ hoti. Avayo nāma yo tāni atthato ca ganthato ca sandhāretuṃ na sakkoti. Atha vāanavayoti anu avayo, sandhivasena ukāralopo. Anu avayo paripuṇṇasippoti attho.

padako veyyākaraṇo. Lokāyataṃvuccati means the science of sophistry (vitaṇḍavādasatthaṃ).Mahāpurisalakkhaṇanti means a text describing the characteristics of great men like the Buddha, a text measuring twelve thousand verses, in which there were sixteen thousand gāthā-pada (verse-feet) of Buddhamantā (Buddha mantras), by which this distinction is known: "Those endowed with these characteristics are called Buddhas, these are Paccekabuddhas, two chief disciples, eighty great disciples, the Buddha's mother, the Buddha's father, chief attendants, chief female attendants, and a universal monarch."Anavayoti means not deficient in these Lokāyata and Mahāpurisalakkhaṇa; fulfilling, not being deficient. Avayo means one who cannot retain those meanings and texts. Alternatively,anavayoti anu avayo, with the elision of the 'u' by sandhi. Anu avayo means fully skilled.

Tenati idaṃ bhagavā naṃ āyācantaṃ disvā ‘‘idānissa pañhaṃ kathetuṃ kālo’’ti ñatvā āha. Tassattho – yasmā maṃ āyācasi, tasmā suṇāhīti.Vivicceva kāmehītiādi visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.70) vitthāritameva. Idha panetaṃ tissannaṃ vijjānaṃ pubbabhāgapaṭipattidassanatthaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Tattha dvinnaṃ vijjānaṃ anupadavaṇṇanā ceva bhāvanānayo ca visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 2.402 ādayo) vitthāritova.

Tenati: Seeing him imploring, the Blessed One said, knowing, "Now is the time to answer his question." Its meaning is: "Since you implore me, listen."Vivicceva kāmehītiādi is already explained extensively in the Visuddhimagga (visuddhi. 1.70). Here, however, it should be understood that it is said to show the preliminary practice for the three knowledges. There, the detailed description and the method of cultivation for the two knowledges are extensively explained in the Visuddhimagga (visuddhi. 2.402 ff).

Paṭhamā vijjāti paṭhamaṃ uppannāti paṭhamā, viditakaraṇaṭṭhena vijjā. Kiṃ viditaṃ karoti? Pubbenivāsaṃ.Avijjāti tasseva pubbenivāsassa aviditakaraṇaṭṭhena tappaṭicchādako moho vuccati.Tamoti sveva moho paṭicchādakaṭṭhena tamoti vuccati.Ālokoti sāyeva vijjā obhāsakaraṇaṭṭhena ālokoti vuccati. Ettha ca vijjā adhigatāti ayaṃ attho. Sesaṃ pasaṃsāvacanaṃ. Yojanā panettha ayamassa vijjā adhigatā, athassa adhigatavijjassa avijjā vihatā vinaṭṭhāti attho. Kasmā? Yasmā vijjā uppannā. Itarasmimpi padadvaye eseva nayo.Yathā tanti etthayathāti opammaṃ,tanti nipātamattaṃ. Satiyā avippavāsenaappamattassa. Vīriyātāpenaātāpino. Kāye ca jīvite ca anapekkhatāyapahitattassa. Pesitattassāti attho. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā appamattassa ātāpino pahitattassa viharato avijjā vihaññeyya, vijjā uppajjeyya. Tamo vihaññeyya, āloko uppajjeyya, evameva tassa avijjā vihatā, vijjā uppannā. Tamo vihato, āloko uppanno. Etassa tena padhānānuyogassa anurūpameva phalaṃ laddhanti.

Paṭhamā vijjāti: The first to arise is paṭhamā, and vijjā because of making known. What does it make known? Past lives.Avijjāti: Ignorance (avijjā) is said to be delusion, which obscures that same knowledge of past lives, due to its nature of not making it known.Tamoti: That same delusion is called darkness (tamo) due to its nature of obscuring.Ālokoti: That same knowledge (vijjā) is called light (āloko) due to its nature of illuminating. And here, the meaning is that knowledge has been attained. The rest is a term of praise. And the construction here is: "Knowledge has been attained by him; then, for him, who has attained knowledge, ignorance is destroyed, perished." Why? Because knowledge has arisen. The same method applies to the other two terms as well.Yathā tanti: Here,yathāti is a simile, andtanti is merely a particle. By non-wandering of mindfulness,appamattassa. By the heat of effort,ātāpino. By not caring for body or life,pahitattassa. Meaning one who has sent forth. This means: "Just as the ignorance of one who is mindful, ardent, and resolute should be destroyed, and knowledge should arise; darkness should be destroyed, and light should arise, so too, his ignorance was destroyed, and knowledge arose; darkness was destroyed, and light arose. He has obtained a result that is in accordance with that strenuous exertion."

vijjāti dibbacakkhuñāṇavijjā.Avijjāti sattānaṃ cutipaṭisandhippaṭicchādikā avijjā. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.

vijjāti means the knowledge of the divine eye.Avijjāti means the ignorance that obscures the passing away and rebirth of beings. The rest is the same as said before.

so evaṃ samāhite citteti vipassanāpādakaṃ catutthajjhānacittaṃ veditabbaṃ.Āsavānaṃ khayañāṇāyāti arahattamaggañāṇatthāya. Arahattamaggo hi āsavavināsanato āsavānaṃ khayoti vuccati, tatra cetaṃ ñāṇaṃ tattha pariyāpannattāti.Cittaṃ abhininnāmetīti vipassanācittaṃ abhinīharati.So idaṃ dukkhanti evamādīsu ettakaṃ dukkhaṃ, na ito bhiyyoti sabbampi dukkhasaccaṃ sarasalakkhaṇappaṭivedhena yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti paṭivijjhati, tassa ca dukkhassa nibbattikaṃ taṇhaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ dukkhasamudayo’’ti, tadubhayampi yaṃ ṭhānaṃ patvā nirujjhati, taṃ tesaṃ apavattiṃ nibbānaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ dukkhanirodho’’ti. Tassa ca sampāpakaṃ ariyamaggaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’’ti sarasalakkhaṇappaṭivedhena yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti paṭivijjhatīti evamattho veditabbo.

so evaṃ samāhite citteti: The fourth jhāna citta, which is the basis for vipassanā, should be understood.Āsavānaṃ khayañāṇāyāti: For the sake of the knowledge of the destruction of the āsavas, meaning for the sake of arahattamaggañāṇa (the knowledge of the path of arahantship). For arahattamagga (the path of arahantship) is called the destruction of the āsavas (āsavānaṃ khayo) because of destroying the āsavas, and this knowledge is included there.Cittaṃ abhininnāmetīti: He directs his vipassanācitta (insight-mind).So idaṃ dukkhanti: In so idaṃ dukkhaṃ, etc., he understands and penetrates as they really are, with their characteristic marks and penetration, all of the dukkha sacca (truth of suffering), knowing "this is the limit of suffering, and no more." And he understands "this is the arising of suffering" (ayaṃ dukkhasamudayo), namely the craving that is the cause of that suffering; and he understands "this is the cessation of suffering" (ayaṃ dukkhanirodho), namely Nibbāna, the place where both of these cease upon reaching it, their cessation; and he understands "this is the path leading to the cessation of suffering" (ayaṃ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā), namely the ariyamagga (noble path), as they really are, with their characteristic marks and penetration. Such is the meaning to be understood.

ime āsavātiādimāha.Tassa evaṃ jānato evaṃ passatoti tassa bhikkhuno evaṃ jānantassa evaṃ passantassa. Saha vipassanāya koṭippattaṃ maggaṃ kathesi.Kāmāsavāti kāmāsavato.Vimuccatīti iminā maggakkhaṇaṃ dasseti. Maggakkhaṇe hi cittaṃ vimuccati, phalakkhaṇe vimuttaṃ hoti.Vimuttasmiṃ vimuttamiti ñāṇanti iminā paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ dasseti.Khīṇā jātītiādīhi tassa bhūmiṃ. Tena hi ñāṇena so paccavekkhanto khīṇā jātītiādīni pajānāti. Katamā panassa jāti khīṇā, kathañca naṃ pajānātīti? Na tāvassa atītā jāti khīṇā pubbeva khīṇattā, na anāgatā, anāgate vāyāmābhāvato, na paccuppannā, vijjamānattā. Yā pana maggassa abhāvitattā uppajjeyya ekacatupañcavokārabhavesu ekacatupañcakkhandhappabhedā jāti, sā maggassa bhāvitattā anuppādadhammataṃ āpajjanena khīṇā. Taṃ so maggabhāvanāya pahīnakilese paccavekkhitvā kilesābhāve vijjamānampi kammaṃ āyatiappaṭisandhikaṃ hotīti jānanto pajānāti.

ime āsavātiādi he said.Tassa evaṃ jānato evaṃ passatoti: Of that bhikkhu, knowing thus, seeing thus. He spoke of the path that has reached the peak of insight.Kāmāsavāti: One with kāmāsava (sensuality-āsava).Vimuccatīti: By this, he shows the moment of the path. For in the moment of the path, the mind is liberated; in the moment of the fruit, it is liberated.Vimuttasmiṃ vimuttamiti ñāṇanti: By this, he shows the knowledge of reviewing.Khīṇā jātītiādīhi: By khīṇā jātī, etc., he shows its ground. Therefore, while reviewing with that knowledge, he knows khīṇā jātī, etc. But which of his jāti (birth) is destroyed, and how does he know it? It is not his past birth that is destroyed, because it was already destroyed before; nor is it his future birth, because there is no effort in the future; nor is it his present birth, because it exists. But the jāti that would arise in the one-, four-, or five-aggregate existences, with the one-, four-, or five-khandha divisions, due to the lack of cultivation of the path, that jāti, by virtue of the cultivation of the path, has attained the state of non-arising. By reviewing that he has abandoned the defilements by the cultivation of the path, he knows, understanding that even the existing kamma does not lead to future rebirth due to the absence of defilements.

Vusitanti vutthaṃ parivutthaṃ, kataṃ caritaṃ niṭṭhitanti attho.Brahmacariyanti maggabrahmacariyaṃ. Puthujjanakalyāṇakena hi saddhiṃ satta sekkhā brahmacariyavāsaṃ vasanti nāma, khīṇāsavo vutthavāso. Tasmā so attano brahmacariyavāsaṃ paccavekkhanto ‘‘vusitaṃ brahmacariya’’nti pajānāti.Kataṃ karaṇīyanti catūsu saccesu catūhi maggehi pariññāpahānasacchikiriyābhāvanābhisamayavasena soḷasavidhampi kiccaṃ niṭṭhāpitanti attho. Puthujjanakalyāṇakādayo hi taṃ kiccaṃ karonti, khīṇāsavo katakaraṇīyo. Tasmā so attano karaṇīyaṃ paccavekkhanto ‘‘kataṃ karaṇīya’’nti pajānāti.Nāparaṃ itthattāyāti puna itthabhāvāya, evaṃ soḷasavidhakiccabhāvāya kilesakkhayāya vā maggabhāvanākiccaṃ me natthīti pajānāti. Atha vāitthattāyāti itthabhāvato, imasmā evaṃ pakārā idāni vattamānakkhandhasantānā aparaṃ khandhasantānaṃ mayhaṃ natthi, ime pana pañcakkhandhā pariññātā tiṭṭhanti chinnamūlakā rukkhā viya. Te carimakaviññāṇanirodhena anupādāno viya jātavedo nibbāyissantīti pajānāti. Idhavijjāti arahattamaggañāṇavijjā.Avijjāti catusaccappaṭicchādikā avijjā. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.

Vusitanti: Lived, fully lived, done, practiced, finished, is the meaning.Brahmacariyanti: The brahmacariya (holy life) of the path. For seven trainees (sekkhā), along with an ordinary virtuous person, are said to live the life of brahmacariya, but a khīṇāsava (arahant) has lived the life. Therefore, while reviewing his life of brahmacariya, he knows "vusitaṃ brahmacariyaṃ" (the holy life has been lived).Kataṃ karaṇīyanti: The sixteen kinds of duties, in terms of the thorough knowledge, abandoning, realization, cultivation, and penetration of the four truths by the four paths, all the tasks have been completed. For ordinary virtuous people, etc., do that task, but a khīṇāsava has done what needs to be done. Therefore, while reviewing his karaṇīya (what needs to be done), he knows "kataṃ karaṇīyaṃ" (what needs to be done has been done).Nāparaṃ itthattāyāti: There is no further practice of the path for me for the sake of this state, for the sake of the destruction of defilements, or for the sake of the sixteenfold duties. Alternatively,itthattāyāti: From this state, from this kind of present continuity of aggregates, I have no other continuity of aggregates; but these five aggregates are understood, standing like trees with their roots cut off. They, with the cessation of the final consciousness, will be extinguished without fuel, like a fire. He knows thus. Here,vijjāti means the knowledge of the path of arahantship.Avijjāti means the ignorance that obscures the four truths. The rest is the same as said before.

Anuccāvacasīlassāti yassa sīlaṃ kālena hāyati, kālena vaḍḍhati, so uccāvacasīlo nāma hoti. Khīṇāsavassa pana sīlaṃ ekantavaḍḍhitameva. Tasmā so anuccāvacasīlo nāma hoti.Vasībhūtanti vasippattaṃ.Susamāhitanti suṭṭhu samāhitaṃ, ārammaṇamhi suṭṭhapitaṃ.Dhīranti dhitisampannaṃ.Maccuhāyinanti maccuṃ jahitvā ṭhitaṃ.Sabbappahāyinanti sabbe pāpadhamme pajahitvā ṭhitaṃ.Buddhanti catusaccabuddhaṃ.Antimadehinanti sabbapacchimasarīradhārinaṃ.Taṃ namassanti gotamanti taṃ gotamagottaṃ buddhasāvakā namassanti. Atha vā gotamabuddhassa sāvakopi gotamo, taṃ gotamaṃ devamanussā namassantīti attho.

Anuccāvacasīlassāti: One whose sīla (virtue) declines at times and increases at times is called uccāvacasīla. But the sīla of a khīṇāsava only ever increases. Therefore, he is called anuccāvacasīla (one whose virtue does not fluctuate).Vasībhūtanti: Having attained mastery.Susamāhitanti: Well composed, well established in the object.Dhīranti: Endowed with wisdom.Maccuhāyinanti: Standing having abandoned death.Sabbappahāyinanti: Standing having abandoned all evil qualities.Buddhanti: Awakened to the four truths.Antimadehinanti: Bearing the very last body.Taṃ namassanti gotamanti: Those disciples of the Buddha of the Gotama clan pay homage to that Gotama. Or, a disciple of the Gotama Buddha is also a Gotama, and gods and humans pay homage to that Gotama, is the meaning.

Pubbenivāsanti pubbenivutthakkhandhaparamparaṃ.Yovetīti yo aveti avagacchati. Yovedītipi pāṭho. Yo avedi, viditaṃ pākaṭaṃ katvā ṭhitoti attho.Saggāpāyañca passatīti cha kāmāvacare nava brahmaloke cattāro ca apāye passati.Jātikkhayaṃ pattoti arahattaṃ patto.Abhiññāvositoti jānitvā kiccavosānena vosito.Munīti moneyyena samannāgato khīṇāsavamuni.Etāhīti heṭṭhā niddiṭṭhāhi pubbenivāsañāṇādīhi.Nāññaṃ lapitalāpananti yo panañño tevijjoti aññehi lapitavacanamattameva lapati, tamahaṃ tevijjoti na vadāmi, attapaccakkhato ñatvā parassapi tisso vijjā kathentamevāhaṃ tevijjoti vadāmīti attho.Kalanti koṭṭhāsaṃ.Nāgghatīti na pāpuṇāti. Idāni brāhmaṇo bhagavato kathāya pasanno pasannākāraṃ karontoabhikkantantiādimāha.

Pubbenivāsanti: The succession of aggregates lived in the past.Yovetīti: One who understands, comprehends. Yovedī is also a reading. One who has understood, has made known and manifest.Saggāpāyañca passatīti: He sees the six sense-sphere heavens, the nine brahma-worlds, and the four woeful realms.Jātikkhayaṃ pattoti: Has attained arahantship.Abhiññāvositoti: Completed with the ending of knowledge and duty.Munīti: A sage (muni) endowed with the quality of silence (moneyya), a khīṇāsavamuni (sage who has destroyed the āsavas).Etāhīti: By these, by the previously mentioned knowledge of past lives, etc.Nāññaṃ lapitalāpananti: But one who is another, who is called a tevijja (one with the three knowledges), only speaks words that are mere babble. I do not call him a tevijja; but I call him a tevijja who, having known directly for himself, tells others about the three knowledges, is the meaning.Kalanti: A portion.Nāgghatīti: Does not reach. Now, the brahmin, pleased with the words of the Blessed One, making a gesture of pleasure, said,abhikkantantiādi.

9. Jāṇussoṇisuttavaṇṇanā
9. Jāṇussoṇisuttavaṇṇanā

60.Navameyassassūti yassa bhaveyyuṃ.Yaññotiādīsu yajitabboti yañño, deyyadhammassetaṃ nāmaṃ.Saddhanti matakabhattaṃ.Thālipākoti varapurisānaṃ dātabbayuttaṃ bhattaṃ.Deyyadhammanti vuttāvasesaṃ yaṃkiñci deyyadhammaṃ nāma.Tevijjesu brāhmaṇesu dānaṃ dadeyyāti sabbametaṃ dānaṃ tevijjesu dadeyya, tevijjā brāhmaṇāva paṭiggahetuṃ yuttāti dasseti. Sesamettha heṭṭhā vuttanayamevāti.

60.In the ninth,yassassūti: Whoever might have.Yaññotiādīsu: Yajitabboti yañño, this is a name for a gift of alms.Saddhanti: A funeral feast.Thālipākoti: Food suitable to be given to excellent people.Deyyadhammanti: What remains of what has been said, whatever is called a gift of alms.Tevijjesu brāhmaṇesu dānaṃ dadeyyāti: He should give all this alms to the tevijjas, showing that only tevijja brahmins are fit to receive. The rest here is the same as said below.

10. Saṅgāravasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Saṅgāravasuttavaṇṇanā

61.Dasamesaṅgāravoti evaṃnāmako rājagahanagare jiṇṇapaṭisaṅkharaṇakārako āyuttakabrāhmaṇo.Upasaṅkamīti bhuttapātarāso hutvā mahājanaparivuto upasaṅkami.Mayamassūti etthaassūti nipātamattaṃ, mayaṃ, bho gotama, brāhmaṇā nāmāti idameva atthapadaṃ.Yaññaṃ yajāmāti bāhirasamaye sabbacatukkena sabbaṭṭhakena sabbasoḷasakena sabbadvattiṃsāya sabbacatusaṭṭhiyā sabbasatena sabbapañcasatenāti ca evaṃ pāṇaghātapaṭisaṃyutto yañño nāma hoti. Taṃ sandhāyevamāha.Anekasārīrikanti anekasarīrasambhavaṃ.Yadidanti yā esā.Yaññādhikaraṇanti yajanakāraṇā ceva yājanakāraṇā cāti attho. Ekasmiñhi bahūnaṃ dadantepi dāpentepi bahūsupi bahūnaṃ dentesupi dāpentesupi puññapaṭipadā anekasārīrikā nāma hoti. Taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Tuyhañca tuyhañca yajāmīti vadantassāpi tvañca tvañca yajāhīti āṇāpentassāpi ca anekasārīrikāva hoti. Tampi sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.Yassa vā tassa vāti yasmā vā tasmā vā.Ekamattānaṃ dametīti attano indriyadamanavasena ekaṃ attānameva dameti.Ekamattānaṃ sametīti attano rāgādisamanavasena ekaṃ attānameva sameti.Parinibbāpetīti rāgādiparinibbāneneva parinibbāpeti.Evamassāyanti evaṃ santepi ayaṃ.

61. In the tenth discourse, saṅgāravo means a brahmin named Saṅgārava, appointed to renovate old buildings in Rājagaha city. Upasaṅkamī means having eaten his morning meal, he approached surrounded by a large crowd. Mayamassū: here, assū is merely an expletive; the actual meaning is "We, venerable Gotama, are called brahmins." Yaññaṃ yajāmā: in external (non-Buddhist) traditions, a sacrifice (yañña) involves killing living beings in every group of four, in every aspect, in every group of sixteen, in every group of thirty-two, in every group of sixty-four, in every group of one hundred, and in every group of five hundred. He speaks thus with reference to that. Anekasārīrikaṃ: originating from many bodies. Yadidaṃ: this that. Yaññādhikaraṇaṃ: it means both the act of sacrificing and the act of causing to sacrifice. Indeed, the meritorious path that involves giving by one person to many, or causing one person to give to many, or giving by many people to many, or causing many people to give to many, is called anekasārīrika. This is said with reference to that. Even for one who says, "I sacrifice to you and you," and for one who commands, "You and you should sacrifice," it is still anekasārīrika. This is also said with reference to that. Yassa vā tassa vā: from whomever or to whomever. Ekamattānaṃ dameti: he tames only one self by way of subduing his own senses. Ekamattānaṃ sameti: he pacifies only one self by way of calming his own passions, etc. Parinibbāpeti: he causes to attain parinibbāna only by the parinibbāna of passions, etc. Evamassāya: even so, this.

tena hi brāhmaṇātiādimāha. Tatthayathā te khameyyāti yathā tuyhaṃ rucceyya.Idha tathāgato loke uppajjatītiādi visuddhimagge vitthāritameva.Ethāyaṃ maggoti etha tumhe, ahamanusāsāmi, ayaṃ maggo.Ayaṃ paṭipadāti tasseva vevacanaṃ.Yathā paṭipannoti yena maggena paṭipanno.Anuttaraṃ brahmacariyogadhanti arahattamaggasaṅkhātassa brahmacariyassa anuttaraṃ ogadhaṃ uttamapatiṭṭhābhūtaṃ nibbānaṃ.Iccāyanti iti ayaṃ.

Tena hi brāhmaṇāti etc. he said. There, yathā te khameyya: as it pleases you. Idha tathāgato loke uppajjatīti etc. is already explained in detail in the Visuddhimagga. Ethāyaṃ maggo: come, I will instruct you, this is the path. Ayaṃ paṭipadā: a synonym for that. Yathā paṭipanno: having followed which path. Anuttaraṃ brahmacariyogadhaṃ: Nibbāna, the ultimate foundation, the unsurpassed immersion (ogadha) of the brahmacariya, which is the path of Arahatship. Iccāyaṃ: thus this.

Appaṭṭhatarāti yattha bahūhi veyyāvaccakarehi vā upakaraṇehi vā attho natthi.Appasamārambhatarāti yattha bahūnaṃ kammacchedavasena pīḷāsaṅkhāto samārambho natthi.Seyyathāpi bhavaṃ gotamo, bhavaṃ cānando, ete me pujjāti yathā bhavaṃ gotamo, bhavañcānando, evarūpā mama pūjitā, tumheyeva dve janā mayhaṃ pujjā ca pāsaṃsā cāti imamatthaṃ sandhāyetaṃ vadati. Tassa kira evaṃ ahosi – ‘‘ānandatthero maṃyeva imaṃ pañhaṃ kathāpetukāmo, attano kho pana vaṇṇe vutte padussanako nāma natthī’’ti. Tasmā pañhaṃ akathetukāmo vaṇṇabhaṇanena vikkhepaṃ karonto evamāha.

Appaṭṭhatarā: where there is no need for many attendants or equipment. Appasamārambhatarā: where there is no undertaking (samārambha), understood as oppression, through the cutting off of the works of many. Seyyathāpi bhavaṃ gotamo, bhavaṃ cānando, ete me pujjā: just as venerable Gotama and venerable Ānanda are, such are my honored ones; only these two people are worthy of honor and praise to me—he speaks this meaning. It seems he thought thus: "The Elder Ānanda wants to make me speak only about this question; however, there is no one who gets angry when his own praise is spoken." Therefore, not wanting to speak about the question, he makes a distraction by speaking praise, and says this.

Nakho tyāhanti na kho te ahaṃ. Theropi kira cintesi – ‘‘ayaṃ brāhmaṇo pañhaṃ akathetukāmo parivattati, imaṃ pañhaṃ etaṃyeva kathāpessāmī’’ti. Tasmā naṃ evamāha.

Na kho tyāhaṃ: I do not, indeed, [say that]. It seems the Elder also thought: "This brahmin, not wanting to speak about the question, is evading it; I will make him speak about this question." Therefore, he said this to him.

Sahadhammikanti sakāraṇaṃ.Saṃsādetīti saṃsīdāpeti.No vissajjetīti na katheti.Yaṃnūnāhaṃ parimoceyyanti yaṃnūnāhaṃ ubhopete vihesato parimoceyyaṃ. Brāhmaṇo hi ānandena pucchitaṃ pañhaṃ akathento viheseti, ānandopi brāhmaṇaṃ akathentaṃ kathāpento. Iti ubhopete vihesato mocessāmīti cintetvā evamāha.Kā nvajjāti kā nu ajja.Antarākathā udapādīti aññissā kathāya antarantare katarā kathā uppajjīti pucchati. Tadā kira rājantepure tīṇi pāṭihāriyāni ārabbha kathā udapādi, taṃ pucchāmīti satthā evamāha. Atha brāhmaṇo ‘‘idāni vattuṃ sakkhissāmī’’ti rājantepure uppannaṃ kathaṃ ārocentoayaṃ khvajja, bho gotamātiādimāha. Tatthaayaṃ khvajjāti ayaṃ kho ajja.Pubbe sudanti etthasudanti nipātamattaṃ.Uttari manussadhammāti dasakusalakammapathasaṅkhātā manussadhammā uttariṃ.Iddhipāṭihāriyaṃ dassesunti bhikkhācāraṃ gacchantā ākāseneva gamiṃsu ceva āgamiṃsu cāti evaṃ pubbe pavattaṃ ākāsagamanaṃ sandhāyevamāha.Etarahi pana bahutarā ca bhikkhūti idaṃ so brāhmaṇo ‘‘pubbe bhikkhū ‘cattāro paccaye uppādessāmā’ti maññe evamakaṃsu, idāni paccayānaṃ uppannabhāvaṃ ñatvā soppena ceva pamādena ca vītināmentī’’ti laddhiyā evamāha.

Sahadhammikaṃ: with a reason. Saṃsādeti: causes to sink down. No vissajjeti: does not explain. Yaṃnūnāhaṃ parimoceyyaṃ: what if I were to free both of these from vexation? Indeed, the brahmin vexes by not answering the question asked by Ānanda, and Ānanda also vexes the brahmin by making him speak when he does not want to. Thinking "Thus, I will free both of these from vexation," he said this. Kā nvajjā: what now today. Antarākathā udapādī: which story arose in between another story? It seems that at that time, a story arose concerning three miracles in the royal palace; the Teacher asks this, thinking, "I will ask about that." Then the brahmin, thinking, "Now I will be able to speak," declaring the story that arose in the royal palace, said ayaṃ khvajja, bho gotamāti etc. There, ayaṃ khvajjā: this now today. Pubbe sudaṃ: here, sudaṃ is merely an expletive. Uttari manussadhammā: beyond ordinary human qualities, [beyond] human qualities consisting of the ten wholesome courses of action. Iddhipāṭihāriyaṃ dassesuṃ: while going for alms, they went and came through the sky, he says thus with reference to that previous occurrence of traveling through the sky. Etarahi pana bahutarā ca bhikkhū: now, however, many monks—this is what that brahmin said with the view that "Previously, the monks thought, ‘We will generate the four requisites,’ and thus they acted; now, knowing the arisen state of the requisites, they spend time in luxury and negligence."

Pāṭihāriyānīti paccanīkapaṭiharaṇavasena pāṭihāriyāni.Iddhipāṭihāriyanti ijjhanavasena iddhi, paṭiharaṇavasena pāṭihāriyaṃ, iddhiyeva pāṭihāriyaṃ iddhipāṭihāriyaṃ. Itaresupi eseva nayo.Anekavihitaṃ iddhividhantiādīnaṃ attho ceva bhāvanānayo ca visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 2.365) vitthāritova.

Pāṭihāriyāni: miracles by way of countering opponents. Iddhipāṭihāriyaṃ: the power (iddhi) is in the sense of success, the miracle (pāṭihāriyaṃ) is in the sense of counteracting; the miracle that is power, iddhipāṭihāriya. The same method applies to the others also. The meaning of anekavihitaṃ iddhividhaṃ etc. and the method of cultivation are already explained in detail in the Visuddhimagga (Visuddhi. 2.365).

Nimittenaādisatīti āgatanimittena vā gatanimittena vā ṭhitanimittena vā ‘‘idaṃ nāma bhavissatī’’ti katheti. Tatridaṃ vatthu – eko kira rājā tisso muttā gahetvā purohitaṃ pucchi ‘‘kiṃ me, ācariya, hatthe’’ti. So ito cito ca olokesi, tena ca samayena ekā sarabū ‘‘makkhikaṃ gahessāmī’’ti pakkhantā, gahaṇakāle makkhikā palātā. So makkhikāya muttattā ‘‘muttā mahārājā’’ti āha. Muttā tāva hontu, kati muttāti. So puna nimittaṃ olokesi. Athāvidūre kukkuṭo tikkhattuṃ saddaṃ nicchāresi. Brāhmaṇo ‘‘tisso mahārājā’’ti āha. Evaṃ ekacco āgatanimittena katheti. Etenupāyena gataṭhitanimittehipi kathanaṃ veditabbaṃ.Evampi te manoti evaṃ tava mano somanassito vā domanassito vā kāmavitakkādisaṃyutto vāti. Dutiyaṃ tasseva vevacanaṃ.Itipi te cittanti itipi tava cittaṃ, imañca imañca atthaṃ cintayamānaṃ pavattatīti attho.Bahuṃ cepi ādisatīti bahuṃ cepi katheti.Tatheva taṃ hotīti yathā kathitaṃ, tatheva hoti.

Nimittena ādisati: he tells what will happen based on a sign that has come, or a sign that has gone, or a sign that is present. Here is an example: it seems a king took three pearls and asked the family priest, "What is in my hand, teacher?" He looked here and there, and at that time, a sarabū bird was flying, thinking, "I will catch a fly"; at the moment of catching, the fly fled. He said, "Pearls, great king," because the fly escaped (muttā) from the bird. "Let them be pearls, but how many pearls?" He again looked at the sign. Then, not far away, a rooster crowed three times. The brahmin said, "Three, great king." Thus, some tell based on a sign that has come. By this method, telling based on signs that have gone and signs that are present should also be understood. Evampi te mano: thus, is your mind associated with joy or sorrow, or connected with thoughts of sensual pleasure, etc.? The second is a synonym for that. Itipi te cittaṃ: thus also, your mind proceeds thinking about this and that thing, this is the meaning. Bahuṃ cepi ādisati: even if he tells much. Tatheva taṃ hotī: as it is said, so it happens.

Amanussānanti yakkhapisācādīnaṃ.Devatānanti cātumahārājikādīnaṃ.Saddaṃ sutvāti aññassa cittaṃ ñatvā kathentānaṃ sutvā.Vitakkavipphārasaddanti vitakkavipphāravasena uppannaṃ vippalapantānaṃ suttappamattādīnaṃ saddaṃ.Sutvāti taṃ sutvā. Yaṃ vitakkayato tassa so saddo uppanno, tassa vasena ‘‘evampi te mano’’tiādisati.

Amanussānaṃ: of non-humans, such as yakkhas and pisācas. Devatānaṃ: of deities such as the Four Great Kings. Saddaṃ sutvā: having heard those who tell by knowing the minds of others. Vitakkavipphārasaddaṃ: the sound of those rambling due to the dissipation of thoughts, of those who are sleepy or negligent, etc. Sutvā: having heard that. Based on that sound that arose from one who is thinking, he declares "Thus is your mind," etc.

Tatrimāni vatthūni – eko kira manusso ‘‘aṭṭaṃ karissāmī’’ti gāmā nagaraṃ gacchanto nikkhantaṭṭhānato paṭṭhāya ‘‘vinicchayasabhāyaṃ rañño ca rājamahāmattānañca idaṃ kathessāmi idaṃ kathessāmī’’ti vitakkento rājakulaṃ gato viya rañño purato ṭhito viya aṭṭakārakena saddhiṃ kathento viya ca ahosi, tassa taṃ vitakkavipphāravasena niccharantaṃ saddaṃ sutvā eko puriso ‘‘kenaṭṭhena gacchasī’’ti āha. Aṭṭakammenāti. Gaccha, jayo te bhavissatīti. So gantvā aṭṭaṃ katvā jayameva pāpuṇi.

Here are some examples: it seems a man, thinking "I will file a lawsuit," while going from his village to the city, starting from the place he left, thinking "In the judgment hall, I will tell this and that to the king and the royal ministers," was as if he went to the royal palace, as if he stood before the king, and as if he was talking with the plaintiff. Hearing that sound emanating from him due to the dissipation of his thoughts, a man asked, "For what purpose are you going?" "For a lawsuit." "Go, you will be victorious!" He went, filed the lawsuit, and indeed attained victory.

Aparopi thero moḷiyagāme piṇḍāya cari. Atha naṃ nikkhamantaṃ ekā dārikā aññavihitā na addasa. So gāmadvāre ṭhatvā nivattitvā oloketvā taṃ disvā vitakkento agamāsi. Gacchantoyeva ca ‘‘kiṃ nu kho kurumānā dārikā na addasā’’ti vacībhedaṃ akāsi. Passe ṭhito eko puriso sutvā ‘‘tumhe, bhante, moḷiyagāme caritthā’’ti āha.

Another Elder was going for alms in Moḷiyagāma. Then, as he was leaving, a girl, occupied elsewhere, did not see him. He stood at the village gate, turned back, looked around, saw her, and went, thinking. While going, he made a verbal expression, "What was the girl doing that she did not see [me]?" A man standing nearby heard and said, "Venerable sir, did you go for alms in Moḷiyagāma?"

Manosaṅkhārāpaṇihitāti cittasaṅkhārā suṭṭhapitā.Vitakkessatīti vitakkayissati pavattayissatīti pajānāti. Pajānanto ca āgamanena jānāti, pubbabhāgena jānāti, antosamāpattiyaṃ cittaṃ apaloketvā jānāti.Āgamanena jānātināma kasiṇaparikammakāleyeva ‘‘yenākārenesa kasiṇabhāvanaṃ āraddho paṭhamajjhānaṃ vā…pe… catutthajjhānaṃ vā aṭṭha vā samāpattiyo nibbattessatī’’ti jānāti.Pubbabhāgena jānātināma paṭhamavipassanāya āraddhāyayeva jānāti, ‘‘yenākārena esa vipassanaṃ āraddho sotāpattimaggaṃ vā nibbattessati…pe… arahattamaggaṃ vā nibbattessatī’’ti jānāti.Antosamāpattiyaṃ cittaṃ oloketvā jānātināma – ‘‘yenākārena imassa manosaṅkhārā suṭṭhapitā, imassa nāma cittassa anantarā imaṃ nāma vitakkaṃ vitakkessati, ito vuṭṭhitassa etassa hānabhāgiyo vā samādhi bhavissati ṭhitibhāgiyo vā visesabhāgiyo vā nibbedhabhāgiyo vā, abhiññāyo vā nibbattessatī’’ti jānāti. Tattha puthujjano cetopariyañāṇalābhī puthujjanānaṃyeva cittaṃ jānāti, na ariyānaṃ. Ariyesupi heṭṭhimo uparimassa cittaṃ na jānāti, uparimo pana heṭṭhimassa jānāti. Etesu ca sotāpanno sotāpattiphalasamāpattiṃ samāpajjati…pe… arahā arahattaphalasamāpattiṃ samāpajjati. Uparimo heṭṭhimaṃ na samāpajjati. Tesañhi heṭṭhimā heṭṭhimā samāpatti tatravattiyeva hoti.Tatheva taṃhotīti etaṃ ekaṃsena tatheva hoti. Cetopariyañāṇavasena ñātañhi aññathābhāvi nāma natthi.

Manosaṅkhārā paṇihitā: mental formations are well established. Vitakkessati: he will think, he will cause to proceed, he knows. And knowing, he knows by arrival, he knows by the preliminary stage, he knows by looking at the mind within the attainment. Āgamanena jānāti means that even at the time of preparing the kasiṇa, he knows, "In what way will he, having started this kasiṇa meditation, generate the first jhāna…pe… the fourth jhāna, or the eight attainments?" Pubbabhāgena jānāti means that even at the start of the first vipassanā, he knows, "In what way will he, having started this vipassanā, generate the path of Stream-entry…pe… the path of Arahatship?" Antosamāpattiyaṃ cittaṃ oloketvā jānāti means—"In what way are his mental formations well established, immediately after this mind, he will think this thought, for him who has arisen from this, there will be a samādhi that is declining, or one that is stable, or one that is progressing, or one that is penetrative, or he will generate the higher knowledges?" There, an ordinary person who has gained the knowledge of reading minds knows the minds of ordinary people only, not of noble ones. Even among the noble ones, the inferior one does not know the mind of the superior one, but the superior one knows the mind of the inferior one. And among these, a Stream-enterer attains the attainment of the fruit of Stream-entry…pe… an Arahant attains the attainment of the fruit of Arahatship. The superior one does not attain the inferior one. Indeed, for them, the inferior attainment is always in its own sphere. Tatheva taṃ hotī: this is definitely so. Indeed, there is no possibility of the known through the knowledge of reading minds being otherwise.

Evaṃ vitakkethāti evaṃ nekkhammavitakkādayo pavattentā vitakketha.Mā evaṃ vitakkayitthāti evaṃ kāmavitakkādayo pavattentā mā vitakkayittha.Evaṃ manasi karothāti evaṃ aniccasaññameva, dukkhasaññādīsu vā aññataraṃ manasi karotha.Mā evanti niccantiādinā nayena mā manasā karittha.Idanti idaṃ pañcakāmaguṇarāgaṃ pajahatha.Idañca upasampajjāti idaṃ catumaggaphalappabhedaṃ lokuttaradhammameva upasampajja pāpuṇitvā nipphādetvā viharatha.

Evaṃ vitakketha: thus, thinking in ways that promote thoughts of renunciation, etc., you should think. Mā evaṃ vitakkayittha: thus, thinking in ways that promote thoughts of sensual pleasure, etc., you should not think. Evaṃ manasi karothā: thus, you should direct your mind to the perception of impermanence itself, or to any one of the perceptions of suffering, etc. Mā evaṃ: you should not direct your mind in the way of permanence, etc. Idaṃ: you should abandon this lust for the five strands of sense pleasure. Idañca upasampajjā: and having attained and realized this supramundane Dhamma, which is divided into the four paths and fruits, you should live.

Māyāsahadhammarūpaṃ viya khāyatīti māyāya samānakāraṇajātikaṃ viya hutvā upaṭṭhāti. Māyākāropi hi udakaṃ gahetvā telaṃ karoti, telaṃ gahetvā udakanti evaṃ anekarūpaṃ māyaṃ dasseti. Idampi pāṭihāriyaṃ tathārūpamevāti.Idampi me, bho gotama, pāṭihāriyaṃ māyāsahadhammarūpaṃ viya khāyatīti cintāmaṇikavijjāsarikkhakataṃ sandhāya evaṃ āha. Cintāmaṇikavijjaṃ jānantāpi hi āgacchantameva disvā ‘‘ayaṃ idaṃ nāma vitakkento āgacchatī’’ti jānanti. Tathā ‘‘idaṃ nāma vitakkento ṭhito, idaṃ nāma vitakkento nisinno, idaṃ nāma vitakkento nipanno’’ti jānanti.

Māyāsahadhammarūpaṃ viya khāyati: it appears as if it is of the same kind as magic. Indeed, a magician also takes water and makes oil, or takes oil and makes water; thus, he shows various kinds of magic. This miracle is also of that kind. Idampi me, bho gotama, pāṭihāriyaṃ māyāsahadhammarūpaṃ viya khāyati: he said thus with reference to something done similar to the Cintāmaṇikā (wish-fulfilling gem) art. Indeed, those who know the Cintāmaṇikā art also, seeing one coming, know "This one is coming thinking about this." Similarly, they know "This one is standing thinking about this, this one is sitting thinking about this, this one is lying down thinking about this."

Abhikkantataranti sundarataraṃ.Paṇītataranti uttamataraṃ.Bhavañhi gotamo avitakkaṃ avicāranti idha brāhmaṇo avasesaṃ ādesanāpāṭihāriyaṃ bāhirakanti na gaṇhi. Idañca pana sabbaṃ so brāhmaṇo tathāgatassa vaṇṇaṃ kathentoyeva āha.Addhā kho tyāyanti ekaṃseneva tayā ayaṃ.Āsajja upanīya vācā bhāsitāti mama guṇe ghaṭṭetvā mameva guṇānaṃ santikaṃ upanītā vācā bhāsitā.Apica tyāhaṃ byākarissāmīti apica te ahameva kathessāmīti. Sesaṃ uttānatthamevāti.

Abhikkantataraṃ: more beautiful. Paṇītataraṃ: more excellent. Bhavañhi gotamo avitakkaṃ avicāraṃ: here, the brahmin did not consider the remaining miracle of mind-reading to be external. And indeed, the brahmin said all of this only while speaking in praise of the Tathāgata. Addhā kho tyāyaṃ: indeed, this is definitely by you. Āsajja upanīya vācā bhāsitā: a word spoken by closely associating with my qualities and bringing it near to the presence of my own qualities. Apica tyāhaṃ byākarissāmī: moreover, I myself will explain it to you. The rest is easy to understand.

(7) 2. Mahāvaggo

(7) 2. The Great Chapter

1. Titthāyatanasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Commentary on the Titthāyatana Sutta

62.Dutiyassa paṭhametitthāyatanānīti titthabhūtāni āyatanāni, titthiyānaṃ vā āyatanāni. Tattha titthaṃ jānitabbaṃ, titthakarā jānitabbā, titthiyā jānitabbā, titthiyasāvakā jānitabbā. Titthaṃ nāma dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhiyo. Titthikarā nāma tāsaṃ diṭṭhīnaṃ uppādakā. Titthiyā nāma yesaṃ tā diṭṭhiyo ruccanti khamanti. Titthiyasāvakā nāma tesaṃ paccayadāyakā.Āyatananti ‘‘kambojo assānaṃ āyatanaṃ, gunnaṃ dakkhiṇāpatho āyatana’’nti ettha sañjātiṭṭhānaṃ āyatanaṃ nāma.

62. In the second [chapter], in the first [sutta], titthāyatanāni: places that are like fords (tittha), or places for the titthiyas. There, tittha should be known, titthakaras should be known, titthiyas should be known, and titthiya disciples should be known. Tittha means the sixty-two views. Titthakaras means those who originated those views. Titthiyas means those who like and accept those views. Titthiya disciples means those who give them support. Āyatana: here, the word "āyatana" means the place of origin, as in "Kamboja is the place of origin for horses, the Southern Path is the place of origin for cattle."

‘‘Manorame āyatane, sevanti naṃ vihaṅgamā;

"In a delightful āyatana, birds resort to it;
Those seeking shade go for shade, those seeking fruit, for eating fruit." (A. Ni. 5.38) –

Samanuyuñjiyamānānīti kā nāmetā diṭṭhiyoti evaṃ pucchiyamānāni.Samanugāhiyamānānīti kiṃkāraṇā etā diṭṭhiyo uppannāti evaṃ sammā anuggāhiyamānāni.Samanubhāsiyamānānīti paṭinissajjetha etāni pāpakāni diṭṭhigatānīti evaṃ sammā anusāsiyamānāni. Apica tīṇipi etāni anuyogapucchāvevacanāneva. Tena vuttaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ – ‘‘samanuyuñjatīti vā samanuggāhatīti vā samanubhāsatīti vā esese ekaṭṭhe same samabhāge tajjāte taññevā’’ti.

Samanuyuñjiyamānāni: being questioned thus, "What are these views called?" Samanugāhiyamānāni: being rightly investigated thus, "What is the reason these views arose?" Samanubhāsiyamānāni: being rightly instructed thus, "Reject these evil views." Moreover, all three of these are synonyms for inquiry and questioning. Therefore, it is said in the commentary: "Whether it is samanuyuñjati, or samanuggāhati, or samanubhāsati, all these have the same meaning, they are equal, similar, of the same kind, just that."

Parampigantvāti ācariyaparamparā laddhiparamparā attabhāvaparamparāti etesu yaṃkiñci paramparaṃ gantvāpi.Akiriyāya saṇṭhahantīti akiriyamatte saṃtiṭṭhanti. ‘‘Amhākaṃ ācariyo pubbekatavādī, amhākaṃ pācariyo pubbekatavādī, amhākaṃ ācariyapācariyo pubbekatavādī. Amhākaṃ ācariyo issaranimmānavādī, amhākaṃ pācariyo issaranimmānavādī, amhākaṃ ācariyapācariyo issaranimmānavādī. Amhākaṃ ācariyo ahetuapaccayavādī, amhākaṃ pācariyo ahetuapaccayavādī, amhākaṃ ācariyapācariyo ahetuapaccayavādī’’ti evaṃ gacchantāni hi etāni ācariyaparamparaṃ gacchanti nāma. ‘‘Amhākaṃ ācariyo pubbekataladdhiko, amhākaṃ pācariyo…pe… amhākaṃ ācariyapācariyo ahetuapaccayaladdhiko’’ti evaṃ gacchantāni laddhiparamparaṃ gacchanti nāma. ‘‘Amhākaṃ ācariyassa attabhāvo pubbekatahetu, amhākaṃ pācariyassa…pe… amhākaṃ ācariyapācariyassa attabhāvo ahetu apaccayo’’ti evaṃ gacchantāni attabhāvaparamparaṃ gacchanti nāma. Evaṃ pana suvidūrampi gacchantāni akiriyamatteyeva saṇṭhahanti, ekopi etesaṃ diṭṭhigatikānaṃ kattā vā kāretā vā na paññāyati.

Parampi gantvā means, having gone to any tradition, whether it be a lineage of teachers (ācariya-paramparā), a lineage of doctrines (laddhi-paramparā), or a lineage of self-becoming (attabhāva-paramparā). Akiriyāya saṇṭhahantī means, they are established in the doctrine of non-action (akiriyavāda). "Our teacher was a proponent of past-action (pubbekatavādī), our preceptor was a proponent of past-action, our teacher-preceptor was a proponent of past-action. Our teacher was a proponent of creation by a supreme being (issaranimmānavādī), our preceptor was a proponent of creation by a supreme being, our teacher-preceptor was a proponent of creation by a supreme being. Our teacher was a proponent of causelessness (ahetu-apaccayavādī), our preceptor was a proponent of causelessness, our teacher-preceptor was a proponent of causelessness," thus, these doctrines go by the lineage of teachers. "Our teacher held the doctrine of past-action, our preceptor… our teacher-preceptor held the doctrine of causelessness," thus, these doctrines go by the lineage of doctrines. "Our teacher's existence is due to past-action, our preceptor's… our teacher-preceptor's existence is causeless and without condition," thus, these doctrines go by the lineage of self-becoming. Even going thus far, they are established only in the doctrine of non-action, for not even one among these adherents of views is found to be an agent or instigator.

Purisapuggaloti satto. Kāmañca purisotipi vutte puggalotipi vutte sattoyeva vutto hoti, ayaṃ pana sammutikathā nāma yo yathā jānāti, tassa tathā vuccati.Paṭisaṃvedetīti attano santāne uppannaṃ jānāti paṭisaṃviditaṃ karoti, anubhavati vā.Pubbekatahetūti pubbekatakāraṇā, pubbekatakammapaccayeneva paṭisaṃvedetīti attho. Iminā kammavedanañca kiriyavedanañca paṭikkhipitvā ekaṃ vipākavedanameva sampaṭicchanti. Ye vā ime pittasamuṭṭhānā ābādhā semhasamuṭṭhānā vātasamuṭṭhānā sannipātikā utupariṇāmajā visamaparihārajā opakkamikā ābādhā kammavipākajā ābādhāti aṭṭha rogā vuttā, tesu satta paṭikkhipitvā ekaṃ vipākavedanaṃyeva sampaṭicchanti. Yepime diṭṭhadhammavedanīyaṃ upapajjavedanīyaṃ aparapariyāyavedanīyanti tayo kammarāsayo vuttā, tesupi dve paṭibāhitvā ekaṃ aparapariyāyakammaṃyeva sampaṭicchanti. Yepime diṭṭhadhammavedanīyo vipāko upapajjavedanīyo aparapariyāyavedanīyoti tayo vipākarāsayo vuttā, tesupi dve paṭibāhitvā ekaṃ aparapariyāyavipākameva sampaṭicchanti. Yepime kusalacetanā akusalacetanā vipākacetanā kiriyacetanāti cattāro cetanārāsayo vuttā, tesupi tayo paṭibāhitvā ekaṃ vipākacetanaṃyeva sampaṭicchanti.

Purisapuggalo means, a being (satta). Even though when 'person' (puriso) is said or when 'individual' (puggalo) is said, only a being is spoken of, but this is called conventional language (sammutikathā), for whatever one knows, it is spoken of accordingly. Paṭisaṃvedetī means, knows or experiences (anubhavati) what has arisen in one's own being (santāne), makes it known, or experiences. Pubbekatahetū means, due to past action (pubbekatakāraṇā), experiences only due to past karma-condition (pubbekatakammapaccayeneva), is the meaning. By this, they reject both the feeling of karma (kammavedana) and the feeling of action (kiriyavedana) and accept only feeling as result (vipākavedana). Of these eight diseases that are spoken of, namely, diseases arising from bile, diseases arising from phlegm, diseases arising from wind, diseases arising from a combination (sannipātikā), diseases arising from change of seasons (utupariṇāmajā), diseases arising from improper behavior (visamaparihārajā), diseases arising from attack (opakkamikā), and diseases arising from the result of karma (kammavipākajā ābādhā), rejecting seven, they accept only feeling as result (vipākavedana). Of these three accumulations of karma that are spoken of, namely, immediately effective karma (diṭṭhadhammavedanīyaṃ), subsequently effective karma (upapajjavedanīyaṃ), and indefinitely effective karma (aparapariyāyavedanīyaṃ), rejecting two, they accept only indefinitely effective karma. Of these three accumulations of results (vipākarāsayo) that are spoken of, namely, immediately effective result (diṭṭhadhammavedanīyo vipāko), subsequently effective result (upapajjavedanīyo), and indefinitely effective result (aparapariyāyavedanīyo), rejecting two, they accept only indefinitely effective result. Of these four accumulations of volition (cetanārāsayo) that are spoken of, namely, wholesome volition (kusalacetanā), unwholesome volition (akusalacetanā), resultant volition (vipākacetanā), and functional volition (kiriyacetanā), rejecting three, they accept only resultant volition.

Issaranimmānahetūti issaranimmānakāraṇā, issarena nimmitattā paṭisaṃvedetīti attho. Ayaṃ hi tesaṃ adhippāyo – imā tisso vedanā paccuppanne attanā katamūlakena vā āṇattimūlakena vā pubbekatena vā ahetuapaccayā vā paṭisaṃvedituṃ nāma na sakkā, issaranimmānakāraṇāyeva pana imā paṭisaṃvedetīti. Evaṃvādino panete heṭṭhā vuttesu aṭṭhasu rogesu ekampi asampaṭicchitvā sabbe paṭibāhanti, heṭṭhā vuttesu ca tīsu kammarāsīsu tīsu vipākarāsīsu catūsu cetanārāsīsu ekampi asampaṭicchitvā sabbepi paṭibāhanti.

Issaranimmānahetū means, due to creation by a supreme being (issaranimmānakāraṇā), experiences because it is created by a supreme being, is the meaning. For this is their intention: these three feelings cannot possibly be experienced in the present due to one's own action, or due to command, or due to past action, or without cause or condition; but they are experienced only because of creation by a supreme being. But these speakers, of the eight diseases mentioned below, do not accept even one, rejecting all; and of the three accumulations of karma, the three accumulations of results, and the four accumulations of volition mentioned below, they do not accept even one, rejecting all.

Ahetuapaccayāti hetuñca paccayañca vinā, akāraṇeneva paṭisaṃvedetīti attho. Ayañhi nesaṃ adhippāyo – imā tisso vedanā paccuppanne attanā katamūlakena vā āṇattimūlakena vā pubbekatena vā issaranimmānahetunā vā paṭisaṃvedituṃ nāma na sakkā, ahetuapaccayāyeva pana imā paṭisaṃvedetīti. Evaṃvādino panete heṭṭhā vuttesu rogādīsu ekampi asampaṭicchitvā sabbaṃ paṭibāhanti.

Ahetuapaccayā means, without cause and condition (hetuñca paccayañca vinā), experiences without reason, is the meaning. For this is their intention: these three feelings cannot possibly be experienced in the present due to one's own action, or due to command, or due to past action, or due to creation by a supreme being; but they are experienced only without cause or condition. But these speakers, of the diseases and so on mentioned below, do not accept even one, rejecting all.

tatra, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tatthaevaṃ vadāmīti laddhipatiṭṭhāpanatthaṃ evaṃ vadāmīti dasseti. Laddhiñhi appatiṭṭhāpetvā niggayhamānā laddhito laddhiṃ saṅkamanti, bho gotama, na mayaṃ pubbekatavādaṃ vadāmātiādīni vadanti. Laddhiyā pana patiṭṭhāpitāya saṅkamituṃ alabhantā suniggahitā honti, iti nesaṃ laddhipatiṭṭhāpanatthaṃ evaṃ vadāmīti āha.Tenahāyasmantoti tena hi āyasmanto. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yadi etaṃ saccaṃ, evaṃ sante tena tumhākaṃ vādena.Pāṇātipātino bhavissanti pubbekatahetūti ye keci loke pāṇaṃ atipātenti, sabbe te pubbekatahetu pāṇātipātino bhavissanti. Kiṃkāraṇā? Na hi pāṇātipātakammaṃ attanā katamūlakena na āṇattimūlakena na issaranimmānahetunā na ahetuapaccayā sakkā paṭisaṃvedetuṃ, pubbekatahetuyeva paṭisaṃvedetīti ayaṃ vo laddhi. Yathā ca pāṇātipātino, evaṃ pāṇātipātā viramantāpi pubbekatahetuyeva viramissantīti. Iti bhagavā tesaṃyeva laddhiṃ gahetvā tesaṃ niggahaṃ āropeti. Iminā nayenaadinnādāyinotiādīsupi yojanā veditabbā.

He began with tatra, bhikkhave. There, evaṃ vadāmī shows that I speak thus for the purpose of establishing a doctrine (laddhipatiṭṭhāpanatthaṃ). For without establishing a doctrine, when being refuted, they shift from doctrine to doctrine, saying, "Venerable Gotama, we do not advocate the doctrine of past-action," and so on. But when the doctrine is established, being unable to shift, they are thoroughly refuted, thus he said "evaṃ vadāmī" for the purpose of establishing their doctrine. Tenahāyasmanto means, therefore, venerable sirs. What is said is this: if this is true, then, given your view (tumhākaṃ vādena), pāṇātipātino bhavissanti pubbekatahetū means, whatever beings in the world take life, all of them will take life due to past-action. For what reason? Because the act of taking life cannot possibly be experienced due to one's own action, or not due to command, or not due to creation by a supreme being, or not without cause or condition; according to your doctrine, it is experienced only due to past-action. And just as those who take life, so too those who abstain from taking life will abstain only due to past-action. Thus, the Blessed One, taking their own doctrine, imposes refutation upon them. In this way, the application should be understood for adinnādāyino and the rest as well.

Sāratopaccāgacchatanti sārabhāvena gaṇhantānaṃ.Chandoti kattukamyatāchando.Idaṃ vā karaṇīyaṃidaṃ vā akaraṇīyanti ettha ayaṃ adhippāyo – idaṃ vā karaṇīyanti kattabbassa karaṇatthāya, idaṃ vā akaraṇīyanti akattabbassa akaraṇatthāya kattukamyatā vā paccattapurisakāro vā na hoti. Chandavāyāmesu vā asantesu ‘‘idaṃ kattabba’’ntipi ‘‘idaṃ na kattabba’’ntipi na hoti.Iti karaṇīyākaraṇīye kho pana saccato thetato anupalabbhiyamāneti evaṃ kattabbe ca akattabbe ca bhūtato thirato apaññāyamāne alabbhamāne. Yadi hi kattabbaṃ kātuṃ akattabbato ca viramituṃ labheyya, karaṇīyākaraṇīyaṃ saccato thetato upalabbheyya. Yasmā pana ubhayampi taṃ esa nupalabbhati, tasmā taṃ saccato thetato na upalabbhati, evaṃ tasmiṃ ca anupalabbhiyamāneti attho.Muṭṭhassatīnanti naṭṭhassatīnaṃ vissaṭṭhassatīnaṃ.Anārakkhānaṃ viharatanti chasu dvāresu nirārakkhānaṃ viharantānaṃ.Na hoti paccattaṃ sahadhammiko samaṇavādoti evaṃ bhūtānaṃ tumhākaṃ vā aññesaṃ vā mayaṃ samaṇāti paccattaṃ sakāraṇo samaṇavādo na hoti na ijjhati. Samaṇāpi hi pubbekatakāraṇāyeva honti, assamaṇāpi pubbekatakāraṇāyevāti.Sahadhammikoti sakāraṇo.Niggahohotīti mama niggaho hoti, te pana niggahitā hontīti.

Sārato paccāgacchata means, for those who grasp in an essential manner. Chando means, the desire to do (kattukamyatāchando). Idaṃ vā karaṇīyaṃ idaṃ vā akaraṇīya in this regard, this is the intention: idaṃ vā karaṇīyaṃ, for the purpose of doing what should be done; idaṃ vā akaraṇīyaṃ, for the purpose of not doing what should not be done, there is no desire to do or personal effort (paccattapurisakāro). Or, in the absence of desire and effort, "this should be done" and "this should not be done" does not occur. Iti karaṇīyākaraṇīye kho pana saccato thetato anupalabbhiyamāne thus, when what should be done and what should not be done are not found, in reality, firmly. For if it were possible to do what should be done and to abstain from what should not be done, what should be done and what should not be done would be found in reality, firmly. But since neither of these is found, therefore, it is not found in reality, firmly, thus, it means when that is not found. Muṭṭhassatīnaṃ means, for those whose mindfulness is lost (naṭṭhassatīnaṃ), whose mindfulness is scattered (vissaṭṭhassatīnaṃ). Anārakkhānaṃ viharata means, for those who dwell unguarded at the six sense doors. Na hoti paccattaṃ sahadhammiko samaṇavādo means, for you or for others who are like this, our claim to be ascetics (samaṇāti) is not, in reality, a reasoned claim to be ascetics, it does not succeed. For ascetics also are ascetics only due to past-action, and non-ascetics are non-ascetics only due to past-action. Sahadhammiko means, with reason. Niggaho hotī means, the refutation is mine, but they are those who are refuted.

tatra, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tassattho pubbekatavāde vuttanayeneva veditabbo, tathā ahetukavādepi.

He began with tatra, bhikkhave. Its meaning should be understood in the same way as explained in the doctrine of past-action, and likewise in the doctrine of causelessness.

ayaṃkho pana, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tatthaaniggahitoti aññehi aniggahito niggahetuṃ asakkuṇeyyo.Asaṃkiliṭṭhoti nikkileso parisuddho, ‘‘saṃkiliṭṭhaṃ naṃ karissāmā’’ti pavattehipi tathā kātuṃ asakkuṇeyyo.Anupavajjoti upavādavinimutto.Appaṭikuṭṭhoti ‘‘kiṃ iminā haratha na’’nti evaṃ appaṭibāhito, anupakkuṭṭho vā.Viññūhīti paṇḍitehi. Apaṇḍitānañhi ajānitvā kathentānaṃ vacanaṃ appamāṇaṃ. Tasmā viññūhīti āha.

He began with ayaṃ kho pana, bhikkhave. There, aniggahito means, unrefuted, unable to be refuted by others. Asaṃkiliṭṭho means, undefiled, pure, unable to be defiled by those who try to "defile it." Anupavajjo means, free from reproach. Appaṭikuṭṭho means, not refuted with "why do you carry this," or not criticized. Viññūhī means, by the wise. For the words of the unwise, who speak without knowing, are without measure. Therefore, he said "by the wise".

imā cha dhātuyotiādimāha. Tatthadhātuyoti sabhāvā. Nijjīvanissattabhāvappakāsako hi sabhāvaṭṭho dhātvaṭṭho nāma.Phassāyatanānīti vipākaphassānaṃ ākaraṭṭhena āyatanāni.Manopavicārāti vitakkavicārapādehi aṭṭhārasasu ṭhānesu manassa upavicārā.

He began with imā cha dhātuyo. There, dhātuyo means, elements (sabhāvā). For the state of being an element (dhātvaṭṭho) is that which reveals the state of being without life and without a being. Phassāyatanānī means, sense-spheres (āyatanāni) in the sense of being a source (ākaraṭṭhena) for spheres of contact as result (vipākaphassānaṃ). Manopavicārā means, thoughts of the mind (manassa upavicārā) in the eighteen instances (ṭhānesu) through the factors of initial and sustained thought (vitakkavicārapādehi).

Pathavīdhātūti patiṭṭhādhātu.Āpodhātūti ābandhanadhātu.Tejodhātūti paripācanadhātu.Vāyodhātūti vitthambhanadhātu.Ākāsadhātūti asamphuṭṭhadhātu.Viññāṇadhātūti vijānanadhātu. Evamidaṃ dhātukammaṭṭhānaṃ āgataṃ. Taṃ kho panetaṃ saṅkhepato āgataṭṭhāne saṅkhepatopi vitthāratopi kathetuṃ vaṭṭati. Vitthārato āgataṭṭhāne saṅkhepato kathetuṃ na vaṭṭati, vitthāratova vaṭṭati. Imasmiṃ pana titthāyatanasutte idaṃ saṅkhepato chadhātuvasena kammaṭṭhānaṃ āgataṃ. Taṃ ubhayathāpi kathetuṃ vaṭṭati.

Pathavīdhātū means, the element of solidity (patiṭṭhādhātu). Āpodhātū means, the element of cohesion (ābandhanadhātu). Tejodhātū means, the element of heat (paripācanadhātu). Vāyodhātū means, the element of motion (vitthambhanadhātu). Ākāsadhātū means, the element of space (asamphuṭṭhadhātu). Viññāṇadhātū means, the element of consciousness (vijānanadhātu). Thus, this meditation on the elements (dhātukammaṭṭhānaṃ) comes. But this, in the place where it comes concisely, it is proper to speak of it both concisely and extensively. In the place where it comes extensively, it is not proper to speak of it concisely; it is proper to speak of it only extensively. But in this Titthāyatana Sutta, this meditation has come concisely in terms of the six elements (chadhātuvasena). It is proper to speak of it in both ways.

Saṅkhepato chadhātuvasena kammaṭṭhānaṃ pariggaṇhantopi evaṃ pariggaṇhāti – pathavīdhātu āpodhātu tejodhātu vāyodhātūti imāni cattāri mahābhūtāni, ākāsadhātu upādārūpaṃ. Ekasmiṃ ca upādārūpe diṭṭhe sesāni tevīsati diṭṭhānevāti sallakkhetabbāni. Viññāṇadhātūti cittaṃ viññāṇakkhandho hoti, tena sahajātā vedanā vedanākkhandho, saññā saññākkhandho, phasso ca cetanā ca saṅkhārakkhandhoti ime cattāro arūpakkhandhā nāma. Cattāri pana mahābhūtāni catunnañca mahābhūtānaṃ upādārūpaṃ rūpakkhandho nāma. Tattha cattāro arūpakkhandhā nāmaṃ, rūpakkhandho rūpanti nāmañca rūpañcāti dveyeva dhammā honti, tato uddhaṃ satto vā jīvo vā natthīti evaṃ ekassa bhikkhuno saṅkhepato chadhātuvasena arahattasampāpakaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ veditabbaṃ.

Even one who takes up the meditation concisely in terms of the six elements takes it up thus: the earth element, the water element, the fire element, the air element—these are the four great elements (mahābhūtāni); the space element is derived materiality (upādārūpaṃ). And when one derived materiality is seen, the remaining twenty-three are to be considered as seen. The consciousness element is the mind, the aggregate of consciousness (viññāṇakkhandho); the feeling that arises together with it is the aggregate of feeling (vedanākkhandho), perception is the aggregate of perception (saññākkhandho), and contact and volition are the aggregate of mental formations (saṅkhārakkhandho)—these four are called immaterial aggregates (arūpakkhandhā). The four great elements and the derived materiality of the four great elements are called the aggregate of form (rūpakkhandho). There, the four immaterial aggregates are name (nāmaṃ), and the aggregate of form is form (rūpaṃ), thus there are only two things: name and form (nāmañca rūpañcāti dveyeva dhammā honti), beyond that there is no being (satto) or life (jīvo)—thus, a bhikkhu should understand the meditation that leads to arahatship concisely in terms of the six elements.

Vitthārato pariggaṇhanto pana cattāri mahābhūtāni pariggaṇhitvā ākāsadhātupariggahānusārena tevīsati upādārūpāni pariggaṇhāti. Atha nesaṃ paccayaṃ upaparikkhanto puna cattāreva mahābhūtāni disvā tesu pathavīdhātu vīsatikoṭṭhāsā, āpodhātu dvādasa, tejodhātu cattāro, vāyodhātu chakoṭṭhāsāti koṭṭhāsavasena samodhānetvā dvācattālīsa mahābhūtāni ca vavatthapetvā tesu tevīsati upādārūpāni pakkhipitvā pañcasaṭṭhi rūpāni vavatthapeti. Tāni ca vatthurūpena saddhiṃ chasaṭṭhi hontīti chasaṭṭhi rūpāni passati. Viññāṇadhātu pana lokiyacittavasena ekāsīti cittāni. Tāni sabbānipi viññāṇakkhandho nāma hoti. Tehi sahajātā vedanādayopi tattakāyevāti ekāsīti vedanā vedanākkhandho, ekāsīti saññā saññākkhandho, ekāsīti cetanā saṅkhārakkhandhoti ime cattāro arūpakkhandhā tebhūmakavasena gayhamānā catuvīsādhikāni tīṇi dhammasatāni hontīti iti ime ca arūpadhammā chasaṭṭhi ca rūpadhammāti sabbepi samodhānetvā nāmañca rūpañcāti dveva dhammā honti, tato uddhaṃ satto vā jīvo vā natthīti nāmarūpavasena pañcakkhandhe vavatthapetvā tesaṃ paccayaṃ pariyesanto avijjāpaccayā taṇhāpaccayā kammapaccayā āhārapaccayāti evaṃ paccayaṃ disvā ‘‘atītepi imehi paccayehi idaṃ vaṭṭaṃ pavattittha, anāgatepi etehi paccayehi pavattissati, etarahipi etehiyeva pavattatī’’ti tīsu kālesu kaṅkhaṃ vitaritvā anukkamena paṭipajjamāno arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti. Evaṃ vitthāratopi chadhātuvasena arahattasampāpakaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ veditabbaṃ.

But one who takes it up extensively, after taking up the four great elements, takes up the twenty-three derived materialities according to the mode of taking up the space element. Then, examining their conditions (paccayaṃ upaparikkhanto), again seeing only the four great elements, and synthesizing them in terms of parts, saying that in them the earth element has twenty parts, the water element has twelve, the fire element has four, and the air element has six, and determining the forty-two great elements and placing the twenty-three derived materialities among them, he determines the sixty-five forms. And these, together with the materiality as object (vatthurūpena), are sixty-six, thus he sees sixty-six forms. The consciousness element, however, in terms of mundane consciousness, is eighty-one consciousnesses. All of them are called the aggregate of consciousness. The feelings and so on that arise together with them are also that many, thus, eighty-one feelings are the aggregate of feeling, eighty-one perceptions are the aggregate of perception, eighty-one volitions are the aggregate of mental formations—these four immaterial aggregates, when taken in terms of the three planes of existence (tebhūmakavasena), are three hundred and twenty-four mental phenomena (dhammasatāni), thus, synthesizing all of these immaterial phenomena and the sixty-six material phenomena, there are only two things: name and form, beyond that there is no being or life—thus, after determining the five aggregates in terms of name and form and seeking their conditions, seeing the conditions as condition of ignorance (avijjāpaccayā), condition of craving (taṇhāpaccayā), condition of karma (kammapaccayā), condition of nutriment (āhārapaccayā), and thus seeing the conditions, and dispelling doubt in the three times, that "in the past also, this cycle revolved by these conditions, in the future also it will revolve by these conditions, and even now it revolves by these very conditions," and successively practicing, one attains arahatship. Thus, the meditation that leads to arahatship should be understood extensively in terms of the six elements.

Cakkhu phassāyatananti suvaṇṇādīnaṃ suvaṇṇādiākaro viya dve cakkhuviññāṇāni dve sampaṭicchanāni tīṇi santīraṇānīti imehi sattahi viññāṇehi sahajātānaṃ sattannaṃ phassānaṃ samuṭṭhānaṭṭhena ākaroti āyatanaṃ.Sotaṃ phassāyatanantiādīsupi eseva nayo.Mano phassāyatananti ettha pana dvāvīsati vipākaphassā yojetabbā. Iti hidaṃ chaphassāyatanānaṃ vasena kammaṭṭhānaṃ āgataṃ. Taṃ saṅkhepatopi vitthāratopi kathetabbaṃ. Saṅkhepato tāva – ettha hi purimāni pañca āyatanāni upādārūpaṃ, tesu diṭṭhesu avasesaṃ upādārūpaṃ diṭṭhameva hoti. Chaṭṭhaṃ āyatanaṃ cittaṃ, taṃ viññāṇakkhandho hoti, tena sahajātā vedanādayo sesā tayo arūpakkhandhāti heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva saṅkhepato ca vitthārato ca arahattasampāpakaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ veditabbaṃ.

Cakkhu phassāyatana means, like a mine of gold and so on (suvaṇṇādiākaro), the eye-sphere is a source for the seven contacts that arise together with the seven consciousnesses, namely, two eye-consciousnesses, two receiving-consciousnesses, and three investigating-consciousnesses. The same method applies to Sotaṃ phassāyatana and the rest. Mano phassāyatana, however, in this case, twenty-two resultant contacts should be applied. Thus, here, meditation has come in terms of the six spheres of contact. It should be spoken of both concisely and extensively. First, concisely: here, the first five spheres are derived materiality, when they are seen, the remaining derived materiality is also seen. The sixth sphere is the mind, it is the aggregate of consciousness, the feelings and so on that arise together with it are the remaining three immaterial aggregates—thus, the meditation that leads to arahatship should be understood concisely and extensively in the way explained below.

Cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvāti cakkhuviññāṇena rūpaṃ passitvā.Somanassaṭṭhāniyanti somanassassa kāraṇabhūtaṃ.Upavicaratīti tattha manaṃ cārento upavicarati. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Ettha ca iṭṭhaṃ vā hotu aniṭṭhaṃ vā, yaṃ rūpaṃ disvā somanassaṃ uppajjati, taṃsomanassaṭṭhāniyaṃnāma. Yaṃ disvā domanassaṃ uppajjati, taṃdomanassaṭṭhāniyaṃnāma. Yaṃ disvā upekkhā uppajjati, taṃupekkhāṭṭhāniyaṃnāmāti veditabbaṃ.Saddādīsupi eseva nayo. Iti idaṃ saṅkhepato kammaṭṭhānaṃ āgataṃ. Taṃ kho panetaṃ saṅkhepato āgataṭṭhāne saṅkhepatopi vitthāratopi kathetuṃ vaṭṭati. Vitthārato āgataṭṭhāne saṅkhepato kathetuṃ na vaṭṭati. Imasmiṃ pana titthāyatanasutte idaṃ saṅkhepato aṭṭhārasamanopavicāravasena kammaṭṭhānaṃ āgataṃ. Taṃ saṅkhepatopi vitthāratopi kathetuṃ vaṭṭati.

Cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā means having seen a form with the eye-consciousness. Somanassaṭṭhāniya means being the cause of joy. Upavicarati means wandering, directing the mind there. The same method applies to the remaining terms. Here, whether it is liked or disliked, the form upon seeing which joy arises is called somanassaṭṭhāniya. That upon seeing which displeasure arises is called domanassaṭṭhāniya. That upon seeing which equanimity arises is called upekkhāṭṭhāniya. The same method should be understood for saddā etc. Thus, this is the kammaṭṭhāna that has come in brief. However, in a place where it has come in brief, it is suitable to speak of it both in brief and in detail. In a place where it has come in detail, it is not suitable to speak of it in brief. But in this Titthāyatana Sutta, this kammaṭṭhāna has come in brief by way of the eighteen mental wanderings. It is suitable to speak of that both in brief and in detail.

Tattha saṅkhepato tāva – cakkhu sotaṃ ghānaṃ jivhā kāyo, rūpaṃ saddo gandho rasoti imāni nava upādārūpāni, tesu diṭṭhesu sesaṃ upādārūpaṃ diṭṭhameva hoti. Phoṭṭhabbaṃ tīṇi mahābhūtāni, tehi diṭṭhehi catutthaṃ diṭṭhameva hoti. Mano viññāṇakkhandho, tena sahajātā vedanādayo tayo arūpakkhandhāti heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva saṅkhepato ca vitthārato ca arahattasampāpakaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ veditabbaṃ.

There, in brief, the eye, ear, nose, tongue, body, form, sound, smell, and taste: these are the nine upādārūpas; when these are seen, the remaining upādārūpas are considered seen. Phoṭṭhabba is the three great elements; when these are seen, the fourth is considered seen. The mind is the viññāṇakkhandha; the feeling and the other two immaterial aggregates that arise together with it: in this way, the kammaṭṭhāna that leads to Arahantship should be understood in brief and in detail, according to the method stated above.

Ariyasaccānīti ariyabhāvakarāni, ariyapaṭividdhāni vā saccāni. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthārato panetaṃ padaṃ visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 2.529) pakāsitaṃ.Channaṃ, bhikkhave, dhātūnanti idaṃ kimatthaṃ āraddhaṃ? Sukhāvabodhanatthaṃ. Yassa hi tathāgato dvādasapadaṃ paccayāvaṭṭaṃ kathetukāmo hoti, tassa gabbhāvakkanti vaṭṭaṃ dasseti. Gabbhāvakkanti vaṭṭasmiṃ hi dassite kathetumpi sukhaṃ hoti paraṃ avabodhe utumpīti sukhāvabodhanatthaṃ idamāraddhanti veditabbaṃ. Tatthachannaṃ dhātūnanti heṭṭhā vuttānaṃyeva pathavīdhātuādīnaṃ.Upādāyāti paṭicca. Etena paccayamattaṃ dasseti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti ‘‘chadhātupaccayā gabbhassāvakkanti hotī’’ti. Kassa channaṃ dhātūnaṃ paccayena, kiṃ mātu, udāhu pitūti? Na mātu na pitu, paṭisandhiggaṇhanakasattasseva pana channaṃ dhātūnaṃ paccayena gabbhassāvakkanti nāma hoti. Gabbho ca nāmesa nirayagabbho tiracchānayonigabbho pettivisayagabbho manussagabbho devagabbhoti nānappakāro hoti. Imasmiṃ pana ṭhāne manussagabbho adhippeto.Avakkanti hotīti okkanti nibbatti pātubhāvo hoti, kathaṃ hotīti? Tiṇṇaṃ sannipātena. Vuttañhetaṃ –

Ariyasaccānī means truths that lead to a noble state or that are penetrated by the noble ones. This is the brief explanation here, but the detailed explanation of this term is expounded in the Visuddhimagga (Visuddhi. 2.529). Channaṃ, bhikkhave, dhātūnaṃ: for what purpose has this been begun? For the purpose of easy understanding. For the one to whom the Tathāgata wishes to speak of the twelve-factored cycle of Dependent Origination, he shows the cycle of conception in the womb. For when the cycle of conception in the womb is shown, it is easy to speak and greatly beneficial for understanding; thus, it should be understood that this has been begun for the purpose of easy understanding. There, channaṃ dhātūnaṃ means the earth element etc. mentioned above. Upādāya means depending on. With this, he shows only the condition. This is what is said: "Conception in the womb occurs conditioned by the six elements." Conditioned by which six elements, of whom, the mother, or the father? Not of the mother, not of the father, but conception in the womb is caused by the six elements of the being taking rebirth. And the womb is of various kinds: the hell-womb, the animal-womb, the petta realm-womb, the human-womb, and the deva-womb. In this context, however, the human-womb is intended. Avakkanti hotī means descent, arising, manifestation occurs; how does it occur? By the combination of three things. For it was said:

‘‘Tiṇṇaṃ kho pana, bhikkhave, sannipātā gabbhassāvakkanti hoti. Katamesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ? Idha mātāpitaro ca sannipatitā honti, mātā ca na utunī hoti, gandhabbo ca na paccupaṭṭhito hoti. Neva tāva gabbhassāvakkanti hoti. Idha mātāpitaro ca sannipatitā honti, mātā ca utunī hoti, gandhabbo ca na paccupaṭṭhito hoti, neva tāva gabbhassāvakkanti hoti. Yato ca kho, bhikkhave, mātāpitaro ca sannipatitā honti, mātā ca utunī hoti, gandhabbo ca paccupaṭṭhito hoti. Evaṃ tiṇṇaṃ sannipātā gabbhassāvakkanti hotī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.408).

"Bhikkhus, conception in the womb occurs with the conjunction of three things. Which three? Here, the mother and father come together, but the mother is not in her fertile period, and the gandhabba is not present. In this case, there is no conception in the womb. Here, the mother and father come together, and the mother is in her fertile period, but the gandhabba is not present. In this case, there is no conception in the womb. But when, bhikkhus, the mother and father come together, and the mother is in her fertile period, and the gandhabba is present, in this case, conception in the womb occurs with the conjunction of these three things" (M.N. 1.408).

Okkantiyāsati nāmarūpanti ‘‘viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpa’’nti vuttaṭṭhāne vatthudasakaṃ kāyadasakaṃ bhāvadasakaṃ tayo arūpino khandhāti tettiṃsa dhammā gahitā, imasmiṃ pana ‘‘okkantiyā sati nāmarūpa’’nti vuttaṭṭhāne viññāṇakkhandhampi pakkhipitvā gabbhaseyyakānaṃ paṭisandhikkhaṇe catuttiṃsa dhammā gahitāti veditabbā.Nāmarūpapaccayā saḷāyatanantiādīhi yatheva okkantiyā sati nāmarūpapātubhāvo dassito, evaṃ nāmarūpe sati saḷāyatanapātubhāvo, saḷāyatane sati phassapātubhāvo, phasse sati vedanāpātubhāvo dassito.

Okkantiyā sati nāmarūpaṃ: in the statement "name-and-form is conditioned by consciousness," the ten-factor object, the ten-factor body, the ten-factor becoming, and the three immaterial aggregates, thus thirty-three phenomena are taken. However, in the statement "name-and-form is conditioned by descent," by including the viññāṇakkhandha, thirty-four phenomena are taken at the moment of rebirth of those lying in the womb. Nāmarūpapaccayā saḷāyatanaṃ etc.: just as the appearance of name-and-form is shown conditioned by descent, so the appearance of the six sense bases is shown conditioned by name-and-form, the appearance of contact conditioned by the six sense bases, and the appearance of feeling conditioned by contact.

Vediyamānassāti ettha vedanaṃ anubhavantopi vediyamānoti vuccati jānantopi. ‘‘Vediyāmahaṃ, bhante, vediyatīti maṃ saṅgho dhāretū’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 102) ettha hi anubhavanto vediyamāno nāma, ‘‘sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vediyamāno sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vediyāmīti pajānātī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.113; dī. ni. 2.380; vibha. 363) ettha jānanto. Idhāpi jānantova adhippeto.Idaṃ dukkhanti paññapemīti evaṃ jānantassa sattassa ‘‘idaṃ dukkhaṃ ettakaṃ dukkhaṃ, natthi ito uddhaṃ dukkha’’nti paññapemi bodhemi jānāpemi.Ayaṃ dukkhasamudayotiādīsupi eseva nayo.

Vediyamānassa: here, even though experiencing feeling, it is called "vediyamāna," also knowing. For in "I experience, venerable sir; may the Sangha regard me as one who experiences" (Cūḷava. Aṭṭha. 102), here experiencing is called vediyamāna, and in "knowing a pleasant feeling, he understands 'I am experiencing a pleasant feeling'" (M.N. 1.113; D.N. 2.380; Vibha. 363), knowing. Here also, knowing is intended. Idaṃ dukkhanti paññapemī: to such a knowing being, I make known, teach, and inform, "This is suffering, this much is suffering; there is no suffering beyond this." The same method applies to Ayaṃ dukkhasamudayo etc.

Tattha dukkhādīsu ayaṃ sanniṭṭhānakathā – ṭhapetvā hi taṇhaṃ tebhūmakā pañcakkhandhā dukkhaṃ nāma, tasseva pabhāvikā pubbataṇhā dukkhasamudayo nāma, tesaṃ dvinnampi saccānaṃ anuppattinirodho dukkhanirodho nāma, ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā nāma. Iti bhagavā okkantiyā sati nāmarūpanti kathentopi vediyamānassa jānamānasseva kathesi, nāmarūpapaccayā saḷāyatananti kathentopi, saḷāyatanapaccayā phassoti kathentopi, phassapaccayā vedanāti kathentopi, vediyamānassa kho panāhaṃ, bhikkhave, idaṃ dukkhanti paññapemīti kathentopi, ayaṃ dukkhasamudayoti, ayaṃ dukkhanirodhoti, ayaṃ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadāti paññapemīti kathentopi vediyamānassa jānamānasseva kathesi.

There, regarding suffering etc., this is the conclusive statement: setting aside craving, the five aggregates of the three realms are called suffering; the previous craving that is the origin of that is called the origin of suffering; the cessation of arising of those two truths is called the cessation of suffering; the Noble Eightfold Path is called the path leading to the cessation of suffering. Thus, even when the Blessed One speaks of name-and-form conditioned by descent, he speaks to one who is experiencing and knowing; even when speaking of the six sense bases conditioned by name-and-form, even when speaking of contact conditioned by the six sense bases, even when speaking of feeling conditioned by contact, even when speaking of "I make known this is suffering to one who is experiencing," even when speaking of "This is the origin of suffering," "This is the cessation of suffering," "This is the path leading to the cessation of suffering," he speaks to one who is experiencing and knowing.

katamañca, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Taṃ sabbaṃ sabbākārena visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 2.537) vitthāritameva. Tattha vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Ayaṃ pana viseso – tattha ‘‘dukkhasamudayaṃ ariyasaccaṃ yāyaṃ taṇhā ponobbhavikā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.133; dī. ni. 2.400; vibha. 203) imāya tantiyā āgataṃ, idha ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā’’ti paccayākāravasena. Tattha ca dukkhanirodhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ ‘‘yo tassāyeva taṇhāya asesavirāganirodho’’ti (ma. ni. 1.134; dī. ni. 2.401; vibha. 204) imāya tantiyā āgataṃ, idha ‘‘avijjāyatveva asesavirāganirodhā’’ti paccayākāranirodhavasena.

Katamañca, bhikkhave: etc., he said. All that is extensively explained in the Visuddhimagga (Visuddhi. 2.537) in every way. It should be understood in accordance with the method stated there. This, however, is the distinction: there, the noble truth of the origin of suffering comes according to this tradition, "that craving which leads to renewed existence" (M.N. 1.133; D.N. 2.400; Vibha. 203), but here in terms of the causal mode, "Conditioned by ignorance are volitional formations." And there, the noble truth of the cessation of suffering comes according to this tradition, "the remainderless fading away and cessation of that very craving" (M.N. 1.134; D.N. 2.401; Vibha. 204), but here in terms of the cessation of the causal mode, "through the remainderless fading away and cessation of that very ignorance."

asesavirāganirodhāti asesavirāgena ca asesanirodhena ca. Ubhayampetaṃ aññamaññavevacanameva.Saṅkhāranirodhoti saṅkhārānaṃ anuppattinirodho hoti. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Imehi pana padehi yaṃ āgamma avijjādayo nirujjhanti, atthato taṃ nibbānaṃ dīpitaṃ hoti. Nibbānañhi avijjānirodhotipi saṅkhāranirodhotipi evaṃ tesaṃ tesaṃ dhammānaṃ nirodhanāmena kathīyati.Kevalassāti sakalassa.Dukkhakkhandhassāti vaṭṭadukkharāsissa.Nirodho hotīti appavatti hoti. Tattha yasmā avijjādīnaṃ nirodho nāma khīṇākāropi vuccati arahattampi nibbānampi, tasmā idha khīṇākāradassanavasena dvādasasu ṭhānesu arahattaṃ, dvādasasuyeva nibbānaṃ kathitanti veditabbaṃ.Idaṃ vuccatīti ettha nibbānameva sandhāya idanti vuttaṃ.Aṭṭhaṅgikoti na aṭṭhahi aṅgehi vinimutto añño maggo nāma atthi. Yathā pana pañcaṅgikaṃ tūriyanti vutte pañcaṅgamattameva tūriyanti vuttaṃ hoti, evamidhāpi aṭṭhaṅgikamattameva maggo hotīti veditabbo.Aniggahitoti na niggahito. Niggaṇhanto hi hāpetvā vā dasseti vaḍḍhetvā vā taṃ parivattetvā vā. Tattha yasmā cattāri ariyasaccāni ‘‘na imāni cattāri, dve vā tīṇi vā’’ti evaṃ hāpetvāpi ‘‘pañca vā cha vā’’ti evaṃ vaḍḍhetvāpi ‘‘na imāni cattāri ariyasaccāni, aññāneva cattāri ariyasaccānī’’ti dassetuṃ na sakkā. Tasmā ayaṃ dhammo aniggahito nāma. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.

Asesavirāganirodhā: through remainderless fading away and remainderless cessation. Both of these are synonyms for each other. Saṅkhāranirodho: the cessation of the non-arising of volitional formations occurs. The same method applies to the remaining terms. By these terms, that to which one resorts and ignorance etc. cease, that is, in meaning, Nibbāna is indicated. For Nibbāna is spoken of by the name of the cessation of those various phenomena, such as the cessation of ignorance, the cessation of volitional formations. Kevalassa: of the entirety. Dukkhakkhandhassa: of the heap of suffering of the cycle. Nirodho hotī: non-occurrence occurs. There, since the cessation of ignorance etc. is called both the state of destruction and Arahantship and Nibbāna, therefore it should be understood that here Arahantship is spoken of in the twelve places in terms of showing the state of destruction, and Nibbāna in the twelve places. Idaṃ vuccatī: here, "this" is said referring to Nibbāna. Aṭṭhaṅgiko: there is no other path apart from the eight factors. Just as when it is said "a five-factored musical instrument," only the five factors are meant as the musical instrument, so here too, it should be understood that only the eight factors are meant as the path. Aniggahito: not to be refuted. For one who refutes either shows it by diminishing it, or by increasing it, or by changing it. There, since it is not possible to show the four Noble Truths by either diminishing them, saying "these are not four, but two or three," or by increasing them, saying "five or six," or by saying "these are not the four Noble Truths, but different four Noble Truths," therefore this Dhamma is called irrefutable. The rest is straightforward everywhere.

2. Bhayasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Bhayasutta Commentary

63.Dutiyeamātāputtikānīti mātā ca putto ca mātāputtaṃ, parittātuṃ samatthabhāvena natthi ettha mātāputtanti amātāputtikāni.Yanti yasmiṃ samaye.Tattha mātāpi puttaṃ nappaṭilabhatīti tasmiṃ aggibhaye uppanne mātāpi puttaṃ passituṃ na labhati, puttopi mātaraṃ passituṃ na labhatīti attho.Bhayaṃ hotīti cittutrāsabhayaṃ hoti.Aṭavisaṅkopoti aṭaviyā saṅkopo. Aṭavīti cettha aṭavivāsino corā veditabbā. Yadā hi te aṭavito janapadaṃ otaritvā gāmanigamarājadhāniyo paharitvā vilumpanti, tadā aṭavisaṅkopo nāma hoti, taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.Cakkasamārūḷhāti ettha iriyāpathacakkampi vaṭṭati yānacakkampi. Bhayasmiṃ hi sampatte yesaṃ yānakāni atthi, te attano parikkhārabhaṇḍaṃ tesu āropetvā palāyanti. Yesaṃ natthi, te kājena vā ādāya sīsena vā ukkhipitvā palāyantiyeva. Te cakkasamārūḷhā nāma honti.Pariyāyantīti ito cito ca gacchanti.Kadācīti kismiñcideva kāle.Karahacīti tasseva vevacanaṃ.Mātāpi puttaṃ paṭilabhatīti āgacchantaṃ vā gacchantaṃ vā ekasmiṃ ṭhāne nilīnaṃ vā passituṃ labhati.Udakavāhakoti nadīpūro.Mātāpi puttaṃ paṭilabhatīti kulle vā uḷumpe vā mattikābhājane vā dārukkhaṇḍe vā laggaṃ vuyhamānaṃ passituṃ paṭilabhati, sotthinā vā puna uttaritvā gāme vā araññe vā ṭhitaṃ passituṃ labhatīti.

63. In the second, amātāputtikānī: mother and son are "mātāputtaṃ," there is no mother and son here in terms of being able to protect, therefore "amātāputtikāni." Yaṃ: at which time. Tattha mātāpi puttaṃ nappaṭilabhatī: in that fire-danger that has arisen, even the mother does not get to see the son, and the son does not get to see the mother, is the meaning. Bhayaṃ hotī: there is fear, mental dread. Aṭavisaṅkopo: disturbance in the jungle. Here, "jungle" should be understood as referring to the robbers living in the jungle. For when they descend from the jungle into the countryside and strike and plunder villages, towns, and capital cities, then it is called "disturbance in the jungle," and this is what is referred to. Cakkasamārūḷhā: here, both the walking wheel and the cartwheel are valid. For when danger has arisen, those who have vehicles load their belongings onto them and flee. Those who do not have them take them either on a mat or lift them on their heads and flee. They are called "cakkasamārūḷhā." Pariyāyantī: they go from here and there. Kadācī: at some time. Karahacī: a synonym for that very word. Mātāpi puttaṃ paṭilabhatī: she gets to see the son, whether coming or going, or hidden in one place. Udakavāhako: a river flood. Mātāpi puttaṃ paṭilabhatī: she gets to see him being carried away clinging to a raft, or a dugout canoe, or an earthenware vessel, or a piece of wood, or she gets to see him having safely crossed over again, standing in a village or in the forest.

tīṇimānītiādimāha. Tatthajarābhayanti jaraṃ paṭicca uppajjanakabhayaṃ. Itaresupi eseva nayo. Vuttampi cetaṃ – ‘‘jaraṃ paṭicca uppajjati bhayaṃ bhayānakaṃ chambhitattaṃ lomahaṃso cetaso utrāso. Byādhiṃ paṭicca, maraṇaṃ paṭicca uppajjati bhayaṃ bhayānakaṃ chambhitattaṃ lomahaṃso cetaso utrāso’’ti (vibha. 921). Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.

Tīṇimānī etc., he said. There, jarābhayaṃ: the fear that arises dependent on old age. The same method applies to the others. And this was said: "Fear arises dependent on old age, dread, trembling, bristling of hairs, mental terror. Fear arises dependent on sickness, dependent on death, dread, trembling, bristling of hairs, mental terror" (Vibha. 921). The rest is straightforward everywhere.

3. Venāgapurasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Venāgapura Sutta Commentary

64.Tatiyekosalesūti evaṃnāmake janapade.Cārikaṃ caramānoti addhānagamanaṃ gacchanto. Cārikā ca nāmesā bhagavato duvidhā hoti turitacārikā ca aturitacārikā cāti. Tattha dūrepi bodhaneyyapuggalaṃ disvā tassa bodhanatthāya sahasā gamanaṃturitacārikānāma. Sā mahākassapapaccuggamanādīsu daṭṭhabbā. Yaṃ pana gāmanigamapaṭipāṭiyā devasikaṃ yojanaaddhayojanavasena piṇḍapātacariyādīhi lokaṃ anuggaṇhantassa gamanaṃ, ayaṃaturitacārikānāma. Imaṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ – ‘‘cārikaṃ caramāno’’ti. Vitthārena pana cārikākathā sumaṅgalavilāsiniyā dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāya ambaṭṭhasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.254) vuttā.Brāhmaṇagāmoti brāhmaṇānaṃ samosaraṇagāmopi brāhmaṇagāmoti vuccati, brāhmaṇānaṃ bhogagāmopi. Idha samosaraṇagāmo brāhmaṇavasanagāmoti adhippeto.Tadavasarīti tattha avasari, sampattoti attho. Vihāro panettha aniyāmito. Tasmā tassa avidūre buddhānaṃ anucchaviko eko vanasaṇḍo atthi, satthā taṃ vanasaṇḍaṃ gatoti veditabbo.

64. In the third, kosalesū: in the country named thus. Cārikaṃ caramāno: going on an itinerary. And this itinerary of the Blessed One is of two kinds: quick itinerary and unhurried itinerary. There, going quickly in order to enlighten a person capable of being enlightened, having seen them even from afar, is called turitacārikā. That should be seen in the welcoming of Mahākassapa etc. However, the going of one who is helping the world by way of the daily alms-round etc. in the order of villages and towns, a yojana or half a yojana, that is called aturitacārikā. Referring to this, this was said: "caramāno cārikaṃ." But the detailed account of the itinerary is spoken of in the Sumaṅgalavilāsinī, the Dīghanikāya commentary, in the Ambaṭṭha Sutta commentary (D.N. Aṭṭha. 1.254). Brāhmaṇagāmo: the village where Brahmins gather together is also called a Brahmin village, as is the village that is the Brahmins' possession. Here, the village where they gather and where the Brahmins reside is intended. Tadavasarī: he arrived there, he reached there, is the meaning. Here, the vihāra is unrestricted. Therefore, not far from there, there is a grove suitable for Buddhas; it should be understood that the Teacher went to that grove.

Assosunti suṇiṃsu upalabhiṃsu, sotadvārasampattavacananigghosānusārena jāniṃsu.Khoti avadhāraṇatthe, padapūraṇamatte vā nipāto. Tattha avadhāraṇatthena ‘‘assosuṃ eva, na tesaṃ koci savanantarāyo ahosī’’ti ayamattho veditabbo. Padapūraṇena byañjanasiliṭṭhatāmattameva.

Assosuṃ: they heard, they perceived, they knew according to the sound of the utterance reaching the ear-door. Kho: in the sense of emphasis, or a particle merely filling out the sentence. There, it should be understood that with emphasis, the meaning is, "they certainly heard; there was no interruption in their hearing." With sentence-filling, it is merely for the elegance of the expression.

samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamotiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha samitapāpattāsamaṇoti veditabbo.Khalūti anussavatthe nipāto.Bhoti tesaṃ aññamaññaṃ ālapanamattaṃ.Gotamoti bhagavato gottavasena paridīpanaṃ, tasmā ‘‘samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo’’ti ettha samaṇo kira, bho, gotamagottoti evamattho daṭṭhabbo.Sakyaputtoti idaṃ pana bhagavato uccākulaparidīpanaṃ.Sakyakulā pabbajitoti saddhāpabbajitabhāvaparidīpanaṃ, kenaci pārijuññena anabhibhūto aparikkhīṇaṃyeva taṃ kulaṃ pahāya saddhāya pabbajitoti vuttaṃ hoti.Taṃ kho panāti itthambhūtākhyānatthe upayogavacanaṃ, tassa kho pana bhoto gotamassāti attho.Kalyāṇoti kalyāṇaguṇasamannāgato, seṭṭhoti vuttaṃ hoti.Kittisaddoti kittiyeva, thutighoso vā.Abbhuggatoti sadevakaṃ lokaṃ ajjhottharitvā uggato. Kinti?Itipi so bhagavā…pe… buddho bhagavāti. Tatrāyaṃ padasambandho – so bhagavā itipi arahaṃ, itipi sammāsambuddho…pe… itipi bhagavāti. Iminā ca iminā ca kāraṇenāti vuttaṃ hoti.

It was said, "samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo," etc. There, samaṇo should be understood as one who has subdued evil. Khalu is a particle used in the sense of hearsay. Bho is merely a form of address used among themselves. Gotamo is a designation of the Blessed One by lineage; therefore, in "samaṇo khalu, bho, gotamo," the meaning should be understood as, "it is said that the samaṇa is of the Gotama lineage." Sakyaputto (a son of the Sakyas) indicates the Blessed One's high birth. Sakyakulā pabbajito (gone forth from the Sakya clan) indicates that he went forth out of faith; it means that he abandoned that clan, which was not overcome by any adversity and was still flourishing, out of faith. Taṃ kho panā is a word used to indicate something of such a nature; the meaning is, "that venerable Gotama." Kalyāṇo means possessed of auspicious qualities, excellent. Kittisaddo means fame itself, or a sound of praise. Abbhuggato means risen, having pervaded the world with its devas. What is it? Itipi so bhagavā…pe… buddho bhagavā (Indeed, the Blessed One is such…pe… the Buddha, the Blessed One). Here, the connection of words is: "so bhagavā itipi arahaṃ" (the Blessed One is such, indeed, an arahaṃ), "itipi sammāsambuddho…pe… itipi bhagavā" (indeed, a fully self-awakened one…pe… indeed, a Blessed One). It means "by this and this reason."

Tattha ‘‘ārakattā, arīnaṃ arānañca hatattā, paccayādīnaṃ arahattā, pāpakaraṇe rahābhāvāti imehi kāraṇehi so bhagavā arahanti veditabbo’’tiādinā nayena mātikaṃ nikkhipitvā sabbāneva etāni padāni visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.125-127) buddhānussatiniddese vitthāritānīti tato nesaṃ vitthāro gahetabbo.

There, beginning with the explanation, "because of being distant, because of destroying the spokes of enemies, because of being worthy of offerings, etc., because of the absence of doing evil, the Blessed One is to be understood as an arahaṃ," all these terms have been extensively explained in the buddhānussati (recollection of the Buddha) section of the Visuddhimagga (Path of Purification) (Visuddhi. 1.125-127); therefore, their detailed explanation should be taken from there.

Soimaṃ lokanti so bhavaṃ gotamo imaṃ lokaṃ, idāni vattabbaṃ nidasseti.Sadevakanti saha devehi sadevakaṃ. Evaṃ saha mārenasamārakaṃ. Saha brahmunāsabrahmakaṃ. Saha samaṇabrāhmaṇehisassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṃ. Pajātattāpajā,taṃ pajaṃ. Saha devamanussehisadevamanussaṃ. Tattha sadevakavacanena pañcakāmāvacaradevaggahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ, samārakavacanena chaṭṭhakāmāvacaradevaggahaṇaṃ, sabrahmakavacanena brahmakāyikādibrahmaggahaṇaṃ, sassamaṇabrāhmaṇivacanena sāsanassa paccatthikapaccāmittasamaṇabrāhmaṇaggahaṇaṃ, samitapāpabāhitapāpasamaṇabrāhmaṇaggahaṇañca, pajāvacanena sattalokaggahaṇaṃ, sadevamanussavacanena sammutidevaavasesamanussaggahaṇaṃ. Evamettha tīhi padehi okāsalokena saddhiṃ sattaloko, dvīhi pajāvasena sattalokova gahitoti veditabbo.

So imaṃ lokaṃ (He, this world): that venerable Gotama, this world; now, he shows what is to be stated. Sadevakaṃ (with its devas): together with the devas, sadevakaṃ. Similarly, together with Māra, samārakaṃ (with its Māra). Together with Brahmā, sabrahmakaṃ (with its Brahmā). Together with samaṇas and brāhmaṇas, sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṃ (with its samaṇas and brāhmaṇas). The population is pajā, that population. Together with devas and humans, sadevamanussaṃ (with its devas and humans). Here, by the term sadevaka, the group of devas in the five sense-sphere heavens should be understood; by the term samāraka, the group of devas in the sixth sense-sphere heaven; by the term sabrahmaka, the group of Brahmas beginning with the Brahma-pertaining deities; by the term sassamaṇabrāhmaṇi, the samaṇas and brāhmaṇas who are adversaries and enemies of the Teaching, and the samaṇas and brāhmaṇas who have subdued evil and banished evil; by the term pajā, the world of beings; by the term sadevamanussa, the conventional devas and the remaining humans. Thus, here, it should be understood that by three terms, together with the space world, the world of beings is taken, and by the two terms (pajāvasena), the world of beings itself is taken.

sadevakanti devatāhi saddhiṃ avasesalokaṃ.Samārakanti mārena saddhiṃ avasesalokaṃ.Sabrahmakanti brahmehi saddhiṃ avasesalokaṃ. Evaṃ sabbepi tibhavūpage satte tīhākārehi tīsu padesu pakkhipitvā puna dvīhi padehi pariyādātuṃsassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṃ pajaṃ sadevamanussanti vuttaṃ. Evaṃ pañcahi padehi tena tenākārena tedhātukameva pariyādinnanti.

Sadevakaṃ: the rest of the world together with the deities. Samārakaṃ: the rest of the world together with Māra. Sabrahmakaṃ: the rest of the world together with the Brahmās. Thus, having placed all beings subject to the three existences into three places by three modes, it is said again with two terms to encompass them: sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṃ pajaṃ sadevamanussa (with its samaṇas and brāhmaṇas, its population with its devas and humans). Thus, by five terms, only the triple world is encompassed in that particular way.

Sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedetītisayanti sāmaṃ, aparaneyyo hutvā.Abhiññāti abhiññāya, adhikena ñāṇena ñatvāti attho.Sacchikatvāti paccakkhaṃ katvā, etena anumānādipaṭikkhepo kato.Pavedetīti bodheti ñāpeti pakāseti.

Sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedeti (Having directly known and realized (it) himself with higher knowledge, he makes (it) known): sayaṃ means himself, without relying on another. Abhiññā means by higher knowledge, having known with superior knowledge. Sacchikatvā means having directly experienced; by this, inference, etc., are rejected. Pavedeti means informs, makes known, proclaims.

So dhammaṃ deseti ādikalyāṇaṃ…pe… pariyosānakalyāṇanti so bhagavā sattesu kāruññataṃ paṭicca hitvāpi anuttaraṃ vivekasukhaṃ dhammaṃ deseti. Tañca kho appaṃ vā bahuṃ vā desento ādikalyāṇādippakārameva deseti, ādimhipi kalyāṇaṃ bhaddakaṃ anavajjameva katvā deseti, majjhepi, pariyosānepi kalyāṇaṃ bhaddakaṃ anavajjameva katvā desetīti vuttaṃ hoti.

So dhammaṃ deseti ādikalyāṇaṃ…pe… pariyosānakalyāṇaṃ (He teaches the Dhamma which is good in the beginning…pe… good in the end): that Blessed One, showing compassion to beings, even forsaking the unsurpassed bliss of seclusion, teaches the Dhamma. And in teaching it, whether he teaches a little or much, he teaches it only in the manner of being good in the beginning, etc.; it means that he teaches it by making even the beginning good, auspicious, and blameless, and also the middle, and also the end good, auspicious, and blameless.

Desanāyatāva catuppadikāyapi gāthāya paṭhamapādo ādi nāma, tato dve majjhaṃ nāma, ante eko pariyosānaṃ nāma. Ekānusandhikassa suttassa nidānaṃ ādi, idamavocāti pariyosānaṃ, ubhinnaṃ antarā majjhaṃ. Anekānusandhikassa suttassa paṭhamānusandhi ādi, ante anusandhi pariyosānaṃ, majjhe eko vā dve vā bahū vā majjhameva.

In a teaching, the first line of even a four-line verse is called the beginning (ādi), then two are called the middle (majjhaṃ), and the last one is called the end (pariyosānaṃ). For a sutta with one connection, the introduction is the beginning, and "idamavoca" (thus he spoke) is the end, and what is in between the two is the middle. For a sutta with many connections, the first connection is the beginning, the last connection is the end, and one, two, or many in the middle are the middle itself.

Sāsanassasīlasamādhivipassanā ādi nāma. Vuttampi cetaṃ – ‘‘ko cādi kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ, sīlañca suvisuddhaṃ diṭṭhi ca ujukā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.369). ‘‘Atthi, bhikkhave, majjhimā paṭipadā tathāgatena abhisambuddhā’’ti evaṃ vutto pana ariyamaggo majjhaṃ nāma. Phalañceva nibbānañca pariyosānaṃ nāma. ‘‘Tasmātiha tvaṃ, brāhmaṇa, brahmacariyaṃ etaṃpāraṃ etaṃpariyosāna’’nti ettha phalaṃ pariyosananti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Nibbānogadhañhi, āvuso visākha, brahmacariyaṃ vussati nibbānaparāyaṇaṃ nibbānapariyosāna’’nti (ma. ni. 1.466) ettha nibbānaṃ pariyosānanti vuttaṃ. Idha pana desanāya ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ adhippetaṃ. Bhagavā hi dhammaṃ desento ādimhi sīlaṃ dassetvā majjhe maggaṃ pariyosāne nibbānaṃ dasseti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘so dhammaṃ deseti ādikalyāṇaṃ majjhekalyāṇaṃ pariyosānakalyāṇa’’nti. Tasmā aññopi dhammakathiko dhammaṃ kathento –

In the Teaching, sīla (virtue), samādhi (concentration), and vipassanā (insight) are called the beginning. It was also said, "What is the beginning of wholesome qualities? Well-purified virtue and upright view" (Saṃ. Ni. 5.369). But the Noble Path, which was said thus, "There is, monks, a middle way awakened to by the Tathāgata," is called the middle. Fruition and Nibbāna are called the end. "Therefore, brahmin, this is the complete and final end of the holy life" means that the fruition is said to be the end. "For the holy life, friend Visākha, is lived with Nibbāna as its essence, Nibbāna as its final goal, Nibbāna as its end" (Ma. Ni. 1.466) means that Nibbāna is said to be the end. Here, however, the beginning, middle, and end of the teaching are intended. For when the Blessed One teaches the Dhamma, he shows virtue in the beginning, the path in the middle, and Nibbāna in the end. Therefore, it was said, "He teaches the Dhamma which is good in the beginning, good in the middle, good in the end." Therefore, another Dhamma speaker, while speaking the Dhamma –

‘‘Ādimhi sīlaṃ dasseyya, majjhe maggaṃ vibhāvaye;

"In the beginning, he should show virtue, in the middle, he should explain the path;
In the end, Nibbāna; this is the structure of a speaker."

Sātthaṃ sabyañjananti yassa hi yāgubhattaitthipurisādivaṇṇanānissitā desanā hoti, na so sātthaṃ deseti. Bhagavā pana tathārūpaṃ desanaṃ pahāya catusatipaṭṭhānādinissitaṃ desanaṃ deseti. Tasmā ‘‘sātthaṃ desetī’’ti vuccati. Yassa pana desanā ekabyañjanādiyuttā vā sabbaniroṭṭhabyañjanā vā sabbavissaṭṭhabyañjanā vā sabbaniggahitabyañjanā vā, tassa damiḷakirātayavanādimilakkhānaṃ bhāsā viya byañjanapāripūriyā abhāvato abyañjanā nāma desanā hoti. Bhagavā pana –

Sātthaṃ sabyañjanaṃ (With its meaning and its phrasing): indeed, a teaching that is based on descriptions of gruel, rice, women, men, etc., is not sātthaṃ (with meaning). But the Blessed One, abandoning such a teaching, teaches a teaching based on the four foundations of mindfulness, etc. Therefore, it is said, "He teaches sātthaṃ." But a teaching of someone whose teaching is associated with one consonant, etc., or all labial consonants, or all aspirated consonants, or all nasal consonants, is called abyañjanā (without phrasing), like the languages of the Tamils, Kirātas, Yavanas, etc., because of the absence of completeness in phrasing. But the Blessed One –

‘‘Sithilaṃ dhanitañca dīgharassaṃ, lahukaṃ garukañca niggahītaṃ;

"Loose and resonant, long and short, light and heavy, nasalized;
Connected, determined, liberated, is the tenfold distinction in understanding phrasing." –

Kevalaparipuṇṇanti etthakevalanti sakalādhivacanaṃ.Paripuṇṇanti anūnādhikavacanaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – sakalaparipuṇṇameva deseti, ekadesanāpi aparipuṇṇā natthīti.Parisuddhanti nirupakkilesaṃ. Yo hi ‘‘imaṃ dhammadesanaṃ nissāya lābhaṃ vā sakkāraṃ vā labhissāmī’’ti deseti, tassa aparisuddhā desanā nāma hoti. Bhagavā pana lokāmisanirapekkho hitapharaṇeneva mettābhāvanāya muduhadayo ullumpanasabhāvasaṇṭhitena cittena deseti. Tasmā parisuddhaṃ desetīti vuccati.Brahmacariyaṃ pakāsetīti ettha brahmacariyanti sikkhattayasaṅgahitaṃ sakalaṃ sāsanaṃ. Tasmā brahmacariyaṃ pakāsetīti so dhammaṃ deseti ādikalyāṇaṃ…pe… parisuddhaṃ, evaṃ desento ca sikkhattayasaṅgahitaṃ sakalasāsanabrahmacariyaṃ pakāsetīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.Brahmacariyanti seṭṭhaṭṭhena brahmabhūtaṃ cariyaṃ, brahmabhūtānaṃ vā buddhādīnaṃ cariyanti vuttaṃ hoti.

Kevalaparipuṇṇaṃ (Entirely complete): here, kevala is a term for entirety. Paripuṇṇaṃ is a term for neither deficient nor excessive. This is what is said: he teaches it entirely complete; not even one part of the teaching is incomplete. Parisuddhaṃ (perfectly pure) means without defilement. Indeed, the teaching of someone who teaches thinking, "Relying on this Dhamma teaching, I will gain profit or honor," is called an impure teaching. But the Blessed One, unconcerned with worldly gain, teaches with a gentle heart due to loving-kindness, with a mind established in the nature of drawing (beings) out, solely with the thought of benefiting (others). Therefore, it is said, "He teaches parisuddhaṃ." Brahmacariyaṃ pakāseti (He reveals the holy life): here, brahmacariya means the entire Teaching, encompassed by the threefold training. Therefore, "He reveals the holy life" means that he teaches the Dhamma which is good in the beginning…pe… perfectly pure; and while teaching thus, he reveals the entire holy life of the Teaching encompassed by the threefold training; thus, the meaning should be understood here. Brahmacariyaṃ means conduct that has become excellent (seṭṭhaṭṭhena), or the conduct of the Buddhas, etc., who have become excellent.

Sādhu kho panāti sundaraṃ kho pana, atthāvahaṃ sukhāvahanti vuttaṃ hoti.Tathārūpānaṃ arahatanti yathārūpo so bhavaṃ gotamo, evarūpānaṃ anekehipi kappakoṭisatasahassehi dullabhadassanānaṃ byāmappabhāparikkhittehi asītianubyañjanapaṭimaṇḍitehi dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇavarehi samākiṇṇamanoramasarīrānaṃ anappakadassanānaṃ atimadhuradhammanigghosānaṃ yathābhūtaguṇādhigamena loke arahantoti laddhasaddānaṃ arahataṃ.Dassanaṃ hotīti pasādasommāni akkhīni ummīletvā dassanamattampi sādhu hoti. Sace pana aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgatena brahmassarena dhammaṃ desentassa ekapadampi sotuṃ labhissāma, sādhutaraṃyeva bhavissatīti evaṃ ajjhāsayaṃ katvā.Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṃsūti sabbakiccāni pahāya tuṭṭhamānasā agamaṃsu.Añjaliṃ paṇāmetvāti ete ubhatopakkhikā, te evaṃ cintesuṃ – ‘‘sace no micchādiṭṭhikā codessanti ‘kasmā tumhe samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ vanditthā’ti, tesaṃ ‘kiṃ añjalikaraṇamattenāpi vanditaṃ hotī’ti vakkhāma. Sace no sammādiṭṭhikā codessanti ‘kasmā bhagavantaṃ na vanditthā’ti, ‘kiṃ sīsena bhūmiṃ paharanteneva vanditaṃ hoti. Nanu añjalikammampi vandanā evā’ti vakkhāmā’’ti.

Sādhu kho panā (Indeed, it is good): indeed, it is beautiful, it is said to be beneficial and happiness-bringing. Tathārūpānaṃ arahataṃ (Of such arahats): yathārūpo (as is) that venerable Gotama, evarūpānaṃ (of such) arahats whose sight is difficult to obtain even in hundreds of thousands of millions of eons, whose delightful bodies are surrounded by a fathom's breadth of light, adorned with eighty minor marks, (and) endowed with the excellent thirty-two marks of a great man, whose voices of Dhamma are exceedingly sweet, (and) who have attained qualities according to reality and have gained the name "arahaṃ" in the world. Dassanaṃ hotī (An appearance occurs): even just seeing them, opening the eyes with serene joy, is good. If we could hear even one word of the Dhamma being taught by one who has a voice endowed with eight qualities, it would be even better; thus, having made such an intention. Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṃsu (They approached the Blessed One) means, abandoning all duties, they went with delighted minds. Añjaliṃ paṇāmetvā (Having raised their joined hands): these (people) were of two sides; they thought thus: "If those of wrong view should criticize us, saying, 'Why did you honor the samaṇa Gotama?', we will say to them, 'Is it not the case that one is honored even by just making the añjali?' If those of right view should criticize us, saying, 'Why did you not honor the Blessed One?', we will say, 'Is it the case that one is honored only by striking the ground with one's head? Indeed, the act of añjali is also honoring.'"

Nāmagottanti, ‘‘bho gotama, ahaṃ asukassa putto datto nāma mitto nāma idhāgato’’ti vadantā nāmaṃ sāventi nāma. ‘‘Bho gotama, ahaṃ vāseṭṭho nāma kaccāno nāma idhāgato’’ti vadantā gottaṃ sāventi nāma. Ete kira daliddā jiṇṇakulaputtā ‘‘parisamajjhe nāmagottavasena pākaṭā bhavissāmā’’ti evaṃ akaṃsu. Ye panatuṇhībhūtānisīdiṃsu, te kerāṭikā ceva andhabālā ca. Tattha kerāṭikā ‘‘ekaṃ dve kathāsallāpe karonte vissāsiko hoti, atha vissāse sati ekaṃ dve bhikkhā adātuṃ na yutta’’nti tato attānaṃ mocentā tuṇhībhūtā nisīdanti. Andhabālā aññāṇatāyeva avakkhittamattikāpiṇḍā viya yattha katthaci tuṇhībhūtā nisīdanti.

Nāmagottaṃ (Name and clan): saying, "Venerable Gotama, I am the son of so-and-so, named Datta, named Mitta, I have come here," they announce the name. Saying, "Venerable Gotama, I am named Vāseṭṭha, named Kaccāna, I have come here," they announce the clan. It seems that these poor, aged sons of good families did this so that they would be known in the assembly by name and clan. But those who sat tuṇhībhūtā (silent) were either deceitful or foolish. There, the deceitful ones sit silently thinking, "When one engages in one or two conversations, one becomes trustworthy; then, when there is trust, it is not proper to give one or two alms," thus freeing themselves. The foolish ones sit silently wherever, like a lump of clay thrown away, due to ignorance itself.

Venāgapurikoti venāgapuravāsī.Etadavocāti pādantato paṭṭhāya yāva kesaggā tathāgatassa sarīraṃ olokento asītianubyañjanasamujjalehi dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇehi paṭimaṇḍitaṃ sarīrā nikkhamitvā samantato asītihatthappadesaṃ ajjhottharitvā ṭhitāhi chabbaṇṇāhi ghanabuddharaṃsīhi samparivāritaṃ tathāgatassa sarīraṃ disvā sañjātavimhayo vaṇṇaṃ bhaṇanto etaṃ ‘‘acchariyaṃ, bho gotamā’’tiādivacanaṃ avoca.

Venāgapuriko (A resident of Venāgapura): a resident of Venāgapura. Etadavocā (Said this): looking at the Tathāgata's body from the soles of the feet up to the tips of the hair, seeing the Tathāgata's body adorned with the eighty minor marks that illuminate, (and) the thirty-two marks of a great man, (and) surrounded on all sides to a distance of eighty cubits by the solid Buddha-rays of six colors emanating from the body, and with wonder arisen, while uttering praise, he spoke these words, "It is wonderful, venerable Gotama," etc.

yāvañcidanti adhimattappamāṇaparicchedavacanametaṃ. Tassa vippasannapadena saddhiṃ sambandho. Yāvañca vippasannāni adhimattavippasannānīti attho.Indriyānīti cakkhādīni cha indriyāni. Tassa hi pañcannaṃ indriyānaṃ patiṭṭhitokāsassa vippasannataṃ disvā tesaṃ vippasannatā pākaṭā ahosi. Yasmā pana sā mane vippasanneyeva hoti, avippasannacittānañhi indriyappasādo nāma natthi, tasmāssa manindriyappasādopi pākaṭo ahosi. Taṃ esa vippasannataṃ gahetvā ‘‘vippasannāni indriyānī’’ti āha.Parisuddhoti nimmalo.Pariyodātoti pabhassaro.Sāradaṃbadarapaṇḍunti saradakāle jātaṃ nātisuparipakkaṃ badaraṃ. Tañhi parisuddhañceva hoti pariyodātañca.Tālapakkanti suparipakkatālaphalaṃ.Sampati bandhanā pamuttanti taṃkhaṇaññeva bandhanā pamuttaṃ. Tassa hi bandhanamūlaṃ apanetvā paramukhaṃ katvā phalake ṭhapitassa caturaṅgulamattaṃ ṭhānaṃ olokentānaṃ parisuddhaṃ pariyodātaṃ hutvā khāyati. Taṃ sandhāyevamāha.Nekkhaṃ jambonadanti surattavaṇṇassa jambonadasuvaṇṇassa ghaṭikā.Dakkhakammāraputtasuparikammakatanti dakkhena suvaṇṇakāraputtena suṭṭhu kataparikammaṃ.Ukkāmukhe sukusalasampahaṭṭhanti suvaṇṇakārauddhane pacitvā sukusalena suvaṇṇakārena ghaṭṭanaparimajjanahaṃsanena suṭṭhu pahaṭṭhaṃ suparimadditanti attho.Paṇḍukambale nikkhittanti agginā pacitvā dīpidāṭhāya ghaṃsitvā gerukaparikammaṃ katvā rattakambale ṭhapitaṃ.Bhāsateti sañjātaobhāsatāya bhāsate.Tapateti andhakāraviddhaṃsanatāya tapate.Virocatīti vijjotamānaṃ hutvā virocati, sobhatīti attho.

Yāvañcidaṃ (Indeed, to such an extent): this is a term that defines an excessive amount. Its connection is with the word vippasanna (clear). Yāvañca vippasannāni means exceedingly clear. Indriyāni (Faculties): the six faculties, beginning with the eye. Indeed, having seen the clarity of the location of the basis for the five faculties, their clarity became evident. Since that clarity occurs only in a clear mind, and there is no clarity of the faculties for those whose minds are not clear, therefore the clarity of his mind faculty also became evident. Having taken that clarity, he said, "The faculties are clear." Parisuddho (Pure) means immaculate. Pariyodāto (Bright) means radiant. Sāradaṃ badarapaṇḍu (A jujube fruit in autumn): a jujube fruit born in the autumn season that is not yet fully ripe. Indeed, that is pure and radiant. Tālapakkaṃ (A ripe palm fruit). Sampati bandhanā pamuttaṃ (Just now freed from its stalk): just now freed from its stalk. Indeed, when those looking at the place of four fingers' breadth saw where the base of the stalk had been removed, (and) making it face upwards, (and) placing it on a board, it appeared pure and radiant. Referring to that, he said thus. Nekkhaṃ jambonadaṃ (A golden ornament of jambonada gold): a golden ornament of jambonada gold that is red in color. Dakkhakammāraputtasuparikammakataṃ (Well-worked by a skilled goldsmith's son): well-worked by a skilled goldsmith's son. Ukkāmukhe sukusalasampahaṭṭhaṃ (Well-burnished at the furnace's mouth by a skilled (goldsmith)): after being fired in a goldsmith's furnace, it means well-burnished and well-polished by a skilled goldsmith through rubbing, polishing, and burnishing. Paṇḍukambale nikkhittaṃ (Placed on a yellow woolen blanket): after being fired by the fire, rubbed with an emery stick, (and) made ready with red ochre, (and) placed on a red blanket. Bhāsate (It shines) means it shines because of its arisen radiance. Tapate (It glows) means it glows because of dispelling darkness. Virocatī (It gleams) means it gleams by being radiant, it shines, is the meaning.

Uccāsayanamahāsayanānīti ettha atikkantappamāṇaṃ uccāsayanaṃ nāma, āyatavitthataṃ akappiyabhaṇḍaṃ mahāsayanaṃ nāma. Idāni tāni dassentoseyyathidaṃ, āsandītiādimāha. Tatthaāsandīti atikkantappamāṇaṃ āsanaṃ.Pallaṅkoti pādesu vāḷarūpāni ṭhapetvā kato.Gonakoti dīghalomako mahākojavo. Caturaṅgulādhikāni kira tassa lomāni.Cittakoti vānacittaṃ uṇṇāmayattharaṇaṃ.Paṭikāti uṇṇāmayo setattharako.Paṭalikāti ghanapuppho uṇṇāmayattharako, yo āmalakapaṭṭotipi vuccati.Tūlikāti tiṇṇaṃ tūlānaṃ aññatarapuṇṇā tūlikā.Vikatikāti sīhabyagghādirūpavicitro uṇṇāmayattharako.Uddalomīti ubhatodasaṃ uṇṇāmayattharaṇaṃ. Keci ekato uggatapupphanti vadanti.Ekantalomīti ekatodasaṃ uṇṇāmayattharaṇaṃ. Keci ubhato uggatapupphanti vadanti.Kaṭṭissanti ratanaparisibbitaṃ koseyyakaṭṭissamayaṃ paccattharaṇaṃ.Koseyyanti ratanaparisibbitameva kosiyasuttamayaṃ paccattharaṇaṃ.Kuttakanti soḷasannaṃ nāṭakitthīnaṃ ṭhatvā naccanayoggaṃ uṇṇāmayattharaṇaṃ.Hatthattharādayo hatthipiṭṭhādīsu attharaṇakaattharakā ceva hatthirūpādīni dassetvā kataattharakā ca.Ajinappaveṇīti ajinacammehi mañcappamāṇena sibbitvā katappaveṇī. Sesaṃ heṭṭhā vuttatthameva.

Uccāsayanamahāsayanānīti: Here, uccāsayana means a seat that exceeds the proper measure, and mahāsayana means a large seat, wide and long, that is not permissible. Now, showing those, he said, seyyathidaṃ, āsandīti, beginning with this. There, āsandī means a seat that exceeds the proper measure. Pallaṅko means one made with legs shaped like wild beasts. Gonako means a large rug with long fleece. It is said that its fleece is more than four fingerbreadths long. Cittako means a variegated woolen spread with animal designs. Paṭikā means a white woolen blanket. Paṭalikā means a woolen spread with dense flowers, which is also called āmalakapaṭṭi. Tūlikā means a mattress filled with one of three kinds of cotton. Vikatikā means a woolen spread variegated with figures of lions, tigers, etc. Uddalomī means a woolen spread with fleece on both sides. Some say it has flowers raised on one side. Ekantalomī means a woolen spread with fleece on one side. Some say it has flowers raised on both sides. Kaṭṭissaṃ means a coverlet made of kaṭṭissa silk, embroidered with jewels. Koseyyaṃ means a coverlet made of kosiya silk thread, also embroidered with jewels. Kuttakaṃ means a woolen spread suitable for sixteen dancing girls to dance on while standing. Hatthattharādayo are spreads spread on elephant backs, etc., and spreads made showing elephant figures, etc. Ajinappaveṇī means a hide sewn together to the size of a couch. The rest has the same meaning as stated below.

Nikāmalābhīti atikāmalābhī icchiticchitalābhī.Akicchalābhīti adukkhalābhī.Akasiralābhīti vipulalābhī mahantalābhī, uḷāruḷārāneva labhati maññeti sandhāya vadati. Ayaṃ kira brāhmaṇo sayanagaruko, so bhagavato vippasannindriyāditaṃ disvā ‘‘addhā esa evarūpesu uccāsayanamahāsayanesu nisīdati ceva nipajjati ca. Tenassa vippasannāni indriyāni, parisuddho chavivaṇṇo pariyodāto’’ti maññamāno imaṃ senāsanavaṇṇaṃ kathesi.

Nikāmalābhīti means one who obtains exceedingly, one who obtains whatever one wishes. Akicchalābhīti means one who obtains without difficulty. Akasiralābhīti means one who obtains abundantly, one who obtains greatly, implying that he obtains only what is magnificent and grand. It is said that this Brahmin was fond of fine lodgings, and seeing the Buddha's serene faculties, he thought, "Indeed, this one sits and lies down on such high and luxurious couches. Therefore, his faculties are so serene, his complexion so pure and clear," and he spoke this praise of the lodging.

Laddhāca pana na kappantīti ettha kiñci kiñci kappati. Suddhakoseyyañhi mañcepi attharituṃ vaṭṭati, gonakādayo ca bhūmattharaṇaparibhogena, āsandiyā pāde chinditvā, pallaṅkassa vāḷe bhinditvā, tūlikaṃ vijaṭetvā ‘‘bimbohanañca kātu’’nti (cūḷava. 297) vacanato imānipi ekena vidhānena kappanti. Akappiyaṃ pana upādāya sabbāneva na kappantīti vuttāni.

Laddhā ca pana na kappantīti: Here, some things are allowable to some extent. Pure koseyya silk is permissible to spread even on a bed, and gonaka and the like are allowable by using them as ground coverings, by cutting off the legs of the āsandī, by breaking the animal shapes on the pallaṅka, by untwisting the tūlika. And because of the saying, "and to make a cushion for the cheek" (cūḷava. 297), these too are allowable by one means. But having taken the impermissible as the standard, it is said that all are not allowable.

Vanantaññeva pavisāmīti araññaṃyeva pavisāmi.Yadevāti yāniyeva.Pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvāti samantato ūrubaddhāsanaṃ bandhitvā.Ujuṃ kāyaṃ paṇidhāyāti aṭṭhārasa piṭṭhikaṇṭake koṭiyā koṭiṃ paṭipādento ujuṃ kāyaṃ ṭhapetvā.Parimukhaṃ satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvāti kammaṭṭhānābhimukhaṃ satiṃ ṭhapetvā, pariggahitaniyyānaṃ vā katvāti attho. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘parīti pariggahaṭṭho. Mukhanti niyyānaṭṭho. Satīti upaṭṭhānaṭṭho. Tena vuccati parimukhaṃ satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvā’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.164).Upasampajja viharāmīti paṭilabhitvā paccakkhaṃ katvā viharāmi.Evaṃbhūtoti evaṃ paṭhamajjhānādīsu aññatarasamaṅgī hutvā.Dibbo me eso tasmiṃ samaye caṅkamo hotīti cattāri hi rūpajjhānāni samāpajjitvā caṅkamantassa caṅkamo dibbacaṅkamo nāma hoti, samāpattito vuṭṭhāya caṅkamantassāpi caṅkamo dibbacaṅkamoyeva. Ṭhānādīsupi eseva nayo. Tathā itaresu dvīsu vihāresu.

Vanantaññeva pavisāmīti: I will enter the forest itself. Yadevāti: Whatever. Pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvāti: Having tied the cross-legged position on all sides. Ujuṃ kāyaṃ paṇidhāyāti: Having set the body straight, aligning the eighteen vertebrae, one tip to the other. Parimukhaṃ satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvāti: Having established mindfulness facing the meditation subject, or having made the object of escape the focus. For it was said: " Parī is in the sense of surrounding. Mukha is in the sense of escape. Satī is in the sense of establishing. Therefore, it is said, 'having established mindfulness facing the object' " (paṭi. ma. 1.164). Upasampajja viharāmīti: Having attained and directly experienced, I abide. Evaṃbhūto means having such a quality, being endowed with one of the jhānas, beginning with the first. Dibbo me eso tasmiṃ samaye caṅkamo hotīti: Indeed, the caṅkama of one who, having attained the four form jhānas, walks back and forth, is called a divine caṅkama, and the caṅkama of one who walks after emerging from the attainment is also a divine caṅkama. The same method applies to standing and so on. Likewise, in the other two abidings.

Soevaṃ pajānāmi ‘‘rāgo me pahīno’’ti mahābodhipallaṅke arahattamaggena pahīnarāgameva dassento ‘‘so evaṃ pajānāmi rāgo me pahīno’’ti āha. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Iminā pana kiṃ kathitaṃ hotīti? Paccavekkhaṇā kathitā, paccavekkhaṇāya phalasamāpatti kathitā. Phalasamāpattiñhi samāpannassapi samāpattito vuṭṭhitassāpi caṅkamādayo ariyacaṅkamādayo honti. Sesamettha uttānatthamevāti.

So evaṃ pajānāmi ‘‘rāgo me pahīno’’ti: Showing that he had abandoned lust with the path of Arahatship on the seat of the Great Bodhi Tree, he said, "So I understand thus: 'My lust is abandoned.'" The same method applies to the remaining phrases. But what is spoken with this? Reflection is spoken; the attainment of fruition is spoken by reflection. Indeed, the caṅkama and so on of one who has attained fruition, as well as of one who has arisen from the attainment, are noble caṅkama and so on. The rest here is of obvious meaning.

4. Sarabhasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Sarabhasuttavaṇṇanā

65.Catuttherājagaheti evaṃnāmake nagare.Gijjhakūṭe pabbateti gijjhasadisānissa kūṭāni, gijjhā vā tassa kūṭesu vasantīti gijjhakūṭo, tasmiṃ gijjhakūṭe pabbate. Etenassa rājagahaṃ gocaragāmaṃ katvā viharantassa vasanaṭṭhānaṃ dassitaṃ. Gijjhakūṭasmiñhi tathāgataṃ uddissa vihāro kārito, gijjhakūṭavihārotvevassa nāmaṃ. Tatthāyaṃ tasmiṃ samaye viharatīti.Sarabho nāma paribbājako acirapakkanto hotīti sarabhoti evaṃnāmako paribbājako imasmiṃ sāsane pabbajitvā nacirasseva pakkanto hoti, adhunā vibbhantoti attho. Sammāsambuddhe hi loke uppanne titthiyā naṭṭhalābhasakkārā ahesuṃ, tiṇṇaṃ ratanānaṃ mahālābhasakkāro uppajji. Yathāha –

65. In the fourth, rājagahe means in the city named thus. Gijjhakūṭe pabbate means on the Gijjhakūṭa mountain, whose peaks resemble vultures, or vultures dwell on its peaks, therefore Gijjhakūṭa, on that Gijjhakūṭa mountain. This shows his dwelling place while dwelling having made Rājagaha his alms village. For in Gijjhakūṭa, a monastery was built dedicated to the Tathāgata; its name was indeed Gijjhakūṭa Monastery. There he was dwelling at that time, thus. Sarabho nāma paribbājako acirapakkanto hotīti Sarabha, a wanderer of that name, having gone forth in this Dispensation, had recently left, meaning he had recently become disturbed. Indeed, when the Sammāsambuddha arose in the world, the Tirthikas experienced loss of gains and honor, and great gains and honor arose for the Triple Gem. As it was said:

‘‘Tena kho pana samayena bhagavā sakkato hoti garukato mānito pūjito apacito lābhī cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānapaccayabhesajjaparikkhārānaṃ. Aññatitthiyā pana paribbājakā asakkatā honti agarukatā amānitā apūjitā na lābhino cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānapaccayabhesajjaparikkhārāna’’nti (udā.14; saṃ.ni.1.2.70).

"Then, at that time, the Blessed One was respected, honored, revered, venerated, and esteemed, and obtained robes, alms food, lodging, and medicine for the sick. But the wanderers of other sects were not respected, honored, revered, venerated, or esteemed, and did not obtain robes, alms food, lodging, and medicine for the sick" (udā.14; saṃ.ni.1.2.70).

Te evaṃ parihīnalābhasakkārā pañcasatamattā ekasmiṃ paribbājakārāme sannipatitvā sammantayiṃsu – ‘‘bho, mayaṃ samaṇassa gotamassa uppannakālato paṭṭhāya hatalābhasakkārā jātā, samaṇassa gotamassa sāvakānañcassa ekaṃ avaṇṇaṃ upadhāretha, avaṇṇaṃ pattharitvā etassa sāsanaṃ garahitvā amhākaṃ lābhasakkāraṃ uppādessāmā’’ti. Te vajjaṃ olokentā – ‘‘tīsu dvāresu ājīve cāti catūsupi ṭhānesu samaṇassa gotamassa vajjaṃ passituṃ na sakkā, imāni cattāri ṭhānāni muñcitvā aññattha olokethā’’ti āhaṃsu. Atha nesaṃ antare eko evamāha – ‘‘ahaṃ aññaṃ na passāmi, ime anvaḍḍhamāsaṃ sannipatitvā dvāravātapānāni pidhāya sāmaṇerānampi pavesanaṃ na denti. Jīvitasadisāpi upaṭṭhākā daṭṭhuṃ na labhanti, āvaṭṭanimāyaṃ osāretvā osāretvā janaṃ āvaṭṭetvā āvaṭṭetvā khādanti. Sace taṃ mayaṃ āharituṃ sakkhissāma, evaṃ no lābhasakkārauḷāro bhavissatī’’ti. Aparopi evameva vadanto uṭṭhāsi. Sabbe ekavādā ahesuṃ. Tato āhaṃsu – ‘‘yo taṃ āharituṃ sakkhissati, taṃ mayaṃ amhākaṃ samaye jeṭṭhakaṃ karissāmā’’ti.

Having thus declined in gains and honor, about five hundred of them gathered in one wanderers' park and conferred: "Friends, from the time of the arising of the ascetic Gotama, we have become bereft of gains and honor. If you would determine one disparagement of the ascetic Gotama and his disciples, having spread the disparagement, having criticized his Dispensation, we will generate gains and honor for ourselves." Seeking a fault, they said, "It is not possible to see a fault in the ascetic Gotama in the four places, namely, in the three doors, in his livelihood, and in his life. Having abandoned these four places, look elsewhere." Then, among them, one spoke thus: "I do not see anything else. Having gathered together for a fortnight, they close the door openings and do not even allow novices to enter. Even attendants dear as life cannot get to see them. Having lowered the trap, they eat having trapped and trapped people. If we are able to bring that about, our gains and honor will be vast." Another also rose, speaking in the same way. All were of one voice. Then they said, "He who will be able to bring that about, we will make him the senior in our group."

Tato koṭito paṭṭhāya ‘‘tvaṃ sakkhissasi, tvaṃ sakkhissasī’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘ahaṃ na sakkhissāmi, ahaṃ na sakkhissāmī’’ti bahūhi vutte sarabhaṃ pucchiṃsu – ‘‘tvaṃ sakkhissasi ācariyā’’ti. So āha – ‘‘agaru etaṃ āharituṃ, sace tumhe attano kathāya ṭhatvā maṃ jeṭṭhakaṃ karissathā’’ti. Agaru etamācariya āhara, tvaṃ katoyevāsi amhehi jeṭṭhakoti. So āha – ‘‘taṃ āharantena thenetvā vā vilumpitvā vā āharituṃ na sakkā, samaṇassa pana gotamassa sāvakasadisena hutvā tassa sāvake vanditvā vattapaṭivattaṃ katvā tesaṃ patte bhattaṃ bhuñjitvā āharituṃ sakkā. Ruccati vo etassa ettakassa kiriyā’’ti. Yaṃkiñci katvā āharitvā ca no dehīti. Tena hi maṃ disvā apassantā viya bhaveyyāthāti paribbājakānaṃ saññaṃ datvā dutiyadivase pātova uṭṭhāya gijjhakūṭamahāvihāraṃ gantvā diṭṭhadiṭṭhānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ pañcapatiṭṭhitena pāde vandi. Bhikkhū āhaṃsu – ‘‘aññe paribbājakā caṇḍā pharusā, ayaṃ pana saddho bhavissati pasanno’’ti. Bhante, tumhe ñatvā yuttaṭṭhānasmiṃyeva pabbajitā, mayaṃ pana anupadhāretvā atittheneva pakkhantā aniyyānikamagge vicarāmāti. So evaṃ vatvā diṭṭhe diṭṭhe bhikkhū punappunaṃ vandati, nhānodakādīni paṭiyādeti, dantakaṭṭhaṃ kappiyaṃ karoti, pāde dhovati makkheti, atirekabhattaṃ labhitvā bhuñjati.

Then, beginning from the end, having asked, "Will you be able, will you be able?" and with many having said, "I will not be able, I will not be able," they asked Sarabha, "Will you be able, teacher?" He said, "It is not difficult to bring that about, if you, standing by your word, will make me the senior." It is not difficult for the teacher to bring that about; you have already been made our senior by us. He said, "It is not possible to bring that about by stealing or plundering. But it is possible to bring that about by becoming like a disciple of the ascetic Gotama, having paid homage to his disciples, having done the duties, having eaten food from their bowls. Do you approve of this much action?" "Do whatever you have to do, and give it to us." "Then, you should act as if you do not see me," having given the signal to the wanderers, on the second day, early in the morning, he went to the Great Gijjhakūṭa Monastery and paid homage with the five-point prostration at the feet of whatever monks he saw. The monks said, "Other wanderers are fierce and harsh, but this one will be faithful and devoted." "Venerable sirs, having known, you have gone forth in a suitable place. But we, not having determined, having left without satisfaction, wander on a path that does not lead out." Having spoken thus, he repeatedly paid homage to each monk he saw, prepared bath water and so on, made tooth sticks permissible, washed and anointed their feet, and obtained and ate extra food.

Taṃ iminā nīhārena vasantaṃ eko mahāthero disvā, ‘‘paribbājaka, tvaṃ saddho pasanno, kiṃ na pabbajasī’’ti. Ko maṃ, bhante, pabbājessati. Mayañhi cirakālaṃ bhadantānaṃ paccatthikā hutvā vicarimhāti. Thero ‘‘sace tvaṃ pabbajitukāmo, ahaṃ taṃ pabbājessāmī’’ti vatvā pabbājesi. So pabbajitakālato paṭṭhāya nirantaraṃ vattapaṭivattamakāsi. Atha naṃ thero vatte pasīditvā nacirasseva upasampādesi. So uposathadivase bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ uposathaggaṃ pavisitvā bhikkhū mahantena ussāhena pātimokkhaṃ paggaṇhante disvā ‘‘iminā nīhārena osāretvā osāretvā lokaṃ khādanti, katipāhena harissāmī’’ti cintesi. So pariveṇaṃ gantvā upajjhāyaṃ vanditvā, ‘‘bhante, ko nāmo ayaṃ dhammo’’ti pucchi. Pātimokkho nāma, āvusoti. Uttamadhammo esa, bhante, bhavissatīti. Āma, āvuso, sakalasāsanadhāraṇī ayaṃ sikkhāti. Bhante, sace esa sikkhādhammo uttamo, imameva paṭhamaṃ gaṇhāmīti. Gaṇhāvusoti thero sampaṭicchi. So gaṇhanto paribbājake passitvā ‘‘kīdisaṃ ācariyā’’ti pucchito, ‘‘āvuso, mā cintayittha, katipāhena āharissāmī’’ti vatvā nacirasseva uggaṇhitvā upajjhāyaṃ āha – ‘‘ettakameva, bhante, udāhu aññampi atthī’’ti. Ettakameva, āvusoti.

While he was living in this manner, a certain elder saw him and said, "Wanderer, you are faithful and devoted. Why do you not go forth?" "Who, venerable sir, will ordain me? Indeed, for a long time we have been opponents of the venerable ones, wandering around." The elder, saying, "If you wish to go forth, I will ordain you," ordained him. From the time he went forth, he continuously performed the duties. Then, the elder, pleased with his duties, soon gave him the full ordination. On the Uposatha day, having entered the Uposatha hall with the monks, seeing the monks reciting the Pātimokkha with great effort, he thought, "Having trapped the world by lowering the trap with this method, I will take it away in a few days." Having gone to his cell, having paid homage to his preceptor, he asked, "Venerable sir, what is the name of this Dhamma?" "It is called Pātimokkha, friend." "This will be the best Dhamma, venerable sir." "Yes, friend, this training is the support of the entire Dispensation." "Venerable sir, if this training Dhamma is the best, I will learn this first." "Learn it, friend," the elder agreed. While he was learning, having seen the wanderers, when asked, "What is it like, teacher?" he said, "Friend, do not worry, I will bring it in a few days," and soon having mastered it, he said to his preceptor, "Is this all, venerable sir, or is there more?" "That is all, friend."

So punadivase yathānivatthapārutova gahitanīhāreneva pattaṃ gahetvā gijjhakūṭā nikkhamma paribbājakārāmaṃ agamāsi. Paribbājakā disvā ‘‘kīdisaṃ, ācariya, nāsakkhittha maññe āvaṭṭanimāyaṃ āharitu’’nti taṃ parivārayiṃsu. Mā cintayittha, āvuso, āhaṭā me āvaṭṭanimāyā, ito paṭṭhāya amhākaṃ lābhasakkāro mahā bhavissati. Tumhe aññamaññaṃ samaggā hotha, mā vivādaṃ akatthāti. Sace te, ācariya, suggahitā, amhepi naṃ vācehīti. So ādito paṭṭhāya pātimokkhaṃ osāresi. Atha te sabbepi – ‘‘etha, bho, nagare vicarantā samaṇassa gotamassa avaṇṇaṃ kathessāmā’’ti anugghāṭitesuyeva nagaradvāresu dvārasamīpaṃ gantvā vivaṭena dvārena sabbapaṭhamaṃ pavisiṃsu. Evaṃ saliṅgeneva apakkantaṃ taṃ paribbājakaṃ sandhāya – ‘‘sarabho nāma paribbājako acirapakkanto hotī’’ti vuttaṃ.

On the next day, just as he had put on his robes and taken his bowl, with the same attitude, having left Gijjhakūṭa, he went to the wanderers' park. The wanderers, seeing him, surrounded him, saying, "What is it like, teacher? I think you were not able to bring the trap." "Do not worry, friends, I have brought the traps. From now on, our gains and honor will be great. May you be harmonious with one another; do not quarrel." "If you have thoroughly learned it, teacher, recite it to us." He recited the Pātimokkha from the beginning. Then all of them, saying, "Come, friends, wandering in the city, we will speak disparagingly of the ascetic Gotama," entered the city through the gates as soon as they were opened, being the very first to enter through the open gates. Referring to that wanderer who had left in this manner, it was said, "Sarabha, a wanderer of that name, had recently left."

so rājagahe parisati evaṃ vācaṃ bhāsatītiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthaaññātoti ñāto avabuddho, pākaṭaṃ katvā uggahitoti dīpeti.Aññāyāti jānitvā.Apakkantoti saliṅgeneva apakkanto. Sace hi samaṇassa gotamassa sāsane koci sāro abhavissa, nāhaṃ apakkamissaṃ. Tassa pana sāsanaṃ asāraṃ nissāraṃ, āvaṭṭanimāyaṃ osāretvā samaṇā lokaṃ khādantīti evamatthaṃ dīpento evamāha.

so rājagahe parisati evaṃ vācaṃ bhāsatīti and so on was said. There, aññāto means known, understood, indicating that he had learned it by making it clear. Aññāyā means having known. Apakkanto means having left in that very way. "If there were any essence in the Dispensation of the ascetic Gotama, I would not have left. But his Dispensation is without essence, without substance, and the ascetics eat the world by lowering the trap," thus, showing this meaning, he said this.

Atha kho sambahulā bhikkhūti atha evaṃ tasmiṃ paribbājake bhāsamāne araññavāsino pañcasatā bhikkhū ‘‘asukaṭṭhānaṃ nāma satthā piṇḍāya carituṃ gato’’ti ajānantā bhikkhācāravelāyaṃ rājagahaṃ piṇḍāya pavisiṃsu. Te sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.Assosunti suṇiṃsu.Yenabhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṃsūti ‘‘imaṃ kāraṇaṃ dasabalassa ārocessāmā’’ti upasaṅkamiṃsu.

Atha kho sambahulā bhikkhūti Then, while that wanderer was speaking thus, five hundred monks who were forest dwellers, not knowing "The Teacher has gone to such-and-such a place for alms," entered Rājagaha for alms at alms-gathering time. This was said referring to them. Assosunti heard. Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṃsūti: They approached, thinking, "We will report this matter to the Ten-Powered One."

Sippinikātīrantisippinikāti evaṃnāmikāya nadiyā tīraṃ.Adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvenāti kāyaṅgavācaṅgāni acopetvā abbhantare khantiṃ dhāretvā citteneva adhivāsesīti attho. Evaṃ adhivāsetvā puna cintesi – ‘‘kiṃ nu kho ajja mayā sarabhassa vādaṃ maddituṃ gacchantena ekakena gantabbaṃ, udāhu bhikkhusaṅghaparivutenā’’ti. Athassa etadahosi – sacāhaṃ bhikkhusaṅghaparivuto gamissāmi, mahājano evaṃ cintessati – ‘‘samaṇo gotamo vāduppattiṭṭhānaṃ gacchanto pakkhaṃ ukkhipitvā gantvā parisabalena uppannaṃ vādaṃ maddati, paravādīnaṃ sīsaṃ ukkhipituṃ na detī’’ti. Na kho pana mayhaṃ uppanne vāde paraṃ gahetvā maddanakiccaṃ atthi, ahameva gantvā maddissāmi. Anacchariyaṃ cetaṃ yvāhaṃ idāni buddhabhūto attano uppannaṃ vādaṃ maddeyyaṃ, cariyaṃ caraṇakāle ahetukapaṭisandhiyaṃ nibbattenāpi hi mayā vahitabbaṃ dhuraṃ añño vahituṃ samattho nāma nāhosi. Imassa panatthassa sādhanatthaṃ –

Sippinikātīranti, sippinikāti: "Sippinikātīra" means the bank of the river named Sippinikā. Adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvenāti: "The Blessed One accepted in silence" means He accepted with His mind, maintaining forbearance inwardly without disturbing His bodily or verbal actions. Having accepted thus, He further thought: "Should I go alone to suppress Sarabha's argument today, or should I go surrounded by the Sangha?" Then it occurred to Him: "If I go surrounded by the Sangha, the multitude will think, 'The ascetic Gotama, going to the place of argument, raises a faction and suppresses the argument that has arisen with the strength of his retinue, not allowing the head of the opponent to be raised.' But I have no need to suppress an argument that has arisen by seizing on another; I myself will go and suppress it. It would not be a marvel if I, now being a Buddha, were to suppress my own argument; even when practicing the cariya, in a rebirth without a cause, the burden that I had to bear, no one else was able to bear it." To illustrate this point, the following Kanhajātaka should be brought forth:

‘‘Yato yato garu dhuraṃ, yato gambhīravattanī;

"Where the burden is heavy, where the path is deep;
There they harness the strong one; he alone bears that burden." (jā. 1.1.29) –

Idaṃ kaṇhajātakaṃ āharitabbaṃ. Atīte kira eko satthavāho ekissā mahallikāya gehe nivāsaṃ gaṇhi. Athassa ekissā dhenuyā rattibhāgasamanantare gabbhavuṭṭhānaṃ ahosi. Sā ekaṃ vacchakaṃ vijāyi. Mahallikāya vacchakaṃ diṭṭhakālato paṭṭhāya puttasineho udapādi. Punadivase satthavāhaputto – ‘‘tava gehavetanaṃ gaṇhāhī’’ti āha. Mahallikā ‘‘mayhaṃ aññena kiccaṃ na atthi, imameva vacchakaṃ dehī’’ti āha. Gaṇha, ammāti. Sā taṃ gaṇhitvā khīraṃ pāyetvā yāgubhattatiṇādīni dadamānā posesi. So vuddhimanvāya paripuṇṇarūpo balavīriyasampanno ahosi sampannācāro, kāḷako nāma nāmena. Athekassa satthavāhassa pañcahi sakaṭasatehi āgacchantassa udakabhinnaṭṭhāne sakaṭacakkaṃ laggi. So dasapi vīsampi tiṃsampi yojetvā nīharāpetuṃ asakkonto kāḷakaṃ upasaṅkamitvā āha – ‘‘tāta, tava vetanaṃ dassāmi, sakaṭaṃ me ukkhipitvā dehī’’ti. Evañca pana vatvā taṃ ādāya – ‘‘añño iminā saddhiṃ dhuraṃ vahituṃ samattho natthī’’ti dhurasakaṭe yottaṃ bandhitvā taṃ ekakaṃyeva yojesi. So taṃ sakaṭaṃ ukkhipitvā thale patiṭṭhāpetvā eteneva nihārena pañca sakaṭasatāni nīhari. So sabbapacchimasakaṭaṃ nīharitvā mociyamāno ‘‘su’’nti katvā sīsaṃ ukkhipi.

It is said that in the past, a caravan leader took residence in an old woman's house. Then, in the latter part of the night, one of her cows was about to calve. She gave birth to a calf. From the moment the old woman saw the calf, motherly love arose in her. The next day, the caravan leader's son said, "Take your house rent." The old woman said, "I have no need of anything else; give me this calf." "Take it, mother," he said. She took it, gave it milk to drink, and raised it, feeding it rice-gruel, rice, grass, and so on. It grew and became fully developed, endowed with strength and vigor, and was named Kāḷaka. Then, when a caravan leader was coming with five hundred carts, the wheel of a cart got stuck in a place broken by water. Unable to pull it out even with ten, twenty, or thirty yoked together, he approached Kāḷaka and said, "Friend, I will give you wages; lift up my cart." Having said this, taking him, he tied the yoke to the cart, thinking, "There is no other capable of bearing the burden with him," and yoked him alone. He lifted that cart and placed it on dry land, and in this way, he pulled out five hundred carts. When the last cart was pulled out and he was being released, he raised his head, making a sound like "su."

atha kho bhagavā sāyanhasamayaṃ paṭisallānā vuṭṭhitotiādi vuttaṃ.

atha kho bhagavā sāyanhasamayaṃ paṭisallānā vuṭṭhitotiādi: "Then the Blessed One, in the evening, arose from seclusion," etc., has been said.

paṭisallānāti puthuttārammaṇehi cittaṃ paṭisaṃharitvā sallānato, phalasamāpattitoti attho.Tenupasaṅkamīti paribbājakesu sakalanagare pakāsanīyakammaṃ katvā nagarā nikkhamma paribbājakārāme sannipatitvā ‘‘sace, āvuso sarabha, samaṇo gotamo āgamissati, kiṃ karissasī’’ti. Samaṇe gotame ekaṃ karonte ahaṃ dve karissāmi, dve karonte cattāri, cattāri karonte pañca, pañca karonte dasa, dasa karonte vīsati, vīsati karonte tiṃsaṃ, tiṃsaṃ karonte cattālīsaṃ, cattālīsaṃ karonte paññāsaṃ, paññāsaṃ karonte sataṃ, sataṃ karonte sahassaṃ karissāmīti evaṃ aññamaññaṃ sīhanādakathaṃ samuṭṭhāpetvā nisinnesu upasaṅkami.

paṭisallānāti: "From seclusion" means from withdrawing the mind from external objects into contemplation, from the fruition attainment. Tenupasaṅkamīti: "He approached them" means after doing a proclamation ceremony against the wandering ascetics in the entire city, they left the city and gathered in the wandering ascetics' park, saying, "If, friend Sarabha, the ascetic Gotama comes, what will you do?" "If the ascetic Gotama does one, I will do two; if he does two, I will do four; if he does four, I will do five; if he does five, I will do ten; if he does ten, I will do twenty; if he does twenty, I will do thirty; if he does thirty, I will do forty; if he does forty, I will do fifty; if he does fifty, I will do a hundred; if he does a hundred, I will do a thousand." He approached them as they were sitting, raising such lion's roar-like talk among themselves.

Upasaṅkamanto pana yasmā paribbājakārāmassa nagaramajjheneva maggo, tasmā surattadupaṭṭaṃ nivāsetvā sugatamahācīvaraṃ pārupitvā vissaṭṭhabalo rājā viya ekakova nagaramajjhena agamāsi. Micchādiṭṭhikā disvā ‘‘paribbājakā samaṇassa gotamassa pakāsanīyakammaṃ karontā avaṇṇaṃ patthariṃsu, so ete anuvattitvā saññāpetuṃ gacchati maññe’’ti anubandhiṃsu. Sammādiṭṭhikāpi ‘‘sammāsambuddho pattacīvaraṃ ādāya ekakova nikkhanto, ajja sarabhena saddhiṃ mahādhammasaṅgāmo bhavissati. Mayampi tasmiṃ samāgame kāyasakkhino bhavissāmā’’ti anubandhiṃsu. Satthā passantasseva mahājanassa paribbājakārāmaṃ upasaṅkami.

As he was approaching, since the path to the wandering ascetics' park was right through the middle of the city, wearing a bright red upper robe and draped in the great robe of the Sugata, like a king with unfettered power, he went alone through the middle of the city. Those with wrong view, seeing him, followed him, thinking, "The wandering ascetics, doing a proclamation ceremony against the ascetic Gotama, spread disparagement; he, following them, is going to appease them, I suppose." Those with right view also followed him, thinking, "The Perfectly Enlightened One, taking his bowl and robe, has gone out alone; today there will be a great Dhamma battle with Sarabha. We too will be bodily witnesses to that assembly." The Teacher approached the wandering ascetics' park as the multitude was watching.

Paribbājakā rukkhānaṃ khandhaviṭapasākhantarehi samuggacchantā chabbaṇṇaghanabuddharasmiyo disvā ‘‘aññadā evarūpo obhāso nāma natthi, kiṃ nu kho eta’’nti ulloketvā ‘‘samaṇo gotamo āgacchatī’’ti āhaṃsu. Taṃ sutvāva sarabho jāṇukantare sīsaṃ ṭhapetvā adhomukho nisīdi. Evaṃ tasmiṃ samaye bhagavā taṃ ārāmaṃ upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi. Tathāgato hi jambudīpatale aggakule jātattā aggāsanārahotissa sabbattha āsanaṃ paññattameva hoti. Evaṃ paññatte mahārahe buddhāsane nisīdi.

The wandering ascetics, seeing the six-colored dense Buddha rays rising up through the trunks, branches, and boughs of the trees, exclaimed, "There is no such radiance at other times; what could this be?" Looking up, they said, "The ascetic Gotama is coming!" Having heard that, Sarabha placed his head between his knees and sat with his face down. At that time, the Blessed One approached that park and sat down on the prepared seat. Indeed, because the Tathāgata was born in the foremost family on the Jambudīpa continent, he is worthy of the foremost seat; therefore, a seat is always prepared wherever he goes. Thus, he sat down on the prepared, precious Buddha seat.

Te paribbājakā sarabhaṃ paribbājakaṃ etadavocunti sammāsambuddhe kira sarabhena saddhiṃ ettakaṃ kathenteyeva bhikkhusaṅgho satthu padānupadiko hutvā paribbājakārāmaṃ sampāpuṇi, catassopi parisā paribbājakārāmeyeva osariṃsu. Tato te paribbājakā ‘‘acchariyaṃ samaṇassa gotamassa kammaṃ, sakalanagaraṃ vicaritvā avaṇṇaṃ pattharitvā pakāsanīyakammaṃ katvā āgatānaṃ verīnaṃ paṭisattūnaṃ paccāmittānaṃ santikaṃ āgantvā thokampi viggāhikakathaṃ na kathesi, āgatakālato paṭṭhāya satapākatelena makkhento viya amatapānaṃ pāyento viya madhurakathaṃ kathetī’’ti sabbepi sammāsambuddhaṃ anuvattantā etadavocuṃ.

Te paribbājakā sarabhaṃ paribbājakaṃ etadavocunti: "Those wandering ascetics said this to Sarabha the wandering ascetic" means it is said that while the Perfectly Enlightened One was conversing so much with Sarabha, the Sangha of monks, following the Teacher's footsteps, arrived at the wandering ascetics' park, and all four assemblies descended at the wandering ascetics' park itself. Then those wandering ascetics, admiring the action of the ascetic Gotama, thinking, "Having roamed the entire city, spread disparagement, and done a proclamation ceremony, he has come to the presence of his enemies, his adversaries, his opponents, without speaking even a small contentious word; from the time he arrived, he speaks sweetly, as if anointing with oil heated a hundred times, as if giving a drink of ambrosia," all following the Perfectly Enlightened One, said this.

Yāceyyāsīti āyāceyyāsi pattheyyāsi piheyyāsi.Tuṇhībhūtoti tuṇhībhāvaṃ upagato.Maṅkubhūtoti nittejataṃ āpanno.Pattakkhandhoti onatagīvo.Adhomukhoti heṭṭhāmukho.Sammāsambuddhassa te paṭijānatoti ‘‘ahaṃ sammāsambuddho, sabbe dhammā mayā abhisambuddhā’’ti evaṃ paṭijānato tava.Anabhisambuddhāti ime nāma dhammā tayā anabhisambuddhā.Tatthāti tesu anabhisambuddhāti evaṃ dassitadhammesu.Aññena vā aññaṃ paṭicarissatīti aññena vā vacanena aññaṃ vacanaṃ paṭicchādessati, aññaṃ pucchito aññaṃ kathessatīti adhippāyo.Bahiddhā kathaṃ apanāmessatīti bahiddhā aññaṃ āgantukakathaṃ āharanto purimakathaṃ apanāmessati.Appaccayanti anabhiraddhiṃ atuṭṭhākāraṃpātukarissatīti pākaṭaṃ karissati. Ettha ca appaccayena domanassaṃ vuttaṃ, purimehi dvīhi mandabalavabhedo kodhoyeva.

Yāceyyāsīti: "You should ask" means you should implore, desire, long for. Tuṇhībhūtoti: "Having become silent" means having adopted silence. Maṅkubhūtoti: "Having become crestfallen" means having attained dejection. Pattakkhandhoti: "With lowered neck" means with bent neck. Adhomukhoti: "Face down" means with the face downwards. Sammāsambuddhassa te paṭijānatoti: "Of you, claiming to be a Perfectly Enlightened One" means of you who claim, "I am a Perfectly Enlightened One; all dhammas have been fully awakened by me." Anabhisambuddhāti: "Not fully awakened" means these dhammas have not been fully awakened by you. Tatthāti: "Therein" means in those dhammas shown as not fully awakened. Aññena vā aññaṃ paṭicarissatīti: "Or will answer one thing with another" means will answer one thing with another word, will answer something else when asked something else. Bahiddhā kathaṃ apanāmessatīti: "Will divert the talk outwards" means bringing in another extraneous topic, will divert the former talk. Appaccayanti: "Displeasure" means a state of dissatisfaction, pātukarissatīti: "will manifest" means will make apparent. Here, displeasure (appaccaya) is said to be sorrow (domanassa), and the former two are anger itself, differing only in intensity.

yo kho maṃ paribbājakātiādimāha. Tatthayassa kho pana te atthāya dhammo desitoti yassa maggassa vā phalassa vā atthāya tayā catusaccadhammo desito.So na niyyātīti so dhammo na niyyāti na niggacchati, na taṃ atthaṃ sādhetīti vuttaṃ hoti.Takkarassāti yo naṃ karoti, tassa paṭipattipūrakassa puggalassāti attho.Sammā dukkhakkhayāyāti hetunā nayena kāraṇena sakalassa vaṭṭadukkhassa khayāya. Atha vāyassa kho pana te atthāya dhammo desitoti yassa te atthāya dhammo desito. Seyyathidaṃ – rāgapaṭighātatthāya asubhakammaṭṭhānaṃ, dosapaṭighātatthāya mettābhāvanā, mohapaṭighātatthāya pañca dhammā, vitakkupacchedāya ānāpānassati.So na niyyāti takkarassa sammā dukkhakkhayāyāti so dhammo yo naṃ yathādesitaṃ karoti, tassa takkarassa sammā hetunā nayena kāraṇena vaṭṭadukkhakkhayāya na niyyāti na niggacchati, taṃ atthaṃ na sādhetīti ayamettha attho.Seyyathāpi sarabho paribbājakoti yathā ayaṃ sarabho paribbājako pajjhāyanto appaṭibhāno nisinno, evaṃ nisīdissatīti.

yo kho maṃ paribbājakātiādi: "That, wandering ascetics," etc., was said. There, yassa kho pana te atthāya dhammo desitoti: "For whose sake the Dhamma is taught" means for the sake of which path or which fruition the four noble truths have been taught by you. So na niyyātīti: "It does not lead out" means that Dhamma does not lead out, does not go forth, does not accomplish that goal. Takkarassāti: "For the doer" means for the person who fulfills the practice. Sammā dukkhakkhayāyāti: "For the right destruction of suffering" means by a proper method, reason, or cause, for the destruction of all the suffering of the round of rebirths. Or, alternatively, yassa kho pana te atthāya dhammo desitoti: "For whose sake the Dhamma is taught" means for whose sake the Dhamma is taught. For example, the foulness meditation for the sake of overcoming lust and aversion, the meditation on loving-kindness for the sake of overcoming hatred, five dhammas for the sake of overcoming delusion, mindfulness of breathing for the sake of cutting off thoughts. So na niyyāti takkarassa sammā dukkhakkhayāyāti: "It does not lead to the right destruction of suffering for the doer" means that Dhamma, which one does according to what has been taught, does not lead out, does not go forth, does not accomplish that goal for the right destruction of suffering of the round of rebirths, by a proper method, reason, or cause, for that doer; this is the meaning here. Seyyathāpi sarabho paribbājakoti: "Just as Sarabha the wandering ascetic" means just as this Sarabha the wandering ascetic sits meditating, speechless, so he will sit.

atha kho bhagavātiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthasīhanādanti seṭṭhanādaṃ abhītanādaṃ appaṭinādaṃ.Vehāsaṃ pakkāmīti abhiññāpādakaṃ catutthajjhānaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya adhiṭṭhāya saddhiṃ bhikkhusaṅghena ākāsaṃ pakkhandi. Evaṃ pakkhando ca pana taṃkhaṇaññeva gijjhakūṭamahāvihāre patiṭṭhāsi.

atha kho bhagavātiādi: "Then the Blessed One," etc., was said. There, sīhanādanti: "Lion's roar" means the best roar, the fearless roar, the unimpeded roar. Vehāsaṃ pakkāmīti: "Departed into the sky" means having attained the fourth jhāna, which is the basis for supernormal powers, arising from it, resolving, he ascended into the sky together with the Sangha of monks. And ascending thus, he immediately stood firm in the Great Monastery of Vulture Peak Mountain.

Vācāya sannitodakenāti vacanapatodena.Sañjambharimakaṃsūti sambharitaṃ nirantaraphuṭaṃ akaṃsu, upari vijjhiṃsūti vuttaṃ hoti.Brahāraññeti mahāraññe.Sīhanādaṃ nadissāmīti sīhassa nadato ākāraṃ disvā ‘‘ayampi tiracchānagato, ahampi, imassa cattāro pādā, mayhampi, ahampi evameva sīhanādaṃ nadissāmī’’ti cintesi. So sīhassa sammukhā nadituṃ asakkonto tasmiṃ gocarāya pakkante ekako nadituṃ ārabhi. Athassa siṅgālasaddoyeva nicchari. Tena vuttaṃ –siṅgālakaṃyeva nadatīti.Bheraṇḍakanti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Apica bhinnassaraṃ amanāpasaddaṃ nadatīti vuttaṃ hoti.Evameva kho tvanti iminā opammena paribbājakā tathāgataṃ sīhasadisaṃ katvā sarabhaṃ siṅgālasadisaṃ akaṃsu.Ambukasañcarīti khuddakakukkuṭikā.Purisakaravitaṃ ravissāmīti mahākukkuṭaṃ ravantaṃ disvā ‘‘imassapi dve pādā dve pakkhā, mayhampi tatheva, ahampi evarūpaṃ ravitaṃ ravissāmī’’ti sā tassa sammukhā ravituṃ asakkontī tasmiṃ pakkante ravamānā kukkuṭikāravaṃyeva ravi. Tena vuttaṃ –ambukasañcariravitaṃyeva ravatīti.Usabhoti goṇo.Suññāyāti tucchāya jeṭṭhakavasabhehi virahitāya.Gambhīraṃ naditabbaṃ maññatīti jeṭṭhakavasabhassa nādasadisaṃ gambhīranādaṃ naditabbaṃ maññati. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.

Vācāya sannitodakenāti: "With the goad of speech" means with the sharp point of words. Sañjambharimakaṃsūti: "They filled and jammed him" means they filled him continuously, pierced him on top. Brahāraññeti: "In the great forest" means in the large forest. Sīhanādaṃ nadissāmīti: "I will roar a lion's roar" means seeing the manner of a roaring lion, he thought, "This one is also a beast, and so am I; it has four legs, and so do I; I too will roar a lion's roar in the same way." Unable to roar in front of the lion, when it had gone to graze, he began to roar alone. Then only the sound of a jackal came out. Therefore, it was said, siṅgālakaṃyeva nadatīti: "He roars only a jackal's roar." Bheraṇḍakanti: "A Bheraṇḍa bird" is another term for the same. Moreover, it means he roars with a discordant, unpleasant sound. Evameva kho tvanti: "Just so are you" means with this simile, the wandering ascetics, likening the Tathāgata to a lion, likened Sarabha to a jackal. Ambukasañcarīti: "A small hen" means a small chicken. Purisakaravitaṃ ravissāmīti: "I will crow a cock's crow" means seeing a crowing rooster, "It also has two legs and two wings, and so do I; I too will crow such a crow," but unable to crow in front of it, when it had gone, crowing, she only crowed a hen's crow. Therefore, it was said, ambukasañcariravitaṃyeva ravatīti: "She crows only a hen's crow." Usabhoti: "Usabha" means a bull. Suññāyāti: "In an empty place" means in a place devoid of elder bulls. Gambhīraṃ naditabbaṃ maññatīti: "Thinks he should roar deeply" means he thinks he should roar a deep roar like the roar of an elder bull. The rest is straightforward in meaning everywhere.

5. Kesamuttisuttavaṇṇanā
5. Kesamutti Sutta Commentary

66.Pañcamekālāmānaṃ nigamoti kālāmā nāma khattiyā, tesaṃ nigamo.Kesamuttiyāti kesamuttanigamavāsino.Upasaṅkamiṃsūti sappinavanītādibhesajjāni ceva aṭṭhavidhapānakāni ca gāhāpetvā upasaṅkamiṃsu.Sakaṃyeva vādaṃ dīpentīti attanoyeva laddhiṃ kathenti.Jotentīti pakāsenti.Khuṃsentīti ghaṭṭenti.Vambhentīti avajānanti.Paribhavantīti lāmakaṃ karonti.Omakkhiṃ karontīti ukkhittakaṃ karonti, ukkhipitvā chaḍḍenti.Aparepi, bhanteti so kira aṭavimukhe gāmo, tasmā tattha aṭaviṃ atikkantā ca atikkamitukāmā ca vāsaṃ kappenti. Tesupi paṭhamaṃ āgatā attano laddhiṃ dīpetvā pakkamiṃsu, pacchā āgatā ‘‘kiṃ te jānanti, amhākaṃ antevāsikā te, amhākaṃ santike kiñci kiñci sippaṃ uggaṇhiṃsū’’ti attano laddhiṃ dīpetvā pakkamiṃsu. Kālāmā ekaladdhiyampi saṇṭhahituṃ na sakkhiṃsu. Te etamatthaṃ dīpetvā bhagavato evamārocetvātesaṃ no, bhantetiādimāhaṃsu. Tatthahoteva kaṅkhāti hotiyeva kaṅkhā.Vicikicchāti tasseva vevacanaṃ.Alanti yuttaṃ.

66. In the fifth, kālāmānaṃ nigamoti: "The town of the Kālāmas" means the Kālāmas are khattiyas, their town. Kesamuttiyāti: "Of Kesamutti" means those dwelling in the town of Kesamutti. Upasaṅkamiṃsūti: "They approached" means having accepted ghee, fresh butter, and other medicines, as well as the eight kinds of drinks, they approached. Sakaṃyeva vādaṃ dīpentīti: "They only expound their own doctrine" means they only speak about their own view. Jotentīti: "They illuminate" means they make clear. Khuṃsentīti: "They grind down" means they crush. Vambhentīti: "They despise" means they scorn. Paribhavantīti: "They revile" means they make cheap. Omakkhiṃ karontīti: "They make rejected" means they make something rejected, having lifted it up, they throw it away. Aparepi, bhanteti: "Others too, venerable sir" means that village was near a forest, therefore those who had crossed the forest and those who wished to cross it took up residence there. Of those, the ones who came first expounded their own doctrine and left; those who came later expounded their own doctrine and left, saying, "What do they know? They are our pupils; they learned some craft or other from our presence." The Kālāmas were not able to settle on even one doctrine. Having shown this matter, they said to the Blessed One, declaring thus, tesaṃ no, bhantetiādi: "To us, venerable sir," etc. There, hoteva kaṅkhāti: "There is indeed doubt" means there is doubt indeed. Vicikicchāti: "Uncertainty" is another term for the same. Alanti: "Enough" means it is fitting.

anussavenāti anussavakathāyapi mā gaṇhittha.Mā paramparāyāti paramparakathāyapi mā gaṇhittha.Mā itikirāyāti evaṃ kira etanti mā gaṇhittha.Mā piṭakasampadānenāti amhākaṃ piṭakatantiyā saddhiṃ sametīti mā gaṇhittha.Mā takkahetūti takkaggāhenapi mā gaṇhittha.Mā nayahetūti nayaggāhenapi mā gaṇhittha.Mā ākāraparivitakkenāti sundaramidaṃ kāraṇanti evaṃ kāraṇaparivitakkenapi mā gaṇhittha.Mā diṭṭhinijjhānakkhantiyāti amhākaṃ nijjhāyitvā khamitvā gahitadiṭṭhiyā saddhiṃ sametītipi mā gaṇhittha.Mā bhabbarūpatāyāti ayaṃ bhikkhu bhabbarūpo, imassa kathaṃ gahetuṃ yuttantipi mā gaṇhittha.Mā samaṇo no garūti ayaṃ samaṇo amhākaṃ garu, imassa kathaṃ gahetuṃ yuttantipi mā gaṇhittha.Samattāti paripuṇṇā.Samādinnāti gahitā parāmaṭṭhā.Yaṃsa hotīti yaṃ kāraṇaṃ tassa puggalassa hoti. Alobhādayo lobhādipaṭipakkhavasena veditabbā.Vigatābhijjhotiādīhi mettāya pubbabhāgo kathito.

Mā anussavenāti: "Not by report" means do not accept even by way of hearsay. Mā paramparāyāti: "Not by tradition" means do not accept even by way of traditional tales. Mā itikirāyāti: "Not by thus it is said" means do not accept by way of "thus it is said." Mā piṭakasampadānenāti: "Not by the agreement with the Piṭaka" means do not accept, thinking, "It agrees with our Piṭaka text." Mā takkahetūti: "Not by logical reasoning" means do not accept even by grasping at logic. Mā nayahetūti: "Not by inferential reasoning" means do not accept even by grasping at inference. Mā ākāraparivitakkenāti: "Not by considering the reasons" means do not accept even by considering the reasons, thinking, "This reason is beautiful." Mā diṭṭhinijjhānakkhantiyāti: "Not by agreement with a considered view" means do not accept, thinking, "It agrees with our view, which has been considered and accepted." Mā bhabbarūpatāyāti: "Not by the speaker being competent" means do not accept, thinking, "This monk appears capable; how is it fitting to accept his words?" Mā samaṇo no garūti: "Not because the ascetic is our teacher" means do not accept, thinking, "This ascetic is our teacher; how is it fitting to accept his words?" Samattāti: "Complete" means perfected. Samādinnāti: "Undertaken" means grasped, clung to. Yaṃsa hotīti: "Whatever thing is" means whatever cause is for that person. Greedlessness, etc., should be understood as opposed to greed, etc. With Vigatābhijjhotiādi: "Free from covetousness," etc., the preliminary part to loving-kindness has been spoken.

mettāsahagatenātiādimāha. Tattha kammaṭṭhānakathāya vā bhāvanānaye vā pāḷivaṇṇanāya vā yaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā, taṃ sabbaṃ visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.240) vuttameva.Evaṃ averacittoti evaṃ akusalaverassa ca puggalaverino ca natthitāya averacitto.Abyābajjhacittoti kodhacittassa abhāvena niddukkhacitto.Asaṃkiliṭṭhacittoti kilesassa natthitāya asaṃkiliṭṭhacitto.Visuddhacittoti kilesamalābhāvena visuddhacitto hotīti attho.Tassāti tassa evarūpassa ariyasāvakassa.Assāsāti avassayā patiṭṭhā.Sace kho pana atthi paro lokoti yadi imamhā lokā paraloko nāma atthi.Athāhaṃ kāyassa bhedā parammaraṇā…pe… upapajjissāmīti atthetaṃ kāraṇaṃ, yenāhaṃ kāyassa bhedā parammaraṇā sugatiṃ saggaṃ lokaṃ upapajjissāmīti evaṃ sabbattha nayo veditabbo.Anīghanti niddukkhaṃ.Sukhinti sukhitaṃ.Ubhayeneva visuddhaṃ attānaṃ samanupassāmīti yañca pāpaṃ na karomi, yañca karotopi na karīyati, iminā ubhayenāpi visuddhaṃ attānaṃ samanupassāmi. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.

mettāsahagatenāti etc. was said. Whatever should be said there, either in the context of a meditation subject, or in the method of cultivation, or in the description of the Pali text, all that has already been said in the Visuddhimagga (visuddhi. 1.240). Evaṃ averacittoti thus, because there is no enmity either in the form of unwholesome aversion or in the form of personal enmity, he is with a mind free from enmity. Abyābajjhacittoti due to the absence of an angry mind, he is with a mind free from affliction. Asaṃkiliṭṭhacittoti due to the absence of defilement, he is with a mind uncorrupted. Visuddhacittoti because of the absence of the impurities of defilement, he has a purified mind, is the meaning. Tassāti to that Noble Disciple of such a kind. Assāsāti they are reliance, they are support. Sace kho pana atthi paro lokoti if indeed there is a world beyond this world. Athāhaṃ kāyassa bhedā parammaraṇā…pe… upapajjissāmīti this is the reason, that I, after the breakup of the body, after death, will be reborn in a good destination, a heavenly world. In this way, the method should be understood everywhere. Anīghanti free from suffering. Sukhinti happy. Ubhayeneva visuddhaṃ attānaṃ samanupassāmīti and whatever evil I do not do, and whatever I do, I do not do it excessively, by both of these I contemplate myself as pure. The rest is self-explanatory everywhere.

6. Sāḷhasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Sāḷhasuttavaṇṇanā

67.Chaṭṭhemigāranattāti migāraseṭṭhino nattā.Sekhuniyanattāti sekhuniyaseṭṭhino nattā.Upasaṅkamiṃsūti bhuttapātarāsā dāsakammakaraparivutā upasaṅkamiṃsu. Tesaṃ kira purebhatte pubbaṇhasamayeyeva gehe eko pañho samuṭṭhito, taṃ pana kathetuṃ okāso nāhosi. Te ‘‘taṃ pañhaṃ sossāmā’’ti therassa santikaṃ gantvā vanditvā tuṇhī nisīdiṃsu. Thero ‘‘gāme taṃ samuṭṭhitaṃ pañhaṃ sotuṃ āgatā bhavissantī’’ti tesaṃ manaṃ ñatvā tameva pañhaṃ ārabhantoetha tumhe sāḷhātiādimāha. Tatthaatthi lobhoti lubbhanasabhāvo lobho nāma atthīti pucchati.Abhijjhāti kho ahaṃ sāḷhā etamatthaṃ vadāmīti etaṃ lobhasaṅkhātaṃ atthaṃ ahaṃ ‘‘abhijjhā’’ti vadāmi, ‘‘taṇhā’’ti vadāmīti samuṭṭhitapañhassa atthaṃ dīpento āha. Evaṃ sabbavāresu nayo netabbo.

67. In the sixth [sutta], migāranattāti grandson of Migāra the wealthy man. Sekhuniyanattāti grandson of Sekhuni the wealthy woman. Upasaṅkamiṃsūti having eaten breakfast, surrounded by servants and workers, they approached. It seems that early in the morning, before the meal, a question arose in their house, but there was no opportunity to discuss it. So, thinking, "We will hear that question," they went to the Elder, paid homage, and sat down silently. The Elder, knowing their minds, thinking, "They must have come to hear the question that arose in the village," beginning with that very question, said, etha tumhe sāḷhāti etc. There, atthi lobhoti he asks, "Is there such a thing as greed, the nature of coveting?" Abhijjhāti kho ahaṃ sāḷhā etamatthaṃ vadāmīti explaining the meaning of the question that had arisen, he said, "This thing called greed, I call it 'abhijjhā,' I call it 'taṇhā.'" In this way, the method should be applied in all instances.

Soevaṃ pajānātīti so cattāro brahmavihāre bhāvetvā ṭhito ariyasāvako samāpattito vuṭṭhāya vipassanaṃ ārabhanto evaṃ pajānāti.Atthi idanti atthi dukkhasaccasaṅkhātaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ nāmarūpavasena paricchinditvā pajānanto esa ‘‘evaṃ pajānāti atthi ida’’nti vutto.Hīnanti samudayasaccaṃ.Paṇītanti maggasaccaṃ.Imassa saññāgatassa uttari nissaraṇanti imassa vipassanāsaññāsaṅkhātassa saññāgatassa uttari nissaraṇaṃ nāma nibbānaṃ, tamatthīti iminā nirodhasaccaṃ dasseti.Vimuttasmiṃ vimuttamiti ñāṇanti ekūnavīsatividhaṃ paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ kathitaṃ.Ahu pubbe lobhoti pubbe me lobho ahosi.Tadahu akusalanti taṃ akusalaṃ nāma ahosi, tadā vā akusalaṃ nāma ahosi.Iccetaṃ kusalanti iti etaṃ kusalaṃ, tasseva akusalassa natthibhāvaṃ kusalaṃ khemanti sandhāya vadati.Nicchātoti nittaṇho.Nibbutoti abbhantare santāpakarānaṃ kilesānaṃ abhāvena nibbuto.Sītibhūtoti sītalībhūto.Sukhappaṭisaṃvedīti kāyikacetasikassa sukhassa paṭisaṃveditā.Brahmabhūtenāti seṭṭhabhūtena. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.

Soevaṃ pajānātīti that Noble Disciple, having developed the four brahmavihāras and standing firm, rising from the attainment, beginning insight, thus understands. Atthi idanti this means, recognizing and understanding the five aggregates in terms of name and form, which are the aggregate of the truth of suffering, he is said to have "understood thus: 'There is this.'" Hīnanti the truth of origin. Paṇītanti the truth of the path. Imassa saññāgatassa uttari nissaraṇanti the further escape from this aggregate of perception which is insight is Nibbāna, and by this he shows the truth of cessation. Vimuttasmiṃ vimuttamiti ñāṇanti the knowledge of reviewing, which is of nineteen kinds, is spoken of. Ahu pubbe lobhoti formerly I had greed. Tadahu akusalanti that was unwholesome, or at that time it was unwholesome. Iccetaṃ kusalanti thus this is wholesome, referring to the wholesome and safe nature of the absence of that very unwholesome quality, he speaks. Nicchātoti without craving. Nibbutoti extinguished because of the absence of defilements which cause torment within. Sītibhūtoti become cooled. Sukhappaṭisaṃvedīti one who experiences bodily and mental happiness. Brahmabhūtenāti with the excellent one. The rest is self-explanatory everywhere.

7. Kathāvatthusuttavaṇṇanā
7. Kathāvatthusuttavaṇṇanā

68.Sattamekathāvatthūnīti kathākāraṇāni, kathāya bhūmiyo patiṭṭhāyoti attho.Atītaṃ vā, bhikkhave, addhānanti atītamaddhānaṃ nāma kālopi vaṭṭati khandhāpi. Anāgatapaccuppannesupi eseva nayo. Tattha atīte kassapo nāma sammāsambuddho ahosi, tassa kikī nāma kāsikarājā aggupaṭṭhāko ahosi, vīsati vassasahassāni āyu ahosīti iminā nayena kathentoatītaṃ ārabbha kathaṃ kathetināma. Anāgate metteyyo nāma buddho bhavissati, tassa saṅkho nāma rājā aggupaṭṭhāko bhavissati, asīti vassasahassāni āyu bhavissatīti iminā nayena kathentoanāgataṃ ārabbha kathaṃ kathetināma. Etarahi asuko nāma rājā dhammikoti iminā nayena kathentopaccuppannaṃ ārabbha kathaṃ kathetināma.

68. In the seventh [sutta], kathāvatthūnīti the causes of discussion, the grounds of discussion, are the foundations, is the meaning. Atītaṃ vā, bhikkhave, addhānanti the past duration is both time and aggregates. The same method applies to the future and present. There, speaking in this way, "In the past there was a Fully Enlightened Buddha named Kassapa, his chief attendant was a Kāsika king named Kikī, and his lifespan was twenty thousand years," is called atītaṃ ārabbha kathaṃ katheti. Speaking in this way, "In the future, there will be a Buddha named Metteyya, his chief attendant will be a king named Saṅkha, and his lifespan will be eighty thousand years," is called anāgataṃ ārabbha kathaṃ katheti. Speaking in this way, "Now there is such-and-such a righteous king," is called paccuppannaṃ ārabbha kathaṃ katheti.

Kathāsampayogenāti kathāsamāgamena.Kacchoti kathetuṃ yutto.Akacchoti kathetuṃ na yutto.Ekaṃsabyākaraṇīyaṃ pañhantiādīsu, ‘‘cakkhu, anicca’’nti puṭṭhena, ‘‘āma, anicca’’nti ekaṃseneva byākātabbaṃ. Eseva nayo sotādīsu. Ayaṃekaṃsabyākaraṇīyopañho. ‘‘Aniccaṃ nāma cakkhū’’ti puṭṭhena pana ‘‘na cakkhumeva, sotampi aniccaṃ, ghānampi anicca’’nti evaṃ vibhajitvā byākātabbaṃ. Ayaṃvibhajjabyākaraṇīyopañho. ‘‘Yathā cakkhu, tathā sotaṃ. Yathā sotaṃ, tathā cakkhū’’ti puṭṭhena ‘‘kenaṭṭhena pucchasī’’ti paṭipucchitvā ‘‘dassanaṭṭhena pucchāmī’’ti vutte ‘‘na hī’’ti byākātabbaṃ. ‘‘Aniccaṭṭhena pucchāmī’’ti vutte, ‘‘āmā’’ti byākātabbaṃ. Ayaṃpaṭipucchābyākaraṇīyopañho. ‘‘Taṃ jīvaṃ taṃ sarīra’’ntiādīni puṭṭhena pana ‘‘abyākatametaṃ bhagavatā’’ti ṭhapetabbo, esa pañho na byākātabbo. Ayaṃṭhapanīyopañho.

Kathāsampayogenāti by the association of talk. Kacchoti fit to speak. Akacchoti not fit to speak. Among ekaṃsabyākaraṇīyaṃ pañhanti etc., when asked, "Is the eye impermanent?", one should answer definitively, "Yes, it is impermanent." The same method applies to the ear and so on. This is a ekaṃsabyākaraṇīyo question. But when asked, "Is it the eye that is impermanent?", one should answer by distinguishing, "Not only the eye, the ear is also impermanent, the nose is also impermanent." This is a vibhajjabyākaraṇīyo question. When asked, "As is the eye, so is the ear. As is the ear, so is the eye," one should ask in return, "In what sense are you asking?" If he says, "I am asking in the sense of seeing," one should answer, "No." If he says, "I am asking in the sense of impermanence," one should answer, "Yes." This is a paṭipucchābyākaraṇīyo question. But when asked about "Is the life-principle the same as the body?" etc., one should put it aside, saying, "This is undeclared by the Blessed One," this question should not be answered. This is a ṭhapanīyo question.

Ṭhānāṭhāne na saṇṭhātīti kāraṇākāraṇe na saṇṭhāti. Tatrāyaṃ nayo – sassatavādī yuttena kāraṇena pahoti ucchedavādiṃ niggahetuṃ, ucchedavādī tena niggayhamāno ‘‘kiṃ panāhaṃ ucchedaṃ vadāmī’’ti sassatavādibhāvameva dīpeti, attano vāde patiṭṭhātuṃ na sakkoti. Evaṃ ucchedavādimhi pahonte sassatavādī, puggalavādimhi pahonte suññatavādī, suññatavādimhi pahonte puggalavādīti evaṃ ṭhānāṭhāne na saṇṭhāti nāma.

Ṭhānāṭhāne na saṇṭhātīti he does not stand firm on reason and unreason. Here is the method: a proponent of eternalism is able to refute a proponent of annihilationism with valid reasoning, but the proponent of annihilationism, being refuted by him, reveals his belief in eternalism, saying, "Am I saying annihilation?" and is not able to stand firm in his own view. Similarly, when a proponent of annihilationism is able to [refute a proponent of eternalism], when a proponent of personalism is able to [refute a proponent of emptiness], when a proponent of emptiness is able to [refute a proponent of personalism], thus he does not stand firm on reason and unreason. is the meaning.

Parikappena saṇṭhātīti idaṃ pañhapucchanepi pañhakathanepi labbhati. Kathaṃ? Ekacco hi ‘‘pañhaṃ pucchissāmī’’ti kaṇṭhaṃ sodheti, so itarena ‘‘idaṃ nāma tvaṃ pucchissasī’’ti vutto ñātabhāvaṃ ñatvā ‘‘na etaṃ, aññaṃ pucchissāmī’’ti vadati. Pañhaṃ puṭṭhopi ‘‘pañhaṃ kathessāmī’’ti hanuṃ saṃsodheti, so itarena ‘‘idaṃ nāma kathessasī’’ti vutto ñātabhāvaṃ ñatvā ‘‘na etaṃ, aññaṃ kathessāmī’’ti vadati. Evaṃ parikappe na saṇṭhāti nāma.

Parikappena saṇṭhātīti this can be obtained both in asking a question and in stating a question. How? One person clears his throat, intending to ask a question. The other, knowing that he knows what he is going to ask, says, "You are going to ask this." Knowing that it is known, he says, "Not this, I will ask something else." Similarly, when asked a question, he adjusts his jaw, intending to state a question. The other, knowing that he knows what he is going to say, says, "You are going to say this." Knowing that it is known, he says, "Not this, I will say something else." Thus, he does not stand firm in contrivance. is the meaning.

Aññātavāde na saṇṭhātīti aññātavāde jānitavāde na saṇṭhāti. Kathaṃ? Ekacco pañhaṃ pucchati, taṃ itaro ‘‘manāpo tayā pañho pucchito, kahaṃ te esa uggahito’’ti vadati. Itaro pucchitabbaniyāmeneva pañhaṃ pucchitvāpi tassa kathāya ‘‘apañhaṃ nu kho pucchita’’nti vimatiṃ karoti. Aparo pañhaṃ puṭṭho katheti, tamañño ‘‘suṭṭhu te pañho kathito, kattha te uggahito, pañhaṃ kathentena nāma evaṃ kathetabbo’’ti vadati. Itaro kathetabbaniyāmeneva pañhaṃ kathetvāpi tassa kathāya ‘‘apañho nu kho mayā kathito’’ti vimatiṃ karoti.

Aññātavāde na saṇṭhātīti he does not stand firm in the unrecognized doctrine, in the known doctrine. How? One person asks a question, and the other says to him, "The question you asked is pleasing to me, where did you learn it?" Even after asking the question according to the rule of asking, he doubts about that talk, "Was the question asked incorrectly?" Another person is asked a question and answers it, and another says to him, "You have answered the question well, where did you learn it, the question should be answered like this by the one answering the question." Even after answering the question according to the rule of answering, he doubts about that talk, "Was the question answered incorrectly by me?"

Paṭipadāya na saṇṭhātīti paṭipattiyaṃ na tiṭṭhati, vattaṃ ajānitvā apucchitabbaṭṭhāne pucchatīti attho. Ayaṃ pañho nāma cetiyaṅgaṇe pucchitena na kathetabbo, tathā bhikkhācāramagge gāmaṃ piṇḍāya caraṇakāle. Āsanasālāya nisinnakāle yāguṃ vā bhattaṃ vā gahetvā nisinnakāle paribhuñjitvā nisinnakāle divāvihāraṭṭhānagamanakālepi. Divāṭṭhāne nisinnakāle pana okāsaṃ kāretvāva pucchantassa kathetabbo, akāretvā pucchantassa na kathetabbo. Idaṃ vattaṃ ajānitvā pucchanto paṭipadāya na saṇṭhāti nāma.Evaṃ santāyaṃ, bhikkhave, puggalo akaccho hotīti, bhikkhave, etaṃ imasmiṃ ca kāraṇe sati ayaṃ puggalo na kathetuṃ yutto nāma hoti.

Paṭipadāya na saṇṭhātīti he does not stand firm in practice, meaning he asks in a place where it should not be asked, without knowing the custom. This question should not be answered when asked in the courtyard of a cetiya, or on the alms-round path, or while going for alms in the village. Nor when sitting in the assembly hall, nor when sitting after taking rice-gruel or food, nor when sitting after eating, nor when going to a place for the daytime rest. However, when sitting in the daytime place, it should be answered only when the one asking has made an opportunity, but it should not be answered when the one asking has not made an opportunity. Asking without knowing this custom is called not standing firm in practice. Evaṃ santāyaṃ, bhikkhave, puggalo akaccho hotīti, monks, when this cause exists, this person is not fit to speak. is the meaning.

Ṭhānāṭhāne saṇṭhātīti sassatavādī yuttena kāraṇena pahoti ucchedavādiṃ niggahetuṃ, ucchedavādī tena niggayhamānopi ‘‘ahaṃ tayā satakkhattuṃ niggayhamānopi ucchedavādīyevā’’ti vadati. Iminā nayena sassatapuggalasuññatavādādīsupi nayo netabbo. Evaṃ ṭhānāṭhāne saṇṭhāti nāma.Parikappe saṇṭhātīti ‘‘pañhaṃ pucchissāmī’’ti kaṇṭhaṃ sodhento ‘‘tvaṃ imaṃ nāma pucchissasī’’ti vutte, ‘‘āma, etaṃyeva pucchissāmī’’ti vadati. Pañhaṃ kathessāmīti hanuṃ saṃsodhentopi ‘‘tvaṃ imaṃ nāma kathessasī’’ti vutte, ‘‘āma, etaṃyeva kathessāmī’’ti vadati. Evaṃ parikappe saṇṭhāti nāma.

Ṭhānāṭhāne saṇṭhātīti the proponent of eternalism is able to refute the proponent of annihilationism with valid reasoning, but the proponent of annihilationism, even while being refuted by him, says, "Even if I am refuted a hundred times by you, I am still a proponent of annihilationism." In this way, the method should be applied to the proponents of eternalism, personalism, emptiness, and so on. Thus, he stands firm on reason and unreason. is the meaning. Parikappe saṇṭhātīti while clearing his throat, intending to ask a question, if someone says, "You are going to ask this," he says, "Yes, I am going to ask this very thing." Similarly, while adjusting his jaw, intending to state a question, if someone says, "You are going to say this," he says, "Yes, I am going to say this very thing." Thus, he stands firm in contrivance. is the meaning.

Aññātavāde saṇṭhātīti imaṃ pañhaṃ pucchitvā ‘‘suṭṭhu te pañho pucchito, pucchantena nāma evaṃ pucchitabba’’nti vutte sampaṭicchati, vimatiṃ na uppādeti. Pañhaṃ kathetvāpi ‘‘suṭṭhu te pañho kathito, kathentena nāma evaṃ kathetabba’’nti vutte sampaṭicchati, vimatiṃ na uppādeti.Paṭipadāya saṇṭhātīti gehe nisīdāpetvā yāgukhajjakādīni datvā yāva bhattaṃ niṭṭhāti, tasmiṃ antare nisinno pañhaṃ pucchati. Sappiādīni bhesajjāni aṭṭhavidhāni pānakāni vatthacchādanamālāgandhādīni vā ādāya vihāraṃ gantvā tāni datvā divāṭṭhānaṃ pavisitvā okāsaṃ kāretvā pañhaṃ pucchati. Evañhi vattaṃ ñatvā pucchanto paṭipadāya saṇṭhāti nāma. Tassa pañhaṃ kathetuṃ vaṭṭati.

Aññātavāde saṇṭhātīti having asked this question, when someone says, "You have asked the question well, the question should be asked like this by the one asking," he accepts it and does not create doubt. Similarly, having answered the question, when someone says, "You have answered the question well, the question should be answered like this by the one answering," he accepts it and does not create doubt. Paṭipadāya saṇṭhātīti having seated him in the house, having given him rice-gruel and snacks, while he is sitting there until the meal is finished, he asks the question. Or, taking ghee and other medicines of eight kinds, or drinks, or cloth, or garlands, or perfumes, or other things, going to the monastery, giving them, entering the daytime dwelling, and making an opportunity, he asks the question. Thus, asking with knowledge of the custom is called standing firm in practice. It is fitting to answer his question.

Aññenaññaṃ paṭicaratīti aññena vacanena aññaṃ paṭicchādeti, aññaṃ vā pucchito aññaṃ katheti.Bahiddhā kathaṃ apanāmetīti āgantukakathaṃ otārento purimakathaṃ bahiddhā apanāmeti. Tatridaṃ vatthu – bhikkhū kira sannipatitvā ekaṃ daharaṃ, ‘‘āvuso, tvaṃ imañcimañca āpattiṃ āpanno’’ti āhaṃsu. So āha – ‘‘bhante, nāgadīpaṃ gatomhī’’ti. Āvuso, na mayaṃ tava nāgadīpagamanena atthikā, āpattiṃ pana āpannoti pucchāmāti. Bhante, nāgadīpaṃ gantvā macche khādinti. Āvuso, tava macchakhādanena kammaṃ natthi, āpattiṃ kirasi āpannoti. So ‘‘nātisupakko maccho mayhaṃ aphāsukamakāsi, bhante’’ti. Āvuso, tuyhaṃ phāsukena vā aphāsukena vā kammaṃ natthi, āpattiṃ āpannosīti. Bhante, yāva tattha vasiṃ, tāva me aphāsukameva jātanti. Evaṃ āgantukakathāvasena bahiddhā kathaṃ apanāmetīti veditabbaṃ.

Aññenaññaṃ paṭicaratīti he covers one thing with another word, or when asked about one thing, he answers about another. Bahiddhā kathaṃ apanāmetīti while introducing an extraneous topic, he diverts the original topic outwards. Here is an instance: it seems that monks, having gathered together, said to a young novice, "Friend, you have committed such-and-such an offense." He said, "Venerable, I have gone to Nāgadīpa." "Friend, we are not concerned with your going to Nāgadīpa, but we are asking whether you have committed an offense." "Venerable, having gone to Nāgadīpa, I ate fish." "Friend, your eating fish is not the issue, but did you commit an offense?" He said, "The fish that was not well-cooked caused me discomfort, venerable." "Friend, we are not concerned with your comfort or discomfort, but did you commit an offense?" "Venerable, as long as I stayed there, I only experienced discomfort." In this way, it should be understood that he diverts the topic outwards through extraneous talk.

Abhiharatīti ito cito ca suttaṃ āharitvā avattharati.Tepiṭakatissattheroviya. Pubbe kira bhikkhū mahācetiyaṅgaṇe sannipatitvā saṅghakiccaṃ katvā bhikkhūnaṃ ovādaṃ datvā aññamaññaṃ pañhasākacchaṃ karonti. Tatthāyaṃ thero tīhi piṭakehi tato tato suttaṃ āharitvā divasabhāge ekampi pañhaṃ niṭṭhāpetuṃ na deti.Abhimaddatīti kāraṇaṃ āharitvā maddati.Anupajagghatīti parena pañhe pucchitepi kathitepi pāṇiṃ paharitvā mahāhasitaṃ hasati, yena parassa ‘‘apucchitabbaṃ nu kho pucchiṃ, akathetabbaṃ nu kho kathesi’’nti vimati uppajjati.Khalitaṃ gaṇhātīti appamattakaṃ mukhadosamattaṃ gaṇhāti, akkhare vā pade vā byañjane vā durutte ‘‘evaṃ nāmetaṃ vattabba’’nti ujjhāyamāno vicarati.Saupanisoti saupanissayo sapaccayo.

Abhiharatīti bringing together suttas from here and there, he strings them together. Tepiṭakatissattheroviya like Tipiṭaka Tissa Thera. It seems that formerly, monks, having gathered in the courtyard of the Mahācetiya, having performed the business of the Sangha, having given advice to the monks, would engage in mutual question-and-answer sessions. There, this Thera, bringing together suttas from here and there from the three baskets, would not allow even one question to be completed during the daytime. Abhimaddatīti bringing forward a reason, he crushes [the opponent]. Anupajagghatīti even when a question is asked or answered by another, he claps his hands and laughs loudly, so that the other person doubts, "Did I ask something that should not have been asked, did I say something that should not have been said?" Khalitaṃ gaṇhātīti he seizes upon a minor verbal fault, observing and criticizing a wrongly-uttered syllable or word or phrase, saying, "It should not be said like that." Saupanisoti with grounds, with causes.

Ohitasototi ṭhapitasoto.Abhijānāti ekaṃ dhammanti ekaṃ kusaladhammaṃ abhijānāti ariyamaggaṃ.Parijānāti ekaṃ dhammanti ekaṃ dukkhasaccadhammaṃ tīraṇapariññāya parijānāti.Pajahati ekaṃ dhammanti ekaṃ sabbākusaladhammaṃ pajahati vinodeti byantīkaroti.Sacchikaroti ekaṃ dhammanti ekaṃ arahattaphaladhammaṃ nirodhameva vā paccakkhaṃ karoti.Sammāvimuttiṃ phusatīti sammā hetunā nayena kāraṇena arahattaphalavimokkhaṃ ñāṇaphassena phusati.

Ohitasototi with attentive ear. Abhijānāti ekaṃ dhammanti he directly knows one wholesome dhamma, the Noble Path. Parijānāti ekaṃ dhammanti he completely understands one dhamma of the truth of suffering by means of thorough understanding. Pajahati ekaṃ dhammanti he abandons, eliminates, and destroys one of all unwholesome dhammas. Sacchikaroti ekaṃ dhammanti he directly realizes one dhamma of the fruit of Arahatship, or cessation itself. Sammāvimuttiṃ phusatīti he touches the liberation of the fruit of Arahatship with the touch of knowledge by means of right reason, method, and cause.

Etadatthā, bhikkhave, kathāti, bhikkhave, yā esā kathāsampayogenāti kathā dassitā, sā etadatthā, ayaṃ tassā kathāya bhūmi patiṭṭhā. Idaṃ vatthu yadidaṃ anupādā cittassa vimokkhoti evaṃ sabbapadesu yojanā veditabbā.Etadatthā mantanāti yā ayaṃ kacchākacchesu puggalesu kacchena saddhiṃ mantanā, sāpi etadatthāyeva.Etadatthā upanisāti ohitasoto saupanisoti evaṃ vuttā upanisāpi etadatthāyeva.Etadatthaṃ sotāvadhānanti tassā upanisāya sotāvadhānaṃ, tampi etadatthameva.Anupādāti catūhi upādānehi aggahetvā.Cittassa vimokkhoti arahattaphalavimokkho. Arahattaphalatthāya hi sabbametanti suttantaṃ vinivattetvā upari gāthāhi kūṭaṃ gaṇhantoye viruddhātiādimāha.

"Etadatthā, bhikkhave, kathā" means, monks, the kathā (talk) that was shown as being connected with talk (kathāsampayogena), that kathā has this meaning, this is the ground and basis of that talk. The meaning in all instances should be understood in this way: "This is the thing, namely, the liberation of the mind through non-clinging." "Etadatthā mantanā" means that mantanā (deliberation), which is deliberation together with individuals in secret places (kacchākacchesu), that too is for this purpose. "Etadatthā upanisā" means the upanisā (close attention), spoken of as "one who has placed the ear, attentive," that upanisā too is for this purpose. "Etadatthaṃ sotāvadhānaṃ" means the placing of the ear (sotāvadhānaṃ) to that upanisā, that too is for this purpose. "Anupādā" means without grasping with the four upādāna (clinging). "Cittassa vimokkho" means the liberation of the fruition of Arahatship. For all this is for the sake of the fruition of Arahatship. Turning away from the suttanta (discourse) and taking up the conclusion with the verses, he said, beginning with "ye viruddhā."

viruddhāti virodhasaṅkhātena kopena viruddhā.Sallapantīti sallāpaṃ karonti.Viniviṭṭhāti abhiniviṭṭhā hutvā.Samussitāti mānussayena suṭṭhu ussitā.Anariyaguṇamāsajjāti anariyaguṇakathaṃ guṇamāsajja kathenti. Guṇaṃ ghaṭṭetvā kathā hi anariyakathā nāma, na ariyakathā, taṃ kathentīti attho.Aññoññavivaresinoti aññamaññassa chiddaṃ aparādhaṃ gavesamānā.Dubbhāsitanti dukkathitaṃ.Vikkhalitanti appamattakaṃ mukhadosakhalitaṃ.Sampamohaṃ parājayanti aññamaññassa appamattena mukhadosena sampamohañca parājayañca.Abhinandantīti tussanti.Nācareti na carati na katheti.Dhammaṭṭhapaṭisaṃyuttāti yā ca dhamme ṭhitena kathitakathā, sā dhammaṭṭhā ceva hoti tena ca dhammena paṭisaṃyuttāti dhammaṭṭhapaṭisaṃyuttā.Anunnatena manasāti anuddhatena cetasā.Apaḷāsoti yugaggāhapaḷāsavasena apaḷāso hutvā.Asāhasoti rāgadosamohasāhasānaṃ vasena asāhaso hutvā.

"Viruddhā" means hostile, opposed by the saṅkhāta (denomination) of opposition, namely, anger. "Sallapantī" means making sallāpa (idle talk). "Viniviṭṭhā" means being firmly fixed. "Samussitā" means being well-elevated by conceit (mānussayena). "Anariyaguṇamāsajjā" means speaking about anariyaguṇa (qualities of the ignoble) by bringing up the qualities. Talk that praises qualities is called ignoble talk, not noble talk, that is what they are speaking. "Aññoññavivaresino" means seeking the fault, the offense, of one another. "Dubbhāsitaṃ" means badly spoken. "Vikkhalitaṃ" means a slight slip of the tongue. "Sampamohaṃ parājayaṃ" means bewilderment and defeat due to a slight slip of the tongue of one another. "Abhinandantī" means they rejoice. "Nācare" means does not conduct, does not speak. "Dhammaṭṭhapaṭisaṃyuttā" means the talk spoken by one standing in the Dhamma, that is dhammaṭṭhā (righteous) and connected with that Dhamma, thus it is dhammaṭṭhapaṭisaṃyuttā. "Anunnatena manasā" means with an un-elated mind. "Apaḷāso" means being without deceit (apaḷāso) in terms of the deceit of seizing upon trivialities (yugaggāhapaḷāsavasena). "Asāhaso" means being without rashness (asāhaso) in terms of the rashness of greed, hatred, and delusion (rāgadosamohasāhasānaṃ vasena).

Anusūyāyamānoti na usūyamāno.Dubbhaṭṭhe nāpasādayeti dukkathitasmiṃ na apasādeyya.Upārambhaṃ na sikkheyyāti kāraṇuttariyalakkhaṇaṃ upārambhaṃ na sikkheyya.Khalitañca na gāhayeti appamattakaṃ mukhakhalitaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ te doso’’ti na gāhayeyya.Nābhihareti nāvatthareyya.Nābhimaddeti ekaṃ kāraṇaṃ āharitvā na maddeyya.Navācaṃ payutaṃ bhaṇeti saccālikapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ vācaṃ na bhaṇeyya.Aññātatthanti jānanatthaṃ.Pasādatthanti pasādajananatthaṃ.Na samusseyya mantayeti na mānussayena samussito bhaveyya. Na hi mānussitā hutvā paṇḍitā kathayanti, mānena pana anussitova hutvā mantaye katheyya bhāseyyāti.

"Anusūyāyamāno" means not being envious (na usūyamāno). "Dubbhaṭṭhe nāpasādaye" means in what is badly spoken, one should not disparage (na apasādeyya). "Upārambhaṃ na sikkheyyā" means one should not practice the censure (upārambhaṃ), which has the characteristic of answering back. "Khalitañca na gāhaye" means one should not point out a slight slip of the tongue, saying, "This is your fault." "Nābhihare" means one should not spread it about. "Nābhimadde" means one should not crush by bringing up a single reason. "Na vācaṃ payutaṃ bhaṇe" means one should not speak speech connected with truthfulness (saccālikapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ). "Aññātatthaṃ" means for the sake of knowing (jānanatthaṃ). "Pasādatthaṃ" means for the sake of generating confidence (pasādajananatthaṃ). "Na samusseyya mantaye" means one should not be elevated with conceit (na mānussayena samussito bhaveyya). For the wise do not speak being conceited, but one should deliberate, speak, and converse without conceit (mānena anussitova hutvā mantaye katheyya bhāseyyāti).

8. Aññatitthiyasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Aññatitthiyasuttavaṇṇanā

69.Aṭṭhamebhagavaṃmūlakāti bhagavā mūlaṃ etesanti bhagavaṃmūlakā. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ime, bhante, amhākaṃ dhammā pubbe kassapasammāsambuddhena uppāditā, tasmiṃ parinibbute ekaṃ buddhantaraṃ añño samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā ime dhamme uppādetuṃ samattho nāma nāhosi, bhagavato pana no ime dhammā uppāditā. Bhagavantañhi nissāya mayaṃ ime dhamme ājānāma paṭivijjhāmāti evaṃ bhagavaṃmūlakā no, bhante, dhammāti.Bhagavaṃnettikāti bhagavā dhammānaṃ netā vinetā anunetā yathāsabhāvato pāṭiyekkaṃ pāṭiyekkaṃ nāmaṃ gahetvāva dassetāti dhammā bhagavaṃnettikā nāma honti.Bhagavaṃpaṭisaraṇāti catubhūmakadhammā sabbaññutaññāṇassa āpāthaṃ āgacchamānā bhagavati paṭisaranti nāmāti bhagavaṃpaṭisaraṇā.Paṭisarantīti osaranti samosaranti. Apica mahābodhimaṇḍe nisinnassa bhagavato paṭivedhavasena phasso āgacchati – ‘‘ahaṃ bhagavā kinnāmo’’ti. Tvaṃ phusanaṭṭhena phasso nāma. Vedanā, saññā, saṅkhārā, viññāṇaṃ āgacchati – ‘‘ahaṃ bhagavā kinnāma’’nti. Tvaṃ vijānanaṭṭhena viññāṇaṃ nāmāti. Evaṃ catubhūmakadhammānaṃ yathāsabhāvato pāṭiyekkaṃ pāṭiyekkaṃ nāmaṃ gaṇhanto bhagavā dhamme paṭisaratītibhagavaṃpaṭisaraṇā. Bhagavantaṃyeva paṭibhātūti bhagavatova etassa bhāsitassa attho upaṭṭhātu, tumheyeva no kathetvā dethāti attho.

69.In the eighth [sutta]: "bhagavaṃmūlakā" means those for whom the Blessed One is the root (bhagavā mūlaṃ etesanti bhagavaṃmūlakā). This is what is said: "These, venerable sir, are our teachings, produced formerly by the Kassapa Sammāsambuddha; when he had passed away, for the duration of one Buddha-interval (buddhantaraṃ), there was no samaṇa or brāhmaṇa capable of producing these teachings; but these teachings have been produced for us by the Blessed One. For relying on the Blessed One, we understand and penetrate these teachings." Thus, "These, venerable sir, are our teachings rooted in the Blessed One." "Bhagavaṃnettikā" means the Blessed One is the leader, the guide, the instructor of the teachings, showing each and every one according to its own nature, taking each and every name, thus the teachings are said to be bhagavaṃnettikā. "Bhagavaṃpaṭisaraṇā" means the teachings of the four planes (catubhūmakadhammā), coming into the range of the knowledge of the All-Knowing One (sabbaññutaññāṇassa āpāthaṃ āgacchamānā), are said to resort to the Blessed One, thus bhagavaṃpaṭisaraṇā. "Paṭisarantī" means they resort, they converge. Moreover, when the Blessed One was sitting at the Great Bodhi-mandala, phassa (contact) came to him in terms of penetration: "What is my name, Blessed One?" You are named phassa in the sense of touching (phusanaṭṭhena). Vedanā (feeling), saññā (perception), saṅkhārā (volitional formations), viññāṇaṃ (consciousness) come: "What is my name, Blessed One?" You are named viññāṇaṃ in the sense of discerning (vijānanaṭṭhena). Thus, the Blessed One, taking each and every name of the teachings of the four planes according to its own nature, resorts to the teachings, thus "bhagavaṃpaṭisaraṇā. Bhagavantaṃyeva paṭibhātū" means may the meaning of this utterance occur to the Blessed One, may you explain and give it to us.

Rāgokhoti rajjanavasena pavattarāgo.Appasāvajjoti lokavajjavasenapi vipākavajjavasenapīti dvīhipi vajjehi appasāvajjo, appadosoti attho. Kathaṃ? Mātāpitaro hi bhātibhaginiādayo ca puttabhātikānaṃ āvāhavivāhamaṅgalaṃ nāma kārenti. Evaṃ tāveso lokavajjavasena appasāvajjo. Sadārasantosamūlikā pana apāye paṭisandhi nāma na hotīti evaṃ vipākavajjavasena appasāvajjo.Dandhavirāgīti virajjamāno panesa saṇikaṃ virajjati, na sīghaṃ muccati. Telamasirāgo viya ciraṃ anubandhati, dve tīṇi bhavantarāni gantvāpi nāpagacchatīti dandhavirāgī.

"Rāgo kho" means rāga (greed) that arises in terms of clinging. "Appasāvajjo" means slightly blameworthy (appadosoti) in terms of both worldly blame (lokavajjavasenapi) and the blame of consequences (vipākavajjavasenapīti). How? Parents and siblings and so on arrange a marriage ceremony for their children. Thus, this is only slightly blameworthy in terms of worldly blame. But since there is no rebirth in the lower realms that is rooted in contentment with one's own spouse (sadārasantosamūlikā), thus it is slightly blameworthy in terms of the blame of consequences. "Dandhavirāgī" means one who is dispassionate becomes dispassionate slowly (saṇikaṃ virajjati), does not quickly become free. Like the stain of oil, it clings for a long time, and does not go away even after going through two or three existences (dve tīṇi bhavantarāni).

Tatridaṃ vatthu – eko kira puriso bhātu jāyāya micchācāraṃ carati. Tassāpi itthiyā attano sāmikato soyeva piyataro ahosi. Sā tamāha – ‘‘imasmiṃ kāraṇe pākaṭe jāte mahatī garahā bhavissati, tava bhātikaṃ ghātehī’’ti. So ‘‘nassa, vasali, mā evaṃ puna avacā’’ti apasādesi. Sā tuṇhī hutvā katipāhaccayena puna kathesi, tassa cittaṃ dvajjhabhāvaṃ agamāsi. Tato tatiyavāraṃ kathito ‘‘kinti katvā okāsaṃ labhissāmī’’ti āha. Athassa sā upāyaṃ kathentī ‘‘tvaṃ mayā vuttameva karohi, asukaṭṭhāne mahākakudhasamīpe titthaṃ atthi, tattha tikhiṇaṃ daṇḍakavāsiṃ gahetvā tiṭṭhāhī’’ti. So tathā akāsi. Jeṭṭhabhātāpissa araññe kammaṃ katvā gharaṃ āgato. Sā tasmiṃ muducittā viya hutvā ‘‘ehi sāmi, sīse te olikhissāmī’’ti olikhantī ‘‘upakkiliṭṭhaṃ te sīsa’’nti āmalakapiṇḍaṃ datvā ‘‘gaccha asukaṭṭhāne sīsaṃ dhovitvā āgacchāhī’’ti pesesi. So tāya vuttatitthameva gantvā āmalakakakkena sīsaṃ makkhetvā udakaṃ oruyha onamitvā sīsaṃ dhovi. Atha naṃ itaro rukkhantarato nikkhamitvā khandhaṭṭhike paharitvā jīvitā voropetvā gehaṃ agamāsi.

Here is a story: It is said that a certain man engaged in misconduct with his brother's wife. And she was dearer to him than her own husband. She said to him, "If this matter becomes public, there will be great blame. Kill your brother." He dismissed her, saying, "No, vile woman, do not say such a thing again." She remained silent, and after a few days, she spoke again, and his mind became indecisive (dvajjhabhāvaṃ agamāsi). Then, when she spoke for the third time, he said, "How can I get an opportunity?" Then she, explaining the method to him, said, "Do just as I tell you. In such a place, near a large kakudha tree, there is a bathing place. Take a sharp stick and stand there." He did so. His elder brother had been working in the forest and came home. She, acting as if she was tenderhearted towards him, said, "Come, my lord, I will delouse your head." While delousing, she gave him a ball of myrobalan, saying, "Your head is dirty. Go and wash your head in such a place and come back." He went to the bathing place she had mentioned, rubbed his head with the myrobalan pulp, went down into the water, bent over, and washed his head. Then the other man came out from behind a tree, struck him on the neck with the staff, killed him, and went home.

Itaro bhariyāya sinehaṃ pariccajitumasakkonto tasmiṃyeva gehe mahādhammani hutvā nibbatti. So tassā ṭhitāyapi nisinnāyapi gantvā sarīre patati. Atha naṃ sā ‘‘soyeva ayaṃ bhavissatī’’ti ghātāpesi. So puna tassā sinehena tasmiṃyeva gehe kukkuro hutvā nibbatti. So padasā gamanakālato paṭṭhāya tassā pacchato pacchato carati. Araññaṃ gacchantiyāpi saddhiṃyeva gacchati. Taṃ disvā manussā ‘‘nikkhanto sunakhaluddako, kataraṭṭhānaṃ gamissatī’’ti uppaṇḍenti. Sā puna taṃ ghātāpesi.

The other man, unable to give up affection for his wife, was reborn as a great dhammaṇi (fly) in that same house. He would go and fall on her body whether she was standing or sitting. Then she thought, "This must be that man," and had him killed. He, out of affection for her, was reborn as a dog in that same house. From the time of walking, he would follow behind her. Even when she went to the forest, he would go with her. Seeing this, people would mock, "The dog-hunter has come out, where is he going?" She had him killed again.

Sopi puna tasmiṃyeva gehe vacchako hutvā nibbatti. Tatheva tassā pacchato pacchato carati. Tadāpi naṃ manussā disvā ‘‘nikkhanto gopālako, kattha gāviyo carissantī’’ti uppaṇḍenti. Sā tasmimpi ṭhāne taṃ ghātāpesi. So tadāpi tassā upari sinehaṃ chindituṃ asakkonto catutthe vāre tassāyeva kucchiyaṃ jātissaro hutvā nibbatti. So paṭipāṭiyā catūsu attabhāvesu tāya ghātitabhāvaṃ disvā ‘‘evarūpāya nāma paccatthikāya kucchismiṃ nibbattosmī’’ti tato paṭṭhāya tassā hatthena attānaṃ phusituṃ na deti. Sace naṃ sā phusati, kandati rodati. Atha naṃ ayyakova paṭijaggati. Taṃ aparabhāge vuddhippattaṃ ayyako āha – ‘‘tāta, kasmā tvaṃ mātu hatthena attānaṃ phusituṃ na desi. Sacepi taṃ phusati, mahāsaddena rodasi kandasī’’ti. Ayyakena puṭṭho ‘‘na esā mayhaṃ mātā, paccāmittā esā’’ti taṃ pavattiṃ sabbaṃ ārocesi. So taṃ āliṅgitvā roditvā ‘‘ehi, tāta, kiṃ amhākaṃ īdise ṭhāne nivāsakicca’’nti taṃ ādāya nikkhamitvā ekaṃ vihāraṃ gantvā pabbajitvā ubhopi tattha vasantā arahattaṃ pāpuṇiṃsu.

Again, he was reborn as a calf in that same house. In the same way, he would follow behind her. Then, too, people seeing him would mock, "The cowherd has come out, where will the cows graze?" She had him killed in that place too. Then, unable to cut off affection for her, for the fourth time he was reborn in her womb as one who remembers his previous lives (jātissaro). Seeing that he had been killed by her in four existences in succession, thinking, "I have been reborn in the womb of such an enemy," from then on he would not allow her hand to touch him. If she touched him, he would cry and weep. Then his grandfather took care of him. When he had grown up, his grandfather said to him, "Why do you not allow your mother's hand to touch you, my dear? Even if she touches you, you cry and weep loudly." Being asked by his grandfather, he said, "She is not my mother, she is my enemy," and told him the whole story. He embraced him and wept, saying, "Come, my dear, what is the use of us living in such a place?" Taking him, he went out, went to a monastery, and both of them, ordaining and living there, attained Arahatship.

Mahāsāvajjoti lokavajjavasenapi vipākavajjavasenapīti dvīhipi kāraṇehi mahāsāvajjo. Kathaṃ? Dosena hi duṭṭho hutvā mātaripi aparajjhati, pitaripi bhātibhaginiādīsupi pabbajitesupi. So gatagataṭṭhānesu ‘‘ayaṃ puggalo mātāpitūsupi aparajjhati, bhātibhaginiādīsupi, pabbajitesupī’’ti mahatiṃ garahaṃ labhati. Evaṃ tāva lokavajjavasena mahāsāvajjo. Dosavasena pana katena ānantariyakammena kappaṃ niraye paccati. Evaṃ vipākavajjavasena mahāsāvajjo.Khippavirāgīti khippaṃ virajjati. Dosena hi duṭṭho mātāpitūsupi cetiyepi bodhimhipi pabbajitesupi aparajjhitvā ‘‘mayhaṃ khamathā’’ti. Accayaṃ deseti. Tassa saha khamāpanena taṃ kammaṃ pākatikameva hoti.

"Mahāsāvajjo" means greatly blameworthy (mahāsāvajjo) in terms of both worldly blame (lokavajjavasenapi) and the blame of consequences (vipākavajjavasenapīti). How? For one who is corrupted by hatred offends even against his mother, even against his father, even against siblings and against ascetics. He incurs great blame in every place he goes, saying, "This person offends even against his parents, even against siblings, even against ascetics." Thus, he is greatly blameworthy in terms of worldly blame. But due to an action done out of hatred, he suffers in hell for an kappa. Thus, he is greatly blameworthy in terms of the blame of consequences. "Khippavirāgī" means he quickly becomes dispassionate. For one who is corrupted by hatred, having offended even against his parents, even against shrines, even against Bodhi trees, even against ascetics, says, "Forgive me." He confesses his transgression. With the act of forgiveness, that action becomes natural.

mahāsāvajjo. Mohena hi mūḷho hutvā mātāpitūsupi cetiyepi bodhimhipi pabbajitesupi aparajjhitvā gatagataṭṭhāne garahaṃ labhati. Evaṃ tāva lokavajjavasena mahāsāvajjo. Mohavasena pana katena ānantariyakammena kappaṃ niraye paccati. Evaṃ vipākavajjavasenapi mahāsāvajjo.Dandhavirāgīti saṇikaṃ virajjati. Mohena mūḷhena hi katakammaṃ saṇikaṃ muccati. Yathā hi acchacammaṃ satakkhattumpi dhoviyamānaṃ na paṇḍaraṃ hoti, evameva mohena mūḷhena katakammaṃ sīghaṃ na muccati, saṇikameva muccatīti. Sesamettha uttānamevāti.

"mahāsāvajjo". For one who is deluded by delusion, having offended even against his parents, even against shrines, even against Bodhi trees, even against ascetics, incurs blame in every place he goes. Thus, he is greatly blameworthy in terms of worldly blame. But due to an action done out of delusion, he suffers in hell for an kappa. Thus, he is greatly blameworthy in terms of the blame of consequences. "Dandhavirāgī" means he becomes dispassionate slowly. For an action done by one deluded by delusion is released slowly. Just as a goat skin, even if washed a hundred times, does not become white, so too, an action done by one deluded by delusion is not quickly released, but is released slowly. The rest here is easy to understand.

9. Akusalamūlasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Akusalamūlasuttavaṇṇanā

70.Navameakusalamūlānīti akusalānaṃ mūlāni, akusalāni ca tāni mūlāni cāti vā akusalamūlāni.Yadapi, bhikkhave, lobhoti yopi, bhikkhave, lobho.Tadapiakusalamūlanti sopi akusalamūlaṃ. Akusalamūlaṃ vā sandhāya idha tampīti attho vaṭṭatiyeva. Etenupāyena sabbattha nayo netabbo.Abhisaṅkharotīti āyūhati sampiṇḍeti rāsiṃ karoti.Asatā dukkhaṃ uppādayatīti abhūtena avijjamānena yaṃkiñci tassa abhūtaṃ dosaṃ vatvā dukkhaṃ uppādeti.Vadhena vātiādi yenākārena dukkhaṃ uppādeti, taṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Tatthajāniyāti dhanajāniyā.Pabbājanāyāti gāmato vā raṭṭhato vā pabbājanīyakammena.Balavamhīti ahamasmi balavā.Balattho itipīti balena me attho itipi, bale vā ṭhitomhītipi vadati.

70.In the ninth [sutta]: "akusalamūlānī" means the roots of the unwholesome, or those that are unwholesome and are roots, thus akusalamūlāni. "Yadapi, bhikkhave, lobho" means even that which, monks, is greed. "Tadapi akusalamūlaṃ" means that too is an unwholesome root. With reference to an unwholesome root, in this case, the meaning "that too" is indeed fitting. The method should be applied in this way everywhere. "Abhisaṅkharoti" means he accumulates, he compacts, he makes a heap. "Asatā dukkhaṃ uppādayatī" means by saying something untrue, non-existent (abhūtena avijjamānena), he creates suffering. "Vadhena vā" etc. is said to show in what way he creates suffering. There, "jāniyā" means loss of wealth (dhanajāniyā). "Pabbājanāyā" means by an act that leads to expulsion from the village or the country. "Balavamhī" means I am strong. "Balattho itipī" means I have a need for strength (balena me attho itipi), or he says, I am established in strength (bale vā ṭhitomhītipi).

Akālavādīti kālasmiṃ na vadati, akālasmiṃ vadati nāma.Abhūtavādīti bhūtaṃ na vadati, abhūtaṃ vadati nāma.Anatthavādīti atthaṃ na vadati, anatthaṃ vadati nāma.Adhammavādīti dhammaṃ na vadati, adhammaṃ vadati nāma.Avinayavādīti vinayaṃ na vadati, avinayaṃ vadati nāma.

"Akālavādī" means he does not speak at the right time (kālasmiṃ na vadati), but speaks at the wrong time. "Abhūtavādī" means he does not speak the truth (bhūtaṃ na vadati), but speaks what is untrue. "Anatthavādī" means he does not speak what is beneficial (atthaṃ na vadati), but speaks what is unbeneficial. "Adhammavādī" means he does not speak the Dhamma (dhammaṃ na vadati), but speaks what is not the Dhamma. "Avinayavādī" means he does not speak the Vinaya (vinayaṃ na vadati), but speaks what is not the Vinaya.

Tathā hāyanti tathā hi ayaṃ.Na ātappaṃ karoti tassa nibbeṭhanāyāti tassa abhūtassa nibbeṭhanatthāya vīriyaṃ na karoti.Itipetaṃ atacchanti imināpi kāraṇena etaṃ atacchaṃ. Itaraṃ tasseva vevacanaṃ.

"Tathā hāya" means thus indeed. "Na ātappaṃ karoti tassa nibbeṭhanāyā" means he does not make effort to remove that untruth (abhūtassa nibbeṭhanatthaṃ). "Itipetaṃ atacchaṃ" means by this reason too, this is not true. The other is a synonym for that.

Duggati pāṭikaṅkhāti nirayādikā duggati icchitabbā, sā assa avassabhāvinī, tatthānena nibbattitabbanti attho.Uddhastoti upari dhaṃsito.Pariyonaddhoti samantā onaddho.Anayaṃ āpajjatīti avuḍḍhiṃ āpajjati.Byasanaṃāpajjatīti vināsaṃ āpajjati. Gimhakālasmiñhi māluvāsipāṭikāya phalitāya bījāni uppatitvā vaṭarukkhādīnaṃ mūle patanti. Tattha yassa rukkhassa mūle tīsu disāsu tīṇi bījāni patitāni honti, tasmiṃ rukkhe pāvussakena meghena abhivaṭṭhe tīhi bījehi tayo aṅkurā uṭṭhahitvā taṃ rukkhaṃ allīyanti. Tato paṭṭhāya rukkhadevatāyo sakabhāvena saṇṭhātuṃ na sakkonti. Tepi aṅkurā vaḍḍhamānā latābhāvaṃ āpajjitvā taṃ rukkhaṃ abhiruhitvā sabbaviṭapasākhāpasākhā saṃsibbitvā taṃ rukkhaṃ upari pariyonandhanti. So māluvālatāhi saṃsibbito ghanehi mahantehi māluvāpattehi sañchanno deve vā vassante vāte vā vāyante tattha tattha palujjitvā khāṇumattameva avasissati. Taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.

"Duggati pāṭikaṅkhā" means a bad destination such as hell is to be expected (icchitabbā), it is certain to happen to him, he will be reborn there (tatthānena nibbattitabbanti). "Uddhasto" means thrown upwards (dhṃsito). "Pariyonaddho" means completely bound (samantā onaddho). "Anayaṃ āpajjatī" means he incurs misfortune (avuḍḍhiṃ āpajjati). "Byasanaṃ āpajjatī" means he incurs destruction (vināsaṃ āpajjati). For in the summer season, when the māluvā creeper has flowered, the seeds fall and land at the base of trees such as banyan trees. There, if three seeds fall at the base of a tree in three directions, when the rain cloud showers in the rainy season, three sprouts grow from the three seeds and cling to that tree. From then on, the tree deities are unable to remain in their own state. Those sprouts, growing, become vines, climb up that tree, entwine all the branches and twigs, and bind that tree above. That tree, intertwined with māluvā vines, covered with dense, large māluvā leaves, is broken down here and there by the rain or the blowing wind, and only a stump remains. With reference to that, this was said.

Evameva khoti ettha pana idaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ – sālādīsu aññatararukkho viya hi ayaṃ satto daṭṭhabbo, tisso māluvālatā viya tīṇi akusalamūlāni, yāva rukkhasākhā asampattā, tāva tāsaṃ latānaṃ ujukaṃ rukkhārohanaṃ viya lobhādīnaṃ dvāraṃ asampattakālo, sākhānusārena gamanakālo viya dvāravasena gamanakālo, pariyonaddhakālo viya lobhādīhi pariyuṭṭhitakālo, khuddakasākhānaṃ palujjanakālo viya dvārappattānaṃ kilesānaṃ vasena khuddānukhuddakā āpattiyo āpannakālo, mahāsākhānaṃ palujjanakālo viya garukāpattiṃ āpannakālo, latānusārena otiṇṇena udakena mūlesu tintesu rukkhassa bhūmiyaṃ patanakālo viya kamena cattāri pārājikāni āpajjitvā catūsu apāyesu nibbattanakālo daṭṭhabbo.

Here, in Evameva kho, this is a comparison: This being should be seen as like any tree among the sala trees, etc.; the three akusalamūla are like the three māluvā creepers; the straight climbing of those creepers on the tree until they reach a branch is like the time before an occasion for lobha, etc., arises; the time of going along a branch is like the time of going by way of a door; the time of being entwined is like the time of being enveloped by lobha, etc.; the time of the breaking of small branches is like the time of incurring minor offenses due to the influence of defilements that have reached a doorway; the time of the breaking of large branches is like the time of incurring a grave offense; and the time of the tree falling to the ground when the roots are soaked by water dripping along the creepers should be seen as like the time of being reborn in the four woeful states (apāyas) after gradually incurring the four pārājikas.

Evameva khoti ettha pana idaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ – sālādīsu aññatararukkho viya ayaṃ satto daṭṭhabbo, tisso māluvālatā viya tīṇi akusalamūlāni, tāsaṃ appavattiṃ kātuṃ āgatapuriso viya yogāvacaro, kuddālo viya paññā, kuddālapiṭakaṃ viya saddhāpiṭakaṃ, palikhananakhaṇitti viya vipassanāpaññā, khaṇittiyā mūlacchedanaṃ viya vipassanāñāṇena avijjāmūlassa chindanakālo, khaṇḍākhaṇḍikaṃ chindanakālo viya khandhavasena diṭṭhakālo, phālanakālo viya maggañāṇena kilesānaṃ samugghātitakālo, masikaraṇakālo viya dharamānakapañcakkhandhakālo, mahāvāte opuṇitvā appavattanakālo viya upādinnakakkhandhānaṃ appaṭisandhikanirodhena nirujjhitvā punabbhave paṭisandhiaggahaṇakālo daṭṭhabboti. Imasmiṃ sutte vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ kathitaṃ.

Here, in Evameva kho, this is a comparison: This being should be seen as like any tree among the sala trees, etc.; the three akusalamūla are like the three māluvā creepers; the yogi who comes to prevent those creepers from growing is like the person who has come; the mattock is like wisdom (paññā); the handle of the mattock is like the handle of faith (saddhā); the digging with the mattock is like the wisdom of insight (vipassanāpaññā); the time of cutting the root with the mattock is like the time of cutting the root of ignorance (avijjā) with the knowledge of insight; the time of cutting into pieces is like the time of seeing with regard to the aggregates (khandha); the time of splitting is like the time of uprooting the defilements with the path knowledge (maggañāṇa); the time of crumbling is like the time of the continuously arising five aggregates (pañcakkhandha); and the time of being blown away by a great wind and prevented from growing again should be seen as like the time of the conditioned aggregates being stopped by cessation without renewed rebirth and the non-arising of a new rebirth. In this sutta, the round (vaṭṭa) and the escape from the round (vivaṭṭa) have been spoken of.

10. Uposathasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Commentary on the Uposatha Sutta

71.Dasametadahuposatheti tasmiṃ ahu uposathe taṃ divasaṃ uposathe, pannarasikauposathadivaseti vuttaṃ hoti.Upasaṅkamīti uposathaṅgāni adhiṭṭhāya gandhamālādihatthā upasaṅkami.Handāti vavassaggatthe nipāto.Divā divassāti divasassa divā nāma majjhanho, imasmiṃ ṭhite majjhanhike kāleti attho.Kuto nu tvaṃ āgacchasīti kiṃ karontī vicarasīti pucchati.Gopālakuposathoti gopālakehi saddhiṃ upavasanauposatho.Nigaṇṭhuposathoti nigaṇṭhānaṃ upavasanauposatho.Ariyuposathoti ariyānaṃ upavasanauposatho.Seyyathāpi visākheti yathā nāma, visākhe.Sāyanhasamayesāmikānaṃ gāvo niyyātetvāti gopālakā hi devasikavetanena vā pañcāhadasāhaaddhamāsamāsachamāsasaṃvaccharaparicchedena vā gāvo gahetvā rakkhanti. Idha pana devasikavetanena rakkhantaṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ –niyyātetvāti paṭicchāpetvā ‘‘etā vo gāvo’’ti datvā.Itipaṭisañcikkhatīti attano gehaṃ gantvā bhuñjitvā mañce nipanno evaṃ paccavekkhati.Abhijjhāsahagatenāti taṇhāya sampayuttena.Evaṃ kho, visākhe, gopālakuposatho hotīti ariyuposathova ayaṃ, aparisuddhavitakkatāya pana gopālakauposathaṭṭhāne ṭhito.Na mahapphaloti vipākaphalena na mahapphalo.Na mahānisaṃsoti vipākānisaṃsena na mahānisaṃso.Na mahājutikoti vipākobhāsena na mahāobhāso.Na mahāvipphāroti vipākavipphārassa amahantatāya na mahāvipphāro.

71. In tadahuposathe, tasmiṃ ahu uposathe means on that day when there was uposatha, that is, on the fifteenth uposatha day. Upasaṅkamī means she approached, intending to observe the uposatha vows, holding flowers, incense, etc., in her hands. Handā is a particle used in the sense of giving up. Divā divassā means the day's daytime, namely midday; the meaning is: while the midday sun is staying in this position. Kuto nu tvaṃ āgacchasī means he asks, "What are you doing as you wander about?" Gopālakuposatho means an uposatha observed together with cowherds. Nigaṇṭhuposatho means an uposatha observed by the Nigaṇṭhas. Ariyuposatho means an uposatha observed by the Noble Ones (ariya). Seyyathāpi visākhe means just as, Visākha. Sāyanhasamaye sāmikānaṃ gāvo niyyātetvā—cowherds protect cows after receiving them for a daily wage or on a contract basis for five days, ten days, half a month, a month, six months, or a year. Here, this is said in reference to one who protects them for a daily wage: niyyātetvā means after handing them back, giving them and saying, "These are your cows." Iti paṭisañcikkhatī—after going to his own house, eating, and lying down on his couch, he reflects thus. Abhijjhāsahagatenā—accompanied by craving (taṇhā). Evaṃ kho, visākhe, gopālakuposatho hotī—this is indeed an ariya uposatha, but due to impure thoughts, it remains merely an uposatha of cowherds. Na mahapphalo means it is not of great fruit with regard to the fruit of its result (vipāka). Na mahānisaṃso means it is not of great benefit with regard to the benefit of its result. Na mahājutiko means it is not of great radiance with regard to the radiance of its result. Na mahāvipphāro means it is not of great extent, due to the unimportance of the extent of its result.

Samaṇajātikāti samaṇāyeva.Paraṃ yojanasatanti yojanasataṃ atikkamitvā tato paraṃ.Tesu daṇḍaṃ nikkhipāhīti tesu yojanasatato parabhāgesu ṭhitesu sattesu daṇḍaṃ nikkhipa, nikkhittadaṇḍo hohi.Nāhaṃ kvacani kassaci kiñcanatasminti ahaṃ katthaci kassaci parassa kiñcanatasmiṃ na homi. Kiñcanaṃ vuccati palibodho, palibodho na homīti vuttaṃ hoti.Na ca mama kvacani katthaci kiñcanatatthīti mamāpi kvacani anto vā bahiddhā vā katthaci ekaparikkhārepi kiñcanatā natthi, palibodho natthi, chinnapalibodhohamasmīti vuttaṃ hoti.Bhogeti mañcapīṭhayāgubhattādayo.Adinnaṃyeva paribhuñjatīti punadivase mañce nipajjantopi pīṭhe nisīdantopi yāguṃ pivantopi bhattaṃ bhuñjantopi te bhoge adinneyeva paribhuñjati.Na mahapphaloti nipphalo. Byañjanameva hi ettha sāvasesaṃ, attho pana niravaseso. Evaṃ upavutthassa hi uposathassa appamattakampi vipākaphalaṃ iṭṭhaṃ kantaṃ manāpaṃ nāma natthi. Tasmā nipphalotveva veditabbo. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo.

Samaṇajātikā—she is virtually a female renunciate (samaṇī). Paraṃ yojanasatanti—beyond a hundred yojanas, further than that. Tesu daṇḍaṃ nikkhipāhīti—cast the rod among those beings who are situated in the regions beyond those hundred yojanas; be one who has cast aside the rod. Nāhaṃ kvacani kassaci kiñcanatasminti—I am not an object of attachment (kiñcana) to anyone anywhere. Kiñcana means encumbrance (palibodha); the meaning is: I am not an encumbrance. Na ca mama kvacani katthaci kiñcanatatthīti—for me too, there is no attachment anywhere, either internally or externally, even to a single requisite; there is no encumbrance; the meaning is: I am one who has cut off encumbrances. Bhoge means couches, chairs, gruel, rice, etc. Adinnaṃyeva paribhuñjatīti—even when he lies down on a couch, sits on a chair, drinks gruel, or eats rice on the following day, he consumes those possessions as if they were not given. Na mahapphalo—fruitless. Indeed, only the literal expression (byañjana) here remains partly complete, but the meaning is entirely incomplete. For the uposatha that is observed in this way, there is nothing at all desirable, pleasing, or agreeable as a result. Therefore, it should be understood as fruitless. The same method should be applied in the remaining phrases.

Upakkiliṭṭhassa cittassāti idaṃ kasmā āha? Saṃkiliṭṭhena hi cittena upavuttho uposatho na mahapphalo hotīti dassitattā visuddhena cittena upavutthassa mahapphalatā anuññātā hoti. Tasmā yena kammaṭṭhānena cittaṃ visujjhati, taṃ cittavisodhanakammaṭṭhānaṃ dassetuṃ idamāha. Tatthaupakkamenāti paccattapurisakārena, upāyena vā.Tathāgataṃ anussaratīti aṭṭhahi kāraṇehi tathāgataguṇe anussarati. Ettha hiitipi so bhagavāti so bhagavā itipi sīlena, itipi samādhināti sabbe lokiyalokuttarā buddhaguṇā saṅgahitā.Arahantiādīhi pāṭiyekkaguṇāva niddiṭṭhā.Tathāgataṃ anussarato cittaṃ pasīdatīti lokiyalokuttare tathāgataguṇe anussarantassa cittuppādo pasanno hoti.

Upakkiliṭṭhassa cittassāti—why did he say this? Because it has been shown that an uposatha observed with a defiled mind is not of great fruit, it is implied that an uposatha observed with a pure mind is of great fruit. Therefore, he says this in order to show the meditation subject that purifies the mind, by which meditation subject the mind is purified. Here, upakkamenāti—by personal effort, or by means of skillful contrivance. Tathāgataṃ anussaratīti—he recollects the qualities of the Tathāgata by eight reasons. Here, in itipi so bhagavā, all the mundane and supramundane qualities of the Buddha are included in so bhagavā itipi sīlena, itipi samādhinā. Only specific qualities are indicated by Arahaṃ, etc. Tathāgataṃ anussarato cittaṃ pasīdatīti—for one recollecting the mundane and supramundane qualities of the Tathāgata, the mind-moment becomes clear.

Cittassa upakkilesāti pañca nīvaraṇā.Kakkanti āmalakakakkaṃ.Tajjaṃ vāyāmanti tajjātikaṃ tadanucchavikaṃ kakkena makkhanaghaṃsanadhovanavāyāmaṃ.Pariyodapanā hotīti suddhabhāvakaraṇaṃ hoti. Kiliṭṭhasmiṃ hi sīse pasādhanaṃ pasādhetvā nakkhattaṃ kīḷamāno na sobhati, parisuddhe pana tasmiṃ pasādhanaṃ pasādhetvā nakkhattaṃ kīḷamāno sobhati, evameva kiliṭṭhacittena uposathaṅgāni adhiṭṭhāya uposatho upavuttho na mahapphalo hoti, parisuddhena pana cittena uposathaṅgāni adhiṭṭhāya upavuttho uposatho mahapphalo hotīti adhippāyena evamāha.Brahmuposathaṃ upavasatīti brahmā vuccati sammāsambuddho, tassa guṇānussaraṇavasena ayaṃ uposatho brahmuposatho nāma, taṃ upavasati.Brahmunā saddhiṃ saṃvasatīti sammāsambuddhena saddhiṃ saṃvasati.Brahmañcassaārabbhāti sammāsambuddhaṃ ārabbha.

Cittassa upakkilesāti—the five hindrances (nīvaraṇā). Kakka means āmalaka powder. Tajjaṃ vāyāmanti—an exercise of that kind, appropriate to it, an exercise involving rubbing, massaging, and washing with the powder. Pariyodapanā hotīti—it becomes a means of purification. Indeed, when one who is playing at the festival after adorning himself on a dirty head, he does not look beautiful; but when one is playing at the festival after adorning himself on a clean head, he looks beautiful. In the same way, an uposatha observed by undertaking the uposatha vows with a defiled mind is not of great fruit, but an uposatha observed by undertaking the uposatha vows with a purified mind is of great fruit; with this idea in mind, he says this. Brahmuposathaṃ upavasatīti—brahmā means the Perfectly Enlightened Buddha; this uposatha is called Brahmuposatha because of the recollection of his qualities; he observes that. Brahmunā saddhiṃ saṃvasatīti—he dwells together with the Perfectly Enlightened Buddha. Brahmañcassa ārabbhāti—having regard to the Perfectly Enlightened Buddha.

Dhammaṃ anussaratīti sahatantikaṃ lokuttaradhammaṃ anussarati.Sottinti kuruvindakasottiṃ. Kuruvindakapāsāṇacuṇṇena hi saddhiṃ lākhaṃ yojetvā maṇike katvā vijjhitvā suttena āvuṇitvā taṃ maṇi kalāpapantiṃ ubhato gahetvā piṭṭhiṃ ghaṃsenti, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘sottiñca paṭiccā’’ti.Cuṇṇanti nhānīyacuṇṇaṃ.Tajjaṃ vāyāmanti ubbaṭṭanaghaṃsanadhovanādikaṃ tadanurūpavāyāmaṃ.Dhammuposathanti sahatantikaṃ navalokuttaradhammaṃ ārabbha upavutthattā ayaṃ uposatho ‘‘dhammuposatho’’ti vutto. Idhāpipariyodapanāti pade ṭhatvā purimanayeneva yojanā kātabbā.

Dhammaṃ anussaratīti—he recollects the supramundane Dhamma together with its texts. Sotti means a kuruvindaka sotti. For having combined lac with kuruvindaka stone powder, made them into beads, pierced them, wrapped them with string, and taking that string of beads on both sides, they rub the back; referring to that, it is said: "sottiñca paṭiccā." Cuṇṇa means bathing powder. Tajjaṃ vāyāmanti—an appropriate exercise involving anointing, rubbing, washing, etc. Dhammuposathanti—because it is observed having regard to the supramundane Dhamma together with its texts, this uposatha is called "dhammuposatha." Here too, the connection should be made in the same way as before, by placing it at the word pariyodapanā.

Saṅghaṃ anussaratīti aṭṭhannaṃ ariyapuggalānaṃ guṇe anussarati.Usmañca paṭiccāti dve tayo vāre gāhāpitaṃ usumaṃ paṭicca. Usañcātipi pāṭho, ayamevattho.Khāranti chārikaṃ.Gomayanti gomuttaṃ vā ajalaṇḍikā vā.Pariyodapanāti idhāpi purimanayeneva yojanā kātabbā.Saṅghuposathanti aṭṭhannaṃ ariyapuggalānaṃ guṇe ārabbha upavutthattā ayaṃ uposatho ‘‘saṅghuposatho’’ti vutto.

Saṅghaṃ anussaratīti—he recollects the qualities of the eight noble individuals (ariyapuggala). Usmañca paṭiccāti—having recourse to heat that has been applied two or three times. Usañcātipi is also a reading; this is the meaning. Khāra means alkali. Gomayanti—either cow urine or dung ash. Pariyodapanāti—here too, the connection should be made in the same way as before. Saṅghuposathanti—because it is observed having regard to the qualities of the eight noble individuals, this uposatha is called "saṅghuposatha."

Sīlānīti gahaṭṭho gahaṭṭhasīlāni, pabbajito pabbajitasīlāni.Akhaṇḍānītiādīnaṃ attho visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.21) vitthāritova.Vālaṇḍupakanti assavālehi vā makacivālādīhi vā kataṃ aṇḍupakaṃ.Tajjaṃvāyāmanti telena temetvā malassa tintabhāvaṃ ñatvā chārikaṃ pakkhipitvā vālaṇḍupakena ghaṃsanavāyāmo. Idhapariyodapanāti pade ṭhatvā evaṃ yojanā kātabbā kiliṭṭhasmiñhi ādāse maṇḍitapasādhitopi attabhāvo olokiyamāno na sobhati, parisuddhe sobhati. Evameva kiliṭṭhena cittena upavuttho uposatho na mahapphalo hoti, parisuddhena pana mahapphalo hotīti.Sīluposathanti attano sīlānussaraṇavasena upavuttho uposatho sīluposatho nāma.Sīlena saddhinti attano pañcasīladasasīlena saddhiṃ.Sīlañcassa ārabbhāti pañcasīlaṃ dasasīlañca ārabbha.

Sīlānīti—for a householder, the precepts for householders; for a renunciate, the precepts for renunciates. The meaning of Akhaṇḍānī, etc., has been explained in detail in the Visuddhimagga (Visuddhi. 1.21). Vālaṇḍupakanti—a pad made of horsehair or fibers of maka reed, etc. Tajjaṃ vāyāmanti—an exercise involving moistening with oil, recognizing the degree of moisture of the dirt, applying ash, and rubbing with a hair pad. Here, by placing it at the word pariyodapanā, the connection should be made thus: Indeed, even when one's own appearance is looked at after being adorned with ornaments in a dirty mirror, it does not look beautiful, but it looks beautiful in a clean mirror. In the same way, an uposatha observed with a defiled mind is not of great fruit, but one observed with a pure mind is of great fruit. Sīluposathanti—the uposatha that is observed by way of recollecting one's own precepts is called Sīluposatha. Sīlena saddhinti—together with his own five or ten precepts. Sīlañcassa ārabbhāti—having regard to the five or ten precepts.

Devatā anussaratīti devatā sakkhiṭṭhāne ṭhapetvā attano saddhādiguṇe anussarati.Ukkanti uddhanaṃ.Loṇanti loṇamattikā.Gerukanti gerukacuṇṇaṃ.Nāḷikasaṇḍāsanti dhamananāḷikañceva parivattanasaṇḍāsañca.Tajjaṃ vāyāmanti uddhane pakkhipanadhamanaparivattanādikaṃ anurūpaṃ vāyāmaṃ. Idhapariyodapanāti pade ṭhatvā evaṃ yojanā veditabbā – saṃkiliṭṭhasuvaṇṇamayena hi pasādhanabhaṇḍena pasādhitā nakkhattaṃ kīḷamānā na sobhanti, parisuddhasuvaṇṇamayena sobhanti. Evameva saṃkiliṭṭhacittassa uposatho na mahapphalo hoti, parisuddhacittassa mahapphalo.Devatuposathanti devatā sakkhiṭṭhāne ṭhapetvā attano guṇe anussarantena upavutthauposatho devatuposatho nāma. Sesaṃ imesu buddhānussatiādīsu kammaṭṭhānesu yaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā, taṃ sabbaṃ visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.123 ādayo) vuttameva.

Devatā anussaratīti—having established the deities in the place of witnesses, he recollects his own qualities of faith, etc. Ukkanti—a fire pot. Loṇanti—salt clay. Gerukanti—red ochre powder. Nāḷikasaṇḍāsanti—both a bellows pipe and rotating tongs. Tajjaṃ vāyāmanti—an appropriate exercise involving placing in the fire pot, blowing, rotating, etc. Here, by placing it at the word pariyodapanā, the meaning should be understood thus: Indeed, those who play at the festival after being adorned with ornaments made of defiled gold do not look beautiful, but they look beautiful with ornaments made of pure gold. In the same way, an uposatha of one with a defiled mind is not of great fruit, but the uposatha of one with a pure mind is of great fruit. Devatuposathanti—the uposatha observed by one who recollects his own qualities after establishing the deities in the place of witnesses is called Devatuposatha. Whatever should be said further about these meditation subjects beginning with the recollection of the Buddha has already been said in the Visuddhimagga (Visuddhi. 1.123 ff.).

Pāṇātipātanti pāṇavadhaṃ.Pahāyāti taṃ pāṇātipātacetanāsaṅkhātaṃ dussīlyaṃ pajahitvā.Paṭiviratāti pahīnakālato paṭṭhāya tato dussīlyato oratā viratāva.Nihitadaṇḍā nihitasatthāti parūpaghātatthāya daṇḍaṃ vā satthaṃ vā ādāya avattanato nikkhittadaṇḍā ceva nikkhittasatthā cāti attho. Ettha ca ṭhapetvā daṇḍaṃ sabbampi avasesaṃ upakaraṇaṃ sattānaṃ vihiṃsanabhāvato satthanti veditabbaṃ. Yaṃ pana bhikkhū kattaradaṇḍaṃ vā dantakaṭṭhavāsiṃ vā pipphalakaṃ vā gahetvā vicaranti, na taṃ parūpaghātatthāya. Tasmā nihitadaṇḍā nihitasatthātveva saṅkhaṃ gacchanti.Lajjīti pāpajigucchanalakkhaṇāya lajjāya samannāgatā.Dayāpannāti dayaṃ mettacittataṃ āpannā.Sabbapāṇabhūtahitānukampīti sabbe pāṇabhūte hitena anukampakā, tāya eva dayāpannatāya sabbesaṃ pāṇabhūtānaṃ hitacittakāti attho.Ahampajjāti ahampi ajja.Imināpi aṅgenāti imināpi guṇaṅgena.Arahataṃ anukaromīti yathā purato gacchantaṃ pacchato gacchanto anugacchati nāma, evaṃ ahampi arahantehi paṭhamaṃ kataṃ imaṃ guṇaṃ pacchā karonto tesaṃ arahantānaṃ anukaromi.Uposatho ca me upavuttho bhavissatīti evaṃ karontena mayā arahatañca anukataṃ bhavissati, uposatho ca upavuttho bhavissati.

Pāṇātipātanti—the killing of living beings. Pahāyāti—having abandoned that wrong-doing (dussīlya) consisting of the intention to kill. Paṭiviratāti—starting from the time of abandoning, he is one who abstains and refrains from that wrong-doing. Nihitadaṇḍā nihitasatthāti—because he does not wield a stick or weapon with the intention of harming others, it means one who has laid down the stick and laid down the weapon. Here, having set aside the stick, all the remaining equipment, too, should be understood as a weapon, since it is capable of harming beings. But the razor, walking stick, or tooth cleaner that monks carry about are not for the purpose of harming others. Therefore, they are considered to have laid down the stick and laid down the weapon. Lajjīti—endowed with shame, characterized by abhorrence of evil. Dayāpannāti—one who has attained compassion, a state of loving-kindness. Sabbapāṇabhūtahitānukampīti—compassionate with the welfare of all living beings, meaning that due to that very compassion, he is one who has a mind for the good of all living beings. Ahampajjāti—I too, today. Imināpi aṅgenāti—by this factor of quality. Arahataṃ anukaromīti—just as one walking behind imitates one walking in front, so too, I, doing this quality later, which was done earlier by the Arahants, imitate those Arahants. Uposatho ca me upavuttho bhavissatīti—by doing so, I will have imitated the Arahants, and the uposatha will have been observed.

Adinnādānanti adinnassa parapariggahitassa ādānaṃ, theyyaṃ corikanti attho. Dinnameva ādiyantītidinnādāyī. Cittenapi dinnameva paṭikaṅkhantītidinnapāṭikaṅkhī. Thenetīti theno, na thenenaathenena. Athenattāyevasucibhūtena. Attanāti attabhāvena, athenaṃ sucibhūtaṃ attabhāvaṃ katvā viharantīti vuttaṃ hoti.

Adinnādānanti—taking what is not given, what is owned by others, theft or thievery is the meaning. Dinnameva ādiyantīti dinnādāyī—because they take only what is given. Cittenapi dinnameva paṭikaṅkhantīti dinnapāṭikaṅkhī—because they expect in their minds only what is given. Thenetīti theno, na thenena athenena—because of thievery, he is a thief; without thievery, he is not a thief. Athenattāyeva sucibhūtena attanā—precisely because of non-thievery, he is pure. Attanā means by one's own nature; the meaning is: he lives having made his nature pure, without thievery.

Abrahmacariyanti aseṭṭhacariyaṃ. Brahmaṃ seṭṭhaṃ ācāraṃ carantītibrahmacārī.Ārācārīti abrahmacariyato dūrācārī.Methunāti rāgapariyuṭṭhānavasena sadisattā methunakāti laddhavohārehi paṭisevitabbato methunoti saṅkhaṃ gatā asaddhammā.Gāmadhammāti gāmavāsīnaṃ dhammā.

Abrahmacariyanti—unwholesome conduct. Brahmaṃ seṭṭhaṃ ācāraṃ carantīti brahmacārī—one who practices the best conduct is called a brahmacārī. Ārācārīti—one who keeps far away from unwholesome conduct. Methunāti—because they should be engaged in due to similarity in terms of being overcome by lust, the unwholesome practices that have come to be known as sexual intercourse. Gāmadhammāti—practices of villagers.

Musāvādāti alikavacanā tucchavacanā. Saccaṃ vadantītisaccavādī. Saccena saccaṃ saṃdahanti ghaṭṭentītisaccasandhā,na antarantarā musā vadantīti attho. Yo hi puriso kadāci musāvādaṃ vadati, kadāci saccaṃ. Tassa musāvādena antaritattā saccaṃ saccena na ghaṭīyati. Tasmā na so saccasandho. Ime pana na tādisā, jīvitahetupi musā avatvā saccena saccaṃ saṃdahantiyevāti saccasandhā.Thetāti thirā, ṭhitakathāti attho. Eko puggalo haliddirāgo viya thusarāsimhi nikhātakhāṇu viya assapiṭṭhe ṭhapitakumbhaṇḍamiva ca na ṭhitakatho hoti. Eko pāsāṇalekhā viya indakhīlo viya ca ṭhitakatho hoti, asinā sīsaṃ chindantepi dve kathā na katheti. Ayaṃ vuccati theto.Paccayikāti pattiyāyitabbakā, saddhāyikāti attho. Ekacco hi puggalo na paccayiko hoti, ‘‘idaṃ kena vuttaṃ, asukena nāmā’’ti vutte ‘‘mā tassa vacanaṃ saddahathā’’ti vattabbataṃ āpajjati. Eko paccayiko hoti, ‘‘idaṃ kena vuttaṃ, asukenā’’ti vutte ‘‘yadi tena vuttaṃ, idameva pamāṇaṃ, idāni paṭikkhipitabbaṃ natthi, evamevaṃ ida’’nti vattabbataṃ āpajjati. Ayaṃ vuccati paccayiko.Avisaṃvādakālokassāti tāya saccavāditāya lokaṃ na visaṃvādentīti attho.

Musāvādāti: false speech, untrue words. Saccavādī: speaking the truth; those who speak truth. Saccasandhā: those who connect with truth through truth, who are consistent with the truth; meaning they do not speak falsehoods intermittently. For if a person sometimes speaks falsehood and sometimes truth, their truth is not connected with truth because it is interrupted by falsehood. Therefore, they are not saccasandha. But these (Ariyans) are not like that; even for the sake of their lives, without speaking falsehood, they connect with truth through truth, thus they are saccasandha. Thetā: steadfast, meaning those whose words are firm. One person is not firm in their words, like dye of turmeric, like a stake planted in a heap of chaff, or like a gourd placed on a donkey’s back. Another is firm in their words, like an inscription on stone or an indakhīla pillar, and would not utter two different statements even if their head were being cut off by a sword. This is called theta. Paccayikā: those who are to be trusted, meaning those who inspire confidence. For some people are not trustworthy; when it is said, "Who said this? So-and-so," they become subject to the comment, "Do not believe their words." Others are trustworthy; when it is said, "Who said this? So-and-so," they become subject to the comment, "If they said it, this is the proof; now there is nothing to reject; it is exactly like this." This is called paccayika. Avisaṃvādakā lokassā: meaning they do not deceive the world with that truthfulness.

Surāmerayamajjapamādaṭṭhānanti surāmerayamajjānaṃ pānacetanāsaṅkhātaṃ pamādakāraṇaṃ.Ekabhattikāti pātarāsabhattaṃ sāyamāsabhattanti dve bhattāni. Tesu pātarāsabhattaṃ antomajjhanhikena paricchinnaṃ, itaraṃ majjhanhikato uddhaṃ antoaruṇena. Tasmā antomajjhanhike dasakkhattuṃ bhuñjamānāpi ekabhattikāva honti. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘ekabhattikā’’ti. Rattibhojanaṃ ratti, tato uparatātirattūparatā. Atikkante majjhanhike yāva sūriyatthaṅgamanā bhojanaṃ vikālabhojanaṃ nāma, tato viratattāviratā vikālabhojanā.

Surāmerayamajjapamādaṭṭhānanti: surā, meraya, and majja, which are the cause of negligence consisting of the intention to drink intoxicants. Ekabhattikā: having one meal; there are two meals, the morning meal and the evening meal. Among these, the morning meal is limited to before noon, while the other is from noon until dawn. Therefore, even if they eat ten times before noon, they are still ekabhattikā. Referring to that, it is said, "having one meal." Rattūparatā: night, and abstaining from that; those who abstain from night meals. Viratā vikālabhojanā: having abstained from untimely food, since eating after midday until sunset is called untimely food (vikālabhojana), they are abstaining from that.

naccagītavāditavisūkadassanaṃ. Naccādīni hi attanā payojetuṃ vā parehi payojāpetuṃ vā payuttāni passituṃ vā neva bhikkhūnaṃ, na bhikkhunīnaṃ vaṭṭanti.

naccagītavāditavisūkadassanaṃ: dancing, singing, instrumental music, and attending shows. Dancing and so on, whether arranged by oneself or by others, or watching them being performed, are not proper for monks or nuns.

Mālādīsumālāti yaṃkiñci pupphaṃ.Gandhanti yaṃkiñci gandhajātaṃ.Vilepananti chavirāgakaraṇaṃ. Tattha piḷandhantodhāretināma, ūnaṭṭhānaṃ pūrentomaṇḍetināma, gandhavasena chavirāgavasena ca sādiyantovibhūsetināma.Ṭhānaṃvuccati kāraṇaṃ, tasmā yāya dussīlyacetanāya tāni mālādhāraṇādīni mahājano karoti, tato paṭiviratāti attho.Uccāsayanaṃvuccati pamāṇātikkantaṃ,mahāsayanaṃakappiyattharaṇaṃ, tato paṭiviratāti attho.

Mālā dīsu mālā: among garlands and so on, mālā is any kind of flower. Gandha: any kind of scent. Vilepana: beautifying the skin. There, wearing it is called dhāreti, adorning a deficient area is called maṇḍeti, and enjoying it through scent and complexion is called vibhūseti. Ṭhānaṃ is called the cause, therefore, it means abstaining from the immoral intention with which the general public engages in wearing garlands and so on. Uccāsayanaṃ is called an overly high (seat or bed), mahāsayanaṃ is an unpermitted (luxurious) seat or bed; it means abstaining from that.

Kīvamahapphaloti kittakaṃ mahapphalo. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo.Pahūtarattaratanānanti pahūtena rattasaṅkhātena ratanena samannāgatānaṃ, sakalajambudīpatalaṃ bheritalasadisaṃ katvā kaṭippamāṇehi sattahi ratanehi pūritānanti attho.Issariyādhipaccanti issarabhāvena vā issariyameva vā ādhipaccaṃ, na ettha sāhasikakammantipi issariyādhipaccaṃ.Rajjaṃ kāreyyāti evarūpaṃ cakkavattirajjaṃ kāreyya.Aṅgānantiādīni tesaṃ janapadānaṃ nāmāni.Kalaṃ nāgghati soḷasinti ekaṃ ahorattaṃ upavutthauposathe puññaṃ soḷasabhāge katvā tato ekaṃ bhāgañca na agghati. Ekarattuposathassa soḷasiyā kalāya yaṃ vipākaphalaṃ, taṃyeva tato bahutaraṃ hotīti attho.Kapaṇanti parittakaṃ.

Kīvamahapphalo: how greatly fruitful. The same method applies to the remaining terms as well. Pahūtarattaratanāna: those endowed with an abundance of red-colored jewels, meaning enough to fill the entire surface of Jambudīpa, making it like a beryl drum, filling it with seven jewels up to the hip level. Issariyādhipacca: lordship or sovereignty through power; here, even reckless actions are not considered lordship or sovereignty. Rajjaṃ kāreyyā: could exercise such a cakkavatti rule. Aṅgānanti: the names of those countries. Kalaṃ nāgghati soḷasi: the merit of observing the uposatha for one day and night is not worth one-sixteenth part. The result of merit from one night of uposatha is much greater than that, it means. Kapaṇa: trifling.

Abrahmacariyāti aseṭṭhacariyato.Rattiṃ na bhuñjeyya vikālabhojananti uposathaṃ upavasanto rattibhojanañca divāvikālabhojanañca na bhuñjeyya.Mañce chamāyaṃva sayetha santhateti muṭṭhihatthapādake kappiyamañce vā sudhādiparikammakatāya bhūmiyaṃ vā tiṇapaṇṇapalālādīni santharitvā kate santhate vā sayethāti attho.Etaṃ hi aṭṭhaṅgikamāhuposathanti evaṃ pāṇātipātādīni asamācarantena upavutthaṃ uposathaṃ aṭṭhahi aṅgehi samannāgatattā aṭṭhaṅgikanti vadanti. Taṃ pana upavasantena ‘‘sve uposathiko bhavissāmī’’ti ajjeva ‘‘idañca idañca kareyyāthā’’ti āhārādividhānaṃ vicāretabbaṃ. Uposathadivase pātova bhikkhussa vā bhikkhuniyā vā dasasīlalakkhaṇaññuno upāsakassa vā upāsikāya vā santike vācaṃ bhinditvā uposathaṅgāni samādātabbāni. Pāḷiṃ ajānantena pana ‘‘buddhapaññattaṃ uposathaṃ adhiṭṭhāmī’’ti adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ. Aññaṃ alabhantena attanāpi adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ, vacībhedo pana kātabboyeva. Uposathaṃ upavasantena parūparodhapaṭisaṃyuttā kammantā na vicāretabbā, āyavayagaṇanaṃ karontena na vītināmetabbaṃ, gehe pana āhāraṃ labhitvā niccabhattikabhikkhunā viya paribhuñjitvā vihāraṃ gantvā dhammo vā sotabbo, aṭṭhatiṃsāya ārammaṇesu aññataraṃ vā manasikātabbaṃ.

Abrahmacariyā: from unrighteous conduct. Rattiṃ na bhuñjeyya vikālabhojana: while observing the uposatha, one should not consume night meals or untimely food during the day. Mañce chamāyaṃva sayetha santhate: one may lie down on a permissible couch with supports for hands and feet, or on the ground plastered with mortar, or on a spread of grass, leaves, or straw. Etaṃ hi aṭṭhaṅgikamāhuposatha: thus, the uposatha observed by one who does not engage in killing and so on, is called eight-factored because it is endowed with eight factors. However, one observing it must consider the provisions for food and so on today itself, thinking, "Tomorrow I will be observing the uposatha, and you should do this and that." On the uposatha day, early in the morning, one should break the precepts by uttering them in the presence of a monk or nun, or a lay follower who knows the characteristics of the ten precepts, and undertake the uposatha observances. One who does not know the Pali should determine, "I undertake the uposatha as established by the Buddha." If one cannot find another, one should determine it oneself, but the utterance must be made. One observing the uposatha should not consider activities associated with obstructing others, nor should one spend time doing income-expense calculations; but after receiving alms at home, like a monk who receives regular alms, one should partake of it and go to the monastery to listen to the Dhamma or contemplate one of the thirty-eight objects of meditation.

Sudassanāti sundaradassanā.Obhāsayanti obhāsayamānā.Anupariyantīti vicaranti.Yāvatāti yattakaṃ ṭhānaṃ.Antalikkhagāti ākāsaṅgamā.Pabhāsantīti jotanti pabhā muñcanti.Disāvirocanāti sabbadisāsu virocamānā. Atha vāpabhāsantīti disāhi disā obhāsanti.Virocanāti virocamānā.Veḷuriyanti maṇīti vatvāpi iminā jātimaṇibhāvaṃ dasseti. Ekavassikaveḷuvaṇṇañhi veḷuriyaṃ jātimaṇi nāma. Taṃ sandhāyevamāha.Bhaddakanti laddhakaṃ.Siṅgīsuvaṇṇanti gosiṅgasadisaṃ hutvā uppannattā evaṃ nāmakaṃ suvaṇṇaṃ.Kañcananti pabbateyyaṃ pabbate jātasuvaṇṇaṃ.Jātarūpanti satthuvaṇṇasuvaṇṇaṃ.Haṭakanti kipillikāhi nīhaṭasuvaṇṇaṃ.Nānubhavantīti na pāpuṇanti.Candappabhāti sāmiatthe paccattaṃ, candappabhāyāti attho.Upavassuposathanti upavasitvā uposathaṃ.Sukhudrayānīti sukhaphalāni sukhavedanīyāni.Saggamupenti ṭhānanti saggasaṅkhātaṃ ṭhānaṃ upagacchanti, kenaci aninditā hutvā devaloke uppajjantīti attho. Sesamettha yaṃ antarantarā na vuttaṃ, taṃ vuttānusāreneva veditabbanti.

Sudassanā: beautiful to see. Obhāsaya: illuminating. Anupariyantī: wandering around. Yāvatā: as far as the place. Antalikkhagā: going in the sky. Pabhāsantī: shining, emitting light. Disāvirocanā: shining in all directions. Alternatively, pabhāsantī: illuminating direction by direction. Virocanā: shining. Veḷuriya: although calling it a gem, it shows its nature as a birth-gem. Veḷuriya gem is one of the color of one-year-old bamboo. Referring to that, he said. Bhaddaka: acquired. Siṅgīsuvaṇṇa: gold named thus because it arose resembling the horn of an ox. Kañcana: mountainous, gold born in the mountains. Jātarūpa: gold of natural color. Haṭaka: gold brought out by ants. Nānubhavantī: do not attain. Candappabhā: the possessive meaning is in the accusative case, meaning candappabhāya. Upavassuposatha: having observed the uposatha. Sukhudrayānī: having pleasant fruits, resulting in pleasant feeling. Saggamupenti ṭhāna: they go to the place called heaven, meaning they are born in the deva world, being unblamed by anyone. Whatever is not said here in between should be understood according to what has been said.

(8) 3. Ānandavaggo

(8) 3. Ānandavaggo

1. Channasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Channasuttavaṇṇanā

72.Tatiyassa paṭhamechannoti evaṃnāmako channaparibbājako.Tumhepi,āvusoti, āvuso, yathā mayaṃ rāgādīnaṃ pahānaṃ paññāpema, kiṃ evaṃ tumhepi paññāpethāti pucchati. Tato thero ‘‘ayaṃ paribbājako amhe rāgādīnaṃ pahānaṃ paññāpemāti vadati, natthi panetaṃ bāhirasamaye’’ti taṃ paṭikkhipantomayaṃ kho, āvusotiādimāha. Tatthakhoti avadhāraṇatthe nipāto, mayameva paññāpemāti attho. Tato paribbājako cintesi ‘‘ayaṃ thero bāhirasamayaṃ luñcitvā haranto ‘mayamevā’ti āha. Kiṃ nu kho ādīnavaṃ disvā ete etesaṃ pahānaṃ paññāpentī’’ti. Atha theraṃ pucchantokiṃ pana tumhetiādimāha. Thero tassa byākarontoratto khotiādimāha. Tatthaattatthanti diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaṃ lokiyalokuttaraṃ attano atthaṃ. Paratthaubhayatthesupi eseva nayo.

72. In the first of the third, channo: Channa the wanderer, so named. Tumhepi, āvuso: venerable, just as we teach the abandoning of lust and so on, do you also teach like that? he asks. Then the Elder, rejecting that the wanderer says "we teach the abandoning of lust and so on; but this does not exist in other sects," says mayaṃ kho, āvuso and so on. There, kho is a particle in the sense of determination, meaning we alone teach it. Then the wanderer thought, "This Elder rejects other sects, taking them away, saying 'we alone.' Having seen what fault do they teach the abandoning of those?" Then, asking the Elder, kiṃ pana tumhe and so on. The Elder, explaining to him, ratto kho and so on. There, attattha: one's own benefit in this life and the next, worldly and supramundane. The same method applies to benefit to others and both benefits. (Paratthaubhayatthesupi eseva nayo)

Andhakaraṇotiādīsu yassa rāgo uppajjati, taṃ yathābhūtadassananivāraṇena andhaṃ karotīti andhakaraṇo. Paññācakkhuṃ na karotītiacakkhukaraṇo. Ñāṇaṃ na karotītiaññāṇakaraṇo. Kammassakatapaññā jhānapaññā vipassanāpaññāti imā tisso paññā appavattikaraṇena nirodhetītipaññānirodhiko. Aniṭṭhaphaladāyakattā dukkhasaṅkhātassa vighātasseva pakkhe vattatītivighātapakkhiko. Kilesanibbānaṃ na saṃvattetītianibbānasaṃvattaniko. Alañca panāvuso ānanda, appamādāyāti, āvuso ānanda, sace evarūpā paṭipadā atthi, alaṃ tumhākaṃ appamādāya yuttaṃ anucchavikaṃ, appamādaṃ karotha, āvusoti therassa vacanaṃ anumoditvā pakkāmi. Imasmiṃ sutte ariyamaggo lokuttaramissako kathito. Sesamettha uttānatthamevāti.

Andhakaraṇotiādīsu: Among blinding and so on, when lust arises for someone, it makes that person blind by preventing the seeing of things as they are. Acakkhukaraṇo: not making the eye of wisdom. Aññāṇakaraṇo: not making knowledge. Paññānirodhiko: it obstructs and prevents the arising of the three kinds of wisdom: wisdom from one’s own actions, wisdom from jhāna, and wisdom from vipassanā. Vighātapakkhiko: being the giver of undesirable results, it tends towards the side of harm, which is suffering. Anibbānasaṃvattaniko: it does not lead to the stilling of defilements. Alañca panāvuso ānanda, appamādāyā: venerable Ānanda, if there is such a practice, it is enough for your diligence, it is fitting and proper; be diligent, venerable. Having approved the Elder's words, he departed. In this sutta, the Noble Path mixed with the supramundane is spoken of. The rest here is clear in meaning.

2. Ājīvakasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Ājīvakasuttavaṇṇanā

73.Dutiyetena hi gahapatīti thero kira cintesi – ‘‘ayaṃ idha āgacchanto na aññātukāmo hutvā āgami, pariggaṇhanatthaṃ pana āgato. Iminā pucchitapañhaṃ imināva kathāpessāmī’’ti. Iti taṃyeva kathaṃ kathāpetukāmotena hītiādimāha. Tatthatena hīti kāraṇāpadeso. Yasmā tvaṃ evaṃ pucchasi, tasmā taññevettha paṭipucchāmīti.Kesaṃ noti katamesaṃ nu.Sadhammukkaṃsanāti attano laddhiyā ukkhipitvā ṭhapanā.Paradhammāpasādanāti paresaṃ laddhiyā ghaṭṭanā vambhanā avakkhipanā.Āyataneva dhammadesanāti kāraṇasmiṃyeva dhammadesanā.Attho ca vuttoti mayā pucchitapañhāya attho ca pakāsito.Attā ca anupanītoti amhe evarūpāti evaṃ attā ca na upanīto. Nupanītotipi pāṭho.

73. In the second, tena hi gahapatī: the Elder thought, "This one has come here not wanting to know, but to take it. I will have the question asked by him answered by him himself." Wanting to have that very conversation conversed, tena hī and so on. There, tena hī is the indication of a cause. Since you ask thus, therefore, I ask the same question here. Kesaṃ no: to which ones then. Sadhammukkaṃsanā: uplifting one's own doctrine. Paradhammāpasādanā: disparaging, reviling, and denigrating the doctrine of others. Āyataneva dhammadesanā: teaching the Dhamma only in the cause. Attho ca vutto: and the meaning of the question asked by me is also revealed. Attā ca anupanīto: and the self is not brought up as "we are like this." Nupanītotipi is also a reading.

3. Mahānāmasakkasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Mahānāmasakkasuttavaṇṇanā

74.Tatiyegilānā vuṭṭhitoti gilāno hutvā vuṭṭhito.Gelaññāti gilānabhāvato.Upasaṅkamīti bhuttapātarāso mālāgandhādīni ādāya mahāparivāraparivuto upasaṅkami.Bāhāyaṃ gahetvāti na bāhāyaṃ gahetvā ākaḍḍhi, nisinnāsanato vuṭṭhāya tassa santikaṃ gantvā dakkhiṇabāhāyaṃ aṅguṭṭhakena saññaṃ datvā ekamantaṃ apanesīti veditabbo. Athassa ‘‘sekhampi kho, mahānāma, sīla’’ntiādinā nayena sattannaṃ sekhānaṃ sīlañca samādhiñca paññañca kathetvā upari arahattaphalavasena asekhā sīlasamādhipaññāyo kathento – ‘‘sekhasamādhito sekhaṃ vipassanāñāṇaṃ asekhañca phalañāṇaṃ pacchā, sekhavipassanāñāṇato ca asekhaphalasamādhi pacchā uppajjatī’’ti dīpesi. Yāni pana sampayuttāni samādhiñāṇāni, tesaṃ apacchā apure uppatti veditabbāti.

74. In the third, gilānā vuṭṭhito: having recovered from illness. Gelaññā: from being ill. Upasaṅkamī: having eaten the morning meal, taking garlands, scents, and so on, and surrounded by a large retinue, he approached. Bāhāyaṃ gahetvā: it should be understood that he did not drag him by taking his arm, but rising from the seat he was sitting on, he went to his presence, gave a signal with his thumb on his right arm, and led him to one side. Then, having described the morality, concentration, and wisdom of the seven trainees in the manner of "even a trainee has morality, Mahānāma," and then describing the morality, concentration, and wisdom of the non-trainee as the fruit of Arahatship, he revealed that "the trainee's insight knowledge (vipassanāñāṇa) is after the trainee's concentration, and the non-trainee's fruition knowledge (phalañāṇa) is after that, and the non-trainee's fruition concentration arises after the trainee's insight knowledge." It should be understood that for those concentrations and knowledges that are associated, their arising is not after or before.

4. Nigaṇṭhasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Nigaṇṭhasuttavaṇṇanā

75.Catutthekūṭāgārasālāyanti dve kaṇṇikā gahetvā haṃsavaṭṭakacchannena katāya gandhakuṭiyā.Aparisesaṃ ñāṇadassanaṃ paṭijānātīti appamattakampi asesetvā sabbaṃ ñāṇadassanaṃ paṭijānāti.Satataṃ samitanti sabbakālaṃ nirantaraṃ.Ñāṇadassanaṃ paccupaṭṭhitanti sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ mayhaṃ upaṭṭhitamevāti dasseti.Purāṇānaṃ kammānanti āyūhitakammānaṃ.Tapasā byantībhāvanti dukkaratapena vigatantakaraṇaṃ.Navānaṃ kammānanti idāni āyūhitabbakammānaṃ.Akaraṇāti anāyūhanena.Setughātanti padaghātaṃ paccayaghātaṃ katheti.Kammakkhayā dukkhakkhayoti kammavaṭṭakkhayena dukkhakkhayo.Dukkhakkhayā vedanākkhayoti dukkhavaṭṭakkhayena vedanākkhayo. Dukkhavaṭṭasmiñhi khīṇe vedanāvaṭṭampi khīṇameva hoti.Vedanākkhayā sabbaṃ dukkhaṃ nijjiṇṇaṃ bhavissatīti vedanākkhayena pana sakalavaṭṭadukkhaṃ nijjiṇṇameva bhavissati.Sandiṭṭhikāyāti sāmaṃ passitabbāya paccakkhāya.Nijjarāya visuddhiyāti kilesajīraṇakapaṭipadāya kilese vā nijjīraṇato nijjarāya sattānaṃ visuddhiyā.Samatikkamo hotīti sakalassa vaṭṭadukkhassa atikkamo hoti.Idha, bhante, bhagavā kimāhāti, bhante, bhagavā imāya paṭipattiyā kimāha, kiṃ etaṃyeva kilesanijjīraṇakapaṭipadaṃ paññapeti, udāhu aññanti pucchati.

75. In the fourth, kūṭāgārasālāya: in the hall of the peaked house, the Gandhakuti made by taking two kaṇṇikās and covering them with a goose-shaped covering. Aparisesaṃ ñāṇadassanaṃ paṭijānātī: without leaving even a little, he claims all knowledge and vision. Satataṃ samita: always, continuously. Ñāṇadassanaṃ paccupaṭṭhita: he shows that the knowledge of omniscience is present to me. Purāṇānaṃ kammāna: of past actions. Tapasā byantībhāva: making an end by rigorous asceticism. Navānaṃ kammāna: of actions to be accumulated now. Akaraṇā: by non-accumulation. Setughāta: he speaks of padaghāta and paccayaghāta. Kammakkhayā dukkhakkhayo: with the destruction of the cycle of action, the destruction of suffering. Dukkhakkhayā vedanākkhayo: with the destruction of the cycle of suffering, the destruction of feeling. For when the cycle of suffering is destroyed, the cycle of feeling is also destroyed. Vedanākkhayā sabbaṃ dukkhaṃ nijjiṇṇaṃ bhavissatī: but with the destruction of feeling, all the suffering of the cycle will surely be exhausted. Sandiṭṭhikāyā: visible by oneself, directly. Nijjarāya visuddhiyā: by the practice of consuming defilements, or by the cleansing of beings by consuming defilements. Samatikkamo hotī: there is transcendence of all the suffering of the cycle. Idha, bhante, bhagavā kimāhā: venerable, what does the Blessed One say with this practice? Does he teach only this practice of consuming defilements, or something else? he asks.

Jānatāti anāvaraṇañāṇena jānantena.Passatāti samantacakkhunā passantena.Visuddhiyāti visuddhisampāpanatthāya.Samatikkamāyāti samatikkamanatthāya.Atthaṅgamāyāti atthaṃ gamanatthāya.Ñāyassa adhigamāyāti saha vipassanāya maggassa adhigamanatthāya.Nibbānassa sacchikiriyāyāti apaccayanibbānassa sacchikaraṇatthāya.Navañca kammaṃ na karotīti navaṃ kammaṃ nāyūhati.Purāṇañca kammanti pubbe āyūhitakammaṃ.Phussa phussa byantī karotīti phusitvā phusitvā vigatantaṃ karoti, vipākaphassaṃ phusitvā phusitvā taṃ kammaṃ khepetīti attho.Sandiṭṭhikāti sāmaṃ passitabbā.Akālikāti na kālantare kiccakārikā.Ehipassikāti ‘‘ehi passā’’ti evaṃ dassetuṃ yuttā.Opaneyyikāti upanaye yuttā allīyitabbayuttā.Paccattaṃ veditabbā viññūhīti paṇḍitehi attano attano santāneyeva jānitabbā, bālehi pana dujjānā. Iti sīlavasena dve maggā, dve ca phalāni kathitāni. Sotāpannasakadāgāmino hi sīlesu paripūrakārinoti.Vivicceva kāmehītiādikāya pana samādhisampadāya tayo maggā, tīṇi ca phalāni kathitāni. Anāgāmī ariyasāvako hi samādhimhi paripūrakārīti vutto.Āsavānaṃ khayātiādīhi arahattaphalaṃ kathitaṃ. Keci pana sīlasamādhayopi arahattaphalasampayuttāva idha adhippetā. Ekekassa pana vasena paṭipattidassanatthaṃ visuṃ visuṃ tanti āropitāti.

Jānatā means knowing with unobstructed knowledge. Passatā means seeing with the eye of omniscience. Visuddhiyā means for the purpose of attaining purity. Samatikkamāyā means for the purpose of transcendence. Atthaṅgamāyā means for the purpose of going to cessation. Ñāyassa adhigamāyā means for the purpose of attaining the path together with insight. Nibbānassa sacchikiriyāyā means for the purpose of realizing Nibbāna, which is free from conditions. Navañca kammaṃ na karotī means he does not accumulate new kamma. Purāṇañca kamma means the kamma previously accumulated. Phussa phussa byantī karotī means experiencing and experiencing, he brings it to an end, meaning that experiencing the result of kamma, he exhausts that kamma. Sandiṭṭhikā means to be seen by oneself. Akālikā means not requiring a time interval to produce results. Ehipassikā means "come and see," worthy of being shown thus. Opaneyyikā means worthy of being brought near, worthy of being closely adhered to. Paccattaṃ veditabbā viññūhī means it should be known by the wise, each for themselves, in their own minds, but it is difficult for the foolish to understand. Thus, two paths and two fruits have been described in terms of virtue. For the Sotāpanna and Sakadāgāmin are perfect in virtue. But with Vivicceva kāmehī, etc., three paths and three fruits have been described by way of the accomplishment of concentration. For the Anāgāmi Ariyasāvaka is said to be perfect in concentration. With Āsavānaṃ khayā, etc., the fruit of Arahatship has been described. But some consider even virtue and concentration as connected with the fruit of Arahatship here. However, in order to show the practice from the perspective of each, the texts are arranged separately.

5. Nivesakasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Nivesakasuttavaṇṇanā

76.Pañcameamaccāti suhajjā.Ñātīti sassusasurapakkhikā.Sālohitāti samānalohitā bhātibhaginiādayo.Aveccappasādeti guṇe avecca jānitvā uppanne acalappasāde.Aññathattanti bhāvaññathattaṃ.Pathavīdhātuyātiādīsu vīsatiyā koṭṭhāsesu thaddhākārabhūtāya pathavīdhātuyā, dvādasasu koṭṭhāsesu yūsagatāya ābandhanabhūtāya āpodhātuyā, catūsu koṭṭhāsesu paripācanabhūtāya tejodhātuyā, chasu koṭṭhāsesu vitthambhanabhūtāya vāyodhātuyā siyā aññathattaṃ.Na tvevāti imesaṃ hi catunnaṃ mahābhūtānaṃ aññamaññabhāvūpagamanena siyā aññathattaṃ, ariyasāvakassa pana na tveva siyāti dasseti. Ettha caaññathattanti pasādaññathattañca gatiaññathattañca. Tañhi tassa na hoti, bhāvaññathattaṃ pana hoti. Ariyasāvako hi manusso hutvā devopi hoti brahmāpi. Pasādo panassa bhavantarepi na vigacchati, na ca apāyagatisaṅkhātaṃ gatiaññathattaṃ pāpuṇāti. Satthāpi tadeva dassentotatridaṃ aññathattantiādimāha. Sesamettha uttānatthamevāti.

76. In the fifth, amaccā means friends. Ñātī means relatives on the side of the mother-in-law and father-in-law. Sālohitā means those of the same blood, such as siblings. Aveccappasāde means unwavering confidence that arises from knowing and discerning the qualities. Aññathatta means alteration of state. Among Pathavīdhātuyā, etc., the pathavīdhātu, which is of a solid nature, in the twenty components; the āpodhātu, which is of a binding nature like moisture, in the twelve components; the tejodhātu, which is of a digestive nature, in the four components; and the vāyodhātu, which is of a supporting nature, in the six components—there could be an alteration. Na tvevā means there could be an alteration due to these four great elements changing into one another, but it would not be so for the Ariyasāvaka. Here, aññathatta means alteration of confidence and alteration of destiny. For that does not happen to him, but there is an alteration of state. For the Ariyasāvaka, being a human, can become a deva or a Brahmā. But his confidence does not disappear even in another existence, nor does he attain an alteration of destiny consisting of falling into the Apāyas. The Teacher, showing the same, said tatridaṃ aññathatta, etc. The rest here is easy to understand.

6. Paṭhamabhavasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Paṭhamabhavasuttavaṇṇanā

77.Chaṭṭhekāmadhātuvepakkanti kāmadhātuyā vipaccanakaṃ.Kāmabhavoti kāmadhātuyaṃ upapattibhavo.Kammaṃ khettanti kusalākusalakammaṃ viruhanaṭṭhānaṭṭhena khettaṃ.Viññāṇaṃ bījanti sahajātaṃ abhisaṅkhāraviññāṇaṃ viruhanaṭṭhena bījaṃ.Taṇhā snehoti paggaṇhanānubrūhanavasena taṇhā udakaṃ nāma.Avijjānīvaraṇānanti avijjāya āvaritānaṃ.Taṇhāsaṃyojanānanti taṇhābandhanena baddhānaṃ.Hīnāya dhātuyāti kāmadhātuyā.Viññāṇaṃ patiṭṭhitanti abhisaṅkhāraviññāṇaṃ patiṭṭhitaṃ.Majjhimāya dhātuyāti rūpadhātuyā.Paṇītāya dhātuyāti arūpadhātuyā. Sesamettha uttānatthamevāti.

77. In the sixth, kāmadhātuvepakka means ripening in the Kāmadhātu. Kāmabhavo means rebirth in the Kāmadhātu. Kammaṃ khetta means wholesome and unwholesome kamma is a field in the sense of being a place of growth. Viññāṇaṃ bīja means co-arisen Saṅkhāraviññāṇa is a seed in the sense of being a place of growth. Taṇhā sneho means craving is called water in the sense of grasping and nourishing. Avijjānīvaraṇāna means those who are covered by ignorance. Taṇhāsaṃyojanāna means those who are bound by the bond of craving. Hīnāya dhātuyā means in the Kāmadhātu. Viññāṇaṃ patiṭṭhita means Saṅkhāraviññāṇa is established. Majjhimāya dhātuyā means in the Rūpadhātu. Paṇītāya dhātuyā means in the Arūpadhātu. The rest here is easy to understand.

7. Dutiyabhavasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Dutiyabhavasuttavaṇṇanā

78.Sattamecetanāti kammacetanā.Patthanāpi kammapatthanāva. Sesaṃ purimasadisamevāti.

78. In the seventh, cetanā means Kammacetanā. Patthanā also means Kammapatthanā. The rest is the same as before.

8. Sīlabbatasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Sīlabbatasuttavaṇṇanā

79.Aṭṭhamesīlabbatanti sīlañceva vatañca.Jīvitanti dukkarakārikānuyogo.Brahmacariyanti brahmacariyavāso.Upaṭṭhānasāranti upaṭṭhānena sāraṃ, ‘‘idaṃ varaṃ idaṃ niṭṭhā’’ti evaṃ upaṭṭhitanti attho.Saphalanti saudrayaṃ savaḍḍhikaṃ hotīti pucchati.Na khvettha, bhante, ekaṃsenāti, bhante, na kho ettha ekaṃsena byākātabbanti attho.Upaṭṭhānasāraṃ sevatoti idaṃ sāraṃ varaṃ niṭṭhāti evaṃ upaṭṭhitaṃ sevamānassa.Aphalanti iṭṭhaphalena aphalaṃ. Ettāvatā kammavādikiriyavādīnaṃ pabbajjaṃ ṭhapetvā seso sabbopi bāhirakasamayo gahito hoti.Saphalanti iṭṭhaphalena saphalaṃ saudrayaṃ. Ettāvatā imaṃ sāsanaṃ ādiṃ katvā sabbāpi kammavādikiriyavādīnaṃ pabbajjā gahitā.Na ca panassa sulabharūpo samasamo paññāyāti evaṃ sekkhabhūmiyaṃ ṭhatvā pañhaṃ kathento assa ānandassa paññāya samasamo na sulabhoti dasseti. Imasmiṃ sutte sekkhabhūmi nāma kathitāti.

79. In the eighth, sīlabbata means virtue and vows. Jīvita means engaging in rigorous practices. Brahmacariya means living the Brahmacariya. Upaṭṭhānasāra means the essence of attendance, meaning attending with the thought, "this is excellent, this is the final goal." Saphala means asking whether it is fruitful and beneficial. Na khvettha, bhante, ekaṃsenā means, "Bhante, this should not be explained in one way only." Upaṭṭhānasāraṃ sevato means one who cultivates what is attended to with the thought, "this is the essence, the excellent, the final goal." Aphala means fruitless with respect to the desired result. Thus, except for the renunciations of the Kammavādins and Kiriyavādins, all other external sects are included. Saphala means fruitful and beneficial with respect to the desired result. Thus, including this Sāsana from the beginning, all renunciations of the Kammavādins and Kiriyavādins are included. Na ca panassa sulabharūpo samasamo paññāyā means it is not easy to find someone equal in wisdom to Ānanda, who, standing on the Sekkha ground, asked the question. In this sutta, the Sekkha ground is mentioned.

9. Gandhajātasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Gandhajātasuttavaṇṇanā

80.Navameetadavocāti pacchābhattaṃ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto dasabalassa vattaṃ dassetvā attano divāvihāraṭṭhānaṃ gantvā ‘‘imasmiṃ loke mūlagandho nāma atthi, sāragandho nāma atthi, pupphagandho nāma atthi. Ime pana tayopi gandhā anuvātaṃyeva gacchanti, na paṭivātaṃ. Atthi nu kho kiñci, yassa paṭivātampi gandho gacchatī’’ti cintetvā aṭṭhannaṃ varānaṃ gahaṇakāleyeva kaṅkhuppattisamaye upasaṅkamanavarassa gahitattā takkhaṇaṃyeva divāṭṭhānato vuṭṭhāya satthu santikaṃ gantvā vanditvā ekamantaṃ nisinno uppannāya kaṅkhāya vinodanatthaṃ etaṃ ‘‘tīṇimāni, bhante’’tiādivacanaṃ avoca. Tatthagandhajātānīti gandhajātiyo.Mūlagandhoti mūlavatthuko gandho, gandhasampannaṃ vā mūlameva mūlagandho. Tassa hi gandho anuvātaṃ gacchati. Gandhassa pana gandho nāma natthi.Sāragandhapupphagandhesupi eseva nayo.Atthānanda, kiñci gandhajātanti ettha saraṇagamanādayo guṇavaṇṇabhāsanavasena disāgāmitāya gandhasadisattā gandhā, tesaṃ vatthubhūto puggalo gandhajātaṃ nāma.Gandho gacchatīti vaṇṇabhāsanavasena gacchati.Sīlavāti pañcasīlena vā dasasīlena vā sīlavā.Kalyāṇadhammoti teneva sīladhammena kalyāṇadhammo sundaradhammo.Vigatamalamaccherenātiādīnaṃ attho visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.160) vitthāritova.Disāsūti catūsu disāsu catūsu anudisāsu.Samaṇabrāhmaṇāti samitapāpabāhitapāpā samaṇabrāhmaṇā.

80. In the ninth, etadavocā means after returning from the alms round after the meal, showing the duty of the Ten-Powered One, and going to his own place for the day's dwelling, thinking, "In this world, there is root fragrance, there is heartwood fragrance, there is flower fragrance. But these three fragrances only go with the wind, not against the wind. Is there anything whose fragrance goes against the wind?" Because the taking of the boon of approaching at the time of the arising of doubt was taken at the time of accepting the eight boons, immediately after rising from his daytime dwelling, going to the Teacher, paying homage, and sitting to one side, he spoke this statement, beginning with "Tīṇimāni, bhante," to dispel the arisen doubt. There, gandhajātānī means kinds of fragrance. Mūlagandho means fragrance based on roots, or the root itself is the root fragrance if it is full of fragrance. For its fragrance goes with the wind. But there is no fragrance of fragrance. The same method applies to Sāragandhapupphagandhesu. Atthānanda, kiñci gandhajāta here, the person who is the basis of qualities like going for refuge, which are similar to fragrance because they go in all directions by way of describing virtues, is called gandhajāta. Gandho gacchatī means the fragrance goes by way of description of virtues. Sīlavā means virtuous with the five precepts or the ten precepts. Kalyāṇadhammo means one with beautiful qualities due to that virtuous Dhamma. The meaning of Vigatamalamaccherenā, etc., has already been extensively explained in the Visuddhimagga (visuddhi. 1.160). Disāsū means in the four directions and the four intermediate directions. Samaṇabrāhmaṇā means Samaṇas and Brāhmaṇas who have calmed evil and banished evil.

Na pupphagandho paṭivātametīti vassikapupphādīnaṃ gandho paṭivātaṃ na gacchati.Na candanaṃ tagaramallikā vāti candanatagaramallikānampi gandho paṭivātaṃ na gacchatīti attho. Devalokepi phuṭasumanā nāma hoti, tassā pupphitadivase gandho yojanasataṃ ajjhottharati. Sopi paṭivātaṃ vidatthimattampi ratanamattampi gantuṃ na sakkotīti vadanti.Satañca gandho paṭivātametīti satañca paṇḍitānaṃ buddhapaccekabuddhabuddhaputtānaṃ sīlādiguṇagandho paṭivātaṃ gacchati.Sabbā disā sappuriso pavāyatīti sappuriso paṇḍito sīlādiguṇagandhena sabbā disā pavāyati, sabbā disā gandhena avattharatīti attho.

Na pupphagandho paṭivātametī means the fragrance of jasmine flowers, etc., does not go against the wind. Na candanaṃ tagaramallikā vā means the fragrance of sandalwood, tagara, and jasmine does not go against the wind. It is said that in the deva world, there is a flower called phuṭasumanā, and on the day it blooms, its fragrance spreads for a hundred yojanas. But even that cannot go against the wind even a vidatthi's length or a ratana's length. Satañca gandho paṭivātametī means the fragrance of the qualities of virtue, etc., of the good people, the wise, the Buddhas, Paccekabuddhas, and sons of the Buddha, goes against the wind. Sabbā disā sappuriso pavāyatī means the good person, the wise person, spreads in all directions with the fragrance of qualities such as virtue, meaning he covers all directions with fragrance.

10. Cūḷanikāsuttavaṇṇanā
10. Cūḷanikāsuttavaṇṇanā

81.Dasamassa duvidho nikkhepo atthuppattikopi pucchāvasikopi. Kataraatthuppattiyaṃ kassa pucchāya kathitanti ce? Aruṇavatisuttantaatthuppattiyaṃ (saṃ. ni. 1.185 ādayo) ānandattherassa pucchāya kathitaṃ. Aruṇavatisuttanto kena kathitoti? Dvīhi buddhehi kathito sikhinā ca bhagavatā amhākañca satthārā. Imasmā hi kappā ekatiṃsakappamatthake aruṇavatinagare aruṇavato rañño pabhāvatiyā nāma mahesiyā kucchismiṃ nibbattitvā paripakke ñāṇe mahābhinikkhamanaṃ nikkhamitvā sikhī bhagavā bodhimaṇḍe sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ paṭivijjhitvā pavattitavaradhammacakko aruṇavatiṃ nissāya viharanto ekadivasaṃ pātova sarīrappaṭijagganaṃ katvā mahābhikkhusaṅghaparivāro ‘‘aruṇavatiṃ piṇḍāya pavisissāmī’’ti nikkhamitvā vihāradvārakoṭṭhakasamīpe ṭhito abhibhuṃ nāma aggasāvakaṃ āmantesi – ‘‘atippago kho, bhikkhu, aruṇavatiṃ piṇḍāya pavisituṃ, yena aññataro brahmaloko tenupasaṅkamissāmā’’ti. Yathāha –

81. In the tenth, there are two kinds of explanations: the explanation of the origin of the subject matter and the explanation based on the question. When was it spoken, in which origin of the subject matter, and in response to whose question? It was spoken in the context of the Aruṇavatisuttanta (saṃ. ni. 1.185 ff), in response to a question from Ānandatthera. Who spoke the Aruṇavatisuttanta? It was spoken by two Buddhas: by Sikhī Bhagavā and by our Teacher. Thirty-one kappas ago from this kappa, in the city of Aruṇavati, having been born in the womb of Pabhāvati, the chief queen of King Aruṇavata, and with his knowledge ripe, Sikhī Bhagavā, having gone forth in the Great Going Forth, having realized all-knowing knowledge at the Bodhimaṇḍa, and having set in motion the excellent Wheel of Dhamma, while dwelling dependent on Aruṇavati, one day, having performed the cleansing of his body in the morning, surrounded by the great Saṅgha of bhikkhus, standing near the gate-chamber of the monastery, intending to enter Aruṇavati for alms, he addressed his chief disciple, named Abhibhū: "It is too early, bhikkhu, to enter Aruṇavati for alms. Let us approach a certain Brahmā world." As he said—

‘‘Atha kho, bhikkhave, sikhī bhagavā arahaṃ sammāsambuddho abhibhuṃ bhikkhuṃ āmantesi – ‘āyāma, brāhmaṇa, yena aññataro brahmaloko tenupasaṅkamissāma, na tāva bhattakālo bhavissatī’ti. ‘Evaṃ, bhante’ti kho, bhikkhave, abhibhū bhikkhu sikhissa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa paccassosi. Atha kho, bhikkhave, sikhī bhagavā arahaṃ sammāsambuddho abhibhū ca bhikkhu yena aññataro brahmaloko tenupasaṅkamiṃsū’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.185).

"Then, bhikkhus, Sikhī Bhagavā, Arahant, Sammāsambuddha, addressed the bhikkhu Abhibhū: 'Come, Brāhmaṇa, let us approach a certain Brahmā world; it is not yet time for the meal.' 'Yes, Bhante,' the bhikkhu Abhibhū replied to Sikhī Bhagavā, Arahant, Sammāsambuddha. Then, bhikkhus, Sikhī Bhagavā, Arahant, Sammāsambuddha, and the bhikkhu Abhibhū approached a certain Brahmā world" (saṃ. ni. 1.185).

Tattha mahābrahmā sammāsambuddhaṃ disvā attamano paccuggamanaṃ katvā brahmāsanaṃ paññāpetvā adāsi, therassāpi anucchavikaṃ āsanaṃ paññāpayiṃsu. Nisīdi bhagavā paññatte āsane, theropi attano paññattāsane nisīdi. Mahābrahmāpi dasabalaṃ vanditvā ekamantaṃ nisīdi.

There, Mahābrahmā, seeing the Sammāsambuddha, delighted, went to greet him, prepared a Brahmā seat, and gave it to him; they also prepared a suitable seat for the Thera. The Bhagavā sat down on the prepared seat, and the Thera also sat down on his prepared seat. Mahābrahmā also paid homage to the Ten-Powered One and sat down to one side.

Atha kho, bhikkhave, sikhī bhagavā abhibhuṃ bhikkhuṃ āmantesi – ‘‘paṭibhātu taṃ, brāhmaṇa, brahmuno ca brahmaparisāya ca brahmapārisajjānañca dhammīkathāti. ‘Evaṃ, bhante’ti kho, bhikkhave, abhibhū bhikkhu sikhissa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa paṭissuṇitvā brahmuno ca brahmaparisāya ca brahmapārisajjānañca dhammiṃ kathaṃ kathesi. There dhammaṃ kathente brahmagaṇā ujjhāyiṃsu – ‘‘cirassañca mayaṃ satthu brahmalokāgamanaṃ labhimha, ayañca bhikkhu ṭhapetvā satthāraṃ sayaṃ dhammakathaṃ ārabhī’’ti.

Then, bhikkhus, Sikhī Bhagavā addressed the bhikkhu Abhibhū: "May a Dhamma talk occur to you for the Brahmā, the Brahmā assembly, and the Brahmā attendants." "Yes, Bhante," the bhikkhu Abhibhū replied to Sikhī Bhagavā, Arahant, Sammāsambuddha, and gave a Dhamma talk to the Brahmā, the Brahmā assembly, and the Brahmā attendants. While the Thera was giving the Dhamma talk, the Brahmā group murmured, "It has been a long time since we obtained the Teacher's coming to the Brahmā world, and this bhikkhu, setting aside the Teacher, begins the Dhamma talk himself."

Satthā tesaṃ anattamanabhāvaṃ ñatvā abhibhuṃ bhikkhuṃ etadavoca – ‘‘ujjhāyanti kho te, brāhmaṇa, brahmā ca brahmaparisā ca brahmapārisajjā ca. Tena hi tvaṃ – brāhmaṇa, bhiyyosomattāya saṃvejehī’’ti. Thero satthu vacanaṃ sampaṭicchitvā anekavihitaṃ iddhivikubbanaṃ katvā sahassilokadhātuṃ sarena viññāpento ‘‘ārambhatha nikkamathā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.185) gāthādvayaṃ abhāsi. Kiṃ pana katvā thero sahassilokadhātuṃ viññāpesīti? Nīlakasiṇaṃ tāva samāpajjitvā sabbattha andhakāraṃ phari, tato ‘‘kimidaṃ andhakāra’’nti sattānaṃ ābhoge uppanne ālokaṃ dassesi. ‘‘Kiṃ āloko aya’’nti vicinantānaṃ attānaṃ dassesi, sahassacakkavāḷe devamanussā añjaliṃ paggaṇhitvā paggaṇhitvā theraṃyeva namassamānā aṭṭhaṃsu. Thero ‘‘mahājano mayhaṃ dhammaṃ desentassa saraṃ suṇātū’’ti imā gāthā abhāsi. Sabbe osaṭāya parisāya majjhe nisīditvā dhammaṃ desentassa viya saddaṃ assosuṃ. Atthopi nesaṃ pākaṭo ahosi.

The Teacher, knowing their displeasure, said this to the bhikkhu Abhibhū: "They are murmuring, Brāhmaṇa, the Brahmā, the Brahmā assembly, and the Brahmā attendants. Therefore, Brāhmaṇa, increase your effort even more." The Thera, accepting the Teacher's word, having performed various kinds of psychic powers, making the thousandfold world known with his voice, spoke the two verses, "Begin, go forth" (saṃ. ni. 1.185). What did the Thera do to make the thousandfold world known? First, he attained the Nīlakasiṇa and spread darkness everywhere; then, when the thought arose in the beings, "What is this darkness?" he showed the light. When they were investigating, "What is this light?" he showed himself, and the devas and humans in the thousandfold world, raising their joined palms, stood worshiping the Thera. The Thera spoke these verses so that the great crowd would hear his voice while he was teaching the Dhamma. They heard the sound as if he were sitting in the middle of the assembled company. The meaning was also clear to them.

Atha kho bhagavā saddhiṃ therena aruṇavatiṃ paccāgantvā piṇḍāya caritvā pacchābhattaṃ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto bhikkhusaṅghaṃ pucchi – ‘‘assuttha no tumhe, bhikkhave, abhibhussa bhikkhuno brahmaloke ṭhitassa gāthāyo bhāsamānassā’’ti. Te ‘‘āma, bhante’’ti paṭijānitvā sutabhāvaṃ āvikarontā tadeva gāthādvayaṃ udāhariṃsu. Satthā ‘‘sādhu sādhū’’ti sādhukāraṃ datvā desanaṃ niṭṭhapesi. Evaṃ tāva idaṃ suttaṃ ito ekatiṃsakappamatthake sikhinā bhagavatā kathitaṃ.

Then the Bhagavā, together with the Thera, returning to Aruṇavati, having gone for alms, after the meal, having returned from the alms round, asked the Saṅgha of bhikkhus: "Have you heard the verses spoken by the bhikkhu Abhibhū while standing in the Brahmā world?" They, acknowledging "Yes, Bhante," revealing that they had heard, uttered the same two verses. The Teacher, giving approval with "Sādhu, sādhu," concluded the discourse. Thus, this sutta was spoken by Sikhī Bhagavā thirty-one kappas ago from this.

atha kho āyasmā ānandoti vuttaṃ.

atha kho āyasmā ānando is said.

sammukhāti sammukhībhūtena mayā etaṃ sutaṃ, na anussavena, na dūtaparamparāyāti iminā adhippāyena evamāha.Kīvatakaṃ pahoti sarena viññāpetunti kittakaṃ ṭhānaṃ sarīrobhāsena vihatandhakāraṃ katvā sarena viññāpetuṃ sakkoti.Sāvako so, ānanda, appameyyā tathāgatāti idaṃ bhagavā iminā adhippāyenāha – ānanda, tvaṃ kiṃ vadesi, so padesañāṇe ṭhito sāvako. Tathāgatā pana dasa pāramiyo pūretvā sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ pattā appameyyā. So tvaṃ nakhasikhāya paṃsuṃ gahetvā mahāpathavipaṃsunā saddhiṃ upamento viya kiṃ nāmetaṃ vadesi. Añño hi sāvakānaṃ visayo, añño buddhānaṃ. Añño sāvakānaṃ gocaro, añño buddhānaṃ. Aññaṃ sāvakānaṃ balaṃ, aññaṃ buddhānanti. Iti bhagavā iminā adhippāyena appameyyabhāvaṃ vatvā tuṇhī ahosi.

sammukhāti, "sammukhībhūtena mayā etaṃ sutaṃ, na anussavena, na dūtaparamparāyā"ti iminā adhippāyena evamāha. Kīvatakaṃ pahoti sarena viññāpetunti, "kittakaṃ ṭhānaṃ sarīrobhāsena vihatandhakāraṃ katvā sarena viññāpetuṃ sakkoti." Sāvako so, ānanda, appameyyā tathāgatāti, idaṃ bhagavā iminā adhippāyenāha – "ānanda, tvaṃ kiṃ vadesi, so padesañāṇe ṭhito sāvako. Tathāgatā pana dasa pāramiyo pūretvā sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ pattā appameyyā. So tvaṃ nakhasikhāya paṃsuṃ gahetvā mahāpathavipaṃsunā saddhiṃ upamento viya kiṃ nāmetaṃ vadesi. Añño hi sāvakānaṃ visayo, añño buddhānaṃ. Añño sāvakānaṃ gocaro, añño buddhānaṃ. Aññaṃ sāvakānaṃ balaṃ, aññaṃ buddhānanti." Iti bhagavā iminā adhippāyena appameyyabhāvaṃ vatvā tuṇhī ahosi.

tatiyampi khotiādi vuttaṃ. Athassa bhagavā byākarontosutā te ānandātiādimāha. Thero cintesi – ‘‘satthā me ‘sutā te, ānanda, sahassī cūḷanikā lokadhātū’ti ettakameva vatvā tuṇhī jāto, idāni buddhasīhanādaṃ nadissatī’’ti so satthāraṃ yācantoetassa bhagavā kālotiādimāha.

tatiyampi khotiādi vuttaṃ. Athassa bhagavā byākarontosutā te ānandātiādimāha. Thero cintesi – ‘‘satthā me ‘sutā te, ānanda, sahassī cūḷanikā lokadhātū’ti ettakameva vatvā tuṇhī jāto, idāni buddhasīhanādaṃ nadissatī’’ti so satthāraṃ yācantoetassa bhagavā kālotiādimāha.

tena hānandātiādimāha. Tatthayāvatāti yattakaṃ ṭhānaṃ.Candimasūriyāti candimā ca sūriyo ca.Pariharantīti vicaranti.Disā bhantīti sabbadisā obhāsanti.Virocanāti virocamānā. Ettāvatā ekacakkavāḷaṃ paricchinditvā dassitaṃ hoti. Idāni taṃ sahassaguṇaṃ katvā dassentotāva sahassadhā lokoti āha.Tasmiṃ sahassadhā loketi tasmiṃ sahassacakkavāḷe.Sahassaṃ cātumahārājikānanti sahassaṃ cātumahārājikānaṃ devalokānaṃ. Yasmā pana ekekasmiṃ cakkavāḷe cattāro cattāro mahārājāno, tasmācattāri mahārājasahassānīti vuttaṃ. Iminā upāyena sabbattha attho veditabbo.Cūḷanikāti khuddikā. Ayaṃ sāvakānaṃ visayo. Kasmā panesā ānītāti? Majjhimikāya lokadhātuyā paricchedadassanatthaṃ.

tena hānandātiādimāha. Tatthayāvatāti yattakaṃ ṭhānaṃ.Candimasūriyāti candimā ca sūriyo ca.Pariharantīti vicaranti.Disā bhantīti sabbadisā obhāsanti.Virocanāti virocamānā. Ettāvatā ekacakkavāḷaṃ paricchinditvā dassitaṃ hoti. Idāni taṃ sahassaguṇaṃ katvā dassentotāva sahassadhā lokoti āha.Tasmiṃ sahassadhā loketi tasmiṃ sahassacakkavāḷe.Sahassaṃ cātumahārājikānanti sahassaṃ cātumahārājikānaṃ devalokānaṃ. Yasmā pana ekekasmiṃ cakkavāḷe cattāro cattāro mahārājāno, tasmācattāri mahārājasahassānīti vuttaṃ. Iminā upāyena sabbattha attho veditabbo.Cūḷanikāti khuddikā. Ayaṃ sāvakānaṃ visayo. Kasmā panesā ānītāti? Majjhimikāya lokadhātuyā paricchedadassanatthaṃ.

Yāvatāti yattakā.Tāva sahassadhāti tāva sahassabhāgena.Dvisahassī majjhimikā lokadhātūti ayaṃ sahassacakkavāḷāni sahassabhāgena gaṇetvā dasasatasahassacakkavāḷaparimāṇā dvisahassī majjhimikā nāma lokadhātu. Ayaṃ sāvakānaṃ avisayo, buddhānameva visayo. Ettakepi hi ṭhāne tathāgatā andhakāraṃ vidhametvā sarīrobhāsaṃ dassetvā sarena viññāpetuṃ sakkontīti dīpeti. Ettakena buddhānaṃ jātikkhettaṃ nāma dassitaṃ. Bodhisattānañhi pacchimabhave devalokato cavitvā mātukucchiyaṃ paṭisandhiggahaṇadivase ca kucchito nikkhamanadivase ca mahābhinikkhamanadivase ca sambodhidhammacakkappavattanaāyusaṅkhāravossajjanaparinibbānadivasesu ca ettakaṃ ṭhānaṃ kampati.

Yāvatāti yattakā.Tāva sahassadhāti tāva sahassabhāgena.Dvisahassī majjhimikā lokadhātūti ayaṃ sahassacakkavāḷāni sahassabhāgena gaṇetvā dasasatasahassacakkavāḷaparimāṇā dvisahassī majjhimikā nāma lokadhātu. Ayaṃ sāvakānaṃ avisayo, buddhānameva visayo. Ettakepi hi ṭhāne tathāgatā andhakāraṃ vidhametvā sarīrobhāsaṃ dassetvā sarena viññāpetuṃ sakkontīti dīpeti. Ettakena buddhānaṃ jātikkhettaṃ nāma dassitaṃ. Bodhisattānañhi pacchimabhave devalokato cavitvā mātukucchiyaṃ paṭisandhiggahaṇadivase ca kucchito nikkhamanadivase ca mahābhinikkhamanadivase ca sambodhidhammacakkappavattanaāyusaṅkhāravossajjanaparinibbānadivasesu ca ettakaṃ ṭhānaṃ kampati.

Tisahassī mahāsahassīti sahassito paṭṭhāya tatiyāti tisahassī, sahassaṃ sahassadhā katvā gaṇitaṃ majjhimikaṃ sahassadhā katvā gaṇitattā mahantehi sahassehi gaṇitāti mahāsahassī. Ettāvatā koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷaparimāṇo loko dassito hoti. Bhagavā ākaṅkhamāno ettake ṭhāne andhakāraṃ vidhametvā sarīrobhāsaṃ dassetvā sarena viññāpeyyāti. Gaṇakaputtatissatthero pana evamāha – ‘‘na tisahassimahāsahassilokadhātuyā evaṃ parimāṇaṃ. Idañhi ācariyānaṃ sajjhāyamuḷhakaṃ vācāya parihīnaṭṭhānaṃ, dasakoṭisatasahassacakkavāḷaparimāṇaṃ pana ṭhānaṃ tisahassimahāsahassilokadhātu nāmā’’ti. Ettāvatā hi bhagavatā āṇākkhettaṃ nāma dassitaṃ. Etasmiñhi antare āṭānāṭiyaparittaisigiliparittadhajaggaparittabojjhaṅgaparittakhandhaparitta- moraparittamettaparittaratanaparittānaṃ āṇā pharati.Yāvatā pana ākaṅkheyyāti yattakaṃ ṭhānaṃ iccheyya, iminā visayakkhettaṃ dasseti. Buddhānañhi visayakkhettassa pamāṇaparicchedo nāma natthi, natthikabhāve cassa imaṃ opammaṃ āharanti – koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷamhi yāva brahmalokā sāsapehi pūretvā sace koci puratthimāya disāya ekacakkavāḷe ekaṃ sāsapaṃ pakkhipanto āgaccheyya, sabbepi te sāsapā parikkhayaṃ gaccheyyuṃ, na tveva puratthimāya disāya cakkavāḷāni. Dakkhiṇādīsupi eseva nayo. Tattha buddhānaṃ avisayo nāma natthi.

Tisahassī mahāsahassīti sahassito paṭṭhāya tatiyāti tisahassī, sahassaṃ sahassadhā katvā gaṇitaṃ majjhimikaṃ sahassadhā katvā gaṇitattā mahantehi sahassehi gaṇitāti mahāsahassī. Ettāvatā koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷaparimāṇo loko dassito hoti. Bhagavā ākaṅkhamāno ettake ṭhāne andhakāraṃ vidhametvā sarīrobhāsaṃ dassetvā sarena viññāpeyyāti. Gaṇakaputtatissatthero pana evamāha – ‘‘na tisahassimahāsahassilokadhātuyā evaṃ parimāṇaṃ. Idañhi ācariyānaṃ sajjhāyamuḷhakaṃ vācāya parihīnaṭṭhānaṃ, dasakoṭisatasahassacakkavāḷaparimāṇaṃ pana ṭhānaṃ tisahassimahāsahassilokadhātu nāmā’’ti. Ettāvatā hi bhagavatā āṇākkhettaṃ nāma dassitaṃ. Etasmiñhi antare āṭānāṭiyaparittaisigiliparittadhajaggaparittabojjhaṅgaparittakhandhaparitta- moraparittamettaparittaratanaparittānaṃ āṇā pharati.Yāvatā pana ākaṅkheyyāti yattakaṃ ṭhānaṃ iccheyya, iminā visayakkhettaṃ dasseti. Buddhānañhi visayakkhettassa pamāṇaparicchedo nāma natthi, natthikabhāve cassa imaṃ opammaṃ āharanti – koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷamhi yāva brahmalokā sāsapehi pūretvā sace koci puratthimāya disāya ekacakkavāḷe ekaṃ sāsapaṃ pakkhipanto āgaccheyya, sabbepi te sāsapā parikkhayaṃ gaccheyyuṃ, na tveva puratthimāya disāya cakkavāḷāni. Dakkhiṇādīsupi eseva nayo. Tattha buddhānaṃ avisayo nāma natthi.

yathā kathaṃ panātiādimāha.

yathā kathaṃ panātiādimāha.

idhānanda, tathāgatotiādimāha. Tatthaobhāsena phareyyāti sarīrobhāsena phareyya. Pharamāno panesa kiṃ kareyyāti? Yasmiṃ ṭhāne sūriyo paññāyati, tattha naṃ attano ānubhāvena atthaṃ gameyya. Yattha pana na paññāyati, tattha naṃ uṭṭhāpetvā majjhe ṭhapeyya. Tato yattha sūriyo paññāyati, tattha manussā ‘‘adhunāva sūriyo paññāyittha, so idāneva atthaṅgamito, nāgāvaṭṭo nu kho ayaṃ, bhūtāvaṭṭayakkhāvaṭṭadevatāvaṭṭānaṃ aññataro’’ti vittakkaṃ uppādeyyuṃ. Yattha pana na paññāyati, tattha manussā ‘‘adhunāva sūriyo atthaṅgamito, svāyaṃ idāneva uṭṭhito, kiṃ nu kho ayaṃ nāgāvaṭṭabhūtāvaṭṭayakkhāvaṭṭadevatāvaṭṭānaṃ aññataro’’ti vitakkaṃ uppādeyyuṃ. Tato tesu manussesu ālokañca andhakārañca āvajjitvā ‘‘kiṃ paccayā nu kho ida’’nti pariyesamānesu satthā nīlakasiṇaṃ samāpajjitvā bahalandhakāraṃ patthareyya. Kasmā? Tesaṃ kammādippasutānaṃ sattānaṃ santāsajananatthaṃ. Atha nesaṃ santāsaṃ āpannabhāvaṃ ñatvā odātakasiṇasamāpattiṃ samāpajjitvā paṇḍaraṃ ghanabuddharasmiṃ vissajjento candasahassasūriyasahassauṭṭhānakālo viya ekappahāreneva sabbaṃ ekālokaṃ kareyya. Tañca kho tilabījamattena kāyappadesena obhāsaṃ muñcanto. Yo hi cakkavāḷapathaviṃ dīpakapallakaṃ katvā mahāsamudde udakaṃ telaṃ katvā sineruṃ vaṭṭiṃ katvā aññasmiṃ sinerumuddhani ṭhapetvā jāleyya, so ekacakkavāḷeyeva ālokaṃ kareyya. Tato paraṃ vidatthimpi obhāsetuṃ na sakkuṇeyya. Tathāgato pana tilaphalappamāṇena sarīrappadesena obhāsaṃ muñcitvā tisahassimahāsahassilokadhātuṃ ekobhāsaṃ kareyya tato vā pana bhiyyo. Evaṃ mahantā hi buddhaguṇāti.

idhānanda, tathāgatotiādimāha. Tatthaobhāsena phareyyāti sarīrobhāsena phareyya. Pharamāno panesa kiṃ kareyyāti? Yasmiṃ ṭhāne sūriyo paññāyati, tattha naṃ attano ānubhāvena atthaṃ gameyya. Yattha pana na paññāyati, tattha naṃ uṭṭhāpetvā majjhe ṭhapeyya. Tato yattha sūriyo paññāyati, tattha manussā ‘‘adhunāva sūriyo paññāyittha, so idāneva atthaṅgamito, nāgāvaṭṭo nu kho ayaṃ, bhūtāvaṭṭayakkhāvaṭṭadevatāvaṭṭānaṃ aññataro’’ti vittakkaṃ uppādeyyuṃ. Yattha pana na paññāyati, tattha manussā ‘‘adhunāva sūriyo atthaṅgamito, svāyaṃ idāneva uṭṭhito, kiṃ nu kho ayaṃ nāgāvaṭṭabhūtāvaṭṭayakkhāvaṭṭadevatāvaṭṭānaṃ aññataro’’ti vitakkaṃ uppādeyyuṃ. Tato tesu manussesu ālokañca andhakārañca āvajjitvā ‘‘kiṃ paccayā nu kho ida’’nti pariyesamānesu satthā nīlakasiṇaṃ samāpajjitvā bahalandhakāraṃ patthareyya. Kasmā? Tesaṃ kammādippasutānaṃ sattānaṃ santāsajananatthaṃ. Atha nesaṃ santāsaṃ āpannabhāvaṃ ñatvā odātakasiṇasamāpattiṃ samāpajjitvā paṇḍaraṃ ghanabuddharasmiṃ vissajjento candasahassasūriyasahassauṭṭhānakālo viya ekappahāreneva sabbaṃ ekālokaṃ kareyya. Tañca kho tilabījamattena kāyappadesena obhāsaṃ muñcanto. Yo hi cakkavāḷapathaviṃ dīpakapallakaṃ katvā mahāsamudde udakaṃ telaṃ katvā sineruṃ vaṭṭiṃ katvā aññasmiṃ sinerumuddhani ṭhapetvā jāleyya, so ekacakkavāḷeyeva ālokaṃ kareyya. Tato paraṃ vidatthimpi obhāsetuṃ na sakkuṇeyya. Tathāgato pana tilaphalappamāṇena sarīrappadesena obhāsaṃ muñcitvā tisahassimahāsahassilokadhātuṃ ekobhāsaṃ kareyya tato vā pana bhiyyo. Evaṃ mahantā hi buddhaguṇāti.

Taṃ ālokaṃ sañjāneyyunti taṃ ālokaṃ disvā ‘‘yena sūriyo atthañceva gamito uṭṭhāpito ca, bahalandhakārañca vissaṭṭhaṃ, esa so puriso idāni ālokaṃ katvā ṭhito, aho acchariyapuriso’’ti añjaliṃ paggayha namassamānā nisīdeyyuṃ.Saddamanussāveyyāti dhammakathāsaddamanussāveyya. Yo hi ekaṃ cakkavāḷapabbataṃ bheriṃ katvā mahāpathaviṃ bhericammaṃ katvā sineruṃ daṇḍaṃ katvā aññasmiṃ sinerumatthake ṭhapetvā ākoṭeyya, so ekacakkavāḷeyeva taṃ saddaṃ sāveyya, parato vidatthimpi atikkāmetuṃ na sakkuṇeyya. Tathāgato pana pallaṅke vā pīṭhe vā nisīditvā tisahassimahāsahassilokadhātuṃ sarena viññāpeti, tato vā pana bhiyyo, evaṃ mahānubhāvā tathāgatāti. Iti bhagavā iminā ettakena visayakkhettameva dasseti.

Taṃ ālokaṃ sañjāneyyunti taṃ ālokaṃ disvā ‘‘yena sūriyo atthañceva gamito uṭṭhāpito ca, bahalandhakārañca vissaṭṭhaṃ, esa so puriso idāni ālokaṃ katvā ṭhito, aho acchariyapuriso’’ti añjaliṃ paggayha namassamānā nisīdeyyuṃ.Saddamanussāveyyāti dhammakathāsaddamanussāveyya. Yo hi ekaṃ cakkavāḷapabbataṃ bheriṃ katvā mahāpathaviṃ bhericammaṃ katvā sineruṃ daṇḍaṃ katvā aññasmiṃ sinerumatthake ṭhapetvā ākoṭeyya, so ekacakkavāḷeyeva taṃ saddaṃ sāveyya, parato vidatthimpi atikkāmetuṃ na sakkuṇeyya. Tathāgato pana pallaṅke vā pīṭhe vā nisīditvā tisahassimahāsahassilokadhātuṃ sarena viññāpeti, tato vā pana bhiyyo, evaṃ mahānubhāvā tathāgatāti. Iti bhagavā iminā ettakena visayakkhettameva dasseti.

lābhā vata metiādimāha. Tatthayassa me satthā evaṃmahiddhikoti yassa mayhaṃ satthā evaṃmahiddhiko, tassa mayhaṃ evaṃmahiddhikassa satthu paṭilābho lābhā ceva suladdhañcāti attho. Atha vā yvāhaṃ evarūpassa satthuno pattacīvaraṃ gahetvā vicarituṃ, pādaparikammaṃ piṭṭhiparikammaṃ kātuṃ, mukhadhovanaudakanhānodakāni dātuṃ, gandhakuṭipariveṇaṃ sammajjituṃ, uppannāya kaṅkhāya pañhaṃ pucchituṃ, madhuradhammakathañca sotuṃ labhāmi, ete sabbepi mayhaṃ lābhā ceva suladdhañcātipi sandhāya evamāha. Ettha ca bhagavato andhakārālokasaddasavanasaṅkhātānaṃ iddhīnaṃ mahantatāya mahiddhikatā, tāsaṃyeva anupharaṇena mahānubhāvatā veditabbā.Udāyīti lāḷudāyitthero. So kira pubbe upaṭṭhākatthere āghātaṃ bandhitvā carati. Tasmā idāni okāsaṃ labhitvā imasmiṃ buddhasīhanādapariyosāne jalamānaṃ dīpasikhaṃ nibbāpento viya carantassa goṇassa tuṇḍe pahāraṃ dento viya bhattabharitaṃ pātiṃ avakujjanto viya therassa pasādabhaṅgaṃ karonto evamāha.

lābhā vata metiādimāha. Tatthayassa me satthā evaṃmahiddhikoti yassa mayhaṃ satthā evaṃmahiddhiko, tassa mayhaṃ evaṃmahiddhikassa satthu paṭilābho lābhā ceva suladdhañcāti attho. Atha vā yvāhaṃ evarūpassa satthuno pattacīvaraṃ gahetvā vicarituṃ, pādaparikammaṃ piṭṭhiparikammaṃ kātuṃ, mukhadhovanaudakanhānodakāni dātuṃ, gandhakuṭipariveṇaṃ sammajjituṃ, uppannāya kaṅkhāya pañhaṃ pucchituṃ, madhuradhammakathañca sotuṃ labhāmi, ete sabbepi mayhaṃ lābhā ceva suladdhañcātipi sandhāya evamāha. Ettha ca bhagavato andhakārālokasaddasavanasaṅkhātānaṃ iddhīnaṃ mahantatāya mahiddhikatā, tāsaṃyeva anupharaṇena mahānubhāvatā veditabbā.Udāyīti lāḷudāyitthero. So kira pubbe upaṭṭhākatthere āghātaṃ bandhitvā carati. Tasmā idāni okāsaṃ labhitvā imasmiṃ buddhasīhanādapariyosāne jalamānaṃ dīpasikhaṃ nibbāpento viya carantassa goṇassa tuṇḍe pahāraṃ dento viya bhattabharitaṃ pātiṃ avakujjanto viya therassa pasādabhaṅgaṃ karonto evamāha.

Evaṃ vutte bhagavāti evaṃ udāyittherena vutte bhagavā yathā nāma papātataṭe ṭhatvā pavedhamānaṃ purisaṃ ekamante ṭhito hitesī puriso ‘‘ito ehi ito ehī’’ti punappunaṃ vadeyya, evamevaṃ udāyittheraṃ tasmā vacanā nivārentomā hevaṃ udāyi, mā hevaṃ udāyīti āha. Tatthati nipātamattaṃ, mā evaṃ avacāti attho.Mahārajjanti cakkavattirajjaṃ. Nanu ca satthā ekassa sāvakassa dhammadesanāya uppannapasādassa mahānisaṃsaṃ aparicchinnaṃ akāsi, so kasmā imassa buddhasīhanādaṃ ārabbha uppannassa pasādassa ānisaṃsaṃ paricchindatīti? Ariyasāvakassa ettakaattabhāvaparimāṇattā. Dandhapaññopi hi sotāpanno sattakkhattuṃ devesu ca manussesu ca attabhāvaṃ paṭilabhati, tenassa gatiṃ paricchindanto evamāha.Diṭṭheva dhammeti imasmiṃyeva attabhāve ṭhatvā.Parinibbāyissatīti appaccayaparinibbānena parinibbāyissati. Iti nibbānena kūṭaṃ gaṇhanto imaṃ sīhanādasuttaṃ niṭṭhāpesīti.

Evaṃ vutte bhagavāti evaṃ udāyittherena vutte bhagavā yathā nāma papātataṭe ṭhatvā pavedhamānaṃ purisaṃ ekamante ṭhito hitesī puriso ‘‘ito ehi ito ehī’’ti punappunaṃ vadeyya, evamevaṃ udāyittheraṃ tasmā vacanā nivārentomā hevaṃ udāyi, mā hevaṃ udāyīti āha. Tatthati nipātamattaṃ, mā evaṃ avacāti attho.Mahārajjanti cakkavattirajjaṃ. Nanu ca satthā ekassa sāvakassa dhammadesanāya uppannapasādassa mahānisaṃsaṃ aparicchinnaṃ akāsi, so kasmā imassa buddhasīhanādaṃ ārabbha uppannassa pasādassa ānisaṃsaṃ paricchindatīti? Ariyasāvakassa ettakaattabhāvaparimāṇattā. Dandhapaññopi hi sotāpanno sattakkhattuṃ devesu ca manussesu ca attabhāvaṃ paṭilabhati, tenassa gatiṃ paricchindanto evamāha.Diṭṭheva dhammeti imasmiṃyeva attabhāve ṭhatvā.Parinibbāyissatīti appaccayaparinibbānena parinibbāyissati. Iti nibbānena kūṭaṃ gaṇhanto imaṃ sīhanādasuttaṃ niṭṭhāpesīti.

(9) 4. Samaṇavaggo

(9) 4. Samaṇavaggo

1. Samaṇasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Samaṇasuttavaṇṇanā

82.Catutthassa paṭhamesamaṇiyānīti samaṇasantakāni.Samaṇakaraṇīyānīti samaṇena kattabbakiccāni.Adhisīlasikkhāsamādānantiādīsu samādānaṃ vuccati gahaṇaṃ, adhisīlasikkhāya samādānaṃ gahaṇaṃ pūraṇaṃ adhisīlasikkhāsamādānaṃ. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo. Ettha ca sīlaṃ adhisīlaṃ, cittaṃ adhicittaṃ, paññā adhipaññāti ayaṃ vibhāgo veditabbo. Tattha pañcasīlaṃ sīlaṃ nāma, taṃ upādāya dasasīlaṃ adhisīlaṃ nāma, tampi upādāya catupārisuddhisīlaṃ adhisīlaṃ nāma. Apica sabbampi lokiyasīlaṃ sīlaṃ nāma, lokuttarasīlaṃ adhisīlaṃ, tadeva sikkhitabbato sikkhāti vuccati. Kāmāvacaracittaṃ pana cittaṃ nāma, taṃ upādāya rūpāvacaraṃ adhicittaṃ nāma, tampi upādāya arūpāvacaraṃ adhicittaṃ nāma. Apica sabbampi lokiyacittaṃ cittameva, lokuttaraṃ adhicittaṃ. Paññāyapi eseva nayo.Tasmāti yasmā imāni tīṇi samaṇakaraṇīyāni, tasmā.Tibboti bahalo.Chandoti kattukamyatākusalacchando. Iti imasmiṃ suttante tisso sikkhā lokiyalokuttarā kathitāti.

82.Catutthassa paṭhamesamaṇiyānīti samaṇasantakāni.Samaṇakaraṇīyānīti samaṇena kattabbakiccāni.Adhisīlasikkhāsamādānantiādīsu samādānaṃ vuccati gahaṇaṃ, adhisīlasikkhāya samādānaṃ gahaṇaṃ pūraṇaṃ adhisīlasikkhāsamādānaṃ. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo. Ettha ca sīlaṃ adhisīlaṃ, cittaṃ adhicittaṃ, paññā adhipaññāti ayaṃ vibhāgo veditabbo. Tattha pañcasīlaṃ sīlaṃ nāma, taṃ upādāya dasasīlaṃ adhisīlaṃ nāma, tampi upādāya catupārisuddhisīlaṃ adhisīlaṃ nāma. Apica sabbampi lokiyasīlaṃ sīlaṃ nāma, lokuttarasīlaṃ adhisīlaṃ, tadeva sikkhitabbato sikkhāti vuccati. Kāmāvacaracittaṃ pana cittaṃ nāma, taṃ upādāya rūpāvacaraṃ adhicittaṃ nāma, tampi upādāya arūpāvacaraṃ adhicittaṃ nāma. Apica sabbampi lokiyacittaṃ cittameva, lokuttaraṃ adhicittaṃ. Paññāyapi eseva nayo.Tasmāti yasmā imāni tīṇi samaṇakaraṇīyāni, tasmā.Tibboti bahalo.Chandoti kattukamyatākusalacchando. Iti imasmiṃ suttante tisso sikkhā lokiyalokuttarā kathitāti.

2. Gadrabhasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Gadrabhasuttavaṇṇanā

83.Dutiyepiṭṭhito piṭṭhitoti pacchato pacchato.Ahampi dammo ahampi dammoti ahampi ‘‘dammo dammamāno’’ti vadamāno gāvīti.Seyyathāpi gunnanti yathā gāvīnaṃ. Gāvo hi kāḷāpi rattāpi setādivaṇṇāpi honti, gadrabhassa pana tādiso vaṇṇo nāma natthi. Yathā ca vaṇṇo, evaṃ saropi padampi aññādisameva. Sesaṃ uttānatthameva. Imasmimpi sutte tisso sikkhā missikāva kathitāti.

83.Dutiyepiṭṭhito piṭṭhitoti pacchato pacchato.Ahampi dammo ahampi dammoti ahampi ‘‘dammo dammamāno’’ti vadamāno gāvīti.Seyyathāpi gunnanti yathā gāvīnaṃ. Gāvo hi kāḷāpi rattāpi setādivaṇṇāpi honti, gadrabhassa pana tādiso vaṇṇo nāma natthi. Yathā ca vaṇṇo, evaṃ saropi padampi aññādisameva. Sesaṃ uttānatthameva. Imasmimpi sutte tisso sikkhā missikāva kathitāti.

3. Khettasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Khettasuttavaṇṇanā

84.Tatiyepaṭikaccevāti paṭhamameva.Sukaṭṭhaṃ karotīti naṅgalena sukaṭṭhaṃ karoti.Sumatikatanti matiyā suṭṭhu samīkataṃ.Kālenāti vapitabbayuttakālena. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Idhāpi tisso sikkhā missikāva kathitā.

84.Tatiyepaṭikaccevāti paṭhamameva.Sukaṭṭhaṃ karotīti naṅgalena sukaṭṭhaṃ karoti.Sumatikatanti matiyā suṭṭhu samīkataṃ.Kālenāti vapitabbayuttakālena. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Idhāpi tisso sikkhā missikāva kathitā.

4. Vajjiputtasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Vajjiputtasuttavaṇṇanā

85.Catutthevajjiputtakoti vajjirājakulassa putto.Diyaḍḍhasikkhāpadasatanti paṇṇāsādhikaṃ sikkhāpadasataṃ. Tasmiṃ samaye paññattāni sikkhāpadāneva sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. So kira bhikkhu ajjavasampanno ujujātiko avaṅko akuṭilo, tasmā ‘‘ahaṃ ettakāni sikkhāpadāni rakkhituṃ sakkuṇeyyaṃ vā na vā’’ti cintetvā satthu ārocesi.Sakkomahanti sakkomi ahaṃ. So kira ‘‘ettakesu sikkhāpadesu sikkhantassa agaru tīsu sikkhāsu sikkhitu’’nti maññamāno evamāha. Atha bhagavā yathā nāma paññāsa tiṇakalāpiyo ukkhipituṃ asakkontassa kalāpiyasataṃ bandhitvā sīse ṭhapeyya, evameva ekissāpi sikkhāya sikkhituṃ asakkontassa aparā dvepi sikkhā upari pakkhipantotasmātiha tvaṃ bhikkhūtiādimāha. Sukhumālo kira uttaro nāma jānapadamanusso lohapāsādavihāre vasati. Atha naṃ daharabhikkhū āhaṃsu – ‘‘uttara, aggisālā ovassati, tiṇaṃ kappiyaṃ katvā dehī’’ti. Taṃ ādāya aṭaviṃ gantvā tena lāyitaṃ tiṇaṃyeva karaḷe bandhitvā ‘‘paññāsa karaḷe gahetuṃ sakkhissasi uttarā’’ti āhaṃsu. So ‘‘na sakkhissāmī’’ti āha. Asītiṃ pana sakkhissasīti? Na sakkhissāmi, bhanteti. Ekaṃ karaḷasataṃ sakkhissasīti? Āma, bhante, gaṇhissāmīti. Daharabhikkhū karaḷasataṃ bandhitvā tassa sīse ṭhapayiṃsu. So ukkhipitvā nitthunanto gantvā aggisālāya samīpe pātesi. Atha naṃ bhikkhū ‘‘kilantarūposi uttarā’’ti āhaṃsu. Āma, bhante, daharā bhikkhū maṃ vañcesuṃ, imaṃ ekampi karaḷasataṃ ukkhipituṃ asakkontaṃ maṃ ‘‘paṇṇāsa karaḷe ukkhipāhī’’ti vadiṃsu. Āma, uttara, vañcayiṃsu tanti. Evaṃ sampadamidaṃ veditabbaṃ. Idhāpi tisso sikkhā missikāva kathitā.

85. In the fourth, vajjiputtako means a son of the Vajji royal family. Diyaḍḍhasikkhāpadasata means one hundred and fifty sikkhāpadas. This was said referring to the sikkhāpadas that were enacted at that time. It seems that this monk was fully ordained, upright, without crookedness or deceit, so he thought, "Will I be able to keep so many sikkhāpadas or not?" and reported it to the Teacher. Sakkomaha means "I am able." He thought, "While training in so many sikkhāpadas, it is difficult to train in the three trainings," so he spoke thus. Then the Blessed One, just as if someone unable to lift fifty bundles of grass were to have a hundred bundles tied and placed on his head, similarly, adding two more trainings on top of someone unable to train in even one training, said, tasmātiha tvaṃ bhikkhū (therefore, here, you monks), and so on. It seems that a simple countryman named Uttara lived in the Lohapāsāda Monastery. Then the young monks said to him, "Uttara, the fire hall is leaking; make a grass covering." Taking that, he went to the forest, and tying the grass he had gathered into bundles, they said, "Uttara, will you be able to carry fifty bundles?" He said, "I will not be able." "But will you be able to carry eighty?" "I will not be able, Bhante." "Will you be able to carry a hundred bundles?" "Yes, Bhante, I will take them." The young monks tied a hundred bundles and placed them on his head. He lifted them up, grumbling, and went and dropped them near the fire hall. Then the monks said to him, "You look exhausted, Uttara." "Yes, Bhante, the young monks deceived me, telling me to lift fifty bundles, even though I cannot lift this one hundred bundles." "Yes, Uttara, they deceived you." Thus, this matter should be understood. Here, too, the three trainings are spoken of mixed together.

5. Sekkhasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Sekkha Sutta Commentary

86.Pañcameujumaggānusārinoti ujumaggo vuccati ariyamaggo, taṃ anussarantassa paṭipannakassāti attho.Khayasmiṃ paṭhamaṃ ñāṇanti paṭhamameva maggañāṇaṃ uppajjati. Maggo hi kilesānaṃ khepanato khayo nāma, taṃsampayuttaṃ ñāṇaṃ khayasmiṃ ñāṇaṃ nāma.Tatoaññā anantarāti tato catutthamaggañāṇato anantarā aññā uppajjati, arahattaphalaṃ uppajjatīti attho.Aññāvimuttassāti arahattaphalavimuttiyā vimuttassa.Ñāṇaṃ ve hotīti paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ hoti. Iti suttepi gāthāsupi satta sekhā kathitā. Avasāne pana khīṇāsavo dassitoti.

86. In the fifth, ujumaggānusārino means one who follows the straight path, and the straight path is called the Noble Path; it means one who remembers and practices it. Khayasmiṃ paṭhamaṃ ñāṇa means that the path knowledge arises first. The path is called khaya because it destroys the defilements; the knowledge associated with that is called khayasmiṃ ñāṇa. Tato aññā anantarā means that after that, immediately after the fourth path knowledge, aññā arises; it means the fruit of Arahatship arises. Aññāvimuttassā means one freed by the liberation of the fruit of Arahatship. Ñāṇaṃ ve hotī means there is knowledge of reviewing. Thus, in the sutta and in the verses, the seven trainees are spoken of. But at the end, the Khīṇāsava is shown.

6. Paṭhamasikkhāsuttavaṇṇanā
6. Paṭhama Sikkhā Sutta Commentary

87.Chaṭṭheattakāmāti attano hitakāmā.Yatthetaṃ sabbaṃ samodhānaṃ gacchatīti yāsu sikkhāsu sabbametaṃ diyaḍḍhasikkhāpadasataṃ saṅgahaṃ gacchati.Paripūrakārī hotīti samattakārī hoti.Mattaso kārīti pamāṇena kārako, sabbena sabbaṃ kātuṃ na sakkotīti attho.Khuddānukhuddakānīti cattāri pārājikāni ṭhapetvā sesasikkhāpadāni. Tatrāpi saṅghādisesaṃ khuddakaṃ, thullaccayaṃ anukhuddakaṃ nāma. Thullaccayañca khuddakaṃ, pācittiyaṃ anukhuddakaṃ nāma, pācittiyañca khuddakaṃ, pāṭidesaniyadukkaṭadubbhāsitāni anukhuddakāni nāma. Ime pana aṅguttaramahānikāyavaḷañjanakaācariyā ‘‘cattāri pārājikāni ṭhapetvā sesāni sabbānipi khuddānukhuddakānī’’ti vadanti.Tāni āpajjatipi vuṭṭhātipīti ettha pana khīṇāsavo tāva lokavajjaṃ nāpajjati, paṇṇattivajjameva āpajjati. Āpajjanto ca kāyenapi vācāyapi cittenapi āpajjati. Kāyena āpajjanto kuṭikārasahaseyyādīni āpajjati, vācāya āpajjanto sañcarittapadasodhammādīni, cittena āpajjanto rūpiyapaṭiggahaṇaṃ āpajjati. Sekkhesupi eseva nayo.Na hi mettha, bhikkhave, abhabbatā vuttāti, bhikkhave, na hi mayā ettha evarūpaṃ āpattiṃ āpajjane ca vuṭṭhāne ca ariyapuggalassa abhabbatā kathitā.Ādibrahmacariyakānīti maggabrahmacariyassa ādibhūtāni cattāri mahāsīlasikkhāpadāni.Brahmacariyasāruppānīti tāniyeva catumaggabrahmacariyassa sāruppāni anucchavikāni.Tatthāti tesu sikkhāpadesu.Dhuvasīloti nibaddhasīlo.Ṭhitasīloti patiṭṭhitasīlo.Sotāpannoti sotasaṅkhātena maggena phalaṃ āpanno.Avinipātadhammoti catūsu apāyesu apatanasabhāvo.Niyatoti sotāpattimagganiyāmena niyato.Sambodhiparāyaṇoti uparimaggattayasambodhiparāyaṇo.

87. In the sixth, attakāmā means desiring one's own welfare. Yatthetaṃ sabbaṃ samodhānaṃ gacchatī means in which trainings all this one hundred and fifty sikkhāpadas are included. Paripūrakārī hotī means one who completes the task. Mattaso kārī means one who acts with measure, meaning one cannot do everything completely. Khuddānukhuddakānī means the remaining sikkhāpadas excluding the four Pārājikas. Even there, Saṅghādisesa is called khuddaka, and Thullaccaya is called anukhuddaka. Thullaccaya is also khuddaka, and Pācittiya is called anukhuddaka; Pācittiya is also khuddaka, and Pāṭidesanīya, Dukkaṭa, and Dubbhāsita are called anukhuddaka. However, these teachers of the Aṅguttara and Mahānikāya Vaḷañjanaka say that "excluding the four Pārājikas, all the remaining ones are khuddānukhuddakānī." Tāni āpajjatipi vuṭṭhātipī means that a Khīṇāsava does not commit offenses against the world, but only offenses against the rules. And in committing an offense, one commits it by body, speech, or mind. Committing by body, one commits offenses such as building a hut, sharing a bed, etc.; committing by speech, one commits offenses such as itinerant speech or Sodhamma; committing by mind, one commits the offense of accepting gold and silver. The same method applies to the trainees. Na hi mettha, bhikkhave, abhabbatā vuttā means, "Monks, I have not spoken of the impossibility of an ariya individual committing such an offense and rising from it." Ādibrahmacariyakānī means the four mahāsīla sikkhāpadas, which are the beginning of the magga brahmacariya. Brahmacariyasāruppānī means those same four are suitable and appropriate for the fourfold magga brahmacariya. Tatthā means in those sikkhāpadas. Dhuvasīlo means one of constant morality. Ṭhitasīlo means one of established morality. Sotāpanno means one who has attained the fruit by the path called sota. Avinipātadhammo means one whose nature is not to fall into the four woeful states. Niyato means one who is assured by the assurance of the Sotāpatti path. Sambodhiparāyaṇo means one who is intent on the sambodhi of the three higher paths.

Tanuttāti tanubhāvo. Sakadāgāmino hi rāgādayo abbhapaṭalaṃ viya macchikāpattaṃ viya ca tanukā honti, na bahalā.Orambhāgiyānanti heṭṭhābhāgiyānaṃ.Saṃyojanānanti bandhanānaṃ.Parikkhayāti parikkhayena.Opapātiko hotīti uppannako hoti.Tattha parinibbāyīti heṭṭhā anotaritvā upariyeva parinibbānadhammo.Anāvattidhammoti yonigativasena anāgamanadhammo.

Tanuttā means thinness. For a Sakadāgāmī, rāga (lust) and the like are thin like a cloud cover or a fly's wing, not thick. Orambhāgiyāna means of the lower. Saṃyojanāna means of the fetters. Parikkhayā means by destruction. Opapātiko hotī means one who is born spontaneously. Tattha parinibbāyī means one who, without returning below, is destined to attain parinibbāna above. Anāvattidhammo means one whose nature is not to return in terms of rebirth.

Padesaṃ padesakārītiādīsu padesakārī puggalo nāma sotāpanno ca sakadāgāmī ca anāgāmī ca, so padesameva sampādeti. Paripūrakārī nāma arahā, so paripūrameva sampādeti.Avañjhānīti atucchāni saphalāni saudrayānīti attho. Idhāpi tisso sikkhā missakāva kathitā.

Padesaṃ padesakārī and so on, the individual who does a part is the Sotāpanna, the Sakadāgāmī, and the Anāgāmī; he accomplishes only a part. The one who completes is the Arahant; he accomplishes the whole. Avañjhānī means not empty, fruitful, having good results. Here, too, the three trainings are spoken of mixed together.

7. Dutiyasikkhāsuttavaṇṇanā
7. Dutiya Sikkhā Sutta Commentary

88.Sattamekolaṃkoloti kulā kulaṃ gamanako.Kulanti cettha bhavo adhippeto, tasmā ‘‘dve vā tīṇi vā kulānī’’ti etthapi dve vā tayo vā bhaveti attho veditabbo. Ayañhi dve vā bhave sandhāvati tayo vā, uttamakoṭiyā cha vā. Tasmā dve vā tīṇi vā cattāri vā pañca vā cha vāti evamettha vikappo daṭṭhabbo.Ekabījīti ekasseva bhavassa bījaṃ etassa atthīti ekabījī.Uddhaṃsototiādīsu atthi uddhaṃsoto akaniṭṭhagāmī, atthi uddhaṃsoto na akaniṭṭhagāmī, atthi na uddhaṃsoto akaniṭṭhagāmī, atthi na uddhaṃsoto na akaniṭṭhagāmī. Tattha yo idha anāgāmiphalaṃ patvā avihādīsu nibbatto tattha yāvatāyukaṃ ṭhatvā uparūpari nibbattitvā akaniṭṭhaṃ pāpuṇāti, ayaṃ uddhaṃsoto akaniṭṭhagāmī nāma. Yo pana avihādīsu nibbatto tattheva aparinibbāyitvā akaniṭṭhampi appatvā uparimabrahmaloke parinibbāyati, ayaṃ uddhaṃsoto na akaniṭṭhagāmī nāma. Yo ito cavitvā akaniṭṭheyeva nibbattati, ayaṃ na uddhaṃsoto akaniṭṭhagāmī nāma. Yo pana avihādīsu catūsu aññatarasmiṃ nibbattitvā tattheva parinibbāyati, ayaṃ na uddhaṃsoto na akaniṭṭhagāmī nāma.

88. In the seventh, kolaṃkolo means going from family to family. Here, kula means existence (bhava), therefore "two or three families" should be understood as "two or three existences." For he runs on to two or three existences, or at most six. Therefore, here, the alternatives should be seen as two, three, four, five, or six. Ekabījī means one who has the seed of only one existence. In Uddhaṃsoto and so on, there is one who is an uddhaṃsoto (one who goes upstream) and reaches Akaniṭṭha, one who is an uddhaṃsoto but does not reach Akaniṭṭha, one who is not an uddhaṃsoto but reaches Akaniṭṭha, and one who is not an uddhaṃsoto and does not reach Akaniṭṭha. Among these, one who attains the fruit of Anāgāmī here and is reborn in Aviha and, remaining there for his entire lifespan, is reborn higher and higher and reaches Akaniṭṭha, this one is called uddhaṃsoto akaniṭṭhagāmī. But one who is reborn in Aviha and, without attaining parinibbāna there, attains parinibbāna in the higher Brahmaloka without reaching Akaniṭṭha, this one is called uddhaṃsoto na akaniṭṭhagāmī. One who, having passed away from here, is reborn in Akaniṭṭha itself, this one is called na uddhaṃsoto akaniṭṭhagāmī. But one who is reborn in any one of the four Aviha and attains parinibbāna there itself, this one is called na uddhaṃsoto na akaniṭṭhagāmī.

sasaṅkhāraparinibbāyīnāma. Asaṅkhārena appayogena pattoasaṅkhāraparinibbāyīnāma. Yo pana kappasahassāyukesu avihesu nibbattitvā pañcamaṃ kappasataṃ atikkamitvā arahattaṃ patto, ayaṃupahaccaparinibbāyīnāma. Atappādīsupi eseva nayo.Antarāparinibbāyīti yo āyuvemajjhaṃ anatikkamitvā parinibbāyati, so tividho hoti. Kappasahassāyukesu tāva avihesu nibbattitvā eko nibbattadivaseyeva arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti. No ce nibbattadivase pāpuṇāti, paṭhamassa pana kappasatassa matthake pāpuṇāti, ayaṃ paṭhamo antarāparinibbāyī. Aparo evaṃ asakkonto dvinnaṃ kappasatānaṃ matthake pāpuṇāti, ayaṃ dutiyo. Aparo evampi asakkonto catunnaṃ kappasatānaṃ matthake pāpuṇāti, ayaṃ tatiyo antarāparinibbāyī. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.

sasaṅkhāraparinibbāyī means one who attains (parinibbāna) with effort. One who attains asaṅkhāraparinibbāyī means one who attains without effort, without exertion. But one who is reborn in Aviha, where the lifespan is thousands of kappas, and after exceeding five hundred kappas, attains Arahatship, this one is called upahaccaparinibbāyī. The same method applies to Atappa and so on. Antarāparinibbāyī means one who attains parinibbāna without exceeding the middle of his lifespan; he is of three kinds. Among those reborn in Aviha, where the lifespan is thousands of kappas, one attains Arahatship on the very day of his rebirth. If he does not attain it on the day of rebirth, but attains it at the end of the first hundred kappas, this is the first antarāparinibbāyī. Another, being unable to do so, attains it at the end of two hundred kappas; this is the second. Another, being unable to do even that, attains it at the end of four hundred kappas; this is the third antarāparinibbāyī. The rest is as said before.

catuvīsati sotāpannānāma. Tīsu pana vimokkhesu suññatavimokkhena sakadāgāmibhūmiṃ pattā catunnaṃ paṭipadānaṃ vasena cattāro sakadāgāmino, tathā animittavimokkhena pattā cattāro, appaṇihitavimokkhena pattā cattāroti imedvādasa sakadāgāmino. Avihesu pana tayo antarāparinibbāyino, eko upahaccaparinibbāyī, eko uddhaṃsoto akaniṭṭhagāmīti pañca anāgāmino, te asaṅkhāraparinibbāyino pañca, sasaṅkhāraparinibbāyino pañcāti dasa honti, tathā atappādīsu. Akaniṭṭhesu pana uddhaṃsoto natthi, tasmā tattha cattāro sasaṅkhāraparinibbāyī, cattāro asaṅkhāraparinibbāyīti aṭṭha, imeaṭṭhacattālīsa anāgāmino. Yathā pana sakadāgāmino, tathevaarahantopi dvādasaveditabbā. Idhāpi tisso sikkhā missikāva kathitā.

catuvīsati sotāpannā means twenty-four Sotāpannas. Among the three vimokkhas, those who attain the Sakadāgāmī plane by means of the suññatavimokkha are four Sakadāgāmīs based on the four paths; similarly, those who attain it by means of the animittavimokkha are four, and those who attain it by means of the appaṇihitavimokkha are four; these are dvādasa sakadāgāmino (twelve Sakadāgāmīs). In Aviha, there are three antarāparinibbāyīs, one upahaccaparinibbāyī, and one uddhaṃsoto akaniṭṭhagāmī, these five Anāgāmīs; five are asaṅkhāraparinibbāyīs, and five are sasaṅkhāraparinibbāyīs, making ten; similarly in Atappa and so on. In Akaniṭṭha, there is no uddhaṃsoto; therefore, there four are sasaṅkhāraparinibbāyīs, and four are asaṅkhāraparinibbāyīs, making eight; these are aṭṭhacattālīsa anāgāmino (forty-eight Anāgāmīs). Just as with the Sakadāgāmīs, arahantopi dvādasa veditabbā (twelve Arahants should be understood). Here, too, the three trainings are spoken of mixed together.

8. Tatiyasikkhāsuttavaṇṇanā
8. Tatiya Sikkhā Sutta Commentary

89.Aṭṭhametaṃ vā pana anabhisambhavaṃ appaṭivijjhanti taṃ arahattaṃ apāpuṇanto appaṭivijjhanto. Iminā nayena sabbaṭṭhānesu attho veditabbo. Idhāpi tisso sikkhā missikāva kathitā. Navamaṃ uttānatthameva. Idhāpi tisso sikkhā missikāva kathitā.

89. In the eighth, taṃ vā pana anabhisambhavaṃ appaṭivijjhaṃ means not attaining or penetrating that Arahatship. In this way, the meaning should be understood in all places. Here, too, the three trainings are spoken of mixed together. The ninth is straightforward in meaning. Here, too, the three trainings are spoken of mixed together.

10. Dutiyasikkhattayasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Dutiya Sikkhāttaya Sutta Commentary

91.Dasameāsavānaṃ khayāti ettha arahattamaggo adhipaññāsikkhā nāma. Phalaṃ pana sikkhitasikkhassa uppajjanato sikkhāti na vattabbaṃ.

91. In the tenth, āsavānaṃ khayā (through the destruction of the āsavas) refers to the path of Arahatship, which is called the training in higher wisdom (adhipaññāsikkhā). But the fruit, because it arises for one who has trained, should not be called a training.

Yathāpure tathā pacchāti yathā paṭhamaṃ tīsu sikkhāsu sikkhati, pacchā tatheva sikkhatīti attho. Dutiyapadepi eseva nayo.Yathā adho tathā uddhanti yathā heṭṭhimakāyaṃ asubhavasena passati, uparimakāyampi tatheva pharati. Dutiyapadepi eseva nayo.Yathā divā tathā rattinti yathā divā tisso sikkhā sikkhati, rattimpi tatheva sikkhatīti attho.Abhibhuyya disā sabbāti sabbā disā ārammaṇavasena abhibhavitvā.Appamāṇasamādhināti arahattamaggasamādhinā.

Yathā pure tathā pacchā means just as he trains in the three trainings at first, so he trains afterwards; this is the meaning. The same method applies to the second phrase. Yathā adho tathā uddhaṃ means just as he sees the lower body as impure, so he pervades the upper body in the same way. The same method applies to the second phrase. Yathā divā tathā ratti means just as he trains in the three trainings during the day, so he trains in the same way at night. Abhibhuyya disā sabbā means having overcome all directions in terms of objects. Appamāṇasamādhinā means by the samādhi of the path of Arahatship.

Sekkhanti sikkhamānaṃ sakaraṇīyaṃ.Paṭipadanti paṭipannakaṃ.Saṃsuddhacāriyanti saṃsuddhacaraṇaṃ parisuddhasīlaṃ.Sambuddhanti catusaccabuddhaṃ.Dhīraṃ paṭipadantagunti khandhadhīraāyatanadhīravasena dhīraṃ dhitisampannaṃ paṭipattiyā antaṃ gataṃ.Viññāṇassāti carimakaviññāṇassa.Taṇhākkhayavimuttinoti taṇhākkhayavimuttisaṅkhātāya arahattaphalavimuttiyā samannāgatassa.Pajjotasseva nibbānanti padīpanibbānaṃ viya.Vimokkho hoti cetasoti cittassa vimutti vimuccanā appavattibhāvo hoti. Taṇhākkhayavimuttino hi khīṇāsavassa carimakaviññāṇanirodhena parinibbānaṃ viya cetaso vimokkho hoti, na gataṭṭhānaṃ paññāyati, apaṇṇattikabhāvūpagamoyeva hotīti attho.

Sekkhaṃ means one who is training, having something to do. Paṭipadaṃ means one who is practicing. Saṃsuddhacāriyaṃ means one of purified conduct, of pure morality. Sambuddhaṃ means one who has awakened to the four truths. Dhīraṃ paṭipadantaguṃ means one who is wise in terms of the aggregates and the sense bases, accomplished in wisdom, one who has reached the end of practice. Viññāṇassā means of the final consciousness. Taṇhākkhayavimuttino means one who is endowed with the liberation of the destruction of craving, which is the liberation of the fruit of Arahatship. Pajjotasseva nibbānaṃ means like the extinguishing of a lamp. Vimokkho hoti cetaso means the liberation of the mind, the release, the state of non-occurrence; there is. For the Khīṇāsava who is liberated by the destruction of craving, with the cessation of his final consciousness, there is a liberation of the mind like parinibbāna; the place where it has gone is not known, it is only the approaching of a state of non-proliferation, this is the meaning.

11. Saṅkavāsuttavaṇṇanā
11. Saṅkavā Sutta Commentary

92.Ekādasamesaṅkavā nāma kosalānaṃ nigamotisaṅkavāti evaṃnāmako kosalaraṭṭhe nigamo.Āvāsikoti bhārahāro nave āvāse samuṭṭhāpeti, purāṇe paṭijaggati.Sikkhāpadapaṭisaṃyuttāyāti sikkhāsaṅkhātehi padehi paṭisaṃyuttāya, tīhi sikkhāhi samannāgatāyāti attho.Sandassetīti sammukhe viya katvā dasseti.Samādapetīti gaṇhāpeti.Samuttejetīti samussāheti.Sampahaṃsetīti paṭiladdhaguṇehi vaṇṇaṃ kathento vodāpeti.Adhisallikhateti ativiya sallikhati, ativiya sallikhitaṃ katvā saṇhaṃ saṇhaṃ kathetīti attho.

92. In the eleventh, saṅkavā nāma kosalānaṃ nigamo means Saṅkavā is the name of a town in the Kosala country. Āvāsiko means one who carries the burden, who establishes a new dwelling, and who maintains an old one. Sikkhāpadapaṭisaṃyuttāyā means connected with the sikkhāpadas, endowed with the three trainings. Sandassetī means shows as if making it face to face. Samādapetī means causes to grasp. Samuttejetī means encourages. Sampahaṃsetī means gladdens, describing the qualities attained. Adhisallikhate means carves exceedingly, he speaks softly and gently, having carved exceedingly.

Accayoti aparādho.Maṃ accagamāti maṃ atikkamma adhibhavitvā pavatto.Ahudeva akkhantīti ahosiyeva anadhivāsanā.Ahu appaccayoti ahosi atuṭṭhākāro.Paṭiggaṇhātūti khamatu.Āyatiṃ saṃvarāyāti anāgate saṃvaratthāya, puna evarūpassa aparādhassa dosassa khalitassa vā akaraṇatthāyāti attho.Tagghāti ekaṃsena.Yathādhammaṃ paṭikarosīti yathā dhammo ṭhito, tathā karosi, khamāpesīti vuttaṃ hoti.Taṃ te mayaṃ paṭiggaṇhāmāti taṃ tava aparādhaṃ mayaṃ khamāma.Vuddhihesā, kassapa, ariyassa vinayeti esā kassapa buddhassa bhagavato sāsane vuddhi nāma. Katamā? Yāyaṃ accayaṃ accayato disvā yathādhammaṃ paṭikaritvā āyatiṃ saṃvarāpajjanā. Desanaṃ pana puggalādhiṭṭhānaṃ karonto ‘‘yo accayaṃ accayato disvā yathādhammaṃ paṭikaroti, āyatiṃ saṃvaraṃ āpajjatī’’ti āha.Na sikkhākāmoti tisso sikkhā na kāmeti na pattheti na piheti.Sikkhāsamādānassāti sikkhāparipūraṇassa.Na vaṇṇavādīti guṇaṃ na katheti.Kālenāti yuttappayuttakālena. Sesamettha uttānatthamevāti.

Accayo means offense. Maṃ accagamā means he transgressed against me, overcame me, and behaved improperly. Ahudeva akkhantī means there was indeed no forbearance. Ahu appaccayo means there was a state of displeasure. Paṭiggaṇhātū means may he forgive. Āyatiṃ saṃvarāyā means for restraint in the future, meaning to prevent doing such an offense, fault, or misdeed again. Tagghā means certainly. Yathādhammaṃ paṭikarosī means you act according to the Dhamma, that is, you ask for forgiveness. Taṃ te mayaṃ paṭiggaṇhāmā means we forgive that offense of yours. Vuddhihesā, kassapa, ariyassa vinaye means this, Kassapa, is called growth in the discipline of the Noble One. Which one? Namely, seeing an offense as an offense, making amends according to the Dhamma, and undertaking restraint in the future. However, when giving the teaching with reference to a person, he said, "Whoever sees an offense as an offense, makes amends according to the Dhamma, and undertakes restraint in the future." Na sikkhākāmo means he does not desire, long for, or crave the three trainings. Sikkhāsamādānassā means the completion of the training. Na vaṇṇavādī means he does not speak of the qualities. Kālenā means at the appropriate and suitable time. The rest here is of obvious meaning.

(10) 5. Loṇakapallavaggo

(10) 5. The Loṇakapallava Chapter

1. Accāyikasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Explanation of the Accāyika Sutta

93.Pañcamassa paṭhameaccāyikānīti atipātikāni.Karaṇīyānīti avassakiccāni. Yañhi na avassaṃ kātabbaṃ, taṃ kiccanti vuccati. Avassaṃ kātabbaṃ karaṇīyaṃ nāma.Sīghaṃ sīghanti vegena vegena.Tassa kho tanti etthatanti nipātamattaṃ.Natthi sā iddhi vā ānubhāvo vāti sā vā iddhi so vā ānubhāvo natthi.Uttarasveti tatiyadivase.Utupariṇāminīti laddhautupariṇāmāni hutvā.Jāyantipīti tatiyadivase nikkhantasetaṅkurāni honti, sattāhe patte nīlaṅkurāni honti.Gabbhīnipi hontīti diyaḍḍhamāsaṃ patvā gahitagabbhāni honti.Paccantipīti tayo māse patvā paccanti. Idāni yasmā buddhānaṃ gahapatikena vā sassehi vā attho natthi, sāsane pana tappaṭirūpakaṃ puggalaṃ vā atthaṃ vā dassetuṃ taṃ taṃ opammaṃ āharanti. Tasmā yamatthaṃ dassetukāmena etaṃ ābhataṃ, taṃ dassentoevameva khotiādimāha. Taṃ atthato uttānameva. Sikkhā pana idhāpi missikā eva kathitā.

93.In the first of the fifth [chapter], accāyikānī means urgent. Karaṇīyānī means necessary duties. For what is not necessarily to be done is called a "duty." What must be done is called "necessary." Sīghaṃ sīghanti means quickly, quickly. Tassa kho tanti here, ta is merely a particle. Natthi sā iddhi vā ānubhāvo vāti means there is no such power or influence. Uttarasve means on the third day. Utupariṇāminī means having undergone seasonal transformation. Jāyantipī means on the third day, they produce white sprouts; when seven days have passed, they have blue sprouts. Gabbhīnipi hontī means having reached two and a half months, they become pregnant. Paccantipī means having reached three months, they ripen. Now, since Buddhas have no need of householders or crops, they bring forth this or that simile to show a person or matter that resembles it in the Teaching. Therefore, showing the meaning that he wishes to point out, he said, evameva kho and so on. That is obvious in meaning. But the training here is spoken of as mixed.

2. Pavivekasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Explanation of the Paviveka Sutta

94.Dutiyecīvarapavivekanti cīvaraṃ nissāya uppajjanakakilesehi vivittabhāvaṃ. Sesadvayepi eseva nayo.Sāṇānīti sāṇavākacelāni.Masāṇānīti missakacelāni.Chavadussānīti matasarīrato chaḍḍitavatthāni, erakatiṇādīni vā ganthetvā katanivāsanāni.Paṃsukūlānīti pathaviyaṃ chaḍḍitanantakāni.Tirīṭānīti rukkhatacavatthāni.Ajinānīti ajinamigacammāni.Ajinakkhipanti tadeva majjhe phālitaṃ, sahakhurakantipi vadanti.Kusacīranti kusatiṇāni ganthetvā katacīraṃ.Vākacīraphalakacīresupi eseva nayo.Kesakambalanti manussakesehi katakambalaṃ.Vālakambalanti assavālādīhi katakambalaṃ.Ulūkapakkhikanti ulūkapattāni ganthetvā katanivāsanaṃ.

94.In the second [sutta], cīvarapavivekanti means the state of being detached from the defilements that arise dependent on robes. The same method applies to the other two as well. Sāṇānī means robes made of hemp or bark. Masāṇānī means mixed robes. Chavadussānī means cloths discarded from corpses, or dwellings made by stringing together eraka grass, etc. Paṃsukūlānī means endless cloths discarded on the ground. Tirīṭānī means clothes made of tree bark. Ajinānī means deer skins. Ajinakkhipa means the same skin split in the middle; some say it means with hooves and claws. Kusacīra means a loincloth made by stringing together kusa grass. The same method applies to vākacīraphalakacīresu as well. Kesakambala means a blanket made of human hair. Vālakambala means a blanket made of horsehair, etc. Ulūkapakkhika means a dwelling made by stringing together owl feathers.

Sākabhakkhāti allasākabhakkhā.Sāmākabhakkhāti sāmākataṇḍulabhakkhā.Nīvārādīsunīvārānāma araññe sayaṃ jātavīhijāti.Daddulanti cammakārehi cammaṃ likhitvā chaḍḍitakasaṭaṃ.Haṭaṃvuccati silesopi sevālopi kaṇikārādirukkhaniyyāsopi.Kaṇanti kuṇḍakaṃ.Ācāmoti bhattaukkhalikāya laggo jhāmaodano. Taṃ chaḍḍitaṭṭhāne gahetvā khādanti, odanakañjiyantipi vadanti.Piññākādayo pākaṭāva.Pavattaphalabhojīti patitaphalabhojī.Bhusāgāranti khalasālaṃ.

Sākabhakkhā means eating fresh greens. Sāmākabhakkhā means eating sāmāka rice. Among nīvārā, nīvārā is a type of rice that grows wild in the forest. Daddula means the scrapings discarded by tanners after scraping leather. Haṭaṃ is said to be algae, moss, or resin from trees like the kanikara. Kaṇa means bran. Ācāmo means the scorched rice clinging to the bottom of the cooking pot. They take and eat it from the place where it was discarded; some say it means rice gruel. Piññākā and the others are well-known. Pavattaphalabhojī means eating fallen fruit. Bhusāgāra means a straw hut.

Sīlavāti catupārisuddhisīlena samannāgato.Dussīlyañcassa pahīnaṃ hotīti pañca dussīlyāni pahīnāni honti.Sammādiṭṭhikoti yāthāvadiṭṭhiko.Micchādiṭṭhīti ayāthāvadiṭṭhi.Āsavāti cattāro āsavā.Aggappattoti sīlaggappatto.Sārappattoti sīlasāraṃ patto.Suddhoti parisuddho.Sāre patiṭṭhitoti sīlasamādhipaññāsāre patiṭṭhito.

Sīlavā means endowed with the fourfold purity of morality. Dussīlyañcassa pahīnaṃ hotī means the five kinds of immorality are abandoned in him. Sammādiṭṭhiko means having right view. Micchādiṭṭhī means having wrong view. Āsavā means the four āsavas. Aggappatto means having attained the highest morality. Sārappatto means having attained the essence of morality. Suddho means pure. Sāre patiṭṭhito means established in the essence of morality, concentration, and wisdom.

Seyyathāpīti yathā nāma.Sampannanti paripuṇṇaṃ paripakkasālibharitaṃ.Saṅgharāpeyyāti saṅkaḍḍhāpeyya.Ubbahāpeyyāti khalaṭṭhānaṃ āharāpeyya.Bhusikanti bhusaṃ.Koṭṭāpeyyāti udukkhale pakkhipāpetvā musalehi paharāpeyya.Aggappattānīti taṇḍulaggaṃ pattāni.Sārappattādīsupi eseva nayo. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Yaṃ panettha ‘‘dussīlyañcassa pahīnaṃ micchādiṭṭhi cassa pahīnā’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ sotāpattimaggena pahīnabhāvaṃ sandhāya vuttanti veditabbaṃ.

Seyyathāpīti means just as. Sampannanti means complete, filled with fully ripe rice. Saṅgharāpeyyāti means having it gathered. Ubbahāpeyyāti means having it brought to the threshing floor. Bhusikanti means chaff. Koṭṭāpeyyāti means having it put into a mortar and beaten with pestles. Aggappattānīti means having attained the tip of the rice grains. The same method applies to sārappattā and the others as well. The rest is obvious. But what is said here, "his immorality is abandoned and his wrong view is abandoned," should be understood as referring to the abandoning achieved by the Stream-entry path.

3. Saradasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Explanation of the Sarada Sutta

95.Tatiyeviddheti valāhakavigamena dūrībhūte.Deveti ākāse.Abhivihaccāti abhivihanitvā.Yatoti yasmiṃ kāle.Virajanti rāgarajādirahitaṃ. Tesaṃyeva malānaṃ vigatattāvītamalaṃ. Dhammacakkhunti catusaccadhammapariggāhakaṃ sotāpattimaggacakkhuṃ.Natthi taṃ saṃyojananti duvidhamevassa saṃyojanaṃ natthi, itarampi pana puna imaṃ lokaṃ ānetuṃ asamatthatāya natthīti vuttaṃ. Imasmiṃ sutte jhānānāgāmī nāma kathitoti.

95.In the third [sutta], viddhe means with the clouds dispersed and far away. Deve means in the sky. Abhivihaccā means having moved through. Yato means at which time. Virajanti means devoid of the dust of passion, etc. Because those very impurities are gone, it is vītamalaṃ, without stain. Dhammacakkhunti means the Stream-entry path-eye, which comprehends the Four Noble Truths. Natthi taṃ saṃyojananti means he has no twofold fetter; however, the other [fetters] are also said to be non-existent because they are unable to bring him back to this world again. In this sutta, one is spoken of as a jhāna-anāgāmī.

4. Parisāsuttavaṇṇanā
4. Explanation of the Parisā Sutta

96.Catutthena bāhulikā hontīti paccayabāhullikā na honti.Na sāthalikāti tisso sikkhā sithilaṃ katvā na gaṇhanti.Okkamane nikkhittadhurāti okkamanaṃ vuccati avagamanaṭṭhena pañca nīvaraṇāni, tesu nikkhittadhurā.Paviveke pubbaṅgamāti kāyacittaupadhivivekasaṅkhāte tividhepi viveke pubbaṅgamā.Vīriyaṃ ārabhantīti duvidhampi vīriyaṃ paggaṇhanti.Appattassāti jhānavipassanāmaggaphalasaṅkhātassa appattavisesassa. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo.Pacchimājanatāti saddhivihārikaantevāsikādayo.Diṭṭhānugatiṃ āpajjatīti ācariyupajjhāyehi kataṃ anukaroti. Yaṃ tāya janatāya ācariyupajjhāyesu diṭṭhaṃ, tassa anugatiṃ āpajjati nāma.Ayaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, aggavatī parisāti, bhikkhave, ayaṃ parisā aggapuggalavatī nāma vuccati.

96.In the fourth [sutta], na bāhulikā hontīti means they do not indulge in an excess of requisites. Na sāthalikāti means they do not take the three trainings lightly. Okkamane nikkhittadhurāti okkamanaṃ is said to be the five hindrances in the sense of understanding; they have laid down the burden on those [hindrances]. Paviveke pubbaṅgamāti means they are foremost in all three kinds of seclusion, namely, bodily seclusion, mental seclusion, and seclusion from the basis [of existence]. Vīriyaṃ ārabhantīti means they exert both kinds of effort. Appattassāti means of the unattained distinction consisting of jhāna, insight, the paths, and the fruits. The same method applies to the other two phrases as well. Pacchimā janatāti means co-residents, disciples, etc. Diṭṭhānugatiṃ āpajjatīti means she imitates what is done by the teacher and preceptor. She follows what is seen by that community in the teachers and preceptors. Ayaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, aggavatī parisāti, O monks, this assembly is said to possess the highest person.

Bhaṇḍanajātāti jātabhaṇḍanā.Kalahajātāti jātakalahā. Bhaṇḍananti cettha kalahassa pubbabhāgo, hatthaparāmāsādivasena vītikkamo kalaho nāma.Vivādāpannāti viruddhavādaṃ āpannā.Mukhasattīhīti guṇavijjhanaṭṭhena pharusā vācā ‘‘mukhasattiyo’’ti vuccanti, tāhi mukhasattīhi.Vitudantā viharantīti vijjhantā vicaranti.

Bhaṇḍanajātā means those who are prone to quarreling. Kalahajātā means those who are prone to strife. Here, quarreling is the precursor to strife, and transgression in the form of physical contact is called strife. Vivādāpannā means those who are subject to contradictory arguments. Mukhasattīhī means harsh words in the sense of piercing qualities are called "mouth-daggers"; with those mouth-daggers. Vitudantā viharantī means they wander about piercing [others].

Samaggāti sahitā.Sammodamānāti samappavattamodā.Khīrodakībhūtāti khīrodakaṃ viya bhūtā.Piyacakkhūhīti upasantehi mettacakkhūhi.Pīti jāyatīti pañcavaṇṇā pīti uppajjati.Kāyo passambhatīti nāmakāyopi rūpakāyopi vigatadaratho hoti.Passaddhakāyoti asāraddhakāyo.Sukhaṃ vediyatīti kāyikacetasikasukhaṃ vediyati.Samādhiyatīti ārammaṇe sammā ṭhapīyati.

Samaggā means united. Sammodamānā means rejoicing together. Khīrodakībhūtā means become like milk and water. Piyacakkhūhī means with peaceful, loving eyes. Pīti jāyatī means five kinds of joy arise. Kāyo passambhatī means both the mind-body and the form-body become free from agitation. Passaddhakāyo means having a calmed body. Sukhaṃ vediyatī means he experiences physical and mental pleasure. Samādhiyatī means it is properly established on the object.

Thullaphusitaketi mahāphusitake.Pabbatakandarapadarasākhāti etthakandaronāma ‘‘ka’’nti laddhanāmena udakena dārito udakabhinno pabbatappadeso, yo ‘‘nitambho’’tipi ‘‘nadikuñjo’’tipi vuccati.Padaraṃnāma aṭṭha māse deve avassante phalito bhūmippadeso.Sākhāti kusobbhagāminiyo khuddakamātikāyo.Kusobbhāti khuddakaāvāṭā.Mahāsobbhāti mahāāvāṭā.Kunnadiyoti khuddakanadiyo.Mahānadiyoti gaṅgāyamunādikā mahāsaritā.

Thullaphusitake means in a great downpour. Pabbatakandarapadarasākhā means here, kandaro means a mountain region that has been split by water, carved out by water with the name "ka" obtained, which is also called "slope" or "river grove." Padaraṃ means a ground area that bears fruit when the gods cause rain for eight months. Sākhā means small waterways that flow to the small puddles. Kusobbhā means small puddles. Mahāsobbhā means large puddles. Kunnadiyo means small rivers. Mahānadiyo means great rivers such as the Ganges and Yamuna.

5-7. Paṭhamaājānīyasuttādivaṇṇanā
5-7. Explanation of the First Ājānīya Sutta, etc.

97-99.Pañcameaṅgehīti guṇaṅgehi.Rājārahoti rañño araho anucchaviko.Rājabhoggoti rañño upabhogabhūto.Rañño aṅganti rañño hatthapādādiaṅgasamatāya aṅganteva saṅkhaṃ gacchati.Vaṇṇasampannoti sarīravaṇṇena sampanno.Balasampannoti kāyabalena sampanno.Āhuneyyoti āhutisaṅkhātaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ paṭiggahetuṃ yutto.Pāhuneyyoti pāhunakabhattassa anucchaviko.Dakkhiṇeyyoti dasavidhadānavatthupariccāgavasena saddhādānasaṅkhātāya dakkhiṇāya anucchaviko.Añjalikaraṇīyoti añjalipaggahaṇassa anucchaviko.Anuttaraṃ puññakkhettaṃ lokassāti sabbalokassa asadisaṃ puññaviruhanaṭṭhānaṃ.

97-99.In the fifth [sutta], aṅgehī means with the qualities. Rājāraho means worthy of a king, befitting a king. Rājabhoggo means something to be enjoyed by a king. Rañño aṅga means it goes to the reckoning of "limb" as if it were a limb such as the hands and feet of the king. Vaṇṇasampanno means endowed with bodily complexion. Balasampanno means endowed with bodily strength. Āhuneyyo means fit to receive alms given as an offering. Pāhuneyyo means befitting of hospitality gifts. Dakkhiṇeyyo means befitting of offerings given with faith in the way of relinquishing the ten kinds of objects of giving. Añjalikaraṇīyo means befitting of the gesture of reverence. Anuttaraṃ puññakkhettaṃ lokassā means an unsurpassed field of merit for the entire world.

Vaṇṇasampannoti guṇavaṇṇena sampanno.Balasampannoti vīriyabalena sampanno.Javasampannoti ñāṇajavena sampanno.Thāmavāti ñāṇathāmena samannāgato.Daḷhaparakkamoti thiraparakkamo.Anikkhittadhuroti aṭṭhapitadhuro paggahitadhuro, aggaphalaṃ arahattaṃ appatvā vīriyadhuraṃ na nikkhipissāmīti evaṃ paṭipanno. Imasmiṃ sutte catusaccavasena sotāpattimaggo, sotāpattimaggena ca ñāṇajavasampannatā kathitāti. Chaṭṭhe tīṇi ca maggāni tīṇi ca phalāni, tīhi maggaphalehi ca ñāṇajavasampannatā kathitā. Sattame arahattaphalaṃ, arahattaphaleneva ca maggakiccaṃ kathitaṃ. Phalaṃ pana javitajavena uppajjanato javoti ca vattuṃ vaṭṭati.

Vaṇṇasampanno means endowed with the quality of virtue. Balasampanno means endowed with the strength of effort. Javasampanno means endowed with the swiftness of knowledge. Thāmavā means possessed of the power of knowledge. Daḷhaparakkamo means firm in exertion. Anikkhittadhuro means one who has not laid down the burden, one who has taken up the burden, one who has resolved thus: "I will not lay down the burden of effort until I have attained the highest fruit, arahatship." In this sutta, the Stream-entry path is spoken of in terms of the Four Noble Truths, and the endowment with swiftness of knowledge is spoken of in terms of the Stream-entry path. In the sixth [sutta], the three paths and the three fruits, and the endowment with swiftness of knowledge are spoken of in terms of the three paths and fruits. In the seventh [sutta], the fruit of arahatship, and the task of the path is spoken of only in terms of the fruit of arahatship. However, the fruit may be said to be swift because it arises with swift speed.

8. Potthakasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Explanation of the Potthaka Sutta

100.Aṭṭhamenavoti karaṇaṃ upādāya vuccati.Potthakoti vākamayavatthaṃ.Majjhimoti paribhogamajjhimo.Jiṇṇoti paribhogajiṇṇo.Ukkhaliparimajjananti ukkhaliparipuñchanaṃdussīloti nissīlo.Dubbaṇṇatāyāti guṇavaṇṇābhāvena dubbaṇṇatāya.Diṭṭhānugatiṃ āpajjantīti tena kataṃ anukaronti.Na mahapphalaṃ hotīti vipākaphalena mahapphalaṃ na hoti.Na mahānisaṃsanti vipākānisaṃseneva na mahānisaṃsaṃ.Appagghatāyāti vipākagghena appagghatāya.Kāsikaṃ vatthanti tīhi kappāsaaṃsūhi suttaṃ kantitvā katavatthaṃ, tañca kho kāsiraṭṭheyeva uṭṭhitaṃ. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Sīlaṃ panettha missakaṃ kathitanti.

100.In the eighth [sutta], navo means new with respect to being made. Potthako means a garment made of bark fiber. Majjhimo means medium in use. Jiṇṇo means old in use. Ukkhaliparimajjana means wiping out the cooking pot. dussīlo means immoral. Dubbaṇṇatāyā means due to the ugliness caused by the lack of virtuous qualities. Diṭṭhānugatiṃ āpajjantī means they imitate what has been done by him. Na mahapphalaṃ hotī means it is not of great fruit in terms of resultant fruit. Na mahānisaṃsanti means it is not of great benefit in terms of resultant benefit. Appagghatāyā means due to being of little worth in terms of the value of the result. Kāsikaṃ vatthanti means cloth woven by spinning thread from three kinds of cotton fibers, and that which has arisen only in the Kasi country. The rest is obvious. Morality is spoken of as mixed here.

9. Loṇakapallasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Explanation of the Loṇakapallava Sutta

101.Navameyathā yathāyanti yathā yathā ayaṃ.Tathā tathā tanti tathā tathā taṃ kammaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yo evaṃ vadeyya – ‘‘yathā yathā kammaṃ karoti, tathā tathāssa vipākaṃ paṭisaṃvediyateva. Na hi sakkā katassa kammassa vipākaṃ paṭisedhetuṃ. Tasmā yattakaṃ kammaṃ karoti, tattakassa vipākaṃ paṭisaṃvediyatevā’’ti.Evaṃ santanti evaṃ sante.Brahmacariyavāso na hotīti yaṃ maggabhāvanato pubbe upapajjavedanīyaṃ kammaṃ kataṃ, tassa avassaṃ paṭisaṃvedanīyattā brahmacariyaṃ vutthampi avutthameva hoti.Okāso na paññāyati sammā dukkhassa antakiriyāyāti yasmā ca evaṃ sante tena kammāyūhanañceva vipākānubhavanā ca hoti, tasmā hetunā nayena vaṭṭadukkhassa antakiriyāya okāso na paññāyati nāma.

101.In the ninth [sutta], yathā yathāyanti means in whatever way this one. Tathā tathā tanti means in that way that action. This is what is said: one who would say, "In whatever way one does an action, in that way one certainly experiences its result. It is not possible to prevent the result of an action that has been done. Therefore, however much action one does, one certainly experiences the result of that much action." Evaṃ santanti means if that is so. Brahmacariyavāso na hotīti means the holy life, even if lived, is as if not lived, because the karma done before the path-cultivation that is due to be experienced in the next life must certainly be experienced. Okāso na paññāyati sammā dukkhassa antakiriyāyāti means since in such a case there is both the accumulation of karma and the experience of its result, therefore, by that cause and by that reasoning, no opportunity is seen for making an end to the round of suffering.

Yathā yathā vedanīyanti yena yenākārena veditabbaṃ.Tathātathāssa vipākaṃ paṭisaṃvediyatīti tena tenākārena assa vipākaṃ paccanubhoti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yadetaṃ sattasu javanesu paṭhamajavanakammaṃ sati paccaye vipākavāraṃ labhantameva diṭṭhadhammavedanīyaṃ hoti, asati ahosikammaṃ nāma. Yañca sattamajavanakammaṃ sati paccaye upapajjavedanīyaṃ hoti, asati ahosikammaṃ nāma. Yañca majjhe pañcajavanakammaṃ yāva saṃsārappavatti, tāva aparapariyāyavedanīyaṃ nāma hoti. Etesu ākāresu yena yenākārena veditabbaṃ kammaṃ ayaṃ puriso karoti, tena tenevassa vipākaṃ paṭisaṃvediyati nāma. Aṭṭhakathāyañhi laddhavipākavārameva kammaṃ yathāvedanīyaṃ kammaṃ nāmāti vuttaṃ.Evaṃ santaṃ, bhikkhave, brahmacariyavāso hotīti kammakkhayakarassa brahmacariyassa khepetabbakammasambhavato vāso nāma hoti, vutthaṃ suvutthameva hotīti attho.Okāso paññāyati sammā dukkhassa antakiriyāyāti yasmā evaṃ sante tena tena maggena abhisaṅkhāraviññāṇassa nirodhena tesu tesu bhavesu āyatiṃ vaṭṭadukkhaṃ na uppajjati, tasmā okāso paññāyati sammā dukkhassa antakiriyāya.

Yathā yathā vedanīyaṃ means in whatever way it is to be experienced. Tathā tathāssa vipākaṃ paṭisaṃvediyatīti means in that very way, he experiences its result. The meaning here is that among the seven javanas, the first javanakamma, if it gets the opportunity to ripen with the presence of conditions, is called diṭṭhadhammavedanīya; if not, it is called ahosikamma. And the seventh javanakamma, if it gets the opportunity to ripen in the next life with the presence of conditions, is called upapajjavedanīya; if not, it is called ahosikamma. And the five javanakammas in between are called aparāpariyāvedanīya as long as the cycle of existence continues. Among these forms, in whatever way this person performs the kamma that is to be experienced, in that very way he experiences its result. For it is said in the commentary that only the kamma that has obtained the opportunity to ripen is called yathāvedanīya kamma. Evaṃ santaṃ, bhikkhave, brahmacariyavāso hotīti means the dwelling of the brahmacariya, which destroys kamma, exists because of the possibility of destroying kamma; the dwelling is well-dwelt, this is the meaning. Okāso paññāyati sammā dukkhassa antakiriyāyāti because when it is like this, due to the cessation of the intention-consciousness (abhisaṅkhāraviññāṇa) through those paths, cyclical suffering does not arise again in those existences, therefore, an opportunity is seen for the right ending of suffering.

idha, bhikkhave, ekaccassātiādimāha. Tatthaappamattakanti parittaṃ thokaṃ mandaṃ lāmakaṃ.Tādisaṃyevāti taṃsarikkhakameva.Diṭṭhadhammavedanīyanti tasmiṃ kammeyeva diṭṭhadhamme vipaccitabbaṃ vipākavāraṃ labhantaṃ diṭṭhadhammavedanīyaṃ hoti.Nāṇupi khāyatīti dutiye attabhāve aṇupi na khāyati, aṇumattampi dutiye attabhāve vipākaṃ na detīti attho.Bahudevāti bahukaṃ pana vipākaṃ kimeva dassatīti adhippāyo.Abhāvitakāyotiādīhi kāyabhāvanārahito vaṭṭagāmī puthujjano dassito.Parittoti parittaguṇo.Appātumoti ātumā vuccati attabhāvo, tasmiṃ mahantepi guṇaparittatāya appātumoyeva.Appadukkhavihārīti appakenapi pāpena dukkhavihārī.Bhāvitakāyotiādīhi khīṇāsavo dassito. So hi kāyānupassanāsaṅkhātāya kāyabhāvanāya bhāvitakāyo nāma. Kāyassa vā vaḍḍhitattā bhāvitakāyo.Bhāvitasīloti vaḍḍhitasīlo. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo. Pañcadvārabhāvanāya vā bhāvitakāyo. Etena indriyasaṃvarasīlaṃ vuttaṃ, bhāvitasīloti iminā sesāni tīṇi sīlāni.Aparittoti na parittaguṇo.Mahattoti attabhāve parittepi guṇamahantatāya mahatto.Appamāṇavihārīti khīṇāsavassetaṃ nāmameva. So hi pamāṇakarānaṃ rāgādīnaṃ abhāvena appamāṇavihārī nāma.

He said, starting with idha, bhikkhave, ekaccassāti. Among them, appamattakanti means little, small, meager, inferior. Tādisaṃyevāti means exactly like that. Diṭṭhadhammavedanīyanti means the diṭṭhadhammavedanīya that ripens in this very life in that kamma, obtaining the opportunity to ripen. Nāṇupi khāyatīti means it does not appear even a bit in the second existence, meaning it does not give result even to a small extent in the second existence. Bahudevāti means but what will it give as a great deal of result? This is the intention. Abhāvitakāyoti and so on, shows the worldling who is without the cultivation of the body and goes to the cycle of existence. Parittoti means of limited qualities. Appātumoti ātumā means existence (attabhāvo); even in that great existence, he is only of small ātumā because of the limitation of qualities. Appadukkhavihārīti means he dwells in suffering even with a little evil. Bhāvitakāyoti and so on, shows the arahant. For he is called bhāvitakāyo by the cultivation of the body, which is called contemplation of the body (kāyānupassanā). Or, because the body is developed, he is bhāvitakāyo. Bhāvitasīloti means developed in virtue. This same method applies to the remaining two terms as well. Or, he is bhāvitakāyo by the cultivation of the five doors. By this, the virtue of sense restraint (indriyasaṃvarasīla) is mentioned; by bhāvitasīlo, the remaining three virtues. Aparittoti means not of limited qualities. Mahattoti means great because of the greatness of qualities even in a limited existence. Appamāṇavihārīti this is just a name for the arahant. For he is called appamāṇavihārī due to the absence of passions and so on that make measurements.

Paritteti khuddake.Udakamallaketi udakasarāve.Orabbhikoti urabbhasāmiko.Urabbhaghātakoti sūnakāro.Jāpetuṃ vāti dhanajāniyā jāpetuṃ. Jhāpetuntipi pāṭho, ayamevattho.Yathāpaccayaṃ vā kātunti yathā icchati, tathā kātuṃ.Urabbhadhananti eḷakaagghanakamūlaṃ. So panassa sace icchati, deti. No ce icchati, gīvāyaṃ gahetvā nikkaḍḍhāpeti. Sesaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Imasmiṃ pana sutte vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ kathitanti.

Paritteti means small. Udakamallaketi means in a water pot. Orabbhikoti means owner of goats. Urabbhaghātakoti means butcher of goats. Jāpetuṃ vāti means to make it known to the relatives. There is also a reading as jhāpetunti, the meaning is the same. Yathāpaccayaṃ vā kātunti means to do as he wishes. Urabbhadhananti means the price of goats. But if he wants, he gives it. If he doesn’t want, he drags it away by the neck. The rest should be understood in the same way as stated before. In this sutta, the cycle of existence and liberation from it are discussed.

10. Paṃsudhovakasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Paṃsudhovakasuttavaṇṇanā

102.Dasamedhovatīti vikkhāleti.Sandhovatīti suṭṭhu dhovati, punappunaṃ dhovati.Niddhovatīti niggaṇhitvā dhovati.Aniddhantakasāvanti anīhatadosaṃ anapanītakasāvaṃ.Pabhaṅgūti pabhijjanasabhāvaṃ, adhikaraṇīyaṃ ṭhapetvā muṭṭhikāya pahaṭamattaṃ bhijjati.Paṭṭikāyāti suvaṇṇapaṭṭakāya.Gīveyyaketi gīvālaṅkāre.

102.In the tenth, dhovatīti means washes. Sandhovatīti means washes well, washes repeatedly. Niddhovatīti means washes thoroughly. Aniddhantakasāvaṃnti means unremoved impurity, unremoved astringency. Pabhaṅgūti means having a nature of breaking, it breaks as soon as it is struck with a fist after placing it on a surface. Paṭṭikāyāti means on a golden plate. Gīveyyaketi means a necklace.

Adhicittanti samathavipassanācittaṃ.Anuyuttassāti bhāventassa.Sacetasoti cittasampanno.Dabbajātikoti paṇḍitajātiko.Kāmavitakkādīsu kāme ārabbha uppanno vitakko kāmavitakko. Byāpādavihiṃsasampayuttā vitakkā byāpādavihiṃsavitakkā nāma. Ñātivitakkādīsu ‘‘amhākaṃ ñātakā bahū puññavantā’’tiādinā nayena ñātake ārabbha uppanno vitakkoñātivitakko. ‘‘Asuko janapado khemo subhikkho’’tiādinā nayena janapadamārabbha uppanno vitakkojanapadavitakko. ‘‘Aho vata maṃ pare na avajāneyyu’’nti evaṃ uppanno vitakkoanavaññattipaṭisaṃyutto vitakkonāma.Dhammavitakkāvasissantīti dhammavitakkā nāma dasavipassanupakkilesavitakkā.So hoti samādhi na ceva santoti so avasiṭṭhadhammavitakko vipassanāsamādhi avūpasantakilesattā santo na hoti.Na paṇītoti na atappako.Nappaṭippassaddhiladdhoti na kilesapaṭippassaddhiyā laddho.Na ekodibhāvādhigatoti na ekaggabhāvappatto.Sasaṅkhāraniggayhavāritagatoti sasaṅkhārena sappayogena kilese niggaṇhitvā vāretvā vārito, na kilesānaṃ chinnante uppanno, kilese pana vāretvā uppanno.

Adhicittanti means concentration and insight consciousness. Anuyuttassāti means cultivating. Sacetasoti means mindful. Dabbajātikoti means of wise nature. Among kāmavitakkā and so on, thought that arises concerning sensual pleasures is kāmavitakko. Thoughts associated with ill-will and cruelty are called byāpādavihiṃsavitakkā. Among ñātivitakkā and so on, the thought that arises concerning relatives in the way, "Our relatives are many and meritorious," is ñātivitakko. The thought that arises concerning a country in the way, "Such and such country is safe and prosperous," is janapadavitakko. The thought that arises in the way, "Oh, that others may not despise me," is called anavaññattipaṭisaṃyutto vitakko. Dhammavitakkāvasissantīti means the thoughts of the Dhamma are the ten thoughts that are defilements of insight (vipassanupakkilesavitakkā). So hoti samādhi na ceva santoti means that remaining thought of the Dhamma, the insight concentration (vipassanāsamādhi) is not peaceful because the defilements are not calmed. Na paṇītoti means not subtle. Nappaṭippassaddhiladdhoti means not obtained by the subsiding of defilements. Na ekodibhāvādhigatoti means not attained one-pointedness. Sasaṅkhāraniggayhavāritagatoti means suppressed or warded off the defilements with effort and application; it is not produced at the end of the destruction of defilements, but it is produced after warding off the defilements.

Hotiso, bhikkhave, samayoti ettha samayo nāma utusappāyaṃ āhārasappāyaṃ senāsanasappāyaṃ puggalasappāyaṃ dhammassavanasappāyanti imesaṃ pañcannaṃ sappāyānaṃ paṭilābhakālo.Yaṃ taṃ cittanti yasmiṃ samaye taṃ vipassanācittaṃ.Ajjhattaṃyeva santiṭṭhatīti attaniyeva tiṭṭhati. Niyakajjhattañhi idha ajjhattaṃ nāma. Gocarajjhattampi vaṭṭati. Puthuttārammaṇaṃ pahāya ekasmiṃ nibbānagocareyeva tiṭṭhatīti vuttaṃ hoti.Sannisīdatīti suṭṭhu nisīdati.Ekodi hotīti ekaggaṃ hoti.Samādhiyatīti sammā ādhiyati.Santotiādīsu paccanīkakilesavūpasamenasanto. Atappakaṭṭhenapaṇīto. Kilesapaṭippassaddhiyā laddhattāpaṭippassaddhaladdho. Ekaggabhāvaṃ gatattāekodibhāvādhigato. Kilesānaṃ chinnante uppannattā na sappayogena kilese niggaṇhitvā vāretvā vāritotina sasaṅkhāraniggayhavāritagato. Ettāvatā ayaṃ bhikkhu vivaṭṭetvā arahattaṃ patto nāma hoti.

Hoti so, bhikkhave, samayoti here, samayo means the time of obtaining these five suitability factors: suitable season, suitable food, suitable dwelling, suitable person, and suitable hearing of the Dhamma. Yaṃ taṃ cittanti means at which time that insight consciousness. Ajjhattaṃyeva santiṭṭhatīti means it stands within oneself. For here, one’s own inside is called ajjhattaṃ. The object inside is also acceptable. It means, abandoning diverse objects, it stands only in one object, which is Nibbāna. Sannisīdatīti means sits well. Ekodi hotīti means becomes one-pointed. Samādhiyatīti means becomes concentrated. Among Santoti and so on, santo because of the calming of opposing defilements. Paṇīto due to the state of being subtle. Paṭippassaddhaladdho because of being obtained by the subsiding of defilements. Ekodibhāvādhigato because of attaining one-pointedness. Na sasaṅkhāraniggayhavāritagato because it is produced at the end of the destruction of defilements, not suppressing or warding off the defilements with effort and application. Up to this point, this bhikkhu has liberated and attained arahantship.

yassa yassa cātiādimāha. Tatthaabhiññā sacchikaraṇīyassāti abhijānitvā paccakkhaṃ kātabbassa.Sati satiāyataneti pubbahetusaṅkhāte ceva idāni ca paṭiladdhabbe abhiññāpādakajjhānādibhede ca sati satikāraṇe. Vitthārato pana ayaṃ abhiññākathā visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 2.365 ādayo) vuttanayeneva veditabbā.Āsavānaṃ khayātiādi cettha phalasamāpattivasena vuttanti veditabbaṃ.

He said, starting with yassa yassa cāti. There, abhiññā sacchikaraṇīyassāti means for what should be directly experienced by knowing. Sati satiāyataneti means when there is the cause, both in the past, which is called the previous cause, and in the present that should be attained, which is of the nature of the basis for the higher knowledges (abhiññā), such as jhāna. But this talk about the higher knowledges in detail should be understood in the same way as stated in the Visuddhimagga (Visuddhi. 2.365 onwards). Āsavānaṃ khayāti and so on here should be understood as stated in terms of the attainment of fruition (phalasamāpatti).

11. Nimittasuttavaṇṇanā
11. Nimittasuttavaṇṇanā

103.Ekādasamepiadhicittaṃsamathavipassanācittameva.Tīṇi nimittānīti tīṇi kāraṇāni.Kālena kālanti kāle kāle, yuttakāleti attho.Kālena kālaṃ samādhinimittaṃ manasikātabbantiādīsu taṃ taṃ kālaṃ sallakkhetvā ekaggatāya yuttakāle ekaggatā manasikātabbā. Ekaggatā hi idha samādhinimittanti vuttā. Tatra vacanattho – samādhiyeva nimittaṃ samādhinimittaṃ. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo.Paggahoti pana vīriyassa nāmaṃ,upekkhāti majjhattabhāvassa. Tasmā vīriyassa yuttakāle vīriyaṃ manasikātabbaṃ, majjhattabhāvassa yuttakāle majjhattabhāve ṭhātabbanti.Ṭhānaṃ taṃ cittaṃ kosajjāya saṃvatteyyāti kāraṇaṃ vijjati yena taṃ cittaṃ kosajjabhāve tiṭṭheyya. Itaresupi eseva nayo.Upekkhānimittaṃyeva manasi kareyyāti ettha ca ñāṇajavaṃ upekkheyyāti ayamattho.Āsavānaṃ khayāyāti arahattaphalatthāya.

103.Also in the eleventh, adhicittaṃ means concentration and insight consciousness itself. Tīṇi nimittānīti means three causes. Kālena kālanti means at the right time, at a suitable time, this is the meaning. Among Kālena kālaṃ samādhinimittaṃ manasikātabbanti and so on, after considering that time, at a suitable time for one-pointedness, one-pointedness should be attended to. For here, one-pointedness is called samādhinimitta. Here is the meaning of the word: concentration itself is the cause, thus samādhinimitta. This same method applies to the remaining two terms as well. But paggahoti is a name for effort (vīriya), upekkhāti is for the state of equanimity. Therefore, at a suitable time for effort, effort should be attended to; at a suitable time for equanimity, one should remain in equanimity. Ṭhānaṃ taṃ cittaṃ kosajjāya saṃvatteyyāti means the reason exists by which that consciousness might remain in a state of laziness. This same method applies to the others as well. Upekkhānimittaṃyeva manasi kareyyāti and here, the meaning is that one should disregard the swiftness of knowledge (ñāṇajavaṃ).

Ukkaṃ bandheyyāti aṅgārakapallaṃ sajjeyya.Ālimpeyyāti tattha aṅgāre pakkhipitvā aggiṃ datvā nāḷikāya dhamanto aggiṃ gāhāpeyya.Ukkāmukhe pakkhipeyyāti aṅgāre viyūhitvā aṅgāramatthake vā ṭhapeyya, mūsāya vā pakkhipeyya.Ajjhupekkhatīti pakkāpakkabhāvaṃ upadhāreti.

Ukkaṃ bandheyyāti means fix a lump of charcoal. Ālimpeyyāti means after putting the coals in there, lighting a fire and fanning with a pipe, one would make the fire catch. Ukkāmukhe pakkhipeyyāti means after scattering the coals, one would place it on top of the coals or put it in a crucible. Ajjhupekkhatīti means observes whether it is cooked or not.

Sammā samādhiyati āsavānaṃ khayāyāti arahattaphalatthāya sammā ṭhapīyati. Ettāvatā hi vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā arahattappatto bhikkhu dassito. Idāni tassa khīṇāsavassa abhiññāya paṭipadaṃ dassentoyassa yassa cātiādimāha. Taṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.

Sammā samādhiyati āsavānaṃ khayāyāti means it is rightly established for the sake of the destruction of the āsavas, for the sake of arahantship. Up to this point, the bhikkhu who has attained arahantship by developing insight has been shown. Now, showing the path for the higher knowledges for that arahant, he said, starting with yassa yassa cāti. That should be understood in the same way as stated earlier.

3. Tatiyapaṇṇāsakaṃ

3. Tatiyapaṇṇāsakaṃ

(11) 1. Sambodhavaggo

(11) 1. Sambodhavaggo

1. Pubbevasambodhasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Pubbevasambodhasuttavaṇṇanā

104.Tatiyassa paṭhamepubbeva sambodhāti sambodhito pubbeva, ariyamaggappattito aparabhāgeyevāti vuttaṃ hoti.Anabhisambuddhassāti appaṭividdhacatusaccassa.Bodhisattasseva satoti bujjhanakasattasseva sato, sammāsambodhiṃ adhigantuṃ ārabhantasseva sato, sambodhiyā vā sattasseva laggasseva sato. Dīpaṅkarassa hi bhagavato pādamūle aṭṭhadhammasamodhānena abhinīhārasamiddhito pabhuti tathāgato sammāsambodhiṃ satto laggo ‘‘pattabbā mayā esā’’ti tadadhigamāya parakkamaṃ amuñcantoyeva āgato, tasmā bodhisattoti vuccati.Ko nu khoti katamo nu kho.Lokoti saṅkhāraloko.Assādoti madhurākāro.Ādīnavoti anabhinanditabbākāro.Tassa mayhanti tassa evaṃ bodhisattasseva sato mayhaṃ.Chandarāgavinayo chandarāgappahānanti nibbānaṃ āgamma ārabbha paṭicca chandarāgo vinayaṃ gacchati pahīyati, tasmā nibbānaṃ ‘‘chandarāgavinayo chandarāgappahāna’’nti vuccati.Idaṃ lokanissaraṇanti idaṃ nibbānaṃ lokato nissaṭattā lokanissaraṇanti vuccati.Yāvakīvanti yattakaṃ pamāṇaṃ kālaṃ.Abbhaññāsinti abhivisiṭṭhena ariyamaggañāṇena aññāsiṃ.Ñāṇañca pana me dassananti dvīhipi padehi paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ vuttaṃ. Sesamettha uttānamevāti.

104.In the first of the third, pubbeva sambodhāti means even before awakening, only in the latter part before the attainment of the Noble Path, this is what is said. Anabhisambuddhassāti means for one who has not penetrated the Four Noble Truths. Bodhisattasseva satoti means for one who is a being intending to awaken, for one who has begun to attain complete perfect awakening, or for one whose being is attached to awakening. For, from the time of the fulfillment of the aspiration with the combination of eight qualities at the foot of the Lord Dīpaṅkara, the Tathāgata was attached to complete perfect awakening, thinking "I must attain this," and came without ceasing the effort for its attainment; therefore, he is called a Bodhisatta. Ko nu khoti means what indeed. Lokoti means the world of formations. Assādoti means the sweet aspect. Ādīnavoti means the unpleasant aspect. Tassa mayhanti means for me, who was thus a Bodhisatta. Chandarāgavinayo chandarāgappahānanti means Nibbāna is called "the subduing of desire and passion, the abandoning of desire and passion" because desire and passion go to subduing and abandoning with regard to and dependent on Nibbāna. Idaṃ lokanissaraṇanti means this Nibbāna is called liberation from the world because it has escaped from the world. Yāvakīvanti means for as long as, for how much time. Abbhaññāsinti means I knew with special knowledge, with the Noble Path knowledge. Ñāṇañca pana me dassananti means the reviewing knowledge (paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ) has been stated with the two terms. The rest here is straightforward.

2. Paṭhamaassādasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Paṭhamaassādasuttavaṇṇanā

105.Dutiyeassādapariyesanaṃ acarinti assādapariyesanatthāya acariṃ. Kuto paṭṭhāyāti? Sumedhakālato paṭṭhāya.Paññāyāti sahavipassanāya maggapaññāya.Sudiṭṭhoti suppaṭividdho. Iminā upāyena sabbattha attho veditabbo. Tatiyaṃ sabbattha uttānameva.

105.In the second, assādapariyesanaṃ acarinti means I lived for the sake of seeking enjoyment. From where starting? Starting from the time of Sumedha. Paññāyāti means with the Path knowledge together with insight. Sudiṭṭhoti means well-penetrated. The meaning should be understood everywhere in this way. The third is straightforward everywhere.

4. Samaṇabrāhmaṇasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Samaṇabrāhmaṇasuttavaṇṇanā

107.Catutthesāmaññatthanti catubbidhaṃ ariyaphalaṃ. Itaraṃ tasseva vevacanaṃ. Sāmaññatthena vā cattāro maggā, brahmaññatthena cattāri phalāni. Imesu pana catūsupi suttesu khandhalokova kathito.

107.In the fourth, sāmaññatthanti means the four kinds of Noble Fruits. The other is a synonym for that itself. Or, with sāmaññattha, the four Paths; with brahmaññattha, the four Fruits. But in these four suttas, only the world of aggregates (khandha) has been discussed.

5. Ruṇṇasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Ruṇṇasuttavaṇṇanā

108.Pañcamaṃ atthuppattiyā nikkhittaṃ. Katarāya atthuppattiyā? Chabbaggiyānaṃ anācāre. Te kira gāyantā naccantā hasantā vicariṃsu. Bhikkhū dasabalassa ārocayiṃsu. Satthā te pakkosāpetvā tesaṃ ovādatthāya idaṃ suttaṃ ārabhi. Tattharuṇṇanti roditaṃ.Ummattakanti ummattakakiriyā.Komārakanti kumārakehi kattabbakiccaṃ.Dantavidaṃsakahasitanti dante dassetvā pāṇiṃ paharantānaṃ mahāsaddena hasitaṃ.Setughāto gīteti gīte vo paccayaghāto hotu, sahetukaṃ gītaṃ pajahathāti dīpeti.Naccepi eseva nayo.Alanti yuttaṃ.Dhammappamoditānaṃ satanti ettha dhammo vuccati kāraṇaṃ, kenacideva kāraṇena pamuditānaṃ santānaṃ.Sitaṃ sitamattāyāti tasmiṃ sitakāraṇe sati yaṃ sitaṃ karotha, taṃ vo sitamattāya aggadante dassetvā pahaṭṭhākāramattadassanāyayeva yuttanti vuttaṃ hoti.

108.The fifth was placed because of the occurrence of a situation. Because of the occurrence of which situation? Because of the misconduct of the group-of-six monks. It seems they were wandering around singing, dancing, and laughing. The bhikkhus reported it to the Ten-Powered One. The Teacher, having them summoned, began this sutta for the purpose of admonishing them. There, ruṇṇanti means crying. Ummattakanti means the action of a madman. Komārakanti means actions to be done by children. Dantavidaṃsakahasitanti means laughing with a loud noise while showing the teeth and clapping the hands. Setughāto gīteti means may there be a destruction of conditions for you in singing; it indicates that you should abandon singing that has a cause. This same method applies to naccepi as well. Alanti means suitable. Dhammappamoditānaṃ satanti here, dhammo means cause; for beings who are delighted by some cause. Sitaṃ sitamattāyāti means when there is a cause for smiling, the smile that you make is only suitable for merely showing the state of being delighted by showing a little of the front teeth.

6. Atittisuttavaṇṇanā
6. Atittisuttavaṇṇanā

109.Chaṭṭhesoppassāti niddāya.Paṭisevanāya natthi tittīti yathā yathā paṭisevati, tathā tathā ruccatiyevāti titti nāma natthi. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo. Sace hi mahāsamudde udakaṃ surā bhaveyya, surāsoṇḍo ca maccho hutvā nibbatteyya, tassa tattha carantassapi sayantassapi titti nāma na bhaveyya. Imasmiṃ sutte vaṭṭameva kathitaṃ.

109.In the sixth, soppassāti means for sleep. Paṭisevanāya natthi tittīti means as much as one indulges, it is only pleasing; therefore, there is no satisfaction. This same method applies to the remaining two terms as well. If the water in the great ocean were to become liquor, and a liquor-guzzling fish were to be born, even for that one wandering and lying down there, there would be no satisfaction. In this sutta, only the cycle of existence is discussed.

7. Arakkhitasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Arakkhitasuttavaṇṇanā

110.Sattameavassutaṃ hotīti tintaṃ hoti.Na bhaddakaṃ maraṇaṃ hotīti apāye paṭisandhipaccayatāya na laddhakaṃ hoti.Kālakiriyāti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Sukkapakkhe sagge paṭisandhipaccayatāya bhaddakaṃ hoti laddhakaṃ. Taṃ pana ekantena sotāpannādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ ariyasāvakānaṃyeva vaṭṭati. Sesamettha uttānamevāti.

110.In the seventh, avassutaṃ hotīti means it is dripping. Na bhaddakaṃ maraṇaṃ hotīti means it is not obtained because it is a condition for rebirth in the lower realms. Kālakiriyāti is a synonym for that itself. In the bright half, it is obtained and favorable because it is a condition for rebirth in heaven. But that only applies entirely to the three Noble Disciples starting with the Stream-enterer. The rest here is straightforward.

8. Byāpannasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Byāpannasuttavaṇṇanā

111.Aṭṭhamebyāpannanti pakatibhāvaṃ jahitvā ṭhitaṃ. Sesaṃ purimasutte vuttanayameva.

111. In the eighth, byāpanna means standing having abandoned its natural state. The rest is as described in the previous sutta.

9. Paṭhamanidānasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Paṭhamanidānasuttavaṇṇanā

112.Navamenidānānīti kāraṇāni.Kammānaṃ samudayāyāti vaṭṭagāmikammānaṃ piṇḍakaraṇatthāya.Lobhapakatanti lobhena pakataṃ.Sāvajjanti sadosaṃ.Taṃ kammaṃ kammasamudayāya saṃvattatīti taṃ kammaṃ aññesampi vaṭṭagāmikammānaṃ samudayāya piṇḍakaraṇatthāya saṃvattati.Na taṃ kammaṃ kammanirodhāyāti taṃ pana kammaṃ vaṭṭagāmikammānaṃ nirodhatthāya na saṃvattati. Sukkapakkhekammānaṃ samudayāyāti vivaṭṭagāmikammānaṃ samudayatthāya. Iminā nayena sabbaṃ atthato veditabbaṃ.

112. In the ninth, nidānāni means causes. Kammānaṃ samudayāya means for the accumulation of kamma that leads to the cycle [of rebirth]. Lobhapakata means done by greed. Sāvajja means with fault. Taṃ kammaṃ kammasamudayāya saṃvattatī means that kamma leads to the accumulation, to the aggregation of other kamma that leads to the cycle [of rebirth]. Na taṃ kammaṃ kammanirodhāyā means that kamma does not lead to the cessation of kamma that leads to the cycle [of rebirth]. On the white side, kammānaṃ samudayāyā means for the accumulation of kamma that leads to liberation. In this way, everything should be understood in terms of its meaning.

10. Dutiyanidānasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Dutiyanidānasuttavaṇṇanā

113.Dasamekammānanti vaṭṭagāmikammānameva.Chandarāgaṭṭhāniyeti chandarāgassa kāraṇabhūte.Ārabbhāti āgamma sandhāya paṭicca.Chandoti taṇhāchando.Yo cetaso sārāgoti yo cittassa rāgo rajjanā rajjitattaṃ, etamahaṃ saṃyojanaṃ vadāmi, bandhanaṃ vadāmīti attho. Sukkapakkhekammānanti vivaṭṭagāmikammānaṃ.Tadabhinivattetīti taṃ abhinivatteti. Yadā vā tena vipāko ñāto hoti vidito, tadā te ceva dhamme tañca vipākaṃ abhinivatteti. Iminā ca padena vipassanā kathitā,tadabhinivattetvāti iminā maggo.Cetasā abhinivijjhitvāti iminā ca maggova.Paññāya ativijjha passatīti saha vipassanāya maggapaññāya nibbijjhitvā passati. Evaṃ sabbattha attho veditabbo. Imasmiṃ pana sutte vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ kathitanti.

113. In the tenth, kammāna means kamma that leads to the cycle [of rebirth]. Chandarāgaṭṭhāniye means being the cause of desire and passion. Ārabbhā means having begun, referring to, dependent on. Chando means desire-intention (taṇhāchando). Yo cetaso sārāgo means whatever the passion of the mind, the act of being colored, being dyed; this I call a fetter, I call a bond, is the meaning. On the white side, kammāna means kamma that leads to liberation. Tadabhinivattetī means he brings that about. Or, when its result is known and understood, then he brings about both those phenomena and that result. And by this word, vipassanā is spoken of, tadabhinivattetvā by this, the path. Cetasā abhinivijjhitvā by this also, the path itself. Paññāya ativijjha passatī means having penetrated with wisdom, he sees, having penetrated together with the wisdom of the path with vipassanā. Thus, the meaning should be understood everywhere. But in this sutta, the cycle and liberation are spoken of.

(12) 2. Āpāyikavaggo

(12) 2. Āpāyikavaggo

1. Āpāyikasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Āpāyikasuttavaṇṇanā

114.Dutiyassa paṭhame apāyaṃ gacchissantītiāpāyikā. Nirayaṃ gacchissantītinerayikā. Idamappahāyāti idaṃ brahmacāripaṭiññatādiṃ pāpadhammattayaṃ avijahitvā.Brahmacāripaṭiññoti brahmacāripaṭirūpako, tesaṃ vā ākappaṃ avijahanena ‘‘ahampi brahmacārī’’ti evaṃpaṭiñño.Anuddhaṃsetīti akkosati paribhāsati codeti.Natthi kāmesu dosoti kilesakāmena vatthukāme sevantassa natthi doso.Pātabyatanti pivitabbataṃ paribhuñjitabbataṃ nirāsaṅkena cittena pipāsitassa pānīyapivanasadisaṃ paribhuñjitabbataṃ. Imasmiṃ sutte vaṭṭameva kathitaṃ.

114. In the first of the second, āpāyikā means those who will go to the apāya. Nerayikā means those who will go to niraya. Idamappahāyā means without abandoning this, the threefold evil Dhamma such as the pretense of being a Brahmacārī. Brahmacāripaṭiñño means one who is in the guise of a Brahmacārī, or one who, not abandoning their behavior, pretends, "I am also a Brahmacārī." Anuddhaṃsetī means does not scold, does not insult, does not accuse. Natthi kāmesu doso means there is no fault in one who indulges in the desire for sensual pleasures (kilesakāma) and material pleasures (vatthukāma). Pātabyata means the state of being drinkable, the state of being consumable, the state of being consumed with a fearless mind, like a thirsty person drinking water. In this sutta, only the cycle [of rebirth] is spoken of.

2. Dullabhasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Dullabhasuttavaṇṇanā

115.Dutiyekataññū katavedīti ‘‘iminā mayhaṃ kata’’nti tena katakammaṃ ñatvā viditaṃ pākaṭaṃ katvā paṭikaraṇakapuggalo.

115. In the second, kataññū katavedī means a person who, knowing the deed done by another, "this was done for me," makes it known and evident, and repays the favor.

3. Appameyyasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Appameyyasuttavaṇṇanā

116.Tatiye sukhena metabbotisuppameyyo. Dukkhena metabbotiduppameyyo. Pametuṃ na sakkotītiappameyyo. Unnaḷoti uggatanaḷo, tucchamānaṃ ukkhipitvā ṭhitoti attho.Capaloti pattamaṇḍanādinā cāpallena samannāgato.Mukharoti mukhakharo.Vikiṇṇavācoti asaññatavacano.Asamāhitoti cittekaggatārahito.Vibbhantacittoti bhantacitto bhantagāvibhantamigasappaṭibhāgo.Pākatindriyoti vivaṭindriyo. Sesamettha uttānamevāti.

116. In the third, suppameyyo means easy to associate with by happiness. Duppameyyo means difficult to associate with by suffering. Appameyyo means not able to be associated with. Unnaḷo means with raised pride, one who stands having lifted up empty pride, is the meaning. Capalo means endowed with fickleness through the adornment of a drinking bowl, etc. Mukharo means harsh-mouthed. Vikiṇṇavāco means one whose speech is uncontrolled. Asamāhito means devoid of one-pointedness of mind. Vibbhantacitto means with a bewildered mind, similar to a bewildered cow, bewildered deer, or snake. Pākatindriyo means with exposed sense faculties. The rest here is obvious.

4. Āneñjasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Āneñjasuttavaṇṇanā

117.Catutthetadassādetīti taṃ jhānaṃ assādeti.Taṃ nikāmetīti tadeva pattheti.Tena ca vittiṃ āpajjatīti tena jhānena tuṭṭhiṃ āpajjati.Tatra ṭhitoti tasmiṃ jhāne ṭhito.Tadadhimuttoti tattheva adhimutto.Tabbahulavihārīti tena bahulaṃ viharanto.Sahabyataṃ upapajjatīti sahabhāvaṃ upapajjati, tasmiṃ devaloke nibbattatīti attho.Nirayampi gacchatītiādi nirayādīhi avippamuttattā aparapariyāyavasena tattha gamanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Na hi tassa upacārajjhānato balavataraṃ akusalaṃ atthi, yena anantaraṃ apāye nibbatteyya.Bhagavato pana sāvakoti sotāpannasakadāgāmianāgāmīnaṃ aññataro.Tasmiṃyeva bhaveti tattheva arūpabhave.Parinibbāyatīti appaccayaparinibbānena parinibbāyati.Adhippayāsoti adhikappayogo. Sesamettha vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Imasmiṃ pana sutte puthujjanassa upapattijjhānaṃ kathitaṃ, ariyasāvakassa tadeva upapattijjhānañca vipassanāpādakajjhānañca kathitaṃ.

117. In the fourth, tadassādetī means he savors that jhāna. Taṃ nikāmetī means he desires only that. Tena ca vittiṃ āpajjatī means he attains satisfaction with that jhāna. Tatra ṭhito means standing in that jhāna. Tadadhimutto means resolved only on that. Tabbahulavihārī means living frequently in that. Sahabyataṃ upapajjatī means he attains companionship, he is reborn in that heaven, is the meaning. Nirayampi gacchatī etc., is said referring to going there in terms of another alternative, because of not being freed from niraya, etc. For there is no unwholesome [kamma] of his that is stronger than the access jhāna, by which he would be reborn immediately in the apāya. Bhagavato pana sāvako means one of the sotāpanna, sakadāgāmī, or anāgāmī. Tasmiṃyeva bhave means in that same formless existence. Parinibbāyatī means he attains parinibbāna with appaccayaparinibbāna. Adhippayāso means an application of increased effort. The rest here should be understood in the way already described. But in this sutta, the jhāna of attainment of the world for the worldling is spoken of, and for the noble disciple, that same jhāna of attainment of the world and the jhāna that leads to vipassanā is spoken of.

5. Vipattisampadāsuttavaṇṇanā
5. Vipattisampadāsuttavaṇṇanā

118.Pañcamesīlavipattīti sīlassa vipannākāro. Sesadvayepi eseva nayo.Natthi dinnanti dinnassa phalābhāvaṃ sandhāya vadati.Yiṭṭhaṃvuccati mahāyogo.Hutanti paheṇakasakkāro adhippeto. Tampi ubhayaṃ phalābhāvameva sandhāya paṭikkhipati.Sukatadukkaṭānanti sukatadukkatānaṃ, kusalākusalānanti attho.Phalaṃ vipākoti yaṃ phalanti vā vipākoti vā vuccati, taṃ natthīti vadati.Natthi ayaṃ lokoti paraloke ṭhitassa ayaṃ loko natthi,natthi paro lokoti idha loke ṭhitassāpi paraloko natthi, sabbe tattha tattheva ucchijjantīti dasseti.Natthi mātā natthi pitāti tesu sammāpaṭipattimicchāpaṭipattīnaṃ phalābhāvavasena vadati.Natthi sattā opapātikāti cavitvā uppajjanakasattā nāma natthīti vadati.Sampadāti pāripūriyo.Sīlasampadāti sīlassa paripuṇṇaavekallabhāvo. Sesadvayepi eseva nayo.Atthi dinnantiādi vuttapaṭipakkhanayena gahetabbaṃ.

118. In the fifth, sīlavipattī means the state of failure of morality. The same method applies in the other two. Natthi dinna means he speaks referring to the lack of fruit of what is given. Yiṭṭhaṃ is said of a great sacrifice. Huta means an offering of gifts. He rejects both of these, also referring to the lack of fruit. Sukatadukkaṭāna means of good deeds and bad deeds, of wholesome and unwholesome, is the meaning. Phalaṃ vipāko means whatever is called fruit or result, that does not exist, he says. Natthi ayaṃ loko means this world does not exist for one standing in the next world, natthi paro loko means even for one standing in this world, the next world does not exist, he shows that all are cut off there and then. Natthi mātā natthi pitā means he speaks in terms of the lack of fruit of correct and incorrect conduct towards them. Natthi sattā opapātikā means there are no beings who arise spontaneously after passing away. Sampadā means fulfillment. Sīlasampadā means the state of perfection and completeness of morality. The same method applies in the other two. Atthi dinna etc., should be understood in the way that contradicts what was said [before].

6. Apaṇṇakasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Apaṇṇakasuttavaṇṇanā

119.Chaṭṭheapaṇṇako maṇīti chahi talehi samannāgato pāsako.Sugatiṃ sagganti cātumahārājikādīsu aññataraṃ saggaṃ lokaṃ. Imasmiṃ sutte sīlañca sammādiṭṭhi cāti ubhayampi missakaṃ kathitaṃ. Sattamaṃ uttānameva.

119. In the sixth, apaṇṇako maṇī means a die endowed with six sides. Sugatiṃ sagga means one of the heavens such as the Cātumahārājika heaven. In this sutta, both morality and right view are spoken of mixed together. The seventh is obvious.

8. Paṭhamasoceyyasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Paṭhamasoceyyasuttavaṇṇanā

121.Aṭṭhamesoceyyānīti sucibhāvā.Kāyasoceyyanti kāyadvāre sucibhāvo. Sesadvayepi eseva nayo. Imesu pana paṭipāṭiyā catūsu suttesu agārikapaṭipadā kathitā. Sotāpannasakadāgāmīnampi vaṭṭati.

121. In the eighth, soceyyānī means states of purity. Kāyasoceyya means purity in the door of the body. The same method applies in the other two. But in these four suttas in order, the conduct of a householder is spoken of. It is also suitable for the sotāpanna and sakadāgāmī.

9. Dutiyasoceyyasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Dutiyasoceyyasuttavaṇṇanā

122.Navameajjhattanti niyakajjhattaṃ.Kāmacchandanti kāmacchandanīvaraṇaṃ.Byāpādādīsupi eseva nayo. Sesamettha heṭṭhā vuttanayameva. Gāthāya panakāyasucinti kāyadvāre suciṃ, kāyena vā suciṃ. Sesadvayepi eseva nayo.Ninhātapāpakanti sabbe pāpe ninhāpetvā dhovitvā ṭhitaṃ. Iminā suttenapi gāthāyapi khīṇāsavova kathitoti.

122. In the ninth, ajjhatta means one's own self. Kāmacchanda means the kāmacchanda hindrance. The same method applies to byāpādā etc. The rest here is in the way already described below. But in the verse, kāyasuci means purity in the door of the body, or purity by means of the body. The same method applies in the other two. Ninhātapāpaka means one who has washed away and removed all evil. By this sutta and by the verse, only the khīṇāsava is spoken of.

10. Moneyyasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Moneyyasuttavaṇṇanā

123.Dasamemoneyyānīti munibhāvā.Kāyamoneyyanti kāyadvāre munibhāvo sādhubhāvo paṇḍitabhāvo. Sesadvayepi eseva nayo.Idaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, kāyamoneyyanti idaṃ tividhakāyaduccaritappahānaṃ kāyamoneyyaṃ nāma. Apica tividhaṃ kāyasucaritampi kāyamoneyyaṃ, tathā kāyārammaṇaṃ ñāṇaṃ kāyamoneyyaṃ, kāyapariññā kāyamoneyyaṃ, pariññāsahagato maggo kāyamoneyyaṃ, kāye chandarāgassa pahānaṃ kāyamoneyyaṃ, kāyasaṅkhāranirodho catutthajjhānasamāpatti kāyamoneyyaṃ.Vacīmoneyyepi eseva nayo.

123. In the tenth, moneyyānī means states of sagehood (muni). Kāyamoneyya means sagehood, goodness, wisdom in the door of the body. The same method applies in the other two. Idaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, kāyamoneyya means this abandonment of the three kinds of bodily misconduct is called bodily sagehood. Moreover, the three kinds of bodily good conduct are also bodily sagehood, likewise, knowledge with the body as its object is bodily sagehood, understanding of the body is bodily sagehood, the path accompanied by understanding is bodily sagehood, the abandonment of desire and passion for the body is bodily sagehood, the cessation of bodily fabrication, the attainment of the fourth jhāna is bodily sagehood. The same method applies to vacīmoneyye also.

Kāyamuninti kāyadvāre muniṃ uttamaṃ parisuddhaṃ, kāyena vā muniṃ. Sesadvayepi eseva nayo.Sabbappahāyinanti khīṇāsavaṃ. Khīṇāsavo hi sabbappahāyī nāmāti.

Kāyamuni means a sage, excellent, purified in the door of the body, or a sage by means of the body. The same method applies in the other two. Sabbappahāyina means the khīṇāsava. For the khīṇāsava is called the one who has abandoned all.

(13) 3. Kusināravaggo

(13) 3. Kusināravaggo

1. Kusinārasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Kusinārasuttavaṇṇanā

124.Tatiyassa paṭhamekusinārāyanti evaṃnāmake nagare.Baliharaṇe vanasaṇḍeti evaṃnāmake vanasaṇḍe. Tattha kira bhūtabalikaraṇatthaṃ baliṃ haranti, tasmā baliharaṇanti vuccati.Ākaṅkhamānoti icchamāno.Sahatthāti sahatthena.Sampavāretīti alaṃ alanti vācāya ceva hatthavikārena ca paṭikkhipāpeti.Sādhu vata māyanti sādhu vata maṃ ayaṃ.Gathitoti taṇhāgedhena gathito.Mucchitoti taṇhāmucchanāyayeva mucchito.Ajjhopannoti taṇhāya gilitvā pariniṭṭhapetvā pavatto.Anissaraṇapaññoti chandarāgaṃ pahāya saṃkaḍḍhitvā paribhuñjanto nissaraṇapañño nāma hoti, ayaṃ na tādiso, sacchandarāgo paribhuñjatīti anissaraṇapañño. Sukkapakkho vuttavipariyāyena veditabbo. Nekkhammavitakkādayo panettha missakā kathitāti veditabbā.

124. In the first of the third, kusinārāya means in a city by that name. Baliharaṇe vanasaṇḍe means in a grove by that name. It is said that there they offer sacrifices for the purpose of making offerings to the spirits, therefore it is called Baliharaṇa. Ākaṅkhamāno means desiring. Sahatthā means with his own hand. Sampavāretī means he causes [others] to refuse with the words "enough, enough" and with gestures of the hand. Sādhu vata māya means this is good for me. Gathito means bound by the snare of craving. Mucchito means infatuated only by the infatuation of craving. Ajjhopanno means swallowed and consumed by craving. Anissaraṇapañño means one who, having abandoned desire and passion, consumes by drawing [himself] away is called one with the wisdom of escape; this one is not such, he consumes with desire and passion, therefore he is one without the wisdom of escape. The white side should be understood in the opposite way to what was said. It should be understood that the thoughts of renunciation, etc., are spoken of mixed together here.

2. Bhaṇḍanasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Bhaṇḍanasuttavaṇṇanā

125.Dutiyepajahiṃsūti pajahanti.Bahulamakaṃsūti punappunaṃ karonti. Idhāpi tayo vitakkā missakāva kathitā.

125. In the second, pajahiṃsū means they abandon. Bahulamakaṃsū means they do repeatedly. Here also, the three thoughts are spoken of mixed together.

3. Gotamakacetiyasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Gotamakacetiyasuttavaṇṇanā

126.Tatiyegotamake cetiyeti gotamakayakkhassa bhavane. Tathāgato hi paṭhamabodhiyaṃ vīsati vassāni kadāci cāpāle cetiye, kadāci sārandade, kadāci bahuputte, kadāci gotamaketi evaṃ yebhuyyena devakulesuyeva vihāsi. Imasmiṃ pana kāle vesāliṃ upanissāya gotamakassa yakkhassa bhavanaṭṭhāne vihāsi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘gotamake cetiye’’ti.Etadavocāti etaṃ ‘‘abhiññāyāha’’ntiādikaṃ suttaṃ avoca.

126. In the third, gotamake cetiye means in the dwelling of the Gotamaka yakkha. For the Tathāgata, in the first enlightenment, for twenty years, sometimes at the Cāpāla shrine, sometimes at the Sārandada, sometimes at the Bahuputta, sometimes at the Gotamaka, thus mostly he lived only in the shrines of the deities. But at this time, dwelling near Vesālī, he lived in the place of the dwelling of the Gotamaka yakkha. Therefore it was said – "at the Gotamaka shrine." Etadavocā means he spoke this sutta beginning with "for direct knowledge."

Idañca bhagavatā suttaṃ atthuppattiyaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Kataraatthuppattiyanti? Mūlapariyāyaatthuppattiyaṃ (ma. ni. 1.1 ādayo). Sambahulā kira brāhmaṇapabbajitā attanā uggahitabuddhavacanaṃ nissāya jānanamadaṃ uppādetvā dhammassavanaggaṃ na gacchanti – ‘‘sammāsambuddho kathento amhehi ñātameva kathessati, no aññāta’’nti. Bhikkhū tathāgatassa ārocesuṃ. Satthā te bhikkhū pakkosāpetvā mukhapaṭiññaṃ gahetvā mūlapariyāyaṃ desesi. Te bhikkhū desanāya neva āgataṭṭhānaṃ, na gataṭṭhānaṃ addasaṃsu. Apassantā ‘‘sammāsambuddho ‘mayhaṃ kathā niyyātī’ti mukhasampattameva kathetī’’ti cintayiṃsu. Satthā tesaṃ manaṃ jānitvā imaṃ suttantaṃ ārabhi.

And this sutta should be understood as having been spoken by the Blessed One on the occasion of the arising of a meaning. On the occasion of the arising of which meaning? On the occasion of the arising of the Mūlapariyāya (Root Discourse) (ma. ni. 1.1 ff). It is said that many Brahmins and wandering ascetics, relying on the Buddha's teachings that they had learned by heart, produced pride in their knowledge and did not go to the assembly for the hearing of the Dhamma – "the Sammāsambuddho, when speaking, will speak only what is known by us, not what is unknown." The monks reported this to the Tathāgata. The Teacher summoned those monks, took a promise from their mouths, and taught the Mūlapariyāya. In the teaching, those monks did not see either the place they had come from or the place they had gone to. Not seeing, they thought, "the Sammāsambuddho speaks only of what is attained by the mouth, that ‘my talk is understood’." Knowing their minds, the Teacher began this suttanta.

abhiññāyāti ‘‘ime pañcakkhandhā, dvādasāyatanāni, aṭṭhārasa dhātuyo, bāvīsatindriyāni, cattāri saccāni, nava hetū, satta phassā, satta vedanā, satta cetanā, satta saññā, satta cittānī’’ti jānitvā paṭivijjhitvā paccakkhaṃ katvā, tathā – ‘‘ime cattāro satipaṭṭhānā’’tiādinā nayena te te dhamme jānitvā paṭivijjhitvā paccakkhameva katvāti attho.Sanidānanti sappaccayameva katvā kathemi, no appaccayaṃ.Sappāṭihāriyanti paccanīkapaṭiharaṇena sappāṭihāriyameva katvā kathemi, no appāṭihāriyaṃ.Alañca pana voti yuttañca pana tumhākaṃ.Tuṭṭhiyāti ‘‘sammāsambuddho bhagavā, svākkhāto dhammo, suppaṭipanno saṅgho’’ti tīṇi ratanāni guṇato anussarantānaṃ tumhākaṃ yuttameva tuṭṭhiṃ kātunti attho. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo.

Abhiññāya means having known, penetrated, made evident, "these five khandha, twelve āyatana, eighteen dhātu, twenty-two indriya, four Noble Truths, nine roots, seven contacts, seven feelings, seven intentions, seven perceptions, seven minds," thus having known, penetrated, made evident those Dhammas in that way, by the method beginning with "these four satipaṭṭhāna", is the meaning. Sanidāna means I speak having made [things] with a cause, not without a cause. Sappāṭihāriya means I speak having made [things] with a miracle, with the overcoming of opposition, not without a miracle. Alañca pana vo means and it is fitting for you. Tuṭṭhiyā means it is fitting for you to make gladness when recollecting the three jewels, "the Sammāsambuddho is the Blessed One, the Dhamma is well-proclaimed, the Saṅgha is of good conduct," in terms of their qualities, is the meaning. The same method applies in the other two phrases.

Akampitthāti chahi ākārehi akampittha. Evarūpo hi pathavikampo bodhimaṇḍepi ahosi. Bodhisatte kira dakkhiṇadisābhāgena bodhimaṇḍaṃ abhiruḷhe dakkhiṇadisābhāgo heṭṭhā avīciṃ pāpuṇanto viya ahosi, uttarabhāgo uggantvā bhavaggaṃ abhihananto viya. Pacchimadisaṃ gate pacchimabhāgo heṭṭhā avīciṃ pāpuṇanto viya ahosi, pācīnabhāgo uggantvā bhavaggaṃ abhihananto viya. Uttaradisaṃ gate uttaradisābhāgo heṭṭhā avīciṃ pāpuṇanto viya, dakkhiṇadisābhāgo uggantvā bhavaggaṃ abhihananto viya. Pācīnadisaṃ gate pācīnadisābhāgo heṭṭhā avīciṃ pāpuṇanto viya, pacchimabhāgo uggantvā bhavaggaṃ abhihananto viya. Bodhirukkhopi sakiṃ heṭṭhā avīciṃ pāpuṇanto viya, sakiṃ uggantvā bhavaggaṃ abhihananto viya. Tasmimpi divase evaṃ chahi ākārehi cakkavāḷasahassī mahāpathavī akampittha.

Akampitthā means it trembled in six ways. This kind of earthquake also occurred at the Bodhi-maṇḍa. It is said that when the Bodhisatta ascended the Bodhi-maṇḍa in the southern direction, the southern part seemed to reach down to Avīci hell, and the northern part rose up as if striking the peak of existence (bhavagga). When he went to the western direction, the western part seemed to reach down to Avīci hell, and the eastern part rose up as if striking the peak of existence. When he went to the northern direction, the northern part seemed to reach down to Avīci hell, and the southern part rose up as if striking the peak of existence. When he went to the eastern direction, the eastern part seemed to reach down to Avīci hell, and the western part rose up as if striking the peak of existence. The Bodhi tree also sometimes seemed to reach down to Avīci hell, and sometimes rose up as if striking the peak of existence. On that day, the great earth of a thousand world-systems trembled in this way in six ways.

4. Bharaṇḍukālāmasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Bharaṇḍukālāmasuttavaṇṇanā

127.Catutthekevalakappanti sakalakappaṃ.Anvāhiṇḍantoti vicaranto.Nāddasāti kiṃ kāraṇā na addasa? Ayaṃ kira bharaṇḍu kālāmo sakyānaṃ aggapiṇḍaṃ khādanto vicarati. Tassa vasanaṭṭhānaṃ sampattakāle ekā dhammadesanā samuṭṭhahissatīti ñatvā bhagavā evaṃ adhiṭṭhāsi, yathā añño āvasatho na paññāyittha. Tasmā na addasa.Purāṇasabrahmacārīti porāṇako sabrahmacārī. So kira āḷārakālāmakāle tasmiṃyeva assame ahosi, taṃ sandhāyevamāha.Santharaṃ paññāpehīti santharitabbaṃ santharāhīti attho.Santharaṃ paññāpetvāti kappiyamañcake paccattharaṇaṃ paññāpetvā.Kāmānaṃ pariññaṃ paññāpetīti ettha pariññā nāma samatikkamo, tasmā kāmānaṃ samatikkamaṃ paṭhamajjhānaṃ paññāpeti.Na rūpānaṃ pariññanti rūpānaṃ samatikkamabhūtaṃ arūpāvacarasamāpattiṃ na paññāpeti.Na vedanānaṃ pariññanti vedanānaṃ samatikkamaṃ nibbānaṃ na paññāpeti.Niṭṭhāti gati nipphatti.Udāhu puthūti udāhu nānā.

127. In the fourth, kevalakappa means the entire kappa. Anvāhiṇḍanto means wandering. Nāddasā: why did he not see? It seems this Bharaṇḍu Kālāma wanders, eating the Sakyans' choice morsels. Knowing that a Dhamma talk would arise at his dwelling place at the appropriate time, the Blessed One resolved that no other lodging would be apparent. Therefore, he did not see. Purāṇasabrahmacārī means a former co-celibate. He was in the same hermitage in Āḷāra Kālāma's time; referring to that, he spoke thus. Santharaṃ paññāpehī means spread out a seat that should be spread out. Santharaṃ paññāpetvā means having spread out a covering on a prepared seat. Kāmānaṃ pariññaṃ paññāpetī: here, pariññā means transcendence; therefore, he teaches the transcendence of sensual pleasures, the first jhāna. Na rūpānaṃ pariñña means he does not teach the immaterial attainments, which are the transcendence of form. Na vedanānaṃ pariñña means he does not teach nibbāna, which is the transcendence of feelings. Niṭṭhā means destination, accomplishment. Udāhu puthū means or else different.

5. Hatthakasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Hatthakasutta Commentary

128.Pañcameabhikkantāya rattiyāti ettha abhikkantasaddo khayasundarābhirūpaabbhanumodanādīsu dissati. Tattha ‘‘abhikkantā, bhante, ratti, nikkhanto paṭhamo yāmo, ciranisinno bhikkhusaṅgho, uddisatu, bhante, bhagavā bhikkhūnaṃ pātimokkha’’nti evamādīsu khaye dissati. ‘‘Ayaṃ imesaṃ catunnaṃ puggalānaṃ abhikkantataro ca paṇītataro cā’’ti evamādīsu (a. ni. 4.100) sundare.

128. In the fifth, abhikkantāya rattiyā: here, the word abhikkanta is seen in the senses of decline, beautiful, pleasing, approval, etc. There, in "Abhikkantā, bhante, ratti, nikkhanto paṭhamo yāmo, ciranisinno bhikkhusaṅgho, uddisatu, bhante, bhagavā bhikkhūnaṃ pātimokkha," it is seen in the sense of decline. In "Ayaṃ imesaṃ catunnaṃ puggalānaṃ abhikkantataro ca paṇītataro cā," it is seen in the sense of beautiful.

‘‘Ko me vandati pādāni, iddhiyā yasasā jalaṃ;

"Who is venerating my feet, blazing with power and glory;
Illuminating all directions with radiant beauty?" (Vi. Va. 857) –

abhikkantāya rattiyāti iṭṭhāya kantāya manāpāya rattiyāti vuttaṃ hoti.Abhikkantavaṇṇāti idha abhikkantasaddo abhirūpe, vaṇṇasaddo pana chavithutikulavaggakāraṇasaṇṭhānapamāṇarūpāyatanādīsu dissati. Tattha ‘‘suvaṇṇavaṇṇosi bhagavā’’ti evamādīsu (ma. ni. 2.399; su. ni. 553) chaviyaṃ. ‘‘Kadā saññūḷhā pana te gahapati samaṇassa gotamassa vaṇṇā’’ti evamādīsu (ma. ni. 2.77) thutiyaṃ. ‘‘Cattārome, bho gotama, vaṇṇā’’ti evamādīsu (dī. ni. 3.115) kulavagge. ‘‘Atha kena nu vaṇṇena, gandhatthenoti vuccatī’’ti evamādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.234) kāraṇe. ‘‘Mahantaṃ hatthirājavaṇṇaṃ abhinimminitvā’’ti evamādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.138) saṇṭhāne. ‘‘Tayo pattassa vaṇṇā’’ti evamādīsu (pārā. 602) pamāṇe. ‘‘Vaṇṇo gandho raso ojā’’ti evamādīsu rūpāyatane. So idha chaviyā daṭṭhabbo. Tenaabhikkantavaṇṇāti abhirūpacchavi, iṭṭhavaṇṇā manāpavaṇṇāti vuttaṃ hoti.

abhikkantāya rattiyā means a night that is pleasing, lovely, and agreeable. Abhikkantavaṇṇā: here, the word abhikkanta is in the sense of beautiful, but the word vaṇṇa is seen in the senses of complexion, praise, class, cause, form, shape, extent, and object of sight. There, in "Suvaṇṇavaṇṇosi bhagavā," it is in the sense of complexion. In "Kadā saññūḷhā pana te gahapati samaṇassa gotamassa vaṇṇā," it is in the sense of praise. In "Cattārome, bho gotama, vaṇṇā," it is in the sense of class. In "Atha kena nu vaṇṇena, gandhatthenoti vuccatī," it is in the sense of cause. In "Mahantaṃ hatthirājavaṇṇaṃ abhinimminitvā," it is in the sense of shape. In "Tayo pattassa vaṇṇā," it is in the sense of extent. In "Vaṇṇo gandho raso ojā," it is in the object of sight. Here, it should be understood as complexion. Therefore, abhikkantavaṇṇā means beautiful complexion, a pleasing and lovely complexion.

Kevalakappanti etthakevalasaddo anavasesayebhuyyābyāmissānatirekadaḷhatthavisaṃyogādianekattho. Tathā hissa ‘‘kevalaparipuṇṇaṃ parisuddhaṃ brahmacariya’’nti evamādīsu (pārā. 1) anavasesatā attho. ‘‘Kevalakappā ca aṅgamagadhā pahūtaṃ khādanīyaṃ bhojanīyaṃ ādāya upasaṅkamissantī’’ti evamādīsu (mahāva. 43) yebhuyyatā. ‘‘Kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa samudayo hotī’’ti evamādīsu (vibha. 225) abyāmissatā. ‘‘Kevalaṃ saddhāmattakaṃ nūna ayamāyasmā’’ti evamādīsu (mahāva. 244) anatirekatā. ‘‘Āyasmato, bhante, anuruddhassa bāhiyo nāma saddhivihāriko kevalakappaṃ saṅghabhedāya ṭhito’’ti evamādīsu (a. ni. 4.243) daḷhatthatā. ‘‘Kevalī vusitavā uttamapurisoti vuccatī’’ti evamādīsu (saṃ. ni. 3.57) visaṃyogo. Idha pana anavasesatā atthoti adhippetā.

Kevalakappa: here, the word kevala has various meanings such as without remainder, abundance, unmixed, not exceeding, firm, disconnected, etc. Thus, its meaning as without remainder is in "kevalaparipuṇṇaṃ parisuddhaṃ brahmacariya." Its meaning as abundance is in "kevalakappā ca aṅgamagadhā pahūtaṃ khādanīyaṃ bhojanīyaṃ ādāya upasaṅkamissantī." Its meaning as unmixed is in "kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa samudayo hotī." Its meaning as not exceeding is in "kevalaṃ saddhāmattakaṃ nūna ayamāyasmā." Its meaning as firmness is in "Āyasmato, bhante, anuruddhassa bāhiyo nāma saddhivihāriko kevalakappaṃ saṅghabhedāya ṭhito." Its meaning as disconnected is in "Kevalī vusitavā uttamapurisoti vuccatī." Here, however, the meaning of without remainder is intended.

Kappasaddo panāyaṃ abhisaddahanavohārakālapaññattichedanavikappalesasamantabhāvādianekattho. Tathā hissa ‘‘okappaniyametaṃ bhoto gotamassa, yathā taṃ arahato sammāsambuddhassā’’ti evamādīsu (ma. ni. 1.387) abhisaddahanamattho. ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, pañcahi samaṇakappehi phalaṃ paribhuñjitu’’nti evamādīsu (cūḷava. 250) vohāro. ‘‘Yena sudaṃ niccakappaṃ viharāmī’’ti evamādīsu (ma. ni. 1.387) kālo. ‘‘Iccāyasmā kappo’’ti evamādīsu (su. ni. 1098; cūḷani. kappamāṇavapucchā 117, kappamāṇavapucchāniddeso 61) paññatti. ‘‘Alaṅkato kappitakesamassū’’ti evamādīsu (jā. 2.22.1368; vi. va. 1094) chedanaṃ. ‘‘Kappati dvaṅgulakappo’’ti evamādīsu (cūḷava. 446) vikappo. ‘‘Atthi kappo nipajjitu’’nti evamādīsu (a. ni. 8.80) leso. ‘‘Kevalakappaṃ veḷuvanaṃ obhāsetvā’’ti evamādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.94) samantabhāvo. Idha panassa samantabhāvo attho adhippeto. Tasmākevalakappaṃ jetavananti ettha anavasesaṃ samantato jetavananti attho.

The word kappa, however, has various meanings such as conviction, expression, time, designation, cutting, alternatives, trace, complete state, etc. Thus, its meaning as conviction is in "okappaniyametaṃ bhoto gotamassa, yathā taṃ arahato sammāsambuddhassā." Its meaning as expression is in "anujānāmi, bhikkhave, pañcahi samaṇakappehi phalaṃ paribhuñjitu." Its meaning as time is in "yena sudaṃ niccakappaṃ viharāmī." Its meaning as designation is in "iccāyasmā kappo." Its meaning as cutting is in "alaṅkato kappitakesamassū." Its meaning as alternatives is in "kappati dvaṅgulakappo." Its meaning as a trace is in "atthi kappo nipajjitu." Its meaning as a complete state is in "kevalakappaṃ veḷuvanaṃ obhāsetvā." Here, however, its meaning of a complete state is intended. Therefore, kevalakappaṃ jetavana means the entire Jetavana completely.

Obhāsetvāti ābhāya pharitvā.Vālukāyāti saṇhāya vālukāya.Na saṇṭhātīti na patiṭṭhāti.Oḷārikanti brahmadevatāya hi pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhānakāle attabhāvo oḷāriko māpetuṃ vaṭṭati pathavī vā, tasmā evamāha.Dhammāti iminā pubbe uggahitabuddhavacanaṃ dasseti.Nappavattino ahesunti sajjhāyamūḷhakā vācā parihīnāyeva ahesuṃ.Appaṭivānoti anivatto anukkaṇṭhito.

Obhāsetvā means having pervaded with light. Vālukāyā means on fine sand. Na saṇṭhātī means does not stand firm. Oḷārika: it is fitting for a Brahmā deity to create a coarse form when establishing the earth, or the earth itself, therefore, he says so. Dhammā: with this, he indicates the Buddha's teaching previously learned. Nappavattino ahesuṃ means the words, obscured by recitation, were indeed diminished. Appaṭivāno means unrepelled, unhindered.

Dassanassāti cakkhuviññāṇena dassanassa.Upaṭṭhānassāti catūhi paccayehi upaṭṭhānassa.Adhisīlanti dasavidhaṃ sīlaṃ. Tañhi pañcasīlaṃ upādāya adhisīlanti vuccati.Avihaṃ gatoti avihabrahmaloke nibbattosmīti dasseti.

Dassanassā means of seeing with eye-consciousness. Upaṭṭhānassā means of attendance with the four requisites. Adhisīla means the ten kinds of sīla. Indeed, it is called adhisīla when including the five precepts. Avihaṃ gato indicates that he was reborn in the Aviha Brahma world.

6. Kaṭuviyasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Kaṭuviyasutta Commentary

129.Chaṭṭhegoyogapilakkhasminti gāvīnaṃ vikkayaṭṭhāne uṭṭhitapilakkhassa santike.Rittassādanti jhānasukhābhāvena rittassādaṃ.Bāhirassādanti kāmaguṇasukhavasena bāhirassādaṃ.Kaṭuviyanti ucchiṭṭhaṃ.Āmagandhenāti kodhasaṅkhātena vissagandhena.Avassutanti tintaṃ.Makkhikāti kilesamakkhikā.Nānupatissantīti uṭṭhāya na anubandhissanti.Nānvāssavissantīti anubandhitvā na khādissanti.Saṃvegamāpādīti sotāpanno jāto.

129. In the sixth, goyogapilakkhasmiṃ means near the pilakkha tree standing in the place for selling cattle. Rittassāda means empty of taste due to the absence of jhāna pleasure. Bāhirassāda means external taste due to sensual pleasures. Kaṭuviya means leftovers. Āmagandhenā means with a raw smell, meaning the smell of anger. Avassuta means dripping. Makkhikā means flies of defilements. Nānupatissantī means they will not fly up and follow. Nānvāssavissantī means having followed, they will not taste. Saṃvegamāpādī means he attained the state of a sotāpanna.

Kaṭuviyakatoti ucchiṭṭhakato.Ārakā hotīti dūre hoti.Vighātasseva bhāgavāti dukkhasseva bhāgī.Caretīti carati gacchati.Dummedhoti duppañño. Imasmiṃ sutte vaṭṭameva kathitaṃ, gāthāsu vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ kathitanti. Sattame vaṭṭameva bhāsitaṃ.

Kaṭuviyakato means one who has made leftovers. Ārakā hotī means he is far away. Vighātasseva bhāgavā means a partaker of suffering indeed. Caretī means walks, goes. Dummedho means dull-witted. In this sutta, only the round (vaṭṭa) is discussed; in the verses, the round and the reverse of the round (vaṭṭavivaṭṭa) are discussed. In the seventh, only the round is spoken of.

8. Dutiyaanuruddhasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Dutiyaanuruddhasutta Commentary

131.Aṭṭhameidaṃ te mānasminti ayaṃ te navavidhena vaḍḍhitamānoti attho.Idaṃ te uddhaccasminti idaṃ tava uddhaccaṃ cittassa uddhatabhāvo.Idaṃte kukkuccasminti idaṃ tava kukkuccaṃ.

131. In the eighth, idaṃ te mānasmiṃ means this is your conceit that has increased in nine ways. Idaṃ te uddhaccasmiṃ means this is your restlessness, the agitated state of mind. Idaṃ te kukkuccasmiṃ means this is your remorse.

9. Paṭicchannasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Paṭicchannasutta Commentary

132.Navameāvahantīti niyyanti.Paṭicchanno āvahatīti paṭicchannova hutvā niyyāti.Vivaṭo virocatīti ettha ekato ubhato attato sabbatthakatoti catubbidhā vivaṭatā veditabbā. Tatthaekato vivaṭaṃnāma asādhāraṇasikkhāpadaṃ.Ubhato vivaṭaṃnāma sādhāraṇasikkhāpadaṃ.Attato vivaṭaṃnāma paṭiladdhadhammaguṇo.Sabbatthakavivaṭaṃnāma tepiṭakaṃ buddhavacanaṃ.

132. In the ninth, āvahantī means bring forth, carry out. Paṭicchanno āvahatī means being concealed, he brings forth. Vivaṭo virocatī: here, four kinds of openness (vivaṭatā) should be understood: one-sided, two-sided, personal, and all-encompassing. There, ekato vivaṭaṃ means an exclusive training rule. Ubhato vivaṭaṃ means a common training rule. Attato vivaṭaṃ means one who has attained qualities of Dhamma. Sabbatthakavivaṭaṃ means the Tipitaka, the word of the Buddha.

10. Lekhasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Lekhasutta Commentary

133.Dasameabhiṇhanti abhikkhaṇaṃ nirantaraṃ.Āgāḷhenāti gāḷhena kakkhaḷena.Pharusenāti pharusavacanena. Gāḷhaṃ katvā pharusaṃ katvā vuccamānopīti attho.Amanāpenāti manaṃ anallīyantena avaḍḍhantena.Sandhiyatimevāti ghaṭiyatiyeva.Saṃsandatimevāti nirantarova hoti.Sammodatimevāti ekībhāvameva gacchati. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.

133. In the tenth, abhiṇhaṃ means repeatedly, constantly. Āgāḷhenā means firmly, harshly. Pharusenā means with harsh words. It means even when being spoken to firmly and harshly. Amanāpenā means not clinging to the mind, not increasing. Sandhiyatimevā means it is only joined together. Saṃsandatimevā means it is only continuous. Sammodatimevā means it only goes to oneness. The rest is clear everywhere.

(14) 4. Yodhājīvavaggo

(14) 4. Yodhājīva Chapter

1. Yodhājīvasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Yodhājīvasutta Commentary

134.Catutthassa paṭhame yuddhaṃ upajīvatītiyodhājīvo. Rājārahoti rañño anucchaviko.Rājabhoggoti rañño upabhogaparibhogo.Aṅganteva saṅkhyaṃ gacchatīti hattho viya pādo viya ca avassaṃ icchitabbattā aṅganti saṅkhyaṃ gacchati.Dūre pātī hotīti udake usabhamattaṃ, thale aṭṭhusabhamattaṃ, tato vā uttarinti dūre kaṇḍaṃ pāteti. Duṭṭhagāmaṇiabhayassa hi yodhājīvo navausabhamattaṃ kaṇḍaṃ pātesi, pacchimabhave bodhisatto yojanappamāṇaṃ.Akkhaṇavedhīti avirādhitavedhī, akkhaṇaṃ vā vijju vijjantarikāya vijjhituṃ samatthoti attho.Mahato kāyassa padāletāti ekatobaddhaṃ phalakasatampi mahiṃsacammasatampi aṅguṭṭhapamāṇabahalaṃ lohapaṭṭampi caturaṅgulabahalaṃ asanapadarampi vidatthibahalaṃ udumbarapadarampi dīghantena vālikasakaṭampi vinivijjhituṃ samatthoti attho.Yaṃkiñci rūpantiādi visuddhimagge vitthāritameva.Netaṃ mamātiādi taṇhāmānadiṭṭhipaṭikkhepavasena vuttaṃ.Sammappaññāya passatīti sammā hetunā kāraṇena sahavipassanāya maggapaññāya passati.Padāletīti arahattamaggena padāleti.

134. In the first of the fourth (chapter), yodhājīvo means one who lives by warfare. Rājāraho means suitable for a king. Rājabhoggo means the king's enjoyment and use. Aṅganteva saṅkhyaṃ gacchatī means it is counted as a limb because it is necessarily desired, like a hand or a foot. Dūre pātī hotī means he shoots an arrow far, eight usabha lengths on land, or more than that. For Duṭṭhagāmaṇi Abhaya, the warrior shot an arrow nine usabha lengths; in his last life, the bodhisatta shot one yojana. Akkhaṇavedhī means one who pierces without missing, or one who is capable of piercing lightning in the space between flashes. Mahato kāyassa padāletā means one who is capable of piercing a hundred planks bound together, a hundred hides of the mahiṃsa animal, an iron plate the thickness of a thumb, an asana plank four inches thick, an udumbara plank a span thick, or a long cartload of sand. Yaṃkiñci rūpa, etc., is explained in detail in the Visuddhimagga. Netaṃ mamā, etc., is said in terms of rejecting craving, conceit, and views. Sammappaññāya passatī means he sees with right wisdom, with insight knowledge together with the right reason and cause. Padāletī means he pierces with the path of arahantship.

2. Parisāsuttavaṇṇanā
2. Parisāsutta Commentary

135.Dutiyeukkācitavinītāti appaṭipucchitvā vinītā dubbinītaparisā.Paṭipucchāvinītāti pucchitvā vinītā suvinītaparisā.Yāvatāvinītāti pamāṇavasena vinītā, pamāṇaṃ ñatvā vinītaparisāti attho. ‘‘Yāvatajjhā’’ti pāḷiyā pana yāva ajjhāsayāti attho, ajjhāsayaṃ ñatvā vinītaparisāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tatiyaṃ uttānameva.

135. In the second, ukkācitavinītā means a company that is disciplined without questioning, an undisciplined company. Paṭipucchāvinītā means a company that is disciplined after questioning, a well-disciplined company. Yāvatāvinītā means disciplined according to measure, meaning a company that is disciplined after knowing the measure. In the text "Yāvatajjhā," however, it means according to inclination (ajjhāsaya); it means a company that is disciplined after knowing the inclination. The third is clear.

4. Uppādāsuttavaṇṇanā
4. Uppādāsutta Commentary

137.Catutthedhammaṭṭhitatāti sabhāvaṭṭhitatā.Dhammaniyāmatāti sabhāvaniyāmatā.Sabbe saṅkhārāti catubhūmakasaṅkhārā.Aniccāti hutvā abhāvaṭṭhena aniccā.Dukkhāti sampaṭipīḷanaṭṭhena dukkhā.Anattāti avasavattanaṭṭhena anattā. Iti imasmiṃ sutte tīṇi lakkhaṇāni missakāni kathitāni.

137. In the fourth, dhammaṭṭhitatā means the state of being in accordance with nature. Dhammaniyāmatā means the regulation of nature. Sabbe saṅkhārā means all conditioned things in the four planes of existence. Aniccā means impermanent in the sense of becoming and ceasing. Dukkhā means painful in the sense of being oppressed. Anattā means not-self in the sense of lacking inherent control. Thus, in this sutta, the three characteristics are spoken of mixed together.

5. Kesakambalasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Kesakambalasutta Commentary

138.Pañcametantāvutānaṃ vatthānanti paccatte sāmivacanaṃ, tantehi vāyitavatthānīti attho.Kesakambaloti manussakesehi vāyitakambalo.Puthusamaṇabrāhmaṇavādānanti idampi paccatte sāmivacanaṃ.Paṭikiṭṭhoti pacchimako lāmako.Moghapurisoti tucchapuriso.Paṭibāhatīti paṭisedheti.Khippaṃ uḍḍeyyāti kuminaṃ oḍḍeyya. Chaṭṭhasattamāni uttānatthāneva.

138. In the fifth, tantāvutānaṃ vatthāna is a possessive locative; it means clothes woven with threads. Kesakambalo means a blanket woven with human hair. Puthusamaṇabrāhmaṇavādāna is also a possessive locative. Paṭikiṭṭho means inferior, base. Moghapuriso means empty person. Paṭibāhatī means rejects. Khippaṃ uḍḍeyyā means may fly away quickly. The sixth and seventh have clear meanings.

8. Assakhaḷuṅkasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Assakhaḷuṅkasutta Commentary

141.Aṭṭhameassakhaḷuṅkoti assapoto.Idamassa javasmiṃ vadāmīti ayamassa ñāṇajavoti vadāmi.Idamassa vaṇṇasmiṃ vadāmīti ayamassa guṇavaṇṇoti vadāmi.Idamassa ārohapariṇāhasminti ayamassa uccabhāvo parimaṇḍalabhāvoti vadāmīti.

141. In the eighth, assakhaḷuṅko means a young horse. Idamassa javasmiṃ vadāmī means I speak of this horse's speed of wisdom. Idamassa vaṇṇasmiṃ vadāmī means I speak of this horse's quality of virtue. Idamassa ārohapariṇāhasmiṃ means I speak of this horse's height and roundness.

9. Assaparassasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Assaparassasutta Commentary

142.Navameassaparasseti assesu parasse.Purisaparasseti purisesu parasse, purisapuriseti attho. Imasmiṃ sutte tīṇi maggaphalāni kathitāni. Tattha ayaṃ tīhi maggehi ñāṇajavasampannoti veditabbo.

142. In the ninth, assaparasse means excellent among horses. Purisaparasse means excellent among men, meaning the best of men. In this sutta, the three paths and fruits are discussed. There, it should be understood that he is endowed with speed of wisdom through the three paths.

10. Assājānīyasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Assājānīyasutta Commentary

143.Dasamebhadreti bhaddake.Assājānīyeti kāraṇākāraṇaṃ jānanake asse.Purisājānīyesupi eseva nayo. Imasmiṃ sutte arahattaphalaṃ kathitaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ arahattamaggena ñāṇajavasampannoti veditabbo.

143. In the tenth, bhadre means excellent. Assājānīye means a horse that knows the cause and the non-cause. The same method applies to purisājānīyesu. In this sutta, the fruit of arahantship is discussed. There, it should be understood that he is endowed with speed of wisdom through the path of arahantship.

11. Paṭhamamoranivāpasuttavaṇṇanā
11. Paṭhamamoranivāpasutta Commentary

144.Ekādasameaccantaniṭṭhoti antaṃ atikkantaniṭṭho, akuppaniṭṭho dhuvaniṭṭhoti attho. Sesaṃ sadisameva.

144. In the eleventh, accantaniṭṭho means one whose end is exceedingly complete, whose end is unshakeable, whose end is permanent. The rest is similar.

12. Dutiyamoranivāpasuttavaṇṇanā
12. Commentary on the Second Moranivāpa Sutta

145.Dvādasameiddhipāṭihāriyenāti ijjhanakapāṭihāriyena.Ādesanāpāṭihāriyenāti ādisitvā apadisitvā kathanaanukathanakathāpāṭihāriyena.

145.In the twelfth [sutta], iddhipāṭihāriyena means by the miracle of psychic power (ijjhanakapāṭihāriya). Ādesanāpāṭihāriyena means by the miracle of teaching: the miracle of speaking, explaining, and recounting without prior instruction.

13. Tatiyamoranivāpasuttavaṇṇanā
13. Commentary on the Third Moranivāpa Sutta

146.Terasamesammādiṭṭhiyāti phalasamāpattatthāya sammādiṭṭhiyā.Sammāñāṇenāti phalañāṇena.Sammāvimuttiyāti sesehi phalasamāpattidhammehi. Imesu tīsupi suttesu khīṇāsavova kathitoti.

146.In the thirteenth [sutta], sammādiṭṭhiyā means with right view for the attainment of the fruition attainment (phalasamāpatti). Sammāñāṇena means with fruition knowledge (phalañāṇa). Sammāvimuttiyā means with the remaining qualities of fruition attainment. In these three suttas, only the Khīṇāsava is spoken of.

(15) 5. Maṅgalavaggo

(15) 5. The Chapter on Blessings

1-9. Akusalasuttādivaṇṇanā
1-9. Commentary on the Akusala Sutta, etc.

147-155.Pañcamassa paṭhameyathābhataṃ nikkhittoti yathā ānetvā ṭhapito. Dutiyesāvajjenāti sadosena. Tatiyevisamenāti sapakkhalanena.Samenāti apakkhalanena. Catuttheasucināti gūthasadisena aparisuddhena amejjhena.Sucināti parisuddhena mejjhena. Pañcamādīni uttānāneva.

147-155.In the first [sutta] of the fifth [chapter], yathābhataṃ nikkhitto means placed as it was brought. In the second, sāvajjenā means with fault. In the third, visamenā means with unevenness, with slipperiness. Samenā means without slipperiness. In the fourth, asucinā means with impurity, like excrement, unclean, unhygienic. Sucinā means pure, clean, hygienic. The fifth and the following are straightforward.

10. Pubbaṇhasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Commentary on the Pubbaṇha Sutta

156.Dasamesunakkhattantiādīsu yasmiṃ divase tayo sucaritadhammā pūritā honti, so divaso laddhanakkhattayogo nāma, tenassa sadāsunakkhattaṃnāma hotīti vuccati. Sveva divaso katamaṅgalo nāma hoti, tenassa sadāsumaṅgalanti vuccati. Pabhātampissa sadāsuppabhātameva, sayanato uṭṭhānampisuhuṭṭhitameva, khaṇopisukkhaṇova,muhuttopisumuhuttova. Ettha ca dasaccharapamāṇo kālo khaṇo nāma, tena khaṇena dasakkhaṇo kālo layo nāma, tena layena ca dasalayo kālo khaṇalayo nāma, tena dasaguṇo muhutto nāma, tena dasaguṇo khaṇamuhutto nāmāti ayaṃ vibhāgo veditabbo.Suyiṭṭhaṃ brahmacārisūti yasmiṃ divase tīṇi sucaritāni pūritāni, tadāssa seṭṭhacārīsu dinnadānaṃ suyiṭṭhaṃ nāma hoti.Padakkhiṇaṃ kāyakammanti taṃ divasaṃ tena kataṃ kāyakammaṃ vaḍḍhikāyakammaṃ nāma hoti. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo.Padakkhiṇāni katvānāti vaḍḍhiyuttāni kāyakammādīni katvā.Labhantatthe padakkhiṇeti padakkhiṇe vaḍḍhiattheyeva labhati. Sesaṃ uttānamevāti.

156.In the tenth [sutta], regarding sunakkhatta and so on, the day on which three kinds of good conduct are fulfilled is called a day with an auspicious constellation (laddhanakkhattayogo), therefore it is said that for him it is always sunakkhattaṃ, meaning auspicious constellation. That very day is called auspicious blessing (katamaṅgalo), therefore it is said that for him it is always sumaṅgalaṃ, meaning auspicious blessing. His dawn is always suppabhātaṃ, meaning good dawn; even his rising from bed is suhuṭṭhita, meaning good rising; even a moment is sukkhaṇo, meaning a good moment; even an instant is sumuhuttova, meaning a good instant. Here, it should be understood that a period of ten letters is called a moment (khaṇo), ten moments is called an instant (layo), ten instants is called a moment-instant (khaṇalayo), ten times that is called an muhutta, and ten times that is called a moment-muhutta. Suyiṭṭhaṃ brahmacārisū means on whatever day the three good conducts are fulfilled, on that day the alms given to those who are best in conduct is called suyiṭṭhaṃ, meaning well-sacrificed. Padakkhiṇaṃ kāyakammanti means that day the bodily action done by him is called increasing bodily action (vaḍḍhikāyakamma). The same method applies to the remaining terms. Padakkhiṇāni katvānā means having done bodily actions and so on that are endowed with increase (vaḍḍhi). Labhantatthe padakkhiṇe means he obtains only increasing benefits in the padakkhiṇa. The rest is straightforward.

Maṅgalavaggo pañcamo.

The Fifth Chapter on Blessings is concluded.

(16) 6. Acelakavaggavaṇṇanā

(16) 6. Commentary on the Acelaka Chapter

157-163.Ito paresuāgāḷhā paṭipadāti gāḷhā kakkhaḷā lobhavasena thiraggahaṇā.Nijjhāmāti attakilamathānuyogavasena suṭṭhu jhāmā santattā paritattā.Majjhimāti neva kakkhaḷā na jhāmā majjhe bhavā.Acelakoti niccelo naggo.Muttācāroti vissaṭṭhācāro, uccārakammādīsu lokiyakulaputtācārena virahito ṭhitakova uccāraṃ karoti, passāvaṃ karoti, khādati bhuñjati.Hatthāpalekhanoti hatthe piṇḍamhi niṭṭhite jivhāya hatthaṃ apalekhati, uccārampi katvā hatthasmiṃyeva daṇḍakasaññī hutvā hatthena apalekhati. Bhikkhāya gahaṇatthaṃ ‘‘ehi, bhadante’’ti vutto na etītina ehibhadantiko. ‘‘Tena hi tiṭṭha, bhante’’ti vuttopi na tiṭṭhatītina tiṭṭhabhadantiko. Tadubhayampi kira so ‘‘etassa vacanaṃ kataṃ bhavissatī’’ti na karoti.Abhihaṭanti puretaraṃ gahetvā āhaṭabhikkhaṃ.Uddissakatanti idaṃ tumhe uddissa katanti evamārocitabhikkhaṃ.Nimantananti ‘‘asukaṃ nāma kulaṃ vā vīthiṃ vā gāmaṃ vā paviseyyāthā’’ti evaṃ nimantitabhikkhampi na sādiyati na gaṇhāti.Na kumbhimukhāti kumbhito uddharitvā dīyamānaṃ bhikkhampi na gaṇhāti.Na kaḷopimukhāti kaḷopīti ukkhali vā pacchi vā, tatopi na gaṇhāti. Kasmā? ‘‘Kumbhikaḷopiyo maṃ nissāya kaṭacchunā pahāraṃ labhantī’’ti.Na eḷakamantaranti ummāraṃ antaraṃ katvā dīyamānaṃ na gaṇhāti. Kasmā? ‘‘Ayaṃ maṃ nissāya antarakaraṇaṃ labhatī’’ti.Daṇḍamusalesupi eseva nayo.Dvinnanti dvīsu bhuñjamānesu ekasmiṃ uṭṭhāya dente na gaṇhāti. Kasmā? Kabaḷantarāyo hotīti.

157-163.In the [suttas] following this, āgāḷhā paṭipadā means a firm, rigid practice, firmly adhered to due to greed. Nijjhāmā means thoroughly withered, heated, and scorched due to the practice of self-mortification (attakilamathānuyoga). Majjhimā means neither rigid nor withered, existing in the middle. Acelako means unclothed, naked. Muttācāro means one of abandoned conduct; in matters of excretion and so on, he acts without the propriety of ordinary people of good families: he stands and excretes, urinates, eats, and consumes. Hatthāpalekhano means when the alms-food in the hand is finished, he licks his hand with his tongue; even after excreting, he considers his hand like a stick and licks it with his hand. If he is told, "Come, venerable one," for the purpose of receiving alms, he does not come, therefore he is na ehibhadantiko. If he is told, "Then stay, venerable one," he still does not stay, therefore he is na tiṭṭhabhadantiko. It seems that he does not do both because he thinks, "An obligation to this person will be done." Abhihaṭa means alms-food brought after being taken earlier. Uddissakata means alms-food that has been announced, "This was done specifically for you." Nimantana means he does not accept or take alms-food to which he has been invited, such as, "You should enter such-and-such family or street or village." Na kumbhimukhā means he does not accept alms-food being given after being scooped from a pot. Na kaḷopimukhā means kaḷopī means a cooking pot or a basket; he does not accept from that either. Why? [Because he thinks,] "The pot and basket will receive a blow from the ladle on my account." Na eḷakamantara means he does not accept alms-food being given with a threshold in between. Why? "This person will incur separation on my account." The same method applies to daṇḍamusalesu. Dvinna means when two are eating, he does not accept from one who rises up and gives. Why? Because there would be an interruption of morsels.

Na gabbhiniyātiādīsu pana gabbhiniyā kucchiyaṃ dārako kilamati, pāyantiyā dārakassa khīrantarāyo hoti, purisantaragatāya ratiantarāyo hotīti na gaṇhāti.Na saṅkittīsūti saṅkittetvā katabhattesu. Dubbhikkhasamaye kira acelakasāvakā acelakānaṃ atthāya tato tato taṇḍulādīni samādapetvā bhattaṃ pacanti, ukkaṭṭhācelako tato na paṭiggaṇhāti.Na yattha sāti yattha sunakho ‘‘piṇḍaṃ labhissāmī’’ti upaṭṭhito hoti, tattha tassa adatvā āhaṭaṃ na gaṇhāti. Kasmā? Etassa piṇḍantarāyo hotīti.Saṇḍasaṇḍacārinīti samūhasamūhacārinī. Sace hi acelakaṃ disvā ‘‘imassa bhikkhaṃ dassāmā’’ti manussā bhattagehaṃ pavisanti, tesu ca pavisantesu kaḷopimukhādīsu nilīnā makkhikā uppatitvā saṇḍasaṇḍā caranti, tato āhaṭaṃ bhikkhaṃ na gaṇhāti. Kasmā? ‘‘Maṃ nissāya makkhikānaṃ gocarantarāyo jāto’’ti.

Furthermore, regarding Na gabbhiniyā and so on, he does not accept from a pregnant woman because the child labors in her womb; he does not accept from a nursing woman because there would be an interruption of milk for the child; he does not accept from a woman in between men because there would be an interruption of pleasure. Na saṅkittīsū means in alms-food prepared after arranging beforehand. It seems that in times of famine, disciples of the Acelakas collect rice and so on from here and there for the Acelakas and cook food, but the most austere Acelaka does not accept from that. Na yattha sā means where a dog is waiting, thinking, "I will get alms-food," he does not accept what is brought without giving to him. Why? Because there would be an interruption of alms-food for that [dog]. Saṇḍasaṇḍacārinī means one who goes about in groups. For if, seeing the Acelaka, people enter the dining hall thinking, "We will give alms-food to this one," and as they enter, flies hidden in the cooking pot and so on fly up and go about in groups, he does not accept alms-food brought from that. Why? "An interruption of feeding for the flies has arisen because of me."

Thusodakanti sabbasassasambhārehi katasovīrakaṃ. Ettha ca surāpānameva sāvajjaṃ, ayaṃ pana sabbesu sāvajjasaññī.Ekāgārikoti yo ekasmiṃyeva gehe bhikkhaṃ labhitvā nivattati.Ekālopikoti ekeneva ālopena yāpeti.Dvāgārikādīsupi eseva nayo.Ekissāpi dattiyāti ekāya dattiyā. Datti nāma ekā khuddakapāti hoti, yattha aggabhikkhaṃ pakkhipitvā ṭhapenti.Ekāhikanti ekadivasantarikaṃ.Addhamāsikanti addhamāsantarikaṃ.Pariyāyabhattabhojananti vārabhattabhojanaṃ, ekāhavārena dvīhavārena sattāhavārena addhamāsavārenāti evaṃ divasavārena ābhatabhattabhojanaṃ.Sākabhakkhotiādīni vuttatthāneva.

Thusodaka means sour gruel made with all kinds of grain ingredients. Here, only drinking alcohol is blameworthy, but this one perceives fault in everything. Ekāgāriko means one who returns after obtaining alms-food from only one house. Ekālopiko means one who sustains himself with only one morsel. The same method applies to dvāgārikādīsu. Ekissāpi dattiyā means with one ladleful. Datti means a small bowl where the first alms-food is put and kept. Ekāhika means with one day interval. Addhamāsika means with a half-month interval. Pariyāyabhattabhojana means eating turn-meal, eating alms-food brought in turn for one day, two days, seven days, or half a month. Sākabhakkho and the rest have the same meaning as previously stated.

Ubbhaṭṭhakoti uddhaṃ ṭhitako.Ukkuṭikappadhānamanuyuttoti ukkuṭikavīriyamanuyutto, gacchantopi ukkuṭikova hutvā uppatitvā uppatitvā gacchati.Kaṇṭakāpassayikoti ayakaṇṭake vā pakatikaṇṭake vā bhūmiyaṃ koṭṭetvā tattha cammaṃ attharitvā ṭhānacaṅkamādīni karoti.Seyyanti sayantopi tattheva seyyaṃ kappeti. Sāyaṃ tatiyamassātisāyatatiyakaṃ. Pāto majjhanhike sāyanti divasassa tikkhattuṃ ‘‘pāpaṃ pavāhessāmī’’ti udakorohanānuyogaṃ anuyutto viharati.

Ubbhaṭṭhako means one who stands upright. Ukkuṭikappadhānamanuyutto means one who is devoted to the practice of squatting; even while walking, he squats and goes jumping up and down. Kaṇṭakāpassayiko means one who spreads out a hide on the ground after setting iron thorns or natural thorns into it, and does standing, walking, and so on there. Seyya means even when lying down, he arranges his lying down right there. Sāyaṃ tatiyamassāti means sāyatatiyakaṃ; in the morning, at midday, and in the evening, he lives devoted to the practice of going down to the water, thinking, "I will wash away evil" three times a day.

Kāye kāyānupassītiādīni heṭṭhā ekakanipātavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbāni.Ayaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, majjhimā paṭipadāti, bhikkhave, ayaṃ kāmasukhallikānuyogañca attakilamathānuyogañcāti dve ante anupagatā, sassatucchedantehi vā vimuttā majjhimā paṭipadāti veditabbā.

Kāye kāyānupassī and so on should be understood in the same way as stated in the Commentary on the Eka-nipāta below. Ayaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, majjhimā paṭipadāti, O monks, this is called the Middle Way (majjhimā paṭipadā) because it does not approach the two extremes of indulgence in sensual pleasures (kāmasukhallikānuyoga) and self-mortification (attakilamathānuyoga), or because it is freed from the eternalism and annihilationism.

17-18. Peyyālavaggādivaṇṇanā

17-18. Commentary on the Peyyāla Chapter, etc.

164-184.Samanuññoti samānajjhāsayo.Rāgassāti pañcakāmaguṇikarāgassa.Abhiññāyāti abhijānanatthaṃ.Suññato samādhītiādīhi tīhipi samādhīhi vipassanāva kathitā. Vipassanā hi niccābhinivesa-niccanimitta-niccapaṇidhiādīnaṃ abhāvā imāni nāmāni labhati.Pariññāyāti parijānanatthaṃ. Sesapadesupi eseva nayoti.

164-184.Samanuñño means of the same inclination. Rāgassā means of the lust for the five strands of sensual pleasure. Abhiññāyā means for the purpose of direct knowledge. Suññato samādhī and so on, Vipassanā (insight) alone is spoken of with these three kinds of samādhi. Indeed, Vipassanā receives these names because of the absence of perceptions of permanence (niccābhinivesa), signs of permanence (niccanimitta), and resolutions of permanence (niccapaṇidhi). Pariññāyā means for the purpose of complete understanding. The same method applies to the remaining terms.

Manorathapūraṇiyā aṅguttaranikāya-aṭṭhakathāya

In the Manorathapūraṇī, the Commentary on the Aṅguttara Nikāya,

. Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa.

. Homage to the Blessed One, the Worthy One, the Perfectly Self-Enlightened One.

Aṅguttaranikāye

In the Aṅguttara Nikāya

Catukkanipāta-aṭṭhakathā

Commentary on the Catukka-nipāta

1. Paṭhamapaṇṇāsakaṃ

1. The First Fifty

1. Bhaṇḍagāmavaggo

1. The Bhaṇḍagāma Chapter

1. Anubuddhasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Commentary on the Anubuddha Sutta

1.Catukkanipātassa paṭhameananubodhāti abujjhanena ajānanena.Appaṭivedhāti appaṭivijjhanena apaccakkhakiriyāya.Dīghamaddhānanti cirakālaṃ.Sandhāvitanti bhavato bhavaṃ gamanavasena sandhāvitaṃ.Saṃsaritanti punappunaṃ gamanāgamanavasena saṃsaritaṃ.Mamañceva tumhākañcāti mayā ca tumhehi ca. Atha vāsandhāvitaṃ saṃsaritanti sandhāvanaṃ saṃsaraṇaṃ mamañceva tumhākañca ahosīti evamettha attho veditabbo.Ariyassāti niddosassa. Sīlaṃ samādhi paññāti ime pana tayo dhammā maggaphalasampayuttāva veditabbā, vimuttināmena phalameva niddiṭṭhaṃ.Bhavataṇhāti bhavesu taṇhā.Bhavanettīti bhavarajju. Taṇhāya eva etaṃ nāmaṃ. Tāya hi sattā goṇā viya gīvāya bandhitvā taṃ taṃ bhavaṃ nīyanti, tasmā bhavanettīti vuccati.

1.In the first [sutta] of the Catukka-nipāta, ananubodhā means by not awakening, by not knowing. Appaṭivedhā means by not penetrating, by not directly realizing. Dīghamaddhāna means for a long time. Sandhāvita means having wandered in dependence on going from existence to existence. Saṃsarita means having transmigrated in dependence on repeatedly going and coming. Mamañceva tumhākañcā means by me and by you. Alternatively, sandhāvitaṃ saṃsarita means the wandering and transmigrating was both mine and yours; the meaning here should be understood in this way. Ariyassā means of the faultless one. However, these three qualities—virtue, concentration, and wisdom—should be understood as associated with the path and the fruit; only the fruit is indicated by the name "liberation." Bhavataṇhā means craving in existences. Bhavanettī means the rope of existence. This is a name for craving itself. For by it beings are led to that particular existence, bound by the neck like oxen; therefore it is called the rope of existence.

Anuttarāti lokuttarā.Dukkhassantakaroti vaṭṭadukkhassa antakaro.Cakkhumāti pañcahi cakkhūhi cakkhumā.Parinibbutoti kilesaparinibbānena parinibbuto. Idamassa bodhimaṇḍe paṭhamaparinibbānaṃ, pacchā pana yamakasālānamantare anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbutoti yathānusandhinā desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesi.

Anuttarā means unsurpassed. Dukkhassantakaro means the ender of the suffering of the round. Cakkhumā means one with the five eyes. Parinibbuto means fully extinguished by the extinction of defilements. This was his first full extinction at the Bodhi-maṇḍa, but later he was fully extinguished in the Nibbāna-element without remainder of clinging in between the twin Sala trees; thus he concluded the discourse in accordance with the connection.

2. Papatitasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Commentary on the Papatita Sutta

2.Dutiyepapatitoti patito cuto.Appapatitoti apatito patiṭṭhito. Tattha lokiyamahājano patitoyeva nāma, sotāpannādayo kilesuppattikkhaṇe patitā nāma, khīṇāsavo ekantapatiṭṭhito nāma.

2.In the second [sutta], papatito means fallen, deceased. Appapatito means not fallen, established. Therein, ordinary people are indeed called fallen; those who are stream-enterers and so on are called fallen at the moment of the arising of defilements; the Khīṇāsava is called completely established.

Cutāpatantīti ye cutā, te patanti nāma.Patitāti ye patitā, te cutā nāma. Cutattā patitā, patitattā cutāti attho.Giddhāti rāgarattā.Punarāgatāti puna jātiṃ puna jaraṃ puna byādhiṃ puna maraṇaṃ āgatā nāma honti.Kataṃ kiccanti catūhi maggehi kattabbakiccaṃ kataṃ.Rataṃ rammanti ramitabbayuttake guṇajāte ramitaṃ.Sukhenānvāgataṃ sukhanti sukhena sukhaṃ anuāgataṃ sampattaṃ. Mānusakasukhena dibbasukhaṃ, jhānasukhena vipassanāsukhaṃ, vipassanāsukhena maggasukhaṃ, maggasukhena phalasukhaṃ, phalasukhena nibbānasukhaṃ sampattaṃ adhigatanti attho.

Cutā patantī means those who have passed away are called falling. Patitā means those who have fallen are called passed away. The meaning is that they have fallen because they have passed away, and they have passed away because they have fallen. Giddhā means attached to lust. Punarāgatā means they have come again to birth, again to old age, again to disease, again to death. Kataṃ kicca means the task to be done has been done by the four paths. Rataṃ ramma means he has delighted in the mass of qualities that are fit to be delighted in. Sukhenānvāgataṃ sukha means happiness has come after happiness, has been attained. The meaning is that heavenly happiness has been attained by human happiness, insight happiness by jhāna happiness, path happiness by insight happiness, fruition happiness by path happiness, and Nibbāna happiness by fruition happiness.

3. Paṭhamakhatasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Commentary on the First Khata Sutta

3.Tatiyaṃ dukanipātavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttameva. Gāthāsu pananindiyanti ninditabbayuttakaṃ.Nindatīti garahati.Pasaṃsiyoti pasaṃsitabbayutto.Vicināti mukhena so kalinti yo evaṃ pavatto, tena mukhena kaliṃ vicināti nāma.Kalinā tena sukhaṃ na vindatīti tena ca kalinā sukhaṃ na paṭilabhati.Sabbassāpi sahāpi attanāti sabbenapi sakena dhanena ceva attanā ca saddhiṃ yo parājayo, so appamattakova kalīti attho.Yo sugatesūti yo pana sammaggatesu puggalesu cittaṃ padusseyya, ayaṃ cittapadosova tato kalito mahantataro kali. Idāni tassa mahantatarabhāvaṃ dassentosataṃ sahassānantiādimāha. Tatthasataṃ sahassānanti nirabbudagaṇanāya satasahassaṃ.Chattiṃsatīti aparāni ca chattiṃsati nirabbudāni.Pañca cāti abbudagaṇanāya ca pañca abbudāni.Yamariyagarahīti yaṃ ariye garahanto nirayaṃ upapajjati, tattha ettakaṃ āyuppamāṇanti.

3.The third [sutta] is the same as stated in the Commentary on the Duka-nipāta. However, in the verses, nindiya means fit to be blamed. Nindatī means reproaches. Pasaṃsiyo means fit to be praised. Vicināti mukhena so kali means he who is thus behaving chooses strife (kali) with his mouth. Kalinā tena sukhaṃ na vindatī means he does not obtain happiness with that strife. Sabbassāpi sahāpi attanā means the destruction, even with all one's wealth and with oneself, that is slight strife. Yo sugatesū means whoever should corrupt the mind towards those who have gone well, this corruption of mind is a greater strife than that. Now, showing its greater nature, he said sataṃ sahassāna and so on. Therein, sataṃ sahassāna means a hundred thousand in the Nirabbuda count. Chattiṃsatī means and another thirty-six Nirabbudas. Pañca cā means and five Abbudas in the Abbuda count. Yamariyagarahī means the duration of life there, where one falls into hell, blaming the noble ones.

4. Dutiyakhatasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Commentary on the Second Khata Sutta

4.Catutthemātari pitari cātiādīsu mittavindako mātari micchāpaṭipanno nāma, ajātasattu pitari micchāpaṭipanno nāma, devadatto tathāgate micchāpaṭipanno nāma, kokāliko tathāgatasāvake micchāpaṭipanno nāma.Bahuñcāti bahukameva.Pasavatīti paṭilabhati.Tāyāti tāya micchāpaṭipattisaṅkhātāya adhammacariyāya.Peccāti ito gantvā.Apāyaṃ gacchatīti nirayādīsu aññatarasmiṃ nibbattati. Sukkapakkhepi eseva nayo.

4.In the fourth [sutta], regarding mātari pitari cā and so on, Mittavindaka was wrongly devoted to his mother; Ajātasattu was wrongly devoted to his father; Devadatta was wrongly devoted to the Tathāgata; Kokālika was wrongly devoted to the disciple of the Tathāgata. Bahuñcā means very much indeed. Pasavatī means obtains. Tāyā means by that unrighteous conduct consisting of wrong devotion. Peccā means having gone from here. Apāyaṃ gacchatī means is reborn in one of the woeful states, such as hell. The same method applies to the bright side.

5. Anusotasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Commentary on the Anusota Sutta

5.Pañcame anusotaṃ gacchatītianusotagāmī. Kilesasotassa paccanīkapaṭipattiyā paṭisotaṃ gacchatītipaṭisotagāmī.Ṭhitattoti ṭhitasabhāvo.Tiṇṇoti oghaṃ taritvā ṭhito.Pāraṅgatoti paratīraṃ gato.Thale tiṭṭhatīti nibbānathale tiṭṭhati.Brāhmaṇoti seṭṭho niddoso.Idhāti imasmiṃ loke.Kāme ca paṭisevatīti kilesakāmehi vatthukāme paṭisevati.Pāpañca kammaṃ karotīti pāpañca pāṇātipātādikammaṃ karoti.Pāpañca kammaṃ na karotīti pañcaverakammaṃ na karoti.Ayaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, ṭhitattoti ayaṃ anāgāmī puggalo tasmā lokā puna paṭisandhivasena anāgamanato ṭhitatto nāma.

5. In the fifth, anusotagāmī means one who goes along with the stream (anusota). Paṭisotagāmī means one who goes against the stream, by practicing the opposite of the stream of defilements. Ṭhitatto means one whose nature is stable. Tiṇṇo means one who has crossed over the flood. Pāraṅgato means one who has gone to the far shore. Thale tiṭṭhatī means one who stands on the dry land of Nibbāna. Brāhmaṇo means the best, the faultless one. Idhā means in this world. Kāme ca paṭisevatī means one indulges in sense pleasures and the objects of sense pleasures. Pāpañca kammaṃ karotī means one commits evil deeds such as killing living beings. Pāpañca kammaṃ na karotī means one does not commit the five kinds of evil deeds. Ayaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, ṭhitatto means this Anāgāmī individual is called ṭhitatto because he does not come again from that world in the manner of rebirth.

Taṇhādhipannāti taṇhāya adhipannā ajjhotthaṭā, taṇhaṃ vā adhipannā ajjhogāḷhā.Paripuṇṇasekhoti sikkhāpāripūriyā ṭhito.Aparihānadhammoti aparihīnasabhāvo.Cetovasippattoti cittavasībhāvaṃ patto. Evarūpo khīṇāsavo hoti, idha pana anāgāmī kathito.Samāhitindriyoti samāhitachaḷindriyo.Paroparāti parovarā uttamalāmakā, kusalākusalāti attho.Sameccāti ñāṇena samāgantvā.Vidhūpitāti viddhaṃsitā jhāpitā vā.Vusitabrahmacariyoti maggabrahmacariyaṃ vasitvā ṭhito.Lokantagūti tividhassāpi lokassa antaṃ gato.Pāragatoti chahākārehi pāragato. Idha khīṇāsavova kathito. Iti suttepi gāthāsupi vaṭṭavivaṭṭameva kathitaṃ.

Taṇhādhipannā means overwhelmed by craving, overcome, or deeply immersed in craving. Paripuṇṇasekho means one who is perfect in training. Aparihānadhammo means one whose nature is not subject to decline. Cetovasippatto means one who has attained mastery over the mind. Such a one is a Khīṇāsava, but here it refers to an Anāgāmī. Samāhitindriyo means one whose six senses are composed. Paroparā means superior and inferior, the best and the worst, meaning skillful and unskillful. Sameccā means having come together with knowledge. Vidhūpitā means destroyed or burnt up. Vusitabrahmacariyo means one who has lived the holy life of the path. Lokantagū means one who has gone to the end of the triple world. Pāragato means one who has gone to the far shore in six ways. Here, it refers to a Khīṇāsava. Thus, in both the Sutta and the Gāthās, only the round and release are spoken of.

6. Appassutasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Commentary on the Appassuta Sutta

6.Chaṭṭheanupapannoti anupāgato.Suttantiādīsu ubhatovibhaṅganiddesakhandhakaparivārasuttanipātamaṅgalasuttaratanasutta- nāḷakasuttatuvaṭakasuttāni, aññampi ca suttanāmakaṃ tathāgatavacanaṃsuttanti veditabbaṃ. Sabbampi sagāthakaṃ suttaṃgeyyanti veditabbaṃ, visesena saṃyuttake sakalopi sagāthāvaggo. Sakalampi abhidhammapiṭakaṃ, niggāthakasuttaṃ, yañca aññampi aṭṭhahi aṅgehi asaṅgahitaṃ buddhavacanaṃ, taṃveyyākaraṇanti veditabbaṃ. Dhammapada-theragāthā-therigāthā suttanipāte nosuttanāmikā suddhikagāthā cagāthāti veditabbā. Somanassañāṇamayikagāthāpaṭisaṃyuttā dveasīti suttantāudānanti veditabbā. ‘‘Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā’’tiādinayappavattā dasuttarasatasuttantāitivuttakanti veditabbā. Apaṇṇakajātakādīni paññāsādhikāni pañca jātakasatānijātakanti veditabbāni. ‘‘Cattārome, bhikkhave, acchariyā abbhutā dhammā ānande’’tiādinayappavattā sabbepi acchariyaabbhutadhammapaṭisaṃyuttā suttantāabbhutadhammanti veditabbā. Cūḷavedallamahāvedallasammādiṭṭhisakkapañhasaṅkhārabhājaniyamahāpuṇṇamasuttādayo sabbepi vedañca tuṭṭhiñca laddhā laddhā pucchitā suttantāvedallanti veditabbā.Na atthamaññāya na dhammamaññāyāti aṭṭhakathañca pāḷiñca ajānitvā.Dhammānudhammappaṭipannoti navalokuttaradhammassa anurūpadhammaṃ sahasīlaṃ pubbabhāgapaṭipadaṃ na paṭipanno hoti. Iminā upāyena sabbavāresu attho veditabbo. Paṭhamavāre panettha appassutadussīlo kathito, dutiye appassutakhīṇāsavo, tatiye bahussutadussīlo, catutthe bahussutakhīṇāsavo.

6. In the sixth, anupapanno means not approached. Among Sutta etc., Ubhatovibhaṅga, Niddesa, Khandhaka, Parivāra, Suttanipāta, Maṅgala Sutta, Ratana Sutta, Nāḷaka Sutta, Tuvaṭaka Sutta, and any other teachings of the Tathāgata called Sutta should be understood as Sutta. All Suttas with Gāthās should be understood as Geyya, especially the entire Sagāthā Vagga in the Saṃyutta Nikāya. The entire Abhidhamma Piṭaka, Suttas without Gāthās, and any other teachings of the Buddha not included in the eight Aṅgas should be understood as Veyyākaraṇa. Dhammapada, Theragāthā, Therīgāthā, and the purification Gāthās in the Suttanipāta that are not named Sutta are to be understood as Gāthā. Eighty-two Suttas connected with Gāthās consisting of joy and knowledge are to be understood as Udāna. One hundred and ten Suttas beginning with "Vuttañhetaṃ Bhagavatā" (Iti 22) are to be understood as Itivuttaka. The five hundred and fifty Jātakas beginning with Apaṇṇaka Jātaka are to be understood as Jātaka. All Suttas connected with wonderful and marvelous things, beginning with "Cattārome, bhikkhave, acchariyā abbhutā dhammā ānande" (A.V,178) are to be understood as Abbhutadhamma. All Suttas asked after gaining knowledge and satisfaction, such as Cūḷavedalla, Mahāvedalla, Sammādiṭṭhi, Sakkapañha, Saṅkhārabhājaniya, and Mahāpuṇṇama Sutta, are to be understood as Vedalla. Na atthamaññāya na dhammamaññāyā means without knowing the Aṭṭhakathā and the Pāḷi. Dhammānudhammappaṭipanno means one does not practice the Dhamma that accords with the Noble Eightfold Path, the associated virtue, and the preliminary practice. In this way, the meaning should be understood in all instances. In the first instance here, a person of little learning and poor virtue is spoken of; in the second, a person of little learning who is a Khīṇāsava; in the third, a person of great learning and poor virtue; and in the fourth, a person of great learning who is a Khīṇāsava.

Sīlesuasamāhitoti sīlesu aparipūrakārī.Sīlato ca sutena cāti sīlabhāgena ca sutabhāgena ca ‘‘ayaṃ dussīlo appassuto’’ti evaṃ taṃ garahantīti attho.Tassa sampajjate sutanti tassa puggalassa yasmā tena sutena sutakiccaṃ kataṃ, tasmā tassa sutaṃ sampajjati nāma.Nāssa sampajjateti sutakiccassa akatattā na sampajjati.Dhammadharanti sutadhammānaṃ ādhārabhūtaṃ.Sappaññanti supaññaṃ.Nekkhaṃ jambonadassevāti jambunadaṃ vuccati jātisuvaṇṇaṃ, tassa jambunadassa nekkhaṃ viya, pañcasuvaṇṇaparimāṇaṃ suvaṇṇaghaṭikaṃ viyāti attho.

Sīlesu asamāhito means one who does not fulfill the virtues. Sīlato ca sutena cā means, "Because of his lack of virtue and learning," they criticize him in this way, saying, "This person is of poor virtue and little learning." Tassa sampajjate suta means that for that person, since the task of learning has been done by that learning, therefore, his learning is accomplished. Nāssa sampajjate means it is not accomplished because the task of learning has not been done. Dhammadhara means the basis of the learned teachings. Sappañña means of good wisdom. Nekkhaṃ jambonadassevā means jambunada is called the finest gold; like a nekkha of that jambunada, like a golden ornament of five suvaṇṇa in measure.

7. Sobhanasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Commentary on the Sobhana Sutta

7.Sattameviyattāti paññāveyyattiyena samannāgatā.Vinītāti vinayaṃ upetā suvinītā.Visāradāti vesārajjena somanassasahagatena ñāṇena samannāgatā.Dhammadharāti sutadhammānaṃ ādhārabhūtā.Bhikkhu ca sīlasampannoti gāthāya kiñcāpi ekekasseva ekeko guṇo kathito, sabbesaṃ pana sabbepi vaṭṭantīti.

7. In the seventh, viyattā means endowed with clarity of wisdom. Vinītā means well-disciplined, having approached discipline. Visāradā means endowed with joyous confidence and knowledge. Dhammadharā means the basis of the learned teachings. Bhikkhu ca sīlasampanno means, although in the Gāthā only one quality is spoken of for each individual, all qualities are applicable to all.

8. Vesārajjasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Commentary on the Vesārajja Sutta

8.Aṭṭhamevesārajjānīti ettha sārajjapaṭipakkho vesārajjaṃ, catūsu ṭhānesu sārajjābhāvaṃ paccavekkhantassa uppannasomanassamayañāṇassetaṃ nāmaṃ.Āsabhaṃ ṭhānanti seṭṭhaṭṭhānaṃ uttamaṭṭhānaṃ. Āsabhā vā pubbabuddhā, tesaṃ ṭhānanti attho. Apica gavasatajeṭṭhako usabho, gavasahassajeṭṭhako vasabho. Vajasatajeṭṭhako vā usabho, vajasahassajeṭṭhako vasabho, sabbagavaseṭṭho sabbaparissayasaho seto pāsādiko mahābhāravaho asanisatasaddehipi asampakampiyo nisabho, so idha usabhoti adhippeto. Idampi hi tassa pariyāyavacanaṃ. Usabhassa idantiāsabhaṃ. Ṭhānanti catūhi pādehi pathaviṃ uppīḷetvā vavatthānaṃ. Idaṃ pana āsabhaṃ viyāti āsabhaṃ. Yatheva hi nisabhasaṅkhāto usabho catūhi pādehi pathaviṃ uppīḷetvā acalaṭṭhānena tiṭṭhati, evaṃ tathāgatopi catūhi vesārajjapādehi aṭṭhaparisapathaviṃ uppīḷetvā sadevake loke kenaci paccatthikena paccāmittena akampiyo acalaṭṭhānena tiṭṭhati. Evaṃ tiṭṭhamānova taṃ āsabhaṃ ṭhānaṃ paṭijānāti upagacchati na paccakkhāti, attani āropeti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘āsabhaṃ ṭhānaṃ paṭijānātī’’ti.

8. In the eighth, vesārajjānī means confidence, which is the opposite of fear (sārajja); this is the name for the joyous knowledge that arises in one who reflects on the absence of fear in the four instances. Āsabhaṃ ṭhāna means the best place, the supreme place. Or, Āsabha are the former Buddhas; it means the place of those Buddhas. Moreover, usabha is superior to a hundred cows, and vasabha is superior to a thousand cows. Or, usabha is superior to a hundred bulls, and vasabha is superior to a thousand bulls; the white bull, which is the best of all cattle, tolerant of all hardships, pleasing, able to bear great burdens, and unshaken even by the sound of a hundred thunderbolts, is the nisabha, and that is what is meant here by usabha. This is another term for him. Āsabhaṃ means belonging to the usabha. Ṭhāna means standing firmly by pressing the earth with its four feet. However, this is āsabhaṃ like the āsabha. Just as the usabha called nisabha stands firmly and immovably by pressing the earth with its four feet, so too, the Tathāgata stands immovably and unshaken by any opponent or enemy in the world with its deities, pressing the earth of the eight assemblies with the four feet of confidence. Standing thus, he acknowledges, undertakes, and does not reject that āsabhaṃ ṭhānaṃ, but establishes it in himself. Therefore, it is said, "āsabhaṃ ṭhānaṃ paṭijānāti."

Parisāsūti aṭṭhasu parisāsu.Sīhanādaṃ nadatīti seṭṭhanādaṃ abhītanādaṃ nadati, sīhanādasadisaṃ vā nādaṃ nadati. Ayamattho sīhanādasuttena dassetabbo. Yathā vā sīho sahanato ca hananato ca sīhoti vuccati, evaṃ tathāgato lokadhammānaṃ sahanato parappavādānañca hananato sīhoti vuccati. Evaṃ vuttassa sīhassa nādaṃ sīhanādaṃ. Tattha yathā sīho sīhabalena samannāgato sabbattha visārado vigatalomahaṃso sīhanādaṃ nadati, evaṃ tathāgatasīhopi tathāgatabalehi samannāgato aṭṭhasu parisāsu visārado vigatalomahaṃso ‘‘iti rūpa’’ntiādinā nayena nānāvidhadesanāvilāsasampannaṃ sīhanādaṃ nadati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘parisāsu sīhanādaṃ nadatī’’ti.

Parisāsū means in the eight assemblies. Sīhanādaṃ nadatī means utters the best roar, the fearless roar, or utters a roar like the roar of a lion. This meaning should be shown by the Sīhanāda Sutta (M.I,63). Or, just as a lion is called a lion because of its tolerance and its killing, so too, the Tathāgata is called a lion because of his tolerance of worldly conditions and his destruction of the views of others. The roar of such a lion, thus spoken of, is the lion's roar. Therein, just as a lion, endowed with the strength of a lion, confident everywhere, and free from fear, utters a lion's roar, so too, the Tathāgata-lion, endowed with the strengths of the Tathāgata, confident in the eight assemblies, and free from fear, utters a lion's roar, rich in various modes of teaching, in the manner of "iti rūpaṃ". Therefore, it is said, "parisāsu sīhanādaṃ nadati."

Brahmacakkaṃpavattetīti etthabrahmanti seṭṭhaṃ uttamaṃ visuddhaṃ. Cakkasaddo panāyaṃ –

Brahmacakkaṃ pavattetīti, here, brahma means the best, the supreme, the pure. The word cakka (wheel) is seen in these meanings:—

‘‘Sampattiyaṃ lakkhaṇe ca, rathaṅge iriyāpathe;

‘‘In prosperity, characteristic, chariot wheel, posture;
In giving, jewel, Dhamma, breast, and so on;
Here in Dhamma wheel it's meant, which is to be distinguished in two ways.’’

‘‘Cattārimāni, bhikkhave, cakkāni, yehi samannāgatānaṃ devamanussāna’’ntiādīsu (a. ni. 4.31) hi ayaṃ sampattiyaṃ dissati. ‘‘Pādatalesu cakkāni jātānī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.35) ettha lakkhaṇe. ‘‘Cakkaṃva vahato pada’’nti (dha. pa. 1) ettha rathaṅge. ‘‘Catucakkaṃ navadvāra’’nti (saṃ. ni. 1.29) ettha iriyāpathe. ‘‘Dadaṃ bhuñja mā ca pamādo, cakkaṃ vattaya sabbapāṇina’’nti (jā. 1.7.149) ettha dāne. ‘‘Dibbaṃ cakkaratanaṃ pāturahosī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.243; ma. ni. 3.256) ettha ratanacakke. ‘‘Mayā pavattitaṃ cakka’’nti (su. ni. 562) ettha dhammacakke. ‘‘Icchāhatassa posassa, cakkaṃ bhamati matthake’’ti (jā. 1.1.104; 1.5.103) ettha uracakke. ‘‘Khurapariyantena cepi cakkenā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.166) ettha paharaṇacakke. ‘‘Asanivicakka’’nti (dī. ni. 3.61; saṃ. ni. 2.162) ettha asanimaṇḍale. Idha panāyaṃ dhammacakke mato.

For here, in "Cattārimāni, bhikkhave, cakkāni, yehi samannāgatānaṃ devamanussānaṃ" (A.IV,31), it is seen in the sense of prosperity. In "Pādatalesu cakkāni jātāni" (D.II,17), in the sense of characteristic. In "Cakkaṃva vahato padaṃ" (Dhp.1), in the sense of chariot wheel. In "Catucakkaṃ navadvāraṃ" (S.I,50), in the sense of posture. In "Dadaṃ bhuñja mā ca pamādo, cakkaṃ vattaya sabbapāṇinaṃ" (Ja.I,7,149), in the sense of giving. In "Dibbaṃ cakkaratanaṃ pāturahosī" (D.II,174; M.III,125), in the sense of jewel wheel. In "Mayā pavattitaṃ cakkaṃ" (Sn.562), in the sense of Dhamma wheel. In "Icchāhatassa posassa, cakkaṃ bhamati matthake" (Ja.I,1,104; I,5,103), in the sense of breast. In "Khurapariyantena cepi cakkenā" (D.I,52), in the sense of weapon wheel. In "Asanivicakka" (D.III,25; S.II,222), in the sense of thunderbolt circle. Here, however, it is meant in the sense of Dhamma wheel.

Taṃ panetaṃ dhammacakkaṃ duvidhaṃ hoti paṭivedhañāṇañca desanāñāṇañca. Tattha paññāpabhāvitaṃ attano ariyaphalāvahaṃ paṭivedhañāṇaṃ, karuṇāpabhāvitaṃ sāvakānaṃ ariyaphalāvahaṃ desanāñāṇaṃ. Tattha paṭivedhañāṇaṃ uppajjamānaṃ uppannanti duvidhaṃ. Tañhi abhinikkhamanato yāva arahattamaggā uppajjamānaṃ, phalakkhaṇe uppannaṃ nāma. Tusitabhavanato vā yāva mahābodhipallaṅke arahattamaggā uppajjamānaṃ, phalakkhaṇe uppannaṃ nāma. Dīpaṅkarato paṭṭhāya vā yāva bodhipallaṅke arahattamaggā uppajjamānaṃ, phalakkhaṇe uppannaṃ nāma. Desanāñāṇampi pavattamānaṃ pavattanti duvidhaṃ. Tañhi yāva aññāsikoṇḍaññassa sotāpattimaggā pavattamānaṃ, phalakkhaṇe pavattaṃ nāma. Tesu paṭivedhañāṇaṃ lokuttaraṃ, desanāñāṇaṃ lokiyaṃ. Ubhayampi panetaṃ aññehi asādhāraṇaṃ, buddhānaṃyeva orasañāṇaṃ.

That Dhamma wheel is of two kinds: the knowledge of penetration and the knowledge of teaching. Therein, the knowledge of penetration, developed by wisdom, brings to oneself the noble fruits; the knowledge of teaching, developed by compassion, brings to the disciples the noble fruits. Therein, the knowledge of penetration is of two kinds: arising and arisen. For indeed, the arising is from the time of renunciation up to the path of Arahatship, and the arisen is at the moment of fruition. Or, the arising is from the Tusita heaven up to the path of Arahatship at the Great Bodhi Platform, and the arisen is at the moment of fruition. Or, the arising is from the time of Dīpaṅkara Buddha up to the path of Arahatship at the Bodhi Platform, and the arisen is at the moment of fruition. The knowledge of teaching is also of two kinds: proceeding and proceeded. For indeed, the proceeding is up to the path of Sotāpatti of Aññāsikoṇḍañña, and the proceeded is at the moment of fruition. Among these, the knowledge of penetration is supramundane, and the knowledge of teaching is mundane. However, both of these are unique, the genuine knowledge of the Buddhas alone.

Sammāsambuddhassa te paṭijānatoti ‘‘ahaṃ sammāsambuddho, sabbe dhammā mayā abhisambuddhā’’ti evaṃ paṭijānato tava.Anabhisambuddhāti ime nāma dhammā tayā anabhisambuddhā.Tatra vatāti tesu ‘‘anabhisambuddhā’’ti evaṃ dassitadhammesu.Sahadhammenāti sahetunā sakāraṇena vacanena.Nimittametanti ettha puggalopi dhammopi nimittanti adhippeto. Taṃ puggalaṃ na passāmi, yo maṃ paṭicodessati. Taṃ dhammaṃ na passāmi, yaṃ dassetvā ‘‘ayaṃ nāma dhammo tayā anabhisambuddho’’ti maṃ paṭicodessatīti ayamettha attho.Khemappattoti khemaṃ patto. Sesapadadvayaṃ imasseva vevacanaṃ. Sabbampetaṃ vesārajjañāṇameva sandhāya vuttaṃ. Dasabalassa hi ‘‘ayaṃ nāma dhammo tayā anabhisambuddho’’ti codakaṃ puggalaṃ vā codanākāraṇaṃ anabhisambuddhadhammaṃ vā apassato ‘‘sabhāvabuddhoyeva vata samāno ahaṃ buddhosmīti vadāmī’’ti paccavekkhantassa balavataraṃ somanassaṃ uppajjati, tena sampayuttaṃ ñāṇaṃ vesārajjaṃ nāma. Taṃ sandhāya ‘‘khemappatto’’tiādimāha. Evaṃ sabbattha attho veditabbo.

Sammāsambuddhassa te paṭijānato means, to you who claim to be a Sammāsambuddha, saying, "I am a Sammāsambuddha; all Dhammas have been fully awakened to by me." Anabhisambuddhā means, these Dhammas have not been fully awakened to by you. Tatra vata means in those Dhammas shown as "not fully awakened to." Sahadhammenā means with reasoned and causal words. Nimittametaṃ means here, both the individual and the Dhamma are intended as the cause. "I do not see that individual who will challenge me. I do not see that Dhamma which, having shown, will challenge me, saying, 'This Dhamma has not been fully awakened to by you.'" This is the meaning here. Khemappatto means attained to safety. The remaining two words are synonyms for this. All this was said with reference to the knowledge of confidence. For when the Ten-Powered One does not see an individual who challenges, or a reason for challenge, or a Dhamma not fully awakened to, saying, "Being one who is naturally awakened, I say that I am a Buddha," then a stronger joy arises in him as he reflects, and the knowledge associated with that is called confidence (vesārajja). Referring to that, he said, "khemappatto" etc. In this way, the meaning should be understood everywhere.

Antarāyikā dhammāti ettha pana antarāyaṃ karontītiantarāyikā. Te atthato sañcicca vītikkantā satta āpattikkhandhā. Sañcicca vītikkantaṃ hi antamaso dukkaṭadubbhāsitampi maggaphalānaṃ antarāyaṃ karoti. Idha pana methunadhammo adhippeto. Methunaṃ sevato hi yassa kassaci nissaṃsayameva maggaphalānaṃ antarāyo hoti.

Antarāyikā dhammā means, here, antarāyikā are those that cause obstruction. In meaning, they are the seven groups of offenses intentionally transgressed. For intentionally transgressing, even the least offense of wrong-doing or wrong-speaking, obstructs the paths and fruits. Here, sexual intercourse is intended. For anyone who engages in sexual intercourse undoubtedly has an obstruction to the paths and fruits.

Yassa kho pana te atthāyāti rāgakkhayādīsu yassa atthāya.Dhammo desitoti asubhabhāvanādidhammo kathito.Tatra vata manti tasmiṃ aniyyānikadhamme maṃ. Sesaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.

Yassa kho pana te atthāyā means for whatever purpose of yours, such as the destruction of craving. Dhammo desito means the Dhamma, such as the contemplation of unattractiveness, has been taught. Tatra vata maṃ means me, in that non-leading-out Dhamma. The rest should be understood in the same way as said before.

Vādapathāti vādāyeva.Puthūti bahū.Sitāti upanibaddhā abhisaṅkhatā. Atha vāputhussitāti puthubhāvaṃ sitā upagatā, puthūhi vā sitātipi puthussitā.Yaṃ nissitāti etarahipi yaṃ vādapathaṃ nissitā.Na te bhavantīti te vādapathā na bhavanti bhijjanti vinassanti.Dhammacakkanti desanāñāṇassapi paṭivedhañāṇassapi etaṃ nāmaṃ. Tesu desanāñāṇaṃ lokiyaṃ, paṭivedhañāṇaṃ lokuttaraṃ.Kevalīti sakalaguṇasamannāgato.Tādisanti tathāvidhaṃ.

Vādapathā means simply for argument. Puthū means many. Sitā means attached, fabricated. Or puthussitā means relied upon manifoldness, or are they relied upon by many. Yaṃ nissitā means whichever paths of argument they rely on. Na te bhavantī means those paths of argument do not exist, they break apart, they perish. Dhammacakkaṃ is the name for both the knowledge of teaching and the knowledge of penetration. Among these, the knowledge of teaching is mundane, and the knowledge of penetration is supramundane. Kevalī means endowed with all qualities. Tādisaṃ means such.

9. Taṇhuppādasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Commentary on the Taṇhuppāda Sutta

9.Navame uppajjati etesūtiuppādā. Kā uppajjati? Taṇhā. Taṇhāya uppādātaṇhuppādā,taṇhāvatthūni taṇhākāraṇānīti attho.Cīvarahetūti ‘‘kattha manāpaṃ cīvaraṃ labhissāmī’’ti cīvarakāraṇā uppajjati.Itibhavābhavahetūti etthaitīti nidassanatthe nipāto. Yathā cīvarādihetu, evaṃ bhavābhavahetupīti attho.Bhavābhavoti cettha paṇītatarāni sappinavanītādīni adhippetāni. Sampattibhavesu paṇītatarapaṇītatamabhavotipi vadantiyeva.

9. In the ninth, uppādā means origins, because they arise in these. What arises? Craving. Taṇhāya uppādā means the origins of craving; the objects of craving, the causes of craving, is the meaning. Cīvarahetū means craving arises due to robes, thinking, "Where shall I obtain a pleasing robe?" Itibhavābhavahetū means, here, itī is a particle in the sense of exemplification. Just as due to robes etc., so too due to existence and non-existence, is the meaning. Bhavābhavo here means the more excellent kinds of ghee and butter. They even speak of the more and more excellent kinds of existence in the existences of attainment.

Taṇhādutiyoti ayañhi satto anamatagge saṃsāravaṭṭe saṃsaranto na ekakova saṃsarati, taṇhaṃ pana dutiyikaṃ labhantova saṃsarati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘taṇhādutiyo’’ti.Itthabhāvaññathābhāvanti ettha itthabhāvo nāma ayaṃ attabhāvo, aññathābhāvo nāma anāgatattabhāvo. Evarūpo vā aññopi attabhāvo itthabhāvo nāma, na evarūpo aññathābhāvo nāma. Taṃ itthabhāvaññathābhāvaṃ.Saṃsāranti khandhadhātuāyatanānaṃ paṭipāṭiṃ.Nātivattatīti nātikkamati.Evamādīnavaṃ ñatvāti evaṃ atītānāgatapaccuppannesu khandhesu ādīnavaṃ jānitvā.Taṇhaṃ dukkhassa sambhavanti taṇhaṃ ca ‘‘ayaṃ vaṭṭadukkhasambhūto sabhāvo kāraṇa’’nti evaṃ jānitvā. Ettāvatā imassa bhikkhuno vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā arahattaṃ pattabhāvo dassito. Idāni taṃ khīṇāsavaṃ thomentovītataṇhotiādimāha. Tatthaanādānoti niggahaṇo.Sato bhikkhu paribbajeti satisampajaññe vepullappatto khīṇāsavo bhikkhu sato sampajāno careyya vihareyyāti attho. Iti suttante vaṭṭaṃ kathetvā gāthāsu vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ kathitanti.

Taṇhādutiyoti: This being, while wandering in the beginningless cycle of existence (saṃsāravaṭṭa), does not wander alone; but wanders having craving as a companion. Therefore, it is said, "accompanied by craving." Itthabhāvaññathābhāvanti: Here, itthabhāva means this present existence (attabhāva), and aññathābhāva means a future existence. Or, another existence like this is called itthabhāva, and one not like this is called aññathābhāva. That itthabhāvaññathābhāva. Saṃsāranti: The continuous succession of aggregates (khandha), elements (dhātu), and sense-bases (āyatana). Nātivattatīti: Does not transcend. Evamādīnavaṃ ñatvāti: Having thus known the danger in the past, future, and present aggregates. Taṇhaṃ dukkhassa sambhavanti: And having known craving as, "This nature is the origin of the cycle of suffering," in this way. Up to this point, it has been shown that this bhikkhu developed insight and attained arahantship. Now, praising that arahant, he says vītataṇhoti, beginning thus. There, anādānoti: Without grasping. Sato bhikkhu paribbajeti: A bhikkhu, who is a mindful and fully aware arahant, having attained fullness in mindfulness and full awareness, should wander, should live. Thus, in the sutta, the cycle (vaṭṭa) was discussed, and in the verses, escape from the cycle (vaṭṭavivaṭṭa) was discussed.

10. Yogasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Yogasuttavaṇṇanā

10.Dasame vaṭṭasmiṃ yojentītiyogā. Kāmayogotiādīsu pañcakāmaguṇiko rāgo kāmayogo. Rūpārūpabhavesu chandarāgobhavayogo,tathā jhānanikanti. Sassatadiṭṭhisahagato ca rāgo dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhiyo cadiṭṭhiyogo. Catūsu saccesu aññāṇaṃavijjāyogo. Kāmesu vā yojetīti kāmayogo. Bhavesu yojetīti bhavayogo. Diṭṭhīsu yojetīti diṭṭhiyogo. Avijjāya yojetīti avijjāyogoti heṭṭhā vuttadhammānaṃyevetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.

10. In the tenth, yogā means those that bind. In Kāmayogoti, etc., sensual desire (rāga) consisting of the five strands of sense pleasure is sensual desire-bond (kāmayoga). Desire and lust (chandarāga) in the realms of form and formlessness is bhavayogo, as is delight in jhāna. Craving accompanied by the eternalist view, and the sixty-two views are diṭṭhiyogo. Ignorance of the four Noble Truths is avijjāyogo. Or, that which binds to sense pleasures is kāmayoga. That which binds to existences is bhavayoga. That which binds to views is diṭṭhiyoga. That which binds to ignorance is avijjāyoga. This is a designation for the same things mentioned below.

katamo ca, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tatthasamudayanti uppattiṃ.Atthaṅgamanti bhedaṃ.Assādanti madhurabhāvaṃ.Ādīnavanti amadhurabhāvaṃ dosaṃ.Nissaraṇanti nissaṭabhāvaṃ.Kāmesūti vatthukāmesu.Kāmarāgoti kāme ārabbha uppannarāgo. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo.Anusetīti nibbattati.Ayaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, kāmayogoti, bhikkhave, idaṃ kāmesu yojanakāraṇaṃ bandhanakāraṇaṃ vuccatīti evaṃ sabbattha attho veditabbo.

katamo ca, bhikkhaveti, etc., he says. There, samudayanti: Origin. Atthaṅgamanti: Dissolution. Assādanti: Delightful aspect. Ādīnavanti: Undelightful aspect, fault. Nissaraṇanti: Escape. Kāmesūti: In sense objects. Kāmarāgoti: Lust that arises in dependence on sense pleasures. The same method applies in the remaining terms. Anusetīti: Arises. Ayaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, kāmayogoti: This, bhikkhus, is said to be the cause of binding to sense pleasures, the cause of attachment. Thus, the meaning should be understood everywhere.

Phassāyatanānanti cakkhādīnaṃ cakkhusamphassādikāraṇānaṃ.Avijjā aññāṇanti ñāṇapaṭipakkhabhāvena aññāṇasaṅkhātā avijjā.Iti kāmayogoti ettha iti saddo catūhipi yogehi saddhiṃ yojetabbo ‘‘evaṃ kāmayogo, evaṃ bhavayogo’’ti.Saṃyuttoti parivārito.Pāpakehīti lāmakehi.Akusalehīti akosallasambhūtehi.Saṃkilesikehīti saṃkilesanakehi, pasannassa cittassa pasannabhāvadūsakehīti attho.Ponobbhavikehīti punabbhavanibbattakehi.Sadarehīti sadarathehi.Dukkhavipākehīti vipākakāle dukkhuppādakehi.Āyatiṃ jātijarāmaraṇikehīti anāgate punappunaṃ jātijarāmaraṇanibbattakehi.Tasmāayogakkhemīti vuccatīti yasmā appahīnayogo puggalo etehi dhammehi sampayutto hoti, tasmā catūhi yogehi khemaṃ nibbānaṃ anadhigatattā na yogakkhemīti vuccati.

Phassāyatanānanti: Of the sense-bases, such as the eye, which are the cause of eye-contact, etc. Avijjā aññāṇanti: Ignorance, being non-knowledge, is ignorance due to being the opposite of knowledge. Iti kāmayogoti: Here, the word "iti" should be connected with all four bonds, "Thus is sensual desire-bond, thus is existence-bond," etc. Saṃyuttoti: Surrounded. Pāpakehīti: By inferior. Akusalehīti: By those born of unskillfulness. Saṃkilesikehīti: By defiling things, those that spoil the serene state of a serene mind, is the meaning. Ponobbhavikehīti: By those that produce renewed existence. Sadarehīti: By those with anxiety. Dukkhavipākehīti: By those that produce suffering at the time of fruition. Āyatiṃ jātijarāmaraṇikehīti: By those that produce repeated birth, aging, and death in the future. Tasmā ayogakkhemīti vuccatīti: Because a person who has not abandoned the bonds is associated with these things, therefore, because he has not attained Nibbāna, which is secure from the four bonds, he is not called one who has attained security from the bonds (yogakkhemī).

Visaṃyogoti visaṃyojanakāraṇāni.Kāmayogavisaṃyogoti kāmayogato visaṃyojanakāraṇaṃ. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Tattha asubhajjhānaṃ kāmayogavisaṃyogo, taṃ pādakaṃ katvā adhigato anāgāmimaggo ekanteneva kāmayogavisaṃyogo nāma. Arahattamaggo bhavayogavisaṃyogo nāma, sotāpattimaggo diṭṭhiyogavisaṃyogo nāma, arahattamaggo avijjāyogavisaṃyogo nāma. Idāni te vitthāravasena dassentokatamo ca, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tassattho vuttanayeneva veditabbo.

Visaṃyogoti: Causes of detachment. Kāmayogavisaṃyogoti: The cause of detachment from the sensual desire-bond. The same method applies to the remaining terms. There, meditation on the repulsive (asubha) is detachment from the sensual desire-bond; the non-returner path (anāgāmimagga), attained by making that the basis, is absolutely called detachment from the sensual desire-bond. The arahantship path is called detachment from the existence-bond, the stream-entry path (sotāpattimagga) is called detachment from the view-bond, and the arahantship path is called detachment from the ignorance-bond. Now, showing them in detail, he says, katamo ca, bhikkhaveti, etc. Its meaning should be understood in the same way as stated above.

Bhavayogena cūbhayanti bhavayogena ca saṃyuttā, kiñci bhiyyo ubhayenāpi sampayuttā, yena kenaci yogena samannāgatāti attho.Purakkhatāti purato katā, parivāritā vā.Kāme pariññāyāti duvidhepi kāme parijānitvā.Bhavayogañca sabbasoti bhavayogañca sabbameva parijānitvā.Samūhaccāti samūhanitvā.Virājayanti virājento, virājetvā vā. ‘‘Virājento’’ti hi vutte maggo kathito hoti, ‘‘virājetvā’’ti vutte phalaṃ.Munīti khīṇāsavamuni. Iti imasmiṃ suttepi gāthāsupi vaṭṭavivaṭṭameva kathitanti.

Bhavayogena cūbhayanti: And connected with the existence-bond, still more connected with both, associated with any kind of bond, is the meaning. Purakkhatāti: Placed in front, or surrounded. Kāme pariññāyāti: Having fully understood both kinds of sense pleasures. Bhavayogañca sabbasoti: And having fully understood all of the existence-bond. Samūhaccāti: Having uprooted. Virājayanti: Detaching, or having detached. For when "detaching" is said, the path is spoken of; when "having detached" is said, the fruit is spoken of. Munīti: The arahant-sage. Thus, in this sutta and in the verses, the cycle and escape from the cycle alone are spoken of.

2. Caravaggo

2. Caravaggo

1. Carasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Carasuttavaṇṇanā

11.Dutiyassa paṭhameadhivāsetīti cittaṃ adhiropetvā vāseti.Nappajahatīti na pariccajati.Na vinodetīti na nīharati.Na byantīkarotīti na vigatantaṃ paricchinnaparivaṭumaṃ karoti.Na anabhāvaṃ gametīti na anuabhāvaṃ avaḍḍhiṃ vināsaṃ gameti.Carampīti carantopi.Anātāpīti nibbīriyo.Anottāpīti upavādabhayarahito.Satatanti niccaṃ.Samitanti nirantaraṃ. Evaṃ sabbattha atthaṃ ñatvā sukkapakkhe vuttavipariyāyena attho veditabbo.

11. In the second, in the first, adhivāsetīti: Establishes and dwells on the mind. Nappajahatīti: Does not abandon. Na vinodetīti: Does not remove. Na byantīkarotīti: Does not make an end to the delimited environment. Na anabhāvaṃ gametīti: Does not bring to non-being, non-growth, destruction. Carampīti: Even while wandering. Anātāpīti: Without energy. Anottāpīti: Without fear of blame. Satatanti: Constantly. Samitanti: Uninterruptedly. Thus, having understood the meaning everywhere, the meaning should be understood in the opposite way in the bright side.

gehanissitanti kilesanissitaṃ.Mohaneyyesūti mohajanakesu ārammaṇesu.Abhabboti abhājanabhūto.Phuṭṭhuṃ sambodhimuttamanti arahattamaggasaṅkhātaṃ uttamañāṇaṃ phusituṃ.

gehanissitanti: Dependent on defilements. Mohaneyyesūti: In objects that generate delusion. Abhabboti: Incapable. Phuṭṭhuṃ sambodhimuttamanti: To realize the supreme knowledge, which is the arahantship path.

2. Sīlasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Sīlasuttavaṇṇanā

12.Dutiyesampannasīlāti paripuṇṇasīlā.Sampannapātimokkhāti paripuṇṇapātimokkhā.Pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvutāti pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlena saṃvutā pihitā upetā hutvā viharatha.Ācāragocarasampannāti ācārena ca gocarena ca sampannā samupāgatā bhavatha.Aṇumattesu vajjesūti aṇuppamāṇesu dosesu.Bhayadassāvinoti tāni aṇumattāni vajjāni bhayato dassanasīlā.Samādāya sikkhatha sikkhāpadesūti sabbasikkhākoṭṭhāsesu samādātabbaṃ samādāya gahetvā sikkhatha. ‘‘Sampannasīlānaṃ…pe… sikkhāpadesū’’ti ettakena dhammakkhānena sikkhattaye samādāpetvā ceva paṭiladdhaguṇesu ca vaṇṇaṃ kathetvā idāni uttari kātabbaṃ dassentokimassātiādimāha. Tatthakimassāti kiṃ bhaveyya.

12. In the second, sampannasīlāti: Perfect in virtue. Sampannapātimokkhāti: Perfect in the Pātimokkha. Pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvutāti: Having been restrained, covered, endowed with the virtue of the Pātimokkha restraint, you live. Ācāragocarasampannāti: Endowed with proper conduct (ācāra) and pasture (gocara), you become fully possessed. Aṇumattesu vajjesūti: In faults that are of small measure. Bhayadassāvinoti: By nature seeing those small faults as fearful. Samādāya sikkhatha sikkhāpadesūti: Having undertaken what should be undertaken in all the constituents of training (sikkhā), train yourselves. Having thus encouraged training in the threefold training (sikkhattaya) by the statement, "Of those perfect in virtue… in the precepts of training," and having spoken in praise of the qualities attained, now, showing what further should be done, he says, kimassāti, etc. There, kimassāti: What would it be?

Yataṃ careti yathā caranto yato hoti saṃyato, evaṃ careyya. Esa nayo sabbattha.Accheti nisīdeyya.Yatamenaṃ pasārayeti yaṃ aṅgapaccaṅgaṃ pasāreyya, taṃ yataṃ saṃyatameva katvā pasāreyya.Uddhanti upari.Tiriyanti majjhaṃ.Apācīnanti adho. Ettāvatā atītā paccuppannā anāgatā ca pañcakkhandhā kathitā.Yāvatāti paricchedavacanaṃ.Jagatogatīti lokassa nipphatti.Samavekkhitā ca dhammānaṃ, khandhānaṃ udayabbayanti etesaṃ sabbaloke atītādibhedānaṃ pañcakkhandhadhammānaṃ udayañca vayañca samavekkhitā. ‘‘Pañcakkhandhānaṃ udayaṃ passanto pañcavīsati lakkhaṇāni passati, vayaṃ passanto pañcavīsati lakkhaṇāni passatī’’ti vuttehi samapaññāsāya lakkhaṇehi sammā avekkhitā hoti.Cetosamathasāmīcinti cittasamathassa anucchavikaṃ paṭipadaṃ.Sikkhamānanti paṭipajjamānaṃ, pūrayamānanti attho.Pahitattoti pesitatto.Āhūti kathayanti. Sesamettha uttānameva. Imasmiṃ pana sutte sīlaṃ missakaṃ kathetvā gāthāsu khīṇāsavo kathito.

Yataṃ careti: He should wander restrained, just as by wandering he is restrained. The same method applies everywhere. Accheti: He should sit. Yatamenaṃ pasārayeti: Whatever limb he extends, he should extend it having made it restrained. Uddhanti: Above. Tiriyanti: In the middle. Apācīnanti: Below. Up to this point, the past, present, and future five aggregates have been spoken of. Yāvatāti: A word of limitation. Jagato gatīti: The arising of the world. Samavekkhitā ca dhammānaṃ, khandhānaṃ udayabbayanti: And the arising and passing away of these five-aggregate-phenomena, with their distinctions of past, etc., in all the world, is well observed. By the statement, "Seeing the arising of the five aggregates, one sees twenty-five characteristics; seeing the passing away, one sees twenty-five characteristics," it is well observed with insight (samapaññā) and their characteristics. Cetosamathasāmīcinti: Practice that is suitable for tranquility of mind. Sikkhamānanti: Practicing, fulfilling, is the meaning. Pahitattoti: One who has sent forth the self. Āhūti: They say. The rest here is easily understood. In this sutta, virtue is spoken of in a mixed way, but in the verses, the arahant is spoken of.

3. Padhānasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Padhānasuttavaṇṇanā

13.Tatiyesammappadhānānīti sundarapadhānāni uttamavīriyāni.Sammappadhānāti paripuṇṇavīriyā.Māradheyyābhibhūtāti tebhūmakavaṭṭasaṅkhātaṃ māradheyyaṃ abhibhavitvā samatikkamitvā ṭhitā.Te asitāti te khīṇāsavā anissitā nāma.Jātimaraṇabhayassāti jātiñca maraṇañca paṭicca uppajjanakabhayassa, jātimaraṇasaṅkhātasseva vā bhayassa.Pāragūti pāraṅgatā.Te tusitāti te khīṇāsavā tuṭṭhā nāma.Jetvā māraṃ savāhininti sasenakaṃ māraṃ jinitvā ṭhitā.Teanejāti te khīṇāsavā taṇhāsaṅkhātāya ejāya anejā niccalā nāma.Namucibalanti mārabalaṃ.Upātivattāti atikkantā.Te sukhitāti te khīṇāsavā lokuttarasukhena sukhitā nāma. Tenevāha –

13. In the third, sammappadhānānīti: Excellent efforts, supreme energies. Sammappadhānāti: Perfect in energy. Māradheyyābhibhūtāti: Having overcome and transcended the realm of Māra (māradheyya), which is the round of the three planes of existence. Te asitāti: Those arahants are called unattached (anissitā). Jātimaraṇabhayassāti: Of the fear that arises dependent on birth and death, or of the fear that is birth and death itself. Pāragūti: Gone beyond. Te tusitāti: Those arahants are called content (tuṭṭhā). Jetvā māraṃ savāhininti: Having conquered Māra along with his army. Te anejāti: Those arahants are called unperturbed (anejā), free from perturbation (ejā), which is craving. Namucibalanti: Māra's power. Upātivattāti: Transcended. Te sukhitāti: Those arahants are happy with the happiness of transcendence (lokuttara sukha). Therefore, he said:

‘‘Sukhitā vata arahanto, taṇhā nesaṃ na vijjati;

"Happy indeed are the arahants, for craving is not found in them;
Self-conceit is completely destroyed, the net of delusion torn apart." (saṃ. ni. 3.76);

4. Saṃvarasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Saṃvarasuttavaṇṇanā

14.Catutthepadhānānīti vīriyāni.Saṃvarappadhānanti cakkhādīni saṃvarantassa uppannavīriyaṃ.Pahānappadhānanti kāmavitakkādayo pajahantassa uppannavīriyaṃ.Bhāvanāppadhānanti sambojjhaṅge bhāventassa uppannavīriyaṃ.Anurakkhaṇāppadhānanti samādhinimittaṃ anurakkhantassa uppannavīriyaṃ.

14. In the fourth, padhānānīti: Efforts. Saṃvarappadhānanti: The effort that arises in one who restrains the eye, etc. Pahānappadhānanti: The effort that arises in one who abandons thoughts of sensual pleasure, etc. Bhāvanāppadhānanti: The effort that arises in one who develops the factors of enlightenment (sambojjhaṅga). Anurakkhaṇāppadhānanti: The effort that arises in one who guards the object of concentration.

Vivekanissitantiādīsu viveko, virāgo, nirodhoti tīṇipi nibbānassa nāmāni. Nibbānaṃ hi upadhivivekattāviveko,taṃ āgamma rāgādayo virajjantītivirāgo,nirujjhantītinirodho. Tasmā vivekanissitantiādīsu ārammaṇavasena vā adhigantabbavasena vā nibbānanissitanti attho.

Vivekanissitanti, etc.: Solitude (viveka), detachment (virāga), and cessation (nirodha) are three names for Nibbāna. For Nibbāna is called viveka because of the solitude from the substrata of existence (upadhi); virāga because passions become detached by depending on it; nirodha because they cease. Therefore, in vivekanissita, etc., the meaning is dependent on Nibbāna, either in terms of object or in terms of what is to be attained.

Vossaggapariṇāminti ettha dve vossaggā – pariccāgavossaggo ca pakkhandanavossaggo ca. Tattha vipassanā tadaṅgavasena kilese ca khandhe ca rāgaṃ pariccajatītipariccāgavossaggo. Maggo ārammaṇavasena nibbānaṃ pakkhandatītipakkhandanavossaggo. Tasmā vossaggapariṇāminti yathā bhāviyamāno satisambojjhaṅgo vossaggatthāya pariṇamati, vipassanābhāvañca maggabhāvañca pāpuṇāti, evaṃ taṃ bhāvetīti ayamettha attho. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo.Bhaddakanti laddhakaṃ.Samādhinimittaṃvuccati aṭṭhikasaññādivasena adhigato samādhiyeva.Anurakkhatīti samādhipāripanthikadhamme rāgadosamohe sodhento rakkhati. Ettha ca aṭṭhikasaññādikā pañceva saññā vuttā, imasmiṃ pana ṭhāne dasapi asubhāni vitthāretvā kathetabbāni. Tesaṃ vitthāro visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.102 ādayo) vuttoyeva. Gāthāya saṃvarādinipphādakaṃ vīriyameva vuttaṃ.Khayaṃ dukkhassa pāpuṇeti dukkhakkhayasaṅkhātaṃ arahattaṃ pāpuṇeyyāti.

Vossaggapariṇāminti: Here there are two kinds of relinquishment (vossagga): relinquishment of abandonment (pariccāgavossaggo) and relinquishment of tendency (pakkhandanavossaggo). There, insight abandons defilements and aggregates through momentary suppression, thus it is pariccāgavossaggo. The path tends toward Nibbāna by way of object, thus it is pakkhandanavossaggo. Therefore, vossaggapariṇāminti: just as when developed, the mindfulness factor of enlightenment (satisambojjhaṅga) leads to relinquishment, attains to the state of insight and the state of the path, thus one should develop it. This is the meaning here. The same method applies in the remaining terms. Bhaddakanti: Obtained. Samādhinimittaṃ is said to be the concentration itself that is attained through the skeleton meditation, etc. Anurakkhatīti: He protects by purifying the factors that obstruct concentration, such as lust and hatred. Here, only five perceptions, such as the skeleton meditation, are mentioned, but in this place, even the ten kinds of foulness should be discussed in detail. Their detailed explanation has already been given in the Visuddhimagga (visuddhi. 1.102 ff.). In the verse, only the effort that produces restraint, etc., is mentioned. Khayaṃ dukkhassa pāpuṇeti: May attain arahantship, which is the cessation of suffering.

5. Paññattisuttavaṇṇanā
5. Paññattisuttavaṇṇanā

15.Pañcameaggapaññattiyoti uttamapaññattiyo.Attabhāvīnanti attabhāvavantānaṃ.Yadidaṃ rāhu asurindoti yo esa rāhu asurindo ayaṃ aggoti. Ettha rāhu kira asurindo cattāri yojanasahassāni aṭṭha ca yojanasatāni ucco, bāhantaramassa dvādasayojanasatāni, hatthatalapādatalānaṃ puthulatā tīṇi yojanasatāni. Aṅgulipabbāni paṇṇāsa yojanāni, bhamukantaraṃ paṇṇāsayojanaṃ, nalāṭaṃ tiyojanasataṃ, sīsaṃ navayojanasataṃ.Kāmabhogīnaṃ yadidaṃ rājā mandhātāti yo esa rājā mandhātā nāma, ayaṃ dibbepi mānusakepi kāme paribhuñjanakānaṃ sattānaṃ aggo nāma. Esa hi asaṅkheyyāyukesu manussesu nibbattitvā icchiticchitakkhaṇe hiraññavassaṃ vassāpento mānusake kāme dīgharattaṃ paribhuñji. Devaloke pana yāva chattiṃsāya indānaṃ āyuppamāṇaṃ, tāva paṇīte kāme paribhuñjīti kāmabhogīnaṃ aggo nāma jāto.Ādhipateyyānanti adhipatiṭṭhānaṃ jeṭṭhakaṭṭhānaṃ karontānaṃ.Tathāgato aggamakkhāyatīti lokiyalokuttarehi guṇehi tathāgato aggo seṭṭho uttamo akkhāyati.

15. In the fifth, aggapaññattiyoti: Supreme designations. Attabhāvīnanti: Of those who have existence. Yadidaṃ rāhu asurindoti: This Rāhu, the chief of the Asuras, is the chief. Here, it is said that Rāhu, the chief of the Asuras, is four thousand eight hundred yojanas tall, the space between his arms is twelve hundred yojanas, the width of his palms and soles is three hundred yojanas, the joints of his fingers are fifty yojanas, the space between his eyebrows is fifty yojanas, his forehead is three hundred yojanas, and his head is nine hundred yojanas. Kāmabhogīnaṃ yadidaṃ rājā mandhātāti: This King Mandhātu, who enjoys sense pleasures, is the chief of beings who enjoy both divine and human sense pleasures. For he, having been born among humans with an incalculable lifespan, long enjoyed human sense pleasures, causing a rain of gold to fall whenever he wished. In the heaven world, he enjoyed excellent sense pleasures for as long as the lifespan of thirty-six Indras; thus, he became the chief of those who enjoy sense pleasures. Ādhipateyyānanti: Of those who exercise sovereignty, of the leaders. Tathāgato aggamakkhāyatīti: The Tathāgata is declared the chief, best, supreme, by qualities that are mundane and supramundane.

Iddhiyā yasasā jalanti dibbasampattisamiddhiyā ca parivārasaṅkhātena yasasā ca jalantānaṃ.Uddhaṃ tiriyaṃ apācīnanti upari ca majjhe ca heṭṭhā ca.Yāvatā jagato gatīti yattakā lokanipphatti.

Iddhiyā yasasā jalanti: Of those who shine with the prosperity of divine accomplishment and with fame consisting of retinue. Uddhaṃ tiriyaṃ apācīnanti: Above, in the middle, and below. Yāvatā jagato gatīti: As far as the arising of the world.

6. Sokhummasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Sokhummasuttavaṇṇanā

16.Chaṭṭhesokhummānīti sukhumalakkhaṇapaṭivijjhanakāni ñāṇāni.Rūpasokhummena samannāgato hotīti rūpe saṇhasukhumalakkhaṇapariggāhakena ñāṇena samannāgato hoti.Paramenāti uttamena.Tena ca rūpasokhummenāti tena yāva anulomabhāvaṃ pattena sukhumalakkhaṇapariggāhakañāṇena.Na samanupassatīti natthibhāveneva na passati.Na patthetīti natthibhāveneva na pattheti.Vedanāsokhummādīsupi eseva nayo.

16. In the sixth, sokhummānīti: Knowledges that penetrate subtle characteristics. Rūpasokhummena samannāgato hotīti: He is endowed with knowledge that grasps subtle characteristics in form. Paramenāti: With the supreme. Tena ca rūpasokhummenāti: With that knowledge of grasping subtle characteristics that has reached as far as conformity-knowledge (anuloma-ñāṇa). Na samanupassatīti: Does not see with an attitude of identification. Na patthetīti: Does not long for with an attitude of identification. The same method applies in vedanāsokhummādi, etc.

Rūpasokhummataṃ ñatvāti rūpakkhandhassa saṇhasukhumalakkhaṇapariggāhakena ñāṇena sukhumataṃ jānitvā.Vedanānañca sambhavanti vedanākkhandhassa ca pabhavaṃ jānitvā.Saññā yato samudetīti yasmā kāraṇā saññākkhandho samudeti nibbattati, tañca jānitvā.Atthaṃgacchati yattha cāti yasmiṃ ṭhāne nirujjhati, tañca jānitvā.Saṅkhāre parato ñatvāti saṅkhārakkhandhaṃ aniccatāya lujjanabhāvena parato jānitvā. Iminā hi padena aniccānupassanā kathitā.Dukkhato no ca attatoti iminā dukkhānattānupassanā.Santoti kilesasantatāya santo.Santipade ratoti nibbāne rato. Iti suttante catūsu ṭhānesu vipassanāva kathitā, gāthāsu lokuttaradhammopīti.

Rūpasokhummataṃ ñatvā means having known the subtlety of the form aggregate with the knowledge that grasps its refined and subtle characteristics. Vedanānañca sambhavaṃ means also having known the origin of the feeling aggregate. Saññā yato samudetī means also having known the cause from which the perception aggregate arises and comes into being. Atthaṃ gacchati yattha cā means also having known the place where it ceases. Saṅkhāre parato ñatvā means having known the formations aggregate as foreign due to its destructible nature because of impermanence. With this phrase, the contemplation of impermanence is spoken of. Dukkhato no ca attato means the contemplation of suffering and not-self with this. Santo means peaceful due to the cessation of defilements. Santipade rato means delighting in Nibbāna. Thus, in the suttas, only insight is spoken of in four places, while in the verses, the supramundane Dhamma is also spoken of.

7. Paṭhamaagatisuttavaṇṇanā
7. Paṭhamaagatisuttavaṇṇanā

17-19.Sattameagatigamanānīti nagatigamanāni.Chandāgatiṃ gacchatīti chandena agatiṃ gacchati, akattabbaṃ karoti. Sesesupi eseva nayo.Chandā dosā bhayā mohāti chandena, dosena, bhayena, mohena.Ativattatīti atikkamati. Aṭṭhamaṃ uttānameva. Navame tathābujjhanakānaṃ vasena dvīhipi nayehi kathitaṃ.

17-19. In the seventh, agatigamanāni means going to what is not the right course. Chandāgatiṃ gacchatī means going to a wrong course through desire, doing what should not be done. The same method applies to the rest as well. Chandā dosā bhayā mohā means through desire, aversion, fear, and delusion. Ativattatī means transgresses. The eighth is straightforward. In the ninth, it is spoken of in two ways based on those who understand accordingly.

10. Bhattuddesakasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Bhattuddesakasuttavaṇṇanā

20.Dasamebhattuddesakoti salākabhattādīnaṃ uddesako.Kāmesu asaṃyatāti vatthukāmesu kilesakāmehi asaṃyatā.Parisākasaṭoca panesa vuccatīti ayañca pana so evarūpā parisākacavaro nāma vuccatīti attho.Samaṇenāti buddhasamaṇena.Parisāya maṇḍo ca panesa vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpā parisā vippasannena parisāmaṇḍoti vuccatīti.

20. In the tenth, bhattuddesako means one who arranges for alms such as ticket-food. Kāmesu asaṃyatā means unrestrained in sensual pleasures, both object of desire and defilement-desires. Parisākasaṭo ca panesa vuccatī means this person is called a 'dustbin of an assembly'. Samaṇenā means by the Buddha-ascetic. Parisāya maṇḍo ca panesa vuccatī means this assembly is called the 'ornament of the assembly' by the discerning assembly.

3. Uruvelavaggo

3. Uruvelavaggo

1. Paṭhamauruvelasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Paṭhamauruvelasuttavaṇṇanā

21.Tatiyassa paṭhameuruvelāyanti etthauruvelāti mahāvelā, mahāvālikarāsīti attho. Atha vāurūti vālukā vuccati,velāti mariyādā. Velātikkamanahetu āhaṭā uru uruvelāti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Atīte kira anuppanne buddhe dasasahassā kulaputtā tāpasapabbajjaṃ pabbajitvā tasmiṃ padese viharantā ekadivasaṃ sannipatitvā katikavattaṃ akaṃsu – ‘‘kāyakammavacīkammāni nāma paresampi pākaṭāni honti, manokammaṃ pana apākaṭaṃ. Tasmā yo kāmavitakkaṃ vā byāpādavitakkaṃ vā vihiṃsāvitakkaṃ vā vitakketi, tassa añño codako nāma natthi. So attanāva attānaṃ codetvā pattapuṭena vālukaṃ āharitvā imasmiṃ ṭhāne ākiratu, idamassa daṇḍakamma’’nti. Tato paṭṭhāya yo tādisaṃ vitakkaṃ vitakketi, so tattha pattapuṭena vālukaṃ ākirati, evaṃ tattha anukkamena mahāvālukarāsi jāto. Tato naṃ pacchimā janatā parikkhipitvā cetiyaṭṭhānamakāsi, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘uruvelāti mahāvelā, mahāvālikarāsīti attho’’ti. Tameva sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha vā urūti vālukā vuccati, velāti mariyādā, velātikkamanahetu āhaṭā uru uruvelāti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo’’ti.

21. In the first of the third, uruvelāyanti, here uruvelā means great shore, a great heap of sand. Or else, urū means sand, velā means boundary. Because it was brought about due to transgression of the boundary, uru uruvelā, thus the meaning here should be understood. It is said that in the past, before a Buddha had arisen, ten thousand sons of good families took up the ascetic life and, dwelling in that region, one day gathered together and made a rule: "Actions of body and speech are visible to others, but actions of mind are not visible. Therefore, whoever thinks a thought of sensual desire, ill-will, or harmfulness, there is no other accuser for him. He, by himself, having accused himself, should bring sand in his bowl and scatter it in this place; this is his punishment." From then on, whoever thought such a thought, scattered sand there with his bowl, and thus gradually a great heap of sand was formed there. Then later people enclosed it and made it a shrine, referring to which it was said, "Uruvelā means great shore, a great heap of sand." Referring to that same thing, it was said: "Or else, urū means sand, velā means boundary; because it was brought about due to transgression of the boundary, uru uruvelā, thus the meaning here should be understood."

Najjā nerañjarāya tīreti uruvelagāmaṃ nissāya nerañjarānadītīre viharāmīti dasseti.Ajapālanigrodheti ajapālakā tassa nigrodhassa chāyāya nisīdantipi tiṭṭhantipi, tasmā so ajapālanigrodhotveva saṅkhaṃ gato, tassa heṭṭhāti attho.Paṭhamābhisambuddhoti sambuddho hutvā paṭhamameva.Udapādīti ayaṃ vitakko pañcame sattāhe udapādi. Kasmā udapādīti? Sabbabuddhānaṃ āciṇṇattā ceva pubbāsevanatāya ca. Tattha pubbāsevanāya pakāsanatthaṃ tittirajātakaṃ āharitabbaṃ. Hatthivānaratittirā kira ekasmiṃ padese viharantā ‘‘yo amhākaṃ mahallako, tasmiṃ sagāravā viharissāmā’’ti nigrodhaṃ dassetvā ‘‘ko nu kho amhākaṃ mahallako’’ti vīmaṃsantā tittirassa mahallakabhāvaṃ ñatvā tassa jeṭṭhāpacāyanakammaṃ katvā aññamaññaṃ samaggā sammodamānā viharitvā saggaparāyaṇā ahesuṃ. Taṃ kāraṇaṃ ñatvā rukkhe adhivatthā devatā imaṃ gāthamāha –

Najjā nerañjarāya tīre means dwelling on the bank of the Nerañjarā River, depending on the village of Uruvelā. Ajapālanigrodhe means beneath that Nigrodha tree of the goat-herds, because the goat-herds would sit or stand in the shade of that tree; therefore it went by the name Ajapālanigrodha. Paṭhamābhisambuddho means immediately after becoming enlightened. Udapādī means this thought arose in the fifth week. Why did it arise? Because it is customary for all Buddhas and because of prior association. There, to show the prior association, the Tittira Jātaka should be brought in. It is said that an elephant, a monkey, and a partridge, dwelling in one place, resolving, "We will live respectfully toward the eldest among us," showing a Nigrodha tree, inquired, "Who among us is the eldest?" Knowing the partridge to be the eldest, they performed the duties of honoring their elder and, living together in harmony and concord, were destined for heaven. Knowing that reason, the deity dwelling in the tree spoke this verse:

‘‘Ye vuḍḍhamapacāyanti, narā dhammassa kovidā;

‘‘Ye vuḍḍhamapacāyanti, narā dhammassa kovidā;
Diṭṭheva dhamme pāsaṃsā, samparāye ca suggatī’’ti. (jā. 1.1.37);

Agāravoti aññasmiṃ gāravarahito, kañci garuṭṭhāne aṭṭhapetvāti attho.Appatissoti patissayarahito, kañci jeṭṭhakaṭṭhāne aṭṭhapetvāti attho.Samaṇaṃvā brāhmaṇaṃ vāti ettha samitapāpabāhitapāpāyeva samaṇabrāhmaṇā adhippetā.Sakkatvā garuṃ katvāti sakkārañceva katvā garukārañca upaṭṭhapetvā.

Agāravo means without respect for another, without establishing anyone in a position of respect. Appatisso means without deference, without establishing anyone in a position of seniority. Samaṇaṃ vā brāhmaṇaṃ vā here, only ascetics and Brahmins who have stilled evil and warded off evil are intended. Sakkatvā garuṃ katvā means having honored and respected.

Sadevake loketiādīsu saddhiṃ devehi sadevake. Devaggahaṇena cettha mārabrahmesu gahitesupi māro nāma vasavattī sabbesaṃ upari vasaṃ vatteti, brahmā nāma mahānubhāvo, ekaṅguliyā ekasmiṃ cakkavāḷasahasse ālokaṃ pharati, dvīhi dvīsu, dasahi aṅgulīhi dasasu cakkavāḷasahassesu ālokaṃ pharati. So iminā sīlasampannataroti vattuṃ mā labhantūtisamārake sabrahmaketi visuṃ vuttaṃ. Tathā samaṇā nāma ekanikāyādivasena bahussutā sīlavanto paṇḍitā, brāhmaṇāpi vatthuvijjādivasena bahussutā paṇḍitā. Te iminā sampannatarāti vattuṃ mā labhantūtisassamaṇabrāhmaṇiyā pajāyāti vuttaṃ.Sadevamanussāyāti idaṃ pana nippadesato dassanatthaṃ gahitameva gahetvā vuttaṃ. Apicettha purimāni tīṇi padāni lokavasena vuttāni, pacchimāni dve pajāvasena.Sīlasampannataranti sīlena sampannataraṃ, adhikataranti attho. Ettha ca sīlādayo cattāro dhammā lokiyalokuttarā kathitā, vimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ lokiyameva. Paccavekkhaṇañāṇameva hetaṃ.Pāturahosīti ‘‘ayaṃ satthā avīcito yāva bhavaggā sīlādīhi attanā adhikataraṃ apassanto ‘mayā paṭividdhanavalokuttaradhammameva sakkatvā upanissāya viharissāmī’ti cinteti, kāraṇaṃ bhagavā cinteti, atthaṃ vuḍḍhiṃ visesaṃ cinteti, gacchāmissa ussāhaṃ janessāmī’’ti cintetvā purato pākaṭo ahosi, abhimukhe aṭṭhāsīti attho.

In sadevake loke and so on, sadevake means together with the devas. Although Māra and Brahmā are included here by the term deva, Māra is the one who wields power over all, and Brahmā is of great power, spreading light over a thousand world-systems with one finger, over two with two, and over ten thousand world-systems with ten fingers. In order to prevent them from claiming, "He is more accomplished in virtue than us," it is stated separately as samārake sabrahmake. Similarly, ascetics are learned, virtuous, and wise due to being of one group and so on, and Brahmins are also learned and wise due to their knowledge of material sciences and so on. In order to prevent them from claiming, "He is more accomplished than us," it is stated sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiyā pajāya. Sadevamanussāyā is stated having already been included, in order to show without remainder. Moreover, here the first three terms are stated in terms of the world, and the latter two in terms of the populace. Sīlasampannataraṃ means more accomplished in virtue, more excellent. And here, the four qualities, virtue and so on, are spoken of as mundane and supramundane; the knowledge and vision of liberation is only mundane. This is the knowledge of reviewing. Pāturahosī means "This Teacher, seeing no one more excellent than himself in virtue and so on from Avīci to the peak of existence, thinks, 'I will dwell honoring and relying upon only the supramundane Dhamma I have penetrated.' The Blessed One thinks of the cause, thinks of the benefit, the increase, the special quality, I will go and generate enthusiasm for him," thinking thus, he became manifest in front, he stood face to face.

Vihaṃsuviharanti cāti ettha yo vadeyya – ‘‘viharantīti vacanato paccuppannepi bahū buddhā’’ti, so ‘‘bhagavāpi bhante etarahi arahaṃ sammāsambuddho’’ti iminā vacanena paṭibāhitabbo.

Vihaṃsu viharanti cā here, if someone were to say, "Because it says 'dwell', there are many Buddhas in the present as well," he should be refuted with this statement, "The Blessed One is now an Arahant, a Fully Enlightened One."

‘‘Na me ācariyo atthi, sadiso me na vijjati;

‘‘Na me ācariyo atthi, sadiso me na vijjati;
Sadevakasmiṃ lokasmiṃ, natthi me paṭipuggalo’’ti. (mahāva. 11; ma. ni. 2.341) –

Tasmāti yasmā sabbepi buddhā saddhammagaruno, tasmā.Mahattamabhikaṅkhatāti mahantabhāvaṃ patthayamānena.Saraṃ buddhāna sāsananti buddhānaṃ sāsanaṃ sarantena.

Tasmā because all Buddhas respect the true Dhamma, therefore. Mahattamabhikaṅkhatā means by one who desires greatness. Saraṃ buddhāna sāsanaṃ means by one who remembers the teaching of the Buddhas.

Yatoti yasmiṃ kāle.Mahattena samannāgatoti rattaññumahattaṃ vepullamahattaṃ brahmacariyamahattaṃ lābhaggamahattanti iminā catubbidhena mahattena samannāgato.Atha me saṅghepi gāravoti atha mayhaṃ saṅghepi gāravo jāto. Kismiṃ pana kāle bhagavatā saṅghe gāravo katoti? Mahāpajāpatiyā dussayugadānakāle. Tadā hi bhagavā attano upanītaṃ dussayugaṃ ‘‘saṅghe, gotami, dehi, saṅghe te dinne ahañceva pūjito bhavissāmi saṅgho cā’’ti vadanto saṅghe gāravaṃ akāsi nāma.

Yato means at what time. Mahattena samannāgato means endowed with four kinds of greatness: greatness of seniority, greatness of abundance, greatness of the holy life, and greatness of gain. Atha me saṅghepi gāravo means then respect arose in me for the Saṅgha as well. But at what time did the Blessed One show respect for the Saṅgha? At the time of Mahāpajāpatī's gift of a pair of cloths. Then, indeed, the Blessed One, saying to her, "Give the pair of cloths to the Saṅgha, Gotamī; when it is given to the Saṅgha, both I and the Saṅgha will be honored," thus showed respect for the Saṅgha.

2. Dutiyauruvelasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Dutiyauruvelasuttavaṇṇanā

22.Dutiyesambahulāti bahukā.Brāhmaṇāti huhukkajātikena brāhmaṇena saddhiṃ āgatā brāhmaṇā.Jiṇṇāti jarājiṇṇā.Vuḍḍhāti vayovuddhā.Mahallakāti jātimahallakā.Addhagatāti tayo vaye addhe atikkantā.Sutametanti amhehi sutaṃ etaṃ.Tayidaṃ bho, gotama, tathevāti bho, gotama, etaṃ amhehi sutakāraṇaṃ tathā eva.Tayidaṃ bho, gotama, na sampannamevāti taṃ etaṃ abhivādanādiakaraṇaṃ ananucchavikameva.

22. In the second, sambahulā means many. Brāhmaṇā means Brahmins who came together with a Brahmin of the Huhukka lineage. Jiṇṇā means old and decrepit. Vuḍḍhā means advanced in age. Mahallakā means old in terms of lineage. Addhagatā means having passed through three stages of life. Sutametaṃ means this has been heard by us. Tayidaṃ bho, gotama, tathevā means, "This reason that has been heard by us is just so, Gotama." Tayidaṃ bho, gotama, na sampannamevā means that this non-performance of greeting and so on is not fitting.

Akālavādītiādīsu akāle vadatītiakālavādī. Asabhāvaṃ vadatītiabhūtavādī. Anatthaṃ vadati, no atthantianatthavādī. Adhammaṃ vadati, no dhammantiadhammavādī. Avinayaṃ vadati, no vinayantiavinayavādī. Anidhānavatiṃ vācaṃ bhāsitāti na hadaye nidhetabbayuttakaṃ vācaṃ bhāsitā.Akālenāti kathetuṃ ayuttakālena.Anapadesanti apadesarahitaṃ, sāpadesaṃ sakāraṇaṃ katvā na katheti.Apariyantavatinti pariyantarahitaṃ, na paricchedaṃ dassetvā katheti.Anatthasaṃhitanti na lokiyalokuttaraatthanissitaṃ katvā katheti.Bālo therotveva saṅkhaṃ gacchatīti andhabālo theroti saṅkhaṃ gacchati.

In akālavādī and so on, akālavādī means one who speaks out of season. Abhūtavādī means one who speaks what is untrue. Anatthavādī means one who speaks what is unbeneficial, not beneficial. Adhammavādī means one who speaks what is not Dhamma, not the Dhamma. Avinayavādī means one who speaks what is not discipline, not the discipline. Anidhānavatiṃ vācaṃ bhāsitā means speaks words that are not worth treasuring in the heart. Akālenā means at an improper time to speak. Anapadesaṃ means without reason, not speaking with a cause and a reason. Apariyantavati means without limit, not speaking showing a boundary. Anatthasaṃhitaṃ means not speaking connecting to mundane or supramundane benefit. Bālo therotveva saṅkhaṃ gacchatī means a foolish person goes by the name of Elder.

Kālavādītiādīni vuttapaṭipakkhavasena veditabbāni.Paṇḍito therotveva saṅkhaṃ gacchatīti paṇḍiccena samannāgatattā paṇḍito, thirabhāvappattiyā theroti saṅkhaṃ gacchati.

Kālavādī and so on should be understood in terms of the opposite of what has been said. Paṇḍito therotveva saṅkhaṃ gacchatī means one who is endowed with wisdom is wise, goes by the name of Elder due to having attained stability.

Bahussuto hotīti bahuṃ assa sutaṃ hoti, navaṅgaṃ satthusāsanaṃ pāḷianusandhipubbāparavasena uggahitaṃ hotīti attho.Sutadharoti sutassa ādhārabhūto. Yassa hi ito gahitaṃ ito palāyati, chiddaghaṭe udakaṃ viya na tiṭṭhati, parisamajjhe ekasuttaṃ vā jātakaṃ vā kathetuṃ vā vācetuṃ vā na sakkoti, ayaṃ na sutadharo nāma. Yassa pana uggahitaṃ buddhavacanaṃ uggahitakālasadisameva hoti, dasapi vīsatipi vassāni sajjhāyaṃ akarontassa neva nassati, ayaṃ sutadharo nāma.Sutasannicayoti sutassa sannicayabhūto. Yassa hi sutaṃ hadayamañjūsāya sannicitaṃ silāya lekhā viya suvaṇṇapatte pakkhittasīhavasā viya ca tiṭṭhati, ayaṃ sutasannicayo nāma.Dhātāti dhātā paguṇā. Ekaccassa hi uggahitabuddhavacanaṃ dhātaṃ paguṇaṃ niccalikaṃ na hoti, ‘‘asukaṃ suttaṃ vā jātakaṃ vā kathehī’’ti vutte ‘‘sajjhāyitvā saṃsanditvā samanuggāhitvā jānissāmī’’ti vadati. Ekaccassa dhātaṃ paguṇaṃ bhavaṅgasotasadisaṃ hoti, ‘‘asukaṃ suttaṃ vā jātakaṃ vā kathehī’’ti vutte uddharitvā tameva katheti. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘dhātā’’ti.Vacasāparicitāti suttadasaka-vaggadasakapaṇṇāsadasakavasena vācāya sajjhāyitā.Manasānupekkhitāti cittena anupekkhitā. Yassa vācāya sajjhāyitaṃ buddhavacanaṃ manasā cintentassa tattha tattha pākaṭaṃ hoti, mahādīpaṃ jāletvā ṭhitassa rūpagataṃ viya paññāyati, taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.Diṭṭhiyā suppaṭividdhāti atthato ca kāraṇato ca paññāya suppaṭividdhā.

Bahussuto hotī means he has heard much, he has learned the Teacher’s Dispensation consisting of nine parts along with the connection of the text and the sequence of what precedes and follows. Sutadharo means one who is a repository of what he has heard. For if what is taken in goes out from here and there, like water in a cracked pot, it does not stay, he cannot speak or recite even one sutta or Jātaka in the midst of an assembly, this one is not called a sutadhara. But for whom the word of the Buddha which has been learned remains just like the time it was learned, even if he does not recite it for ten or twenty years it never disappears, this one is called a sutadhara. Sutasannicayo means one who has accumulated what he has heard. For if what is heard is accumulated in the heart like a writing on a stone or like lion's fat placed in a golden bowl, this one is called a sutasannicaya. Dhātā means having at heart, ready. For the word of the Buddha that is learned is not at heart or ready for some, "If asked to speak or recite such and such a sutta or Jātaka, they say 'Having recited and compared, I will learn it after studying it properly'". For some it is at heart, ready, like the stream of existence, "If asked to speak or recite such and such a sutta or Jātaka," he brings it up and speaks just that. Referring to that it was said "dhātā". Vacasā paricitā means recited by mouth in terms of groups of ten suttas, groups of vaggas, groups of fifty suttas. Manasānupekkhitā means contemplated by mind. The word of the Buddha recited by mouth becomes clear in various places to one contemplating it in his mind, it appears like the form of something for one who stands lighting a great lamp, referring to that it was said. Diṭṭhiyā suppaṭividdhā means well-penetrated by wisdom in terms of meaning and in terms of cause.

Ābhicetasikānantiabhicetoti abhikkantaṃ visuddhaṃ cittaṃ vuccati, adhicittaṃ vā, abhicetasi jātāni ābhicetasikāni, abhicetosannissitānīti vā ābhicetasikāni.Diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārānanti diṭṭhadhamme sukhavihārānaṃ. Diṭṭhadhammoti paccakkho attabhāvo vuccati, tattha sukhavihārabhūtānanti attho. Rūpāvacarajjhānānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Tāni hi appetvā nisinnā jhāyino imasmiṃyeva attabhāve asaṃkiliṭṭhanekkhammasukhaṃ vindanti, tasmā ‘‘diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārānī’’ti vuccati.Nikāmalābhīti nikāmena lābhī, attano icchāvasena lābhī, icchiticchitakkhaṇe samāpajjituṃ samatthoti vuttaṃ hoti.Akicchalābhīti sukheneva paccanīkadhamme vikkhambhetvā samāpajjituṃ samatthoti vuttaṃ hoti.Akasiralābhīti akasirānaṃ lābhī vipulānaṃ, yathāparicchedena vuṭṭhātuṃ samatthoti vuttaṃ hoti. Ekacco hi lābhīyeva hoti, na pana icchiticchitakkhaṇe sakkoti samāpajjituṃ. Ekacco sakkoti tathāsamāpajjituṃ, pāripanthike ca pana kicchena vikkhambheti. Ekacco tathā ca samāpajjati, pāripanthike ca akiccheneva vikkhambheti, na sakkoti nāḷikayantaṃ viya yathāparicchedeyeva vuṭṭhātuṃ. Yassa pana ayaṃ tividhāpi sampadā atthi, so ‘‘akicchalābhī akasiralābhī’’ti vuccati.Āsavānaṃ khayātiādīni vuttatthāneva. Evamidha sīlampi bāhusaccampi khīṇāsavasseva sīlaṃ bāhusaccañca, jhānānipi khīṇāsavasseva vaḷañjanakajjhānāni kathitāni. ‘‘Āsavānaṃ khayā’’tiādīhi pana arahattaṃ kathitaṃ. Phalena cettha maggakiccaṃ pakāsitanti veditabbaṃ.

Ābhicetasikānaṃ means abhiceto means outstanding, pure mind, or adhicitta, what is born of the abhicetasī is ābhicetasikāni, or what is based on abhiceto is ābhicetasikāni. Diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārānaṃ means pleasant abidings in the visible here and now. Diṭṭhadhamma means the immediate existence, the pleasant abidings are the nature of that. This is a designation for the rūpāvacara jhānas. For those who sit down having abandoned [the hindrances] find the uncorrupted happiness of renunciation in this very existence, therefore it is called "pleasant abidings in the visible here and now." Nikāmalābhī means gaining at will, capable of attaining at will, at the moment of desiring to desire. Akicchalābhī means gaining without difficulty, capable of suppressing opposing states with ease. Akasiralābhī means gaining without trouble, gaining extensively, capable of rising from it at will. For some are only gainers, but are not able to attain at will at the moment of desiring to desire. Some are able to attain in that way, but suppress interfering things with difficulty. Some attain in that way, and suppress interfering things without difficulty, but are not able to rise at will just like a water clock. But one who has this threefold accomplishment is called "a gainer without difficulty, a gainer without trouble." Āsavānaṃ khayā and so on are just as in the places already spoken of. Thus here, virtue as well as great learning are the virtue and great learning of one whose taints are destroyed, the jhānas too are the vaḷañjanakajjhānas of one whose taints are destroyed. With "From the destruction of the taints" and so on, however, arahatta is spoken of. It should be understood that with the fruit, the function of the path is revealed.

Uddhatenāti uddhaccasahagatena.Samphanti palāpakathaṃ.Asamāhitasaṅkappoti aṭṭhapitasaṅkappo.Magoti magasadiso.Ārāti dūre.Thāvareyyamhāti thāvarabhāvato.Pāpadiṭṭhīti lāmakadiṭṭhi.Anādaroti ādararahito.Sutavāti sutena upagato.Paṭibhānavāti duvidhena paṭibhānena samannāgato.Paññāyatthaṃ vipassatīti sahavipassanāya maggapaññāya catunnaṃ saccānaṃ atthaṃ vinivijjhitvā passati.Pāragū sabbadhammānanti sabbesaṃ khandhādidhammānaṃ pāraṃ gato, abhiññāpāragū, pariññāpāragū, pahānapāragū, bhāvanāpāragū, sacchikiriyāpāragū, samāpattipāragūti evaṃ chabbidhena pāragamanena sabbadhammānaṃ pāraṃ pariyosānaṃ gato.Akhiloti rāgakhilādivirahito.Paṭibhānavāti duvidheneva paṭibhānena samannāgato.Brahmacariyassa kevalīti sakalabrahmacariyo. Sesamettha uttānamevāti.

Uddhatenāti: with arrogance (uddhacca). Samphanti: frivolous talk. Asamāhitasaṅkappoti: with unfixed thoughts. Magoti: like a fool. Ārāti: far. Thāvareyyamhāti: from steadfastness. Pāpadiṭṭhīti: with evil views. Anādaroti: without respect. Sutavāti: endowed with learning. Paṭibhānavāti: possessing two kinds of ready wit. Paññāyatthaṃ vipassatīti: sees the meaning of the four Noble Truths, discerning it with the wisdom of the path accompanied by insight. Pāragū sabbadhammānanti: one who has gone to the far shore of all dhammas, such as the aggregates (khandha); gone to the far shore of higher knowledge (abhiññā); gone to the far shore of complete understanding (pariññā); gone to the far shore of abandonment (pahāna); gone to the far shore of development (bhāvanā); gone to the far shore of realization (sacchikiriyā); gone to the far shore of attainments (samāpatti)—thus, having gone to the end, the far shore, of all dhammas by means of this sixfold going to the far shore. Akhiloti: without the impediments (khila) of lust, etc. Paṭibhānavāti: possessing the same two kinds of ready wit. Brahmacariyassa kevalīti: one who has completed the entire holy life (brahmacariya). The rest here is easy to understand.

3. Lokasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Lokasuttavaṇṇanā

23.Tatiyelokoti dukkhasaccaṃ.Abhisambuddhoti ñāto paccakkho kato.Lokasmāti dukkhasaccato.Pahīnoti mahābodhimaṇḍe arahattamaggañāṇena pahīno.Tathāgatassa bhāvitāti tathāgatena bhāvitā.

23. In the third, lokoti: the world, means the truth of suffering (dukkhasacca). Abhisambuddhoti: fully awakened to, known, and directly experienced. Lokasmāti: from the truth of suffering. Pahīnoti: abandoned by the knowledge of the path of arahantship at the great Bodhi-mandala. Tathāgatassa bhāvitāti: developed by the Tathāgata.

yaṃ, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tatthadiṭṭhanti rūpāyatanaṃ.Sutanti saddāyatanaṃ.Mutanti patvā gahetabbato gandhāyatanaṃ rasāyatanaṃ phoṭṭhabbāyatanaṃ.Viññātanti sukhadukkhādi dhammārammaṇaṃ.Pattanti pariyesitvā vā apariyesitvā vā pattaṃ.Pariyesitanti pattaṃ vā appattaṃ vā pariyesitaṃ.Anuvicaritaṃ manasāti cittena anusañcaritaṃ.

He said "yaṃ, bhikkhavetiādi" (Bhikkhus, whatever), etc. Here, diṭṭhanti: seen, means the eye-sphere (rūpāyatana). Sutanti: heard, means the ear-sphere (saddāyatana). Mutanti: sensed, means the nose-sphere (gandhāyatana), the tongue-sphere (rasāyatana), and the body-sphere (phoṭṭhabbāyatana), because they are apprehended by contact. Viññātanti: cognized, means the mind-object sphere (dhammārammaṇa) consisting of pleasant and unpleasant things, etc. Pattanti: attained, means attained whether sought for or not. Pariyesitanti: sought for, means sought for whether attained or not. Anuvicaritaṃ manasāti: pondered over by the mind.

Tathāgatenaabhisambuddhanti iminā etaṃ dasseti – yaṃ aparimāṇāsu lokadhātūsu imassa sadevakassa lokassa nīlaṃ pītakantiādi rūpārammaṇaṃ cakkhudvāre āpāthaṃ āgacchati, ‘‘ayaṃ satto imasmiṃ khaṇe imaṃ nāma rūpārammaṇaṃ disvā sumano vā dummano vā majjhatto vā jāto’’ti sabbaṃ tathāgatassa evaṃ abhisambuddhaṃ. Tathā yaṃ aparimāṇāsu lokadhātūsu imassa sadevakassa lokassa bherisaddo mudiṅgasaddotiādi saddārammaṇaṃ sotadvāre āpāthaṃ āgacchati, mūlagandho tacagandhotiādi gandhārammaṇaṃ ghānadvāre āpāthaṃ āgacchati, mūlaraso khandharasotiādi rasārammaṇaṃ jivhādvāre āpāthaṃ āgacchati, kakkhaḷaṃ mudukantiādi pathavīdhātutejodhātuvāyodhātubhedaṃ phoṭṭhabbārammaṇaṃ kāyadvāre āpāthaṃ āgacchati, ‘‘ayaṃ satto imasmiṃ khaṇe imaṃ nāma phoṭṭhabbārammaṇaṃ phusitvā sumano vā dummano vā majjhatto vā jāto’’ti sabbaṃ tathāgatassa evaṃ abhisambuddhaṃ. Tathā yaṃ aparimāṇāsu lokadhātūsu imassa sadevakassa lokassa sukhadukkhādibhedaṃ dhammārammaṇaṃ manodvārassa āpāthaṃ āgacchati, ‘‘ayaṃ satto imasmiṃ khaṇe imaṃ nāma dhammārammaṇaṃ vijānitvā sumano vā dummano vā majjhatto vā jāto’’ti sabbaṃ tathāgatassa evaṃ abhisambuddhaṃ. Yañhi, bhikkhave, imesaṃ sabbasattānaṃ diṭṭhaṃ sutaṃ mutaṃ viññātaṃ, tattha tathāgatena adiṭṭhaṃ vā asutaṃ vā amutaṃ vā aviññātaṃ vā natthi, imassa pana mahājanassa pariyesitvā appattampi atthi, apariyesitvā appattampi atthi, pariyesitvā pattampi atthi, apariyesitvā pattampi atthi, sabbampi tathāgatassa appattaṃ nāma natthi ñāṇena asacchikataṃ.

Tathāgatena abhisambuddhanti: With this, he shows that whatever form object (rūpārammaṇa), such as blue or yellow, comes to the range of the eye-door in the limitless world-systems of this world with its devas, [the Tathāgata knows] "This being, having seen this form object at this moment, has become happy, unhappy, or indifferent." All this is fully awakened to by the Tathāgata. Similarly, whatever sound object (saddārammaṇa), such as the sound of a drum or a lute, comes to the range of the ear-door in the limitless world-systems of this world with its devas; whatever odor object (gandhārammaṇa), such as the root scent or the bark scent, comes to the range of the nose-door; whatever taste object (rasārammaṇa), such as the root taste or the stem taste, comes to the range of the tongue-door; whatever tangible object (phoṭṭhabbārammaṇa), a distinction of earth-element, fire-element, or air-element, such as hard or soft, comes to the range of the body-door, [the Tathāgata knows] "This being, having touched this tangible object at this moment, has become happy, unhappy, or indifferent." All this is fully awakened to by the Tathāgata. Similarly, whatever mind-object (dhammārammaṇa), a distinction of pleasant or unpleasant things, comes to the range of the mind-door in the limitless world-systems of this world with its devas, [the Tathāgata knows] "This being, having cognized this mind-object at this moment, has become happy, unhappy, or indifferent." All this is fully awakened to by the Tathāgata. Indeed, bhikkhus, there is nothing seen, heard, sensed, or cognized by all these beings that is unseen, unheard, unsensed, or uncognized by the Tathāgata. But for this great mass of people, there are things unattained even when sought for, and things unattained when not sought for, things attained when sought for, and things attained when not sought for. However, there is nothing unattained by the Tathāgata that is not realized by knowledge.

Tasmā tathāgatoti vuccatīti yaṃ yathā lokena gataṃ, tassa tatheva gatattā tathāgatoti vuccati. Pāḷiyaṃ pana ‘‘abhisambuddha’’nti vuttaṃ, taṃ gatasaddena ekatthaṃ. Iminā nayena sabbavāresu tathāgatoti nigamassa attho veditabbo. Tassa yutti ekapuggalavaṇṇanāyaṃ tathāgatasaddavitthāre vuttāyeva. Apicetthaaññadatthūti ekaṃsatthe nipāto. Dakkhatītidaso. Vasaṃ vattetītivasavattī.

Tasmā tathāgatoti vuccatīti: Therefore, he is called the Tathāgata because he has gone to the truth (tathā) in the same way (tathā) as it has been gone to by the world. However, in the Pali, it is said "abhisambuddhanti" (fully awakened), which is the same meaning as the word "gata" (gone). In this way, the meaning of the conclusion "Tathāgata" should be understood in all instances. Its explanation has already been given in the detailed explanation of the word "Tathāgata" in the explanation of the characteristics of a single individual. Moreover, here, aññadatthūti: is a particle in the sense of uniqueness. Dakkhatīti: daso: he sees, therefore, he is a seer (daso). Vasaṃ vattetīti: vasavattī: he controls, therefore, he is a controller (vasavattī).

Sabbaṃ lokaṃ abhiññāti tedhātukaṃ lokasannivāsaṃ jānitvā.Sabbaṃ loke yathātathanti tasmiṃ tedhātukalokasannivāse yaṃkiñci neyyaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ yathātathaṃ aviparītaṃ jānitvā.Visaṃyuttoti catunnaṃ yogānaṃ pahānena visaṃyutto.Anūpayoti taṇhādiṭṭhiupayehi virahito.Sabbābhibhūti rūpādīni sabbārammaṇāni abhibhavitvā ṭhito.Dhīroti dhitisampanno.Sabbaganthappamocanoti sabbe cattāropi ganthe mocetvā ṭhito.Phuṭṭhassāti phuṭṭhā assa. Idañca karaṇatthe sāmivacanaṃ.Paramā santīti nibbānaṃ. Tañhi tena ñāṇaphusanena phuṭṭhaṃ. Tenevāha –nibbānaṃ akutobhayanti. Atha vāparamāsantīti uttamā santi. Katarā sāti? Nibbānaṃ. Yasmā pana nibbāne kutoci bhayaṃ natthi, tasmā taṃakutobhayanti vuccati.Vimutto upadhisaṅkhayeti upadhisaṅkhayasaṅkhāte nibbāne tadārammaṇāya phalavimuttiyā vimutto.Sīho anuttaroti parissayānaṃ sahanaṭṭhena kilesānañca hiṃsanaṭṭhena tathāgato anuttaro sīho nāma.Brahmanti seṭṭhaṃ.Itīti evaṃ tathāgatassa guṇe jānitvā.Saṅgammāti samāgantvā.Taṃ namassantīti taṃ tathāgataṃ te saraṇaṃ gatā namassanti. Idāni yaṃ vadantā te namassanti, taṃ dassetuṃdantotiādi vuttaṃ. Taṃ uttānatthamevāti.

Sabbaṃ lokaṃ abhiññāti: having known the entire aggregation of the three realms (tedhātuka). Sabbaṃ loke yathātathanti: having known everything knowable in that aggregation of the three realms as it actually is (yathātathaṃ), without perversion. Visaṃyuttoti: detached by the abandonment of the four bonds (yoga). Anūpayoti: without attachment, devoid of the attachments of craving and wrong view, etc. Sabbābhibhūti: having overcome all objects, such as forms, he stands. Dhīroti: endowed with wisdom (dhiti). Sabbaganthappamocanoti: having released all four bonds, he stands. Phuṭṭhassāti: he has touched; this is a possessive word in the sense of instrumentality. Paramā santīti: Nibbāna, for it is touched by him with the touch of knowledge. Therefore, he said, "nibbānaṃ akutobhayanti" (Nibbāna is without fear from anywhere). Alternatively, paramāsantīti: the highest peace. Which peace? Nibbāna. Since there is no fear from anywhere in Nibbāna, therefore it is called akutobhayanti (without fear from anywhere). Vimutto upadhisaṅkhayeti: liberated by the liberation of fruition (phalavimutti) with Nibbāna, reckoned as the cessation of becoming (upadhisaṅkhaya), as its object. Sīho anuttaroti: the Tathāgata is called the unsurpassed lion (anuttaro sīho) because of his endurance of adversities and his destruction of defilements. Brahmanti: the best. Itīti: thus, having known the qualities of the Tathāgata. Saṅgammāti: having gathered together. Taṃ namassantīti: having gone to him for refuge, they honor that Tathāgata. Now, to show what they say when they honor him, dantotiādi is said. That is easy to understand.

4. Kāḷakārāmasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Kāḷakārāmasuttavaṇṇanā

24.Catutthaṃ atthuppattiyaṃ nikkhittaṃ. Katarāya atthuppattiyanti? Dasabalaguṇakathāya. Anāthapiṇḍikassa kira dhītā cūḷasubhaddā ‘‘sāketanagare kāḷakaseṭṭhiputtassa gehaṃ gacchissāmī’’ti satthāraṃ upasaṅkamitvā, ‘‘bhante, ahaṃ micchādiṭṭhikakulaṃ gacchāmi. Sace tattha sakkāraṃ labhissāmi, ekasmiṃ purise pesiyamāne papañco bhavissati, maṃ āvajjeyyātha bhagavā’’ti paṭiññaṃ gahetvā agamāsi. Seṭṭhi ‘‘suṇisā me āgatā’’ti maṅgalaṃ karontova bahuṃ khādanīyabhojanīyaṃ paṭiyādetvā pañca acelakasatāni nimantesi. So tesu nisinnesu ‘‘dhītā me āgantvā arahante vandatū’’ti cūḷasubhaddāya pesesi. Āgataphalā ariyasāvikā arahanteti vuttamatteyeva ‘‘lābhā vata me’’ti uṭṭhahitvā gatā te nissirikadassane acelake disvāva ‘‘samaṇā nāma na evarūpā honti, tāta, yesaṃ neva ajjhattaṃ hirī, na bahiddhā ottappaṃ atthī’’ti vatvā ‘‘na ime samaṇā, dhīdhī’’ti kheḷaṃ pātetvā nivattitvā attano vasanaṭṭhānameva gatā.

24. The fourth [sutta] was placed based on the arising of a matter. What is the arising of the matter? It is the account of the qualities of the Ten Powers. It is said that Anāthapiṇḍika's daughter, Cūḷasubhaddā, approached the Teacher [saying], "Bhante, I will go to the house of the son of Kāḷaka-setthi in Sāketa-nagara," [and] having taken a promise [from the Teacher, saying] "If I receive honor there, there will be complications when a man is sent [to inform you], may the Blessed One consider me," she departed. The setthi, making a celebration [saying], "My daughter-in-law has come," prepared much food both hard and soft and invited five hundred naked ascetics (acelaka). When they were seated, he sent [a message] to Cūḷasubhaddā, "My daughter, come and pay homage to the arahants." The noble disciple who had attained the fruits [of the path], as soon as the word "arahants" was uttered, thinking "It is indeed a gain for me," got up and went. Having seen those naked ascetics with their inauspicious appearance, she said, "Ascetics are not like this; these have no shame within nor fear without." Saying, "These are not ascetics, fie, fie!" she spat phlegm and returned to her own dwelling.

Tato acelakā ‘‘mahāseṭṭhi kuto te evarūpā kālakaṇṇī laddhā, kiṃ sakalajambudīpe aññā dārikā natthī’’ti seṭṭhiṃ paribhāsiṃsu. So ‘‘ācariyā jānitvā vā kataṃ hotu ajānitvā vā, ahamettha jānissāmī’’ti acelake uyyojetvā subhaddāya santikaṃ gantvā ‘‘amma, kasmā evarūpaṃ akāsi, kasmā arahante lajjāpesī’’ti āha. Tāta, arahantā nāma evarūpā na hontīti. Atha naṃ so āha –

Then the naked ascetics reproached the great setthi, "Great setthi, where did you get such a jinx? Is there no other girl in all of Jambudīpa?" He, thinking, "Whether the teachers did this knowingly or unknowingly, I will find out about this," having dismissed the naked ascetics, went to Subhaddā and said, "Dear, why did you do such a thing? Why did you embarrass the arahants?" [She replied,] "Father, arahants are not like this." Then he said to her:

‘‘Kīdisā samaṇā tuyhaṃ, bāḷhaṃ kho ne pasaṃsasi;

"What kind of ascetics are yours, you greatly praise them;
What is their morality, what is their conduct? Tell me when asked."

Sā āha –

She said:

‘‘Santindriyā santamanā, santatejā guṇamaggasaṇṭhitā;

"With senses calmed, with minds stilled, with energy calmed, established on the path of virtue;
With eyes cast down, speaking moderately, such are my ascetics.

‘‘Vasanti vanamogayha, nāgo chetvāva bandhanaṃ;

"They dwell having entered the forest, like a nāga having cut its bonds;
Living alone, without a second, such are my ascetics."

Evañca pana vatvā seṭṭhissa pure ṭhatvā tiṇṇaṃ ratanānaṃ guṇaṃ kathesi. Seṭṭhi tassā vacanaṃ sutvā ‘‘yadi evaṃ, tava samaṇe ānetvā maṅgalaṃ karomā’’ti. Sā pucchi ‘‘kadā karissatha, tātā’’ti. Seṭṭhi cintesi – ‘‘katipāhaccayenāti vutte pesetvā pakkosāpeyyā’’ti. Atha naṃ ‘‘sve ammā’’ti āha. Sā sāyanhasamaye uparipāsādaṃ āruyha mahantaṃ pupphasamuggaṃ gahetvā satthu guṇe anussaritvā aṭṭha pupphamuṭṭhiyo dasabalassa vissajjetvā añjaliṃ paggayha namassamānā aṭṭhāsi. Evañca avaca – ‘‘bhagavā sve pañcahi bhikkhusatehi saddhiṃ mayhaṃ bhikkhaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti. Tāni pupphāni gantvā dasabalassa matthake vitānaṃ hutvā aṭṭhaṃsu. Satthā āvajjento taṃ kāraṇaṃ addasa. Dhammadesanāpariyosāne anāthapiṇḍikamahāseṭṭhi dasabalaṃ vanditvā ‘‘sve, bhante, pañcahi bhikkhusatehi saddhiṃ mama gehe bhikkhaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti āha. Cūḷasubhaddāya nimantitamha seṭṭhīti. Na, bhante, kañci āgataṃ passāmāti. Āma, seṭṭhi, saddhā pana upāsikā dūre yojanasatamatthakepi yojanasahassamatthakepi ṭhitā himavanto viya paññāyatīti vatvā –

Having spoken thus, standing before the setthi, she spoke of the qualities of the Triple Gem. The setthi, having heard her words, [said,] "If so, let us bring your ascetics and make a celebration." She asked, "When will you do it, father?" The setthi thought, "If I say 'after a few days', I would have to send [a messenger] to call them back." Then he said to her, "Tomorrow, dear." She, in the evening, having ascended to the upper story of the palace, taking a large bouquet of flowers, recollecting the qualities of the Teacher, having thrown eight handfuls of flowers towards the Ten-Powered One, stood paying homage with her hands clasped in añjali. And she said thus, "May the Blessed One accept my alms tomorrow together with five hundred bhikkhus." Those flowers went and formed a canopy over the head of the Ten-Powered One and remained there. The Teacher, reflecting, saw that cause. At the end of the Dhamma talk, Anāthapiṇḍika-mahāseṭṭhi, having paid homage to the Ten-Powered One, [said,] "Bhante, may the Blessed One accept alms in my house tomorrow together with five hundred bhikkhus." [The Teacher replied,] "The setthi has been invited by Cūḷasubhaddā." "No, bhante, I do not see anyone who has come." "Yes, setthi, a faithful female lay follower is apparent like the Himalayas, even standing a hundred or a thousand yojanas away," and said:

‘‘Dūre santo pakāsenti, himavantova pabbato;

"The good make themselves known from afar, like the Himalayas;
The bad are not seen here, like arrows shot at night." (dha. pa. 304) –

Imaṃ gāthamāha. Anāthapiṇḍiko ‘‘bhante, mama, dhītu saṅgahaṃ karothā’’ti vanditvā pakkāmi.

Anāthapiṇḍika, [saying,] "Bhante, please accept [this invitation] for the sake of my daughter," having paid homage, departed.

Satthā ānandattheraṃ āmantesi – ‘‘ahaṃ, ānanda, sāketaṃ gamissāmi, pañcannaṃ bhikkhusatānaṃ salākaṃ dehi. Dadanto ca chaḷabhiññānaṃyeva dadeyyāsī’’ti. Thero tathā akāsi. Cūḷasubhaddā rattibhāgasamanantare cintesi – ‘‘buddhā nāma bahukiccā bahukaraṇīyā, maṃ sallakkheyya vā na vā, kiṃ nu kho karissāmī’’ti. Tasmiṃ khaṇe vessavaṇo mahārājā cūḷasubhaddāya kathesi – ‘‘bhadde, mā kho tvaṃ vimanā ahosi, mā dummanā. Adhivutthaṃ te bhagavatā svātanāya bhattaṃ saddhiṃ bhikkhusaṅghenā’’ti. Sā tuṭṭhapahaṭṭhā dānameva saṃvidahi. Sakkopi kho devarājā vissakammaṃ āmantesi – ‘‘tāta, dasabalo cūḷasubhaddāya santikaṃ sāketanagaraṃ gacchissati, pañca kūṭāgārasatāni māpehī’’ti. So tathā akāsi. Satthā pañcahi chaḷabhiññasatehi parivuto kūṭāgārayānena maṇivaṇṇaṃ ākāsaṃ vilikhanto viya sāketanagaraṃ agamāsi.

The Teacher addressed Ānanda-thera, "Ānanda, I will go to Sāketa; give out tickets to five hundred bhikkhus, and when giving, give only to those with the six supernormal knowledges." The Thera did so. Cūḷasubhaddā, shortly after nightfall, thought, "Buddhas have much to do and many obligations; will he remember me or not? What shall I do?" At that moment, Vessavaṇa-mahārājā spoke to Cūḷasubhaddā, "Good lady, do not be disheartened, do not be sad. The Blessed One has accepted your meal for tomorrow with the Sangha of bhikkhus." She, delighted and joyful, prepared the alms. Sakka, the King of Gods, also addressed Vissakamma, "Dear, the Ten-Powered One will go to Sāketa-nagara to Cūḷasubhaddā's place; build five hundred peaked houses." He did so. The Teacher, surrounded by five hundred bhikkhus with the six supernormal knowledges, went to Sāketa-nagara as if writing the color of jewels on the sky with a peaked-house vehicle.

Subhaddā buddhappamukhassa bhikkhusaṅghassa dānaṃ datvā satthāraṃ vanditvā āha – ‘‘bhante, mayhaṃ sasurapakkho micchādiṭṭhiko, sādhu tesaṃ anucchavikadhammaṃ kathethā’’ti. Satthā dhammaṃ desesi. Kāḷakaseṭṭhi sotāpanno hutvā attano uyyānaṃ dasabalassa adāsi. Acelakā ‘‘amhākaṃ paṭhamaṃ dinna’’nti nikkhamituṃ na icchanti. ‘‘Gacchatha nīharitabbaniyāmena te nīharathā’’ti sabbe nīharāpetvā tattheva satthu vihāraṃ kāretvā brahmadeyyaṃ katvā udakaṃ pātesi. So kāḷakena kāritatāya kāḷakārāmo nāma jāto. Bhagavā tasmiṃ samaye tattha viharati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘sākete viharati kāḷakārāme’’ti.

Subhaddā, having given alms to the Sangha of bhikkhus with the Buddha at its head, having paid homage to the Teacher, said, "Bhante, my in-laws are of wrong view; it would be good if you would speak Dhamma appropriate to them." The Teacher taught the Dhamma. Kāḷaka-setthi, having become a sotāpanna, gave his garden to the Ten-Powered One. The naked ascetics did not want to leave, [saying,] "It was given to us first." [He ordered,] "Go and remove them by the rule of expulsion; expel them all!" Having caused a monastery to be built for the Teacher right there, he made it brahmadeyya and poured water [as a sign of donation]. Because it was built by Kāḷaka, it became known as Kāḷakārāma. The Blessed One dwelt there at that time. Therefore it was said, "He dwells at Sāketa in Kāḷakārāma."

Bhikkhū āmantesīti pañcasate bhikkhū āmantesi. Te kira sāketanagaravāsino kulaputtā satthu dhammadesanaṃ sutvā satthu santike pabbajitvā upaṭṭhānasālāya nisinnā ‘‘aho buddhaguṇā nāma mahantā, evarūpaṃ nāma micchādiṭṭhikaṃ kāḷakaseṭṭhiṃ diṭṭhito mocetvā sotāpattiphalaṃ pāpetvā sakalanagaraṃ satthārā devalokasadisaṃ kata’’nti dasabalassa guṇaṃ kathenti. Satthā tesaṃ guṇaṃ kathentānaṃ cittaṃ upaparikkhitvā – ‘‘mayi gate mahatī desanā samuṭṭhissati, desanāpariyosāne ca ime pañcasatā bhikkhū arahatte patiṭṭhahissanti, mahāpathavī udakapariyantaṃ katvā kampissatī’’ti dhammasabhaṃ gantvā paññattavarabuddhāsane nisinno te bhikkhū ādiṃ katvāyaṃ, bhikkhave, sadevakassa lokassāti imaṃ desanaṃ ārabhi. Evamidaṃ suttaṃ guṇakathāya nikkhittanti veditabbaṃ.

Bhikkhū āmantesīti: He addressed the five hundred bhikkhus. It is said that those sons of good families residing in Sāketa-nagara, having heard the Teacher's Dhamma talk, having gone forth in the presence of the Teacher, seated in the hall of attendance, praising the qualities of the Ten-Powered One [said], "Indeed, the qualities of the Buddha are great; having freed such a wrong-viewed Kāḷaka-setthi from wrong view, having caused him to attain the fruit of sotāpatti, the Teacher has made the entire city like the deva world." The Teacher, having examined the minds of those praising his qualities, [thinking,] "When I leave, a great discourse will arise, and at the end of the discourse, these five hundred bhikkhus will be established in arahantship, and the great earth will tremble, making the water its boundary," having gone to the Dhamma assembly hall, seated on the excellent Buddha-seat that was prepared, beginning with those bhikkhus, began this discourse, yaṃ, bhikkhave, sadevakassa lokassāti (Bhikkhus, whatever in the world with its devas). Thus, this sutta should be understood as being placed based on an account of qualities.

Abbhaññāsinti abhiaññāsiṃ, jāninti attho.Viditanti pākaṭaṃ katvā ñātaṃ. Iminā etaṃ dasseti – aññe jānantiyeva, mayā pana pākaṭaṃ katvā viditanti. Imehi tīhi padehi sabbaññutabhūmi nāma kathitā.Taṃ tathāgato na upaṭṭhāsīti taṃ chadvārikaṃ ārammaṇaṃ tathāgato taṇhāya vā diṭṭhiyā vā na upaṭṭhāsi na upagañchi. Ayañhi passati bhagavā cakkhunā rūpaṃ, chandarāgo bhagavato natthi, suvimuttacitto so bhagavā. Suṇāti bhagavā sotena saddaṃ. Ghāyati bhagavā ghānena gandhaṃ. Sāyati bhagavā jivhāya rasaṃ. Phusati bhagavā kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṃ. Vijānāti bhagavā manasā dhammaṃ, chandarāgo bhagavato natthi, suvimuttacitto so bhagavā. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘taṃ tathāgato na upaṭṭhāsī’’ti. Iminā padena khīṇāsavabhūmi kathitāti veditabbā.

Taṃ mamassa musāti taṃ me vacanaṃ musāvādo nāma bhaveyya.Taṃ passa tādisamevāti tampi musāvādo bhaveyya.Taṃ mamassa kalīti taṃ vacanaṃ mayhaṃ doso bhaveyyāti attho. Ettāvatā saccabhūmi nāma kathitāti veditabbā.

Daṭṭhādaṭṭhabbanti disvā daṭṭhabbaṃ.Diṭṭhaṃ na maññatīti taṃ diṭṭhaṃ rūpāyatanaṃ ‘‘ahaṃ mahājanena diṭṭhameva passāmī’’ti taṇhāmānadiṭṭhīhi na maññati.Adiṭṭhaṃ na maññatīti ‘‘ahaṃ mahājanena adiṭṭhameva etaṃ passāmī’’ti evampi taṇhādīhi maññanāhi na maññati.Daṭṭhabbaṃ na maññatīti ‘‘mahājanena diṭṭhaṃ passāmī’’ti evampi tāhi maññanāhi na maññati. Daṭṭhabbañhi adiṭṭhampi hotiyeva. Evarūpāni hi vacanāni tīsupi kālesu labbhanti, tenassa attho vutto.Daṭṭhāraṃna maññatīti passitāraṃ ekasattaṃ nāma tāhi maññanāhi na maññatīti attho. Sesaṭṭhānesupi imināva nayena attho veditabbo. Iminā ettakena ṭhānena suññatābhūmi nāma kathitā.

Iti kho, bhikkhaveti evaṃ kho, bhikkhave.Tādīyeva tādītitāditānāma ekasadisatā. Tathāgato ca yādiso lābhādīsu, tādisova alābhādīsu. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘lābhepi tādī, alābhepi tādī. Yasepi tādī, ayasepi tādī. Nindāyapi tādī, pasaṃsāyapi tādī. Sukhepi tādī, dukkhepi tādī’’ti (mahāni. 38, 192). Imāya tāditāya tādī.Tamhā ca pana tādimhāti tato tathāgatatādito añño uttaritaro vā paṇītataro vā tādī natthīti ettāvatā tādibhūmi nāma kathitā. Imāhi pañcabhūmīhi desanaṃ niṭṭhāpentassa pañcasupi ṭhānesu mahāpathavī sakkhibhāvena akampittha. Desanāpariyosāne te pañcasate adhunāpabbajite kulaputte ādiṃ katvā taṃ ṭhānaṃ pattānaṃ devamanussānaṃ caturāsīti pāṇasahassāni amatapānaṃ piviṃsu.

yaṃkiñcītiādimāha. Tatthaajjhositaṃ saccamutaṃ paresanti paresaṃ saddhāya parapattiyāyanāya saccamutanti maññitvā ajjhositaṃ gilitvā pariniṭṭhāpetvā gahitaṃ.Sayasaṃvutesūti sayameva saṃvaritvā piyāyitvā gahitagahaṇesu, diṭṭhigatikesūti attho. Diṭṭhigatikā hi sayaṃ saṃvutāti vuccanti.Saccaṃ musā vāpi paraṃ daheyyāti tesu sayaṃ saṃvutasaṅkhātesu diṭṭhigatikesu tathāgato tādī tesaṃ ekampi vacanaṃ ‘‘idameva saccaṃ moghamañña’’nti evaṃ saccaṃ musā vāpi paraṃ uttamaṃ katvā na odaheyya, na saddaheyya, na pattiyāyeyya.Etañca sallanti etaṃ diṭṭhisallaṃ.Paṭikacca disvāti puretaraṃ bodhimūleyeva disvā.Visattāti laggā lagitā palibuddhā.Jānāmi passāmi tatheva etanti yathāyaṃ pajā ajjhositā gilitvā pariniṭṭhāpetvā visattā laggā lagitā, evaṃ ahampi jānāmi passāmi. Tathā evaṃ yathā etāya pajāya gahitanti evaṃ ajjhositaṃ natthi tathāgatānanti attho.

5. Brahmacariyasuttavaṇṇanā

25.Pañcamejanakuhanatthanti tīhi kuhanavatthūhi janassa kuhanatthāya.Na janalapanatthanti na janassa upalāpanatthaṃ.Na lābhasakkārasilokānisaṃsatthanti na cīvarādithutivacanatthaṃ.Na itivādappamokkhānisaṃsatthanti na tena tena kāraṇena katavādānisaṃsatthaṃ, na vādassa pamokkhānisaṃsatthaṃ.Na iti maṃ jano jānātūti na ‘‘evaṃ kira esa bhikkhu, evaṃ kira esa bhikkhū’’ti janassa jānanatthāya.Saṃvaratthanti pañcahi saṃvarehi saṃvaraṇatthāya.Pahānatthanti tīhi pahānehi pajahanatthāya.Virāgatthanti rāgādīnaṃ virajjanatthāya.Nirodhatthanti tesaṃyeva nirujjhanatthāya.Anītihanti itihaparivajjitaṃ, aparapattiyanti attho.Nibbānogadhagāminanti nibbānassa antogāminaṃ. Maggabrahmacariyañhi nibbānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ karitvā nibbānassa antoyeva vattati pavattati.Paṭipajjantīti duvidhampi paṭipajjanti. Imasmiṃ sutte vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ kathetvā gāthāsu vivaṭṭameva kathitaṃ.

6. Kuhasuttavaṇṇanā

26.Chaṭṭhekuhāti kuhakā.Thaddhāti kodhena ca mānena ca thaddhā.Lapāti upalāpakā.Siṅgīti ‘‘tattha katamaṃ siṅgaṃ, yaṃ siṅgaṃ siṅgāratā cāturatā cāturiyaṃ parikkhattatā pārikkhattiya’’nti (vibha. 852) evaṃ vuttehi siṅgasadisehi pākaṭakilesehi samannāgatā.Unnaḷāti uggatanaḷā tucchamānaṃ ukkhipitvā ṭhitā.Asamāhitāti cittekaggamattassāpi alābhino.Name te, bhikkhave, bhikkhū māmakāti te mayhaṃ bhikkhū mama santakā na honti. ‘‘Te mayha’’nti idaṃ pana satthāraṃ uddissa pabbajitattā vuttaṃ.Te kho me, bhikkhave, bhikkhū māmakāti idhāpi meti attānaṃ uddissa pabbajitattā vadati, sammāpaṭipannattā pana ‘‘māmakā’’ti āha.Vuddhiṃ virūḷhiṃ vepullaṃ āpajjantīti sīlādīhi guṇehi vaḍḍhanato vuddhiṃ, niccalabhāvena virūḷhiṃ, sabbattha patthaṭatāya vepullaṃ pāpuṇanti. Te panete yāva arahattamaggā viruhanti, arahattaphalaṃ patte virūḷhā nāma honti. Iti imasmiṃ suttepi gāthāsupi vaṭṭavivaṭṭameva kathitaṃ.

7. Santuṭṭhisuttavaṇṇanā

27.Sattameappānīti parittāni.Sulabhānīti sukhena laddhabbāni, yattha katthaci sakkā honti labhituṃ.Anavajjānīti niddosāni.Piṇḍiyālopabhojananti jaṅghāpiṇḍiyabalena caritvā ālopamattaṃ laddhaṃ bhojanaṃ.Pūtimuttanti yaṃkiñci muttaṃ. Yathā hi suvaṇṇavaṇṇopi kāyo pūtikāyoti vuccati, evaṃ abhinavampi muttaṃ pūtimuttameva.

Vighātoti vigataghāto, cittassa dukkhaṃ na hotīti attho.Disānappaṭihaññatīti yassa hi ‘‘asukaṭṭhānaṃ nāma gato cīvarādīni labhissāmī’’ti cittaṃ uppajjati, tassa disā paṭihaññati nāma. Yassa evaṃ na uppajjati, tassa nappaṭihaññati nāma.Dhammāti paṭipattidhammā.Sāmaññassānulomikāti samaṇadhammassa anulomā.Adhiggahitāti sabbete tuṭṭhacittassa bhikkhuno adhiggahitā honti antogatā na paribāhirāti.

8. Ariyavaṃsasuttavaṇṇanā

28.Aṭṭhamassa ajjhāsayiko nikkhepo. Imaṃ kira mahāariyavaṃsasuttantaṃ bhagavā jetavanamahāvihāre dhammasabhāyaṃ paññattavarabuddhāsane nisinno attanopi parapuggalānampi ajjhāsayavasena parivāretvā nisinnāni cattālīsa bhikkhusahassāni, ‘‘bhikkhave’’ti āmantetvācattārome, bhikkhave, ariyavaṃsāti ārabhi. Tatthaariyavaṃsāti ariyānaṃ vaṃsā. Yathā hi khattiyavaṃso brāhmaṇavaṃso vessavaṃso suddavaṃso samaṇavaṃso kulavaṃso rājavaṃso, evaṃ ayampi aṭṭhamo ariyavaṃso ariyatanti ariyapaveṇī nāma hoti. So kho panāyaṃ ariyavaṃso imesaṃ vaṃsānaṃ mūlagandhādīnaṃ kāḷānusārigandhādayo viya aggamakkhāyati.

ariyavaṃsā. Ito pubbe hi satasahassakappādhikānaṃ catunnaṃ asaṅkhyeyyānaṃ matthake taṇhaṅkaro, medhaṅkaro, saraṇaṅkaro, dīpaṅkaroti cattāro buddhā uppannā, te ariyā, tesaṃ ariyānaṃ vaṃsāti ariyavaṃsā. Tesaṃ buddhānaṃ parinibbānato aparabhāge asaṅkhyeyyaṃ atikkamitvā koṇḍañño nāma buddho uppanno…pe… imasmiṃ kappe kakusandho, koṇāgamano, kassapo, amhākaṃ bhagavā gotamoti cattāro buddhā uppannā, tesaṃ ariyānaṃ vaṃsāti ariyavaṃsā. Apica atītānāgatapaccuppannānaṃ sabbabuddha-paccekabuddha-buddhasāvakānaṃ ariyānaṃ vaṃsāti ariyavaṃsā.

aggaññāaggāti jānitabbā,rattaññādīgharattaṃ pavattāti jānitabbā,vaṃsaññāvaṃsāti jānitabbā.Porāṇāna adhunuppattikā.Asaṃkiṇṇāavikiṇṇā anapanītā.Asaṃkiṇṇapubbāatītabuddhehipi na saṃkiṇṇapubbā, ‘‘ki imehī’’ti na apanītapubbā.Na saṃkīyantīti idānipi na apanīyanti.Na saṃkīyissantīti anāgatabuddhehipi na apanīyissanti. Ye loke viññū samaṇabrāhmaṇā, tehiappaṭikuṭṭhā,samaṇehi brāhmaṇehi viññūhi aninditā agarahitā.

Santuṭṭho hotīti paccayasantosavasena santuṭṭho hoti.Itarītarenāti na thūlasukhumalūkhapaṇītathirajiṇṇānaṃ yena kenaci, atha kho yathāladdhādīnaṃ itarītarena yena kenaci santuṭṭho hotīti attho. Cīvarasmiñhi tayo santosā yathālābhasantoso yathābalasantoso yathāsāruppasantosoti. Piṇḍapātādīsupi eseva nayo. Tesaṃ vitthārakathā ‘‘santuṭṭhassa, bhikkhave, anuppannā ceva kusalā dhammā uppajjantī’’ti imasmiṃ sutte vuttanayeneva veditabbā. Iti ime tayo santose sandhāya ‘‘santuṭṭho hoti itarītarena cīvarena, yathāladdhādīsu yena kenaci cīvarena santuṭṭho hotī’’ti vuttaṃ.

cīvaraṃ jānitabbanti khomādīni cha cīvarāni dukūlādīni cha anulomacīvarāni jānitabbāni. Imāni dvādasa kappiyacīvarāni. Kusacīraṃ, vākacīraṃ, phalakacīraṃ, kesakambalaṃ, vāḷakambalaṃ, potthako, cammaṃ, ulūkapakkhaṃ, rukkhadussaṃ, latādussaṃ, erakadussaṃ, kadalidussaṃ, veḷudussanti evamādīni pana akappiyacīvarāni.

Cīvarakkhettanti ‘‘saṅghato vā gaṇato vā ñātito vā mittato vā attano vā dhanena, paṃsukūlaṃ vā’’ti evaṃ uppajjanato cha khettāni, aṭṭhannañca mātikānaṃ vasena aṭṭha khettāni jānitabbāni.

Paṃsukūlanti sosānikaṃ, pāpaṇikaṃ, rathiyaṃ, saṅkārakūṭakaṃ, sotthiyaṃ, sinānaṃ, titthaṃ, gatapaccāgataṃ, aggidaḍḍhaṃ, gokhāyitaṃ, upacikakhāyitaṃ, undūrakhāyitaṃ, antacchinnaṃ, dasacchinnaṃ, dhajāhaṭaṃ, thūpaṃ, samaṇacīvaraṃ, sāmuddiyaṃ, ābhisekiyaṃ, panthikaṃ, vātāhaṭaṃ, iddhimayaṃ, devadattiyanti tevīsati paṃsukūlāni veditabbāni. Ettha casotthiyanti gabbhamalaharaṇaṃ.Gatapaccāgatanti matakasarīraṃ pārupitvā susānaṃ netvā ānītacīvaraṃ.Dhajāhaṭanti dhajaṃ ussāpetvā tato ānītaṃ.Thūpanti vammike pūjitacīvaraṃ.Sāmuddiyanti samuddavīcīhi thalaṃ pāpitaṃ.Panthikanti panthaṃ gacchantehi corabhayena pāsāṇehi koṭṭetvā pārutacīvaraṃ.Iddhimayanti ehibhikkhucīvaraṃ. Sesaṃ pākaṭamevāti.

Cīvarasantosoti vīsati cīvarasantosā – cīvare vitakkasantoso, gamanasantoso, pariyesanasantoso, paṭilābhasantoso, mattapaṭiggahaṇasantoso, loluppavivajjanasantoso, yathālābhasantoso, yathābalasantoso, yathāsāruppasantoso, udakasantoso, dhovanasantoso, karaṇasantoso, parimāṇasantoso, suttasantoso, sibbanasantoso, rajanasantoso, kappasantoso, paribhogasantoso, sannidhiparivajjanasantoso, vissajjanasantosoti.

Contentment with robes (cīvarasantoso): There are twenty kinds of contentment with robes: contentment with thoughts (vitakkasantoso) about robes, contentment with going (gamanasantoso) for robes, contentment with seeking (pariyesanasantoso) robes, contentment with obtaining (paṭilābhasantoso) robes, contentment with moderate acceptance (mattapaṭiggahaṇasantoso) of robes, contentment with avoiding greed (loluppavivajjanasantoso) for robes, contentment with what is obtained (yathālābhasantoso), contentment according to one's strength (yathābalasantoso), contentment according to suitability (yathāsāruppasantoso), contentment with water (udakasantoso) for washing robes, contentment with washing (dhovanasantoso) robes, contentment with making (karaṇasantoso) robes, contentment with the proper measure (parimāṇasantoso) of robes, contentment with thread (suttasantoso) for sewing robes, contentment with sewing (sibbanasantoso) robes, contentment with dyeing (rajanasantoso) robes, contentment with proper construction (kappasantoso) of robes, contentment with using (paribhogasantoso) robes, contentment with avoiding storing up (sannidhiparivajjanasantoso) robes, and contentment with giving away (vissajjanasantoso) robes.

vitakkasantosonāma. Vitakkasantosena pana santuṭṭhena bhikkhunā pācīnakhaṇḍarājivāsikapaṃsukūlikattherasadisena bhavitabbaṃ.

Contentment with thoughts (vitakkasantoso): A bhikkhu who is content with thoughts should be like the Elder Pācīnakhaṇḍarājivāsika, a wearer of robes collected from a dust heap (paṃsukūlika).

Thero kira ‘‘cetiyapabbatavihāre cetiyaṃ vandissāmī’’ti āgato cetiyaṃ vanditvā cintesi – ‘‘mayhaṃ cīvaraṃ jiṇṇaṃ, bahūnaṃ vasanaṭṭhāne labhissāmī’’ti. So mahāvihāraṃ gantvā saṅghattheraṃ disvā vasanaṭṭhānaṃ pucchitvā tattha vuttho punadivase cīvaraṃ ādāya āgantvā theraṃ vandi. Thero ‘‘kiṃ, āvuso’’ti āha. Gāmadvāraṃ, bhante, gamissāmīti. Ahampāvuso, gamissāmīti. Sādhu, bhanteti gacchanto mahābodhidvārakoṭṭhake ṭhatvā ‘‘puññavantānaṃ vasanaṭṭhāne manāpaṃ labhissāmī’’ti cintetvā ‘‘aparisuddho me vitakko’’ti tatova paṭinivatti. Punadivase ambaṅgaṇasamīpato, punadivase mahācetiyassa uttaradvārato tattheva paṭinivattitvā catutthadivase therassa santikaṃ agamāsi. Thero ‘‘imassa bhikkhuno vitakko na parisuddho bhavissatī’’ti cīvaraṃ gahetvā tena saddhiṃyeva pañhaṃ pucchamāno gāmaṃ pāvisi. Tañca rattiṃ eko manusso uccārapalibuddho sāṭakeyeva vaccaṃ katvā taṃ saṅkāraṭṭhāne chaḍḍesi. Paṃsukūlikatthero taṃ nīlamakkhikāhi samparikiṇṇaṃ disvā añjaliṃ paggahesi. Mahāthero ‘‘kiṃ, āvuso, saṅkāraṭṭhānassa añjaliṃ paggaṇhāsī’’ti. Nāhaṃ, bhante, saṅkāraṭṭhānassa añjaliṃ paggaṇhāmi, mayhaṃ pitu dasabalassa paggaṇhāmi, puṇṇadāsiyā sarīraṃ pārupitvā chaḍḍitaṃ paṃsukūlaṃ tumbamatte pāṇake vidhunitvā susānato gaṇhantena dukkarataraṃ kataṃ, bhanteti. Mahāthero ‘‘parisuddho vitakko paṃsukūlikassā’’ti cintesi. Paṃsukūlikattheropi tasmiṃyeva ṭhāne ṭhito vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā tīṇi phalāni patto taṃ sāṭakaṃ gahetvā cīvaraṃ katvā pārupitvā pācīnakhaṇḍarājiṃ gantvā aggaphalaṃ arahattaṃ pāpuṇi.

It seems that the Elder, having come to the Cetiyapabbata Vihāra, thinking "I will worship the Cetiya", and having worshipped the Cetiya, thought, "My robe is old; I will obtain one in a place where robes are given out." He went to the Mahā Vihāra, saw the Saṅgha Elder, inquired about where robes were given out, and stayed there. The next day, having taken a robe, he came and paid homage to the Elder. The Elder said, "What is it, friend?" "I will go to the village gate, venerable sir." "I too, friend, will go." "Good, venerable sir." As he was going, he stood at the Mahābodhi gatehouse and thought, "In a place where robes are given out, I will obtain something desirable," and then, thinking, "My thought is not pure," he turned back from there. The next day, near the mango grove, and the next day, from the northern gate of the Great Cetiya, he turned back in the same way, and on the fourth day he went to the Elder. The Elder, thinking, "This bhikkhu's thought will not be pure," took the robe and entered the village with him, asking questions. That night, a man relieved himself on a discarded cloth (sāṭaka) covered in excrement and threw it in the rubbish heap. The dust-heap-robe-wearing Elder, seeing it swarming with blue flies, raised his joined hands in reverence (añjali). The Great Elder said, "Why, friend, do you raise your joined hands in reverence to the rubbish heap?" "I do not raise my joined hands in reverence to the rubbish heap, venerable sir, but to my Father, the Ten-Powered One (dasabala). What was done was extremely difficult; a dust-heap robe discarded after being used to cover the body of a slave woman, after shaking off the worms as big as my thumb, I would take from the charnel ground, venerable sir." The Great Elder thought, "The dust-heap-robe-wearer's thought is pure." The dust-heap-robe-wearing Elder, standing in that very place, developed insight and attained three fruits (phalāni). Having taken that cloth, made it into a robe, worn it, and gone to Pācīnakhaṇḍarāji, he attained the highest fruit, Arahatship.

gamanasantosonāma. Pariyesantassa pana yena vā tena vā saddhiṃ apariyesitvā lajjiṃ pesalaṃ bhikkhuṃ gahetvā pariyesanaṃpariyesanasantosonāma. Evaṃ pariyesantassa āhariyamānaṃ cīvaraṃ dūrato disvā ‘‘etaṃ manāpaṃ bhavissati, etaṃ amanāpa’’nti evaṃ avitakketvā thūlasukhumādīsu yathāladdheneva santussanaṃpaṭilābhasantosonāma. Evaṃ laddhaṃ gaṇhantassāpi ‘‘ettakaṃ dupaṭṭassa bhavissati, ettakaṃ ekapaṭṭassā’’ti attano pahonakamatteneva santussanaṃmattapaṭiggahaṇasantosonāma. Cīvaraṃ pariyesantassa pana ‘‘asukassa gharadvāre manāpaṃ labhissāmī’’ti acintetvā dvārapaṭipāṭiyā caraṇaṃloluppavivajjanasantosonāma.

Contentment with going (gamanasantoso): While seeking, one should not seek with just anyone, but should take a modest, amiable bhikkhu and seek. Contentment with seeking (pariyesanasantoso). While seeking in this way, seeing from afar a robe being brought, one should not think, "This will be desirable, this will be undesirable," but one should be content with whatever is obtained, whether coarse or fine. Contentment with obtaining (paṭilābhasantoso). Even when accepting what is obtained in this way, one should be content with just what is sufficient for oneself, thinking, "So much will be for a double robe, so much will be for a single robe." Contentment with moderate acceptance (mattapaṭiggahaṇasantoso). While seeking a robe, one should not think, "I will obtain something desirable at the door of such and such a house," but one should go in the order of the houses. Contentment with avoiding greed (loluppavivajjanasantoso).

yathālābhasantosonāma. Attano thāmaṃ jānitvā yena yāpetuṃ sakkoti, tena yāpanaṃyathābalasantosonāma. Manāpaṃ aññassa datvā attanā yena kenaci yāpanaṃyathāsāruppasantosonāma.

Contentment with what is obtained (yathālābhasantoso): Knowing one's strength, one should live on what one is able to live on. Contentment according to one's strength (yathābalasantoso). Giving what is desirable to another, one should live on whatever one can. Contentment according to suitability (yathāsāruppasantoso).

udakasantosonāma. Paṇḍumattikagerukapūtipaṇṇarasakiliṭṭhāni pana udakāni vajjetuṃ vaṭṭati. Dhovantassa pana muggarādīhi apaharitvā hatthehi madditvā dhovanaṃdhovanasantosonāma. Tathā asujjhantaṃ paṇṇāni pakkhipitvā tāpitaudakenāpi dhovituṃ vaṭṭati. Evaṃ dhovitvā karontassa ‘‘idaṃ thūlaṃ, idaṃ sukhuma’’nti akopetvā pahonakanīhāreneva karaṇaṃkaraṇasantosonāma. Timaṇḍalapaticchādanamattasseva karaṇaṃparimāṇasantosonāma. Cīvarakaraṇatthāya pana manāpaṃ suttaṃ pariyesissāmīti avicāretvā rathikādīsu vā devaṭṭhāne vā āharitvā pādamūle vā ṭhapitaṃ yaṃkiñcideva suttaṃ gahetvā karaṇaṃsuttasantosonāma.

Contentment with water (udakasantoso): It is proper to avoid water that is stained with dye, clay, or red ochre, and water with foul-smelling leaves, and dirty water. While washing, one should wash by rubbing with the hands, without striking with a club or other implement. Contentment with washing (dhovanasantoso). Similarly, it is proper to wash that which does not become clean by putting in leaves and heating the water. Having washed in this way, one should make (the robe) with the proper skill, without destroying it by thinking, "This is coarse, this is fine." Contentment with making (karaṇasantoso). Making (the robe) only to the extent of the three-piece covering (timaṇḍalapaticchādana). Contentment with the proper measure (parimāṇasantoso). One should not consider, "I will seek desirable thread for making a robe," but one should take whatever thread is found on the road or in a shrine or placed at the foot of a tree and make (the robe). Contentment with thread (suttasantoso).

sibbanasantosonāma. Rajantena pana kāḷakacchakādīni pariyesantena na caritabbaṃ, somavakkalādīsu yaṃ labhati, tena rajitabbaṃ. Alabhantena pana manussehi araññe vākaṃ gahetvā chaḍḍitarajanaṃ vā bhikkhūhi pacitvā chaḍḍitakasaṭaṃ vā gahetvā rajitabbaṃ. Ayaṃrajanasantosonāma. Nīlakaddamakāḷasāmesu yaṃkiñci gahetvā hatthipiṭṭhe nisinnassa paññāyamānakappakaraṇaṃkappasantosonāma.

Contentment with sewing (sibbanasantoso). While dyeing, one should not wander seeking black mud, etc., but one should dye with whatever is obtained, such as somavakkala. If one does not obtain that, one should dye with dye discarded by people who have taken bark from the forest, or with sediment discarded by bhikkhus after boiling it. This is contentment with dyeing (rajanasantoso). Taking whatever is available, whether blue mud or black sāma, one should construct the proper construction as seen when sitting on the back of an elephant. Contentment with proper construction (kappasantoso).

paribhogasantosonāma. Dussaṃ pana labhitvā suttaṃ vā sūciṃ vā kārakaṃ vā alabhantena ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭati, labhantena na vaṭṭati. Katampi sace antevāsikādīnaṃ dātukāmo hoti, te ca asannihitā, yāva āgamanā ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭati. Āgatamattesu dātabbaṃ. Dātuṃ asakkontena adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ. Aññasmiṃ cīvare sati paccattharaṇampi adhiṭṭhātuṃ vaṭṭati. Anadhiṭṭhitameva hi sannidhi hoti, adhiṭṭhitaṃ na hotītimahāsīvattheroāha. Ayaṃsannidhiparivajjanasantosonāma. Vissajjentena pana na mukhaṃ oloketvā dātabbaṃ, sāraṇīyadhamme ṭhatvā vissajjetabbanti ayaṃvissajjanasantosonāma.

Contentment with using (paribhogasantoso). Having obtained cloth, if one does not obtain thread or a needle or a maker, it is proper to put it away; if one obtains them, it is not proper. Even if it is made, if one wishes to give it to a pupil, etc., and they are not present, it is proper to put it away until they come. It should be given as soon as they come. If one is unable to give it, it should be determined (adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ). If there is another robe, a spread (paccattharaṇa) may also be determined. Indeed, what is not determined is storage (sannidhi), what is determined is not, said Mahāsīva Thera. This is contentment with avoiding storing up (sannidhiparivajjanasantoso). While giving away, one should not give looking at faces, but one should give standing in the qualities that cause one to be remembered. This is contentment with giving away (vissajjanasantoso).

Cīvarappaṭisaṃyuttāni dhutaṅgānināma paṃsukūlikaṅgañceva tecīvarikaṅgañca. Tesaṃ vitthārakathā visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.24-25) veditabbā. Iti cīvarasantosamahāariyavaṃsaṃ pūrayamāno bhikkhu imāni dve dhutaṅgāni gopeti. Imāni gopento cīvarasantosamahāariyavaṃsavasena santuṭṭho hotīti.

The ascetic practices (dhutaṅgāni) connected with robes are the dust-heap-robe-wearing practice (paṃsukūlikaṅga) and the three-robe practice (tecīvarikaṅga). The detailed explanation of these should be understood in the Visuddhimagga (visuddhi. 1.24-25). Thus, a bhikkhu fulfilling the Great Lineage of Contentment with Robes (cīvarasantosamahāariyavaṃsa) maintains these two ascetic practices. Maintaining these, he is content in accordance with the Great Lineage of Contentment with Robes.

Vaṇṇavādīti eko santuṭṭho hoti, santosassa vaṇṇaṃ na katheti. Eko na santuṭṭho hoti, santosassa vaṇṇaṃ katheti. Eko neva santuṭṭho hoti, na santosassa vaṇṇaṃ katheti. Eko santuṭṭho ceva hoti, santosassa ca vaṇṇaṃ katheti. Taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘itarītaracīvarasantuṭṭhiyā ca vaṇṇavādī’’ti vuttaṃ.

An advocate (vaṇṇavādī): One is content but does not speak in praise of contentment. One is not content but speaks in praise of contentment. One is neither content nor speaks in praise of contentment. One is content and speaks in praise of contentment. To show this, it is said, "and an advocate of contentment with whatever kind of robe comes to him (itarītaracīvarasantuṭṭhiyā ca vaṇṇavādī)".

Anesananti dūteyyapahinagamanānuyogapabhedaṃ nānappakāraṃ anesanaṃ.Appatirūpanti ayuttaṃ.Aladdhāti alabhitvā. Yathā ekacco ‘‘kathaṃ nu kho cīvaraṃ labhissāmī’’ti puññavantehi bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ ekato hutvā kohaññaṃ karonto uttasati paritassati, santuṭṭho bhikkhu evaṃ aladdhā cīvaraṃ na paritassati.Laddhā cāti dhammena samena labhitvā.Agadhitoti vigatalobhagiddho.Amucchitoti adhimattataṇhāya mucchaṃ anāpanno.Anajjhopannoti taṇhāya anotthato apariyonaddho.Ādīnavadassāvīti anesanāpattiyañca gedhitaparibhoge ca ādīnavaṃ passamāno.Nissaraṇapaññoti ‘‘yāvadeva sītassa paṭighātāyā’’ti vuttaṃ nissaraṇameva pajānanto.

Not seeking improperly (anesana): Improper seeking (anesana) of various kinds, such as pursuing errands, sending messages, and going on missions. Unsuitable (appatirūpaṃ): inappropriate. Not obtaining (aladdhā) indeed: not having obtained. Just as some, doing deceitful talk together with virtuous bhikkhus, worry and fret, thinking, "How indeed will I obtain a robe?", a contented bhikkhu, not obtaining a robe, does not fret in this way. Obtaining (laddhā) indeed: having obtained by lawful means. Not greedy (agadhito): without greed. Not infatuated (amucchito): not overcome by excessive craving. Not addicted (anajjhopanno): not overwhelmed and enveloped by craving. Seeing the danger (ādīnavadassāvī): seeing the danger in improper seeking and in consuming with greed. Wise as to escape (nissaraṇapañño): knowing that "just enough to ward off the cold" is the escape.

Itarītaracīvarasantuṭṭhiyāti yena kenaci cīvarena santuṭṭhiyā.Nevattānukkaṃsetīti ‘‘ahaṃ paṃsukūliko, mayā upasampadamāḷeyeva paṃsukūlikaṅgaṃ gahitaṃ, ko mayā sadiso atthī’’ti attukkaṃsanaṃ na karoti.No paraṃ vambhetīti ‘‘ime panaññe bhikkhū na paṃsukūlikā’’ti vā, ‘‘paṃsukūlikaṅgamattampi etesaṃ natthī’’ti vā evaṃ paraṃ na vambheti.Yo hi tattha dakkhoti yo tasmiṃ cīvarasantose vaṇṇavādādīsu vā dakkho cheko byatto.Analasoti sātaccakiriyāya ālasiyavirahito.Sampajāno paṭissatoti sampajānapaññāya ceva satiyā ca yutto.Ariyavaṃse ṭhitoti ariyavaṃse patiṭṭhito.

Content with whatever robe comes to him (itarītaracīvarasantuṭṭhiyā): content with whatever kind of robe comes to him. He does not extol himself (nevattānukkaṃsetī): he does not praise himself, thinking, "I am a dust-heap-robe-wearer; I took up the dust-heap-robe-wearing practice at the very ordination platform; who is like me?" Nor disparage others (no paraṃ vambhetī): he does not disparage others by saying, "But these other bhikkhus are not dust-heap-robe-wearers," or, "They do not even have the dust-heap-robe-wearing practice." For he is skilled therein (yo hi tattha dakkho): for he is skilled, clever, and capable in that contentment with robes, or in advocating it, etc. Not lazy (analaso): without laziness in continuous practice. Fully aware and mindful (sampajāno paṭissato): endowed with wisdom of full awareness and with mindfulness. Established in the Ariyan lineage (ariyavaṃse ṭhito): established in the Ariyan lineage.

Itarītarenapiṇḍapātenāti yena kenaci piṇḍapātena. Etthāpi piṇḍapāto jānitabbo, piṇḍapātakkhettaṃ jānitabbaṃ, piṇḍapātasantoso jānitabbo, piṇḍapātappaṭisaṃyuttaṃ dhutaṅgaṃ jānitabbaṃ. Tatthapiṇḍapātoti odano kummāso sattu maccho maṃsaṃ khīraṃ dadhi sappi navanītaṃ telaṃ madhu phāṇitaṃ yāgu khādanīyaṃ sāyanīyaṃ lehanīyanti soḷasa piṇḍapātā.

With whatever alms food (piṇḍapātena): with whatever kind of alms food. Herein, alms food (piṇḍapāto) should be known, the alms food area (piṇḍapātakkhettaṃ) should be known, contentment with alms food (piṇḍapātasantoso) should be known, and the ascetic practice connected with alms food (piṇḍapātappaṭisaṃyuttaṃ dhutaṅgaṃ) should be known. Therein, alms food (piṇḍapāto): rice, gruel, barley flour, fish, meat, milk, yogurt, ghee, butter, oil, honey, molasses, porridge, and things that are edible, consumable, and lickable; these are the sixteen kinds of alms food.

Piṇḍapātakkhettanti saṅghabhattaṃ uddesabhattaṃ nimantanaṃ salākabhattaṃ pakkhikaṃ uposathikaṃ pāṭipadikabhattaṃ āgantukabhattaṃ gamikabhattaṃ gilānabhattaṃ gilānupaṭṭhākabhattaṃ dhurabhattaṃ kuṭibhattaṃ vārabhattaṃ vihārabhattanti pannarasa piṇḍapātakkhettāni.

Alms food area (piṇḍapātakkhetta): Saṅgha meal, designated meal, invitation meal, ticket meal, fortnightly meal, uposatha meal, pāṭipadika meal, guest meal, traveller's meal, sick person's meal, sick person's attendant's meal, regular meal, dwelling meal, turn meal, and monastery meal; these are the fifteen kinds of alms food area.

Piṇḍapātasantosoti piṇḍapāte vitakkasantoso gamanasantoso pariyesanasantoso paṭilābhasantoso paṭiggahaṇasantoso mattapaṭiggahaṇasantoso loluppavivajjanasantoso yathālābhasantoso yathābalasantoso yathāsāruppasantoso upakārasantoso parimāṇasantoso paribhogasantoso sannidhiparivajjanasantoso vissajjanasantosoti pannarasa santosā.

Contentment with alms food (piṇḍapātasantoso): In regard to alms food, there are contentment with thoughts (vitakkasantoso), contentment with going (gamanasantoso), contentment with seeking (pariyesanasantoso), contentment with obtaining (paṭilābhasantoso), contentment with accepting (paṭiggahaṇasantoso), contentment with moderate acceptance (mattapaṭiggahaṇasantoso), contentment with avoiding greed (loluppavivajjanasantoso), contentment with what is obtained (yathālābhasantoso), contentment according to one's strength (yathābalasantoso), contentment according to suitability (yathāsāruppasantoso), contentment with benefit (upakārasantoso), contentment with the proper measure (parimāṇasantoso), contentment with using (paribhogasantoso), contentment with avoiding storing up (sannidhiparivajjanasantoso), and contentment with giving away (vissajjanasantoso); these are the fifteen kinds of contentment.

vitakkasantosonāma.

Contentment with thoughts (vitakkasantoso).

gamanasantosonāma. Pariyesantena yaṃ vā taṃ vā aggahetvā lajjiṃ pesalameva gahetvā pariyesitabbaṃ. Ayaṃpariyesanasantosonāma. Dūratova āhariyamānaṃ disvā ‘‘etaṃ manāpaṃ, etaṃ amanāpa’’nti cittaṃ na uppādetabbaṃ. Ayaṃpaṭilābhasantosonāma. ‘‘Imaṃ manāpaṃ gaṇhissāmi, imaṃ amanāpaṃ na gaṇhissāmī’’ti acintetvā yaṃkiñci yāpanamattaṃ gahetabbameva. Ayaṃpaṭiggahaṇasantosonāma.

Contentment with going (gamanasantoso). While seeking, one should not take just anyone, but one should take only a modest, amiable (bhikkhu) and seek. This is contentment with seeking (pariyesanasantoso). Seeing what is being brought from afar, one should not generate the thought, "This is desirable, this is undesirable." This is contentment with obtaining (paṭilābhasantoso). Without thinking, "I will accept this desirable thing, I will not accept this undesirable thing," whatever is just enough for sustenance should be accepted. This is contentment with accepting (paṭiggahaṇasantoso).

mattapaṭiggahaṇasantosonāma. Aḍḍhakulāniyeva agantvā dvārapaṭipāṭiyā gantabbaṃ. Ayaṃloluppavivajjanasantosonāma.Yathālābhasantosādayo cīvare vuttanayā eva.

Contentment with moderate acceptance (mattapaṭiggahaṇasantoso). One should not go to only half the families, but one should go in the order of the houses. This is contentment with avoiding greed (loluppavivajjanasantoso). Contentment with what is obtained (yathālābhasantosā), etc., are the same as explained in regard to robes.

upakārasantosonāma. Pattaṃ pūretvā ānītaṃ na paṭiggahetabbaṃ. Anupasampanne sati tena gāhāpetabbaṃ, asati harāpetvā paṭiggahaṇamattaṃ gahetabbaṃ. Ayaṃparimāṇasantosonāma. ‘‘Jighacchāya paṭivinodanaṃ idamettha nissaraṇa’’nti evaṃ paribhuñjanaṃparibhogasantosonāma. Nidahitvā na paribhuñjitabbanti ayaṃsannidhiparivajjanasantosonāma. Mukhaṃ anoloketvā sāraṇīyadhamme ṭhitena vissajjetabbaṃ. Ayaṃvissajjanasantosonāma.

Contentment with benefit (upakārasantoso). One should not accept (food) brought filling the bowl. If there is one who is not fully ordained (anupasampanne), one should have him take it, and if there is not, one should have it carried and take only what is to be accepted. This is contentment with the proper measure (parimāṇasantoso). Using (food) thinking, "This is the escape from the pangs of hunger." This is contentment with using (paribhogasantoso). One should not consume (food) after storing it up. This is contentment with avoiding storing up (sannidhiparivajjanasantoso). One should give away standing in the qualities that cause one to be remembered, without looking at faces. This is contentment with giving away (vissajjanasantoso).

Piṇḍapātappaṭisaṃyuttānipana pañca dhutaṅgāni piṇḍapātikaṅgaṃ sapadānacārikaṅgaṃ ekāsanikaṅgaṃ pattapiṇḍikaṅgaṃ khalupacchābhattikaṅganti. Tesaṃ vitthārakathā visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.26-30) vuttā. Iti piṇḍapātasantosamahāariyavaṃsaṃ pūrayamāno bhikkhu imāni pañca dhutaṅgāni gopeti, imāni gopento piṇḍapātasantosamahāariyavaṃsena santuṭṭho hoti. Vaṇṇavādītiādīni vuttanayeneva veditabbāni.

Ascetic practices (dhutaṅgāni) connected with alms food: there are five ascetic practices: the alms-food-eating practice (piṇḍapātikaṅga), the going-on-alms-round practice (sapadānacārikaṅga), the one-session-eating practice (ekāsanikaṅga), the bowl-food-eating practice (pattapiṇḍikaṅga), and the abstaining-from-further-food practice (khalupacchābhattikaṅga). The detailed explanation of these is stated in the Visuddhimagga (visuddhi. 1.26-30). Thus, a bhikkhu fulfilling the Great Lineage of Contentment with Alms Food (piṇḍapātasantosamahāariyavaṃsa) maintains these five ascetic practices; maintaining these, he is content in accordance with the Great Lineage of Contentment with Alms Food. The explanations regarding "an advocate (vaṇṇavādī)", etc., should be understood in the same way as before.

Senāsanenāti idha senāsanaṃ jānitabbaṃ, senāsanakkhettaṃ jānitabbaṃ, senāsanasantoso jānitabbo, senāsanappaṭisaṃyuttaṃ dhutaṅgaṃ jānitabbaṃ. Tatthasenāsananti mañco pīṭhaṃ bhisi bimbohanaṃ vihāro aḍḍhayogo pāsādo hammiyaṃ guhā leṇaṃ aṭṭo māḷo veḷugumbo rukkhamūlaṃ yattha vā pana bhikkhū paṭikkamantīti imāni pannarasa senāsanāni.

With lodging (senāsanena): Herein, lodging (senāsanaṃ) should be known, the lodging area (senāsanakkhettaṃ) should be known, contentment with lodging (senāsanasantoso) should be known, and the ascetic practice connected with lodging (senāsanappaṭisaṃyuttaṃ dhutaṅgaṃ) should be known. Therein, lodging (senāsana): couch, chair, mattress, pillow, monastery, aḍḍhayoga, palace, mansion, cave, rock shelter, hut, upper chamber, bamboo grove, foot of a tree, or wherever else bhikkhus dwell; these are the fifteen kinds of lodging.

Senāsanakkhettanti saṅghato vā gaṇato vā ñātito vā mittato vā attano vā dhanena paṃsukūlaṃ vāti cha khettāni.

Lodging area (senāsanakkhetta): from the Saṅgha, or from a group, or from relatives, or from friends, or by one's own wealth, or a dust-heap robe; these are the six areas.

Senāsanasantosoti senāsane vitakkasantosādayo pannarasa santosā. Te piṇḍapāte vuttanayeneva veditabbā.Senāsanappaṭisaṃyuttānipana pañca dhutaṅgāni āraññikaṅgaṃ rukkhamūlikaṅgaṃ abbhokāsikaṅgaṃ sosānikaṅgaṃ yathāsanthatikaṅganti. Tesaṃ vitthārakathā visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.31-35) vuttā. Iti senāsanasantosamahāariyavaṃsaṃ pūrayamāno bhikkhu imāni pañca dhutaṅgāni gopeti. Imāni gopento senāsanasantosamahāariyavaṃsena santuṭṭho hoti.

Contentment with lodging (senāsanasantoso): In regard to lodging, there are fifteen kinds of contentment, such as contentment with thoughts (vitakkasantosādayo). These should be understood in the same way as explained in regard to alms food. Ascetic practices (dhutaṅgāni) connected with lodging: there are five ascetic practices: the forest-dwelling practice (āraññikaṅga), the tree-root-dwelling practice (rukkhamūlikaṅga), the open-air-dwelling practice (abbhokāsikaṅga), the charnel-ground-dwelling practice (sosānikaṅga), and the using-whatever-bed-is-offered practice (yathāsanthatikaṅga). The detailed explanation of these is stated in the Visuddhimagga (visuddhi. 1.31-35). Thus, a bhikkhu fulfilling the Great Lineage of Contentment with Lodging (senāsanasantosamahāariyavaṃsa) maintains these five ascetic practices. Maintaining these, he is content in accordance with the Great Lineage of Contentment with Lodging.

Gilānapaccayopana piṇḍapāteyeva paviṭṭho. Tattha yathālābhayathābalayathāsāruppasantoseneva santussitabbaṃ. Nesajjikaṅgaṃ bhāvanārāmaariyavaṃsaṃ bhajati. Vuttampi cetaṃ –

Gilānapaccayo however, is included in almsfood itself. There, one should be content with whatever is obtained, whatever strength one has, and whatever is suitable. The practice of dwelling in the forest (nesajjhikaṅga) aligns with delighting in meditation (bhāvanārāma) and the lineage of the noble ones (ariyavaṃsa). As it was said –

‘‘Pañca senāsane vuttā, pañca āhāranissitā;

“Five are mentioned regarding dwelling places, five are dependent on food; One is associated with effort, and two are dependent on robes.”

puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu bhāvanārāmo hotīti desanaṃ ārabhi.

Furthermore, monks, a monk is one who delights in meditation—thus, the discourse began.

bhāvanārāmo. Bhāvanāya ratotibhāvanārato. Pañcavidhe pahāne ārāmo assātipahānārāmo. Apica bhāvento ramatītibhāvanārāmo. Pajahanto ramatītipahānārāmoti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Ayañhi cattāro satipaṭṭhāne bhāvento ramati, ratiṃ vindatīti attho. Tathā cattāro sammappadhāne. Cattāro iddhipāde, pañcindriyāni, pañca balāni, satta bojjhaṅge, satta anupassanā, aṭṭhārasa mahāvipassanā, sattatiṃsa bodhipakkhiyadhamme, aṭṭhatiṃsa ārammaṇavibhattiyo bhāvento ramati, ratiṃ vindati. Kāmacchandādayo pana kilese pajahanto ramati, ratiṃ vindati.

bhāvanārāmo: Delighting in meditation, therefore bhāvanārato. One whose delight is in the five kinds of abandoning (pahāna), therefore pahānārāmo. Moreover, delighting while developing, therefore bhāvanārāmo. Delighting while abandoning, therefore pahānārāmo—thus, the meaning here should be understood. For indeed, he delights and finds joy in developing the four foundations of mindfulness. Likewise, the four right efforts; the four bases of power; the five faculties; the five strengths; the seven factors of enlightenment; the seven contemplations; the eighteen great insights; the thirty-seven qualities conducive to enlightenment; the thirty-eight kinds of object-distinction. He delights and finds joy in developing these. But he delights and finds joy in abandoning defilements such as sensual desire, etc.

Imesu pana catūsu ariyavaṃsesu purimehi tīhi terasannaṃ dhutaṅgānaṃ catupaccayasantosassa ca vasena sakalaṃ vinayapiṭakaṃ kathitaṃ hoti, bhāvanārāmena avasesaṃ piṭakadvayaṃ. Imaṃ pana bhāvanārāmaṃ ariyavaṃsaṃ kathentena bhikkhunā paṭisambhidāmagge nekkhammapāḷiyā kathetabbo, dīghanikāye dasuttarasuttantapariyāyena kathetabbo, majjhimanikāye satipaṭṭhānasuttantapariyāyena kathetabbo, abhidhamme niddesapariyāyena kathetabbo.

Among these four lineages of the noble ones (ariyavaṃsa), the entire Vinaya Piṭaka is spoken of through the first three, based on the thirteen dhutaṅgas and contentment with the four requisites, and the remaining two Piṭakas through delighting in meditation (bhāvanārāma). This lineage of the noble ones that delights in meditation, should be explained by a monk in the Nekkhammapāḷi of the Paṭisambhidāmagga, in the Dasuttarasuttantapariyāya of the Dīgha Nikāya, in the Satipaṭṭhānasuttantapariyāya of the Majjhima Nikāya, and in the Niddesapariyāya of the Abhidhamma.

paṭisambhidāmagge nekkhammapāḷiyāti –

In the Nekkhammapāḷi of the Paṭisambhidāmagga

‘‘Nekkhammaṃ bhāvento ramati, kāmacchandaṃ pajahanto ramati. Abyāpādaṃ, byāpādaṃ… ālokasaññaṃ… thinamiddhaṃ… avikkhepaṃ, uddhaccaṃ… dhammavavatthānaṃ… vicikicchaṃ… ñāṇaṃ… avijjaṃ… pāmojjaṃ… aratiṃ… paṭhamajjhānaṃ, pañca nīvaraṇe… dutiyajjhānaṃ… vitakkavicāre… tatiyajjhānaṃ… pītiṃ… catutthajjhānaṃ… sukhadukkhe… ākāsānañcāyatanasamāpattiṃ bhāvento ramati, rūpasaññaṃ paṭighasaññaṃ nānattasaññaṃ pajahanto ramati. Viññāṇañcāyatanasamāpattiṃ…pe… nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattiṃ bhāvento ramati, ākiñcaññāyatanasaññaṃ pajahanto ramati.

“He delights in developing renunciation, he delights in abandoning sensual desire. He delights in loving-kindness, abandoning ill-will... the perception of light... sloth and torpor... non-distraction, restlessness... discrimination of phenomena... doubt... knowledge... ignorance... joy... discontent... He delights in developing the first jhāna, abandoning the five hindrances... the second jhāna... thought and examination... the third jhāna... rapture... the fourth jhāna... pleasure and pain... He delights in developing the attainment of the sphere of boundless space, abandoning the perception of form, the perception of aversion, the perception of diversity. The attainment of the sphere of boundless consciousness...pe... He delights in developing the attainment of the sphere of neither perception nor non-perception, abandoning the perception of the sphere of nothingness.

‘‘Aniccānupassanaṃ bhāvento ramati, niccasaññaṃ pajahanto ramati. Dukkhānupassanaṃ… sukhasaññaṃ… anattānupassanaṃ… attasaññaṃ… nibbidānupassanaṃ… nandiṃ… virāgānupassanaṃ… rāgaṃ… nirodhānupassanaṃ… samudayaṃ… paṭinissaggānupassanaṃ… ādānaṃ… khayānupassanaṃ … ghanasaññaṃ… vayānupassanaṃ… āyūhanaṃ… vipariṇāmānupassanaṃ… dhuvasaññaṃ… animittānupassanaṃ … nimittaṃ… appaṇihitānupassanaṃ… paṇidhiṃ… suññatānupassanaṃ… abhinivesaṃ… adhipaññādhammavipassanaṃ… sārādānābhinivesaṃ… yathābhūtañāṇadassanaṃ… sammohābhinivesaṃ… ādīnavānupassanaṃ… ālayābhinivesaṃ… paṭisaṅkhānupassanaṃ… appaṭisaṅkhaṃ… vivaṭṭānupassanaṃ… saṃyogābhinivesaṃ… sotāpattimaggaṃ… diṭṭhekaṭṭhe kilese… sakadāgāmimaggaṃ… oḷārike kilese… anāgāmimaggaṃ… anusahagate kilese… arahattamaggaṃ bhāvento ramati, sabbakilese pajahanto ramatī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.41,95).

“He delights in developing the contemplation of impermanence, abandoning the perception of permanence. The contemplation of suffering... the perception of happiness... the contemplation of non-self... the perception of self... the contemplation of disenchantment... delight... the contemplation of detachment... passion... the contemplation of cessation... origination... the contemplation of relinquishment... grasping... the contemplation of decay... the perception of solidity... the contemplation of dissolution... accumulation... the contemplation of change... the perception of stability... the signless contemplation... a sign... the desireless contemplation... aspiration... the emptiness contemplation... clinging... the contemplation of higher wisdom regarding phenomena... clinging to taking what is essential... the vision of knowledge and truth... clinging to delusion... the contemplation of drawbacks... clinging to attachment... the contemplation of reflection... non-reflection... the contemplation of turning away... clinging to fetters... He delights in developing the path of stream-entry, abandoning defilements that are fixed in view... the path of once-returning... coarse defilements... the path of non-returning... defilements associated with latent tendencies... the path of arahantship, abandoning all defilements" (paṭi. ma. 1.41,95).

Evaṃ paṭisambhidāmagge nekkhammapāḷiyā kathetabbo.

Thus, it should be explained in the Nekkhammapāḷi of the Paṭisambhidāmagga.

Dīghanikāyedasuttarasuttantapariyāyenāti –

In the Dīgha Nikāya by way of the Dasuttarasuttantapariyāya

‘‘Ekaṃ dhammaṃ bhāvento ramati, ekaṃ dhammaṃ pajahanto ramati…pe… dasa dhamme bhāvento ramati, dasa dhamme pajahanto ramati. Katamaṃ ekaṃ dhammaṃ bhāvento ramati? Kāyagatāsatiṃ sātasahagataṃ, imaṃ ekaṃ dhammaṃ bhāvento ramati. Katamaṃ ekaṃ dhammaṃ pajahanto ramati? Asmimānaṃ, imaṃ ekaṃ dhammaṃ pajahanto ramati. Katame dve dhamme…pe… katame dasa dhamme bhāvento ramati? Dasa kasiṇāyatanāni, ime dasa dhamme bhāvento ramati. Katame dasa dhamme pajahanto ramati? Dasa micchatte, ime dasa dhamme pajahanto ramati. Evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu bhāvanārāmo hotī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.351-360).

“He delights in developing one thing, he delights in abandoning one thing...pe... he delights in developing ten things, he delights in abandoning ten things. What is the one thing he delights in developing? Mindfulness directed to the body, accompanied by satisfaction—this is the one thing he delights in developing. What is the one thing he delights in abandoning? The conceit ‘I am’—this is the one thing he delights in abandoning. What are the two things...pe... what are the ten things he delights in developing? The ten kasina spheres—these are the ten things he delights in developing. What are the ten things he delights in abandoning? The ten wrong paths—these are the ten things he delights in abandoning. Thus, monks, a monk is one who delights in meditation” (dī. ni. 3.351-360).

Evaṃ dīghanikāye dasuttarasuttantapariyāyena kathetabbo.

Thus, it should be explained in the Dīgha Nikāya by way of the Dasuttarasuttantapariyāya.

Majjhimanikāye satipaṭṭhānasuttantapariyāyenāti –

In the Majjhima Nikāya by way of the Satipaṭṭhānasuttantapariyāya

‘‘Ekāyano ayaṃ, bhikkhave, maggo…pe… yāvadeva ñāṇamattāya paṭissatimattāya. Anissito ca viharati, na ca kiñci loke upādiyati. Evampi kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu bhāvanārāmo hoti bhāvanārato. Pahānārāmo hoti pahānarato. Puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu gacchanto vā gacchāmīti pajānāti…pe… puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu seyyathāpi passeyya sarīraṃ sivathikāya chaḍḍitaṃ…pe… pūtīni cuṇṇakajātāni. So imameva kāyaṃ upasaṃharati ‘ayampi kho kāyo evaṃdhammo evaṃbhāvī evaṃanatīto’ti. Iti ajjhattaṃ vā kāye kāyānupassī viharati…pe… evampi kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu bhāvanārāmo hotī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.106 ādayo).

“This, monks, is the one way...pe... only for knowledge, only for mindfulness. And he dwells independent, and clings to nothing in the world. Thus, monks, a monk is one who delights in meditation, delights in meditation. He is one who delights in abandoning, delights in abandoning. Furthermore, monks, a monk, when walking, knows ‘I am walking’...pe... furthermore, monks, a monk might see a body cast away in a charnel ground...pe... decomposed, reduced to dust. He applies this very body to himself: ‘This body of mine, too, is of such a nature, subject to such a condition, and has not escaped it.’ Thus, he dwells contemplating the body in the body internally...pe... thus, monks, a monk is one who delights in meditation” (ma. ni. 1.106 ff).

Evaṃ majjhimanikāye satipaṭṭhānasuttantapariyāyena kathetabbo.

Thus, it should be explained in the Majjhima Nikāya by way of the Satipaṭṭhānasuttantapariyāya.

Abhidhamme niddesapariyāyenāti sabbepi saṅkhate ‘‘aniccato dukkhato rogato gaṇḍato …pe… saṃkilesikadhammato passanto ramati, evaṃ kho bhikkhu bhāvanārāmo hotī’’ti (mahāni. 13; cūḷani. upasīvamāṇavapucchāniddeso 39, nandamāṇavapucchāniddeso 51). Evaṃ niddesapariyāyena kathetabbo.

In the Abhidhamma by way of the Niddesapariyāya, seeing all conditioned things as "impermanent, as suffering, as disease, as a boil...pe... as a defiled phenomenon, he delights; thus, a monk is one who delights in meditation" (mahāni. 13; cūḷani. Upasīvamāṇavapucchāniddeso 39, Nandamāṇavapucchāniddeso 51). Thus, it should be explained by way of the Niddesapariyāya.

Nevattānukkaṃsetīti ‘‘ajja me saṭṭhi vā sattati vā vassāni aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattāti vipassanāya kammaṃ karontassa ko mayā sadiso atthī’’ti evaṃ attukkaṃsanaṃ na karoti.No paraṃ vambhetīti ‘‘aniccaṃ dukkhanti vipassanāmattakampi natthi, kiṃ ime vissaṭṭhakammaṭṭhānā carantī’’ti evaṃ paravambhanaṃ na karoti. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.

Nevattānukkaṃsetī: He does not exalt himself, thinking, "Today I am sixty or seventy years old, and who is like me, doing the work of insight into impermanence, suffering, and non-self?" No paraṃ vambhetī: He does not disparage others, thinking, "There is not even a mere insight into impermanence and suffering; why do these people wander about with abandoned meditation subjects?" The rest is as has been said.

Ime kho, bhikkhave, cattāro ariyavaṃsāti, bhikkhave, ime cattāro ariyavaṃsā ariyatantiyo ariyapaveṇiyo ariyañjasā ariyavaṭumānīti suttantaṃ vinivaṭṭetvā idāni mahāariyavaṃsaparipūrakassa bhikkhuno vasanadisā dassentoimehi ca pana, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tatthasveva aratiṃ sahatīti soyeva aratiṃ anabhiratiṃ ukkaṇṭhitaṃ sahati abhibhavati.Na taṃ arati sahatīti taṃ pana bhikkhuṃ yā esā pantesu senāsanesu adhikusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ bhāvanāya arati nāma hoti, sā sahituṃ adhibhavituṃ na sakkoti.Aratiratisahoti aratiñca pañcakāmaguṇaratiñca sahati, adhibhavituṃ sakkoti.

Ime kho, bhikkhave, cattāro ariyavaṃsā: Monks, these four lineages of the noble ones are noble foundations, noble traditions, the noble path, the noble way of life. Now, turning away from the suttanta, showing the direction of dwelling for a monk who is a fulfiller of the great noble lineage, he says, imehi ca pana, bhikkhave, etc. There, sveva aratiṃ sahatī: He alone overcomes discontent (arati), displeasure, and weariness. Na taṃ arati sahatī: But that monk cannot be overcome or dominated by discontent (arati), which arises in remote dwelling places for the development of wholesome qualities. Aratiratisaho: He is able to overcome both discontent and delight in the five strands of sense pleasure.

nāratītiādimāha. Tatthadhīranti vīriyavantaṃ.Nārati dhīraṃ sahatīti idaṃ purimasseva kāraṇavacanaṃ. Yasmā sā dhīraṃ na sahati nappahoti dhīraṃ sahituṃ adhibhavituṃ na sakkoti, tasmā nārati sahati dhīraṃ.Dhīro hi aratissahoti aratisahattā hi so dhīro nāma, tasmā aratiṃ sahatīti attho.Sabbakammavihāyīnanti sabbaṃ tebhūmakakammaṃ cajitvā paricchinnaṃ parivaṭumaṃ katvā ṭhitaṃ.Panuṇṇaṃ ko nivārayeti kilese panuditvā ṭhitaṃ ko nāma rāgo vā doso vā nivāreyya.Nekkhaṃjambonadasseva, ko taṃ ninditumarahatīti jambonadasaṅkhātassa jātirattasuvaṇṇassa nikkhasadisaṃ garahitabbadosavimuttaṃ ko taṃ puggalaṃ nindituṃ arahati.Brahmunāpi pasaṃsitoti mahābrahmunāpi esa puggalo pasaṃsitoyevāti. Desanāpariyosāne cattālīsa bhikkhusahassāni arahatte patiṭṭhahiṃsu.

He says, nāratī etc. There, dhīraṃ: the resolute one, the energetic one. Nārati dhīraṃ sahatī: This is a statement of the same reason as before. Because it cannot overcome the resolute one, it is not able to overcome the resolute one, therefore, discontent cannot overcome the resolute one. Dhīro hi aratissaho: Because he is an overcomer of discontent, he is called resolute; therefore, he overcomes discontent. Sabbakammavihāyīnaṃ: For one who has abandoned all karma in the three realms, having made it limited and circumscribed. Panuṇṇaṃ ko nivāraye: Who could turn back one who has driven away the defilements? Nekkhaṃ jambonadasseva, ko taṃ ninditumarahatī: Who is worthy to criticize that person who is like gold of the jambonada variety, free from blameworthy faults like a touchstone? Brahmunāpi pasaṃsito: This person is praised even by the Great Brahmā. At the end of the discourse, forty thousand monks were established in arahantship.

9. Dhammapadasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Dhammapadasuttavaṇṇanā

29.Navamedhammapadānīti dhammakoṭṭhāsā.Anabhijjhātiādīsu abhijjhāpaṭikkhepenaanabhijjhā,byāpādapaṭikkhepenaabyāpādo,micchāsatipaṭikkhepenasammāsati,micchāsamādhipaṭikkhepenasammāsamādhiveditabbo.

29. In the ninth, dhammapadānī: sections of the Dhamma. Among anabhijjhā etc., anabhijjhā is to be understood as the rejection of covetousness (abhijjhā), abyāpādo as the rejection of ill-will (byāpāda), sammāsati as the rejection of wrong mindfulness (micchāsati), and sammāsamādhi as the rejection of wrong concentration (micchāsamādhi).

Anabhijjhālūti nittaṇho hutvā.Abyāpannena cetasāti sabbakālaṃ pakatibhāvaṃ avijahantena cittena.Sato ekaggacittassāti satiyā samannāgato ārammaṇe ekaggacitto assa.Ajjhattaṃ susamāhitoti niyakajjhatte suṭṭhu ṭhapitacitto imasmiṃ suttepi gāthāyapi vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ kathitaṃ.

Anabhijjhālū: being without craving. Abyāpannena cetasā: with a mind that does not abandon its natural state at all times. Sato ekaggacittassā: being endowed with mindfulness and having a mind concentrated on the object. Ajjhattaṃ susamāhito: with a mind well-established in his own self. In this sutta and verse, both the round and the turning away have been spoken of.

10. Paribbājakasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Paribbājakasuttavaṇṇanā

30.Dasameabhiññātāti ñātā pākaṭā.Annabhārotiādīni tesaṃ nāmāni.Paṭisallānā vuṭṭhitoti phalasamāpattito vuṭṭhito. Sā hi idha paṭisallānanti adhippetā.Paccakkhāyāti paṭikkhipitvā.Abhijjhālunti sataṇhaṃ.Kāmesutibbasārāganti vatthukāmesu bahalarāgaṃ.Tamahaṃ tattha evaṃ vadeyyanti taṃ ahaṃ tasmiṃ kāraṇe evaṃ vadeyyaṃ.Paṭikkositabbaṃ maññeyyāti paṭikkositabbāni paṭibāhitabbani vā maññeyya.Sahadhammikāti sakāraṇā.Vādānupātāti dhammikavāde ghaṭṭayamānā adhammikavādānupātā, vādappavattiyoti attho.Gārayhā ṭhānāti garahitabbayuttakā paccayā.Āgacchantīti upagacchanti.

30. In the tenth, abhiññātā: known, evident. Annabhāro etc., are their names. Paṭisallānā vuṭṭhito: having arisen from the fruition attainment (phalasamāpatti). For that is what is meant by seclusion (paṭisallāna) here. Paccakkhāyā: having rejected. Abhijjhālu: being full of craving. Kāmesu tibbasārāga: having intense passion for sense objects. Tamahaṃ tattha evaṃ vadeyyaṃ: There, in that instance, I would say thus. Paṭikkositabbaṃ maññeyyā: I would consider them worthy of being refuted or rejected. Sahadhammikā: with a reason. Vādānupātā: engaging in justified debate, following after unjustified debate; that is, the instigation of debate. Gārayhā ṭhānā: blameworthy grounds, reasons. Āgacchantī: approaching.

Ukkalāti ukkalajanapadavāsino.Vassabhaññāti vasso ca bhañño cāti dve janā.Ahetukavādāti ‘‘natthi hetu natthi paccayo sattānaṃ visuddhiyā’’tievamādivādino.Akiriyavādāti ‘‘karoto na karīyati pāpa’’nti evaṃ kiriyapaṭikkhepavādino.Natthikavādāti ‘‘natthi dinna’’ntiādivādino. Te imesu tīsupi dassanesu okkantaniyāmā ahesuṃ. Kathaṃ pana tesu niyāmo hotīti? Yo hi evarūpaṃ laddhiṃ gahetvā rattiṭṭhānadivāṭṭhānesu nisinno sajjhāyati vīmaṃsati, tassa ‘‘natthi hetu natthi paccayo karoto na karīyati pāpaṃ…pe… natthi dinnaṃ…pe… kāyassa bhedā ucchijjatī’’ti tasmiṃ ārammaṇe micchāsati santiṭṭhati, cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hoti, javanāni javanti. Paṭhamajavane satekiccho hoti, tathā dutiyādīsu, sattame buddhānampi atekiccho anivatti ariṭṭhakaṇṭakasadiso hoti. Tattha koci ekaṃ dassanaṃ okkamati, koci dve, koci tīṇipi. Niyatamicchādiṭṭhikova hoti, patto saggamaggāvaraṇañceva mokkhamaggāvaraṇañca, abhabbo tassa attabhāvassa anantaraṃ saggampi gantuṃ, pageva mokkhaṃ. Vaṭṭakhāṇuko nāmesa satto pathavigopako, yebhuyyena evarūpassa bhavato vuṭṭhānaṃ natthi. Vassabhaññāpi edisā ahesuṃ.Nindābyārosanaupārambhabhayāti attano nindabhayena ghaṭṭanabhayena upavādabhayena cāti attho.Abhijjhāvinaye sikkhanti abhijjhāvinayo vuccati arahattaṃ, arahatte sikkhamāno appamatto nāma vuccatīti suttante vaṭṭaviṭṭaṃ kathetvā gāthāya phalasamāpatti kathitāti.

Ukkalā: inhabitants of the Ukkala country. Vassabhaññā: Vassa and Bhañña are the names of two people. Ahetukavādā: those who argue, "There is no cause, no condition for the purification of beings," and so on. Akiriyavādā: those who deny action, arguing, "In doing, no evil is done," and so on. Natthikavādā: those who argue, "There is no gift," and so on. They were fixed in their adherence to all three views. But how can there be such fixity in them? For whoever, having adopted such a view, sits and recites and reflects in places suitable by night and day, wrong mindfulness is established in that object, the mind becomes concentrated, and volitions rush forth, thinking, "There is no cause, no condition, in doing, no evil is done...pe... there is no gift...pe... at the breaking up of the body, one is annihilated." In the first moment of impulsion (javana), he is one who can still be treated; likewise, in the second and subsequent moments, in the seventh, even the Buddhas cannot treat him; he is unyielding, like a poisonous splinter. There, someone adheres to one view, someone to two, someone to all three. He is invariably one with wrong view, he has attained the obscuration of the path to heaven and the obscuration of the path to liberation, he is incapable of going to heaven immediately after that existence, let alone liberation. Such a being is like a post stuck in a circle, a protector of the earth; generally, there is no rising up from such a state. Vassa and Bhañña were such people. Nindābyārosanaupārambhabhayā: because of the fear of self-blame, the fear of conflict, and the fear of reproach. Abhijjhāvinaye sikkhā: "Training in the subduing of covetousness" means arahatship. One who is training in arahatship is called diligent. In the suttanta, the round and the turning away have been spoken of, and in the verse, the fruition attainment has been spoken of.

4. Cakkavaggo

4. Cakkavaggo

1. Cakkasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Cakkasuttavaṇṇanā

31.Catutthassa paṭhamecakkānīti sampattiyo.Catucakkaṃ vattatīti cattāri sampatticakkāni vattanti ghaṭiyantiyevāti attho.Patirūpadesavāsoti yattha catasso parisā sandissanti, evarūpe anucchavike dese vāso.Sappurisāvassayoti buddhādīnaṃ sappurisānaṃ avassayanaṃ sevanaṃ bhajanaṃ, na rājānaṃ.Attasammāpaṇidhīti attano sammā ṭhapanaṃ, sace pubbe assaddhādīhi samannāgato hoti, tāni pahāya saddhādīsu patiṭṭhāpanaṃ.Pubbe ca katapuññatāti pubbe upacitakusalatā. Idameva cettha pamāṇaṃ. Yena hi ñāṇasampayuttacittena kusalakammaṃ kataṃ hoti, tadeva kusalaṃ taṃ purisaṃ patirūpadese upaneti, sappurise bhajāpeti, so eva ca puggalo attānaṃ sammā ṭhapeti.Puññakatoti katapuñño.Sukhañcetaṃdhivattatīti sukhañca etaṃ puggalaṃ adhivattati, avattharatīti attho.

31. In the first of the fourth, cakkānī: accomplishments. Catucakkaṃ vattatī: the four wheels of accomplishment turn, like the wheels of a water-lifting device. Patirūpadesavāso: dwelling in a suitable country where the four assemblies are found. Sappurisāvassayo: reliance on, association with, and service to good people such as the Buddhas, not kings. Attasammāpaṇidhī: the right establishing of oneself; if one was previously endowed with lack of faith, etc., abandoning those, establishing oneself in faith, etc. Pubbe ca katapuññatā: having done meritorious deeds in the past. This is the standard here. For the wholesome deed that was done with a mind accompanied by knowledge, that very wholesome deed leads that person to a suitable country, causes him to associate with good people, and that very person establishes himself rightly. Puññakato: one who has done meritorious deeds. Sukhañcetaṃdhivattatī: and happiness flows over that person, pervades him.

2. Saṅgahasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Saṅgahasuttavaṇṇanā

32.Dutiyesaṅgahavatthūnīti saṅgaṇhanakāraṇāni.Dānañcātiādīsu ekacco hi dāneneva saṅgaṇhitabbo hoti, tassa dānameva dātabbaṃ.Peyyavajjanti piyavacanaṃ. Ekacco hi ‘‘ayaṃ dātabbaṃ nāma deti, ekekena pana vacanena sabbaṃ makkhetvā nāseti, kiṃ tassa dāna’’nti vattā hoti. Ekacco ‘‘ayaṃ kiñcāpi dānaṃ na deti, kathento pana telena viya makkheti. Esa detu vā mā vā, vacanamevassa sahassaṃ agghatī’’ti vattā hoti. Evarūpo puggalo dānaṃ na paccāsīsati, piyavacanameva paccāsīsati. Tassa piyavacanameva vattabbaṃ.Atthacariyāti atthavaḍḍhanakathā. Ekacco hi neva dānaṃ, na piyavacanaṃ paccāsīsati, attano hitakathaṃ vaḍḍhikathameva paccāsīsati. Evarūpassa puggalassa ‘‘idaṃ te kātabbaṃ, idaṃ na kātabbaṃ, evarūpo puggalo sevitabbo, evarūpo na sevitabbo’’ti evaṃ atthacariyakathāva kathetabbā.Samānattatāti samānasukhadukkhabhāvo. Ekacco hi dānādīsu ekampi na paccāsīsati, ekāsane nisajjaṃ, ekapallaṅke sayanaṃ, ekato bhojananti evaṃ samānasukhadukkhataṃ paccāsīsati. So sace gahaṭṭhassa jātiyā pabbajitassa sīlena sadiso hoti, tassāyaṃ samānattatā kātabbā.Tattha tattha yathārahanti tesu tesu dhammesu yathānucchavikaṃ samānattatāti attho.Rathassāṇīva yāyatoti yathā rathassa gacchato āṇi saṅgaho nāma hoti, sā rathaṃ saṅgaṇhāti, evamime saṅgahā lokaṃ saṅgaṇhanti.Na mātā puttakāraṇāti yadi mātā ete saṅgahe puttassa na kareyya, puttakāraṇā mānaṃ vā pūjaṃ vā na labheyya.Saṅgahāeteti upayogavacane paccattaṃ. Saṅgahe eteti vā pāṭho.Samavekkhantīti sammā pekkhanti.Pāsaṃsā ca bhavantīti pasaṃsanīyā ca bhavanti.

32. Saṅgahavatthūni in "Dutiye saṅgahavatthūni" means the causes of sympathy. In Dānañcāti and the following, one person should be treated with generosity (dāna); only generosity should be given to them. Peyyavajja means affectionate speech. Someone might say, "This person gives what should be given, but ruins everything by smearing it with unpleasant words; what good is their giving?" Someone else might say, "This person, even if they don't give, smears one with oil when speaking. Whether they give or not, their words are worth a thousand." Such a person does not expect generosity but only expects kind words. Only kind words should be spoken to them. Atthacariyā means speech promoting benefit. Someone expects neither generosity nor kind words but only expects talk about their own welfare and prosperity. To such a person, one should speak only of actions conducive to benefit, saying, "This you should do, this you should not do, such a person should be associated with, such a person should not be associated with." Samānattatā means sharing the same happiness and sorrow. Someone expects not even one of the gifts, kind words, etc., but expects to sit on the same seat, sleep on the same couch, eat together, and thus share the same happiness and sorrow. If such a person, whether a householder by birth or a renunciate, is similar in virtue (sīla), this sharing of equality should be done for them. Tattha tattha yathārahaṃ means equality befitting each of those qualities. Rathassāṇīva yāyato means just as the axle-pin (āṇi) is the means of union for a moving chariot, uniting the chariot, so these ways of sympathy unite the world. Na mātā puttakāraṇā means if a mother did not show sympathy to her child, she would not receive honor or homage because of the child. Saṅgahā ete means each one used as appropriate. "Saṅgahe eteti vā" is an alternative reading. Samavekkhantī means looking well, considering carefully. Pāsaṃsā ca bhavantī means they also become praiseworthy.

3. Sīhasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Sīhasuttavaṇṇanā

33.Tatiyesīhoti cattāro sīhā – tiṇasīho, kāḷasīho, paṇḍusīho, kesarasīhoti. Tesutiṇasīhokapotavaṇṇagāvisadiso tiṇabhakkho ca hoti.Kāḷasīhokāḷagāvisadiso tiṇabhakkhoyeva.Paṇḍusīhopaṇḍupalāsavaṇṇagāvisadiso maṃsabhakkho.Kesarasīholākhāparikammakateneva mukhena agganaṅguṭṭhena catūhi ca pādapariyantehi samannāgato, matthakatopissa paṭṭhāya lākhātūlikāya katā viya tisso rājiyo piṭṭhimajjhena gantvā antarasatthimhi dakkhiṇāvattā hutvā ṭhitā. Khandhe panassa satasahassagghanikakambalaparikkhepo viya kesarabhāro hoti, avasesaṭṭhānaṃ parisuddhasālipiṇḍasaṅkhacuṇṇapiṇḍavaṇṇaṃ hoti. Imesu catūsu sīhesu ayaṃ kesarasīho idha adhippeto.

33. In the third, sīho refers to four types of lions: the grass-lion (tiṇasīho), the black lion (kāḷasīho), the pale lion (paṇḍusīho), and the maned lion (kesarasīho). Among these, the tiṇasīho is the color of a dove and resembles a cow, and it eats grass. The kāḷasīho resembles a black cow and only eats grass. The paṇḍusīho resembles a cow the color of a pale leaf and eats meat. The kesarasīho appears as if its face, the end of its tail, and the ends of its four feet have been lacquered; from the top of its head, three lines run down the middle of its back like those made with lacquer paste, turning clockwise within the inner thighs and stopping there. Its shoulders bear a burden of mane like a cloak worth a hundred thousand, while the rest of its body is the color of pure Sāli rice flour. Among these four lions, the maned lion (kesarasīho) is intended here.

Migarājāti sabbamigagaṇassa rājā.Āsayāti vasanaṭṭhānato, suvaṇṇaguhato vā rajatamaṇiphalikamanosilāguhato vā nikkhamatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Nikkhamamāno panesa catūhi kāraṇehi nikkhamati andhakārapīḷito vā ālokatthāya, uccārapassāvapīḷito vā tesaṃ vissajjanatthāya, jighacchāpīḷito vā gocaratthāya, sambhavapīḷito vā assaddhammapaṭisevanatthāya. Idha pana gocaratthāya nikkhamanto adhippeto.

Migarājā means the king of all the animal kingdom. Āsayā means from its dwelling place, from a golden cave or a cave of silver, gemstones, crystal, or red arsenic. It is said that it emerges. When emerging, it does so for four reasons: either afflicted by darkness, it seeks light; or afflicted by the need to urinate or defecate, it seeks to relieve itself; or afflicted by hunger, it seeks food; or afflicted by the urge to procreate, it seeks to abandon unwholesome behavior. Here, it is understood to emerge for the sake of food.

Vijambhatīti suvaṇṇatale vā rajatamaṇiphalikamanosilātalānaṃ vā aññatarasmiṃ dve pacchimapāde samaṃ patiṭṭhāpetvā purimapāde purato pasāretvā sarīrassa pacchābhāgaṃ ākaḍḍhitvā purimabhāgaṃ abhiharitvā piṭṭhiṃ nāmetvā gīvaṃ ukkhipitvā asanisaddaṃ karonto viya nāsapuṭāni pothetvā sarīralaggaṃ rajaṃ vidhunanto vijambhati. Vijambhanabhūmiyañca pana taruṇavacchako viya aparāparaṃ javati, javato panassa sarīraṃ andhakāre paribbhamantaṃ alātaṃ viya khāyati.

Vijambhatī means it places its two hind feet evenly on a golden surface or one of silver, gemstone, crystal, or red arsenic, stretches its forelegs forward, pulls the back part of its body, raises the front part, lowers its back, raises its neck, and, as if making the sound of thunder, flares its nostrils, shakes off the dust clinging to its body, and yawns. In the yawning area, it leaps back and forth like a young calf, and when it leaps, its body appears like a torch whirling in the darkness.

Anuviloketīti kasmā anuviloketi? Parānuddayatāya. Tasmiṃ kira sīhanādaṃ nadante papātāvāṭādīsu visamaṭṭhānesu carantā hatthigokaṇṇamahiṃsādayo pāṇā papātepi āvāṭepi patanti, tesaṃ anuddayāya anuviloketi. Kiṃ panassa luddassa paramaṃsakhādino anuddayā nāma atthīti? Āma atthi. Tathā hi ‘‘kiṃ me bahūhi ghātitehī’’ti attano gocaratthāyāpi khuddake pāṇe na gaṇhāti. Evaṃ anuddayaṃ karoti, vuttampi cetaṃ – ‘‘māhaṃ khuddake pāṇe visamagate saṅghātaṃ āpādesi’’nti (a. ni. 10.21).

Anuviloketī means why does it look around? Out of compassion for others. It is said that when it roars the lion's roar, creatures such as elephants, cattle, buffaloes, etc., roaming in precipices, ravines, and uneven places, fall into precipices and ravines; it looks around out of compassion for them. But does a cruel, flesh-eating animal really have compassion? Yes, it does. Thus, it does not even catch small creatures for its own food, thinking, "What good are many killed?" Thus, it shows compassion, as it is said: "May I not bring small creatures in uneven places to destruction" (A.N. 10.21).

Sīhanādaṃ nadatīti tikkhattuṃ tāva abhītanādaṃ nadati. Evañca panassa vijambhanabhūmiyaṃ ṭhatvā nadantassa saddo samantā tiyojanapadesaṃ ekaninnādaṃ karoti, tamassa ninnādaṃ sutvā tiyojanabbhantaragatā dvipadacatuppadagaṇā yathāṭhāne ṭhātuṃ na sakkonti.Gocarāya pakkamatīti āhāratthāya gacchati. Kathaṃ? So hi vijambhanabhūmiyaṃ ṭhatvā dakkhiṇato vā vāmato vā uppatanto usabhamattaṃ ṭhānaṃ gaṇhāti, uddhaṃ uppatanto cattāripi aṭṭhapi usabhaṭṭhānāni uppatati, same ṭhāne ujukaṃ pakkhandanto soḷasausabhamattampi vīsatiusabhamattampi ṭhānaṃ pakkhandati, thalā vā pabbatā vā pakkhandanto saṭṭhiusabhamattampi asītiusabhamattampi ṭhānaṃ pakkhandati, antarāmagge rukkhaṃ vā pabbataṃ vā disvā taṃ pariharanto vāmato vā dakkhiṇato vā uddhaṃ vā usabhamattaṃ apakkamati. Tatiyaṃ pana sīhanādaṃ naditvā teneva saddhiṃ tiyojane ṭhāne paññāyati, tiyojanaṃ gantvā nivattitvā ṭhito attanova nādassa anunādaṃ suṇāti. Evaṃ sīghena javena pakkamati.

Sīhanādaṃ nadatī means it roars the fearless roar three times. When it stands in the yawning area and roars, its sound makes a single reverberation throughout an area of three yojanas, and having heard its roar, the groups of bipeds and quadrupeds within three yojanas are unable to remain in their places. Gocarāya pakkamati means it goes for food. How? Standing in the yawning area, it covers a distance of one usabha (bull-length) when leaping to the right or left. When leaping upwards, it leaps four or eight usabha lengths. When leaping directly on level ground, it leaps sixteen or twenty usabha lengths. When leaping from a plain or a mountain, it leaps sixty or eighty usabha lengths. If it sees a tree or a mountain in its path, it avoids it by moving one usabha to the left, right, or upward. After roaring the third lion's roar, it appears in a place three yojanas away with that same sound, and after going three yojanas, it turns back and stands listening to the echo of its own roar. Thus, it proceeds with great speed.

Yebhuyyenāti pāyena.Bhayaṃ santāsaṃ saṃveganti sabbaṃ cittutrāsasseva nāmaṃ. Sīhassa hi saddaṃ sutvā bahū bhāyanti, appakā na bhāyanti. Ke pana teti? Samasīho hatthājānīyo assājānīyo usabhājānīyo purisājānīyo khīṇāsavoti. Kasmā panete na bhāyantīti? Samasīho tāva ‘‘jātigottakulasūrabhāvehi samānosmī’’ti na bhāyati, hatthājānīyādayo attano sakkāyadiṭṭhibalavatāya na bhāyanti, khīṇāsavo sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā pahīnattā na bhāyati.

Yebhuyyenā means generally. Bhayaṃ santāsaṃ saṃvegaṃ all mean mental agitation, fright. Hearing the lion's roar, many are afraid, but few are not. Who are they? A lion of equal status (samasīho), a thoroughbred elephant (hatthājānīyo), a thoroughbred horse (assājānīyo), a thoroughbred bull (usabhājānīyo), a thoroughbred man (purisājānīyo), and an arahant. Why are they not afraid? The lion of equal status is not afraid because it thinks, "I am equal in birth, lineage, clan, and courage." The thoroughbred elephant, horse, bull, and man are not afraid because of the strength of their personality belief (sakkāyadiṭṭhi), and the arahant is not afraid because they have abandoned personality belief.

Bilāsayāti bile sayantā bilavāsino ahinakulagodhādayo.Udakāsayāti udakavāsino macchakacchapādayo.Vanāsayāti vanavāsino hatthiassagokaṇṇamigādayo.Pavisantīti ‘‘idāni āgantvā gaṇhissatī’’ti maggaṃ oloketvā pavisanti.Daḷhehīti thirehi.Varattehīti cammarajjūhi.Mahiddhikotiādīsu vijambhanabhūmiyaṃ ṭhatvā dakkhiṇapassādīhi usabhamattaṃ, ujuṃ vīsatiusabhamattādilaṅghanavasena mahiddhikatā, sesamigānaṃ adhipatibhāvena mahesakkhatā, samantā tiyojanaṭṭhāne saddaṃ sutvā palāyantānaṃ vasena mahānubhāvatā veditabbā.

Bilāsayā means those dwelling in holes, such as snakes, mongooses, and lizards. Udakāsayā means those dwelling in water, such as fish and turtles. Vanāsayā means those dwelling in the forest, such as elephants, horses, cattle, and deer. Pavisantī means they enter looking at the path, thinking, "Now it will come and catch us." Daḷhehī means strong. Varattehī means with leather straps. Among Mahiddhiko and the following, it should be understood that the great power (mahiddhikatā) comes from leaping one usabha length to the right side and so on from the yawning area, and leaping directly twenty usabha lengths and so on; the great authority (mahesakkhatā) comes from being the overlord of other animals; and the great influence (mahānubhāvatā) comes from those fleeing after hearing the sound in an area of three yojanas all around.

Evameva khoti bhagavā tesu tesu suttantesu tathā tathā attānaṃ kathesi. ‘‘Sīhoti kho, bhikkhave, tathāgatassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ arahato sammāsambuddhassā’’ti (a. ni. 5.99; 10.21) imasmiṃ tāva sutte sīhasadisaṃ attānaṃ kathesi. ‘‘Bhisakko sallakattoti kho, sunakkhatta, tathāgatassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti (ma. ni. 3.65) imasmiṃ vejjasadisaṃ, ‘‘brāhmaṇoti kho, bhikkhave, tathāgatassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti (a. ni. 8.85) imasmiṃ brāhmaṇasadisaṃ, ‘‘puriso maggakusaloti kho, tissa, tathāgatassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti (saṃ. ni. 3.84) imasmiṃ maggadesakapurisasadisaṃ, ‘‘rājāhamasmi, selā’’ti (su. ni. 559; ma. ni. 2.399) imasmiṃ rājasadisaṃ. Imasmiṃ pana sutte sīhasadisameva katvā attānaṃ kathento evamāha.

Evameva kho the Blessed One spoke of himself in various ways in those discourses. "Monks, the word 'lion' is a designation for the Tathāgata, the Arahant, the Perfectly Enlightened One" (A.N. 5.99; 10.21). In this discourse, he spoke of himself as similar to a lion. "Sunakkhatta, the word 'physician, surgeon' is a designation for the Tathāgata" (M.N. 3.65). In that discourse, he spoke of himself as similar to a physician. "Monks, the word 'Brahmin' is a designation for the Tathāgata" (A.N. 8.85). In that discourse, he spoke of himself as similar to a Brahmin. "Tissa, the word 'a man skilled in the path' is a designation for the Tathāgata" (S.N. 3.84). In that discourse, he spoke of himself as similar to a man showing the path. "I am a king, Sela" (Sn. 559; M.N. 2.399). In that discourse, he spoke of himself as similar to a king. But in this discourse, he spoke of himself by making himself similar to a lion.

Tatrāyaṃ sadisatā – sīhassa kañcanaguhādīsu vasanakālo viya hi tathāgatassa dīpaṅkarapādamūle katābhinīhārassa aparimitakālaṃ pāramiyo pūretvā pacchimabhave paṭisandhiggahaṇena ceva mātukucchito nikkhamanena ca dasasahassilokadhātuṃ kampetvā vuddhimanvāya dibbasampattisadisaṃ sampattiṃ anubhavamānassa tīsu pāsādesu nivāsakālo daṭṭhabbo. Sīhassa kañcanaguhādito nikkhantakālo viya tathāgatassa ekūnatiṃsasaṃvacchare vivaṭena dvārena kaṇḍakaṃ āruyha channasahāyassa nikkhamitvā tīṇi rajjāni atikkamitvā anomānadītīre brahmunā dinnāni kāsāyāni paridahitvā pabbajitassa sattame divase rājagahaṃ gantvā tattha piṇḍāya caritvā paṇḍavagiripabbhāre katabhattakiccassa sammāsambodhiṃ patvā paṭhamameva magadharaṭṭhaṃ āgamanatthāya yāva rañño paṭiññādānakālo.

Here is the similarity: the time of the lion's dwelling in a golden cave is like the Tathāgata's time dwelling in the three palaces, enjoying prosperity like divine attainment, having made the vow at the feet of Dīpaṅkara, fulfilling the perfections (pāramiyo) for an immeasurable time, and shaking the ten thousand world-systems with his rebirth in the final existence and with his emergence from his mother's womb. The time of the lion's emerging from the golden cave is like the Tathāgata's leaving the city at the age of twenty-nine, mounting Kaṇḍaka through the open gate, going forth with Channa as his companion, crossing three kingdoms, putting on the robes given by Brahmā on the bank of the Anomā River, going to Rājagaha on the seventh day after renouncing, begging for alms there, performing the meal duty on the slope of Paṇḍavagiris, attaining complete enlightenment (sammāsambodhi), and the time up to giving the promise to the king to come to Magadha for the first time.

Sīhassa vijambhanakālo viya tathāgatassa dinnapaṭiññassa āḷārakālāmaupasaṅkamanaṃ ādiṃ katvā yāva sujātāya dinnapāyāsassa ekūnapaṇṇāsāya piṇḍehi paribhuttakālo veditabbo. Sīhassa sarīravidhunanaṃ viya sāyanhasamaye sottiyena dinnā aṭṭha tiṇamuṭṭhiyo gahetvā dasasahassacakkavāḷadevatāhi thomiyamānassa gandhādīhi pūjiyamānassa tikkhattuṃ bodhiṃ padakkhiṇaṃ katvā bodhimaṇḍaṃ āruyha cuddasahatthubbedhe ṭhāne tiṇasantharaṃ attharitvā caturaṅgavīriyaṃ adhiṭṭhāya nisinnassa taṃkhaṇaññeva mārabalaṃ vidhametvā tīsu yāmesu tisso vijjā visodhetvā anulomappaṭilomaṃ paṭiccasamuppādamahāsamuddaṃ yamakañāṇamanthanena manthentassa sabbaññutaññāṇe paṭividdhe tadanubhāvena dasasahassilokadhātukampanaṃ veditabbaṃ.

The time of the lion's yawning is like the Tathāgata's time from approaching Āḷāra Kālāma after the promise was given, up to consuming the alms of forty-nine portions given by Sujātā. The lion's shaking of its body is like the Tathāgata's taking eight handfuls of grass given by the Sotthiya at eventide, being praised by the deities of the ten thousand world-systems, being honored with scents and so on, circumambulating the Bodhi tree three times, mounting the Bodhi-maṇḍa, spreading the grass mat in a place fourteen cubits high, sitting down with fourfold effort, and at that very moment defeating the army of Māra, purifying the three knowledges in the three watches, churning the great ocean of Dependent Origination (paṭiccasamuppāda) in forward and reverse order with the churning stick of knowledge of pairs (yamakañāṇa), and the shaking of the ten thousand world-systems due to the power of the knowledge of omniscience being penetrated.

Sīhassa catudisāvilokanaṃ viya paṭividdhasabbaññutaññāṇassa sattasattāhaṃ bodhimaṇḍe viharitvā paribhuttamadhupiṇḍikāhārassa ajapālanigrodhamūle mahābrahmuno dhammadesanāyācanaṃ paṭiggahetvā tattha viharantassa ekādasame divase ‘‘sve āsāḷhipuṇṇamā bhavissatī’’ti paccūsasamaye ‘‘kassa nu kho ahaṃ paṭhamaṃ dhammaṃ deseyya’’nti āḷārudakānaṃ kālakatabhāvaṃ ñatvā dhammadesanatthāya pañcavaggiyānaṃ olokanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sīhassa gocaratthāya tiyojanaṃ gamanakālo viya attano pattacīvaraṃ ādāya ‘‘pañcavaggiyānaṃ dhammacakkaṃ pavattessāmī’’ti pacchābhatte ajapālanigrodhato vuṭṭhitassa aṭṭhārasayojanamaggaṃ gamanakālo.

The lion's looking in the four directions is like the Tathāgata's looking at the group of five after abiding at the Bodhi-maṇḍa for seven weeks with the knowledge of omniscience having been penetrated, and dwelling there after accepting the request of Mahābrahmā at the foot of the Ajapāla banyan tree to teach the Dhamma after consuming the honey-ball food, knowing on the eleventh day that "tomorrow will be the Āsāḷhī full moon," and thinking in the early morning, "To whom should I teach the Dhamma first?" knowing that Āḷāra and Udaka had passed away.

Sīhassa sīhanādakālo viya tathāgatassa aṭṭhārasayojanamaggaṃ gantvā pañcavaggiye saññāpetvā acalapallaṅke nisinnassa dasahi cakkavāḷasahassehi sannipatitena devagaṇena parivutassa ‘‘dveme, bhikkhave, antā pabbajitena na sevitabbā’’tiādinā nayena dhammacakkappavattanakālo veditabbo. Imasmiṃ ca pana pade desiyamāne tathāgatasīhassa dhammaghoso heṭṭhā avīciṃ upari bhavaggaṃ gahetvā dasasahassilokadhātuṃ paṭicchādesi. Sīhassa saddena khuddakapāṇānaṃ santāsāpajjanakālo viya tathāgatassa tīṇi lakkhaṇāni dīpetvā cattāri saccāni soḷasahākārehi saṭṭhiyā ca nayasahassehi vibhajitvā dhammaṃ kathentassa dīghāyukānaṃ devānaṃ ñāṇasantāsassa uppattikālo veditabbo.

The time of the lion going three yojanas for food is like the time of taking his bowl and robe and going the eighteen-yojana path after rising from the Ajapāla banyan tree in the late afternoon, thinking, "I will set in motion the Wheel of Dhamma for the group of five." The time of the lion's roar is like the Tathāgata's setting in motion the Wheel of Dhamma in the manner beginning with "Monks, these two extremes should not be cultivated by one who has gone forth" after going the eighteen-yojana path, having the group of five agree, sitting on the immovable seat, surrounded by the assembly of deities who had gathered from ten thousand world-systems. When this passage was being taught, the Dhamma-sound of the Tathāgata-lion covered the ten thousand world-systems, taking from Avīci below to the peak of existence above. The time of the arising of fear in the small creatures due to the lion's sound is like the time of the arising of knowledge-fear for the long-lived deities when the Tathāgata was teaching the Dhamma, revealing the three characteristics and dividing the four Noble Truths into sixteen aspects and sixty thousand ways of reasoning.

Aparo nayo – sīho viya sabbaññutaṃ patto tathāgato, āsayabhūtāya kanakaguhāya nikkhamanaṃ viya gandhakuṭito nikkhamanakālo, vijambhanaṃ viya dhammasabhaṃ upasaṅkamanakālo, disāvilokanaṃ viya parisāvilokanaṃ, sīhanādanadanaṃ viya dhammadesanākālo, gocarāya pakkamanaṃ viya paravādanimmaddanatthāya gamanaṃ.

Another way: the Tathāgata who has attained omniscience is like the lion; the time of emerging from the golden cave that is its abode is like the time of emerging from the perfume chamber (gandhakuṭi); the yawning is like the time of approaching the Dhamma assembly; looking in the directions is like looking at the assembly; roaring the lion's roar is like the time of teaching the Dhamma; going for food is like going to subdue the opinions of others.

Aparo nayo – sīho viya tathāgato, himavantanissitāya kañcanaguhāya nikkhamanaṃ viya ārammaṇavasena nibbānanissitāya phalasamāpattiyā vuṭṭhānaṃ, vijambhanaṃ viya paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ, disāvilokanaṃ viya veneyyasattavilokanaṃ, sīhanādo viya sampattaparisāya dhammadesanā, gocarāya pakkamanaṃ viya asampattānaṃ veneyyasattānaṃ santikūpasaṅkamanaṃ veditabbaṃ.

Another way: the Tathāgata is like the lion; emerging from the golden cave relying on the Himalayas is like rising from the fruition attainment (phalasamāpatti) relying on Nibbāna as the object; the yawning is like the reviewing knowledge (paccavekkhaṇañāṇa); looking in the directions is like looking at the beings to be trained (veneyyasatta); the lion's roar is like teaching the Dhamma to the accomplished assembly; going for food is like approaching the unaccomplished beings to be trained.

Yadāti yasmiṃ kāle.Tathāgatoti heṭṭhā vuttehi aṭṭhahi kāraṇehi tathāgato.Loketi sattaloke.Uppajjatīti abhinīhārato paṭṭhāya yāva bodhipallaṅkā vā arahattamaggañāṇā vā uppajjati nāma, arahattaphale pana patte uppanno nāma.Arahaṃ sammāsambuddhotiādīni visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.124 ādayo) buddhānussatiniddese vitthāritāni.

Yadā means at what time. Tathāgato means the Tathāgata by the eight reasons stated above. Loke means in the world of beings. Uppajjatī means from the vow onwards, it is called arising until the Bodhi-pallaṅka or the knowledge of the path of arahantship, but when the fruit of arahantship is attained, it is called arisen. Arahaṃ sammāsambuddho and the following are explained in detail in the section on recollection of the Buddha in the Visuddhimagga (Visuddhi. 1.124 ff.).

Iti sakkāyoti ayaṃ sakkāyo, ettako sakkāyo, na ito bhiyyo sakkāyo atthīti. Ettāvatā sabhāvato sarasato pariyantato paricchedato parivaṭumato sabbepi pañcupādānakkhandhā dassitā honti.Iti sakkāyasamudayoti ayaṃ sakkāyassa samudayo nāma. Ettāvatā ‘‘āhārasamudayā rūpasamudayo’’tiādi sabbaṃ dassitaṃ hoti.Iti sakkāyassa atthaṅgamoti ayaṃ sakkāyassa atthaṅgamo. Imināpi ‘‘āhāranirodhā rūpanirodho’’tiādi sabbaṃ dassitaṃ hoti.

‘Iti sakkāyo’ means this is sakkāya, so much is sakkāya; there is no more sakkāya than this. Thus, all five aggregates subject to clinging are shown in terms of their nature, essence, limit, delimitation, and circumscription. ‘Iti sakkāyasamudayo’ means this is the arising of sakkāya. Thus, everything beginning with “with the arising of food, there is the arising of form” is shown. ‘Iti sakkāyassa atthaṅgamo’ means this is the cessation of sakkāya. By this too, everything beginning with “with the cessation of food, there is the cessation of form” is shown.

Vaṇṇavantoti sarīravaṇṇena vaṇṇavanto.Dhammadesanaṃ sutvāti pañcasu khandhesu paṇṇāsalakkhaṇappaṭimaṇḍitaṃ tathāgatassa dhammadesanaṃ sutvā.Yebhuyyenāti idha ke ṭhapeti? Ariyasāvake deve. Tesaṃ hi khīṇāsavattā cittutrāsabhayampi na uppajjati, saṃviggassa yoniso padhānena pattabbaṃ pattatāya ñāṇasaṃvegopi. Itarāsaṃ pana devatānaṃ ‘‘tāso heso, bhikkhave, anicca’’nti manasikarontānaṃ cittutrāsabhayampi, balavavipassanākāle ñāṇabhayampi uppajjati.Bhoti dhammālapanamattametaṃ.Sakkāyapariyāpannāti pañcakkhandhapariyāpannā. Iti tesaṃ sammāsambuddhe vaṭṭadosaṃ dassetvā tilakkhaṇāhataṃ katvā dhammaṃ desente ñāṇabhayaṃ nāma okkamati.

‘Vaṇṇavanto’ means beautiful with the beauty of the body. ‘Dhammadesanaṃ sutvā’ means having heard the Tathāgata’s teaching adorned with fifty characteristics in the five aggregates. ‘Yebhuyyenā’ means who are established here? The noble disciples and the deities. For them, because their corruptions are destroyed, neither mental agitation nor fear arises, nor does knowledge-induced agitation arise, which should be attained by the vigilant through appropriate effort. But for the other deities, when they contemplate, “This fear, bhikkhus, is impermanent,” mental agitation and fear arise, and at the time of strong insight, knowledge-induced fear also arises. ‘Bho’ is merely a term of address. ‘Sakkāyapariyāpannā’ means included within the five aggregates. Thus, while the Buddha shows the fault of repetition in regard to them, striking it with the three characteristics, a knowledge-induced fear descends as he teaches the Dhamma.

Abhiññāyāti jānitvā.Dhammacakkanti paṭivedhañāṇampi desanāñāṇampi.Paṭivedhañāṇaṃnāma yena ñāṇena bodhipallaṅke nisinno cattāri saccāni soḷasahākārehi saṭṭhiyā ca nayasahassehi paṭivijjhi.Desanāñāṇaṃnāma yena ñāṇena tiparivaṭṭaṃ dvādasākāraṃ dhammacakkaṃ pavattesi. Ubhayampetaṃ dasabalassa ure jātañāṇameva. Tesu dhammadesanāñāṇaṃ gahetabbaṃ. Taṃ panesa yāva aṭṭhārasabrahmakoṭīhi saddhiṃ aññākoṇḍaññattherassa sotāpattiphalaṃ na uppajjati, tāva pavatteti nāma. Tasmiṃ uppanne pavattitaṃ nāma hotīti veditabbaṃ.Appaṭipuggaloti sadisapuggalarahito.Yasassinoti parivārasampannā.Tādinoti lābhālābhādīhi ekasadisassa.

‘Abhiññāya’ means having known. ‘Dhammacakka’ means both the knowledge of penetration and the knowledge of teaching. ‘Paṭivedhañāṇaṃ’ means the knowledge by which, seated on the Bodhi-pallaṅka, he penetrated the four truths with sixteen aspects and sixty thousand nayas. ‘Desanāñāṇaṃ’ means the knowledge by which he set in motion the Wheel of Dhamma with three rounds and twelve aspects. Both of these are knowledge born in the breast of the Ten-Powered One. Among these, the knowledge of teaching the Dhamma should be taken. But this he sets in motion until the fruit of stream-entry arises for the Venerable Aññā Koṇḍañña, together with eighteen brahmakoṭis. It should be understood that it is said to be set in motion when that arises. ‘Appaṭipuggalo’ means devoid of an equal person. ‘Yasassino’ means endowed with a retinue. ‘Tādino’ means the same in gain and loss, etc.

4. Pasādasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Commentary on the Pasāda Sutta

34.Catutthe aggesu pasādā, aggā vā pasādātiaggappasādā.Yāvatāti yattakā.Apadāti nippadā ahimacchādayo.Dvipadāti manussapakkhiādayo.Catuppadāti hatthiassādayo.Bahuppadāti satapadiādayo.Nevasaññināsaññinoti bhavagge nibbattasattā.Aggamakkhāyatīti guṇehi aggo uttamo seṭṭhoti akkhāyati.Asaṅkhatāti nibbānameva gahetvā vuttaṃ.Virāgotiādīni nibbānasseva nāmāni. Tañhi āgamma sabbakilesā virajjanti, sabbe rāgamadādayo madā nimmadā honti, abhāvaṃ gacchanti, sabbā pipāsā vinayaṃ upenti, sabbe ālayā samugghātaṃ gacchanti, vaṭṭāni upacchijjanti, taṇhā khīyanti, vaṭṭadukkhā nirujjhanti, sabbe pariḷāhā nibbāyanti. Tasmā etāni nāmāni labhati. Sesamettha uttānatthamevāti.

34. In the fourth [sutta], ‘aggappasādā’ means foremost are the objects of faith, or faith is foremost. ‘Yāvatā’ means as many as. ‘Apadā’ means footless, such as snakes and fish. ‘Dvipadā’ means two-footed, such as humans and birds. ‘Catuppadā’ means four-footed, such as elephants and horses. ‘Bahuppadā’ means many-footed, such as centipedes. ‘Nevasaññināsaññino’ means beings born in the Peak of Existence. ‘Aggamakkhāyatī’ means it is said to be foremost, best, and supreme in qualities. ‘Asaṅkhatā’ is stated taking only Nibbāna. ‘Virāgo’ and the following are names for Nibbāna. For leaning on that, all defilements are detached, all intoxications such as lust and pride become without intoxication, they go to non-existence, all thirsts come to cessation, all attachments go to destruction, the rounds [of rebirth] are cut off, craving wastes away, suffering in the round ceases, and all burning subsides. Therefore, it obtains these names. The rest here is obvious in meaning.

5. Vassakārasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Commentary on the Vassakāra Sutta

35.Pañcameanussaritāti anugantvā saritā, aparāparaṃ sarituṃ samatthoti attho.Dakkhoti cheko.Tatrupāyāyāti ‘‘imasmiṃ kāle imaṃ nāma kattabba’’nti evaṃ tattha tattha upāyabhūtāya paññāya samannāgato.Anumoditabbanti abhinanditabbaṃ.Paṭikkositabbanti paṭikkhipitabbaṃ.Neva kho tyāhanti neva kho te ahaṃ. Kasmā panetaṃ bhagavā nābhinandati, nappaṭikkhipatīti? Lokiyattā nābhinandati, lokiyaṃ atthaṃ gahetvā ṭhitattā nappaṭikkosati.Bahussa janatāti bahu assa janatā. Idañca karaṇatthe sāmivacanaṃ veditabbaṃ.Ariye ñāyeti sahavipassanake magge.Kalyāṇadhammatā kusaladhammatātipi tasseva nāmāni.Yaṃ vitakkanti nekkhammavitakkādīsu aññataraṃ.Na taṃ vitakkaṃ vitakketīti kāmavitakkādīsu ekampi na vitakketi. Itaraṃ tasseva vevacanaṃ.Vitakkapatheti ettha vitakkoyeva vitakkapatho.Ahañhi brāhmaṇātiādīsu paṭhamanayena khīṇāsavassa sīlañceva bāhusaccañca kathitaṃ, dutiyatatiyehi khīṇāsavassa kiriyavitakkāni ceva kiriyajjhānāni ca, catutthena khīṇāsavabhāvo kathitoti veditabbo.

35. In the fifth [sutta], ‘anussaritā’ means having gone along, remembered, and being capable of repeatedly remembering, this is the meaning. ‘Dakkho’ means skilled. ‘Tatrupāyāyā’ means endowed with wisdom that is a means in each case, thinking "this should be done at this time." ‘Anumoditabba’ means should be rejoiced over. ‘Paṭikkositabba’ means should be rejected. ‘Neva kho tyāhaṃ’ means I do not rejoice or reject. Why does the Blessed One not rejoice or reject this? Because of its worldliness he does not rejoice; because it stands taking a worldly meaning, he does not reject it. ‘Bahussa janatā’ means much is the population for him. And this should be understood as a possessive word in the sense of doing. ‘Ariye ñāye’ means in the noble path associated with insight. ‘Kalyāṇadhammatā kusaladhammatā’ are also names for that. ‘Yaṃ vitakkaṃ’ means any of the thoughts of renunciation, etc. ‘Na taṃ vitakkaṃ vitakketi’ means he does not think a single thought of sensual pleasure, etc. The other is a synonym for that. ‘Vitakkapathe’ means here, thought itself is the path of thought. ‘Ahañhi brāhmaṇā’ and so on, in the first method, the morality and great learning of a khīṇāsava are spoken of; in the second and third, the actions, thoughts, and actions of the khīṇāsava are mentioned, and the jhānas; and in the fourth, the state of being a khīṇāsava is spoken of, and should be understood.

Maccupāsappamocananti maccupāsā pamocanakaṃ maggaṃ.Ñāyaṃ dhammanti sahavipassanakaṃ maggaṃ.Disvā ca sutvā cāti ñāṇeneva passitvā ca suṇitvā ca. Sesamettha uttānameva.

‘Maccupāsappamocanaṃ’ means the path that releases from the snare of death. ‘Ñāyaṃ dhammaṃ’ means the path associated with insight. ‘Disvā ca sutvā cā’ means having seen and heard through knowledge. The rest here is obvious.

6. Doṇasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Commentary on the Doṇa Sutta

36.Chaṭṭheantarā ca ukkaṭṭhaṃ antarā ca setabyanti etthaukkaṭṭhāti ukkāhi dhārīyamānāhi māpitattā evaṃladdhavohāraṃ nagaraṃ.Setabyanti atīte kassapasammāsambuddhassa jātanagaraṃ.Antarāsaddo pana kāraṇakhaṇacittavemajjhavivarādīsu vattati. ‘‘Tadantaraṃ ko jāneyya aññatra tathāgatā’’ti (a. ni. 6.44; 10.75) ca, ‘‘janā saṅgamma mantenti, mañca tañca kimantara’’nti ca ādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.228) kāraṇe. ‘‘Addasā maṃ, bhante, aññatarā itthī vijjantarikāya bhājanaṃ dhovantī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.149) khaṇe. ‘‘Yassantarato na santi kopā’’tiādīsu (udā. 20) citte. ‘‘Antarāvosānamāpādī’’tiādīsu vemajjhe. ‘‘Apicāyaṃ tapodā dvinnaṃ mahānirayānaṃ antarikāya āgacchatī’’tiādīsu (pārā. 231) vivare. Svāyamidha vivare vattati. Tasmā ukkaṭṭhāya ca setabyassa ca vivareti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Antarāsaddena pana yuttattā upayogavacanaṃ kataṃ. Īdisesu ca ṭhānesu akkharacintakā ‘‘antarā gāmañca nadiñca yātī’’ti evaṃ ekameva antarāsaddaṃ payuñjanti, so dutiyapadenapi yojetabbo hoti, ayojiyamāne upayogavacanaṃ na pāpuṇāti. Idha pana yojetvā eva vutto.

36. In the sixth [sutta], ‘antarā ca ukkaṭṭhaṃ antarā ca setabyaṃ’ here ‘ukkaṭṭhā’ means a city that has thus received its designation because it was measured by torches being carried. ‘Setabya’ means the birthplace of the past Kassapa Sammāsambuddha. The word ‘antarā’ occurs in the senses of cause, moment, mind, middle space, and gap. As in “Who would know that cause other than the Tathāgata?” (A. N. 6.44; 10.75) and “People gather and confer, what is the cause between you and me?” (S. N. 1.228) in the causes. As in "Venerable sir, a certain woman saw me washing a dish in the gap of the path" (M. N. 2.149) in moments. As in "For those in whose minds there is no anger" (Uda. 20) in the mind. As in "He has arrived in the midst of the end of his life" in the middle. As in "Moreover, this Tapodā flows in the gap between two great hells" (Pārā. 231) in a gap. Here, indeed, it occurs in the sense of a gap. Therefore, the meaning here should be understood as a gap between Ukkaṭṭhā and Setabya. However, because it is connected with the word antarā, the possessive word is used. And in such places, those who think about syllables use only one antarā word, as in “he goes between the village and the river,” so it should be connected with the second word as well; if it is not connected, it does not attain the meaning of a possessive word. Here, however, it is said having been connected.

Addhānamaggappaṭipanno hotīti addhānasaṅkhātaṃ maggaṃ paṭipanno hoti, dīghamagganti attho. Kasmā paṭipannoti? Taṃ divasaṃ kira bhagavā idaṃ addasa ‘‘mayi taṃ maggaṃ paṭipanne doṇo brāhmaṇo mama padacetiyāni passitvā padānupadiko hutvā mama nisinnaṭṭhānaṃ āgantvā pañhaṃ pucchissati. Athassāhaṃ ekaṃ saccadhammaṃ desessāmi. Brāhmaṇo tīṇi sāmaññaphalāni paṭivijjhitvā dvādasapadasahassaparimāṇaṃ doṇagajjitaṃ nāma vaṇṇaṃ vatvā mayi parinibbute sakalajambudīpe uppannaṃ mahākalahaṃ vūpasametvā dhātuyo bhājessatī’’ti. Iminā kāraṇena paṭipanno.Doṇopi sudaṃ brāhmaṇoti doṇo brāhmaṇopi tayo vede paguṇe katvā pañcasate māṇavake sippaṃ vācento taṃdivasaṃ pātova uṭṭhāya sarīrapaṭijagganaṃ katvā satagghanakaṃ nivāsetvā pañcasatagghanakaṃ ekaṃsavaragataṃ katvā āmuttayaññasutto rattavaṭṭikā upāhanā ārohitvā pañcasatamāṇavakaparivāro tameva maggaṃ paṭipajji. Taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.

‘Addhānamaggappaṭipanno hotī’ means he is following a path called addhāna, meaning a long path. Why did he follow it? It is said that on that day, the Blessed One saw this: “If I follow that path, the brahmin Doṇa, seeing the traces of my feet, will follow the footprints and come to the place where I am sitting and ask a question. Then I will teach him a true Dhamma. The brahmin, penetrating the three fruits of asceticism, will utter a eulogy called the Doṇagajjita, amounting to twelve thousand verses, and when I have attained final Nibbāna, he will calm the great quarrel that has arisen in all of Jambudīpa and distribute the relics.” For this reason, he followed the path. ‘Doṇopi sudaṃ brāhmaṇo’ means the brahmin Doṇa, too, having mastered the three Vedas and teaching skills to five hundred students, on that day, rising early in the morning, having performed his bodily maintenance, wearing a hundred-thousand-worth garment, having wrapped a five-hundred-thousand-worth upper garment, having put on a sacred thread, a red turban, and shoes, and surrounded by five hundred students, set out on the same path. This was said referring to that.

Pādesūti pādehi akkantaṭṭhānesu.Cakkānīti lakkhaṇacakkāni. Kiṃ pana bhagavato gacchantassa akkantaṭṭhāne padaṃ paññāyatīti? Na paññāyati. Kasmā? Sukhumattā mahābalattā mahājanānuggahena ca. Buddhānañhi sukhumacchavitāya akkantaṭṭhānaṃ tūlapicuno patiṭṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ viya hoti, padavaḷañjo na paññāyati. Yathā ca balavato vātajavasindhavassa paduminipattepi akkantamattameva hoti, evaṃ mahābalatāya tathāgatena akkantaṭṭhānaṃ akkantamattameva hoti, na tattha padavaḷañjo paññāyati. Buddhānañca anupadaṃ mahājanakāyo gacchati, tassa satthu padavaḷañjaṃ disvā maddituṃ avisahantassa gamanavicchedo bhaveyya. Tasmā akkantaakkantaṭṭhāne yopi padavaḷañjo bhaveyya, so antaradhāyateva. Doṇo pana brāhmaṇo tathāgatassa adhiṭṭhānavasena passi. Bhagavā hi yassa padacetiyaṃ dassetukāmo hoti, taṃ ārabbha ‘‘asuko nāma passatū’’ti adhiṭṭhāti. Tasmā māgaṇḍiyabrāhmaṇo viya ayampi brāhmaṇo tathāgatassa adhiṭṭhānavasena addasa.

‘Pādesū’ means in the places stepped on by the feet. ‘Cakkānī’ means wheel marks. But does a foot appear in the place stepped on by the Blessed One as he walks? It does not appear. Why? Because of his subtlety, great strength, and compassion for the great assembly. For, due to the subtle skin of the Buddhas, the place stepped on is like the place where a tuft of cotton has been placed; the depression of the foot does not appear. And just as, even on a lotus leaf, there is only the slightest impression where a strong Sindh horse with the speed of the wind has stepped, so, due to the great strength, the place stepped on by the Tathāgata is only the slightest impression; the depression of the foot does not appear there. And a great crowd follows the Buddhas step by step, and if they see the depression of the Teacher's foot and are unable to bear treading on it, there would be an interruption in their going. Therefore, whatever depression of the foot there might be in the place stepped on, that disappears. But the brahmin Doṇa saw it by the power of the Tathāgata's determination. For the Blessed One, wishing to show someone the impression of his feet, determines, thinking "Let so-and-so see." Therefore, like the brahmin Māgaṇḍiya, this brahmin also saw it by the power of the Tathāgata's determination.

Pāsādikanti pasādajanakaṃ. Itaraṃ tasseva vevacanaṃ.Uttamadamathasamathamanuppattanti ettha uttamadamatho nāma arahattamaggo, uttamasamatho nāma arahattamaggasamādhi, tadubhayaṃ pattanti attho.Dantanti nibbisevanaṃ.Guttanti gopitaṃ.Saṃyatindriyanti rakkhitindriyaṃ.Nāganti chandādīhi agacchanato, pahīnakilese puna anāgacchanato, āguṃ akaraṇato, balavantaṭṭhenāti catūhi kāraṇehi nāgaṃ.

‘Pāsādikaṃ’ means generating faith. The other is a synonym for that. ‘Uttamadamathasamathamanuppatta’ here, uttamadamatho means the path of Arahatship, and uttamadamathasamatho means the concentration of the path of Arahatship; the meaning is that he has attained both of these. ‘Danta’ means without attachment. ‘Gutta’ means protected. ‘Saṃyatindriya’ means with controlled senses. ‘Nāga’ [elephant] means nāga for four reasons: because he does not go with desire, etc.; because, having abandoned defilements, he does not come again; because he does not do evil; and because he is strong.

Devo no bhavaṃ bhavissatīti ettha ‘‘devo no bhava’’nti ettāvatāpi pucchā niṭṭhitā bhaveyya, ayaṃ pana brāhmaṇo ‘‘anāgate mahesakkho eko devarājā bhavissatī’’ti anāgatavasena pucchāsabhāgeneva kathento evamāha. Bhagavāpissa pucchāsabhāgeneva kathentona kho ahaṃ, brāhmaṇa, devo bhavissāmīti āha. Esa nayo sabbattha.Āsavānanti kāmāsavādīnaṃ catunnaṃ.Pahīnāti bodhipallaṅke sabbaññutaññāṇādhigameneva pahīnā.Anupalitto lokenāti taṇhādiṭṭhilepānaṃ pahīnattā saṅkhāralokena anupalitto.Buddhoti catunnaṃ saccānaṃ buddhattā buddho iti maṃ dhārehi.

‘Devo no bhavaṃ bhavissatī’ here, the question would have been concluded with just “are you a god?”, but this brahmin, saying that he would become a great and powerful king of the gods in the future, spoke in this way, with a part of the question referring to the future. The Blessed One, too, speaking with a part of the question, said ‘na kho ahaṃ, brāhmaṇa, devo bhavissāmī’. This is the method everywhere. ‘Āsavānaṃ’ of the four āsavas such as the kāmāsava. ‘Pahīnā’ means abandoned by the attainment of the knowledge of omniscience at the Bodhi-pallaṅka itself. ‘Anupalitto lokenā’ means unattached to the world of aggregates because of the abandonment of the stains of craving and views. ‘Buddho’ regard me as Buddha, because of being awakened to the four truths.

Yenāti yena āsavena.Devūpapatyassāti devūpapatti assa mayhaṃ bhaveyya.Vihaṅgamoti ākāsacaro gandhabbakāyikadevo.Viddhastāti vidhamitā.Vinaḷīkatāti vigatanaḷā vigatabandhanā katā.Vaggūti sundaraṃ.Toyena nupalippatīti udakato ratanamattaṃ accuggamma ṭhitaṃ saraṃ sobhayamānaṃ bhamaragaṇaṃ hāsayamānaṃ toyena na lippati.Tasmā buddhosmi brāhmaṇāti desanāpariyosāne tīṇi maggaphalāni pāpuṇitvā dvādasahi padasahassehi doṇagajjitaṃ nāma vaṇṇaṃ kathesi, tathāgate ca parinibbute jambudīpatale uppannaṃ mahākalahaṃ vūpasametvā dhātuyo bhājesīti.

‘Yenā’ by which āsava. ‘Devūpapatyassā’ may I have rebirth among the gods. ‘Vihaṅgamo’ means a gandhabba deity who travels in the sky. ‘Viddhastā’ means scattered. ‘Vinaḷīkatā’ means made without reeds, without bonds. ‘Vaggū’ means beautiful. ‘Toyena nūpalipattī’ it is not stained by water, shining on the surface of the water at a distance of a ratana, delighting the throng of bees. ‘Tasmā buddhosmi brāhmaṇā’ at the end of the discourse, having attained the three paths and fruits, he spoke a eulogy called Doṇagajjita with twelve thousand verses, and when the Tathāgata had attained final Nibbāna, he calmed the great quarrel that had arisen on the surface of Jambudīpa and divided the relics.

7. Aparihāniyasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Commentary on the Aparihāniya Sutta

37.Sattamenibbānasseva santiketi nibbānasantikeyeva carati.Sīle patiṭṭhitoti pātimokkhasīle patiṭṭhito.Evaṃvihārīti evaṃ viharanto.Ātāpīti ātāpena vīriyena samannāgato.Yogakkhemassāti catūhi yogehi khemassa nibbānassa.Pamāde bhayadassivāti pamādaṃ bhayato passanto.

37. In the seventh [sutta], ‘nibbānasseva santike’ means he walks near Nibbāna itself. ‘Sīle patiṭṭhito’ means established in the pātimokkhasīla. ‘Evaṃ vihārī’ means living thus. ‘Ātāpī’ means endowed with zeal and effort. ‘Yogakkhemassā’ for the safety from the four yogas, for Nibbāna. ‘Pamāde bhayadassivā’ means seeing danger in negligence.

8. Patilīnasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Commentary on the Patilīna Sutta

38.Aṭṭhamepanuṇṇapaccekasaccoti ‘‘idameva dassanaṃ saccaṃ, idameva sacca’’nti evaṃ pāṭiekkaṃ gahitattā paccekasaṅkhātāni diṭṭhisaccāni panuṇṇāni nīhaṭāni pahīnāni assāti panuṇṇapaccekasacco.Samavayasaṭṭhesanoti etthaavayāti anūnā,saṭṭhāti vissaṭṭhā, sammā avayā saṭṭhā esanā assāti samavayasaṭṭhesano, sammā vissaṭṭhasabbaesanoti attho.Patilīnoti nilīno ekībhāvaṃ upagato.Puthusamaṇabrāhmaṇānanti bahūnaṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ. Ettha casamaṇāti pabbajjūpagatā,brāhmaṇāti bhovādino.Puthupaccekasaccānīti bahūni pāṭekkasaccāni.Nuṇṇānīti nīhaṭāni.Panuṇṇānīti suṭṭhu nīhaṭāni.Cattānīti vissaṭṭhāni.Vantānīti vamitāni.Muttānīti chinnabandhanāni katāni.Pahīnānīti pajahitāni.Paṭinissaṭṭhānīti yathā na puna cittaṃ ārohanti, evaṃ paṭinissajjitāni. Sabbānevetāni gahitagahaṇassa vissaṭṭhabhāvavevacanāni.

38. In the eighth [sutta], ‘panuṇṇapaccekasacco’ means for whom individual truths, called such because each is grasped as "this is the only true view, this alone is true," are driven out, removed, and abandoned. ‘Samavayasaṭṭhesano’ here ‘avayā’ means not deficient, ‘saṭṭhā’ means detached; the meaning is one whose seeking is well-ordered and detached. ‘Patilīno’ means retreated, having attained a state of oneness. ‘Puthusamaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ’ of many ascetics and brahmins. Here ‘samaṇā’ means those who have undertaken the going forth; ‘brāhmaṇā’ means those who use the term bho. ‘Puthupaccekasaccānī’ means many individual truths. ‘Nuṇṇānī’ means removed. ‘Panuṇṇānī’ means well removed. ‘Cattānī’ means relinquished. ‘Vantānī’ means vomited. ‘Muttānī’ means made with bonds cut. ‘Pahīnānī’ means abandoned. ‘Paṭinissaṭṭhānī’ means given up in such a way that they do not rise again in the mind. All of these are synonyms for the state of relinquishing what has been grasped.

Kāmesanā pahīnā hotīti anāgāmimaggena pahīnā.Bhavesanāpana arahattamaggena pahīyati. ‘‘Brahmacariyaṃ esissāmi gavesissāmī’’ti evaṃ pavattajjhāsayasaṅkhātābrahmacariyesanāpi arahattamaggeneva paṭippassaddhiṃ vūpasamaṃ gacchati. Diṭṭhibrahmacariyesanā pana sotāpattimaggeneva paṭippasambhatīti veditabbā.Evaṃ kho, bhikkhaveti evaṃ catutthajjhānena passaddhakāyasaṅkhāro vūpasantaassāsapassāso nāma hoti.Asmimānoti asmīti uppajjanako navavidhamāno.

‘Kāmesanā pahīnā hotī’ means sensual craving is abandoned by the path of the Non-Returner. ‘Bhavesanā’, however, is abandoned by the path of Arahatship. ‘Brahmacariyesanā’, which is called the intention to engage and search for the holy life, also goes to cessation and appeasement by the path of Arahatship. It should be understood that craving for the holy life through views is calmed by the path of Stream-Entry. ‘Evaṃ kho, bhikkhave’ thus, bhikkhus, one whose bodily fabrication is calmed by the fourth jhāna is one whose in-breath and out-breath are stilled. ‘Asmimāno’ means the nine-fold conceit that arises as "I am."

kāmesanā bhavesanāti etā dve esanā,brahmacariyesanā sahāti tāhiyeva saha brahmacariyesanāti tissopi etā. Idha ṭhatvāesanā paṭinissaṭṭhāti iminā padena saddhiṃ yojanā kātabbā.Iti saccaparāmāso, diṭṭhiṭṭhānā samussayāti ‘‘iti saccaṃ iti sacca’’nti gahaṇaparāmāso ca diṭṭhisaṅkhātāyeva diṭṭhiṭṭhānā ca ye samussitattā uggantvā ṭhitattā samussayāti vuccanti, te sabbepi. Idha ṭhatvādiṭṭhiṭṭhānā samūhatāti iminā padena saddhiṃ yojanā kātabbā. Kassa pana etā esanā paṭinissaṭṭhā, ete ca diṭṭhiṭṭhānā samūhatāti?Sabbarāgavirattassa taṇhākkhayavimuttino. Yo hi sabbarāgehipi viratto, taṇhākkhaye ca nibbāne pavattāya arahattaphalavimuttiyā samannāgato, etassa esanā paṭinissaṭṭhā, diṭṭhiṭṭhānā ca samūhatā.Sa ve santoti so evarūpo kilesasantatāya santo.Passaddhoti dvīhi kāyacittapassaddhīhi passaddho.Aparājitoti sabbakilese jinitvā ṭhitattā kenaci aparājito.Mānābhisamayāti mānassa pahānābhisamayena.Buddhoti cattāri saccāni bujjhitvā ṭhito. Iti imasmiṃ suttepi gāthāsupi khīṇāsavova kathitoti.

kāmesanā bhavesanāti these two are searchings: searching for sensual pleasures and searching for continued existence, brahmacariyesanā sahāti brahmacariyesanā, the searching in holy life, is along with those themselves, even Tissa said. Having stayed here, esanā paṭinissaṭṭhāti connection should be made of this phrase. Iti saccaparāmāso, diṭṭhiṭṭhānā samussayāti "this is the truth, this is the truth" - clinging and the bases for views which are called diṭṭhi, which are arisen due to being elevated, all of these are called samussaya, having stood out, all of these. Having stayed here, diṭṭhiṭṭhānā samūhatāti connection should be made of this phrase. But whose searchings are abandoned, and whose bases for views are uprooted? Sabbarāgavirattassa taṇhākkhayavimuttino. Indeed, one who is detached from all forms of craving and is endowed with the liberation of arahantship fruition, which is established in the cessation of craving, Nibbana, for him, searchings are abandoned and the bases of views are uprooted. Sa ve santoti that one, such as that one, is peaceful because of the peace from the continuum of defilements. Passaddhoti calmed by two calmnes of the body and mind. Aparājitoti unvanquished by anyone, because he stood having conquered all the defilements. Mānābhisamayāti by the breakthrough of abandoning conceit. Buddhoti having awakened and stood having awakened to the four noble truths. Thus, in this sutta too, it is said that only the one with destroyed taints is spoken of in the verses.

9. Ujjayasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Ujjayasuttavaṇṇanā

39.Navamesaṅghātaṃ āpajjantīti vadhaṃ maraṇaṃ āpajjanti.Niccadānanti salākabhattaṃ.Anukulayaññanti amhākaṃ pitūhi pitāmahehi dinnattā evaṃ kulānukulavasena yajitabbaṃ, dātabbanti attho.Assamedhantiādīsu assamettha medhantīti assamedho, dvīhi pariyaññehi yajitabbassa ekavīsatiyūpassa ṭhapetvā bhūmiñca purise ca avasesasabbavibhavadakkhiṇassa yaññassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Purisamettha medhantītipurisamedho,catūhi pariyaññehi yajitabbassa saddhiṃ bhūmiyā assamedhe vuttavibhavadakkhiṇassa yaññassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Sammamettha pāsantītisammāpāso,divase divase sammaṃ khipitvā tassa patitokāse vediṃ katvā saṃhārimehi yūpādīhi sarassatinadiyā nimuggokāsato pabhuti paṭilomaṃ gacchantena yajitabbassa sabbayāgassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Vājamettha pivantītivājapeyyaṃ,ekena pariyaññena sattarasahi pasūhi yajitabbassa beluvayūpassa sattarasakadakkhiṇassa yaññassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Natthi ettha aggaḷātiniraggaḷo. Navahi pariyaññehi yajitabbassa saddhiṃ bhūmiyā purisehi ca assamedhe vuttavibhavadakkhiṇassa sabbamedhapariyāyanāmassa assamedhavikappassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.Mahārambhāti mahākiccā mahākaraṇīyā. Apica pāṇātipātasamārambhassa mahantatāyapi mahārambhāyeva.Na te honti mahapphalāti ettha niravasesatthe sāvasesarūpanaṃ kataṃ. Tasmā iṭṭhaphalena nipphalāva hontīti attho. Idañca pāṇātipātasamārambhameva sandhāya vuttaṃ. Yaṃ pana tattha antarantarā dānaṃ diyyati, taṃ iminā samārambhena upahatattā mahapphalaṃ na hoti, mandaphalaṃ hotīti attho.Haññareti haññanti.Yajanti anukulaṃ sadāti ye aññe anukulaṃ yajanti, pubbapurisehi yiṭṭhattā pacchimapurisāpi yajantīti attho.Seyyo hotīti visesova hoti.Na pāpiyoti pāpaṃ kiñci na hoti.

39.In the ninth, saṅghātaṃ āpajjantīti they undergo slaughter and death. Niccadānanti the food offering by ticket. Anukulayaññanti meaning, because it was given by our fathers and grandfathers, thus it should be sacrificed and given according to the lineage. Assamedhanti and so on, assamettha medhantīti assamedho, this is a designation for the sacrifice where horses are sacrificed, where twenty-one sacrificial posts are erected, and where the earth, men, and all remaining wealth are offered as a gift, to be sacrificed with two pariññas. Purisamettha medhantīti purisamedho, this is a designation for the sacrifice where men are sacrificed, together with the earth, with wealth offered as a gift as described in the assamedha, to be sacrificed with four pariyaññas. Sammamettha pāsantīti sammāpāso, this is a designation for all sacrifices to be sacrificed daily by throwing a sammā and making a vedī in the place where it falls, with saṃhāri wood from the place submerged in the Sarasvati River going in reverse order. Vājamettha pivantīti vājapeyyaṃ, this is a designation for the sacrifice to be sacrificed with one pariyañña with seventeen animals, with a beluva sacrificial post, with seventeen-fold gifts. Natthi ettha aggaḷāti niraggaḷo. This is a designation for the variation of the horse sacrifice named sabbamedha, to be sacrificed with nine pariyaññas, together with land and men, with wealth offered as a gift as described in the horse sacrifice. Mahārambhāti great undertakings, great actions. Moreover, it is also mahārambhā due to the greatness of undertaking the commitment of killing living beings. Na te honti mahapphalāti here, the savasesa form is made into niravasesa, therefore, meaning, they are indeed fruitless with the fruit of giving. And this is said regarding the commitment of killing living beings itself. But whatever giving is given intermittently, that is not of great fruit, but is of small fruit because it is harmed by this commitment. Haññareti they kill. Yajanti anukulaṃ sadāti those others who sacrifice according to lineage, meaning, subsequent people also sacrifice because it was sacrificed by previous people. Seyyo hotīti it is especially better. Na pāpiyoti there is no evil.

10. Udāyisuttavaṇṇanā
10. Udāyisuttavaṇṇanā

40.Dasameabhisaṅkhatanti rāsikataṃ.Nirārambhanti pāṇasamārambharahitaṃ.Yaññanti deyyadhammaṃ. Tañhi yajitabbattā yaññanti vuccati.Kālenāti yuttappattakālena.Upasaṃyantīti upagacchanti.Kulaṃ gatinti vaṭṭakulañceva vaṭṭagatiñca atikkantā.Yaññassakovidāti catubhūmakayaññe kusalā.Yaññeti pakatidāne.Saddheti matakadāne.Habyaṃ katvāti hunitabbaṃ deyyadhammaṃ upakappetvā.Sukhette brahmacārisūti brahmacārisaṅkhāte sukhettamhīti attho.Suppattanti suṭṭhu pattaṃ.Dakkhiṇeyyesu yaṃ katanti yaṃ dakkhiṇāya anucchavikesu upakappitaṃ, taṃ suhutaṃ suyiṭṭhaṃ suppattanti attho.Saddhoti buddhadhammasaṅghaguṇānaṃ saddahanatāya saddho.Muttena cetasāti vissaṭṭhena cittena. Imināssa muttacāgaṃ dīpetīti.

40.In the tenth, abhisaṅkhatanti amassed. Nirārambhanti devoid of the commitment of killing living beings. Yaññanti the gift-worthy thing. For that is called yañña because it should be sacrificed. Kālenāti at the appropriate time. Upasaṃyantīti they approach. Kulaṃ gatinti they have transcended both the lineage and the destiny of repeated existences. Yaññassa kovidāti skilled in the four-leveled sacrifice. Yaññeti in natural giving. Saddheti in giving to the dead. Habyaṃ katvāti having prepared the gift-worthy thing to be offered. Sukhette brahmacārisūti meaning, in the good field that is called brahmacārī. Suppattanti well-obtained. Dakkhiṇeyyesu yaṃ katanti whatever is prepared for those worthy of offerings, fitting for gifts, that is well-sacrificed, well-given, and well-obtained. Saddhoti faithful due to believing in the qualities of the Buddha, Dhamma, and Sangha. Muttena cetasāti with a released mind. By this, he shows his released generosity.

5. Rohitassavaggo

5. Rohitassavaggo

1. Samādhibhāvanāsuttavaṇṇanā
1. Samādhibhāvanāsuttavaṇṇanā

41.Pañcamassa paṭhameñāṇadassanappaṭilābhāyāti dibbacakkhuñāṇadassanassa paṭilābhāya.Divāsaññaṃ adhiṭṭhātīti divāti evaṃ saññaṃ adhiṭṭhāti.Yathā divā tathā rattinti yathā divā ālokasaññā manasi katā, tatheva taṃ rattimpi manasi karoti. Dutiyapadepi eseva nayo.Sappabhāsanti dibbacakkhuñāṇobhāsena sahobhāsaṃ. Kiñcāpi ālokasadisaṃ kataṃ, attho panettha na evaṃ sallakkhetabbo. Dibbacakkhuñāṇāloko hi idhādhippeto.

41.In the first of the fifth, ñāṇadassanappaṭilābhāyāti for the attainment of the knowledge and vision of the divine eye. Divāsaññaṃ adhiṭṭhātīti he establishes the perception of day. Yathā divā tathā rattinti just as the perception of light is made in the mind during the day, so too he makes that in the mind at night. The same method applies in the second phrase as well. Sappabhāsanti with radiance, together with the radiance of the knowledge of the divine eye. Although it is made similar to light, the meaning should not be regarded like this here. For here, the light of the knowledge of the divine eye is intended.

Viditāti pākaṭā hutvā. Kathaṃ pana vedanā viditā uppajjanti, viditā abbhatthaṃ gacchantīti? Idha bhikkhu vatthuṃ pariggaṇhāti, ārammaṇaṃ pariggaṇhāti. Tassa pariggahitavatthārammaṇatāya tā vedanā ‘‘evaṃ uppajjitvā evaṃ ṭhatvā evaṃ nirujjhantī’’ti viditā uppajjanti, viditā tiṭṭhanti, viditā abbhatthaṃ gacchanti nāma.Saññāvitakkesupi eseva nayo.

Viditāti having become apparent. But how do feelings arise known, and how do they go to destruction known? Here, a bhikkhu takes up an object, he takes up a basis. Due to his taking up an object and a basis, those feelings arise known, "having arisen like this, having stayed like this, they cease like this," feelings stay known, they go to destruction known. Saññāvitakkesupi the same method applies for perceptions and thoughts as well.

Udayabbayānupassīti udayañca vayañca passanto.Iti rūpanti evaṃ rūpaṃ ettakaṃ rūpaṃ na ito paraṃ rūpaṃ atthīti.Iti rūpassa samudayoti evaṃ rūpassa uppādo.Atthaṅgamoti pana bhedo adhippeto.Vedanādīsupi eseva nayo.Idañca pana metaṃ, bhikkhave, sandhāya bhāsitanti, bhikkhave, yaṃ mayā etaṃ puṇṇakapañhe ‘‘saṅkhāya lokasmi’’ntiādi bhāsitaṃ, taṃ idaṃ phalasamāpattiṃ sandhāya bhāsitanti attho.

Udayabbayānupassīti seeing arising and passing away. Iti rūpanti thus is form, this much is form, there is no form beyond this. Iti rūpassa samudayoti thus is the arising of form. Atthaṅgamoti but dissolution is intended. The same method applies Vedanādīsupi for feelings and so on as well. Idañca pana metaṃ, bhikkhave, sandhāya bhāsitanti, monks, what was spoken by me in that Puṇṇaka's question, "having known in the world" and so on, that was spoken intending the attainment of fruition.

saṅkhāyāti ñāṇena jānitvā.Lokasminti sattaloke.Paroparānīti uccāvacāni uttamādhamāni.Iñjitanti calitaṃ.Natthi kuhiñci loketi lokasmiṃ katthaci ekakkhandhepi ekāyatanepi ekadhātuyāpi ekārammaṇepi natthi.Santoti paccanīkakilesavūpasamena santo.Vidhūmoti kodhadhūmena vigatadhūmo. Evamettha suttante maggekaggatampi kathetvā gāthāya phalasamāpattiyeva kathitāti.

saṅkhāyāti having known by knowledge. Lokasminti in the sentient world. Paroparānīti high and low, excellent and inferior. Iñjitanti agitated. Natthi kuhiñci loketi there is nothing anywhere in the world, not in one aggregate, not in one sense base, not in one element, not in one object. Santoti peaceful due to the subsiding of opposing defilements. Vidhūmoti without smoke from the smoke of anger. Thus, in this sutta, having spoken of the one-pointedness of the path, only the attainment of fruition is spoken of in the verse.

2. Pañhabyākaraṇasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Pañhabyākaraṇasuttavaṇṇanā

42.Dutiyeyo ca tesaṃ tattha tattha, jānāti anudhammatanti yo etesaṃ pañhānaṃ tasmiṃ tasmiṃ ṭhāne byākaraṇaṃ jānāti.Catupañhassa kusalo, āhu bhikkhuṃ tathāvidhanti tathāvidhaṃ bhikkhuṃ tesu catūsu pañhesu kusaloti evaṃ vadanti.Durāsado duppasahoti parehi ghaṭṭetuṃ vā abhibhavituṃ vā na sakkā.Gambhīroti sattasīdantaramahāsamuddo viya gambhīro.Duppadhaṃsiyoti dummocāpayo, gahitaggahaṇaṃ vissajjāpetuṃ na sakkāti attho.Atthe anatthe cāti vaḍḍhiyañca avaḍḍhiyañca.Atthābhisamayāti atthasamāgamena.Dhīro paṇḍitoti pavuccatīti dhitisampanno puggalo ‘‘paṇḍito aya’’nti evaṃ pavuccati.

42.In the second, yo ca tesaṃ tattha tattha, jānāti anudhammatanti the one who knows the explanation of those questions in that particular place. Catupañhassa kusalo, āhu bhikkhuṃ tathāvidhanti they say that a monk who is skilled in those four questions is of such a kind. Durāsado duppasahoti he cannot be attacked or overpowered by others. Gambhīroti deep like the great ocean with seven layers of depths. Duppadhaṃsiyoti difficult to dislodge, it is not possible to make one give up the grasped grasp, meaning. Atthe anatthe cāti in growth and non-growth. Atthābhisamayāti by the union with meaning. Dhīro paṇḍitoti pavuccatīti a person endowed with wisdom is spoken of as "this is a wise one."

3-4. Kodhagarusuttadvayavaṇṇanā
3-4. Kodhagarusuttadvayavaṇṇanā

43-44.Tatiyekodhagaru na saddhammagarūti kodhaṃ gāravena garuṃ katvā gaṇhāti, na saddhammaṃ, saddhammaṃ pana agāravena lāmakaṃ katvā gaṇhāti. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo.

43-44.In the third, kodhagaru na saddhammagarūti he takes anger as heavy with reverence, but not the true Dhamma, but he takes the true Dhamma as light and without reverence. The same method applies in the remaining phrases as well.

Virūhantīti vaḍḍhanti, sañjātamūlāya vā saddhāya patiṭṭhahanti acalā bhavanti. Catutthekodhagarutāti kodhamhi sagāravatā. Esa nayo sabbattha.

Virūhantīti they grow, they become established in the arising root of faith, they become unshakeable. In the fourth, kodhagarutāti reverence for anger. This method applies everywhere.

5. Rohitassasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Rohitassasuttavaṇṇanā

45.Pañcameyatthāti cakkavāḷalokassa ekokāse bhummaṃ.Na cavati na upapajjatīti idaṃ aparāparaṃ cutipaṭisandhivasena gahitaṃ.Gamanenāti padagamanena.Lokassa antanti satthā saṅkhāralokassa antaṃ sandhāya vadati.Ñāteyyantiādīsu ñātabbaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ pattabbanti attho. Iti devaputtena cakkavāḷalokassa anto pucchito, satthārā saṅkhāralokassa kathito. So pana ‘‘attano pañhena saddhiṃ satthu byākaraṇaṃ sametī’’ti saññāya sampahaṃsantoacchariyantiādimāha.

45.In the fifth, yatthāti one place of the world of the cycle. Na cavati na upapajjatīti this is taken in terms of successive death and rebirth. Gamanenāti by walking. Lokassa antanti the Teacher speaks intending the end of the world of formations. Ñāteyyantiādīsu meaning, it should be known, it should be seen, it should be attained. Thus, the deva's son asked about the end of the world of the cycle, and the Teacher spoke of the world of formations. He, delighted with the thought that "the Teacher's explanation is in accordance with his own question," said acchariyantiādi, "amazing" and so on.

Daḷhadhammāti daḷhadhanu uttamappamāṇena dhanunā samannāgato.Dhanuggahoti dhanuācariyo.Sikkhitoti dvādasa vassāni dhanusippaṃ sikkhito.Katahatthoti usabhappamāṇepi vālaggaṃ vijjhituṃ samatthabhāvena katahattho.Katūpāsanoti katasarakkhepo dassitasippo.Asanenāti kaṇḍena.Atipāteyyāti atikkameyya. Yāvatā so tālacchādiṃ atikkameyya, tāvatā kālena ekaṃ cakkavāḷaṃ atikkamāmīti attano javasampattiṃ dasseti.

Daḷhadhammāti strong bowman, endowed with a bow of the highest standard. Dhanuggahoti archery teacher. Sikkhitoti trained in archery for twelve years. Katahatthoti with skilled hands because he is able to pierce a hair at the distance of an ox. Katūpāsanoti having shown his skill, having released an arrow. Asanenāti by an arrow. Atipāteyyāti he would pass over. He shows his swiftness, "In the time that he would pass over that palm tree shade, I would pass over one world-sphere."

Puratthimā samuddā pacchimoti yathā puratthimā samuddā pacchimasamuddo dūre, evaṃ me dūre padavītihāro ahosīti vadati. So kira pācīnacakkavāḷamukhavaṭṭiyaṃ ṭhito pādaṃ pasāretvā pacchimacakkavāḷamukhavaṭṭiṃ atikkamati, puna dutiyapādaṃ pasāretvā paracakkavāḷamukhavaṭṭiṃ atikkamati.Icchāgatanti icchā eva.Aññatrevāti nippapañcataṃ dasseti. Bhikkhācārakāle kiresa nāgalatādantakaṭṭhaṃ khāditvā anotatte mukhaṃ dhovitvā kāle sampatte uttarakurumhi piṇḍāya caritvā cakkavāḷamukhavaṭṭiyaṃ nisinno bhattakiccaṃ karoti, tattha muhuttaṃ vissamitvā puna javati.Vassasatāyukoti tadā dīghāyukakālo hoti, ayaṃ pana vassasatāvasiṭṭhe āyumhi gamanaṃ ārabhi.Vassasatajīvīti taṃ vassasataṃ anantarāyena jīvanto.Antarāyeva kālaṅkatoti cakkavāḷalokassa antaṃ appatvā antarāva mato. So pana tattha kālaṃ katvāpi āgantvā imasmiṃyeva cakkavāḷe nibbatti.

Puratthimā samuddā pacchimoti he says, "Just as the eastern ocean and the western ocean are far, so too my course of walking was far." It seems that he, standing at the eastern mouth of the world-sphere, extended his foot and passed over the western mouth of the world-sphere, then extending his second foot, he passed over another world-sphere. Icchāgatanti according to his wish. Aññatrevāti he shows the state without proliferation. It seems that during the alms round, he chewed the nāgalatā tooth stick, washed his face in the Anotatta lake, and when the time came, having gone for alms in Uttarakuru, sitting at the mouth of the world-sphere, he performed his meal duties, and having rested there for a moment, he went again swiftly. Vassasatāyukoti at that time, the life span was long, but he began walking when his life span had a remaining one hundred years. Vassasatajīvīti living that one hundred years without interruption. Antarāyeva kālaṅkatoti having died in between without reaching the end of the world-sphere. He, having died there, was reborn in this world-sphere itself.

Appatvāti saṅkhāralokassa antaṃ appatvā.Dukkhassāti vaṭṭadukkhassa.Antakiriyanti pariyantakaraṇaṃ.Kaḷevareti attabhāve.Sasaññimhi samanaketi sasaññe sacittake.Lokanti dukkhasaccaṃ.Lokasamudayanti samudayasaccaṃ.Lokanirodhanti nirodhasaccaṃ.Paṭipadanti maggasaccaṃ. Iti ‘‘nāhaṃ, āvuso, imāni cattāri saccāni tiṇakaṭṭhādīsu paññapemi, imasmiṃ pana catumahābhūtike kāyasmiṃyeva paññapemī’’ti dasseti.Samitāvīti samitapāpo.Nāsīsatīti na pattheti. Chaṭṭhaṃ uttānatthamevāti.

Appatvāti without reaching the end of the world of formations. Dukkhassāti of the suffering of repeated existences. Antakiriyanti making an end. Kaḷevareti in the body. Sasaññimhi samanaketi in the sentient, with mind. Lokanti the truth of suffering. Lokasamudayanti the truth of arising. Lokanirodhanti the truth of cessation. Paṭipadanti the truth of the path. Thus, he shows, "I do not declare these four truths in sticks and branches, but I declare them in this body with four great elements." Samitāvīti with quelled evil. Nāsīsatīti he does not desire. The sixth is indeed straightforward in meaning.

7. Suvidūrasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Suvidūrasuttavaṇṇanā

47.Sattamesuvidūravidūrānīti kenaci pariyāyena anāsannāni hutvā suvidūrāneva vidūrāni.Nabhañca, bhikkhave, pathavī cāti ākāsañca mahāpathavī ca. Tattha kiñcāpi pathavito ākāsaṃ nāma na dūre, dvaṅgulamattepi hoti. Aññamaññaṃ alagganaṭṭhena pana ‘‘suvidūravidūre’’ti vuttaṃ.Verocanoti sūriyo.Satañca, bhikkhave, dhammoti catusatipaṭṭhānādibhedo sattatiṃsabodhipakkhiyadhammo.Asatañca dhammoti dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhigatabhedo assaddhammo.

47.In the seventh, suvidūravidūrānīti being not near in any way, they are very far and distant. Nabhañca, bhikkhave, pathavī cāti the sky and the great earth. There, although the sky is not far from the earth, it is only about two fingers away, it is said to be "very far and distant" due to the state of not clinging to each other. Verocanoti the sun. Satañca, bhikkhave, dhammoti the thirty-seven factors of enlightenment, with distinctions beginning with the four establishments of mindfulness. Asatañca dhammoti the un-Dhamma, with distinctions of sixty-two kinds of views.

Pabhaṅkaroti ālokakaro.Abyāyiko hotīti avigacchanasabhāvo hoti.Sataṃ samāgamoti paṇḍitānaṃ mittasanthavavasena samāgamo.Yāvāpitiṭṭheyyāti yattakaṃ addhānaṃ tiṭṭheyya.Tatheva hotīti tādisova hoti, pakatiṃ na jahati.Khippaṃ hi vetīti sīghaṃ vigacchati.

Pabhaṅkaroti light-maker. Abyāyiko hotīti he is of the nature of not disappearing. Sataṃ samāgamoti the gathering of wise people through friendship and association. Yāvāpi tiṭṭheyyāti for as long as it would last. Tatheva hotīti it is just like that, it does not abandon its nature. Khippaṃ hi vetīti it quickly disappears.

8. Visākhasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Visākhasuttavaṇṇanā

48.Aṭṭhamepañcālaputtoti pañcālabrāhmaṇiyā putto.Poriyā vācāyāti paripuṇṇavācāya.Vissaṭṭhāyāti apalibuddhāya.Anelagalāyāti niddosāya ceva agaḷitāya ca apatitapadabyañjanāya.Pariyāpannāyāti vivaṭṭapariyāpannāya.Anissitāyāti vaṭṭaṃ anissitāya. Vivaṭṭanissitameva katvā katheti, vaṭṭanissitaṃ katvā na kathetīti ayamettha adhippāyo.

48.In the eighth, pañcālaputtoti son of a Pañcala Brahmin woman. Poriyā vācāyāti with complete speech. Vissaṭṭhāyāti un-stuck. Anelagalāyāti both without fault and un-stammering, with un-fallen word and phrase. Pariyāpannāyāti with open completeness. Anissitāyāti un-dependent on repeated existences. The meaning here is that he speaks only making dependent on liberation, he does not speak making dependent on repeated existences.

Nābhāsamānanti na akathentaṃ.Amataṃ padanti nibbānapadaṃ.Bhāsayeti obhāseyya.Jotayeti tasseva vevacanaṃ.Paggaṇhe isinaṃ dhajanti abbhuggataṭṭhena navalokuttaradhammo isīnaṃ dhajo nāma vuccati, tameva paggaṇheyya ukkhipeyya, uccaṃ katvā katheyyāti attho. Navalokuttaradhammadīpakaṃ subhāsitaṃ dhajo etesantisubhāsitadhajā. Isayoti buddhādayo ariyā.Dhammo hi isinaṃ dhajoti heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva lokuttaradhammo isīnaṃ dhajo nāmāti.

Nābhāsamānanti: not declaring or speaking out. Amataṃ padanti: the deathless state, Nibbana. Bhāsayeti: would illuminate. Jotayeti: a synonym for that same. Paggaṇhe isinaṃ dhajanti: the ninefold supramundane Dhamma is called the banner of the sages because of its exalted nature; he should take it up, raise it, declare it having made it high, is the meaning. Those who have the well-spoken word, which illuminates the ninefold supramundane Dhamma, as their banner are called subhāsitadhajā. Isayoti: sages, meaning Buddhas and other noble ones. Dhammo hi isinaṃ dhajoti: the supramundane Dhamma is called the banner of the sages in the same way as stated above.

9. Vipallāsasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Vipallāsasuttavaṇṇanā

49.Navamesaññāvipallāsāti saññāya vipallatthabhāvā, catasso viparītasaññāyoti attho. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo.Anicce, bhikkhave, niccanti saññāvipallāsoti anicce vatthusmiṃ ‘‘niccaṃ ida’’nti evaṃ gahetvā uppajjanakasaññā, saññāvipallāsoti attho. Iminā nayena sabbapadesu attho veditabbo.

49. In the ninth, saññāvipallāsāti: the perversion of perception, meaning the four perverted perceptions. The same method applies to the other two terms as well. Anicce, bhikkhave, niccanti saññāvipallāsoti: the perception that arises in an impermanent thing, grasping it as "this is permanent," is the meaning of perversion of perception. The meaning should be understood in all terms in this way.

Anattani ca attāti anattani ‘‘attā’’ti evaṃsaññinoti attho.Micchādiṭṭhihatāti na kevalaṃ saññinova, saññāya viya uppajjamānāya micchādiṭṭhiyāpi hatā.Khittacittāti te saññādiṭṭhiyo viya uppajjamānena khittena cittena samannāgatā.Visaññinoti desanāmattametaṃ, viparītasaññācittadiṭṭhinoti attho.Te yogayuttā mārassāti te mārassa yoge yuttā nāma honti.Ayogakkheminoti catūhi yogehi khemaṃ nibbānaṃ appattā.Sattāti puggalā.Buddhāti catusaccabuddhā.Imaṃ dhammanti catusaccadhammaṃ.Sacittaṃ paccaladdhāti sakaṃ cittaṃ paṭilabhitvā.Aniccato dakkhunti aniccabhāvena addasaṃsu.Asubhataddasunti asubhaṃ asubhatoyeva addasaṃsu.Sammādiṭṭhisamādānāti gahitasammādassanā.Sabbaṃ dukkhaṃ upaccagunti sakalaṃ vaṭṭadukkhaṃ samatikkantā.

Anattani ca attāti: one who perceives "self" in what is not-self, is the meaning. Micchādiṭṭhihatāti: not only perceiving, but also struck by wrong view, which arises like perception. Khittacittāti: they are endowed with a distracted mind that arises like perception and view. Visaññinoti: this is just a way of speaking; it means those with perverted perception, mind, and view. Te yogayuttā mārassāti: they are joined to the yoke of Mara. Ayogakkheminoti: not attained to Nibbana, which is freedom from the four yokes. Sattāti: beings, individuals. Buddhāti: Buddhas who understand the four noble truths. Imaṃ dhammanti: this Dhamma, the four noble truths. Sacittaṃ paccaladdhāti: having regained their own minds. Aniccato dakkhunti: they saw in terms of impermanence. Asubhataddasunti: they saw the unattractive as unattractive itself. Sammādiṭṭhisamādānāti: having adopted right view. Sabbaṃ dukkhaṃ upaccagunti: they have transcended all the suffering of the round.

10. Upakkilesasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Upakkilesasuttavaṇṇanā

50.Dasameupakkilesāti virocituṃ adatvā upakkiliṭṭhabhāvakaraṇena upakkilesā.Mahikāti himaṃ.Dhūmo rajoti dhūmo ca rajo ca.Rāhūti purimā tayo asampattaupakkilesā, rāhu pana sampattaupakkilesavasena kathitoti veditabbo.Samaṇabrāhmaṇā na tapanti na bhāsanti na virocantīti guṇappatāpena na tapanti, guṇobhāsena na bhāsanti, guṇavirocanena na virocanti.Surāmerayapānā appaṭiviratāti pañcavidhāya surāya catubbidhassa merayassa ca pānato aviratā.

50. In the tenth, upakkilesāti: defilements, so called because they cause a state of being defiled by not giving room to shine forth. Mahikāti: frost. Dhūmo rajoti: smoke and dust. Rāhūti: the first three are defilements of non-attainment, but Rāhu should be understood as being spoken of in terms of defilements of attainment. Samaṇabrāhmaṇā na tapanti na bhāsanti na virocantīti: they do not shine with the power of qualities, they do not speak with the light of qualities, they do not radiate with the radiance of qualities. Surāmerayapānā appaṭiviratāti: not abstaining from drinking the five kinds of surā and the four kinds of meraya.

Avijjānivutāti avijjāya nivāritā pihitā.Piyarūpābhinandinoti piyarūpaṃ sātarūpaṃ abhinandamānā tussamānā.Sādiyantīti gaṇhanti.Aviddasūti andhabālā.Sanettikāti taṇhāyotteneva sayottā.Kaṭasinti attabhāvaṃ.Ghoranti kakkhaḷaṃ. Imasmiṃ suttepi gāthāsupi vaṭṭameva kathitanti.

Avijjānivutāti: covered and obstructed by ignorance. Piyarūpābhinandinoti: delighting and enjoying the pleasant form, the agreeable form. Sādiyantīti: they accept. Aviddasūti: blind fools. Sanettikāti: with craving as their guide, connected to a guide. Kaṭasinti: the self. Ghoranti: harsh. In this sutta too, only the round of existence is spoken of in the verses.

2. Dutiyapaṇṇāsakaṃ

2. Dutiyapaṇṇāsakaṃ

(6) 1. Puññābhisandavaggo

(6) 1. Puññābhisandavaggo

1. Paṭhamapuññābhisandasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Paṭhamapuññābhisandasuttavaṇṇanā

51.Dutiyassa paṭhamepuññābhisandāti puññassa abhisandā, puññappattiyoti attho.Kusalābhisandāti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Te panete sukhaṃ āharantītisukhassāhārā. Suṭṭhu aggānaṃ rūpādīnaṃ dāyakātisovaggikā. Sukho nesaṃ vipākotisukhavipākā. Sagge upapatti saggo, saggāya saṃvattantītisaggasaṃvattanikā. Cīvaraṃ paribhuñjamānoti cīvaratthāya vatthaṃ labhitvā sūcisuttādīnaṃ abhāvena taṃ nikkhipantopi karontopi pārupantopi jiṇṇakāle paccattharaṇaṃ karontopi paccattharitumpi asakkuṇeyyaṃ bhūmattharaṇaṃ karontopi bhūmattharaṇassa ananucchavikaṃ phāletvā pādapuñchanaṃ karontopi ‘‘paribhuñjamāno’’tveva vuccati. Yadā pana ‘‘pādapuñchanampi na sakkā ida’’nti sammajjitvā chaḍḍitaṃ hoti, tadā paribhuñjamāno nāma na hoti.Appamāṇaṃ cetosamādhinti arahattaphalasamādhiṃ.Appamāṇo tassa puññābhisandoti iminā dāyakassa puññacetanāya appamāṇataṃ katheti. Tassa hi ‘‘khīṇāsavo me cīvaraṃ paribhuñjatī’’ti punappunaṃ anussaraṇavasena pavattā puññacetanā appamāṇā hoti. Taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.Piṇḍapātādīsu pana yo piṇḍapātaṃ paribhuñjitvā sattāhampi teneva yāpeti, aññaṃ na paribhuñjati, so sattāhampi taṃyeva piṇḍapātaṃ paribhuñjamāno nāma hoti. Ekasmiṃ pana senāsane rattiṭṭhānadivāṭṭhānādīsu caṅkamantopi yāva taṃ senāsanaṃ pahāya aññaṃ na gaṇhāti, tāva paribhuñjamāno nāma hoti. Ekena pana bhesajjena byādhimhi vūpasante yāva aññaṃ bhesajjaṃ na paribhuñjati, tāvadeva paribhuñjamāno nāma hoti.

51. In the first of the second, puññābhisandāti: the influx of merit, meaning the attainment of merit. Kusalābhisandāti: a synonym for that same. However, these bring happiness, therefore sukhassāhārā. They give very excellent forms and so on, therefore sovaggikā. Happiness is their result, therefore sukhavipākā. Uprising in heaven is heaven, they lead to heaven, therefore saggasaṃvattanikā. Cīvaraṃ paribhuñjamānoti: having obtained cloth for the sake of a robe, even one who puts it away due to the lack of needle and thread, or who makes it, or wears it, or in old age makes it a ground-covering, or is unable to even spread it out, or makes it a floor covering, or tears the floor covering improperly and makes it a foot-wiper, is still called "making use of." But when it is swept and thrown away, thinking, "this cannot even be a foot-wiper," then he is not called "making use of." Appamāṇaṃ cetosamādhinti: the concentration of the fruition of Arahatship. Appamāṇo tassa puññābhisandoti: with this, he speaks of the immeasurableness of the meritorious intention of the giver. For the meritorious intention that arises again and again in him, thinking, "a khīṇāsava is using my robe," is immeasurable. This was said in reference to that. But among piṇḍapātā and so on, the one who lives for even a week having made use of almsfood, and does not make use of anything else, is called making use of that same almsfood for even a week. But while wandering in one dwelling place for night-stay, day-stay, and so on, as long as he does not leave that dwelling place and take another, he is called making use of it. But when a disease has subsided with one medicine, as long as he does not take another medicine, he is called making use of it.

Bahubheravanti bahūhi bheravārammaṇehi samannāgataṃ.Ratanavarānanti sattannampi vararatanānaṃ.Ālayanti nivāsaṭṭhānaṃ.Puthū savantīti bahukā hutvā sandamānā. Sesamettha uttānameva.

Bahubheravanti: endowed with many terrifying objects. Ratanavarānanti: even the seven excellent jewels. Ālayanti: a dwelling place. Puthū savantīti: flowing forth as many. The rest here is easy to understand.

2. Dutiyapuññābhisandasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Dutiyapuññābhisandasuttavaṇṇanā

52.Dutiyeariyakantehīti maggaphalasampayuttehi. Tāni hi ariyānaṃ kantāni honti piyāni manāpāni. Sesaṃ suttante tāva yaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā, taṃ visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.124 ādayo) vuttameva.

52. In the second, ariyakantehīti: connected to the paths and fruits. For those are dear, beloved, and pleasing to the noble ones. As for what should be said in the Suttanta, that has already been said in the Visuddhimagga (Visuddhi. 1.124 ff).

saddhāti sotāpannassa saddhā adhippetā. Sīlampi sotāpannassa sīlameva.Ujubhūtañca dassananti kāyavaṅkādīnaṃ abhāvena khīṇāsavassa dassanaṃ ujubhūtadassanaṃ nāma.Āhūti kathayanti.Pasādanti buddhadhammasaṅghesu pasādaṃ.Dhammadassananti catusaccadhammadassanaṃ.

saddhāti: here faith is intended, the faith of a sotāpanna. The morality is also the morality of a sotāpanna. Ujubhūtañca dassananti: the seeing of a khīṇāsava, free from bodily crookedness and so on, is called upright seeing. Āhūti: they say. Pasādanti: confidence in the Buddha, Dhamma, and Sangha. Dhammadassananti: the seeing of the four noble truths.

3. Paṭhamasaṃvāsasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Paṭhamasaṃvāsasuttavaṇṇanā

53.Tatiyesambahulāpi kho gahapatī ca gahapatāniyo cāti bahukā gahapatayo ca gahapatāniyo ca āvāhavivāhakaraṇatthāya gacchantā tameva maggaṃ paṭipannā honti.Saṃvāsāti sahavāsā ekatovāsā.Chavo chavāyāti guṇamaraṇena matattā chavo guṇamaraṇeneva matāya chavāya saddhiṃ.Deviyā saddhinti guṇehi devibhūtāya saddhiṃ.Dussīloti nissīlo.Pāpadhammoti lāmakadhammo.Akkosakaparibhāsakoti dasahi akkosavatthūhi akkosako, bhayaṃ dassetvā santajjanena paribhāsako. Evaṃ sabbattha attho veditabbo.

53. In the third, sambahulāpi kho gahapatī ca gahapatāniyo cāti: many householders and their wives who are going for the purpose of marriage and weddings are following that same road. Saṃvāsāti: cohabitations, living together. Chavo chavāyāti: a corpse with a corpse, due to being dead in qualities. Deviyā saddhinti: with one who is divine due to qualities. Dussīloti: without morality. Pāpadhammoti: of wicked nature. Akkosakaparibhāsakoti: one who scolds with the ten grounds for scolding, one who reviles by showing fear and threatening. The meaning should be understood everywhere in this way.

Kadariyāti thaddhamaccharino.Jānipatayoti jayampatikā.Vadaññūti yācakānaṃ vacanassa atthaṃ jānanti.Saññatāti sīlasaṃyamena samannāgatā.Dhammajīvinoti dhamme ṭhatvā jīvikaṃ kappentīti dhammajīvino.Atthāsaṃ pacurā hontīti vaḍḍhisaṅkhātā atthā etesaṃ bahū honti.Phāsukaṃ upajāyatīti aññamaññaṃ phāsuvihāro jāyati.Kāmakāminoti kāme kāmayamānā.

Kadariyāti: stingy and miserly. Jānipatayoti: husbands and wives. Vadaññūti: knowing the meaning of the words of beggars. Saññatāti: endowed with restraint in morality. Dhammajīvinoti: those who maintain their livelihood while standing in the Dhamma are dhammajīvino. Atthāsaṃ pacurā hontīti: their wealth, reckoned as increase, is abundant. Phāsukaṃ upajāyatīti: a comfortable dwelling arises for each other. Kāmakāminoti: desiring sensual pleasures.

4. Dutiyasaṃvāsasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Dutiyasaṃvāsasuttavaṇṇanā

54.Catutthe kammapathavasena desanā pavattitā. Sesaṃ tādisameva. Imesu pana dvīsupi suttesu agārikapaṭipadā kathitā. Sotāpannasakadāgāmīnampi vaṭṭati.

54. In the fourth, the teaching has proceeded in terms of the paths of action. The rest is just the same. But in these two suttas, the conduct of householders is spoken of. It is suitable for sotāpannas and sakadāgāmīs as well.

5-6. Samajīvīsuttadvayavaṇṇanā
5-6. Samajīvīsuttadvayavaṇṇanā

55-56.Pañcametenupasaṅkamīti kimatthaṃ upasaṅkami? Anuggaṇhanatthaṃ. Tathāgato hi taṃ raṭṭhaṃ pāpuṇanto imesaṃyeva dvinnaṃ saṅgaṇhanatthāya pāpuṇāti. Nakulapitā kira pañca jātisatāni tathāgatassa pitā ahosi, pañca jātisatāni mahāpitā, pañca jātisatāni cūḷapitā. Nakulamātāpi pañca jātisatāni tathāgatassa mātā ahosi, pañca jātisatāni mahāmātā, pañca jātisatāni cūḷamātā. Te satthu diṭṭhakālato paṭṭhāya puttasinehaṃ paṭilabhitvā ‘‘hantāta, hantātā’’ti vacchakaṃ disvā vacchagiddhinī gāvī viya viravamānā upasaṅkamitvā paṭhamadassaneneva sotāpannā jātā. Nivesane pañcasatānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ āsanāni sadā paññattāneva honti. Iti bhagavā tesaṃ anuggaṇhanatthāya upasaṅkami.Aticaritāti atikkamitā.Abhisamparāyañcāti paraloke ca.Samasaddhāti saddhāya samā ekasadisā.Sīlādīsupi eseva nayo. Chaṭṭhaṃ kevalaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ desitaṃ. Sesamettha tādisameva.

55-56. In the fifth, tenupasaṅkamīti: why did he approach? For the sake of favoring them. For the Tathagata reaches that country for the sake of favoring these two. It seems that Nakulapita was the father of the Tathagata for five hundred births, the grandfather for five hundred births, and the great-grandfather for five hundred births. Nakulamata was also the mother of the Tathagata for five hundred births, the grandmother for five hundred births, and the great-grandmother for five hundred births. From the time they saw the Teacher, having regained affection for him as a son, they approached, crying out, "come, son, come, son," like a cow greedy for her calf when seeing her calf, and became sotāpannas at the very first sight. In their dwelling, seats for five hundred monks are always prepared. Thus, the Blessed One approached for the sake of favoring them. Aticaritāti: transgressed. Abhisamparāyañcāti: and in the next world. Samasaddhāti: equal in faith, alike. The same method applies to sīlā and so on. The sixth was taught only to monks. The rest here is just the same.

7. Suppavāsāsuttavaṇṇanā
7. Suppavāsāsuttavaṇṇanā

57.Sattamepajjanikanti tassa nigamassa nāmaṃ.Koliyānanti kolarājakulānaṃ.Āyuṃ kho pana datvāti āyudānaṃ datvā.Āyussa bhāginī hotīti āyubhāgapaṭilābhinī hoti, āyuṃ vā bhajanikā hoti, āyuppaṭilābhinīti attho. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo.

57. In the seventh, pajjanikanti: the name of that town. Koliyānanti: of the Kolara race. Āyuṃ kho pana datvāti: having given a gift of life. Āyussa bhāginī hotīti: she becomes a partaker of the share of life, or she is a recipient of life, meaning she obtains life. The same method applies to the other terms as well.

Rasasā upetanti rasena upetaṃ rasasampannaṃ.Ujjugatesūti kāyavaṅkādirahitattā ujukameva gatesu khīṇāsavesu.Caraṇūpapannesūti pañcadasahi caraṇadhammehi samannāgatesu.Mahaggatesūti mahattaṃ gatesu. Khīṇāsavānaññevetaṃ nāmaṃ.Puññena puññaṃ saṃsandamānāti puññena saddhiṃ puññaṃ ghaṭayamānā.Mahapphalā lokavidūna vaṇṇitāti evarūpā dānasaṅkhātā dakkhiṇā tividhalokaṃ viditaṃ katvā ṭhitattā lokavidūnaṃ buddhānaṃ vaṇṇitā, buddhehi pasatthāti attho.Yaññamanussarantāti yaññaṃ dānaṃ anussarantā.Vedajātāti tuṭṭhijātā.

Rasasā upetanti: endowed with taste, full of flavor. Ujjugatesūti: in those who go straight, free from bodily crookedness and so on, in the khīṇāsavas. Caraṇūpapannesūti: in those endowed with the fifteen conduct qualities. Mahaggatesūti: in those who have attained greatness. This is another name for the khīṇāsavas. Puññena puññaṃ saṃsandamānāti: connecting merit with merit. Mahapphalā lokavidūna vaṇṇitāti: such a donation, reckoned as a gift, is praised by the Buddhas, the knowers of the world, because they have made known the threefold world, meaning it is commended by the Buddhas. Yaññamanussarantāti: remembering the sacrifice, the gift. Vedajātāti: born of joy.

8. Sudattasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Sudattasuttavaṇṇanā

58.Aṭṭhamesaññatānanti kāyavācāhi saṃyatānaṃ.Paradattabhojinanti parehi dinnameva bhuñjitvā yāpentānaṃ.Kālenāti yuttappattakālena.Sakkacca dadātīti sahatthā sakkāraṃ katvā dadāti.Cattāri ṭhānāni anuppavecchatīti cattāri kāraṇāni anuppaveseti dadāti.Yasavā hotīti mahāparivāro hoti. Navamaṃ kevalaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ kathitaṃ. Sesamettha tādisameva.

58. In the eighth, saññatānanti: for those restrained in body and speech. Paradattabhojinanti: for those who maintain themselves by eating only what is given by others. Kālenāti: at the appropriate time. Sakkacca dadātīti: he gives with his own hand, having made an offering. Cattāri ṭhānāni anuppavecchatīti: he gives, ushering in four reasons. Yasavā hotīti: he has a great retinue. The ninth was spoken only to monks. The rest here is just the same.

10. Gihisāmīcisuttavaṇṇanā
10. Gihisāmīcisuttavaṇṇanā

60.Dasamegihisāmīcipaṭipadanti gihīnaṃ anucchavikaṃ paṭipattiṃ.Paccupaṭṭhito hotīti atiharitvā dātukāmatāya patiupaṭṭhito hoti upagato, bhikkhusaṅghassa cīvaraṃ detīti attho.

60. In the tenth, gihisāmīcipaṭipadanti: conduct befitting householders. Paccupaṭṭhito hotīti: he is ready and comes near, wishing to give without delay, meaning he gives robes to the Sangha of monks.

Upaṭṭhitāti upaṭṭhāyako.Tesaṃ divā ca ratto cāti ye evaṃ catūhi paccayehi upaṭṭhahanti, tesaṃ divā ca rattiñca pariccāgavasena ca anussaraṇavasena ca sadā puññaṃ pavaḍḍhati.Saggañca kamatiṭṭhānanti tādiso ca bhaddakaṃ kammaṃ katvā saggaṭṭhānaṃ upagacchati. Imesu catūsupi suttesu āgāriyapaṭipadā kathitā. Sotāpannasakadāgāmīnampi vaṭṭati.

Upaṭṭhitāti: a supporter. Tesaṃ divā ca ratto cāti: for those who support in this way with the four requisites, merit always increases day and night by way of giving and by way of recollection. Saggañca kamatiṭṭhānanti: and such a one, having done good deeds, goes to a heavenly state. In these four suttas, the conduct of householders is spoken of. It is suitable for sotāpannas and sakadāgāmīs as well.

(7) 2. Pattakammavaggo

(7) 2. Pattakammavaggo

1. Pattakammasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Pattakammasuttavaṇṇanā

61.Dutiyassa paṭhame aniṭṭhapaṭikkhepenaiṭṭhā. Mane kamanti pavisantītikantā. Manaṃ appāyanti pavaḍḍhentītimanāpā. Dullabhāti paramadullabhā.Bhogāti bhuñjitabbā rūpādayo visayā.Sahadhammenāti dhammeneva saddhiṃ uppajjantu, mā dhammūpaghātaṃ katvā adhammenāti. Athavāsahadhammenāti sakāraṇena, tena tena senāpatiseṭṭhiṭṭhānādikāraṇena saddhiṃyeva uppajjantūti attho.Yasoti parivārasampatti.Sahañātībhīti ñātakehi saddhiṃ.Saha upajjhāyehīti sukhadukkhesu upanijjhāyitabbattā upajjhāyasaṅkhātehi sandiṭṭhasambhattehi saddhiṃ.

61. In the first of the second, iṭṭhā means desirable, by rejecting the undesirable. They enter the mind, therefore kantā. They please and increase the mind, therefore manāpā. Dullabhāti: very difficult to obtain. Bhogāti: enjoyments, objects such as forms to be enjoyed. Sahadhammenāti: may they arise only together with the Dhamma, not by harming the Dhamma and with what is unrighteous. Or else, sahadhammenāti: with a cause, may they arise only together with the cause of that-that general, treasurer, etc., is the meaning. Yasoti: the attainment of a retinue. Sahañātībhīti: together with relatives. Saha upajjhāyehīti: together with those known and intimate who are called preceptors, since they should be considered in happiness and suffering.

Akiccaṃ karotīti akātabbaṃ karoti.Kiccaṃ aparādhetīti kattabbayuttakaṃ kiccaṃ akaronto taṃ aparādheti nāma.Dhaṃsatīti patati parihāyati.Abhijjhāvisamalobhanti abhijjhāsaṅkhātaṃ visamalobhaṃ.Pajahatīti nudati nīharati.Mahāpaññoti mahantapañño.Puthupaññoti puthulapañño.Āpātadasoti taṃ taṃ atthaṃ āpāteti tameva passati, sukhumampissa atthajātaṃ āpātaṃ āgacchatiyevāti attho.

Akiccaṃ karotīti: he does what should not be done. Kiccaṃ aparādhetīti: while not doing the appropriate duty to be done, he fails in that. Dhaṃsatīti: he falls, declines. Abhijjhāvisamalobhanti: covetousness, which is uneven greed. Pajahatīti: he removes, expels. Mahāpaññoti: one with great wisdom. Puthupaññoti: one with wide wisdom. Āpātadasoti: he causes that-that meaning to appear, he sees only that, even a subtle matter comes into his view, is the meaning.

Uṭṭhānavīriyādhigatehīti uṭṭhānasaṅkhātena vīriyena adhigatehi.Bāhābalaparicitehīti bāhābalena paricitehi vaḍḍhitehi.Sedāvakkhittehīti avakkhittasedehi, sedaṃ muñcitvā vāyāmena payogena samadhigatehīti attho.Dhammikehīti dhammayuttehi.Dhammaladdhehīti dasakusalakammapathadhamme akopetvā laddhehi.Pattakammānīti yuttakammāni anucchavikakammāni.Sukhetīti sukhitaṃ karoti.Pīṇetīti pīṇitaṃ balasampannaṃ karoti.Ṭhānagataṃ hotīti kāraṇagataṃ hoti. Kiṃ pana tanti? Catūsu pattakammesu ekaṃ bhogehi kattabbakammaṃ bhogajātameva ṭhānagataṃ.Pattagatanti yuttappattaṭṭhānagataṃ.Āyatanaso paribhuttanti kāraṇeneva paribhuttaṃ bhogajātaṃ hoti.

Uṭṭhānavīriyādhigatehī means acquired through the energy characterized by exertion. Bāhābalaparicitehī means made familiar and increased through the strength of arms. Sedāvakkhittehī means having shed sweat, meaning acquired through effort and exertion, having released sweat. Dhammikehī means in accordance with Dhamma. Dhammaladdhehī means acquired without violating the ten paths of wholesome action. Pattakammānī means appropriate actions, suitable actions. Sukhetī means makes happy. Pīṇetī means makes satisfied, full of strength. Ṭhānagataṃ hotī means becomes a cause. But what is the cause? Among the four appropriate actions, the action to be done with wealth, only that which arises from wealth becomes a cause. Pattagata means becomes a cause in an appropriate situation. Āyatanaso paribhutta means becomes a wealth-related thing that is used for a reason.

Pariyodhāyasaṃvattatīti pidahitvā vattati. Yathā aggiādīhi uppannāsu āpadāsu, evaṃ ādittagehanibbāpanādīnaṃ atthāya dhanapariccāgaṃ katvā tāsaṃ āpadānaṃ maggaṃ pidahati nivāreti.Sotthiṃ attānaṃ karotīti nirupaddavaṃ khemaṃ attānaṃ karoti.Ñātibalinti ñātakānaṃ baliṃ.Atithibalinti āgantukānaṃ baliṃ.Pubbapetabalinti paralokagatānaṃ ñātakānaṃ baliṃ.Rājabalinti rañño kattabbayuttakaṃ rājabaliṃ.Devatābalinti devatānaṃ kattabbabaliṃ. Sabbametaṃ tesaṃ tesaṃ yathānucchavikavasena dātabbadānassa adhivacanaṃ.

Pariyodhāya saṃvattatī means it tends to cover over. As in the case of dangers arising from fire and the like, so too, by giving up wealth for the sake of extinguishing a burning house, one covers over, i.e., prevents the path of those dangers. Sotthiṃ attānaṃ karotī means makes oneself free from harm and safe. Ñātibali means offering to relatives. Atithibali means offering to guests. Pubbapetabali means offering to relatives who have passed away. Rājabali means the appropriate offering to be made to the king. Devatābali means offering to the deities. All this is a designation for the giving of alms to each of them according to what is fitting.

Khantisoracce niviṭṭhāti adhivāsanakkhantiyañca susīlatāya ca niviṭṭhā.Ekamattānaṃ damentīti ekaṃ attanova attabhāvaṃ indriyadamena damenti.Samentīti attano cittaṃ kilesavūpasamanena samenti.Parinibbāpentīti kilesaparinibbāneneva parinibbāpenti.Uddhaggikantiādīsu uparūparibhūmīsu phaladānavasena uddhamaggamassātiuddhaggikā. Saggassa hitāti tatrupapattijananatosovaggikā. Nibbattanibbattaṭṭhāne sukhova vipāko assātisukhavipākā. Suṭṭhu aggānaṃ dibbavaṇṇādīnaṃ dasannaṃ visesānaṃ nibbattanatosaggasaṃvattanikā,evarūpaṃ dakkhiṇaṃ patiṭṭhāpetīti attho.

Khantisoracce niviṭṭhā means established in forbearance that endures and in good morality. Ekamattānaṃ damentī means they tame only one self, one lifetime, through taming the senses. Samentī means they calm their own minds through the calming of defilements. Parinibbāpentī means they cause to be extinguished only through the extinction of defilements. Among Uddhaggika etc., because it gives fruit in the higher and higher planes, it is the path that goes upwards, therefore uddhaggikā. Because it is beneficial for heaven, it generates rebirth there, therefore sovaggikā. Because its result is happiness in the place of arising, it is sukhavipākā. Because it perfectly brings about the ten special qualities of the finest divine complexion etc., it is saggasaṃvattanikā, this means he establishes such a donation.

Ariyadhamme ṭhitoti pañcasīladhamme patiṭṭhito.Pecca sagge pamodatīti paralokaṃ gantvā yattha sagge paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhāti, tattha modati. Sotāpannasakadāgāmino vā hontu anāgāmī vā, sabbesaṃ ayaṃ paṭipadā labbhatevāti.

Ariyadhamme ṭhito means established in the Dhamma of the five precepts. Pecca sagge pamodatī means having gone to the next world, he rejoices in whatever heaven he takes rebirth in. Whether they are Stream-enterers, Once-returners, or Non-returners, this path is available to all.

2. Ānaṇyasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Ānaṇyasuttavaṇṇanā

62.Dutiyeadhigamanīyānīti pattabbāni.Kāmabhogināti vatthukāme ca kilesakāme ca paribhuñjantena.Atthisukhādīsu atthīti uppajjanakasukhaṃatthisukhaṃnāma. Bhoge paribhuñjantassa uppajjanakasukhaṃbhogasukhaṃnāma. Anaṇosmīti uppajjanakasukhaṃānaṇyasukhaṃnāma. Niddoso anavajjosmīti uppajjanakasukhaṃanavajjasukhaṃnāma.

62.In the second, adhigamanīyānī means attainable. Kāmabhoginā means one who enjoys sense pleasures and defilement-pleasures. Among atthisukhā etc., the happiness that arises from having is called atthisukhaṃ. The happiness that arises from enjoying wealth is called bhogasukhaṃ. The happiness that arises from being debt-free is called ānaṇyasukhaṃ. The happiness that arises from being blameless and faultless is called anavajjasukhaṃ.

Bhuñjanti bhuñjamāno.Paññā vipassatīti paññāya vipassati.Ubho bhāgeti dve koṭṭhāse, heṭṭhimāni tīṇi ekaṃ koṭṭhāsaṃ, anavajjasukhaṃ ekaṃ koṭṭhāsanti evaṃ paññāya passamāno dve koṭṭhāse jānātīti attho.Anavajjasukhassetanti etaṃ tividhampi sukhaṃ anavajjasukhassa soḷasiṃ kalaṃ nāgghatīti.

Bhuñja means while enjoying. Paññā vipassatī means discerns with wisdom. Ubho bhāge means two portions, the lower three are one portion, and anavajjasukha is one portion, thus discerning with wisdom, he knows two portions, this is the meaning. Anavajjasukhasseta means this threefold happiness is not worth even a sixteenth part of anavajjasukha.

3. Brahmasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Brahmasuttavaṇṇanā

63.Tatiyaṃ tikanipāte vaṇṇitameva.Sapubbadevatānīti padamattameva ettha visesoti. Catutthe sabbaṃ uttānatthameva.

63.The third has already been described in the Tika Nipāta. Sapubbadevatānī only this much of the word is special here. In the fourth, everything is of obvious meaning.

5. Rūpasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Rūpasuttavaṇṇanā

65.Pañcame rūpe pamāṇaṃ gahetvā pasannorūpappamāṇonāma.Rūpappasannoti tasseva atthavacanaṃ. Ghose pamāṇaṃ gahetvā pasannoghosappamāṇonāma. Cīvaralūkhapattalūkhesu pamāṇaṃ gahetvā pasannolūkhappamāṇonāma. Dhamme pamāṇaṃ gahetvā pasannodhammappamāṇonāma. Itarāni tesaṃyeva atthavacanāni. Sabbasatte ca tayo koṭṭhāse katvā dve koṭṭhāsā rūpappamāṇā, eko na rūpappamāṇo. Pañca koṭṭhāse katvā cattāro koṭṭhāsā ghosappamāṇā, eko na ghosappamāṇo. Dasa koṭṭhāse katvā nava koṭṭhāsā lūkhappamāṇā, eko na lūkhappamāṇo. Satasahassaṃ koṭṭhāse katvā pana eko koṭṭhāsova dhammappamāṇo, sesā na dhammappamāṇāti veditabbā.

65.In the fifth, one who is pleased by taking form as a measure is called rūpappamāṇo. Rūpappasanno is a statement of the same meaning. One who is pleased by taking sound as a measure is called ghosappamāṇo. One who is pleased by taking rough robes and rough bowls as a measure is called lūkhappamāṇo. One who is pleased by taking the Dhamma as a measure is called dhammappamāṇo. The others are statements of the same meaning. And having made all beings into three parts, two parts are those who take form as a measure, and one is not one who takes form as a measure. Having made five parts, four parts are those who take sound as a measure, and one is not one who takes sound as a measure. Having made ten parts, nine parts are those who take roughness as a measure, and one is not one who takes roughness as a measure. But having made a hundred thousand parts, only one part is one who takes the Dhamma as a measure, the rest are not those who take the Dhamma as a measure, this should be understood.

Rūpe pamāṇiṃsūti ye rūpaṃ disvā pasannā, te rūpe pamāṇiṃsu nāma, pasīdiṃsūti attho.Ghosena anvagūti ghosena anugatā, ghosappamāṇaṃ gahetvā pasannāti attho.Chandarāgavasūpetāti chandassa ca rāgassa ca vasaṃ upetā.Ajjhattañca na jānātīti niyakajjhatte tassa guṇaṃ na jānāti.Bahiddhā ca na passatīti bahiddhāpissa paṭipattiṃ na passati.Samantāvaraṇoti samantato āvārito, samantā vā āvaraṇamassāti samantāvaraṇo.Ghosena vuyhatīti ghosena niyati, na guṇena.Ajjhattañca na jānāti, bahiddhā ca vipassatīti niyakajjhatte guṇaṃ na jānāti, bahiddhā panassa paṭipattiṃ passati.Bahiddhā phaladassāvīti tassa parehi kataṃ bahiddhā sakkāraphalaṃ passanto.Vinīvaraṇadassāvīti vivaṭadassāvī.Na so ghosena vuyhatīti so ghosena na nīyati.

Rūpe pamāṇiṃsū means those who, having seen form, are pleased, are called those who take form as a measure, meaning they were pleased. Ghosena anvagū means followed after sound, meaning one who is pleased having taken sound as a measure. Chandarāgavasūpetā means subjected to the control of desire and lust. Ajjhattañca na jānātī means he does not know the qualities of his own self. Bahiddhā ca na passatī means he does not see his practice outwardly either. Samantāvaraṇo means surrounded on all sides, or he has a covering on all sides, therefore samantāvaraṇo. Ghosena vuyhatī means he is led by sound, not by quality. Ajjhattañca na jānāti, bahiddhā ca vipassatī means he does not know the qualities of his own self, but he sees his practice outwardly. Bahiddhā phaladassāvī means seeing the outward reward done by others for him. Vinīvaraṇadassāvī means seeing with an open view. Na so ghosena vuyhatī means he is not led by sound.

6. Sarāgasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Sarāgasuttavaṇṇanā

66.Chaṭṭhemohajaṃ cāpaviddasūti mohajaṃ cāpi aviddasū apaṇḍitā.Savighātanti sadukkhaṃ.Dukhudrayanti āyatiñca dukkhavaḍḍhidāyakaṃ.Acakkhukāti paññācakkhurahitā.Yathā dhammā tathā santāti yathā rāgādayo dhammā ṭhitā, tathā sabhāvāva hutvā.Na tassevanti maññareti mayaṃ evaṃsantā evaṃsabhāvāti tassa na maññare, na maññantīti attho. Imasmiṃ suttepi gāthāsupi vaṭṭameva kathitaṃ.

66.In the sixth, mohajaṃ cāpaviddasū means even those born of delusion are unskillful and unwise. Savighāta means with suffering. Dukhudraya means causing an increase of suffering in the future. Acakkhukā means lacking the eye of wisdom. Yathā dhammā tathā santā means just as the phenomena of lust etc. are established, they exist just as their own nature. Na tassevanti maññare means they do not think that "we are thus existing, thus natured," they do not think thus. In this sutta too, the round is spoken of in the verses.

7. Ahirājasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Ahirājasuttavaṇṇanā

67.Sattameimāni cattāri ahirājakulānīti idaṃ daṭṭhavisāneva sandhāya vuttaṃ. Ye hi keci daṭṭhavisā, sabbete imesaṃ catunnaṃ ahirājakulānaṃ abbhantaragatāva honti.Attaguttiyāti attano guttatthāya.Attarakkhāyāti attano rakkhaṇatthāya.Attaparittāyāti attano parittāṇatthāya. Parittaṃ nāma anujānāmīti attho.

67.In the seventh, imāni cattāri ahirājakulānī this is said referring only to those with visible fangs. For whatever snakes have visible fangs, all of them are included within these four families of snakes. Attaguttiyā means for the sake of one's own protection. Attarakkhāyā means for the sake of one's own defense. Attaparittāyā means for the sake of one's own safety. Paritta means I allow.

virūpakkhehi metiādimāha. Tatthavirūpakkhehīti virūpakkhanāgakulehi. Sesesupi eseva nayo.Apādakehīti apādakasattehi. Sesesupi eseva nayo.Sabbe sattāti ito pubbe ettakena ṭhānena odissakamettaṃ kathetvā idāni anodissakamettaṃ kathetuṃ idamāraddhaṃ. Tatthasattā pāṇā bhūtāti sabbānetāni puggalavevacanāneva.Bhadrāni passantūti bhadrāni ārammaṇāni passantu.Mā kañci pāpamāgamāti kañci sattaṃ pāpakaṃ lāmakaṃ mā āgacchatu.Appamāṇo buddhoti etthabuddhoti buddhaguṇā veditabbā. Te hi appamāṇā nāma. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo.Pamāṇavantānīti guṇappamāṇena yuttāni.Uṇṇanābhīti lomasanābhiko makkaṭako.Sarabūti gharagolikā.Katā me rakkhā, katā me parittāti mayā ettakassa janassa rakkhā ca parittāṇañca kataṃ.Paṭikkamantu bhūtānīti sabbepi me kataparittāṇā sattā apagacchantu, mā maṃ viheṭhayiṃsūti attho.

He said virūpakkhehi me etc. There, virūpakkhehi means by the Virūpakkha family of Nāgas. The same method applies to the rest. Apādakehī means by footless beings. The same method applies to the rest. Sabbe sattā having spoken of directed loving-kindness by this much, now beginning to speak of undirected loving-kindness, this is begun. There, sattā pāṇā bhūtā all these are merely synonyms for individuals. Bhadrāni passantū may they see auspicious objects. Mā kañci pāpamāgamā may no evil come to any being. Appamāṇo buddho here buddho the qualities of the Buddha should be understood. For these are called immeasurable. The same method applies to the other two words as well. Pamāṇavantānī endowed with a measure of qualities. Uṇṇanābhī a spider with a hairy navel. Sarabū a house lizard. Katā me rakkhā, katā me parittā I have done protection and safety for so many people. Paṭikkamantu bhūtānī may all beings who have been protected by me go away, may they not harm me, this is the meaning.

8. Devadattasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Devadattasuttavaṇṇanā

68.Aṭṭhameacirapakkante devadatteti saṅghaṃ bhinditvā nacirapakkante.Parābhavāyāti avaḍḍhiyā vināsāya.Assatarīti vaḷavāya kucchismiṃ gadrabhassa jātā.Attavadhāya gabbhaṃ gaṇhātīti taṃ assena saddhiṃ sampayojenti, sā gabbhaṃ gaṇhitvā kāle sampatte vijāyituṃ nasakkontī pādehi bhūmiṃ paharantī tiṭṭhati. Athassā cattāro pāde catūsu khāṇūsu bandhitvā kucchiṃ phāletvā potakaṃ nīharanti. Sā tattheva marati. Tenetaṃ vuttaṃ.

68.In the eighth, acirapakkante devadatte not long after Devadatta had departed after splitting the Sangha. Parābhavāyā for decline and destruction. Assatarī born of a donkey in the womb of a mare. Attavadhāya gabbhaṃ gaṇhātī when they mate her with a horse, she conceives, and when the time comes, she stands striking the ground with her feet, unable to give birth. Then, having tied her four feet to four stakes, they cut open her belly and take out the foal. She dies right there. Therefore, this was said.

9. Padhānasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Padhānasuttavaṇṇanā

69.Navame kilesānaṃ saṃvaratthāya pavesanadvāraṃ pidahanatthāya padhānaṃsaṃvarappadhānaṃ,pajahanatthāya padhānaṃpahānappadhānaṃ,kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ brūhanatthāya vaḍḍhanatthāya padhānaṃbhāvanāppadhānaṃ,tesaṃyeva anurakkhaṇatthāya padhānaṃanurakkhaṇāppadhānaṃ.

69.In the ninth, effort for the sake of restraining defilements, for the sake of closing the door of entry, is saṃvarappadhānaṃ, effort for the sake of abandoning is pahānappadhānaṃ, effort for the sake of developing and increasing wholesome qualities is bhāvanāppadhānaṃ, effort for the sake of maintaining those same qualities is anurakkhaṇāppadhānaṃ.

10. Adhammikasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Adhammikasuttavaṇṇanā

70.Dasameadhammikā hontīti porāṇakarājūhi ṭhapitaṃ dasabhāgabaliñceva aparādhānurūpañca daṇḍaṃ aggahetvā atirekabalino ceva atirekadaṇḍassa ca gahaṇena adhammikā.Rājāyuttāti rañño janapadesu kiccasaṃvidhāyakā āyuttakapurisā.Brāhmaṇagahapatikāti antonagaravāsino brāhmaṇagahapatayo.Negamajānapadāti nigamavāsino ceva janapadavāsino ca.Visamanti visamā hutvā, asamayena vāyantīti attho.Visamāti na samā, atithaddhā vā atimudukā vāti attho.Apañjasāti maggato apagatā, ummaggagāmino hutvā vāyantīti attho.Devatā parikupitā bhavantīti vātesu hi visamesu apañjasesu vāyantesu rukkhā bhijjanti, vimānāni bhijjanti. Tasmā devatā parikupitā bhavanti, tā devassa sammā vassituṃ na denti. Tena vuttaṃdevo na sammā dhāraṃ anuppavecchatīti.Visamapākāni sassāni bhavantīti ekasmiṃ ṭhāne gabbhīni honti, ekasmiṃ sañjātakhīrāni, ekaṃ ṭhānaṃ paccatīti evaṃ visamaṃ pākāni sassāni bhavanti.

70.In the tenth, adhammikā hontī they are unrighteous by not taking the ten-part tax established by the ancient kings and the punishment appropriate to the offense, but by taking excessive taxes and excessive punishments. Rājāyuttā the royal officials, the officers who manage affairs in the countryside. Brāhmaṇagahapatikā the Brahmin householders living in the inner city. Negamajānapadā those living in the towns and those living in the countryside. Visama being uneven, meaning they blow out of season. Visamā not even, either too stiff or too soft. Apañjasā gone from the path, meaning they blow going off the path. Devatā parikupitā bhavantī when the winds are uneven and blow off course, the trees break, the aerial mansions break. Therefore, the deities become angry, they do not allow the god to rain properly. Therefore, it was said, devo na sammā dhāraṃ anuppavecchatī the god does not properly send down a stream of rain. Visamapākāni sassāni bhavantī the crops ripen unevenly, in one place they are in the womb, in another they are producing milk, one place is ripening, thus the crops ripen unevenly.

Samaṃnakkhattāni tārakarūpāni parivattantīti yathā kattikapuṇṇamā kattikanakkhattameva labhati, migasirapuṇṇamā migasiranakkhattamevāti evaṃ tasmiṃ tasmiṃ māse sā sā puṇṇamā taṃ taṃ nakkhattameva labhati, tathā sammā parivattanti.Samaṃ vātā vāyantīti avisamā hutvā samayasmiṃyeva vāyanti, cha māse uttarā vātā, cha māsedakkhiṇāti evaṃ tesaṃ tesaṃ janapadānaṃ anurūpe samaye vāyanti.Samāti samappavattino nātithaddhā nātimudū.Pañjasāti maggappaṭipannā, maggeneva vāyanti, no amaggenāti attho.

Samaṃ nakkhattāni tārakarūpāni parivattantī just as the full moon in Kattika gets only the Kattika constellation, the full moon in Migasira gets only the Migasira constellation, thus in that month, that full moon gets only that constellation, thus they revolve properly. Samaṃ vātā vāyantī the winds blow evenly without being uneven, they blow at the right time, north winds for six months, south winds for six months, thus they blow at the appropriate time for those countries. Samā evenly flowing, neither too stiff nor too soft. Pañjasā following the path, meaning they blow only on the path, not off the path.

Jimhaṃgacchatīti kuṭilaṃ gacchati, atitthaṃ gaṇhāti.Nette jimhaṃ gate satīti nayatīti nettā. Tasmiṃ nette jimhaṃ gate kuṭilaṃ gantvā atitthaṃ gaṇhante itarāpi atitthameva gaṇhantīti attho. Netetipi pāṭho.Dukkhaṃ setīti dukkhaṃ sayati, dukkhitaṃ hotīti attho.

Jimhaṃ gacchatī goes crookedly, takes the wrong path. Nette jimhaṃ gate satī nettā because it leads. When that netta goes crookedly, takes the wrong path, then the others also take only the wrong path, this is the meaning. Neteti is also a reading. Dukkhaṃ setī lies down in suffering, is miserable, this is the meaning.

(8) 3. Apaṇṇakavaggo

(8) 3. Apaṇṇakavaggo

1. Padhānasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Padhānasuttavaṇṇanā

71.Tatiyavaggassa paṭhameapaṇṇakappaṭipadanti aviraddhappaṭipadaṃ.Yoni cassa āraddhā hotīti kāraṇañcassa paripuṇṇaṃ hoti.Āsavānaṃ khayāyāti arahattatthāya. Dutiyaṃ uttānameva.

71.In the first of the third vagga, apaṇṇakappaṭipada means a non-erroneous practice. Yoni cassa āraddhā hotī and his cause is complete. Āsavānaṃ khayāyā for the sake of Arahatship. The second is obvious in meaning.

3. Sappurisasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Sappurisasuttavaṇṇanā

73.Tatiyeavaṇṇoti aguṇo.Pātukarotīti katheti, pākaṭaṃ karoti.Pañhābhinītoti pañhatthāya abhinīto.Ahāpetvā alambitvāti aparihīnaṃ alambitaṃ katvā. Ettha ca asappuriso pāpicchatāya attano avaṇṇaṃ chādeti, sappuriso lajjitāya attano vaṇṇaṃ. Idāni yasmā asappuriso hirottapparahito saṃvāsena avajānāti, sappuriso pana hirottappasamannāgato saṃvāsenāpi nāvajānāti. Tasmā asappurisabhāvasādhakaṃ adhunāgatavadhukopammaṃ dassetuṃseyyathāpi, bhikkhave, vadhukātiādimāha. Tatthavadhukāti suṇisā.Tibbanti bahalaṃ. Sesamettha uttānatthamevāti.

73.In the third, avaṇṇo means without qualities. Pātu karotī means speaks, makes manifest. Pañhābhinīto directed towards a question. Ahāpetvā alambitvā having made it not diminished and supported. And here, the bad person, due to his desire for evil, conceals his faults, while the good person, due to shame, conceals his good qualities. Now, because the bad person, devoid of shame and fear of wrongdoing, despises through association, but the good person, endowed with shame and fear of wrongdoing, does not despise even through association. Therefore, in order to show the simile of the newly arrived bride, which establishes the nature of a bad person, he said seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, vadhukā etc. There, vadhukā means daughter-in-law. Tibba means thick. The rest here is obvious in meaning.

4-5. Aggasuttadvayavaṇṇanā
4-5. Aggasuttadvayavaṇṇanā

74-75.Catutthesīlagganti aggappattaṃ uttamasīlaṃ. Eseva nayo sabbattha. Pañcamerūpagganti yaṃ rūpaṃ sammasitvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti, idaṃ rūpaggaṃ nāma. Sesesupi eseva nayo.Bhavagganti ettha pana yasmiṃ attabhāve ṭhito arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti, etaṃ bhavaggaṃ nāmāti.

74-75.In the fourth, sīlagga means the foremost, the highest morality. The same method applies everywhere. In the fifth, rūpagga means the form having contemplated which one attains Arahatship, this is called rūpagga. The same method applies to the rest. Bhavagga here, however, in whichever existence one attains Arahatship, this is called bhavagga.

6. Kusinārasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Kusināra Sutta Commentary

76.Chaṭṭheupavattaneti pācīnagatāya sālapantiyā uttarena nivattitvā ṭhitāya vemajjhaṭṭhāne.Antarena yamakasālānanti dvinnaṃ sālarukkhānaṃ antare.Kaṅkhāti dveḷhakaṃ.Vimatīti vinicchituṃ asamatthatā. ‘‘Buddho nu kho na buddho nu kho, dhammo nu kho na dhammo nu kho, saṅgho nu kho na saṅgho nu kho, maggo nu kho na maggo nu kho, paṭipadā nu kho na paṭipadā nu kho’’ti yassa saṃsayo uppajjeyya, taṃ vo vadāmi pucchatha, bhikkhaveti ayamettha saṅkhepattho.Satthugāravenapi na puccheyyāthāti ‘‘mayaṃ satthu santike pabbajimha, cattāro paccayāpi no satthu santakāva. Te mayaṃ ettakaṃ kālaṃ kaṅkhaṃ akatvā na arahāma ajja pacchime kāle kaṅkhaṃ kātu’’nti sace evaṃ satthari gāravena na pucchatha.Sahāyakopi, bhikkhave, sahāyakassa ārocetūti tumhākaṃ yo yassa bhikkhussa sandiṭṭho sambhatto, so tassa ārocetu, ahaṃ ekassa bhikkhussa kathessāmi, tassa kathaṃ sutvā sabbe nikkaṅkhā bhavathāti dasseti.Evaṃ pasannoti evaṃ saddahāmi ahanti attho.Ñāṇamevāti nikkaṅkhabhāvapaccakkhakaraṇañāṇaṃyeva ettha tathāgatassa, na saddhāmattanti attho.Imesañhi, ānandāti imesaṃ antosāṇiyaṃ nisinnānaṃ pañcannaṃ bhikkhusatānaṃ.Yo pacchimakoti yo guṇavasena pacchimako, ānandattheraṃyeva sandhāyāha.

76. In the sixth, upavattane means in the middle space, having turned north from the row of Sāla trees that are going east and standing. Antarena yamakasālāna means between the two Sāla trees. Kaṅkhā means doubt. Vimatī means the inability to decide. "If doubt should arise in anyone, whether the Buddha is the Buddha or not, whether the Dhamma is the Dhamma or not, whether the Saṅgha is the Saṅgha or not, whether the path is the path or not, whether the practice is the practice or not," I tell you, ask, monks - this is the meaning here in brief. Satthugāravenapi na puccheyyāthā means, "We went forth in the presence of the Teacher, and the four requisites are also the Teacher’s. We are not worthy to create doubt, having not created doubt for so long; today, in the final hour, to create doubt?" If you do not ask out of respect for the Teacher. Sahāyakopi, bhikkhave, sahāyakassa ārocetū means, "Monks, let the one who is known and familiar to you tell his companion, I will speak to one monk, having heard his words, you all will be free from doubt," this he shows. Evaṃ pasanno means, "I have faith in this way," is the meaning. Ñāṇamevā means, here, only the knowledge that directly realizes the state of being without doubt is of the Tathāgata, not merely faith, is the meaning. Imesañhi, ānandā means of these five hundred monks sitting inside the awning. Yo pacchimako means the one who is last in terms of qualities, referring to Ānanda Thera.

7. Acinteyyasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Acinteyya Sutta Commentary

77.Sattameacinteyyānīti cintetuṃ ayuttāni.Na cintetabbānīti acinteyyattāyeva na cintetabbāni.Yāni cintentoti yāni kāraṇāni cintento.Ummādassāti ummattakabhāvassa.Vighātassāti dukkhassa.Buddhavisayoti buddhānaṃ visayo, sabbaññutaññāṇādīnaṃ buddhaguṇānaṃ pavatti ca ānubhāvo ca.Jhānavisayoti abhiññājhānavisayo.Kammavipākoti diṭṭhadhammavedanīyādīnaṃ kammānaṃ vipāko.Lokacintāti ‘‘kena nu kho candimasūriyā katā, kena mahāpathavī, kena mahāsamuddo, kena sattā uppāditā, kena pabbatā, kena ambatālanāḷikerādayo’’ti evarūpā lokacintā.

77. In the seventh, acinteyyānī means things unfit to be contemplated. Na cintetabbānī means they should not be contemplated because they are unthinkable. Yāni cintento means contemplating which causes. Ummādassā means to a state of madness. Vighātassā means to suffering. Buddhavisayo means the realm of the Buddhas, the activity and power of the qualities of the Buddhas, such as all-knowing wisdom. Jhānavisayo means the realm of the abhiññā jhāna. Kammavipāko means the result of actions, such as actions that are felt in this very life. Lokacintā means thinking about the world, such as, "By whom were the sun and moon made, by whom was the great earth made, by whom was the great ocean made, by whom were beings produced, by whom were the mountains, by whom were the mango, palm, and coconut trees?" Such thoughts about the world.

8. Dakkhiṇasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Dakkhiṇā Sutta Commentary

78.Aṭṭhamedakkhiṇāvisuddhiyoti dānasaṅkhātāya dakkhiṇāya visujjhanakāraṇāni.Dāyakato visujjhatīti mahapphalabhāvena visujjhati, mahapphalā hotīti attho.Kalyāṇadhammoti sucidhammo.Pāpadhammoti lāmakadhammo.Dāyakato visujjhatīti ettha vessantaramahārājā kathetabbo. So hi jūjakabrāhmaṇassa dārake datvā mahāpathaviṃ kampesi.Paṭiggāhakato visujjhatīti ettha kalyāṇīnadīmukhadvāravāsī kevaṭṭo kathetabbo. So kira dīghasumattherassa tikkhattuṃ piṇḍapātaṃ datvā maraṇamañce nipanno ‘‘ayyassa maṃ dīghasumattherassa dinnapiṇḍapāto uddharatī’’ti āha.Neva dāyakatoti ettha vaḍḍhamānavāsī luddako kathetabbo. So kira petadakkhiṇaṃ dento ekassa dussīlasseva tayo vāre adāsi. Tatiyavāre ‘‘amanusso dussīlo maṃ vilumpatī’’ti viravi. Ekassa sīlavato bhikkhuno datvā pāpitakāleyevassa pāpuṇi.Dāyakato ceva visujjhati paṭiggāhakato cāti ettha asadisadānaṃ kathetabbanti.

78. In the eighth, dakkhiṇāvisuddhiyo means the causes of purification for the offering called dakkhiṇā. Dāyakato visujjhatī means it becomes purified by being of great fruit, it becomes of great fruit, is the meaning. Kalyāṇadhammo means pure Dhamma. Pāpadhammo means base Dhamma. Dāyakato visujjhatī means here, Vessantara Mahārāja should be mentioned. Indeed, he made the great earth tremble after giving the children to the brahmin Jūjaka. Paṭiggāhakato visujjhatī means here, the fisherman living at the mouth of the Kalyāṇī River should be mentioned. It is said that after giving alms food to Dīghasuma Thera three times, he lay on his deathbed and said, "May the alms food given to Dīghasuma Thera raise me up." Neva dāyakato means here, the hunter living in Vaḍḍhamāna should be mentioned. It is said that while giving a donation to the dead, he gave it to a single immoral person three times. The third time, he cried out, "A non-human, immoral person is robbing me." After giving to a virtuous monk, it reached the recipient at the very moment. Dāyakato ceva visujjhati paṭiggāhakato cā means here, the unequalled donation should be mentioned.

9. Vaṇijjasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Vaṇijjā Sutta Commentary

79.Navametādisā vāti taṃsadisāva taṃsarikkhakāva.Chedagāminī hotīti chedaṃ gacchati. Yaṃ patthitaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ nassatīti attho.Na yathādhippāyā hotīti yathājjhāsayā na hoti.Parādhippāyā hotīti parajjhāsayā ajjhāsayato adhikataraphalā hoti.Samaṇaṃ vā brāhmaṇaṃ vāti ettha samitapāpabāhitapāpatāhi samaṇabrāhmaṇatā veditabbā.Vadatu, bhante, paccayenāti, bhante, catubbidhena cīvarādinā paccayena vadeyyāsīti evaṃ pavāreti nimanteti.Yena pavāretīti paricchinditvā yattakena pavāreti.Taṃ na detīti taṃ sabbasova na deti.Na yathādhippāyaṃ detīti yathā tassa ajjhāsayo, evaṃ dātuṃ na sakkoti, hāpetvā appakaṃ deti.Yathādhippāyaṃ detīti yattakaṃ so icchati, tattakameva deti.Parādhippāyaṃ detīti appakaṃ pavāretvā avattharitvā bahuṃ deti.

79. In the ninth, tādisā vā means just like that, just resembling that. Chedagāminī hotī means it goes to destruction. Whatever is desired, all of that is lost, is the meaning. Na yathādhippāyā hotī means it is not according to intention. Parādhippāyā hotī means it is more fruitful than intended, according to the intention of others. Samaṇaṃ vā brāhmaṇaṃ vā means here, samaṇahood and brahminhood should be understood by the subsiding of evil and the banishing of evil. Vadatu, bhante, paccayenā means, "Venerable sir, may you speak with the four kinds of requisites, such as robes," thus he invites. Yena pavāretī means having determined with how much he invites. Taṃ na detī means he does not give all of that. Na yathādhippāyaṃ detī means he is not able to give according to his intention, having reduced it, he gives a small amount. Yathādhippāyaṃ detī means he gives just as much as he intends. Parādhippāyaṃ detī means having invited with a small amount, without holding back, he gives a large amount.

10. Kambojasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Kamboja Sutta Commentary

80.Dasameneva sabhāyaṃ nisīdatīti vinicchayakaraṇatthaṃ vinicchayasabhāyaṃ neva nisīdati.Na kammantaṃ payojetīti kasivaṇijjādimahākammantaṃ nappayojeti.Na kambojaṃ gacchatīti bhoge sambharaṇatthāya kambojaraṭṭhaṃ na gacchati. Desanāmattameva cetaṃ, yaṃ kiñci tiroraṭṭhaṃ na gacchatīti attho.Kodhanotiādīsu kodhanatāya kodhapariyuṭṭhito atthānatthaṃ na jānāti, issukitāya parasampattiṃ na sahati, maccharitāya dhanaṃ datvā kiccaṃ kātuṃ na sakkoti, nippaññatāya kiccaṃ saṃvidhātuṃ na sakkoti. Tasmā etāni sabhānisīdanādīni na karotīti.

80. In the tenth, neva sabhāyaṃ nisīdatī means he does not sit in the assembly for making decisions, in the decision-making assembly. Na kammantaṃ payojetī means he does not undertake great tasks such as farming and trade. Na kambojaṃ gacchatī means he does not go to the Kamboja country to gather wealth. This is merely a statement, meaning he does not go to any foreign land. In kodhano etc., due to being angry, being overcome by anger, he does not know what is beneficial and not beneficial; due to envy, he does not tolerate the wealth of others; due to stinginess, he is not able to do what needs to be done by giving wealth; due to lack of wisdom, he is not able to arrange what needs to be done. Therefore, he does not do these things such as sitting in the assembly.

(9) 4. Macalavaggo

(9) 4. Macala Vagga

1-5. Pāṇātipātādisuttapañcakavaṇṇanā
1-5. Commentaries on the Five Suttas beginning with Pāṇātipātā

81-85.Catutthassa paṭhamādīni uttānatthāneva. Pañcame ‘‘nīce kule paccājāto’’tiādikena tamena yuttotitamo. Kāyaduccaritādīhi puna nirayatamūpagamanatotamaparāyaṇo. Iti ubhayenapi khandhatamova kathito hoti. ‘‘Aḍḍhe kule paccājāto’’tiādikena jotinā yuttatojoti,ālokabhūtoti vuttaṃ hoti. Kāyasucaritādīhi puna sagguppattijotibhāvūpagamanatojotiparāyaṇo. Iminā nayena itarepi dve veditabbā.

81-85. The first etc. of the fourth are straightforward in meaning. In the fifth, tamo means darkness, being endowed with darkness by "born in a low family" etc. Tamaparāyaṇo means tending to darkness, again, due to going to the realm of darkness by way of bodily misconduct etc. Thus, by both, only the darkness of the aggregates is spoken of. Joti means light, being endowed with light by "born in a wealthy family" etc., it is said to be light. Jotiparāyaṇo means tending to light, again, due to going to the state of light by way of bodily good conduct etc. In this way, the other two should also be understood.

Venakuleti vilīvakārakule.Nesādakuleti migaluddakādīnaṃ kule.Rathakārakuleti cammakārakule.Pukkusakuleti pupphachaḍḍakakule.Kasiravuttiketi dukkhavuttike.Dubbaṇṇoti paṃsupisācako viya jhāmakhāṇuvaṇṇo.Duddasikoti vijātamātuyāpi amanāpadassano.Okoṭimakoti lakuṇḍako.Kāṇoti ekacchikāṇo vā ubhayacchikāṇo vā.Kuṇīti ekahatthakuṇī vā ubhayahatthakuṇī vā.Khañjoti ekapādakhañjo vā ubhayapādakhañjo vā.Pakkhahatoti hatapakkho pīṭhasappī.Padīpeyyassāti telakapallādino dīpaupakaraṇassa.Evaṃ kho, bhikkhaveti ettha eko puggalo bahiddhā ālokaṃ adisvā mātu kucchimhiyeva kālaṃ katvā apāyesu nibbattanto sakalampi kappaṃ saṃsarati. Sopi tamotamaparāyaṇova. So pana kuhakapuggalo bhaveyya. Kuhakassa hi evarūpā nipphatti hotīti vuttaṃ.

Venakule means in the family of weavers. Nesādakule means in the family of hunters of deer etc. Rathakārakule means in the family of leather workers. Pukkusakule means in the family of flower sweepers. Kasiravuttike means with a miserable livelihood. Dubbaṇṇo means of unsightly complexion, like a goblin covered in dust, with the color of a charred stump. Duddasiko means unpleasant to look at even by his own mother. Okoṭimako means a hunchback. Kāṇo means blind in one eye or blind in both eyes. Kuṇī means crippled in one hand or crippled in both hands. Khañjo means lame in one foot or lame in both feet. Pakkhahato means with broken wings, a flat cake. Padīpeyyassā means for the lamp accessory, such as oil and wick. Evaṃ kho, bhikkhave means here, one person, not seeing the light outside, only having made time in the mother’s womb, being reborn in the lower realms, wanders for an entire kappa. He too is only tending to darkness. However, he might be a deceitful person. For such an outcome belongs to a deceitful person, it is said.

Ettha ca ‘‘nīce kule’’tiādīhi āgamanavipatti ceva paccuppannapaccayavipatti ca dassitā. ‘‘Dalidde’’tiādīhi pavattapaccayavipatti, ‘‘kasiravuttike’’tiādīhi ājīvupāyavipatti, ‘‘dubbaṇṇo’’tiādīhi attabhāvavipatti, ‘‘bahvābādho’’tiādīhi dukkhakāraṇasamāyogo, ‘‘na lābhī’’tiādīhi sukhakāraṇavipatti ceva upabhogavipatti ca, ‘‘kāyena duccarita’’ntiādīhi tamaparāyaṇabhāvassa kāraṇasamāyogo, ‘‘kāyassa bhedā’’tiādīhi samparāyikatamūpagamo. Sukkapakkho vuttapaṭipakkhanayena veditabbo.

And here, by "in a low family" etc., both the calamity of arrival and the calamity of present conditions are shown. By "poor" etc., the calamity of continuing conditions; by "miserable livelihood" etc., the calamity of livelihood; by "unsightly complexion" etc., the calamity of the self; by "much sickness" etc., the association with the cause of suffering; by "not a gainer" etc., both the calamity of the cause of happiness and the calamity of enjoyment; by "bodily misconduct" etc., the association with the cause of tending to darkness; by "at the breaking up of the body" etc., going to the realm of darkness in the next life. The bright side should be understood in the opposite way as stated.

6. Oṇatoṇatasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Oṇatoṇata Sutta Commentary

86.Chaṭṭheoṇatoṇatoti idāni nīcako āyatimpi nīcako bhavissati.Oṇatuṇṇatoti idāni nīco āyatiṃ ucco bhavissati.Uṇṇatoṇatoti idāni ucco āyatiṃ nīco bhavissati.Uṇṇatuṇṇatoti idāni ucco āyatimpi ucco bhavissati. Vitthāro pana nesaṃ purimasuttanayeneva veditabbo.

86. In the sixth, oṇatoṇato means now he is low, and in the future he will be low. Oṇatuṇṇato means now he is low, and in the future he will be high. Uṇṇatoṇato means now he is high, and in the future he will be low. Uṇṇatuṇṇato means now he is high, and in the future he will be high. However, their expanse should be understood in the same way as in the previous sutta.

7. Puttasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Putta Sutta Commentary

87.Sattamesamaṇamacaloti samaṇaacalo, makāro padasandhikaro, niccalasamaṇoti attho. Iminā sattavidhampi sekhaṃ dasseti. So hi sāsane mūlajātāya saddhāya patiṭṭhitattā acalo nāma.Samaṇapuṇḍarīkoti puṇḍarīkasadiso samaṇo. Puṇḍarīkaṃ nāma ūnasatapattaṃ saroruhaṃ. Iminā sukkhavipassakakhīṇāsavaṃ dasseti. So hi jhānābhiññānaṃ abhāvena aparipuṇṇaguṇattā samaṇapuṇḍarīko nāma hoti.Samaṇapadumoti padumasadiso samaṇo. Padumaṃ nāma paripuṇṇasatapattaṃ saroruhaṃ. Iminā ubhatobhāgavimuttaṃ khīṇāsavaṃ dasseti. So hi jhānābhiññānaṃ bhāvena paripuṇṇaguṇattā samaṇapadumo nāma hoti.Samaṇesu samaṇasukhumāloti sabbesupi etesu samaṇesu sukhumālasamaṇo muducittasarīro kāyikacetasikadukkharahito ekantasukhī. Etena attānañceva attasadise ca dasseti.

87. In the seventh, samaṇamacalo means samaṇa acala, the "ma" is a euphonic addition, meaning an unmoving samaṇa. By this, he shows the seven kinds of learners (sekha). Indeed, he is called unmoving because he is established in faith, the root nature, in the Dispensation. Samaṇapuṇḍarīko means a samaṇa like a puṇḍarīka. Puṇḍarīka is the name for a lotus with fewer than one hundred petals. By this, he shows the dry-insight arahant (sukkhavipassaka khīṇāsava). Indeed, he is called a puṇḍarīka samaṇa because of the lack of jhāna and abhiññā, being of incomplete qualities. Samaṇapadumo means a samaṇa like a paduma. Paduma is the name for a lotus with a complete one hundred petals. By this, he shows the arahant freed in both ways (ubhatobhāgavimutta khīṇāsava). Indeed, he is called a paduma samaṇa because of the presence of jhāna and abhiññā, being of complete qualities. Samaṇesu samaṇasukhumālo means among all these samaṇas, the sukhumāla samaṇa is one with a tender mind and body, without physical and mental suffering, one who is exclusively happy. By this, he shows himself and one like himself.

kathañca, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tatthasekhoti sattavidhopi sekho.Pāṭipadoti paṭipannako.Anuttaraṃ yogakkhemaṃ patthayamāno viharatīti arahattaṃ patthayanto viharati.Muddhāvasittassāti muddhani avasittassa, katābhisekassāti attho.Ābhisekoti abhisekaṃ kātuṃ yutto.Anabhisittoti na tāva abhisitto.Macalappattoti rañño khattiyassa muddhāvasittassa puttabhāvena ceva puttesu jeṭṭhakabhāvena ca na tāva abhisittabhāvena ca abhisekappattiatthāya acalappatto niccalapatto. Makāro nipātamattaṃ.Kāyena phusitvāti nāmakāyena phusitvā.

Kathañca, bhikkhave etc., he says. There, sekho means even the seven kinds of learners (sekha). Pāṭipado means one who has entered the path. Anuttaraṃ yogakkhemaṃ patthayamāno viharatī means he dwells desiring arahantship. Muddhāvasittassā means one sprinkled on the head, meaning one consecrated. Ābhiseko means fit to be consecrated. Anabhisitto means not yet consecrated. Macalappatto means for the king, the khattiya sprinkled on the head, by way of being a son and by way of being the eldest among the sons, and by way of not yet being consecrated, for the sake of being fit for consecration, he has attained the unmoving, he has attained the unmoving state. The "ma" is merely a particle. Kāyena phusitvā means having touched with the name-body.

Yācitova bahulaṃ cīvaraṃ paribhuñjatīti ‘‘idaṃ, bhante, paribhuñjathā’’ti evaṃ dāyakehi yācamāneheva upanītaṃ cīvaraṃ bahuṃ paribhuñjati, kiñcideva ayācitaṃ, bākulatthero viya. Piṇḍapātaṃ khadiravanamagge sīvalitthero viya. Senāsanaṃ aṭṭhakanāgarasutte (ma. ni. 2.17 ādayo; a. ni. 11.16 ādayo) ānandatthero viya. Gilānapaccayaṃ pilindavacchathero viya.Tyassāti te assa.Manāpenevāti manaṃ allīyanakena.Samudācarantīti kattabbakiccāni karonti pavattanti vā.Upahāraṃ upaharantīti kāyikacetasikaupahāraṃ upaharanti upanīyanti.Sannipātikānīti tiṇṇampi sannipātena nibbattāni.Utupariṇāmajānīti utupariṇāmato atisītaatiuṇhaututo jātāni.Visamaparihārajānīti accāsanaatiṭṭhānādikā visamaparihārato jātāni.Opakkamikānīti vadhabandhanādiupakkamena nibbattāni.Kammavipākajānīti vināpi imehi kāraṇehi kevalaṃ pubbe katakammavipākavaseneva jātāni.Catunnaṃ jhānānanti ettha khīṇāsavānampi buddhānampi kiriyajjhānāneva adhippetāni. Sesaṃ uttānatthamevāti.

Yācitova bahulaṃ cīvaraṃ paribhuñjatī means, like Bākula Thera, he often makes use of robes brought forth by donors who ask "Venerable sir, please make use of this," only rarely making use of what is not asked for. Like Sīvali Thera for alms food on the Khadiravana path. Like Ānanda Thera for lodging in the Aṭṭhaka Nāgara Sutta (M.N.ii.17 ff; A.N.xi.16 ff). Like Pilindavaccha Thera for medicine. Tyassā means to them. Manāpenevā means only with what is pleasing. Samudācarantī means they perform or maintain the tasks to be done. Upahāraṃ upaharantī means they offer, bring near, bodily and mental offerings. Sannipātikānī means those born of a combination of the three (bile, phlegm, wind). Utupariṇāmajānī means those born of the transformation of the seasons, from excessively cold or excessively hot seasons. Visamaparihārajānī means those born of improper behavior, such as overeating or standing too long. Opakkamikānī means those born of assaults, such as killing or imprisonment. Kammavipākajānī means those born of only the result of past actions, even without these causes. Catunnaṃ jhānāna means here, only the functional jhāna (kiriyajjhāna) of the arahants and Buddhas are intended. The rest is straightforward in meaning.

8. Saṃyojanasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Saṃyojana Sutta Commentary

88.Aṭṭhame sāsane laddhappatiṭṭhattā sotāpannovasamaṇamacaloti vutto, nātibahuguṇattā na bahupattaṃ viya saroruhaṃ sakadāgāmīsamaṇapuṇḍarīkoti, tato bahutaraguṇattā satapattaṃ viya saroruhaṃ anāgāmīsamaṇapadumoti, thaddhabhāvakarānaṃ kilesānaṃ sabbaso samucchinnattā mudubhāvappatto khīṇāsavosamaṇasukhumāloti.

88. In the eighth, because he has gained establishment in the Dispensation, the stream-enterer (sotāpanna) is said to be samaṇamacalo; because he does not have very many qualities, the once-returner (sakadāgāmī) is samaṇapuṇḍarīko, like a lotus that does not have many petals; because he has many more qualities than that, the non-returner (anāgāmī) is samaṇapadumo, like a lotus with a hundred petals; because the kilesas that cause stubbornness have been completely eradicated, the arahant, having attained tenderness, is samaṇasukhumālo.

9. Sammādiṭṭhisuttavaṇṇanā
9. Sammādiṭṭhi Sutta Commentary

89.Navamesammādiṭṭhikotiādīhi aṭṭhaṅgikamaggavasena paṭhamasutte viya satta sekhā gahitā. Dutiyavāre dasaṅgikamaggavasena vā arahattaphalañāṇaarahattaphalavimuttīhi saddhiṃ, aṭṭhaṅgikamaggavasena vā sukkhavipassakakhīṇāsavo kathito, tatiyavāre ubhatobhāgavimutto, catutthavāre tathāgato ca tathāgatasadisakhīṇāsavo cāti. Iti idaṃ suttaṃ paṭhamasutte kathitapuggalānaṃ vaseneva kathitaṃ, desanāmattameva panettha nānanti.

89. In the ninth, by sammādiṭṭhiko etc., the seven learners (sekha) are grasped according to the eightfold path, as in the first sutta. In the second instance, with the tenfold path, or together with the knowledge of the fruit of arahantship and the freedom of the fruit of arahantship, according to the eightfold path, the dry-insight arahant (sukkhavipassaka khīṇāsava) is spoken of; in the third instance, the arahant freed in both ways (ubhatobhāgavimutta); in the fourth instance, the Tathāgata and the arahant like the Tathāgata. Thus, this sutta is spoken of only with reference to the persons spoken of in the first sutta, only the statement is different here.

10. Khandhasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Khandha Sutta Commentary

90.Dasame paṭhamavāre arahattatthāya payogaṃ anārabhitvā ṭhito pamādavihārī sekhapuggalo kathito. Dutiyavāre anuppāditajjhāno āraddhavipassako appamādavihārī sekhapuggalo kathito. Tatiyavāre āraddhavipassako appamādavihārī aṭṭhavimokkhalābhī sekhapuggalo kathito, catutthavāre paramasukhumālakhīṇāsavoti.

90. In the tenth, in the first instance, a learner (sekha) who is living heedlessly, who has not started applying effort for arahantship, is spoken of. In the second instance, a learner (sekha) who has not developed jhāna but has started insight and is living heedfully is spoken of. In the third instance, a learner (sekha) who has started insight and is living heedfully and has attained the eight deliverances (aṭṭhavimokkha) is spoken of; in the fourth instance, the most refined arahant is spoken of.

(10) 5. Asuravaggo

(10) 5. Asura Vagga

1. Asurasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Asura Sutta Commentary

91.Pañcamassa paṭhameasuroti asurasadiso bībhaccho.Devoti devasadiso guṇavasena abhirūpo pāsādiko.

91. In the first of the fifth, asuro means like an asura, disgusting. Devo means like a deva, beautiful and pleasing in terms of qualities.

2. Paṭhamasamādhisuttavaṇṇanā
2. Paṭhama Samādhi Sutta Commentary

92.Dutiyeajjhattaṃ cetosamathassāti niyakajjhatte appanācittasamādhissa.Adhipaññādhammavipassanāyāti saṅkhārapariggāhakavipassanāñāṇassa. Tañhi adhipaññāsaṅkhātañca, pañcakkhandhasaṅkhātesu ca dhammesu vipassanābhūtaṃ, tasmā ‘‘adhipaññādhammavipassanā’’ti vuccatīti.

92. In the second, ajjhattaṃ cetosamathassā means concentration of mind's quiescence within oneself, in one's own self. Adhipaññādhammavipassanāyā means the insight knowledge that discerns conditioned phenomena. For that is called higher wisdom, and it is insight into the phenomena that constitute the five aggregates; therefore, it is called "adhipaññādhammavipassanā".

3. Dutiyasamādhisuttavaṇṇanā
3. Commentary on the Second Samādhi Sutta

93.Tatiyeyogo karaṇīyoti yuttappayuttatā kattabbā.Chandoti kattukamyatāchando.Vāyāmoti payogo.Ussāhoti tato adhimattataraṃ vīriyaṃ.Ussoḷhīti paṅkalaggasakaṭauddharaṇasadisaṃ mahāvīriyaṃ.Appaṭivānīti anivattanatā.

93. In the third, yogo karaṇīyo means effort should be made, application should be done. Chando means desire to do. Vāyāmo means exertion. Ussāho means energy that is even more intense than that. Ussoḷhī means great energy, like lifting a cart stuck in the mud. Appaṭivānī means non-retreating.

4. Tatiyasamādhisuttavaṇṇanā
4. Commentary on the Third Samādhi Sutta

94.Catuttheevaṃ kho, āvuso, saṅkhārā daṭṭhabbātiādīsu, āvuso, saṅkhārā nāma aniccato daṭṭhabbā, aniccato sammasitabbā, aniccato passitabbā. Tathā dukkhato, anattatoti evaṃ attho daṭṭhabbo.Evaṃ kho, āvuso, cittaṃ saṇṭhapetabbantiādīsupi paṭhamajjhānavasena, āvuso, cittaṃ saṇṭhapetabbaṃ paṭhamajjhānavasena sannisādetabbaṃ, paṭhamajjhānavasena ekodi kātabbaṃ, paṭhamajjhānavasena samādahitabbaṃ. Tathā dutiyajjhānādivasenāti evaṃ attho daṭṭhabbo. Imesu tīsupi suttesu samathavipassanā lokiyalokuttarāva kathitā.

94. In the fourth, in evaṃ kho, āvuso, saṅkhārā daṭṭhabbā etc., the meaning should be seen thus: "Friend, conditioned phenomena should be seen as impermanent, should be contemplated as impermanent, should be viewed as impermanent." Similarly, with suffering, with non-self, thus the meaning should be seen. In evaṃ kho, āvuso, cittaṃ saṇṭhapetabba etc., the meaning should be seen thus: "Friend, the mind should be established with the first jhāna, the mind should be settled with the first jhāna, the mind should be made unified with the first jhāna, the mind should be concentrated with the first jhāna." Similarly, with the second jhāna and so on. In these three suttas, both samatha and vipassanā, mundane and supramundane, are spoken of.

5. Chavālātasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Commentary on the Chavālāta Sutta

95.Pañcamechavālātanti susāne alātaṃ.Majjhegūthagatanti majjhaṭṭhāne gūthamakkhitaṃ.Neva gāme kaṭṭhatthaṃ pharatīti kūṭagopānasithambhasopānādīnaṃ atthāya anupaneyyatāya gāme na kaṭṭhatthaṃ sādheti, khettakuṭipādaṃ vā mañcapādaṃ vā kātuṃ anupaneyyatāya na araññe kaṭṭhatthaṃ sādheti. Dvīsu koṭīsu gayhamānaṃ hatthaṃ ḍahati, majjhe gayhamānaṃ gūthena makkheti.Tathūpamanti taṃsarikkhakaṃ.Abhikkantataroti sundarataro.Paṇītataroti uttamataro.Gavā khīranti gāvito khīraṃ.Khīramhā dadhītiādīsu paraṃ paraṃ purimato purimato aggaṃ, sappimaṇḍo pana tesu sabbesupi aggameva.Aggotiādīsu guṇehi aggo ceva seṭṭho ca pamukho ca uttamo ca pavaro cāti veditabbo. Chavālātūpamāya na dussīlo puggalo kathito, appassuto pana vissaṭṭhakammanto goṇasadiso puggalo kathitoti veditabbo. Chaṭṭhe sabbaṃ uttānatthameva.

95. In the fifth, chavālāta means a torch in a charnel ground. Majjhe gūthagata means smeared with excrement in the middle. Neva gāme kaṭṭhatthaṃ pharatī means, because it cannot be used for things like beams, rafters, pillars or stairs, it does not serve for firewood purposes in the village; because it cannot be used to make a field hut leg or a couch leg, it does not serve for firewood purposes in the forest. If grasped at either end, it burns the hand; if grasped in the middle, it smears with excrement. Tathūpama means similar to that. Abhikkantataro means more beautiful. Paṇītataro means more excellent. Gavā khīra means milk from a cow. In khīramhā dadhī etc., each successive one is superior to the preceding one, but the cream of ghee is the most superior of all. In aggo etc., it should be understood that agga means foremost in qualities, as well as best, chief, excellent, and distinguished. By the simile of the charnel ground torch, a person of bad morality is described; but it should be understood that an unlearned person, whose actions are disordered, like an ox, is described.

7. Khippanisantisuttavaṇṇanā
7. Commentary on the Khippanisanti Sutta

97.Sattamekhippanisantīti khippanisāmano sīghaṃ jānituṃ samattho.Sutānañca dhammānanti sutappaguṇānaṃ tantidhammānaṃ.Atthūpaparikkhīti atthaṃ upaparikkhako.Atthamaññāya dhammamaññāyāti aṭṭhakathañca pāḷiñca jānitvā.Dhammānudhammappaṭipanno hotīti navalokuttaradhammānaṃ anurūpadhammabhūtaṃ sasīlakaṃ pubbabhāgappaṭipadaṃ paṭipanno hoti.No ca kalyāṇavācoti na sundaravacano.Na kalyāṇavākkaraṇoti na sundaravacanaghoso hoti.Poriyātiādīhi saddhiṃ no-kāro yojetabboyeva. Guṇaparipuṇṇāya apalibuddhāya adosāya agaḷitapadabyañjanāya atthaṃ viññāpetuṃ samatthāya vācāya samannāgato na hotīti attho. Iminā upāyena sabbattha attho veditabbo.

97. In the seventh, khippanisantī means one who is quick to investigate, able to quickly understand. Sutānañca dhammāna means the textual teachings that have been heard and are well-recited. Atthūpaparikkhī means one who investigates the meaning. Atthamaññāya dhammamaññāyā means having understood both the commentary and the Pali. Dhammānudhammappaṭipanno hotī means he practices the preliminary practice, endowed with morality, that is in accordance with the nine supramundane dhammas. No ca kalyāṇavāco means not having beautiful speech. Na kalyāṇavākkaraṇo means not having a beautiful voice. The no- should be connected with poriyā etc. He is not endowed with speech that is complete in qualities, not stammering, without faults, with undistorted words and phrases, and able to make the meaning clear. In this way, the meaning should be understood everywhere.

8. Attahitasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Commentary on the Attahita Sutta

98-99.Aṭṭhamaṃ puggalajjhāsayavasenāpi dasabalassa desanāñāṇavilāsenāpi kathitaṃ, navamaṃ pañcaveravasena.

98-99. The eighth was spoken according to the inclinations of individuals and also by the power of the Ten-Powered One's knowledge of teaching; the ninth is with reference to the five kinds of fear.

10. Potaliyasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Commentary on the Potaliya Sutta

100.Dasamekālenāti yuttappattakālena.Khamatīti ruccati.Yadidaṃ tattha tattha kālaññutāti yā esā tattha tattha kālaṃ jānanā. Taṃ taṃ kālaṃ ñatvā hi avaṇṇārahassa avaṇṇakathanaṃ vaṇṇārahassa ca vaṇṇakathanaṃ paṇḍitānaṃ pakatīti dasseti.

100. In the tenth, kālenā means at the appropriate time. Khamatī means it pleases. Yadidaṃ tattha tattha kālaññutā means that knowing of the right time in each case. For it shows that knowing the right time in each case, speaking dispraise of one who deserves dispraise and speaking praise of one who deserves praise is the nature of the wise.

3. Tatiyapaṇṇāsakaṃ

3. The Third Book of Fifty

(11) 1. Valāhakavaggo

(11) 1. The Cloud-gods Chapter

1-2. Valāhakasuttadvayavaṇṇanā
1-2. Commentary on the Two Valāhaka Suttas

101-2.Tatiyapaṇṇāsakassa paṭhamevalāhakāti meghā.Bhāsitā hoti no kattāti ‘‘idañcidañca karissāmī’’ti kevalaṃ bhāsatiyeva, na karoti.Kattā hoti no bhāsitāti akathetvāva ‘‘idañcidañca mayā kātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti kattā hoti. Evaṃ sabbattha attho veditabbo. Dutiyaṃ uttānatthameva.

101-2. In the first of the Third Book of Fifty, valāhakā means clouds. Bhāsitā hoti no kattā means he only speaks, saying "I will do this and that," but does not do it. Kattā hoti no bhāsitā means without speaking, he does it, thinking "I should do this and that." In this way, the meaning should be understood everywhere. The second is clear in meaning.

3. Kumbhasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Commentary on the Kumbha Sutta

103.Tatiyekumbhāti ghaṭā.Tuccho pihitoti rittako pihitamukho.Pūro vivaṭoti udakapuṇṇo apārutamukho. Sesadvayepi eseva nayo.

103. In the third, kumbhā means pots. Tuccho pihito means empty with the mouth covered. Pūro vivaṭo means full of water with the mouth uncovered. The same method applies in the remaining two cases.

4. Udakarahadasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Commentary on the Udakarahada Sutta

104.Catuttheuttāno gambhīrobhāsotiādīsu purāṇapaṇṇarasasambhinnavaṇṇo kāḷaudakogambhīrobhāsonāma, acchavippasannamaṇivaṇṇaudakouttānobhāsonāma.

104. In the fourth, in uttāno gambhīrobhāso etc., water with an ancient, mixed color, like the fifteenth-day moon, is called gambhīrobhāso; water with a clear, bright, jewel-like color is called uttānobhāso.

5-6. Ambasuttavaṇṇanā
5-6. Commentary on the Amba Sutta

105-6.Pañcameāmaṃ pakkavaṇṇīti āmakaṃ hutvā olokentānaṃ pakkasadisaṃ khāyati. Evaṃ sabbapadāni daṭṭhabbāni. Chaṭṭhaṃ uttānatthameva.

105-6. In the fifth, āmaṃ pakkavaṇṇī means when it is unripe, it appears to those who look at it as if it were ripe. All the words should be understood in this way. The sixth is clear in meaning.

7. Mūsikasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Commentary on the Mūsika Sutta

107.Sattame yo āvāṭaṃ khaṇati, na ca tattha vasati, sogādhaṃ kattā no vasitāti vuccati. Khantātipi pāṭho. Iminā nayena sabbapadāni veditabbāni.

107. In the seventh, one who digs a hole but does not live there is called gādhaṃ kattā no vasitā. Khantā is also a reading. All the words should be understood in this way.

8. Balībaddasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Commentary on the Balībadda Sutta

108.Aṭṭhame yo attano gogaṇaṃ maddati, na paragogaṇaṃ, ayaṃsagavacaṇḍo no paragavacaṇḍoti evaṃ sabbapadāni veditabbāni.Ubbejetā hotīti ghaṭṭetvā vijjhitvā ubbegapattaṃ karoti.

108. In the eighth, one who crushes his own cattle, but not the cattle of others, is called sagavacaṇḍo no paragavacaṇḍo; all the words should be understood in this way. Ubbejetā hotī means he makes (the cattle) agitated by prodding and piercing them.

9. Rukkhasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Commentary on the Rukkha Sutta

109.Navamepheggu phegguparivāroti nissāro pheggurukkho pheggurukkheheva parivuto.Sāraparivāroti khadirādīhi sārarukkheheva parivuto. Esa nayo sabbattha.

109. In the ninth, pheggu phegguparivāro means a pith tree surrounded by pith trees only. Sāraparivāro means surrounded by heartwood trees only, such as khadira etc. This method applies everywhere.

10. Āsīvisasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Commentary on the Āsīvisa Sutta

110.Dasameāgataviso na ghoravisoti yassa visaṃ āgacchati, ghoraṃ pana na hoti, cirakālaṃ na pīḷeti. Sesapadesupi eseva nayoti.

110. In the tenth, āgataviso na ghoraviso means one whose poison is incoming, but is not terrible, does not afflict for a long time. The same method applies in the remaining words.

(12) 2. Kesivaggo

(12) 2. The Kesi Chapter

1. Kesisuttavaṇṇanā
1. Commentary on the Kesi Sutta

111.Dutiyassa paṭhamekesīti tassa nāmaṃ. Assadamme sāretītiassadammasārathi. Saṇhenapi vinetītiādīsu tassa anucchavikaṃ sakkāraṃ katvā subhojanaṃ bhojetvā madhurapānaṃ pāyetvā muduvacanena samudācaritvā damento saṇhena dameti nāma, jāṇubandhanamukhabandhanādīhi ceva patodavijjhanakasābhighātapharusavacanehi ca damento pharusena dameti nāma, kālena kālaṃ tadubhayaṃ karonto saṇhapharusena dameti nāma.

111. In the first of the second (chapter), kesī is his name. Assadamme sāretīti assadammasārathi means a trainer of horses to be tamed. In saṇhenapi vinetī etc., training by treating him appropriately with respect, feeding him good food, giving him sweet drinks, and addressing him with gentle words is called training gently; training by using knee restraints, mouth restraints, and so on, and by prodding, piercing, striking with a whip, and harsh words is called training harshly; doing both of these from time to time is called training both gently and harshly.

2. Javasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Commentary on the Java Sutta

112.Dutiyeajjavenāti ujukabhāvena.Javenāti padavegena.Khantiyāti adhivāsanakkhantiyā.Soraccenāti sucibhāvasīlena. Puggalaguṇaṅgesujavenāti ñāṇajavena. Sesamettha uttānatthameva.

112. In the second, ajjavenā means by straightforwardness. Javenā means by speed of foot. Khantiyā means by forbearance to endure. Soraccenā means by purity of moral conduct. Among the qualities of persons, javenā means by speed of knowledge. The rest here is clear in meaning.

3. Patodasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Commentary on the Patoda Sutta

113.Tatiyepatodacchāyanti vijjhanatthaṃ ukkhittassa patodassa chāyaṃ.Saṃvijjatīti ‘‘javo me gahetabbo’’ti sallakkhaṇavasena saṃvijjati.Saṃvegaṃ āpajjatīti saṃvegaṃ paṭipajjatilomavedhaviddhoti lomakūpe patodavedhena viddhamatto.Cammavedhaviddhoti chavicammaṃ chindantena patodavedhena viddho.Aṭṭhivedhaviddhoti aṭṭhiṃ bhindantena vedhena viddho.Kāyenāti nāmakāyena.Paramasaccanti nibbānaṃ.Sacchikarotīti passati.Paññāyāti sahavipassanāya maggapaññāya.

113. In the third, patodacchāya means the shadow of the goad that has been raised to strike. Saṃvijjatī means it exists in the sense of perceiving "speed is to be gained". Saṃvegaṃ āpajjatī means he attains agitation. Lomavedhaviddho means pierced merely by the goad's piercing of the hair follicle. Cammavedhaviddho means pierced by the goad's piercing, cutting through the skin. Aṭṭhivedhaviddho means pierced by the piercing that breaks the bone. Kāyenā means with the body of name. Paramasacca means Nibbāna. Sacchikarotī means sees. Paññāyā means with insight together, with the knowledge of the path.

4. Nāgasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Commentary on the Nāga Sutta

114.Catuttheaṭṭhiṃ katvāti aṭṭhiko hutvā.Tiṇavaninnādasaddānanti etthatiṇavoti ḍiṇḍimo,ninnādasaddoti sabbesampi ekatomissito mahāsaddo. Ḍaṃsādīsuḍaṃsāti piṅgalamakkhikā,makasāmakasāva.Khippaññeva gantā hotīti sīlasamādhipaññāvimuttivimuttiñāṇadassanāni pūretvā sīghameva gantā hoti.

114. In the fourth, aṭṭhiṃ katvā means having become an ascetic. In tiṇavaninnādasaddāna, tiṇavo here means a small drum, ninnādasaddo means a great sound mixed from all (instruments). Among biting insects etc., ḍaṃsā means reddish-brown flies, makasā means mosquitoes. Khippaññeva gantā hotī means having quickly completed virtue, concentration, wisdom, liberation, and knowledge and vision of liberation, he quickly goes.

5. Ṭhānasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Commentary on the Ṭhāna Sutta

115.Pañcameṭhānānīti kāraṇāni.Anatthāya saṃvattatīti ahitāya avaḍḍhiyā saṃvattati. Ettha ca paṭhamaṃ opātakkhaṇanamacchabandhanasandhicchedanādibhedaṃ sadukkhaṃ savighātaṃ pāpakammaṃ veditabbaṃ, dutiyaṃ samajīvikānaṃ gihīnaṃ pupphacchaḍḍakādikammaṃ sudhākoṭṭana-gehacchādanaasuciṭṭhānasammajjanādikammañca veditabbaṃ, tatiyaṃ surāpānagandhavilepanamālāpiḷandhanādikammañceva assādavasena pavattaṃ pāṇātipātādikammañca veditabbaṃ, catutthaṃ dhammassavanatthāya gamanakāle suddhavatthacchādana-mālāgandhādīnaṃ ādāya gamanaṃ cetiyavandanaṃ bodhivandanaṃ madhuradhammakathāsavanaṃ pañcasīlasamādānanti evamādīsu somanassasampayuttaṃ kusalakammaṃ veditabbaṃ.Purisathāmeti purisassa ñāṇathāmasmiṃ. Sesadvayepi eseva nayo.

115. In the fifth, ṭhānānī means causes. Anatthāya saṃvattatī means it leads to harm and decline. Here, the first should be understood as bad action accompanied by suffering and distress, such as digging pits, catching fish, and breaking into houses; the second should be understood as the actions of lay people who make a living together, such as throwing flowers, whitewashing walls, covering houses, and sweeping impure places; the third should be understood as bad action such as killing living beings, which occurs through attachment to the enjoyment of drinking alcohol, applying perfumes, and wearing garlands; the fourth should be understood as wholesome action associated with joy, such as going to hear the Dhamma while taking clean clothes, garlands, and perfumes, venerating cetiyas, venerating the Bodhi tree, hearing sweet Dhamma talks, and undertaking the five precepts. Purisathāme means in the power of a man's knowledge. The same method applies in the remaining two cases.

6. Appamādasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Commentary on the Appamāda Sutta

116.Chaṭṭheyato khoti yadā kho.Samparāyikassāti desanāmattametaṃ, khīṇāsavo pana neva samparāyikassa, na diṭṭhadhammikassa maraṇassa bhāyati. Sova idha adhippeto. Keci pana ‘‘sammādiṭṭhi bhāvitāti vacanato sotāpannaṃ ādiṃ katvā sabbepi ariyā adhippetā’’ti vadanti.

116. In the sixth, yato kho means whenever. Samparāyikassā means this is merely a statement of teaching, but the one with defilements destroyed does not fear death in either the future life or in this present life. He is what is intended here. But some say that "because it is said 'having cultivated right view,' all noble ones beginning with the stream-enterer are intended."

7. Ārakkhasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Commentary on the Ārakkha Sutta

117.Sattameattarūpenāti attano anurūpena anucchavikena, hitakāmenāti attho.Rajanīyesūti rāgassa paccayabhūtesu.Dhammesūti sabhāvesu, iṭṭhārammaṇesūti attho. Evaṃ sabbattha nayo veditabbo.Na rajjatīti diṭṭhivasena na rajjati. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo.Na ca pana samaṇavacanahetupi gacchatīti samaṇānaṃ paravādīnaṃ vacanahetupi attano diṭṭhiṃ pahāya tesaṃ diṭṭhivasena na gacchatīti attho. Idhāpi khīṇāsavova adhippeto.

117. In the seventh, attarūpenā means according to his own form, appropriately, with a mind for welfare. Rajanīyesū means in things that are the cause of lust. Dhammesū means in phenomena, in desirable objects. Thus, the method should be understood everywhere. Na rajjatī means he does not lust with the view. The same method applies in the remaining words. Na ca pana samaṇavacanahetupi gacchatī means he does not go with the view of those who are proponents of other doctrines, abandoning his own view even because of the words of ascetics. Here too, one with defilements destroyed is intended.

8-10. Saṃvejanīyādisuttattayavaṇṇanā
8-10. Commentary on the Three Saṃvejanīya Suttas, etc.

118-120.Aṭṭhamedassanīyānīti passitabbayuttakāni.Saṃvejanīyānīti saṃvegajanakāni. Navamejātibhayanti jātiṃ ārabbha uppajjanakabhayaṃ. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Dasameaggibhayanti aggiṃ paṭicca uppajjanakabhayaṃ. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo.

118-120. In the eighth, dassanīyānī means fit to be seen. Saṃvejanīyānī means causing agitation. In the ninth, jātibhaya means fear arising on account of birth. The same method applies in the remaining words. In the tenth, aggibhaya means fear arising dependent on fire. The same method applies in the remaining words.

(13) 3. Bhayavaggo

(13) 3. The Fear Chapter

1. Attānuvādasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Commentary on the Attānuvāda Sutta

121.Tatiyassa paṭhameattānuvādabhayanti attānaṃ anuvadantassa uppajjanakabhayaṃ.Parānuvādabhayanti parassa anuvādato uppajjanakabhayaṃ.Daṇḍabhayanti dvattiṃsa kammakāraṇā paṭicca uppajjanakabhayaṃ.Duggatibhayanti cattāro apāye paṭicca uppajjanakabhayaṃ.Idaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, attānuvādabhayantiādīsu attānuvādabhayaṃ tāva paccavekkhantassa ajjhattaṃ hirī samuṭṭhāti, sāssa tīsu dvāresu saṃvaraṃ janeti, tīsu dvāresu saṃvaro catupārisuddhisīlaṃ hoti. So tasmiṃ sīle patiṭṭhāya vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā aggaphale patiṭṭhāti. Parānuvādabhayaṃ pana paccavekkhantassa bahiddhā ottappaṃ samuṭṭhāti, tadassa tīsu dvāresu saṃvaraṃ janeti, tīsu dvāresu saṃvaro catupārisuddhisīlaṃ hoti. So tasmiṃ sīle patiṭṭhāya vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā aggaphale patiṭṭhāti. Duggatibhayaṃ paccavekkhantassa ajjhattaṃ hirī samuṭṭhāti, sāssa tīsu dvāresu saṃvaraṃ janeti, tīsu dvāresu saṃvaro catupārisuddhisīlaṃ hoti. So tasmiṃ sīle patiṭṭhāya vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā aggaphale patiṭṭhāti.

121. In the first of the third (chapter), attānuvādabhaya means fear arising from self-reproach. Parānuvādabhaya means fear arising from the reproach of others. Daṇḍabhaya means fear arising dependent on the thirty-two causes of punishment. Duggatibhaya means fear arising dependent on the four woeful realms. In idaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, attānuvādabhaya etc., for one who reflects on fear of self-reproach, conscience arises within, which generates restraint at the three doors; restraint at the three doors is the fourfold purification of morality. Established in that morality, he develops insight and becomes established in the highest fruit. For one who reflects on fear of the reproach of others, shame arises externally, which generates restraint at the three doors; restraint at the three doors is the fourfold purification of morality. Established in that morality, he develops insight and becomes established in the highest fruit. For one who reflects on fear of a bad destiny, conscience arises within, which generates restraint at the three doors; restraint at the three doors is the fourfold purification of morality. Established in that morality, he develops insight and becomes established in the highest fruit.

2. Ūmibhayasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Commentary on the Ūmibhaya Sutta

122.Dutiyeudakorohantassāti udakaṃ otarantassa.Pāṭikaṅkhitabbānīti icchitabbāni.Susukābhayanti caṇḍamacchabhayaṃ.Mukhāvaraṇaṃ maññe karontīti mukhapidahanaṃ viya karonti.Odarikattassāti mahodaratāya mahagghasabhāvassa.Arakkhiteneva kāyenātiādīsu kāyadvāre tividhassa saṃvarassa abhāvato arakkhitena kāyena. Vacīdvāre catubbidhassa saṃvarassa abhāvatoarakkhitāya vācāya.

122. Dutiye udakorohantassā means while descending into the water. Pāṭikaṅkhitabbānī means should be desired. Susukābhaya means fear of fierce crocodiles. Mukhāvaraṇaṃ maññe karontī means they act as if covering the face. Odarikattassā means due to being gluttonous, having a large belly. In arakkhiteneva kāyenā and the following, because of the absence of the threefold restraint at the body door, it is "with an unguarded body." Because of the absence of the fourfold restraint at the speech door, it is arakkhitāya vācāya.

3. Paṭhamanānākaraṇasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Paṭhamanānākaraṇasuttavaṇṇanā

123.Tatiyetadassādetīti taṃ jhānaṃ sukhassādena assādeti.Nikāmetīti pattheti.Vittiṃāpajjatīti tuṭṭhiṃ āpajjati.Tadadhimuttoti tasmiṃ adhimutto, taṃ vā adhimutto.Tabbahulavihārīti tena jhānena bahulaṃ viharanto.Sahabyataṃ upapajjatīti sahabhāvaṃ gacchati, tattha nibbattatīti attho.Kappo āyuppamāṇanti ettha paṭhamajjhānaṃ atthi hīnaṃ, atthi majjhimaṃ, atthi paṇītaṃ. Tattha hīnena uppannānaṃ kappassa tatiyo koṭṭhāso āyuppamāṇaṃ, majjhimena upaḍḍhakappo, paṇītena kappo. Taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.Nirayampi gacchatīti nirayagamanīyassa kammassa appahīnattā aparāparaṃ gacchati, na anantarameva.Tasmiṃyeva bhave parinibbāyatīti tasmiṃyeva rūpabhave ṭhatvā parinibbāyati, na heṭṭhā otarati.Yadidaṃ gatiyā upapattiyā satīti yaṃ idaṃ gatiyā ca upapattiyā ca sati sekhassa ariyasāvakassa paṭisandhivasena heṭṭhā anotaritvā tasmiṃyeva rūpabhave upari dutiyatatiyādīsu aññatarasmiṃ brahmaloke parinibbānaṃ, puthujjanassa pana nirayādigamanaṃ, idaṃ nānākaraṇanti attho.

123. In the third, tadassādetī means he savors that jhāna with the taste of pleasure. Nikāmetī means he longs for it. Vittiṃ āpajjatī means he attains satisfaction. Tadadhimutto means devoted to that, or that is what he is devoted to. Tabbahulavihārī means living frequently with that jhāna. Sahabyataṃ upapajjatī means he goes to companionship, that is, he is reborn there. Kappo āyuppamāṇa: here, the first jhāna has an inferior form, a middling form, and a superior form. Among them, for those who arise from the inferior form, a third of a kappa is the lifespan; for the middling, half a kappa; for the superior, a kappa. This is said with that in mind. Nirayampi gacchatī means because the karma leading to hell has not been abandoned, he goes on and on, not immediately. Tasmiṃyeva bhave parinibbāyatī means he attains final Nibbāna while staying in that very rūpa-bhava, he does not descend below. Yadidaṃ gatiyā upapattiyā satī means that this difference is that, with regard to the destiny and rebirth, a Sekha (trainee) Ariya disciple, without descending below by way of rebirth, attains final Nibbāna in that very rūpa-bhava, in one of the higher Brahma-worlds such as the second or third, while a worldling goes to hell, etc.

Dve kappāti etthāpi dutiyajjhānaṃ vuttanayeneva tividhaṃ hoti. Tattha paṇītabhāvanena nibbattānaṃ aṭṭhakappā āyuppamāṇaṃ, majjhimena cattāro, hīnena dve. Taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.Cattārokappāti ettha yaṃ heṭṭhā vuttaṃ ‘‘kappo, dve kappā’’ti, tampi āharitvā attho veditabbo. Kappoti ca guṇassapi nāmaṃ, tasmā kappo dve kappā cattāro kappāti ayamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yo paṭhamaṃ vutto kappo, so dve vāre gaṇetvā ekena guṇena dve kappā honti, dutiyena cattāro, puna te cattāro kappāti imehi catūhi guṇehi guṇitā ekena guṇena aṭṭha honti, dutiyena soḷasa, tatiyena dvattiṃsa, catutthena catusaṭṭhīti. Evamidha paṇītajjhānavasena catusaṭṭhi kappā gahitāti veditabbā.Pañca kappasatānīti idaṃ paṇītasseva upapattijjhānassa vasena vuttaṃ. Vehapphalesu vā paṭhamajjhānabhūmiādīsu viya tiṇṇaṃ brahmalokānaṃ abhāvato ettakameva āyuppamāṇaṃ. Tasmā evaṃ vuttaṃ.

Dve kappā here also, the second jhāna is threefold in the manner already stated. Among them, for those reborn due to superior cultivation, the lifespan is eight kappas; for the middling, four; for the inferior, two. This is said with that in mind. Cattāro kappā here, the meaning should be understood by bringing in what was said below, "a kappa, two kappas." And "kappa" is also a name for a quality, therefore, the meaning here should be seen as "a kappa, two kappas, four kappas." This is what is said: the kappa that was first mentioned, counting it twice, becomes two kappas with one quality; with the second, four; then these four kappas, multiplied by these four qualities, become eight with one quality, sixteen with the second, thirty-two with the third, sixty-four with the fourth. Thus, here, sixty-four kappas are to be understood as taken in terms of superior jhāna. Pañca kappasatānī this is said in terms of the superior upapattijhāna. Or, as in the Vehapphala and first jhāna realms, because there are no three Brahma-worlds, this is the extent of the lifespan. Therefore, it is said thus.

4. Dutiyanānākaraṇasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Dutiyanānākaraṇasuttavaṇṇanā

124.Catutthe rūpamevarūpagataṃ. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo.Aniccatotiādīsu hutvā abhāvaṭṭhenaaniccato,ābādhaṭṭhenarogato,anto padussanaṭṭhenagaṇḍato,anupaviṭṭhaṭṭhenasallato,sadukkhaṭṭhenaaghato,sampīḷanaṭṭhenaābādhato,avidheyyaṭṭhenaparato,palujjanaṭṭhenapalokato,nissattaṭṭhenasuññato,avasavattanaṭṭhenaanattato. Ettha ca ‘‘aniccato palokato’’ti dvīhi padehi aniccalakkhaṇaṃ kathitaṃ, ‘‘suññato anattato’’ti dvīhi anattalakkhaṇaṃ, sesehi dukkhalakkhaṇaṃ kathitanti veditabbaṃ.Samanupassatīti ñāṇena passati. Evaṃ pañcakkhandhe tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā passanto tayo magge tīṇi phalāni sacchikaroti.Suddhāvāsānaṃdevānaṃ sahabyataṃ upapajjatīti tattha ṭhito catutthajjhānaṃ bhāvetvā upapajjati.

124. In the fourth, rūpameva rūpagataṃ means form as form. The same method applies in the remaining terms. In aniccato and the following, aniccato because of the meaning of being without permanence; rogato because of the meaning of disease; gaṇḍato because of the meaning of internal corruption; sallato because of the meaning of being unextracted; aghato because of the meaning of being sad; ābādhato because of the meaning of oppression; parato because of the meaning of being uncontrollable; palokato because of the meaning of disintegration; suññato because of the meaning of being without substance; anattato because of the meaning of being without self. Here, it should be understood that impermanence is described by the two terms "aniccato, palokato," the characteristic of not-self by the two terms "suññato, anattato," and the characteristic of suffering by the remaining terms. Samanupassatī means he sees with wisdom. Thus, seeing by applying the three characteristics to the five aggregates, he realizes the three paths and three fruits. Suddhāvāsānaṃ devānaṃ sahabyataṃ upapajjatī means having cultivated the fourth jhāna while staying there, he is reborn there.

5-6. Mettāsuttadvayavaṇṇanā
5-6. Mettāsuttadvayavaṇṇanā

125-126.Pañcame paṭhamajjhānavasena mettā, dutiyādivasena karuṇādayo dassitā. Chaṭṭhaṃ catutthe vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.

125-126. In the fifth, mettā is shown in terms of the first jhāna, and karuṇā etc., in terms of the second jhāna and so on. The sixth should be understood in the same way as stated in the fourth.

7. Paṭhamatathāgataacchariyasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Paṭhamatathāgataacchariyasuttavaṇṇanā

127.Sattamepātubhāvāti pātubhāvena.Kucchiṃ okkamatīti ettha kucchiṃ okkanto hotīti attho. Okkante hi tasmiṃ evaṃ hoti, na okkamamāne.Appamāṇoti vuḍḍhippamāṇo, vipuloti attho.Uḷāroti tasseva vevacanaṃ.Devānaṃ devānubhāvanti ettha devānaṃ ayamānubhāvo – nivatthavatthassa pabhā dvādasa yojanāni pharati, tathā sarīrassa, tathā vimānassa, taṃ atikkamitvāti attho.Lokantarikāti tiṇṇaṃ tiṇṇaṃ cakkavāḷānaṃ antarā ekeko lokantariko hoti, tiṇṇaṃ sakaṭacakkānaṃ pattānaṃ vā aññamaññaṃ āhacca ṭhapitānaṃ majjhe okāso viya. So pana lokantarikanirayo parimāṇato aṭṭhayojanasahassappamāṇo hoti.Aghāti niccavivaṭā.Asaṃvutāti heṭṭhāpi appatiṭṭhā.Andhakārāti tamabhūtā.Andhakāratimisāti cakkhuviññāṇuppattinivāraṇato andhabhāvakaraṇatimisāya samannāgatā. Tattha kira cakkhuviññāṇaṃ na jāyati.Evaṃmahiddhikānanti candimasūriyā kira ekappahāreneva tīsu dīpesu paññāyanti, evaṃmahiddhikā. Ekekāya disāya nava nava yojanasatasahassāni andhakāraṃ vidhamitvā ālokaṃ dassenti,evaṃmahānubhāvā. Ābhā nānubhontīti pabhā nappahonti. Te kira cakkavāḷapabbatassa vemajjhena caranti cakkavāḷapabbatañca atikkamitvā lokantaranirayā. Tasmā tesaṃ tattha ābhā nappahonti.

127. In the seventh, pātubhāvā means by manifestation. Kucchiṃ okkamatī means here, "he descends into the womb." For when he has descended, it is thus, not while he is descending. Appamāṇo means immeasurable in growth, extensive, is the meaning. Uḷāro is a synonym for that. Devānaṃ devānubhāva here, this is the power of the Devas: the radiance of the cloth worn extends twelve yojanas, likewise of the body, likewise of the celestial mansion, surpassing that, is the meaning. Lokantarikā means between three sets of three world-spheres, there is one Lokantarika, like the space in the middle of the rims of three cartwheels hitting each other and placed there. However, that Lokantarika hell is approximately eight thousand yojanas in extent. Aghā means always open. Asaṃvutā means without support even below. Andhakārā means being darkness itself. Andhakāratimisā means endowed with darkness that causes blindness, preventing the arising of eye-consciousness. It is said that eye-consciousness does not arise there. Evaṃmahiddhikāna the moon and sun are said to appear in three continents with a single strike, they are so powerful. Having dispelled the darkness by nine hundred thousand yojanas in each direction, they show light, evaṃmahānubhāvā. Ābhā nānubhontī means their radiance is not sufficient. They travel through the middle of the Cakkavāḷa mountain, and the Lokantarika hells are beyond the Cakkavāḷa mountain. Therefore, their radiance is not sufficient there.

Yepi tattha sattāti yepi tasmiṃ lokantaramahāniraye sattā upapannā. Kiṃ pana kammaṃ katvā tattha uppajjantīti? Bhāriyaṃ dāruṇaṃ mātāpitūnaṃ dhammikasamaṇabrāhmaṇānañca upari aparādhaṃ, aññañca divase divase pāṇavadhādisāhasikakammaṃ katvā uppajjanti tambapaṇṇidīpe abhayacoranāgacorādayo viya. Tesaṃ attabhāvo tigāvutiko hoti, vaggulīnaṃ viya dīghanakhā honti. Te rukkhe vagguliyo viya nakhehi cakkavāḷapabbatapāde lagganti. Yadā saṃsappantā aññamaññassa hatthapāsagatā honti, atha ‘‘bhakkho no laddho’’ti maññamānā tattha byāvaṭā viparivattitvā lokasandhārakaudake patanti, vāte paharantepi madhukaphalāni viya chijjitvā udake patanti, patitamattāva accantakhāre udake piṭṭhapiṇḍi viya vilīyanti.Aññepi kira bho santi sattāti bho yathā mayaṃ mahādukkhaṃ anubhavāma, evaṃ aññepi kira sattā idaṃ dukkhaṃ anubhavanatthāya idhūpapannāti taṃdivasaṃ passanti. Ayaṃ pana obhāso ekayāgupānamattampi na tiṭṭhati. Yāvatā niddāyitvā pabuddho ārammaṇaṃ vibhāveti, tattakaṃ kālaṃ hoti. Dīghabhāṇakā pana ‘‘accharāsaṅghātamattameva vijjuobhāso viya niccharitvā kiṃ idanti bhaṇantānaṃyeva antaradhāyatī’’ti vadanti.

Yepi tattha sattā means whatever beings are reborn in that great Lokantarika hell. What karma do they do to be reborn there? They are reborn after committing heavy and cruel offenses against their parents and righteous ascetics and Brahmins, and other violent acts such as killing living beings day by day, like the Abhaya thieves and Nāga thieves in Tambapaṇṇidīpa. Their bodies are three gāvutas in size, and their nails are long like those of bats. Like bats on trees, they cling to the foot of the Cakkavāḷa mountain with their nails. When, as they crawl, they come within reach of each other's hands, then thinking "we have not obtained food," they are engaged there, turning around and falling into the water that holds the world together; even when struck by the wind, they are cut off and fall into the water like madhuka fruits; as soon as they fall, they dissolve like a lump of flour in the extremely salty water. Aññepi kira bho santi sattā "Indeed, sir, just as we experience great suffering, so too, it seems, other beings have been reborn here to experience this suffering," they see that day. However, this light does not last even for the duration of one sip of rice-gruel. It lasts only as long as it takes to fall asleep and awaken and discern an object. But the Dīgha-bhāṇakas say, "Like a flash of lightning, it disappears as soon as they say, 'What is this?'"

8. Dutiyatathāgataacchariyasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Dutiyatathāgataacchariyasuttavaṇṇanā

128.Aṭṭhame taṇhādiṭṭhīhi allīyitabbaṭṭhena ālayoti pañca kāmaguṇā, sakalameva vā vaṭṭaṃ. Āramanti etthāti ārāmo, ālayo ārāmo etissātiālayārāmā. Ālaye ratātiālayaratā. Ālaye sammuditātiālayasammuditā. Anālaye dhammeti ālayapaṭipakkhe vivaṭṭūpanissite ariyadhamme.Sussūsatīti sotukāmo hoti.Sotaṃ odahatīti sotaṃ ṭhapeti.Aññā cittaṃ upaṭṭhapetīti ājānanatthāya cittaṃ paccupaṭṭhapeti.Mānoti maññanā, maññitabbaṭṭhena vā sakalaṃ vaṭṭameva.Mānavinaye dhammeti mānavinayadhamme. Upasamapaṭipakkhoanupasamo,anupasantaṭṭhena vā vaṭṭameva anupasamo nāma.Opasamiketi upasamakare vivaṭṭūpanissite. Avijjāya gatā samannāgatātiavijjāgatā. Avijjaṇḍakosena pariyonaddhattā aṇḍaṃ viya bhūtātiaṇḍabhūtā. Samantato onaddhātipariyonaddhā. Avijjāvinayeti avijjāvinayo vuccati arahattaṃ, taṃnissite dhamme desiyamāneti attho. Iti imasmiṃ sutte catūsu ṭhānesu vaṭṭaṃ, catūsu vivaṭṭaṃ kathitaṃ.

128. In the eighth, ālayārāmā because of the meaning of clinging with craving and views, "ālaya" means the five strands of sense pleasure, or the entire cycle of existence. Ārāmo because one delights in it, the ālaya is the ārāma of these, therefore, ālayārāmā. Ālayaratā means delighting in the ālaya. Ālayasammuditā means rejoicing in the ālaya. Anālaye dhamme means in the Ariya-dhamma that is opposed to the ālaya, that tends to detachment. Sussūsatī means he wishes to hear. Sotaṃ odahatī means he lends an ear. Aññā cittaṃ upaṭṭhapetī means he applies his mind for the sake of knowing. Māno means conceiving, or because of the meaning of what should be conceived, the entire cycle of existence is māna. Mānavinaye dhamme means in the dhamma for subduing conceit. Anupasamo is the opposite of calming, or because of the meaning of being uncalmed, the cycle of existence itself is called anupasamo. Opasamike means conducive to calming, tending to detachment. Avijjāgatā means gone to ignorance. Aṇḍabhūtā because they are covered by the shell of ignorance, they are like an egg. Pariyonaddhā means completely enveloped. Avijjāvinaye means avijjāvinaya (the dispelling of ignorance) means Arahatship, that is, when the dhamma dependent on that is being taught. Thus, in this sutta, the cycle of existence is spoken of in four places, and detachment in four places.

9. Ānandaacchariyasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Ānandaacchariyasuttavaṇṇanā

129.Navamebhikkhuparisā ānandaṃ dassanāyāti ye bhagavantaṃ passitukāmā theraṃ upasaṅkamanti, ye vā ‘‘āyasmā kirānando samantapāsādiko abhirūpo dassanīyo bahussuto saṅghasobhano’’ti therassa guṇe sutvā āgacchanti, te sandhāya ‘‘bhikkhuparisā ānandaṃ dassanāya upasaṅkamatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Esa nayo sabbattha.Attamanāti ‘‘savanena no dassanaṃ sametī’’ti sakamanā tuṭṭhacittā.Dhammanti ‘‘kacci, āvuso, khamanīyaṃ, kacci yāpanīyaṃ, kacci yonisomanasikārakammaṃ karotha, ācariyupajjhāyavattaṃ pūrethā’’ti evarūpaṃ paṭisanthāradhammaṃ. Tattha bhikkhunīsu ‘‘kacci, bhaginiyo, aṭṭha garudhamme samādāya vattathā’’ti idampi nānākaraṇaṃ hoti. Upāsakesu ‘‘svāgataṃ, upāsaka, na te kiñci sīsaṃ vā aṅgaṃ vā rujjati, arogā te puttabhātaro’’ti na evaṃ paṭisanthāraṃ karoti, evaṃ pana karoti – ‘‘kathaṃ, upāsakā, tīṇi saraṇāni pañca sīlāni rakkhatha, māsassa aṭṭha uposathe karotha, mātāpitūnaṃ upaṭṭhānavattaṃ pūretha, dhammikasamaṇabrāhmaṇe paṭijaggathā’’ti. Upāsikāsupi eseva nayo.

129. In the ninth, bhikkhuparisā ānandaṃ dassanāyā means, with regard to those who, wishing to see the Buddha, approach the Elder; or those who, having heard the virtues of the Elder—"Venerable Ānanda is pleasing, handsome, delightful, learned, and an adornment to the Sangha"—come, with these in mind, it is said, "The assembly of monks approaches Ānanda for a sight." This method is to be applied everywhere. Attamanā means, thinking, "Our seeing matches our hearing," they are of a satisfied mind. Dhamma means this kind of friendly Dhamma: "Is it well with you, friend? Are you able to live? Are you applying proper attention? Are you fulfilling the duties to your teachers and preceptors?" There, with regard to the bhikkhunīs, "Are you undertaking and practicing the eight Garudhamma (weighty principles)?" this also is a difference. With regard to the male lay followers, he does not make such friendly conversation as, "Welcome, lay follower, is nothing hurting your head or limbs, are your sons and brothers healthy?" but instead he does this: "Lay followers, how are you? Do you protect the Three Refuges and the Five Precepts? Do you observe the eight precepts on the Uposatha days of the month? Do you fulfill your duties to your mother and father? Do you attend to righteous ascetics and Brahmins?" The same method applies to the female lay followers as well.

10. Cakkavattiacchariyasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Cakkavattiacchariyasuttavaṇṇanā

130.Dasamekhattiyaparisāti abhisittā anabhisittā ca khattiyā. Te hi kira ‘‘rājā cakkavattī nāma abhirūpo pāsādiko hoti, ākāsena vicaranto rajjaṃ anusāsati, dhammiko dhammarājā’’ti tassa guṇakathaṃ sutvā savanena dassanamhi samente attamanā honti.Bhāsatīti ‘‘kathaṃ, tātā, rājadhammaṃ pūretha, paveṇiṃ rakkhathā’’ti paṭisanthāraṃ karoti. Brāhmaṇesu pana ‘‘kathañca, ācariyā, mante vācetha, antevāsikā mante gaṇhanti, dakkhiṇaṃ vā vatthāni vā sīlaṃ vā labhathā’’ti evaṃ paṭisanthāraṃ karoti. Gahapatīsu ‘‘kathaṃ, tātā, na vo rājakulato daṇḍena vā bandhanena vā pīḷā atthi, sammā devo dhāraṃ anuppavecchati, sassāni sampajjantī’’ti evaṃ paṭisanthāraṃ karoti. Samaṇesu ‘‘kathaṃ, bhante, kacci pabbajitaparikkhārā sulabhā, samaṇadhamme nappamajjathā’’ti evaṃ paṭisanthāraṃ karotīti.

130. In the tenth, khattiyaparisā means the anointed and the unanointed Khattiyas. For having heard the talk of his virtues—"The Cakkavatti (wheel-turning) king is handsome and delightful; wandering through the sky, he rules the kingdom; he is righteous, a king of Dhamma"—they are delighted that their seeing matches their hearing. Bhāsatī means he makes friendly conversation: "How are you, sirs? Do you fulfill the duties of a king? Do you protect the traditions?" But with regard to the Brahmins, he makes friendly conversation thus: "How are you, teachers? Do you recite the mantras? Do the pupils learn the mantras? Do you obtain offerings of cloth or robes or virtue?" With regard to the householders, he makes friendly conversation thus: "How are you, sirs? Is there no oppression from the royal family by way of punishment or imprisonment? Does the god properly give rain? Are the crops flourishing?" With regard to the ascetics, he makes friendly conversation thus: "How are you, venerable sirs? Are the requisites for a renunciate easy to obtain? Do you not neglect the ascetic's duties?"

(14) 4. Puggalavaggo

(14) 4. Puggalavaggo

1. Saṃyojanasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Saṃyojanasuttavaṇṇanā

131.Catutthassa paṭhameupapattipaṭilābhiyānīti yehi anantarā upapattiṃ paṭilabhati.Bhavapaṭilābhiyānīti upapattibhavassa paṭilābhāya paccayāni.Sakadāgāmissāti idaṃ appahīnasaṃyojanesu ariyesu uttamakoṭiyā gahitaṃ. Yasmā pana antarāparinibbāyissa antarā upapatti natthi, yaṃ pana so tattha jhānaṃ samāpajjati, taṃ kusalattā ‘‘upapattibhavassa paccayo’’ teva saṅkhyaṃ gacchati. Tasmāssa ‘‘upapattipaṭilābhiyāni saṃyojanāni pahīnāni, bhavapaṭilābhiyāni saṃyojanāni appahīnānī’’ti vuttaṃ. Orambhāgiyesu ca appahīnaṃ upādāya sakadāgāmissa avisesena ‘‘orambhāgiyāni saṃyojanāni appahīnānī’’ti vuttaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva.

131. In the first of the fourth, upapattipaṭilābhiyānī means those (saṃyojanas) by which he immediately obtains rebirth. Bhavapaṭilābhiyānī means the conditions for obtaining rebirth in existence. Sakadāgāmissā this is taken in the highest degree among the Ariyas who have not abandoned the saṃyojanas. However, since there is no rebirth in between for one who will attain final Nibbāna in between, but the jhāna that he attains there is counted as a "condition for rebirth in existence" because it is wholesome. Therefore, it is said of him, "The saṃyojanas that lead to rebirth have been abandoned, the saṃyojanas that lead to existence have not been abandoned." And because of including what has not been abandoned among the Orambhāgiya-saṃyojanas, it is said of the Sakadāgāmī without distinction, "The Orambhāgiya-saṃyojanas have not been abandoned." The rest here is easy to understand.

2. Paṭibhānasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Paṭibhānasuttavaṇṇanā

132.Dutiyeyuttappaṭibhāno no muttappaṭibhānoti pañhaṃ kathento yuttameva katheti, sīghaṃ pana na katheti, saṇikameva kathetīti attho. Iminā nayena sabbapadāni veditabbāni.

132. In the second, yuttappaṭibhāno no muttappaṭibhāno means when speaking in response to a question, he speaks only what is relevant, but he does not speak quickly, he speaks only slowly, is the meaning. All the terms should be understood in this way.

3. Ugghaṭitaññūsuttavaṇṇanā
3. Ugghaṭitaññūsuttavaṇṇanā

133.Tatiye catunnampi puggalānaṃ iminā suttena viseso veditabbo –

133. In the third, the distinction among the four types of persons should be understood by means of this sutta:

ugghaṭitaññū. Katamo ca puggalo vipañcitaññū, yassa puggalassa vitthārena atthe vibhajiyamāne dhammābhisamayo hoti, ayaṃ vuccati puggalovipañcitaññū. Katamo ca puggalo neyyo, yassa puggalassa uddesato paripucchato yonisomanasikaroto kalyāṇamitte sevato bhajato payirupāsato anupubbena dhammābhisamayo hoti, ayaṃ vuccati puggaloneyyo. Katamo ca puggalo padaparamo, yassa puggalassa bahumpi suṇato bahumpi bhaṇato bahumpi dhārayato bahumpi vācayato na tāya jātiyā dhammābhisamayo hoti, ayaṃ vuccati puggalopadaparamo’’ti (pu. pa. 148-151).

ugghaṭitaññū. And what kind of person is a vipañcitaññū? It is the person who, when the meaning is explained in detail, attains the Dhamma. This person is called vipañcitaññū. And what kind of person is a neyya? It is the person who, by asking questions in detail, giving careful attention, associating with good friends, honoring and attending on them, gradually attains the Dhamma. This person is called neyya. And what kind of person is a padaparamo? It is the person who, even having heard much, spoken much, retained much, and recited much, does not attain the Dhamma in that life. This person is called padaparamo" (pu. pa. 148-151).

4. Uṭṭhānaphalasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Uṭṭhānaphalasutta Interpretation

134.Catutthe uṭṭhānavīriyeneva divasaṃ vītināmetvā tassa nissandaphalamattaṃ kiñcideva labhitvā jīvikaṃ kappeti, taṃ pana uṭṭhānaṃ āgamma kiñci puññaphalaṃ nappaṭilabhati, ayaṃuṭṭhānaphalūpajīvī na kammaphalūpajīvīnāma. Cātumahārājike pana deve ādiṃ katvā sabbepi devā uṭṭhānavīriyena vinā puññaphalasseva upajīvanatokammaphalūpajīvino na uṭṭhānaphalūpajīvinonāma. Rājarājamahāmattādayouṭṭhānaphalūpajīvino ca kammaphalūpajīvino ca. Nerayikasattāneva uṭṭhānaphalūpajīvino na kammaphalūpajīvino. Imasmiṃ sutte puññaphalameva kammaphalanti adhippetaṃ, tañca tesaṃ natthi.

134. In the fourth [sutta], spending the day only with the effort of striving (uṭṭhāna-viriya), earning a livelihood by receiving only a minimal resultant benefit from that, but not obtaining any meritorious result from that striving, this is called uṭṭhānaphalūpajīvī, not kammaphalūpajīvī (one who lives off the fruit of effort, not one who lives off the fruit of kamma). But all the devas, beginning with the Cātumahārājika devas, since they live only off the fruit of merit without effort of striving, are called kammaphalūpajīvino na uṭṭhānaphalūpajīvino (those who live off the fruit of kamma, not those who live off the fruit of effort). Royal ministers, etc., are uṭṭhānaphalūpajīvino ca kammaphalūpajīvino ca (those who live off the fruit of effort and the fruit of kamma). Sufferers in hell are neva uṭṭhānaphalūpajīvino na kammaphalūpajīvino (neither those who live off the fruit of effort nor those who live off the fruit of kamma). In this sutta, merit (puñña-phala) itself is intended as kamma-phala, and that is not present for them.

5. Sāvajjasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Sāvajjasutta Interpretation

135.Pañcame paṭhamo andhabālaputhujjano, dutiyo antarantarā kusalakārako lokiyaputhujjano, tatiyo sotāpanno, sakadāgāmianāgāminopi eteneva saṅgahitā. Catuttho khīṇāsavo. So hi ekanteneva anavajjo.

135. In the fifth [sutta], the first is a blind, ignorant worldling; the second is a worldling who occasionally does wholesome deeds; the third is a sotāpanna, and sakadāgāmins and anāgāmins are included by this same [category]. The fourth is a khīṇāsava. For he is entirely blameless.

6-7. Sīlasuttādivaṇṇanā
6-7. Sīlasuttādi Interpretation

136-137.Chaṭṭhe paṭhamo lokiyamahājano, dutiyo sukkhavipassako sotāpanno ca sakadāgāmī ca, tatiyo anāgāmī. So hi yasmā taṅkhaṇikampi upapattinimittakaṃ jhānaṃ paṭilabhatiyeva, tasmā sukkhavipassakopi samādhismiṃ paripūrakārīyeva. Catuttho khīṇāsavoyeva. So hi sabbesaṃ sīlādipaccanīkānaṃ pahīnattā sabbattha paripūrakārī nāma. Sattamepi chaṭṭhe vuttanayeneva puggalaparicchedo veditabbo.

136-137. In the sixth [sutta], the first is the ordinary worldling; the second is a sukkhavipassaka, a sotāpanna, and a sakadāgāmin; the third is an anāgāmin. Since he definitely obtains even momentary jhāna that is the cause for rebirth, therefore even a sukkhavipassaka is a fulfiller in samādhi. The fourth is only a khīṇāsava. Since all opposites to sīla, etc., are abandoned by him, he is called a fulfiller in all ways. In the seventh [sutta] also, the distinction of persons should be understood in the same way as stated in the sixth.

8. Nikaṭṭhasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Nikaṭṭhasutta Interpretation

138.Aṭṭhamenikaṭṭhakāyoti niggatakāyo.Anikaṭṭhacittoti anupaviṭṭhacitto. Kāyeneva gāmato nikkhanto, cittena araññe vasantopi gāmameva paviṭṭhoti vuttaṃ hoti. Iminā nayena sabbattha attho veditabbo.

138. In the eighth [sutta], nikaṭṭhakāyo means one whose body is despised (niggatakāyo). Anikaṭṭhacitto means one whose mind is not settled (anupaviṭṭhacitto). It is said that one who has left the village in body, but dwells in the forest with his mind, has indeed entered the village. In this way, the meaning should be understood everywhere.

9. Dhammakathikasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Dhammakathikasutta Interpretation

139.Navameasahitanti atthena asaṃyuttaṃ.Na kusalā hotīti na chekā hoti.Sahitāsahitassāti atthanissitassa vā anissitassa vā. Evaṃ sabbattha attho veditabbo.

139. In the ninth [sutta], asahitaṃ means not connected with the meaning. Na kusalā hoti means not skilled. Sahitāsahitassa means dependent on meaning or not dependent. Thus, the meaning should be understood everywhere.

10. Vādīsuttavaṇṇanā
10. Vādīsutta Interpretation

140.Dasameatthato pariyādānaṃ gacchatīti aṭṭhakathaṃ pucchito pariyādānaṃ parikkhayaṃ gacchati, kathetuṃ na sakkoti.No byañjanatoti byañjanaṃ panassa pavattati na pariyādiyati. Eseva nayo sabbatthāti.

140. In the tenth [sutta], atthato pariyādānaṃ gacchati means when asked about the meaning, he goes to exhaustion, is not able to speak. No byañjanato means the wording proceeds for him, it does not become exhausted. This same method [applies] everywhere.

(15) 5. Ābhāvaggo

(15) 5. Ābhāvaggo

1. Ābhāsuttavaṇṇanā
1. Ābhāsutta Interpretation

141.Pañcamassa paṭhame ābhāsanavasena candovacandābhā. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo.

141. In the first [sutta] of the fifth, like the moon in terms of shining, candābhā (moon-shining). The same method applies in the remaining passages.

2-5. Pabhāsuttādivaṇṇanā
2-5. Pabhāsuttādi Interpretation

142-145.Dutiyādīsupi pabhāsanavasena candovacandappabhā. Ālokanavasena candovacandāloko. Obhāsanavasena candovacandobhāso. Pajjotanavasena candovacandapajjototi. Evaṃ sabbapadesupi attho veditabbo.

142-145. In the second [sutta] and so on, like the moon in terms of radiance, candappabhā (moon-radiance). Like the moon in terms of light, candāloko (moon-light). Like the moon in terms of illumination, candobhāso (moon-illumination). Like the moon in terms of brightness, candapajjoto (moon-brightness). Thus, the meaning should be understood in all passages.

6. Paṭhamakālasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Paṭhamakālasutta Interpretation

146.Chaṭṭhekālāti yuttappayuttakālā.Kālena dhammassavananti yuttappayuttakāle dhammassavanaṃ.Dhammasākacchāti pañhapucchanavissajjanavasena pavattā saṃsandanakathā.

146. In the sixth [sutta], kālā means suitable and unsuitable times. Kālena dhammassavanaṃ means hearing the Dhamma at suitable and unsuitable times. Dhammasākacchā means conversation that proceeds in terms of question and answer, friendly discussion.

7. Dutiyakālasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Dutiyakālasutta Interpretation

147.Sattamekālāti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ kāle dhammassavanādivasena pavattānaṃ kusaladhammānaṃ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Te bhāviyanti ceva anuparivattiyanti ca.Āsavānaṃkhayanti arahattaṃ. Aṭṭhamaṃ uttānatthameva.

147. In the seventh [sutta], kālā is a designation for the wholesome qualities that proceed at various times in terms of hearing the Dhamma, etc. They are developed and repeatedly practiced. Āsavānaṃ khaya means arahatship. The eighth [sutta] is of obvious meaning.

9-10. Sucaritasuttādivaṇṇanā
9-10. Sucaritasuttādi Interpretation

149-150.Navamesaṇhā vācāti mudukavācā.Mantabhāsāti mantasaṅkhātāya paññāya paricchinditvā kathitakathā. Dasamesīlasāroti sārasampāpakaṃ sīlaṃ. Sesesupi eseva nayo.

149-150. In the ninth [sutta], saṇhā vācā means gentle speech. Mantabhāsā means speech uttered after discerning with wisdom called manta. In the tenth [sutta], sīlasāro means morality that leads to the essence. The same method [applies] in the remaining [passages].

4. Catutthapaṇṇāsakaṃ

4. Catutthapaṇṇāsakaṃ

(16) 1. Indriyavaggo

(16) 1. Indriyavaggo

1. Indriyasuttādivaṇṇanā
1. Indriyasuttādi Interpretation

151.Catutthassa paṭhame saddhādhurena indaṭṭhaṃ karotītisaddhindriyaṃ. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Dutiye assaddhiye akampanaṭṭhenasaddhābalaṃ. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Tatiyeanavajjabalanti niddosabalaṃ.Saṅgahabalanti saṅgaṇhitabbayuttakānaṃ saṅgaṇhanabalaṃ. Catutthapañcamāni uttānāneva.

151. In the first [sutta] of the fourth, saddhindriyaṃ is that which performs the function of dominating (indaṭṭhaṃ karoti) with faith as its authority (saddhādhurena). The same method applies in the remaining [passages]. In the second [sutta], saddhābalaṃ is the power of faith in the sense of being unshakable with regard to faithlessness (assaddhiye akampanaṭṭhena). The same method applies in the remaining [passages]. In the third [sutta], anavajjabalaṃ means blameless power; saṅgahabalaṃ means the power to gather what is appropriate to be gathered. The fourth and fifth [suttas] are obvious in meaning according to the Pāḷi itself.

6. Kappasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Kappasutta Interpretation

156.Chaṭṭhesaṃvaṭṭatīti etthatayo saṃvaṭṭāāposaṃvaṭṭo, tejosaṃvaṭṭo, vāyosaṃvaṭṭoti.Tisso saṃvaṭṭasīmāābhassarā, subhakiṇhā, vehapphalāti. Yadā kappo tejena saṃvaṭṭati, ābhassarato heṭṭhā agginā ḍayhati. Yadā āpena saṃvaṭṭati, subhakiṇhato heṭṭhā udakena vilīyati. Yadā vātena saṃvaṭṭati, vehapphalato heṭṭhā vātena viddhaṃsati. Vitthārato pana sadāpi ekaṃ buddhakkhettaṃ vinassati. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthārakathā pana visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 2.403-404 ādayo) vuttanayeneva veditabbā.

156. In the sixth [sutta], in saṃvaṭṭatī, there are three destructions (saṃvaṭṭā): destruction by water (āposaṃvaṭṭo), destruction by fire (tejosaṃvaṭṭo), and destruction by wind (vāyosaṃvaṭṭo). Three boundaries of destruction (saṃvaṭṭasīmā) [are]: Ābhassarā, Subhakiṇhā, and Vehapphalā. When the aeon is destroyed by fire, everything below Ābhassarā is burned by fire. When it is destroyed by water, everything below Subhakiṇhā is dissolved by water. When it is destroyed by wind, everything below Vehapphalā is shattered by wind. In detail, however, always one Buddha-field is destroyed. This is a summary here, but the detailed account should be understood in the same way as stated in the Visuddhimagga (Visuddhi. 2.403-404, etc.).

7. Rogasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Rogasutta Interpretation

157.Sattamevighātavāti mahicchāpaccayena vighātena dukkhena samannāgato.Asantuṭṭhoti catūsu paccayesu tīhi santosehi asantuṭṭho.Anavaññappaṭilābhāyāti parehi anavajānanassa paṭilābhatthāya.Lābhasakkārasilokappaṭilābhāyāti susaṅkhatacatupaccayasaṅkhātassa lābhasakkārassa ceva vaṇṇabhaṇanasaṅkhātassa silokassa ca paṭilābhatthāya.Saṅkhāya kulāni upasaṅkamatīti ‘‘iti maṃ ete jānissantī’’ti jānanatthāya kulāni upasaṅkamati. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo.

157. In the seventh [sutta], vighātavā means endowed with suffering due to frustration (vighāta) caused by great desire (mahicchāpaccayena). Asantuṭṭho means not content with three of the four requisites. Anavaññappaṭilābhāyā means for the sake of gaining non-disrespect from others. Lābhasakkārasilokappaṭilābhāyā means for the sake of gaining gain and honor consisting of the well-prepared four requisites, as well as praise consisting of reciting virtues. Saṅkhāya kulāni upasaṅkamatī means he approaches families for the sake of their knowing him, thinking, "These will know me." The same method applies in the remaining passages.

8. Parihānisuttavaṇṇanā
8. Parihānisutta Interpretation

158.Aṭṭhamegambhīresūti atthagambhīresu.Ṭhānāṭhānesūti kāraṇākāraṇesu.Na kamatīti nāvagāhati nappavattati.Paññācakkhūti ettha uggahaparipucchāpaññāpi vaṭṭati, sammasanappaṭivedhapaññāpi vaṭṭatiyeva.

158. In the eighth [sutta], gambhīresū means in profound meanings. Ṭhānāṭhānesū means in causes and non-causes. Na kamatī means he does not penetrate, he does not engage. Paññācakkhū means here, the wisdom of learning and questioning also applies, and the wisdom of reviewing and penetrating definitely applies.

9. Bhikkhunīsuttavaṇṇanā
9. Bhikkhunīsutta Interpretation

159.Navameehi tvanti there paṭibaddhacittā taṃ pahiṇituṃ evamāha.Sasīsaṃ pārupitvāti saha sīsena kāyaṃ pārupitvā.Mañcake nipajjīti vegena mañcakaṃ paññāpetvā tattha nipajji.Etadavocāti tassākāraṃ sallakkhetvā lobhappahānatthāya saṇheneva asubhakathaṃ kathetuṃ etaṃ avoca.Āhārasambhūtoti āhārena sambhūto āhāraṃ nissāya vaḍḍhito.Āhāraṃ nissāya āhāraṃ pajahatīti paccuppannaṃ kabaḷīkārāhāraṃ nissāya taṃ evaṃ yoniso sevamāno pubbakammasaṅkhātaṃ āhāraṃ pajahati. Paccuppannepi pana kabaḷīkārāhāre nikantitaṇhā pajahitabbā.

159. In the ninth [sutta], ehi tvaṃ (come, you) is what she said to send him away, her mind being attached to the Thera. Sasīsaṃ pārupitvā means covering her body together with her head. Mañcake nipajjī means quickly preparing a bed and lying down there. Etadavocā means, observing her appearance and in order to abandon her lust, he spoke this unlovely talk gently. Āhārasambhūto means born of food, grown relying on food. Āhāraṃ nissāya āhāraṃ pajahatī means relying on present physical food, and attending to it wisely in this way, he abandons food consisting of past kamma. However, craving for present physical food should also be abandoned.

Taṇhaṃ pajahatīti idāni evaṃ pavattaṃ paccuppannataṇhaṃ nissāya vaṭṭamūlikaṃ pubbataṇhaṃ pajahati. Ayaṃ pana paccuppannataṇhā kusalā akusalāti? Akusalā. Sevitabbā na sevitabbāti? Sevitabbā. Paṭisandhiṃ ākaḍḍhati nākaḍḍhatīti? Nākaḍḍhati. Etissāpi pana paccuppannāya sevitabbataṇhāya nikanti pajahitabbāyeva.So hi nāma āyasmā āsavānaṃ khayā upasampajja viharissati, kimaṅgaṃ panāhanti etthakimaṅgaṃ panāti kāraṇaparivitakkanametaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – so āyasmā arahattaphalaṃ sacchikatvā viharissati, ahaṃ kena kāraṇena na sacchikatvā viharissāmi. Sopi hi āyasmā sammāsambuddhasseva putto, ahampi sammāsambuddhasseva putto, mayhampetaṃ uppajjissatīti.Mānaṃ nissāyāti idaṃ evaṃ uppannasevitabbamānaṃ nissāya.Mānaṃpajahatīti vaṭṭamūlakaṃ pubbamānaṃ pajahati. Yaṃ nissāya panesa taṃ pajahati, sopi taṇhā viya akusalo ceva sevitabbo ca, no ca paṭisandhiṃ ākaḍḍhati. Nikanti pana tasmimpi pajahitabbāva.

Taṇhaṃ pajahatī means now, relying on present craving that is occurring in this way, he abandons past craving that is the root of the round [of rebirths]. Now, is this present craving skillful or unskillful? Unskillful. Should it be cultivated or not cultivated? It should be cultivated. Does it draw rebirth or not draw rebirth? It does not draw rebirth. However, the attachment to this present craving that should be cultivated must definitely be abandoned. So hi nāma āyasmā āsavānaṃ khayā upasampajja viharissati, kimaṅgaṃ panāhaṃ means here, kimaṅgaṃ panā (what then) is a consideration of a reason. This is what is said: That venerable one will realize the fruit of arahatship and dwell [in it]; for what reason will I not realize it and dwell [in it]? That venerable one also is a son of the truly enlightened Buddha, and I also am a son of the truly enlightened Buddha; this will arise for me also. Mānaṃ nissāyā means relying on the pride that has arisen in this way and should be cultivated. Mānaṃ pajahatī means he abandons past pride that is the root of the round [of rebirths]. That upon which he relies to abandon that [pride], that also, like craving, is unskillful and should be cultivated, but it does not draw rebirth. However, attachment must be abandoned in that also.

Setughātovutto bhagavatāti padaghāto paccayaghāto buddhena bhagavatā kathito. Iti imehi catūhi aṅgehi there desanaṃ vinivaṭṭente tassā bhikkhuniyā theraṃ ārabbha uppanno chandarāgo apagañchi. Sāpi theraṃ khamāpetuṃ accayaṃ desesi, theropissā paṭiggaṇhi. Taṃ dassetuṃatha kho sā bhikkhunītiādi vuttaṃ.

Setughāto vutto bhagavatā means the destruction of the bridge (padaghāto) [or] the destruction of the condition (paccayaghāto) was spoken by the Blessed One. Thus, with these four factors, as the Thera turned back the teaching, the passion and lust that had arisen in that bhikkhuni with regard to the Thera disappeared. She also confessed her offense to the Thera, asking for forgiveness, and the Thera also accepted it from her. To show that, atha kho sā bhikkhunī (then that bhikkhuni), etc., was said.

10. Sugatavinayasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Sugatavinayasutta Interpretation

160.Dasameduggahitanti uppaṭipāṭiyā gahitaṃ.Pariyāpuṇantīti vaḷañjenti kathenti.Padabyañjanehīti ettha padameva atthassa byañjanato byañjananti vuttaṃ.Dunnikkhittassāti duṭṭhu nikkhittassa uppaṭipāṭiyā ṭhapitassa.Atthopi dunnayo hotīti aṭṭhakathā nīharitvā kathetuṃ na sakkā hoti.Chinnamūlakoti mūlabhūtānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ upacchinnattā chinnamūlako.Appaṭisaraṇoti appatiṭṭho.Bāhulikāti paccayabāhullāya paṭipannā.Sāthalikāti tisso sikkhā sithilaggahaṇena gaṇhanakā.Okkamanepubbaṅgamāti pañca nīvaraṇāni avagamanato okkamananti vuccanti, tattha pubbaṅgamāti attho.Paviveketi tividhe viveke.Nikkhittadhurāti nibbīriyā. Iminā nayena pana sabbattha attho veditabbo.

160. In the tenth [sutta], duggahitaṃ means grasped in the wrong order. Pariyāpuṇantī means they recite, they speak. Padabyañjanehī means here, the word itself is said to be the expression (byañjanato) of the meaning. Dunnikkhittassā means of what is badly placed, placed in the wrong order. Atthopi dunnayo hotī means it is not possible to bring out and speak the commentary. Chinnamūlako means with the root cut off, since the fundamental bhikkhus are cut off. Appaṭisaraṇo means without support. Bāhulikā means those who are committed to abundance of requisites. Sāthalikā means those who take up the three trainings with a loose grasp. Okkamane pubbaṅgamā means the five hindrances are called overcoming (okkamana) because of overcoming, foremost in that [overcoming] is the meaning. Paviveke means in the three kinds of seclusion. Nikkhittadhurā means without effort. However, in this way, the meaning should be understood everywhere.

(17) 2. Paṭipadāvaggo

(17) 2. Paṭipadāvaggo

1. Saṃkhittasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Saṃkhittasutta Interpretation

161.Dutiyassa paṭhame sukhapaṭikkhepena dukkhā paṭipajjitabbato paṭipadā etissātidukkhāpaṭipadā. Asīghappavattitāya garubhāvena dandhā abhiññā etissātidandhābhiññā. Imināva nayena sabbapadesu attho veditabbo.

161. In the first [sutta] of the second [vagga], dukkhāpaṭipadā [means] the practice is difficult because one must practice with the rejection of ease. Dandhābhiññā [means] slow in direct knowledge because of its heaviness due to its not proceeding quickly. In this same way, the meaning should be understood in all passages.

2. Vitthārasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Vitthārasutta Interpretation

162.Dutiyeabhikkhaṇanti abhiṇhaṃ.Ānantariyanti anantaravipākadāyakaṃ maggasamādhiṃ.Āsavānaṃ khayāyāti arahattaphalatthāya.Pañcindriyānīti vipassanāpañcamakāni pañcindriyāni.Paññindriyanti hi ettha vipassanāpaññāva paññindriyanti adhippetaṃ. Sesamettha pāḷivasena uttānameva.

162. In the second [sutta], abhikkhaṇaṃ means frequently. Ānantariyaṃ means concentration of the path giving immediate result. Āsavānaṃ khayāyā means for the sake of the fruit of arahatship. Pañcindriyānī means the five faculties with insight as the fifth. Here, only insight-wisdom is intended as the faculty of wisdom (paññindriya). The rest here is obvious according to the Pāḷi itself.

Imāsaṃ pana paṭipadānaṃ ayaṃ āvibhāvakathā – idha bhikkhu pubbe akatābhiniveso pubbabhāge rūpapariggahe kilamati, arūpapariggahe kilamati, paccayapariggahe kilamati, tīsu addhāsu kilamati, maggāmagge kilamati. Evaṃ pañcasu ṭhānesu kilamanto vipassanaṃ pāpuṇāti. Vipassanaṃ patvāpi udayabbayānupassane, bhaṅgānupassane, bhayatupaṭṭhāne, ādīnavānupassane, nibbidānupassane, muccitukamyatāñāṇe, saṅkhārupekkhāñāṇe, anulomañāṇe, gotrabhuñāṇeti imesu navasu vipassanāñāṇesupi kilamitvāva lokuttaramaggaṃ pāpuṇāti. Tassa so lokuttaramaggo evaṃ dukkhena garubhāvena sacchikatattā dukkhapaṭipado dandhābhiñño nāma jāto. Yo pana pubbabhāge pañcasu ñāṇesu kilamanto aparabhāge navasu vipassanāñāṇesu akilamitvāva maggaṃ sacchikaroti, tassa so maggo evaṃ dukkhena agarubhāvena sacchikatattā dukkhapaṭipado khippābhiñño nāma jāto. Iminā upāyena itarāpi dve veditabbā.

Now, this is the manifestation story of these practices: Here, a bhikkhu, without previous strong inclination, toils in the preliminary part in comprehending form, toils in comprehending the formless, toils in comprehending conditions, toils in the three times, toils in the path and non-path. Thus, while toiling in the five places, he attains insight. Even having attained insight, he attains the supramundane path only after toiling in the nine insight knowledges: knowledge of rise and fall, knowledge of dissolution, the appearance as terror, the contemplation of drawbacks, the contemplation of disenchantment, the desire for deliverance, knowledge of equanimity about formations, adaptation knowledge, and lineage-breaking knowledge. Because that supramundane path of his is realized with difficulty and heaviness in this way, it is called a difficult practice with slow direct knowledge. But for one who, toiling in the five knowledges in the preliminary part, realizes the path without toiling in the nine insight knowledges in the subsequent part, that path of his, because it is realized with difficulty and without heaviness in this way, is called a difficult practice with quick direct knowledge. In this way, the other two should also be understood.

Goṇapariyesakaupamāhi cetā vibhāvetabbā – ekassa hi purisassa cattāro goṇā palāyitvā aṭaviṃ paviṭṭhā. So sakaṇṭake sagahane vane te pariyesanto gahanamaggeneva kicchena kasirena gantvā gahanaṭṭhāneyeva nilīne goṇepi kicchena kasirena addasa. Eko kicchena gantvā abbhokāse ṭhite khippameva addasa. Aparo abbhokāsamaggena sukhena gantvā gahanaṭṭhāne nilīne kicchena kasirena addasa. Aparo abbhokāsamaggeneva sukhena gantvā abbhokāse ṭhiteyeva khippaṃ addasa. Tattha cattāro goṇā viya cattāro ariyamaggā daṭṭhabbā, goṇapariyesako puriso viya yogāvacaro, gahanamaggena kicchena kasirena gamanaṃ viya pubbabhāge pañcasu ñāṇesu kilamato dukkhāpaṭipadā. Gahanaṭṭhāne nilīnānaṃ kiccheneva dassanaṃ viya aparabhāge navasu ñāṇesu kilamantassa ariyamaggānaṃ dassanaṃ. Iminā upāyena sesaupamāpi yojetabbā.

These should be understood through the simile of the search for oxen: A certain man had four oxen that ran away and entered a forest. While searching for them in the thorny and dense woods, he proceeded with difficulty and hardship along a dense path, and he saw the oxen hidden in the dense area with difficulty and hardship. One, after proceeding with difficulty, saw one standing in an open space very quickly. Another, after proceeding easily along an open path, saw one hidden in a dense area with difficulty and hardship. Another, after proceeding easily along an open path, quickly saw one standing in an open space. Here, the four Ariya Paths should be seen as the four oxen, the man searching for the oxen as the yogi, proceeding with difficulty and hardship along a dense path as the painful practice while struggling with the five knowledges in the preliminary stage. Seeing those hidden in a dense place with difficulty as seeing the Ariya Paths of one struggling with the nine knowledges in the later stage. The remaining similes should also be applied in this way.

3. Asubhasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Asubha Sutta Commentary

163.Tatiyeasubhānupassī kāye viharatīti attano karajakāye ‘‘yathā etaṃ, tathā ida’’nti iminā nayena bahiddhā diṭṭhānaṃ dasannaṃ asubhānaṃ upasaṃharaṇavasena asubhānupassī viharati, attano kāyaṃ asubhato paṭikūlato ñāṇena passatīti attho.Āhāre paṭikūlasaññīti navannaṃ pāṭikulyānaṃ vasena kabaḷīkārāhāre paṭikūlasaññī.Sabbaloke anabhiratisaññīti sabbasmimpi tedhātuke lokasannivāse anabhiratāya ukkaṇṭhitasaññāya samannāgato.Sabbasaṅkhāresu aniccānupassīti sabbepi tebhūmakasaṅkhāre aniccato anupassanto.Maraṇasaññāti maraṇaṃ ārabbha uppannasaññā.Ajjhattaṃ sūpaṭṭhitā hotīti niyakajjhatte suṭṭhu upaṭṭhitā hoti. Ettāvatā balavavipassanā kathitā.Sekhabalānīti sikkhanakānaṃ balāni. Sesamettha pāḷivasena uttānameva. ‘‘Asubhānupassī’’tiādīni pana dukkhāya paṭipadāya dassanatthaṃ vuttāni, paṭhamajjhānādīni sukhāya. Asubhādīni hi paṭikūlārammaṇāni, tesu pana pakatiyāva sampiyāyamānaṃ cittaṃ allīyati. Tasmā tāni bhāvento dukkhapaṭipadaṃ paṭipanno nāma hoti. Paṭhamajjhānādīni paṇītasukhāni, tasmā tāni paṭipanno sukhapaṭipadaṃ paṭipanno nāma hoti.

163. In the third, dwells contemplating the repulsiveness of the body: He dwells contemplating the repulsiveness of his own body composed of the elements, in the manner of "Just as this, so is that," by associating it with the ten kinds of repulsiveness seen externally. That is, he sees his own body as repulsive with knowledge. Perceiving repulsiveness in food: Perceiving repulsiveness in morsel food based on the nine kinds of repulsiveness. Perceiving non-delight in the entire world: Endowed with a perception of non-delight, a longing, in the entire threefold world. Contemplating impermanence in all conditioned things: Contemplating impermanence in all conditioned things in the three realms. Perception of death: Perception arisen in connection with death. Is well-established internally: Is well-established in his own self. So far, strong Vipassanā has been described. Powers of one in training: The powers of one who is training. The rest here is clear in meaning according to the Pali. However, "contemplating the repulsive" and so on are stated for the purpose of showing the painful path, while the first Jhāna and so on are for the pleasant path. Indeed, the contemplation of the repulsive and so on have repulsive objects, but the mind naturally clings to them, being fond of them. Therefore, one who cultivates them is said to have undertaken a painful practice. The first Jhāna and so on are refined and pleasant, therefore, one who undertakes them is said to have undertaken a pleasant practice.

Ayaṃ panettha sabbasādhāraṇā upamā – saṅgāmāvacarapuriso hi phalakakoṭṭhakaṃ katvā pañcāvudhāni sannayhitvā saṅgāmaṃ pavisati, so antarā vissamitukāmo phalakakoṭṭhakaṃ pavisitvā vissamati ceva pānabhojanādīni ca paṭisevati. Tato puna saṅgāmaṃ pavisitvā kammaṃ karoti. Tattha saṅgāmo viya kilesasaṅgāmo daṭṭhabbo, phalakakoṭṭhako viya pañcanissayabalāni, saṅgāmapavisanapuriso viya yogāvacaro, pañcāvudhasannāho viya vipassanāpañcamāni indriyāni, saṅgāmaṃ pavisanakālo viya vipassanāya kammakaraṇakālo, vissamitukāmassa phalakakoṭṭhakaṃ pavisitvā vissamanapānabhojanāni paṭisevanakālo viya vipassanāya kammaṃ karontassa cittuppādassa nirassādakkhaṇe pañca balāni nissāya cittaṃ sampahaṃsanakālo, vissamitvā khāditvā pivitvā ca puna saṅgāmassa pavisanakālo viya pañcahi balehi cittaṃ sampahaṃsetvā puna vipassanāya kammaṃ karontassa vivaṭṭetvā arahattaggahaṇakālo veditabbo. Imasmiṃ pana sutte balāni ceva indriyāni ca missakāneva kathitānīti.

Here is a simile applicable to all: A warrior makes a shield and fortress, puts on five weapons, and enters the battle. He wishes to rest in between, enters the shield and fortress, rests, and enjoys drinks and food. Then, he re-enters the battle and does his duty. Here, the battle should be seen as the battle of defilements, the shield and fortress as the five powers based on faith, the warrior entering the battle as the yogi, the putting on of the five weapons as the five faculties with Vipassanā as the fifth, the time of entering the battle as the time of doing the work of Vipassanā, the time of entering the shield and fortress to rest and enjoy drinks and food as the time when the mind rejoices, relying on the five powers, when the mind of Vipassanā has no taste, and the time of resting, eating, and drinking and then re-entering the battle as the time of reviewing and grasping Arahatta, when the mind, rejoiced by the five powers, is again doing the work of Vipassanā. However, in this sutta, both the powers and the faculties are spoken of in a mixed manner.

4. Paṭhamakhamasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Pathama Khama Sutta Commentary

164.Catuttheakkhamāti anadhivāsikapaṭipadā.Khamāti adhivāsikapaṭipadā.Damāti indriyadamanapaṭipadā.Samāti akusalavitakkānaṃ vūpasamanapaṭipadā.Rosantaṃ paṭirosatīti ghaṭṭentaṃ paṭighaṭṭeti.Bhaṇḍantaṃpaṭibhaṇḍatīti paharantaṃ paṭipaharati. Pañcamachaṭṭhāni uttānatthāneva.

164. In the fourth, akkhamā: is the practice of non-endurance. Khamā: is the practice of endurance. Damā: is the practice of taming the senses. Samā: is the practice of calming unwholesome thoughts. Retaliates against one who is angry: Retaliates against one who strikes. Retaliates against one who disputes: retaliates against one who strikes. The fifth and sixth are clear in meaning.

7. Mahāmoggallānasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Mahā Moggallāna Sutta Commentary

167.Sattame mahāmoggallānattherassa heṭṭhimā tayo maggā sukhapaṭipadā dandhābhiññā ahesuṃ, arahattamaggo dukkhapaṭipado khippābhiñño. Tasmā evamāha – ‘‘yāyaṃ paṭipadā dukkhā khippābhiññā, imaṃ me paṭipadaṃ āgamma anupādāya āsavehi cittaṃ vimutta’’nti.

167. In the seventh, for the Venerable Mahā Moggallāna, the lower three paths were the pleasant practice with slow Abhiññā, the Arahatta Path was the painful practice with quick Abhiññā. Therefore, he said thus: "By resorting to this practice, which is painful and with quick Abhiññā, my mind is liberated from the Āsavas without clinging."

8. Sāriputtasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Sāriputta Sutta Commentary

168.Aṭṭhame dhammasenāpatittherassa heṭṭhimā tayo maggā sukhapaṭipadā dandhābhiññā, arahattamaggo sukhapaṭipado khippābhiñño. Tasmā ‘‘yāyaṃ paṭipadā sukhā khippābhiññā’’ti āha. Imesu pana dvīsupi suttesu missikāva paṭipadā kathitāti veditabbā.

168. In the eighth, for the Venerable Dhammasenāpati, the lower three paths were the pleasant practice with slow Abhiññā, the Arahatta Path was the pleasant practice with quick Abhiññā. Therefore, he said: "This is the practice that is pleasant and with quick Abhiññā." However, in both of these suttas, it should be understood that the practice is spoken of in a mixed manner.

9. Sasaṅkhārasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Sasaṅkhāra Sutta Commentary

169.Navame paṭhamadutiyapuggalā sukkhavipassakā sasaṅkhārena sappayogena saṅkhāranimittaṃ upaṭṭhapenti. Tesu eko vipassanindriyānaṃ balavattā idheva kilesaparinibbānena parinibbāyati, eko indriyānaṃ dubbalatāya idha asakkonto anantare attabhāve tadeva mūlakammaṭṭhānaṃ paṭilabhitvā sasaṅkhārena sappayogena saṅkhāranimittaṃ upaṭṭhapetvā kilesaparinibbānena parinibbāyati, tatiyacatutthā samathayānikā. Tesaṃ eko asaṅkhārena appayogena indriyānaṃ balavattā idheva kilese khepeti, eko indriyānaṃ dubbalattā idha asakkonto anantare attabhāve tadeva mūlakammaṭṭhānaṃ paṭilabhitvā asaṅkhārena appayogena kilese khepetīti veditabbo.

169. In the ninth, the first and second individuals are dry-insight practitioners who establish the sign of conditioned things with effort and application (sasaṅkhārena sappayogena). Among them, one, due to the strength of the faculties of Vipassanā, attains final Nibbāna in this very life by the extinction of defilements; one, unable to do so in this life due to the weakness of the faculties, attains the same root meditation in a subsequent existence, and having established the sign of conditioned things with effort and application (sasaṅkhārena sappayogena), attains final Nibbāna by the extinction of defilements. The third and fourth are those who take serenity as their vehicle (samathayānikā). Among them, one, without effort and application (asaṅkhārena appayogena), eradicates the defilements in this very life due to the strength of the faculties; one, unable to do so in this life due to the weakness of the faculties, attains the same root meditation in a subsequent existence, and having eradicated the defilements without effort and application (asaṅkhārena appayogena), should be understood.

10. Yuganaddhasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Yuganaddha Sutta Commentary

170.Dasamesamathapubbaṅgamanti samathaṃ pubbaṅgamaṃ purecārikaṃ katvā.Maggo sañjāyatīti paṭhamo lokuttaramaggo nibbattati.Sotaṃ magganti ekacittakkhaṇikamaggassa āsevanādīni nāma natthi, dutiyamaggādayo pana uppādento tameva āsevati bhāveti bahulīkarotīti vuccati.Vipassanāpubbaṅgamanti vipassanaṃ pubbaṅgamaṃ purecārikaṃ katvā samathaṃ bhāveti, pakatiyā vipassanālābhī vipassanāya ṭhatvā samādhiṃ uppādetīti attho.

170. In the tenth, samatha pubbaṅgama: Having serenity as the forerunner, as the pre-cursor. Maggo sañjāyati: The first supramundane path arises. So taṃ magga: There is no practice of cultivating the single-moment path, but when producing the second path and so on, it is said that he cultivates, develops, and frequently practices that very path. Vipassanā pubbaṅgama: Having Vipassanā as the forerunner, as the pre-cursor, he develops serenity, that is, one who naturally gains Vipassanā, having stood in Vipassanā, produces samādhi.

Yuganaddhaṃ bhāvetīti yuganaddhaṃ katvā bhāveti. Tattha teneva cittena samāpattiṃ samāpajjitvā teneva saṅkhāre sammasituṃ na sakkā. Ayaṃ pana yāvatā samāpattiyo samāpajjati, tāvatā saṅkhāre sammasati. Yāvatā saṅkhāre sammasati, tāvatā samāpattiyo samāpajjati. Kathaṃ? Paṭhamajjhānaṃ samāpajjati, tato vuṭṭhāya saṅkhāre sammasati, saṅkhāre sammasitvā dutiyajjhānaṃ samāpajjati. Tato vuṭṭhāya puna saṅkhāre sammasati. Saṅkhāre sammasitvā tatiyajjhānaṃ…pe… nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattiṃ samāpajjati, tato vuṭṭhāya saṅkhāre sammasati. Evamayaṃ samathavipassanaṃ yuganaddhaṃ bhāveti nāma.

Yuganaddhaṃ bhāveti: Develops by making it yoked together. Here, it is not possible to enter into samāpatti with the same mind and contemplate conditioned things with that same mind. But as much as he enters into samāpattis, so much does he contemplate conditioned things. As much as he contemplates conditioned things, so much does he enter into samāpattis. How? He enters the first Jhāna, then, rising from it, he contemplates conditioned things, having contemplated conditioned things, he enters the second Jhāna. Then, rising from it, he again contemplates conditioned things. Having contemplated conditioned things, the third Jhāna…pe… he enters the samāpatti of the realm of neither-perception-nor-non-perception, then, rising from it, he contemplates conditioned things. In this way, he is said to develop serenity and Vipassanā yoked together.

Dhammuddhaccaviggahitanti samathavipassanādhammesu dasavipassanupakkilesasaṅkhātena uddhaccena viggahitaṃ, suggahitanti attho.So, āvuso, samayoti iminā sattannaṃ sappāyānaṃ paṭilābhakālo kathito.Yaṃ taṃ cittanti yasmiṃ samaye taṃ vipassanāvīthiṃ okkamitvā pavattaṃ cittaṃ.Ajjhattamevasantiṭṭhatīti vipassanāvīthiṃ paccottharitvā tasmiṃyeva gocarajjhattasaṅkhāte ārammaṇe santiṭṭhati.Sannisīdatīti ārammaṇavasena sammā nisīdati.Ekodi hotīti ekaggaṃ hoti.Samādhiyatīti sammā ādhiyati suṭṭhapitaṃ hoti. Sesamettha uttānatthameva.

Dhammuddhacca viggahita: Disrupted by distraction (uddhacca) in the Dhammas of serenity and Vipassanā, in the sense of the ten imperfections of Vipassanā, that is, well-grasped. So, āvuso, samayo: By this, the time of gaining the seven suitable conditions has been spoken of. Yaṃ taṃ citta: At which time, that mind, having descended into the Vipassanā process, having occurred. Ajjhattameva santiṭṭhati: Having withdrawn from the Vipassanā process, it stands firmly on that same object known as the internal realm. Sannisīdati: Sits down well in relation to the object. Ekodi hoti: Becomes one-pointed. Samādhiyati: Is well-established, well-placed. The rest here is clear in meaning.

(18) 3. Sañcetaniyavaggo

(18) 3. Sañcetanīya Vagga

1. Cetanāsuttavaṇṇanā
1. Cetanā Sutta Commentary

171.Tatiyassa paṭhamekāyeti kāyadvāre, kāyaviññattiyā satīti attho.Kāyasañcetanāhetūtiādīsu kāyasañcetanā nāma kāyadvāre cetanā pakappanā. Sā aṭṭha kāmāvacarakusalavasena aṭṭhavidhā, akusalavasena dvādasavidhāti vīsatividhā. Tathā vacīsañcetanā, tathā manosañcetanā. Apicettha nava mahaggatacetanāpi labbhanti.Kāyasañcetanāhetūti kāyasañcetanāpaccayā.Uppajjati ajjhattaṃ sukhadukkhanti aṭṭhakusalakammapaccayā niyakajjhatte sukhaṃ uppajjati, dvādasaakusalakammapaccayā dukkhaṃ. Sesadvāresupi eseva nayo.Avijjāpaccayāvāti avijjākāraṇeneva. Sace hi avijjā chādayamānā paccayo hoti, evaṃ sante tīsu dvāresu sukhadukkhānaṃ paccayabhūtā cetanā uppajjati. Iti mūlabhūtāya avijjāya vasenetaṃ vuttaṃ.

171. In the third, in the first, kāye: In the body door, meaning with bodily intimation. In kāyasañcetanāhetū and so on, kāyasañcetanā (bodily intention) means intention, planning in the body door. That is eightfold in the sense of eight wholesome states of the desire realm, twelvefold in the sense of unwholesome states, thus twentyfold. Likewise, vacīsañcetanā (verbal intention), likewise manosañcetanā (mental intention). Moreover, here nine great (mahaggata) intentions can also be obtained. Kāyasañcetanāhetū: Because of bodily intention. Uppajjati ajjhattaṃ sukhadukkha: Because of eight wholesome actions, happiness arises in one's own self, because of twelve unwholesome actions, suffering. The same method applies in the remaining doors. Avijjāpaccayāvā: Indeed, only because of ignorance. If ignorance, covering over, becomes a condition, then intention, being the cause of happiness and suffering in the three doors, arises. Thus, this is said in terms of ignorance, which is the root cause.

Sāmaṃ vātiādīsu parehi anāṇatto sayameva abhisaṅkharonto sāmaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ abhisaṅkharoti nāma. Yaṃ pana pare samādapetvā āṇāpetvā kārenti, tassa taṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ pare abhisaṅkharonti nāma. Yo pana kusalaṃ kusalanti akusalaṃ akusalanti kusalavipākaṃ kusalavipākoti akusalavipākaṃ akusalavipākoti jānanto kāyadvāre vīsatividhaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ abhisaṅkharoti, ayaṃ sampajāno abhisaṅkharoti nāma. Yo evaṃ ajānanto abhisaṅkharoti, ayaṃ asampajāno abhisaṅkharoti nāma. Sesadvāresupi eseva nayo.

In sāmaṃ vā and so on, he himself, not instructed by others, intentionally forms, that is, he himself intentionally forms bodily formations. But what others cause to be done by instructing and commanding, that is called others intentionally forming bodily formations. But whoever, knowing what is wholesome as wholesome, what is unwholesome as unwholesome, what is the result of wholesome as the result of wholesome, and what is the result of unwholesome as the result of unwholesome, intentionally forms twenty kinds of bodily formation in the body door, this one intentionally forms, knowing. Whoever intentionally forms without knowing thus, this one intentionally forms without knowing. The same method applies in the remaining doors.

Tattha asampajānakammaṃ evaṃ veditabbaṃ – daharadārakā ‘‘mātāpitūhi kataṃ karomā’’ti cetiyaṃ vandanti, pupphapūjaṃ karonti, bhikkhusaṅghaṃ vandanti, tesaṃ kusalanti ajānantānampi taṃ kusalameva hoti. Tathā migapakkhiādayo tiracchānā dhammaṃ suṇanti, saṅghaṃ vandanti, cetiyaṃ vandanti, tesaṃ jānantānampi ajānantānampi taṃ kusalameva hoti. Daharadārakā pana mātāpitaro hatthapādehi paharanti, bhikkhūnaṃ talasattikaṃ uggiranti, daṇḍaṃ khipanti, akkosanti. Gāviyo bhikkhusaṅghaṃ anubandhanti, sunakhā anubandhanti, ḍaṃsanti, sīhabyagghādayo anubandhanti, jīvitā voropenti. Tesaṃ jānantānampi ajānantānampi akusalakammaṃ hotīti veditabbaṃ.

Here, action done without knowing should be understood thus: young children worship a Cetiya saying "we do what our parents have done," they offer flowers, they worship the Saṅgha of monks, that is wholesome even for those who do not know that it is wholesome. Likewise, animals such as birds and beasts hear the Dhamma, worship the Saṅgha, worship a Cetiya, that is wholesome even for those who know and do not know. But young children strike their parents with their hands and feet, spew phlegm at the monks, throw sticks, and scold. Cows follow the Saṅgha of monks, dogs follow, bite, lions, tigers, and so on follow, deprive of life. That is unwholesome action for those who know and do not know.

Idāni tīsupi dvāresu āyūhanacetanā samodhānetabbā. Seyyathidaṃ – kāyadvāre sayaṃkatamūlikā vīsati cetanā, āṇattimūlikā vīsati, sampajānamūlikā vīsati, asampajānamūlikā vīsatīti asīti cetanā honti, tathā vacīdvāre. Manodvāre pana ekekasmimpi vikappe ekūnatiṃsa katvā satañca soḷasa ca honti. Iti sabbāpi tīsu dvāresu dve satāni chasattati ca cetanā. Tā sabbāpi saṅkhārakkhandhoteva saṅkhaṃ gacchanti, taṃsampayutto vedayitākāro vedanākkhandho, sañjānanākāro saññākkhandho, cittaṃ viññāṇakkhandho, kāyo upādārūpaṃ, tassa paccayā catasso dhātuyo cattāri bhūtānīti ime pañcakkhandhā dukkhasaccaṃ nāma.

Now, intention that accumulates (āyūhanacetanā) should be combined in all three doors. Namely: twenty intentions rooted in self-doing in the body door, twenty rooted in instruction, twenty rooted in knowing, twenty rooted in not knowing, thus there are eighty intentions, likewise in the verbal door. But in the mental door, making twenty-nine in each variation, there are one hundred and sixteen. Thus, in all three doors, there are two hundred and seventy-six intentions. All those go to the count as only the Saṅkhāra-khandha (aggregate of mental formations), the aspect of experiencing associated with that is the Vedanā-kkhandha (aggregate of feeling), the aspect of perceiving is the Saññā-kkhandha (aggregate of perception), the mind is the Viññāṇa-kkhandha (aggregate of consciousness), the body is upādārūpa (derived materiality), its conditions are the four elements, the four primary elements, thus these five aggregates are called Dukkha Sacca (the truth of suffering).

Imesu, bhikkhave, dhammesu avijjā anupatitāti imesu vuttappabhedesu cetanādhammesu avijjā sahajātavasena ca upanissayavasena ca anupatitā. Evaṃ vaṭṭañceva vaṭṭamūlikā ca avijjā dassitā hoti.

Imesu, bhikkhave, dhammesu avijjā anupatitā: In these Dhamma of intention with the distinctions mentioned, ignorance follows along with, by way of co-nascence and by way of decisive support. Thus, both the round of rebirths and ignorance, the root of the round, are shown.

avijjāyatveva asesavirāganirodhātiādimāha. Tatthaasesavirāganirodhāti asesavirāgena ceva asesanirodhena ca.So kāyo na hotīti khīṇāsavassa kāyena karaṇakammaṃ paññāyati, cetiyaṅgaṇasammajjanaṃ bodhiyaṅgaṇasammajjanaṃ abhikkamanaṃ paṭikkamanaṃ vattānuvattakaraṇanti evamādi. Kāyadvāre panassa vīsati cetanā avipākadhammataṃ āpajjanti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘so kāyo na hoti, yaṃ paccayāssa taṃ uppajjati ajjhattaṃ sukhadukkha’’nti. Kāyadvārappavattā hi cetanā idha kāyoti adhippetā. Sesadvayepi eseva nayo.Khettantiādīnipi kusalākusalakammasseva nāmāni. Tañhi vipākassa viruhanaṭṭhānaṭṭhena khettaṃ, patiṭṭhānaṭṭhena vatthu, kāraṇaṭṭhena āyatanaṃ, adhikaraṇaṭṭhena adhikaraṇanti vuccati.

avijjāyatveva asesavirāganirodhātiādi (but with the remainderless fading away and cessation of ignorance) he said. Here, asesavirāganirodhā: By remainderless fading away and remainderless cessation. So kāyo na hoti: For one with destroyed Āsavas, action to be done with the body is known, such as sweeping the Cetiya courtyard, sweeping the Bodhi courtyard, going forward, going back, doing habitual duties, and so on. But twenty intentions in the body door attain the state of being of non-resultant nature. Therefore, it was said: "That body does not exist, because of which happiness and suffering arise in one's own self." For intention occurring in the body door is intended here as the body. The same method applies in the remaining two doors. Khetta (field) and so on are names for wholesome and unwholesome action itself. For that is called a field (khetta) because it is the place of growth of the result, a ground (vatthu) because it is the place of support, a base (āyatana) because it is the cause, a basis (adhikaraṇa) because it is the authority.

cattārome bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tatthaattabhāvappaṭilābhāti paṭiladdhaattabhāvā.Attasañcetanā kamatīti attanā pakappitacetanā vahati pavattati.

cattārome bhikkhave: (There are these four, monks) and so on he said. Here, attabhāvappaṭilābhā: Having gained an existence. Attasañcetanā kamati: Intention planned by oneself prevails, proceeds.

Attasañcetanāhetu tesaṃ sattānaṃ tamhā kāyā cuti hotītiādīsu khiḍḍāpadosikā devāattasañcetanāhetucavanti. Tesañhi nandanavanacittalatāvanaphārusakavanādīsu dibbaratisamappitānaṃ kīḷantānaṃ pānabhojane sati sammussati, te āhārupacchedena ātape khittamālā viya milāyanti. Manopadosikā devāparasañcetanāhetucavanti, ete cātumahārājikā devā. Tesu kira eko devaputto ‘‘nakkhattaṃ kīḷissāmī’’ti saparivāro rathena vīthiṃ paṭipajjati. Athañño nikkhamanto taṃ purato gacchantaṃ disvā ‘‘kiṃ, bho, ayaṃ kapaṇo adiṭṭhapubbaṃ viya etaṃ disvā pītiyā uddhumāto viya gajjamāno viya ca gacchatī’’ti kujjhati. Purato gacchantopi nivattitvā taṃ kuddhaṃ disvā kuddhā nāma suvijānā hontīti kuddhabhāvamassa ñatvā ‘‘tvaṃ kuddho mayhaṃ kiṃ karissasi, ayaṃ sampatti mayā dānasīlādīnaṃ vasena laddhā, na tuyhaṃ vasenā’’ti paṭikujjhati. Ekasmiñhi kuddhe itaro akuddho rakkhati, ubhosu pana kuddhesu ekassa kodho itarassa paccayo hoti, tassapi kodho itarassa paccayo hotīti ubho kandantānaṃyeva orodhānaṃ cavanti. Manussāattasañcetanā ca parasañcetanā ca hetucavanti, attasañcetanāya ca parasañcetanāya ca hetubhūtāya cavantīti attho. Manussā hi kujjhitvā attanāva attānaṃ hatthehipi daṇḍehipi paharanti, rajjubandhanādīhipi bandhanti, asināpi sīsaṃ chindanti, visampi khādanti, papātepi patanti, udakampi pavisanti, aggimpi pavisanti, parepi daṇḍena vā satthane vā paharitvā mārenti. Evaṃ tesu attasañcetanāpi parasañcetanāpi kamati.

In the passages beginning with "Attasañcetanāhetu tesaṃ sattānaṃ tamhā kāyā cuti hotīti," the Khiḍḍāpadosikā deities pass away due to attasañcetanāhetu (self-induced causes). For them, while delighting in divine pleasures in Nandanavana, Cittalatāvana, Phārusakavana, and other places, they become intoxicated with drink and food. Due to the interruption of sustenance, they wither like garlands thrown in the sun. The Manopadosikā deities pass away due to parasañcetanāhetu (other-induced causes); these are the Cātumahārājikā deities. It is said that among them, one devaputta, thinking, "I will play at the nakkhatta festival," proceeds along the street in a chariot with his retinue. Then another, coming out, sees him going in front and becomes angry, thinking, "Why is this wretched one, as if never seen before, going along gazing and roaring with joy?" The one going in front, turning back and seeing him angry, knows his state of anger, for angry ones are easily recognized, and retorts, "What will you do to me, being angry? This prosperity I have obtained by means of generosity, virtue, and so on, not by your power!" When one is angry, the other, if not angry, protects; but when both are angry, the anger of one becomes a condition for the other, and the anger of the other becomes a condition for the first. Thus, both pass away amidst the lamentations of their harems. Humans pass away due to attasañcetanā ca parasañcetanā ca hetu (both self-induced and other-induced causes), meaning they pass away due to causes that are both self-induced and other-induced. For humans, becoming angry, strike themselves with their own hands or with sticks; they bind themselves with ropes and the like; they even cut off their heads with swords, consume poison, fall off cliffs, enter water, or enter fire; others also strike and kill them with sticks or weapons. Thus, in their case, both self-induced and other-induced actions are effective.

Katametena devā daṭṭhabbāti katame nāma te devā daṭṭhabbāti attho. Tena vā attabhāvena katame devā daṭṭhabbātipi attho. Kasmā pana thero imaṃ pañhaṃ pucchati, kiṃ attanā kathetuṃ nappahotīti? Pahoti, idaṃ pana padaṃ attano sabhāvena buddhavisayaṃ pañhanti thero na kathesi.Tena daṭṭhabbāti tena attabhāvena daṭṭhabbā. Ayaṃ pana pañho heṭṭhā kāmāvacarepi rūpāvacarepi labbhati, bhavaggena pana paricchinditvā kathito nippadesena kathito hotīti bhagavatā evaṃ kathito.

Katame tena devā daṭṭhabbā means: which devas are to be seen by what? Or, which devas are to be seen by that self? Why does the Elder ask this question? Is it that he is unable to speak himself? He is able, but the Elder did not speak this phrase, as it is a question of the Buddha's domain by its very nature. Tena daṭṭhabbā means to be seen by that self. This question can be found in the realm of desire and the realm of form below, but it is spoken by the Blessed One, having delimited it by the peak of existence, so it is spoken without remainder.

Āgantāroitthattanti itthabhāvaṃ kāmāvacarapañcakkhandhabhāvameva āgantāro, neva tatrūpapattikā na uparūpapattikā honti.Anāgantāro itthattanti imaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ anāgantāro, heṭṭhūpapattikā na honti, tatrūpapattikā vā uparūpapattikā vā tattheva vā parinibbāyino hontīti attho. Ettha ca heṭṭhimabhave nibbattānaṃ vasena uparūpapattikā veditabbā. Bhavagge panetaṃ natthi. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.

Āgantāro itthatta means those who come to this state, to the five-khandha state of the desire realm; they are neither reborn there nor above. Anāgantāro itthatta means those who do not come to this group of five khandhas; they are not reborn below; either they are reborn there, or they are reborn above, or they attain parinibbāna right there. Here, with reference to those born in the lower existence, those reborn above should be understood. However, this is not the case in the peak of existence. The rest is all straightforward.

2. Vibhattisuttavaṇṇanā
2. Vibhattisutta Commentary

172.Dutiyeatthapaṭisambhidāti pañcasu atthesu pabhedagataṃ ñāṇaṃ.Odhisoti kāraṇaso.Byañjanasoti akkharaso.Anekapariyāyenāti anekehi kāraṇehi.Ācikkhāmīti kathemi.Desemīti pākaṭaṃ katvā kathemi.Paññāpemīti jānāpemi.Paṭṭhapemīti paṭṭhapetvā pavattetvā kathemi.Vivarāmīti vivaṭaṃ katvā kathemi.Vibhajāmīti vibhajitvā kathemi.Uttānīkaromīti gambhīraṃ uttānakaṃ katvā kathemi.So maṃ pañhenāti so maṃ pañhena upagacchatu.Ahaṃ veyyākaraṇenāti ahamassa pañhakathanena cittaṃ ārādhessāmi.Yo no dhammānaṃ sukusaloti yo amhākaṃ adhigatadhammānaṃ sukusalo satthā, so esa sammukhībhūto. Yadi mayā atthapaṭisambhidā na sacchikatā, ‘‘sacchikarohi tāva sāriputtā’’ti vatvā maṃ paṭibāhissatīti satthu purato nisinnakova sīhanādaṃ nadati. Iminā upāyena sabbattha attho veditabbo. Imāsu ca pana paṭisambhidāsu tisso paṭisambhidā lokiyā, atthapaṭisambhidā lokiyalokuttarāti.

172. In the second, atthapaṭisambhidā means the knowledge pertaining to the distinctions in the five meanings. Odhiso means causally. Byañjanaso means verbally. Anekapariyāyenā means by many reasons. Ācikkhāmī means I declare. Desemī means I declare, making manifest. Paññāpemī means I make known. Paṭṭhapemī means I establish and set forth. Vivarāmī means I make open. Vibhajāmī means I divide. Uttānīkaromī means I make the profound plain. So maṃ pañhenā means let him approach me with a question. Ahaṃ veyyākaraṇenā means I will please his mind by answering his question. Yo no dhammānaṃ sukusalo means that our skillful teacher, the one who is skilled in the Dhamma we have attained, he is present. If I have not realized the attainment of meaning, he will dismiss me, saying, "First, realize it, Sāriputta." Thus, he roars his lion's roar as if sitting in front of the Teacher. In this way, the meaning should be understood everywhere. And of these paṭisambhidās, three are mundane, and atthapaṭisambhidā is both mundane and supramundane.

3. Mahākoṭṭhikasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Mahākoṭṭhikasutta Commentary

173.Tatiyephassāyatanānanti phassākarānaṃ, phassassa uppattiṭṭhānānanti attho.Atthaññaṃ kiñcīti etesu asesato niruddhesu tato paraṃ koci appamattakopi kileso atthīti pucchati.Natthaññaṃ kiñcīti idhāpi ‘‘appamattakopi kileso natthī’’ti pucchati. Sesadvayepi eseva nayo. Ime pana cattāropi pañhe sassatucchedaekaccasassataamarāvikkhepavasena pucchati. Tenassa thero pucchitapucchitaṃ paṭibāhantomā hevanti āha. Etthahiiti nipātamattaṃ, evaṃ mā bhaṇīti attho. Attūpaladdhivaseneva ‘‘atthaññaṃ kiñci añño koci attā nāma atthī’’ti sassatādiākārena pucchati. Kiṃ panesa attūpaladdhikoti? Na attūpaladdhiko. Evaṃladdhiko pana tattheko bhikkhu nisinno, so pucchituṃ na sakkoti. Tassa laddhiṃ vissajjāpanatthaṃ evaṃ pucchati. Yepi ca anāgate evaṃladdhikā bhavissanti, tesaṃ ‘‘buddhakālepeso pañho mahāsāvakehi vissajjito’’ti vacanokāsupacchedanatthaṃ pucchatiyeva.

173. In the third, phassāyatanāna means the sources of contact, the places of origin of contact. Atthaññaṃ kiñcī means, after these have completely ceased, is there any slight defilement remaining? Natthaññaṃ kiñcī here also means, "Is there any slight defilement not present?" The same method applies in the remaining two cases. These four questions are asked in terms of eternalism, annihilationism, partial eternalism, and equivocating. Therefore, the Elder, refuting each question asked, says mā heva. Here, hi is merely a particle, meaning, "Do not say so." Due to clinging to a self-view, he asks in the manner of eternalism and so on, "Is there anything else, some other self?" Is he clinging to a self-view? He is not clinging to a self-view. However, a certain bhikkhu sitting there has acquired such a view, and he is unable to ask. He asks in order to dispel his view. Also, for those who will acquire such views in the future, he asks so as to cut off the possibility of their saying, "This question was answered by the great disciples in the Buddha's time."

Appapañcaṃpapañcetīti na papañcetabbaṭṭhāne papañcaṃ karoti, anācaritabbaṃ maggaṃ carati.Tāvatā papañcassa gatīti yattakā channaṃ phassāyatanānaṃ gati, tattakāva taṇhādiṭṭhimānappabhedassa papañcassa gati.Channaṃ, āvuso, phassāyatanānaṃ asesavirāganirodhā papañcanirodho papañcavūpasamoti etesu chasu āyatanesu sabbaso niruddhesu papañcāpi niruddhāva honti, vūpasantāva hontīti attho. Āruppe pana puthujjanadevatānaṃ kiñcāpi pañca phassāyatanāni niruddhāni, chaṭṭhassa pana aniruddhattā tayopi papañcā appahīnāva. Apica pañcavokārabhavavaseneva pañho kathitoti. Catutthe imināva nayena attho veditabbo.

Appapañcaṃ papañcetī means he makes proliferation where there should be no proliferation, he travels a path that should not be traveled. Tāvatā papañcassa gatī means as far as is the course of the six sense bases, so far is the course of proliferation, which is a differentiation of craving, views, and conceit. Channaṃ, āvuso, phassāyatanānaṃ asesavirāganirodhā papañcanirodho papañcavūpasamo means with the complete cessation of passion and the cessation of these six sense bases, proliferation is also ceased and calmed.

5. Upavāṇasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Upavāṇasutta Commentary

175-176.Pañcamevijjāyantakaro hotīti vijjāya vaṭṭadukkhassa antakaro hoti, sakalaṃ vaṭṭadukkhaṃ paricchinnaṃ parivaṭumaṃ katvā tiṭṭhatīti. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo.Saupādānoti sagahaṇova hutvā.Antakaro abhavissāti vaṭṭadukkhassa antaṃ katvā ṭhito abhavissa.Caraṇasampannoti pannarasadhammabhedena caraṇena samannāgato.Yathābhūtaṃ jānaṃpassaṃ antakaro hotīti yathāsabhāvaṃ maggapaññāya jānitvā passitvā vaṭṭadukkhassa antaṃ katvā ṭhito nāma hotīti arahattanikūṭena pañhaṃ niṭṭhapesi. Chaṭṭhaṃ heṭṭhā ekakanipātavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.

175-176. In the fifth, vijjāyantakaro hotī means he is the end-maker of knowledge, of the round of suffering; he stands having completely cut off the entire round of suffering. The same method applies in the remaining passages. Saupādāno means being with grasping. Antakaro abhavissā means he would have been standing having made an end to the round of suffering. Caraṇasampanno means endowed with conduct, complete with the fifteen-fold conduct. Yathābhūtaṃ jānaṃ passaṃ antakaro hotī means having known and seen according to reality with the wisdom of the path, he is called one who stands having made an end to the round of suffering; he concluded the question with the pinnacle of arahantship. The sixth should be understood in the same way as stated in the commentary on the Ekakanipāta.

7. Rāhulasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Rāhulasutta Commentary

177.Sattameajjhattikāti kesādīsu vīsatiyā koṭṭhāsesu thaddhākāralakkhaṇā pathavīdhātu.Bāhirāti bahiddhā anindriyabaddhesu pāsāṇapabbatādīsu thaddhākāralakkhaṇā pathavīdhātu. Imināva nayena sesāpi dhātuyo veditabbā.Netaṃ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attāti idaṃ tayaṃ taṇhāmānadiṭṭhiggāhapaṭikkhepavasena vuttaṃ.Sammappaññāya daṭṭhabbanti hetunā kāraṇena maggapaññāya passitabbaṃ.Disvāti sahavipassanāya maggapaññāya passitvā.Acchecchi taṇhanti maggavajjhataṇhaṃ samūlakaṃ chindi.Vivattayi saṃyojananti dasavidhampi saṃyojanaṃ vivattayi ubbattetvā pajahi.Sammā mānābhisamayāti hetunā kāraṇena navavidhassa mānassa pahānābhisamayā.Antamakāsi dukkhassāti vaṭṭadukkhaṃ paricchinnaṃ parivaṭumaṃ akāsi, katvā ṭhitoti attho. Iti satthārā saṃyuttamahānikāye rāhulovāde (saṃ. ni. 3.91 ādayo) vipassanā kathitā, cūḷarāhulovādepi (ma. ni. 3.416 ādayo) vipassanā kathitā, ambalaṭṭhikarāhulovāde (ma. ni. 2.107 ādayo) daharasseva sato musāvādā veramaṇī kathitā, mahārāhulovāde (ma. ni. 2.113 ādayo) vipassanā kathitā. Imasmiṃ aṅguttaramahānikāye ayaṃ catukoṭikasuññatā nāma kathitāti.

177. In the seventh, ajjhattikā means the earth element characterized by hardness in the twenty internal koṭṭhāsa, such as hair. Bāhirā means the earth element characterized by hardness in external, non-organ-bound things such as rocks and mountains. The remaining elements should be understood in the same way. Netaṃ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā means this triad is spoken in terms of rejecting the grasping of craving, conceit, and views. Sammappaññāya daṭṭhabba means it should be seen with right wisdom, by reason, by cause, with the wisdom of the path. Disvā means having seen with the wisdom of the path, with co-arising insight. Acchecchi taṇha means he cut off craving, which is to be killed by the path, with its root. Vivattayi saṃyojana means he turned back and abandoned the ten kinds of fetters. Sammā mānābhisamayā means by reason, by cause, by the comprehension of the abandonment of the nine kinds of conceit. Antamakāsi dukkhassā means he made the round of suffering limited, circumscribed; meaning he stood having done so. Thus, in the Saṃyuttamahānikāya, the Teacher spoke of vipassanā in the Rāhulovāda (saṃ. ni. 3.91 ff.), and vipassanā was also spoken of in the Cūḷarāhulovāda (ma. ni. 3.416 ff.), in the Ambalaṭṭhikarāhulovāda (ma. ni. 2.107 ff.) the refraining from false speech was spoken of when he was still young, and in the Mahārāhulovāda (ma. ni. 2.113 ff.) vipassanā was spoken of. In this Aṅguttaramahānikāya, this four-cornered emptiness is spoken of.

8. Jambālīsuttavaṇṇanā
8. Jambālīsutta Commentary

178.Aṭṭhamesantaṃ cetovimuttinti aṭṭhannaṃ samāpattīnaṃ aññataraṃ samāpattiṃ.Sakkāyanirodhanti tebhūmakavaṭṭasaṅkhātassa sakkāyassa nirodhaṃ, nibbānanti attho.Na pakkhandatīti ārammaṇavasena na pakkhandati. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo.Na pāṭikaṅkhoti na pāṭikaṅkhitabbo.Lepagatenāti lepamakkhitena.

178. In the eighth, santaṃ cetovimutti means one of the eight attainments. Sakkāyanirodha means the cessation of sakkāya, which is the three-bhūmika round, nibbāna. Na pakkhandatī means it does not flow towards, in terms of the object. The same method applies in the remaining passages. Na pāṭikaṅkho means it should not be expected. Lepagatenā means smeared with clay.

Imasmiñca panatthe nadīpāraṃ gantukāmapurisopammaṃ āharitabbaṃ – eko kira puriso caṇḍasotāya vāḷamacchākulāya nadiyā pāraṃ gantukāmo ‘‘orimaṃ tīraṃ sāsaṅkaṃ sappaṭibhayaṃ, pārimaṃ tīraṃ khemaṃ appaṭibhayaṃ, kiṃ nu kho katvā pāraṃ gamissāmī’’ti paṭipāṭiyā ṭhite aṭṭha kakudharukkhe disvā ‘‘sakkā imāya rukkhapaṭipāṭiyā gantu’’nti manasikatvā ‘‘kakudharukkhā nāma maṭṭhasākhā honti, sākhāya hatthā na saṇṭhaheyyu’’nti nigrodhapilakkharukkhādīnaṃ aññatarassa lākhāya hatthapāde makkhetvā dakkhiṇahatthena ekaṃ sākhaṃ gaṇhi. Hattho tattheva lagi. Puna vāmahatthena dakkhiṇapādena vāmapādenāti cattāropi hatthapādā tattheva lagiṃsu. So adhosiro lambamāno uparinadiyaṃ deve vuṭṭhe puṇṇāya nadiyā sote nimuggo kumbhīlādīnaṃ bhakkho ahosi.

In this meaning, the simile of a man wishing to cross a river should be brought in: It is said that a man wishing to cross a swift-flowing river teeming with fierce fish, seeing eight kakudha trees standing in a row, thought, "This shore is dangerous and fearful, that shore is safe and fearless, what should I do to cross over?" and thinking, "It is possible to go by means of this row of trees," he considered, "Kakudha trees have smooth branches, the hands will not hold on to the branches," so he smeared his hands and feet with lac and grasped one branch with his right hand. His hand stuck there. Then, with his left hand, right foot, and left foot, all four hands and feet stuck there. He, hanging head down, submerged in the current of the river when the gods rained above and the river was full, became food for crocodiles and other creatures.

Tattha nadīsotaṃ viya saṃsārasotaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, sotassa pāraṃ gantukāmapuriso viya yogāvacaro, orimatīraṃ viya sakkāyo, pārimatīraṃ viya nibbānaṃ, paṭipāṭiyā ṭhitā aṭṭha kakudharukkhā viya aṭṭha samāpattiyo, lepamakkhitena hatthena sākhāgahaṇaṃ viya jhānavipassanānaṃ pāripanthike asodhetvā samāpattisamāpajjanaṃ, catūhi hatthapādehi sākhāya baddhassa olambanaṃ viya paṭhamajjhāne nikantiyā laggakālo, uparisote vuṭṭhi viya chasu dvāresu kilesānaṃ uppannakālo, nadiyā puṇṇāya sote nimuggassa kumbhīlādīnaṃ bhakkhabhūtakālo viya saṃsārasote nimuggassa catūsu apāyesu dukkhānubhavanakālo veditabbo.

There, the current of the river should be seen as the current of saṃsāra, the man wishing to cross the current as the yogi, this shore as sakkāya, that shore as nibbāna, the eight kakudha trees standing in a row as the eight samāpattis, grasping a branch with a lac-smeared hand as entering samāpatti without purifying what is an obstacle to jhāna and vipassanā, hanging bound to the branch with four hands and feet as the time of clinging due to desire in the first jhāna, the rain falling above in the current as the time of arising of defilements in the six doors, the time of being submerged in the current of the full river and becoming food for crocodiles and other creatures as the time of experiencing suffering in the four apāyas for one submerged in the current of saṃsāra should be understood.

Suddhena hatthenāti sudhotena parisuddhahatthena. Imasmimpi atthe tādisameva opammaṃ kātabbaṃ – tatheva hi pāraṃ gantukāmo puriso ‘‘kakudharukkhā nāma maṭṭhasākhā, kiliṭṭhahatthena gaṇhantassa hattho parigaleyyā’’ti hatthapāde sudhote katvā ekaṃ sākhaṃ gaṇhitvā paṭhamaṃ rukkhaṃ āruḷho. Tato otaritvā dutiyaṃ…pe… tato otaritvā aṭṭhamaṃ, aṭṭhamarukkhato otaritvā pārimatīre khemantabhūmiṃ gato.

Suddhena hatthenā means with a clean, pure hand. In this meaning also, the same simile should be applied: For just as the man wishing to cross over thought, "Kakudha trees have smooth branches, the hand of one grasping with an unclean hand will slip off," so he washed his hands and feet and, having grasped one branch, climbed the first tree. Then, having descended, he climbed the second…pe… then, having descended, the eighth, and having descended from the eighth tree, he went to the safe land on the other shore.

Tattha ‘‘imehi rukkhehi pārimatīraṃ gamissāmī’’ti tassa purisassa cintitakālo viya yogino ‘‘aṭṭha samāpattiyo samāpajjitvā samāpattito vuṭṭhāya arahattaṃ gamissāmī’’ti cintitakālo, suddhena hatthena sākhāgahaṇaṃ viya jhānavipassanānaṃ pāripanthikadhamme sodhetvā samāpattisamāpajjanaṃ. Tattha paṭhamarukkhārohaṇakālo viya paṭhamajjhānasamāpattikālo, paṭhamarukkhato oruyha dutiyaṃ āruḷhakālo viya paṭhamajjhāne nikantiyā abaddhassa tato vuṭṭhāya dutiyajjhānasamāpannakālo…pe… sattamarukkhato oruyha aṭṭhamaṃ āruḷhakālo viya ākiñcaññāyatanasamāpattiyaṃ nikantiyā abaddhassa tato vuṭṭhāya nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpannakālo. Aṭṭhamarukkhato oruyha pārimatīraṃ khemantabhūmiṃ gatakālo viya nevasaññānāsaññāyatane nikantiyā abaddhassa samāpattito vuṭṭhāya saṅkhāre sammasitvā arahattappattakālo veditabbo.

There, the time of thinking of that man, "I will go to the other shore by means of these trees," is like the time of thinking of the yogi, "Having entered the eight samāpattis and risen from the samāpatti, I will go to arahantship," grasping the branch with a clean hand is like entering samāpatti after purifying the obstacles to jhāna and vipassanā. There, the time of climbing the first tree is like the time of the first jhāna samāpatti, the time of descending from the first tree and climbing the second is like the time of one free from desire in the first jhāna, having risen from that and entered the second jhāna…pe… the time of descending from the seventh tree and climbing the eighth is like the time of one free from desire in the ākincaññāyatana samāpatti, having risen from that and entered the nevasaññānāsaññāyatana. The time of descending from the eighth tree and going to the safe land on the other shore is like the time of one free from desire in the nevasaññānāsaññāyatana, having risen from the samāpatti and comprehended the saṅkhāras, having attained arahantship should be understood.

Avijjāppabhedaṃ manasi karotīti aṭṭhasu ṭhānesu aññāṇabhūtāya gaṇabahalamahāavijjāya pabhedasaṅkhātaṃ arahattaṃ manasi karoti.Na pakkhandatīti ārammaṇavaseneva na pakkhandati.Jambālīti gāmato nikkhantassa mahāudakassa patiṭṭhānabhūto mahāāvāṭo.Anekavassagaṇikāti gāmassa vā nagarassa vā uppannakāleyeva uppannattā anekāni vassagaṇāni uppannāya etissāti anekavassagaṇikā.Āyamukhānīti catasso pavisanakandarā.Apāyamukhānīti apavāhanacchiddāni.Na āḷippabhedo pāṭikaṅkhoti na pāḷippabhedo pāṭikaṅkhitabbo. Na hi tato udakaṃ uṭṭhāya pāḷiṃ bhinditvā kacavaraṃ gahetvā mahāsamuddaṃ pāpuṇāti.

Avijjāppabhedaṃ manasi karotī means he attends in his mind to arahantship, which is called the distinction of great ignorance, the thick mass of ignorance, which is non-knowing in the eight places. Na pakkhandatī means it does not flow towards, in terms of the object. Jambālī is a large pit, the place of settling of the great water that has flowed out from the village. Anekavassagaṇikā means it has arisen for many years since it arose at the very time the village or city arose. Āyamukhānī means the four entrance openings. Apāyamukhānī means the drainage holes. Na āḷippabhedo pāṭikaṅkho means the breach of the embankment should not be expected. For the water does not rise from there and, breaking the embankment, take away the rubbish and reach the great ocean.

Imassa panatthassa vibhāvanatthaṃ uyyānagavesakaopammaṃ āharitabbaṃ. Eko kira nagaravāsiko kulaputto uyyānaṃ gavesanto nagarato nātidūre naccāsanne mahantaṃ jambāliṃ addasa. So ‘‘imasmiṃ ṭhāne ramaṇīyaṃ uyyānaṃ bhavissatī’’ti sallakkhetvā kuddālaṃ ādāya cattāripi kandarāni pidhāya apavāhanacchiddāni vivaritvā aṭṭhāsi. Devo na sammā vassi, avasesaudakaṃ apavāhanacchiddena parissavitvā gataṃ. Cammakhaṇḍapilotikādīni tattheva pūtikāni jātāni, pāṇakā saṇṭhitā, samantā anupagamanīyā jātā. Upagatānampi nāsāpuṭe pidhāya pakkamitabbaṃ hoti. So katipāhena āgantvā paṭikkamma ṭhito oloketvā ‘‘na sakkā upagantu’’nti pakkāmi.

To clarify this point further, the simile of a gardener seeking a pleasure garden should be brought forth. It seems that a certain clansman, a resident of a city, while searching for a pleasure garden not too far from the city, saw a large patch of marshy ground. Considering, “A delightful pleasure garden could be here,” he took a hoe, blocked all four drainage channels, opened the escape holes, and stood watching. The rain did not fall properly; the remaining water drained away through the escape holes. Pieces of leather, rags, and other things decayed right there, creatures gathered, and the entire place became inaccessible. Even those who approached had to hold their noses and leave. After a few days, he came back, stopped at a distance, looked around, and thinking, “It's impossible to approach,” he departed.

Tattha nagaravāsī kulaputto viya yogāvacaro daṭṭhabbo, uyyānaṃ gavesantena gāmadvāre jambāliyā diṭṭhakālo viya cātumahābhūtikakāyo, āyamukhānaṃ pihitakālo viya dhammassavanodakassa aladdhakālo, apāyamukhānaṃ vivaṭakālo viya chadvārikasaṃvarassa vissaṭṭhakālo, devassa sammā avuṭṭhakālo viya sappāyakammaṭṭhānassa aladdhakālo, avasesaudakassa apāyamukhehi parissavitvā gatakālo viya abbhantare guṇānaṃ parihīnakālo, udakassa uṭṭhāya pāḷiṃ bhinditvā kacavaraṃ ādāya mahāsamuddaṃ pāpuṇituṃ asamatthakālo viya arahattamaggena avijjāpāḷiṃ bhinditvā kilesarāsiṃ vidhamitvā nibbānaṃ sacchikātuṃ asamatthakālo, cammakhaṇḍapilotikādīnaṃ tattheva pūtibhāvo viya abbhantare rāgādikilesehi paripūritakālo, tassa āgantvā disvā vippaṭisārino gatakālo viya vaṭṭasamaṅgipuggalassa vaṭṭe abhiratakālo veditabbo.

Here, the clansman, a resident of the city, should be seen as the yogāvacara, the time when the marshy ground was seen near the village gate as the four great elements body, the time when the inlet channels were closed as the time when the water of Dhamma hearing was not received, the time when the outlet channels were opened as the time when the six sense-doors control was loosened, the time when the rain did not fall properly as the time when the suitable meditation object was not received, the time when the remaining water drained away through the outlet channels as the time when the qualities within diminished, the time when the water, rising, broke the dam, and being unable to take away the rubbish reached the great ocean, as the time when, with the path of Arahatship, breaking the dam of ignorance, scattering the mass of defilements, one is unable to realize Nibbāna, the state of decaying of pieces of leather, rags, and other things right there, as the time when one is filled within with defilements such as craving, the time when he came, saw, and left with remorse, as the time when the individual destined for the cycle is delighted in the cycle should be understood.

Āḷippabhedo pāṭikaṅkhoti pāḷippabhedo pāṭikaṅkhitabbo. Tato hi udakaṃ uṭṭhāya pāḷiṃ bhinditvā kacavaraṃ ādāya mahāsamuddaṃ pāpuṇituṃ sakkhissatīti attho.

Āḷippabhedo pāṭikaṅkho means a breach of the dam should be expected. That is, then the water, rising, will be able to break the dam and, taking away the rubbish, reach the great ocean.

Idhāpi tadeva opammaṃ āharitabbaṃ. Tattha āyamukhānaṃ vivaṭakālo viya sappāyadhammassavanassa laddhakālo, apāyamukhānaṃ pihitakālo viya chasu dvāresu saṃvarassa paccupaṭṭhitakālo, devassa sammā vuṭṭhakālo viya sappāyakammaṭṭhānassa laddhakālo, udakassa uṭṭhāya pāḷiṃ bhinditvā kacavaraṃ ādāya mahāsamuddaṃ pattakālo viya arahattamaggena avijjaṃ bhinditvā akusalarāsiṃ vidhamitvā arahattaṃ sacchikatakālo, āyamukhehi paviṭṭhena udakena sarassa paripuṇṇakālo viya abbhantare lokuttaradhammehi paripuṇṇakālo, samantato vatiṃ katvā rukkhe ropetvā uyyānamajjhe pāsādaṃ māpetvā nāṭakāni paccupaṭṭhapetvā subhojanaṃ bhuñjantassa nisinnakālo viya dhammapāsādaṃ āruyha nibbānārammaṇaṃ phalasamāpattiṃ appetvā nisinnakālo veditabbo. Sesamettha uttānatthameva. Desanā pana lokiyalokuttaramissikā kathitāti.

Here too, the same simile should be brought forth. There, the time when the inlet channels were opened as the time when suitable Dhamma hearing was received, the time when the outlet channels were closed as the time when control at the six doors was established, the time when the rain fell properly as the time when the suitable meditation object was received, the time when the water, rising, broke the dam, and taking away the rubbish reached the great ocean, as the time when, with the path of Arahatship, breaking ignorance, scattering the mass of unwholesome states, Arahatship is realized, the time when the lake was filled with the water entering through the inlet channels as the time when one is filled within with supramundane qualities, the time when, having made a surrounding wall, planted trees, built a palace in the middle of the pleasure garden, and sitting enjoying dramatic performances and fine food, as the time when, ascending to the Dhamma palace, excluding the fruition attainment with Nibbāna as object, one is sitting should be understood. The rest here is of obvious meaning. However, the teaching is said to be a mixture of mundane and supramundane.

9. Nibbānasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Nibbānasuttavaṇṇanā

179.Navamehānabhāgiyā saññātiādīsu ‘‘paṭhamassa jhānassa lābhiṃ kāmasahagatā saññāmanasikārā samudācaranti, hānabhāginī paññā’’ti (vibha. 799) abhidhamme vuttanayeneva attho veditabbo.Yathābhūtaṃnappajānantīti yathāsabhāvato maggañāṇena na jānanti.

179.In the ninth, in hānabhāgiyā saññā, the meaning should be understood in the same way as stated in the Abhidhamma, "for one who has attained the first jhāna, perceptions and thoughts associated with sensual desire arise, knowledge is in the state of decline." (vibha. 799) Yathābhūtaṃ nappajānantī means they do not know according to reality with the knowledge of the path.

10. Mahāpadesasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Mahāpadesasuttavaṇṇanā

180.Dasamebhoganagare viharatīti parinibbānasamaye cārikaṃ caranto taṃ nagaraṃ patvā tattha viharati.Ānandacetiyeti ānandayakkhassa bhavanaṭṭhāne patiṭṭhitavihāre.Mahāpadeseti mahāokāse mahāapadese vā, buddhādayo mahante mahante apadisitvā vuttāni mahākāraṇānīti attho.Neva abhinanditabbanti haṭṭhatuṭṭhehi sādhukāraṃ datvā pubbeva na sotabbaṃ. Evaṃ kate hi pacchā ‘‘idaṃ na sametī’’ti vuccamānopi ‘‘kiṃ pubbeva ayaṃ dhammo, idāni na dhammo’’ti vatvā laddhiṃ na vissajjeti.Nappaṭikkositabbanti ‘‘kiṃ esa bālo vadatī’’ti evaṃ pubbeva na vattabbaṃ. Evaṃ vutte hi vattuṃ yuttampi na vakkhati. Tenāha –anabhinanditvā appaṭikkositvāti.Padabyañjanānīti padasaṅkhātāni byañjanāni.Sādhukaṃ uggahetvāti ‘‘imasmiṃ ṭhāne pāḷi vuttā, imasmiṃ ṭhāne attho vutto, imasmiṃ ṭhāne anusandhi kathitā, imasmiṃ ṭhāne pubbāparaṃ kathita’’nti suṭṭhu gahetvā.Sutte otāretabbānīti sutte otaritabbāni.Vinaye sandassetabbānīti vinaye saṃsandetabbāni.

180.In the tenth, bhoganagare viharatī means while wandering on tour at the time of final passing away, reaching that city, he dwelt there. Ānandacetiye means in the monastery established at the place of residence of the Ānanda-yakka. Mahāpadese means in a great open space or in a great declaration; the Buddha and others declared and spoke about great causes, this is the meaning. Neva abhinanditabba means it should not be listened to beforehand, giving approval with joyous delight. For if it is done so, even when it is said later, "this does not agree," he will not abandon his view, saying, "was this not the Dhamma before, and now it is not the Dhamma?" Nappaṭikkositabba means it should not be said beforehand, "what is this fool saying?" For if it is said so, he will not speak even what is right to say. Therefore, he said – anabhinanditvā appaṭikkositvā. Padabyañjanānī means the words called pada and phrases. Sādhukaṃ uggahetvā means having well grasped, "in this place the Pāḷi was spoken, in this place the meaning was spoken, in this place the connection was spoken, in this place the beginning and the end were spoken." Sutte otāretabbānī means they should be compared with the Suttas. Vinaye sandassetabbānī means they should be collated with the Vinaya.

suttanti vinayo vutto. Yathāha – ‘‘kattha paṭikkhittaṃ, sāvatthiyaṃ suttavibhaṅge’’ti (cūḷava. 457)vinayoti khandhako. Yathāha – ‘‘vinayātisāre’’ti. Evaṃ vinayapiṭakampi na pariyādiyati. Ubhatovibhaṅgā pana suttaṃ, khandhakaparivārā vinayoti evaṃ vinayapiṭakaṃ pariyādiyati. Atha vā suttantapiṭakaṃ suttaṃ, vinayapiṭakaṃ vinayoti evaṃ dveyeva piṭakāni pariyādiyanti. Suttantābhidhammapiṭakāni vā suttaṃ, vinayapiṭakaṃ vinayoti evampi tīṇi piṭakāni na tāva pariyādiyanti. Asuttanāmakañhi buddhavacanaṃ nāma atthi. Seyyathidaṃ – jātakaṃ paṭisambhidā niddeso suttanipāto dhammapadaṃ udānaṃ itivuttakaṃ vimānavatthu petavatthu theragāthā therīgāthā apadānanti.

sutta means the Vinaya is stated. As it is said – "where was it rejected? In Sāvatthi, in the Sutta Vibhanga" (cūḷava. 457). vinayo means the Khandhaka. As it is said – "in excess of the Vinaya". Thus, the Vinaya Piṭaka is not exhausted. However, the two Vibhangas are the Sutta, the Khandhaka and Parivāra are the Vinaya, thus the Vinaya Piṭaka is exhausted. Or else, the Suttanta Piṭaka is the Sutta, the Vinaya Piṭaka is the Vinaya, thus only two Piṭakas are exhausted. Or the Suttanta and Abhidhamma Piṭakas are the Sutta, the Vinaya Piṭaka is the Vinaya, thus even three Piṭakas are not yet exhausted. For there is Buddha-word that is not called Sutta. Namely – the Jātaka, the Paṭisambhidā, the Niddesa, the Sutta Nipāta, the Dhammapada, the Udāna, the Itivuttaka, the Vimānavatthu, the Petavatthu, the Theragāthā, the Therīgāthā, and the Apadāna.

Sudinnatthero pana ‘‘asuttanāmakaṃ buddhavacanaṃ natthī’’ti taṃ sabbaṃ paṭikkhipitvā ‘‘tīṇi piṭakāni suttaṃ, vinayo pana kāraṇa’’nti āha. Tato taṃ kāraṇaṃ dassento idaṃ suttamāhari –

However, Sudinnatthera, rejecting all that, saying "there is no Buddha-word that is not called Sutta," said, "the three Piṭakas are the Sutta, but the Vinaya is the cause." Then, showing that cause, he brought forth this Sutta –

‘‘Ye kho tvaṃ, gotami, dhamme jāneyyāsi, ime dhammā sarāgāya saṃvattanti no virāgāya, saṃyogāya saṃvattanti no visaṃyogāya, saupādānāya saṃvattanti no anupādānāya, mahicchatāya saṃvattanti no appicchatāya, asantuṭṭhiyā saṃvattanti no santuṭṭhiyā, kosajjāya saṃvattanti no vīriyārambhāya, saṅgaṇikāya saṃvattanti no pavivekāya, ācayāya saṃvattanti no apacayāya. Ekaṃsena, gotami, jāneyyāsi ‘neso dhammo neso vinayo netaṃ satthu sāsana’nti.

"Gotami, those things that you know: ‘These things lead to passion, not to dispassion; to bondage, not to freedom; to accumulation, not to non-accumulation; to great desires, not to fewness of desires; to discontent, not to contentment; to sloth, not to energetic effort; to gregariousness, not to seclusion; to piling up, not to shedding.’ Gotami, you may know for certain: ‘This is not the Dhamma, this is not the Vinaya, this is not the Teacher’s instruction.’

‘‘Ye ca kho tvaṃ, gotami, dhamme jāneyyāsi, ime dhammā virāgāya saṃvattanti no sarāgāya, visaṃyogāya saṃvattanti no saṃyogāya. Anupādānāya saṃvattanti no saupādānāya, appicchatāya saṃvattanti no mahicchatāya, santuṭṭhiyā saṃvattanti no asantuṭṭhiyā, vīriyārambhāya saṃvattanti no kosajjāya, pavivekāya saṃvattanti no saṅgaṇikāya, apacayāya saṃvattanti no ācayāya. Ekaṃsena, gotami, jāneyyāsi ‘eso dhammo eso vinayo etaṃ satthu sāsana’’’nti (cūḷava. 406; a. ni. 8.53).

"And Gotami, those things that you know: ‘These things lead to dispassion, not to passion; to freedom, not to bondage; to non-accumulation, not to accumulation; to fewness of desires, not to great desires; to contentment, not to discontent; to energetic effort, not to sloth; to seclusion, not to gregariousness; to shedding, not to piling up.’ Gotami, you may know for certain: ‘This is the Dhamma, this is the Vinaya, this is the Teacher’s instruction.’" (cūḷava. 406; a. ni. 8.53)

sutteti tepiṭakabuddhavacane otāretabbāni.Vinayeti etasmiṃ rāgādivinayakāraṇe saṃsandetabbānīti ayamettha attho.Na ceva sutte otarantīti suttapaṭipāṭiyā katthaci anāgantvā challiṃ uṭṭhapetvā guḷhavessantara-guḷhaummagga-guḷhavinayavedallapiṭakānaṃ aññatarato āgatāni paññāyantīti attho. Evaṃ āgatāni hi rāgādivinaye ca apaññāyamānāni chaḍḍetabbāni honti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘iti hidaṃ, bhikkhave, chaḍḍeyyāthā’’ti. Etenupāyena sabbattha attho veditabbo.Idaṃ, bhikkhave, catutthaṃ mahāpadesaṃ dhāreyyāthāti imaṃ, bhikkhave, catutthaṃ dhammassa patiṭṭhānokāsaṃ dhāreyyāthāti.

sutte means they should be compared with the Buddha-word of the three Piṭakas. Vinaye means they should be collated with this cause of subduing passion, etc.; this is the meaning here. Na ceva sutte otarantī means not coming anywhere in the order of the Sutta, raising a question, it appears to come from one of the Guḷhavessantara, Guḷhaummagga, or Guḷhavinayavedallapiṭaka; this is the meaning. For those that have come thus, not appearing in the subduing of passion, etc., should be discarded. Therefore, it was said – "In this way, monks, you should discard it." By this means, the meaning should be understood everywhere. Idaṃ, bhikkhave, catutthaṃ mahāpadesaṃ dhāreyyāthā means this, monks, you should maintain this fourth great ground of the Dhamma.

(19) 4. Brāhmaṇavaggo

(19) 4. Brāhmaṇavaggo

1. Yodhājīvasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Yodhājīvasuttavaṇṇanā

181.Catutthassa paṭhameṭhānakusaloti yena ṭhānena ṭhito avirādhetvā vijjhituṃ sakkoti, tasmiṃ ṭhāne kusalo. Sesaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.

181.In the first of the fourth, ṭhānakusalo means skilled in that place, by which place standing he is able to shoot without missing the mark. The rest should be known in the same way as stated below.

2. Pāṭibhogasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Pāṭibhogasuttavaṇṇanā

182.Dutiyenatthi koci pāṭibhogoti ahaṃ te pāṭibhogoti evaṃ pāṭibhogo bhavituṃ samattho nāma natthi.Jarādhammanti jarāsabhāvaṃ. Esa nayo sabbattha.

182.In the second, natthi koci pāṭibhogo means there is no one able to be a guarantor, saying, "I am your guarantor." Jarādhamma means of the nature of aging. This is the method everywhere.

3. Sutasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Sutasuttavaṇṇanā

183.Tatiyenatthi tato dosoti tasmiṃ doso nāma natthīti attho.

183.In the third, natthi tato doso means there is no fault in that, this is the meaning.

4. Abhayasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Abhayasuttavaṇṇanā

184.Catutthe kicchājīvitakāraṇaṭṭhena rogovarogātaṅkonāma.Phuṭṭhassāti tena rogātaṅkena samannāgatassa.Urattāḷiṃ kandatīti uraṃ tāḷetvā rodati.Akatakalyāṇotiādīsu kalyāṇaṃ vuccati puññakammaṃ, taṃ akataṃ etenāti akatakalyāṇo. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Puññakammameva hi kosallasambhūtattākusalaṃ,bhītassa parittāyakattābhīruttāṇanti vuccati.Katapāpotiādīsu pāpaṃ vuccati lāmakaṃ akusalakammaṃ.Luddanti kakkhaḷakammaṃ.Kibbisanti samalaṃ aparisuddhakammaṃ.Kaṅkhī hotīti buddhadhammasaṅghaguṇesu ceva sikkhāya ca pubbante ca aparante ca pubbantāparante ca paṭiccasamuppāde cāti aṭṭhasu ṭhānesu kaṅkhāya samannāgato hoti.Vicikicchīti vicikicchāya samannāgato sāsanasaddhamme na niṭṭhaṃ gato, uggahaparipucchāvasena niṭṭhaṃ gantuṃ na sakkoti. Iminā nayena sabbattha attho veditabbo.

184.In the fourth, rogātaṅko means like a disease, due to the cause of a difficult life. Phuṭṭhassā means for one afflicted by that disease. Urattāḷiṃ kandatī means he weeps striking his chest. In akatakalyāṇo etc., kalyāṇaṃ is called meritorious action; one by whom that is not done is akatakalyāṇo. This is the same method in the remaining terms. For meritorious action itself, being born of skillfulness, is called kusalaṃ, and being a refuge for the frightened, it is called bhīruttāṇaṃ. In katapāpo etc., pāpaṃ is called base unwholesome action. Luddaṃ means harsh action. Kibbisaṃ means defiled impure action. Kaṅkhī hotī means he is endowed with doubt in eight places, namely in the qualities of the Buddha, Dhamma, and Saṅgha, and in the training, and in the past end, and in the future end, and in the past and future end, and in dependent origination. Vicikicchī means he is endowed with uncertainty, he has not reached a conclusion in the Teaching, he is unable to reach a conclusion by way of learning and questioning. By this method, the meaning should be understood everywhere.

5. Brāhmaṇasaccasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Brāhmaṇasaccasuttavaṇṇanā

185.Pañcamebrāhmaṇasaccānīti brāhmaṇānaṃ saccāni tathāni.So tena na samaṇoti maññatīti so khīṇāsavo tena saccena ‘‘ahaṃ samaṇo’’ti taṇhāmānadiṭṭhīhi na maññati. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo.Yadeva tattha saccaṃ, tadabhiññāyāti yaṃ tattha ‘‘sabbe pāṇā avajjhā’’ti paṭipattiyā saccaṃ tathaṃ aviparītaṃ. Iminā vacīsaccaṃ abbhantaraṃ katvā paramatthasaccaṃ nibbānaṃ dasseti.Tadabhiññāyāti taṃ ubhayampi abhivisiṭṭhāya paññāya jānitvā.Anuddayāya anukampāya paṭipanno hotīti anuddayatthāya ca anukampatthāya ca yā paṭipadā, taṃ paṭipanno hoti, pūretvā ṭhitoti attho. Sesapaṭipadāsupi eseva nayo.

185.In the fifth, brāhmaṇasaccānī means the truths of the brāhmaṇas are realities. So tena na samaṇoti maññatī means that arahant, with that truth, does not consider "I am a samaṇa" with craving, conceit, and views. This is the same method in the remaining terms. Yadeva tattha saccaṃ, tadabhiññāyā means that which there is true, real, not reversed, by the practice "all beings are not to be killed." Making this verbal truth internal, he shows the ultimate truth, Nibbāna. Tadabhiññāyā means having known both of those with higher wisdom. Anuddayāya anukampāya paṭipanno hotī means he is engaged in the practice for the sake of compassion and for the sake of sympathy, that is, he stands fulfilling it. This is the same method in the remaining practices.

Sabbe kāmāti sabbe vatthukāmakilesakāmā.Iti vadaṃ brāhmaṇo saccamāhāti evampi vadanto khīṇāsavabrāhmaṇo saccameva āha.Sabbe bhavāti kāmabhavādayo tayopi.Nāhaṃ kvacanīti ettha pana catukkoṭikasuññatā kathitā. Ayañhi ‘‘nāhaṃ kvacanī’’ti kvaci attānaṃ na passati,kassaci kiñcanatasminti attano attānaṃ kassaci parassa kiñcanabhāve upanetabbaṃ na passati, bhātiṭṭhāne bhātaraṃ, sahāyaṭṭhāne sahāyaṃ, parikkhāraṭṭhāne vā parikkhāraṃ maññitvā upanetabbaṃ na passatīti attho.Na ca mama kvacanīti ettha mamasaddaṃ tāva ṭhapetvā ‘‘na ca kvacani parassa ca attānaṃ kvaci na passatī’’ti ayamattho. Idāni ‘‘mamasaddaṃ āharitvā mama kismiñci kiñcanaṃ natthī’’ti so parassa attā mama kismiñci kiñcanabhāve atthīti na passati, attano bhātiṭṭhāne bhātaraṃ, sahāyaṭṭhāne sahāyaṃ, parikkhāraṭṭhāne vā parikkhāranti kismiñci ṭhāne parassa attānaṃ iminā kiñcanabhāvena upanetabbaṃ na passatīti attho. Evamayaṃ yasmā neva katthaci attānaṃ passati, na taṃ parassa kiñcanabhāve upanetabbaṃ passati, na parassa attānaṃ passati, na parassa attānaṃ attano kiñcanabhāve upanetabbaṃ passatīti.Iti vadaṃ brāhmaṇoti evaṃ catukkoṭikaṃ suññataṃ vadantopi khīṇāsavabrāhmaṇo tassā paṭipadāya sammā paṭividdhattā saccameva āha, na musāti sabbesupi vāresu maññanānaṃ pahīnattāyeva na maññatīti ca attho veditabbo.Ākiñcaññaṃyevapaṭipadanti kiñcanabhāvavirahitaṃ nippalibodhaṃ niggahaṇameva paṭipadaṃ paṭipanno hoti pūretvā ṭhito.

Sabbe kāmā means all sensuous pleasures and defilement-sensuous pleasures. Iti vadaṃ brāhmaṇo saccamāhā means even saying thus, the arahant-brāhmaṇa speaks only the truth. Sabbe bhavā means the three existences, beginning with the sensuous existence. Nāhaṃ kvacanī means here the emptiness of four extremes is stated. For he does not see himself anywhere in "nāhaṃ kvacanī." kassaci kiñcanatasminti he does not see his self as fit to be brought into any state of possession of anyone else, thinking of a brother in the place of a brother, a friend in the place of a friend, or a requisite in the place of a requisite; this is the meaning. Now, setting aside the word "mama," the meaning is "na ca kvacani parassa ca attānaṃ kvaci na passatī," "and he does not see either himself or another's self anywhere." Now, bringing in the word "mama," "mama kismiñci kiñcanaṃ natthī," he does not see the other's self as being in any state of possession of mine, he does not see another's self in any place, thinking of a brother in the place of a brother, a friend in the place of a friend, or a requisite in the place of a requisite, in any place that is fit to be brought into this state of possession. Thus, since he sees neither himself anywhere, nor sees that it should be brought into another's state of possession, nor sees another's self, nor sees another's self as fit to be brought into his state of possession, therefore iti vadaṃ brāhmaṇo means even speaking of the emptiness of four extremes, the arahant-brāhmaṇa speaks only the truth, not falsely, because of the thorough penetration of that practice; and the meaning should be understood that he does not consider it because of the abandonment of all views in all cases. Ākiñcaññaṃyeva paṭipada means he is engaged in the practice, fulfilling it, which is devoid of possessions, without obstacles, without grasping.

Imāni kho paribbājakā cattāri brāhmaṇasaccāni mayā sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvā paveditānīti yāni tumhe bhovādibrāhmaṇānaṃ saccāni vadetha, tehi aññāni mayā imāni bāhitapāpabrāhmaṇassa cattāri saccāni catūhi maggehi soḷasavidhena kiccena jānitvā paccakkhaṃ katvā paveditāni desitāni jotitānīti attho. Iti imasmiṃ sutte catūsupi ṭhānesu khīṇāsavassa vacīsaccameva kathitanti.

These four truths of the Brahmanas, O wanderers, are realized and proclaimed by me through direct knowledge—meaning that these four truths of the sinless Brahmana, which you call the truths of the 'bhovādi' Brahmanas, are known, realized, and proclaimed by me, having been known through the four paths with a sixteenfold task. Thus, in this sutta, in all four places, only the truthful speech of the Khīṇāsava has been spoken.

6. Ummaggasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Ummaggasuttavaṇṇanā

186.Chaṭṭheparikassatīti ākaḍḍhiyati.Ummaggoti ummujjanaṃ, paññāgamananti attho. Paññā eva vā ummujjanaṭṭhena ummaggoti vuccati. Sāva paṭibhānaṭṭhenapaṭibhānaṃ. Cittassauppannassa vasaṃ gacchatīti ye cittassa vasaṃ gacchanti, tesaṃyevettha gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ.Atthamaññāya dhammamaññāyāti atthañca pāḷiñca jānitvā.Dhammānudhammappaṭipanno hotīti lokuttaradhammassa anucchavikadhammaṃ saha sīlena pubbabhāgappaṭipadaṃ paṭipanno hoti.Nibbedhikapaññoti nibbijjhanakapañño.Idaṃ dukkhanti ṭhapetvā taṇhaṃ sesaṃ tebhūmakakkhandhapañcakaṃ dukkhanti sutaṃ hoti.Paññāyāti maggapaññāya.Ayaṃ dukkhasamudayoti vaṭṭamūlakataṇhā tassa dukkhassa samudayoti sutaṃ hoti. Iminā upāyena sesadvayepi attho veditabbo. Catutthapañhavissajjanena arahattaphalaṃ kathitanti veditabbaṃ.

186. In the sixth, parikassati means it is pulled. Ummaggo means emerging, the coming forth of wisdom. Or, wisdom itself is called ummagga because of the meaning of emerging. That itself, in the sense of readiness of wit, is paṭibhānaṃ. Cittassa uppannassa vasaṃ gacchati means only those who go under the control of the mind are to be understood here. Atthamaññāya dhammamaññāya means having understood the meaning and the Pali. Dhammānudhammappaṭipanno hoti means he practices the Dhamma that accords with the supramundane Dhamma, along with morality, the preliminary practice. Nibbedhikapañño means wisdom that penetrates. Idaṃ dukkhaṃ means, setting aside craving, the remaining five aggregates of existence in the three realms are heard as suffering. Paññāya means by the wisdom of the path. Ayaṃ dukkhasamudayo means craving, the root of the cycle of existence, is heard as the origin of that suffering. In this way, the meaning should be understood in the remaining two as well. By the explanation of the fourth question, the fruit of Arahatship is said to be explained.

7. Vassakārasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Vassakārasuttavaṇṇanā

187.Sattametodeyyassāti tudigāmavāsikassa.Parisatīti sannipatitāya parisāya.Parūpārambhaṃ vattentīti paragarahaṃ pavattenti kathenti.Bālo ayaṃ rājātiādi yaṃ te upārambhaṃ vattenti, tassa dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ.Samaṇe rāmaputteti udake rāmaputte.Abhippasannoti atikkamma pasanno.Paramanipaccakāranti uttamanipātakiriyaṃ nīcavuttiṃ.Parihārakāti paricārakā.Yamakotiādīni tesaṃ nāmāni. Tesu hi eko yamako nāma, eko moggallo nāma, eko uggo nāma, eko nāvindakī nāma, eko gandhabbo nāma, eko aggivesso nāma.Tyāssudanti etthaassudanti nipātamattaṃ, te attano parisati nisinneti attho.Iminā nayena netīti iminā kāraṇena anuneti jānāpeti.Karaṇīyādhikaraṇīyesūti paṇḍitehi kattabbakiccesu ca atirekakattabbakiccesu ca.Vacanīyādhivacanīyesūti vattabbesu ca atirekavattabbesu ca.Alamatthadasatarehīti ettha atthe passituṃ samatthā alamatthadasā, te atisitvā ṭhitā alamatthadasatarā, tehi alamatthadasatarehi.Alamatthadasataroti alamatthadasatāya uttaritaro, chekehi chekataro paṇḍitehi paṇḍitataroti pucchanto evamāha. Athassa te paṭipucchantāevaṃ bhotiādimāhaṃsu. Iti brāhmaṇo attano sappurisatāya taṃ eḷeyyarājānampi tassa parivārikepi udakampi rāmaputtaṃ pasaṃsi. Andho viya hi asappuriso, cakkhumā viya sappuriso. Yathā andho neva anandhaṃ na andhaṃ passati, evaṃ asappuriso neva sappurisaṃ na asappurisaṃ jānāti. Yathā cakkhumā andhampi anandhampi passati, evaṃ sappuriso sappurisampi asappurisampi jānāti. Todeyyopi sappurisatāya asappurise aññāsīti imamatthavasaṃ paṭicca tuṭṭhamānaso brāhmaṇoacchariyaṃ bho, gotamātiādīni vatvā tathāgatassa bhāsitaṃ anumoditvā pakkāmi.

187. In the seventh, Todeyyassā means of the one living in Tudigāma. Parisatī means to the assembled gathering. Parūpārambhaṃ vattentī means they cause blame of others to proceed; they speak. Bālo ayaṃ rājā etc., is said to show the blaming that they speak. Samaṇe rāmaputte means Rāmaputta in the water. Abhippasanno means exceedingly pleased. Paramanipaccakāra means the utmost humility, humble conduct. Parihārakā means attendants. Yamako etc., are their names. Among them, one is named Yamaka, one is named Moggalla, one is named Ugga, one is named Nāvindakī, one is named Gandhabba, one is named Aggivessa. Tyāssuda—here, assuda is merely a particle; they are sitting in his assembly, is the meaning. Iminā nayena netī means by this reason, he leads, makes known. Karaṇīyādhikaraṇīyesū means in tasks to be done by the wise and in additional tasks to be done. Vacanīyādhivacanīyesū means in things to be said and in additional things to be said. Alamatthadasatarehī—here, those who are capable of seeing the meaning are alamatthadasā; those who stand surpassing them are alamatthadasatarā; by those who are more capable of seeing the meaning. Alamatthadasataro means further superior in the capability of seeing the meaning, more skilled than the skilled, more wise than the wise, he asks thus. Then, those answering him asked evaṃ bho, etc. Thus, the Brahmana praised Eḷeyyarāja, his attendants, and Udaka Rāmaputta, by his own goodness. The unvirtuous one is like the blind, the virtuous one is like one with sight. Just as the blind man sees neither one without blindness nor one with blindness, so the unvirtuous man knows neither the virtuous nor the unvirtuous. Just as one with sight sees both the blind and one without blindness, so the virtuous man knows both the virtuous and the unvirtuous. Todeyya also, by his virtue, knew the unvirtuous, and with this meaning in mind, the Brahmana, with a delighted mind, said, acchariyaṃ bho, gotamā, etc., and having approved the Tathagata's speech, departed.

8. Upakasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Upakasuttavaṇṇanā

188.Aṭṭhameupakoti tassa nāmaṃ.Maṇḍikāputtoti maṇḍikāya putto.Upasaṅkamīti so kira devadattassa upaṭṭhāko, ‘‘kiṃ nu kho satthā mayi attano santikaṃ upagate vaṇṇaṃ kathessati, udāhu avaṇṇa’’nti pariggaṇhanatthaṃ upasaṅkami. ‘‘Nerayiko devadatto kappaṭṭho atekiccho’’ti (cūḷava. 348) vacanaṃ sutvā satthāraṃ ghaṭṭetukāmo upasaṅkamītipi vadanti.Parūpārambhaṃ vattetīti paragarahaṃ katheti.Sabbo so na upapādetīti sabbopi so kusaladhammaṃ na uppādeti, attano vā vacanaṃ upapādetuṃ anucchavikaṃ kātuṃ na sakkoti.Anupapādento gārayho hotīti kusalaṃ dhammaṃ uppādetuṃ asakkonto attano ca vacanaṃ upapannaṃ anucchavikaṃ kātuṃ asakkonto gārayho hoti.Upavajjoti upavaditabbo ca hoti, vajjena vā upeto hoti, sadoso hotīti attho.

188. In the eighth, Upako is his name. Maṇḍikāputto means the son of Maṇḍikā. Upasaṅkamī means it is said that he was an attendant of Devadatta, and he approached intending to discern, "Will the Teacher praise me when I have approached his presence, or will he criticize?" It is also said that he approached wanting to provoke the Teacher, having heard the saying, "Devadatta is destined for hell, will remain for a kappa, and is incurable." (cūḷava. 348). Parūpārambhaṃ vattetī means he speaks the blame of others. Sabbo so na upapādetī means he does not produce any skillful Dhamma, or he is not able to make his own statement fit, accordant. Anupapādento gārayho hotī means, being unable to produce skillful Dhamma, and being unable to make his own statement fit, accordant, he is blameworthy. Upavajjo means he is to be reproached, or he is endowed with fault, he is with defect, is the meaning.

parūpārambhantiādimāha.Ummujjamānakaṃyevāti udakato sīsaṃ ukkhipantaṃyeva.Tattha aparimāṇā padātiādīsu tasmiṃ akusalanti paññāpane padānipi akkharānipi dhammadesanāpi aparimāṇāyeva.Itipidaṃakusalanti idampi akusalaṃ idampi akusalaṃ imināpi kāraṇena imināpi kāraṇena akusalanti evaṃ akusalapaññattiyaṃ āgatānipi aparimāṇāni. Athāpi aññenākārena tathāgato taṃ dhammaṃ deseyya, evampissa desanā aparimāṇā bhaveyya. Yathāha – ‘‘apariyādinnāvassa tathāgatassa dhammadesanā, apariyādinnaṃ dhammapadabyañjana’’nti (ma. ni. 1.161). Iminā upāyena sabbavāresu attho veditabbo.Yāva dhaṃsī vatāyanti yāva guṇadhaṃsī vata ayaṃ.Loṇakāradārakoti loṇakāragāmadārako.Yatra hi nāmāti yo hi nāma.Āsādetabbaṃ maññissatīti ghaṭṭetabbaṃ maññissati.Apehīti apagaccha, mā me purato aṭṭhāsi. Evañca pana vatvā gīvāya gaṇhāpetvā nikkaḍḍhāpesiyevāti.

Parūpārambha etc., he said. Ummujjamānakaṃyevā means just raising his head from the water. Tattha aparimāṇā padā etc.—in that which is unskillful, even the words and letters, even the teaching of the Dhamma, are immeasurable. Itipidaṃ akusala means this too is unskillful, this too is unskillful, by this reason too, by this reason too, it is unskillful. Thus, even those that have come into the designation of unskillful are immeasurable. Even if the Tathagata were to teach that Dhamma in another way, even that teaching of his would be immeasurable. As it was said, "The Tathagata's teaching of the Dhamma is without limit, the word and expression of the Dhamma are without limit" (ma. ni. 1.161). In this way, the meaning should be understood in all instances. Yāva dhaṃsī vatāya means indeed, to what extent is he a destroyer of virtues. Loṇakāradārako means the boy from the village of the salt-makers. Yatra hi nāmā means whoever indeed. Āsādetabbaṃ maññissatī means he will think it should be provoked. Apehī means go away, do not stand before me. And having said this, he had him seized by the neck and dragged out.

9. Sacchikaraṇīyasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Sacchikaraṇīyasuttavaṇṇanā

189.Navamekāyenāti nāmakāyena.Sacchikaraṇīyāti paccakkhaṃ kātabbā.Satiyāti pubbenivāsānussatiyā.Cakkhunāti dibbacakkhunā.Paññāyāti jhānapaññāya vipassanāpaññā sacchikātabbā, vipassanāpaññāya maggapaññā, maggapaññāya phalapaññā, phalapaññāya paccavekkhaṇapaññā sacchikātabbā, pattabbāti attho. Āsavānaṃ khayasaṅkhātaṃ pana arahattaṃ paccavekkhaṇavasena paccavekkhaṇapaññāya sacchikaraṇīyaṃ nāmāti.

189. In the ninth, kāyenā means by the name-body. Sacchikaraṇīyā means to be realized directly. Satiyā means by recollection of past lives. Cakkhunā means by the divine eye. Paññāyā means by the wisdom of jhāna, the wisdom of Vipassanā is to be realized; by the wisdom of Vipassanā, the wisdom of the Path; by the wisdom of the Path, the wisdom of the Fruit; by the wisdom of the Fruit, the wisdom of reviewing is to be realized, is the meaning. But Arahatship, reckoned as the destruction of the āsavas, is said to be realizable by the wisdom of reviewing in terms of reviewing.

10. Uposathasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Uposathasuttavaṇṇanā

190.Dasametuṇhībhūtaṃ tuṇhībhūtanti yato yato anuviloketi, tato tato tuṇhībhūtameva.Bhikkhū āmantesīti paṭipattisampanne bhikkhū pasannehi cakkhūhi anuviloketvā uppannadhammapāmojjo thometukāmatāya āmantesi.Apalāpāti palāparahitā. Itaraṃ tasseva vevacanaṃ.Suddhāti nimmalā.Sāre patiṭṭhitāti sīlādisāre patiṭṭhitā.Alanti yuttaṃ.Yojanagaṇanānīti ekaṃ yojanaṃ yojanameva, dasapi yojanāni yojanāneva. Tato uddhaṃ ‘‘yojanagaṇanānī’’ti vuccati. Idha pana yojanasatampi yojanasahassampi adhippetaṃ.Puṭosenāpīti puṭosaṃ vuccati pātheyyaṃ, pātheyyaṃ gahetvāpi upasaṅkamituṃ yuttamevāti attho. Puṭaṃsenātipi pāṭho. Tassattho – puṭo aṃse assāti puṭaṃso, tena puṭaṃsena, aṃsena pātheyyapuṭaṃ vahantenāpīti vuttaṃ hoti.

190. In the tenth, tuṇhībhūtaṃ tuṇhībhūtaṃ means wherever he looks around, it is only silent. Bhikkhū āmantesī means having looked around at the monks endowed with practice with delighted eyes, filled with the joy of the Dhamma that had arisen, he addressed them, wanting to praise them. Apalāpā means without deceit. The other is a synonym for that same. Suddhā means pure. Sāre patiṭṭhitā means established in morality and other essences. Ala means fitting. Yojanagaṇanānī means one yojana is only one yojana, even ten yojanas are only yojanas. Above that, it is called "yojanagaṇanānī". Here, however, even a hundred yojanas or a thousand yojanas is intended. Puṭosenāpī—puṭosaṃ is said to be provisions for a journey; it is indeed fitting to approach even having taken provisions for a journey, is the meaning. There is also a reading "Puṭaṃsenātipi". Its meaning is: puṭo aṃse assāti puṭaṃso—one whose provision-bag is on the shoulder, by that puṭaṃsa, it is said to be even by one carrying a bag of provisions on his shoulder.

santi bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tatthadevappattāti upapattidevanibbattakaṃ dibbavihāraṃ dibbavihārena ca arahattaṃ pattā.Brahmappattāti niddosaṭṭhena brahmabhāvasādhakaṃ brahmavihāraṃ brahmavihārena ca arahattaṃ pattā.Āneñjappattāti aniñjanabhāvasādhakaṃ āneñjaṃ āneñjena ca arahattaṃ pattā.Ariyappattāti puthujjanabhāvaṃ atikkamma ariyabhāvaṃ pattā.Evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu devappatto hotītiādīsu evaṃ rūpāvacaracatutthajjhāne ṭhatvā cittaṃ vivaṭṭetvā arahattaṃ patto devappatto nāma hoti, catūsu brahmavihāresu ṭhatvā cittaṃ vivaṭṭetvā arahattaṃ patto brahmappatto nāma, catūsu arūpajjhānesu ṭhatvā cittaṃ vivaṭṭetvā arahattaṃ patto āneñjappatto nāma.Idaṃ dukkhantiādīhi catūhi saccehi cattāro maggā tīṇi ca phalāni kathitāni. Tasmā imaṃ ariyadhammaṃ patto bhikkhu ariyappatto nāma hotīti.

Santi bhikkhave etc., he said. There, devappattā means those who have attained divine existence that produces rebirth in the realm of devas, and Arahatship by means of divine abiding. Brahmappattā means those who have attained Brahma-abiding that establishes the state of Brahma in the sense of being without fault, and Arahatship by means of Brahma-abiding. Āneñjappattā means those who have attained the imperturbable state that establishes the state of imperturbability, and Arahatship by means of imperturbability. Ariyappattā means those who have attained the state of the noble ones, having transcended the state of ordinary beings. Evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu devappatto hotī etc.—in these, a monk who, having stood in such fourth jhāna of the realm of form, has developed his mind and attained Arahatship is called devappatto; one who, having stood in the four Brahma-vihāras, has developed his mind and attained Arahatship is called brahmappatto; one who, having stood in the four formless jhānas, has developed his mind and attained Arahatship is called āneñjappatto. Idaṃ dukkha etc.—by the four truths, the four paths and the three fruits are spoken. Therefore, a monk who has attained this noble Dhamma is called ariyappatto.

(20) 5. Mahāvaggo

(20) 5. Mahāvaggo

1. Sotānugatasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Sotānugatasuttavaṇṇanā

191.Pañcamassa paṭhamesotānugatānanti pasādasotaṃ odahitvā ñāṇasotena vavatthapitānaṃ.Cattāro ānisaṃsā pāṭikaṅkhāti cattāro guṇānisaṃsā pāṭikaṅkhitabbā. Idaṃ pana bhagavatā atthuppattivasena āraddhaṃ. Kataraatthuppattivasenāti? Bhikkhūnaṃ dhammassavanāya anupasaṅkamanaatthuppattivasena. Pañcasatā kira brāhmaṇapabbajitā ‘‘sammāsambuddho liṅgavacanavibhattipadabyañjanādīhi kathento amhehi ñātameva kathessati, aññātaṃ kiṃ kathessatī’’ti dhammassavanatthaṃ na gacchanti. Satthā taṃ pavattiṃ sutvā te pakkosāpetvā ‘‘kasmā evaṃ karotha, sakkaccaṃ dhammaṃ suṇātha, sakkaccaṃ dhammaṃ suṇantānañca sajjhāyantānañca ime ettakā ānisaṃsā’’ti dassento imaṃ desanaṃ ārabhi.

191. In the fifth, in the first, sotānugatāna means those who have listened with the ear of faith, determined with the ear of knowledge. Cattāro ānisaṃsā pāṭikaṅkhā means four qualities and benefits are to be expected. This, however, was begun by the Blessed One in terms of arising meaning. In terms of which arising of meaning? In terms of the arising of meaning of the monks not approaching to hear the Dhamma. It is said that five hundred Brahmanas and ascetics, thinking, "When the Sammāsambuddho speaks with forms, words, inflections, phrases, expressions, etc., he will speak only what is known by us; what unknown thing will he speak?", do not go to hear the Dhamma. The Teacher, having heard that account, had them summoned and, showing "Why do you do this? Listen to the Dhamma respectfully, and to those who listen to the Dhamma respectfully and recite it, these are so many benefits," began this discourse.

dhammaṃ pariyāpuṇātīti suttaṃ geyyantiādikaṃ navaṅgaṃ satthusāsanabhūtaṃ tantidhammaṃ vaḷañjeti.Sotānugatā hontīti sotaṃ anuppattā anupaviṭṭhā honti.Manasānupekkhitāti cittena olokitā.Diṭṭhiyā suppaṭividdhāti atthato ca kāraṇato ca paññāya suṭṭhu paṭividdhā paccakkhaṃ katā.Muṭṭhassati kālaṃ kurumānoti nayidaṃ buddhavacanaṃ anussaraṇasatiyā abhāvena vuttaṃ, puthujjanakālakiriyaṃ pana sandhāya vuttaṃ. Puthujjano hi muṭṭhassati kālaṃ karoti nāma.Upapajjatīti suddhasīle patiṭṭhito devaloke nibbattati.Dhammapadā plavantīti antarābhave nibbattamuṭṭhassatino, yepi pubbe sajjhāyamūlikā vācāparicitabuddhavacanadhammā, te sabbe pasanne ādāse chāyā viya plavanti, pākaṭā hutvā paññāyanti.Dandho, bhikkhave, satuppādoti buddhavacanānussaraṇasatiyā uppādo dandho garu. Atha so satto khippaṃyeva visesagāmī hoti, nibbānagāmī hotīti attho.

Dhammaṃ pariyāpuṇātī means he cultivates the Tantī Dhamma, the Dhamma that is the teaching of the Teacher, consisting of nine parts, such as Sutta, Geyya, etc. Sotānugatā hontī means they have come to the ear, entered the ear. Manasānupekkhitā means considered by the mind. Diṭṭhiyā suppaṭividdhā means thoroughly penetrated by wisdom in terms of meaning and in terms of cause, made directly known. Muṭṭhassati kālaṃ kurumāno—this is not said due to the absence of mindfulness of recollection of the Buddha's word, but is said with reference to the death of an ordinary person. For an ordinary person dies unmindful, it is said. Upapajjatī means, established in pure morality, he is reborn in the realm of devas. Dhammapadā plavantī means for one dying unmindful in the intermediate existence, all those teachings of the Buddha, the words familiar from previous recitation, float like reflections in a clear mirror, becoming manifest, they appear. Dandho, bhikkhave, satuppādo means the arising of mindfulness of recollection of the Buddha's word is slow, difficult. Then, that being quickly goes to distinction, goes to Nibbana, is the meaning.

Iddhimā cetovasippattoti iddhisampanno cittassa vasibhāvapatto khīṇāsavo.Ayaṃvā so dhammavinayoti ettha vibhāvanattho vā-saddo.Yatthāti yasmiṃ dhammavinaye.Brahmacariyaṃ acarinti brahmacariyavāsaṃ vasiṃ. Idampi buddhavacanaṃ mayā pubbe vaḷañjitanti buddhavacanānussaraṇavasenetaṃ vuttaṃ.Devaputtoti pañcālacaṇḍo viya hatthakamahābrahmā viya sanaṅkumārabrahmā viya ca eko dhammakathikadevaputto.Opapātiko opapātikaṃ sāretīti paṭhamaṃ uppanno devaputto pacchā uppannaṃ sāreti.Sahapaṃsukīḷikāti etena nesaṃ dīgharattaṃ kataparicayabhāvaṃ dasseti.Samāgaccheyyunti sālāya vā rukkhamūle vā sammukhībhāvaṃ gaccheyyuṃ.Evaṃ vadeyyāti sālāya vā rukkhamūle vā paṭhamataraṃ nisinno pacchā āgataṃ evaṃ vadeyya. Sesamettha pāḷinayeneva veditabbaṃ.

Iddhimā cetovasippatto means a Khīṇāsava who is endowed with psychic power, has attained mastery of mind. Ayaṃ vā so dhammavinayo—here, the word "vā" is for the sake of emphasis. Yatthā means in which Dhamma-Vinaya. Brahmacariyaṃ acari means he lived the life of celibacy. This statement, "This Buddha's word was cultivated by me formerly," is said in terms of mindfulness of recollection of the Buddha's word. Devaputto means a certain deva-son who is a Dhamma-speaker, like Pañcālacaṇḍa, like Hatthaka Mahābrahmā, and like Sanankumāra Brahmā. Opapātiko opapātikaṃ sāretī means the deva-son who was born first reminds the one who was born later. Sahapaṃsukīḷikā—by this, he shows their state of having been familiar for a long time. Samāgaccheyyu means they might come to a state of being face to face in a hall or at the foot of a tree. Evaṃ vadeyyā means the one who sat down earlier in the hall or at the foot of the tree might say thus to the one who came later. The rest here should be understood according to the way of the Pali.

2. Ṭhānasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Ṭhānasuttavaṇṇanā

192.Dutiyeṭhānānīti kāraṇāni.Ṭhānehīti kāraṇehi.Soceyyanti sucibhāvo.Saṃvasamānoti ekato vasamāno.Na santatakārīti na satatakārī.Na santatavutti sīlesūti satataṃ sabbakālaṃ sīlajīvitaṃ na jīvatīti attho.Saṃvohāramānoti kathento.Ekena eko voharatīti ekena saddhiṃ eko hutvā katheti.Vokkamatīti okkamati.Purimavohārā pacchimavohāranti purimakathāya pacchimakathaṃ, purimakathāya ca pacchimakathā, pacchimakathāya ca purimakathā na sametīti attho.

192. In the second, ṭhānānī means causes. Ṭhānehī means by causes. Soceyya means purity. Saṃvasamāno means living together. Na santatakārī means he is not constant. Na santatavutti sīlesū means he does not live a life of morality constantly, at all times, is the meaning. Saṃvohāramāno means while conversing. Ekena eko voharatī means he speaks being one with one. Vokkamatī means he deviates. Purimavohārā pacchimavohāra means the latter talk does not agree with the former talk, nor the former talk with the latter talk, nor the latter talk with the former talk.

Ñātibyasanenātiādīsu ñātīnaṃ byasanaṃ ñātibyasanaṃ, ñātivināsoti attho. Dutiyapadepi eseva nayo.Rogabyasanepana rogoyeva ārogyavināsanato byasanaṃ rogabyasanaṃ.Anuparivattantīti anubandhanti.Lābho cātiādīsu ekaṃ attabhāvaṃ lābho anuparivattati, ekaṃ alābhoti evaṃ nayo netabbo.Sākacchāyamānoti pañhapucchanavissajjanavasena sākacchaṃ karonto.Yathāti yenākārena.Ummaggoti pañhummaggo.Abhinīhāroti pañhābhisaṅkharaṇavasena cittassa abhinīhāro.Samudāhāroti pañhapucchanaṃ.Santanti paccanīkasantatāya santaṃ katvā na kathetīti attho.Paṇītanti atappakaṃ.Atakkāvacaranti yathā takkena nayaggāhena gahetuṃ sakkā hoti, evaṃ na kathetīti attho.Nipuṇanti saṇhaṃ.Paṇḍitavedanīyanti paṇḍitehi jānitabbakaṃ. Sesaṃ sabbattha vuttānusāreneva veditabbaṃ.

Ñātibyasanenāti etc., ñātibyasanaṃ means the calamity of relatives, that is, the destruction of relatives. The same method applies to the second term as well. However, in rogabyasane, rogabyasanaṃ means that disease itself is a calamity because it destroys health. Anuparivattantīti means they follow closely. In lābho cātiādi, the method should be understood thus: one existence is followed by gain, another by loss. Sākacchāyamānoti means engaging in conversation by asking and answering questions. Yathāti means in what manner. Ummaggoti means the path of questioning. Abhinīhāroti means the inclination of the mind through the directing of questions. Samudāhāroti means the asking of a question. Santanti means having calmed by means of opposing continuity, meaning he does not speak. Paṇītanti means not irritating. Atakkāvacaranti means he does not speak in such a way that it can be grasped by reasoning and inference. Nipuṇanti means subtle. Paṇḍitavedanīyanti means to be understood by the wise. The rest should be understood everywhere according to what has been said.

3. Bhaddiyasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Bhaddiyasuttavaṇṇanā

193.Tatiyeupasaṅkamīti bhuttapātarāso hutvā mālāgandhavilepanaṃ gahetvā bhagavantaṃ vandissāmīti upasaṅkami.Mā anussavenātiādīsu anussavavacanena mama kathaṃ mā gaṇhathāti iminā nayena attho veditabbo.Sārambhoti karaṇuttariyalakkhaṇo sārambho.Alobhādayo lobhādipaṭipakkhavasena veditabbā.Kusaladhammūpasampadāyāti kusaladhammānaṃ sampādanatthāya, paṭilābhatthāyāti vuttaṃ hoti.Ime cepi, bhaddiya, mahāsālāti purato ṭhite sālarukkhe dassento evamāha. Sesamettha heṭṭhā vuttanayattā uttānatthattā ca suviññeyyameva. Satthari pana desanaṃ vinivaṭṭente bhaddiyo sotāpanno jātoti.

193.In the third, upasaṅkamīti means having eaten breakfast, he approached, thinking, "I will take garlands, scents, and unguents and pay homage to the Blessed One." In Mā anussavenātiādi, the meaning should be understood in this way: "Do not take my word by hearsay." Sārambhoti means sārambho characterized by making an effort. Alobhādayo should be understood in terms of being opposites of greed etc. Kusaladhammūpasampadāyāti means for the acquisition of wholesome qualities, that is, for the purpose of gaining them. Ime cepi, bhaddiya, mahāsālāti, pointing to the sal trees standing in front, he spoke thus. The rest here is very easy to understand because of the method stated below and because the meaning is straightforward. However, when the Teacher turned back the teaching, Bhaddiya became a sotāpanna.

4. Sāmugiyāsuttavaṇṇanā
4. Sāmugiyāsuttavaṇṇanā

194.Catutthesāmugiyāti sāmuganigamavāsino.Byagghapajjāti te ālapanto evamāha. Kolanagarassa hi kolarukkhe hāretvā katattā kolanagaranti ca byagghapathe māpitattā byagghapajjanti ca dve nāmāni. Etesañca pubbapurisā tattha vasiṃsūti byagghapajjavāsitāya byagghapajjavāsino byagghapajjāti vuccanti. Te ālapanto evamāha.Pārisuddhipadhāniyaṅgānīti pārisuddhiatthāya padhāniyaṅgāni padahitabbavīriyassa aṅgāni, koṭṭhāsāti attho.Sīlapārisuddhipadhāniyaṅganti sīlaparisodhanavīriyassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Tañhi sīlapārisuddhiparipūraṇatthāya padhāniyaṅganti sīlapārisuddhipadhāniyaṅgaṃ. Sesesupi eseva nayo.Tattha tattha paññāya anuggahessāmīti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ ṭhāne vipassanāpaññāya anuggahessāmi.Yo tattha chandotiādīsu yo tasmiṃ anuggaṇhane kattukāmatāchandoti iminā nayena attho veditabbo. Satisampajaññaṃ panettha satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvā ñāṇena paricchinditvā vīriyapaggahanatthaṃ vuttaṃ.Rajanīyesu dhammesu cittaṃ virājetīti rāgapaccayesu iṭṭhārammaṇesu yathā cittaṃ virajjati, evaṃ karoti.Vimocanīyesu dhammesu cittaṃ vimocetīti yehi ārammaṇehi cittaṃ vimocetabbaṃ, tesu yathā vimuccati, evaṃ karoti.Virājetvāti ettha maggakkhaṇe virājeti nāma, phalakkhaṇe virattaṃ nāma hoti. Dutiyapadepi eseva nayo.Sammāvimuttiṃ phusatīti hetunā nayena arahattaphalavimuttiṃ ñāṇaphassena phusatīti.

194.In the fourth, sāmugiyāti means those dwelling in the Sāmuga village. Byagghapajjāti, addressing them, he spoke thus. For Kolanagara has two names, Kolanagara because it was made after carrying a kola tree to the city, and Byagghapajja because it was measured out on the path of tigers. And because their ancestors lived there, those dwelling in Byagghapajja are called Byagghapajja due to living in Byagghapajja. Addressing them, he spoke thus. Pārisuddhipadhāniyaṅgānīti means the limbs essential for purity, the limbs of effort that should be exerted, the component parts. Sīlapārisuddhipadhāniyaṅganti is the name for the effort of purifying virtue. For since it is an essential limb for the fulfillment of the purity of virtue, it is a sīlapārisuddhipadhāniyaṅga. The same method applies to the rest as well. Tattha tattha paññāya anuggahessāmīti means in each and every place, I will support with the wisdom of insight. In Yo tattha chandotiādi, the meaning should be understood in this way: "Whatever desire there is for that support, the desire to do it." Here, mindfulness and clear comprehension are stated for the purpose of exerting effort after establishing mindfulness and discerning with knowledge. Rajanīyesu dhammesu cittaṃ virājetīti means he acts in such a way that the mind becomes dispassionate towards desirable objects, which are causes for passion. Vimocanīyesu dhammesu cittaṃ vimocetīti means he acts in such a way that it is freed from those objects from which the mind should be freed. Virājetvāti, here, he is said to make dispassionate at the moment of the path, and he is said to be dispassionate at the moment of the fruition. The same method applies to the second term as well. Sammāvimuttiṃ phusatīti means he touches the fruition of arahantship, which is right liberation, with the touch of knowledge, by way of cause.

5. Vappasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Vappasuttavaṇṇanā

195.Pañcamevappoti dasabalassa cūḷapitā sakyarājā.Nigaṇṭhasāvakoti vesāliyaṃ sīhasenāpati viya nāḷandāyaṃ upāligahapati viya ca nigaṇṭhassa nāṭaputtassa upaṭṭhāko.Kāyena saṃvutoti kāyadvārassa saṃvutattā pihitattā kāyena saṃvuto nāma. Sesadvayepi eseva nayo.Avijjāvirāgāti avijjāya khayavirāgena.Vijjuppādāti maggavijjāya uppādena.Taṃ ṭhānanti taṃ kāraṇaṃ.Avipakkavipākanti aladdhavipākavāraṃ.Tatonidānanti taṃhetu tappaccayā.Dukkhavedaniyā āsavā assaveyyunti dukkhavedanāya paccayabhūtā kilesā assaveyyuṃ, tassa purisassa uppajjeyyunti attho.Abhisamparāyanti dutiye attabhāve.Kāyasamārambhapaccayāti kāyakammapaccayena.Āsavāti kilesā.Vighātapariḷāhāti etthavighātoti dukkhaṃ.Pariḷāhoti kāyikacetasiko pariḷāho.Phussa phussa byantīkarotīti ñāṇavajjhaṃ kammaṃ ñāṇaphassena phusitvā phusitvā khayaṃ gameti, vipākavajjhaṃ kammaṃ vipākaphassena phusitvā phusitvā khayaṃ gameti.Nijjarāti kilesajīraṇakapaṭipadā. Sesavāresupi eseva nayo. Idha ṭhatvā ayaṃ bhikkhu khīṇāsavo kātabbo, cattāri mahābhūtāni nīharitvā catusaccavavatthānaṃ dassetvā yāva arahattaphalaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ kathetabbaṃ.

195.In the fifth, vappoti means the Sakyan king who was the great-uncle of the Ten-Powered One. Nigaṇṭhasāvakoti means a follower of the Nigaṇṭha Nāṭaputta, like Sīhasenāpati in Vesālī and Upāligahapati in Nāḷandā. Kāyena saṃvutoti, he is called kāyena saṃvuto because the door of the body is restrained, because it is closed. The same method applies to the other two as well. Avijjāvirāgāti means by the fading away and cessation of ignorance. Vijjuppādāti means by the arising of the knowledge of the path. Taṃ ṭhānanti means that reason. Avipakkavipākanti means a turn of not having obtained its result. Tatonidānanti means because of that reason, because of that condition. Dukkhavedaniyā āsavā assaveyyunti means the defilements that are the cause of painful feeling would flow, that is, would arise in that person. Abhisamparāyanti means in a future existence. Kāyasamārambhapaccayāti means because of the condition of bodily action. Āsavāti means defilements. Vighātapariḷāhāti, here, vighātoti means suffering. Pariḷāhoti means physical and mental torment. Phussa phussa byantīkarotīti means having touched the karma that is liable to yield a result with the touch of knowledge, he destroys it again and again; having touched the karma that is liable to yield a result with the touch of result, he destroys it again and again. Nijjarāti means the practice of wearing out defilements. The same method applies to the other instances as well. Standing here, this bhikkhu should be made a khīṇāsava, after extracting the four great elements, the contemplation of the Four Noble Truths should be shown, and the meditation subject should be spoken up to the fruition of arahantship.

evaṃ sammā vimuttacittassātiādimāha. Tatthasammā vimuttacittassāti hetunā kāraṇena sammā vimuttassa.Satatavihārāti niccavihārā nibaddhavihārā.Neva sumano hotīti iṭṭhārammaṇe rāgavasena na somanassajāto hoti.Na dummanoti aniṭṭhārammaṇe paṭighavasena na domanassajāto hoti.Upekkhako viharati sato sampajānoti satisampajaññapariggahitāya majjhattākāralakkhaṇāya upekkhāya tesu ārammaṇesu upekkhako majjhatto hutvā viharati.

He spoke beginning with evaṃ sammā vimuttacittassātiādi. There, sammā vimuttacittassāti means of one whose mind is rightly liberated, because of that reason. Satatavihārāti means constant dwelling, continuous dwelling. Neva sumano hotīti means he does not become one whose mind is glad in desirable objects because of passion. Na dummanoti means he does not become one whose mind is sad in undesirable objects because of aversion. Upekkhako viharati sato sampajānoti means he dwells, being equanimous, being neutral, towards those objects with equanimity characterized by neutrality, which is encompassed by mindfulness and clear comprehension.

Kāyapariyantikanti kāyantikaṃ kāyaparicchinnaṃ, yāva pañcadvārakāyo pavattati, tāva pavattaṃ pañcadvārikavedananti attho.Jīvitapariyantikanti jīvitantikaṃ jīvitaparicchinnaṃ, yāva jīvitaṃ pavattati, tāva pavattaṃ manodvārikavedananti attho. Tattha pañcadvārikavedanā pacchā uppajjitvā paṭhamaṃ nirujjhati, manodvārikavedanā paṭhamaṃ uppajjitvā pacchā nirujjhati. Sā hi paṭisandhikkhaṇe vatthurūpasmiṃyeva patiṭṭhāti. Pañcadvārikā pavatte pañcadvāravasena pavattamānā paṭhamavaye vīsativassakāle rajjanadussanamuyhanavasena adhimattā balavatī hoti, paṇṇāsavassakāle ṭhitā hoti, saṭṭhivassakālato paṭṭhāya parihāyamānā, asītinavutivassakāle mandā hoti. Tadā hi sattā ‘‘cirarattaṃ ekato nisīdimhā nipajjimhā’’ti vadantepi na jānāmāti vadanti. Adhimattānipi rūpādiārammaṇāni na passāma, sugandhaduggandhaṃ vā sāduasāduṃ vā thaddhamudukaṃ vāti na jānāmātipi vadanti. Iti nesaṃ pañcadvārikavedanā bhaggā hoti, manodvārikā pavattati. Sāpi anupubbena parihāyamānā maraṇasamaye hadayakoṭiṃyeva nissāya pavattati. Yāva panesā pavattati, tāva satto jīvatīti vuccati. Yadā nappavattati, tadā ‘‘mato niruddho’’ti vuccati.

Kāyapariyantikanti means limited by the body, confined to the body; that is, feeling that occurs as long as the five-door body exists. Jīvitapariyantikanti means limited by life, confined to life; that is, feeling that occurs as long as life exists, which is feeling at the mind-door. There, feeling at the five doors arises later and ceases first, while feeling at the mind-door arises first and ceases later. For it is established at the moment of rebirth on the base object itself. Five-door feeling, occurring through the five doors in the course of existence, is exceedingly strong in the first age, at the age of twenty, due to passion, aversion, and confusion; it remains steady at the age of fifty; from the age of sixty onwards, it declines, becoming weak at the age of eighty or ninety. At that time, even when beings say, "We have been sitting or lying down together for a long time," they say that they do not know. They also say that they do not see even very intense objects such as forms, nor do they know whether a smell is fragrant or foul, or whether a taste is delicious or not delicious, or whether something is hard or soft. Thus, their five-door feeling is broken, while the mind-door feeling continues. Gradually declining, even that continues, depending on the heart-base itself at the moment of death. As long as that continues, a being is said to be alive. When it does not continue, then he is said to be "dead, ceased."

Svāyamattho vāpiyā dīpetabbo – yathā hi puriso pañcaudakamaggasampannaṃ vāpiṃ kareyya. Paṭhamaṃ deve vuṭṭhe pañcahi udakamaggehi udakaṃ pavisitvā antovāpiyaṃ āvāṭe pūreyya. Punappunaṃ deve vassante udakamagge pūretvā gāvutaḍḍhayojanamattaṃ ottharitvā udakaṃ tiṭṭheyya tato tato vissandamānaṃ. Atha niddhamanatumbe vivaritvā khettesu kamme kayiramāne udakaṃ nikkhamantaṃ, sassapākakāle udakaṃ nikkhantaṃ udakaṃ parihīnaṃ, ‘‘macche gaṇhāmā’’ti vattabbataṃ āpajjeyya. Tato katipāhena āvāṭesuyeva udakaṃ saṇṭhaheya. Yāva pana taṃ āvāṭesu hoti, tāva mahāvāpiyaṃ udakaṃ atthīti saṅkhaṃ gacchati. Yadā pana tattha chijjati, tadā ‘‘vāpiyaṃ udakaṃ natthī’’ti vuccati. Evaṃ sampadamidaṃ veditabbaṃ.

Here, this meaning should be illustrated by means of a pond: just as a man would make a pond complete with five water inlets. When the rains first fall, water would enter through the five water inlets and fill the pool inside the pond. When the rains fall again and again, after filling the water inlets, the water would stand overflowing about half a league in extent, seeping out from here and there. Then, after opening the spouts of water-lifting devices, the water would flow out while work is being done in the fields; when the crops are ripe, the water would flow out and the water would diminish, reaching a state where it could be said, "Let us catch the fish." Then, after a few days, the water would collect only in the pools. As long as it is in those pools, it is counted that there is water in the great pond. When it is cut off there, then it is said, "There is no water in the pond." This entire matter should be understood similarly.

Paṭhamaṃ deve vassante pañcahi maggehi udake pavisante āvāṭānaṃ pūraṇakālo viya hi paṭhamameva paṭisandhikkhaṇe manodvārikavedanāya vatthurūpe patiṭṭhitakālo, punappunaṃ deve vassante pañcamaggānaṃ pūraṇakālo viya pavatte pañcadvārikavedanāya pavatti, gāvutaḍḍhayojanamattaṃ ajjhottharaṇaṃ viya paṭhamavaye vīsativassakāle rajjanādivasena tassa adhimattabalavabhāvo, yāva vāpito udakaṃ na niggacchati, tāva pūrāya vāpiyā ṭhitakālo viya paññāsavassakāle tassa ṭhitakālo, niddhamanatumbesu vivaṭesu kamme kayiramāne udakassa nikkhamanakālo viya saṭṭhivassakālato paṭṭhāya tassa parihāni, udake bhaṭṭhe udakamaggesu parittaudakassa ṭhitakālo viya asītinavutikāle pañcadvārikavedanāya mandakālo, āvāṭesuyeva udakassa patiṭṭhitakālo viya hadayavatthukoṭiṃ nissāya manodvāre vedanāya pavattikālo, āvāṭesu parittepi udake sati ‘‘vāpiyaṃ udakaṃ atthī’’ti vattabbakālo viya yāva sā pavattati, tāva ‘‘satto jīvatī’’ti vuccati. Yathā pana āvāṭesu udake chinne ‘‘natthi vāpiyaṃ udaka’’nti vuccati, evaṃ manodvārikavedanāya appavattamānāya satto matoti vuccati. Imaṃ vedanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘jīvitapariyantikaṃ vedanaṃ vediyamāno’’ti.

Just as when the rains first fall, when water enters through the five inlets, it is like the time of filling the pools; in the very first moment of rebirth, it is like the time of being established on the base object by mind-door feeling; just as when the rains fall again and again, it is like the time of filling the five inlets; the occurrence of five-door feeling in the course of existence, just as overflowing about half a league in extent, is like its state of being exceedingly strong at the age of twenty, due to passion, etc.; just as the time of the pond remaining full as long as water does not flow out from the pond, is like its steady state at the age of fifty; just as when the spouts of water-lifting devices are opened and work is being done, it is like the time of the water flowing out, is like its decline from the age of sixty onwards; just as when the water is used up, there is little water in the water inlets, is like the weak time of five-door feeling at the age of eighty or ninety; just as when the water is established only in the pools, is like the time of the feeling at the mind-door continuing depending on the heart-base; just as when there is little water in the pools, it can be said, "There is water in the pond," so as long as that continues, it is said that "a being is alive." However, just as when the water in the pools is cut off, it is said, "There is no water in the pond," so when mind-door feeling does not occur, a being is said to be dead. With reference to this feeling, it was said – "experiencing feeling limited by life."

Kāyassa bhedāti kāyassa bhedena.Uddhaṃ jīvitapariyādānāti jīvitakkhayato uddhaṃ.Idhevāti paṭisandhivasena parato agantvā idheva.Sītībhavissantīti pavattivipphandanadaratharahitāni sītāni appavattanadhammāni bhavissanti.

Kāyassa bhedāti means with the breakup of the body. Uddhaṃ jīvitapariyādānāti means after the cessation of life. Idhevāti means without going elsewhere in terms of rebirth, right here. Sītībhavissantīti means they will become cold, without the vibration of the activity, without excitement, without the nature of occurring.

Thūṇaṃ paṭiccāti rukkhaṃ paṭicca.Kuddālapiṭakaṃ ādāyāti kuddālañca khaṇittiñca pacchiñca gahetvāti attho. Desanā pana kuddālavaseneva katā.Mūle chindeyyāti mūlamhi kuddālena chindeyya.Palikhaṇeyyāti khaṇittiyā samantā khaṇeyya.

Thūṇaṃ paṭiccāti means relying on a tree. Kuddālapiṭakaṃ ādāyāti means having taken a spade, a pickaxe, and a basket. However, the teaching was done only by way of the spade. Mūle chindeyyāti means he would cut at the root with the spade. Palikhaṇeyyāti means he would dig around on all sides with the pickaxe.

Evamevakhoti ettha idaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ – rukkho viya hi attabhāvo daṭṭhabbo, rukkhaṃ paṭicca chāyā viya kusalākusalaṃ kammaṃ, chāyaṃ appavattaṃ kātukāmo puriso viya yogāvacaro, kuddālo viya paññā, piṭakaṃ viya samādhi, khaṇitti viya vipassanā, khaṇittiyā mūlānaṃ palikhaṇanakālo viya arahattamaggena avijjāya chedanakālo, khaṇḍākhaṇḍaṃ karaṇakālo viya khandhavasena diṭṭhakālo, phālanakālo viya āyatanavasena diṭṭhakālo, sakalīkaraṇakālo viya dhātuvasena diṭṭhakālo, vātātapena visosanakālo viya kāyikacetasikassa vīriyassa karaṇakālo, agginā ḍahanakālo viya ñāṇena kilesānaṃ ḍahanakālo, masikaraṇakālo viya vattamānaka-pañcakkhandhakālo, mahāvāte ophunanakālo viya nadīsote pavāhanakālo viya ca chinnamūlakānaṃ pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ appaṭisandhikanirodho, ophunanappavāhanehi apaññattikabhāvūpagamo viya punabbhave vipākakkhandhānaṃ anuppādena apaṇṇattikabhāvo veditabbo.

Evamevakhoti, here, this is the connection of the simile: the existence should be seen like a tree; wholesome and unwholesome karma like the shade depending on the tree; the yogi like a man who wants to make the shade not occur; knowledge like the spade; concentration like the basket; insight like the pickaxe; the time of digging around the roots with the pickaxe is like the time of cutting off ignorance with the path of arahantship; the time of making pieces is like the time of seeing in terms of aggregates; the time of splitting is like the time of seeing in terms of sense bases; the time of fragmenting is like the time of seeing in terms of elements; the time of drying up with wind and heat is like the time of making physical and mental effort; the time of burning with fire is like the time of burning the defilements with knowledge; the time of pulverizing is like the time of the present five aggregates; the time of being swept away by the great wind is like the time of being carried away by the river's current is like the non-arising of rebirth of the five aggregates whose roots have been cut off; the state of non-conceptuality by being swept away and carried away should be understood as the state of non-conceptuality due to the non-production of the aggregates of result in future existence.

Bhagavantaṃ etadavocāti satthari desanaṃ vinivaṭṭente sotāpattiphalaṃ patvā etaṃ ‘‘seyyathāpi, bhante’’tiādivacanaṃ avoca. Tatthaudayatthikoti vaḍḍhiatthiko.Assapaṇiyaṃ poseyyāti pañca assapotasatāni kiṇitvā pacchā vikkiṇissāmīti poseyya. Sahassagghanakassa assassa pañcasatamattaṃ upakaraṇaṃ gandhamālādivasena posāvanikaṃyeva agamāsi. Athassa te assā ekadivaseneva rogaṃ phusitvā sabbe jīvitakkhayaṃ pāpuṇeyyunti iminā adhippāyena evamāha.Udayañceva nādhigaccheyyāti vaḍḍhiñca gehato nīharitvā dinnamūlañca kiñci na labheyya.Payirupāsinti catūhi paccayehi upaṭṭhahiṃ.Svāhaṃ udayañceva nādhigacchinti so ahaṃ neva udayaṃ na gehato dinnadhanaṃ adhigacchiṃ, paṇiyaassajagganako nāma jātosmīti dasseti. Sesamettha uttānamevāti.

Bhagavantaṃ etadavocāti, when the Teacher turned back the teaching, having attained the fruit of stream-entry, he spoke this statement beginning with "Just as, venerable sir." There, udayatthikoti means one who wants growth. Assapaṇiyaṃ poseyyāti means he would raise a herd of five hundred foals, thinking, "Having bought them, I will sell them later." About five hundred, the price of a thousand-worth horse, he would spend only on things for fostering them, such as scents and garlands. Then those horses, having been touched by disease in one day, would all reach the destruction of life; with this intention, he spoke thus. Udayañceva nādhigaccheyyāti means he would not gain growth, nor would he gain back even the initial price that was taken out of the house. Payirupāsinti means I attended with the four requisites. Svāhaṃ udayañceva nādhigacchinti, he shows that "I did not gain either growth or the wealth given out of the house; I became known as the horse-trading loser." The rest here is easy to understand.

6. Sāḷhasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Sāḷhasuttavaṇṇanā

196.Chaṭṭhedvayenāti dvīhi koṭṭhāsehi.Oghassanittharaṇanti caturoghanittharaṇaṃ.Tapojigucchāhetūti dukkarakārikasaṅkhātena tapena pāpajigucchanahetu.Aññataraṃ sāmaññaṅganti ekaṃ samaṇadhammakoṭṭhāsaṃ.Aparisuddhakāyasamācārātiādīsu purimehi tīhi padehi kāyikavācasikacetasikasīlānaṃ aparisuddhataṃ dassetvā pacchimena padena aparisuddhājīvataṃ dasseti.Ñāṇadassanāyāti maggañāṇasaṅkhātāya dassanāya.Anuttarāya sambodhāyāti arahattāya, arahattañāṇaphassena phusituṃ abhabbāti vuttaṃ hoti.Sālalaṭṭhinti sālarukkhaṃ.Navanti taruṇaṃ.Akukkuccakajātanti ‘‘bhaveyya nu kho, na bhaveyyā’’ti ajanetabbakukkuccaṃ.Lekhaṇiyā likheyyāti avalekhanamattakena avalikheyya.Dhoveyyāti ghaṃseyya.Anto avisuddhāti abbhantare asuddhā apanītasārā.

196. In the sixth, dvayena means with two parts. Oghassa nittharaṇaṃ means crossing the four floods (ogha). Tapojigucchāhetū means because of disgust with evil due to austerity, which is called difficult practices. Aññataraṃ sāmaññaṅgaṃ means one aspect of ascetic practice. In Aparisuddhakāyasamācārā, etc., the first three words show the impurity of bodily, verbal, and mental morality, and the last word shows the impurity of livelihood. Ñāṇadassanāya means for the vision consisting of the knowledge of the path. Anuttarāya sambodhāya means for arahantship, it is said to be incapable of touching with the fruition-knowledge-contact of arahantship. Sālalaṭṭhi means a sal tree. Nava means young. Akukkuccakajāta means doubt that should not be generated, such as "will it be or will it not be?" Lekhaṇiyā likheyyā means to write only with a scratch. Dhoveyyā means to scrub. Anto avisuddhā means impure inside, devoid of essence.

Evameva khoti ettha idaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ – sālalaṭṭhi viya hi attabhāvo daṭṭhabbo, nadīsotaṃ viya saṃsārasotaṃ, pāraṃ gantukāmapuriso viya dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhiyo gahetvā ṭhitapuriso, sālalaṭṭhiyā bahiddhā suparikammakatakālo viya bahiddhā tapacaraṇaṃ gāḷhaṃ katvā gahitakālo, anto asuddhakālo viya abbhantare sīlānaṃ aparisuddhakālo, sālalaṭṭhiyā saṃsīditvā adhogamanaṃ viya diṭṭhigatikassa saṃsārasote saṃsīdanaṃ veditabbaṃ.

Evameva kho, here, this is a comparison: the personality should be seen as like a sal tree, the stream of existence as like a river's current, the person wishing to go to the other shore as like a person standing holding sixty-two views, the time when the sal tree is well-prepared externally as like the time when the practice of austerity is firmly undertaken externally, the time when it is impure inside as like the time when the moralities are impure internally, the sinking and going downwards of the sal tree as like the sinking in the stream of existence of one who has gone to a wrong view, should be understood.

Phiyārittaṃ bandheyyāti phiyañca arittañca yojeyya.Evamevāti etthāpi idaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ – sālalaṭṭhi viya attabhāvo, nadīsotaṃ viya saṃsārasotaṃ, pāraṃ gantukāmapuriso viya yogāvacaro, bahiddhā suparikammakatakālo viya chasu dvāresu saṃvarassa paccupaṭṭhitakālo, anto suvisodhitabhāvo viya abbhantare parisuddhasīlabhāvo, phiyārittabandhanaṃ viya kāyikacetasikavīriyakaraṇaṃ, sotthinā pārimatīragamanaṃ viya anupubbena sīlaṃ pūretvā samādhiṃ pūretvā paññaṃ pūretvā nibbānagamanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.

Phiyārittaṃ bandheyyā means to join both the float (phiya) and the oar (aritta). Evameva, here also, this is a comparison: the personality is like a sal tree, the stream of existence is like a river's current, the person wishing to go to the other shore is like a yogi, the time when it is well-prepared externally is like the time when restraint at the six sense doors is present, the state of being well-purified inside is like the state of pure morality internally, the tying of the float and oar is like the exertion of bodily and mental effort, the going safely to the other shore is to be seen as like gradually fulfilling morality, fulfilling concentration, fulfilling wisdom, and going to Nibbana.

Kaṇḍacitrakānīti saralaṭṭhisararajjusarapāsādasarasāṇisarapokkharaṇisarapadumānīti anekāni kaṇḍehi kattabbacitrāni.Atha kho so tīhi ṭhānehīti so evaṃ bahūni kaṇḍacitrakāni jānantopi na rājāraho hoti, tīhiyeva pana ṭhānehi hotīti attho.Sammāsamādhihotīti maggasamādhinā ca phalasamādhinā ca samāhito hotīti ayamettha attho.Sammādiṭṭhīti maggasammādiṭṭhiyā samannāgato.Idaṃ dukkhantiādīhi catūhi saccehi cattāro maggā tīṇi ca phalāni kathitāni. Ayaṃ pana maggeneva avirādhitaṃ vijjhati nāmāti veditabbo.Sammāvimuttīti arahattaphalavimuttiyā samannāgato.Avijjākkhandhaṃ padāletīti arahattamaggena padāleti nāmāti vuccati. Iminā hi heṭṭhā arahattamaggena avijjākkhandho padālito, idha pana padālitaṃ upādāya padāletīti vattuṃ vaṭṭatīti.

Kaṇḍacitrakānī means many designs to be made with shafts, such as arrow shafts, arrow ropes, arrow palaces, arrow ponds, arrow lotuses. Atha kho so tīhi ṭhānehī means even though he knows how to make many shaft designs, he is not worthy of a king, but he is worthy only with three qualities, this is the meaning. Sammāsamādhi hotī means he is concentrated with path-concentration and fruition-concentration, this is the meaning here. Sammādiṭṭhī means endowed with path-right-view. With Idaṃ dukkha, etc., the four paths and three fruits are spoken of with the four truths. But this should be understood as piercing without error only with the path. Sammāvimuttī means endowed with the fruition-deliverance of arahantship. Avijjākkhandhaṃ padāletī means it is called shattering the aggregate of ignorance with the path of arahantship. For here, the aggregate of ignorance was shattered below with the path of arahantship, but here it is fitting to say "shatters" taking into account what was shattered.

7. Mallikādevīsuttavaṇṇanā
7. Mallikādevīsuttavaṇṇanā

197.Sattamemallikā devīti pasenadirañño devī.Yena midhekacco mātugāmoti yena idhekaccā itthī.Dubbaṇṇāti bībhacchavaṇṇā.Durūpāti dussaṇṭhitā.Supāpikāti suṭṭhu pāpikā suṭṭhu lāmikā.Dassanāyāti passituṃ.Daliddāti dhanadaliddā.Appassakāti sakena dhanena rahitā.Appabhogāti upabhogaparibhogabhaṇḍakarahitā.Appesakkhāti appaparivārā.Aḍḍhāti issarā.Mahaddhanāti vaḷañjanakadhanena mahaddhanā.Mahābhogāti upabhogaparibhogabhaṇḍabhogena mahābhogā.Mahesakkhāti mahāparivārā.Abhirūpāti uttamarūpā.Dassanīyāti dassanayuttā.Pāsādikāti dassanena pāsādikā.Vaṇṇapokkharatāyāti vaṇṇena ceva sarīrasaṇṭhānena ca.

197. In the seventh, Mallikā devī means the queen of King Pasenadi. Yena midhekacco mātugāmo means by which here a certain woman. Dubbaṇṇā means of ugly complexion. Durūpā means of bad form. Supāpikā means very wicked, very lowly. Dassanāyā means to see. Daliddā means poor in wealth. Appassakā means lacking her own wealth. Appabhogā means lacking goods for use and consumption. Appesakkhā means of small retinue. Aḍḍhā means wealthy. Mahaddhanā means very wealthy with wealth for investment. Mahābhogā means very wealthy with wealth for use and consumption goods. Mahesakkhā means of great retinue. Abhirūpā means of excellent form. Dassanīyā means fit to be seen. Pāsādikā means pleasing to see. Vaṇṇapokkharatāyā means by complexion and the structure of the body.

Abhisajjatīti laggati.Byāpajjatīti pakatiṃ pajahati.Patitthīyatīti kodhavasena thinabhāvaṃ thaddhabhāvaṃ āpajjati.Nadātā hotīti na dāyikā hoti.Seyyāvasathapadīpeyyanti etthaseyyāti mañcapallaṅkādisayanaṃ.Āvasathoti āvasathāgāraṃ.Padīpeyyaṃvuccati vaṭṭitelādipadīpūpakaraṇaṃ. Issāmanikāti issāya sampayuttacittā. Iminā nayena sabbattha attho veditabbo.Kodhanā ahosinti kodhamanā ahosiṃ.Anissāmanikā ahosinti issāvirahitacittā ahosiṃ. Sesamettha uttānatthamevāti.

Abhisajjatī means clings to. Byāpajjatī means abandons her nature. Patitthīyatī means attains a stiff state due to anger. Na dātā hotī means is not a giver. Seyyāvasathapadīpeyya here, seyyā means a bed, couch, etc. Āvasatho means a dwelling place. Padīpeyyaṃ is called equipment for lamps such as wicks, oil, etc. Issāmanikāti means with a mind associated with envy. The meaning should be understood in all places in this way. Kodhanā ahosi means I was angry-minded. Anissāmanikā ahosi means I was with a mind devoid of envy. The rest here is of obvious meaning.

8. Attantapasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Attantapasuttavaṇṇanā

198.Aṭṭhame attantapādīsu attānaṃ tapati dukkhāpetītiattantapo. Attano paritāpanānuyogaṃattaparitāpanānuyogaṃ. Paraṃ tapatītiparantapo. Paresaṃ paritāpanānuyogaṃparaparitāpanānuyogaṃ. Diṭṭheva dhammeti imasmiṃyeva attabhāve.Nicchātoti chātaṃ vuccati taṇhā, sā assa natthīti nicchāto. Sabbakilesānaṃ nibbutattānibbuto. Anto tāpanakilesānaṃ abhāvā sītalo jātotisītībhūto. Jhānamaggaphalanibbānasukhāni paṭisaṃvedetītisukhappaṭisaṃvedī. Brahmabhūtena attanāti seṭṭhabhūtena attanā.

198. In the eighth, among those who torment themselves, attantapo means one who torments himself, causes himself suffering. Attaparitāpanānuyogaṃ means devotion to tormenting oneself. Parantapo means one who torments others. Paraparitāpanānuyogaṃ means devotion to tormenting others. Diṭṭheva dhamme means in this very existence. Nicchāto means hunger is called craving, he has no craving, therefore nicchāto. Nibbuto because all defilements are extinguished. Sītībhūto because he has become cool due to the absence of defilements that cause internal burning. Sukhappaṭisaṃvedī means experiencing the happiness of jhana, path, fruition, and Nibbana. Brahmabhūtena attanā means with a self that has become excellent.

Acelakotiādīni vuttatthāneva.Orabbhikādīsu urabbhā vuccanti eḷakā, urabbhe hanatītiorabbhiko. Sūkarikādīsupi eseva nayo.Luddoti dāruṇo kakkhaḷo.Macchaghātakoti macchabandho kevaṭṭo.Bandhanāgārikoti bandhanāgāragopako.Kurūrakammantāti dāruṇakammantā.

Acelako, etc., are of the meaning stated before. Among Orabbhikā, etc., urabbhā means goats, orabbhiko means one who kills goats. The same method applies in Sūkarikā, etc. Luddo means cruel, harsh. Macchaghātako means a fisherman, a fisherman. Bandhanāgāriko means a prison guard. Kurūrakammantā means of cruel occupations.

Muddhāvasittoti khattiyābhisekena muddhani abhisitto.Puratthimena nagarassāti nagarato puratthimāya disāya.Santhāgāranti yaññasālaṃ.Kharājinaṃ nivāsetvāti sakhuraṃ ajinacammaṃ nivāsetvā.Sappitelenāti sappinā ceva telena ca. Ṭhapetvā hi sappiṃ avaseso yo koci sneho telanti vuccati.Kaṇḍuvamānoti nakhānaṃ chinnattā kaṇḍuvitabbakāle tena kaṇḍuvamāno.Anantarahitāyāti asanthatāya.Sarūpavacchāyāti sadisavacchāya. Sace gāvī setā hoti, vacchopi setakova. Sace kapilā vā rattā vā, vacchakopi tādisovāti evaṃ sarūpavacchāya.So evamāhāti so rājā evaṃ vadeti.Vacchatarāti taruṇavacchakabhāvaṃ atikkantā balavavacchā.Vacchatarīsupi eseva nayo.Barihisatthāyāti parikkhepakaraṇatthāya ceva yaññabhūmiyaṃ attharaṇatthāya ca.

Muddhāvasitto means anointed on the head with the anointing of a khattiya. Puratthimena nagarassā means in the eastern direction from the city. Santhāgāra means a sacrificial hall. Kharājinaṃ nivāsetvā means having put on a rough goat skin. Sappitelenā means with ghee and oil. For having set aside ghee, whatever else is fat is called oil. Kaṇḍuvamāno means scratching at the time when it should be scratched because the nails are cut. Anantarahitāyā means uninterrupted. Sarūpavacchāyā means with a calf of similar appearance. If the cow is white, the calf is also white. If it is brown or red, the calf is also the same, thus with a calf of similar appearance. So evamāhā means that king said thus. Vacchatarā means having gone beyond the state of a young calf, a strong calf. The same method applies in Vacchatarīsu. Barihisatthāyā means for scattering around and for spreading in the sacrificial ground.

idha, bhikkhave, tathāgatotiādimāha. Tatthatathāgatotiādīni vuttatthāneva.Taṃ dhammanti taṃ vuttappakārasampadaṃ dhammaṃ.Suṇāti, gahapati, vāti kasmā paṭhamaṃ gahapatiṃ niddisati? Nihatamānattā ussannattā ca. Yebhuyyena hi khattiyakulato pabbajitā jātiṃ nissāya mānaṃ karonti. Brāhmaṇakulā pabbajitā mante nissāya mānaṃ karonti, hīnajaccakulā pabbajitā attano vijātitāya patiṭṭhātuṃ na sakkonti. Gahapatidārakā pana kacchehi sedaṃ muñcantehi piṭṭhiyā loṇaṃ pupphamānāya bhūmiṃ kasitvā tādisassa mānassa abhāvato nihatamānadappā honti. Te pabbajitvā mānaṃ vā dappaṃ vā akatvā yathābalaṃ buddhavacanaṃ uggahetvā vipassanāya kammaṃ karontā sakkonti arahatte patiṭṭhātuṃ. Itarehi ca kulehi nikkhamitvā pabbajitā na bahukā, gahapatikāva bahukā. Iti nihatamānattā ussannattā ca paṭhamaṃ gahapatiṃ niddisatīti.

idha, bhikkhave, tathāgato etc. was said. There, tathāgato etc. are of the meaning stated before. Taṃ dhammaṃ means that dhamma of the kind mentioned. Suṇāti, gahapati, vā why does he specify the householder first? Because of subdued pride and outstanding qualities. For generally those who have gone forth from a khattiya family have pride based on their birth. Those who have gone forth from a brahmin family have pride based on their mantras, those who have gone forth from a low caste family are unable to establish themselves due to their own low birth. But householders, having plowed the ground with sweat pouring from their armpits and salt blooming on their backs, have subdued pride and arrogance due to the absence of such pride. Having gone forth, not making pride or arrogance, learning the Buddha's word according to their ability, and doing the work of insight, they are able to be established in arahantship. And those who have gone forth after leaving other families are not many, only householders are many. Thus, because of subdued pride and outstanding qualities, he specifies the householder first.

Aññatarasmiṃ vāti itaresaṃ vā kulānaṃ aññatarasmiṃ.Paccājātoti patijāto.Tathāgate saddhaṃ paṭilabhatīti parisuddhaṃ dhammaṃ sutvā dhammasāmimhi tathāgate ‘‘sammāsambuddho vata bhagavā’’ti saddhaṃ paṭilabhati.Iti paṭisañcikkhatīti evaṃ paccavekkhati.Sambādho gharāvāsoti sacepi saṭṭhihatthe ghare yojanasatantarepi vā dve jāyampatikā vasanti, tathāpi nesaṃ sakiñcanasapalibodhaṭṭhena gharāvāso sambādhova.Rajāpathoti rāgarajādīnaṃ uṭṭhānaṭṭhānanti mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ. Āgamanapathotipi vaṭṭati. Alagganaṭṭhena abbhokāso viyātiabbhokāso. Pabbajito hi kūṭāgāraratanapāsādadevavimānādīsu pihitadvāravātapānesu paṭicchannesu vasantopi neva laggati na sajjati na bajjhati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘abbhokāso pabbajjā’’ti. Apicasambādho gharāvāsokusalakiriyāya yathāsukhaṃ okāsābhāvato,rajāpathoasaṃvutasaṅkāraṭṭhānaṃ viya rajānaṃ, kilesarajānaṃ sannipātaṭṭhānato.Abbhokāso pabbajjākusalakiriyāya yathāsukhaṃ okāsasabbhāvato.

Aññatarasmiṃ vā means in one of the other families. Paccājāto means reborn. Tathāgate saddhaṃ paṭilabhatī means having heard the pure dhamma, he gains faith in the Tathagata, the owner of the dhamma, saying "the Blessed One is truly a perfectly enlightened one." Iti paṭisañcikkhatī means thus he reflects. Sambādho gharāvāso even if two spouses live in a sixty-cubit house or even a hundred-yojana house, still, their household life is cramped due to being with possessions and entanglements. Rajāpatho means a place for the arising of defilements such as passion, according to the great commentary. It is also fitting to say a place of coming and going. Abbhokāso as if open space because of non-attachment. For the one who has gone forth, even living in covered dwellings, jeweled palaces, divine mansions, etc., with closed doors and windows, neither clings, nor adheres, nor is bound. Therefore it was said: "The going forth is open space." Moreover, sambādho gharāvāso because of the absence of opportunity for skillful action as one pleases, rajāpatho a place of accumulation of defilements, like a place for unabandoned corruptions. Abbhokāso pabbajjā because of the complete opportunity for skillful action as one pleases.

Nayidaṃ sukaraṃ…pe… pabbajeyyanti ettha ayaṃ saṅkhepakathā – yadetaṃ sikkhattayabrahmacariyaṃ ekampi divasaṃ akhaṇḍaṃ katvā carimakacittaṃ pāpetabbatāyaekantaparipuṇṇaṃ,ekadivasampi ca kilesamalena amalinaṃ katvā carimakacittaṃ pāpetabbatāyaekantaparisuddhaṃ, saṅkhalikhitaṃlikhitasaṅkhasadisaṃ dhotasaṅkhasappaṭibhāgaṃ caritabbaṃ. Idaṃ na sukaraṃ agāraṃ ajjhāvasatā agāramajjhe vasantena ekantaparipuṇṇaṃ…pe… carituṃ. Yaṃnūnāhaṃ kese ca massuñca ohāretvā kasāyarasapītatāya kāsāyāni brahmacariyaṃ carantānaṃ anucchavikāni vatthāni acchādetvā paridahitvā agārasmā nikkhamitvā anagāriyaṃ pabbajeyyanti. Ettha ca yasmā agārassa hitaṃ kasivaṇijjādikammaṃ agāriyanti vuccati, tañca pabbajjāya natthi, tasmā pabbajjā anagāriyāti ñātabbā, taṃ anagāriyaṃ.Pabbajeyyanti paṭipajjeyyaṃ.

Nayidaṃ sukaraṃ…pe… pabbajeyya here, this is a summary statement: this threefold training of the holy life should be lived having made even one day without breaking it, and for the purpose of attaining the final thought, ekantaparipuṇṇaṃ, and having made even one day without being stained by the defilement of defilements, and for the purpose of attaining the final thought, ekantaparisuddhaṃ, it should be lived like a written conch shell, like a polished conch shell. This is not easy for one living in a house, living in the midst of a house, to live having made it completely full…to live pure. What if I were to shave off my hair and beard, put on robes that are fitting for those who live the holy life, which are of a taste like astringent juice, and having gone forth from the house, were to go forth into homelessness. And here, since the work beneficial to the house, such as farming and trade, is called household life, and that is not in the going forth, therefore the going forth should be known as homelessness, that homelessness. Pabbajeyya means I should undertake.

Appaṃ vāti sahassato heṭṭhā bhogakkhandho appo nāma hoti, sahassato paṭṭhāya mahā. Ābandhanaṭṭhena ñātiyevañātiparivaṭṭo. So vīsatiyā heṭṭhā appo nāma hoti, vīsatiyā paṭṭhāya mahā.Bhikkhūnaṃ sikkhāsājīvasamāpannoti yā bhikkhūnaṃ adhisīlasaṅkhātā sikkhā, tañca, yattha cete saha jīvanti, ekajīvikā sabhāgavuttino honti, taṃ bhagavatā paññattasikkhāpadasaṅkhātaṃ sājīvañca tattha sikkhanabhāvena samāpannoti bhikkhūnaṃ sikkhāsājīvasamāpanno.Samāpannoti sikkhaṃ paripūrento sājīvañca avītikkamanto hutvā tadubhayaṃ upagatoti attho.

Appaṃ vā a store of wealth less than a thousand is called small, from a thousand onwards it is great. Ñātiparivaṭṭo relatives are a band. That is called small below twenty, great from twenty onwards. Bhikkhūnaṃ sikkhāsājīvasamāpanno that which is the training of the monks called higher morality, and where these live together, of one livelihood, sharing the same habits, and that livelihood consisting of the training rules laid down by the Blessed One, being endowed with training there, means endowed with the training and livelihood of the monks. Samāpanno means fulfilling the training and not transgressing the livelihood, having approached both, this is the meaning.

Pāṇātipātaṃ pahāyātiādīni vuttatthāneva.Imesaṃ bhedāyāti yesaṃ itoti vuttānaṃ santike sutaṃ, tesaṃ bhedāya.Bhinnānaṃ vā sandhātāti dvinnaṃ mittānaṃ vā samānupajjhāyakādīnaṃ vā kenacideva kāraṇena bhinnānaṃ ekamekaṃ upasaṅkamitvā ‘‘tumhākaṃ īdise kule jātānaṃ evaṃ bahussutānaṃ idaṃ na yutta’’ntiādīni vatvā sandhānaṃ kattā.Anuppadātāti sandhānānuppadātā, dve jane samagge disvā ‘‘tumhākaṃ evarūpe kule jātānaṃ evarūpehi guṇehi samannāgatānaṃ anucchavikameta’’ntiādīni vatvā daḷhīkammaṃ kattāti attho. Samaggo ārāmo assātisamaggārāmo. Yattha samaggā natthi, tattha vasitumpi na icchatīti attho. Samaggarāmotipi pāḷi, ayameva attho.Samaggaratoti samaggesu rato, te pahāya aññattha gantuṃ na icchatīti attho. Samagge disvāpi sutvāpi nandatītisamagganandī. Samaggakaraṇiṃ vācaṃ bhāsitāti yā vācā satte samaggeyeva karoti, taṃ sāmaggiguṇaparidīpikameva vācaṃ bhāsati, na itaranti.

Pāṇātipātaṃ pahāyā etc. are of the meaning stated before. Imesaṃ bhedāyā for the sake of the division of those near whom it was heard from here. Bhinnānaṃ vā sandhātā means one who makes reconciliation, having approached each one of two friends or those with the same preceptor, etc., who are divided for some reason, saying "this is not fitting for you who are born in such a family and are so learned," etc. Anuppadātā means one who reinforces reconciliation, saying "this is unfitting for you who are born in such a family and endowed with such qualities," having seen two people united, and strengthening the bond, this is the meaning. Samaggo ārāmo assāti may the monastery be united. Where there is no unity, he does not even want to live there, this is the meaning. Samaggarāmotipi is also a reading, this is the meaning. Samaggarato means delighted in those who are united, he does not want to go elsewhere abandoning them, this is the meaning. Samagge disvāpi sutvāpi nandatī means he rejoices having seen or heard those who are united. Samaggakaraṇiṃ vācaṃ bhāsitā means he speaks speech that only makes beings united, he speaks only speech that illuminates the qualities of unity, not the other.

Nelāti elaṃ vuccati doso, nāssā elanti nelā, niddosāti attho ‘‘nelaṅgo setapacchādo’’ti (udā. 65) ettha vuttanelaṃ viya.Kaṇṇasukhāti byañjanamadhuratāya kaṇṇānaṃ sukhā, sūcivijjhanaṃ viya kaṇṇasūlaṃ na janeti. Atthamadhuratāya sakalasarīre kopaṃ ajanetvā pemaṃ janetītipemanīyā. Hadayaṃ gacchati appaṭihaññamānā sukhena cittaṃ pavisatītihadayaṅgamā. Guṇaparipuṇṇatāya pure bhavātiporī. Pure saṃvaḍḍhanārī viya sukumārātipiporī. Purassa esātipiporī,nagaravāsīnaṃ kathāti attho. Nagaravāsino hi yuttakathā honti, pitimattaṃ pitāti, bhātimattaṃ bhātāti vadanti. Evarūpī kathā bahuno janassa kantā hotītibahujanakantā. Kantabhāveneva bahujanassa manāpā cittavuḍḍhikarātibahujanamanāpā.

Nelā: Ela means fault, she has no ela, hence nelā, meaning faultless, like nela mentioned in "nelaṅgo setapacchādo" (udā. 65). Kaṇṇasukhā: Pleasant to the ears due to the sweetness of the expression, it does not produce ear pain like a needle prick. Pemanīyā: Due to the sweetness of the meaning, instead of generating anger in the entire body, it generates love. Hadayaṅgamā: It goes to the heart without obstruction, entering the mind pleasantly. Porī: Because of the completeness of virtues, it is ancient. Porī: Also, like a woman who has grown up in ancient times, it is very refined. Porī: Also, it belongs to the city, meaning the speech of city dwellers. City dwellers speak with fitting words, calling only a father "father," and only a brother "brother." Bahujanakantā: Such speech is pleasing to many people. Bahujanamanāpā: Precisely because it is pleasing, it is delightful and enhances the minds of many people.

kālavādī,vattabbayuttakālaṃ sallakkhetvā vadatīti attho. Bhūtaṃ tacchaṃ sabhāvameva vadatītibhūtavādī. Diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaatthasannissitameva katvā vadatītiatthavādī. Navalokuttaradhammasannissitaṃ katvā vadatītidhammavādī. Saṃvaravinayapahānavinayasannissitaṃ katvā vadatītivinayavādī. Nidhānaṃ vuccati ṭhapanokāso, nidhānamassā atthītinidhānavatī. Hadaye nidhetabbayuttakaṃ vācaṃ bhāsitāti attho.Kālenāti evarūpiṃ bhāsamānopi ca ‘‘ahaṃ nidhānavatiṃ vācaṃ bhāsissāmī’’ti na akālena bhāsati, yuttakālaṃ pana avekkhitvāva bhāsatīti attho.Sāpadesanti saupamaṃ, sakāraṇanti attho.Pariyantavatinti paricchedaṃ dassetvā, yathāssā paricchedo paññāyati, evaṃ bhāsatīti attho.Atthasaṃhitanti anekehipi nayehi vibhajantena pariyādātuṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya atthasampannaṃ bhāsati. Yaṃ vā so atthavādī atthaṃ vadati, tena atthena saṃhitattā atthasaṃhitaṃ vācaṃ bhāsati, na aññaṃ nikkhipitvā aññaṃ bhāsatīti vuttaṃ hoti.

Kālavādī: Meaning, he speaks after considering the appropriate time to speak. Bhūtavādī: He speaks only of what is true, factual, and natural. Atthavādī: He speaks only after relating it to matters pertaining to the visible here and now and the hereafter. Dhammavādī: He speaks only after relating it to the nine supramundane Dhammas. Vinayavādī: He speaks only after relating it to the discipline of restraint, elimination, and abandonment. Nidhānavatī: Nidhāna means a place for keeping; she has a nidhāna, meaning she speaks words that are fit to be kept in the heart. Kālena: Although speaking in this way, she does not speak untimely, thinking, "I will speak words worthy of being treasured," but speaks only after considering the appropriate time. Sāpadesaṃ: With comparison, meaning with reason. Pariyantavati: Showing a limit, meaning she speaks in such a way that her limit is evident. Atthasaṃhitaṃ: Because it is impossible to fully grasp it even by dividing it in many ways, she speaks words that are full of meaning. Or, because that speaker of meaning speaks meaning, she speaks words connected with meaning, meaning she does not set aside one thing and speak of another.

Bījagāmabhūtagāmasamārambhāti mūlabījaṃ khandhabījaṃ phaḷubījaṃ aggabījaṃ bījabījanti pañcavidhassa bījagāmassa ceva yassa kassaci nīlatiṇarukkhādikassa bhūtagāmassa ca samārambhā, chedanabhedanapacanādibhāvena vikopanā paṭiviratoti attho.

Bījagāmabhūtagāmasamārambhā: Abstaining from the destruction of seed-life (bījagāma) which are of five kinds: root-seeds, stem-seeds, joint-seeds, cutting-seeds, and seed-seeds, and the destruction of sprout-life (bhūtagāma), that is any kind of green plants, trees etc., by cutting, splitting, burning etc.

Ekabhattikoti pātarāsabhattaṃ sāyamāsabhattanti dve bhattāni. Tesu pātarāsabhattaṃ antomajjhanhikena paricchinnaṃ, itaraṃ majjhanhikato uddhaṃ antoaruṇena. Tasmā antomajjhanhike dasakkhattuṃ bhuñjamānopi ekabhattikova hoti. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘ekabhattiko’’ti. Rattiyā bhojanaṃ ratti, tato uparatotirattūparato. Atikkante majjhanhike yāva sūriyatthaṅgamanā bhojanaṃ vikālabhojanaṃ nāma, tato viratattāvirato vikālabhojanā.

Ekabhattiko: There are two meals: a morning meal and an evening meal. Among these, the morning meal is limited to before midday, while the other is from midday upwards until before dawn. Therefore, even if one eats ten times before midday, one is still ekabhattiko. With that in mind, it is said, "ekabhattiko". Rattūparato: Abstaining from night meals. Virato vikālabhojanā: Because he abstains from untimely food, which is food eaten after midday until sunset.

Jātarūpanti suvaṇṇaṃ.Rajatanti kahāpaṇo lohamāsako jatumāsako dārumāsakoti ye vohāraṃ gacchanti. Tassa ubhayassāpi paṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato, neva taṃ uggaṇhāti, na uggaṇhāpeti, na upanikkhittaṃ sādiyatīti attho.

Jātarūpa: Gold. Rajata: Coins, metal māsaka coins, lacquer māsaka coins, wooden māsaka coins, which are in common use. He abstains from accepting both of these; he neither takes them himself, nor encourages others to take them, nor approves of them being kept nearby.

Āmakadhaññapaṭiggahaṇāti sālivīhiyavagodhūmakaṅguvarakakudrūsakasaṅkhātassa sattavidhassapi āmakadhaññassa paṭiggahaṇā. Na kevalañca etesaṃ paṭiggahaṇameva, āmasanampi bhikkhūnaṃ na vaṭṭatiyeva.Āmakamaṃsapaṭiggahaṇāti ettha aññatra odissa anuññātā āmakamaṃsamacchānaṃ paṭiggahaṇameva bhikkhūnaṃ na vaṭṭati, no āmasananti.

Āmakadhaññapaṭiggahaṇā: Abstaining from accepting raw grains (āmakadhañña), namely the seven kinds of raw grains: rice, paddy, barley, wheat, kaṅgu, varaka, and kudrūsaka. It is not only the acceptance of these that is not allowed for monks, but even touching them. Āmakamaṃsapaṭiggahaṇā: Here, other than the raw meat and fish that are allowed by designation, the acceptance of raw meat is not allowed for monks, but not the touching of it.

Itthikumārikapaṭiggahaṇāti etthaitthīti purisantaragatā, itarā kumārikā nāma, tāsaṃ paṭiggahaṇampi āmasanampi akappiyameva.Dāsidāsapaṭiggahaṇāti ettha dāsidāsavaseneva tesaṃ paṭiggahaṇaṃ na vaṭṭati, ‘‘kappiyakārakaṃ dammi, ārāmikaṃ dammī’’ti evaṃ vutte pana vaṭṭati.Ajeḷakādīsupikhettavatthupariyosānesu kappiyākappiyanayo vinayavasena upaparikkhitabbo. Tatthakhettaṃnāma yasmiṃ pubbaṇṇaṃ ruhati.Vatthunāma yasmiṃ aparaṇṇaṃ ruhati. Yattha vā ubhayampi ruhati, taṃ khettaṃ. Tadatthāya akatabhūmibhāgo vatthu. Khettavatthusīsena cettha vāpi-taḷākādīnipi saṅgahitāneva.

Itthikumārikapaṭiggahaṇā: Here, itthī means a woman who has gone to another man, while the other is called kumārikā, a maiden. Accepting them or touching them is impermissible. Dāsidāsapaṭiggahaṇā: Here, it is not allowed to accept male and female slaves (dāsidāsa) as such, but it is allowed if it is said, "I will give a suitable attendant or a monastery attendant." In the case of goats, sheep, etc., and ending with fields and land (khettavatthu), the distinction between what is allowable and unallowable should be examined in accordance with the Vinaya. Here, khettaṃ means that in which the first crop grows. Vatthu means that in which the second crop grows. Or, where both grow, that is khetta. The part of the land not yet prepared for that purpose is vatthu. Under the heading of khettavatthu, ponds, lakes, etc., are also included.

Dūteyyaṃvuccati dūtakammaṃ gihīnaṃ paṇṇaṃ vā sāsanaṃ vā gahetvā tattha tattha gamanaṃ.Pahiṇagamanaṃvuccati gharā gharaṃ pesitassa khuddakagamanaṃ.Anuyogonāma tadubhayakaraṇaṃ. Tasmā duteyyapahiṇagamanānaṃ anuyogoti evamettha attho veditabbo.Kayavikkayāti kayā ca vikkayā ca.Tulākūṭādīsukūṭanti vañcanaṃ. Tattha tulākūṭaṃ tāva rūpakūṭaṃ, aṅgakūṭaṃ, gahaṇakūṭaṃ, paṭicchannakūṭanti catubbidhaṃ hoti. Tattharūpakūṭaṃnāma dve tulā samarūpā katvā gaṇhanto mahatiyā gaṇhāti, dadanto khuddikāya deti.Aṅgakūṭaṃnāma gaṇhanto pacchābhāge hatthena tulaṃ akkamati, dadanto pubbabhāge.Gahaṇakūṭaṃnāma gaṇhanto mūle rajjuṃ gaṇhāti, dadanto agge.Paṭicchannakūṭaṃnāma tulaṃ susiraṃ katvā anto ayacuṇṇaṃ pakkhipitvā gaṇhanto taṃ pacchābhāge karoti, dadanto aggabhāge.

Dūteyyaṃ: Means the work of a messenger, going here and there with letters or messages from laypeople. Pahiṇagamanaṃ: Means the small journeys of one sent from house to house. Anuyogo: Means doing both of these. Therefore, here the meaning should be understood as engaging in the work of messengers and errands. Kayavikkayā: Buying and selling. Among scales, coins, etc., kūṭa means deception. There, deception with scales (tulākūṭaṃ) is fourfold: deception of form (rūpakūṭaṃ), deception of the arm (aṅgakūṭaṃ), deception of grasping (gahaṇakūṭaṃ), and deception of concealment (paṭicchannakūṭaṃ). There, rūpakūṭaṃ means making two scales of similar form, he takes with the large one and gives with the small one. Aṅgakūṭaṃ means when taking, he presses down on the back of the scale with his hand, and when giving, he presses down on the front. Gahaṇakūṭaṃ means when taking, he grasps the rope at the base, and when giving, at the tip. Paṭicchannakūṭaṃ means making the scale hollow and putting iron filings inside, when taking he keeps that at the back, and when giving, at the front.

Kaṃsovuccati suvaṇṇapāti, tāya vañcanaṃkaṃsakūṭaṃ. Kathaṃ? Ekaṃ suvaṇṇapātiṃ katvā aññā dve tisso lohapātiyo suvaṇṇavaṇṇā karoti. Tato janapadaṃ gantvā kiñcideva aḍḍhakulaṃ pavisitvā ‘‘suvaṇṇabhājanāni kiṇathā’’ti vatvā agghe pucchite samagghataraṃ dātukāmā honti. Tato tehi ‘‘kathaṃ imesaṃ suvaṇṇabhāvo jānitabbo’’ti vutte ‘‘vīmaṃsitvā gaṇhathā’’ti suvaṇṇapātiṃ pāsāṇe ghaṃsitvā sabbapātiyo datvā gacchati.

Kaṃso: Means a golden bowl, deception with that is kaṃsakūṭaṃ. How? Having made one golden bowl, he makes two or three other bowls of base metal that are the color of gold. Then, going to a town, after entering some small hamlet, he says, "Buy golden vessels," and when asked the price, they are willing to give a higher price. Then, when they say, "How can the gold content of these be known?" he says, "Examine them and take them," and after rubbing the golden bowl on a stone, he gives all the bowls and leaves.

Mānakūṭaṃnāma hadayabheda-sikhābheda-rajjubhedavasena tividhaṃ hoti. Tatthahadayabhedosappitelādiminanakāle labbhati. Tāni hi gaṇhanto heṭṭhāchiddena mānena ‘‘saṇikaṃ āsiñcā’’ti vatvā attano bhājane bahuṃ paggharāpetvā gaṇhāti, dadanto chiddaṃ pidhāya sīghaṃ pūretvā deti.Sikhābhedotilataṇḍulādiminanakāle labbhati. Tāni hi gaṇhanto saṇikaṃ sikhaṃ ussāpetvā gaṇhāti, dadanto vegena pūretvā sikhaṃ chindanto deti.Rajjubhedokhettavatthuminanakāle labbhati. Lañjaṃ alabhantā hi khettaṃ amahantampi mahantaṃ katvā minanti.

Mānakūṭaṃ: Deception with measures is threefold: deception of the bottom (hadayabheda), deception of the peak (sikhābheda), and deception of the rope (rajjubheda). There, hadayabhedo is found when measuring oil, ghee, etc. When taking them, he says "Pour slowly" with a measure that has a hole at the bottom, and lets a lot drip into his own vessel, and when giving, he covers the hole and quickly fills it and gives it. Sikhābhedo is found when measuring sesame seeds, rice, etc. When taking them, he slowly raises the peak, and when giving, he quickly fills it and gives it while cutting off the peak. Rajjubhedo is found when measuring fields and land. When they don't get a reward (lañjaṃ), they measure the field making it seem larger than it is.

Ukkoṭanādīsuukkoṭananti sāmike assāmike kātuṃ lañjaggahaṇaṃ.Vañcananti tehi tehi upāyehi paresaṃ vañcanaṃ. Tatridamekaṃ vatthu – eko kira luddako migañca migapotakañca gahetvā āgacchati. Tameko dhutto ‘‘kiṃ bho migo agghati, kiṃ migapotako’’ti āha. ‘‘Migo dve kahāpaṇe, migapotako eka’’nti ca vutte ekaṃ kahāpaṇaṃ datvā migapotakaṃ gahetvā thokaṃ gantvā nivatto ‘‘na me bho migapotakenattho, migaṃ me dehī’’ti āha. Tena hi dve kahāpaṇe dehīti. So āha – ‘‘nanu te bho mayā paṭhamaṃ eko kahāpaṇo dinno’’ti? Āma dinnoti. Imampi migapotakaṃ gaṇha, evaṃ so ca kahāpaṇo ayañca kahāpaṇagghanako migapotako’’ti dve kahāpaṇā bhavissantīti. So ‘‘kāraṇaṃ vadatī’’ti sallakkhetvā migapotakaṃ gahetvā migaṃ adāsīti.Nikatīti yogavasena vā māyāvasena vā apāmaṅgaṃ pāmaṅganti, amaṇiṃ maṇinti, asuvaṇṇaṃ suvaṇṇanti katvā patirūpakena vañcanaṃ.Sāciyogoti kuṭilayogo. Etesaṃyeva ukkoṭanādīnametaṃ nāmaṃ. Tasmā ukkoṭanasāciyogo vañcanasāciyogo nikatisāciyogoti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Keci aññaṃ dassetvā aññassa parivattanaṃ sāciyogoti vadanti, taṃ pana vañcaneneva saṅgahitaṃ.

Among Ukkoṭanā etc., ukkoṭana means taking a bribe to make the owner a non-owner. Vañcana means deceiving others by various means. Here is one example: A hunter was coming along with a deer and a fawn. A cheat said to him, "What is the price of the deer? What is the price of the fawn?" When he said, "The deer is two kahāpaṇa coins, the fawn is one," he gave one kahāpaṇa coin, took the fawn, and after going a little way, he turned back and said, "I don't need the fawn, give me the deer." He said, "Then give me two kahāpaṇa coins." He said, "Didn't I give you one kahāpaṇa coin earlier?" He said, "Yes, you did." "Take this fawn also, thus that kahāpaṇa and this fawn worth a kahāpaṇa will be two kahāpaṇa." He, thinking, "He is stating a reason," took the fawn and did not give the deer. Nikatī: Means cheating by means of yoga or magic, making what is inferior seem superior, what is not a jewel seem like a jewel, what is not gold seem like gold by means of a counterfeit. Sāciyogo: Means crooked yoga. This is just another name for those same ukkoṭana etc. Therefore, here the meaning should be understood as ukkoṭanasāciyogo, vañcanasāciyogo, and nikatisāciyogo. Some say that sāciyogo is exchanging one thing for another after showing something else, but that is included in deception itself.

chedananti hatthacchedanādi.Vadhoti māraṇaṃ.Bandhoti rajjubandhanādīhi bandhanaṃ.Viparāmosoti himaviparāmoso, gumbaviparāmosoti duvidho. Yaṃ himapātasamaye himena paṭicchannā hutvā maggappaṭipannaṃ janaṃ musanti, ayaṃ himaviparāmoso. Yaṃ gumbādīhi paṭicchannā musanti, ayaṃ gumbaviparāmoso.Ālopovuccati gāmanigamādīnaṃ vilopakaraṇaṃ.Sahasākāroti sāhasikakiriyā, gehaṃ pavisitvā manussānaṃ ure satthaṃ ṭhapetvā icchitabhaṇḍaggahaṇaṃ. Evametasmā chedana…pe… sahasākārā paṭivirato hoti.

Chedana: Means cutting off hands, etc. Vadho: Means killing. Bandho: Means binding with ropes, etc. Viparāmoso: Deceiving through snow or bushes; it is of two kinds. That which deceives people who are on the path by being covered with snow during snowfall is deceiving through snow. That which deceives by being covered with bushes, etc., is deceiving through bushes. Ālopo: Means plundering villages, towns, etc. Sahasākāro: Means violent action, entering a house and placing a weapon on a person's chest and taking desired goods. He abstains from this cutting off…pe…violent action.

So santuṭṭho hotīti svāyaṃ bhikkhu heṭṭhā vuttena catūsu paccayesu dvādasavidhena itarītarapaccayasantosena samannāgato hoti. Iminā pana dvādasavidhena itarītarapaccayasantosena samannāgatassa bhikkhuno aṭṭha parikkhārā vaṭṭanti – tīṇi cīvarāni, patto, dantakaṭṭhacchedanavāsi, ekā sūci, kāyabandhanaṃ parissāvananti. Vuttampi cetaṃ –

So santuṭṭho hotī: That monk is content with whatever is available from the twelve kinds of requisites, based on the four basic requisites mentioned below. But for a monk endowed with this twelvefold contentment with whatever is available, eight requisites are necessary: the three robes, the bowl, a razor for cutting nails or a knife, a needle, a belt, and a water strainer. It was also said:

‘‘Ticīvarañca patto ca, vāsi sūci ca bandhanaṃ;

"The three robes and the bowl,
A razor, needle, and belt;
And the water strainer, these eight,
For a monk who is rightly engaged."

Te sabbe kāyaparihārikāpi honti, kucchiparihārikāpi. Kathaṃ? Ticīvaraṃ tāva nivāsetvā pārupitvā ca vicaraṇakāle kāyaṃ pariharati posetīti kāyaparihārikaṃ hoti. Cīvarakaṇṇena udakaṃ parissāvetvā pivanakāle, khāditabbaphalāphalaṃ gahaṇakāle ca kucchiṃ pariharati posetīti kucchiparihārikaṃ hoti. Pattopi tena udakaṃ uddharitvā nhānakāle kuṭiparibhaṇḍakaraṇakāle ca kāyaparihāriko hoti, āhāraṃ gahetvā bhuñjanakāle kucchiparihāriko. Vāsipi tāya dantakaṭṭhacchedanakāle mañcapīṭhānaṃ aṅgapādacīvarakuṭidaṇḍakasajjanakāle ca kāyaparihārikā hoti, ucchucchedananāḷikerāditacchanakāle kucchiparihārikā. Sūcipi cīvarasibbanakāle kāyaparihārikā hoti, pūvaṃ vā phalaṃ vā vijjhitvā khādanakāle kucchiparihārikā. Kāyabandhanaṃ bandhitvā vicaraṇakāle kāyaparihārikaṃ, ucchuādīni bandhitvā gahaṇakāle kucchiparihārikaṃ. Parissāvanaṃ tena udakaṃ parissāvetvā nhānakāle senāsanaparibhaṇḍakaraṇakāle ca kāyaparihārikaṃ, pānīyapānakaparissāvanakāle teneva tilataṇḍulaputhukādīni gahetvā khādanakāle ca kucchiparihārikaṃ. Ayaṃ tāva aṭṭhaparikkhārikassa parikkhāramattā.

All of those are also for the maintenance of the body and also for the maintenance of the belly. How? The three robes, by being worn and put on, maintain and nourish the body while wandering, so they are for the maintenance of the body. By straining water with the edge of the robe while drinking and while taking fruits to be eaten, it maintains and nourishes the belly, so it is for the maintenance of the belly. The bowl also, by drawing water with it while bathing and while making a hut, is for the maintenance of the body, and by taking food and eating it, it is for the maintenance of the belly. The knife also, by cutting nails with it and while preparing the legs for beds and chairs and while preparing the robe hut pole, is for the maintenance of the body, and by cutting sugarcane and scraping coconuts, etc., it is for the maintenance of the belly. The needle also, while sewing robes, is for the maintenance of the body, and by piercing and eating cake or fruit, it is for the maintenance of the belly. The belt, by being tied and while wandering, is for the maintenance of the body, and by tying sugarcane, etc., and taking it, it is for the maintenance of the belly. The water strainer, by straining water with it while bathing and while preparing the bedding, is for the maintenance of the body, and while straining drinking water and while taking and eating sesame seeds, rice, cakes, etc., with that same strainer, it is for the maintenance of the belly. This is only the extent of the requisites for one who has eight requisites.

santuṭṭho hoti kāyaparihārikena cīvarenātiādimāha.

He said, santuṭṭho hoti kāyaparihārikena cīvarenā, etc.

kāyaparihārikenāti kāyapariharaṇamattakena.Kucchiparihārikenāti kucchipariharaṇamattakena.Samādāyeva pakkamatīti taṃ aṭṭhaparikkhāramattakaṃ sabbaṃ gahetvāva kāyappaṭibaddhaṃ katvāva gacchati, ‘‘mama vihāro pariveṇaṃ upaṭṭhāko’’tissa saṅgo vā bandho vā na hoti. So jiyā mutto saro viya, yūthā apakkanto mattahatthī viya icchiticchitaṃ senāsanaṃ, vanasaṇḍaṃ, rukkhamūlaṃ, navaṃ pabbhāraṃ paribhuñjanto eko tiṭṭhati, eko nisīdati, sabbiriyāpathesu eko adutiyo.

kāyaparihārikenā: With just enough to maintain the body. Kucchiparihārikenā: With just enough to maintain the belly. Samādāyeva pakkamatī: Taking all those eight requisites, keeping them connected to the body, he departs; he has no attachment or bond, thinking, "My monastery, my enclosure, my attendant." Like an arrow released from a bow, like a drunken elephant separated from the herd, using any lodging he wishes, a grove, the foot of a tree, a new cave, he dwells alone, he sits alone, in all postures he is alone, without a second.

‘‘Cātuddiso appaṭigho ca hoti,

"He is unrestricted in all directions,
Contented, whatever is available;
Unperturbed, enduring hardships,
Let him wander alone like a rhinoceros." (su. ni. 42; cūḷani. khaggavisāṇasuttaniddeso 128)

Evaṃ vaṇṇitaṃ khaggavisāṇakappataṃ āpajjati.

He attains the state of being like a rhinoceros horn, which has been described in this way.

seyyathāpītiādimāha. Tatthapakkhī sakuṇoti pakkhayutto sakuṇo.Ḍetīti uppatati. Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepattho – sakuṇā nāma ‘‘asukasmiṃ padese rukkho paripakkaphalo’’ti ñatvā nānādisāhi āgantvā nakhapakkhatuṇḍādīhi tassa phalāni vijjhantā vidhunantā khādanti, ‘‘idaṃ ajjatanāya, idaṃ svātanāya bhavissatī’’ti nesaṃ na hoti. Phale pana khīṇe neva rukkhassa ārakkhaṃ ṭhapenti, na tattha pakkhaṃ vā pattaṃ vā nakhaṃ vā tuṇḍaṃ vā ṭhapenti, atha kho tasmiṃ rukkhe anapekkhā hutvā yo yaṃ disābhāgaṃ icchati, so tena sapattabhārova uppatitvā gacchati. Evameva ayaṃ bhikkhu nissaṅgo nirapekkhoyeva pakkamati, samādāyeva pakkamati.Ariyenāti niddosena.Ajjhattanti sake attabhāve.Anavajjasukhanti niddosasukhaṃ.

seyyathāpītiādi is said. Therein, pakkhī sakuṇo means a bird (sakuṇo) with wings. Ḍetī means flies up. Herein, this is the concise meaning: Birds, having learned that "in such and such place, a tree has ripe fruits," come from various directions, pecking, shaking, and eating its fruits with their claws, wings, beaks, etc. They do not think, "This is for today, this will be for tomorrow." But when the fruits are gone, they neither keep watch over the tree, nor do they leave a wing, leaf, claw, or beak there; rather, being without attachment to that tree, whichever direction they wish, they fly up and go, just like birds with wings. Just so, this bhikkhu departs without attachment or expectation, he departs having undertaken [the training]. Ariyenā means faultless. Ajjhatta means in one's own being. Anavajjasukha means faultless happiness.

So cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvāti so iminā ariyena sīlakkhandhena samannāgato bhikkhu cakkhuviññāṇena rūpaṃ passitvāti attho. Sesapadesupi yaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā, taṃ sabbaṃ visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.15) vuttaṃ.Abyāsekasukhanti kilesehi anāsittasukhaṃ, avikiṇṇasukhantipi vuttaṃ. Indriyasaṃvarasukhaṃ hi diṭṭhādīsu diṭṭhamattādivasena pavattatāya avikiṇṇaṃ hoti.

So cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā means that bhikkhu endowed with this noble aggregate of virtue (sīlakkhandha), sees a form with eye-consciousness. In the remaining passages also, whatever should be said, all that is stated in the Visuddhimagga (Visuddhi. 1.15). Abyāsekasukha means happiness unpolluted by defilements, also stated as unscattered happiness. For the happiness of sense restraint is unscattered because it occurs in the case of what is seen, etc., merely as what is seen, etc.

So abhikkante paṭikkanteti so manacchaṭṭhānaṃ indriyānaṃ saṃvarena samannāgato bhikkhu imesu abhikkantapaṭikkantādīsu sattasu ṭhānesu satisampajaññavasena sampajānakārī hoti. Tatthaabhikkantanti purato gamanaṃ.Paṭikkantanti pacchāgamanaṃ.

So abhikkante paṭikkante means that bhikkhu, endowed with restraint of the six senses including the mind, is mindful and clearly comprehending (sampajānakārī) in these seven situations of going forward, going backward, etc. Therein, abhikkanta means going forward. Paṭikkanta means going backward.

Sampajānakārīhotīti sātthakasampajaññaṃ, sappāyasampajaññaṃ, gocarasampajaññaṃ, asammohasampajaññanti imesaṃ catunnaṃ satisampayuttānaṃ sampajaññānaṃ vasena satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvā ñāṇena paricchinditvāyeva tāni abhikkantapaṭikkantāni karoti. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana icchantena dīghanikāye sāmaññaphalavaṇṇanāto vā majjhimanikāye satipaṭṭhānavaṇṇanāto vā gahetabbo.

Sampajānakārī hotī means, establishing mindfulness and discerning with knowledge, by means of these four kinds of clear comprehension (sampajañña) connected with mindfulness: clear comprehension of purpose (sātthakasampajaññaṃ), clear comprehension of suitability (sappāyasampajaññaṃ), clear comprehension of domain (gocarasampajaññaṃ), and clear comprehension of non-delusion (asammohasampajaññaṃ), he performs those acts of going forward, going backward, etc. The same method applies to the remaining passages. This is the summary here, but one who wishes for detail should take it from the Sāmaññaphalavaṇṇanā in the Dīgha Nikāya or the Satipaṭṭhānavaṇṇanā in the Majjhima Nikāya.

So iminā cātiādinā kiṃ dasseti? Araññavāsassa paccayasampattiṃ dasseti. Yassa hi ime cattāro paccayā natthi, tassa araññavāso na ijjhati, tiracchānagatehi vā vanacarakehi vā saddhiṃ vatthabbataṃ āpajjati. Araññe adhivatthā devatā ‘‘kiṃ evarūpassa pāpabhikkhuno araññavāsenā’’ti bheravasaddaṃ sāventi, hatthehi sīsaṃ paharitvā palāyanākāraṃ karonti. ‘‘Asuko bhikkhu araññaṃ pavisitvā idañcidañca pāpakammamakāsī’’ti ayaso pattharati. Yassa panete cattāro paccayā atthi, tassa araññavāso ijjhati. So hi attano sīlaṃ paccavekkhanto kiñci kāḷakaṃ vā tilakaṃ vā apassanto pītiṃ uppādetvā taṃ khayato vayato sammasanto ariyabhūmiṃ okkamati. Araññe adhivatthā devatā attamanā vaṇṇaṃ bhāsanti. Itissa udake pakkhittatelabindu viya yaso vitthāriko hoti.

So iminā cātiādi, what does this indicate? It indicates the fulfillment of requisites for dwelling in the forest. For one who does not have these four requisites, dwelling in the forest is not successful, and he ends up having to live with animals or forest wanderers. Deities dwelling in the forest, thinking "What is the use of this evil bhikkhu dwelling in the forest?" make frightening noises, striking their heads with their hands, and running away. They spread a rumor saying, "Such and such bhikkhu, having entered the forest, did such and such evil deeds." But for one who has these four requisites, dwelling in the forest is successful. Indeed, reviewing his own virtue (sīla) and not seeing any black mark or blemish, he generates joy, and contemplating that as subject to destruction and decay, he enters the noble ground. Deities dwelling in the forest, being delighted, speak his praise. His fame becomes widespread, like a drop of oil placed in water.

vivittanti suññaṃ, appasaddaṃ, appanigghosanti attho. Etadeva hi sandhāya vibhaṅge ‘‘vivittanti santike cepi senāsanaṃ hoti, tañca anākiṇṇaṃ gahaṭṭhehi pabbajitehi, tena taṃ vivitta’’nti (vibha. 526) vuttaṃ. Seti ceva āsati ca etthātisenāsanaṃ. Mañcapīṭhānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Tenāha – ‘‘senāsananti mañcopi senāsanaṃ, pīṭhampi, bhisipi, bimbohanampi, vihāropi, aḍḍhayogopi, pāsādopi, hammiyampi, guhāpi, aṭṭopi, māḷopi, leṇampi, veḷugumbopi, rukkhamūlampi, maṇḍapopi senāsanaṃ, yattha vā pana bhikkhū paṭikkamanti, sabbametaṃ senāsana’’nti (vibha. 527). Apica vihāro, aḍḍhayogo, pāsādo, hammiyaṃ, guhāti idaṃ vihārasenāsanaṃ nāma. Mañco, pīṭhaṃ, bhisi, bimbohananti idaṃ mañcapīṭhasenāsanaṃ nāma. Cimilikā, cammakhaṇḍo, tiṇasanthāro, paṇṇasanthāroti idaṃ santhatasenāsanaṃ nāma. Yattha vā pana bhikkhū paṭikkamantīti etaṃ okāsasenāsanaṃ nāmāti evaṃ catubbidhaṃ senāsanaṃ hoti. Taṃ sabbampi senāsanaggahaṇena gahitameva.

vivitta means empty, quiet, without much noise. With this in mind, it was said in the Vibhaṅga, "Vivitta means even if the dwelling is nearby, it is uncrowded with householders and renunciates, therefore it is vivitta" (vibha. 526). Senāsanaṃ is where one lies down (seti) and sits (āsati). This is a designation for beds and chairs. Therefore, it is said: "Senāsanaṃ means a bed is a senāsanaṃ, a chair also, a cushion, a pillow, a monastery, a lean-to, a palace, a mansion, a cave, a hut, an upper chamber, a lodging, a bamboo grove, the foot of a tree, a pavilion is a senāsanaṃ; or wherever bhikkhus dwell, all this is a senāsanaṃ" (vibha. 527). Moreover, vihāro (monastery), aḍḍhayogo (lean-to), pāsādo (palace), hammiyaṃ (mansion), guhā (cave), this is called a vihārasenāsanaṃ. Mañco (bed), pīṭhaṃ (chair), bhisi (cushion), bimbohanaṃ (pillow), this is called a mañcapīṭhasenāsanaṃ. Cimilikā (mat of plaited bamboo strips), cammakhaṇḍo (piece of hide), tiṇasanthāro (straw mat), paṇṇasanthāro (leaf mat), this is called santhatasenāsanaṃ. Yattha vā pana bhikkhū paṭikkamantīti, this is called okāsasenāsanaṃ (open-air dwelling). Thus, there are four kinds of senāsanaṃ. All that is included by the গ্রহণ (grahaṇa) of senāsanaṃ.

araññaṃ rukkhamūlantiādimāha. Tatthaaraññanti ‘‘nikkhamitvā bahi indakhīlā sabbametaṃ arañña’’nti (vibha. 529) ‘‘idaṃ bhikkhunīnaṃ vasena āgataṃ araññaṃ. ‘‘Āraññakaṃ nāma senāsanaṃ pañcadhanusatikaṃ pacchima’’nti (pārā. 654) idaṃ pana imassa bhikkhuno anurūpaṃ. Tassa lakkhaṇaṃ visuddhimagge dhutaṅganiddese vuttaṃ.Rukkhamūlanti yaṃkiñci sītacchāyaṃ vivittaṃ rukkhamūlaṃ.Pabbatanti selaṃ. Tattha hi udakasoṇḍīsu udakakiccaṃ katvā sītāya rukkhacchāyāya nisinnassa nānādisāsu khāyamānāsu sītena vātena bījiyamānassa cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hoti.Kandaranti kaṃ vuccati udakaṃ, tena dāritaṃ udakabhinnaṃ pabbatapadesaṃ, yaṃ nitambantipi nadīnikuñjantipi vadanti. Tattha hi rajatapaṭṭasadisā vālikā hoti, matthake maṇivitānaṃ viya vanagahanaṃ, maṇikkhandhasadisaṃ udakaṃ sandati. Evarūpaṃ kandaraṃ oruyha pānīyaṃ pivitvā gattāni sītāni katvā vālikaṃ ussāpetvā paṃsukūlacīvaraṃ paññāpetvā nisinnassa samaṇadhammaṃ karoto cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hoti.Giriguhanti dvinnaṃ pabbatānaṃ antaraṃ, ekasmiṃyeva vā umaṅgasadisaṃ mahāvivaraṃ.Susānalakkhaṇaṃ visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.34) vuttaṃ.Vanapatthanti gāmantaṃ atikkamitvā manussānaṃ anupacāraṭṭhānaṃ, yattha na kasanti na vapanti. Tenevāha – ‘‘vanapatthanti dūrānametaṃ senāsanānaṃ adhivacana’’ntiādi.Abbhokāsanti acchannaṃ. Ākaṅkhamāno panettha cīvarakuṭiṃ katvā vasati.Palālapuñjanti palālarāsiṃ. Mahāpalālapuñjato hi palālaṃ nikkaḍḍhitvā pabbhāraleṇasadise ālaye karonti, gacchagumbādīnampi upari palālaṃ pakkhipitvā heṭṭhā nisinnā samaṇadhammaṃ karonti. Taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.

araññaṃ rukkhamūlantiādi is said. Therein, arañña means "having gone out beyond the boundary pillar, all this is forest" (vibha. 529). "Āraññakaṃ, as a dwelling, is five dhanus (bow-lengths) away to the west" (pārā. 654). This, however, is suitable for this bhikkhu. Its characteristic is stated in the dhutaṅga section of the Visuddhimagga. Rukkhamūla means any secluded tree root that provides cool shade. Pabbata means a rock. For there, having done one's water duties in the water channels and sitting in the cool shade of a tree, with cool breezes blowing from various directions, the mind becomes concentrated. Kandara means kaṃ which is called water, a mountain region split by it, broken by water, which they also call nitamba or nadīnikuñja (river grove). For there is sand like a sheet of silver, a dense forest like a canopy of jewels on the summit, and water flows like a pillar of jewels. Having descended to such a kandara, drinking water, cooling one's limbs, spreading out sand, arranging a robe of discarded rags, and sitting down, while practicing the ascetic life, the mind becomes concentrated. Giriguha means the space between two mountains, or a large cave-like opening in one mountain. The characteristics of susāna (cemetery) are stated in the Visuddhimagga (Visuddhi. 1.34). Vanapattha means a place beyond the village boundary, not frequented by people, where they neither plow nor sow. Therefore, it is said, "vanapattha is a designation for distant dwellings," etc. Abbhokāsa means uncovered. Here, if he wishes, he lives having made a cīvarakuṭi (robe-hut). Palālapuñja means a heap of straw. For from a large heap of straw, having pulled out straw, they make dwellings like pabbhāraleṇa (mountain cleft shelters), and having placed straw on top of clumps of bushes, etc., sitting underneath, they practice the ascetic life. With that in mind, this is said.

Pacchābhattanti bhattassa pacchato.Piṇḍapātapaṭikkantoti piṇḍapātapariyesanato paṭikkanto.Pallaṅkanti samantato ūrubaddhāsanaṃ.Ābhujitvāti bandhitvā.Ujuṃ kāyaṃ paṇidhāyāti uparimasarīraṃ ujukaṃ ṭhapetvā aṭṭhārasa piṭṭhikaṇṭake koṭiyā koṭiṃ paṭipādetvā. Evañhi nisinnassa cammamaṃsanhārūni na paṇamanti. Athassa yā tesaṃ paṇamanapaccayā khaṇe khaṇe vedanā uppajjeyyuṃ, tā na uppajjanti. Tāsu na uppajjamānāsu cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hoti, kammaṭṭhānaṃ na paripatati, vuddhiṃ phātiṃ upagacchati.Parimukhaṃ satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvāti kammaṭṭhānābhimukhaṃ satiṃ ṭhapayitvā, mukhasamīpe vā katvāti attho. Teneva vibhaṅge vuttaṃ – ‘‘ayaṃ sati upaṭṭhitā hoti sūpaṭṭhitā nāsikagge vā mukhanimitte vā. Tena vuccati parimukhaṃ satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvā’’ti (vibha. 537). Atha vā‘‘parīti pariggahaṭṭho.Mukhanti niyyānaṭṭho.Satīti upaṭṭhānaṭṭho. Tena vuccati – ‘parimukhaṃ sati’’’nti evaṃ paṭisambhidāyaṃ (paṭi. ma. 1.164) vuttanayena panettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Tatrāyaṃ saṅkhepo ‘‘pariggahitaniyyānaṃ satiṃ katvā’’ti.

Pacchābhatta means after the meal. Piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto means having returned from seeking alms. Pallaṅka means a cross-legged posture binding the thighs all around. Ābhujitvā means having tied. Ujuṃ kāyaṃ paṇidhāyā means having set the upper body straight, setting the eighteen vertebrae one upon the other, point to point. For one sitting thus, the skin, flesh, sinews, and bones do not bend. Then, the pains that would arise moment by moment due to their bending do not arise. When those do not arise, the mind becomes concentrated, the meditation subject does not fail, it reaches growth and increase. Parimukhaṃ satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvā means having established mindfulness facing the meditation subject, or having it near the face. Therefore, it is said in the Vibhaṅga: "This mindfulness is established, well-established at the tip of the nose or at the mouth-object. Therefore, it is said having established mindfulness parimukhaṃ" (vibha. 537). Or "parī means in the sense of surrounding. Mukha means in the sense of outlet. Satī means in the sense of establishing. Therefore, it is said 'parimukhaṃ sati,'" thus, the meaning here should be understood according to the method stated in the Paṭisambhidāmagga (paṭi. ma. 1.164). Here, the summary is "having made mindfulness the surrounding outlet."

Abhijjhaṃ loketi ettha lujjana-palujjanaṭṭhena pañcupādānakkhandhā loko. Tasmā pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu rāgaṃ pahāya kāmacchandaṃ vikkhambhetvāti ayamettha attho.Vigatābhijjhenāti vikkhambhanavasena pahīnattā vigatābhijjhena, na cakkhuviññāṇasadisenāti attho.Abhijjhāya cittaṃ parisodhetīti abhijjhāto cittaṃ parimoceti, yathā naṃ sā muñcati ceva muñcitvā ca na puna gaṇhāti, evaṃ karotīti attho.Byāpādapadosaṃ pahāyātiādīsupi eseva nayo. Byāpajjati iminā cittaṃ pūtikummāsādayo viya purimapakatiṃ pajahatītibyāpādo. Vikārappattiyā padussati, paraṃ vā padūseti vināsetītipadoso. Ubhayampetaṃ kodhasseva adhivacanaṃ. Thinaṃ cittagelaññaṃ, middhaṃ cetasikagelaññaṃ. Thinañca middhañcathinamiddhaṃ. Ālokasaññīti rattimpi divāpi diṭṭhaālokasañjānanasamatthāya vigatanīvaraṇāya parisuddhāya saññāya samannāgato.Sato sampajānoti satiyā ca ñāṇena ca samannāgato. Idaṃ ubhayaṃ ālokasaññāya upakārakattā vuttaṃ. Uddhaccañca kukkuccañcauddhaccakukkuccaṃ. Tiṇṇavicikicchoti vicikicchaṃ taritvā atikkamitvā ṭhito. ‘‘Kathamidaṃ kathamida’’nti evaṃ nappavattatītiakathaṃkathī. Kusalesu dhammesūti anavajjesu dhammesu. ‘‘Ime nu kho kusalā, kathamime kusalā’’ti evaṃ na vicikicchati na kaṅkhatīti attho. Ayamettha saṅkhepo. Imesu pana nīvaraṇesu vacanatthalakkhaṇādibhedato yaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā, taṃ visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.71-72) vuttaṃ.Paññāya dubbalīkaraṇeti yasmā ime pañca nīvaraṇā uppajjamānā anuppannāya lokiyalokuttarāya paññāya uppajjituṃ na denti, uppannāpi aṭṭha samāpattiyo pañca vā abhiññā ucchinditvā pātenti. Tasmā paññāya dubbalīkaraṇāti vuccanti.Vivicceva kāmehītiādīni visuddhimagge vitthāritāni.

Abhijjhaṃ loke here, the five aggregates subject to clinging (pañcupādānakkhandhā) are the world (loko) in the sense of decaying and disintegrating. Therefore, having abandoned lust for the five aggregates of clinging, having warded off sensual desire (kāmacchanda), this is the meaning here. Vigatābhijjhenā means with lust gone due to having been warded off by way of repulsion, not like eye-consciousness. Abhijjhāya cittaṃ parisodhetī means he purifies the mind from lust, he does so such that it releases it, and having released it, he does not grasp it again. The same method applies in Byāpādapadosaṃ pahāyātiādi as well. Byāpajjati, the mind abandons its former nature like bad buttermilk, therefore it is byāpādo (ill-will). It is called padoso (hatred) because it is corrupted due to change, or it corrupts or destroys others. Both of these are designations for anger. Thinaṃ is mental sluggishness, middhaṃ is cetasikagelaññaṃ (mental drowsiness). Thinañca and middhañca is thinamiddhaṃ (sloth and torpor). Ālokasaññī means endowed with pure perception (saññā) that is capable of perceiving the light seen even at night or during the day, devoid of hindrances. Sato sampajāno means endowed with mindfulness (sati) and knowledge (ñāṇa). This pair is stated because they are helpful to the perception of light. Uddhaccañca and kukkuccañca is uddhaccakukkuccaṃ (restlessness and remorse). Tiṇṇavicikiccho means having crossed over and transcended doubt (vicikicchā). Akathaṃkathī means not behaving in such a way as "How is this? How is this?". Kusalesu dhammesū means in faultless states. He does not doubt or waver thinking "Are these wholesome? How are these wholesome?" This is the summary here. But regarding these hindrances, whatever should be said regarding the difference in wording, meaning, characteristic, etc., that is stated in the Visuddhimagga (Visuddhi. 1.71-72). Paññāya dubbalīkaraṇe means since these five hindrances, when arising, do not allow mundane or supramundane wisdom (paññā) that has not arisen to arise, and even if it has arisen, they cut off and destroy the eight attainments (samāpatti) or the five higher knowledges (abhiññā), therefore they are called weakeners of wisdom. Vivicceva kāmehītiādi are explained in detail in the Visuddhimagga.

Ime āsavātiādi aparenāpi pariyāyena catusaccappakāsanatthaṃ vuttaṃ.Nāparaṃ itthattāyāti pajānātīti ettāvatā heṭṭhā tīhi aṅgehi bāhirasamayassa nipphalabhāvaṃ dassetvā catutthena aṅgena attano sāsanassa gambhīrabhāvaṃ pakāsetvā desanāya arahattena kūṭaṃ gaṇhi. Idāni desanaṃ appentoevaṃ kho, bhikkhavetiādimāha.

Ime āsavātiādi is stated to reveal the Four Noble Truths by another method as well. Nāparaṃ itthattāyāti pajānātī means by this much, having shown the fruitlessness of external doctrines with the first three factors stated earlier, and having revealed the profundity of his own teaching with the fourth factor, he took the summit with arahantship in the teaching. Now, applying the teaching, he says evaṃ kho, bhikkhavetiādi.

9. Taṇhāsuttavaṇṇanā
9. Taṇhāsuttavaṇṇanā

199.Navamejālininti jālasadisaṃ. Yathā hi jālaṃ samantato saṃsibbitaṃ ākulabyākulaṃ, evaṃ taṇhāpīti jālasadisattā jālinīti vuttā. Tayo vā bhave ajjhottharitvā ṭhitāya etissā tattha tattha attano koṭṭhāsabhūtaṃ jālaṃ atthītipi jālinī.Saritanti tattha tattha saritvā saṃsaritvā ṭhitaṃ.Visaṭanti patthaṭaṃ vikkhittaṃ.Visattikanti tattha tattha visattaṃ laggaṃ lagitaṃ. Apica‘‘visamūlāti visattikā.Visaphalāti visattikā’’tiādināpi (mahāni. 3; cūḷani. mettagūmāṇavapucchāniddeso 22) nayenettha attho daṭṭhabbo.Uddhastoti upari dhaṃsito.Pariyonaddhoti samantā veṭhito.Tantākulakajātoti tantaṃ viya ākulajāto. Yathā nāma dunnikkhittaṃ mūsikacchinnaṃ pesakārānaṃ tantaṃ tahiṃ tahiṃ ākulaṃ hoti, ‘‘idaṃ aggaṃ idaṃ mūla’’nti aggena vā aggaṃ, mūlena vā mūlaṃ samānetuṃ dukkaraṃ hoti, evaṃ sattā imāya taṇhāya pariyonaddhā ākulabyākulā na sakkonti attano nissaraṇamaggaṃ ujuṃ kātuṃ.Gulāguṇṭhikajātoti gulāguṇṭhikaṃ vuccati pesakārakañjiyasuttaṃ. Gulā nāma sakuṇikā, tassā kulāvakotipi eke. Yathā tadubhayampi ākulaṃ aggena vā aggaṃ, mūlena vā mūlaṃ samānetuṃ dukkaranti purimanayeneva yojetabbaṃ.Muñjapabbajabhūtoti muñjatiṇaṃ viya pabbajatiṇaṃ viya ca bhūto, tādiso jāto. Yathā tāni tiṇāni koṭṭetvā katarajjuṃ jiṇṇakāle katthaci patitaṃ gahetvā tesaṃ tiṇānaṃ ‘‘idaṃ aggaṃ idaṃ mūla’’nti aggena vā aggaṃ, mūlena vā mūlaṃ samānetuṃ dukkaraṃ. Tampi ca paccattapurisakāre ṭhatvā sakkā bhaveyya ujuṃ kātuṃ, ṭhapetvā pana bodhisatte añño satto attano dhammatāya taṇhājālaṃ padāletvā attano nissaraṇamaggaṃ ujuṃ kātuṃ samattho nāma natthi. Evamayaṃ loko taṇhājālena pariyonaddho apāyaṃ duggatiṃ vinipātaṃ saṃsāraṃ nātivattati. Tatthaapāyoti niraya-tiracchānayoni-pettivisaya-asurakāyā. Sabbepi hi te vaḍḍhisaṅkhātassa āyassa abhāvato apāyāti vuccanti. Tathā dukkhassa gatibhāvatoduggati. Sukhasamussayato vinipatitattāvinipāto. Itaro pana –

199. In "jālini": jālini means like a net. Just as a net is intertwined and entangled all around, so too is craving, hence it is called jālinī because it is like a net. Or, because it has thoroughly covered the three existences (bhava), it has its own network, a portion in each existence, hence it is jālinī. Sarita: flowing and wandering in various places. Visaṭa: spread out, scattered. Visattika: clinging, attached, and sticking in various places. Furthermore, the meaning here should also be understood by the method beginning with "visamūlāti visattikā. Visaphalāti visattikā" (mahāni. 3; cūḷani. mettagūmāṇavapucchāniddeso 22). Uddhasto: cast upwards. Pariyonaddho: completely bound. Tantākulakajāto: tangled like threads. Just as poorly laid out threads, cut by mice, become entangled in various places for weavers, making it difficult to connect end to end, or beginning to beginning, similarly beings are completely bound by this craving, entangled and unable to straighten their path to liberation. Gulāguṇṭhikajāto: gulāguṇṭhikaṃ refers to the weaver's ball of thread (pesakārakañjiyasuttaṃ). Gulā means small birds, some say their nests. Just as both of these are tangled, making it difficult to connect end to end, or beginning to beginning, it should be understood in the same way as before. Muñjapabbajabhūto: become like muñja grass and pabbaja grass. Just as when those grasses are cut and someone picks up a fallen piece in old age, it is difficult to connect end to end, discerning which is the beginning and which is the end. And even that might be possible to straighten out with personal effort, but except for Bodhisattas, no other being can break through the net of craving by their own nature and straighten their path to liberation. Thus, this world, bound by the net of craving, does not transcend the woeful states (apāya), bad destinations (duggati), ruin (vinipāta), and wandering-on (saṃsāra). Here, apāyo means hell, the animal realm, the realm of ghosts, and the realm of demons. All these are called apāya because of the absence of increase (āyassa), which is synonymous with growth. Similarly, duggati because it is a destination of suffering. Vinipāto** because it is a fall from the accumulation of happiness. But the other—

‘‘Khandhānañca paṭipāṭi, dhātuāyatanāna ca;

"The continuous sequence of aggregates,
And of elements and sense-fields;
Unbrokenly proceeding,
Is called wandering-on."

Taṃ sabbaṃ nātivattati nātikkamati, atha kho cutito paṭisandhiṃ paṭisandhito cutinti evaṃ punappunaṃ cutipaṭisandhiyo gaṇhamāno tīsu bhavesu catūsu yonīsu pañcasu gatīsu sattasu viññāṇaṭṭhitīsu navasu sattāvāsesu mahāsamudde vātakkhittanāvā viya yante yuttagoṇo viya ca paribbhamatiyeva.

All that, he does not transcend, he does not overcome, but repeatedly taking rebirth after death, and death after rebirth, thus wandering on and on in the three existences, the four modes of generation, the five destinies, the seven abodes of consciousness, and the nine abodes of beings, like a ship tossed by the wind in the great ocean, or like an ox yoked to a cart.

Ajjhattikassa upādāyāti ajjhattikaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ upādāya. Idañhi upayogatthe sāmivacanaṃ.Bāhirassa upādāyāti bāhiraṃ khandhapañcakaṃ upādāya, idampi upayogatthe sāmivacanaṃ.Asmīti, bhikkhave, satīti, bhikkhave, yadetaṃ ajjhattaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ upādāya taṇhāmānadiṭṭhivasena samūhaggāhato asmīti hoti, tasmiṃ satīti attho.Itthasmīti hotītiādīsu pana evaṃ samūhato ahanti gahaṇe sati tato anupanidhāya ca upanidhāya cāti dvidhā gahaṇaṃ hoti. Tatthaanupanidhāyāti aññaṃ ākāraṃ anupagamma sakabhāvameva ārammaṇaṃ katvā itthasmīti hoti, khattiyādīsu idaṃpakāro ahanti evaṃ taṇhāmānadiṭṭhivasena hotīti attho. Idaṃ tāva anupanidhāya gahaṇaṃ.Upanidhāya gahaṇaṃpana duvidhaṃ hoti samato ca asamato ca. Taṃ dassetuṃevaṃsmīti aññathāsmīti ca vuttaṃ. Tatthaevaṃsmīti idaṃ samato upanidhāya gahaṇaṃ, yathāyaṃ khattiyo yathāyaṃ brāhmaṇo, evamahampīti attho.Aññathāsmīti idaṃ pana asamato gahaṇaṃ, yathāyaṃ khattiyo yathāyaṃ brāhmaṇo, tato aññathā ahaṃ, hīno vā adhiko vāti attho. Imāni tāva paccuppannavasena cattāri taṇhāvicaritāni.

Ajjhattikassa upādāyā: based on the internal five aggregates. Here, this is a possessive case with the sense of usage. Bāhirassa upādāyā: based on the external five aggregates; this too is a possessive case with the sense of usage. Asmīti, bhikkhave, satī: O monks, when there is this grasping of a collection in terms of craving, conceit, and views, based on the internal five aggregates, there is "I am," this is the meaning. In itthasmīti hotī etc., when there is this grasping of "I" as a collection, there are two kinds of grasping: with and without dependence (upanidhāya). Here, anupanidhāyā: without approaching another form, but making one's own nature the object, there is "I am this," meaning in the case of khattiyas etc., there is "I am this kind of I" in terms of craving, conceit, and views. This, first of all, is grasping without dependence. Upanidhāya gahaṇaṃ, grasping with dependence, however, is of two kinds: similar and dissimilar. To show that, evaṃsmīti aññathāsmīti is said. Here, evaṃsmī: this is grasping with similar dependence, meaning just as this khattiya is, just as this brahmin is, so am I. Aññathāsmī: this, however, is grasping with dissimilar dependence, meaning just as this khattiya is, just as this brahmin is, I am different from that, inferior or superior. These, for the present, are the four ways in which craving operates in the present.

Asasmīti satasmīti imāni pana dve yasmā atthīti asaṃ, niccassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Sīdatīti sataṃ, aniccassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Tasmā sassatucchedavasena vuttānīti veditabbāni. Ito parānisanti evamādīni cattāri saṃsayaparivitakkavasena vuttāni.Santi hotīti evamādīsu ahaṃ siyanti hotīti evamattho veditabbo. Adhippāyo panettha purimacatukke vuttanayeneva gahetabbo.Apihaṃ santiādīni pana cattāri api nāma ahaṃ bhaveyyanti evaṃ patthanākappanavasena vuttāni. Tānipi purimacatukke vuttanayeneva veditabbāni.Bhavissantiādīni pana cattāri anāgatavasena vuttāni. Tesampi purimacatukke vuttanayeneva attho veditabbo. Evamete –

Asasmīti satasmī: these two, because there is asaṃ, this is a term for what is impermanent. That which ceases is sataṃ, this is a term for what is permanent. Therefore, they should be understood as being stated in terms of eternalism and annihilationism. The four terms beginning with sa are stated in terms of doubt and speculation. In santi hotī etc., the meaning should be understood as "I might be." The intention here should be understood in the same way as stated in the first four. The four terms beginning with apihaṃ sa are stated in terms of desiring and imagining "may I be." These too should be understood in the same way as stated in the first four. The four terms beginning with Bhavissa are stated in terms of the future. The meaning of these too should be understood in the same way as stated in the first four. Thus, these—

‘‘Dve diṭṭhisīsā sīsaññe, cattāro sīsamūlakā;

"Two view-headings and one other heading,
Four are the root headings;
Three and three; these eighteen
One should discern."

Imināti iminā rūpena vā…pe… viññāṇena vāti esa viseso veditabbo. Sesaṃ tādisameva.

Iminā: this distinction should be understood: with this form or…pe… with this consciousness. The rest is just as before.

Iti evarūpāni atītāni chattiṃsāti ekamekassa puggalassa atīte addhani chattiṃsa.Anāgatānichattiṃsāti ekamekasseva puggalassa ca anāgate addhani chattiṃsa.Paccuppannāni chattiṃsāti ekassa vā puggalassa yathāsambhavato bahūnaṃ vā paccuppanne addhani chattiṃsāva. Sabbasattānaṃ pana niyameneva atīte addhani chattiṃsa, anāgate chattiṃsa, paccuppanne chattiṃsa. Anantā hi asadisataṇhāmānadiṭṭhibhedā sattā.Aṭṭhasataṃtaṇhāvicaritaṃ hontīti ettha pana aṭṭhasatasaṅkhātaṃ taṇhāvicaritaṃ hotīti evamattho daṭṭhabbo.

Iti evarūpāni atītāni chattiṃsā: thus, for each individual, there are thirty-six in the past time. Anāgatānichattiṃsā: for each individual, there are thirty-six in the future time. Paccuppannāni chattiṃsā: for one individual, or according to possibility, for many, there are just thirty-six in the present time. But for all beings, invariably there are thirty-six in the past time, thirty-six in the future, and thirty-six in the present. For beings are endless, with diverse distinctions of craving, conceit, and views. Aṭṭhasataṃtaṇhāvicaritaṃ hontī: here, the meaning should be understood as "there are craving-operations to the number of eight hundred."

10. Pemasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Commentary on the Pema Sutta

200.Dasamena ussenetīti diṭṭhivasena na ukkhipati.Na paṭisenetīti paṭiviruddho hutvā kalahabhaṇḍanavasena na ukkhipati.Na dhūpāyatīti ajjhattikassa upādāya taṇhāvicaritavasena na dhūpāyati.Na pajjalatīti bāhirassa upādāya taṇhāvicaritavasena na pajjalati.Na sampajjhāyatīti asmimānavasena na sampajjhāyati. Sesaṃ pāḷinayeneva veditabbaṃ. Imasmiṃ sutte vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ kathitanti.

200. In the tenth, na ussenetī: does not lift up in terms of views. Na paṭisenetī: does not lift up in opposition, in terms of quarrels and disputes. Na dhūpāyatī: does not fume in terms of craving-operations based on the internal. Na pajjalatī: does not blaze in terms of craving-operations based on the external. Na sampajjhāyatī: does not reflect in terms of the "I am" conceit. The rest should be understood in accordance with the text itself. In this sutta, the round (vaṭṭa) and escape (vivaṭṭa) have been spoken of.

5. Pañcamapaṇṇāsakaṃ

5. Fifth Set of Fifty

(21) 1. Sappurisavaggo

(21) 1. Sappurisa Section

1-6. Sikkhāpadasuttavaṇṇanā
1-6. Commentary on the Sikkhāpada Suttas

201.Pañcamassa paṭhameasappurisanti lāmakapurisaṃ tucchapurisaṃ mūḷhapurisaṃ avijjāya andhīkataṃ bālaṃ.Asappurisataranti atirekena asappurisaṃ. Itare dve vuttapaṭipakkhavasena veditabbā. Sesamettha uttānatthameva. Yathā cettha, evaṃ ito paresu pañcasu. Etesu hi paṭhamaṃ pañcaveravasena desitaṃ, dutiyaṃ assaddhammavasena, tatiyaṃ kāyavacīdvāravasena, catutthaṃ manodvāravasena, pañcamaṃ aṭṭhamicchattavasena, chaṭṭhaṃ dasamicchattavasena.

201. In the first of the fifth, asappurisa: a base person, an empty person, a foolish person, blinded by ignorance, a fool. Asappurisatara: an exceedingly base person. The other two should be understood in terms of opposition to what has been stated. The rest here is easy to understand. As here, so in the five that follow. For in these, the first is taught in terms of the five kinds of aversion, the second in terms of disbelief in the Dhamma, the third in terms of the doors of body and speech, the fourth in terms of the door of mind, the fifth in terms of the eight wrongnesses, the sixth in terms of the ten wrongnesses.

7-10. Pāpadhammasuttacatukkavaṇṇanā
7-10. Commentary on the Pāpadhamma Sutta Quartet

207-210.Sattamepāpanti lāmakaṃ saṃkiliṭṭhapuggalaṃ.Kalyāṇanti bhaddakaṃ anavajjapuggalaṃ. Sesamettha uttānatthameva. Aṭṭhamepi eseva nayo. Navamepāpadhammanti lāmakadhammaṃ.Kalyāṇadhammanti anavajjadhammaṃ. Sesamettha uttānatthameva. Dasamepi eseva nayo. Imasmiṃ vagge dasasupi suttesu agāriyappaṭipadā kathitā. Sacepi sotāpannasakadāgāmino honti, vaṭṭatiyevāti.

207-210. In the seventh, pāpa: a base, defiled person. Kalyāṇa: a good, blameless person. The rest here is easy to understand. The same method applies in the eighth. In the ninth, pāpadhamma: a base teaching. Kalyāṇadhamma: a blameless teaching. The rest here is easy to understand. The same method applies in the tenth. In this section, the way of life of a householder is spoken of in all ten suttas. Even if they are stream-enterers and once-returners, it is fitting.

(22) 2. Parisāvaggo

(22) 2. Parisā Section

1. Parisāsuttavaṇṇanā
1. Parisā Sutta Commentary

211.Dutiyassa paṭhame parisaṃ dūsentītiparisadūsanā. Parisaṃ sobhentītiparisasobhanā.

211. In the first of the second, parisadūsanā: one who corrupts the assembly. Parisasobhanā: one who adorns the assembly.

2. Diṭṭhisuttavaṇṇanā
2. Diṭṭhi Sutta Commentary

212.Dutiye manoduccarite pariyāpannāpi micchādiṭṭhi mahāsāvajjatāya visuṃ vuttā, tassā ca paṭipakkhavasena sammādiṭṭhi.

212. In the second, wrong view, even though included under misconduct of mind, is stated separately because of its great faultiness, and right view is stated in terms of its opposition.

3. Akataññutāsuttavaṇṇanā
3. Akataññutā Sutta Commentary

213.Tatiyeakataññutā akataveditāti akataññutāya akataveditāya. Ubhayampetaṃ atthato ekameva. Sukkapakkhepi eseva nayo.

213. In the third, akataññutā akataveditā: ingratitude and lack of awareness of what has been done. Both of these are the same in meaning. The same method applies in the pure side.

4-7. Pāṇātipātīsuttādivaṇṇanā
4-7. Pāṇātipātī Sutta Commentary, etc.

214-217.Catutthaṃ catunnaṃ kammakilesānaṃ tappaṭipakkhassa ca vasena vuttaṃ, pañcamaṃ sukkapakkhānaṃ ādito catunnaṃ micchattānaṃ vasena, chaṭṭhaṃ avasesānaṃ catunnaṃ, sattamaṃ anariyavohāraariyavohārānaṃ. Tathā aṭṭhamanavamadasamāni sappaṭipakkhānaṃ assaddhammānaṃ vasena vuttāni. Sabbasuttesu pana sukkapakkhadhammā lokiyalokuttaramissakāva kathitā. Navasu suttesu kiñcāpi ‘‘sagge’’ti vuttaṃ, tayo pana maggā tīṇi ca phalāni labbhantiyevāti.

214-217. The fourth is stated in terms of the four karmic defilements and their opposites, the fifth in terms of the first four wrongnesses on the pure side, the sixth in terms of the remaining four, the seventh in terms of ignoble speech and noble speech. Similarly, the eighth, ninth, and tenth are stated in terms of the ignoble qualities with their opposites. In all the suttas, however, the qualities of the pure side are spoken of as a mixture of mundane and supramundane. Although "heaven" is mentioned in nine suttas, the three paths and three fruits can certainly be attained.

(23) 3. Duccaritavaggavaṇṇanā

(23) 3. Duccarita Section Commentary

221-231.Tatiyassa paṭhamādīni uttānatthāneva. Dasame yo cintetvā kabyaṃ karoti, ayaṃcintākavināma. Yo sutvā karoti, ayaṃsutakavināma. Yo ekaṃ atthaṃ nissāya karoti, ayaṃatthakavināma. Yo taṅkhaṇaññeva vaṅgīsatthero viya attano paṭibhānena karoti, ayaṃpaṭibhānakavināmāti.

221-231. The first onwards of the third are easy to understand. In the tenth, one who composes poetry after thinking is called a cintākavi. One who composes after hearing is called a sutakavi. One who composes relying on a single meaning is called an atthakavi. One who composes at that very moment by his own inspiration, like the Elder Vaṅgīsa, is called a paṭibhānakavi.

(24) 4. Kammavaggo

(24) 4. Kamma Section

1. Saṃkhittasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Saṃkhitta Sutta Commentary

232.Catutthassa paṭhamekaṇhanti kāḷakaṃ dasaakusalakammapathakammaṃ.Kaṇhavipākanti apāye nibbattanato kāḷakavipākaṃ.Sukkanti paṇḍarakaṃ kusalakammapathakammaṃ.Sukkavipākanti sagge nibbattanato paṇḍarakavipākaṃ.Kaṇhasukkanti missakakammaṃ.Kaṇhasukkavipākanti sukhadukkhavipākaṃ. Missakakammañhi katvā akusalena tiracchānayoniyaṃ maṅgalahatthiṭṭhānādīsu uppanno kusalena pavatte sukhaṃ vediyati. Kusalena rājakulepi nibbatto akusalena pavatte dukkhaṃ vediyati.Akaṇhaṃ asukkanti kammakkhayakaraṃ catumaggañāṇaṃ adhippetaṃ. Tañhi yadi kaṇhaṃ bhaveyya, kaṇhavipākaṃ dadeyya. Yadi sukkaṃ bhaveyya, sukkavipākaṃ dadeyya. Ubhayavipākassa pana appadānato akaṇhaṃ asukkanti ayamettha attho.

232. In the first of the fourth, kaṇha: black, the ten courses of unwholesome action (akusalakammapatha). Kaṇhavipāka: black result, because it leads to rebirth in the woeful states. Sukka: white, the courses of wholesome action (kusalakammapatha). Sukkavipāka: white result, because it leads to rebirth in heaven. Kaṇhasukka: mixed kamma. Kaṇhasukkavipāka: result of happiness and suffering. For having done mixed kamma, one is born in the animal realm in places like the position of auspicious elephants due to the unwholesome, and experiences happiness when the wholesome prevails. Even if born in a royal family due to the wholesome, one experiences suffering when the unwholesome prevails. Akaṇhaṃ asukka: the fourfold path-knowledge that leads to the destruction of kamma is intended. For if that were black, it would give a black result. If it were white, it would give a white result. But because it does not give either result, it is "neither black nor white," this is the meaning here.

2. Vitthārasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Vitthāra Sutta Commentary

233.Dutiyesabyābajjhanti sadosaṃ.Kāyasaṅkhāranti kāyadvāracetanaṃ.Abhisaṅkharotīti āyūhati sampiṇḍeti. Sesadvayepi eseva nayo.Sabyābajjhaṃ lokanti sadukkhaṃ lokaṃ.Sabyābajjhā phassāti sadukkhā vipākaphassā.Sabyābajjhaṃ vedanaṃ vediyatīti sābādhaṃ vipākavedanaṃ vediyati.Ekantadukkhanti ekanteneva dukkhaṃ, na sukhasammissaṃ.Seyyathāpi sattā nerayikāti etthaseyyathāpīti nidassanatthe nipāto. Tena kevalaṃ nerayikasatte dasseti, aññe pana taṃsarikkhakā nāma natthi. Iminā upāyena sabbattha attho veditabbo.Seyyathāpi manussātiādīsu pana manussānaṃ tāva kālena sukhā vedanā uppajjati, kālena dukkhā vedanā.Ekacceca devāti ettha pana kāmāvacaradevā daṭṭhabbā. Tesañhi mahesakkhatarā devatā disvā nisinnāsanato vuṭṭhānaṃ, pārutauttarāsaṅgassa otāraṇaṃ, añjalipaggaṇhanantiādīnaṃ vasena kālena dukkhaṃ uppajjati, dibbasampattiṃ anubhavantānaṃ kālena sukhaṃ.Ekacce ca vinipātikāti ettha vemānikapetā daṭṭhabbā. Te nirantarameva ekasmiṃ kāle sukhaṃ, ekasmiṃ kāle dukkhaṃ vediyanti. Nāgasupaṇṇahatthiassādayo pana manussā viya vokiṇṇasukhadukkhāva honti.Pahānāya yā cetanāti ettha vivaṭṭagāminī maggacetanā veditabbā. Sā hi kammakkhayāya saṃvattatīti.

233. In the second, sabyābajjha: with ill will. Kāyasaṅkhāra: volition regarding the bodily action. Abhisaṅkharotī: accumulates, amasses. The same method applies in the other two. Sabyābajjhaṃ loka: a world with suffering. Sabyābajjhā phassā: painful resultants of contact. Sabyābajjhaṃ vedanaṃ vediyatī: experiences painful resultant feeling. Ekantadukkha: exclusively suffering, not mixed with happiness. Seyyathāpi sattā nerayikā: here, seyyathāpī is a particle in the sense of example. Therefore, it shows only hell beings, and there are no others similar to them. The meaning should be understood in this way everywhere. In seyyathāpi manussā etc., happiness arises for humans at one time, and suffering at another time. Ekacceca devā: here, the sense-sphere gods should be understood. For the more powerful deities, suffering arises at one time due to things like rising from their seats when seeing someone, removing the upper robe, and raising their joined hands, and happiness at another time when experiencing divine prosperity. Ekacce ca vinipātikā: here, the aerial ghosts (vemānikapetā) should be understood. They experience happiness at one time and suffering at another time, constantly. But nāgas, supaṇṇas, elephants, horses, etc., are a mixture of happiness and suffering, like humans. Pahānāya yā cetanā: here, the path-consciousness leading to escape should be understood. For that leads to the destruction of kamma.

3. Soṇakāyanasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Soṇakāyana Sutta Commentary

234.Tatiyesikhāmoggallānoti sīsamajjhe ṭhitāya mahatiyā sikhāya samannāgato moggallānagotto brāhmaṇo.Purimānīti atītānantaradivasato paṭṭhāya purimāni, dutiyādito paṭṭhāyapurimatarāniveditabbāni.Soṇakāyanoti tasseva antevāsiko.Kammasaccāyaṃ bho lokoti bho ayaṃ loko kammasabhāvo.Kammasamārambhaṭṭhāyīti kammasamārambhena tiṭṭhati. Kammaṃ āyūhantova tiṭṭhati, anāyūhanto ucchijjatīti dīpeti. Sesaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayameva.

234. Tatiye sikhāmoggallāno means a brahmin of the Moggallāna clan endowed with a large topknot situated in the middle of his head. Purimānī means previous, starting from the day immediately past; purimatarāni should be understood as prior, starting from the second day. Soṇakāyano means a pupil of that same (brahmin). Kammasaccāyaṃ bho loko means, "Venerable sir, this world is karmically determined." Kammasamārambhaṭṭhāyī means it stands by the undertaking of karma. It stands only as long as it produces karma; when it does not produce (karma), it is cut off, this is what it indicates. The rest is as explained below.

4-9. Sikkhāpadasuttādivaṇṇanā
4-9. Commentary on the Sikkhāpada Suttas, Etc.

235.Catutthādīnipi uttānatthāneva. Maggaṅgesu pana yasmā satiyā upaṭṭhapetvā paññāya paricchindati, tasmā ubhayameva kammaṃ. Sesā aṅgāneva honti, no kammanti vuttaṃ. Bojjhaṅgesupi eseva nayo. Abhidhamme pana sabbampetaṃ avisesena cetanāsampayuttakammanteva vaṇṇitaṃ.

235. The fourth and subsequent (suttas) also have straightforward meanings. However, among the factors of the path (Maggaṅga), because one establishes mindfulness (sati) and discerns with wisdom (paññā), both are action (kamma). The remaining factors are only constituents (aṅga), not action; thus it was said. The same method applies to the Bojjhaṅgas. In the Abhidhamma, however, all of this is described without distinction as action associated with volition (cetanā).

10. Samaṇasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Commentary on the Samaṇa Sutta

241.Dasameidhevāti imasmiṃyeva sāsane. Ayaṃ pana niyamo sesapadesupi veditabbo. Dutiyādayopi hi samaṇā idheva, na aññattha.Suññāti rittā tucchā.Parappavādāti cattāro sassatavādā, cattāro ekaccasassatikā, cattāro antānantikā, cattāro amarāvikkhepikā, dve adhiccasamuppannikā, soḷasa saññivādā, aṭṭha asaññivādā, aṭṭha nevasaññināsaññivādā, satta ucchedavādā, pañca diṭṭhadhammanibbānavādāti ime sabbepi brahmajāle āgatadvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhiyo ito bāhirānaṃ paresaṃ pavādā parappavādā nāma. Te sabbepi imehi catūhi phalaṭṭhakasamaṇehi suññā. Na hi te ettha santi. Na kevalañca eteheva suññā, catūhi pana maggaṭṭhakasamaṇehipi, catunnaṃ maggānaṃ atthāya āraddhavipassakehipīti dvādasahipi samaṇehi suññā eva. Idameva atthaṃ sandhāya bhagavatā mahāparinibbāne (dī. ni. 2.214) vuttaṃ –

241. In the tenth (sutta), idhevā means in this Dispensation itself. However, this rule should be understood in the remaining terms as well. For the second and subsequent samaṇas are here (idha), not elsewhere. Suññā means empty, void. Parappavādā means the four eternalist theories (sassatavādā), the four semi-eternalists, the four finitist/infinitist theories (antānantikā), the four evasive wrigglers (amarāvikkhepikā), the two theories of fortuitous origination (adhiccasamuppannikā), the sixteen theories of perception (saññivādā), the eight theories of non-perception (asaññivādā), the eight theories of neither-perception-nor-non-perception (nevasaññināsaññivādā), the seven annihilationist theories (ucchedavādā), and the five theories of Nibbāna here and now (diṭṭhadhammanibbānavādā). All these sixty-two theories appearing in the Brahmajāla Sutta are the doctrines of outsiders, of others, and are called "parappavādā". All these are devoid of the four samaṇas established in the fruits (phalaṭṭhakasamaṇa). For they are not present here. And not only are they devoid of these, but also of the four samaṇas established in the paths (maggaṭṭhakasamaṇa), those who have undertaken insight (vipassanā) for the sake of the four paths; thus they are devoid of even the twelve samaṇas. With this meaning in mind, the Blessed One said in the Mahāparinibbāna Sutta (dī. ni. 2.214):

‘‘Ekūnatiṃso vayasā subhadda,

‘‘Ekūnatiṃso vayasā subhadda,
Yaṃ pabbajiṃ kiṃkusalānuesī;
Vassāni paññāsa samādhikāni,
Yato ahaṃ pabbajito subhadda;
Ñāyassa dhammassa padesavattī,
Ito bahiddhā samaṇopi natthi’’.

‘‘Dutiyopi samaṇo natthi, tatiyopi samaṇo natthi, catutthopi samaṇo natthi, suññā parappavādā samaṇehi aññehī’’ti. Ettha hi padesavattīti āraddhavipassako adhippeto. Tasmā sotāpattimaggassa āraddhavipassakaṃ maggaṭṭhaṃ phalaṭṭhanti tayopi ekato katvā ‘‘samaṇopi natthī’’ti āha, sakadāgāmimaggassa āraddhavipassakaṃ maggaṭṭhaṃ phalaṭṭhanti tayopi ekato katvā ‘‘dutiyopi samaṇo natthī’’ti āha. Itaresupi dvīsu eseva nayo. Ekādasamaṃ uttānatthamevāti.

"There is no second samaṇa, no third samaṇa, no fourth samaṇa; other doctrines are empty of samaṇas." Here, padesavattī refers to one who has undertaken insight. Therefore, having combined into one the one who has undertaken insight for the Sotāpatti path, the one established in the path (maggaṭṭha), and the one established in the fruit (phalaṭṭha), he said, "there is no samaṇa." Having combined into one the one who has undertaken insight for the Sakadāgāmi path, the one established in the path, and the one established in the fruit, he said, "there is no second samaṇa." The same method applies to the other two. The eleventh is straightforward in meaning.

(25) 5. Āpattibhayavaggo

(25) 5. Āpattibhaya Vagga

1. Saṅghabhedakasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Commentary on the Saṅghabhedaka Sutta

243.Pañcamassa paṭhameapi nu taṃ, ānanda, adhikaraṇanti vivādādhikaraṇādīsu aññataraṃ adhikaraṇaṃ bhikkhusaṅghassa uppajji, satthā tassa vūpasantabhāvaṃ pucchanto evamāha.Kuto taṃ, bhanteti, bhante, kuto kinti kena kāraṇena taṃ adhikaraṇaṃ vūpasamissatīti vadati.Kevalakappanti sakalaṃ samantato.Saṅghabhedāya ṭhitoti saṅghena saddhiṃ vādatthāya kathitaṃ paṭikathentova ṭhito.Tatrāyasmāti tasmiṃ evaṃ ṭhite āyasmā anuruddho.Na ekavācikampi bhaṇitabbaṃ maññatīti ‘‘mā, āvuso, saṅghena saddhiṃ evaṃ avacā’’ti ekavacanampi vattabbaṃ na maññati.Voyuñjatīti anuyuñjati anuyogaṃ āpajjati.Atthavaseti kāraṇavase.Nāsessantīti uposathappavāraṇaṃ upagantuṃ adatvā nikkaḍḍhissanti. Sesaṃ pāḷivaseneva veditabbaṃ.

243. In the first sutta of the fifth (vagga), api nu taṃ, ānanda, adhikaraṇa means: "Ānanda, did any dispute (adhikaraṇa), such as a dispute about the Dhamma or Vinaya, arise in the Saṅgha of monks?" The Teacher, inquiring whether it had subsided, said this. Kuto taṃ, bhante means, "Venerable sir, from where? In what way will that dispute subside?" Kevalakappa means entirely, completely. Saṅghabhedāya ṭhito means he stands contradicting what was said in accordance with the Saṅgha for the purpose of debate. Tatrāyasmā means venerable Anuruddha, when he was standing thus. Na ekavācikampi bhaṇitabbaṃ maññatī means he does not think that even a single word should be said, such as, "Friend, do not speak thus against the Saṅgha." Voyuñjatī means he urges, he applies himself to urging. Atthavase means according to the reason. Nāsessantī means they will drive him out without giving (him) the opportunity to observe the Uposatha and Pavāraṇā. The rest should be understood according to the Pali text itself.

2. Āpattibhayasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Commentary on the Āpattibhaya Sutta

244.Dutiyekhuramuṇḍaṃ karitvāti pañca sikhaṇḍake ṭhapetvā khurena muṇḍaṃ karitvā.Kharassarenāti kakkhaḷasaddena.Paṇavenāti vajjhabheriyā.Thalaṭṭhassāti ekamante ṭhitassa.Sīsacchejjanti sīsacchedārahaṃ.Yatra hi nāmāti yaṃ nāma.So vatassāhanti so vata ahaṃ assaṃ, yaṃ evarūpaṃ pāpaṃ na kareyyanti attho.Yathādhammaṃ paṭikarissatīti dhammānurūpaṃ paṭikarissati, sāmaṇerabhūmiyaṃ ṭhassatīti attho.Kāḷavatthaṃ paridhāyāti kāḷapilotikaṃ nivāsetvā.Mosallanti musalābhipātārahaṃ.Yathādhammanti idha āpattito vuṭṭhāya suddhante patiṭṭhahanto yathādhammaṃ karoti nāma.Bhasmapuṭanti chārikābhaṇḍikaṃ.Gārayhaṃ bhasmapuṭanti garahitabbachārikāpuṭena matthake abhighātārahaṃ.Yathādhammanti idha āpattiṃ desento yathādhammaṃ paṭikaroti nāma.Upavajjanti upavādārahaṃ.Pāṭidesanīyesūti paṭidesetabbesu. Iminā sabbāpi sesāpattiyo saṅgahitā.Imāni kho, bhikkhave, cattāri āpattibhayānīti, bhikkhave, imāni cattāri āpattiṃ nissāya uppajjanakabhayāni nāmāti.

244. In the second (sutta), khuramuṇḍaṃ karitvā means having shaved the head with a razor, leaving five tufts of hair. Kharassarenā means with a harsh voice. Paṇavenā means with a war drum. Thalaṭṭhassā means of one standing to one side. Sīsacchejja means deserving of having the head cut off. Yatra hi nāmā means whatever name. So vatassāha means "So indeed may I be, so that I would not do such evil," is the meaning. Yathādhammaṃ paṭikarissatī means he will make amends in accordance with the Dhamma; he will stand in the position of a novice, is the meaning. Kāḷavatthaṃ paridhāyā means having put on a black rag. Mosalla means deserving of being pounded with a pestle. Yathādhamma means here, when rising from an offense and being established in purity, he is said to be acting in accordance with the Dhamma. Bhasmapuṭa means a container of ashes. Gārayhaṃ bhasmapuṭa means deserving of being struck on the head with a blameworthy container of ashes. Yathādhamma means here, when confessing an offense, he is said to be making amends in accordance with the Dhamma. Upavajja means deserving of blame. Pāṭidesanīyesū means in those offenses that should be confessed. With this, all the remaining offenses are included. Imāni kho, bhikkhave, cattāri āpattibhayānī means, "Monks, these are the four fears arising due to offenses."

3. Sikkhānisaṃsasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Commentary on the Sikkhānisaṃsa Sutta

245.Tatiye sikkhā ānisaṃsā etthātisikkhānisaṃsaṃ. Paññā uttarā etthātipaññuttaraṃ. Vimutti sāro etthātivimuttisāraṃ. Sati ādhipateyyā etthātisatādhipateyyaṃ. Etesaṃ hi sikkhādisaṅkhātānaṃ ānisaṃsādīnaṃ atthāya vussatīti vuttaṃ hoti.Ābhisamācārikāti uttamasamācārikā. Vattavasena paññattasīlassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.Tathā tathā so tassā sikkhāyāti tathā tathā so sikkhākāmo bhikkhu tasmiṃ sikkhāpade.

245. Sikkhānisaṃsaṃ means, in this there is benefit of training. Paññuttaraṃ means, in this there is wisdom as the highest. Vimuttisāraṃ means, in this there is liberation as the essence. Satādhipateyyaṃ means, in this there is mindfulness as the ruling factor. For it is said that one dwells for the sake of the benefits, etc., known as training, etc. Ābhisamācārikā means the best conduct. This is a designation for the virtue (sīla) that is established in terms of practice. Tathā tathā so tassā sikkhāyā means, in that way, that monk who desires training, in that training rule.

Ādibrahmacariyikāti maggabrahmacariyassa ādibhūtānaṃ catunnaṃ mahāsīlānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ.Sabbasoti sabbākārena.Dhammāti catusaccadhammā.Paññāya samavekkhitā hontīti sahavipassanāya maggapaññāya sudiṭṭhā honti.Vimuttiyā phusitā hontīti arahattaphalavimuttiyā ñāṇaphassena phuṭṭhā honti.Ajjhattaṃyeva sati sūpaṭṭhitā hotīti niyakajjhatteyeva sati suṭṭhu upaṭṭhitā hoti.Paññāya anuggahessāmīti vipassanāpaññāya anuggahessāmi.Paññāyasamavekkhissāmīti idhāpi vipassanāpaññā adhippetā.Phusitaṃ vā dhammaṃ tattha tattha paññāya anuggahessāmīti ettha pana maggapaññāva adhippetā.

Ādibrahmacariyikā means this is a designation for the four great virtues that are the beginning of the holy life of the path (maggabrahmacariya). Sabbaso means in every way. Dhammā means the four noble truths. Paññāya samavekkhitā hontī means they are well seen with wisdom (paññā) together with insight (vipassanā). Vimuttiyā phusitā hontī means they are touched by the knowledge-contact of the liberation of Arahatship. Ajjhattaṃyeva sati sūpaṭṭhitā hotī means mindfulness is well-established in one's own self. Paññāya anuggahessāmī means I will support with insight wisdom. Paññāya samavekkhissāmī here also insight wisdom is intended. Phusitaṃ vā dhammaṃ tattha tattha paññāya anuggahessāmī here, however, only the wisdom of the path (magga) is intended.

4. Seyyāsuttavaṇṇanā
4. Commentary on the Seyyā Sutta

246.Catutthepetāti kālakatā vuccanti.Uttānā sentīti te yebhuyyena uttānakāva sayanti. Atha vā pettivisaye nibbattāpetānāma, te appamaṃsalohitattā aṭṭhisaṅghātajaṭitā ekena passena sayituṃ na sakkonti, uttānāva senti.Anattamano hotīti tejussadattā sīho migarājā dve purimapāde ekasmiṃ, pacchimapāde ekasmiṃ ṭhāne ṭhapetvā naṅguṭṭhaṃ antarasatthimhi pakkhipitvā purimapādapacchimapādanaṅguṭṭhānaṃ ṭhitokāsaṃ sallakkhetvā dvinnaṃ purimapādānaṃ matthake sīsaṃ ṭhapetvā sayati. Divasampi sayitvā pabujjhamāno na uttasanto pabujjhati, sīsaṃ pana ukkhipitvā purimapādādīnaṃ ṭhitokāsaṃ sallakkhetvā sace kiñci ṭhānaṃ vijahitvā ṭhitaṃ hoti, ‘‘nayidaṃ tuyhaṃ jātiyā, na sūrabhāvassa anurūpa’’nti anattamano hutvā tattheva sayati, na gocarāya pakkamati. Idaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘anattamano hotī’’ti. Avijahitvā ṭhite pana ‘‘tuyhaṃ jātiyā ca sūrabhāvassa ca anurūpamida’’nti haṭṭhatuṭṭho uṭṭhāya sīhavijambhanaṃ vijambhitvā kesarabhāraṃ vidhunitvā tikkhattuṃ sīhanādaṃ naditvā gocarāya pakkamati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘attamano hotī’’ti.

246. In the fourth (sutta), petā means those who have passed away. Uttānā sentī means they mostly lie on their backs. Or, petā means beings reborn in the realm of ghosts; because they have little flesh and blood, and are covered with a skeleton of bones, they cannot lie on one side; they lie only on their backs. Anattamano hotī means, because of its power and strength, the lion, king of beasts, places two front paws in one place and one hind paw in another, puts its tail between its thighs, notes the space where the front paws, hind paw, and tail are situated, and lies down placing its head on top of the two front paws. Even when waking up after sleeping during the day, it does not wake up startled; but lifting its head and noting the space where the front paws, etc., are situated, if any place is found displaced, "This is not fitting for your lineage or courage," it becomes displeased and lies down there itself, and does not go for food. This is with reference to what was said: "He is displeased". However, if it is situated without displacement, feeling delighted and pleased, "This is fitting for your lineage and courage," it gets up, yawns the lion's yawn, shakes the mane, roars the lion's roar three times, and then goes for food. Therefore, it was said, "He is pleased."

5. Thūpārahasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Commentary on the Thūpāraha Sutta

247.Pañcamerājā cakkavattīti ettha kasmā bhagavā agāramajjhe vasitvā kālakatassa rañño thūpakaraṇaṃ anujānāti, na sīlavato puthujjanabhikkhussāti? Anacchariyattā. Puthujjanabhikkhūnañhi thūpe anuññāyamāne tambapaṇṇidīpe tāva thūpānaṃ okāso na bhaveyya, tathā aññesu ṭhānesu. Tasmā ‘‘anacchariyā te bhavissantī’’ti nānujānāti. Cakkavattī rājā ekova nibbattati, tenassa thūpo acchariyo hoti. Puthujjanasīlavato pana parinibbutabhikkhuno viya mahantampi sakkāraṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatiyeva. Chaṭṭhasattamāni uttānatthāneva.

247. In the fifth (sutta), rājā cakkavattī: Here, why does the Blessed One allow the making of a stūpa for a king who has passed away after living in a household, but not for a virtuous ordinary monk? Because it is not something common. For if stūpas were allowed for ordinary monks, there would be no space for stūpas even on the island of Tambapaṇṇi, and likewise in other places. Therefore, He does not allow it, (thinking) "These will become not uncommon." A universal monarch is born only one at a time, therefore his stūpa is uncommon. However, it is indeed proper to make even a great offering for a virtuous ordinary monk who has passed away, like a monk who has attained Nibbāna. The sixth and seventh are straightforward in meaning.

8. Paṭhamavohārasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Commentary on the Paṭhama Vohāra Sutta

250.Aṭṭhameanariyavohārāti anariyānaṃ kathā. Sesesupi eseva nayo.

250. In the eighth (sutta), anariyavohārā means the speech of the ignoble. The same method applies in the remaining (suttas) as well.

(26) 6. Abhiññāvaggo

(26) 6. Abhiññā Vagga

1-3. Abhiññāsuttādivaṇṇanā
1-3. Commentary on the Abhiññā Suttas, Etc.

254-256.Chaṭṭhassa paṭhameabhiññāyāti jānitvā.Samatho ca vipassanā cāti cittekaggatā ca saṅkhārapariggahavipassanāñāṇañca.Vijjā ca vimutti cāti maggañāṇavijjā ca sesā sampayuttakadhammā ca. Dutiyeanariyapariyesanāti anariyānaṃ esanā gavesanā.Jarādhammanti jarāsabhāvaṃ. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Tatiyaṃ uttānameva.

254-256. In the first sutta of the sixth (vagga), abhiññāyā means having known. Samatho ca vipassanā cā means concentration of mind and the wisdom of insight that comprehends formations. Vijjā ca vimutti cā means the knowledge of the path and the remaining associated phenomena. In the second (sutta), anariyapariyesanā means the search, the quest, of the ignoble. Jarādhammanti means subject to old age. The same method applies in the remaining (suttas) as well. The third sutta is straightforward in meaning.

4. Mālukyaputtasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Commentary on the Mālukyaputta Sutta

257.Catutthemālukyaputtoti mālukyabrāhmaṇiyā putto.Etthāti etasmiṃ tava ovādayācane. Iminā theraṃ apasādetipi ussādetipi. Kathaṃ? Ayaṃ kira daharakāle paccayesu laggo hutvā pacchā mahallakakāle araññavāsaṃ patthento kammaṭṭhānaṃ yācati. Atha bhagavā ‘‘ettha dahare kiṃ vakkhāma, mālukyaputto viya tumhepi taruṇakāle paccayesu laggitvā mahallakakāle araññaṃ pavisitvā samaṇadhammaṃ kareyyāthā’’ti iminā adhippāyena bhaṇanto theraṃ apasādeti nāma. Yasmā pana thero mahallakakāleva araññaṃ pavisitvā samaṇadhammaṃ kātukāmo, tasmā bhagavā ‘‘ettha dahare kiṃ vakkhāma, ayaṃ amhākaṃ mālukyaputto mahallakakālepi araññaṃ pavisitvā samaṇadhammaṃ kātukāmo kammaṭṭhānaṃ yācati. Tumhe tāva taruṇakālepi vīriyaṃ na karothā’’ti iminā adhippāyena bhaṇanto theraṃ ussādeti nāmāti yojanā.

257. In the fourth (sutta), mālukyaputto means the son of Mālukyabrāhmaṇī. Etthā means in this request of yours for instruction. With this, he both degrades and encourages the elder. How? It seems that this elder, when young, was attached to the requisites, and later in his old age, desiring to live in the forest, requested a meditation subject. Then the Blessed One, thinking, "What shall we say to this young man? You too, like Mālukyaputta, having been attached to the requisites in your youth, and having entered the forest in your old age, would practice the ascetic life," in this intention, degrading the elder. However, since the elder was desirous of practicing the ascetic life, entering the forest even in his old age, the Blessed One, thinking, "What shall we say to this young man? This Mālukyaputta of ours, even in his old age, desiring to practice the ascetic life, requests a meditation subject. You, however, do not make effort even in your youth," in this intention, encouraging the elder. This is the interpretation.

5-10. Kulasuttādivaṇṇanā
5-10. Commentary on the Kula Suttas, Etc.

258-263.Pañcameādhipacce ṭhapentīti bhaṇḍāgārikaṭṭhāne ṭhapenti. Chaṭṭhevaṇṇasampannoti sarīravaṇṇena samannāgato.Balasampannoti kāyabalena samannāgato. Bhikkhuvārevaṇṇasampannoti guṇavaṇṇena samannāgato.Balasampannoti vīriyabalena samannāgato.Javasampannoti ñāṇajavena samannāgato. Sattamepi eseva nayo. Sesamettha uttānamevāti.

258-263. In the fifth (sutta), ādhipacce ṭhapentī means they place him in the position of treasurer. In the sixth (sutta), vaṇṇasampanno means endowed with bodily complexion. Balasampanno means endowed with bodily strength. In the monastic context, vaṇṇasampanno means endowed with the complexion of virtue. Balasampanno means endowed with the strength of effort. Javasampanno means endowed with quickness of knowledge. The same method applies in the seventh (sutta) as well. The rest here is straightforward in meaning.

(27) 7. Kammapathavaggavaṇṇanā

(27) 7. Kammapatha Vagga Commentary

264-273.Kammapathavaggepi dasapi kammapathā lokiyalokuttaramissakāva kathitā.

264-273. In the Kammapatha Vagga also, all ten courses of action (kammapatha) are spoken of as a mixture of mundane and supramundane.

(28) 8. Rāgapeyyālavaṇṇanā

(28) 8. Rāgapeyyāla Commentary

274-783.Rāgapeyyālaṃ arahattaṃ pāpetvā kathitaṃ. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.

274-783. The Rāgapeyyāla is spoken of as leading to Arahatship. The rest is all straightforward in meaning everywhere.